diff --git a/.openpublishing.redirection.json b/.openpublishing.redirection.json index 1f06d9a6..1c6c5c8e 100644 --- a/.openpublishing.redirection.json +++ b/.openpublishing.redirection.json @@ -1,5 +1,5805 @@ { "redirections": [ + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/addresses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/addresses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australia-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australia-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/bas-fuel-tax-credits.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/bas-fuel-tax-credits", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/business-activity-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/business-activity-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/calculating-distribution-amounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/calculating-distribution-amounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/electronic-funds-transfer-eft-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/electronic-funds-transfer-eft-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-adjust-settlement-exchange-rates-for-vat-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-adjust-settlement-exchange-rates-for-vat-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-create-check-installments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-create-check-installments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-enter-australian-business-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-enter-australian-business-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-export-business-activity-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-modify-bas-setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-modify-bas-setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-income-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-income-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-report-bas-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-report-bas-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-units-for-business-activity-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-units-for-business-activity-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-withholding-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/withholding-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Australia/withholding-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/austria-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/austria-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-a-vat-statement.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-a-vat-statement", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/vat-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Austria/vat-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-banking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-banking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-intrastat-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-intrastat-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgium-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgium-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/coda-bank-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/coda-bank-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/direct-debit-using-domiciliation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/enterprise-numbers-and-branch-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/enterprise-numbers-and-branch-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-activate-sepa-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-coda-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-coda-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-archive-ibs-log-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-archive-ibs-log-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-financial-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-financial-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-download-coda-files-from-an-isabel-server.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-download-coda-files-from-an-isabel-server", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-document-amounts-in-purchase-invoices-and-credit-memos.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-document-amounts-in-purchase-invoices-and-credit-memos", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-to-accon.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-to-accon", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-sepa-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-sepa-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-payment-suggestions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-import-coda-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-import-coda-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-limit-the-posting-period.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-limit-the-posting-period", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-make-manual-corrections-to-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-make-manual-corrections-to-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-payment-files.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-payment-files", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-the-work-date-as-the-posting-date.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-the-work-date-as-the-posting-date", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-declaration-types", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-domiciliations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-electronic-banking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-export-protocols.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-export-protocols", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-domiciliations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-domiciliations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-upload-payment-files-to-an-isabel-server.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-upload-payment-files-to-an-isabel-server", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/isabel-6.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/isabel-6", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/sepa-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/sepa-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/summarizing-payment-lines-and-general-journal-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/summarizing-payment-lines-and-general-journal-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/ca-sales-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/ca-sales-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/canada-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/canada-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-create-deposits.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-create-deposits", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/sales-tax-goods-services.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/sales-tax-goods-services", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/work-gifi-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Canada/work-gifi-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/denmark-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/denmark-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ean-location-number.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ean-location-number", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-oioubl.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-oioubl", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-c5-data-migration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-c5-data-migration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/vat-vies-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/vat-vies-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/automatic-account-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/automatic-account-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/electronic-banking-in-finland.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/electronic-banking-in-finland", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/finland-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/finland-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-disregard-payment-discounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-generate-payment-files.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-generate-payment-files", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-finnish-intrastat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-finnish-intrastat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-vat-information-on-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-vat-information-on-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/posting-depreciation-differences.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/posting-depreciation-differences", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/sepa-credit-transfer-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/sepa-credit-transfer-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/vat-vies-declaration-in-finland.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Finland/vat-vies-declaration-in-finland", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/accelerated-depreciation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/accelerated-depreciation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/france-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/france-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-archive-payment-slips.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-archive-payment-slips", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-income-statement-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-income-statement-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-years.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-years", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-payment-slips.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-payment-slips", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-simulation-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-simulation-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-delete-simulation-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-years.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-years", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-open-a-new-fiscal-year-duplicate.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-open-a-new-fiscal-year-duplicate", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-payment-slips.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-payment-slips", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-print-general-ledger-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-print-general-ledger-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-reopen-accounting-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-reopen-accounting-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-addresses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-classes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-statuses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-steps", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-simulation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-simulation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-specify-posting-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-specify-posting-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-transfer-simulation-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-view-ledger-reconciliations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-view-ledger-reconciliations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/payment-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/payment-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/requirements-for-reporting-declaration-of-trade-in-goods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/requirements-for-reporting-declaration-of-trade-in-goods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/simulation-of-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/simulation-of-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/year-end-processes-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/France/year-end-processes-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/currency-exchange-rates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/currency-exchange-rates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/elster-transmission-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/elster-transmission-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/eu-sales-list-in-germany.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/eu-sales-list-in-germany", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/example-inventory-order-line-with-tracking-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/example-inventory-order-line-with-tracking-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/gdpdu-filter-examples.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/gdpdu-filter-examples", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/germany-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/germany-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-correct-vat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-correct-vat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-vat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-vat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-declare-vat-vies-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-declare-vat-vies-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-dimensions-for-physical-inventory-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-dimensions-for-physical-inventory-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-gdpdu-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-include-company-registration-numbers-on-sales-reports-and-purchase-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-include-company-registration-numbers-on-sales-reports-and-purchase-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-a-negative-entry.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-a-negative-entry", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-vat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-vat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-upgrade-a-.dtd-definition-file.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-upgrade-a-.dtd-definition-file", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/vat-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/vat-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Germany/walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/deleting-posted-invoices-and-credit-memos.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/deleting-posted-invoices-and-credit-memos", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/electronic-invoicing-requirement-issuing-single-copy-invoice.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/electronic-invoicing-requirement-issuing-single-copy-invoice", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-map-irs-numbers-to-chart-of-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-map-irs-numbers-to-chart-of-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-print-vat-summary-information-on-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-print-vat-summary-information-on-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/iceland-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/iceland-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/icelandic-tax-regulations-of-conditional-discounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/icelandic-tax-regulations-of-conditional-discounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/fiscal-inventory-valuation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/fiscal-inventory-valuation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-close-a-fiscal-year.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-close-a-fiscal-year", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-define-debit-and-credit-amounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-define-debit-and-credit-amounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-issue-vendor-payments-and-customer-bills.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-issue-vendor-payments-and-customer-bills", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-and-reprint-g-l-books-and-vat-registers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-and-reprint-g-l-books-and-vat-registers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-intrastat-reports-for-italy.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-intrastat-reports-for-italy", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-withholding-tax-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-withholding-tax-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-company-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-company-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-initial-item-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-initial-item-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-submit-vat-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-submit-vat-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-update-vat-transactions-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-subcontracting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-subcontracting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italy-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italy-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/reversing-journal-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/reversing-journal-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/vendor-payments-and-customer-bills-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Italy/vendor-payments-and-customer-bills-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/electronic-invoicing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/electronic-invoicing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-create-deposits.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-create-deposits", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-generate-electronic-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-pac-web-services", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-sales-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-sales-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/tax-identification-types-for-mexico.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/tax-identification-types-for-mexico", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/vat-recalculation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/vat-recalculation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cash-bank-giro.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cash-bank-giro", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/check-purchase-amounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/check-purchase-amounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cmr-notes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cmr-notes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/digipoort-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/digipoort-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/docket-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/docket-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-electronic-banking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-electronic-banking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-post-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-post-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-tax-declarations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-tax-declarations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-activate-sepa-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-an-audit-file-for-the-tax-authority.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-an-audit-file-for-the-tax-authority", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-and-export-payment-history", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-proposals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-proposals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-enter-and-post-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-enter-and-post-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-code-updates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-code-updates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-standard-sales-or-purchase-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-standard-sales-or-purchase-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-validation-of-purchase-amounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-validation-of-purchase-amounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-vat-categories", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/netherlands-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/netherlands-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-2-foreign-payment-fcy-to-fcy-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-2-foreign-payment-fcy-to-fcy-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-3-foreign-payment-lcy-to-fcy-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-3-foreign-payment-lcy-to-fcy-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenarios.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenarios", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/required-descriptions-in-g-l-entry.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/required-descriptions-in-g-l-entry", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/single-euro-payments-area-sepa-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/telebanking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/telebanking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/addresses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/addresses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/calculating-distribution-amounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/calculating-distribution-amounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/new-zealand-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/new-zealand-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-banking-in-norway.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-banking-in-norway", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries-in-closed-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries-in-closed-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-calculate-proportional-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-calculate-proportional-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-cancel-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-cancel-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-electronic-documents-for-ehf.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-electronic-documents-for-ehf", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-recurring-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-recurring-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-suggestions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-export-remittance-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-export-remittance-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payment-return-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payment-return-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payroll-transactions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payroll-transactions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-a-vat-reconciliation-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-a-vat-reconciliation-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-document-printing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-document-printing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ehf.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ehf", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ocr-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-payment-line-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-groups", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-test-remittance-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-test-remittance-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-use-one-vat-code-in-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-use-one-vat-code-in-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-view-remittance-error-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norway-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norway-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-sales-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-sales-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/paper-sources-and-tray-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/paper-sources-and-tray-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/proportional-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/proportional-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recipient-reference-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recipient-reference-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recurring-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recurring-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/remittance-errors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/remittance-errors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/types-of-payment-returns-files.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Norway/types-of-payment-returns-files", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/account-schedules-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/account-schedules-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-and-cash-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-and-cash-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/company-addresses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/company-addresses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/corrective-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/corrective-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/customer-card-and-vendor-card-fields.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/customer-card-and-vendor-card-fields", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-bonus.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-bonus", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-methods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-methods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-charges.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-charges", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-locations-and-employees", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-turnover.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-turnover", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/future-expenses-deferrals-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/future-expenses-deferrals-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-journal-extension.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-journal-extension", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-ledger-correspondence.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-ledger-correspondence", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-account-for-the-cost-to-dispose-a-fixed-asset.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-account-for-the-cost-to-dispose-a-fixed-asset", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-assessed-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-assessed-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-future-period-expenses-depreciation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-future-period-expenses-depreciation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-tax-differences.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-tax-differences", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-combine-customer-or-vendor-cards.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-combine-customer-or-vendor-cards", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-additional-sheets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-additional-sheets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-print-general-ledger-account-turnover.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-print-general-ledger-account-turnover", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-cash-account-cards.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-cash-account-cards", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-corrective-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-corrective-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-future-expense-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-statutory-report-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-statutory-report-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-tax-registers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-tax-registers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-1-report-for-acceptance-of-goods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-1-report-for-acceptance-of-goods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-2-report-for-registering-mismatched-receipts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-2-report-for-registering-mismatched-receipts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-29-goods-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-29-goods-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-entry-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-entry-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-ledgers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-tax-registers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-tax-registers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-import-and-export-account-schedules.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-import-and-export-account-schedules", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-red-storno-corrections.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-red-storno-corrections", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-tax-differences.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-tax-differences", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-factura-invoice.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-factura-invoice", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-register-vat-on-purchase-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-register-vat-on-purchase-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-release-track-and-write-off-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-release-track-and-write-off-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-an-intangible-assets-account.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-an-intangible-assets-account", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-and-create-letters-of-attorney.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-and-create-letters-of-attorney", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-company-addresses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-company-addresses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-norm-jurisdictions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-norm-jurisdictions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-statutory-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-statutory-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-authority-fund-cards.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-authority-fund-cards", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vendor-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vendor-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-and-print-account-turnover-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-and-print-account-turnover-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-act-of-receivables-and-payables-inv-17.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-act-of-receivables-and-payables-inv-17", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-general-ledger-turnover.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-general-ledger-turnover", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-obligatory-acts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-obligatory-acts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/obligatory-sales-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/obligatory-sales-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/payables-and-receivables.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/payables-and-receivables", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/petty-cash-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/petty-cash-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/posting-vat-on-sales.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/posting-vat-on-sales", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/recurring-journal-extension.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/recurring-journal-extension", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/report-selection.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/report-selection", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russia-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russia-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-chart-of-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-chart-of-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-payables-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-payables-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-receivables-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-receivables-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/setting-up-tax-difference-calculation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/statutory-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/statutory-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-difference-registers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-difference-registers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-differences.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-differences", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-registers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-registers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/undepreciable-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/undepreciable-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat-ledgers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat-ledgers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/calculating-due-dates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/calculating-due-dates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/cartera-module.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/cartera-module", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/corrective-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/corrective-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n34.1.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n34.1", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n341", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/equivalence-charges-ec-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/equivalence-charges-ec-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-340.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-340", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-347.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-347", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-349.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-349", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-ccc-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-ccc-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-nace-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-nace-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-account-schedules-to-asc-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-account-schedules-to-asc-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-ignore-discounts-in-general-ledger-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-ignore-discounts-in-general-ledger-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-indent-and-validate-chart-of-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-indent-and-validate-chart-of-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-post-and-print-all-transactions-for-a-period.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-post-and-print-all-transactions-for-a-period", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-account-book-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-account-book-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-intrastat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-intrastat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-invoice-books.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-invoice-books", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-limits-for-due-dates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-limits-for-due-dates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-340-reports-for-small-businesses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-340-reports-for-small-businesses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-and-close-income-statement-balances.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-and-close-income-statement-balances", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-operation-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-operation-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-payment-days-and-non-payment-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-payment-days-and-non-payment-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-void-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-void-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-cartera-module.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-cartera-module", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-in-cash.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-in-cash", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/receivables-cartera-module.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/receivables-cartera-module", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-340.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-340", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-347.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-347", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-349.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-349", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/spain-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/spain-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/transaction-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/transaction-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/vat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Spain/vat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/automatic-account-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/automatic-account-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-import-and-export-data-in-standard-import-export-format.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-import-and-export-data-in-standard-import-export-format", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-print-balance-sheet-and-income-statement-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-print-balance-sheet-and-income-statement-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-eu-third-party-purchase-transactions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-eu-third-party-purchase-transactions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/sweden-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/sweden-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/balance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/balance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-adjust-exchange-rates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-adjust-exchange-rates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-inventory-items-for-sales-or-purchases.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-inventory-items-for-sales-or-purchases", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-close-an-lsv-collection.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-close-an-lsv-collection", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-and-print-a-swiss-vat-statement.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-and-print-a-swiss-vat-statement", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-deactivate-item-cost-tracking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-deactivate-item-cost-tracking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-export-payments-using-ezag.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-export-payments-using-ezag", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-export-payments-using-lsv.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-export-payments-using-lsv", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-import-esr-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-import-esr-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-import-swiss-bank-clearing-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-import-swiss-bank-clearing-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-import-swiss-post-codes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-import-swiss-post-codes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-post-lsv-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-post-lsv-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-an-inventory-picking-list-from-a-sales-order.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-an-inventory-picking-list-from-a-sales-order", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-esr-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-esr-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-swiss-vat-statements-older-version-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-swiss-vat-statements-older-version-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-process-an-lsv-collection.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-process-an-lsv-collection", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-set-up-automatic-archiving-of-documents-in-switzerland.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-set-up-automatic-archiving-of-documents-in-switzerland", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-submit-dta-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-submit-dta-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-suggest-dta-payment-for-vendors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-suggest-dta-payment-for-vendors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-verify-a-list-of-vendors-for-dta-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-verify-a-list-of-vendors-for-dta-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-view-temporary-balances-in-general-ledger-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-view-temporary-balances-in-general-ledger-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments-using-dta.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments-using-dta", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments-using-esr.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments-using-esr", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments-using-lsv-.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments-using-lsv-", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-electronic-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-general-ledger-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-general-ledger-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-inventory-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-inventory-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-purchase-documents-and-sales-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-purchase-documents-and-sales-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-value-added-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/swiss-value-added-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/switzerland-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/switzerland-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/vat-rates-for-switzerland.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/vat-rates-for-switzerland", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-change-vat-setup-in-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-change-vat-setup-in-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-define-accounting-periods-for-straight-line-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-define-accounting-periods-for-straight-line-depreciation-of-fixed-assets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-enter-external-document-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-enter-external-document-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-enter-statutory-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-enter-statutory-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-localize-intrastat-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-localize-intrastat-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-checks-for-apacs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-checks-for-apacs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-direct-sales-and-purchase-details-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-direct-sales-and-purchase-details-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-remittance-advice.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-remittance-advice", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-vat-audit-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-vat-audit-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-vat-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-print-vat-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-set-up-a-posting-date-warning.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-set-up-a-posting-date-warning", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-set-up-reverse-charges-on-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/how-to-set-up-reverse-charges-on-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/uk-setup-postal-code-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/uk-setup-postal-code-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/united-kingdom-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedKingdom/united-kingdom-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-create-deposits.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-create-deposits", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/tax-1099.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/tax-1099", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/united-states-local-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/united-states-local-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/us-sales-tax.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/LocalFunctionality/UnitedStates/us-sales-tax", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/about-develop-extensions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/about-develop-extensions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/about-export-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/about-export-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/about-languages.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/about-languages", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/about-locale-language.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/about-locale-language", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/accross-how-consolidated-company-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/accross-how-consolidated-company-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-data-exchange.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-data-exchange", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-display-lists-different-views.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-display-lists-different-views", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-exchange-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-exchange-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-faq.yml", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-faq", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-exporting-payment-files-using-bank-data-conversion-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-field-mapping-when-exporting-payment-files-using-bank-data-conversion-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-get-started.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-get-started", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-connect-disconnect-income-document-records.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-connect-disconnect-income-document-records", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-create-income-document-records.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-create-income-document-records", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-manage-many-income-document-records.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-manage-many-income-document-records", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-publish-web-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-publish-web-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-setup-income-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-setup-income-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-archive-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-archive-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-assign-base-calendars", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-create-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-delete-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-delete-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-enable-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-enable-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-manage-notification-templates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-restrict-and-allow-usage-of-a-record.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-restrict-and-allow-usage-of-a-record", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-set-up-approval-users", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-track-document-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-track-document-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-use-approval-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-import-data-configuration-packages.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-import-data-configuration-packages", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-income-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-income-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-log-changes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-log-changes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-outlook.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-outlook", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-powerbi.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-powerbi", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-process-income-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-process-income-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-data-exchange.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-set-up-data-exchange", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-set-up-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-setting-up-workflow-notifications", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-use-workflows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-use-workflows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-user-tasks.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-user-tasks", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/across-workflow.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/across-workflow", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-classifying-data-sensitivity.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-classifying-data-sensitivity", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-configure-user-interface.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-configure-user-interface", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-how-set-up-colored-indicator-on-cues.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-how-set-up-colored-indicator-on-cues", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-manage-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-manage-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-profiles.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-profiles", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-responding-to-requests-about-personal-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-responding-to-requests-about-personal-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-setup-and-administration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-setup-and-administration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/admin-users-profiles-roles.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/admin-users-profiles-roles", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-assemble-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-how-to-assemble-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-quote-an-assemble-to-order-sale.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-how-to-quote-an-assemble-to-order-sale", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-undo-assembly-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/assembly-how-to-undo-assembly-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bank-how-setup-bank-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-transfer-bank-funds.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bank-how-transfer-bank-funds", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bank-manage-bank-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bank-manage-bank-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bank-setup-banking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bank-setup-banking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi-create-reports-with-xbrl.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi-create-reports-with-xbrl", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-actual-versus-budget.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi-how-analyze-actual-versus-budget", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi-how-analyze-data-dimension", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-create-analysis-views-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi-how-create-analysis-views-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-to-set-up-and-publish-kpi-web-services-based-on-account-schedules.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi-how-to-set-up-and-publish-kpi-web-services-based-on-account-schedules", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-work-account-schedule.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi-how-work-account-schedule", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/bi.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/bi", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/change-role.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/change-role", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-application-design.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-application-design", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-assembly-order-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-assembly-order-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-average-cost.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-average-cost", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-closing-demand-and-supply.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-closing-demand-and-supply", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-adjustment.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-cost-adjustment", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-components.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-cost-components", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-costing-methods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-costing-methods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-and-supply.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-demand-and-supply", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-demand-at-blank-location", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-dimension-set-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-expected-cost-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-expected-cost-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-fixed-reorder-qty.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-fixed-reorder-qty", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-general-journal-post-line-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-general-journal-post-line", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-projected-negative-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-handling-projected-negative-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-handling-reordering-policies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-integration-with-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-integration-with-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-internal-warehouse-flows", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-costing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-inventory-costing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-inventory-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-inventory-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-valuation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-inventory-valuation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-application.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-application", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-planning.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-and-planning", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-availability.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-availability", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-design.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-design", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-in-the-warehouse.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-in-the-warehouse", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-lines-window", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-item-tracking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-lot-for-lot.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-lot-for-lot", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-maximum-qty.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-maximum-qty", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-monitoring-the-projected-inventory-level-and-the-reorder-point.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-monitoring-the-projected-inventory-level-and-the-reorder-point", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-order.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-order", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-assignment-table.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-planning-assignment-table", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-parameters.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-planning-parameters", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-engine-structure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-posting-engine-structure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-interface-structure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-posting-interface-structure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-prioritizing-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-prioritizing-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-production-order-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-production-order-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reordering-policies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-reordering-policies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-revaluation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-revaluation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-rounding.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-rounding", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-staying-under-the-overflow-level.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-staying-under-the-overflow-level", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-supply-planning.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-supply-planning", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-table-structure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-table-structure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-concept-of-balancing-in-brief.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-the-concept-of-balancing-in-brief", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-reorder-point.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-the-role-of-the-reorder-point", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-time-bucket.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-the-role-of-the-time-bucket", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-transfers-in-planning.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-transfers-in-planning", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-variance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-variance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-warehouse-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-warehouse-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/design-details-warehouse-setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-depreciation-methods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-depreciation-methods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-acquire.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-acquire", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-depreciate-amortize", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-dispose-retire.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-dispose-retire", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-insure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-insure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-maintain.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-maintain", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-manage-budgets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-manage-budgets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-revalue.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-revalue", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-depreciation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-setup-depreciation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-general.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-setup-general", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-insurance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-setup-insurance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-maintenance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-setup-maintenance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-trans-split-combine.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-how-trans-split-combine", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-manage.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-manage", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/fa-setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/fa-setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-about-calculating-standard-cost", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-cost-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-about-cost-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-finished-production-order-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-about-finished-production-order-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-account-schedule.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-account-schedule", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-cash-flow.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-analyze-cash-flow", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-excel.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-analyze-excel", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-cashflow-how-use-cortana-intelligence.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-cashflow-how-use-cortana-intelligence", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-create-cost-budgets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-create-cost-budgets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-define-and-allocate-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-dimensions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-dimensions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-handle-inventory-and-manufacturing-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-handle-inventory-and-manufacturing-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-budgets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-create-budgets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-defer-revenue-expenses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-defer-revenue-expenses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-define-check-layouts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-define-check-layouts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-import-payroll-transactions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-positive-pay.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-positive-pay", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-post-transactions-directly", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-report-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-report-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-reverse-journal-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-setup-report-intrastat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-specify-posting-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-correct-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-correct-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-and-export-to-a-bank-file.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-and-export-to-a-bank-file", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-delete-cost-budget-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-delete-cost-budget-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-print-remittance-advice.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-print-remittance-advice", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cash-customers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-cash-customers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-types.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-types", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-settle-purchase-invoices-promptly.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-settle-purchase-invoices-promptly", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-update-standard-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-update-currencies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-how-update-currencies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-invite-external-accountant.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-invite-external-accountant", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-invoice-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-invoice-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-learn-about-costing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-learn-about-costing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-cost-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-manage-cost-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-inventory-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-manage-inventory-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-payables.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-manage-payables", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-methods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-payment-methods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-posting-groups.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-posting-groups", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-results-of-the-transfer.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-results-of-the-transfer", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-set-up-cost-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-invoice-rounding.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-set-up-invoice-rounding", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-set-up-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-chart-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-chart-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-currencies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-currencies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-dimensions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-dimensions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-finance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-finance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-unrealized-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-unrealized-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-setup-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance-work-with-vat.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance-work-with-vat", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/finance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/finance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/financials-requirements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/financials-requirements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-manage-absence.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/hr-how-manage-absence", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-register-employees.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/hr-how-register-employees", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/hr-manage-human-resources.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/hr-manage-human-resources", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/index.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/index", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/install-mobile-app.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/install-mobile-app", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/intercompany-how-setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-work-documents-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/intercompany-how-work-documents-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-manage.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/intercompany-manage", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-adjust-item-costs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-availability-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-availability-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-categorize-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-categorize-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-post-inventory-cost-gl.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-post-inventory-cost-gl", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-register-new-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-register-new-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-revalue-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-general.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-setup-general", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-locations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-setup-locations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-to-reserve-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-set-up-stockkeeping-units.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-to-set-up-stockkeeping-units", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-transfer-between-locations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-BOMs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-work-BOMs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-work-item-attributes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-work-item-tracking", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-manage-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-manage-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-responsibility-centers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-responsibility-centers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/inventory-setup-inventory.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/inventory-setup-inventory", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/keyboard-shortcuts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-business-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/madeira-business-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-cancel.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/madeira-cancel", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-how-setup-email.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/madeira-how-setup-email", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-no-outlook.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/madeira-no-outlook", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-powerbi.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/madeira-powerbi", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-sell.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/madeira-sell", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-add-contact-segment.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-add-contact-segment", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-auto-record-interactions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-auto-record-interactions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-business-relations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-business-relations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-campaigns.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-campaigns", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-contacts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-contacts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-companies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-create-contact-companies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-persons.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-create-contact-persons", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternate-address.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-assign-alternate-address", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternative-address.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-assign-alternative-address", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-companies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-create-contact-companies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-persons.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-create-contact-persons", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-interactions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-create-interactions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-opportunities.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-create-opportunities", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-segment.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-create-segment", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-link-contact.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-link-contact", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-industry-groups.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-industry-groups", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-integrate-dynamicscrm.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-integrate-dynamicscrm", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interaction-segments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-interaction-segments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interactions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-interactions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-job-responsibilities.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-job-responsibilities", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-mailing-groups.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-mailing-groups", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-manage-sales-opportunities", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-organizational-levels.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-organizational-levels", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-processing-sales-opportunities.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-processing-sales-opportunities", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-relationship-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-relationship-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-segments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-segments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-contacts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-setup-contacts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-marketing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-setup-marketing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/marketing-web-sources.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/marketing-web-sources", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-assign-item-charges.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-how-assign-item-charges", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-how-export-payments-bank-file", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-work-checks.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-how-work-checks", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-make-payments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-make-payments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/payables-manage-payables.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/payables-manage-payables", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-about-planning-functionality.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-about-planning-functionality", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-about-production-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-about-production-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-configure-production-processes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-configure-production-processes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-set-up-standard-routing-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-set-up-standard-routing-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-a-forecast.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-create-a-forecast", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-boms.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-create-production-boms", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders-from-sales-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-create-production-orders-from-sales-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-create-production-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-routings.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-create-routings", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-modify-planning-suggestions-in-a-graphical-view.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-modify-planning-suggestions-in-a-graphical-view", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-project-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-plan-project-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-capacities.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-post-capacities", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-consumption.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-post-consumption", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-post-output-quantity", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-scrap.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-post-scrap", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-reverse-output-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-reverse-output-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-run-mps-and-mrp.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-run-mps-and-mrp", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-view-the-load-on-work-centers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-to-view-the-load-on-work-centers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-track-demand-supply.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-track-demand-supply", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-how-work-family.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-how-work-family", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-manage-manufacturing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-manage-manufacturing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-planning-with-without-locations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-planning-with-without-locations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/production-planning.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/production-planning", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-create-jobs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-create-jobs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-invoice-jobs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-invoice-jobs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-budgets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-manage-budgets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-project-supplies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-manage-project-supplies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-monitor-progress-performance", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-record-job-usage.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-record-job-usage", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-jobs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-setup-jobs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-resources.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-setup-resources", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-setup-time-sheets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-resources.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-use-resources", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-how-use-time-sheets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-manage-projects.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-manage-projects", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-setup-projects.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-setup-projects", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/projects-understanding-wip.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/projects-understanding-wip", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchase-price-discount-payment-agreements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-record-purchase-price-discount-payment-agreements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchases.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-record-purchases", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-request-quotes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-request-quotes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-setup-purchasers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-setup-purchasers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-combine-receipts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-to-combine-receipts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-manage-purchasing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-manage-purchasing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-setup-purchasing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/purchasing-setup-purchasing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-collect-outstanding-balances", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/receivables-manage-receivables.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/receivables-manage-receivables", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/reports-saving-reusing-settings.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/reports-saving-reusing-settings", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-date-calculation-for-sales.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-date-calculation-for-sales", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-drop-shipment.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-drop-shipment", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-customer-payments-paypal.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-enable-customer-payments-paypal", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-invoice-sales.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-invoice-sales", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-make-offers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-make-offers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-register-new-customers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-register-new-customers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-sell-products.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-sell-products", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-salespeople.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-setup-salespeople", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-to-create-special-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-track-packages.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-track-packages", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-work-standard-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-how-work-standard-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-manage-sales.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-manage-sales", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/sales-setup-sales.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/sales-setup-sales", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-allocation-status-and-repair-status", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-deliver-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-deliver-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-fulfill-service-contracts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-fulfill-service-contracts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-create-invoices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-create-invoices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-fault-reporting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-loaner-program.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-loaner-program", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-resource-allocation", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-coding.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-service-coding", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-contracts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-service-contracts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-service-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-offerings.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-service-offerings", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-troubleshooting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-work-service-hours.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-setup-work-service-hours", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-allocate-resources.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-allocate-resources", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-change-the-annual-amount-on-service-contracts-or-contract-quotes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-change-the-annual-amount-on-service-contracts-or-contract-quotes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-convert-service-contracts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-convert-service-contracts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-create-service-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-create-service-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-quotes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-create-service-quotes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-post-service-orders.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-post-service-orders", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-multiple-contracts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-multiple-contracts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-order-repair-status.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-order-repair-status", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-plan-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-plan-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-service-order-status-and-repair-status.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-service-order-status-and-repair-status", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-service-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-service-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-service-price-management.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-service-price-management", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-service-statistics.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-service-statistics", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service-processes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-setup-service-processes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/service-setup-service", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-costing-method.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/setup-best-practices-costing-method", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-global-planning-setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/setup-best-practices-global-planning-setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-planning-parameters.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/setup-best-practices-planning-parameters", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-reordering-policies.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/setup-best-practices-reordering-policies", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/setup-best-practices-supply-planning", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/setup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/setup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-accessibility.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-accessibility", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-across-business-areas.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-across-business-areas", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-basic-settings.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-change-basic-settings", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-role.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-change-role", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-create-number-series.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-create-number-series", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-customizing-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-customizing-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-criteria-filters.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-enter-criteria-filters", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-enter-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-date-ranges.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-enter-date-ranges", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-accountant-portal.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-accountant-portal", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-ceridian-payroll.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-ceridian-payroll", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-getaddressio.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-getaddressio", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-image-analyzer.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-image-analyzer", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-other.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-other", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-paypal-payments-standard.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-paypal-payments-standard", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-payroll.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-quickbooks-payroll", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-sales-forecast", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-tax-file-formats-dk.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-tax-file-formats-dk", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-worldpay-payments-standard.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions-worldpay-payments-standard", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-extensions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-get-ready-business.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-get-ready-business", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-fields-word-report-layout.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-add-fields-word-report-layout", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-add-link-to-record", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-create-custom-report-layout", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-define-ext-text.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-define-ext-text", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-preview-post-results.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-preview-post-results", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-register-dynamics-nav-azure.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-register-dynamics-nav-azure", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-run-batch-jobs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-run-batch-jobs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-send-documents-email.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-send-documents-email", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-use-allocation-keys-general-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-use-allocation-keys-general-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-users-permissions.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-users-permissions", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-view-test-reports-posting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-how-view-test-reports-posting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-let-system-suggest-values.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-let-system-suggest-values", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-manage-report-layouts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-manage-report-layouts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-mandatory-fields.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-mandatory-fields", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-locked.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-personalization-locked", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-manage.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-personalization-manage", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-overview.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-personalization-overview", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-user.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-personalization-user", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-windows-client.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-personalization-windows-client", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-documents-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-post-documents-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-purchases.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-post-purchases", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-sales.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-post-sales", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-schedule-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-schedule-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-search.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-search", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-smart-notifications.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-smart-notifications", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-sorting.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-sorting", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-specify-printer-selection-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-troubleshoot-self-signup.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-troubleshoot-self-signup", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-update-report-layouts.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-update-report-layouts", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-general-journals.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-work-general-journals", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-product.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-work-product", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-report.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-work-report", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-with-notes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/ui-work-with-notes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/upload-data.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/upload-data", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-conducting-a-sales-campaign.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-conducting-a-sales-campaign", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-making-cash-flow-forecasts-by-using-account-schedules.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-making-cash-flow-forecasts-by-using-account-schedules", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-picking-and-shipping-in-basic-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-picking-and-shipping-in-basic-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-advanced-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-advanced-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-selling-assembling-and-shipping-kits.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-selling-assembling-and-shipping-kits", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-receive-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-receive-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-ship-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-ship-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-assign-default-bins-to-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-assign-default-bins-to-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-convert-existing-locations-to-warehouse-locations.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-convert-existing-locations-to-warehouse-locations", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-internal-operations-in-advanced-warehousing.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-internal-operations-in-advanced-warehousing", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-warehouse-movements-in-worksheets.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-plan-warehouse-movements-in-worksheets", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-contents.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-contents", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-items-for-directed-put-away-and-pick.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-items-for-directed-put-away-and-pick", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-manage-warehouse.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-manage-warehouse", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-move-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-move-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-pick-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-pick-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-picking-by-fefo", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-put-away-items.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-put-away-items", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-setup-warehouse.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-setup-warehouse", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-use-automated-data-capture-systems-adcs.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/warehouse-use-automated-data-capture-systems-adcs", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-allocate-costs-income.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-allocate-costs-income", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-close-account-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-close-account-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-close-books.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-close-books", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-close-income-statement.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-close-income-statement", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-close-years-periods.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-close-years-periods", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-how-complete-period-end-processes", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-how-post-year-end-close-entry", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statement.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-prepare-close-statement", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statements.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-prepare-close-statements", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, + { + "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-preclose-reports.md", + "redirect_url": "/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2018/year-prepare-preclose-reports", + "redirect_document_id": false + }, { "source_path": "dynamics-nav-app/madeira-outlook.md", "redirect_url": "across-outlook", diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/addresses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/addresses.md deleted file mode 100644 index d1b33bad..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/addresses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Addresses in Australia - description: A single postal code can include multiple cities in the same region in Australia. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Addresses in Australia -A single postal code can include multiple cities in the same region. - -At the same time, cities with the same name are sometimes located in different states. - -For example, Australian postal code 4069 covers the cities of Chapel Hill and Kenmore in the state of Queensland. However, there is also a city named Chapel Hill in the state of South Australia, located in postal code 5153. - -To avoid confusion and improve address accuracy, available options display when you enter data in address fields. For example, when you enter a postal code on a customer card, you can select from a list of all available cities for that postal code in the **City** field drop-down list. Likewise, when you enter a city name, you can select from a list of all available states in the **State** field drop-down list. - -To enable this functionality, you must enter the data into the **Post Code** table. You can do this manually, or you can download a copy of the Australian postal codes from the Australian Post Office website. - -To increase postal efficiency in Australia, the postal department has introduced an address bar coding system in which every address is assigned a unique identifier called a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID). From the DPID, a bar code is generated and printed for each address. Companies can receive discounts on bulk mailings if they use these bar codes. To retrieve a DPID, you must connect to the local postal database that uses authorized Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) software. You can reduce your number of postal returns by validating customer addresses using the AMAS database. - -When you print an address that has a DPID, a bar code will be printed together with the address. If you cannot print bar codes, the DPID will be printed together with the address. - -Contact your Microsoft partner for information on how to obtain AMAS software. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australia-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australia-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 63ad6349..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australia-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Australia Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Australian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Australia Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Australian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Australian Business Numbers and Adjustment Notes](australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes.md) - [Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) - [Tax](tax.md) - [Addresses](addresses.md) - [Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT)](electronic-funds-transfer-eft-.md) - [Calculating Distribution Amounts](calculating-distribution-amounts.md) - [How to: Determine Sales Price by Cost Plus Percentage](how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md) - [How to: Print Income Statements](how-to-print-income-statements.md) - [How to: Print Balance Sheet Reports](how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports.md) - [How to: Compare Bank Cash Flow](how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md) - [How to: Print Deposit Slip Reports](how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md) - [How to: Print Bank Account Reconciliation Reports](how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md) - [How to: Create Check Installments](how-to-create-check-installments.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes.md deleted file mode 100644 index fbafc7be..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Australian Business Numbers and Adjustment Notes - description: An Australian Business Number (ABN) is a single identifier for all business dealings with the tax office, and for dealings with other government departments and agencies. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Australian Business Numbers and Adjustment Notes -An Australian Business Number (ABN) is a single identifier for all business dealings with the tax office, and for dealings with other government departments and agencies. - - ABNs and adjustment notes—or credit memos—are used to satisfy tax requirements. - -## ABN - All companies must register and apply for an ABN to report the details of payment summaries issued to their payees during the financial year. The payment summary includes the Tax File Numbers (TFN) or business numbers of the payees. - -## Adjustment Notes - Adjustment notes are issued by suppliers to a business when the amount of consideration for taxable supplies changes. The recipient needs an adjustment note to claim more or less GST credits than previously claimed. - - Section 19-10 of A New Tax System (Goods and Services Tax) Act 1999 defines an adjustment event as any event that has the effect of: - -- Canceling a supply or acquisition. -- Changing the consideration for a supply or acquisition. -- Causing a supply or acquisition to start or stop being a taxable supply or creditable acquisition. - -An adjustment event may result in an increase or decrease to your net amount for the tax period. - -Adjustment notes—or credit memos—should be connected to an invoice. - -Because credit memos are used for adjustment notes, each credit memo should satisfy all of the legal requirements for an adjustment note. Each credit memo should have an original invoice number, date, and reason code assigned to it. The following fields are included in the adjustment note: - -- **Adjustment Applies to**: The number of the document to which the adjustment note applies. If you use the **Copy Document** function, this field populates automatically. You must enter a reason code before the transaction can be posted. You can use this field to create an adjustment note for a paid or closed transaction. - -- **Adjustment Reference No**: The number of the adjustment note. For **Sales & Receivables**, the number assigned to the posted document populates automatically in this field. - -- **Adjustment Note Date**: Automatically populated from the document date. - -- **Adjustment** and **BAS Adjustment**: These entries populate automatically. Some credit memos are Business Activity Statement (BAS) adjustments. Adjustment notes can only be applied against a single document. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Australian Business Numbers](how-to-enter-australian-business-numbers.md) - [Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/bas-fuel-tax-credits.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/bas-fuel-tax-credits.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3a67ab65..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/bas-fuel-tax-credits.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: BAS Fuel Tax Credits - description: Fuel tax credits provide companies with a credit for the fuel tax (excise or customs duty) included in the price of fuel used for business activities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# BAS Fuel Tax Credits -Fuel tax credits provide companies with a credit for the fuel tax (excise or customs duty) included in the price of fuel used for business activities in: - -- Machinery -- Plant -- Equipment -- Heavy vehicles - -For more information on fuel tax credits, see [Fuel Tax Credits](http://www.ato.gov.au/businesses/content.aspx?menuid=0&doc=/content/76594.htm&page=2&H2). - -In this release, support has been added to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] for two fields, which track and report fuel tax credits to the Australian Tax office (ATO). - -- 7C – Fuel Tax Credit Over Claim -- 7D – Fuel Tax Credit diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/business-activity-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/business-activity-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8724cc33..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/business-activity-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Business Activity Statements - description: A Business Activity Statement (BAS) is a form that businesses must submit to the Australian Tax Office (ATO) on a monthly or quarterly basis. BAS reports both the total Goods and Services Tax (GST) collected from sales activities—which must be paid to the ATO—and the total GST paid on purchases – which is claimed as an input tax credit. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Business Activity Statements -A Business Activity Statement (BAS) is a form that businesses must submit to the Australian Tax Office (ATO) on a monthly or quarterly basis. BAS reports both the total Goods and Services Tax (GST) collected from sales activities—which must be paid to the ATO—and the total GST paid on purchases – which is claimed as an input tax credit. - -Companies can report their taxes manually using a form, or electronically using Electronic Commerce Interface (ECI) software provided by the ATO. If you choose to file your BAS electronically, the ATO provides the ECI software at no cost. Many different BAS layouts are available, depending on the type of business involved. - -You are provided with a worksheet that you can use to review and update your BAS details before completing the manual form or exporting the XML file for electronic submission to ECI. - -When you file your BAS electronically, you must perform the following tasks: - -1. Ensure that the BAS setup has been completed. -2. Using the ECI software, download your monthly or quarterly file from the ATO. -3. Import this file into the BAS area. -4. Update your tax details. -5. Export the data to an XML file. -6. Upload the completed XML file to the ATO using the ECI software. -7. Update BAS with the receipt number received from the ATO. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements](how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Export Business Activity Statements](how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Calculate Goods and Services Tax on Prepayments](how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md) - [Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/calculating-distribution-amounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/calculating-distribution-amounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 193284d3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/calculating-distribution-amounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Calculating Distribution Amounts in Australia - description: In Australia, you can reallocate the amount in one general ledger account to other general ledger accounts so that the balances of your accounts remain proportionate to one another. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Calculating Distribution Amounts in Australia -You can reallocate the amount in one general ledger account to other general ledger accounts so that the balances of your accounts remain proportionate to one another. - - Use the **Calculate Distribution Amount** function to calculate the allocation percentage based on the balances of the accounts, or the net changes between the accounts. Run the **Calculate Distribution Amount** function from the **Allocation** window for the Standard Balance and Reverse Balance recurring methods in the **Recurring Journal**. - - The net changes or balances of the accounts in the **Allocation** window determine the allocation percentage calculated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/electronic-funds-transfer-eft-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/electronic-funds-transfer-eft-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7928cb7c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/electronic-funds-transfer-eft-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) - description: You can pay vendors using the electronic funds transfer (EFT) system in Australia. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 05/11/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) -You can pay vendors using the electronic funds transfer (EFT) system in Australia. - -## Setting up Electronic Funds Transfer in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] can export EFT files that you can then upload to your bank’s website for additional processing. To submit EFT files, you must set up the following information: - -- You must add EFT information to the bank account or bank accounts that you will use to pay vendors electronically. The EFT-specific fields are on the **Transfer** FastTab in the Bank Account Card window. - -- For those vendors that you want to pay electronically, you must select the EFT Payment field and specify the vendor bank account in the EFT Vendor Bank Account Code field in the Vendor Card window. - - When you have set up bank accounts and vendors, you can create EFT file that are based on entries in the payment journal. For more information, see Create EFT File. When you create an EFT file, an entry is made in the **EFT Register** table. In the EFT Register window, you can drill down to see the vendor ledger entries for the EFT file. In the Payment Journal window, you can also import existing EFT register entries to the payment journal by using the **Transfer EFT Register** batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](../../payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-adjust-settlement-exchange-rates-for-vat-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-adjust-settlement-exchange-rates-for-vat-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index d441eb57..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-adjust-settlement-exchange-rates-for-vat-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Adjust Settlement Exchange Rates for VAT Entries - description: You can use the **Adjust Settlement Exch. Rates** batch job to settle VAT entries according to the government exchange rate as defined in the **Currency Exchange Rate** table. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Adjust Settlement Exchange Rates for VAT Entries -You can use the **Adjust Settlement Exch. Rates** batch job to settle VAT entries according to the government exchange rate as defined in the **Currency Exchange Rate** table. - -## To adjust settlement exchange rates for VAT - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Adjust Settlement Exch. Rates**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Settlement Period**|Specifies the start date of the settlement period.| - |**Ending Date**|Specifies the end date of the settlement period.| - |**Posting Description**|Specifies the posting description.| - |**Document No.**|Specifies the document number for which you want to settle VAT entries.| - |**Posting Date**|Specifies the posting date of the document.| - |**Use Daily Settlement Exch. Rate**|Select if you want to use the daily settlement exchange rate.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -The VAT entries are adjusted and you can view them in the **VAT Register** report. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md deleted file mode 100644 index b26a90fe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements - description: You can use the **Calc. and Post WHT Settlement** window to calculate and post the withholding tax (WHT). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements -You can use the **Calc. and Post WHT Settlement** window to calculate and post the withholding tax (WHT). - -You can close WHT entries that are open or not settled and transfer the corresponding amount to the WHT settlement account. - -The sum of all withheld amounts is reported as a truncated whole number to the Australian tax authorities. - -> [!NOTE] -> The truncated cents are accounted for in a rounding account. - -## To calculate and post withholding tax settlements - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Calc. and Post WHT Settlement**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|The start date of the period for which WHT has to be settled.| - |**Ending Date**|The end date of the period for which WHT has to be settled.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date of the WHT settlement entries.| - |**Document No.**|The document number of the WHT settlement entries.| - |**Description**|The WHT settlement description.| - |**Settlement Account Type**|The settlement account type.| - |**Settlement Account**|The account number based on the account type selected in the **Settlement Account Type** field.| - |**Rounding G/L Account**|The account to which the truncated amount is to be posted.| - |**Show WHT Entries**|Select to view the withholding tax entries for the specified period.| - |**Post**|Select to post the WHT settlement entries.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Withholding Tax](withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9ab287d1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Goods and Services Tax on Prepayments - description: When a partial payment or prepayment is made, you must calculate Goods and Services Tax (GST) for that partial payment or prepayment based on the total invoice amount, instead of on a partial amount. If you account for GST on a non-cash basis, you must report and pay GST on payments during the period in which you receive partial payment or issue a tax invoice for payment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Goods and Services Tax on Prepayments -When a partial payment or prepayment is made, you must calculate Goods and Services Tax (GST) for that partial payment or prepayment based on the total invoice amount, instead of on a partial amount. If you account for GST on a non-cash basis, you must report and pay GST on payments during the period in which you receive partial payment or issue a tax invoice for payment. - -## To calculate GST on prepayments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Local Functionalities** FastTab, select the **Full GST on Prepayment** check box to calculate GST for the total invoice amount when a prepayment invoice is posted. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements](how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Export Business Activity Statements](how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md) - [Invoicing Prepayments](../../finance-invoice-prepayments.md) - [Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md deleted file mode 100644 index 500a7cf3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Compare Bank Cash Flow - description: You can use the **Bank Detail Cashflow Compare** report to compare the flow of cash in a particular bank for a specified period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Compare Bank Cash Flow -You can use the **Bank Detail Cashflow Compare** report to compare the flow of cash in a particular bank for a specified period. - - The report displays the following details: - -- Posting date -- Document type -- Document number -- Debit amount -- Credit amount -- Remaining amount - -The debit and credit amounts are displayed in the local currency. You can also view the starting balance and ending balance for each bank. - -## To compare bank cash flow - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Detail Cashflow Compare**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Compare Start Date**|Specifies the start date for the comparison.| - |**Compare End Date**|Specifies the end date for comparison.| - |**New Page per Bank Account**|Specifies if the details of each bank account will be printed on a separate page.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Check Installments](how-to-create-check-installments.md) - [Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-create-check-installments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-create-check-installments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 34cd0da3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-create-check-installments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Check Installments - description: You can create check installments for post-dated checks. You can define the number of installments that a payment will be divided into, the percent of interest, and the period in which the checks will be created. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Check Installments -You can create check installments for post-dated checks. You can define the number of installments that a payment will be divided into, the percent of interest, and the period in which the checks will be created. - -## To create a check installment - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Post Dated checks-Purchases**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Choose the relevant check, and then, on the **Home** tab, choose **Edit**. -3. In the **Post Dated Checks-Purchase** window, on the **Home** tab, choose **Create Check Installments**. -4. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - -5. |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No. of Installments**|Specifies the number of installments into which the post-dated check will be divided.| - |**Interest %**|Specifies the percent of interest.| - |**Period Length**|Specifies the period for which the installments will be created. For example, if you want to divide the check into monthly installments, enter **1M**.| - |**Start Document No.**|Specifies the starting number of the document. Based on the number of installments specified, the consecutive numbers are allocated to the documents created.| - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - - The installment checks are created and displayed in the **Post Dated Checks-Purchases** window. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md deleted file mode 100644 index e9b4cf57..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Determine Sales Price by Cost Plus Percentage in Australia - description: In Australia, use the cost plus percentage function to set a sales price based on the cost of an item. The cost of the item can be calculated along with cost plus calculation. The discount will be based on this calculation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Determine Sales Price by Cost Plus Percentage in Australia -Use the cost plus percentage function to set a sales price based on the cost of an item. The cost of the item can be calculated along with cost plus calculation. The discount will be based on this calculation. This functionality eliminates the need for the use of spreadsheets in determining percentage discounts as they correspond to cost plus percentage. - -## To determine sales tax by cost plus percentage - -1. Choose the **Receivables** action. -3. Choose the **Customers** action. -4. Open the card for a relevant customer. - - –or– - - Choose the **New** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > For a new customer, in the **No.** field, enter the customer number. - -5. To open the **Sales Prices** window, choose the **Prices** action. -6. In the **General** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Sales Type Filter**|Select one of the following options:

- **Customer**
- **Customer Price Group**
- **All Customers**
- **Campaign**
- **None**| - |**Sales Code Filter**|The sales code.| - |**Item No. Filter**|The item number.| - |**Starting Date Filter**|The starting date.| - |**Currency Code Filter**|The currency code.| - -7. Enter information into the relevant fields. -8. To send the details to a recipient, choose the **Send To** action, and then select one of the following formats: - - - **Recipient as Attachment** - - **Microsoft Word** - - **Microsoft Excel** - -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-enter-australian-business-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-enter-australian-business-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 62c77cf9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-enter-australian-business-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter Australian Business Numbers - description: You can enter an Australian Business Number (ABN) in certain windows. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter Australian Business Numbers -You can enter an Australian Business Number (ABN) in the following windows: - -- **Company Information** -- **Vendor Card** - -An algorithm provided by the local tax office ensures that the number is in a valid format. - -## To enter Australian business numbers - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information** or **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required company or vendor. -3. Expand the **Registration** FastTab. -4. In the **ABN** field, enter the ABN. -5. In the **ABN Division Part No.** field, enter the division part number of the ABN, if applicable. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Australian Business Numbers and Adjustment Notes](australian-business-numbers-and-adjustment-notes.md) - [Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 36324abf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export Business Activity Statements - description: A Business Activity Statement (BAS) is a form that reports both the total Goods and Services Tax (GST) collected from sales activities, and GST paid on purchases. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Business Activity Statements -A Business Activity Statement (BAS) is a form that reports both the total Goods and Services Tax (GST) collected from sales activities, and GST paid on purchases. - -You can review the calculated GST amounts, export the BAS setup details to Excel for manual adjustments, and print BAS. - -## To export business activity statements - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Setup Names**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a relevant BAS calculation sheet. -3. Choose the **BAS Setup** action to open the **BAS Setup** window. -4. Choose the **Preview** action to open the **BAS Setup Preview** window. -5. In the **BAS Setup** window, to export the BAS setup details to Excel, choose the **Export to Excel** action. -6. In the **Export BAS Setup to Excel** batch job, select the appropriate filters, and then choose the **OK** button. -7. Close the **BAS Setup Preview** and **BAS Setup** windows. - -## To print business activity statements - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Calculation Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Update** action to open the **BAS Update** window. -3. To ensure that past adjustments to transactions are collected in the latest BAS, in the **Include GST Entries** field, select the **Before and Within the Period** option. -4. Select the appropriate filters. -5. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements](how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Calculate Goods and Services Tax on Prepayments](how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-modify-bas-setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-modify-bas-setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0fa6b7e8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-modify-bas-setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Modify BAS Setup - description: To complete the Business Activity Statement (BAS) setup, you must map fuel tax credits to general ledger accounts. Do not map an account for field 7C if you only have a fuel tax credit that the ATO owes you and you do not owe anything to ATO. In this case, you can consider mapping only field 7D. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Modify BAS Setup -To complete the Business Activity Statement (BAS) setup, you must map fuel tax credits to general ledger accounts. Do not map an account for field 7C if you only have a fuel tax credit that the ATO owes you and you do not owe anything to ATO. In this case, you can consider mapping only field 7D. - -## To modify and map BAS Setup for the fuel tax credit fields - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Setup Names**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **BAS Setup** action. -3. In the **BAS Setup** window, on a new line 16000, in the **Field No.** field, enter 72. -4. In the **Account Totaling** field, select the appropriate general ledger account. The account should have a credit balance. -5. In the **BAS Setup** window, on a new line 17000, in the **Field No.** field, enter 73. -6. In the **Account Totaling** field, select the appropriate general ledger account. The account should have a debit balance. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[BAS Fuel Tax Credits](bas-fuel-tax-credits.md) - [How to: Set Up BAS XML Fields](how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields.md) - [Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4fb2e0b0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Balance Sheet Reports - description: You can use the **Balance Sheet** report to view the company’s balance sheet. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Balance Sheet Reports -You can use the **Balance Sheet** report to view the company’s balance sheet. - - This is a legal report that is required for auditing accounts. You can use this report to view assets and liabilities. - -### To print a balance sheet report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Balance Sheet**, and then choose the relevant link. - -2. In the **Balance Sheet** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Amounts in whole**|Specifies the nearest unit to which the amounts must be rounded.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Print Income Statements](how-to-print-income-statements.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md) - [How to: Compare Bank Cash Flow](how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2ab8c906..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Bank Account Reconciliation Reports in Australia - description: In Australia, the **Bank Account Reconciliation** report displays open bank ledger entries as unpresented checks or unrecorded deposits. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Bank Account Reconciliation Reports in Australia -The **Bank Account Reconciliation** report displays open bank ledger entries as unpresented checks or unrecorded deposits. - -## To print a bank account reconciliation report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reconciliation**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **New Page per Bank Account** check box. -3. On the **Bank Account** FastTab, select appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately](../../bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4d3f5117..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Deposit Slip Reports in Australia - description: In Australia, the **Deposit Slip** report displays cash and check details in a format required by the bank. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Deposit Slip Reports in Australia -The **Deposit Slip** report displays cash and check details in a format required by the bank. - -## To a print deposit slip report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Bank** journal. -3. Choose the **Edit Journal** action. -4. In the **Cash Receipt Journal** window, choose the **Print Deposit Slip** action. -5. On the **Gen. Journal Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -6. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2c9c4181..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports - description: You must submit a periodic report of goods and services tax (GST) settlement. You can create this settlement from the **BAS Calc. Schedule List** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports -You must submit a periodic report of goods and services tax (GST) settlement. You can create this settlement from the **BAS Calc. Schedule List** window. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Before you calculate the GST settlement, you must export the business activity statement (BAS). For more information, see [How to: Export Business Activity Statements](how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md). - -### To print a goods and service tax settlement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Calculation Sheets**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Choose the appropriate BAS calculation sheet, and then, on the **Actions** tab, choose **Calculate GST Statement**. - -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Settlement Account Type**|The settlement account type.| - |**Settlement Account No.**|The general ledger account number or vendor number, based on the type selected in the **Settlement Account Type** field.| - |**Rounding G/L Account No.**|The account to which the truncated cents will be posted.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the settlement entries.| - |**Document No.**|The document number of the settlement entries.| - |**Description**|The settlement description.| - |**Post**|Select to post the withholding tax settlement entries.| - |**Inter Company**|Select if the posting is inter company.| - -4. On the **BAS Calculation Sheet** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - -5. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Goods and Service Tax Posting](how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting.md) - [Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5dd583da..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports - description: You can create reports of goods and services tax (GST) for purchases and sales from the **BAS Calc. Schedule List** window. Goods and Services Tax (GST) is the tax applied on most goods and services bought and sold in Australia. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports -You can create reports of goods and services tax (GST) for purchases and sales from the **BAS Calc. Schedule List** window. Goods and Services Tax (GST) is the tax applied on most goods and services bought and sold in Australia. - - You can use the GST sales report and GST purchase report to reconcile the sales and purchase amounts recorded in business activity statements (BAS). Companies must provide details for all sales and purchase transactions and GST calculations for the BAS period to the Australian Tax Office (ATO) during a BAS audit. These reports can also be used as internal audit documents to validate GST figures in BAS. - -### To print GST sales and purchase reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Calculation Sheets**, and then choose the relevant link. - -2. Choose the appropriate BAS calculation sheet, and then, on the **Actions** tab, choose **GST Sales Report** or choose **GST Purchase Report**. - -3. On the **Options** FastTab, and then fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Start Date**|Select a start date for the report.| - |**End Date**|Select an end date for the report.| - |**Export to Excel**|Select to export the GST transaction details to Microsoft Excel for manual calculation of the GST credits using the appropriate rate.| - - > [!NOTE] - > If the start and end dates are not specified, all of the entries up to and including the work date will be listed. - -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements](how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Export Business Activity Statements](how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-income-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-income-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 97ef8dea..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-print-income-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Income Statements - description: You can use the **Income Statement** report to view the company’s annual income statement. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Income Statements -You can use the **Income Statement** report to view the company’s annual income statement. - -This is a legal report that is required for auditing accounts. This report displays the details of revenues and expenses for the current year and the previous year. - -## To print the income statement report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Income Statement**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Income Statement** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Amounts in whole**|Specifies the nearest unit to which the amount must be rounded.| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Reporting Currency**|Specifies if the amounts will be displayed in the additional reporting currency.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements](how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements](how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md) - [How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) - [How to: Compare Bank Cash Flow](how-to-compare-bank-cash-flow.md) - [How to: Print Balance Sheet Reports](how-to-print-balance-sheet-reports.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-report-bas-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-report-bas-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 647fafb6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-report-bas-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Report BAS Information - description: You need to report the Business Activity Statement (BAS) calculation information for goods and services tax (GST). The **C** and **D** fields on the **Totals** FastTab in the **BAS Calculation Sheet** window are used for fuel tax credits. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Report BAS Information -You need to report the Business Activity Statement (BAS) calculation information for goods and services tax (GST). The **C** and **D** fields on the **Totals** FastTab in the **BAS Calculation Sheet** window are used for fuel tax credits. - -## To report BAS information and calculate the GST settlement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Calculation Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **BAS Calculation Sheet** window, choose the **Import** action. -4. In the **BAS – Import/Export** window, enter the BAS file name to import a sample XML file. The totals information will be updated. Choose the **OK** button. -5. In the **BAS Calculation Sheet** window, choose the **Update** action. -6. In the **BAS-Update** window, choose the **Preview** button to view the update information. Choose the **OK** button to close the preview window. -7. In the **BAS Calculation Sheet** window, choose the **Export** action. -8. In the **BAS – Import/Export** window, select an XML file to export the data to, and then choose the **OK** button. The XML file is updated with the new information. If you use Electronic Commerce Interface (ECI) to update your taxes, the information in the XML file will be complete. -9. In the **BAS Calculation Sheet** window, choose the **Calculate GST Settlement** action. -10. In the **Calculate GST Settlement** window, make sure that the **Post** field is selected. When you run the report, the resulting GST settlement postings include the fuel tax values. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[BAS Fuel Tax Credits](bas-fuel-tax-credits.md) - [How to: Set Up BAS XML Fields](how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields.md) - [Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields.md deleted file mode 100644 index c83173bd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-bas-xml-fields.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up BAS XML Fields - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you must define setup names for XML fields in the Business Activity Statement (BAS). You can group the required BAS XML field IDs under one setup name. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up BAS XML Fields -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you must define setup names for XML fields in the Business Activity Statement (BAS). You can group the required BAS XML field IDs under one setup name. - -## To set up BAS XML fields - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS XML Field IDs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |**XML Field ID**|**Field No.**| - |----------------------|-------------------| - |**Fuel_Excise_Credit**|73| - |**Fuel_Excise_Debit**|72| - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] automatically fills in the **Field Label No.** and **Field Description** fields by using the Business Activity Statement (BAS) labels. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[BAS Fuel Tax Credits](bas-fuel-tax-credits.md) - [How to: Set Up BAS XML Fields]() - [Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9c846936..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Business Activity Statements - description: You must set up a Business Activity Statement (BAS) to generate a BAS report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements -You must set up a Business Activity Statement (BAS) to generate a BAS report. BAS setup includes the following: - -- Goods and Services Tax (GST) posting setup. -- BAS – XML field IDs. -- BAS setup names. - -## To set up GST posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. To set up GST posting rules, create a new line and enter information into the relevant fields. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up BAS – XML field IDs - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS – XML Field IDs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new line. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**XML Field ID**|The name for the BAS field, as it appears in the XML file.| - |**Field No.**|The internal [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] number that corresponds to the field label number in the XML file.| - |**Field Label No.**|This value is replicated from the XML file received from the Australian Tax Office (ATO). It refers to the relevant section of the BAS, as described in the BAS instructions from the ATO. **Note:** The value in this field is updated when you select a value in the **Field No.** field.| - |**Field Description**|This is the description for the value in the **Field Label No.** field. **Note:** The value in this field is updated when you select a value in the **Field No.** field.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up BAS - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Setup Names**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|The BAS setup name.| - |**Description**|The description for the BAS setup name.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. In the **BAS Setup Name** window, choose the **BAS Setup** action. -6. In the **BAS Setup** window, enter the BAS setup information. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Export Business Activity Statements](how-to-export-business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Calculate Goods and Services Tax on Prepayments](how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-units-for-business-activity-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-units-for-business-activity-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index c08bc8ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-business-units-for-business-activity-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Business Units for Business Activity Statements - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can consolidate the financial statements of various companies into one financial statement. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Business Units for Business Activity Statements -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can consolidate the financial statements of various companies into one financial statement. - -You must set up a consolidation company to perform the consolidation. In this company, the total amounts for all accounts in the group, from both the parent company and subsidiaries are added together. You must also indicate the general ledger accounts in the consolidated company to which the total should be transferred. - -You can use the **BAS Business Units** window to set up the following: - -- Parent company -- Subsidiaries -- Affiliates - -You must set up information in the **General Ledger Setup** window before you can set up business units. - -## To set up general ledger for a business activity statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**BAS to be Lodged as a Group**|Select if you are logging a business activity statement for a group of companies.| - |**BAS Group Company**|Select if this company is the main company in the group of companies for which you are lodging a group business activity statement.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set a business unit for a business activity statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **BAS Business Units**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Company Name**|Specify the name of the company which will be added to the group company's business activity statement.| - |**Document No.**|Specify the BAS document number that has to be consolidated. This field is associated with the **BAS Version** field.| - |**BAS Version**|Specify the BAS version number in which the transaction was included. This field is associated with the **Document No.** field.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Activity Statements](business-activity-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up Business Activity Statements](how-to-set-up-business-activity-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 583777ae..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Goods and Service Tax Posting - description: Goods and services tax (GST) is the tax that is applied on most goods and services. The GST that is paid and received during a period is reported in the Business Activity Statement (BAS) that has to be submitted to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Goods and Service Tax Posting -Goods and services tax (GST) is the tax that is applied on most goods and services. The GST that is paid and received during a period is reported in the Business Activity Statement (BAS) that has to be submitted to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO). - -To set up posting details for GST, you must define the posting groups, rate of GST, and the accounts to which GST is to be posted. You can set up this information for a particular combination business posting groups and product posting groups. - -You must set up GST posting before you generate the BAS report. - -## To set up goods and sales tax posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT Bus. Posting Group**|Specifies the VAT business posting group code.| - |**VAT Prod. Posting Group**|Specifies the VAT product posting group code.| - |**VAT Identifier**|Specifies the code that is used to group similar VAT setups with similar attributes.

For example, you can group a number of VAT posting setups that have a common VAT percentage.| - |**VAT %**|Specifies the VAT rate.| - |**VAT Calculation Type**|Specifies the method that is used to calculate the purchase or sale of items.| - |**Sales VAT Account**|Specifies the number of the general ledger account to which you want to post the sales VAT.

If you have selected the **Reverse Charge VAT** option in the **VAT Calculation Type** field, then do not enter a value in this field.| - |**Purchase VAT Account**|Specifies the number of the general ledger account to which you want to post the purchase VAT.| - |**Reverse Chrg. VAT Acc.**|Specifies the number of the general ledger account to which you want to post the reverse charge VAT.

You can enter a value in this field only if you have selected the **Reverse Charge VAT** option in the **VAT Calculation Type** field.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report BAS Information](how-to-report-bas-information.md) - [How to: Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3157bdf0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax - description: Revenue types are used to categorize withholding tax (WHT) entries and are used for WHT certificates. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax -Revenue types are used to categorize withholding tax (WHT) entries and are used for WHT certificates. - -You can use the **WHT Revenue Types** window to set up the revenue types for withholding tax. - -## To set up revenue types for withholding tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **WHT Revenue Types**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specifies the unique code for the revenue type. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|Specifies the description for the WHT revenue type.| - |**Sequence**|Specifies the sequence in which you want to group the revenue types. For example, a revenue type with sequence 0 will be displayed before sequence 1.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Withholding Tax](withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) - [How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements](how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 36411ba7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Vendors Without ABN for Calculating the Withholding Tax - description: Withholding Tax (WHT) is calculated for local vendors who do not have an Australian Business Number (ABN), as required by tax law. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Vendors Without ABN for Calculating the Withholding Tax -Withholding Tax (WHT) is calculated for local vendors who do not have an Australian Business Number (ABN), as required by tax law. - -## To set up vendors without ABN for calculating the withholding tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the required vendor, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Vendor Card** window, on the **Registration** FastTab, make sure the **ABN** field and the **Foreign Vend** field must be empty. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > The WHT percentage is automatically withheld in accordance with what was specified in the **WHT Posting Setup** window. The WHT certificate is produced for submission to the vendor. For more information, see [Withholding Tax](withholding-tax.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Withholding Tax](withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index a776578e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Withholding Tax - description: Withholding tax (WHT) is the tax withheld by a company when it makes a payment to a vendor, in which the full amount owed to the vendor is reduced by the tax withheld. The withheld tax is then remitted to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) when the next Business Activity Statement (BAS) is submitted. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 05/12/2020 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Withholding Tax -Withholding tax (WHT) is the tax withheld by a company when it makes a payment to a vendor, in which the full amount owed to the vendor is reduced by the tax withheld. The withheld tax is then remitted to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) when the next Business Activity Statement (BAS) is submitted. - -If a supplier without an Australian Business Number (ABN) provides an invoice, a withholding tax amount must be withheld if the total amount of the invoice is more than the threshold amount. - -## To enable withholding tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. - -2. On the **Local Functionalities** FastTab, choose the **Enable WHT** field. - -3. Optionally, choose the **Round Amount for WHT Calc** field. - - If you choose this field, all WHT amounts will be rounded down to the nearest number. For example, if the WHT amount on an invoice is calculated to be 33.90, and the **Round Amount for WHT Calc** field is chosen in the General Ledger Setup, then the WHT amount will round to 33. - -## Set up WHT posting groups - -To use withholding tax, you must set up the business posting groups and product posting groups for withholding tax so that the correct WHT calculations are made for each vendor. - -> [!NOTE] -> As a prerequisite, you need to set up source codes for WHT settlement in the **Source Code Setup** page. For more information, see [Set Up Trail Codes](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2016/hh168751(v=nav.90)) in the Help for Dynamics NAV 2016. - -The following procedure describes how to set up product posting groups for WHT, but the same steps also apply to setting up business posting groups for WHT. - -## To set up a product posting group for withholding tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **WHT Product Posting Group**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify the code for the product posting group. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|Specify the description for the product posting group. You can enter a maximum of 50 alphanumeric characters.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up posting for withholding tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **WHT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**WHT Business Posting Group**|Specifies the business posting group code for withholding tax.| - |**WHT Product Posting Group**|Specifies the product posting group code for withholding tax.| - |**WHT Calculation Rule**|Specifies the calculation rule for WHT, which is used with the amount specified in the **WHT Minimum Invoice Amount** field. This will help identify the transactions for which WHT will not be deducted.

For example, if you select the **Less than** option here and enter 100 in the **WHT Minimum Invoice Amount** field, then WHT will not be deducted for those transactions with an amount less than 100.| - |**WHT Minimum Invoice Amount**|Specifies the threshold amount that is below which WHT will not be deducted.| - |**WHT %**|Specifies the WHT rate. You must enter the rate without the percent sign.| - |**Realized WHT Type**|Specifies the mode of WHT calculation for purchases or sales of items.| - |**Prepaid WHT Account Code**|Specifies the general ledger account number to which sales WHT is to be posted.| - |**Payable WHT Account Code**|Specifies the general ledger account number to which purchase WHT is to be posted.| - |**WHT Report**|Specifies the withholding tax report type.| - |**Bal. Prepaid Account Type**|Specifies the type of balancing account for sales WHT transactions.| - |**Bal. Prepaid Account No.**|Specifies the account number or bank name for sales WHT transactions, based on the type selected in the **Bal. Prepaid Account Type** field.| - |**Bal. Payable Account Type**|Specifies the type of balancing account for purchase WHT transactions.| - |**Bal. Payable Account No.**|Specifies the account number or bank name for purchase WHT transactions. This is based on the type selected in the **Bal. Payable Account Type** field.| - |**WHT Report Line No. Series**|Specifies the number series for the WHT report line.| - |**Revenue Type**|Specifies the revenue type. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md).| - |**Purch. WHT Adj. Account No.**|Specifies the account number which to post purchase credit memo adjustments.| - |**Sales WHT Adj. Account No.**|Specifies the account number to post sales credit memo adjustments.| - |**Sequence**|Specifies the sequence in which the withholding tax posting setup information must be displayed in reports.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) - [How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements](how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md) - [Withholding Tax](withholding-tax.md) - [Australian Taxation Office (ATO)](http://www.ato.gov.au/) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos.md deleted file mode 100644 index 69d553a2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Posted Tax Credit Memos - description: You can use the **Posted Sales Tax Credit Memo** window and **Posted Purch. Tax Credit Memo** window to view details of sales tax credit memos and purchase tax credit memos that have been posted. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Posted Tax Credit Memos -You can use the **Posted Sales Tax Credit Memo** window and **Posted Purch. Tax Credit Memo** window to view details of sales tax credit memos and purchase tax credit memos that have been posted. - -The following procedure describes how to view posted sales tax credit memos, but the same steps also apply for viewing posted purchase tax credit memos. - -## To view a posted sales tax credit memo - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Tax Credit Memo**, and then choose the related link. -2. View the FastTabs as described in the following table. - - |FastTab|Description| - |-------------|---------------------------------------| - |**General**|General information about the credit memo.| - |**Posted Sales Tax Cr. Memo Sub**|Posted sales tax credit memo information.| - |**Invoicing**|Invoice information.| - |**Shipping**|Shipping information.| - |**Foreign Trade**|Foreign trade information.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: View Posted Tax Invoices](how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices.md) - [How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index 77c1468c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Posted Tax Invoices - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use the **Posted Sales Tax Invoice** window and the **Posted Purchase Tax Invoice** window to view the details of posted sales tax invoices and posted purchase tax invoices. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Posted Tax Invoices -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use the **Posted Sales Tax Invoice** window and the **Posted Purchase Tax Invoice** window to view the details of posted sales tax invoices and posted purchase tax invoices. - -The following procedure describes how to view the posted sales tax invoice, but the same steps also apply to viewing posted purchase tax invoices. - -## To view a posted sales tax invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Tax Invoice**, and then choose the related link. -2. View the FastTabs as described in the following table. - - |FastTab|Description| - |-------------|---------------------------------------| - |**General**|General information about the invoice.| - |**Posted Sales Tax Inv. Subform**|Posted sales tax invoice information.| - |**Invoicing**|Invoice information.| - |**Shipping**|Shipping information.| - |**Foreign Trade**|Foreign trade information.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: View Posted Tax Credit Memos](how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index f07ff1cb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Withholding Tax Entries - description: You can view entries that have been posted with withholding tax (WHT) for a specified general ledger register. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Withholding Tax Entries -You can view entries that have been posted with withholding tax (WHT) for a specified general ledger register. - -In the **WHT Entry** window, you can view details about the withholding tax, such as the base amount, the calculated WHT amount, the WHT calculation method, and the unrealized WHT amount. - -## To view withholding tax entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the general ledger register for which you want to view WHT entries, and then choose the **WHT Entry** action. - -You can view the posted WHT entries in the **WHT Entry** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Withholding Tax](withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements](how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2f1c30dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Australian Tax - description: Tax functionality in Australia is described in several topics. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Tax -For information about tax in Australia, see the following topics: - -[How to: Set Up Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md) -[How to: Set Up Vendors Without ABN for Calculating the Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax.md) -[How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md) -[How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements](how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md) -[How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) -[How to: Set Up Goods and Service Tax Posting](how-to-set-up-goods-and-service-tax-posting.md) -[How to: Print Goods and Service Tax Settlement Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-service-tax-settlement-reports.md) -[How to: Print Goods and Services Tax Sales and Purchase Reports](how-to-print-goods-and-services-tax-sales-and-purchase-reports.md) -[How to: Calculate Goods and Services Tax on Prepayments](how-to-calculate-goods-and-services-tax-on-prepayments.md) -[How to: Adjust Settlement Exchange Rates for VAT Entries](how-to-adjust-settlement-exchange-rates-for-vat-entries.md) -[How to: View Posted Tax Invoices](how-to-view-posted-tax-invoices.md) -[How to: View Posted Tax Credit Memos](how-to-view-posted-tax-credit-memos.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/withholding-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/withholding-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c8da8e9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Australia/withholding-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Withholding Tax - description: Withholding Tax (WHT) is tax withheld by a company when making a payment to a vendor, in which the full amount owed to that vendor is reduced by the tax withheld. The withheld tax is then remitted to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) during the next Business Activity Statement (BAS) submission. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Withholding Tax -Withholding Tax (WHT) is tax withheld by a company when making a payment to a vendor, in which the full amount owed to that vendor is reduced by the tax withheld. The withheld tax is then remitted to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) during the next Business Activity Statement (BAS) submission. - -The Australian government requires taxes to be withheld from payment to vendors under the following circumstances: - -- The vendor is a local supplier who has not supplied an Australian Business Number (ABN) before the payment is processed, and the individual transaction amount is greater than the specified threshold amount. - -- The vendor is a non-resident supplier and the payment is to be made to this non-resident entity in the form of interest, royalty, or dividend payments. Currently, there is no minimum threshold amount. Withholding rates may vary due to payment, or international tax treaties existing between Australia and the vendor's country/region. - -Fields within **WHT Business Posting Groups** and **WHT Product Posting Groups** must be set up in the **WHT Posting Setup** window so that the correct WHT calculations are made for each vendor. - -- **WHT Calculation Rule** – This field controls how calculation applies to the **WHT Minimum Invoice Amount**, or the invoice threshold amount. The following options exist: - - - **Less than** - - **Less than or equal to** - - **Equal to** - - **Greater than** - - **Greater than or equal to** - -In Australia, WHT is not calculated if the individual invoice amount is less than or equal to the threshold amount. Australian companies should select **Less than or equal to**. - -- **WHT Minimum Invoice Amount** – Enter the invoice threshold amount. - -- **WHT %** – Enter the relevant WHT rate for the particular combination of **WHT Business Posting Group** and **WHT Product Posting Group**. If you do not wish to calculate any withholding amount, enter 0.00. - -- **Realised WHT Type** – Select **Payment** to calculate only the withholding amount at the time of payment. The other options of **Invoice** and **Earliest** do not apply to Australia. - -- **Payable WHT Account Code** – Enter the number of the G/L account to which you want to post **Purchase WHT** for the particular combination of **WHT Business Posting Group** and **WHT Product Posting Group**. - -- **Purch. WHT Adjustment Account No.** – Select an account number for **Purchase CR/Adj Note** adjustments. - -- **Revenue Types** – Drill down to the **WHT Revenue Types** window. These values determine how the combination of **WHT Business Posting Group** and **WHT Product Posting Group** are displayed in reports. You must enter a value in order for this combination to appear in the WHT reports. - -## WHT for Suppliers Without an ABN -Ensure that there is a valid combination of **General Business** and **General Product Posting Groups** with the correct threshold. For example, in Australia today the minimum threshold is $75 with a rate of 46.50%. - -The percentage withheld is specified in **WHT Posting Setup**. The amount to be withheld is calculated automatically at the time of payment. The WHT certificate is printed automatically, and then sent to the vendor with payment. The WHT certificate explains the reasons for not sending the full invoiced amount. - -## WHT for Foreign Suppliers -Ensure that a valid combination of **General Business** and **General Product PostingGroups** has been established for vendors for whom you need to withhold tax, other than for non-ABN. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors Without ABN for Calculating the Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-vendors-without-abn-for-calculating-the-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Set Up Revenue Types for Withholding Tax](how-to-set-up-revenue-types-for-withholding-tax.md) - [How to: Calculate and Post Withholding Tax Settlements](how-to-calculate-and-post-withholding-tax-settlements.md) - [How to: View Withholding Tax Entries](how-to-view-withholding-tax-entries.md) - [Australia Local Functionality](australia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/austria-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/austria-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8b0bea34..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/austria-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Austria Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Austrian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Austria Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Austrian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - -[VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) -[How to: Print General Ledger Setup Information](how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md) -[How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory](how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md) -[How to: Copy Existing Items to New Items](how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md) -[How to: Print Sales and Purchase Orders During Batch Posting](how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md) -[How to: Print Vendor Payments List Reports](how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index bf2e793d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Delivery Reminders in Austria - description: In Austria, delivery reminders are used to track overdue vendor shipments, and to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Delivery Reminders in Austria -Delivery reminders are used to track overdue vendor shipments, and to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. To create delivery reminders, you must set up the following: - -- Delivery reminder terms - - Delivery reminder terms are identified by a code that must be assigned to vendors. To use more than one combination of settings, you must set up a code for each setting separately. You can set up any number of delivery reminder terms. - -- Delivery reminder levels - - For every delivery reminder term, you must set up delivery reminder levels. These levels determine how often delivery reminders can be created for a specific term. Level 1 is the first delivery reminder that you create for an overdue delivery. Level 2 is the second delivery reminder, and so on. When delivery reminders are created, the number of reminders that were created previously is considered, and the current number is used to apply terms. - -- Delivery reminder texts messages - - You must set up delivery reminder text messages for every delivery reminder level. There are two types of delivery reminder text messages: beginning and ending. The beginning text message is printed under the header section, before the list of entries that are marked for reminder. The ending text message is printed after this list. - -For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md). - -After you have set up the delivery terms, you must assign the delivery reminder term codes to vendors. For more information, see [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md). - -You can create delivery reminders manually or automatically. You can use the **Create Delivery Reminder** batch job to create delivery reminders automatically. This batch job allows you to select the purchase orders for which delivery reminders must be created. For more information, see [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md). - -You can also track documents in relation to purchase order lines and sales order lines. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] provides the following reports: - -- **Issued Delivery Reminder** - To view the delivery reminders for vendors. -- **Delivery Reminder - Test** - To verify the delivery reminders before you issue them. - -For more information, see [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md deleted file mode 100644 index bf60de0c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors in Austria - description: In Austria, in order to enable delivery reminders for overdue purchases, you must assign delivery reminder terms to vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors in Austria -In order to enable delivery reminders for overdue purchases, you must assign delivery reminder terms to vendors. For more information, see [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md). - -## To assign delivery reminders codes to vendors - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the vendor for whom you want to set up delivery reminders, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Receiving** FastTab, in the **Delivery Reminder Terms** field, select a delivery reminder terms code for the vendor. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Vendors](../../purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) - [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index 219c6327..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Block Shipment for Negative Inventory in Austria - description: In Austria, you can block outbound shipment for an item when a transaction results in a negative inventory for that item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory in Austria -You can block outbound shipment for an item when a transaction results in a negative inventory for that item. - -## To block shipment for negative inventory - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivable Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivable Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Block ship. when neg. invent.** check box. - - When this check box is selected, the inventory for all items is calculated when you post a sales shipment. If the transaction leads to a negative quantity in inventory for an item, an error message appears. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](../../sales-setup-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9ba06a67..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Copy Existing Items to New Items in Austria - description: In Austria, you can group items with similar settings in an item catalog. When you add a new item, to save time, you can use **Copy Item** to copy an existing item to use as a template for a new item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Copy Existing Items to New Items in Austria -You can group items with similar settings in an item catalog. When you add a new item, to save time, you can use the **Copy Item** function to copy an existing item to use as a template for a new item. - -## To copy existing items to new items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item that you want to copy, and then choose the **Copy Item** action. -3. In the **Item Copy** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Source Item No.**|Sets the item number from which the data is to be copied.| - |**Target Item No.**|Sets the item number for the item to which the data is to be copied.| - |**Target No. Series**|Sets the item number series to which the data is to be copied.| - - > [!NOTE] - > You can specify an item number in the **Target Item No.** field or in the **Target No. Series** field. The copy item will be assigned to the next available number in that number series. - -4. Select the appropriate check boxes for the data that you want to copy. -5. To copy your selections to the new item, choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-a-vat-statement.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-a-vat-statement.md deleted file mode 100644 index 63854417..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-a-vat-statement.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create a VAT Statement - description: You can submit a periodic report of VAT transactions. The VAT statement is submitted as a FDF file that corresponds with an editable PDF file from the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create a VAT Statement -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] allows you to submit a periodic report of VAT transactions. The VAT statement is submitted as a FDF file that corresponds with an editable PDF file from the tax authorities. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You must fill in detailed information about your company address in the Company Information window before you create the VAT statement. This includes information about street, building, floor, and room number. This information is included in the FDF file. - -## To create a VAT statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statement AT**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|Specifies the start date of the VAT period.| - |**Ending Date**|Specifies the end date of the VAT period.| - |**Include VAT Entries**|Specifies if you want to include VAT entries that are either open or closed, or both open and closed entries.| - |**Include VAT Entries**|Specifies if you want to include VAT entries that are from the specified period or also include entries from before the period.| - |**Reporting Type**|Select if this VAT statement is the quarterly report, monthly report, or if it applies to another period.| - |**Check Positions**|Select to verify the positions of the VAT statement during the export.| - |**Round to Whole Numbers**|Select to round amounts to whole numbers.| - |**Surplus Used to Pay Dues**|Select to use a potential surplus to cover other charges.| - |**Additional Invoices sent via Mail**|Select if you will send additional information.| - |**Number §6 Abs. 1**|Specify the number according to §6 section 1 if you want to claim tax-free revenues without input tax reduction.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. When prompted, choose to save or open the generated XML file and FDF file. - -If your VAT statement does not contain errors, you can now submit the FDF file to the tax authorities. For more information, see the [Finanz-Online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=239929). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md deleted file mode 100644 index a5b27c15..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Delivery Reminders Manually in Austria - description: In Austria [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually in Austria -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. You can create a single delivery reminder manually, or you can generate delivery reminders for all overdue deliveries. For more information, see [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To create delivery reminders, you must set up the delivery reminder properties. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md). - -## To create a delivery reminder manually - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Delivery Reminder** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|The unique identification number for the delivery reminder.| - |**Vendor No.**|The number of the vendor for whom you want to post the delivery reminder.

When you select the vendor number, the **Name**, **Address**, **Post Code/City**, and **Contact** fields are filled in automatically.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the delivery reminder. This date is copied to all of the delivery reminder ledger entries.| - |**Document Date**|The document date for the delivery reminder. This date is also used to calculate the due date for the delivery reminder. You can modify the posting date if required.| - |**Reminder Level**|The delivery reminder level. This value is based on the number of delivery reminders that have already been sent. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md).| - |**Reminder Terms Code**|Specify the delivery reminder terms code that is set up for the vendor.| - |**Due Date**|The due date for the delivery reminder.| - -4. Choose the **Suggest Reminder Lines** action - - If there are overdue deliveries from the specified vendor, these are added to the deliver reminder. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - - The delivery reminder is created. You can now issue and print the delivery reminder. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3027e558..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Generate Delivery Reminders in Austria - description: In Austria, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Generate Delivery Reminders in Austria -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. You can generate delivery reminders for all overdue deliveries, or you can create a single delivery reminder manually. For more information, see [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To create delivery reminders, you must set up the delivery reminder properties. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md). - -## To generate delivery reminders for all overdue deliveries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Delivery Reminder** window, choose the **Create Delivery Reminder** action. -4. On the **Purchase Header** FastTab and the **Purchase Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -If there are overdue deliveries that match the filters that you have set, deliver reminders are created. You can now issue and print the delivery reminders. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0f653675..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Issue Delivery Reminders in Austria - description: In Austria, after you have created delivery reminders, you must issue and print them so that you can send reminders to vendors. Before you issue the delivery reminders, you can print a test report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Issue Delivery Reminders in Austria -After you have created delivery reminders, you must issue and print them so that you can send reminders to vendors. Before you issue the delivery reminders, you can print a test report. For more information, see [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md). - -When you issue the delivery reminders, delivery reminder ledger entries are created. You can view the created ledger entries in the **Deliv. Reminder Ledger Entries** window. - -## To issue delivery reminders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Delivery Reminder** window, select the delivery reminder that you want to issue, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Issue** action. -4. In the **Issue Delivery Reminder** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Print**|Select to print the delivery reminders when they are issued.| - |**Replace Posting Date**|Select to replace the existing posting date for the delivery reminder.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the delivery reminder.

This posting date is used for all delivery reminders if you have selected the **Replace Posting Date** check box. If the **Replace Posting Date** check box is cleared, this date will be used for only those delivery reminders for which a posting date is not available.| - -5. Optionally, on the **Delivery Reminder Header** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can remove filters and issue all delivery reminders at the same time. - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -You can view the issued reminders in the **Issued Delivery Reminder** window. Optionally, you can now print a delivery reminder. - -## To view delivery reminder ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the purchase order for which you want to view the reminder status, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Deliv. Reminder Ledger Entries** action. - -In the Deliv. Reminder Ledger Entries window, you can view the delivery reminder ledger entries for the selected purchase order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index e6baacbf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print General Ledger Setup Information in Austria - description: In Austria, before you use [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in the daily business, you can run the **G/L Setup Information** report to display the master data that you have set up. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print General Ledger Setup Information in Austria -Before you use [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in the daily business, you can run the **G/L Setup Information** report to display the master data that you have set up. You can look over this master data so that you have a baseline to compare to, and then verify that you have set up posting groups correctly, for example. - -## To print general ledger setup information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Setup Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Setup Information** field, select the master data area as described in the following table. - - |Option|Description| - |-------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**G/L Setup - Company Data - Consolidation**|Displays tables for general ledger setup, company information, and business units.| - |**Posting Groups**|Displays customer posting group tables, vendor posting group tables, inventory posting group tables, and bank account posting group tables.| - |**Posting Matrix**|Displays general business posting group tables, general product posting group tables, and general posting group tables.| - |**VAT Setup**|Displays VAT business posting group tables, VAT product posting group tables, and VAT posting setup tables.| - |**Source Code - Reason Code**|Displays source tables, source code setup tables, and reason codes tables.| - |**Check Number Series**|Select to provide an overview of the use of number series so that you can identify number series that are problematic for the data export for the Grundsätze zum Datenzugriff und zur Prüfbarkeit digitaler Unterlagen (GDPdU). The report will show number series with one of the following issues:

- The number series allows manual document numbers.
- The number series is not chronological.
- The number series is used in more than one table or field.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance-setup-finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index ef47c721..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Sales and Purchase Orders During Batch Posting in Austria - description: In Austria, after sales orders and purchase orders are batch posted, you can print the corresponding posted documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Sales and Purchase Orders During Batch Posting in Austria -After sales orders and purchase orders are batch posted, you can print the corresponding posted documents. - -The following procedure describes how to print sales orders, but the same steps also apply to purchase orders. - -## To print sales and purchase orders during batch posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Post Batch** action. -3. In the **Batch Post Sales Orders** window, on the **Options** FastTab, select the **Print** check box. -4. Optionally, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the additional fields. -5. To batch post and print the sales orders, choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Invoice Sales](../../sales-how-invoice-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 432c5fc0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders in Austria - description: In Austria, after you have created delivery reminders and made any needed modifications, you can either print the test reports or issue the delivery reminders. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders in Austria -After you have created delivery reminders and made any needed modifications, you can either print the test reports or issue the delivery reminders. - -A test report is a document that lets you review and modify a delivery reminder before you issue it. - -## To print test reports before issuing delivery reminders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Delivery Reminder List** window, choose the **Delivery Reminder - Test** action. -3. In the **Delivery Reminder - Test** window, set a filter if you want to print only selected delivery reminders. -4. Choose the **Print** to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 80a2afe3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print The Vendor Payments List Reports - description: The **Vendor Payments List** report provides a list of payments for each vendor. Report can sort payments chronologically or grouped by vendor. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print The Vendor Payments List Reports -The **Vendor Payments List** report provides a list of payments for each vendor. The report can sort payments chronologically or grouped by vendor. - -## To print the vendor payments list report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Payments List**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Sorting**|Specifies the sort order. You can sort by vendor or chronologically. If you sort by vendor, you will see a subtotal for each vendor. If you sort chronologically, you will not see subtotals.| - |**Layout**|Specifies the layout of the report.

The results can be displayed in the following layouts:

**Standard**
Displays the vendor number and vendor name, together with posting details, such as the document number and the amount in local currency.

**FCY Amounts**
Displays the vendor number, vendor name, document number, payment status (O for open, PP for partial payment, and C for closed), and payment amount.

**Posting Info**
Displays the vendor number, vendor name, cost center, cost object, user ID, and payment amount.| - - At the end of the report, the number of processed payments is displayed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Making Payments](../../payables-make-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md deleted file mode 100644 index 97e518f3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up The Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text - description: To create delivery reminders, you are required to perform certain setup. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up The Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text -To create delivery reminders, you must set up the following: - -- Delivery reminder terms -- Delivery reminder levels -- Delivery reminder text messages - -Each delivery reminder term has two or more delivery reminder levels, and for each delivery reminder level, you can specify text that will be part of the delivery reminder. - -For more information, see [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md). - -## To set up delivery reminder terms - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The code for the delivery reminder term. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|The description for the delivery reminder term. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Max. No. of Delivery Reminders**|The maximum number of delivery reminders that can be created for an order.

**NOTE:** This is the maximum number across all reminder levels for this reminder term. For example, if you have set up three levels, and you set **Max. No. of Delivery Reminders** to 5, the first reminder is created at level 1, the second at level 2, and the last three at level 3.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To add delivery reminder levels to a delivery reminder term - -1. In the **Delivery Reminder Terms** window, select the delivery reminder term for which you want to set up levels, and then choose the **Levels** action. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|The delivery reminder level number. This field is filled in automatically.| - |**Due Date Calculation**|The formula for the due date calculation for the delivery reminder. You can enter a combination of numbers from 0 to 9999, and date codes (D for day, WD for weekday, W for week, M for month, Q for quarter, or Y for year). The date codes denote the calculation for the delivery reminder due date. You can enter a maximum of 20 characters for the due date calculation formula.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -For each delivery reminder level, you can define text messages that are added to the delivery reminder. You can define beginning text that is added before the description of the overdue purchase order, and ending text that is added after the description of the overdue purchase order. - -The following procedure describes how to set up beginning text messages, but the same steps apply for setting up ending text messages. - -## To set up delivery reminder text messages - -1. In the **Delivery Reminder Levels** window, select a level, and then choose the **Beginning Text** action. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Description** field, enter the beginning text message for the delivery reminder. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index b1cb41c8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up The Delivery Reminders - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use purchase delivery reminders for reminding vendors about overdue deliveries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up The Delivery Reminders -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use purchase delivery reminders to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. To create delivery reminders for vendors, you must set up base data for delivery reminder creation and number series for the delivery reminders in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. - -## To set up delivery reminders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Default Del. Rem. Date Field** field, specify one of the following options as described in the following table. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Requested Receipt Date**|To specify that the date value in the **Requested Receipt Date** field on the purchase order line will be used as the default date for creating delivery reminders.| - |**Promised Receipt Date**|To specify that the date value in the **Promised Receipt Date** field on the purchase order line will be used as the default date for creating delivery reminders.| - |**Expected Receipt Date**|To specify that the date value in the **Expected Receipt Date** field on the purchase order line will be used as the default date for creating delivery reminders.| - -3. On the **Numbering** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Delivery Reminder Nos.**|The number series code for delivery reminders.| - |**Issued Delivery Reminder Nos.**|The number series code for issued delivery reminders.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/vat-reporting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/vat-reporting.md deleted file mode 100644 index fab063d5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Austria/vat-reporting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT Reporting Method - description: You can report VAT electronically to the tax authorities. You can generate, electronically sign, encrypt, and send an XML file directly to the German ELSTER portal. - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT Reporting Method -You can report VAT electronically to the tax authorities. You can generate, electronically sign, encrypt, and send an XML file directly to the German ELSTER portal. Response messages are received and processed in the same transaction. - -You can print the following local VAT reports. - -|Report|Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|**VAT Statement Germany**|A simple VAT report. The main VAT reporting is handled by the ELSTER functionality. The amounts are differentiated by taxable base and taxable amount.

Serves as the basis for VAT registration for a selected period, and is printed according to the VAT statement in the VAT Statement Line table.

Use this report in conjunction with VAT correction.| -|**VAT Statement AT**|The Austrian VAT statement serves as the basis for VAT registration for a selected period, and is printed according to the VAT statement in the VAT Statement Line table. You can generate the report in three different formats. For more information, see VAT Statement AT.| -|**Sales VAT Adv. Not. Acc. Proof**|Confirms that entries in the VAT statement form are also posted in general ledger accounts.

To verify VAT in sales VAT advance notifications, select the same settings for the VAT statement form and the sales VAT advance notification.| -|**VAT Statement Schedule**|This report can be retrieved from the **VAT Statement** window.

Prints the settings in the VAT statement. Using this report, you can print the characteristics of the **Sales VAT Adv. Not. Acc. Proof**.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How To: Report VAT to the Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) -[How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases](../../finance-work-with-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-banking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-banking.md deleted file mode 100644 index 589db3a8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-banking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Belgian Electronic Banking - description: Electronic banking allows you to electronically exchange data with Belgian financial institutions. Data can be exchanged either on disk, by modem, or via Interbanks Standards Association Belgium (Isabel). This way you can benefit from a faster processing time and avoid errors caused by manual data entry or processing. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Belgian Electronic Banking -Electronic banking allows you to electronically exchange data with Belgian financial institutions. Data can be exchanged either on disk, by modem, or via Interbanks Standards Association Belgium (Isabel). This way you can benefit from a faster processing time and avoid errors caused by manual data entry or processing. - -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use electronic banking to perform the following functions: - -- Send electronic payments -- Process bank statements with CODA -- Process direct debits with domiciliations - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [CODA Bank Statements](coda-bank-statements.md) - [Direct Debit Using Domiciliation](direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index d3c64217..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-electronic-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Belgian Electronic Payments - description: In the electronic banking module in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can make domestic, international, SEPA, and non-Euro SEPA electronic payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Belgian Electronic Payments -In the electronic banking module in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can make domestic, international, SEPA, and non-Euro SEPA electronic payments. - -|Electronic payment|Description| -|------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Domestic|These payments are in the local currency (LCY) and are processed by a local financial institution for beneficiaries who have accounts that have a local financial institution. The validity of the bank account numbers will be verified by [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|International|These payments are either in foreign currencies or in LCY and are processed by a local financial institution for beneficiaries who have accounts that have foreign financial institutions. The validity of the bank account numbers will not be verified by [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|SEPA|These payments are in euro and are processed in countries/regions that accept SEPA payments. The validity of the bank account numbers will be verified by [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|Non-Euro SEPA|These payments are in currency other than euro and made to a country/region outside the European Economic Association (EEA). The validity of the bank account numbers will be verified by [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| - - In electronic banking, because the standard for electronic payments is different for countries/regions, electronic payments created in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] can only be processed by financial institutions in Belgium. For international payments, the local financial institutions will then have to process the payment with the foreign institutions. - -> [!NOTE] -> Credit memos cannot be processed separately because payments must not have a negative balance. To process a credit memo, the credit memo must be added to one or more invoices by summarizing payments. - -Before you can make electronic payments, you must set up use electronic banking in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## Correcting Payment Lines -You must correct all errors before you can post the electronic payment lines. You can correct payment lines in the following ways. - -|Correction|Description| -|----------------|---------------------------------------| -|Add a payment journal line|If the payment journal already contains many lines and you want to add an additional line, you can enter the journal line manually. For example, if you want to reimburse a credit memo to a customer. These types of customer payments are not suggested automatically by the **Suggest Vendor Payments** batch job.| -|Edit a payment journal line|If you have not assigned a bank account to the payment journal or if you have not specified a preferred bank account on the Vendor card, you will have to manually enter this information on each journal line before posting the journal. If you specify a bank account for a vendor, the bank account will be copied to all payment journal lines for that vendor. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md).| -|Delete a payment journal line|The **Suggest Vendor Payments** batch job creates payment suggestions for all vendors matching the specified criteria. If you want to prevent payment for a specific vendor ledger entry or vendor, you can delete the corresponding journal lines.| - -For more information, see [How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines](how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Suggestions](how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines](how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md) - [How to: Print Payment Files](how-to-print-payment-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-intrastat-reporting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-intrastat-reporting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1fc686a1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-intrastat-reporting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Belgian Intrastat Reporting - description: Companies in the European Union (EU) are required to report trade with other countries/regions in the EU. This reporting process is through Intrastat reporting or VIES (VAT Information Exchange System). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Belgian Intrastat Reporting -Companies in the European Union (EU) are required to report trade with other countries/regions in the EU. This reporting process is through Intrastat reporting or VIES (VAT Information Exchange System). There are two types of Intrastat declarations: - -- Simplified declaration -- Extended declaration - -To determine the type of declaration that you should use, visit the [National Bank of Belgium](https://www.nbb.be/) Web site. - -## Submitting the Intrastat Report -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can export the Intrastat declarations to a file that you can then submit to the OneGate portal. For more information, see [How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations](how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Declaration Types](how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md) - [How to: Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers](how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md) - [How to: Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers](how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md) - [How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations](how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md) - [How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report](how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md) -[How to: Set Up Intrastat Reporting](../../finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md) - [How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report](how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 348213ac..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgian-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Belgian VAT - description: Belgian enhancements of the VAT reporting feature enables you to print VAT transaction details. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Belgian VAT -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] ../../includes Belgium enhancements to VAT reporting feature that enables you to print VAT transaction details. You must send the following reports to the Belgian tax authorities: - -- Monthly/Quarterly declaration - This report is used to create monthly or quarterly VAT declarations, depending on your company revenue. - -- VAT annual listing (on paper/disk) - This report is used to annually report all amounts invoiced for both goods and services to all Belgian companies with a registered VAT number. - -- VAT-VIES listing (on paper/disk) - This report is used to report the sales of goods to other countries/regions. - -You are also required to provide a printed statement detailing the VAT transactions to the Belgian tax authorities. For more information, see VAT Statement. - -## Non-Deductible VAT - In Belgium, VAT can be fully or partially deductible. Expenses such as representation cost or purchases of cars are only partially deductible, and the transaction must specify how much of the VAT is non-deductible. For example, you create a general ledger account for fixed assets such as cars, and another account for representation cost. For each account, you specify how much of the reported VAT is non-deductible by setting the Percentage Non deductible VAT field. Then, when you post a transaction, the deductible VAT will post to the corresponding VAT account, and the non-deductible VAT will be added to the base amount and posted to the same account as the tangible or intangible asset. - - For fixed assets, the non-deductible VAT depreciates just like the base acquisition cost of the fixed asset. You must set up separate fixed asset posting groups for each percentage of non-deductible VAT since each fixed asset posting group posts to a general ledger account where the Percentage Non deductible VAT field specifies how much VAT must post to the same account as the fixed asset. - - If you select the Incl. Non Deductible VAT field in a VAT statement line, non-deductible VAT is included in the VAT amount. The **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement** report adds the non-deductible part of that amount to the **Non Ded. VAT Amount** and **Non Ded. Source Curr. VAT Amt.** fields in the resulting VAT entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Print Periodic VAT Reports](how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Non-Deductible VAT](how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgium-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgium-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 97f3155e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/belgium-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Belgium Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Belgian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Belgium Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Belgian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [Belgian Intrastat Reporting](belgian-intrastat-reporting.md) - [Belgian VAT](belgian-vat.md) - [Enterprise Numbers and Branch Numbers](enterprise-numbers-and-branch-numbers.md) - [How to: Set the Work Date as the Posting Date](how-to-set-the-work-date-as-the-posting-date.md) - [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md) - [How to: Export to Accon](how-to-export-to-accon.md) - [How to: Apply and Unapply General Ledger Entries](how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md) - [How to: Limit the Posting Period](how-to-limit-the-posting-period.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/coda-bank-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/coda-bank-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c1d02f3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/coda-bank-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: CODA Bank Statements - description: The Coded Statement of Account (CODA) is a national banking standard, designed by the Belgian Banker's Association, which allows you to automatically process electronic bank statements. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# CODA Bank Statements -The Coded Statement of Account (CODA) is a national banking standard, designed by the Belgian Banker's Association, which allows you to automatically process electronic bank statements. - -Each type of transaction in a CODA statement is assigned a unique code. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] uses this code to interpret transactions and apply them to the corresponding ledger entries. - -## Applying Statement Lines -When you have imported a CODA statement, you can apply the statement lines to existing ledger entries, based on the information in the **Transaction Coding** table. - -If the transaction coding of the statement line is not found, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will stop processing and continue with the next statement line. If you select the **Default Posting** field, the statement line will be used as a default posting. - -If the transaction coding of the statement line is found, the statement lines will be matched to the following account types and corresponding account numbers: - -- General ledger - If the account type is general ledger account, the statement line is posted on the corresponding general ledger account. - -- Customer or vendor - If the account type is customer or vendor, a matching customer or vendor ledger entry is found based on the following criteria: - - - If a ledger entry is found using the standard format, the ledger entry will be matched to the statement line and the application status will be set to **Applied**. If the ledger entry does not use the standard format, the bank account number of the customer or vendor is used to find the customer or vendor. - - - If no ledger entry with a matching remaining amount is found, the customer or vendor account is used and the application status will be set to **Partly Applied**. - - - If the bank account number is used to find the customer or vendor, a matching ledger entry is found based on the amount of the statement line. If the amount is found, the statement line is matched to the corresponding ledger entry and the application status will be set to **Applied**. - - - If the bank account number cannot be used to find the customer or vendor, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will either stop processing the current line or use the line as a default posting, before continuing with the next statement line. - -You can run the process as many times as you like. Only statement lines with a blank application status will be applied. - -When you have applied all statement lines to a general ledger account or to a matching customer ledger entry or vendor ledger entry, you are ready to post the CODA statement lines. For more information, see [How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Apply CODA Statements](how-to-apply-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md) - [How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md deleted file mode 100644 index d1428fc8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Direct Debit Using Domiciliation - description: A domiciliation is a financial agreement between you and your customers, allowing you to automatically collect the payments for customer's invoices through a preferred bank account. Domiciliations can only be processed for domestic customers with domestic bank accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Direct Debit Using Domiciliation -A domiciliation is a financial agreement between you and your customers, allowing you to automatically collect the payments for customer's invoices through a preferred bank account. Domiciliations can only be processed for domestic customers with domestic bank accounts. Domiciliations in foreign currencies or involving foreign banks are not supported. - -Direct debit domiciliation is useful for companies with many customers or subscribers, such as a utility company or a publishing company. - -Before you can start using electronic banking for domiciliations, you must enter certain basic information. - -- Domiciliation number - This is a unique code obtained from the bank which identifies the domiciliation agreement between you, your customer, and the bank. The contract contains details regarding payment frequency, bank account numbers, and amounts. When you send your payments to the bank, the bank will use the domiciliation number to identify all parties involved. - -- Preferred bank account - The preferred bank account will be suggested as a default bank account on all domiciliation suggestions for that customer. If necessary, you can change the bank account before posting the domiciliation suggestions. For more information, see [How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions](how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up Domiciliations](how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions](how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md) - [How to: Test Domiciliations](how-to-test-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines](how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md) - [How to: Export and Post Domiciliations](how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/enterprise-numbers-and-branch-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/enterprise-numbers-and-branch-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index ef4d38ed..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/enterprise-numbers-and-branch-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Enterprise Numbers and Branch Numbers - description: Companies receive a unique enterprise number and one or more branch numbers from the Belgian Crossroad Bank of Enterprises. These numbers are used in all correspondence to simplify communication with the Belgian administrative and legal authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Enterprise Numbers and Branch Numbers -Companies receive a unique enterprise number and one or more branch numbers from the Belgian Crossroad Bank of Enterprises. These numbers are used in all correspondence to simplify communication with the Belgian administrative and legal authorities. - -## Enterprise Numbers - The enterprise number replaces the existing VAT number. For existing companies with a VAT registration number, the enterprise number is set as the VAT registration number preceded by a leading zero. New companies will receive a new enterprise number. - - The enterprise number is printed on the following documents: - -- Outgoing sales and purchase documents -- Financial statements -- Reminders and finance charge memos -- Intrastat forms and files - -The enterprise number is set up in the following locations: - -- Company Information table -- Contact card -- Customer table -- Vendor table - -## Branch Numbers - A branch number is given to a company to identify an address where at least one of the company’s activities is exercised, for example, a workshop, office, warehouse, agency, or subsidiary. Unlike the enterprise number, there is no legal requirement to print the branch number. - - All branches of a company will receive a unique number that is different from the enterprise number. The branch number is transferable to another company, such as after a merger or takeover. - - The branch number is set up in the following locations: - -- Company Information table -- Location table - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 22cfea65..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Activate The SEPA Payments - description: To submit vendor payments electronically in Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) ISO 20022 payment format, you must set up prerequisites to enable SEPA payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Activate The SEPA Payments -To submit vendor payments electronically in Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) ISO 20022 payment format, you must set up prerequisites for enabling SEPA payments. - -In the following procedures describe how to enable SEPA payment and set up vendor bank accounts. - -## To enable countries/regions for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Countries/Regions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit List** action. -3. Select the **SEPA Allowed** check box for each country or region that you want to enable for SEPA. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To enable bank accounts for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account that you want to enable for SEPA, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Country/Region Code** field, select the appropriate code. - - > [!NOTE] - > The specified country/region code must be enabled for SEPA as described in the previous procedure. - -4. Enter a value in the **Min. Balance** field. -5. On the **Transfer** FastTab, in the **SWIFT Code** field, enter a code. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up vendor bank accounts for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant vendor, and then choose the **Bank Accounts** action. -3. Select the vendor bank account to set up for SEPA, and then choose the **Edit**. -4. On the **Transfer** FastTab, in the **IBAN** and **SWIFT Code** fields, enter the international bank identifier code of the bank where the vendor has the account. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[SEPA Payments](sepa-payments.md) - [How to: File SEPA Payments](how-to-file-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: File Non-Euro SEPA Payments](how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Export Protocols](how-to-set-up-export-protocols.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 562b73f3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Apply and Unapply The General Ledger Entries - description: Applying temporary general ledger entries allows companies to work with temporary and transfer accounts in the general ledger. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Apply and Unapply The General Ledger Entries -Applying temporary general ledger entries allows companies to work with temporary and transfer accounts in the general ledger. Temporary and transfer accounts are used to store temporary ledger entries that are waiting for further processing into the general ledger. - - You can use temporary accounts for: - -- Money transfers from one bank account to another. -- Financial transaction transfers from one system to another in which part of the information temporarily resides on the original system. -- Transactions for which you have issued a sales invoice to a customer but have not yet received the corresponding purchase invoice from the vendor. - - When the ledger entries have been processed, you can use the apply entries function to update the posted ledger entries and the posting account type. - - You can unapply the applied general ledger entries and then open the closed entries to make changes. - -## To apply general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. In the **General Ledger Entries** window, choose the **Apply Entries** action. - - All open ledger entries for the general ledger account are displayed in the **Apply General Ledger Entries** window. - - > [!NOTE] - > By default, the **Include Entries** field is set to **Open**. You can change the value of the **Include Entries** field to **All** or **Closed**. You can only apply general ledger entries that are **Open**. - -4. Select the relevant general ledger entry, and then, on the **Navigate** tab, in the **Application** group, choose **Set Applies-to ID**. - - The **Applies-to ID** field is updated with the user ID. The remaining amount is displayed in the **Balance** field in the **Apply General Ledger Entries** window. - -5. Choose the **Post Application**. - - You can post the application even if the balance amount is equal to 0. When posted, the **Remaining Amount** field is affected as follows: - - - If the **Balance** is equal to 0, then the **Remaining Amount** field on all ledger entries is set to 0. - - - If the **Balance** is not equal to 0, then the amount in the **Balance** field is transferred to the **Remaining Amount** field for the general ledger entry that was selected when you posted the application. - - - For all other general ledger entries, the **Remaining Amount** field is set to 0 and the **Open**, **Closed by Entry No.**, **Closed by Amount**, and **Closed at Date** fields are updated. - - > [!NOTE] - > When posted, the general ledger entries which update the **Applies-to ID** field are deleted. - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To view the applied general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. Select the relevant general ledger entry, and then choose the **Applied Entries** action. - - You can view all the applied general ledger entries. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To unapply general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. Select the general ledger entry that you want to unapply, and then choose the **Undo Application** action. - - The applied general ledger entries are unapplied. - - > [!NOTE] - > If an entry is applied to more than one application entry, you must unapply the latest application entry first. By default, the latest entry is displayed. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-coda-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-coda-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index c37b7b34..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-apply-coda-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Apply CODA Statements - description: After a CODA statement has been imported, the statement lines can be accessed from the **Bank Account Card** window. The application status on each line will be blank because the statement amounts have not been applied to outstanding ledger entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Apply CODA Statements -After a CODA statement has been imported, the statement lines can be accessed from the **Bank Account Card** window. The application status on each line will be blank because the statement amounts have not been applied to outstanding ledger entries. - -Statement amounts can be applied to outstanding ledger entries by: - -- Manually applying CODA statement lines. -- Automatically applying CODA statement amounts to the appropriate ledger entries and accounts. Automatic processing of CODA statement lines is recommended. - -## To manually apply the CODA statement lines - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account, and then choose the **CODA Statements** action. -3. Select the CODA statement, and then choose the **Edit** action. -4. In the **CODA Statement Lines** FastTab, for each statement line, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Account No.**|Enter the number of the general ledger account, bank, customer, vendor, or fixed asset, which the bank account statement line is linked to.| - |**Description**|[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] automatically retrieves the description from the imported CODA file, but you can modify the contents of this field.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To automatically apply the CODA statement lines - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account, and then choose the **CODA Statements** action. -3. Select the CODA statement, and then choose the **Edit** action. -4. Choose the **Process CODA Statement Lines** action. -5. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Default Posting**|Select if you want the batch job to post statement amounts that cannot be linked to existing ledger entries. For more information, see Transaction Coding.| - |**Print List**|Select to print a list of statement amounts that cannot be linked automatically.| - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - - When you start the batch job, statement amounts will be applied to existing ledger entries based on the transaction codes. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[CODA Bank Statements](coda-bank-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md) - [How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-archive-ibs-log-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-archive-ibs-log-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index c0b30dc1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-archive-ibs-log-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Archive IBS Log Entries - description: IBS log lines that have a process status of **Processed** can be archived. IBS logs contain information about electronic banking files that are created during Isabel electronic bank transfers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Archive IBS Log Entries -IBS log lines that have a process status of **Processed** can be archived. IBS logs contain information about electronic banking files that are created during Isabel electronic bank transfers. - -Isabel is a third-party software program that is frequently used in Belgium to manage and transfer electronic banking files. Isabel currently supports bank transactions, such as SEPA credit transfers, automated bank orders, and CODA files. - -## To archive an IBS log entry - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IBS Logs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line that you want to archive, and then choose the **Archive** action. -3. A message appears asking if you want to archive the IBS log records. -4. Choose the **Yes** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Process Status** field for the line will now be **Archived**. You can delete a record with a status of **Archived**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1b50cf1f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements - description: After you have applied and processed all CODA statement lines, you can transfer the CODA statement lines to a financial journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements -After you have applied and processed all CODA statement lines, you can transfer the CODA statement lines to a financial journal. - -After transferring the statement lines, you can post the lines in a corresponding general journal. If no such general journal exists, you cannot transfer the lines. You can create a journal to handle CODA statements. For more information, see [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md). - -Alternatively, you can manually transfer and post CODA statements. For information, see [How to: Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md). - -## To automatically transfer statement lines - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account, and then choose **CODA Statements** action. -3. Select the CODA statement, and then choose the **Edit** action. -4. Choose the **Transfer to General Ledger** action. -5. Choose the **Yes** button. - -The batch job will now transfer the CODA statement lines to the financial journal. - -After transferring the statement lines to the journal, you can post the statement lines in the corresponding financial journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[CODA Bank Statements](coda-bank-statements.md) - [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Apply CODA Statements](how-to-apply-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md) - [How to: Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-financial-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-financial-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0e52a0ea..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-financial-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Financial Journals - description: Financial journals are used to register bank account transactions. The financial journal lets you enter a starting balance and an ending balance and automatically calculate the difference so that you can verify that all of the transactions have been registered. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Financial Journals -Financial journals are used to register bank account transactions. The financial journal lets you enter a starting balance and an ending balance and automatically calculate the difference so that you can verify that all of the transactions have been registered. - -## To create a financial journal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Type**|Select **Financial** for the type of journal.| - |**Bal. Account Type**|Select **Bank Account** for the type of balancing account.| - |**Bal. Account No.**|Select the number of the balancing account.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md deleted file mode 100644 index 36b483a6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], payment suggestions are generated and posted in payment journals. The structure of the payment journal is similar to the structure of other journal types. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], payment suggestions are generated and posted in payment journals. The structure of the payment journal is similar to the structure of other journal types. However, the payment journal contains some fields that are specific for processing payments. Before you can start generating payment suggestions, you have to set up a payment journal template and a payment journal batch. - -If you assign a bank account to the payment journal template, the bank account will be inserted on all payment journal batches and payment journal lines that are created by using this template. By specifying a bank account for the journal template, you can reduce the time that is required for checking the payment suggestions. - -## To create a payment journal template - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **EB Payment Journal Templates** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|Enter the unique name for the payment journal template that you are creating.| - |**Description**|Enter a description of the payment journal template.| - |**Bank Account**|Select the bank account that will be used when you create a payment suggestion.| - |**Reason Code**|Select the reason code that will be used on all the journal batches and lines that are created by using the journal template. If you want to use a different reason code on a journal line, you can manually change it.| - |**Source Code**|Select the source code that will be used on all the journal batches and lines that are created by using the journal template.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To add payment journal batches to the journal template - -1. In the **Payment Journal Templates** window, choose the **Batches** action. -2. In the **Paym. Journal Batch** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Journal Template Name**|Specify a journal template name for the payment journal batch.| - |**Name**|Enter a unique name for the journal batch.

**NOTE:** To have the journal name update numerically, include a number in the journal batch name. For example, the name KBC1 will increment by one number with every posting to KBC2, KBC3, and so on.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the journal batch.| - |**Reason Code**|Specifies the reason code that is linked to this journal batch.| - |**Status**|Specifies the status of the batch.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-download-coda-files-from-an-isabel-server.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-download-coda-files-from-an-isabel-server.md deleted file mode 100644 index e4b176c6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-download-coda-files-from-an-isabel-server.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Download CODA Files from an Isabel Server - description: CODA files can be downloaded manually or in attended mode. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Download CODA Files from an Isabel Server -CODA files can be downloaded manually or in attended mode. - -To manually download CODA files, log on to the Isabel server and select the files that you want to download. The downloaded files can then be imported from the **Bank Account** table. For more information, see [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md). - -## To download CODA files in attended mode - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IBS Logs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Download** action. -3. In the **IBS Download Request Options** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Date**|Specify the start date of the download.| - |**To Date**|Specify the end date of the download.| - |**File Format**|Select **Coda** as the file format.| - |**File Status**|Select the file status of the download. File statuses include **Not Downloaded**, **Downloaded**, and **All**. Typically you will select **Not Downloaded**, because you are downloading the CODA files that have not been downloaded to your system.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot delete any files from the Isabel server by using the **IBS Download Request Options** window. You must manually delete the files by logging on to the Isabel server. - - After the CODA files have been downloaded, the **Process Status** field will display **Created** in the **IBS Logs** window. You can log on to the Isabel server to manually retrieve the files. For more information, see [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index 498f4c5a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines - description: After you have generated domiciliation suggestions, you may want to change the domiciliations lines. For example, you may want to reassign a bank account or prevent payment for a specific customer or customer ledger entry. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines -After you have generated domiciliation suggestions, you may want to change the domiciliations lines. For example, you may want to reassign a bank account or prevent payment for a specific customer or customer ledger entry. - -After you have modified the journal lines, print the **Domiciliation Journal - Test** report to test all journal lines. - -The **Suggest Domiciliations** batch job creates domiciliation suggestions for all customers matching the specified criteria. - -## To edit a journal line - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Domiciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch. -3. Select the journal line, and edit the fields. - -## To delete a journal line - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Domiciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch. -3. Select the journal line, and then choose the **Delete** action. -4. Choose the **Yes** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Direct Debit Using Domiciliation](direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md) - [How to: Set Up Domiciliations](how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions](how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md) - [How to: Test Domiciliations](how-to-test-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Export and Post Domiciliations](how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-document-amounts-in-purchase-invoices-and-credit-memos.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-document-amounts-in-purchase-invoices-and-credit-memos.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8b60755d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-edit-document-amounts-in-purchase-invoices-and-credit-memos.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Edit Document Amounts in Purchase Invoices and Credit Memos - description: You can easily edit document amounts in purchase invoices and credit memos. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Edit Document Amounts in Purchase Invoices and Credit Memos -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] lets you easily edit document amounts in purchase invoices and credit memos. - -## To edit document amounts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoice** or **Purchase Credit Memo**, and then choose the related link. -2. Edit the document amount in the **Doc. Amount Incl. VAT** field and the **Doc. Amount VAT** field. -3. The value entered in the **Doc. Amount Incl. VAT** field is divided on the invoice lines according to how it was defined in the standard vendor purchase code scheme in the **Standard Purchase Code** table. Accept the proposal and post the invoice or credit memo. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](../../sales-how-work-standard-lines.md) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 72e42795..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export and Post Domiciliations - description: You can submit domiciliations to your bank by exporting the data to a file. When you export to a file, you can choose to automatically post the lines to the general ledger. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export and Post Domiciliations -You can submit domiciliations to your bank by exporting the data to a file. When you export to a file, you can choose to automatically post the lines to the general ledger. - -Depending on setup of the **SEPA Direct Debit Exp. Format** field in the **Bank Account Card** window, the **File Domiciliations** action opens either of these request pages: - -- **Create Gen. Jnl. Lines** window – for the SEPA Direct Debit format. -- **File Domiciliations** window – for domestic formats. - -## To export and post domiciliations in SEPA format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Domiciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch, and then choose the **File Domiciliations** action. -3. In the **Create Gen. Jnl. Lines** window, select the **Options** FastTab, and then fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Journal Template Name**|Select the general journal template that the domiciliations will be posted from.| - |**Journal Batch**|Select the general journal batch that the journal lines will be transferred from.| - |**Post General Journal Lines**|Select to post to the general ledger.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button to export the file. -5. Choose an appropriate location from where you upload the file to your bank, and then choose **Save**. -6. Choose the **Yes** button to automatically post the domiciliation journal lines. - - If you did not select the **Post General Journal Lines** check box, you will have to post the domiciliations manually in the general journal. - - > [!NOTE] - > After you have posted domiciliations in the general journal, delete the posted domiciliations in the **Domiciliation Journal** window. To do this, select all lines with status **Posted**, and then choose the **Delete** button. - -## To export and post domiciliations in Isabel format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Domiciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch, and then choose the **File Domiciliations** action. -3. In the **File Domiciliations** window, select the **Options** FastTab, and then fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Journal Template Name**|Select the general journal template that the domiciliations will be posted from.| - |**Journal Batch**|Select the general journal batch that the journal lines will be transferred from.| - |**Post General Journal Lines**|Select to post to the general ledger.| - |**Pivot Date**|Enter a pivot date if you want a date that differs from the posting date on the domiciliation lines. The date entered will overwrite the posting date on the selected journal lines.| - |**Inscription No.**|Enter the inscription number that is on the intra-community declaration disk. The number is included in the file and on the accompanying note.| - |**File Name**|Enter the name of the export file that you are creating.| - -4. Choose the **Print** button to export the domiciliations and print the accompanying note, or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. If you do not want to export the file now, choose the **Cancel** button. -5. Choose the **OK** button to send the report to the printer. -6. Choose the **Yes** button to automatically post the domiciliation journal lines. - - If you did not select the **Post General Journal Lines** check box, you will have to post the domiciliations manually in the general journal. - - > [!NOTE] - > After you have posted domiciliations in the general journal, delete the posted domiciliations in the **Domiciliation Journal** window. To do this, select all lines with status **Posted**, and then choose the **Delete** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Direct Debit Using Domiciliation](direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md) - [How to: Set Up Domiciliations](how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions](how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md) - [How to: Test Domiciliations](how-to-test-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines](how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9d2f5ac7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations - description: In Belgium, you must have a third-party declarant fill out the Intrastat declaration. The third-party declarant must be an external person or company. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations -In Belgium, you must have a third-party declarant fill out the Intrastat declaration. The third-party declarant must be an external person or company. - -## To export the third-party declaration - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Make Diskette** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Nihil declaration**|Select if you do not have any trade transactions with European Union (EU) countries/regions and want to send an empty declaration.| - |**Enterprise No./VAT Reg. No.**|Enter the enterprise or VAT registration number.| - |**Directory**|Enter the directory which the file will be saved to.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The file will be created in the directory that you indicated. Next, the declaration must be submitted to the OneGate portal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Intrastat Reporting](belgian-intrastat-reporting.md) - [How to: Set Up Declaration Types](how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md) - [How to: Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers](how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md) - [How to: Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers](how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md) - [How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report](how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-to-accon.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-to-accon.md deleted file mode 100644 index df178ab7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-export-to-accon.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export to Accon - description: The **Link to Accon** report enables you to create a file that can be imported into ACCON Plus to generate an annual income statement. The report exports the total balances of the general ledger accounts for a specific period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export to Accon -The **Link to Accon** report enables you to create a file that can be imported into ACCON Plus to generate an annual income statement. The report exports the total balances of the general ledger accounts for a specific period. - -## To export the Link to Accon report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Link to Accon**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Reporting Currency**|Select to print the amounts in the additional reporting currency.

If the check box is cleared, the amounts will be printed in local currency.| - |**f_1_3 File Name**|Enter the full path of the file.| - -3. On the **G/L Account** FastTab, enter the filter information. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index bbb4704b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to File Non-Euro SEPA Payments - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can file non-euro SEPA payments with the bank. This is useful when you make payments to other countries/regions that do not use SEPA and for currencies other than the euro. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: File Non-Euro SEPA Payments -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can file non-euro SEPA payments with the bank. This is useful when you make payments to other countries that do not use SEPA and for currencies other than the euro. - -Before you can file a non-euro SEPA payment you must complete the following administration tasks: - -- Set up a new export protocol for a non-euro SEPA. For more information, see Export Protocol. -- In the **Country/Region** table, clear the **SEPA Allowed** field for each country that belongs to the EEA zone. -- Verify that the **Currency Euro** field in the **General Ledger Setup** table is not in euro currency. -- Verify that the vendor’s **Preferred Bank Account** field in the **Vendor** table contains the IBAN and SWIFT code. - -## To file a non-euro SEPA payment - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **File Non Euro SEPA Payments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Journal Template Name**|Specify the general journal template for the non-euro SEPA payment report.| - |**Journal Batch**|Specify the general journal batch for the non-euro SEPA payment report.| - |**Post General Journal Lines**|Specify if you want to transfer the payment lines to the general ledger.| - |**Include Dimensions**|Enter the dimensions that you want to include in the non-euro SEPA payment report. The option is only available if the **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** field in the **Electronic Banking Setup** window is selected.| - |**Execution Date**|Enter an execution date if you want an execution date that differs from the posting date on the payment lines.| - |**File Name**|Enter the name of the file, including the drive and folder, to which you want to print the report.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: File SEPA Payments](how-to-file-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: Activate SEPA Payments](how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md) - [SEPA Payments](sepa-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-sepa-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-sepa-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index ae9c9b5d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-file-sepa-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to File SEPA Payments - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) credit transfers to file SEPA payments with the bank. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: File SEPA Payments -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) credit transfers to file SEPA payments with the bank. - -SEPA unifies payment methods in participating European countries/regions, which makes international payments as easy to process as domestic payments. European citizens and companies can make and receive payments in euros, whether within or across national/regional borders, with the same basic conditions, rights, and obligations, regardless of location. - -Before you can file a SEPA payment you must complete the following administration tasks: - -- Set up a new export protocol. For more information, see Export Protocol. -- In the **Country/Region** table, select the **SEPA Allowed** field for each country that belongs to the EEA zone. -- Verify that the **Currency Euro** field in the **General Ledger Setup** table corresponds with the currency in the payment lines. -- Verify that the vendor’s **Preferred Bank Account** field in the **Vendor** table contains the IBAN and SWIFT code. - -## To file a SEPA payment - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **File SEPA Payments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Journal Template Name**|Specify the general journal template for the SEPA payment report.| - |**Journal Batch**|Specify the general journal batch for the SEPA payment report.| - |**Post General Journal Lines**|Specify if you want to transfer the payment lines to the general ledger.| - |**Include Dimensions**|Enter the dimensions that you want to include in the SEPA payment report. The option is only available if the **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** field in the **Electronic Banking Setup** window is selected.| - |**Execution Date**|Enter an execution date if you want an execution date that differs from the posting date on the payment lines.| - |**File Name**|Enter the name of the file, including the drive and folder, to which you want to print the report.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Export Protocols](how-to-set-up-export-protocols.md) - [How to: File Non-Euro SEPA Payments](how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: Activate SEPA Payments](how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 616274ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Generate Domiciliation Suggestions - description: After you have set up domiciliations, you can start generating domiciliation suggestions. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can only create domiciliation suggestions for domestic customers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions -After you have set up domiciliations, you can start generating domiciliation suggestions. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can only create domiciliation suggestions for domestic customers. - -## To generate domiciliation suggestions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Domiciliation Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch, and then choose the **Suggest Domiciliations** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as displayed in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Due Date**|Enter the due date to be included in the batch job. Only entries that have a due date before or on this date will be included.| - |**Take Payment Discounts**|Select if you want the batch job to include customer ledger entries for which you can receive a payment discount.| - |**Payment Discount Date**|Enter the date that will be used to calculate the payment discount.| - |**Select Possible Refunds**|Select if you want the batch job to include refunds.| - |**Posting Date**|Enter the date that will appear as the posting date on the lines that the batch job inserts in the domiciliation journal.| - -4. On the **Customer** FastTab, enter any additional filter criteria. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -When the batch job is finished, the domiciliation journal contains all open customer ledger entries that match the filters. - -> [!NOTE] -> The domiciliation suggestions will only include customers who have a Domiciliation number set up. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Domiciliations](how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [Direct Debit Using Domiciliation](direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md) - [How to: Set Up Domiciliations](how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Test Domiciliations](how-to-test-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines](how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md) - [How to: Export and Post Domiciliations](how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6505ad27..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Generate Payment Suggestions - description: After you have set up electronic banking, you can start generating payment suggestions. You can do this in the payment journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Generate Payment Suggestions -After you have set up electronic banking, you can start generating payment suggestions. You can do this in the payment journal. - -## To generate payment suggestions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the appropriate journal batch, and then choose the **Suggest Vendor Payments** action. -3. In the **Suggest Vendor Payments EB** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Last Due Date**|Enter the last due date that can appear on the vendor ledger entries to be included in the batch job.| - |**Take Credit Memos**|Select to include outstanding credit memos for vendors. The credit memos will be subtracted from the amount due. When selecting credit memos, the due date is not used.| - |**Take Payment Discounts**|Select to include vendor ledger entries for which you can receive a payment discount.| - |**Payment Discount Date**|Enter the date that will be used to calculate a payment discount.| - |**Available Amount**|If there is a maximum amount available for payments, you can enter it here. The batch job will then create a payment suggestion based on this amount and the priority of vendors.| - |**Posting Date**|Enter the date that will appear as the posting date on the lines that the batch job inserts in the payment journal.| - -4. On the **Vendor** FastTab, enter the filter criteria. -5. Choose the **OK** button to start the batch job. - -When the batch job is finished, the payment journal contains all vendor ledger entries that match the filters. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines](how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md) - [How to: Print Payment Files](how-to-print-payment-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-import-coda-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-import-coda-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1cf82ca4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-import-coda-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import CODA Statements - description: When you receive a CODA statement from your bank, you must import it into [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import CODA Statements -When you receive a CODA statement from your bank, you must import it into [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md). - -## To import a CODA statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account, and then choose **Import CODA File** action. -3. Enter the name of the file to import and then choose the **OK** button. - -This imports the CODA statement. Next, you must process the CODA statement lines. For more information, see [How to: Apply CODA Statements](how-to-apply-coda-statements.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[CODA Bank Statements](coda-bank-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Apply CODA Statements](how-to-apply-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md) - [How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-limit-the-posting-period.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-limit-the-posting-period.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7f60394a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-limit-the-posting-period.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Limit the Posting Period - description: You can limit the period by which posting is permitted on three different levels, **by company**, **by user**, and **by template**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Limit the Posting Period -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can limit the period by which posting is permitted on three different levels: **by company**, **by user**, and **by template**. - -Limiting posting periods can be useful when a company closes its sales journal at the end of each month. This keeps salespeople from registering sales documents from the previous month. At the same time, the purchase journal may stay open to register incoming purchase invoices from the previous month. - -When you post in the **General Journal Templates** window, the contents of the **Allow Posting From** field and **Allow Posting To** field are checked for a date interval. The date interval indicates when you can post to a journal template. If the field is blank, the **User Setup** window is checked for a date interval for the current user. If the **User Setup** window does not contain an interval, the **Allow Posting From** field and the **Allow Posting To** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window is checked for a date interval at the company level. - -## To limit the posting periods by company - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. To specify the start of the period, choose the **Allow Posting From** field, and then enter the earliest date on which posting to the company is enabled. -3. To specify the end of the period, choose the **Allow Posting To** field, and then enter the last date on which posting to the company is enabled. - -## To limit the posting periods by user - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. To specify the start of the period, choose the **Allow Posting From** field, and then enter the earliest date on which the user can post to the company. -3. To specify the end of the period, choose the **Allow Posting To** field, and then enter the last date the user will be able to post to the company. - -## To limit the posting periods by template - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. To specify the start of the period, choose the **Allow Posting From** field, and then enter the earliest date on which the user can post to the company. -3. To specify the end of the period, choose the **Allow Posting To** field, and then enter the last date the user will be able to post to the company. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Specify Posting Periods](../../finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-make-manual-corrections-to-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-make-manual-corrections-to-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6b94a4fd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-make-manual-corrections-to-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Make Manual Corrections to VAT - description: You can make corrections to posted VAT entries without posting the correction into the VAT or general ledger entries. This is useful if you need to make a change to the total sales or purchases VAT amounts without changing the VAT base. For example, you can manually correct VAT if you receive an invoice from a vendor who has calculated VAT incorrectly. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Make Manual Corrections to VAT -You can make corrections to posted VAT entries without posting the correction into the VAT or general ledger entries. This is useful if you need to make a change to the total sales or purchases VAT amounts without changing the VAT base. For example, you can manually correct VAT if you receive an invoice from a vendor who has calculated VAT incorrectly. - -## To make manual corrections to VAT - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statement Preview**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line that needs to be corrected. You can make the VAT correction on both the **Row Totaling** and **VAT Entry Totaling** row **Type**. -3. To make the correction, choose the **Correction Amount** field. The **Manual VAT Correction List** window opens. -4. Choose the **Edit List** action. In the **Manual VAT Correction List** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Posting Date**|Enter the posting date of the VAT correction.| - |**Amount**|Enter the amount of the VAT correction. You must enter the correction amount, not the new amount. For example, if the amount is 1000.00 and should be 1200.00, enter 200.00.| - |**Additional-Currency Amount**|This field displays the amount of the VAT correction in the additional reporting currency.

The field is automatically calculated, based on the contents of the **Amount** field and the current exchange rate.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. -6. Refresh the **VAT Statement Preview** window to see your corrections. -7. To view a report related to the preview of the VAT information, choose one of the following actions: - - |Action|Description| - |------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Detailed Report**|Opens the **VAT Statement** report. For more information, see VAT Statement.| - |**Form/Intervat Declaration**|Opens the **VAT –Form** report. For more information, see VAT - Form.

The **Form/Intervat Declaration** report is based on the VAT Statement template that is defined in the general ledger setup. Therefore, it may export data that is not the same as what is shown in the **VAT Statement Preview** window.| - |**Declaration Summary Report**|Opens the **VAT Statement Summary** report. For more information, see VAT Statement Summary.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian VAT](belgian-vat.md) - [How to: Print Periodic VAT Reports](how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Non-Deductible VAT](how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8738c88d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Manage Electronic Payment Lines - description: You can have [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] suggest payments automatically and then you can add more payments manually. You can also edit or delete suggested payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines -You can have [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] suggest payments automatically and then you can add more payments manually. You can also edit or delete suggested payments. You must correct all errors before you can post the electronic payment lines. The following procedure describes how to manually add or edit payment journal lines, but you can also delete payment journal lines in the **Payment Journal** window. - -## To manage a payment journal line - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch. -3. Select a journal line and enter the information as needed. - - - or - - - To delete the selected line, choose the **Delete** action. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Suggestions](how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 293b304a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-manually-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements - description: After you have applied and processed all CODA statement lines, you can manually transfer the CODA statement lines to a financial journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manually Transfer and Post CODA Statements -After you have applied and processed all CODA statement lines, you can manually transfer the CODA statement lines to a financial journal. The financial journal lets you enter a starting balance and an ending balance and automatically calculate the difference between the two balances. Posting is not allowed if the statement line amounts do not balance with the statement ending balance. - -For information about how to automatically transfer statements, see [How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md). - -## To manually transfer and post statement lines - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the journal, and then choose the **OK** button. -3. Enter the **Statement Ending Balance** field. -4. Manually enter each line of the statement. -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [CODA Bank Statements](coda-bank-statements.md) - [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Apply CODA Statements](how-to-apply-coda-statements.md) - [How to: Create Financial Journals](how-to-create-financial-journals.md) - [How to: Automatically Transfer and Post CODA Statements](how-to-automatically-transfer-and-post-coda-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-payment-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-payment-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c418bb6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-payment-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Payment Files - description: After you have printed a test report and corrected all errors, you can print the payment journal lines to a payment file. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Payment Files -After you have printed a test report and corrected all errors, you can print the payment journal lines to a payment file. - -A payment file contains either domestic, international, SEPA, or non-euro SEPA payments. The file can be sent to a bank either on disk, by modem, or via Interbanks Standards Association Belgium (Isabel). You can only create one file for each posting date and each currency code. When you export the payments to a file, an accompanying note is printed, which can also be sent to the bank. - -In the payment journal, the **Status** field on the exported lines will be set to **Posted**. - -## To print a payment file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Batch Name**|Specify the batch name of the payment journal.| - |**Bank Account**|Specify the bank account of the payment journal.| - |**Export Protocol**|Specify the export protocol code of the payment journal line. Export protocols control which payment file will be generated in the payment journal.

You can have a mixture of export formats in a single batch, such as domestic, international, SEPA, or a combination of these. However, when exporting the payment lines to a file, you can only use one export format, or export protocol. **Note:** By defining the export protocol, you also define the type of validation that will be performed in the payment journal.| - -3. Choose the **Check Payment Lines** action. - - The **Export Check Error Logs** window displays any errors that may exist. If there are errors, you must fix the errors before you can continue. - -4. If there are no errors, choose the **Export Payment Lines** action. - - The report that you specified in the **Test Report ID** field in the **EB Payment Journal Templates** will open. - -5. Choose the **Print** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Suggestions](how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines](how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 90a4f29f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Periodic VAT Reports - description: The VAT reporting feature enables you to print VAT transaction details. You must send the following VAT reports to the Belgian tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Periodic VAT Reports -The VAT reporting feature enables you to print VAT transaction details. You must send the following VAT reports to the Belgian tax authorities: - -- Monthly/Quarterly declaration -- VAT annual listing (on paper/disk) -- VAT-VIES listing (on paper/disk) - -## To print the monthly/quarterly declaration - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Form/Intervat Declaration**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT – Form** window, fill in the fields. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Wrong Enterprise No.**|Specifies if you want to print the report that has erroneous enterprise numbers.| - |**VAT Annual Listing**|Specifies if you want to print the **VAT Annual Listing** report.| - |**Year**|Enter the year of the period for which you want to print the report. You should enter the year as a 4 digit code. For example, to print a declaration for 2013, you should enter "2013" (instead of "13").| - |**Minimum Amount**|Enter the customer's minimum year balance to be included in the report. If the yearly balance of the customer is less than the minimum amount, the customer will not be included in the declaration.| - |**Include Customers From**|Select to include customers from all countries/regions or from a specific country/region in the report.| - |**Country/Region**|Select the country/region to include in the report.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## To print the VAT annual listing on disk - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Annual Listing – Disk**, and then enter the related link. -2. In the **VAT Annual Listing – Disk** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Year**|Enter the year of the VAT declaration. You should enter the year as a four digit code. For example, to print a declaration for 2013, you should enter "2013" (instead of "13").| - |**Minimum**|Enter the customer's minimum year balance to be included in the report.

If the yearly balance of the customer is less than the minimum amount, the customer will not be included in the declaration.| - |**Test Declaration**|Specifies if you want to create a test declaration.

If selected, an attribute test is written to the file that uses value 1, which indicates that this is a test file. If you want to test the XML file before sending it, you can upload this file to the Intervat site. The file is then validated without being stored on the server and you receive a notification if the file is valid. Also the unique sequence number in the XML file is not increased when a test declaration is created, which means that you can create as many internal test declarations as you want.| - |**Add Representative**|Specifies if you want to include the VAT declaration representative.

A representative is a person or an agency that has license to make a VAT declaration for your company.| - |**ID**|Enter the ID of the representative who is responsible for making the VAT declaration.| - |**File Name**|Enter the path and name of the file to which you want to create the declaration.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## To print the VAT-VIES declaration report to disk - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter the **VAT – Vies Declaration Disk**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the required information, and choose the **OK** button to start the batch job, which will create an xml file. For more information, see VAT- VIES Declaration Disk. -3. If you have to make a correction, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT – VIES Correction**, and then choose the related link. -4. Choose the **Edit List** action, and then enter the information that has to be adjusted. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian VAT](belgian-vat.md) - [How to: Set Up Non-Deductible VAT](how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7d741d70..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Intrastat Form Report - description: The **Intrastat - Form** report must be used for reporting to Intrastat. In Belgium, you must report the movement of goods to the statistics authorities every month, and the report must be sent to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report -The **Intrastat - Form** report must be used for reporting to Intrastat. In Belgium, you must report the movement of goods to the statistics authorities every month, and the report must be sent to the tax authorities. - -Before you print the **Intrastat - Form** report, you can also print the **Intrastat Checklist** report to verify the contents of the report. - -## To print the Intrastat form report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat – Form**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|Enter the company name.| - |**Address**|Enter the address.| - |**Post Code + City**|Enter the postal code and the city.| - |**Contact**|Enter the name of the contact person.| - |**Telephone**|Enter the telephone number of the contact person.| - |**Telefax**|Enter the telefax number.| - |**International VAT number**|Enter the international VAT registration number.| - |**Nihil declaration**|Select if you do not have any trade transactions with EU countries/regions and want to send an empty declaration. When selected, the message "NIHIL" displays in the **Message** field.| - |**Message**|Enter a message to be printed on the Intrastat declaration, such as "regular declaration" or "replacement declaration".| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Intrastat Reporting](belgian-intrastat-reporting.md) - [How to: Set Up Declaration Types](how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md) - [How to: Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers](how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md) - [How to: Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers](how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md) - [How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations](how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-the-work-date-as-the-posting-date.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-the-work-date-as-the-posting-date.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0585706..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-the-work-date-as-the-posting-date.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set the Work Date as the Posting Date - description: You can set up the general ledger to use the work date as the posting date for customer or vendor open entries on an invoice, payment, or credit memo. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set the Work Date as the Posting Date -You can set up the general ledger to use the work date as the posting date for customer or vendor open entries on an invoice, payment, or credit memo. - -## To set the work date as the posting date - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Application** FastTab, select the **Use Workdate for Appl./Unappl.** field. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgium Local Functionality](belgium-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Apply and Unapply General Ledger Entries](how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md deleted file mode 100644 index 02cbde7d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA - description: Before you can start to use the electronic banking functionality for CODA statements, you must set up certain codes. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA -Before you can start to use the electronic banking functionality for CODA statements, you must set up the following codes: - -- Protocol number -- Version code -- IBLC/BLWI codes - For more information, see [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md). - -## To set up protocol numbers and version codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Posting** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Protocol No.**|Enter the protocol number that is used by the CODA system to import coded bank account statements.| - |**Version Code**|Enter the version code used by the CODA system to import coded bank account statements.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[CODA Bank Statements](coda-bank-statements.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Import CODA Statements](how-to-import-coda-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 01dd8253..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers - description: The Belgian customs and tax authorities have established an 8-digit item code for various tariff items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers -The Belgian customs and tax authorities have established an 8-digit item code for various tariff items. - -### To set up tariff numbers - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tariff Numbers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Tariff Numbers** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Conversion Factor**|Enter the conversion factor for the tariff number. The conversion factor is the factor by which you have to multiply the item unit to obtain the unit imposed by Intrastat. The conversion factor can be used when the item unit differs from the imposed Intrastat unit. The field is available when **Supplementary Units** is selected.| - |**Unit of Measure**|Enter the unit of measure for the tariff number. The field is available when **Supplementary Units** is selected.| - |**Weight Mandatory**|Select this field to show the weight of the items.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Intrastat Reporting](belgian-intrastat-reporting.md) - [How to: Set Up Declaration Types](how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md) - [How to: Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers](how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md) - [How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations](how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md) - [How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report](how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5876d913..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Declaration Types - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], there are two types of declaration. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Declaration Types -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], there are two types of declaration: - -- Simplified declaration -- Extended declaration - -The type of declaration depends on the amount of shipped or received goods. To determine the type of declaration that you should use, see the [National Bank of Belgium](https://www.nbb.be/) web site. - -When using the extended declaration, you will also need to set up an Incoterm in Intrastat Declaration for each shipping method. - -## To set up declaration types - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select the **Simplified Intrastat Decl.** check box to set up a simplified declaration type. Clear this field to use extended declaration. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Intrastat Reporting](belgian-intrastat-reporting.md) - [How to: Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers](how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md) - [How to: Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers](how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md) - [How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations](how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md) - [How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report](how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5e81f745..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Domiciliations - description: Before you can use electronic banking for domiciliations, you must enter the customer's domiciliation number and preferred bank account. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Domiciliations -Before you can use electronic banking for domiciliations, you must enter the customer's domiciliation number and preferred bank account. - -> [!NOTE] -> You should use one bank account per customer for all domiciliations. - -## To set up domiciliation - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the customer, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Domiciliation**|Enter the domiciliation number for the customer. This number will be used when you create domiciliations for this customer.| - |**Preferred Bank Account**|Enter the preferred bank account for transactions with this customer. This account will be used when you create a payment suggestion for this customer.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Direct Debit Using Domiciliation](direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md) - [How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions](how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md) - [How to: Test Domiciliations](how-to-test-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines](how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md) - [How to: Export and Post Domiciliations](how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md deleted file mode 100644 index d59e50c1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Electronic Banking - description: With electronic banking, you can make electronic payments to domestic, international, SEPA, and non-Euro SEPA vendors and customers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Electronic Banking -With electronic banking, you can make electronic payments to domestic, international, SEPA, and non-Euro SEPA vendors and customers. - -Your company subscribes to an eBanking contract with the bank to maintain a certain bank account or several bank accounts. The company also subscribes to Isabel to send payment files to and receive bank statement files from the bank electronically. Therefore, the company receives smartcards linked to the eBanking contract. The smartcards are secured by PIN codes. - -You will receive one of these smartcards to connect to IBS so that you are connected to the eBanking contract of the company. - -When uploading to or downloading files from the IBS platform, you will insert the smartcard in the card reader and use a PIN code to make connection to IBS. When the IBS session is established, the eBanking contract and eBanking user is known by the system. Also the eBanking contract and user linked bank account numbers are known. - -Before you can use electronic banking, you must set up the following information: - -- Electronic banking setup. -- IBLC/BLWI codes - For more information, see [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md). -- Preferred bank accounts (optional). - -## To set up electronic banking - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Electronic Banking Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Electronic Banking Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines**|Select to indicate if you want to group the payment journal lines for each vendor.| - |**Cut off Payment Message Texts**|Select to indicate if you want to truncate long payment messages. Messages will be truncated if greater than 106 characters for domestic payments and less than 140 characters for international payments.| - |**IBS Version**|Specify the version of Isabel that is currently used for electronic banking in your organization.| - |**Notification E-mail address**|Specify the notification email address that you want to use for electronic banking balance and transaction messages. This is the default address that is used to contact the Isabel server.| - |**Language**|Specify the language that you want to use for electronic bank balance and transaction messages.| - |**IBS Service Version**|Specify the service version that is used to communicate with the Isabel server.| - -3. On the **Upload** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Upload integration Mode**|Specify the mode that you want to use to upload content to the Isabel server. The integration mode options include **Attended** and **Manual**. If the integration mode is set to **Attended**, you must set the **IBS Version** field to **6**. The entries in the **IBS Log** table will be created when payment files are generated. If the integration mode is set to **Manual**, you must log on to the Isabel server manually and no log entries will be created.| - |**Upload Path**|Specify the path to the folder where the files will be saved during the upload process.| - -4. On the **Download** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Download integration Mode**|Specify the mode that you want to use to download content to the Isabel server. The options include **Attended** and **Manual**. If the integration mode is set to **Attended**, you must set the **IBS Version** field to **6**. The entries in the **IBS Log** table will be created when the download is performed. If the integration mode is set to **Manual**, you must log on to the Isabel server manually and no log entries will be created.| - |**Download Path**|Specify the path to the folder where the files will be saved during the download process.| - -5. On the **Numbering** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**IBS Log Upload Nos.**|Specify the number series that is used for Isabel log entries created during the file upload process.| - |**IBS Log Download Nos.**|Specify the number series that is used for Isabel log entries created during the file download process.| - |**IBS Request ID**|Specify a number sequence used for automatic and unique numbering of the requests.| - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -Optionally, you can assign bank accounts to each customer and vendor. This helps make electronic payments simpler. The following procedure explains how to assign preferred bank accounts to customers, but the same steps also apply to vendors. - -## To add a preferred bank account to a customer - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a customer, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Payments** FastTab, enter the **Preferred Bank Account**, and then choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > For all payments, use one bank account for each customer or vendor. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Isabel website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=210323) - [Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Suggestions](how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines](how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md) - [How to: Print Payment Files](how-to-print-payment-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-export-protocols.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-export-protocols.md deleted file mode 100644 index 04fc9cef..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-export-protocols.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Export Protocols - description: Before you can use electronic banking, you must set up export protocols. Export protocols define the file format that is generated when you export payment history to be processed by the bank. Each line contains an export protocol identified by a code and a description. You can set up as many export protocols as necessary. You must set up an export protocol for domestic payments, international payments, SEPA payments, and non-Euro SEPA payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Export Protocols -Before you can use electronic banking, you must set up export protocols. Export protocols define the file format that is generated when you export payment history to be processed by the bank. Each line contains an export protocol identified by a code and a description. You can set up as many export protocols as necessary. You must set up an export protocol for domestic payments, international payments, SEPA payments, and non-Euro SEPA payments. - - With export protocols, you can assign the codeunit that defines the check that should be performed before exporting the payment lines to a file and the report that defines the payment format. For example, you might have an export protocol named **DOM1**. This export protocol contains the **Check Domestic Payments** check codeunit and the **File Domestic Payments** report. Each export protocol has both a check codeunit and a matching report, as shown in the following table. - -|**Check Object ID**|**Export Object ID**| -|-------------------------|--------------------------| -|2000002 Check Domestic Payments|Report 2000001 File Domestic Payments| -|2000003 Check International Payments|Report 2000002 File International Payments| -|2000004 Check SEPA Payments|Report 2000005 File SEPA Payments| -|2000005 Check Non Euro SEPA Payments|Report 2000006 File Non Euro SEPA Payments| -|If you do not want this option, set to zero, otherwise select another option.|XMLport 1000 (SEPA pain.001.001.03 Payments)| - - After you have set up export protocols, you can use them in your electronic banking payment journals. - -## To set up an export protocol - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Export Protocols**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Export Protocols** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify a code that uniquely identifies the export protocol.| - |**Description**|Specify a description for the export protocol entry. You can enter a maximum of 50 characters, both numbers and letters.| - |**Code Expenses**|Specify the code that describes the type of expenses associated with the export protocol entry. Code expenses include **blank**, **SHA**, **BEN**, and **OUR**. For international payments, **SHA** is the default.| - |**Check Object ID**|Specify the identification number of the codeunit that you want to use to perform a check on the object before the payment file is exported.| - |**Check Object Name**|Specify the name of a verification process that is used to perform a check on the object before the payment file is exported. After you select the **Check Object ID**, this field will display the **Check Object Name**.| - |**Export Object Type**|Specify the type of the object that defines the export format of the payment file export. After you select the **Export Object ID**, this field will display the **Export Object Type**.

**NOTE:** To set the export protocol up for SEPA pain.001.001.03, select **XMLPort**.| - |**Export Object ID**|Specify the identification number of the object that defines the export format of the payment file export. For example, if you select **2000002**, the export format for the payment file will be **File International Payments**.

**NOTE:** To set up the export protocol for SEPA pain.001.001.03, select XMLport **1000**.| - |**Export No. Series**|Specify the number series that is used to assign identification numbers to the payment file export.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2906aa38..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes - description: In order to process electronic payments, you must set up transaction codes according to the requirements of the Belgian-Luxembourg Exchange Institute. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes -In order to process electronic payments, you must set up transaction codes according to the requirements of the Belgian-Luxembourg Exchange Institute. These are international identification codes for the different types of payment transactions. The IBLC/BLWI codes are used only for international payments. - -## To set up IBLC/BLWI transaction codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IBLC/BLWI Transaction Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Enter the **Transaction Code** and **Description**. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for CODA](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-coda.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 06156ffc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-intrastat-establishment-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers - description: The Intrastat establishment number is a company identification number that is printed on the Intrastat declaration. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Intrastat Establishment Numbers -The Intrastat establishment number is a company identification number that is printed on the Intrastat declaration. - -## To set up an Intrastat establishment number - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Other** FastTab, enter the Intrastat establishment number in the **Intrastat Establishment No.** field. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Intrastat Reporting](belgian-intrastat-reporting.md) - [How to: Set Up Declaration Types](how-to-set-up-declaration-types.md) - [How to: Set Up Belgian Tariff Numbers](how-to-set-up-belgian-tariff-numbers.md) - [How to: Export Intrastat Third-Party Declararations](how-to-export-intrastat-third-party-declararations.md) - [How to: Print the Intrastat Form Report](how-to-print-the-intrastat-form-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 62e23db3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-non-deductible-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Non-Deductible VAT - description: You can calculate VAT amounts for specific types of expenses which can be partially declared as VAT. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Non-Deductible VAT -You can calculate VAT amounts for specific types of expenses which can be partially declared as VAT. For example, in the **G/L Account Card** window, if you enter 75 percent in the **% Non-Deductible VAT** field, then 75 percent of the regular VAT amount is considered an additional cost and will be added to the net amount during posting. The remaining 25 percent will be posted as regular VAT. - -> [!NOTE] -> If no value is entered in the **% Non-Deductible VAT** field, the VAT amount is 100 percent deductible. - -## To set up the non-deductible VAT percentage - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger expense account that requires the partial deduction, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Posting** FastTab, enter the amount in **% Non deductible VAT** field. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian VAT](belgian-vat.md) - [How to: Print Periodic VAT Reports](how-to-print-periodic-vat-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3ecb0e5d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions - description: You can set up each vendor so that unpaid invoices from that vendor are automatically included in payment suggestions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions -You can set up each vendor so that unpaid invoices from that vendor are automatically included in payment suggestions. For each vendor, you must decide whether you want to automatically generate payment suggestions. If you do not want to generate payment suggestions for a vendor, you should not select the **Suggest Payments** check box. This way the outstanding ledger entries for the vendor will not be included in payment suggestions. - -## To set up a vendor to be included in the payment suggestion batch - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Vendors** window, select a relevant vendor, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Payments** FastTab, select the **Suggest Payments** check box. - - If this field is not selected, no payment suggestions will be generated for the vendor. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up IBLC-BLWI Transaction Codes](how-to-set-up-iblc-blwi-transaction-codes.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Suggestions](how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Payment Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-create-payment-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Test Electronic Payments](how-to-test-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Manage Electronic Payment Lines](how-to-manage-electronic-payment-lines.md) - [How to: Print Payment Files](how-to-print-payment-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-domiciliations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-domiciliations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8e1e0a7c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-domiciliations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Test Domiciliations - description: To test the domiciliation journal lines, you can use the **Domiciliation Journal - Test** report. This report prints an overview of all journal lines along with any errors such as missing fields or incorrect bank accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Test Domiciliations -To test the domiciliation journal lines, you can use the **Domiciliation Journal - Test** report. This report prints an overview of all journal lines along with any errors such as missing fields or incorrect bank accounts. You have to correct all errors before you can post the lines. - -## To print a domiciliation test report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Domiciliation Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch. -3. Choose the **Test Report** action. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [Direct Debit Using Domiciliation](direct-debit-using-domiciliation.md) - [How to: Set Up Domiciliations](how-to-set-up-domiciliations.md) - [How to: Generate Domiciliation Suggestions](how-to-generate-domiciliation-suggestions.md) - [How to: Edit and Delete Domiciliation Lines](how-to-edit-and-delete-domiciliation-lines.md) - [How to: Export and Post Domiciliations](how-to-export-and-post-domiciliations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-electronic-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-electronic-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5770d6dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-test-electronic-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Test Electronic Payments - description: After you have set up electronic banking and generated payment suggestions, you can test the payment journal lines for errors before posting them. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Test Electronic Payments -After you have set up electronic banking and generated payment suggestions, you can test the payment journal lines for errors before posting them. - -Some of the information that is validated includes: - -- Bank accounts numbers are valid. -- Positive payment lines are present. -- If domestic and international payments are made from only one bank account. -- If only one bank account can be used for Isabel. -- If payment lines are in Euro for SEPA. -- If a number series has been defined for SEPA. - -You can view any errors in the **Export Check Error Logs** window. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You have to correct all errors before you can post the lines. - -## To test payment journal lines - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch. -3. In the **Export Protocol** field, select the export protocol. -4. Enter the payment journal line information, and then choose the **Check Payment Lines** action to validate the payment journal lines. The validation that is performed on the journal lines depends on the type of check that is specified in the **Export Protocols** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Belgian Electronic Payments](belgian-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Automatic Payment Suggestions](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-automatic-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Suggestions](how-to-generate-payment-suggestions.md) - [How to: Print Payment Files](how-to-print-payment-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-upload-payment-files-to-an-isabel-server.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-upload-payment-files-to-an-isabel-server.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2f6ef7f6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/how-to-upload-payment-files-to-an-isabel-server.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Upload Payment Files to an Isabel Server - description: Payment files can be uploaded using the **IBS Logs** window. The **Upload Integration Mode** and **Download Integration Mode** fields in the **Electronic Banking Setup** window must be set to **Attended** to upload payment files. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Upload Payment Files to an Isabel Server -Payment files can be uploaded using the **IBS Logs** window. The **Upload Integration Mode** and **Download Integration Mode** fields in the **Electronic Banking Setup** window must be set to **Attended** to upload payment files. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can upload payment files you must be logged on to the Isabel server. - -## To upload payment files in attended mode - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IBS Logs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Contract and User** action. -3. After verifying the payment files, a user ID and contract ID will be displayed in the **IBS User ID** and **IBS Contract ID** fields. - - The **Upload Status** field will be set to **Ready for Upload**. If more than one contract exists on the Isabel server for the bank account, the **Upload Status** will be set to **Conflict Exists**. Select the correct contract. - -4. Choose the **Perform Download** action. The payment files will be uploaded to the Isabel server and the **Process Status** field will be set to **Processed**. -5. Continue processing the payment files by signing and sending the files on the Isabel server. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Archive IBS Log Entries](how-to-archive-ibs-log-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/isabel-6.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/isabel-6.md deleted file mode 100644 index b4d76e71..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/isabel-6.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Isabel 6 - description: The Isabel organization has developed a Client Isabel Synchronizer (CIS) platform that allows [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to securely integrate with Isabel. CIS handles document exchange to and from the Isabel server. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Isabel 6 -The Isabel organization has developed a Client Isabel Synchronizer (CIS) platform that allows [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to securely integrate with Isabel. CIS handles document exchange to and from the Isabel server. - -To upload or download the bank files, you will have to set up your environment to work with Isabel. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] communicates to the CIS.dll through a COM wrapper. - -To set up your system to work with Isabel, complete the following: - -- Install the Isabel security components. For more information, see the download area on the [Isabel website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=210323). - -- Install the COM wrapper that is manufactured by the Isabel organization. This wrapper is included with the Isabel GO 6.20 package. - -- Register the COM wrapper on your computer. At the command prompt, locate the CIS.dll and then execute the **regsvr32 CISComWrapper.dll** command. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Isabel website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=210323) - [Belgian Electronic Banking](belgian-electronic-banking.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/sepa-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/sepa-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 549cc31a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/sepa-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: SEPA Payments - description: The Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) unifies payment methods in participating European countries/regions. This makes international payments as easy to process as domestic payments. Regardless of location, European citizens and companies can make and receive payments in euros, whether within or across national borders, with the same basic conditions, rights, and obligations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# SEPA Payments -The Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) unifies payment methods in participating European countries/regions. This makes international payments as easy to process as domestic payments. Regardless of location, European citizens and companies can make and receive payments in euros, whether within or across national/regional borders, with the same basic conditions, rights, and obligations. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Febelfin website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=275119) - [ISO 20022 website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=275120) - [How to: Activate SEPA Payments](how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: File SEPA Payments](how-to-file-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: File Non-Euro SEPA Payments](how-to-file-non-euro-sepa-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/summarizing-payment-lines-and-general-journal-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/summarizing-payment-lines-and-general-journal-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8538b80..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Belgium/summarizing-payment-lines-and-general-journal-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Summarizing Payment Lines and General Journal Lines - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] handles several types of transactions in the same way. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Summarizing Payment Lines and General Journal Lines -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] handles the following types of transactions in the same way: - -- Domestic payments -- International payments -- SEPA payments -- Non-euro SEPA payments - -## How Payment Journal Lines are Transferred to the General Journal -When you export the payment journal lines to a file, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] transfers the payment journal lines to the specified general journal. By default, a general journal line is created for each payment journal line. - -The following two fields in the **Electronic Banking Setup** window affect how the payment lines are summarized: - -- **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** -- **Cut off Payment Message Texts** - -If you have selected the **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** check box in the **Electronic Banking Setup** window, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] summarizes all payment journal lines for a specific vendor into one general journal line. The general description "Payment %1," where %1 is the vendor number, is used for the summarized journal line description. A separate payment line and a separate general journal line are created to handle: - -- Payment journal lines that contain partial payments, with both the **Partial Payment** and the **Separate Line** fields selected. - -- Payment journal lines that contain a standard format message (that is, passes the MOD97 test), which sets **Standard Format Message** to True in the electronic banking journal. - -## Example 1 -In this example, you export payment lines, and the **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** check box is selected. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates: - -- One combined payment line in a XML file that has a concatenated payment message. White space is the delimiter. -- One payment line in the general journal with a generic description that ../../includes the vendor name. - -## Example 2 -In this example, you export payment lines, and the **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** check box is selected. The **Cut off Payment Message Texts** check box is cleared, and combined SEPA and non-euro SEPA payment lines exceed 140 characters in payment message. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates: - -- Two combined payment lines in a XML file. The first payment line contains the first concatenated payment messages. The second payment line contains the payment message from the third line. - -- One payment line in the general journal with a generic description that ../../includes the vendor name. - -## Example 3 -In this example, you export payment lines, and the **Summarize Gen. Jnl. Lines** check box is selected. The **Cut off Payment Message Texts** check box is also selected and combined SEPA and non-SEPA payment lines exceed 140 characters in payment message. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates: - -- One combined payment line in a XML file that has two concatenated payment messages. An ellipsis (…) is used to indicate that the message is truncated. - -- One payment line in the general journal with a generic description that includes the vendor name. - -Based on the XML structure, the payments are summarized per account number and beneficiary bank account no and bank account no. The bank account filter can be empty. - -The EndToEndId in the SEPA message is taken from the payment message and can be truncated to the maximum length of 45 characters. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Electronic Banking](how-to-set-up-electronic-banking.md) - [Setting Up Finance](../../finance-setup-finance.md) - [How to: Record Purchases](../../purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/ca-sales-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/ca-sales-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 91ed63f2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/ca-sales-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Tax Groups, Areas, and Jurisdictions in Canada -description: Learn about how sales tax is set up, and how tax groups, tax areas (states, counties, cities, and localities), tax jurisdictions, and tax details work. - - -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: local -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Reporting Sales Tax in Canada -When you first start using [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can run an assisted setup guide to quickly and easily set up sales tax information for your company, customers, and vendors. In a matter of minutes, you are ready to create sales documents and purchase documents with sales tax calculated correctly. This is explained [in our blog post](https://madeira.microsoft.com/blog/sales-tax-setup-made-easy). -If you move to the empty My Company, we recommend that you start by using each of the assisted setup guides, including the one for sales tax. If you prefer to set up sales tax yourself, this article explains what you have to take into consideration. - -## Tax Groups, Tax Areas, and Tax Jurisdictions -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], a tax group represents a group of inventory items or resources that are subject to identical tax terms. For example, you can set up a tax group for taxable items and another for nontaxable items. You must assign tax group codes to inventory items and general ledger accounts. Similarly, you must assign tax area codes to customers, locations, and to your own company settings. The assisted setup guide helps you do this. - -Each tax area is a grouping of sales tax jurisdictions based on a particular geographic location. For example, the Miami, Florida, tax area includes three sales tax jurisdictions: city (Miami), county (Dade), and state (Florida). [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes a limited set of tax areas with a default configuration, but you can change them and add new tax areas. - -If you set up new tax areas and tax jurisdictions, you must make sure that you fill in the fields correctly. In Canada, the federal government and provinces can charge sales tax. Companies collect and remit sales tax to these government authorities for products sold to end users. Sales tax can also be charged to existing sales tax. For example, tax can be calculated on a sales invoice amount that already includes the tax from other jurisdictions. - -In Canada, tax amounts must be detailed in documents for each tax jurisdiction. Up to four jurisdictions can be displayed in a document, and jurisdictions that have the same print order are combined when they are printed. - -## Tax Details -The **Tax Details** window shows different combinations of sales tax jurisdictions and sales tax groups to establish sales tax rates. For each tax jurisdiction, we recommend that you set up one tax group for normal sales tax, another tax group for items or services that are not taxed, and an additional tax group for every type of item or service that is handled with a different sales tax rate in that jurisdiction. - -In Canada, when you sell to a customer at a location where you do not have a *situs*—or a legal location in that state, you do not collect sales tax. For locations in which you do not have a situs, ensure that both the **Tax Below Minimum** and **Tax Above Maximum** fields are 0.00. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance-setup-finance.md) -[Sales Tax and Goods and Services Tax in Canada](sales-tax-goods-services.md) -[Set Up Sales Tax - Watch a Video](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qMs4BoSytN8&index=13&list=PLcakwueIHoT8K1m148oMqo7amR2a7Bz-8) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/canada-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/canada-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index f38732bb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/canada-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Canada Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Canadian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Canada Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Canadian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section -[How to: Work With GIFI Codes](work-gifi-codes.md) -[How to: Set Up Use Tax and Purchase Tax](how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md) -[How to: Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts](how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Canada](ca-sales-tax.md) -[How to: Manage Customer Credit Information](how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md) -[How to: Create Deposits](how-to-create-deposits.md) -[How to: Print Troubleshooting Reports](how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-create-deposits.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-create-deposits.md deleted file mode 100644 index 264be14a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-create-deposits.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create The Deposits - description: You can make The deposits to maintain a transaction record that contains information that can be applied to outstanding invoices and credit memos. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create The Deposits -You can make deposits to maintain a transaction record that contains information that can be applied to outstanding invoices and credit memos. - -## To create a deposit -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Deposits**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|The unique identification number for the deposit.| - |**Bank Account No.**|The bank account number for the deposit.| - |**Total Deposit Amount**|The total deposit amount posted to the bank ledger.

You can post this deposit only if the sum of the deposit lines is equal to the value in this field.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the deposit.| - |**Document Date**|The deposit document date.| -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Account Type**|The account type.| - |**Account No.**|The unique identification account number that is associated with the selected account type, to which the entry will be posted.| - |**Description**|The journal line entry description.| - |**Document Date**|The journal line entry document date.| - |**Document Type**|The journal line entry document type.| - |**Document No.**|The journal line entry document number.| - |**Credit Amount**|The total credit amount on the journal line.| - -5. Optionally, on the **Navigate** tab, choose **Dimensions**, and then add relevant dimensions in the **Dimension Set Entries** window. - -After you have created a deposit, you must post it. - -## To post a deposit -1. Choose the **Post** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can post a deposit only if the amount displayed in the **Total Deposit Lines** field is equal to the amount in the **Total Deposit Amount** field. - -Next, you can use the Deposit Test Report and Deposit reports to reconcile your posted deposits with outstanding invoices and credit memos. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index b6356392..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Manage The Customer Credit Information - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can add comments to the customer credit information. You can also hold and block customers with bad credit before shipping or invoicing occurs. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage The Customer Credit Information -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can add comments to customer credit information. You may also hold and block customers with bad credit before shipping or invoicing occurs. - -## To add comments to customer credit information -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Credit Management**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Customer List - Credit Mgmt.** window, select a customer, and then choose the **Comments** action. -3. In the **Comment Sheet** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Date**|The date of the comment.| - |**Comment**|The comment about the customer. You can enter a maximum of 80 alphanumeric characters.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To prevent an order from shipping or invoicing -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the customer, and the choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -3. In the **On Hold** field, enter the initials of the customer. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must have the proper security clearance to add or remove holds on individual sales orders using the **On Hold** field. - -## To block a sales order for a customer -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a customer, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Blocked** field, select one of the following options: - - - **<Blank>** – Transaction is allowed for this customer. - - **Ship** – New orders and new shipments cannot be created for this customer. Existing shipments not yet invoiced can be invoiced. - - **Invoice** – New orders, new shipments, and new invoices cannot be created for this customer. Existing shipments not yet invoiced cannot be invoiced. - - **All** – No transaction is allowed for this customer, including payments. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 764d67e2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print The Troubleshooting Reports - description: The following troubleshooting reports are available to assist Microsoft Certified Partners with troubleshooting issues. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print The Troubleshooting Reports -The following troubleshooting reports are available to assist Microsoft Certified Partners with troubleshooting issues: - -- **License Information** report – This report contains the license number, the name of the licensed user, which application granules they have purchased, and when the license expires, if applicable. - -- **Data Dictionary** report (report #10315) – This report allows you to print detailed table reference, field reference, and table properties for table objects. - -You must have access to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Object Designer, which is available only to administrators. - -You can print these reports and send them to your Microsoft Certified Partner to help resolve issues with your [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] implementation. - -## To print the License Information report -1. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Object Designer, on the **Tools** menu, choose **License Information**. -2. In the **License Information** window, you can preview the license information, or you can choose the **Export** button to print the **License Information** report. - -## To print the Data Dictionary report -1. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Object Designer, on the **Tools** menu, choose **Object Designer**. -2. Choose the **Report** button. -3. In the **Type** column, find **ID** 10315, which is the **Data Dictionary** report. -4. In the **Object Designer** window, choose the **Run** button to open the **Data Dictionary** report. -5. On the **Options** tab, enter the relevant information into the fields. -6. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index a14acc16..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts (Canada) - description: You can use the **General Ledger Setup** window to set up unrealized sales tax. You can also set up maximum correction tax amounts so that you can limit the tax correction amounts that are entered for sales and purchases. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts (Canada) -You can use the **General Ledger Setup** window to set up unrealized sales tax. You can also set up maximum correction tax amounts so that you can limit the tax correction amounts that are entered for sales and purchases. This allows you to overwrite the calculated tax when there are rounding differences between what is calculated on the purchase order, and what is calculated on the purchase invoice from the vendor. - -## To set up unrealized sales tax -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Pmt. Disc. Excl. Tax**|Select to calculate the payment discount on amounts excluding sales tax.| - |**Adjust for Payment Disc.**|Select to recalculate the tax amounts when you post payments that trigger payment discounts.

This field is used in the context of VAT, not sales tax.| - |**Unrealized VAT**|Select if any of your sales tax jurisdictions allow you to pay your sales tax after you have been paid. If you do not select this check box this function will be blocked for all sales tax jurisdictions.| -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up unrealized tax for jurisdictions -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Jurisdictions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Jurisdictions** window, choose the **Edit List** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Unrealized Tax Type**|< – The unrealized tax feature is not used for this tax jurisdiction.

–or–

**Percentage** – Each payment covers both tax amounts and invoice amounts in proportion to the remaining invoice amount. The paid tax amount is transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account.

–or–

**First** – Payments cover the tax first, and then the invoice amount.

–or–

**Last** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, and then the tax amount. In this case, nothing will be transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account until the total invoice amount—exclusive of tax—has been paid.

–or–

**First (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the tax first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid.

–or–

**Last (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Unreal. Tax Acc (Sales)**|The general ledger account that you want to use to post calculated unrealized tax on sales transactions. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Unreal. Tax Acc (Purchases)**|The general ledger account that you want to use to post calculated unrealized tax on purchase transactions. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Unreal. Rev. Charge (Purch.)**|The general ledger account that you want to use for posting calculated unrealized reverse-charge tax on purchase transactions. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up adjustments for payment discounts in a tax posting group -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Tax Posting Setup Card** window, select the **Adjust for Payment Discount** check box. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > This field is available in the **VAT Posting Setup** window, but it is not shown by default. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up maximum tax correction amounts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales Receivables Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Allow Tax Difference** check box. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Allow Tax Difference** check box. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -8. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, in the **Max. Tax Difference Allowed** field, enter the maximum tax correction amount that is allowed for the local currency. - - > [!NOTE] - > In this field, if you enter USD 5, you may correct tax amounts by up to five dollars. To use the tax difference function, an amount must be entered in the **Max. Tax Difference Allowed** field. -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Canada](ca-sales-tax.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index a926cf50..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up The Use Tax and Purchase Tax - description: Sales tax includes taxes that companies pay for using items. Use tax is a United States sales tax. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Use The Tax and Purchase Tax -Sales tax includes taxes that companies pay for using items: - -- Use tax (United States) – Use tax is a United States sales tax that is paid on items that are purchased by a company and are used by that company instead of being sold to a customer. The company must pay sales tax for those items to the government, in the form of use tax. -- Purchase tax (Canada) – Purchase tax is a Canadian sales tax that is paid by a company on items that are purchased from a vendor. When a company purchases items for use by the company itself, the vendor charges the appropriate sales tax for the items. - -## To set up use tax for a purchase order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link in **Order Processing**. -2. In the **Purchase Orders** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](../../includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Liable**|Select to set up tax liability. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Tax Area Code**|The tax area code of the vendor. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Tax Exemption No.**|The company's tax exemption number. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Provincial Tax Area Code**|The tax code for the province. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up use tax details -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Details**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Details** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **New - Tax Details** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Jurisdiction Code**|The tax jurisdiction code for the tax detail entry.| - |**Tax Group Code**|The tax group code for the tax detail entry.| - |**Tax Type**|**Sales and Use Tax** – To apply both sales tax and use tax to the tax detail entry.

–or–

**Excise Tax** – To apply excise tax to the tax detail entry.

–or–

**Sales Tax Only** – To apply only sales tax to the tax detail entry.

–or–

**Use Tax Only** – To apply only use tax to the tax detail entry.| -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up purchase tax for a company -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Company Information** window, on the **Tax** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Area Code**|The company's tax area code. The tax area code is used in conjunction with a tax group code field and the **Tax Liable** field to find the necessary information for calculating sales tax.| - |**Tax Exemption No.**|The company's tax exemption number. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Provincial Tax Area Code**|The tax code for the province.| -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up purchase tax for a location -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Locations** window, select the required location, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Do Not Use For Tax Calculation**|Select to specify whether the tax information included on this location record is to be used for sales tax calculations on purchase documents.| - |**Tax Area Code**|The tax area code for the location. The tax area code is used in conjunction with a tax group code field and the **Tax Liable** field to find the necessary information for calculating sales tax.| - |**Tax Exemption No.**|The company's tax exemption number. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Provincial Tax Area Code**|The tax code for the province.| -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up purchase tax for non-recoverable tax -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Details**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Details** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Select the **Expense/Capitalize** check box. - - > [!NOTE] - > This check box must be selected if the tax paid is not recoverable. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Canada](ca-sales-tax.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/sales-tax-goods-services.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/sales-tax-goods-services.md deleted file mode 100644 index d08f2865..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/sales-tax-goods-services.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Sales Tax in Canada -description: Learn about local sales tax and goods and services tax in Canada. - - -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: sales tax, local -ms.date: 08/11/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Reporting Sales Tax and Goods/Services Tax in Canada -In Canada, when a vendor does not have a business presence in the province in which purchases are made, the vendor will charge the Goods and Services Tax (GST) or Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) only. However, if the province has a Provincial Sales Tax (PST), then the purchaser must still calculate the PST and pay it directly to the province. When a Provincial Tax Area Code is selected, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] uses it to calculate the PST and post it so that there is a tax liability in both the general ledger and the tax entry records. Therefore, the tax area code selected here should be one where only the PST is included, not the GST. - -## Submitting the GST/HST File -The tax information in purchase documents is used to generate a GST/HST online file transfer that you must provide to the tax authorities. This file includes goods and services tax (GST) and harmonized sales tax (HST). The file is created in a .tax file format, which can be transferred online. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance-setup-finance.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Canada](ca-sales-tax.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/work-gifi-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/work-gifi-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 27cae08a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Canada/work-gifi-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: GIFI Codes (Canada) -description: In Canada, you can set up General Index of Financial Information (GIFI) codes and assign them to posting accounts - - -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: local -ms.date: 08/11/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work With GIFI Codes (Canada) -Fiscal information can include general ledger accounts, reports, income statements, balance sheets, and statements of retained earnings. Fiscal information is classified using codes. The use of codes helps the government to process information, prepare for electronic filing, and validate tax information electronically. The use of codes also helps statistical organizations to work more efficiently, as financial information is more readily available. For more information, see the [Canada Revenue Agency website](http://www.cra-arc.gc.ca/). - -The Canada Revenue Agency uses General Index of Financial Information (GIFI) codes to collect, validate, and process financial and tax information electronically. It is a best practice to assign GIFI codes only to posting accounts, so that all totaling is done by your tax preparation software. - -When an account is associated with a GIFI code, it is reported to the revenue agency under that code. Multiple accounts can all have the same GIFI code, but each account can have only one GIFI code. - -You can export balance information by GIFI code and save the exported file in Excel, which is useful for transferring information to your tax preparation software. - -## To set up GIFI codes -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you must set up GIFI codes for general ledger accounts, reports, balance sheets, income sheets, and statements of retained earnings. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **GIFI Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **GIFI Codes** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Set up GIFI codes by filling the fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](../../includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To associate GIFI codes with G/L accounts -To report financial information by GIFI code, each GIFI code must be associated with the appropriate accounts in the chart of accounts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a relevant general ledger account, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Cost Accounting** FastTab, in the **GIFI Code** field, select an appropriate GIFI code. - -## To view account balances using the GIFI code report -You can review your account balances by GIFI code by using the **Account Balances by GIFI Code** report. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Balances by GIFI Code**, and then choose the related link. -2. Specify what to include in the report by filling the fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](../../includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **Print** or the **Preview** button. - -## To export balance information using GIFI codes -You can export balance information using GIFI codes and save the exported file in Excel. You can modify, save, or delete the file. You can use the file to transfer information to your tax preparation software. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Export GIFI Info. to Excel**, and then choose the related link. -2. Specify what to export to Excel by filling the fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](../../includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> The Excel file has the following characteristics: - -* The balance is rounded to the nearest percentage, but the cell value maintains the same percentage as it does in the general ledger. -* Negative numbers are represented as positive number in brackets. Accordingly, -123 is represented as (123). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Canada Local Functionality](canada-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/denmark-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/denmark-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index bb5c2f76..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/denmark-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Denmark Local Functionality - description: This section describes local functionality in Denmark. - - - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 11/23/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Denmark Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Danish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in Denmark. - -## In This Section -[OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview](oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md) -[EAN Location Number](ean-location-number.md) -[Payments and Reconciliations (DK) Extension](ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk.md) -[FIK Details in the Payment Reconciliation Journal](fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal.md) -[VAT-VIES Reporting](vat-vies-reporting.md) -[How to: Print VAT Reconciliation Reports](how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports.md) -[C5 2012 Data Migration](ui-extensions-c5-data-migration.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ean-location-number.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ean-location-number.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6274e90b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ean-location-number.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: EAN Location Number - description: A European Article Numbering (EAN) location number is an electronic address that you can use when you send an electronic invoice. This number uniquely identifies the buyer’s billing address. EAN location numbers can be used in countries/regions outside Europe and are also referred to as Global Location Numbers (GLN). - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# EAN Location Number -A European Article Numbering (EAN) location number is an electronic address that you can use when you send an electronic invoice. This number uniquely identifies the buyer’s billing address. EAN location numbers can be used in countries/regions outside Europe and are also referred to as Global Location Numbers (GLN). - -## EAN Location Numbers in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - Departments, directorates, agencies, and other organizations in the Danish public sector have EAN location numbers, which uniquely identifies the bill-to address of the customer. If your company has a customer who is in the public sector, you must submit invoices and other documents electronically by using Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL). In order to do that, you must specify the customer’s EAN location number. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md). - - An EAN location number has a fixed length of 13 digits. This number must be processed in its entirety. The following is an example of an EAN number. - - **5790987654321** - - EAN numbers start with a 3-digit prefix allocated by EAN International. For Denmark, the first three numbers are **579**. The EAN number ends with a check digit that is calculated based on the first 12 digits. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) - [OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview](oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md) - [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8f89da51..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: FIK Details in the Payment Reconciliation Journal - description: The Transaction Text field in the Payment Reconciliation Journal window shows information about the automatic application of payments using the Danish FIK standard. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# FIK Details in the Payment Reconciliation Journal -The **Transaction Text** field in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window shows information about the automatic application of payments using the Danish FIK standard. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](../../receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - - The following table describes the six values that may be shown in the **Transaction Text** field. - -|Transaction Text|Description| -|-----------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Matching Amount**|The amount paid covers exactly the remaining amount on an unpaid sales invoice that is identified by the FIK number.| -|**Partial Amount**|The amount paid is less than the remaining amount on an unpaid sales invoice that is identified by the FIK number.| -|**Excess Amount**|The amount paid is more than the remaining amount on an unpaid sales invoice that is identified by the FIK number.| -|**No Matching FIK Number**|The system has not found any unpaid or paid sales invoices with a FIK number that matches the FIK number on the payment.| -|**Duplicate FIK Number**|The system has discovered that there are payments that have similar FIK numbers.| -|**Invoice Already Paid**|The system has discovered that a FIK number on a payment matches a sales invoice that is fully applied and closed.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payments and Reconciliations (DK) Extension](ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk.md) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) -[How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](../../receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl.md deleted file mode 100644 index f8e0151a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Electronic Documents by Using OIOUBL - description: When you sell goods or services to a customer in the public sector, you must submit documents electronically. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Electronic Documents by Using OIOUBL -When you sell goods or services to a customer in the public sector, you must submit documents electronically. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create electronic documents for invoices, credit memos, reminders, and finance charge memos. Before you can create the electronic documents, you must have set up file locations and information about the customers. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md). - -## Creating Electronic Documents -Electronic documents can only be created after a document has been posted or issued. The following sections describe how to post a sales invoice with the required information and then create an electronic sales invoice, but the same procedure applies to sales credit memos, reminders, finance charge memos, service invoices, and service credit memos. - -### To post a sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the sales invoice that you want to post. -3. On the **General** FastTab, make sure that the **External Document No.** field contains the document number that the customer supplied. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > This is required if you want to create an electronic invoice. - - For service documents, you must fill in the **Your Reference** field on the **General** FastTab. - -4. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, make sure that the following fields have values: - - - **EAN No.** - - **Account Code** - - **Payment Channel** - - For reminders and finance charge memos, the fields are on the **Posting** FastTab. - -5. Post the invoice. - -### To create an electronic sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant posted sales invoice. -3. Choose the **Create Electronic Invoice** action. -4. Optionally, in the **Create Electronic Invoices** window, set additional filters, and then choose the **OK** button. - -An XML file is created and stored at the location that was defined in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. You can now submit the document to the customer. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-oioubl.md) - [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md) - [OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview](oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8f61093e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print VAT Reconciliation Reports - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use the **VAT Reconciliation** report to view a list of general ledger accounts with their base amounts and VAT amounts. These amounts are grouped by VAT type to help with VAT settlement reconciliation. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print VAT Reconciliation Reports -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use the **VAT Reconciliation** report to view a list of general ledger accounts with their base amounts and VAT amounts. These amounts are grouped by VAT type to help with VAT settlement reconciliation. - -### To print a VAT reconciliation report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Reconciliation**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Details**|Select to print all transaction amounts in the report.

If you do not select this field, a single cumulative line is printed for each general ledger account.| - |**Show Transactions without VAT**|Select to print a line for each general ledger account that transactions are posted to. You can use this option for both single accounts and multiple accounts.

The default is **No**. The report includes only those transactions that include VAT entries. If you select this field, the report includes all transactions.| - -3. On the **G/L Entry** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3333d2f8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Customers for OIOUBL - description: To create Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL) documents for customers in the public sector, you must add OIOUBL information to the relevant customers. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/17/2019 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL -To create Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL) documents for customers in the public sector, you must add OIOUBL information to the relevant customers. - - This topic only describes fields that apply to OIOUBL. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](../../sales-how-register-new-customers.md). - -### To set up customers for OIOUBL - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the customer that you want to enable for OIOUBL. -3. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**EAN No.**|Enter the European Article Numbering (EAN) location number for the customer. For more information, see [EAN Location Number](ean-location-number.md).| - |**Account Code**|Enter the account code for the customer.

Customers in the public sector provide an account code when they place an order or requisition. Based on the value of this field, the account code is included in the OIOUBL documents that you create in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. In accordance with **Lov om Offentlige Betalinger** and related statutes, the customer is entitled to withhold payment until they receive an invoice with the relevant account code. For more information, see Account Code.| - |**OIOUBL Profile Code**|Specifies the profile that this customer requires for electronic documents if this is different from the default profile that you specified in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window.| - |**OIOUBL Profile Code Required**|Specifies if this customer requires a profile code for electronic documents. **Tip:** If the **OIOUBL Profile Code Required** field is selected, you cannot post a sales document for this customer unless you have specified a profile.| - - These fields are specific to OIOUBL. The values are used in all OIOUBL documents that you create for this customer. For more information, see [OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview](oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Register New Customers](../../sales-how-register-new-customers.md) - [How to: Set Up OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-oioubl.md) - [How to: Create Electronic Documents by Using OIOUBL](how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl.md) - [OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview](oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md) - [EAN Location Number](ean-location-number.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-oioubl.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-oioubl.md deleted file mode 100644 index 89e688cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/how-to-set-up-oioubl.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up OIOUBL - description: You must define a location for storing Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL) files when you create electronic documents such as invoices or credit memos. You must also define payment methods, payment terms, and item charges, and you must set up relevant customers for OIOUBL. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up OIOUBL -You must define a location for storing Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL) files when you create electronic documents such as invoices or credit memos. You must also define payment methods, payment terms, and item charges, and you must set up relevant customers for OIOUBL. - -## To set up OIOUBL file locations for sales and receivables - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, on the **OIOUBL** FastTab, in the **Output Paths** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Invoice Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the OIOUBL files for sales invoices.| - |**Cr. Memo Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the OIOUBL files for sales credit memos.| - |**Reminder Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the OIOUBL files for reminders.| - |**Fin. Chrg. Memo Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the OIOUBL files for finance charge memos.| - -3. In the **Default OIOUBL Profile Code** field, select the profile that most of your public sector customers use. - - When you select a profile, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] updates open sales documents and service documents with the specified profile. - - 1. To create a new profile, choose the **Default OIOUBL Profile Code** field, and then choose **New**. - 2. In the **OIOUBL Profile List** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specifies the code for the OIOUBL profile.| - |**Profile ID**|Specifies the profile that you want to support in the electronic documents that you send to customers in the Danish public sector, such as **Procurement-BilSim-1.0**.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> External document numbers are required for OIOUBL documents even if you did not select the **Ext. Doc. No. Mandatory** field on the **General** FastTab. If the document does not have an external document number, you will receive an error message. - -### To set up OIOUBL file locations for service management - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Mgt. Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, on the **OIOUBL** FastTab, in the **Output Paths** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Service Invoice Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the OIOUBL files for service invoices.| - |**Service Cr. Memo Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the OIOUBL files for service credit memos.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -You must also add an OIOUBL payment channel to the payment methods that you use for electronic invoices. You must also set a code for the relevant payment terms. - -## To set up payment methods and payments terms -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Methods** window, for each payment method that you will use for electronic invoices, in the **Payment Channel** field, select a payment channel. The following table describes the options. - - |Option|Description| - |-------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payment Slip**|The payment is made by using a payment slip, such as giro or an FI card (Fællesindbetalingskort). **Important:** This payment channel is not supported in the standard version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| - |**Account Transfer**|The payment is made by transfer from the customer’s bank account.| - |**National Clearing**|The payment is made by transfer from the customer’s bank account and is processed by a clearing house.| - |**Direct Debit**|The payment is made by using the unified bank payment service (PBS).| - -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Terms**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **Payment Terms** window, for each payment term that you will use for electronic invoices, in the **OIOXML Code** field, select a code. For more information, see OIOUBL Code. - -Next, you must categorize your item charges. - -## To set up item charges -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Charges**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Charges** window, for each item charge, in the **Charge Category** field, select a category. For more information, see Charge Category. - -You must also make sure that the OIOUBL Country-Region Code field is filled in for Denmark in the **Countries/Regions** window. - -Finally, you must specify EAN numbers and account codes for the relevant customers. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) -[OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview](oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md) -[How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 48f6991b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/oioubl-electronic-invoicing-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview - description: Companies must send sales invoices, credit memos, finance charge memos, and reminders to the Danish public sector electronically in the Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL) format. If a company does not send these documents electronically, the authorities can deny payment. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# OIOUBL Electronic Invoicing Overview -Companies must send sales invoices, credit memos, finance charge memos, and reminders to the Danish public sector electronically in the Offentlig Information Online UBL (OIOUBL) format. If a company does not send these documents electronically, the authorities can deny payment. - -For more information about OIOUBL electronic invoicing, see [oioubl.info](http://www.oioubl.info). - -## Implementation in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] -The current requirements for sending electronic invoices are based on OIOUBL, which is based on the Universal Business Language (UBL) version 2.0 standard. For more information, see the [OASIS UBL](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212593) website. The generated XML documents can then be sent to the customer. - -To send documents electronically, you must assign European Article Numbering (EAN) location numbers and account codes to the relevant customers in the **Customer Card** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md). These numbers are the included when you create documents, and post or issue them. After the documents have been posted or issued, you can create electronic versions to be sent to the customer. You can submit the following types of documents: - -- Sales invoice -- Service invoice -- Sales credit memo -- Service credit memo -- Finance charge memo -- Reminder - -The electronic documents are stored in the locations that are defined in the Sales & Receivables Setup. - -## OIOUBL Profiles -Your customers can use a profile that is based on the Danish OIOUBL definitions, or they can use a profile that is based on the OIOUBL implementation of the Northern European Subset (NES) definitions. Some profiles require responses to be sent when an electronic document is received. You can set up which profile most of your customers use. If a customer uses a different profile, you can change that in the customer card. For example, you can specify that the default profile is Procurement-OrdSim-BilSim-1.0, but that customer 10000 requires profile urn:www.nesubl.eu:profiles:profile5:ver2.0. For more information, see [How to: Set Up OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-oioubl.md). - -For more information, see the entry on OIOUBL profiles in the frequently asked questions section at [Digitaliseringsstyrelsen](https://digst.dk/styring/statens-digitaliseringsakademi/spoergsmaal-og-svar-faq/). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-oioubl.md) - [How to: Set Up Customers for OIOUBL](how-to-set-up-customers-for-oioubl.md) - [How to: Create Electronic Documents by Using OIOUBL](how-to-create-electronic-documents-by-using-oioubl.md) - [EAN Location Number](ean-location-number.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-c5-data-migration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-c5-data-migration.md deleted file mode 100644 index d98e1101..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-c5-data-migration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the C5 Data Migration Extension -description: Use this extension to migrate customers, vendors, items, and general ledger accounts from Microsoft Dynamics C5 2012 to Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: extension, migrate, data, C5, import -ms.date: 09/26/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# The C5 Data Migration Extension for Dynamics NAV -This extension makes it easy to migrate customers, vendors, items, and your general ledger accounts from Microsoft Dynamcis C5 2012 to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -> [!Note] -> The company in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)] must not contain any data. Additionally, after you start a migration, do not create customers, vendors, items, or accounts until the migration finishes. - -## To migrate data -There are just a few steps to export data from C5, and import it in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)]: - -1. In C5, use the **Export Database** feature to export the data. Then send the export folder to a compressed (zipped) folder. -2. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)], choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Data Migration**, and then choose **Data Migration**. -3. Complete the steps in the assisted setup guide. Make sure to choose **Import from Microsoft Dynamcis C5 2012** as the data source. - -> [!Note] -> Companies often add fields to customize C5 for their specific line of business. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not migrate data from custom fields. Also, migration will fail if you have more than 10 custom fields. - -## Viewing the Status of the Migration -Use the **Data Migration Overview** page to monitor the success of the migration. The page shows information such as the number of entities that the migration will include, the status of the migration, and the number of items that have been migrated and whether they were successfull. It also shows the number of errors, lets you investigate what went wrong and, when possible, makes it easy to go to the entity to fix the issues. For more information, see the next section in this topic. - -> [!Note] -> While you are waiting for the results of the migration, you must refresh the page to display the results. - -## Correcting Errors -If something goes wrong and an error occurs, the **Status** field will show **Completed with Errors**, and the **Error Count** field will show how many. To view a list of the errors, you can open the **Data Migration Errors** page by choosing: - -* The number in the **Error Count** field for the entity. -* The entity, and then the **Show Errors** action. - -On the **Data Migration Errors** page, to fix an error you can choose an error message, then choose **Edit Record** to open a page that shows the migrated data for the entity. After you fix one or more errors, you can choose **Migrate** to migrate only the entities you fixed, without having to completely restart the migration. -> [!Tip] -> If you have fixed more than one error, you can use the **Select More** feature to select multiple lines to migrate. Alternatively, if there are errors that are not important to fix, you can choose them and then choose **Skip Selections**. - -> [!Note] -> If you have items that are included in a BOM, you might need to migrate more than once if the original item is not created before the variants that reference it. If an item variant is created first, the reference to the original item can cause an error message. - -## Verifying Data After Migrating -If you want to verify that your data migrated correctly, you can look at the following pages in C5 and [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -|Microsoft Dynamcis C5 2012 | [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)]| -|-----|-----| -|Customer Entries| General Journals| -|Vendor Entries| General Journals| -|Item Entries| Item Journals| - -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](../../includes/d365fin_md.md)], the batch for the migrated data is named **C5MIGRATE**. - -> [!Note] -> Remember that we migrate only open entries. You will not find any historical data. - -## Stopping Data Migration -You can stop migrating data by choosing **Stop All Migrations**. If you do, all pending migrations are also stopped. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4b923a89..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-payments-reconciliation-formats-dk.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Payments and Reconciliations (DK) Extension -description: This extension provides the ability to export files that are pre-formatted to meet bank requirements for electronic submissions. - - -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: extension, bank, formats -ms.date: 09/15/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# The Payments and Reconciliations (DK) Extension for Microsoft Dynamics for Finance and Operations, Business edition -Make fast, error-free payments by exporting files that are formatted specifically for exchanges with your vendor or bank. These files speed up the payment and reconciliation processes, and eliminate errors that can happen when you manually enter the information on a bank website. - -This extension supports file formats for several Danish banks. When you export payment information to a file, the extension packages the data into the format that your bank requires. For example, the formats include Bankdata-vl, BEC, SDC, and FIK, which many different banks use, and some that are more specialized for certain banks, for example, Danske Bank and Nordea. The extension also includes some formats for importing and reconciling bank statements. - -> [!Note] -> To use the extension, you must know the format that your bank or vendor requires. Some banks or vendors provide this information on their websites; however, you might need to contact their customer service to get the information. - -## Supported Bank Formats -This extension can apply the following file formats for payment files: - -* BANKDATA-V3 -* BEC-INDLAND -* BEC-CSV -* DANSKEBANK-CMKV -* DANSKEBANK-CMKXKSX -* DANSKEBANK -* FIK71 -* NORDEA-ERHVERV-CSV -* NORDEA -* NORDEA-UNITEL-V3 -* SDC -* SDC-CSV - -## To set up the extension -There are a few steps to get started. - -* Allow payment data exports. To help protect your data, this is not readily available. -* Set up purchase and payables so that you do not require external document numbers on invoices. If needed, you can use the reference number to refer to a specific invoice. -* Specify the payment method for each vendor. Payment methods define how you pay invoices from the vendor. For example, Bank, Cash, Check, or Account. -* Specify the type of format to use for each of your bank accounts. For example, NORDEA, DANSKEBANK, SDC, and so on. - -Additionally, you must assign vendors to a domestic **Gen. Bus. Posting Group** and a **Vendor Posting Group**. The Country/Region setting for the vendor must be Denmark (DK). For more information, see [Setting Up Posting Groups](../../finance-posting-groups.md). - -### To allow [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to export payment data -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Edit Payment Journal** window, choose the **Bank** batch. -3. Choose the **Allow Payment Export** check box. - -### To specify a payment method for a vendor -The following table shows the combinations of FIK and GIRO payment methods that [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] supports. - -| Element | GIRO Account | GIRO Account | FIK Creditor | FIK Creditor | -|----|---|---|---|---| -|Giro Account No. or FIK Creditor No.? | Giro Account No. | Giro Account No. | FIK Creditor No. | FIK Creditor No.| -|Allows Message to Recipient? | Yes |No |No | Yes | -|Contains Payment Reference number? | No | Yes, 16 digits. | Yes, 15 digits. | No| - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card, expand the **Payments** tab, in the **Payment Method** field choose the payment method. -3. Depending on your selection, you must complete other fields. See the table above for a description of the combinations. - -### To specify the format to use for a bank account -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the bank account. -3. In the **Payment Export Format** field, choose the format for your export file. - -## Choosing the FIK or Giro payment information for vendor invoices -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the vendor. Remember, this must be a Danish vendor with an address in Denmark. -3. Create an invoice. The **Payment Method** and **Vendor Number** fields are filled in based on settings on the Vendor card. You can change them if you want. -4. In the **Payment Reference** field, enter the 15-digit number from the vendor invoice. - - > [!Tip] - > You only have to add the last 11 digits of the number. Dynamics NAV will add four zeros to the beginning of the number. -5. Post the invoice. - -## To use the extension to export payment data -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Suggest Vendor Payment Journals** action. - - > [!Tip] - > If you want to export only specific payments, use the options for filtering the data. - -3. If needed, you can add filters to export only specific payments. -4. In the **Bank Payment Type** field, choose **Electronic Payment**. -5. Choose the **Export** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[FIK Details in the Payment Reconciliation Journal](fik-details-in-the-payment-reconciliation-journal.md) -[Customizing Dynamics NAV Using Extensions](../../ui-extensions.md) -[How to: Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File](../../finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md) -[How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](../../finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts](../../finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](../../finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[Working with General Journals](../../ui-work-general-journals.md) - - - - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/vat-vies-reporting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/vat-vies-reporting.md deleted file mode 100644 index ea930164..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Denmark/vat-vies-reporting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT-VIES Reporting - description: Danish companies must submit VAT declarations for trade of goods or services with other EU countries/regions. You can create the required file by using the **VAT- VIES Declaration Disk** batch job. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT-VIES Reporting -Danish companies must submit VAT declarations for trade of goods or services with other EU countries/regions. You can create the required file by using the **VAT- VIES Declaration Disk** batch job. - -## Reporting EU Sales - In order to track VAT for the trade of goods or services between EU countries/regions, you must submit information about this trade to the Danish Listesystem. The **VAT- VIES Declaration Disk** batch job creates a comma-separated file that you can then upload to the tax authorities at the [www.virk.dk online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=212340). Before you create the file, you can verify your customers’ VAT registration number online. The tax authorities also recommend that you do not submit large files to the online portal. If your declaration consists of more than 1,000 lines, it is recommended that you submit several smaller files instead. For more information, see the tax authorities’ [website](http://www.skat.dk). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Denmark Local Functionality](denmark-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Print VAT Reconciliation Reports](how-to-print-vat-reconciliation-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/automatic-account-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/automatic-account-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index b98d26f1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/automatic-account-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Automatic Account Codes (Finland) - description: You can use customized posting groups to automate recurring transactions in journals, sales documents, or purchase documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Automatic Account Codes (Finland) -You can use customized posting groups to automate recurring transactions in journals, sales documents, or purchase documents. These posting groups can be used throughout [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to trigger automatic postings and allocations across different accounts or dimensions. - -Automatic account codes can be used to automate postings related to payroll overhead. For example, when posting total salary expenses at the end of the month, you can use automatic account codes to assign a percentage of the total salary to automatically post as overhead expenses. - -You can also use automatic account codes to trigger cost or revenue allocations across different dimensions. For example, you can set up an automatic account group to divide total expenses across three departments when posting an invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Automatic Account Posting Groups](how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md) -[Setting Up Posting Groups](../../finance-posting-groups.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/electronic-banking-in-finland.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/electronic-banking-in-finland.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2e664926..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/electronic-banking-in-finland.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Banking in Finland - description: The [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] electronic banking feature allows you to process electronic customer and vendor payments. This feature supports domestic payments (LM03) and foreign payments (LUM2) for transferring electronic bank payments. To export or import electronic payments, you must first set up bank reference files to determine how payment files are processed. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Banking in Finland -The [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] electronic banking feature allows you to process electronic customer and vendor payments. This feature supports domestic payments (LM03) and foreign payments (LUM2) for transferring electronic bank payments. To export or import electronic payments, you must first set up bank reference files to determine how payment files are processed. - -## Customer Payments -Domestic customer payments can be imported from the bank and linked to the associated accounts receivable entry with a reference number. This type of automation enables incoming payments to be linked directly to open receivables without a delay in manual processing. The following steps explain how to import customer payments into a file from the bank and how to link these payments to invoices through their reference numbers. - -- Create a sales invoice and assign a unique reference number to the invoice. This reference number will be used by the customer when paying the invoice. - -- Import the payment files that contain customer payments into the cash receipt journal. These files contain the reference numbers received from the bank. The payments are linked to the accounts receivable entry through their reference numbers. - -- Post the cash receipt journal and close the open accounts receivable entries with the applied payments from the file. - -## Reference Number -A reference number is automatically created when an invoice is posted or when an order is posted for invoicing. However, you can enter a reference number manually on a sales journal transaction. This reference number is not based on the reference number options in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. If you enter a reference number for the sales journal, only the validity of the reference number is checked. - -## Vendor Payments -To send electronic bank payments to vendors, you can export domestic or foreign vendor payments into a transfer file that can be sent to the bank. The following steps show how to export vendor payments. - -- Use the **Bank Payments to Send** window to select the vendors for which you want to create payment files. -- Enter payment information for each transaction in the payment journal or use **Suggest Vendor Payments** to create suggested payments. -- Generate and preview the payment report. -- Create a transfer file for domestic or foreign vendor payments. -- Send the payment transfer file to the bank. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finland Local Functionality](finland-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Reference Files](how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Files](how-to-generate-payment-files.md) - [How to: Disregard Payment Discounts](how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/finland-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/finland-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index d6c1416b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/finland-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Finland Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Finnish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Finland Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Finnish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Automatic Account Codes](automatic-account-codes.md) - [Electronic Banking in Finland](electronic-banking-in-finland.md) - [Posting Depreciation Differences](posting-depreciation-differences.md) - [SEPA Credit Transfer Payments](sepa-credit-transfer-payments.md) - [VAT-VIES Declaration in Finland](vat-vies-declaration-in-finland.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3dc7b748..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Disregard Payment Discounts - description: Use the disregard payment discount at full payment feature to accept payments when certain conditions are true. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Disregard Payment Discounts -Use the disregard payment discount at full payment feature to accept payments when the following conditions are true: - -- Payment discount date < payment date <= payment tolerance date -- Full amount >= payment amount >= full amount - payment discount - -## To disregard a payment discount - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line with the payment term for which you want to activate or deactivate payment discounts. -3. Select the **Disreg. Pmt. Disc. at Full Pmt** check box to initiate activation for this feature. To deactivate, clear the check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you apply one payment to multiple invoices, the feature to ignore payment discount at full payment is not supported. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Finland](electronic-banking-in-finland.md) -[How to: Generate Payment Files](how-to-generate-payment-files.md) -[Defining Payment Methods](../../finance-payment-methods.md) -[How to: Work with Payment Tolerances and Payment Discount Tolerances](../../finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md) -[How to: Set Up Bank Reference Files](how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-generate-payment-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-generate-payment-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index d59b4c06..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-generate-payment-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Generate Payment Files - description: To send electronic payments to vendors, you must first generate a payment file for domestic or foreign payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Generate Payment Files -To send electronic payments to vendors, you must first generate a payment file for domestic or foreign payments. - -## To generate a payment file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Payments to Send**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Vendor No.** column, select the vendors to include in the payment file. -3. Enter payment information for each vendor, or choose **Suggest Vendor Payments** to create suggested vendor payment information. -4. Choose the **Domestic payments** or **Foreign payments** action. -5. Choose the **Yes** button to create a payment file. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Finland](electronic-banking-in-finland.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Reference Files](how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md) - [How to: Disregard Payment Discounts](how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-finnish-intrastat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-finnish-intrastat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5f85c846..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-finnish-intrastat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Finnish Intrastat Reports - description: Companies in the European Union (EU) must report the extent of their trade with other EU countries/regions according to specific rules. You must report the movement of goods to the Intrastat authorities in their respective countries/regions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Finnish Intrastat Reports -Companies in the European Union (EU) must report the extent of their trade with other EU countries/regions according to specific rules. You must report the movement of goods to the Intrastat authorities in their respective countries/regions. - -The completed entries can be sent in a file to the Intrastat authorities, or you can print a report and manually enter the information on the forms from the Intrastat authorities. - -## To print a Finnish Intrastat report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the batch name for the Intrastat report. -3. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Checklist Report** action. -4. Choose the **Print** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Intrastat Reporting](../../finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-vat-information-on-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-vat-information-on-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8ae2999d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-print-vat-information-on-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print VAT Information on Invoices - description: You can use posting groups to print VAT information for each item on the sales invoice. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print VAT Information on Invoices -You can use posting groups to print VAT information for each item on the sales invoice. - -## To print VAT information on an invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Group**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter an item code and description. -3. Select **Print VAT info on Invoice** to print the VAT information for each item on the respective sales invoice. -4. Create and post a sales invoice. Choose the **Preview** button to review the invoice and verify that it contains VAT information for each row from the posting group. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Finland](electronic-banking-in-finland.md) - [Setting Up Posting Groups](../../finance-posting-groups.md) - [Setting Up Value-Added Tax](../../finance-setup-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md deleted file mode 100644 index 55dd44d4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Automatic Account Posting Groups (Finland) - description: To use automatic account codes, you must create an automatic account posting group. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Automatic Account Posting Groups (Finland) -To use automatic account codes, you must create an automatic account posting group. - -## To set up automatic account posting groups - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Auto. Acc. Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**No.**|Enter a unique alphanumeric number for the automatic account posting group.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the automatic account posting group.| - -4. On the **Automatic Acc. Line** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Allocation Percentage**|Enter the percentage of the source line amount that is to be allocated.| - |**G/L Account No.**|Enter the general ledger account number to which the allocation should be posted.| - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Total Balance** field totals the **Allocation Percentage** field for automatic account lines in a posting group. If the total allocation percent for a posting group does not balance to zero, an error message will be displayed when the item is posted. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Automatic Account Codes](automatic-account-codes.md) - [Setting Up Posting Groups](../../finance-posting-groups.md) - [Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0bbeec0a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Bank Reference Files - description: To process electronic payments, you must first set up bank reference files to determine how payment data should be imported or exported. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Bank Reference Files -To process electronic payments, you must first set up bank reference files to determine how payment data should be imported or exported. - -## To set up a bank reference file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Reference File Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies a bank account code.| - |**Export Reference Payments**|Enter the full path of the payment file to export.| - |**Import Reference Payments**|Enter the full path of the payment file to import.| - |**Currency Exchange Rate File**|Enter the full path of the currency exchange rate file.| - |**Inform. of Appl. Cr. Memos**|Select to display credits applied to invoices on the payment recipient's account statement.| - -3. On the **Foreign Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Export Foreign Payments**|Enter the full path of the payment file to export to foreign banks.| - |**Due Date Handling**|Select how due date processing should be applied to foreign payments.

**Batch** – All payments in the file receive the same payment date.

–or–

**Transaction** – Each payment in the file receives a transaction-specific payment date. Contact your bank to determine whether this setting should be used.| - |**Default Service Fee Code**|Select a default service fee code for foreign banks.| - |**Default Payment Method**|Select a default payment method for foreign payments.| - |**Exchange Rate Contract No.**|Enter the exchange rate contract number.| - |**Allow Comb. Foreign Pmts.**|Select to combine all foreign payments made to one recipient in one day from the same bank account.| - -4. On the **SEPA** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Bank Party ID**|Enter a SEPA bank party ID. **Note:** This field is only used for the SEPA pain.001.001.02 standard.| - |**File Name**|Enter the full path of the SEPA payment file. **Note:** This field is only used for the SEPA pain.001.001.02 standard.| - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > To export vendor payments using the SEPA standard, you must fill the **Payment Export Format** field in the **Bank Account Card** window. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Finland](electronic-banking-in-finland.md) - [How to: Generate Payment Files](how-to-generate-payment-files.md) - [How to: Disregard Payment Discounts](how-to-disregard-payment-discounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/posting-depreciation-differences.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/posting-depreciation-differences.md deleted file mode 100644 index c82f4901..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/posting-depreciation-differences.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Posting Depreciation Differences - description: In Finland, certain depreciation methods are commonly used for fixed assets. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Posting Depreciation Differences -In Finland, the following depreciation methods are commonly used for fixed assets: - -- Straight-line depreciation which posts fixed assets to the general ledger. -- Declining balance depreciation which does not post fixed assets to the general ledger. - -If two depreciation methods are used, Finnish tax legislation requires that the difference in accumulated depreciation between the different depreciation methods be calculated and posted to the general ledger. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finland Local Functionality](finland-local-functionality.md) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/sepa-credit-transfer-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/sepa-credit-transfer-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2948bac3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/sepa-credit-transfer-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: SEPA Credit Transfer Payments - description: Finnish enhancements allow you to create Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) credit transfer files to send vendor payments to banks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# SEPA Credit Transfer Payments -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes Finnish enhancements to allow you to create Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) credit transfer files to send vendor payments to banks. A SEPA credit transfer is a payment that is transferred according to the file format specified by the European Payments Commission. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finland Local Functionality](finland-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Bank Reference Files](how-to-set-up-bank-reference-files.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/vat-vies-declaration-in-finland.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/vat-vies-declaration-in-finland.md deleted file mode 100644 index 311cb0f4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Finland/vat-vies-declaration-in-finland.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT-VIES Declaration in Finland - description: Finnish enhancements allow you to comply with regulations for VAT and European Union (EU) sales reporting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT-VIES Declaration in Finland -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] provides Finnish enhancements to comply with regulations for VAT and European Union (EU) sales reporting. The **VAT-VIES Declaration Tax Auth** report and the **EC Sales List** report include the **EU Service** field, which allows you to print service-related sales amounts separately from item-related sales amounts based on different posting groups. This information is required in VAT reports for EU third-party trade transactions in 2010 and all subsequent years. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finland Local Functionality](finland-local-functionality.md) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/accelerated-depreciation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/accelerated-depreciation.md deleted file mode 100644 index cabfc7da..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/accelerated-depreciation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Accelerated Depreciation - description: Accelerated depreciation is calculated based on the differences between the accounting depreciation book and the tax depreciation book fixed asset, during the life of the fixed asset. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Accelerated Depreciation -Accelerated depreciation is calculated based on the differences between the accounting depreciation book and the tax depreciation book fixed asset, during the life of the fixed asset. - -Fixed assets that have higher tax depreciation and lower accounting depreciation are depreciated using the accelerated depreciation method, as allowed by the tax authorities. - -Companies must use the accelerated depreciation method to post the extra tax amounts if they meet at least two of the following criteria: - -- They have more than 50 employees. -- They have at least two million euros in assets. -- They have at least four million euros in sales. - -## Depreciation Book -The accelerated depreciation method helps you to calculate and post differences between tax depreciation amounts and accounting depreciation amounts that are allowed for fixed assets. To calculate accelerated depreciation for fixed assets, the following depreciation books must be set up: - -- The accounting depreciation book (integrated with the general ledger). -- The tax depreciation book (not integrated with the general ledger). - -You must set up the tax book as a derogatory book by using an accelerated depreciation setup parameter. If this parameter is set, differences between the tax book and the accounting book are calculated and posted as accelerated depreciation amounts. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md). - -### Example - If you have a fixed asset valued at 1,000 euros that is depreciated in the accounting depreciation book over five years, and depreciated in the tax depreciation book over three years, then the accounting depreciation for the first year is 200 euros (1,000/5) and the tax depreciation for the first year is 333.33 euros (1,000/3). The accelerated depreciation amount is the difference between these two amounts: 133.33 euros (333.33 - 200). - -## Accelerated Depreciation Accounts -Accelerated depreciation uses the derogatory fixed asset posting type. Statistics and reports use this posting type to report the accelerated depreciation calculation. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). - -There are two accounts to set up for derogatory amounts: - -- Positive accelerated depreciation amounts (increase of accelerated depreciation): - - - Derogatory account - - Derogatory expense account - - Negative accelerated depreciation amounts (decrease of accelerated depreciation): - - Derogatory Acc. on Disposal - - Derog. Bal. Acc. on Disposal - -If you post an acquisition, depreciation, or disposal for the accounting depreciation book, the transaction is automatically duplicated and posted in the tax depreciation book when the journal is posted. - -After you set up the tax depreciation book and the accounting depreciation book, the accelerated depreciation is calculated automatically for fixed assets using the calculate depreciation batch job in the accounting depreciation book. For more information, see [How to: Calculate Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md) - [How to: Calculate Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md) - [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) - [France Local Functionality](france-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2b063eb9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years - description: A fiscal year is typically divided into 12 monthly fiscal periods. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can have two fiscal years open at the same time. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years -A fiscal year is typically divided into 12 monthly fiscal periods. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can have two fiscal years open at the same time. You cannot create a third fiscal year if there are two fiscal years open. - -To close a fiscal year, you must close the accounting periods within that year. - -You can only reopen a closed accounting period if the period falls within an open fiscal year. For more information, see [How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md). You cannot reopen a closed fiscal year. - -## Closing Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years -After a fiscal year is complete, you must close the accounting periods within that fiscal year. This is to ensure that general ledger entries are not posted for that period. For more information, see [How to: Fiscally Close Accounting Periods](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md). - -A fiscal year can be closed if all of the following criteria are met: - -- The posting dates in the **User Setup** window and the **General Ledger Setup** window do not fall within the year that you are closing. For more information, see User Setup and General Ledger Setup. - -- The fiscal year has been closed using the **Close Year** function in the **Accounting Periods** window. For more information, see [Closing Years and Periods](../../year-close-years-periods.md). - -- All of the unposted journal lines and simulation entries for the year have been posted or deleted. - -- All closing entries are up to date. - -When you close a fiscal period, the earliest open fiscal period is closed. The **Allow Posting From** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window is updated with the start date for the next open period, if the existing date in this field is not already a later date. If the **Allow Posting To** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window is within the closed period, then the value in the **Allow Posting To** field is updated with the end date for the first open fiscal period. For more information, see General Ledger Setup. - -At the end of the year, you must do the following: - -- Close the fiscal year using the **Close Year** function. -- Generate a year-end closing entry. -- Post the year-end closing entry, along with the offset equity account entries. -- Close the fiscal year using the **Fiscally Close Year** function. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Accounting Periods](how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md) - [Closing Years and Periods](../../year-close-years-periods.md) - [How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) - [How to: Reopen Accounting Periods](how-to-reopen-accounting-periods.md) - [How to: Close Income Statement Accounts](how-to-close-income-statement-accounts.md) - [France Local Functionality](france-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/france-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/france-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index ccb8354b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/france-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: France Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the French version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# France Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the French version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [General Ledger](general-ledger.md) - [Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years](fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md) - [Accelerated Depreciation](accelerated-depreciation.md) - [Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [Simulation of Entries](simulation-of-entries.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index c6d8b99a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: General Ledger (France) - description: Special general ledger functionality exists for the French version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# General Ledger (France) -General ledger functionality for France is described in the below topics. - -## In This Section -[How to: Apply General Ledger Entries](how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries.md) -[How to: Unapply General Ledger Entries](how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md) -[How to: Print General Ledger Reports](how-to-print-general-ledger-reports.md) -[How to: Export General Ledger Entries to an XML File](how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file.md) -[How to: View Ledger Reconciliations](how-to-view-ledger-reconciliations.md) -[How to: Export General Ledger Entries for Tax Audits](how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 24b10dfa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Apply General Ledger Entries - description: You apply general ledger entries to justify ledger balances on asset and liability accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Apply General Ledger Entries -You apply general ledger entries to justify ledger balances on asset and liability accounts. For example, you can apply transactions on the bill of exchange accounts to get a clear picture of which bills make up the balance of the account. - -## To apply general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, select the account that you want to apply entries for, and then choose the **Apply Entries** action. -3. In the **Apply G/L Entries** window, select the ledger entries that you want to apply. -4. Choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action to populate the Applies-to ID field with the user ID of the current user. -5. Choose the **Post Application** action. - -This effectuates the application by setting the Letter and Letter Date fields. - -> [!NOTE] -> Applied entries will be identified by the same three-letter combination and the same date. Balanced entries will be assigned only uppercase letters, and unbalanced entries will be assigned only lowercase letters. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Unapply General Ledger Entries](how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-archive-payment-slips.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-archive-payment-slips.md deleted file mode 100644 index e2577ffc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-archive-payment-slips.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Archive Payment Slips - description: When a payment slip has been processed, you can separate it from the active payment slips by archiving it. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Archive Payment Slips -When a payment slip has been processed, you can separate it from the active payment slips by archiving it. - -You can archive the payment slip by using the following methods: - -- Manually – for individual payment slips. -- Automatically – for a batch of payment slips. - -## To archive a payment slip - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slips**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Select the relevant payment slip, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Payment Slip** window, choose the **Archive** action. -4. Choose the **Yes** button to archive the payment slip. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the current status of the payment slip does not allow archiving, a message is displayed. - -## To archive a batch of payment slips - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Archive Payment Slips**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Archive Payment Slips** window, on the **Payment Header** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -The payment slips are archived. - -> [!NOTE] -> This batch job will only archive payment slips that have the **Archiving Authorized** check box selected in the **Payment Status** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 65ab61ef..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Accelerated Depreciation - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you calculate periodic depreciation for fixed assets by using the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job. The fixed asset depreciation book that is linked to the fixed asset defines the depreciation method, the starting date for depreciation, and the fixed asset posting group that is used in the batch job. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Accelerated Depreciation -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you calculate periodic depreciation for fixed assets by using the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job. The fixed asset depreciation book that is linked to the fixed asset defines the depreciation method, the starting date for depreciation, and the fixed asset posting group that is used in the batch job. - -If a fixed asset depreciation book is integrated with the general ledger, then it is called an *accounting depreciation book*. If a fixed asset depreciation book is not integrated with the general ledger, then it is called a *tax depreciation book*. - -You can only calculate the accelerated depreciation for fixed assets that have an accounting depreciation book and a tax depreciation book. For more information about setting up tax depreciation books and accounting depreciation books for fixed assets, see [How to: Set Up Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md). - -Entries are transferred to the fixed asset general journal when you select an accounting depreciation book in the batch job. Entries are transferred to the fixed asset journal when you select the tax depreciation book. - -## To calculate accelerated depreciation - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Calculate Depreciation**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Calculate Depreciation** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Depreciation Book**|The unique identification code for the accounting depreciation book.| - |**FA Posting Date**|Specify the ending date for the depreciation calculation, if this is the first depreciation entry for the asset. The depreciation starting date that is defined in the **FA Depreciation Books** window is used as the starting date for the depreciation calculation. If you have already depreciated the asset, the fixed asset posting date of the last depreciation entry is used as the starting date for the depreciation calculation.| - |**Use Force No. of Days**|Select to use the number of days in the **Force No. of Days** field for the depreciation calculation.| - |**Force No. of Days**|The number of days for the depreciation calculation. You can only enter a number in this field if the **Use Force No of Days** check box is selected.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the calculated depreciation.

You can leave this field blank if the **Use Same FA + G/L Posting Dates** field in the accounting depreciation book is selected. The posting date is copied to the resulting journal lines.| - |**Document No.**|The document number for the fixed asset journal batch. Leave this field blank if you have set up a numbering series for the fixed asset journal batch in the **No. Series** window. For more information, see No. Series.| - |**Posting Description**|The posting description for the fixed asset journal entries.| - |**Insert Bal. Account**|Select to automatically insert balancing accounts in the resulting journal. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job only uses balancing accounts that are defined in the FA Posting Group.| - -3. On the **Fixed Asset** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The accelerated depreciation for the fixed asset is calculated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accelerated Depreciation](accelerated-depreciation.md) - [How to: Set Up Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md) - [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) - [Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-income-statement-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-income-statement-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8952b78f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-income-statement-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Close Income Statement Accounts (France) - description: Before you can run the **Close Income Statement** batch job, you must close the fiscal year. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Close Income Statement Accounts (France) -Before you can run the **Close Income Statement** batch job, you must close the fiscal year. For more information, see [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md). - -## To close the income statement accounts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Close Income Statement**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Close Income Statement** window, on the **Options** FastTab, specify the conditions of the batch job. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - When the batch job is finished, you must close the accounts. - -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the relevant link. -5. Select the general journal that contains the closing entries. -6. Enter one line with a balancing entry that posts the net income to the correct general ledger account under owners’ equity on the balance sheet. -7. Choose the **Post** action to post the journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-years.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-years.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4eb940aa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-close-years.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Close Years - description: When a fiscal year is over, you must close the periods that it comprises. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Close Years -When a fiscal year is over, you must close the periods that it comprises. - -## To close a year - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Choose the **Close Year** action. - - If more than one fiscal year is open, the earliest one should be closed. A message appears to identify the year that should be closed and explains the consequences of closing it. - -3. To close the year, choose the **Yes** button. - -When the fiscal year is closed, the **Closed** and **Date Locked** fields are selected for all the periods in the year. At this point the fiscal year cannot be opened again, and you cannot clear the **Closed** or **Date Locked** fields. - -> [!WARNING] -> You cannot close a fiscal year before you create a new one. When a fiscal year has been closed, you cannot change the starting date of the following fiscal year. - -Even though a fiscal year has been closed, you can still post general ledger entries to it until you fiscally close the fiscal year. When you do this, the entries will be marked as posted to a closed fiscal year, and the Prior-Year Entry field will be selected. For more information, see [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md). - -After a fiscal year is closed, you must close the income statement accounts and transfer the year's results to an account in the balance sheet. You can repeat this each time you post to the closed fiscal year. - -After a fiscal year is fiscally closed, it cannot be opened again. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) - [Year End Processes Overview](year-end-processes-overview.md) - [How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md) - [Closing Years and Periods](../../year-close-years-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-payment-slips.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-payment-slips.md deleted file mode 100644 index 94672e13..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-payment-slips.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,130 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Payment Slips - description: You can create payments slips to manage vendor and customer payments. Before you create payment slips, you must set up payment classes. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Payment Slips -You can create payments slips to manage vendor and customer payments. Before you create payment slips, you must set up payment classes. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md). - -The following procedure describes how to create payment slips for vendor payments, but the same steps also apply to creating payment slips for customer payments. - -## To create a payment slip for vendors - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slips**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Payment Slip** window, choose a field to open the **Payment Class List** window. -4. Select a payment class, and then choose the **OK** button. -5. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Currency Code**|Specify the currency code to be used for the payment lines.| - |**Posting Date**|Specify the posting date.| - |**Document Date**|Specify the document date.| - |**Amount (LCY)**|The total amount from the payment lines. This field is updated automatically when the net line amounts are changed.

| - -6. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Account Type**|The account type to which the payment line is posted.| - |**Account No.**|The unique identification number for the account to which the entry will be posted.| - -7. In the **Bank Account Code** field, select a bank name from the list, and then choose **Advanced**. -8. Optionally, for SEPA, in the **Select – Vendor Account List** window, and then choose the **Edit** action. - - Fill in the following fields if needed: - - - **Country/Region Code**. In the list, choose **Advanced**, and make sure that the **SEPA Allowed** check box is selected for the code that you select. - - **Swift Code** - - **IBAN** - - Choose the **OK** button to close the window. - -9. Optionally, for SEPA, choose the **Header RIB** action. Select the **Bank Country/Region Code** field, and then choose **Advanced**. Make sure the **SEPA Allowed** check box is selected. Also make sure that the **IBAN** and **SWIFT Code** fields are filled in. - -10. Choose the **Suggest Vendor Payments** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also manually fill in the payment lines. - -11. In the **Suggest Vendor Payments** batch job, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Last Payment Date**|The last payment date for the vendor ledger entries that are to be included in the batch job.| - |**Find Payment Discounts**|Select to include vendor ledger entries for which you can receive a payment discount.| - |**Summarize per**|The criteria for summarizing the payment line.| - |**Use Vendor Priority**|Select to sort the suggested payments based on the value in the **Priority** field on the vendor cards. For more information, see Priority.| - |**Available Amount (LCY)**|The maximum amount that is available for payments in local currency.| - |**Currency Filter**|The code for the currency to be included in the batch job.| - -12. On the **Vendor** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -13. Choose the **OK** button. - - The payment lines are automatically created. - -14. In the **Payment Slip** window, on the **Posting** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Source Code**|The source code for the payment slip.| - |**Department Code**|The relevant dimension code.| - |**Project Code**|The relevant dimension code.| - |**Account Type**|The account type to which or from which the payments will be transferred.| - |**Account No.**|The account number to which or from which the payments will be transferred.| - -15. Optionally, for SEPA, in the **Account No.** field, choose the **Advanced** option. - - 1. In the **Bank Account List** window, choose the **Edit** action. - 2. Fill in the following fields if needed: - - - **General** FastTab - - **Country/Region Code** - - **Transfer** FastTab - - **Swift Code** - - **IBAN** - - **RIB** FastTab - - **Payment Export Format**: SEPA - - **SEPA CT Msg. ID No. Series**: Bank - -16. Choose the **OK** button. - -After you create a payment slip, you can generate payment files and send them to the bank electronically. - -> [!NOTE] -> A payment file can be created if the payment slip displays **File** for the **Action Type** field. - -## To create a payment file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slips**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Select a payment slip, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Payment Slip** window, choose the **Generate file** action. -4. Choose the **Yes** button, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The payment file is generated and exported according to the export type that is specified in the **Payment Step** window. - -5. In the case of error, review the errors listed in the **File Export Errors** FactBox, and take the appropriate action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-simulation-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-simulation-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 87856c03..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-create-simulation-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Simulation Entries - description: When you have set up simulation of general ledger entries, you can create simulation entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Simulation Entries -When you have set up simulation of general ledger entries, you can create simulation entries. - -## To create simulation entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Select the general journal template which has been set up for the Simulation functionality. -3. Select a general journal batch in the **Batch Name** field. -4. Create your transactions as in any journal. -5. Post the journal. -6. To see the results of posting, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Simulation Registers**, and then choose the related link. -7. Select the most recent register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Simulation](how-to-set-up-simulation.md) - [How to: Transfer Simulation Entries](how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md) - [How to: Delete Simulation Entries](how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2f5a00be..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Delete Simulation Entries - description: You can create and post simulation entries to the general ledger without affecting the real accounting, and you can delete the simulated entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Delete Simulation Entries -You can create and post simulation entries to the general ledger without affecting the real accounting, and you can delete the simulated entries. - -## To delete simulation entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Simulation Registers**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Select the simulation register that you want to delete, and then choose the **Delete** action. - -This deletes the register entry and the general ledger entries that are linked to it. A dialog box appears in which you must choose the **Yes** button to confirm. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Simulation](how-to-set-up-simulation.md) - [How to: Create Simulation Entries](how-to-create-simulation-entries.md) - [How to: Transfer Simulation Entries](how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md deleted file mode 100644 index d5cfbc5c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-for-tax-audits.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export General Ledger Entries for Tax Audits - description: The standard audit file for tax purposes records key business information (transactions and ledger postings) into a file in a specified common format for audit purposes. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export General Ledger Entries for Tax Audits -The standard audit file for tax purposes records key business information (transactions and ledger postings) into a file in a specified common format for audit purposes. In France, you are required to provide the government with this information in a standard audit file beginning in January 2014. This applies to companies for both corporate tax and VAT audit purposes. - -In general, the report is designed to provide information on account types that include posted entries. - -You can choose to include opening balances in the file, but these are not actual entries that are posted in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] calculates the opening balance by using the entries for a given account up to the starting date that you have specified for the file. The closing entries generated by the closing prior year end process are also included in the calculation. The opening balances are then mapped into the required fields of the report. - -If you do not close your fiscal year or do not run the **Close Year** action before generating the report, income statement accounts will still have balances, which will be reported in the file. - -> [!NOTE] -> Opening balances are only included in the report for accounts that have a balance not equal to zero. You can identify opening balances by the following values in the fields: -> -> - JournalCode = 0 -> - JournalLib = BALANCE OUVERTURE -> - EcritureNum = 0 -> - EcritureLib = Accounts prefixed with BAL OUV -> - ValidDate = Start date specified on the report's request page - -## To export general ledger entries to a text file for a tax audit - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Export G/L Entries – Tax Audit**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Export G/L Entries – Tax Audit** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|Enter the date to use as the starting date for the time period to be covered by the audit.| - |**Ending Date**|Enter the date to use as the ending date for the time period to be covered by the audit.| - |**Include Opening Balances**|Select if you want to include opening balances in the audit report file. The balances are calculated as of the date before the first date of the period covered by the report.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button to export the file. - -When you create the report, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] sorts the information in the report by the **No.** and **Creation Date** fields in the general ledger register. - -The report will have the following name: <FEC< - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9a5afdff..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export General Ledger Entries to an XML File - description: You can export financial transactions for a particular period to an XML file for external archiving. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export General Ledger Entries to an XML File -You can export financial transactions for a particular period to an XML file for external archiving. After the closing of the fiscal year, you can export the general ledger transactions for the closed year by applying the correct date filter and then exporting the financial transactions within the specified period to the XML file. The XML file includes all the general ledger transaction information, such as document posting date, document type, document number, account type, account number, credit amount, and debit amount retrieved from the **General Journal** window. - -## To export general ledger entries to an XML file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Export G/L Entries to XML**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Export G/L Entries to XML** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|Sets the starting date to export the financial transactions.| - |**Ending Date**|Sets the ending date to export the financial transactions.| - -3. To export the file, choose the **OK** button. - -You can save the generated file to a specified location, or you can open the file. - -> [!WARNING] -> If you have set the start date and end date to include the entire fiscal year, the process can take several minutes. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Print General Ledger Reports](how-to-print-general-ledger-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md deleted file mode 100644 index 58d3b0f3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters - description: You can export or import payment management setup parameters to an external disk so that you can use the same parameters for another company with similar requirements. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters -You can export or import payment management setup parameters to an external disk so that you can use the same parameters for another company with similar requirements. - -You can use the following formats to export payment setup parameters: - -- ETEBAC (XMLport 10860) – To create a bill of exchange remittance. -- Withdraw (XMLport 10861) – To create a customer payment withdrawal (direct debit). -- Transfer (XMLport 10862) – To create a vendor payment transfer (credit transfer). - -You can select these formats when you set up the payment status for your payment class. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md). - -## To export or import payment management setup parameters - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slip Setup**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Payment Class** window, choose the **Export Parameters** action. - - To import a parameter, choose the **Import Parameter** action, select the file, and then choose the **Open** button. - -3. Choose the **Save** button to open the **Save As** window and navigate to the location where the file should be saved. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 15457d0b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-export-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export Payments - description: The Payment Management module allows you to export your payments electronically via a text file or XMLport. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Payments -The Payment Management module allows you to export your payments electronically via a text file or XMLport. - -## To export payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slip Setup**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Payment Class** window, select a payment class, and then choose the **Steps** action. -3. In the **Payment Step** window, fill in the **Name** field. -4. Choose the **Edit** action to open. -5. In the **Payment Step Card** window, fill in the fields. -6. In the **Action Type** field, select the **File** option, and then in the **Export Type** field, select the **Report** or the **XMLport** action. -7. In the **Export No.** field, specify the object that will export the payments. - -The next time you make a payment that is based on this payment step, the payments will be exported to a file as specified. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 70b8b226..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Fiscally Close Accounting Periods - description: When a fiscal period is complete, you can fiscally close the period to make sure that no more general ledger entries can be posted. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Fiscally Close Accounting Periods -When a fiscal period is complete, you can fiscally close the period to make sure that no more general ledger entries can be posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> When a period is being closed, any simulation entries that may exist are found and deleted. - -## To fiscally close accounting periods - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Accounting Periods** window, choose the **Close Fiscal Period** action. - - If more than one fiscal period is not fiscally closed, the earliest one should be fiscally closed. A message appears to identify the period that should be closed and explains the consequences of closing it. - -3. To fiscally close the period, choose the **Yes** button. - -When the period is fiscally closed, the Fiscally Closed field is selected, and the Fiscal Closing Date field is updated for the period. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) - [How to: Reopen Accounting Periods](how-to-reopen-accounting-periods.md) - [Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years](fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-years.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-years.md deleted file mode 100644 index 629fd410..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-fiscally-close-years.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Fiscally Close Years - description: When a fiscal year is complete, you must fiscally close the periods that it comprises to make sure that no more general ledger entries can be posted. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 10/21/2020 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Fiscally Close Years -When a fiscal year is complete, you must fiscally close the periods that it comprises to make sure that no more general ledger entries can be posted. - -Before fiscal closing is allowed the following must be done: - -- The fiscal year has been closed first. For more information, see [How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md). -- All journal lines that are not posted and all simulation entries for the year are either posted or deleted before the year is fiscally closed. -- All closing entries are up-to-date. - -## To fiscally close years - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. On the **Navigate** tab, in the **Fiscal Closing** group, choose the **Fiscally Close Year** check box. - - If more than one fiscal year is not fiscally closed, the earliest one should be fiscally closed. A message appears that identifies the year that should be closed and explains the consequences of closing it. - -3. To fiscally close the year, choose the **Yes** button. - -When the fiscal year is fiscally closed, the **Fiscally Closed** field for all the periods in the year is selected. The fiscally closed year cannot be opened again, and you cannot clear the **Fiscally Closed** field. - -General journal entries can still be posted as long as the **Allow posting from** and **Allow posting to** fields in the posting setup for the relevant users are within the posting date of the entry. Once posted, this will be tagged as prior-year entry on the general ledger entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) - [Year End Processes Overview](year-end-processes-overview.md) - [How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md) - [Closing Years and Periods](../../year-close-years-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-open-a-new-fiscal-year-duplicate.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-open-a-new-fiscal-year-duplicate.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4d109b98..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-open-a-new-fiscal-year-duplicate.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Open a New Fiscal Year - description: Before you can post in a fiscal year, you must open the fiscal year and define its accounting periods. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Open a New Fiscal Year -Before you can post in a fiscal year, you must open the fiscal year and define its accounting periods. - -## To open a new fiscal year - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Choose the **Create Year** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, define the structure of the fiscal year. The fiscal year is usually 12 periods of one month each, but you can also divide it in other ways. -4. Fill in the fields. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -The accounting periods are created, and the result is shown. The **Starting Date** field and the **Name** field are filled in with the name of the month from the starting date. - -After the last period in the fiscal year, an accounting period is inserted with the **New Fiscal Year** field selected. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> In concordance with French law no more than two open fiscal years are allowed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Specify Posting Periods](how-to-specify-posting-periods.md) - [How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) - [How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) - [Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years](fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-payment-slips.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-payment-slips.md deleted file mode 100644 index db99a0aa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-payment-slips.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Payment Slips - description: You must post payment slips to complete a payment transaction and to create the related financial data. You can post a payment slip if the payment slip's **Action Type** is set to **Ledger**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Payment Slips -You must post payment slips to complete a payment transaction and to create the related financial data. You can post a payment slip if the payment slip's **Action Type** is set to **Ledger**. - -Before you post a payment slip, you must create the payment slip. For more information, see [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md). - -## To post a payment slip - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slips**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Select a payment slip, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Payment Slip** window, choose the **Post** action. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The payment slip is posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md deleted file mode 100644 index d63baae2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post the Year-End Closing Entry (France) - description: After you use the **Close Income Statement** batch job to generate the year-end closing entry or entries, you must review and post the entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry (France) -After you use the **Close Income Statement** batch job to generate the year-end closing entry or entries, you must open the journal you specified in the batch job, and then review and post the entries. - -## To post the year-end closing entry - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Review the entries. -3. Choose the **Post** action. -4. In the posting confirmation window, choose the **Yes** button. - -If an error is detected, an error message is displayed. If the posting is successful, the system removes the posted entries from the journal. - -Once posted, an entry is posted to each income statement account so that its balance becomes zero and the year's result is transferred to the balance sheet. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Year End Processes Overview](year-end-processes-overview.md) - [How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-print-general-ledger-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-print-general-ledger-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7bc8f44b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-print-general-ledger-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print General Ledger Reports - description: General ledger reports meet financial accounting standards, and they contain information about ledger entries, simulation entries, customer entries, vendor entries, and bank entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print General Ledger Reports -General ledger reports meet financial accounting standards, and they contain information about ledger entries, simulation entries, customer entries, vendor entries, and bank entries. - -## To print general ledger reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Choose the **Reports and Analysis** action, choose the **France** action, and then choose one of the following reports. - - |Report|Description| - |------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Journals**|- Shows all of the general ledger transactions.
- Shows the subtotals of the transactions per period.

For more information, see Journals.| - |**G/L Journal**|Shows the subtotals for each source code per month.

For more information, see G-L Journal.| - |**G/L Trial Balance**|Shows opening debit and credit balances, period debit and credit balances, and final debit and credit balances for all general ledger accounts.

For more information, see G-L Trial Balance.| - |**G/L Detail Trial Balance**|- Shows the general ledger transactions for all general ledger accounts.
- Shows the subtotals of the transactions per general ledger account.

For more information, see G-L Detail Trial Balance.| - |**Customer Journal**|- Shows the transactions of all customer accounts.
- Show the subtotals of the customer transactions per period.

For more information, see Customer Journal.| - |**Customer Trial Balance**|Shows opening debit and credit balances, period debit and credit balances, and final debit and credit balances for all customer accounts.

For more information, see Customer Trial Balance.| - |**Customer Trial Balance**|- Shows all of the transactions for all customer accounts.
- Shows the subtotals of the customer transactions per account.

For more information, see Customer Trial Balance.| - |**Vendor Journal**|- Shows the transactions for all vendor accounts.
- Shows the subtotals of the vendor transactions per period.

For more information, see Vendor Journal.| - |**Vendor Trial Balance**|Shows opening debit and credit balances, period debit and credit balances, and final debit and credit balances for all vendor accounts.

For more information, see Vendor Trial Balance.| - |**Vendor Detail Trial Balance**|- Shows transactions for all vendor accounts.
- Show the subtotals of the vendor transactions per account.

For more information, see Vendor Detail Trial Balance.| - |**Bank Account Journal**|- Shows transactions for all bank accounts.
- Shows the subtotals of the bank transactions per period.

For more information, see Bank Account Journal.| - |**Bank Account Trial Balance**|Shows opening debit and credit balances, period debit and credit balances, and final debit and credit balances for all bank accounts.

For more information, see Bank Account Trial Balance.| - |**Bank Acc. Detail Trial Balance**|- Shows transactions for all bank accounts.
- Shows the subtotals of the transactions per account.

For more information, see Bank Acc. Detail Trial Balance.| - -3. On the **Options** FastTab, enter information in the relevant fields, and then select the appropriate filters. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Options** FastTab is not available for the **G/L Journal** batch job. - -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report, or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Export General Ledger Entries to an XML File](how-to-export-general-ledger-entries-to-an-xml-file.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-reopen-accounting-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-reopen-accounting-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 869e68a4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-reopen-accounting-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Reopen Accounting Periods - description: When a single fiscal period has been fiscally closed it might be necessary to reopen it to post general ledger entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reopen Accounting Periods -When a single fiscal period has been fiscally closed it might be necessary to reopen it to post general ledger entries. - -> [!NOTE] -> After the year that the accounting period belongs to is fiscally closed, you cannot reopen it. - -## To reopen accounting periods - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Choose the **Reopen Fiscal Period** action. - - If more than one fiscal period is fiscally closed, the last one should be reopened. A message appears that identifies the period that should be reopened and explains the consequences of reopening it. - -3. To fiscally open the period, choose the **Yes** button. - -When the period is reopened, the **Fiscally Closed** field is cleared, and the **Period Reopened Date** field is updated for the period. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Close Years](how-to-close-years.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Years](how-to-fiscally-close-years.md) - [How to: Fiscally Close Accounting Periods](how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 12f6131d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-accelerated-depreciation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Accelerated Depreciation - description: To use the accelerated depreciation calculation, you must set up depreciation books for fixed assets. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Accelerated Depreciation -To use the accelerated depreciation calculation, you must set up the following depreciation books for fixed assets: - -- The accounting depreciation book (integrated with the general ledger). -- The tax depreciation book (not integrated with the general ledger). - -> [!NOTE] -> When you post an acquisition, depreciation, or disposal for the accounting depreciation book, the transaction is duplicated and posted in the tax depreciation book when the fixed asset journal is posted. - -## To set up the accounting depreciation book - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Depreciation Book List** window, choose ¨the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The unique identification code for the accounting depreciation book. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|The depreciation book description.| - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > Leave the **Derogatory Calculation** field blank. - -4. On the **Integration** FastTab, select the **Derogatory** check box to integrate accelerated depreciation with the general ledger. - - For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up the tax depreciation book - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Depreciation Book List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The unique identification code for the tax depreciation book. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|The tax depreciation book description.| - -4. In the **Derogatory Calculation** field, select the accounting depreciation book code to indicate that this is a tax depreciation book to calculate derogatory depreciation. - - For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -The **Used with Derogatory Book** field in the accounting depreciation book is updated with the tax depreciation book code. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accelerated Depreciation](accelerated-depreciation.md) - [How to: Calculate Accelerated Depreciation](how-to-calculate-accelerated-depreciation.md) -[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7ffd5781..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Payment Addresses - description: To use payment management, you must set up payment addresses that will be used for vendors and customers at the time of settlement. The payment address can differ from the default address. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Payment Addresses -To use payment management, you must set up payment addresses that will be used for vendors and customers at the time of settlement. The payment address can differ from the default address. - -The following procedure describes how to set up a payment address for a vendor, but the same steps apply to setting up a payment address for a customer. - -## To set up a payment address - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. Select a vendor, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Payment Addresses** action. -4. Fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The payment address code.| - |**Default Value**|Select to use this address as the default payment address. You can select one default payment address.| - |**Name**|The name associated with the payment address.| - |**Address**|The payment address.| - - 5. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> If a payment address is not set up, the address in the vendor or customer card is set as the default value. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md)s diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md deleted file mode 100644 index ba2f2491..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Payment Classes - description: To use payment management, you must set up payment classes to define operation types, such as bills of exchange, electronic payments, or checks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Payment Classes -To use payment management, you must set up payment classes to define operation types, such as bills of exchange, electronic payments, or checks. - -## To set up a payment class - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slip Setup**, and then choose the relevant link. -2. In the **Payment Class** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Enable**|Select to enable usage of the payment class.| - |**Code**|The unique identification code for the payment class.| - |**Name**|The payment class description.| - |**Header No. Series**|The number series code for the payment slip header.| - |**Line No. Series**|The number series code for the payment slip lines. If you leave this field blank, the number for each payment line is created based on the payment header number.| - |**Suggestions**|The type of payment proposals that can be created automatically on a payment slip.| - |**Unrealized VAT Reversal**|Specify the method to handle unrealized VAT.

If you select **Application**, VAT will be realized when you post the invoice application and payment application.

If you select **Delayed**, you must define the payment step during which VAT must be realized, by selecting the **Realize VAT** field in the **Payment Step Card** window. For more information, see Realize VAT and Payment Step.| - |**SEPA Transfer Type**|Specify the SEPA export format, either **Credit Transfer** or **Direct Debit**.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md deleted file mode 100644 index a9a00518..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Payment Statuses (France) - description: To use payment management, you must set up payment statuses to define payment document progress levels and statuses for each payment class. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Payment Statuses (France) -To use payment management, you must set up payment statuses to define payment document progress levels. You must define a set of statuses for each payment class. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md). - -## To set up payment statuses - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slip Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a payment class, and then choose the **Status** action. -3. In the **Payment Status** window, choose the **New** action. -4. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|The payment status description.| - |**RIB**|Select to indicate that information about the Relevé d Identité Bancaire (RIB) statement for the customer or vendor must be displayed in the payment lines. The RIB information includes the bank branch number, agency code, bank account number, bank name, RIB key, and key verification.| - |**Look**|Select to indicate that the payment document lines that have reached this payment status can be edited and viewed in the **View/Edit Payment Line** window.

For more information, see View-Edit Payment Line.| - |**ReportMenu**|Select to indicate that the documents that have reached this payment status can be printed.| - |**Amount**|Select to display the amount in the payment lines.| - |**Payment in Progress**|Select to indicate that all billing and payment lines with this status must be considered when calculating the payments in progress.| - |**Archiving Authorized**|Select to indicate that payment headers with this payment status can be archived.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md deleted file mode 100644 index e73e9e33..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Payment Statuses In France - description: To use payment management, you must set up payment statuses to define payment document progress levels. You must define a set of statuses for each payment class. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Payment Statuses In France -To use payment management, you must set up payment statuses to define payment document progress levels. You must define a set of statuses for each payment class. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md). - -## To set up payment statuses - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Slip Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a payment class, and then choose the **Status** action. -3. In the **Payment Status** window, choose the **New** action. -4. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|The payment status description.| - |**RIB**|Select to indicate that information about the Relevé d Identité Bancaire (RIB) statement for the customer or vendor must be displayed in the payment lines. The RIB information includes the bank branch number, agency code, bank account number, bank name, RIB key, and key verification.| - |**Look**|Select to indicate that the payment document lines that have reached this payment status can be edited and viewed in the **View/Edit Payment Line** window.

For more information, see View-Edit Payment Line.| - |**ReportMenu**|Select to indicate that the documents that have reached this payment status can be printed.| - |**Amount**|Select to display the amount in the payment lines.| - |**Payment in Progress**|Select to indicate that all billing and payment lines with this status must be considered when calculating the payments in progress.| - |**Archiving Authorized**|Select to indicate that payment headers with this payment status can be archived.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Management](payment-management.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-simulation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-simulation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1aabddcd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-set-up-simulation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Simulation - description: You can create and post simulation entries to the general ledger without affecting the real accounting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Simulation -You can create and post simulation entries to the general ledger without affecting the real accounting. - -Before you can start to use the simulation functionality, you must set up a source code and a number series, and you must add this information to a general journal template. - -## To set up simulation - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Source Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Source Codes** window, create a new record and fill in the fields. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > Select the **Simulation** field. - -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **No. Series**, and then choose the related link for the **Setup** area. -4. In the **No. Series** window, create a new record and fill in the fields. Drill down on the **Starting No.** field to set up additional information for the number series. -5. Select the **Default Nos.** field and the **Manual Nos.** field. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -7. In the **General Journal Templates** window, create a new record and fill in the fields. In the **Type** field, select General, and specify your new number series and source code in the **No. Series** field and the **Source Code** field. - -Now you can create simulation entries using the general journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Simulation Entries](how-to-create-simulation-entries.md) - [How to: Delete Simulation Entries](how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md) - [How to: Transfer Simulation Entries](how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-specify-posting-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-specify-posting-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9afaf0b1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-specify-posting-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Specify Posting Periods In France - description: When you specify posting periods, you limit the period in which posting is allowed. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Specify Posting Periods (France) -When you specify posting periods, you limit the period in which posting is allowed. - -## To specify posting periods (France) - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, on the **General** tab, in the **Allow Posting From** field, specify the start date of the posting period. -3. In the **Allow Posting To** field, specify the end date of the posting period. - - The dates are validated against the allowed posting ranges to make sure that they belong to open fiscal years. For more information, see Allowed Posting Range. - -4. To verify what the allowed posting range is, choose the **Get Allowed Posting Range** action. - -The dates that you define here apply to the whole company, that is, to all users. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can define different posting periods for different users and apply a posting period to a user in the **User Setup** window. - -If you enter dates here, the dates entered on the **General** tab in the **General Ledger Setup** window will not apply to these users. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years](fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index f1d14708..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Transfer Simulation Entries - description: When you have created and posted simulation entries to the general ledger, you can transfer the simulation entries into real accounting entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Transfer Simulation Entries -When you have created and posted simulation entries to the general ledger, you can transfer the simulation entries into real accounting entries. - -> [!NOTE] -> You transfer simulated entries to the general ledger but create new general journal entries that must be posted manually, and delete the original simulation entries. - -## To transfer simulation entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Simulation Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the simulation register that you want to transfer, and then choose the **Transfer** action. -3. Select the general journal template and general journal batch that you want to transfer the entries to, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. In the window that appears, choose the **Yes** button to confirm the deletion of the simulation entries. -5. Open the relevant general journal and post the newly created journal entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Simulation](how-to-set-up-simulation.md) - [How to: Create Simulation Entries](how-to-create-simulation-entries.md) - [How to: Delete Simulation Entries](how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index db60b81c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Unapply General Ledger Entries - description: You can unapply general ledger entries in a very straightforward way. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Unapply General Ledger Entries -You can unapply general ledger entries in a very straightforward way. - -## To unapply general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, select the account you want to unapply entries for, and then choose the **Apply Entries** action. -3. In the **Apply G/L Entries** window, select the ledger entries you want to unapply. -4. Choose the **Unapply Entries** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Apply General Ledger Entries](how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-view-ledger-reconciliations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-view-ledger-reconciliations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9173bad2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/how-to-view-ledger-reconciliations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Ledger Reconciliations - description: Two reports can help you reconcile general ledger entries with customer ledger entries and vendor ledger entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Ledger Reconciliations -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes two reports that can help you reconcile general ledger entries with customer ledger entries and vendor ledger entries. The reports print a separate page for each customer or vendor that sums up amounts from general ledger transactions based on payments and posted invoices. - -The following procedure applies to viewing reconciliation between the general ledger and the customer ledger, but the same steps apply to reconciliation with the vendor ledger. - -## To view general ledger reconciliation with the customer ledger - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger**, and then choose the related link in **General Ledger**. -2. Choose the **Reports** action, choose the **France** action, and then choose the **GL/Cust. Ledger Reconciliation** action. -3. In the **GL/Cust. Ledger Reconciliation** window, set the appropriate filters. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must specify a date filter. - -4. Choose the **Preview** button. - -You can now view the debit and credit amounts for each customer, and you can see the document numbers that resulted in each general ledger transaction. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[France Local Functionality](france-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/payment-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/payment-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6ef4fcfe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/payment-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payment Management - description: You can manage bills of exchange, electronic payments, and vendor payments using the payment management function. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payment Management -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] allows you to manage bills of exchange, electronic payments, and vendor payments using the payment management function. - -You can manage customer and vendor payments using payment slips. Before you create a payment slip, you must set up the following prerequisites: - -- Payment class – The type of payment that you want to perform, for example, bill of exchange, electronic payment, or check. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md). - -- Payment status – The progress level of a payment document. You must define a set of statuses for each payment class. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md). - -- Payment steps – A payment that is executed at a specified time. After a payment step is completed, you can move the payment document from one status to another. If a step involves posting debit or credit entries, you must define additional actions in the **Payment Step Ledger** table. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md). - -- Payment address for vendors and customers – The address that is used for a vendor or a customer at the time of settlement. The payment address can be different from the vendor’s or customer's default address. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md). - -You can also transfer your payment management setup information to an external disk so that you can use the same parameters for another company with similar requirements. You can export the payment data in the following formats: - -- ETEBAC – To create a bill of exchange remittance. -- Withdraw – To create a customer payment withdrawal (direct debit). -- Transfer – To create a vendor payment transfer (credit transfer). - -## Managing Payment Slips and Files -You can create payment slips to manage customer payments and vendor payments. After creating the payment slip, you must post it. - -These payment slips can then be converted into payment files, which can be sent to the bank electronically. - -For more information, see [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md). - -## Archiving Payment Slips -You can separate a fully processed payment slip from the active payment slips by archiving it. You can manually archive an individual payment slip or you can automatically archive a batch of payment slips. For more information, see [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Payment Classes](how-to-set-up-payment-classes.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Statuses](how-to-set-up-payment-statuses.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Steps](how-to-set-up-payment-steps.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Addresses](how-to-set-up-payment-addresses.md) - [How to: Create Payment Slips](how-to-create-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Post Payment Slips](how-to-post-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Archive Payment Slips](how-to-archive-payment-slips.md) - [How to: Export or Import Payment Management Setup Parameters](how-to-export-or-import-payment-management-setup-parameters.md) - [France Local Functionality](france-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/requirements-for-reporting-declaration-of-trade-in-goods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/requirements-for-reporting-declaration-of-trade-in-goods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3bbc2bba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/requirements-for-reporting-declaration-of-trade-in-goods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Requirements for Reporting Declaration of Trade in Goods - description: This topic shows a list of required fields that are needed for reporting Declaration of Trade in Goods (DEB) based on the DTI+ format. For more information, see Export DEB DTI. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Requirements for Reporting Declaration of Trade in Goods -This topic shows a list of required fields that are needed for reporting Declaration of Trade in Goods (DEB) based on the DTI+ format. For more information, see Export DEB DTI. - -The following fields are required for reporting DEB: - -- **CISD** from the **Company Information** table. -- **Registration No.** from the **Company Information** table. -- **VAT Registration No.** from the **Company Information** table. -- **Name** from the **Company Information** table. -- **Date** for the statistics period from the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** table. -- **Transaction Specification** from the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** table. -- **Quantity** from the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** table must be greater than 0. -- **Statistical Value** from the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** table must be greater than 0. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Export DEB DTI** report exports shipments and receipts in one batch. If you want to report only shipments or receipts, then you must set a filter to remove the lines that are not needed in the **Intrastat Journal** table. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[France Local Functionality](france-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/simulation-of-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/simulation-of-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index e4fe7a62..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/simulation-of-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Simulation of Entries - description: Functionality for France includes the ability to simulate posted entries before posting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Simulation of Entries -Functionality to simulate posted entries before posting is described in the below topics. - -## In This Section -[How to: Set Up Simulation](how-to-set-up-simulation.md) -[How to: Create Simulation Entries](how-to-create-simulation-entries.md) -[How to: Delete Simulation Entries](how-to-delete-simulation-entries.md) -[How to: Transfer Simulation Entries](how-to-transfer-simulation-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/year-end-processes-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/year-end-processes-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6b6f9775..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/France/year-end-processes-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Year End Processes Overview - description: Year end closing in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] involves three steps. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Year End Processes Overview -Year end closing in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] involves three steps: - -1. Closing the fiscal year. For more information, see [How to: Fiscally Close Accounting Periods](how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md). -2. Generating a year-end closing entry using the **Close Income Statement** option along with the offsetting equity account entries. For more information, see [Posting the year-end closing entry](how-to-post-the-year-end-closing-entry.md). -3. Fiscally closing the fiscal year. For more information, see [How to: Fiscally Close Accounting Periods](how-to-fiscally-close-accounting-periods.md). - -According to the French law *NF Logiciel compatibilité informatisée* the system has to refuse the creation of a third open fiscal year, so only two open fiscal years are allowed at the same time. - -So in time you are required to close a year. You also do not have to worry about losing details of transactions when you close because all details are retained, even after you (fiscally) close the year. - -When you close at the end of the year, the system moves your earnings from calculated earnings, or the Current Earnings account, to a posted account, or the Retained Earnings account. The system also marks the fiscal year as "closed," and marks all subsequent entries for the closed year as "prior year entries." - -The system then generates a closing entry, but it does not post the entry automatically. You are given the opportunity to make the offsetting equity account entry or entries, which allows you to decide how to allocate your closing entry. For example, if your company has several divisions, you can let the system generate a single closing entry for all the divisions, and you can then make an offsetting entry for each division's equity account. - -Once a year has been fiscally closed you will not be able to post in this fiscal year. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fiscal Periods and Fiscal Years](fiscal-periods-and-fiscal-years.md) - [Closing Years and Periods](../../year-close-years-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/currency-exchange-rates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/currency-exchange-rates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 11146ebf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/currency-exchange-rates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Currency Exchange Rates - description: At the end of the fiscal year, you must adjust currency exchange rates for payables and receivables so that they are valued correctly in the annual balance. The **Adjust Exchange Rates** batch job supports different valuation methods in order to meet legal requirements in Germany. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Currency Exchange Rates -At the end of the fiscal year, you must adjust currency exchange rates for payables and receivables so that they are valued correctly in the annual balance. The **Adjust Exchange Rates** batch job supports different valuation methods in order to meet legal requirements in Germany. - -## Valuation Methods -According to the Bilanz Modernisierungs Gesetz (BilMoG), payables and receivables are valued differently depending on the difference between the reference date and the due date. This is managed by the **Adjust Exchange Rates** batch job where you can specify which valuation method to use. If the due date is less than one year after the reference date, the **Adjust Exchange Rates** batch job must be run using the lowest value valuation method. - -The following table describes the valuation methods. - -|Valuation method|Description| -|----------------------|---------------------------------------| -|BilMoG (Germany)|Beginning in 2010, each ledger entry is adjusted as follows:

- If the due date is less than one year after the reference date, payable/receivable transactions are valued at the actual exchange rate.
- If the due date is more than one year after the reference date, payable/receivable transactions are valued at the lowest value, with the possibility of appreciation in value (Wertaufholung) up to the initial value. **Note:** Ledger entries must contain a due date. An entry that does not have a due date is treated as a long term liability.| -|Lowest value|Exchange rates are adjusted by using the lowest value of the two exchange rates. Currency losses are always calculated and posted. Currency gains are only calculated and posted up to the original local currency value of the transaction.

This ensures that receivables are not valued above their original posting amounts, and that payables are not valued below their original posting amounts.| -|Standard|Exchange rates are adjusted according to standard valuation principles. Full unrealized gains and losses are calculated and posted. If the transaction is partially applied, only the remaining amount is included in the adjustment. For more information, see Adjust Exchange Rates.| - -German companies must use the **BilMoG (Germany)** option when they run the **Adjust Exchange Rates** batch job. This ensures that each transaction is adjusted using the appropriate valuation method as required in Germany. This also enables two fields in the request window, where you can specify the two dates that must be used to calculate the adjustment. The following table describes the fields. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Valuation Reference Date**|Specifies the base date that is used to calculate which entries are short-term entries.| -|**Short term liabilities until**|Specifies the date that separates short-term entries from long-term entries. Short-term entries have a due date that is before or on this date. The default value is the value of the **Valuation Reference Date** field plus one year.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates](../../finance-how-update-currencies.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index e526a91a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Delivery Reminders (Germany) - description: Delivery reminders are used to track overdue vendor shipments, and to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Delivery Reminders (Germany) -Delivery reminders are used to track overdue vendor shipments, and to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. To create delivery reminders, you must set up the following: - -- Delivery reminder terms - - Delivery reminder terms are identified by a code that must be assigned to vendors. To use more than one combination of settings, you must set up a code for each setting separately. You can set up any number of delivery reminder terms. - -- Delivery reminder levels - - For every delivery reminder term, you must set up delivery reminder levels. These levels determine how often delivery reminders can be created for a specific term. Level 1 is the first delivery reminder that you create for an overdue delivery. Level 2 is the second delivery reminder, and so on. When delivery reminders are created, the number of reminders that were created previously is considered, and the current number is used to apply terms. - -- Delivery reminder texts messages - - You must set up delivery reminder text messages for every delivery reminder level. There are two types of delivery reminder text messages: beginning and ending. The beginning text message is printed under the header section, before the list of entries that are marked for reminder. The ending text message is printed after this list. - -For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md). - -After you have set up the delivery terms, you must assign the delivery reminder term codes to vendors. For more information, see [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md). - -You can create delivery reminders manually or automatically. You can use the **Create Delivery Reminder** batch job to create delivery reminders automatically. This batch job allows you to select the purchase orders for which delivery reminders must be created. For more information, see [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md). - -You can also track documents in relation to purchase order lines and sales order lines. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] provides the following reports: - -- **Issued Delivery Reminder** - To view the delivery reminders for vendors. -- **Delivery Reminder - Test** - To verify the delivery reminders before you issue them. - -For more information, see [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md deleted file mode 100644 index e22bb62a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Submission of Sales VAT Advance Notifications to ELSTER - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can electronically submit tax documents and VAT statements, such as the sales VAT advance notification, to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Submission of Sales VAT Advance Notifications to ELSTER -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can electronically submit tax documents and VAT statements, such as the sales VAT advance notification, to the tax authorities. - -## Sales VAT Advance Notifications -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates an XML document containing tax and base amounts, along with company information. You can validate the data before submitting it to the tax authorities. You can set up the XML document using the layout that is defined in the tax authorities' style sheet. You can then transmit the XML document to the tax authorities' Elektronische Steuererklärungen (ELSTER) online portal interface. - -You must first set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to be able to submit sales VAT advance notifications to the ELSTER online portal. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md). You can later create and transmit the sales VAT advance notification. For more information, see [How to: Create and Submit Sales VAT Advance Notifications](how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md). - -The tax authorities' server processes the submitted XML document, and sends an XML document in response. This response document displays codes and descriptions for errors that occurred during the processing of the submitted XML document. The XML documents are encrypted during transmission. For more information, see the [ELSTER online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=155998). - -## Architectural Overview -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes an interface to the ELSTER portal, the Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler.dll assembly. The assembly manages the communication with the ELSTER portal and installs when you install the [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Windows client. For more information, see [ELSTER Transmission Overview](elster-transmission-overview.md). - -The ELSTER portal has requirements for computers that will submit documents. This includes a software certificate that you must acquire for each user who will submit documents to ELSTER. You must verify your installation against the information that is available on [ELSTER online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=155998). The following section describes installation considerations for your [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] implementation. - -### Installation Considerations -The Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler.dll assembly installs as part of the installation of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you install a new version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -ELSTER requires certificates to identify the company and the person who submits each document. On the computer of each user who will submit a statement to ELSTER, you must install the following certificates: - -- The public certificate of the tax authorities. -- A personal .pfx certificate for that user. - -You must then list the users and the friendly names of the certificates in the **Certificates** window. For more information about how to install a certificate and how to find the friendly name, see the Help for the operating system. - -If you use a proxy server to submit the ELSTER documents, you must specify the settings in the **Electronic VAT Decl. Setup** window. - -For more information, see [How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md). - -## Certificates and Style Sheets -Your company must register at the ELSTER online portal so that you can acquire the necessary certificates. If you have already registered, you do not have to register again. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The ELSTER online portal provides three methods of connection, but [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] only supports the software certificate that is included in the ELSTER-Basis certification method. The ELSTER-Spezial and ELSTER-Plus methods are not available in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -After you have registered at the ELSTER online portal, you must acquire a personal certificate. You must also download the public certificate of the tax authorities and the style sheets that are needed for the data transmissions. When you install the personal certificate on the user’s computer, you will be asked to specify a password. - -The public certificate of the tax authorities is available for download from the ELSTER online portal. The current file name is Coala2019.pem.cer. - -The personal .pfx certificate is required to clearly identify the user who submits the documents to the tax authorities. The personal certificate contains a digital signature that is included in the transmitted XML files. The name of the user who submitted the files is also included. - -You must also download all relevant style sheets that the tax authorities make available. This includes the ustva.xsl style sheet that you must specify in the **Sales VAT Adv. Notif. Card** window, but the tax authorities may require additional style sheets that must be located in the same folder as the ustva.xsl style sheet. - -For more information, see the [ELSTER online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=155998) - -## Transmissions -In the **Sales VAT Adv. Notification List** window, you can create and submit sales VAT advance notifications. When you create a document, you can preview it before submitting it to the ELSTER portal. The documents that are created are based on the XML stylesheets that are published at the ELSTER portal, and on the certificate and other information that you have set up in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -After you have submitted a document to ELSTER, an entry is made in the **VAT Transmission Log Entries** window. When the ELSTER online portal processed the submitted document, errors can occur, and [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] displays an error message that is based on the error code from ELSTER. In most cases, the error is caused by problems with the user-specific certificate or with network connectivity. For more information, see [Error Messages of the ElsterTransferHandler and ELSTER Transmission Overview](error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md) - [How to: Create and Submit Sales VAT Advance Notifications](how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md) - [ELSTER online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=155998) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/elster-transmission-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/elster-transmission-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8c586d63..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/elster-transmission-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: ELSTER Transmission Overview - description: When a user submits a sales VAT advance notification from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to the Elektronische Steuererklärungen (ELSTER) online portal, the Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler assembly processes the document and then transmits it to ELSTER. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# ELSTER Transmission Overview -When a user submits a sales VAT advance notification from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to the Elektronische Steuererklärungen (ELSTER) online portal, the Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler assembly processes the document and then transmits it to ELSTER. The following section describes technical aspects of submitting documents to ELSTER. - -## Process Overview - -1. Within the program all relevant data is collected and written into an XML document which follows a schema as prescribed by the Oberfinanzdirektion (OFD). This document contains tax information as well as information about the company and person who submits this tax information. -2. After this document has been created successfully it is extended with configuration information (proxy server, certificates, and so forth) which is needed by Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler. -3. The complete document is handed over to Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler. The assembly further processes the data (encryption, compression, signature) and sends it to one of the servers of the OFD. - - You can specify the servers of the OFD in the **Electronic VAT Decl. Setup** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md) - -4. The data is received and processed by the server of the OFD and a response document is sent back. -5. The response document is received, decrypted, and decompressed by Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler and returned as an XML document to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. You can then view the responses in the **VAT Transmission Log Entries** window. - -## Process Details -The Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler assembly is responsible for preparation before the transmission to the OFD and the processing of the response document before it is returned to the program. - -## Compression -The used method for compression is GZIP. A compression method which assures data integrity using a redundancy check. For more information, see [System.IO.Compression.GZipStream](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=200710) on the MSDN Library. Certain parts of the documents are compressed with the GZIP method. - -The response document is also compressed using this method. The Handler has to decompress the data before it is returned to the program. - -## Encryption -The standard which is used for encryption is PKCS#7v1.5. For more information, see [System.Security.Cryptography.Pkcs.EnvelopedCms](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=200708) on the MSDN Library. This method not only encrypts the data but also encrypts a recipient information in terms of a certificate from the OFD. This encryption is based upon an asymmetric method which ensures that the data can only be decrypted by the recipient. The data is encrypted with a part of the certificate which is publicly accessible (PublicKey) and can be decrypted exclusively with the non public part of the certificate (PrivateKey). Additionally, the recipient information from the encryption has to match the recipient certificate. This ensures that the data only can be decrypted by the OFD. - -The response uses the same method. With the transmission the OFD receives the public part of the user certificate which is used to encrypt the response document. This ensures that the response document can be decrypted by the recipient only. - -In order to transfer the encrypted data in a text based XML file it has to be Base64 coded. This is a method which is used to present binary data in a textual form. - -## Signature -For the signature of the data a method following the standard XML-DSig is used. For more information, see [System.Security.Cryptography.Xml.SignedXml](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=200709) on the MSDN Library. This method applies a signature to the whole document or a part of the document which is encrypted with a certificate. Using this encryption (also with an asymmetric method) allows the mapping to a certain registered user by the OFD. Thus the integrity of the data can be assured and the identity of the sender can be determined by means of the signature. - -The integrity is assured by the fact that if the document is changed after it has been signed the signature will become invalid and the OFD rejects the data. - -The identity of the sender is determined by mapping the certificate to a registered user. It is checked if the certificate is valid, if it is locked or if other conspicuities have been noticed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Error Messages of the ElsterTransferHandler](error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler.md) - [Electronic Submission of Sales VAT Advance Notifications to ELSTER](electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md) - [How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8bf9cdc5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/error-messages-of-the-elstertransferhandler.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Error Messages of the ElsterTransferHandler - description: When [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] submits sales VAT advance notifications, errors can occur. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Error Messages of the ElsterTransferHandler -When [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] submits sales VAT advance notifications, errors can occur. - -For example, if the configuration file for the Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler.dll assembly does not contain the correct friendly name of the public certificate, the ELSTER portal returns error 3400, and [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] displays the corresponding error message. - -## Error Messages -The following table lists the error messages that the ELSTER portal sends to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -|**Error number**|**Description**| -|----------------------|-------------------------------------------| -|1000|ELSTER cannot identify the sender as [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. The Microsoft.Dynamics.ElsterTransferHandler.dll assembly can only be used with Microsoft Dynamics products.| -|2000|No connection could be made to the OFD servers while transmitting data. This can be a problem with your network connection. Check your network configuration, or try again later.| -|2100|The XML file could not been sent because the connection was lost unexpectedly.| -|2200|No connection could be made to the OFD servers while receiving data. This can be a problem with your network connection. Check your network configuration, or try again later.| -|2300|The response document could not been received because the connection was lost unexpectedly.| -|3000|ELSTER could not access the user-specific certificate. You must make sure that the certificate is installed correctly.| -|3100|You have submitted a document but you do not have access to the certificate store. You must make sure that the certificate is installed correctly.| -|3200|The user-specific certificate could not be found. You must make sure that the certificate is installed correctly.| -|3300|The specified certificate does not have a private key, or the password for the private key is incorrect. You must make sure that the certificate is installed correctly.| -|3400|The public certificate of the OFD could not be opened. You must make sure that the certificate is installed correctly.| -|4000|The response document could not be decrypted because the private key does not match the public key that was used for encryption.| -|4100|The response document could not be decrypted. Data can have been damaged during transmission. You must submit the document again.| -|5000|The document could not be compressed. This can be caused by a lack of sufficient memory on the computer, or that the operating system has stopped the compression process. You must submit the document again.| -|5100|The document could not be decompressed. You must submit the document again.| -|6000|The proxy server does not respond. You must make sure that the setup of sales VAT advance notifications is correct in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|6100|The user is not able to connect to the server. You must make sure that the setup of sales VAT advance notifications is correct in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|6200|The user could not be registered on the proxy server. You must make sure that the setup of sales VAT advance notifications is correct in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|7000|The data could not be signed because the configured certificate cannot be used for signing data. You must make sure that the setup of sales VAT advance notifications is correct in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)].| -|7100|The XML document could not be signed. This can be caused by a lack of sufficient memory on the computer, or that the operating system has stopped the compression process.| -|9000|An error occurred when the ELSTER portal was trying to read the configuration of the certificate. You must verify the content of the generated XML document.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[ELSTER Transmission Overview](elster-transmission-overview.md) - [How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/eu-sales-list-in-germany.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/eu-sales-list-in-germany.md deleted file mode 100644 index b94c5808..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/eu-sales-list-in-germany.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: EU Sales List in Germany - description: In Germany, the German EU sales list is submitted to the "Bundeszentralamt für Steuern" (BZSt) through the BZSt Online Portal by using the ELMA5 interface. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# EU Sales List in Germany -In Germany, the German EU sales list is submitted to the "Bundeszentralamt für Steuern" (BZSt) through the BZSt Online Portal by using the ELMA5 interface. - -In order to increase security, all types of taxes and tax reports must be submitted under an authentication method. Beginning in January 1, 2013, it has become mandatory that you make submissions with authentication. To do so, you sign in with your BZSt number and private key using your pass phrase on the ELMA5 communications server. ELMA5 is designed to handle the transmission of large datasets of more than 1000 records. Following successful login, you can upload the data transfer in an interactive way. You can also set up the transfer to be automatic. - -## Implementation in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] and then submit it to the processing agency (ZIVIT). - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The ability to submit a VAT report in an XML format is not supported. However, you can make a submission of fewer than 1000 records in a .csv file. For this, you can use the Elster Online portal, and use the VAT – VIES Declaration Disk batch job, report 88. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[BZSt Online Portal](http://www.bzst.de) -[How to: Create VAT Reports](how-to-create-vat-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/example-inventory-order-line-with-tracking-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/example-inventory-order-line-with-tracking-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index cf317101..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/example-inventory-order-line-with-tracking-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Example - Inventory Order Line with Tracking Lines - description: The physical inventory order line must contain certain data. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Example - Inventory Order Line with Tracking Lines -The physical inventory order line should contain the following data: - -- Item No.: 80216-V -- Location Code: BLUE -- The fields Variant Code and Bin Code may be blank. - -There is a check mark in the field Use Tracking Lines on the physical inventory order line and the item 80216-V should be posted all time with lot nos. according to the item tracking code. - -The posting date on the physical inventory order header should be 12/31/2002. - -The expected quantity of the item 80216-V at the location BLUE on 12/31/2001 should be 120 pieces. - -The quantity on stock consists of the following lots: - -## The expected Item Tracking Lines: - -|**Lot No.**|**Quantity**| -|-----------------|------------------| -|CH1001|80| -|CH1003|30| -|CH1006|10| -|**Total**|**120**| - -There had been recorded the following physical inventory recording lines for the item 80216-V, location code BLUE: - -## Recorded Lot Nos. on the Physical Inventory Recording Lines: - -|**Lot No.**|**Quantity**| -|-----------------|------------------| -|CH1001|80| -|CH1002|12| -|CH1003|20| -|**Total**|**112**| - -When finishing the physical inventory order the program will calculate for the item 80216-V at the location BLUE a negative adjustment of 8 pieces and will create the following entries: - -## Item Tracking lines to post: - -|**Lot No.**|**Expected Quantity**|**Recorded Quantity**|**Quantity to post**| -|-----------------|---------------------------|---------------------------|--------------------------| -|CH1001|80|80|0| -|CH1002|0|12|+ 12| -|CH1003|30|20|- 10| -|CH1006|10|0|- 10| -|**Total**|**120**|**112**|**- 8**| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) - [How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](../../inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/gdpdu-filter-examples.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/gdpdu-filter-examples.md deleted file mode 100644 index b738fc4b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/gdpdu-filter-examples.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: GDPdU Filter Examples - description: The following topic provides examples of how you can use and combine different filter types when you set up your GPDdU exports. By setting filters appropriately, you can improve performance. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# GDPdU Filter Examples -The following topic provides examples of how you can use and combine different filter types when you set up your GPDdU exports. By setting filters appropriately, you can improve performance. - -The following examples use the G/L Entry and Cust. Ledger Entry tables for data. They assume that you have specified the following date in the **Export Business Data** batch job. - -Start Date = 01/01/2013 - -End Date = 12/31/2013 - -## Setting Up Export Record Source Examples - -### Period Field No. -In the **Data Export Record Source** window, the set up is as described in the following table. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Period Field No.|Period Field Name|Table Filter| -|---------------|----------------|----------------------|-----------------------|------------------| -|17|G/L Entry|4|Posting Date|No filter set.| -|21|Cust. Ledger Entry|4|Posting Date|No filter set.| - -**Export Results** - -- G/L Entries with Posting Date between 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Cust. Ledger Entries with Posting Date between 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. - -### Table Filter -In this example, in addition to Period Field No. information, you also specify a table filter. This is useful when you want to not only include a starting date and ending date for your export, but also include an additional filter to specify other criteria, for example, amounts. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Period Field No.|Period Field Name|Table Filter| -|---------------|----------------|----------------------|-----------------------|------------------| -|17|G/L Entry|4|Posting Date|| -|21|Cust. Ledger Entry|||Cust. Ledger Entry: **Posting Date=..31-12-13**| - -**Export Results** - -- G/L Entries with Posting Date between 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Cust. Ledger Entries with Posting Date earlier than 01/01/2014. - -### Date Filter Field No. and Date Filter Handling -The following example demonstrates setting Date type FlowFilters. If a table has more than one date FlowFilter, you cannot specify one to use, but you can specify how the date filter should be handled. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Period Field No.|Period Field Name|Table Filter|Date Filter Handling| -|---------------|----------------|----------------------|-----------------------|------------------|--------------------------| -|18|Customer|||Customer: **Net Change (LCY)**=<>0|**Period**| -|21|Cust. Ledger Entry|4|Posting Date|Cust. Ledger Entry: **Remaining Amt. (LCY)**=<>0|**End Date Only**| - -**Export Results** - -- Customers that have Net Change (LCY) <> 0 in the period from 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Cust. Ledger Entries with Posting Date between 01/01/2013 and 12/31/2013 that have Remaining Amt. (LCY) <> 0 at 12/31/2013. - -### Date Filter Handling for the Same Table -In this example, you set multiple filter definitions for the same table. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Table Filter|Date Filter Handling| -|---------------|----------------|------------------|--------------------------| -|18|Customer|Customer: **Net Change (LCY)**=<>0|**Period**| -|18|Customer|Customer: **Net Change (LCY)**=<>0|**Start Date Only**| - -**Export Results** - -- Customers that have Net Change (LCY) <> 0 in the period from 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Customers that have Net Change (LCY) <> 0 on the day before the start date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU](how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/germany-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/germany-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7ae99c4a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/germany-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Germany Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the German version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Germany Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the German version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU)](process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md) - [Physical Inventory Documents](physical-inventory-documents.md) - [VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) - [Currency Exchange Rates](currency-exchange-rates.md) - [How to: Print General Ledger Setup Information](how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md) - [How to: Set Up Reports for VAT and Intrastat](how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat.md) - [How to: Post a Negative Entry](how-to-post-a-negative-entry.md) - [How to: Copy Existing Items to New Items](how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md) - [How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory](how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md) - [How to: Include Company Registration Numbers on Sales Reports and Purchase Reports](how-to-include-company-registration-numbers-on-sales-reports-and-purchase-reports.md) - [How to: Export and Print Intrastat Reports](how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports.md) - [How to: Print Sales and Purchase Orders During Batch Posting](how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md) - [How to: Print Vendor Payments List Reports](how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1edf30bd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Analyze Physical Inventory Differences - description: After you have finished the physical inventory order, you can analyze the physical inventory differences. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Analyze Physical Inventory Differences -After you have finished the physical inventory order, you can analyze the physical inventory differences. - -You can view the differences in the statistic window or you can print them as a report. - -## To view the Physical Inventory Statistics window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open physical inventory order that you want to view the statistics of. -3. Choose the **Statistics** action. - - The **Phys. Invt. Order Statistics** window opens. - -## To print the Phys. Inventory Order Difference list - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open physical inventory order that you want to print the difference list of. -3. Choose the **Print** action. -4. In the **Phys. Invt. Order Diff. List** window, choose the **Print** button to print the report on paper or choose the **Preview** button to see them on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [How to: Post Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) - [How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory](../../inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md deleted file mode 100644 index f835014c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors (Germany) - description: In order to enable delivery reminders for overdue purchases, you must assign delivery reminder terms to vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors (Germany) -In order to enable delivery reminders for overdue purchases, you must assign delivery reminder terms to vendors. For more information, see [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md). - -## To assign delivery reminders codes to vendors - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the vendor for whom you want to set up delivery reminders, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Receiving** FastTab, in the **Delivery Reminder Terms** field, select a delivery reminder terms code for the vendor. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Vendors](../../purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) - [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index c36666d8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Block Shipment for Negative Inventory (Germany) - description: You can block outbound shipment for an item when a transaction results in a negative inventory for that item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory (Germany) -You can block outbound shipment for an item when a transaction results in a negative inventory for that item. - -## To block shipment for negative inventory - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivable Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivable Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Block ship. when neg. invent.** check box. - - When this check box is selected, the inventory for all items is calculated when you post a sales shipment. If the transaction leads to a negative quantity in inventory for an item, an error message appears. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](../../sales-setup-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md deleted file mode 100644 index c3fff003..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Quantity On Hand for a Physical Inventory Order - description: After you have created the physical inventory order and after you have entered the physical inventory order lines, you must have the program calculate the field Qty. Expected (Base) for every physical inventory order line. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Quantity On Hand for a Physical Inventory Order -After you have created the physical inventory order and after you have entered the physical inventory order lines, you must have the program calculate the field Qty. Expected (Base) for every physical inventory order line. - -If [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] created this physical inventory order lines automatically, you could decide in the request page for the batch job whether to calculate the expected quantity or not. If you have created the physical inventory order lines manually or if you changed them in the meantime, you have to calculate the expected quantities manually. You can calculate quantities in two ways as described in the following section. - -## To calculate the expected quantity on the physical inventory order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the physical inventory order that you want to calculate the expected quantity for. -3. To calculate the expected quantity of only one physical inventory order line, choose the **Calculate Qty. Expected** action, and then choose the **This Line** action. -4. To calculate the expected quantity in all physical inventory order lines, choose the **Calculate Qty. Expected** action, and then choose the **All Lines** action. - - In the dialog that appears, choose to calculate the quantities for all lines or for those lines that have not yet been calculated. - -If [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] has already calculated the expected quantity, it shows this by placing a check mark in the **Qty. Exp. Calculated** field in the inventory order line. - -> [!NOTE] -> The process of taking the inventory and recording it in the physical inventory recording is independent from the calculation of the expected quantities. - -You must calculate the expected quantities for all physical inventory order lines of a physical inventory order before you can set the Status field to **Finished**. This is because [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] compares the expected and the recorded quantities and calculates the differences for posting. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory](physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) - [How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory](../../inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 94071689..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Copy Existing Items to New Items (Germany) - description: You can group items with similar settings in an item catalog. When you add a new item, to save time, you can use **Copy Item** to copy an existing item to use as a template for a new item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Copy Existing Items to New Items (Germany) -You can group items with similar settings in an item catalog. When you add a new item, to save time, you can use the **Copy Item** function to copy an existing item to use as a template for a new item. - -## To copy existing items to new items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item that you want to copy, and then choose the **Copy Item** action. -3. In the **Item Copy** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Source Item No.**|Sets the item number from which the data is to be copied.| - |**Target Item No.**|Sets the item number for the item to which the data is to be copied.| - |**Target No. Series**|Sets the item number series to which the data is to be copied.| - - > [!NOTE] - > You can specify an item number in the **Target Item No.** field or in the **Target No. Series** field. The copy item will be assigned to the next available number in that number series. - -4. Select the appropriate check boxes for the data that you want to copy. -5. To copy your selections to the new item, choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-correct-vat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-correct-vat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index d687e15a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-correct-vat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Correct VAT Reports - description: If you have to submit a corrective VAT report or delete a submitted VAT report, you must create a new VAT report. According to the legislation, a corrective report must be submitted within a month of the initial report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Correct VAT Reports -If you have to submit a corrective VAT report or delete a submitted VAT report, you must create a new VAT report. According to the legislation, a corrective report must be submitted within a month of the initial report. - -When you create a corrective report, the report will contain two line types per corrected line. In one line type, Cancellation, the base value of the VAT is reported as a cancellation. All other information remains the same, and cannot be edited. On a new line, Correction type, you can make corrections as needed to the VAT amount. The **Suggest Lines** action, however, will suggest the correct amount based on the filters and posted documents. You cannot correct or modify the **VAT Registration No.** Each period being corrected needs its own corrective report. - -The **Suggest Lines** action recalculates the values to report. The **Correct Lines** action is used to make manual changes. You can combine the effects of the two actions to correct your report. - -**Example corrections scenarios** - -1. If you post additional VAT entries after you submit the Standard report in the report period, choose **Suggest Lines** in the **Process** group to get the updated amounts. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you manually changed the amount for a customer or vendor, this amount will be overwritten when additional VAT entries are posted. Update the amount accordingly. - -2. If you want to change the amount of a report line that has already been submitted and no new VAT entries are posted, choose the **Correct Lines** action. In the **VAT Report Lines** window, select the lines that you want to correct, and then choose the **OK** button. - - For each entry, two lines are displayed: Cancellation and Correction. You can now change the amount on the Correction line. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Correct Lines** action will not suggest the amount based in VAT entries. If you have new VAT entries for the customer or vendor, instead use the **Suggest Lines** action. - -3. If you used the wrong filters, for example, the wrong VAT product posting group, choose the **Suggest Lines** action, and then set filters as needed. - - **Suggest Lines** will create entries to account for the difference between the filters. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the updated filters exclude a customer or vendor, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates a Cancellation line for the previous reported amount and a Correction entry with amount 0. - -## To correct a VAT report - -1. Create a new VAT report. For more information, see [How to: Create VAT Reports](how-to-create-vat-reports.md). -2. Fill in the fields in the **General** FastTab, and set the **VAT Report Type** field to Corrective. -3. In the **Original Report No.** field, select the report that you want to correct. You can only select reports of type Standard that have been marked as Submitted. -4. Create your correction VAT report line entries. - - Choose the **Suggest Lines** action. Set filters as needed. - - On each line you can drill down on the amounts to see which VAT entries make up the amount. Change the amount if needed. You cannot edit, however, the **VAT Registration No.**. - -5. If the **Suggest Lines** action does not provide suggestions to correct the amounts that you intended, use the **Correct Lines** action to insert cancellation and correction lines for the customer or vendor. -6. Continue with the VAT report creation process, and release the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up VAT Reports](how-to-set-up-vat-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md deleted file mode 100644 index 53ccb26d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create a Physical Inventory Recording - description: After you have created a physical inventory order and its lines you can create a new physical inventory recording for taking the inventory. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording -After you have created a physical inventory order and its lines you can create a new physical inventory recording for taking the inventory. - -You can create a physical inventory recording manually if it is not necessary to use physical inventory lists or if the physical inventory data will be taken by a scanner. You can also create a physical inventory recording manually even if the related physical recording order does not contain any line. After finishing the physical inventory, the required physical inventory order lines are created automatically. This may be useful, for instance, in the case of a permanent physical inventory. - -However, in most cases, you use a batch job to record inventory. Based on the physical inventory recording, you can print a list for taking the inventory and writing the results down. After that, you can transfer the results from paper to the physical inventory recording lines. - -## To create a physical inventory recording - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the physical inventory order that you want to create an inventory recording for, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. To create a physical inventory recording, choose the **Make New Recording** action. -4. In the **Make New Phys. Invt. Recording** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Only Lines Not In Recordings**|Select to generate a new physical inventory recording line only if the data do not exist in any other physical inventory recording line.| - |**Recording Without Order Permit**|Select to generate a new physical inventory recording line.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button to start the batch job. -6. Choose the **Recordings** action. The physical inventory recording window appears. Select the new created physical inventory recording. - - You can now print a physical inventory list based on the data on the current physical inventory recording. - -7. Choose the **Physical Inventory Recording** action. -8. In the **Phys. Invt. Recording** window, set the appropriate filters, and then choose the **Print** button or choose the **Preview** button. - - Optionally, you can use the Copy Phys. Invt. Rec. Line batch job to record serial numbers or lot numbers. - -9. In the **Phys. Inventory Recording** window, select the physical inventory recording line, choose **Functions**, and then choose **Copy Line**. -10. In the **Copy Phys. Invt. Rec. Line** window, specify the number of copies to make of the selected line, and then choose the **OK** button. - -You can use the printed physical inventory recording to update the actual quantity of the item available in the specified location. To complete the recording process, the **Recorded** check box must be selected for all physical inventory recording lines. - -To show that you have finished the physical inventory recording, you have to set the **Status** on the inventory recording header to **Finished**. For more information, see [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md). - -## To complete a physical inventory recording - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Recording**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the physical inventory recording that you want to complete, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Phys. Invt. Recording** window, on the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Quantity** field for each line, enter the actual item quantity. -4. Select the **Recorded** check box for each line. -5. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Person Recorded**|The person who recorded the inventory.| - |**Date Recorded**|The date on which the physical inventory was recorded.| - |**Time Recorded**|The time at which the physical inventory was recorded.| - - You can now finish the physical inventory recording. For more information, see [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory](physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md) - [How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Calculate Quantity On Hand for a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md deleted file mode 100644 index 76d83d6d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create and Submit Sales VAT Advance Notifications - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can submit the sales VAT advance notification file electronically to the ELSTER portal. You can transmit the sales VAT advance notification file to the tax authorities after you have verified the calculated tax amount and the base amount. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create and Submit Sales VAT Advance Notifications -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can submit the sales VAT advance notification file electronically to the ELSTER portal. You can transmit the sales VAT advance notification file to the tax authorities after you have verified the calculated tax amount and the base amount. - -## To create an XML document for sales VAT advance notification - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Vat Advanced Notification List**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales Vat Advanced Notification List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Sales VAT Adv. Notif. Card** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Contact for Tax Office**|The contact person for the tax office in your organization.| - |**Contact Phone No.**|The contact person's telephone number.| - |**Contact E-Mail**|The contact person's email address.| - -5. Choose the **Create XML-File** action. -6. In the **Create Sales VAT Adv. Notif.** batch job, on the **Options** FastTab, in the **XML-File** field, select the **Create** or the **Create and Show** option. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To submit an XML document for sales VAT advance notification - -1. In the **Sales VAT Advance Notification List** window, select the document that you want to submit to ELSTER. -2. Choose the **Transmit XML-File** action. - -The XML file is transmitted to ELSTER. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Submission of Sales VAT Advance Notifications to ELSTER](electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md) - [How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER](how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md deleted file mode 100644 index 164b8ca5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Delivery Reminders Manually In Germany - description: Remind customers of late delivery. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually (Germany) -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. You can create a single delivery reminder manually, or you can generate delivery reminders for all overdue deliveries. For more information, see [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To create delivery reminders, you must set up the delivery reminder properties. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md). - -## To create a delivery reminder manually (Germany) - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Delivery Reminder** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|The unique identification number for the delivery reminder.| - |**Vendor No.**|The number of the vendor for whom you want to post the delivery reminder.

When you select the vendor number, the **Name**, **Address**, **Post Code/City**, and **Contact** fields are filled in automatically.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the delivery reminder. This date is copied to all of the delivery reminder ledger entries.| - |**Document Date**|The document date for the delivery reminder. This date is also used to calculate the due date for the delivery reminder. You can modify the posting date if required.| - |**Reminder Level**|The delivery reminder level. This value is based on the number of delivery reminders that have already been sent. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md).| - |**Reminder Terms Code**|Specify the delivery reminder terms code that is set up for the vendor.| - |**Due Date**|The due date for the delivery reminder.| - -4. Choose the **Suggest Reminder Lines** action - - If there are overdue deliveries from the specified vendor, these are added to the deliver reminder. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - - The delivery reminder is created. You can now issue and print the delivery reminder. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-vat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-vat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1cf5febf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-create-vat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create VAT Reports - description: You can configure different types of VAT reports based on requirements. Then, when you have to submit a VAT report, you can create it in the **VAT Report** window and then export it in electronic format that conforms to the ELMA5 format requirements. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create VAT Reports -You can configure different types of VAT reports based on requirements. Then, when you have to submit a VAT report, you can create it in the **VAT Report** window and then export it in electronic format that conforms to the ELMA5 format requirements. - -## To create a VAT report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Report**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields in the **General** FastTab, including the fields that are described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specify the report number.

Depending on the type of report, and the configuration in your company, you can use the automatically generated number, select a different number series, or enter a different number manually.| - |**VAT Report Type**|Select the appropriate VAT Report type. The default setting is **Standard**. If the report is an update to an existing report, choose **Corrective**.| - |**Trade Type**|Specify the type of trade that the report is to describe. The default is **Sales**. Other options are **Purchases** or **Both**.| - |**Start Date**|Specify the start date of the report period.| - |**End Date**|Specify the end date of the report period.| - |**EU Goods/Services**|Specify whether the report applies to **Goods**, **Services**, or both. The default is **Both**.| - |**Report Period Type**|Specify the time period that the report applies to:

- Month
- Quarter
- Year
- Bi-Monthly| - |**Report Period No.**|Specify the number of the VAT period.| - |**Report Year**|Specify the year that the VAT report covers.| - |**Processing Date**|Specify the date that the VAT report is created.| - -3. Fill in the fields in the **Sign-off** FastTab, including the key fields that are described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Sign-off Place**|Specify the location where the VAT report was signed off.| - |**Sign-off Date**|Specify the date that the VAT report has been signed off.| - |**Signed by Employee No.**|Specify the number of the employee who signed the VAT report from the lookup list.| - |**Created by Employee No.**|Specify the number of the employee who created the VAT report from the lookup list.| - -4. Import the VAT ledger entries that must be included in the VAT report. -5. Choose the **Suggest Lines** action. - -This adds VAT entries to the window. For each line, in the **Amount** field, you can drill down to see the VAT ledger entries that are the source of the line. - -After you create the VAT report, you have to submit it to the tax authorities. - -## To submit a VAT report - -1. In the **VAT Report** window, choose the **Release** action. -2. Confirm that you want to release the report. - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] validates that the VAT report is set up correctly. If the validation fails, the errors are shown in the **VAT Report Error Log** window so that you can make the appropriate changes. For example, an error displays if you try to release a standard VAT report but you have not yet added any lines to the report. - - When you mark a VAT report as released, it becomes non-editable. If you must change the report after marking it as released, you must first reopen it. - -3. Choose the **Export** action to create a VAT report of EU Sales List data in ELMA5 format. Save a copy of the report, which has the required name specified by ELMA5. - - You can now submit the report to the tax authorities. - -4. Choose the **Mark as Submitted** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Correct VAT Reports](how-to-correct-vat-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up VAT Reports](how-to-set-up-vat-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-declare-vat-vies-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-declare-vat-vies-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1a455138..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-declare-vat-vies-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Declare VAT-VIES Tax - description: The VAT-VIES declaration report allows you to submit information about sales transactions with other European Union (EU) countries/regions to the customs and tax authorities' list system. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Declare VAT-VIES Tax -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes the VAT-VIES declaration report, which you can use to submit information about sales transactions with other European Union (EU) countries/regions to the customs and tax authorities' list system. The report displays information in the same format that is used in the customs and tax authorities' declaration list. - -Depending on the volume of sales of goods or services to other EU countries/regions, you must submit monthly, bi-monthly, or quarterly declarations. If your company has sales of more than 100,000 euros per quarter, you must submit a monthly declaration. If your company has sales of less than 100,000 euros per quarter, you must submit a quarterly declaration. For more information, see the [BZSt website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=204368). - -The report is based on the VAT Entry table. - -## To declare VAT-VIES tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT-Vies Declaration Tax – DE**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT-Vies Declaration Tax – DE** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Reporting Period**|Select the time period that the report applies to. This can be a month, a two-month period, a quarter, or the calendar year.| - |**Date of Signature**|Enter the date on which the VAT-VIES declaration is sent.| - |**Corrected Notification**|If selected, this field indicates that this is a corrected version of an already delivered VAT-VIES declaration.| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Reporting Currency**|If selected, the amounts of the report will be in the additional reporting currency. For more information, see Additional Reporting Currency.| - |**Change to monthly reporting**|If selected, your company has sales of more than 100,000 euros per quarter and you must migrate from a quarterly report to a monthly report. **Important:** Only select this field the first time that you submit a monthly report.| - |**Revoke monthly reporting**|If selected, you want to switch from monthly reporting to another reporting period.

For example, if you have previously submitted monthly declarations but the EU sales are less than 100,000 euros per quarter, select this field and then select one of the quarters in the **Reporting Period** field.| - -3. On the **VAT Entry** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - - > [!NOTE] - > In order to run this report, you must select the **Posting Date** as a filter, and enter the posting date value. - -You can print the declaration on paper or create an XML file that you can submit electronically to the tax authorities. For more information, see the [BZSt website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=204368). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-dimensions-for-physical-inventory-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-dimensions-for-physical-inventory-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 40c2fdd5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-dimensions-for-physical-inventory-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter Dimensions for Physical Inventory Orders - description: After you have created a physical inventory order, you can enter dimensions for this order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter Dimensions for Physical Inventory Orders -After you have created a physical inventory order, you can enter dimensions for this order. - -The application distinguishes between the dimensions for the physical inventory order header and the dimensions for the physical inventory order lines. The dimensions of the physical inventory header are a pattern for the dimensions of the physical inventory order lines. Every time you create a new physical inventory order line manually or automatically, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will transfer the dimensions from the header to the new line. - -That is why you should create the physical inventory order lines first after complete entering the dimensions for the physical inventory order header. You can manually change the dimensions for every physical inventory order line. For posting, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will use the dimensions of the physical inventory order line. - -## To enter dimensions for a physical inventory order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the physical inventory order that you want to create an inventory recording for, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Dimensions** action. -4. In the **Edit Dimension Set Entries** window, enter the dimensions for the inventory order header. -5. Create a new physical inventory order line and enter the item number. -6. Choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Dimensions** action. -7. In the **Edit Dimension Set Entries** window, optionally, enter the dimensions for the inventory order line. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Post Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [Dimension Set Entries Overview](../../design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index fc6e96db..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter Physical Inventory Orders - description: A physical inventory order is a complete document that consists of a physical inventory order header and some physical inventory order lines. The information on a physical inventory header describes how to take the physical inventory. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders -A physical inventory order is a complete document that consists of a physical inventory order header and some physical inventory order lines. The information on a physical inventory header describes how to take the physical inventory. You can fill in the header manually. You can create a physical inventory order and relate it to one or more physical inventory recordings. - -The physical inventory order lines contain the information about the items and their locations. You can create the physical inventory order lines manually, or you can let the program automatically create physical inventory order lines for you. You can do this by using batch jobs. - -Before you can create physical inventory orders you have to set up properties for physical inventory. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Physical Inventory Documents](how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents.md). - -## To create a physical inventory order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Description**|Sets a description for the physical inventory order.| - |**Location Code**|Sets location code for the item in the order line.| - |**Person Responsible**|Select the code for the person responsible for taking the inventory.

Optionally, you can add this information later.| - |**Order Date**|Sets the creation date for the physical inventory order.| - |**Posting Date**|Sets the posting date for the physical inventory order.| - -You can add lines to the physical inventory order manually, or [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] can create new physical inventory order lines automatically. To create new physical inventory order lines automatically, you have two possibilities: - -- You can create new physical inventory order lines based on inventory items and item ledger entries. -- You can create new physical inventory order lines based on existing or posted physical inventory orders by using the copy function. - -Both batch jobs will check if there is already a line with the same values in the following fields on a physical inventory order line: Item No., Variant Code, Location Code, and Bin Code. In this case the new line is not inserted automatically to avoid duplicate lines. - -## To automatically add physical inventory order lines from inventory - -1. In the **Phys. Inventory Order** window, choose the **Calculate Lines** action. -2. In the **Calc. Phys. Invt. Order Lines** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Calculate Qty. Expected**|Select to calculate and insert the quantity expected data for newly created physical inventory order lines.| - |**Items Not on Inventory**|Select to insert physical inventory order lines for items that have a value of zero in the **Quantity Expected** field.| - -3. Optionally, on the **Item** FastTab, select the appropriate filters, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. When the batch job completes, choose the **OK** button. - -## To automatically add physical inventory order lines by copying documents - -1. In the **Phys. Inventory Order** window, choose the **Copy Document** action. -2. In the **Copy Phys. Invt. Order** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Document Type**|Specify the type of document to copy.| - |**Document No.**|Specify the document to copy.| - |**Calculate Qty. Expected**|Select to calculate and insert the quantity expected data for newly created physical inventory order lines.| - -3. When the batch job completes, choose the **OK** button. - -You can run the batch job more than once. If there are already existing lines for the physical inventory order, the program will append the new lines at the end. - -For each physical inventory order, you can create one or more physical inventory recordings. There you can document the physical count. For more information, see [How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md). - -You can compare and document the expected quantities from the physical inventory order lines with the (counted) quantities from the physical inventory recording lines. You can post the physical inventory differences. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Physical Inventory Documents](physical-inventory-documents.md) - [How to: Enter Dimensions for Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-dimensions-for-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: View Duplicate Physical Inventory Order Lines](how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md) - [How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: Calculate Quantity On Hand for a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [How to: Post Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index f926ffc5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export and Print Intrastat Reports - description: Intrastat reporting is required throughout the European Union (EU) and must follow local requirements, such as specific formats and files. All companies in the EU must report their trade with other EU countries/regions. - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export and Print Intrastat Reports -Intrastat reporting is required throughout the European Union (EU) and must follow local requirements, such as specific formats and files. All companies in the EU must report their trade with other EU countries/regions. The movement of goods must be reported to the statistics authorities (Statistisches Bundesamt) every month, and a report must be delivered to the tax authorities. - - For Intrastat reporting, you must provide paper reports and files, which must be in ASCII format for Germany. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes reports and batch jobs that generate all of the information that must be sent to the German tax authorities. This information automatically includes both receipt and delivery of goods. The Intrastat file contains information from the lines in the **Intrastat** journal. - -## To print the German Intrastat checklist - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch name. -3. Choose the **Checklist Report** action. -4. In the **Intrastat - Checklist DE** window, on the **Options** FastTab, select the **Show Intrastat Journal Lines** check box. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > If you clear the **Show Intrastat Journal Lines** check box, the report displays only the information that must be reported to the tax authorities, and not the lines in the journal. - -5. Optionally, on the **Intrastat Jnl. Batch** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -6. Optionally, on the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -7. Choose the **Print** button to print the Intrastat checklist or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## To print the German Intrastat form - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch name. -3. Choose the **Form** action. -4. Optionally, on the **Intrastat Jnl. Batch** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -5. Optionally, on the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -6. Choose the **Print** button to print the Intrastat checklist or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## To export Intrastat information to a disk - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required journal batch name. -3. Choose the **Make Diskette** action. -4. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Path** field, enter the full path and the name of the file to which you want to write the information. - - Optionally, on the **Intrastat Jnl. Batch** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - -5. To export the file, choose the **OK** button. - -The Intrastat information is exported, and you can either save the data to a file, or you can open the file in the appropriate program. - - When the file is exported, the **Reported** check box in the **Intrastat Jnl. Batches** window will be selected, and the **Internal Ref. No.** field on every entry in the journal will be filled in. You can manually change the contents of the field. For example, you can make changes when you need to run the report again. For more information, see Intrastat Jnl. Batch. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) - [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index f46bd846..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export GDPdU Data - description: You can export financial data and tax data according to the process for data access and testability of digital documents (GDPdU). You can also select various options to be included in an XML file. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export GDPdU Data -You can export financial data and tax data according to the process for data access and testability of digital documents (GDPdU). You can also select various options to be included in an XML file. - - If there is no data to export, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates empty files. - -### To export GDPdU data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Export Business Data**, and then choose the related link. - -2. In the **GDPdU Export** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Option | Description | - |--------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Starting Date** | Specifies the start date for the data export.

**NOTE:** If the data export source includes period fields, the start date and the end date are used as filter values for the period fields. | - | **Ending Date** | Specifies the end date for the data export. | - | **Include Closing Date** | Specifies if the data export must include the closing date for the period. | - - -3. On the **Data Export Record Definition** FastTab, select the appropriate filters to identify the data export and data export record type. For more information, see [Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU)](process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md). - -4. To export the data, choose the **OK** button. - - > [!WARNING] - > During the export, any existing files, including the log file, will be overwritten. If you export the same data twice, the files from the first export are overwritten - - You will be notified when the export completes. If you cancel the export, or if you close the window, you will also be notified that the export has completed, but the log folder will be empty. However, depending on your configuration, some files may have been exported, but the export might not be complete. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU)](process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md deleted file mode 100644 index ab90a611..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Finish a Physical Inventory Order - description: After you have entered all data for the physical inventory order, you can finish the physical inventory order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Order -After you have entered all data for the physical inventory order, you can finish the physical inventory order. - -It is only possible to finish the physical inventory order if the following is true: - -- For all related physical inventory recordings, the Status field is set to **Finished**. -- In all physical inventory order lines, the quantity expected has been calculated. - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] shows this by setting a check mark in the field **Qty. Exp. Calculated** of the physical inventory order line. - -- Every physical inventory order line has been counted by at least one inventory recording line. - - This is indicated by selecting the In Recording Lines field of the physical inventory order line. For a physical inventory order line, you can view a list of the physical inventory recording lines. - -## To finish a physical inventory order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the physical inventory order that you want to finish, and then choose the **Finish** action. - - The status of the physical inventory header is set to **Finished**. You can no longer change the physical inventory order header or the physical inventory order lines. - -When finishing the physical inventory order, the expected quantity and the recorded quantities of the physical inventory header are compared and the differences calculated. - -You have to finish the physical inventory order header first before you can evaluate differences and before you can post the physical inventory order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Post Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Calculate Quantity On Hand for a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: Analyze Physical Inventory Differences](how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md) - [Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md deleted file mode 100644 index b3d24560..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Finish a Physical Inventory Recording - description: After you have entered all data for a physical inventory recording, you can finish the recording by setting the **Status** field to **Finished**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording -After you have entered all data for a physical inventory recording, you can finish the recording by setting the **Status** field to **Finished**. - -You can only do this, if the **Recorded** field is selected for all physical inventory recording lines for the current physical inventory recording. - -## To finish a physical inventory recording - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Recording List**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the physical inventory recording that you want to finish, and then choose the **Finish** action. - - The status is set to **Finished**. You can no longer change the physical inventory header or the physical inventory lines. - -When you finish the current physical inventory recording, every physical inventory recording line is assigned to one line of the related physical inventory order. The physical inventory order lines are assigned with the same values in the **Item No.**, **Variant Code**, **Location Code**, and **Bin Code** fields as the physical inventory recording line has. - -If no such physical inventory order line exists, and if the **Recording without order permit** field is selected on the physical inventory recording header, a new line is inserted automatically and the **Recorded without Order** field on the physical inventory order line is selected. Otherwise, an error message is displayed and the process is canceled. If there are more than one such physical inventory order lines, an error message is displayed and the process is canceled. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: View Duplicate Physical Inventory Order Lines](how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md) - [How to: Analyze Physical Inventory Differences](how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md) - [Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 800603b9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Generate Delivery Reminders (Germany) - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Generate Delivery Reminders (Germany) -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create delivery reminders when a purchase has not been delivered as expected. You can generate delivery reminders for all overdue deliveries, or you can create a single delivery reminder manually. For more information, see [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To create delivery reminders, you must set up the delivery reminder properties. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md). - -## To generate delivery reminders for all overdue deliveries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Delivery Reminder** window, choose the **Create Delivery Reminder** action. -4. On the **Purchase Header** FastTab and the **Purchase Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -If there are overdue deliveries that match the filters that you have set, deliver reminders are created. You can now issue and print the delivery reminders. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-include-company-registration-numbers-on-sales-reports-and-purchase-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-include-company-registration-numbers-on-sales-reports-and-purchase-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index a444829d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-include-company-registration-numbers-on-sales-reports-and-purchase-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Include Company Registration Numbers on Sales Reports and Purchase Reports - description: When generating certain sales reports and purchase reports, you can print registration numbers on the reports. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Include Company Registration Numbers on Sales Reports and Purchase Reports -When generating certain sales reports and purchase reports, you can print registration numbers on the reports. - -## To print company registration numbers on sales reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Tax Office** FastTab, in the **Registration No.** field, enter the registration number of the company. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To print company registration numbers on purchase reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the vendor that you want to add a registration number for, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, in the **Registration No.** field, enter the registration number of the vendor. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Vendors](../../purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8591a33e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Issue Delivery Reminders (Germany) - description: After you have created delivery reminders, you must issue and print them so that you can send reminders to vendors. Before you issue the delivery reminders, you can print a test report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Issue Delivery Reminders (Germany) -After you have created delivery reminders, you must issue and print them so that you can send reminders to vendors. Before you issue the delivery reminders, you can print a test report. For more information, see [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md). - -When you issue the delivery reminders, delivery reminder ledger entries are created. You can view the created ledger entries in the **Deliv. Reminder Ledger Entries** window. - -## To issue delivery reminders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Delivery Reminder** window, select the delivery reminder that you want to issue, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Issue** action. -4. In the **Issue Delivery Reminder** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Print**|Select to print the delivery reminders when they are issued.| - |**Replace Posting Date**|Select to replace the existing posting date for the delivery reminder.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the delivery reminder.

This posting date is used for all delivery reminders if you have selected the **Replace Posting Date** check box. If the **Replace Posting Date** check box is cleared, this date will be used for only those delivery reminders for which a posting date is not available.| - -5. Optionally, on the **Delivery Reminder Header** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can remove filters and issue all delivery reminders at the same time. - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -You can view the issued reminders in the **Issued Delivery Reminder** window. Optionally, you can now print a delivery reminder. - -## To view delivery reminder ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the purchase order for which you want to view the reminder status, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Deliv. Reminder Ledger Entries** action. - -In the Deliv. Reminder Ledger Entries window, you can view the delivery reminder ledger entries for the selected purchase order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-a-negative-entry.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-a-negative-entry.md deleted file mode 100644 index 33078f8b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-a-negative-entry.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post a Negative Entry - description: You can use the **Correction** field to post a negative debit instead of a credit, or to post a negative credit instead of a debit on an account. To meet legal requirements, this field is visible by default in all journals. The **Debit Amount** and **Credit Amount** fields include both the original entry, and the corrected entry. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post a Negative Entry -You can use the **Correction** field to post a negative debit instead of a credit, or to post a negative credit instead of a debit on an account. To meet legal requirements, this field is visible by default in all journals. The **Debit Amount** and **Credit Amount** fields include both the original entry, and the corrected entry. These fields have no effect on the account balance. - -## To post a negative entry - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select the required batch name. -3. Enter information into the relevant fields. -4. In the journal line that you want to activate for negative entries, select the **Correction** check box. -5. To post the journal, choose the **Post** action, and then choose the **Yes** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Reverse Postings](../../finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md) -[Germany Local Functionality](germany-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index acd6a334..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Physical Inventory Orders - description: After completing a physical inventory order and changing its status to **Finished**, you can post it. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Physical Inventory Orders -After completing a physical inventory order and changing its status to **Finished**, you can post it. - -You can set the status of a physical inventory order to **Finished** if the following is true: - -- All related physical inventory recordings have a status of **Finished**. -- Each physical inventory order line has been counted by at least one inventory recording line. -- The **In Recording Lines** and the **Qty. Exp. Calculated** check boxes have been selected for all of the physical inventory order lines. - -After posting the order, you can view the posted physical inventory orders. Posted inventory documents provide a complete overview of the physical inventory process. - -## To post a physical inventory order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the physical inventory order that you want to complete, and then choose the **Edit** action. - - In the **Phys. Inventory Order** window, you can view the quantity recorded after taking physical inventory in the **Qty. Recorded (Base)** field. - -3. Choose the **Finish** action. -4. Choose the **Yes** button. The value in the **Status** field is changed to **Finished**. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot change the physical inventory order header or the physical inventory order lines. - -5. To post the order, choose **Post**, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## To view posted physical inventory orders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Phys. Invt. Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Posted Phys. Invt. Order** window, select the posted inventory order that you want to view, and then choose the **View** action. -3. To view a list of related physical inventory recordings, choose the **Recordings** action. - - You can also run a report that returns the difference between the expected quantity and the physical (recorded) quantity. - -4. Close the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Physical Inventory Documents](physical-inventory-documents.md) - [How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8713a224..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-general-ledger-setup-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print General Ledger Setup Information (Germany) - description: Before you use [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in the daily business, you can run the **G/L Setup Information** report to display the master data that you have set up. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print General Ledger Setup Information (Germany) -Before you use [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in the daily business, you can run the **G/L Setup Information** report to display the master data that you have set up. You can look over this master data so that you have a baseline to compare to, and then verify that you have set up posting groups correctly, for example. - -## To print general ledger setup information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Setup Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Setup Information** field, select the master data area as described in the following table. - - |Option|Description| - |-------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**G/L Setup - Company Data - Consolidation**|Displays tables for general ledger setup, company information, and business units.| - |**Posting Groups**|Displays customer posting group tables, vendor posting group tables, inventory posting group tables, and bank account posting group tables.| - |**Posting Matrix**|Displays general business posting group tables, general product posting group tables, and general posting group tables.| - |**VAT Setup**|Displays VAT business posting group tables, VAT product posting group tables, and VAT posting setup tables.| - |**Source Code - Reason Code**|Displays source tables, source code setup tables, and reason codes tables.| - |**Check Number Series**|Select to provide an overview of the use of number series so that you can identify number series that are problematic for the data export for the Grundsätze zum Datenzugriff und zur Prüfbarkeit digitaler Unterlagen (GDPdU). The report will show number series with one of the following issues:

- The number series allows manual document numbers.
- The number series is not chronological.
- The number series is used in more than one table or field.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance-setup-finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index e68795c8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-orders-during-batch-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Sales and Purchase Orders During Batch Posting (Germany) - description: After sales orders and purchase orders are batch posted, you can print the corresponding posted documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Sales and Purchase Orders During Batch Posting (Germany) -After sales orders and purchase orders are batch posted, you can print the corresponding posted documents. - -The following procedure describes how to print sales orders, but the same steps also apply to purchase orders. - -## To print sales and purchase orders during batch posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Post Batch** action. -3. In the **Batch Post Sales Orders** window, on the **Options** FastTab, select the **Print** check box. -4. Optionally, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the additional fields. -5. To batch post and print the sales orders, choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Invoice Sales](../../sales-how-invoice-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8e72925f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders (Germany) - description: After you have created delivery reminders and made any needed modifications, you can either print the test reports or issue the delivery reminders. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders (Germany) -After you have created delivery reminders and made any needed modifications, you can either print the test reports or issue the delivery reminders. - -A test report is a document that lets you review and modify a delivery reminder before you issue it. - -## To print test reports before issuing delivery reminders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Delivery Reminder List** window, choose the **Delivery Reminder - Test** action. -3. In the **Delivery Reminder - Test** window, set a filter if you want to print only selected delivery reminders. -4. Choose the **Print** to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3df89f28..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-print-vendor-payments-list-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Vendor Payments List Reports (Germany) - description: The **Vendor Payments List** report provides a list of payments for each vendor. The report can sort payments chronologically or grouped by vendor. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Vendor Payments List Reports (Germany) -The **Vendor Payments List** report provides a list of payments for each vendor. The report can sort payments chronologically or grouped by vendor. - -## To print the vendor payments list report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Payments List**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Sorting**|Specifies the sort order. You can sort by vendor or chronologically. If you sort by vendor, you will see a subtotal for each vendor. If you sort chronologically, you will not see subtotals.| - |**Layout**|Specifies the layout of the report.

The results can be displayed in the following layouts:

**Standard**
Displays the vendor number and vendor name, together with posting details, such as the document number and the amount in local currency.

**FCY Amounts**
Displays the vendor number, vendor name, document number, payment status (O for open, PP for partial payment, and C for closed), and payment amount.

**Posting Info**
Displays the vendor number, vendor name, cost center, cost object, user ID, and payment amount.| - - At the end of the report, the number of processed payments is displayed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Making Payments](../../payables-make-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md deleted file mode 100644 index 60dafafe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU - description: You must set up data export record sources to be able to export Grundsätze zum Datenzugriff und zur Prüfkbarkeit digtaler Unterlagen (GDPdU) data. For each data export type, you must define one or more record sources, where each source is a table from which you want to export data. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU -You must set up data export record sources to be able to export Grundsätze zum Datenzugriff und zur Prüfkbarkeit digtaler Unterlagen (GDPdU) data. For each data export type, you must define one or more record sources, where each source is a table from which you want to export data. - -## To set up a GDPdU data export - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Data Exports**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Data Exports** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify the unique code for the data export, such as **Export-1**.| - |**Description**|Specify the description for the data export.| - -You must add record definitions to the data export. Each record definition represents a set of data that will be exported. - -## To add a record definition to a GDPdU definition group - -1. In the **Data Exports** window, choose the **Record Definitions** action. -2. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Data Export Code**|Select the data export code.

If no data export code exists, you can create a new one.| - |**Description**|Specify the description for the record definition.| - |**Export Path**|Specify the path where the exported files will be stored.| - - Next, you must add the relevant .dtd file that is required according to the GDPdU, such as **gdpdu-01-08-2002.dtd**. If you must import a new DTD file to replace an existing file, you must first export the existing DTD file. - -3. Choose the **Import** action. -4. In the **Import** window, navigate to the location of the relevant DTD file, and then choose the **Open** button. - -Next, you must specify the source for the data that will be exported. - -## To add source tables to a data export - -1. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, choose the **Record Source** action. -2. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Table No.**|Select the number of the main table to export data from.

When you enter a value in the **Table No.** field, the **Table Name** field is updated.| - |**Export Table Name**|Optional. Change the suggested name of the table to be used in the INDEX.XML file during the export.

The value of the **Export Table Name** field is used to generate the INDEX.XML file during the GDPdU data export. The default name is the name of the table without special characters due to the requirements of the auditors’ tool.

**Tip:** In most cases, the **Export Table Name** and **Export File Name** fields are based on the same value.

There may be cases where you specify exporting the same table more than once. You can choose different Export Table Names for each table entry, and the Export File Name will be automatically adjusted to match. You can then change the Export File Name as long as it is unique.

[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] automatically names the files as follows.

**Table Name:** G/L Account

**Export Table Name**: GLAccount

**Export File Name:** GLAccount.txt

**Table Name:** G/L Account

**Export Table Name:** GLAccount1

**Export File Name:** GLAccount1.txt| - |**Period Field No.**|Specify a filter for which date field will be used in setting the start date and end date of the report.

For example, if you select the **G/L Entry** table as your data export source, you can select one of the date fields that are available in that table.| - |**Table Filter**|Specify a field on which you want to set a filter.

In the **Table Filter** window, enter filter settings in the **Field Filter** column.

For example, you can specify a field that conveys information about the amount. You can also specify a date field and set a filter for it if you want to filter on a time period other than Start Date .. End Date. However, you cannot specify a date field and set a filter for it if the same field is already used in the Period Field No.| - |**Date Filter Field No.**|Specify a date filter field if the table has one.

If the table has more than one date filter, do not specify one in this field.| - |**Date Filter Handing**|Specify how the date filter is to be handled:

* <: No filter is set.

* Period: Use the specified Start Date and End Date.

* End Date Only: Use the batch job's End Date.

* Start Date Only: Use the batch job's Start Date - 1.| - |**Export File Name**|Specify the name of the file that data from this table will be exported to.

For example, if the table is the **G/L Account** table, the value of the **Export Table Name** can be **GLAccount**, and the value of the **Export File Name** field can be **GLAccount.txt**.| - |**Key No.**|Optional. Specify the key field.| - - For more linformation, see the "GDPdU Filter Examples" section. - - Next, you must specify the fields that data will be exported from. - -3. In the **Fields** pane, choose the **Add** action. -4. In the **Data Exp. Field List** window, select one or more fields that you want to export, and then choose the **OK** button. - - 1. To change the order of the fields, choose the **Move Up** or the **Move Down** action. - 2. To remove a field from the list of selected fields, choose the **Delete** action. - -You have added the main table from which to export. Optionally, you can add one or more related tables. - -## To add related tables to a data export source - -1. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, in the line below the line for the main table, add the related table. -2. Choose the **Indent** action. -3. Select the indented table, and then choose the **Relationships** action. -4. In the **GDPdU Table Relation** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Field No.**|Contains the number of the field in the parent table. You can specify that this field is related to a field in the subordinate table.| - |**To Field No.**|Contains the number of the field in the subordinate table. You can specify that a field in the parent table is related to this field.| - - > [!NOTE] - > The **From Field Name** and the **To Field Name** fields are populated automatically. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -After you have added tables and fields, you must validate that the structure of the data export source is correct. - -## To validate the data export source - -In the **Data Exp. Record Source** window, choose the **Validate** action. - -This validates the list of fields against the keys for the tables. If you select a primary key after you select a secondary key, an error message displays, and you must change the order of the fields in the **Fields** pane. - -## GDPdU Filter Examples -The following section provides examples of how you can use and combine different filter types when you set up your GPDdU exports. By setting filters appropriately, you can improve performance. - -The following examples use the G/L Entry and Cust. Ledger Entry tables for data. They assume that you have specified the following date in the **Export Business Data** batch job. - -- Start Date = 01/01/2013 -- End Date = 12/31/2013 - -### Setting Up Export Record Source Examples - -#### Period Field No. -In the **Data Export Record Source** window, the set up is as described in the following table. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Period Field No.|Period Field Name|Table Filter| -|---------------|----------------|----------------------|-----------------------|------------------| -|17|G/L Entry|4|Posting Date|No filter set.| -|21|Cust. Ledger Entry|4|Posting Date|No filter set.| - -**Export Results** - -- G/L Entries with Posting Date between 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Cust. Ledger Entries with Posting Date between 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. - -#### Table Filter -In this example, in addition to Period Field No. information, you also specify a table filter. This is useful when you want to not only include a starting date and ending date for your export, but also include an additional filter to specify other criteria, for example, amounts. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Period Field No.|Period Field Name|Table Filter| -|---------------|----------------|----------------------|-----------------------|------------------| -|17|G/L Entry|4|Posting Date|| -|21|Cust. Ledger Entry|||Cust. Ledger Entry: **Posting Date=..31-12-13**| - -**Export Results** - -- G/L Entries with Posting Date between 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Cust. Ledger Entries with Posting Date earlier than 01/01/2014. - -#### Date Filter Field No. and Date Filter Handling -The following example demonstrates setting Date type FlowFilters. If a table has more than one date FlowFilter, you cannot specify one to use, but you can specify how the date filter should be handled. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Period Field No.|Period Field Name|Table Filter|Date Filter Handling| -|---------------|----------------|----------------------|-----------------------|------------------|--------------------------| -|18|Customer|||Customer: **Net Change (LCY)**=<>0|**Period**| -|21|Cust. Ledger Entry|4|Posting Date|Cust. Ledger Entry: **Remaining Amt. (LCY)**=<>0|**End Date Only**| - -**Export Results** - -- Customers that have Net Change (LCY) <> 0 in the period from 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Cust. Ledger Entries with Posting Date between 01/01/2013 and 12/31/2013 that have Remaining Amt. (LCY) <> 0 at 12/31/2013. - -#### Date Filter Handling for the Same Table -In this example, you set multiple filter definitions for the same table. - -|Table No.|Table Name|Table Filter|Date Filter Handling| -|---------------|----------------|------------------|--------------------------| -|18|Customer|Customer: **Net Change (LCY)**=<>0|**Period**| -|18|Customer|Customer: **Net Change (LCY)**=<>0|**Start Date Only**| - -**Export Results** - -- Customers that have Net Change (LCY) <> 0 in the period from 1/1/2013 and 12/31/2013. -- Customers that have Net Change (LCY) <> 0 on the day before the start date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central]/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU)](process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md) - [How to: Export GDPdU Data](how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md deleted file mode 100644 index 045de50c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text - description: To create delivery reminders, you must perform certain setup. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text -To create delivery reminders, you must set up the following: - -- Delivery reminder terms -- Delivery reminder levels -- Delivery reminder text messages - -Each delivery reminder term has two or more delivery reminder levels, and for each delivery reminder level, you can specify text that will be part of the delivery reminder. - -For more information, see [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md). - -## To set up delivery reminder terms - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delivery Reminder Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The code for the delivery reminder term. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|The description for the delivery reminder term. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Max. No. of Delivery Reminders**|The maximum number of delivery reminders that can be created for an order.

**NOTE:** This is the maximum number across all reminder levels for this reminder term. For example, if you have set up three levels, and you set **Max. No. of Delivery Reminders** to 5, the first reminder is created at level 1, the second at level 2, and the last three at level 3.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To add delivery reminder levels to a delivery reminder term - -1. In the **Delivery Reminder Terms** window, select the delivery reminder term for which you want to set up levels, and then choose the **Levels** action. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|The delivery reminder level number. This field is filled in automatically.| - |**Due Date Calculation**|The formula for the due date calculation for the delivery reminder. You can enter a combination of numbers from 0 to 9999, and date codes (D for day, WD for weekday, W for week, M for month, Q for quarter, or Y for year). The date codes denote the calculation for the delivery reminder due date. You can enter a maximum of 20 characters for the due date calculation formula.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -For each delivery reminder level, you can define text messages that are added to the delivery reminder. You can define beginning text that is added before the description of the overdue purchase order, and ending text that is added after the description of the overdue purchase order. - -The following procedure describes how to set up beginning text messages, but the same steps apply for setting up ending text messages. - -## To set up delivery reminder text messages - -1. In the **Delivery Reminder Levels** window, select a level, and then choose the **Beginning Text** action. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Description** field, enter the beginning text message for the delivery reminder. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 23aeb40e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Delivery Reminders (Germany) - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use purchase delivery reminders to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders (Germany) -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use purchase delivery reminders to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. To create delivery reminders for vendors, you must set up base data for delivery reminder creation and number series for the delivery reminders in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. - -## To set up delivery reminders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Default Del. Rem. Date Field** field, specify one of the following options as described in the following table. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Requested Receipt Date**|To specify that the date value in the **Requested Receipt Date** field on the purchase order line will be used as the default date for creating delivery reminders.| - |**Promised Receipt Date**|To specify that the date value in the **Promised Receipt Date** field on the purchase order line will be used as the default date for creating delivery reminders.| - |**Expected Receipt Date**|To specify that the date value in the **Expected Receipt Date** field on the purchase order line will be used as the default date for creating delivery reminders.| - -3. On the **Numbering** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Delivery Reminder Nos.**|The number series code for delivery reminders.| - |**Issued Delivery Reminder Nos.**|The number series code for issued delivery reminders.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7240e372..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Physical Inventory Documents - description: Before you can use physical inventory order and physical inventory recording documents, you have to set up some properties. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Physical Inventory Documents -Before you can use physical inventory order and physical inventory recording documents, you have to set up some properties. - -## To enter the properties for physical inventory documents - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Numbering** FastTab, fill in the fields for physical inventory. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [Physical Inventory Documents](physical-inventory-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat.md deleted file mode 100644 index bfc6c6e3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Reports for VAT and Intrastat - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can specify which reports to use to create the documents that you must submit to the authorities, such as the VAT statement and the Intrastat form. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Reports for VAT and Intrastat -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can specify which reports to use to create the documents that you must submit to the authorities, such as the VAT statement and the Intrastat form. - -### To set up reports for VAT - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Selections VAT**, and then choose the related link. - -2. In the **Report Selection – VAT** window, in the **Usage** field, select the type of document that you want to specify reports for. This includes the VAT statement and the VAT statement schedule. - -3. Specify the report or batch job that must run when a user starts the activity for the document type that you specified in the **Usage** field. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Sequence**|Specifies where a report is in the printing order.| - |**Report ID**|Specifies the ID of the report that prints for this document type.| - |**Report Name**|Specifies the name of the report that prints for this document type. The **Report Name** field updates based on the selection in the **Report ID** field.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -### To set up reports for Intrastat - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Selection**, and then choose the related link. - -2. In the **Report Selection – Intrastat** window, in the **Usage** field, select the type of document that you want to specify reports for. This includes the Intrastat checklist and Intrastat form. - -3. Specify the report or batch job that must run when a user starts the activity for the document type that you specified in the **Usage** field. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Sequence**|Specifies where a report is in the printing order.| - |**Report ID**|Specifies the ID of the report that prints for this document type.| - |**Report Name**|Specifies the name of the report that prints for this document type. The **Report Name** field updates based on the selection in the **Report ID** field.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Export and Print Intrastat Reports](how-to-export-and-print-intrastat-reports.md) -[VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md deleted file mode 100644 index ab357b00..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-sales-vat-advance-notifications-for-elster.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], to submit valid sales VAT advance notifications to the ELSTER portal, you must perform certain setup. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Sales VAT Advance Notifications for ELSTER -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], to submit valid sales VAT advance notifications to the ELSTER portal, you must set up the following: - -- The company registration information and tax office information. -- The number series for sales VAT advance notification. -- The user authentication for the tax authorities. -- The VAT statement. - -You must also download components from the ELSTER portal. For more information, see the [ELSTER online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=155998). - -## To set up company information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Company Information** window, on the **General** FastTab, in the **VAT Representative** field, enter the contact person for VAT related information. -3. On the **Tax Office** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Use Proxy Server** | Select to use a proxy server for communication. | - | **Proxy Server Authent. Required** | Select to use a dedicated proxy server for authentication.

If you use a proxy server and the required dedicated authentication, then you must enter the user account and the password before transmitting. If you use Windows authentication, do not select this field. | - | **Proxy Server IP-Address/Port** | The address and the port that will be used for communication if you use a proxy server. | - - -4. On the **HTTP Servers** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |-----------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **HTTP Server URL 1** | Specifies a server of the Oberfinanzdirektion (OFD), such as ****. | - | **HTTP Server URL 2** | Specifies a server of the OFD, such as ****. | - | **HTTP Server URL 3** | Specifies a server of the OFD, such as ****. | - | **HTTP Server URL 4** | Specifies a server of the OFD, such as ****. | - - Now you must specify the users who can submit documents to the ELSTER portal. - -5. Choose the **Certificates** action. - - For more information about ELSTER certificates, see the [ELSTER online portal](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=155998). - - 1. In the **Certificates** window, in the **User ID** field, specify the user who you want to authorize to submit documents to ELSTER. - 2. Choose the **Upload Elster Certificate** action, and then specify the certificate file, such as Coala2019.pem.cer. - 3. Choose **Upload PFX File**, and then specify the personal certificate file for this user, such as test-soft-pse.pfx. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > If data encryption is not already enabled, you must enable it before you proceed. - - 4. Choose the **Set Pfx File Password** option, and then specify the password for this personal certificate. - -6. Repeat step 5 for other users who will submit documents to ELSTER. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up a VAT statement for sales VAT advance notifications - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Statement** window, in the **Name** field, choose the drop-down arrow. -3. In the **VAT Statement Names** window, in the line for the appropriate VAT statement name select the **Sales VAT Adv. Notification** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > Only one VAT statement name can be selected for sales VAT advance notification at one time. The VAT statement must have a VAT statement line for each key figure required by the tax authority, where the **Row No.** field contains the key figure and the **Amount Type** field specifies if this is a base amount or a tax amount. Ask your tax office if you have questions concerning the key figures and their definition. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Submission of Sales VAT Advance Notifications to ELSTER](electronic-submission-of-sales-vat-advance-notifications-to-elster.md) - [How to: Create and Submit Sales VAT Advance Notifications](how-to-create-and-submit-sales-vat-advance-notifications.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-vat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-vat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1c777ac9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-set-up-vat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up VAT Reports - description: Information from various invoice types is used to feed data into the EU Sales List report. To file a VAT report under the ELMA5 system from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you need to set up report parameters. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up VAT Reports -Information from various invoice types is used to feed data into the EU Sales List report. To file a VAT report under the ELMA5 system from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you need to set up report parameters. - -## To set up a VAT report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Report Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select the **Modify Submitted Reports** check box to let users modify VAT reports that have been submitted to the tax authorities. - - If the field is left blank, users must create a corrective VAT report instead. - -3. Select the **Export Cancellation Lines** check box if you want to include information about cancellation lines when you export data for the VAT report of EU sales. For more information, see [How to: Correct VAT Reports](how-to-correct-vat-reports.md). -4. On the **Numbering** FastTab, specify the number series that will be used for standard VAT reports. This will be the default numbering series that is used on any VAT Report that you then create. - - Depending on the requirements, you can use the same number series for all VAT reports, or separate number series for each type of VAT report. - - For example, if your company uses separate number series for standard and corrective VAT reports, this number series is the default number series. Users can select a different number series in the **No.** field when they create corrective reports. - -5. On the **ZIVIT** FastTab, specify information for the fields. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Reporting](vat-reporting.md) - [How to: Create VAT Reports](how-to-create-vat-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-upgrade-a-.dtd-definition-file.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-upgrade-a-.dtd-definition-file.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5c58a87d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-upgrade-a-.dtd-definition-file.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Upgrade a .DTD Definition File - description: You can explicitly validate a .dtd file after you import one in order to address upgrade issues. This is useful when you have an existing setup that needs to be updated to reflect the current version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Upgrade a .DTD Definition File -You can explicitly validate a .dtd file after you import one in order to address upgrade issues. This is useful when you have an existing setup that needs to be updated to reflect the current version of Microsoft Dynamics NAV. - -## To upgrade and validate a .dtd file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Data Exports**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Record Definitions** action. -3. Set up a record definition, and choose the **Import** action. -4. Select a file to import, and then choose the **Validate** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU](how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index c7ffc40f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Duplicate Physical Inventory Order Lines - description: If you create physical inventory order lines manually, or if you change automatically created lines, you must make sure that there are no duplicate lines. You can create a list of duplicate physical inventory order lines. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Duplicate Physical Inventory Order Lines -If you create physical inventory order lines manually, or if you change automatically created lines, you must make sure that there are no duplicate lines. You can create a list of duplicate physical inventory order lines. - -The combination of the Item No., Variant Code, Location Code, and Bin Code fields in the inventory order lines should exist only one time for a physical inventory order. This is verified when assigning physical inventory recording lines to physical inventory order lines. - -## To view duplicate physical inventory order lines - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the physical inventory order that you want to view to duplicate lines of. -3. Choose the **Show Duplicate Lines** action. - -Any duplicate physical inventory order lines are displayed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory](physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index baa9342f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Physical Inventory Documents - description: You can take inventory of your items using the physical inventory order and the physical inventory recording documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Physical Inventory Documents -You can take inventory of your items using the physical inventory order and the physical inventory recording documents. - -The physical inventory order contains data for planning, realizing, and analyzing physical inventory. The item, location, and bin information are also available. - -## Physical Inventory Recording -The physical inventory recording contains the item names and quantities counted while taking physical inventory. An item may be counted in more than one physical inventory recording. - -A physical inventory order can be related to more than one physical inventory recording, but a physical inventory recording can be related to only one physical inventory order. For more information, see [Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory](physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md). - -After completing the physical inventory recordings and the physical inventory order, you can post the physical inventory order. The information is transferred to the physical inventory journal. After this transfer, the physical inventory order will be available as a posted physical inventory order for future retrieval. - -## Posted Physical Inventory Documents -After posting the physical inventory order will be deleted and you can view and evaluate the document as posted physical inventory order. - -When posting the physical inventory orders also physical inventory recording headers and physical inventory recording lines and physical inventory comment lines will be transferred to posted documents. - -The posted inventory documents offer you the possibility to get a complete overview about the whole process of physical inventory. You cannot change the data of posted physical inventory order headers and posted physical inventory order lines because the documents have been already posted. - -If you have used also item tracking lines to register serial nos. and lot nos. the program will save the expected item tracking lines, the recorded item tracking lines and the posted item tracking ledger entries. - -It is possible to use the posted physical inventory order to create new physical inventory orders using the copy function. - -You can use Navigate to view the inventory ledger entries and other related ledger entries for a posted physical inventory order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](../../warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) - [Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) - [Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory](physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md) - [How to: Set Up Physical Inventory Documents](how-to-set-up-physical-inventory-documents.md) - [How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: Post Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-post-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory](how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md) - [Germany Local Functionality](germany-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index dd875b1b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines - description: Item tracking lines are used to enter serial nos. and lot nos. for physical inventory order lines. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines -Item tracking lines are used to enter serial nos. and lot nos. for physical inventory order lines. - - The program will obey the item tracking lines only if there is a check mark in the field Use Tracking Lines of the physical inventory order line. - - The program places the checkmark automatically depending on the settings for the item tracking code from the item table. You can also set or delete the check mark in the check box manually. Placing a check mark here is only possible, if the item of the current physical inventory order line has been posted all the time using serial nos. or lot nos. - - If there is a check mark in this check box the program uses 3 places, where tracking information can be found: - -- expected item tracking lines - -- physical counts with serial nos. and lot nos. on the physical inventory recording line. - -- item tracking lines to post. - - **Expected Tracking Lines:** - - If you have the program to calculate the field Qty. Expected (Base) on the physical inventory order line, the program also calculates a list for the current item containing quantities with serial nos. and lot nos. which should be available on stock. - - The program includes in the calculation all item ledger entries, which have been posted until the Posting Date of the inventory order header and which have the same values on the 4 fields Item No., Variant Code, Location Code and Bin Code on the physical inventory order line. - - You can view the expected tracking lines for the current physical inventory order line. Choose **Line**, **Item Tracking Lines**, **Expected Tracking Lines**. The window Expect. Phys. Inv. Track. List opens. - - **Serial No./Lot No. On The Physical Inventory Recording Line:** - - If you enter the recorded quantities on the physical inventory recording, you can enter serial nos./lot nos. to. When finishing the physical inventory recording, the program will assign the physical inventory recording lines with serial nos./ lot nos. to physical inventory order lines. - - You can view the counted serial nos. and lot nos. for the current physical inventory order line. Choose **Line**, **Recording Lines**. The window Phys. Invt. Recording Lines opens. - - **Item Tracking Lines To Post:** - - When finishing the physical inventory order, the program compares the expected quantity and the recorded (counted) quantity and calculates the difference. If you have the program also to obey item tracking lines (by placing a check mark on the field Use Tracking Lines of the physical inventory order line), the program also calculates the differences between the expected serial nos. and lot nos. and the recorded serial nos. and lot nos. The list of the calculated differences will be used by the program when posting the physical inventory order. - - You can view the item tracking lines to post for the current physical inventory order line. Choose **Line**, **Item Tracking Lines**, **All Diff. Tracking Lines**. The window **Phys. Invt. Item Track. List** opens. - - For more information, see [Example - Inventory Order Line with Tracking Lines](example-inventory-order-line-with-tracking-lines.md). - - You can have the program to print the item tracking lines optional when printing the report Phys. Invt. Order Diff. List for the inventory order lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Physical Inventory Orders](how-to-enter-physical-inventory-orders.md) - [How to: Calculate Quantity On Hand for a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-calculate-quantity-on-hand-for-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory](physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Order](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-order.md) - [How to: Analyze Physical Inventory Differences](how-to-analyze-physical-inventory-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8eac497..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/physical-inventory-recording-counting-physical-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory - description: After you have created a physical inventory order and after you have entered the physical inventory order lines, you can take the physical inventory. Therefore you can use the physical inventory recording documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Physical Inventory Recording - Counting Physical Inventory -After you have created a physical inventory order and after you have entered the physical inventory order lines, you can take the physical inventory. Therefore you can use the physical inventory recording documents. - -A physical inventory recording is related to only one physical inventory order. A physical inventory order may have relations to more than one physical inventory recordings. - -A physical inventory recoding consists of a physical inventory recording header and a number of physical inventory recording lines. The physical inventory recording header contains the information, that are common for all physical inventory recording lines. - -This lines contain the items, locations, bins and the recorded quantities. - -You can create lines manually or you can have the program to create new physical inventory recordings automatically. You can print physical inventory recording lists. - -By setting the Status to finished, you tell the program, that the current physical inventory recording has been finished. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you finish the current physical inventory recording, the program assigns every physical inventory recording line to one line of the related physical inventory order. The program assigns this physical inventory order lines with the same values in the 4 fields Item No., Variant Code, Location Code and Bin Code like in the physical inventory recording line. -> -> If there is no such physical inventory order line the program will automatically insert a new line when finishing the physical inventory recording. The program will note this by placing a check mark in the field Recorded without Order on the physical inventory order line. -> -> If there are more than one such physical inventory order lines, an error message appears. You can have the program to show you the duplicate lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-create-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: Finish a Physical Inventory Recording](how-to-finish-a-physical-inventory-recording.md) - [How to: View Duplicate Physical Inventory Order Lines](how-to-view-duplicate-physical-inventory-order-lines.md) - [Physical Inventory Order Lines With Item Tracking Lines](physical-inventory-order-lines-with-item-tracking-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 89c1e071..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU) - description: You can export data from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] according to the process for data access and testability of digital documents (GDPdU), which is based on German tax law. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU) -You can export data from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] according to the process for data access and testability of digital documents (GDPdU), which is based on German tax law. - -## Overview -Section 147(6) of the German Fiscal Code (Abgabenordnung, AO) allows tax authorities to assess the data of electronic accounting systems digitally. They may do this with a data storage device submitted to them or by direct or indirect access to the system. In the data storage device scenario, the tax liable company (or the person or entity entrusted with accounting and tax duties) must provide appropriate data storage devices with the data in computer-readable form. This means for the tax authorities that they will be able to access at will all stored data, including the master data and connections with sort and filter functions. To provide data that can be used and evaluated in this manner, you must define and standardize the file formats for submission by data storage device. - -Tax authorities in Germany use analysis software, IDEA, which imports data from ASCII files. The IDEA software can import data in variable length or fixed length format. It requires an XML file, index.xml, that describes the structure of the data files. For more information, see the [Audicon website for GDPdU](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=245841). - -## Defining GDPdU Export Data -You can configure [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to export GDPdU data to meet your needs. You can export large sets of data, and you can export small sets of data. You can export data from a single table or a table and related tables. - -For each data export, you define the tables and fields that you want to export. This depends on the auditor's requests. The selected information is exported to the ASCII files. A corresponding XML file, INDEX.XML, is also created to describe the ASCII file structure. - -The elements in the INDEX.XML file define the names of the tables and fields that are exported. Because the current auditing tool has restrictions on these field names, such as the length and the characters that are used, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] removes spaces and special characters and then truncates the names to match the 20 character limitation. You can change the suggested table and field names when you add fields to a table definition. - -In most cases, you will set up GDPdU data export one time, and then a person in your company can run the export when the auditor requests new data. It is recommended that the setup is handled by people with an understanding of the database structure and the technical hardware in your company, but also in collaboration with people who understand the business data, such as the accountant. - -## Configuration -You can set up different GDPdU data exports depending on the type of data that you want to be able to export. For example, you can create two GDPdU data exports: - -- One exports high-level information about all general ledger entries, customer ledger entries, vendor ledger entries, and VAT entries. -- The other exports detailed information about the general ledger entries. - -> [!NOTE] -> How to set up the GDPdU data exports depends on your company’s needs and the auditor’s requests. - -For an example of how to set up data exports for GDPdU, see [Walkthrough: Exporting GDPdU Data](walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data.md). - -### Data Export Filters -When you set up a data export, you can filter data on different levels as described in the following table. - -|Filter level|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Period filters|You can specify a start date and end date for the data that will be exported. You can then use this period filter to filter the data. For example, if you set a period filter for the export, you can then set table filters that use the period.| -|Table filters|You can set filters on each table in the export. For example, you can include only open ledger entries, or entries that have a posting date in the specified filter. You can also set a filter that is based on FlowFields, such as **Net Change (LCY)**, to only export customers where there has been a change, for example. **Important:** You cannot set a table filter that is based on a FlowFilter.

When you add table filters, you can increase performance by specifying the fields that the exported data will be sorted by the value of the **Key No.** field for the record definition. Which keys to use depends on the table. For example, if the table only has two key fields and relatively few entries, then the sort order does not affect the speed of the export. But for a table such as G/L Entry, the export is faster if you specify the key in advance, such as the `G/L Account No.,Posting Date` key. If you do not specify a key, then the primary key is used, which might not be the best choice.

Other tables in which it can be useful to specify the key include the Cust. Ledger Entry and Vendor Ledger Entry tables.| -|FlowField filters|You can include FlowFields in the export and set filters based on the period. For example, you can apply the period filter to the **Balance at Date** field on the **G/L Account** table.| - -If you include a FlowField such as the **Net Change (LCY)** field on the **Customer** table, you can specify that the entries must be filtered based on the remaining amount at the end date of the GDPdU period. If you add this as a field filter, then the calculation formulas are based on the dates that are specified during the export. - -For more informa.tion, see the "GDPdU Filter Examples" section in [How to: Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU](how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md). - -## Export Performance - If you want to export large sets of data, it can take a very long time. We recommend that you set up data exports based on advice from your tax advisor to establish your business needs, and the requirements of the tax auditor. The number of records in a table is also something that you should consider. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU](how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md) - [How to: Export GDPdU Data](how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md) - [Walkthrough: Exporting GDPdU Data](walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data.md) - [Germany Local Functionality](germany-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/vat-reporting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/vat-reporting.md deleted file mode 100644 index f2966e68..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/vat-reporting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT Reporting (Germany) - description: You can report VAT electronically to the tax authorities. You can generate, electronically sign, encrypt, and send an XML file directly to the German ELSTER portal. Response messages are received and processed in the same transaction. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT Reporting (Germany) -You can report VAT electronically to the tax authorities. You can generate, electronically sign, encrypt, and send an XML file directly to the German ELSTER portal. Response messages are received and processed in the same transaction. - -You can print the following local VAT reports. - -|Report|Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|**VAT Statement Germany**|A simple VAT report. The main VAT reporting is handled by the ELSTER functionality. The amounts are differentiated by taxable base and taxable amount.

Serves as the basis for VAT registration for a selected period, and is printed according to the VAT statement in the VAT Statement Line table.

Use this report in conjunction with VAT correction.| -|**VAT Statement AT**|The Austrian VAT statement serves as the basis for VAT registration for a selected period, and is printed according to the VAT statement in the VAT Statement Line table. You can generate the report in three different formats. For more information, see VAT Statement AT.| -|**Sales VAT Adv. Not. Acc. Proof**|Confirms that entries in the VAT statement form are also posted in general ledger accounts.

To verify VAT in sales VAT advance notifications, select the same settings for the VAT statement form and the sales VAT advance notification.| -|**VAT Statement Schedule**|This report can be retrieved from the **VAT Statement** window.

Prints the settings in the VAT statement. Using this report, you can print the characteristics of the **Sales VAT Adv. Not. Acc. Proof**.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How To: Report VAT to the Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) -[How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases](../../finance-work-with-vat.md) -[How to: Set Up Reports for VAT and Intrastat](how-to-set-up-reports-for-vat-and-intrastat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index 90eaf891..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Germany/walkthrough-exporting-gdpdu-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,280 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Exporting GDPdU Data - description: You can export business data for auditing purposes. How the data export is set up is different for all companies, and you should ask your tax advisor and the tax auditor. The following walkthrough describes the end-to-end process, but it is an example only. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Exporting GDPdU Data -You can export business data for auditing purposes. How the data export is set up is different for all companies, and you should ask your tax advisor and the tax auditor. The following walkthrough describes the end-to-end process, but it is an example only. - -The sample implementation illustrates a scenario where the auditor has requested that you export data from your general ledger, and information about your customers and vendors. This is not an example that is based on actual requirements from a tax auditor, but it serves to illustrate how to export data according to the process for data access and testability of digital documents (GDPdU) in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## About This Walkthrough -This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Setting up requirements for the data export. -- Setting up the source for the data export. -- Exporting data for the tax auditor. - -## Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- The German version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] with the CRONUS AG demonstraltion company. -- The .DTD file that is required according to the GDPdU. In this scenario, **gdpdu-01-08-2002.dtd**. - -## Story -Cassie is an accountant at CRONUS AG. She has been notified by the company’s tax auditor that they want to see a list of purchase and sales transactions in the first quarter of the calendar year 2013. Cassie knows the type of financial data that the auditor wants, but she needs the help of Sean to set up the export. - -Sean is a power user with CRONUS AG. He understands how the data is set up technically with tables and fields. Therefore he usually helps Cassie set up the data exports for the auditors. From other data exports, he knows that the tool that the auditors use has some requirements on what the exported files must contain, but he needs the help of Cassie to establish exactly which data is needed. - -## Defining the Requirements -Cassie sets up the requirements for the data export. The auditors have asked her for transactions with customers and vendors. Therefore she knows that she needs data from the customer ledger, the vendor ledger, and the general ledger. - -### To set up the requirements for a data export - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Data Export**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Data Exports** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The unique code for the data export, **AUDIT-Q113**.| - |**Description**|The description for the data export, **Data export for Q1 of CY 2013**.| - - The **AUDIT-Q113** code is a container for the data export. - - Next, Cassie adds descriptions of the kind of data that she needs in the export. - -4. In the **Data Exports** window, choose the **Record Definitions** action. -5. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, choose the **Record Code** field, and then, in the window that appears, choose the **New** action. -6. In the **Data Export Record Types** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The code for the record type, **GLCUSTVEND**.| - |**Description**|The description for the record type, **G/L, Cust., Vend.**.| - -7. Choose the **OK** button. -8. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Record Code**|Select the record code, **GLCUSTVEND**.| - |**Description**|The description for the record type is added automatically, but you can change this to **General ledger, customers and vendors**, for example.| - |**Export Path**|Specify the path where the exported files will be stored.

In this scenario, **C:Exports**.| - - If the specified folder does not exist, choose the **Yes** button to create it. - -Next, Cassie specifies the source for the data that will be exported. She knows from previous exports that she wants data from the following tables: - -- **G/L Account** -- **Customer** -- **Vendor** - -### To specify requirements for the source for the data export - -1. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, choose the **Record Source** action. -2. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, in the **Table No.** field, enter **15**. - - The **Table Name** field is automatically updated with the name of the **G/L Account** table. - -3. In the **Notes** part, choose the link, and then enter the following text: - - **I need entries that show the affected accounts, the posting date, the balance, and the net change.** - -4. Repeat the two previous steps to add tables 18, **Customer**, and 23, **Vendor** to the data export record source. - - For these tables, Cassie asks for data about each customer and vendor and detailed information about each transaction based on the customer ledger and the vendor ledger. She also asks for the net change at the start of the period, during the period, and after the period that the data export is for. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -Cassie has described the kind of data that she needs, and she notifies Sean that she wants his help is setting up the data export. - -## Setting Up the Source for the Data Export -Cassie and Sean have talked about the requirements. Cassie has explained what she means with the comments she has made for the first three tables in the record sources. The next day, Sean can complete the setup for the data export source. - -First, Sean adds the required .dtd file to the data export record definition. - -### To add a .dtd file to a record definition - -1. In the **Data Exports** window, choose the **AUDIT-Q113** data export, and then choose the **Record Definitions** action. -2. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, choose the line where the **Data Export Record Type Code** field is set to **GLCUSTVEND**, and then choose the **Import** action. -3. In the **Import** window, navigate to the location of the relevant DTD file, and then choose the **Open** button. - -Next, Sean adds the **G/L Entry** table to the source. Then he adds fields from that table and the **G/L Account** table. - -### To add the G/L Entry table to the data export record source - -1. In the **Data Export Record Definitions** window, choose the line where the **Data Export Record Type Code** field is set to **GLCUSTVEND**, and then choose the **Record Source** action. -2. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, select the line under the line for the **G/L Account** table, and then choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Table No.** field, enter **17**. - - The **Table Name** field is automatically updated with the name of the **G/L Entry** table. - -4. Choose the **Indent** action. - - This indents the **G/L Entry** table under the **G/L Account** table. Next, Sean adds a table relationship between the two tables. - -5. Choose the **Relationships** action. -6. In the **Data Exp. Table Relationship** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Field No.**|Contains the number of the field in the parent table. In this scenario, the **No.** field on the **G/L Account** table.| - |**To Field No.**|Contains the number of the field in the parent table. In this scenario, the **G/L Account No.** field on the **G/L Entry** table.| - -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -### To add fields from the G/L Account and G/L Entry tables to the data export record source - -1. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, select the line for the **G/L Account** table, and then choose the **Add** action. -2. Choose the following fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - - |Field number|Field name| - |------------------|----------------| - |1|**No.**| - |2|**Name**| - |4|**Account Type.**| - |31|**Balance at Date**| - |32|**Net Change**| - -3. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, select the line for the **G/L Entry** table, and then in the **Fields** pane, in the toolbar, choose the **Add** action. -4. Choose the following fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - - |Field number|Field name| - |------------------|----------------| - |4|**Posting Date**| - |5|**Document Type**| - |17|**Amount**| - -Sean added the **Posting Date** field from the **G/L Entry** table because Cassie needs the data to be filtered based on the posting date. Now, Sean will use the field to specify the field on the **G/L Entry** table that will be used to calculate the period for the data export. - -### To add a period filter to a table in a data export source - -1. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, select the line for the **G/L Entry** table, and then choose the **Period Field No.** field. -2. In the **Data Exp. Field List** window, choose the **Posting Date** field, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The **Data Exp. Field List** window is filtered to show only the date fields. - -This means that when Cassie exports the data and specifies the start date and the end date for the period that the auditors want, the export will include entries where the **Posting Date** field is between the specified start date and end date. - -Next, Sean adds the **Customer** and **Vendor** tables. - -### To add the Customer table - -1. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Table No.**|**18**| - |**Export Table Name**|**Customer**| - |**Export File Name**|**Customer.txt**| - -2. In the **Fields** pane, in the toolbar, choose the **Add** action. -3. Choose the following fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - - |Field number|Field name| - |------------------|----------------| - |1|**No.**| - |2|**Name**| - |21|**Customer Posting Group**| - |59|**Balance (LCY)**| - |61|**Net Change (LCY)**| - -4. Repeat the previous two steps to add the **Balance (LCY)** field again. -5. Choose the line for the first instance of the **Balance (LCY)** field, and then, in the **Datefilter Handling** field, choose **Startdate**. -6. Choose the line for the second instance of the **Balance (LCY)** field, and then, in the **Datefilter Handling** field, choose **Enddate**. -7. Choose the line for the **Net Change (LCY)** field, and then, in the **Datefilter Handling** field, choose **Startdate..Enddate**. - - The following table describes the field values for the fields on the **Customer** table. - - |**Field No.**|**Field Name**|**Field Class**|**Datefilter Handling**|**Export Field Name**| - |---------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------| - |1|**No.**|**Normal**||**No**| - |2|**Name**|**Normal**||**Name**| - |21|**Customer Posting Group**|**Normal**||**CustomerPostingGroup**| - |59|**Balance (LCY)**|**FlowField**|**..Startdate**|**StartBalanceLCY**| - |59|**Balance (LCY)**|**FlowField**|**..Enddate**|**EndBalanceLCY**| - |61|**Net Change (LCY)**|**FlowField**|**Startdate..Enddate**|**NetChangeLCYPeriod**| - - > [!TIP] - > To change the order of the fields, select a field, and then choose the **Move Up** or the **Move Down** action. - -Sean has added the **Customer** table to the data export source. Now, he adds the **Vendor** table. - -### To add the Vendor table - -1. In the **Data Export Record Source** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Table No.**|**23**| - |**Export Table Name**|**Vendor**| - |**Export File Name**|**Vendor.txt**| - -2. Follow the steps in the previous procedure to add fields from the **Vendor** table to the data export source. - - The following table describes the field values for the fields in the **Vendor** table. - - |**Field No.**|**Field Name**|**Field Class**|**Datefilter Handling**|**Export Field Name**| - |---------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------| - |1|**No.**|**Normal**||**No**| - |2|**Name**|**Normal**||**Name**| - |21|**Vendor Posting Group**|**Normal**||**VendorPostingGroup**| - |59|**Balance (LCY)**|**FlowField**|**..Startdate**|**StartBalanceLCY**| - |59|**Balance (LCY)**|**FlowField**|**..Enddate**|**EndBalanceLCY**| - |61|**Net Change (LCY)**|**FlowField**|**Startdate..Enddate**|**NetChangeLCYPeriod**| - -Sean has almost completed the setup, but he wants to verify that the data export source meets the technical requirements of the auditors’ tool. - -### To validate the data export source - -Choose the **Validate** action. - -Sean has now completed the setup of the data export based on the requirements from Cassie. He notifies her that she can start exporting data for the tax auditors. - -## Exporting Data for the Tax Auditors -Cassie wants to export data that she can then send to the tax auditors. - -### To export data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **GDPdU Export**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **GDPdU Export** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|The start date. In this scenario, **01-01-2013**.| - |**Ending Date**|The end date. In this scenario, **03-31-2013**.| - -3. On the **GDPdU Record Definition** FastTab, select filters as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Data Export Code**|In this scenario, **AUDIT-Q113**.| - |**Data Exp. Rec. Type Code**|In this scenario, **GLCUSTVEND**.| - -4. To export the data, choose the **OK** button. - -When the export is completed, Cassie is notified. She can now submit the exported files to the tax auditors. First, she examines the files in the C:Exports folder on her computer. There is a file for each table, and the files have the names that Sean specified in the data export source. There is also an INDEX.XML file that describes the structure of the data export with the names of the tables and fields that Sean specified. - -## Next Steps -When the tax auditors import Cassie’s files into their software, they can read the data that she exported. If the auditors need a new version of the same data export, Cassie can run the export again. - -The next time the tax auditors request new data, Cassie and Sean can collaborate to create a new data export. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process for Data Access and Testability of Digital Documents (GDPdU)](process-for-data-access-and-testability-of-digital-documents-gdpdu-.md) - [How to: Set Up Data Exports for GDPdU](how-to-set-up-data-exports-for-gdpdu.md) - [How to: Export GDPdU Data](how-to-export-gdpdu-data.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/deleting-posted-invoices-and-credit-memos.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/deleting-posted-invoices-and-credit-memos.md deleted file mode 100644 index 239e355c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/deleting-posted-invoices-and-credit-memos.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Deleting Posted Invoices and Credit Memos - description: In Iceland, in accordance with legislation, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] has been modified to prevent you from deleting posted invoices and credit memos. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Deleting Posted Invoices and Credit Memos -In Iceland, in accordance with legislation, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] has been modified to prevent you from deleting posted invoices and credit memos. When you attempt to delete one of these documents, a message will note that the posted document may not be deleted. The **Delete** command is not available on the ribbon for the following document types: - -- Sales invoices -- Sales credit memos -- Purchase invoices -- Purchase credit memos - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Invoice Sales](../../sales-how-invoice-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/electronic-invoicing-requirement-issuing-single-copy-invoice.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/electronic-invoicing-requirement-issuing-single-copy-invoice.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1fc84134..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/electronic-invoicing-requirement-issuing-single-copy-invoice.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Invoicing Requirement when Issuing Single Copy Invoice - description: In Iceland, you must send a report to the government if an invoice has been printed more than once. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Invoicing Requirement: Issuing Single Copy Invoice -In Iceland, you must send a report to the government if an invoice has been printed more than once. This report includes legal text, which confirms that the invoice originates from an Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) solution that complies with legislation. - -Using this feature, you can send a legal statement with terms and limitations for using single-copy invoices to the tax authorities. The **Printing** FastTab in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window contains a legal statement (terms and limitations for using single-copy invoices) and also provides an **Electronic Invoicing** check box, which you can select as a reminder that you need to print a statement for the tax authority. You can then print the **IRS Notification** report from the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. On the **Home** tab, in the **Report** group, choose **Print Statement**. - -On the standard posted invoices (invoice and credit memo), legal text is inserted stating that the invoices originate from an ERP solution that complies with Regulation No. 598/1999. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](../../sales-setup-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-map-irs-numbers-to-chart-of-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-map-irs-numbers-to-chart-of-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 350f8070..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-map-irs-numbers-to-chart-of-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Map IRS Numbers to Chart of Accounts - description: Companies in Iceland are required to send the tax authority a data file in a predefined format. Before you can do this, you must map predefined Internal Revenue Service (IRS) account codes to general ledger accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Map IRS Numbers to Chart of Accounts -Companies in Iceland are required to send the tax authority a data file in a predefined format. Before you can do this, you must map predefined Internal Revenue Service (IRS) account codes to general ledger accounts. - -## To create an Internal Revenue Service number - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IRS Number**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the new line, enter a number in the **IRS number** field, and provide a name in the **Name** field. -4. Select the **Reverse Prefix** check box if you want the negative operator to be reversed on the balance of the general ledger account that the IRS number is mapped to. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To map an IRS number to a general ledger account - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger account that has an **Account Type** of **Posting**. -3. In the **IRS Number** field, select an IRS number from the list. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Special Data Output and Reports for the Tax Authority](special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-print-vat-summary-information-on-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-print-vat-summary-information-on-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 12a9fa44..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/how-to-print-vat-summary-information-on-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print VAT Summary Information on Documents - description: If VAT is calculated, VAT summary information is typically printed on sales and purchase documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print VAT Summary Information on Documents -If VAT is calculated, VAT summary information is typically printed on sales and purchase documents. However, in Iceland, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] does not print VAT summary information if only one VAT sales code is used in the document. You can modify this behavior by using the **Always Show VAT Summary** option. - -The following procedure describes how to display VAT summary information on a sales invoice document, but the same steps also apply to sales order confirmations, sales quotes, sales credit memos, blanket sales orders, purchase orders, purchase invoices, and purchase credit memos. - -## To show VAT summary information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the list, select the relevant document, and then choose the **Print** action. -3. To display VAT information in the report, select the **Always Show VAT Summary** check box. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/iceland-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/iceland-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8c20cc4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/iceland-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Iceland Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Icelandic version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Iceland Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Icelandic version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - -## In This Section - [Icelandic Tax Regulations of Conditional Discounts](icelandic-tax-regulations-of-conditional-discounts.md) - [Electronic Invoicing Requirement: Issuing Single Copy Invoice](electronic-invoicing-requirement-issuing-single-copy-invoice.md) - [Deleting Posted Invoices and Credit Memos](deleting-posted-invoices-and-credit-memos.md) - [How to: Print VAT Summary Information on Documents](how-to-print-vat-summary-information-on-documents.md) - [Special Data Output and Reports for the Tax Authority](special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/icelandic-tax-regulations-of-conditional-discounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/icelandic-tax-regulations-of-conditional-discounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 60cc8cc6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/icelandic-tax-regulations-of-conditional-discounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Icelandic Tax Regulations of Conditional Discounts - description: In Iceland, it is a legal requirement to issue a credit memo if a conditional discount has been given. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Icelandic Tax Regulations of Conditional Discounts -In Iceland, it is a legal requirement to issue a credit memo if a conditional discount has been given. - -The local tax regulation of conditional discounts feature enables you to issue a credit memo if a conditional discount is given to a customer. The payment for a conditional discount must be made within a specified period. - -On the Sales and Receivables Setup form, a field has been added for number series for credit invoices. A new field has also been added in the Customer Ledger Entry table to link the appropriate entries to a credit invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](../../sales-setup-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority.md deleted file mode 100644 index 18828bbd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Iceland/special-data-output-and-reports-for-the-tax-authority.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Special Data Output and Reports for the Tax Authority - description: It is a legal requirement to send the tax authority a data file in a predefined format. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Special Data Output and Reports for the Tax Authority -It is a legal requirement to send the tax authority a data file in a predefined format. - -To generate the data file for the tax authorities, every account in the chart of accounts must be set up with the correct Internal Revenue Service (IRS) tax number as defined by the tax authority. - -General ledger accounts are mapped to predefined government account codes and these codes are divided into groups and types. You need to add the relevant IRS numbers and then manually map general ledger accounts to these codes. You must also report the data to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/fiscal-inventory-valuation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/fiscal-inventory-valuation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8999426e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/fiscal-inventory-valuation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Fiscal Inventory Valuation - description: You must submit an annual report that shows the monetary value of inventory items for the fiscal year. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fiscal Inventory Valuation -You must submit an annual report that shows the monetary value of inventory items for the fiscal year. According to the Italian requirements for fiscal inventory valuation, you must calculate the following cost types: - -- Year average cost -- Weighted average cost -- First in, First Out (FIFO) cost -- Last in, First Out (LIFO) cost -- Discrete LIFO cost - -## Fiscal Inventory Valuation in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] -Initially, you must set up the fiscal inventory valuation for all cost types in the **Item Costing Setup** window and the **Item Card** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fiscal Inventory Valuation](how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md). - -When you set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you must enter the inventory item ledger entries for the first year in order to calculate the item’s valuation. You can do this in the Before Start Item Cost window. - -To calculate discrete LIFO cost, you must set up information in the **Item Card** window and the **Subcontracting Prices** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> The discrete LIFO cost can only be calculated for items for which the **Inventory Valuation** field is set to **Discrete LIFO** in the **Item Card** window. - -After you set up the discrete LIFO cost calculation, you can post sales and purchase transactions based on year-end costs. - -## End of Year - At the end of the fiscal year, you can run the Calculate End Year Costs batch job to calculate the fiscal inventory value of each inventory item according to the required valuation methods. The results are shown in the Item Cost History List window. Then, you can run the **Fiscal Inventory Valuation** report and the **LIFO Valuation** report to show the inventory valuation. - - For year-end operations, such as calculating the profit and loss during a fiscal year, there is a definitive period and a non-definitive period. If the **Competence Year** field in the **Item Cost History List** window is equal to the fiscal year end date, it is a definitive period, and you cannot recalculate data for a definitive period. If the definitive data differs from the fiscal year end date, then it is a non-definitive period. There should be data for at least one non-definitive period to perform calculations or partial calculations. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Fiscal Inventory Valuation](how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md) - [How to: Set Up Initial Item Costs](how-to-set-up-initial-item-costs.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-close-a-fiscal-year.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-close-a-fiscal-year.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3084ed79..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-close-a-fiscal-year.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Close a Fiscal Year - description: To evaluate profit and loss, a fiscal year closing report is provided at the end of each fiscal year. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Close a Fiscal Year -To evaluate profit and loss, a fiscal year closing report is provided at the end of each fiscal year. - -Fiscal year closing involves the following steps: - -- Closing the fiscal year using the **Accounting Period** option. -- Generating a year-end closing entry using the **Close Income Statement** option. -- Posting the year-end closing entry. - -## To close a fiscal year - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the related link. -2. To close an accounting period, select the accounting period, and then choose the **Close Year** action. -3. To confirm that you want to close the fiscal year, choose the **Yes** button. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > After the fiscal year is closed it cannot be opened again, and the period in the fiscal year cannot be changed. - -## To generate a year-end closing entry using the Close Income Statement option - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Close Income Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** tab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Fiscal Year Ending Date**|The ending date for the fiscal year.| - |**Gen. Journal Template**|The name of the general journal template in which to place the entries.| - |**Gen. Journal Batch**|The name of the general journal batch in which to place the entries.| - |**Balancing Account No.**|Select the relevant account number.| - |**Document No.**|The batch job automatically populates this field with the next available number for the journal batch if you fill in the **Gen. Journal Template** and **Gen. Journal Batch** fields. You can also enter a number into this field manually.| - |**Net Profit Account No.**|Select the unique net profit account number.| - |**Net Loss Account No.**|Select the unique net loss account number.| - |**Posting Description**|Enter a description. The default text is **Close Income Statement**.| - |**Business Unit Code**|Select this check box if you require an entry for each business unit code.| - |**Dimensions**|Optionally, select the field to select the dimension codes if you require an entry for each dimension used in the general ledger account.| - |**Inventory Period Closed**|This field indicates that the inventory periods with ending dates greater than or equal to the last date of the accounting period are closed.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button to create the journal entries. - -## To post the year-end closing entry - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch** field, specify the batch that contains the closing entries. -3. Add the relevant entries to the journal lines. -4. To post the journal, choose the **Post** action. - -An entry is posted to each income statement account so that it has a zero balance. The year-end result is transferred to the balance sheet. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Years and Periods](../../year-close-years-periods.md) - [Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index e143753a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Correct VAT Transactions Reports - description: You can correct and resend VAT transaction reports. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Correct VAT Transactions Reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Reports**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new report. For more information, see [How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md). -3. In the new report, change the **VAT Report Type** field to **Corrective** or **Cancellation**. In the **Original Report No.** field, select the report that you want to correct from the list of available reports. The **Start Date** and **End Date** fields are copied from the original report. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only select VAT reports that are marked as Submitted, as it is required that the original report has a **Tax Auth. Receipt No.** - > - > If it is a corrective report, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Suggest Lines** to get the relevant VAT entries for the period. A cancellation report does not contain any lines. - > - > The suggested lines are based on the VAT entries within the specified period and the current threshold setup. It is not correlated with the information from the original report. - -4. Review the transaction details. To exclude a line from being reported to the tax authority, on the line, clear the **Incl. in Report** check box. - - Choose the **Export** action. The **Export VAT Transactions** batch job opens. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you choose **Export** for a report with the status Open, it will be automatically validated and the status will be changed to Released. At this point, you can reopen the report to make changes. - -5. Submit the file to the authority. Use the guidelines provided by the authority. For more information, see the [Italian Revenue Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=206524). - - After you receive a response from the tax authorities, you must update the VAT report. - -6. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Tax Auth. Receipt No.** field, specify the receipt number that you received from the tax authorities. -7. Choose the **Mark as Submitted** action to finalize the report. The **Status** field is updated to Submitted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Export VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 11050f06..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports - description: You must create a list of transactions that include VAT with amounts over the current threshold on or before the specified occurrence date. You submit this report to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports -You must create a list of transactions that include VAT with amounts over the current threshold on or before the specified occurrence date. You submit this report to the tax authorities. - -## To create a VAT transactions report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Report**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Without Contract**|The VAT entries that resulted in this line are not associated with a contract.| - |**Contract**|The VAT entries that resulted in this line are associated with a contract.| - |**Other**|The VAT entries that resulted in this line are not associated with a special contract, such as ongoing maintenance or other exceptions.| - - > [!TIP] - > In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], the contract that the tax authorities are looking for can be blanket orders or service contracts. To identify if the VAT report line belongs to a blanket order or service contract, you can drill down to see the underlying VAT entries from the **Amount** field. - -Credit memos are included in the VAT transaction report if the customer or vendor is from a country/region that is outside the EU. For more information, see [Italian VAT](italian-vat.md). - -Now that you have created the VAT report, you must submit it to the tax authorities. For more information, see [How to: Export VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Italian VAT](italian-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md deleted file mode 100644 index cc4afe12..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Multiple Fixed Asset Cards - description: You can create multiple fixed asset cards automatically during purchase invoice posting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Multiple Fixed Asset Cards -You can create multiple fixed asset cards automatically during purchase invoice posting. For example, if your company purchases 200 computers of the same kind from the same vendor, you do not have to manually create a fixed asset card for each computer; the fixed asset cards can be created automatically. - -## To create multiple fixed asset cards - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Lists** action, and then choose the **Fixed Assets** action. -3. In the **Fixed Asset List** window, choose the **New** action. -4. In the **Fixed Asset Card** window, fill in the relevant fields. - - You will use the value of the **No.** field when you generate the remaining fixed assets later. - -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -6. Create a new purchase order, or open the existing purchase order. -7. Expand the **Lines** FastTab. -8. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Type**|Select **Fixed Asset**.| - |**No.**|Specify the fixed asset number.

**NOTE:** This should be the same fixed asset number that you entered in the **Fixed Asset** list.| - |**No. of Fixed Asset Cards**|Specify the relevant number of duplicates for your fixed asset.

**NOTE:** During invoice posting, duplicate fixed asset cards are automatically generated and added to the fixed asset list. The only difference between the duplicate fixed asset cards is the number assigned to each fixed asset.| - -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) - [Italian Fixed Assets](italian-fixed-assets.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-define-debit-and-credit-amounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-define-debit-and-credit-amounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index c7289eb7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-define-debit-and-credit-amounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Define Debit and Credit Amounts - description: The **Debit Amount** and **Credit Amount** fields are included in multiple journals and tables, including the **General Journal**, **Cust. Ledger Entry** table, and **Vendor Ledger Entry** table. - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Define Debit and Credit Amounts -The **Debit Amount** and **Credit Amount** fields are included in multiple journals and tables, including the **General Journal**, **Cust. Ledger Entry** table, and **Vendor Ledger Entry** table. The debit and credit amounts must match in the journals and tables, or you will be unable to post or save. - -## To define debit and credit amounts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Debit Amount**|Enter the debit amount.| - |**Credit Amount**|Enter the credit amount.| - - > [!WARNING] - > The **Debit Amount** and **Credit Amount** fields must match. If the amounts are different, you will not be able to post or save the journal. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index e929aedc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-export-vat-transactions-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export VAT Transactions Reports - description: After you create a report, you can release it, and then export it for the authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export VAT Transactions Reports -After you create a report, you can release it, and then export it for the authorities. To change the report, make sure that the Modify Submitted Reports check box is enabled in the VAT Report Setup window. If it is not, to change the report when you want to correct an error, you will have to create a new report, add the report with the error in the original report number, and then create a corrective report. For more information, see [How to: Correct VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports.md). - -It is only possible to change the lines and fields when the document has the status Open. In the Released status, only the receipt no. is available for change. In the Submitted status, all fields are locked. - -## To export and submit a VAT transaction report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Reports**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an existing report or create a new report: - - - Select the relevant VAT report from the list, and then choose the **Edit** action. - - Choose the **New** action, and create a new report. For more information, see [How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md). - -3. Review the transaction details. To exclude a line from being reported to the tax authority, on the line, clear the **Incl. in Report** check box. To see the VAT entries that the line is based on, choose the drill-down button in the **Amount** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can create an empty report, that is, a report that has no lines, in the case in which there are no transactions to report. - -4. Choose the **Release** action. The **Status** field is updated to Released. - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] validates that the VAT report is valid and ready for submission. If the validation fails, the errors are shown in the **VAT Report Error Log** window so that you can make the appropriate changes. - - After you release a VAT report, you cannot edit it. If you have to change the report after it is released, you have to first reopen it. Choose the **Reopen** action. - -5. Choose the **Export** action. The **Export VAT Transactions** batch job opens. -6. Select the **Detailed Export** check box, depending on your needs. The field controls whether to export the data in detailed format or in aggregate. If aggregate, lines are further grouped by VAT registration number or fiscal code. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - - The VAT report is exported as a .ccf file. You can now submit the report to the tax authorities by using the tool from the Italian Revenue Agency. Use the guidelines provided by the authority. For more information, see the [Italian Revenue Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=206524). - - After you receive a response from the tax authorities, you must update the VAT report. - -8. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Tax Auth. Receipt No.** field, specify the receipt number that you received from the tax authorities. In the **Tax Auth. Doc. No.** field, specify the document number that you receive. -9. Choose the **Mark as Submitted** action to finalize the report. The **Status** field is updated to Submitted. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can modify a report that has the status of Submitted only if you have enabled the **Modify Submitted Reports** check box in the **VAT Report Setup** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Correct VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-correct-vat-transactions-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-issue-vendor-payments-and-customer-bills.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-issue-vendor-payments-and-customer-bills.md deleted file mode 100644 index f1563f2c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-issue-vendor-payments-and-customer-bills.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Issue Vendor Payments and Customer Bills - description: The vendor and customer bill pay feature supports SEPA-based formats in addition to Italian file formats. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Issue Vendor Payments and Customer Bills -The vendor and customer bill pay feature supports SEPA-based formats in addition to Italian file formats. You can pay vendors according to the SEPA Credit Transfer standard and collect payment from customers according to the SEPA Direct Debit standard. The following procedure describes the process for sending a SEPA-based payment to a vendor. The steps are similar for collecting payment from a customer. - - Before starting the following procedure, make sure that information for your company's bank has been provided in the **Bank Account Card** window. On the card, include information for the following fields: - -- IBAN -- SWIFT Code (optional) -- Payment Export Format -- SEPA CT Msg. ID No. Series - -In addition, there must be a posted purchased invoice against which you can send a payment. - -## To issue payment to a vendor - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the vendor to which you want to send payment. On the **Payment** FastTab, in the **Payment Method Code** field, choose the **TRASFBANC** option. -3. Choose the **Bank Accounts** action. -4. In the **Vendor Bank Account List**, select the vendor's bank account, and then choose the **Edit** action. -5. On the **Transfer** FastTab, specify information for the **IBAN** field. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Bill Card**, and then choose the related link. -8. Choose the **New** action. -9. On the **General** FastTab, enter information in the following fields: **Bank Account No.** of the vendor and **Payment Method Code**. -10. Choose the **Suggest Payment** action. -11. Set filters, as appropriate, and then choose the **OK** button to run the batch job. -12. Choose the **Create List** action. -13. Choose the **Yes** button to send the bill payment. -14. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Bill List Issued**, and choose the related link. -15. Select the bill payment that you issued from the list, and then choose the **Edit** action. The **Vendor Bill List Sent Card** window opens. -16. To export the payment information, choose the **Export Bill List to File** action. You can review the xml file that was sent. - - 1. Export to File (for standard SEPA format files) - 2. Export Bill List to File - -You can review the .xml file before sending it. To review and fix errors, you can refer to the **File Export Errors** FactBox. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File](../../finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index a1d7e5c5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Prepare for VAT Transactions Reports - description: You must submit periodic reports to the tax authorities to list all transactions that include VAT. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Prepare for VAT Transactions Reports -You must submit periodic reports to the tax authorities to list all transactions that include VAT. The tax authority establishes the thresholds at which reporting is required. Currently, the threshold is set at zero, meaning that all transactions are to be reported. To prepare for these reports, you must set up VAT posting to include VAT transaction report amounts. - -## To set up VAT transaction amounts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **VAT Transaction Report Amount** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Individual Person**|Select if this customer is an individual person.| - |**Resident**|Specify if the customer is a resident in Italy.

If a customer is not a resident, you must also specify a tax representative on the **Foreign Trade** FastTab.| - |**First Name**|Specifies the first name of the person.| - |**Last Name**|Specifies the last name of the person.| - |**Date of Birth**|Specifies the date of birth of the person.| - |**Place of Birth**|Specifies the place of birth of the person.| - -3. If the customer is not resident in Italy and is not an individual person, you must specify a tax representative for the customer. - - > [!NOTE] - > Before you can specify a tax representative, you must have created the tax representative as a contact. - -### To specify a tax representative for a non-resident customer - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a customer. -2. On the **Foreign Trade** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Representative Type**|Specifies if the tax representative is a customer or a contact. You must set this field to **Contact**.| - |**Tax Representative No.**|Specify the contact that is the tax representative for this customer.| - - You have set up information so that [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will track new transactions with VAT that meet the thresholds that are specified by the tax authorities. Before you create the first VAT transaction report, you should prepare the existing data. For more information, see [How to: Update VAT Transactions Data](how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md). You can then create VAT transactions reports. For more information, see [How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Update VAT Transactions Data](how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md) - [How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md) - [Italian VAT](italian-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-and-reprint-g-l-books-and-vat-registers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-and-reprint-g-l-books-and-vat-registers.md deleted file mode 100644 index f3859fce..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-and-reprint-g-l-books-and-vat-registers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print and Reprint G-L Books and VAT Registers - description: The tax authorities require that you submit two fiscal reports that list all of the posted ledger entries, the **G/L Book - Print** report and the **VAT Register - Print** report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print and Reprint GL Books and VAT Registers -The tax authorities require that you submit two fiscal reports that list all of the posted ledger entries, the **G/L Book - Print** report and the **VAT Register - Print** report. Each printed page must have its own progressive number, and therefore, you must update [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] with the last printed page number before you run these reports again. - -The following procedure describes how to print or reprint the **G/L Book - Print** report, but the same steps apply to printing or reprinting the **VAT Register - Print** report. - -## To print the general ledger book report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Book - Print**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Report Type**|Select the type of report to create.

If you select **Reprint**, the **From Progressive No.** field becomes enabled.| - |**Starting Date**|Enter the first date in the period from which posted entries will be shown.| - |**Ending Date**|Enter the last date in the period from which posted entries will be shown.| - |**From Progressive No.**|Specifies the progressive number for the report.| - |**Print Company Information**|Select to print company information on the report.

The remaining fields are populated based on the **Company Information** window.| - - When you print the report, you will be reminded to update the **General Ledger Setup** window with the page number on the last page. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] does not save the page number automatically when you run the reports. After you run the G/L Book - Print report or the VAT Register - Print report, you must update Microsoft Dynamics NAV with the last printed page number.. - -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. - - To set the last printed page number for the VAT register report, search for **VAT Register**, and choose the link for the window under **VAT Posting Group**. - -4. In the **Fiscal Reporting** FastTab, in the **Last Printed G/L Book Page** field, specify the page number that is on the last page of the **G/L Book - Print** report that you just printed. - -Both official reports can be reprinted. When you reprint a report, the first page of the report must have the same page number as it did when the report was printed the first time. If you want to reprint one of the reports, and the page number is incorrect, you can change the reprinting information for the report - -The following procedure describes how to view or change the page numbering for previously printed versions of the **G/L Book - Print** report, but the same steps apply to the **VAT Register - Print** report. - -## To view or change page numbering for reprinting the general ledger book report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Change G/L Book Reprint Info.** action. In the **G/L Book Reprint Info** window, the **First Page Number** field specifies the first page number of the previously printed reports. - -When you update the **General Ledger Setup** window or the **VAT Registers** window with the page number of the last page of the printed report, make sure that you specify the correct page number. If the reprinted report starts with the wrong page number, the report will not be accepted by the tax authorities. The **G/L Book Reprint Info** window and the **VAT Register Reprint Info** can help you identify the correct page number. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8b31d2ab..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Depreciation Book Reports - description: The **Depreciation Book** is a fiscal report that is sorted by year and item class. The **Depreciation Book** report shows changes in fixed asset stock in a given year by item class, rather than by the individual items. The **Depreciation Book** report is run after the depreciation method has been set up and assets have been entered. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Depreciation Book Reports -The **Depreciation Book** is a fiscal report that is sorted by year and item class. The **Depreciation Book** report shows changes in fixed asset stock in a given year by item class, rather than by the individual items. The **Depreciation Book** report is run after the depreciation method has been set up and assets have been entered. - -## To print depreciation book reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Reports and Analysis** action, and then choose the **Depreciation Book** action. -3. Expand the **Options** FastTab. -4. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Depreciation Book**|The depreciation book to be printed.| - |**Starting Date**|Sets the start date.| - |**Ending Date**|Sets the end date.| - |**Print per Fixed Asset**|Select to print the report for each fixed asset.| - -5. Expand the **Fixed Asset** FastTab, and then select the appropriate filters. -6. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Italian Fixed Assets](italian-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Create Multiple Fixed Asset Cards](how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md) - [How to: Set Up Compressed Depreciation of Fixed Assets](how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-intrastat-reports-for-italy.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-intrastat-reports-for-italy.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0c26a312..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-intrastat-reports-for-italy.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Intrastat Reports for Italy - description: You can print monthly and quarterly Intrastat reports and submit them to the authorities on a diskette by running the **Intrastat Make Disk Tax Auth** batch job. Information regarding the receipt and the delivery of goods is included automatically. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Intrastat Reports for Italy -You can print monthly and quarterly Intrastat reports and submit them to the authorities on a diskette by running the **Intrastat Make Disk Tax Auth** batch job. Information regarding the receipt and the delivery of goods is included automatically. - -The following Intrastat reports are available: - -- **Intrastat - Checklist** report -- **Intrastat - Form** report - -## To print quarterly or monthly reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required journal batch. -3. To open the **Intrastat - Monthly** report or the **Intrastat - Quarterly** report, choose the **Monthly Report** action or the **Quarterly Report** action. -4. On the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -5. Choose the **Print** button to print the report, or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. -6. In the **Intrastat Journal** window, to save the report details to a diskette, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Print** group, choose **Make Diskette**. - - > [!NOTE] - > Before you print, you can select the path and file name. If you do not specify this information, the file will be named **scambi.cee** and will print to the root of the C drive. - -## To print Intrastat - Checklist reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat - Checklist**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **Show Intrastat Journal Lines** check box to include detailed information about the journal lines in the report. -3. On the **Intrastat Jnl. Batch** and **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTabs, select the appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report, or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## To print Intrastat - Form reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat - Form**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Intrastat Jnl. Batch** and **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTabs, select the appropriate filters. -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report, or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-withholding-tax-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-withholding-tax-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 34cf5e94..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-print-withholding-tax-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Withholding Tax Reports - description: The **Withholding Taxes** report displays a list of withholding taxes that are payable to the government. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Withholding Tax Reports -The **Withholding Taxes** report displays a list of withholding taxes that are payable to the government. - -## To print a withholding tax report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Withholding Taxes**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Reference Month**|Enter the month of the withholding tax period in numeric format.| - |**Reference Year**|Enter the year of the withholding tax period in numeric format.| - |**Print Details**|Select if you want to show all detailed information about withholding tax transactions.| - |**Final Printing**|Select if you want to mark this report as the final printed version. If you select this check box, the withholding taxes report will be marked as printed.| - -3. Chose the **Print** button to print the report, or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9eaf4dfc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Alternate Depreciation Methods - description: Alternate depreciation methods include anticipated depreciation, accelerated depreciation, and reduced depreciation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Alternate Depreciation Methods -Alternate depreciation methods include the following: - -- Anticipated depreciation. -- Accelerated depreciation. -- Reduced depreciation. - -You must create depreciation tables to set up these depreciation methods. - -## To set up alternate depreciation methods - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Tables**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Depreciation Table List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The code for the depreciation table.| - |**Description**|The description for the depreciation table.| - |**Period Length**|The length of the period to which each of the depreciation table lines will apply.| - |**Total No. of Units**|The total number of units that the asset is expected to produce in its lifetime.| - -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Period Depreciation %**|The depreciation percentage to apply to the period.| - |**No. of Units in Period**|The number of units produced by the asset to which this depreciation table applies.| - |**Anticipated %**|The anticipated depreciation percentage.| - |**Accelerated/Reduced %**|The actual depreciation percentage.| - -5. In the **Total Depreciation %** field, enter the total depreciation percentage. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) - [Italian Fixed Assets](italian-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Create Multiple Fixed Asset Cards](how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md) - [How to: Set Up Compressed Depreciation of Fixed Assets](how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Print Depreciation Book Reports](how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills.md deleted file mode 100644 index aeb77f04..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Automatic Payments and Automatic Bills - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can manage automatic payments and bills. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Automatic Payments and Automatic Bills -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can manage automatic payments and bills. - -To use automatic payments and automatic bills, you must set up the relevant information. - -## To add bank information for your company - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the key fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payment Method**|Select the payment method for the type of payments made to or from this bank account. For example, for the bank account that will be used for automatic payments made by customers, select a payment method for bank transfers.| - |**Bills For Collection Acc. No.**|Specify the general ledger account where bills for collection will be credited.| - |**Bills For Discount Acc. No.**|Specify the general ledger account where bill discounts will be debited.| - |**Bills Subj. to Coll. Acc. No.**|Specify the general ledger account where bills subject to collection will be credited.| - |**Expense Bill Account No.**|Specify the general ledger account where expenses for bank receipts will be posted.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > Before you can export a vendor bill, you must select a payment format in the **Payment Export Format** field in the **Bank Account Card** window. - > - > Before you can export a customer bill, you must select a payment format in the **SEPA Direct Debit Exp. Format** field in the **Bank Account Card** window. - -The following procedure describes how to set up automatic bills for sales and receivables, but the same steps also apply to setting up purchases and payables for using automatic payments. - -## To set up automatic bills for sales and receivables - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Bills** FastTab, in the **Temporary Bill List No.** field, select the temporary bill list number. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |-------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Temporary Bill List No.** | Select the number series that will be used for temporary bill lists. | - | **Recall Bill Description** | Specify the descriptive text that will be used for recalled bills. | - | **Bank Receipts Risk Period** | Specify a date formula to calculate the risk period in days, such as **20D**.

This will be a reference for bank receipt closing. Customer bills will be closed only at the end of the risk period that you specify here. | - - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - Next, you must specify bill codes for those payment methods that you use for automatic payments and automatic bills. - -## To specify bill codes for a payment method - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the payment method that you use for bank transfers to vendors, and then, in the **Bill Code** field, select a bill code. - - 1. To create a bill code, in the **Bill Code** field, choose the field, and then choose the **New** action. - 2. In the **Bill** window, fill in the fields. - -Now, you can process customer bills and vendor bills so that they are handled automatically. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Defining Payment Methods](../../finance-payment-methods.md) - [Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-company-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-company-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4a30b3d8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-company-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Company Information - description: Fiscal documents must contain all company information. You can enter all relevant data in the **Company Information** window when setting up a company. - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Company Information -Fiscal documents must contain all company information. You can enter all relevant data in the **Company Information** window when setting up a company. This data will be included in all reports and fiscal documents. - -## To set up company information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the information into the FastTabs as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-------------|---------------------------------------| - |**General**|The general company information.| - |**Communication**|The company contact information.| - |**Payments**|The bank information for the company.| - |**Shipping**|The shipping information for the company.| - |**Administration**|The administration information for the company.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3fc19dcc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Compressed Depreciation of Fixed Assets - description: You can compress fixed asset depreciation into subclasses and choose to display only the total sum by subclass. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Compressed Depreciation of Fixed Assets -You can compress fixed asset depreciation into subclasses and choose to display only the total sum by subclass. You can choose to post only the depreciation totals of assets that are grouped by category. This is particularly important for companies that have multiple fixed assets divided into many individual items. - -When you calculate depreciation, one line is generated for each fixed asset. For example, posting depreciations for 100 assets generates 100 lines that are posted to both the general ledger and fixed asset ledger entries. - -## To set up compressed depreciation of fixed assets - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Depreciation Book List** window, select the relevant depreciation book, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. To post only the depreciation totals of assets that are grouped by category, in the **Depreciation Book Card** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Compress Depreciation** check box. - - > [!NOTE] - > Multiple depreciation lines are then compressed in the general ledger and are displayed in a single entry that is divided by fixed asset categories. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) - [Italian Fixed Assets](italian-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Set Up Alternate Depreciation Methods](how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods.md) - [How to: Create Multiple Fixed Asset Cards](how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md) - [How to: Print Depreciation Book Reports](how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3143c88e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Fiscal Inventory Valuation - description: To use fiscal inventory valuation, you must set up inventory valuation methods. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Fiscal Inventory Valuation -To use fiscal inventory valuation, you must set up inventory valuation methods. - -## To set up fiscal inventory valuation for item costing - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Costing Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Components Valuation**|Specify the fiscal inventory valuation method.| - |**Estimated WIP Consumption**|Select to include the finished production orders or the released production orders for the cost calculation.

If this field is cleared, then consumption and capacity ledger entries are filtered by posting date.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up fiscal inventory valuation for an item - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item List** window select each item, and then, on the **General** FastTab, in the **Inventory Valuation** field, specify the inventory valuation type. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fiscal Inventory Valuation](fiscal-inventory-valuation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-initial-item-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-initial-item-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 52f095e3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-initial-item-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Initial Item Costs - description: When you set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in your organization. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Initial Item Costs -When you set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] in your organization. - -In the **Before Start Item Cost** window, you can enter information about inventory items, such as component costs, routing costs, and overhead costs. - -## To set up initial item costs - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Before Start Item Cost**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Enter information into the required fields. This includes the **Starting Date**, **Purchase Quantity**, **Purchase Amount**, **Production Quantity**, and **Production Amount** fields. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The entries in this window will be used to calculate the average year cost. For more information, see Item Cost History List and Calculate End Year Costs. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fiscal Inventory Valuation](fiscal-inventory-valuation.md) - [How to: Set Up Fiscal Inventory Valuation](how-to-set-up-fiscal-inventory-valuation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0e92b676..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Journal Templates and Batches - description: All European Union (EU) companies must submit Intrastat reports to the customs office, detailing their trade with other EU countries/regions for the current year. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Journal Templates and Batches -All European Union (EU) companies must submit Intrastat reports to the customs office, detailing their trade with other EU countries/regions for the current year. An Intrastat summary report is presented to the tax authorities monthly, quarterly, or yearly depending upon the company's business. - -You can print Intrastat reports in the **Intrastat Jnl. Batches** window based on Intrastat journal entries. You can manually place entries into the journal, or use a batch job to place the entries there. Before you can do this, you must set up Intrastat journal templates and batches. - -## To set up Intrastat journal templates - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. To create a new Intrastat journal template, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Intrastat Journal Templates** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|The name of the Intrastat journal template. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|The description of the Intrastat journal template. You can enter a maximum of 80 alphanumeric characters.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up Intrastat journal batches - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. To open the **Intrastat Jnl. Batches** window, select the required template, and then choose the **Batches** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|The name of the Intrastat journal. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Description**|The description of the Intrastat journal. You can enter a maximum of 50 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Periodicity**|Select one of the following options:

- **Month**
- **Quarter**
- **Year**| - |**Type**|Select one of the following options:

- **Purchases**
- **Sales**| - |**Statistics Period**|The statistics period that the report will cover. Enter the value in YYMM format.| - |**Corrective Entry**|Select the **Corrective Entry** check box to correct an entry.| - |**File Disk No.**|The number of the file disk.

This is used when you run the Intrastat - Make Disk Tax Auth batch job.| - |**Currency Identifier**|The code to identify the currency for the Intrastat report.| - |**Reported**|If the entry has already been reported to the tax authorities, select the **Reported** check box. This check box is selected automatically when you run the **Intrastat - Make Disk Tax Auth** batch job for this entry.| - -4. To close the window, choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also - [Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Print Intrastat Reports for Italy](how-to-print-intrastat-reports-for-italy.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-submit-vat-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-submit-vat-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8296e4bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-submit-vat-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Submit VAT Statements - description: Companies must pay VAT for most purchased goods and services. VAT can be deducted if the goods and services that are purchased by a company are used in the production of its income. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Submit VAT Statements -Companies must pay VAT for most purchased goods and services. VAT can be deducted if the goods and services that are purchased by a company are used in the production of its income. - -You must submit periodic VAT statements to the tax authorities to list transactions that include VAT with amounts over a specific threshold. Before you submit your VAT statement, you should review the VAT statement, and then settle and post the VAT transactions. - -## To review and print VAT statements - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statements**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Statement** window, in the **Name** field, select the required VAT statement, and then choose the **Print** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, enter a date interval to limit the period covered by the statement and define what type of VAT entries that you want to include. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the VAT statement. - -You can use the printed VAT statement to review the VAT entries to be submitted to the tax authorities. - -## To settle and post VAT transactions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, enter a date interval to limit the period covered by the VAT settlement, select the correct VAT settlement account, and then select the **Post** action if you want to post the VAT amounts to the settlement account. -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the VAT settlement and post the entries. - -After you calculate and post the VAT settlement, VAT amounts are transferred to the appropriate VAT settlement accounts. - -## To submit VAT statements - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statements**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Statement** window, in the **Name** field, select the required VAT statement, choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **PDF** option. - -The exported file can now be submitted to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index ffe3c412..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Update VAT Transactions Data - description: Before you create the first VAT transaction report, you should prepare the existing data by running the **Update VAT Transaction Data** report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Update VAT Transactions Data -Before you create the first VAT transaction report, you should prepare the existing data by running the **Update VAT Transaction Data** report. You should also run this report if you have made changes to the setup based on new requirements from the tax authorities. - -You can run the **Update VAT Transaction Data** report as a test before you change any data. When you have verified that the filters meet your expectations and the requirements of the tax authorities, you should run the report again to make the appropriate changes to data. - -> [!CAUTION] -> Before you run the **Update VAT Transaction Data** report, you should activate the change log in the **Change Log Setup** window. Also, you should enable logging for modifications to the **Include in VAT Transac. Report** field on the **VAT Entry** table. - -## To update VAT transaction data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Update VAT Transaction Data**, and then choose the related link. -2. Optionally, on the **VAT Entry** FastTab, set the appropriate filters. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Compare against Threshold**|Select to compare VAT entries against the threshold amounts that are specified in the VAT posting setup.| - |**Show List Only**|Select if you do not want to update data.

If you select this field, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] prints a report so that you can verify the changes before data is modified. The report contains a line for each document where the VAT base is equal to or greater than the threshold amounts. **Warning:** Do not select both this field and the **Set Include in VAT Transaction Report** field.| - |**Set Include in VAT Transaction Report**|Select to set the **Include in VAT Trans. Report** to **Yes** on all VAT entries where the amounts meet the threshold amounts that are specified in the VAT posting setup. **Warning:** If you select this field, your data is updated. You should run the report as a test before you run it to change data.| - -4. Choose the **Print** button to update VAT transaction data, or choose the **Preview** button to view the changes. - -When you run the report, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] processes VAT entries based on the filters that you set. The following rules are also applied: - -- The **Blocked** field for the VAT entry must be blank. -- The **Type** field for the VAT entry must not be **Settlement**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Set Up VAT](../../finance-setup-vat.md) - [How to: Prepare for VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports.md) - [Italian VAT](italian-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4474f9ca..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Italian Fixed Assets - description: Fixed assets are properties owned by a company and used in the production of its income. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Italian Fixed Assets -Fixed assets are properties owned by a company and used in the production of its income. Assets can be either tangible or intangible, and can be either durable or non-durable. Cars, machines, and furniture are examples of tangible assets. Startup costs and licenses are examples of intangible assets. - -The following features have been added to the fixed assets functionality: - -- There are several types of depreciation available, including the following: anticipated, accelerated, and reduced. -- Automatic creation of multiple fixed asset cards from an invoice. -- A **Depreciation Book** report that displays depreciation by fixed asset type. - -Anticipated depreciation allows companies to delay payment of taxes on assets by using an augmented depreciation rate for the first three years. This augmented depreciation rate must be a maximum of twice the normal depreciation rate. Thereafter, the depreciation rate is halved for the first year, and then doubled for the remaining two years. For subsequent years, the depreciation follows the standard pattern. - -Accelerated depreciation allows companies that can prove that an asset’s use is more intensive than that of a standard asset to use a higher depreciation rate for this asset. Accelerated depreciation allows companies to shorten the period of an asset’s depreciation. - -Reduced depreciation allows companies that can prove that an asset’s use is less intensive than that of a standard asset to use a lower depreciation rate for this asset, and recover the difference during the following fiscal years. Reduced depreciation allows companies to lengthen the period of an asset’s depreciation. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) - [Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Alternate Depreciation Methods](how-to-set-up-alternate-depreciation-methods.md) - [How to: Create Multiple Fixed Asset Cards](how-to-create-multiple-fixed-asset-cards.md) - [How to: Set Up Compressed Depreciation of Fixed Assets](how-to-set-up-compressed-depreciation-of-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Print Depreciation Book Reports](how-to-print-depreciation-book-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-subcontracting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-subcontracting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 780a630d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-subcontracting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Italian Subcontracting - description: Companies contracted for production often outsource the production of components to subcontractors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Italian Subcontracting -Companies contracted for production often outsource the production of components to subcontractors. In order to know how many components to transfer to the subcontractor, there is a link between the subcontractors' operations and the BOM. This facilitates Master Production Scheduling (MPS) and Material Requirements Planning (MRP), and enables contractors to manage their outsourced and subcontracted components. - -Special unit prices are often negotiated between main contractors and subcontractors, so an extra subcontracting price list is available. - -## Work in Progress -You can send an item to a subcontractor and have the subcontractor return it as a Work in Progress (WIP) to the main contractor. You can also send and receive groups of items without forced reference to the item card. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Monitor Job Progress and Performance](../../projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md) - [Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1cae8bdd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italian-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Italian VAT - description: Companies must pay VAT to the state for most purchased goods and services. VAT can be deducted if the goods or services purchased by a company are used in the production of its income. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Italian VAT -Companies must pay VAT to the state for most purchased goods and services. VAT can be deducted if the goods or services purchased by a company are used in the production of its income. - - In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can define periodic VAT reports in the **VAT Report** window. You can fill in the lines based on VAT entries, and then export the VAT report to the appropriate authorities. - -## VAT Codes and Rates - VAT codes and rates must be set up even though some transactions are not subject to VAT rates. There are also many VAT-liable operations that are subject to a zero VAT rate by provision of the law. - - The related VAT code is printed for each invoice line. Invoices for VAT transaction entries that are not subject to VAT rates must be recorded and printed with a note stating that VAT is not owed. - -### Computing VAT - VAT is computed for transactions to comply with the rules in effect on that the day the transactions occur. Thus, the date on which a transaction legally occurs must be tracked when recording transactions. - -### Dates - The date of issue is the document date and the date of registration is the posting date. Reporting date filters are based on the posting dates. This is changed from the previous behavior in which reporting date filters were based on the Operation Occured Date. - -### Non-deductible VAT - VAT cannot be deducted for some purchases because of: - -- The type of goods or services purchased – VAT is fully or partially non-deductible by provision of the law on goods like cars, mobile phones, food purchased at restaurants, and so on. - -- Partially deductible pro-rated VAT – VAT is pro-rated according to the ratio between sales operations for which VAT is owed, and all operations performed. VAT exceeding this ratio cannot be deducted. - -## Service Tariffs - The European Union (EU) has issued directives that change the VAT reporting for cross-border trade of goods and services in the EU. - - In Italy, the EU sales list (Intrastat) and annual listing reports are updated to include services. This involves a change in the reporting format. A new table for service tariffs is added so that companies can classify services that must be included in the Intrastat report. Users must add the relevant service tariff to all documents that are for cross-border transactions. The service tariff specified on the **Foreign Trade** FastTab for the document can be modified in each line in the document. - -## VAT Transaction Reports - You must submit periodic reports to the tax authorities, which list transactions that include VAT with amounts over a specified threshold. The VAT transaction reports are created based on transactions with customers or vendors from a country/region that is outside the EU and is not blocked. Transactions with customers or vendors from EU countries/regions are reported through **Intrastat** reports. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] provides support for the following transaction types: - -|**Transaction Type**|**Supported**| -|--------------------|-------------| -|FE - Customer invoices (factures issued)|Yes| -|FR - Vendor invoices (factures received)|Yes| -|NE - Customer credit notes (notes issued)|Yes| -|NR - Vendor credit notes (notes received)|Yes| -|DF - Transactions without invoices (direct invoices) (customer)|No| -|FN - Customers invoices, when customer is non-resident|Yes| -|SE - Vendor invoices, when vendor is non-resident|Yes **Note:** The purchase of services is assumed, but differentiation between service and goods is left for the user to implement.| - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] does not report the following types of transactions: - -- Prepayment invoices, because the total amount will be reported at the time of the final invoice. - -- Operations without an invoice, for example, VAT entries posted via general ledger accounts, because a VAT registration number, a fiscal code, or a customer or vendor reference is required for inclusion in a report. - -- Self-billed transactions, which are not supported. - -The VAT transactions reports include lines where the amount is over the threshold and lines that must be included for other legal reasons. The threshold amount is set by the Italian authorities. - -Document lines contain a field to indicate if the line must be included in the VAT transaction reports. The **Include in VAT Transac. Rep.** fields are selected automatically based on the day of the transaction and a comparison with the threshold amount for the calendar year. If sales lines are related to a blanket order, the threshold is compared to the amount for the blanket order. This only applies to sales line of type **Item**. For service lines, the comparison is made with the service contract amount. - -> [!NOTE] -> Credit memos are included in the VAT transaction report if the customer or vendor is from a country/region that is outside the EU and is not blocked. - -When you post credit memos, you must update the **Refers to Period** field to specify the relevant period. The VAT transaction reports will include credit memos where the **Refers to Period** field is set to **Current Calendar Year** or **Previous Calendar Year**. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] adds credit memos to the VAT reports in different ways depending on the application status and the value of the **Refers to Period** field. The following table describes the scenarios. - -|Scenario|Impact| -|--------------|------------| -|A credit memo is applied to a single invoice.

The **Refers to Period** field is set to **Current Calendar Year**.|The **Invoice No.** field will be set to the document number of the invoice.

The **Invoice Date** field will be set to the date that is specified in the **Operation Occurred Date** field

[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will deduct the credit memo amount from the amount of the original invoice. If the resulting amount is above the threshold, both the invoice and credit memo will be included in the VAT transactions report. If the resulting amount is below the threshold, neither invoice or credit memo will be included in the VAT transactions report.| -|A credit memo is applied to multiple invoices, or it is not applied.

The **Refers to Period** field is set to **Current Calendar Year**.|The **Invoice Date** field will be set to the last day of the year that is specified in the **Operation Occurred Date** field. For example, if the **Operation Occurred Date** field is **07-11-11**, the **Invoice Date** field will be set to **31-12-11**.

Only the credit memo will be included in the VAT transactions report.| -|A credit memo is applied to multiple invoices, or it is not applied.

The **Refers to Period** field is set to **Previous Calendar Year**.|The **Invoice Date** field will be set to the last day of the year before the date that is specified in the **Operation Occurred Date** field. For example, if the **Operation Occurred Date** field is **07-11-11**, the **Invoice Date** field will be set to **31-12-10**.

Only the credit memo will be included in the VAT transactions report.| - - When service contracts are compared with the threshold, the **Annual Amount** field is converted to your local currency (LCY). The conversion is based on the **Currency Code** field and the exchange rate on the date in the **Starting Date** field for the service contract. - - Transactions with reverse charges are not included in the VAT transaction reports. Transactions with prepayments are also not included in the VAT transaction reports. - - To prepare your data for these reports, you must set up VAT posting to include VAT transaction report amounts. When a transaction such as posting a sales invoice is made that uses this VAT posting setup, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] checks if the transaction meets the threshold amounts. The check is based on document lines because a document can contain lines that must be included in the VAT transaction report and lines that must be excluded. The VAT transaction reports must only contain the lines that must be submitted, so [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] compares amounts against the threshold for each line instead of for a document. - - You must submit a VAT transactions report electronically to the tax authorities. For more information, see [How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Set Up VAT](../../finance-setup-vat.md) -[How to: Record VAT](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) -[How to: Prepare for VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-prepare-for-vat-transactions-reports.md) -[How to: Create Electronic VAT Transactions Reports](how-to-create-electronic-vat-transactions-reports.md) -[How to: Submit VAT Statements](how-to-submit-vat-statements.md) -[How to: Update VAT Transactions Data](how-to-update-vat-transactions-data.md) -[Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italy-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italy-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index fc760d45..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/italy-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Italy Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Italian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Italy Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Italian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Vendor Payments and Customer Bills Overview](vendor-payments-and-customer-bills-overview.md) - [Fiscal Inventory Valuation](fiscal-inventory-valuation.md) - [Italian Fixed Assets](italian-fixed-assets.md) - [Italian VAT](italian-vat.md) - [How to: Print Withholding Reports](how-to-print-withholding-tax-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Journal Templates and Batches](how-to-set-up-journal-templates-and-batches.md) - [How to: Set Up Company Information](how-to-set-up-company-information.md) - [How to: Define Debit and Credit Amounts](how-to-define-debit-and-credit-amounts.md) - [How to: Close a Fiscal Year](how-to-close-a-fiscal-year.md) - [Reversing Journal Entries](reversing-journal-entries.md) - [Italian Subcontracting](italian-subcontracting.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/reversing-journal-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/reversing-journal-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index c470a9b3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/reversing-journal-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Reversing Journal Entries - description: Controls have been added to the **Reverse Transaction Entries** window to comply with local laws. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Reversing Journal Entries -Controls have been added to the **Reverse Transaction Entries** window to comply with local laws. These controls ensure the following: - -- You cannot reverse an invoice, credit note, or document involving VAT management. -- You cannot reverse posted invoices, credit memos, or debit memos. -- You cannot delete posted invoices, credit memos, or general journals in the sales, purchase, or service area—even if they have been printed. -- You cannot reverse sales, purchase, or service headers for reserved documents. - -## See Also - [Italy Local Functionality](italy-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/vendor-payments-and-customer-bills-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/vendor-payments-and-customer-bills-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index c6ff77f2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Italy/vendor-payments-and-customer-bills-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Vendor Payments and Customer Bills Overview - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can manage automatic bills to customers and from vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Vendor Payments and Customer Bills Overview -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can manage automatic bills to customers and from vendors. - -In addition, the bill pay feature supports the issuance of payment in many formats, including SEPA Credit Transfer, SEPA Direct Debit, and Italian bill formats. - -## Customer Bills and Vendor Bills -You can issue a document to your bank with the payment amounts that are due to vendors on or before a certain date. The bank will pay the amount on or before that date by transferring the money from your bank account to the vendor's bank account. - -Similarly, you can issue a billing document to your customers who have payments that are due on or before a certain date. The customers can pay the amount to your bank, which then transfers that amount to your bank account. The bill is then given to the customer as evidence of your receipt of the payment. - -Before you can process bills, you must add your bank information to the **Company Information** window. You must also create bill posting groups and assign a bill posting group to the bank account that you will use for automatic bills. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Automatic Payments and Automatic Bills](how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills.md). Then, you can generate lists of customer bills and vendor bills and process them. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Automatic Payments and Automatic Bills](how-to-set-up-automatic-payments-and-automatic-bills.md) - [How to: Issue Vendor Payments and Customer Bills](how-to-issue-vendor-payments-and-customer-bills.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/electronic-invoicing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/electronic-invoicing.md deleted file mode 100644 index f3b6e8de..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/electronic-invoicing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Invoicing - description: Mexican companies must be able to send invoices electronically as Comprobante Fiscal Digital por Internet (CFDI) files. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] supports CFDI so that you can export sales and service invoices and credit memos as electronic documents that have the required digital signature. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Invoicing -Mexican companies must be able to send invoices electronically as Comprobante Fiscal Digital por Internet (CFDI) files. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] supports CFDI so that you can export sales and service invoices and credit memos as electronic documents that have the required digital signature. - -The CFDI file is an XML file that contains: - -- Name of issuing company. -- Fiscal address of issuing company. -- Tax scheme of the issuing company. -- Federal tax registration number (RFC) of issuing company. -- RFC of the receiving company. -- Quantity and description of the goods or services. -- Unit price. -- Tax amounts listed by tax type. -- Currency code. -- Customs location, which includes the date and number of the customs document, if the transaction is an import. -- Digital stamp of the issuing company, which is assigned by the tax authorities (SAT). -- Digital stamp of an authorized service provider, PAC, that you choose. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You will be submitting the electronic invoices to a PAC, which is an authorized service provider appointed by the Mexican tax authorities (SAT). - -## Getting Started -Before you can use [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] for electronic invoicing, you must obtain the appropriate certification, digital stamp, and control numbers from the tax authorities. You must install the certificate on the computer where the CFDI files will be generated. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Electronic Invoicing](how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md). For information about SAT certificates and keys, see the [Servicio de Administracíon Tributaria](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=242772) website. - -You also must specify the web services that you will use to communicate with the PAC in order to obtain digital stamps. For more information, see [How to: Set Up PAC Web Services](how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md). - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> SAT has certified more than one PAC in Mexico, and you must obtain the appropriate information to communicate with the PAC of your choice. - -## Sending Electronic Invoices -When you have posted an invoice or credit memo, you can send it to your customer. But first you must obtain a digital stamp from a PAC. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] communicates with the PAC through web services to request a stamp, and the document is automatically digitally signed by your company and the PAC. - -When you send an electronic invoice or credit memo to your customer, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] uses the email address that you have specified in the **Company Information** window. The document is sent to the email address that you have specified in the **Customer Card** window for the bill-to customer on the invoice or credit memo. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, you also can choose to include the documents as PDF files in the email that is sent. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The users who will send electronic invoices must be able to send mail using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). Depending on the configuration in your company, you may have to grant explicit permissions to each relevant user and computer. - -If you also want to print the documents, the documents will include a Quick Response (QR) bar code and other information that identifies the related electronic invoice. This information makes the printed document computer-readable and provides a link between the electronic document and the printed document. - -For more information, see [How to: Generate Electronic Invoices](how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md). - -## Communication Component -The [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] component for electronic invoicing deploys in a library assembly, Microsoft.Dynamics.NAV.MX.dll, which is installed automatically when you install the Microsoft Dynamics NAV Windows client. The component handles the communication with the PAC web services and also generates the QR codes that are included in the printed documents. For examples of how to use the Microsoft.Dynamics.NAV.MX.dll assembly, see codeunit 10145 **E-Invoice Mgt.** and codeunit 10147 **E-Invoice Object Factory**. - - When you generate an electronic document to request a stamp, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] creates an XML document and sends it to the PAC for processing. The original XML document contains the same information as the original string field that is shown on the printed document. The original string includes the following information: - -- Document date -- Document type -- Payment terms -- Name, address, and federal registration number of your company -- Name, address, and federal registration number of the customer -- Line amounts and quantities - -The PAC returns an XML document that has the original string, but this file also includes a section for the digital stamp. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can export the XML files for documents that have a digital stamp and learn more about the data that goes into each XML element. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Electronic Invoicing](how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md) - [How to: Set Up PAC Web Services](how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md) - [How to: Generate Electronic Invoices](how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-create-deposits.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-create-deposits.md deleted file mode 100644 index b8bc3fd2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-create-deposits.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Deposits (Mexico) - description: You can make deposits to maintain a transaction record that contains information that can be applied to outstanding invoices and credit memos. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Deposits (Mexico) -You can make deposits to maintain a transaction record that contains information that can be applied to outstanding invoices and credit memos. - -## To create a deposit -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Deposits**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|The unique identification number for the deposit.| - |**Bank Account No.**|The bank account number for the deposit.| - |**Total Deposit Amount**|The total deposit amount posted to the bank ledger.

You can post this deposit only if the sum of the deposit lines is equal to the value in this field.| - |**Posting Date**|The posting date for the deposit.| - |**Document Date**|The deposit document date.| -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Account Type**|The account type.| - |**Account No.**|The unique identification account number that is associated with the selected account type, to which the entry will be posted.| - |**Description**|The journal line entry description.| - |**Document Date**|The journal line entry document date.| - |**Document Type**|The journal line entry document type.| - |**Document No.**|The journal line entry document number.| - |**Credit Amount**|The total credit amount on the journal line.| - -5. Optionally, on the **Navigate** tab, choose **Dimensions**, and then add relevant dimensions in the **Dimension Set Entries** window. - -After you have created a deposit, you must post it. - -## To post a deposit -1. Choose the **Post** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can post a deposit only if the amount displayed in the **Total Deposit Lines** field is equal to the amount in the **Total Deposit Amount** field. - -Next, you can use the Deposit Test Report and Deposit reports to reconcile your posted deposits with outstanding invoices and credit memos. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index 27864d81..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Generate Electronic Invoices - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], after you post a sales invoice you must generate an electronic invoice that will be sent to the customer. You can also export the electronic invoice as an XML file, which you can save to a specified location. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Generate Electronic Invoices -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], after you post a sales invoice you must generate an electronic invoice that will be sent to the customer. You can also export the electronic invoice as an XML file, which you can save to a specified location. - -The following procedure describes how to generate electronic invoices for sales invoices, but the same steps also apply to service invoices and credit memos. - -## To generate electronic invoices for sales invoices - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoice**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the posted invoice. -3. Choose the **Send Electronic Document** action. An email will be sent to the customer with the electronic invoice attached as an XML file. If you selected the **Send PDF Report** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window, a PDF will be included with the XML file. -4. Optionally, choose the **Export E-Document as XML** action. Select the location where you want to save the electronic invoice as an XML file. - - To verify the electronic invoice activity, in the **Posted Sales Invoice** window, on the **Invoicing** FastTab, the **Electronic Document Sent** and **No. of E-Document Submissions** fields will be updated. - -> [!NOTE] -> ADD INCLUDE - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Electronic Invoicing](how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md) - [Electronic Invoicing](electronic-invoicing.md) - [Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9383d100..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Manage Customer Credit Information (Mexico) - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can add comments to customer credit information. You can also hold and block customers with bad credit before shipping or invoicing occurs. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Customer Credit Information (Mexico) -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can add comments to customer credit information. You can also hold and block customers with bad credit before shipping or invoicing occurs. - -## To add comments to customer credit information -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Credit Management**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Customer List - Credit Mgmt.** window, select a customer, and then choose the **Comments** action. -3. In the **Comment Sheet** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Date**|The date of the comment.| - |**Comment**|The comment about the customer. You can enter a maximum of 80 alphanumeric characters.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To prevent an order from shipping or invoicing -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the customer, and the choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -3. In the **On Hold** field, enter the initials of the customer. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must have the proper security clearance to add or remove holds on individual sales orders using the **On Hold** field. - -## To block a sales order for a customer -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a customer, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Blocked** field, select one of the following options: - - - **<** – Transaction is allowed for this customer. - - **Ship** – New orders and new shipments cannot be created for this customer. Existing shipments not yet invoiced can be invoiced. - - **Invoice** – New orders, new shipments, and new invoices cannot be created for this customer. Existing shipments not yet invoiced cannot be invoiced. - - **All** – No transaction is allowed for this customer, including payments. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 28b1b141..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Troubleshooting Reports (Mexico) - description: Troubleshooting reports are available to assist Microsoft Certified Partners with troubleshooting issues. - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Troubleshooting Reports (Mexico) -The following troubleshooting reports are available to assist Microsoft Certified Partners with troubleshooting issues: - -- **License Information** report – This report contains the license number, the name of the licensed user, which application granules they have purchased, and when the license expires, if applicable. -- **Data Dictionary** report (report #10315) – This report allows you to print detailed table reference, field reference, and table properties for table objects. - -You must have access to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Object Designer, which is available only to administrators. - -You can print these reports and send them to your Microsoft Certified Partner to help resolve issues with your [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] implementation. - -## To print the License Information report -1. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Object Designer, on the **Tools** menu, choose **License Information**. -2. In the **License Information** window, you can preview the license information, or you can choose the **Export** button to print the **License Information** report. - -## To print the Data Dictionary report -1. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] Object Designer, on the **Tools** menu, choose **Object Designer**. -2. Choose the **Report** button. -3. In the **Type** column, find **ID** 10315, which is the **Data Dictionary** report. -4. In the **Object Designer** window, choose the **Run** button to open the **Data Dictionary** report. -5. On the **Options** tab, enter the relevant information into the fields. -6. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 45b6a578..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Electronic Invoicing - description: Before you can send electronic documents, you must set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to ensure that the tax identification number (RFC), personal identification number (CURP), and state inscription IDs are available for your company and all your customers and vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Electronic Invoicing -Before you can send electronic documents, you must set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to ensure that the tax identification number (RFC), personal identification number (CURP), and state inscription IDs are available for your company and all your customers and vendors. You also need to set up the parameters that are needed for sending electronic invoices to customers and vendors. These parameters include the certificate thumbprint, which is the certificate that you received from the Mexico tax authority (SAT). - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The certificate that you received from the Mexico tax authority must be installed for each user who sends electronic invoices. For more information, see the [Servicio de Administracíon Tributaria](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=242772) website. -> -> Your company must also have SMTP mail set up for emailing electronic invoices. Depending on the configuration in your company, you may need to grant explicit SMTP permissions to each relevant user and computer. The documents will be sent from the address that is specified in the **Company Information** window. - -## To set up company information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Company Information** window, on the **Tax** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**SAT Certificate Thumbprint**|Enter the friendly name of the certificate that you want to use for issuing electronic invoices. **Note:** A certificate is needed for each user who sends electronic invoices. To get the certificate thumbprint, see the Help for the operating system.| - |**Send PDF Report**|Select to include a PDF when you email electronic invoices to customers or vendors. Electronic invoices are always sent as an XML file, this option allows you to include a PDF with the XML file.| - |**PAC Code**|Specify the authorized service provider, PAC, that you want apply digital stamps to your electronic invoices. **Note:** To use a PAC, you must set up web services. For more information, see [How to: Set Up PAC Web Services](how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md).| - |**PAC Environment**|Specify if your company uses electronic invoices, and if you are using the web services of your authorized service provider, PAC, in a test environment or a production environment.| - -Optionally, you can ask your Microsoft Certified Partner to modify the text that is included in the email that is sent when you send electronic invoices. The text is stored as text variables in codeunit 10145. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Invoicing](electronic-invoicing.md) - [How to: Generate Electronic Invoices](how-to-generate-electronic-invoices.md) - [Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md deleted file mode 100644 index d726cbfb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-pac-web-services.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up PAC Web Services - description: Before you can send invoices and credit memos electronically, you must specify one or more providers of the electronic stamp that must be included in invoices in Mexico. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up PAC Web Services -Before you can send invoices and credit memos electronically, you must specify one or more providers of the electronic stamp that must be included in invoices in Mexico. - -When you send an electronic document, it must receive a digital stamp by an authorized service provider, PAC, before it can be sent to your customer. The communication between [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] and the PAC is managed through web services, and therefore, you must specify technical information about the web services of the PAC that you intend to use. - -To use web services, you must identify the name of the method on the web service that processes requests for digital stamps. Your PAC can give you this information. - -If your PAC offers the service of canceling signed documents, you must specify two web methods: one web method for requesting the digital stamp, and the other for canceling an already signed document. - -## To set up a PAC web service - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **PAC Web Services**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Environment**|Specify if the web service is for a test environment or a production environment.| - |**Type**|Specify if the web method is for requesting a digital stamp or for canceling.| - |**Method Name**|Specify the name of the web method, such as **GeneraTimbre** or **CancelaTimbre**.| - |**Address**|Specify the URL of the web method.| - - Contact your PAC for this information. - -5. Repeat the steps for any additional PAC that you want to set up. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > SAT has certified more than one PAC in Mexico, and you must obtain the appropriate information for communication with the PAC of your choice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Invoicing](electronic-invoicing.md) - [How to: Set Up Electronic Invoicing](how-to-set-up-electronic-invoicing.md) - [Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 06552dbe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts (Mexico) - description: You can use the **General Ledger Setup** window to set up unrealized sales tax. You can also set up maximum correction tax amounts so that you can limit the tax correction amounts. - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts (Mexico) -You can use the **General Ledger Setup** window to set up unrealized sales tax. You can also set up maximum correction tax amounts so that you can limit the tax correction amounts that are entered for sales and purchases. This allows you to overwrite the calculated tax when there are rounding differences between what is calculated on the purchase order, and what is calculated on the purchase invoice from the vendor. - -## To set up unrealized sales tax -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Pmt. Disc. Excl. Tax**|Select to calculate the payment discount on amounts excluding sales tax.| - |**Adjust for Payment Disc.**|Select to recalculate the tax amounts when you post payments that trigger payment discounts.

This field is used in the context of VAT, not sales tax.| - |**Unrealized VAT**|Select if any of your sales tax jurisdictions allow you to pay your sales tax after you have been paid. If you do not select this check box this function will be blocked for all sales tax jurisdictions.| -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up unrealized tax for jurisdictions -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Jurisdictions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Jurisdictions** window, choose the **Edit List** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Unrealized Tax Type**|< – The unrealized tax feature is not used for this tax jurisdiction.

–or–

**Percentage** – Each payment covers both tax amounts and invoice amounts in proportion to the remaining invoice amount. The paid tax amount is transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account.

–or–

**First** – Payments cover the tax first, and then the invoice amount.

–or–

**Last** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, and then the tax amount. In this case, nothing will be transferred from the unrealized tax account to the tax account until the total invoice amount—exclusive of tax—has been paid.

–or–

**First (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the tax first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid.

–or–

**Last (Fully Paid)** – Payments cover the invoice amount first, but nothing is transferred to the tax account until the full tax amount has been paid. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Unreal. Tax Acc (Sales)**|The general ledger account that you want to use to post calculated unrealized tax on sales transactions. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Unreal. Tax Acc (Purchases)**|The general ledger account that you want to use to post calculated unrealized tax on purchase transactions. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Unreal. Rev. Charge (Purch.)**|The general ledger account that you want to use for posting calculated unrealized reverse-charge tax on purchase transactions. **Important:** This field is available in the **Tax Jurisdiction** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up adjustments for payment discounts in a tax posting group -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Tax Posting Setup Card** window, select the **Adjust for Payment Discount** check box. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > This field is available in the **VAT Posting Setup** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)] -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up maximum tax correction amounts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales Receivables Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Allow Tax Difference** check box. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Allow Tax Difference** check box. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -8. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, in the **Max. Tax Difference Allowed** field, enter the maximum tax correction amount that is allowed for the local currency. - - > [!NOTE] - > In this field, if you enter USD 5, you may correct tax amounts by up to five dollars. To use the tax difference function, an amount must be entered in the **Max. Tax Difference Allowed** field. -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Mexico](mexico-sales-tax.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 71c4ce02..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Use Tax and Purchase Tax - description: Sales tax includes taxes that companies pay for using items - - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Use Tax and Purchase Tax -Sales tax includes taxes that companies pay for using items: - -- Use tax (United States) – Use tax is a United States sales tax that is paid on items that are purchased by a company and are used by that company instead of being sold to a customer. The company must pay sales tax for those items to the government, in the form of use tax. -- Purchase tax (Canada) – Purchase tax is a Canadian sales tax that is paid by a company on items that are purchased from a vendor. When a company purchases items for use by the company itself, the vendor charges the appropriate sales tax for the items. - -## To set up use tax for a purchase order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link in **Order Processing**. -2. In the **Purchase Orders** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](../../includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Liable**|Select to set up tax liability. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Tax Area Code**|The tax area code of the vendor. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Tax Exemption No.**|The company's tax exemption number. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Provincial Tax Area Code**|The tax code for the province. **Important:** This field is available in the **Purchase Header** window, but it is not shown by default. To select the field, you must first add the column that shows this field. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up use tax details -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Details**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Details** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **New - Tax Details** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Jurisdiction Code**|The tax jurisdiction code for the tax detail entry.| - |**Tax Group Code**|The tax group code for the tax detail entry.| - |**Tax Type**|**Sales and Use Tax** – To apply both sales tax and use tax to the tax detail entry.

–or–

**Excise Tax** – To apply excise tax to the tax detail entry.

–or–

**Sales Tax Only** – To apply only sales tax to the tax detail entry.

–or–

**Use Tax Only** – To apply only use tax to the tax detail entry.| -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up purchase tax for a company -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Company Information** window, on the **Tax** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Area Code**|The company's tax area code. The tax area code is used in conjunction with a tax group code field and the **Tax Liable** field to find the necessary information for calculating sales tax.| - |**Tax Exemption No.**|The company's tax exemption number. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Provincial Tax Area Code**|The tax code for the province.| -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up purchase tax for a location -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Locations** window, select the required location, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Do Not Use For Tax Calculation**|Select to specify whether the tax information included on this location record is to be used for sales tax calculations on purchase documents.| - |**Tax Area Code**|The tax area code for the location. The tax area code is used in conjunction with a tax group code field and the **Tax Liable** field to find the necessary information for calculating sales tax.| - |**Tax Exemption No.**|The company's tax exemption number. You can enter a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Provincial Tax Area Code**|The tax code for the province.| -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up purchase tax for non-recoverable tax -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Details**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Details** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Select the **Expense/Capitalize** check box. - - > [!NOTE] - > This check box must be selected if the tax paid is not recoverable. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Mexico](mexico-sales-tax.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8deee985..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Mexico Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Mexican version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Mexico Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Mexican version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section -[How to: Set Up Use Tax and Purchase Tax](how-to-set-up-use-tax-and-purchase-tax.md) -[How to: Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts](how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md) -[Reporting Sales Tax in Mexico](mexico-sales-tax.md) -[Electronic Invoicing](electronic-invoicing.md) -[Tax Identification Types for Mexico](tax-identification-types-for-mexico.md) -[VAT Recalculation](vat-recalculation.md) -[How to: Manage Customer Credit Information](how-to-manage-customer-credit-information.md) -[How to: Create Deposits](how-to-create-deposits.md) -[How to: Print Troubleshooting Reports](how-to-print-troubleshooting-reports.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-sales-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-sales-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5ab6486d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/mexico-sales-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Tax Groups, Areas, and Jurisdictions in Mexico -description: Learn about how sales tax is set up, and how tax groups, tax areas (states, counties, cities, and localities), tax jurisdictions, and tax details work. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: local -ms.date: 10/19/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Reporting Sales Tax in the Mexico -When you first start using [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can run an assisted setup guide to quickly and easily set up sales tax information for your company, customers, and vendors. In a matter of minutes, you are ready to create sales documents and purchase documents with sales tax calculated correctly. This is explained [in our blog post](https://madeira.microsoft.com/blog/sales-tax-setup-made-easy). -If you move to the empty My Company, we recommend that you start by using each of the assisted setup guides, including the one for sales tax. If you prefer to set up sales tax yourself, this article explains what you have to take into consideration. - -## Tax Groups, Tax Areas, and Tax Jurisdictions -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], a tax group represents a group of inventory items or resources that are subject to identical tax terms. For example, you can set up a tax group for taxable items and another for nontaxable items. You must assign tax group codes to inventory items and general ledger accounts. Similarly, you must assign tax area codes to customers, locations, and to your own company settings. The assisted setup guide helps you do this. - -If you set up new tax areas and tax jurisdictions, you must make sure that you fill in the fields correctly. In Mexico, states, counties, cities, and localities can charge sales tax. Companies collect and remit sales tax to these government authorities for products sold to end users. Sales tax can also be charged to existing sales tax. For example, tax can be calculated on a sales invoice amount that already includes the tax from other jurisdictions. - -## Tax Details -The **Tax Details** window shows different combinations of sales tax jurisdictions and sales tax groups to establish sales tax rates. For each tax jurisdiction, we recommend that you set up one tax group for normal sales tax, another tax group for items or services that are not taxed, and an additional tax group for every type of item or service that is handled with a different sales tax rate in that jurisdiction. - -In Mexico, when you sell to a customer at a location where you do not have a *situs*—or a legal location in that state, you do not collect sales tax. For locations in which you do not have a situs, ensure that both the **Tax Below Minimum** and **Tax Above Maximum** fields are 0.00. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) -[Finance](../../finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](../../finance.md) -[Set Up Sales Tax - Watch a Video](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qMs4BoSytN8&index=13&list=PLcakwueIHoT8K1m148oMqo7amR2a7Bz-8) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/tax-identification-types-for-mexico.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/tax-identification-types-for-mexico.md deleted file mode 100644 index b84c5bc6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/tax-identification-types-for-mexico.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Tax Identification Types for Mexico - description: All customers and vendors must a have federal tax identification number. The identification type used for a customer or vendor depends on whether the customer or vendor is classified as a company or as a person. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Tax Identification Types for Mexico -All customers and vendors must a have federal tax identification number. The identification type used for a customer or vendor depends on whether the customer or vendor is classified as a company or as a person. - -## Available Tax Identification Types -In Mexico, a legal entity, such as a company or a person, is assigned a tax identification number according to two types. - -### Registro Federal de Contribuyentes (RFC) - -This tax identification type can be applied to companies and to people. An RFC number for a company is 12 characters, while an RFC number for a person is 13 characters. - -### Cédula de identification fiscal con clave única de registro de población (CURP) -This tax identification type can only be applied to people. A CURP number is 18 characters. - -When you create a new customer or vendor in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you specify whether the customer or vendor is a company or a person, and then you specify the tax identification type. The tax identification type and the tax identification number are included in any reports that reference tax information about a customer or vendor. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/vat-recalculation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/vat-recalculation.md deleted file mode 100644 index eca4608c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Mexico/vat-recalculation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT Recalculation - description: When a customer makes payment in a foreign currency, VAT must be recalculated using the exchange rate at the time of the invoice payment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT Recalculation -When a customer makes payment in a foreign currency, VAT must be recalculated using the exchange rate at the time of the invoice payment. - -A company creates an invoice in a foreign currency for the purchase of taxable goods and taxable services by a foreign customer. This invoice includes VAT. When the customer makes the payment at a later date, VAT is recalculated based on the original sales amount, and adjusted for the new currency rates. - -The following steps show how to create a report for unrealized VAT amounts: - -- Set up an option to allow recalculation of VAT upon receipt of payment. -- Recalculate VAT upon receipt of payment. -- Adjust journal entries for realization of VAT taxes payable to recognize exchange differences. -- Create a VAT statement that shows the unrealized VAT amounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) - [How to: Set Up Unrealized Sales Tax and Sales Payment Discounts](how-to-set-up-unrealized-sales-tax-and-sales-payment-discounts.md) - [Mexico Local Functionality](mexico-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cash-bank-giro.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cash-bank-giro.md deleted file mode 100644 index 27ee678b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cash-bank-giro.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Cash-Bank-Giro - description: Cash/Bank/Giro helps you posting both cash and bank/giro transactions into the system in an easier and more direct way than using the General Journals. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Cash-Bank-Giro -Cash/Bank/Giro helps you posting both cash and bank/giro transactions into the system in an easier and more direct way than using the General Journals. - - Next to this and in conjunction with Telebanking, it allows you import electronic bank statements into the Bank/Giro Journals. If wanted the system can automatically reconcile these statements during this import process and determine whether a statement can be applied to open ledger entries for the relevant vendor/customer. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Telebanking](telebanking.md) - [How to: Print the Test Reports for Cash and Bank or Giro Journals](how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md) - [How to: Enter and Post Cash and Bank or Giro Journals](how-to-enter-and-post-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/check-purchase-amounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/check-purchase-amounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0d0dd84e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/check-purchase-amounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Check Purchase Amounts - description: Before posting a purchase invoice or credit memo, the program checks if the 'amount including VAT' and the 'VAT amount' stated on the purchase document is equal to the total amount of the inserted purchase lines. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Check Purchase Amounts -Before posting a purchase invoice or credit memo, the program checks if the amount including VAT and the VAT amount stated on the purchase document is equal to the total amount of the inserted purchase lines. To do this, the **Doc. Amount Incl. VAT** and **Doc. Amount VAT** fields must be filled in in the **Purchase Invoice** or **Purchase Credit Memo** window. - - In case there is only one purchase line or in case all lines are subject to the same VAT %, the correct **Doc. Amount VAT Field** will be calculated automatically when you have inserted the purchase lines and the **Doc. Amount Incl. VAT Field**. In case several lines exist with different VAT percentages, the **Doc. Amount VAT Field** must be changed manually. - - Default the program will check the purchase document total amounts, but you can switch it off by deselecting the **Check Doc. Total Amounts** check box in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. - - To determine the reason of the difference between the document total amounts and the total amounts of the inserted purchase lines, you have the possibility to let the program calculate the total amount, total base amount, total VAT amount and total amount including VAT of the inserted purchase lines and show them at the bottom of the purchase invoice or purchase credit memo window. - - Default the program will not show these total amounts, but you can switch it on by selecting the **Show Totals on Purch. Inv.-CM.** check box in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you activate this field, totals on all purchase invoices and credit memos must be recalculated. This can be a time-consuming process depending on the number of documents that must be recalculated. You can not activate this field in case purchase invoices and/or credit memos exist without any purchase lines or in case you have purchase invoices and/or purchase credit memos with no quantity specified on the lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Validation of Purchase Amounts](how-to-set-up-validation-of-purchase-amounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cmr-notes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cmr-notes.md deleted file mode 100644 index e9b6639e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/cmr-notes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: CMR Notes - description: A CMR note is a bill of lading or an international consignment note defined under the 1956 United Nations Convention for the Contract of the International Carriage of Goods by Road. This is also known as the CMR Convention. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# CMR Notes -A CMR note is a bill of lading or an international consignment note defined under the 1956 United Nations Convention for the Contract of the International Carriage of Goods by Road. This is also known as the CMR Convention. - - Claims with complete CMR note information are easily processed. - -## CMR Notes -Countries/regions that follow the CMR Convention adhere to a standard form for CMR notes. The type of CMR note used depends on the type of transaction. There are two types: - -- **CMR - Sales Shipment** – This report is used to print CMR documents for sales shipments. For each CMR document, the report shows address data for the sender, shipping agent and consignee, along with data about the shipped items. - -- **CMR - Transfer Shipment** – This report is used to print CMR documents for transfer shipments. For each CMR document, the report shows address data for the location from which the items are shipped, the location to which the items are shipped, and information regarding the shipping agent, along with data about the shipped items. - -> [!NOTE] -> CMR notes are formatted to print on preprinted CMR forms. - -The following details the standard life cycle of a CMR note: - -- The warehouse manager prints the CMR notes for the shipments that need to be sent. -- The shipments are then packed and handed to the truck driver, along with the CMR notes. -- The driver ensures that each shipment has a CMR note. -- When goods are delivered to the customers, the driver ensures that the customers sign the CMR notes. -- The signed CMR notes are then given to the respective internal Accounts Receivable departments. -- The Accounts Payable administrators receive the signed CMR notes, along with the invoice for freight forwarding services from the freight forwarder. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Netherlands Local Functionality](netherlands-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/digipoort-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/digipoort-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index b3a125fc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/digipoort-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Digipoort Overview - description: In the Netherlands, you use Digipoort (government electronic post office) to make periodic electronic filings for VAT declarations and ICP reports in EU sales list submissions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Digipoort Overview -In the Netherlands, you use Digipoort to make periodic electronic filings for VAT declarations and ICP reports in EU sales list submissions. Digipoort is the electronic post office provided by the Dutch government for companies. It provides the common infrastructure for the communication of information between companies and the government, including VAT declarations. The reports are in XBRL format. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] installer installs the .dll to the following location: c:Program Files (x86)Microsoft Dynamics NAV<RoleTailored ClientAdd-insMicrosoft.Dynamics.NL.Digipoortservice.dll. - -The Digipoort channel replaces the BAPI method for making submissions. - -## Certificate Storage -In order to communicate electronically using Digipoort with the Dutch government, you will need two certificates (PKIoverheid). You will need a private certificate for the company as well as a public certificate from the website of the Dutch tax authorities. need a private certificate for the company as well as a public certificate from the Dutch authorities. You can get more specific information from the website of the Dutch tax authority. For more information, see the Dutch Tax Administration website[Logius](https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl/site/en/). - -You will have to import the certificates that you receive into the Windows Certificate store. This is a change from prior releases, in which you stored your certificates in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Certificates for use with Digipoort](how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/docket-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/docket-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index f8ac43a4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/docket-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Docket Reports - description: The Dutch telebanking application allows you to combine ledger entries for the same customer or vendor, having the same transaction mode, into one payment or collection order to the bank. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Docket Reports -The Dutch telebanking application allows you to combine ledger entries for the same customer or vendor, having the same transaction mode, into one payment or collection order to the bank. As such one total amount will be paid to or collected from the vendor or customer involved. Possibly this combined payment could lack all detail information about the individual payments or collections. Telebanking offers you the possibility to inform your vendor or customer in detail by generating a docket report that describes the individual payments that constitute the total amount paid or collected. - -When generating payment proposals using the **Get Proposal Entries** batch job the system will select the **Docket** check box on the proposal in case that: - -- The resulting combined payment includes too many invoice numbers to list them in the available four description fields of the new proposal line: **Description 1** field, **Description 2** field, **Description 3** field, and **Description 4** field. - -- The payment is not based upon an invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Telebanking](telebanking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-electronic-banking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-electronic-banking.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9cf25330..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-electronic-banking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Dutch Electronic Banking - description: Electronic banking functionality allows you to create electronic payment files and direct debit files, and to import electronic bank statements from supported bank software. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 10/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dutch Electronic Banking -Electronic banking functionality allows you to create electronic payment files and direct debit files, and to import electronic bank statements from supported bank software. - -## Telebanking -Using Telebanking, you can export payments, import bank statements, and collect data to forward to the bank. For more information, see [Telebanking](telebanking.md). - -You can create payment proposals and reconcile bank accounts in the cash, bank, and giro journals. - -### Payment Files -You can make payment proposals for paying open invoices to suppliers. Payment proposals can be edited manually prior to processing to add or remove payment invoices, or to change payment amounts. After processing a proposed payment batch, you can transfer electronic payment files to the bank. If an error occurs in the payment file while importing into the banking software, you can make a copy of the payment file to resubmit to the bank. - -You can make domestic payments and international payments using the designated formats. For more information, see [Telebanking](telebanking.md). - -### Direct Debit Files -You can create a payment proposal to collect payment from customer bank accounts. You can edit payment proposals manually to add or remove invoices, or to change collection amounts. After processing a proposed payment batch, you can transfer electronic direct debit files to the bank. If an error occurs in the direct debit file while importing into the banking software, you can make a copy of the direct debit file to resubmit to the bank. - -You can only collect payments domestically at this time. For more information, see [How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md). - -### Bank Statement Import -You can import bank statements from supported bank software, and reconcile them with incoming and outgoing payments. You can also reconcile bank charges and interest earned. - -Electronic bank statement files are supported for the following banks: - -- ABN AMRO Bank \(SWIFT MT940\) -- ING Bank \(SWIFT MT940, PAYMUL\) -- Rabobank \(MUT.ASC, VVMUT.ASC, BBV and ASCII\) -- Postbank \(SWIFT MT940\) - -### Bank Account Number Validation -Bank account numbers are validated by ensuring that they are either 9 or 10 digits long and they pass the “eleven test” algorithm. For giro accounts, the account number must be less than eight digits. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Telebanking](telebanking.md) - [Cash\-Bank\-Giro](cash-bank-giro.md) - [How to: Import and Reconcile Bank Statements](how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-post-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-post-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index c7cc00a2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/dutch-post-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Dutch Post Codes - description: In the Netherlands, a company called Cendris delivers post code and post code updates for your business. These updates are important for marketing and relationship management activities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dutch Post Codes -In the Netherlands, a company called Cendris delivers post code and post code updates for your business. These updates are important for marketing and relationship management activities. Each month Cendris delivers a file that has changes to the post code data for you to import into [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Import Post Codes](how-to-import-post-codes.md) - [How to: Import Post Code Updates](how-to-import-post-code-updates.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-tax-declarations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-tax-declarations.md deleted file mode 100644 index a7dd3d84..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-tax-declarations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Tax Declarations - description: Companies must deliver their VAT and ICP declarations electronically to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 01/10/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Tax Declarations -Companies must deliver their VAT and ICP declarations electronically to the tax authorities. - -## Prepare for Electronic Declaration - Before you can send electronic declarations to the tax authorities you must perform the following tasks: - -1. Request user certificates from the certification authority (CA) and import them in the application. For more information, see the [website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=223151) of the Dutch tax office. -2. Register at the tax authorities for electronic declaration. -3. Enter general data and personal data received from the tax authorities in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window. - -For more information, see [Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md). - -## Create and Submit Electronic Declarations -When the tasks stated above are finished the application can create and submit VAT and ICP declarations to the tax authorities. - -For each electronic declaration the tax authorities will send a response message. These messages must be received from the server of the tax authorities and processed. - -## Response Message from the Tax Authorities -The tax authorities will send a response message to inform the company about the status of their electronic declarations. The first step is to import the response messages from the tax authorities in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. The second step is processing the response messages. - -The response message must be linked to the related electronic tax declaration. - -If the accompanying electronic tax declaration is found then, depending on the type of the response message, different steps must be performed. - -## Acknowledgement Response Message -If no errors were found in the electronic declaration and the data has been processed by the tax authorities, the **Status** field in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Header** table will be changed into **Acknowledgement**. - -## Declaration for a Fiscal Entity -If a company has several companies registered as subsidiaries of a holding company, they have the option to submit the VAT declaration individually or combined for one fiscal entity. Regardless of the choice, the ICP declarations must always be submitted individually. - -The application cannot combine tax information for several companies into one electronic VAT declaration. If the company wants to combine the tax information, they have to create a VAT statement on paper for each subsidiary company and calculate the total amount for the holding company. After that these amounts can be manually entered on the website of the tax authorities. - -For each subsidiary company an electronic ICP declaration can be created and submitted to the tax authorities. These electronic ICP declarations must contain the VAT registration number of the subsidiary company and the **Fiscal Entity No.** field of the holding company, in the **Company Information** window. - -To setup electronic declarations for subsidiaries of a holding company, you must select the **Part of Fiscal Entity** field in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window. - -## Digipoort -In the Netherlands, you use Digipoort to make periodic electronic filings for VAT declarations and ICP reports in EU sales list submissions. Digipoort is the electronic post office provided by the Dutch government for companies. It provides the common infrastructure for the communication of information between companies and the government, including VAT declarations. The reports are in XBRL format. For more information, see [Digipoort Overview](digipoort-overview.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [Digipoort Overview](digipoort-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md deleted file mode 100644 index f2a24600..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations - description: Companies must submit periodic VAT and ICP declarations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations -Companies must submit periodic VAT and ICP declarations. - -VAT declarations must be submitted on a monthly or quarterly basis. - -Companies that sell goods or services to European Union (EU) countries/regions must submit Intracommunautaire leveringen (ICP) declarations on a quarterly basis. Purchases are not included in this declaration. For these intracommunautaire transactions, it is required that the merchandise have crossed the border physically. It is not enough that the location of an invoice address or the office of the vendor or customer is in another EU country or region. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can send electronic declarations to the tax authorities you must register your company for electronic declaration. The information that the tax authorities need depends on the sign method your company will use, PIN or PKI. For both methods, you have to send the form "Aanmeldingsformulier voor elektronisch berichtenverkeer met de belastingdienst" to the tax authorities. -> -> For more information, see the [website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=223151) of the Dutch tax office. - -## Submitting Electronic Tax Declarations -You can submit the VAT declarations and ICP declarations in the following ways: - -- Log on to the website of the Dutch tax office and enter the information manually. For more information, see the [website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=223151) of the Dutch tax office. - - For ICP declarations, you can enter a maximum of 99 lines. - -- Create an electronic declaration and submit the encrypted file through Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server to the Dutch tax office. - -The electronic VAT declaration contains the posted VAT and the calculated duty liable to the customs authorities for a specified period. The data of the VAT declaration is based on the definition of the VAT statement in the **VAT Statement Line** table. For more information, see VAT Statement Line. - -The data of the ICP declaration is based on the **VAT Entry** table. For more information, see VAT Entry. - -## Electronic Tax Declaration Methods -You can submit the VAT and ICP declarations electronically to the tax authorities using the following methods: - -**Personal identification number (PIN) method** - Uses a PIN code to sign the declaration. If you submit your declarations using the PIN method, you must create a PIN code for your company and deliver it to the tax authorities. This code helps the tax authorities to identify the company that has submitted the electronic declaration. This PIN code is not stored in the database. Therefore, you must save the PIN code in a secure location. - -> [!WARNING] -> The tax authorities are reconsidering whether to accept declarations that are signed using a PIN code. For more information, see the [website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=223151) of the Dutch tax office. - -**Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) method** - Uses digital certificates to encrypt messages and verify digital signature. If you submit your declarations using the PKI method, you must also have additional certificates, generic parameters, and other parameters when you use the PKI method. For more information, see the [website](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=223151) of the Dutch tax office. - -## Contact Information -The electronic VAT and ICP declarations contain contact information about the taxpayer or the agent. For more information, see VAT Registration No.. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Tax Declarations](electronic-tax-declarations.md) - [How to: Set Up VAT Categories](how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md) - [How to: Create Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [How to: Process Response Messages from Tax Authorities](how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9f950dfd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: General Ledger (Netherlands) - description: Special general ledger functionality exists for the Dutch version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# General Ledger (Netherlands) -General ledger functionality for the Netherlands is described in the below topics. - -## In This Section -[How to: How to: Apply Customer Payments Manually](../../receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md) -[Required Descriptions in G-L Entry](required-descriptions-in-g-l-entry.md) -[How to: Create an Audit File for the Tax Authority](how-to-create-an-audit-file-for-the-tax-authority.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 750fad09..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Activate SEPA Payments (Netherlands) - description: To submit vendor payments electronically in Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) ISO 20022 payment format, you must set up prerequisites for enabling SEPA payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Activate SEPA Payments (Netherlands) -To submit vendor payments electronically in Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) ISO 20022 payment format, you must set up prerequisites for enabling SEPA payments. - -In the following procedures, the first four describe how to enable SEPA payments, and the remaining two relate to the individual vendors. - -## To enable countries/regions for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Countries/Regions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit List** action. -3. Select the **SEPA Allowed** check box for each country or region that you want to enable for SEPA. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To enable bank accounts for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account that you want to enable for SEPA, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Country/Region Code** field, select the appropriate code. - - > [!NOTE] - > The specified country/region code must be enabled for SEPA as described in the previous procedure. - -4. Enter a value in the **Min. Balance** field. -5. On the **Transfer** FastTab, in the **SWIFT Code** field, enter a code. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up a SEPA ISO 20022 export protocol - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Export Protocols**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Export Protocols** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Sets the export protocol code, such as **SEPA ISO20022**.| - |**Description**|Provides the description for the export protocol.| - |**Check ID**|Sets the ID for the codeunit to check payment, such as **11000010**.| - |**Check Name**|Sets the name of the codeunit.| - |**Export Protocol Type**|Specifies the type of the export protocol:

- **Report**
- **XMLPort**| - |**Export ID**|Sets the ID for the batch job to export payment, such as **11000011**.

If you select XMLPort as your export protocol type, then choose an ID such as **1000**.| - |**Export Name**|The name of the batch job.| - |**Docket ID**|Sets the ID for the batch job to inform the contact on combined payments, such as **11000004**.

This does not apply to XMLPort protocol types.| - |**Docket Name**|The name of the docket report.| - |**Default File Names**|Sets the location to export payment and collection data.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To enable transaction modes for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transaction Modes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the transaction mode that you want to enable for SEPA, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Transaction Mode Card** window, on the **Paym. Proposal** FastTab, in the **Export Protocol** field, select the SEPA export protocol that you have created, such as **SEPA ISO20022**. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To verify vendor payment transaction modes for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the vendor that you want to verify the transaction mode for, and then choose the **View** action. -3. On the **Payments** FastTab, in the **Transaction Mode Code** field, verify that the vendor payment transaction mode is one that has been enabled for SEPA. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up vendor bank accounts for SEPA - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant vendor, and then choose the **Bank Accounts** action. -3. Select the vendor bank account to set up for SEPA, and then choose the **Edit** action. -4. On the **Transfer** FastTab, in the **IBAN** and **SWIFT Code** fields, enter the international bank identifier code of the bank where the vendor has the account. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Single EURO Payments Area (SEPA)](single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md) - [How to: Submit Vendor Payments Electronically in SEPA ISO 20022 Payment Format](how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 649744a6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Apply and Unapply General Ledger Entries (Netherlands) - description: Applying temporary general ledger entries allows companies to work with temporary and transfer accounts in the general ledger (Netherlands). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Apply and Unapply General Ledger Entries (Netherlands) -Applying temporary general ledger entries allows companies to work with temporary and transfer accounts in the general ledger. Temporary and transfer accounts are used to store temporary ledger entries that are waiting for further processing into the general ledger. - -You can use temporary accounts for: - -- Money transfers from one bank account to another. -- Financial transaction transfers from one system to another in which part of the information temporarily resides on the original system. -- Transactions for which you have issued a sales invoice to a customer but have not yet received the corresponding purchase invoice from the vendor. - -When the ledger entries have been processed, you can use the apply entries function to update the posted ledger entries and the posting account type. - -You can unapply the applied general ledger entries and then open the closed entries to make changes. - -## To apply general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. In the **General Ledger Entries** window, choose the **Apply Entries** action. - - All open ledger entries for the general ledger account are displayed in the **Apply General Ledger Entries** window. - - > [!NOTE] - > By default, the **Include Entries** field is set to **Open**. You can change the value of the **Include Entries** field to **All** or **Closed**. You can only apply general ledger entries that are **Open**. - -4. Select the relevant general ledger entry, and then choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. - - The **Applies-to ID** field is updated with the user ID. The remaining amount is displayed in the **Balance** field in the **Apply General Ledger Entries** window. -5. Choose the **Post Application** action. - - You can post the application even if the balance amount is equal to 0. When posted, the **Remaining Amount** field is affected as follows: - - - If the **Balance** is equal to 0, then the **Remaining Amount** field on all ledger entries is set to 0. - - - If the **Balance** is not equal to 0, then the amount in the **Balance** field is transferred to the **Remaining Amount** field for the general ledger entry that was selected when you posted the application. - - - For all other general ledger entries, the **Remaining Amount** field is set to 0 and the **Open**, **Closed by Entry No.**, **Closed by Amount**, and **Closed at Date** fields are updated. - - > [!NOTE] - > When posted, the general ledger entries which update the **Applies-to ID** field are deleted. - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To view the applied general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. Select the relevant general ledger entry, and then choose the **Applied Entries** action. - - You can view all the applied general ledger entries. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To unapply general ledger entries - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a general ledger register, and then choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. Select the general ledger entry that you want to unapply, and then choose the **Undo Application** action. - - The applied general ledger entries are unapplied. - - > [!NOTE] - > If an entry is applied to more than one application entry, you must unapply the latest application entry first. By default, the latest entry is displayed. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[General Ledger](general-ledger.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-an-audit-file-for-the-tax-authority.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-an-audit-file-for-the-tax-authority.md deleted file mode 100644 index ad8bad56..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-an-audit-file-for-the-tax-authority.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create an Audit File for the Tax Authority - description: During an examination of the books for a fiscal year, a tax inspector can ask for data about the basis transactions from the general ledger for that fiscal year. Basis transactions usually are processed via journal entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create an Audit File for the Tax Authority -During an examination of the books for a fiscal year, a tax inspector can ask for data about the basis transactions from the general ledger for that fiscal year. Basis transactions usually are processed via journal entries. That is the reason why the journal entries are the basis for the audit file. - - The tax authority stimulates companies to use the audit file but it is not prescribed. - - The audit file can also be used to exchange data between companies. You can select every period you want, but the start and end date of the entered period must be in the same fiscal year. - -## To make an Audit file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Authority - Audit File**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Start Date**|Specify the start date of the period on which the data must be based.| - |**End Date**|Specify the end date of the period on which the data must be based.| - |**Exclude Begin Balance**|Specifies if the audit file must contain the begin balance of general ledger accounts.

The field is editable if the start date of the period is equal to the start date of a fiscal year.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button to create the audit file. If you do not want to create the audit file, choose the **Cancel** button to close the window. - -When you run the report, you must specify the name and location of the exported file. The default file name is **audit.xaf**, but you can change that. The file extension must be .xaf. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [How to: Submit Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md deleted file mode 100644 index de9f6437..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create and Export Payment History - description: After you have created a proposal and made any modifications, you can process the proposal to create a payment history. Proposals can be created manually or automatically from a vendor or customer ledger entry. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create and Export Payment History -After you have created a proposal and made any modifications, you can process the proposal to create a payment history. Proposals can be created manually or automatically from a vendor or customer ledger entry. For more information, see [How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md). - - For exporting payment histories, the following protocols are supported: - -- BTL91 $) -- BBV -- PAYMUL - -## To create a payment history for a proposal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Telebank - Bank Overview**, and then choose the related link. - - If you want to print the proposal before you process it, choose the **Print** button. - -2. To process the proposal, choose the **Process** action. -3. To view the payment history, close the **Telebank Proposal** window. Make sure the same bank account in the **Telebank – Bank Overview** window is selected, and then choose the **Payment History** action. - -The **Payment History List** window displays the payment history that you just created. - -## To export a payment history - -- In the **Payment History List** window, choose the **Export** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > A text file will be created. This file contains the path and file name as defined in the **Default File Names Field** field of the export protocol. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md deleted file mode 100644 index a0a95ae9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations - description: To create electronic VAT and ICP declarations, you must first set up the declaration using the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window. Then you can submit them to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations -To create electronic VAT and ICP declarations, you must first set up the declaration using the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window. Then you can submit them to the tax authorities. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you have selected the **Part of Fiscal Entity** field in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window, then you can create an electronic declaration for only one company. If you want to combine the tax information for all subsidiaries of a holding company, you must create a VAT statement on paper for each subsidiary company and manually calculate the total amounts for the holding company. These total amounts of the holding company must be entered on the website of the tax authorities. You cannot combine tax information for ICP declarations. ICP declarations must always be submitted individually. - -If there are no intra-community deliveries in the declaration period, then an electronic ICP declaration is created without XML elements for the deliveries. If you submit such a declaration, an error message will be displayed. - -## To create an electronic VAT or ICP declaration - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Elec. Tax Declarations**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Elec. Tax Declaration List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Elec. Tax Declaration Card** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Template Name**|The name of the template that will be used to create the electronic declaration.| - |**Statement Name**|The name of the statement that will be used to create the electronic declaration.| - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -The XML elements and the accompanying data of the electronic declaration are displayed on the **Lines** FastTab in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Card** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Tax Declarations](electronic-tax-declarations.md) - [Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [How to: Set Up VAT Categories](how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-proposals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-proposals.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3a368a77..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-create-proposals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Proposals - description: Proposals can be generated manually or automatically based on either vendor or customer ledger entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Proposals -Proposals can be generated manually or automatically based on either vendor or customer ledger entries. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> To create a proposal, you must use the **Owner Information** field in the Vendor Bank Account Card and Customer Bank Account Card windows. - -> [!NOTE] -> At any time and at any level, before processing a proposal, the transaction mode and bank account can be modified. At the lowest level on the relevant vendor or customer ledger entries. - -## To create proposals manually - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Telebank - Bank Overview**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant bank account and then choose the **Proposal** action. -3. At a minimum, you must fill in the **Account Type**, **Account No.**, **Transaction Mode**, **Bank Account No.**, and **Amount** fields. - -4. If you want to view or adjust the proposal's detail lines, choose the **Detail Information** action. To return to the proposal, close the **Proposal Detail Line** window. - -## To create proposals automatically from sales - -1. Set up a card for the customer who sent the invoice with appropriate values for the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields. -2. Create a sales invoice or credit memo, enter the customer and relevant items and post the invoice. -3. Check whether the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields of the invoice/credit memo contain appropriate values. By default, they will be copied from the customer card. - -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Telebank - Bank Overview**, and then choose the related link. -5. Select the relevant bank account, and then choose the **Proposal** action. -6. Choose the **Get Entries** action. - - You can use the Get Proposal Entries Batch Job batch job to generate proposal lines based on relevant customer ledger entries. - - > [!NOTE] - > Only proposal lines will be created for ledger entries that have a transaction mode of account type **Customer** and a link to the active bank account. - -6. If you want to view or adjust the proposal's detail lines, choose the **Detail Information** action. To return to the proposal, close the **Proposal Detail Line** window. - -## To create proposals automatically from purchases - -1. Set up a card for the vendor that sent the invoice with appropriate values for **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields. -2. Create a purchase invoice or credit memo, enter the vendor and relevant items. -3. Post the invoice. -4. Check whether the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields of the invoice/credit memo contain appropriate values. By default, they will be copied from the vendor card. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Telebank - Bank Overview**, and then choose the related link. -6. Select the relevant bank account, and then choose the **Proposal** action. -7. Choose the **Get Entries** action. - - You can use the Get Proposal Entries Batch Job batch job to generate proposal lines based on relevant vendor ledger entries. - - > [!NOTE] - > Only proposal lines will be created for ledger entries that have a transaction mode of account type **Vendor** and a link to the active bank account. - -6. If you want to view or adjust the proposal's detail lines, choose the **Detail Information** action. To return to the proposal, close the **Proposal Detail Line** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Customers](../../sales-how-register-new-customers.md) - [How to: Invoice Sales](../../sales-how-invoice-sales.md) - [How to: Record Purchases](../../purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) - [How to: Create and Export Payment History](how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-enter-and-post-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-enter-and-post-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index bc56f920..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-enter-and-post-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter and Post Cash and Bank or Giro Journals - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use the cash and bank journals to enter the transactions that affect the cash and bank accounts by using **Cash Book** and **Bank Book**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter and Post Cash and Bank or Giro Journals -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use the cash and bank journals to enter the transactions that affect the cash and bank accounts by using **Cash Book** and **Bank Book**. - -You can enter increases or decreases to the cash account in the **Cash Journals**. For example, you can use this journal for paying out petty cash or receiving transfers from a different bank account. - -The **Bank/Giro Journal** records the inflow or outflow of the cash to a specific bank account. This journal forms the basis for bank reconciliation. The layout of this journal resembles the paper bank statement, so you can transpose the required fields from the paper statement to the journal, or you can import an electronic bank statement file. The transactions can be customer payments or vendor payments. - -You can apply the payments from customers to the open invoices from accounts receivables. You can also enter general ledger transactions to capture miscellaneous amounts, such as bank charges or interest income. VAT codes can also be applied to these transaction lines. You can define a journal for every bank account. - -## To post cash journals - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Cash Journal** window, on the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Date**|The journal entry date.| - |**Document No.**|The document number for which journal entry is created.| - |**Account Type**|The account type to which the entry is to be posted.| - |**Account No.**|The account number to which the entry is to be posted.| - |**Description**|The description of the entry. This field automatically populates the description of the account number selected in the **Account No.** field.| - |**VAT Prod. Posting Group**|The VAT product posting group code used to post the entry. You can select a code in this field only if the **Account Type** is **G/L Account**. For more information, see VAT Product Posting Groups.| - |**Amount**|The total amount that the statement line consists of. You must enter the debit amount without a plus or minus sign and the credit amount with a minus sign.

If this amount includes the VAT amount, then select the **Amount incl. VAT** check box.| - -4. Choose the **Post** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > If there is a difference between the opening balance and the closing balance, you must change the closing balance before posting the entry. - - The entries are posted to the general ledger. For more information, see General Ledger Entries. - -## To post bank or giro journals - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank/Giro Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Select the relevant journal template, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. In the **Bank/Giro Journal** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Opening Balance**|The current balance of the bank or giro account. It equals the closing balance of previously posted entries for the journal.| - |**Closing Balance**|The new closing balance of the journal.| - -5. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the required fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Date**|The journal entry date.| - |**Account Type**|The account type to which the journal entry is to be posted.| - |**Account No.**|The account number to which the journal entry is to be posted.| - |**Identification**|The identification number that links the statement line to a payment history line.| - |**Description**|The description of the entry.| - |**VAT Prod. Posting Group**|The VAT product posting group code that will be used when you post the entry on the statement line.| - |**Amount**|The total amount that the statement line consists of. You must enter the debit amount without a plus or minus sign and the credit amount with a minus sign.

If this amount includes the VAT amount, then select the **Amount incl. VAT** check box.| - -6. Choose the **Post** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> If there is a difference between the opening balance and the closing balance, you must change the closing balance before posting the entry. - -The entries are posted to the general ledger. For more information, see General Ledger Entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Print the Test Reports for Cash and Bank or Giro Journals](how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 96156420..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import and Reconcile Bank Statements - description: Banks provide electronic bank statements for all your financial interactions. You can import these statements into the bank or giro journals. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import and Reconcile Bank Statements -Banks provide electronic bank statements for all your financial interactions. You can import these statements into the bank or giro journals. - -The import bank statement is supported by the following protocols: - -- Rabobank mut.asc -- Rabobank vvmut.ac -- Rabobank ASCII -- SEPA CAMT - -## To import and reconcile bank statements - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Import Bank Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Import Protocol List** window, select the required import protocol, and then choose the **OK** button. -3. To reconcile the bank statements automatically when importing, on the **Options** FastTab, select the **Automatic Reconciliation** check box. - - > [!NOTE] - > This function does not work for bank statement files of type SEPA CAMT. Instead, use the **Match Automatically** action in the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window. For more information, see [Applying Payments Automatically and Reconcile Bank Accounts](../../receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md). - -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. To import the file that contains the electronic bank statement, specify the file name and path, and then choose the **Open** button. - -The electronic bank statement is imported into the bank or giro journals. For more information, see [Dutch Electronic Banking](dutch-electronic-banking.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Dutch Electronic Banking](dutch-electronic-banking.md) - [Applying Payments Automatically and Reconcile Bank Accounts](../../receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-code-updates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-code-updates.md deleted file mode 100644 index ee602956..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-code-updates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import Post Code Updates - description: Every month a post code file will be delivered with all post code mutations in a month. This post code file can be imported and update the relevant data of the **Post Code Range** table. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import Post Code Updates -Every month a post code file will be delivered with all post code mutations in a month. This post code file can be imported and update the relevant data of the **Post Code Range** table. - -## To import the update file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Post Codes Updates**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Post Codes Updates** window, choose the **Import Post Codes Update** action. -3. Specify the path and name of the post code update file, and then choose the **OK** button. If you do not want to import the file, choose the **Cancel** button to close the window. - -If there is no file imported with a full set of post code data, then a message appears. - -Before updating the post codes the following checks will be performed: - -- Is there already an update file imported with a Date Field later then the date of this new update file? If so then the process will stop. - -- Is there a gap between the date of this file and the value in the Date Field field for the last imported file? If there is a gap then a message appears. You can choose if you still want to import the update file. - -Information about the imported post code will be saved in the Post Code Update Log Entry Table table. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Dutch Post Codes](dutch-post-codes.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index f3c9c7d7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-import-post-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import Post Codes - description: You can import a file that specifies post codes for marketing and relationship management activities. The post code data that you import will be saved in the **Post Code Range** table. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import Post Codes -You can import a file that specifies post codes for marketing and relationship management activities. The post code data that you import will be saved in the **Post Code Range** table. - -## To import a post code file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Post Codes Updates**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Post Codes Updates** window, choose the **Import Post Codes** action. -3. Specify the path and name of the post code file, and then choose the **OK** button. If you do not want to import the file, choose the **Cancel** button to close the window. - -Information about the imported post code will be saved in the Post Code Update Log Entry Table table. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Dutch Post Codes](dutch-post-codes.md) - [How to: Import Post Code Updates](how-to-import-post-code-updates.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1b96b69a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-print-the-test-reports-for-cash-and-bank-or-giro-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Test Reports for Cash and Bank or Giro Journals - description: You can use the **CBG Posting - Test** report to edit the statement lines and see the effect of posting before you post cash journals and bank or giro journals. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Test Reports for Cash and Bank or Giro Journals -You can use the **CBG Posting - Test** report to edit the statement lines and see the effect of posting before you post cash journals and bank or giro journals. - -This report displays the statement lines of a cash journal and bank journal or giro journal. For more information, see CBG Statement Line Table and Bank-Giro Journal Window. - -## To print the test report for cash journal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cash Journal** window, choose the **Test Report** action. -3. To include the information on applied entries for the statement lines, select the **Show Applied Entries** check box. - - For more information, see [How to: Apply and Unapply General Ledger Entries](how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md). - -4. On the **CBG Statement** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - - You can select the **Journal Template Name** and **No.** fields as filters when you generate this report. -5. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it in on the screen. - -## To print the test report for bank or giro journal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank/Giro Journal**, and then choose the related link -2. Choose the **General Ledger** action. -3. In the **General Journal Template List** window, Choose the **OK** button. -4. In the **Bank/Giro Journal** window, choose the **Test Report** action. -5. To include the information on applied entries for the statement lines, select the **Show Applied Entries** check box. -6. On the **CBG Statement** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. - - You can select the **Journal Template Name** and **No.** as filters when you generate this report. - -7. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it in on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Apply and Unapply General Ledger Entries](how-to-apply-and-unapply-general-ledger-entries.md) - [Cash-Bank-Giro](cash-bank-giro.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities.md deleted file mode 100644 index aca69c75..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Process Response Messages from Tax Authorities - description: When you submit a VAT or ICP declaration to the tax authorities electronically, they will process the declaration and send you a message in response. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Process Response Messages from Tax Authorities -When you submit a VAT or ICP declaration to the tax authorities electronically, they will process the declaration and send you a message in response. - -You can import the response into [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] by using the **Receive Response Messages** batch job. The response message will contain the status of the declaration. - -## To import messages from the tax authorities' server - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Elec. Tax Decl. Response Msgs.**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Receive Response Messages** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**CA Certificate Encryption Password**|The password that was used to encrypt the Certificate Authorities' certificates.| - |**User Certificate Password**|The password that is used to encrypt the user certificates.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To process the response messages from the tax authorities - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Elec. Tax Decl. Response Msgs.**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Process Response Messages** action. -3. In the **Process Response Messages Batch Job** window, on the **Elec. Tax Decl. Response Msg**. FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - The processed information about the response message is displayed in the **Elec. Tax Decl. Response Msgs.**. window. - -5. To export a message or attachment, choose the **Export Response Message** action or the **Export Response Attachment** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [How to: Set Up VAT Categories](how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md) - [How to: Create Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md deleted file mode 100644 index d0845a39..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Certificates for use with Digipoort - description: Information about Digipoort certificates. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Certificates for use with Digipoort -The following procedure assumes that you have obtained the certificates from the government. If you have not, take the following steps to obtain the certificates. - -- Obtain a PKIoverheid certificate for the company if you do not have one already. A list of certificate providers can be found here: [http://www.logius.nl/producten/toegang/pkioverheid/aansluiten/toegetreden-csps](http://www.logius.nl/producten/toegang/pkioverheid/aansluiten/toegetreden-csps). - -- Obtain a **Digipoort Service certificate**, which can be obtained at the Dutch Tax Administration website: <[https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl](https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl)>. - -- Register a user of Digipoort, which can be done here: <[https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl/site/registratie/nieuw](https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl/site/registratie/nieuw)>. - -After you register and log on to the official site, you can download the digiport server certificates from this site: <[https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl/site/documentatie/certificaten](https://aansluiten.procesinfrastructuur.nl/site/documentatie/certificaten)>. - -Next, you have to install the certificates. The certificates have to be installed on the server. Later, you will use the common name (CN) of the certificates in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the Digipoort implementation you install certificates on the server. Users who need to be able to communicate with tax authorities via Digipoort will need access to the private key of the personal certificate on the server. - -## To install the certificates - -1. Open the **Windows Certificate Console** to import the certificates that you have obtained from the government. For more information, see [How to: Use the Certificates Console](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/2167.how-to-use-the-certificates-console.aspx). -2. Import the two certificates. For more information, [To import a certificate](https://social.technet.microsoft.com/wiki/contents/articles/2167.how-to-use-the-certificates-console.aspx#To_import_certificates). - - **Personal Certificate** - - 1. In the **Personal** section, choose the **Import** action. Make sure to set proper permissions to the private key. - 2. Complete the **Certificate Import Wizard**. - - **Service Certificate** - - 1. In the **Trusted Publishers** section, choose the **Import** action - 2. Complete the **Certificate Import Wizard**. - -3. Grant read permissions to the certificate for the user who is doing the submission. - - Right-click the certificate, choose the **All Tasks** action, and then choose the **Manage Private Keys** action. Select the user and in the **Permissions** box, select the **Allow Read** check box. - -4. Close the **Console** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Digipoort Overview](digipoort-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4dab123f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations - description: To get your Digipoort communications to work, you may have to adjust your network settings. Digipoort uses a secure communication protocol and requires using TCP port 443. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations -To get your Digipoort communications to work, you may have to adjust your network settings. Digipoort uses a secure communication protocol and requires using TCP port 443. Before proceeding with the following procedure, set up your network to use this port. - -To be able to create electronic VAT and ICP declarations and communicate with the tax authorities, you must first set up general information about electronic tax declarations. Your company must be registered with the tax authorities before you can send electronic declarations. - -## To set up electronic tax declarations - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **VAT Contact Type**. - - The options include **Tax Payer** and **Agent**. If the contact type is **Tax Payer**, the contact ID in the electronic declaration will be filled with the VAT registration number of the company. - -3. Select the **ICP Contact Type**. The options include **Tax Payer** and **Agent**. -4. If you want to send electronic ICP declarations for a subsidiary company of a fiscal entity, select the **Part of Fiscal Entity** field. -5. On the **Numbering** FastTab, enter the number series for the **VAT Declaration Nos. Field** field. -6. On the **Digipoort** FastTab, enter the data needed for the Digipoort submissions. - - 1. In the **Digipoort Client Cert. Name** field, enter the common name (CN) of the certificate you requested for use with Digipoort. You can find this information in the certificate properties of the personal certificate that you installed under the **Personal** folder. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Certificates for use with Digipoort](how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md). - 2. In the **Digipoort Service Cert. Name** field, enter the common name of the service certificate, which may be equal to the name of the server that that you are communicating with for the Dutch government. You can find this information in the certificate properties of the public certificate that was installed in the **Trusted Publishers** folder. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Certificates for use with Digipoort](how-to-set-up-certificates-for-use-with-digipoort.md). - 3. In the **Digipoort Delivery URL** field, specify the URL for the production version of the Digipoort Aanlever service. For more information, see [http://www.logius.nl/producten/gegevensuitwisseling/digipoort](http://www.logius.nl/producten/gegevensuitwisseling/digipoort). - 4. In the **Digipoort Status URL** field, specify the URL for the status information that is coming from the Digipoort Statusinformatie service. - - For more information, see [Digipoort Overview](digipoort-overview.md). - -Currently, there are two sets of URLs that are provided by the Dutch Tax Administration. These are subject to change, however, and you should check the administration’s website regularly for updates. - -**Production Use** - -- Digipoort Delivery URL: https://www.procesinfrastructuur.nl/wus/2.0/aanleverservice/1.2 -- Digipoort Status URL: https://www.procesinfrastructuur.nl/wus/2.0/statusinformatieservice/1.2 - -**Testing Use** - -- Digipoort Delivery URL: https://preprod.procesinfrastructuur.nl/wus/2.0/aanleverservice/1.2 -- Digipoort Status URL: https://preprod.procesinfrastructuur.nl/wus/2.0/statusinformatieservice/1.2 - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Submit Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [How to: Process Response Messages from Tax Authorities](how-to-process-response-messages-from-tax-authorities.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-standard-sales-or-purchase-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-standard-sales-or-purchase-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9f497033..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-standard-sales-or-purchase-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Standard Sales or Purchase Lines - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can specify how the standard sales or purchase codes will be entered when you are creating the specified sales or purchase documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Standard Sales or Purchase Lines -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can specify how the standard sales or purchase codes will be entered when you are creating the specified sales or purchase documents. - -The following procedure describes how to set up a standard sales line, but the same steps apply to setting up standard purchase lines in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. - -## To set up a standard sales line - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Std. Customer Sales Codes** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Insert Std. Cust. Sales Lines**|Specify the method by which to insert the standard customer sales lines.

- **Manual** - You must insert the standard sales lines that you set up for that customer. If you select this option, then you will not be able to select the **Quotes**, **Orders**, **Invoices**, or **Credit Memos** fields in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window.
- **Automatic** - Automatically insert standard sales lines on sales documents that you create for a customer.
- **Always Ask** - Display a window with all the existing standard sales codes that you set up for the customer.| - |**Quotes**|Select to insert standard sales lines on sales quotes.| - |**Orders**|Select to insert standard sales lines on sales orders.| - |**Invoices**|Select to insert standard sales lines on sales invoices.| - |**Credit Memos**|Select to insert standard sales lines on sales credit memos.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](../../sales-how-work-standard-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-validation-of-purchase-amounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-validation-of-purchase-amounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4717c003..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-validation-of-purchase-amounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Validation of Purchase Amounts - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can activate the **Check Doc. Total Amounts** function to validate the total amount of purchase documents before posting a purchase invoice and purchase credit memo. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Validation of Purchase Amounts -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can activate the **Check Doc. Total Amounts** function to validate the total amount of purchase documents before posting a purchase invoice and purchase credit memo. By default, the purchase document total amount is validated when you post. The total amount of the inserted purchase lines must be equal to the amount including VAT and the VAT amount. To validate the purchase document amount automatically, you must enter the document amount including VAT and the document amount VAT on the **Purchase Invoice** or **Purchase Credit Memo** window. - -If you have only one purchase line or several purchase lines with the same VAT percentage, the correct document amount VAT is calculated automatically when you insert the purchase lines and the document amount including VAT. If you have several purchase lines with different VAT percentages, the document amount VAT value must be changed manually. - -You can also locate when the document total amounts and the total amounts of the inserted purchase lines are different. You can activate the **Show Totals on Purch. Inv./CM.** option to view the following in the inserted purchase lines: - -- Total amount -- Total base amount -- Total VAT amount -- Total amount including VAT - -The calculated amounts are displayed in the purchase invoice or purchase credit memo. By default, this total amount is not displayed. - -You can activate this option only if the purchase invoice or purchase credit memo has: - -- A minimum of one purchase line. -- The quantity field specified. - -## To set up validation of total amounts for purchase documents - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Totals on Purch. Inv./CM.**|Select to recalculate the totals on all purchase invoices and credit memos. This can take more time depending on the number of documents that must be recalculated.| - |**Check Doc. Total Amounts**|Select to modify the **Doc. Amount Incl. VAT** and **Doc. Amount VAT** fields on the **Purchase Invoice** and **Purchase Credit Memo** windows.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Netherlands Local Functionality](netherlands-local-functionality.md) -[Setting Up Purchases](../../sales-how-work-standard-lines.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md deleted file mode 100644 index 890d5f0d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-set-up-vat-categories.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up VAT Categories - description: To use the electronic VAT declaration, you must set up a VAT category code for all XML elements in the electronic VAT declaration. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up VAT Categories -To use the electronic VAT declaration, you must set up a VAT category code for all XML elements in the electronic VAT declaration. - -You must set up all of the possible category and subcategory combinations that represent an XML element in the electronic VAT declaration. Then, you can map the VAT statement data directly to an XML element. - -## To set up a VAT category - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Elec. Tax. Decl. VAT Categories**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Elec. Tax. Decl. VAT Categories** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|The unique code for each category and subcategory combination. You can enter a maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters.| - |**Category**|Specify the main category option for the VAT statement.| - |**By Us (Domestic)**|The subcategory for the VAT Statement.

Select a subcategory here if the **Category** field displays **By Us (Domestic)**.| - |**To Us (Domestic)**|The subcategory for the VAT Statement.

Select a subcategory here if the **Category** field displays **To Us (Domestic)**.| - |**By Us (Foreign)**|The subcategory for the VAT Statement.

Select a subcategory here if the **Category** field displays **By Us (Foreign)**.| - |**To Us (Foreign)**|The subcategory for the VAT Statement.

Select a subcategory here if the **Category** field displays **To Us (Foreign)**.| - |**Calculation**|The subcategory for the VAT Statement.

Select a subcategory here if the **Category** field displays **Calculation**.| - |**Optional**|Select to indicate that the XML element that is represented by the category code is not required in the electronic VAT declaration.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -You can now map the VAT statement data directly to an XML element. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) - [How to: Create Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations](how-to-create-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md deleted file mode 100644 index a6e7f17b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-electronic-vat-and-icp-declarations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Submit Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations - description: With the eXtensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) reporter, you can submit the Intracommunautaire Leveringen (ICP) declaration or the VAT declaration in the required XML format. When it is submitted, the file is sent to the tax authorities as defined in the Elec. Tax Declaration Setup Window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Submit Electronic VAT and ICP Declarations -With the eXtensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) reporter, you can submit the Intracommunautaire Leveringen (ICP) declaration or the VAT declaration in the required XML format. When it is submitted, the file is sent to the tax authorities as defined in the Elec. Tax Declaration Setup Window. - -The XBRL reporter ensures that all account numbers that are imported from [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] are mapped to the XBRL elements in a report. The XBRL reporter also displays a list of errors of unmapped elements or accounts. - -To submit electronic VAT and ICP declarations to the tax authorities, you can use the **Submit electronic VAT Declaration** batch job and **Submit electronic ICP Declaration** batch job, respectively. The batch job will sign, compress, and encrypt the electronic declaration before submitting it to the tax authorities. - -## To submit an electronic VAT or ICP declaration - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Elec. Tax Declarations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the electronic declaration that you want to submit, and then choose the **Edit** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only submit an electronic declaration that has the status **Created**. For more information about the status of the electronic declaration, see Status Field. - -3. Choose the **Submit Electronic Tax Declaration** action. -4. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**PIN**|The personal identification number of the company.

You can enter a value in this field only if you have set the **Sign Method** field to **PIN** in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window.| - |**User Certificate Password**|The password that will encrypt the user certificates.

You can enter a value in this field only if you have set the **Sign Method** field to **PKI** in the **Elec. Tax Declaration Setup** window.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -The electronic declaration is submitted to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Reports with XBRL](../../bi-create-reports-with-xbrl.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index acb6916a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Submit Vendor Payments Electronically in SEPA ISO 20022 Payment Format - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create and submit Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) ISO 20022 vendor payments electronically. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Submit Vendor Payments Electronically in SEPA ISO 20022 Payment Format -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create and submit Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) ISO 20022 vendor payments electronically. - -Before you can create and submit SEPA vendor payments, you must enable SEPA payments. For more information, see [How to: Activate SEPA Payments](how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md). - -## To submit vendor payments electronically in SEPA ISO 20022 payment format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Telebank-Bank Overview**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant bank account, and then choose the **Proposal** action. -3. Select the relevant vendor bank account, and then choose the **Get Entries** action. -4. In the **Get Proposal Entries** batch job, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Currency Date**|Specify the currency date.| - |**Pmt. Discount Date**|Specify the payment discount date.| - -5. On the **Transaction Mode** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -6. On the **Cust. Ledger Entry** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -7. On the **Vendor Ledger Entry** FastTab, select the **Vendor No.** filter, and then select a vendor number. - - > [!NOTE] - > Select other appropriate filters if required. - -8. Choose the **OK** button. - -The proposal lines populate in the **Telebank Proposal** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Activate SEPA Payments](how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md) - [Single EURO Payments Area (SEPA)](single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/netherlands-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/netherlands-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4046cf47..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/netherlands-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Netherlands Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Dutch version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Netherlands Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Dutch version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - -## In This Section - [CMR Notes](cmr-notes.md) - [Dutch Electronic Banking](dutch-electronic-banking.md) - [Electronic Tax Declarations](electronic-tax-declarations.md) - [General Ledger](general-ledger.md) - [Single EURO Payments Area (SEPA)](single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2f470de1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payment Scenario 1 - Domestic Payments (LCY to LCY) - description: You can use telebanking for trade with domestic and foreign customers and vendors. Here is a scenario where the trade is with domestic customers and vendors. - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payment Scenario 1 - Domestic Payments (LCY to LCY) -You can use telebanking for trade with domestic and foreign customers and vendors. This topic describes a scenario where the trade is with domestic customers and vendors. - -The following list describes the main steps: - -1. Create Vendor/Customer. -2. Create Vendor/Customer Bank Account. -3. Create and Post Purchase Invoice for Vendor or Sales Invoice for Customer. -4. Create Proposal. -5. Create Payment History. -6. Export Payment History. -7. Import Bank Statement. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the examples below some standard CRONUS data is being used. Likewise instead of creating a vendor/customer and a vendor/customer bank account you could use existing data. - -## Create Vendor/Customer -Create vendor/customer and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Currency Code**: Leave empty - i.e. it is set to the local currency (LCY). -- **Transaction Mode**: Select an appropriate, default transaction mode - i.e. one that can deal with local currency payments for your bank. -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Select an appropriate, default vendor/customer bank account having the same Currency Code as the vendor/customer itself. - -> [!NOTE] -> In order to be able to enter a bank account in the **Bank Account** vendor/customer bank accounts must be available. See below. - -### Example -Olek Johansson (code **OLEK**) is one of our local vendors. Purchase invoices will be paid through our national bank account (code **ABN**) to his bank account (code **OJBA**). Both bank account ABN and OJBA are denominated in local currency (LCY). Therefore, on Olek Johansson's vendor card we leave the **Currency Code** field empty, fill the **Transaction Mode** field with **ABN** that is linked to our bank account, ABN, and set the **Bank Account** field to **OJBA**. - -## Create Vendor/Customer Bank Account -Create vendor/customer bank account and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Enter a valid bank account number. -- **Currency Code**: Leave empty - i.e. it is set to the local currency (LCY). -- **Owner Information**: Be sure all owner information has been entered. - -### Example -Olek Johansson's bank account (code **OJBA**) is denominated in local currency (LCY). Therefore, on Olek Johansson's vendor bank account card we enter a valid number in the **Bank Account No.** field, leave the **Currency Code** field empty and fill the fields on the **Owner Information** FastTab with appropriate values. - -## Create and Post Purchase Invoice for Vendor or Sales Invoice for Customer -Create a purchase/sales invoice and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Currency Code**: Leave empty - i.e. it is set to the local currency (LCY). -- **Transaction Mode**: Select an appropriate, default transaction mode - i.e. one that can deal with local currency payments for your bank. -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Select an appropriate, default vendor/customer bank account having the same Currency Code is the vendor/customer itself. - -By default these three fields will be populated with values taken from the vendor/customer card. - -When the invoice is finished it can be posted. - -### Example -When creating a purchase invoice for Olek Johansson we enter **OLEK** in the **Buy-from Vendor No.** field. By default the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode** and **Bank Account** fields will be populated with values taken from the Olek Johansson's vendor card. Therefore, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode** and **Bank Account** fields will be **<**, **ABN** and **OJBA** respectively. Nevertheless, these values can be changed. - -## Create Proposal -Open the **Telebank - Bank Overview** window and browse to the bank through which we want to perform our payment. Open the **Proposal** window and generate payment proposals using the **Get Proposal Entries** batch job. - -### Example -Through the **Telebank - Bank Overview** window, we open the **Proposal** window for our bank, ABN. Using the batch job, one proposal line will be created for the purchase invoice we just created and posted for vendor OLEK. - -## Create Payment History -From the **Proposal** window, we process our proposal into a payment history. The proposal will disappear and can be found in the **Payment History Overview** window for the same bank. - -### Example -We process our proposal concerning the payment to vendor OLEK and open the **Payment History Overview** window for our bank, ABN. The last payment history is the one we just created. - -## Export Payment History -Open the **Payment History Overview** window, browse to the relevant payment history and choose the **Export** action. The export batch job will appear for the export protocol that is linked to this payment. For this export the system already has entered appropriate filters. Check, if wanted, any of the fields on the **Options** FastTab, and then choose the **OK** action to export the payment. The system will generate a text file using a filename as defined in the **Default File Names Field** field of the export protocol, which now is ready to be sent to our bank. - -## Import Bank Statement -After receiving electronic bank statements from our bank we can import them by running the appropriate import protocol from the **Import Protocol List** window. - -### Example -The bank statement containing our payment to Olek Johansson will be sent to us by our bank, ABN. Therefore, we should chose **OFFICE NET EXTRA** as the appropriate import protocol. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md) - [How to: Create and Export Payment History](how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-2-foreign-payment-fcy-to-fcy-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-2-foreign-payment-fcy-to-fcy-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4237b16a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-2-foreign-payment-fcy-to-fcy-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payment Scenario 2 - Foreign Payment (FCY to FCY) - description: You can use telebanking for trade with domestic and foreign customers and vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payment Scenario 2 - Foreign Payment (FCY to FCY) -You can use telebanking for trade with domestic and foreign customers and vendors. This topic describes a scenario where the trade is with foreign customers and vendor that use the same foreign currency as your bank account is set up to use. - -The following list describes the main steps: - -1. Create Vendor/Customer. -2. Create Vendor/Customer Bank Account. -3. Create and Post Purchase Invoice for Vendor or Sales Invoice for Customer. -4. Create Proposal. -5. Create Payment History. -6. Export Payment History. -7. Import Bank Statement. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the examples below some standard CRONUS data is being used. Likewise instead of creating a vendor/customer and a vendor/customer bank account you could use existing data. - -## Create Vendor/Customer - Create vendor/customer and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Currency Code**: Set it to the foreign currency (FCY). -- **Transaction Mode**: Select an appropriate, default transaction mode - i.e. one that can deal with foreign currency payments for your foreign bank. -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Select an appropriate, default vendor/customer bank account having the same Currency Code as the vendor/customer itself. - -> [!NOTE] -> In order to be able to enter a bank account in the **Bank Account** vendor/customer bank accounts must be available. See below. - -### Example -Jannet Carter (code **JANNET**) is one of our US vendors. Purchase invoices will be paid through our foreign bank account (code **ABN-USD**) to her bank account (code **JCBA**). Both bank account ABN-USD and JCBA are denominated in the same foreign currency (FCY) - i.e. USD. Therefore, on Jannet Carter's vendor card, we set the **Currency Code** field to **USD**, fill the **Transaction Mode** field with **ABN-USD** that is linked to our bank account, ABN-USD and set the **Bank Account** field to **JCBA**. - -## Create Vendor/Customer Bank Account -Create vendor/customer bank account and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Enter a valid bank account number. -- **Currency Code**: Set it to the foreign currency (FCY). -- **Owner Information**: Be sure all owner information has been entered. - -### Example -Jannet Carter's bank account (code **JCBA**) is denominated in foreign currency (FCY) - i.e. USD. Therefore, on Jannet Carter's vendor bank account card, we enter a valid number in the **Bank Account No.** field, set the **Currency Code** field to **USD**, and fill the fields on the **Owner Information** tab with appropriate values. - -## Create and Post Purchase Invoice for Vendor or Sales Invoice for Customer -Create a purchase/sales invoice and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Currency Code**: Set it to the foreign currency (FCY). -- **Transaction Mode**: Select an appropriate, default transaction mode - i.e. one that can deal with foreign currency payments for your foreign bank. -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Select an appropriate, default vendor/customer bank account having the same Currency Code is the vendor/customer itself. - -By default, these three fields will be populated with values taken from the vendor/customer card. - -When the invoice is finished it can be posted. - -### Example -When creating a purchase invoice for Jannet Carter we enter **JANNET** in the **Buy-from Vendor No.** field. By default, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields will be populated with values taken from the Jannet Carter's vendor card. Therefore, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields will be **USD**, **ABN-USD**, and **JCBA** respectively. Nevertheless, these values can be changed. - -## Create Proposal -Open the **Telebank - Bank Overview** window and browse to the bank through which we want to perform our payment. Open the **Proposal** window and generate payment proposals using the **Get Proposal Entries** batch job. - -### Example -Through the **Telebank - Bank Overview** window, we open the **Proposal** window for our bank, ABN-USD. Using the batch job, one proposal line will be created for the purchase invoice we just created and posted for the vendor JANNET. - -## Create Payment History -From the **Proposal** window we process our proposal into a payment history. The proposal will disappear and can be found in the **Payment History Overview** window for the same bank. - -### Example -We process our proposal concerning the payment to the vendor JANNET and open the **Payment History Overview** window for our bank, ABN-USD. The last payment history is the one we just created. - -## Export Payment History -Open the **Payment History Overview** window, browse to the relevant payment history and choose the **Export** action. The export batch job will appear for the export protocol that is linked to this payment. For this export the system already has entered appropriate filters. Check, if wanted, any of the fields on the **Options** FastTab, and then choose the **OK** button to export the payment. The system will generate a text file using a filename as defined in the **Default File Names Field** field of the export protocol, which now is ready to be sent to our bank. - -### Example -As the transaction mode associated with our payment is ABN-USD, the **BBV** or **PAYMUL** batch job will appear. - -## Import Bank Statement -After receiving electronic bank statements from our bank we can import them by running the appropriate import protocol from the **Import Protocol List** window. - -### Example -The bank statement containing our payment to Jannet Carter will be sent to us by our bank, ABN-USD. Therefore, we should chose **OFFICE NET EXTRA** as the appropriate import protocol. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md) - [How to: Create and Export Payment History](how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-3-foreign-payment-lcy-to-fcy-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-3-foreign-payment-lcy-to-fcy-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 388b89d5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenario-3-foreign-payment-lcy-to-fcy-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payment Scenario 3 - Foreign Payment (LCY to FCY) - description: You can use telebanking for trade with domestic and foreign customers and vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payment Scenario 3 - Foreign Payment (LCY to FCY) -You can use telebanking for trade with domestic and foreign customers and vendors. This topic describes a scenario where the trade is with foreign customers and vendors that use a different currency than your local currency. - -1. Create Vendor/Customer. -2. Create Vendor/Customer Bank Account. -3. Create and Post Purchase Invoice for Vendor or Sales Invoice for Customer. -4. Create Proposal. -5. Create Payment History. -6. Export Payment History. -7. Import Bank Statement. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the examples below some standard CRONUS data is being used. Likewise instead of creating a vendor/customer and a vendor/customer bank account you could use existing data. - -## Create Vendor/Customer - Create vendor/customer and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Currency Code**: Set it to the foreign currency (FCY). -- **Transaction Mode**: Select an appropriate, default transaction mode - i.e. one that can deal with foreign currency payments for your local bank. -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Select an appropriate, default vendor/customer bank account having the same Currency Code as the vendor/customer itself. - -> [!NOTE] -> In order to be able to enter a bank account in the **Bank Account** vendor/customer bank accounts must be available. See below. - -### Example -Hernandez Ortiz (code **ORTIZ**) is one of our Mexican vendors. Purchase invoices will be paid through our national bank account (code **ABN**) to his bank account (code **HOBA**). While our bank account ABN is denominated in local currency (LCY), Hernandez Ortiz's bank account HOBA is denominated in Mexican peso (MXN). Therefore, on Hernandez Ortiz's vendor card, we set the **Currency Code** field to **MXN**, fill the **Transaction Mode** field with **ABN** that is linked to our bank account, ABN, and set the **Bank Account** field to **HOBA**. - -## Create Vendor/Customer Bank Account -Create vendor/customer bank account and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Enter a valid bank account number. -- **Currency Code**: Set it to the foreign currency (FCY). -- **Owner Information**: Be sure all owner information has been entered. - -### Example -Hernandez Ortiz's bank account (code **HOBA**) is denominated in **MXN**. Therefore, on Hernandez Ortiz's vendor bank account card, we enter a valid number in the **Bank Account No.** field, set the **Currency Code** field to **MXN**, and fill the fields on the **Owner Information** FastTab with appropriate values. - -## Create and Post Purchase Invoice for Vendor or Sales Invoice for Customer -Create a purchase/sales invoice and enter all necessary information. Special attention should be paid to the following fields: - -- **Currency Code**: Set it to the foreign currency (FCY). -- **Transaction Mode**: Select an appropriate, default transaction mode - i.e. one that can deal with local currency payments for your local bank. -- **Preferred Bank Account**: Select an appropriate, default vendor/customer bank account having the same Currency Code is the vendor/customer itself. - -By default these three fields will be populated with values taken from the vendor/customer card. - -When the invoice is finished it can be posted. - -### Example -When creating a purchase invoice for Hernandez Ortiz we enter **ORTIZ** in the **Buy-from Vendor No.** field. By default, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields will be populated with values taken from the Hernandez Ortiz's vendor card. Therefore, the **Currency Code**, **Transaction Mode**, and **Bank Account** fields will be **MXN**, **ABN**, and **HOBA** respectively. Nevertheless, these values can be changed. - -## Create Proposal -Open the **Telebank - Bank Overview** window and browse to the bank through which we want to perform our payment. Open the **Proposal** window and generate payment proposals using the **Get Proposal Entries** batch job. - -### Example -Through the **Telebank - Bank Overview** window, we open the **Proposal** window for our bank, ABN. Using the batch job, one proposal line will be created for the purchase invoice we just created and posted for the vendor ORTIZ. The amount of the payment will be in local currency (LCY). - -## Create Payment History -From the **Proposal** window, we process our proposal into a payment history. The proposal will disappear and can be found in the **Payment History Overview** window for the same bank. - -### Example -We process our proposal concerning the payment to the vendor ORTIZ and open the **Payment History Overview** window for our bank, ABN. The last payment history is the one we just created. - -## Export Payment History -Open the **Payment History Overview** window, browse to the relevant payment history and then choose the **Export** action. The export batch job will appear for the export protocol that is linked to this payment. For this export the system already has entered appropriate filters. Check, if wanted, any of the fields on the **Options** FastTab, and choose the **OK** button to export the payment. The system will generate a text file using a filename as defined in the **Default File Names Field** field of the export protocol, which now is ready to be sent to our bank. - -### Example -As the transaction mode associated with our payment is *ABN*, the **BBV* or **PAYMUL** batch job will appear. - -## Import Bank Statement -After receiving electronic bank statements from our bank we can import them by running the appropriate import protocol from the **Import Protocol List** window. - -### Example -The bank statement containing our payment to Hernandez Ortiz will be sent to us by our bank, ABN. Therefore, we should chose **OFFICE NET EXTRA** as the appropriate import protocol. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md) - [How to: Create and Export Payment History](how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenarios.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenarios.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6940eb8b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/payment-scenarios.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payment Scenarios - description: Based on a sales or purchase invoice or credit memo a proposal can be generated and exported in order to be processed by our bank. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payment Scenarios -Based on a sales or purchase invoice or credit memo a proposal can be generated and exported in order to be processed by our bank. - -Using telebanking you can deal with three scenarios: - -1. The payment is done by means of a bank account denominated in your local currency (LCY), which is the same currency as linked to the invoice/credit memo. - - For more information, see [Payment Scenario 1 - Domestic Payments (LCY to LCY)](payment-scenario-1-domestic-payments-lcy-to-lcy-.md). - -2. The payment is done by means of a bank account denominated in the same currency as the currency linked to the invoice/credit memo. Both foreign. - - For more information, see [Payment Scenario 2 - Foreign Payment (FCY to FCY)](payment-scenario-2-foreign-payment-fcy-to-fcy-.md). - -3. The payment is done by means of a bank account denominated in your local currency (LCY), while the invoice/credit memo is linked to a foreign currency. - - For more information, see [Payment Scenario 3 - Foreign Payment (LCY to FCY)](payment-scenario-3-foreign-payment-lcy-to-fcy-.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Telebanking](telebanking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/required-descriptions-in-g-l-entry.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/required-descriptions-in-g-l-entry.md deleted file mode 100644 index d69a13d7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/required-descriptions-in-g-l-entry.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Required Descriptions in G-L Entry - description: When entering general journal lines on a form, the system fills in automatically the description field. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Required Descriptions in G-L Entry -When entering general journal lines on a form, the system fills in automatically the description field. This description will also be stored in the G/L entry after posting the journal. For a good audit trail, a more detailed description is desirable, when you post a journal line of type G/L Account. - -To force the user to enter a more detailed description, it is possible to choose if the system must fill in automatically the description of the G/L account or leave the field blank. If the **Omit Default Descr. in Jnl. Field** check box in the **G/L Account Card** window is checked, the system will not fill in the **Description** field for that G/L account when selected in a general journal line. - -When posting the journal lines, the system will check if all the **Description** fields are filled in. If there is a blank description, an error message will appear. - -> [!NOTE] -> Leaving the description field blank and check if all the description fields are filled in before posting, will only be done on the general journal windows in several application areas and on the local Cash Bank Giro windows. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[General Ledger](general-ledger.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1b4c281c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/single-euro-payments-area-sepa-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Single EURO Payments Area (SEPA) - description: The Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) unifies payment methods in participating European countries/regions, making international payments as easy to process as domestic payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Single EURO Payments Area (SEPA) -The Single Euro Payments Area (SEPA) unifies payment methods in participating European countries/regions, making international payments as easy to process as domestic payments. 300 million European citizens and companies are able to make and receive payments in euros, whether within or across national/regional borders, with the same basic conditions, rights, and obligations, regardless of location. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] supports the Dutch requirements for submitting SEPA payments, credit transfers, and direct debit. - -Before you can submit vendor payments electronically in SEPA ISO2022 format, you must activate SEPA in the following windows: - -- Countries/Regions -- Bank Accounts -- Export Protocols -- Transaction Modes - -Additionally you will need to verify that vendor payment transaction modes and vendor bank accounts are set up to use SEPA for each vendor. - -Vendor payments made using SEPA ISO 20022 must comply with the following rules. - -- Make all payments in euros. -- Make payments within the European Economic Area (EEA). -- Use the vendor bank’s International Bank Account Number (IBAN) and Bank Identifier Code (BIC) information. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Activate SEPA Payments](how-to-activate-sepa-payments.md) - [How to: Submit Vendor Payments Electronically in SEPA ISO 20022 Payment Format](how-to-submit-vendor-payments-electronically-in-sepa-iso-20022-payment-format.md) - [Netherlands Local Functionality](netherlands-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/telebanking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/telebanking.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2d565c0d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Netherlands/telebanking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Telebanking - description: Based on both sales and purchase transactions, telebanking enables you to generate your payments and collections and interchange them with your bank electronically. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Telebanking -Based on both sales and purchase transactions, telebanking enables you to generate your payments and collections and interchange them with your bank electronically. This includes the export of payment and collection data that need to be forwarded to the bank as well as the import of bank statements sent to you by the bank. - -## Transactions -In general, all financial interactions with vendors and customers are done through either purchase or sales invoices and credit memos. As soon as these transactions have been registered and posted, payments or collections can be carried out by your company. - -## Proposals -Based on vendor and customer ledger entries, telebanking enables you to generate payment and collection proposals. This can be done for any bank that has been set up for your company. Both domestic and foreign payments and collections are possible. - -You can set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to combine payments to or collections from the same bank account automatically. - -When a proposal has been agreed upon, it should be processed into a payment history. - -> [!NOTE] -> In general, for any open vendor and customer ledger entries, a proposal can be generated if it meets a number of criteria. For more information, see [How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md). - -## Payment Histories -A payment history is nothing more than a proposal except for the fact that data on a payment history cannot be modified. The payment or collection data is ready to be exported and forwarded to the bank. - - For more information, see [How to: Create and Export Payment History](how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md). - -## Bank Statements - For all your financial interactions through your bank, the bank can send you electronic bank statements. These statements can be imported into the Bank/Giro Journals. If you want, you can have [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] automatically reconcile these statements during this import process and determine whether a statement can be applied to open ledger entries for the relevant vendor/customer. - - For more information, see [How to: Import and Reconcile Bank Statements](how-to-import-and-reconcile-bank-statements.md). - -## Exchange Protocols - For both exporting and importing, a number of protocols have been defined. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] supports the following protocols: - -- BTL91 (export) -- BBV (export) -- PAYMUL (export) -- Rabobank mut.asc (import) -- Rabobank vvmut.asc (import) -- Rabobank ASCII (import) -- SEPA CAMT - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Invoice Sales](../../sales-how-invoice-sales.md) - [How to: Record Purchases](../../purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) - [How to: Create Proposals](how-to-create-proposals.md) - [How to: Create and Export Payment History](how-to-create-and-export-payment-history.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/addresses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/addresses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7c7cc777..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/addresses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Addresses in New Zealand - description: A single postal code can include multiple cities in the same region. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Addresses in New Zealand -A single postal code can include multiple cities in the same region. - -At the same time, cities with the same name are sometimes located in different regions. - -To avoid confusion and improve address accuracy, available options display when you enter data in address fields. For example, when you enter a postal code on a customer card, you can select from a list of all available cities for that postal code in the **City** field drop-down list. Likewise, when you enter a city name, you can select from a list of all available regions in the **Region** field drop-down list. - -To enable this functionality, you must enter the data into the **Post Code** table. You can do this manually, or you can download a copy of the New Zealand postal codes for New Zealand. - -To increase postal efficiency in New Zealand, the postal department has introduced an address bar coding system in which every address is assigned a unique identifier called a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID). From the DPID, a bar code is generated and printed for each address. Companies can receive discounts on bulk mailings if they use these bar codes. To retrieve a DPID, you must connect to the local postal database that uses authorized Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) software. You can reduce your number of postal returns by validating customer addresses using the AMAS database. - -When you print an address that has a DPID, a bar code will be printed together with the address. If you cannot print bar codes, the DPID will be printed together with the address. - -Contact your Microsoft partner for information on how to obtain AMAS software. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[New Zealand Local Functionality](new-zealand-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/calculating-distribution-amounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/calculating-distribution-amounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 24146711..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/calculating-distribution-amounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Calculating Distribution Amounts (New Zealand) - description: You can reallocate the amount in one general ledger account to other general ledger accounts so that the balances of your accounts remain proportionate to one another. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Calculating Distribution Amounts (New Zealand) -You can reallocate the amount in one general ledger account to other general ledger accounts so that the balances of your accounts remain proportionate to one another. - - Use the **Calculate Distribution Amount** function to calculate the allocation percentage based on the balances of the accounts, or the net changes between the accounts. Run the **Calculate Distribution Amount** function from the **Allocation** window for the Standard Balance and Reverse Balance recurring methods in the **Recurring Journal**. - - The net changes or balances of the accounts in the **Allocation** window determine the allocation percentage calculated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[New Zealand Local Functionality](new-zealand-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md deleted file mode 100644 index 89e2cc12..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Determine Sales Price by Cost Plus Percentage (New Zealand) - description: Use the cost plus percentage function to set a sales price based on the cost of an item. The cost of the item can be calculated along with cost plus calculation. The discount will be based on this calculation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Determine Sales Price by Cost Plus Percentage (New Zealand) -Use the cost plus percentage function to set a sales price based on the cost of an item. The cost of the item can be calculated along with cost plus calculation. The discount will be based on this calculation. This functionality eliminates the need for the use of spreadsheets in determining percentage discounts as they correspond to cost plus percentage. - -## To determine sales tax by cost plus percentage - -1. Choose the **Receivables** action. -3. Choose the **Customers** action. -4. Open the card for a relevant customer. - - –or– - - Choose the **New** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > For a new customer, in the **No.** field, enter the customer number. - -5. To open the **Sales Prices** window, choose the **Prices** action. -6. In the **General** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Sales Type Filter**|Select one of the following options:

- **Customer**
- **Customer Price Group**
- **All Customers**
- **Campaign**
- **None**| - |**Sales Code Filter**|The sales code.| - |**Item No. Filter**|The item number.| - |**Starting Date Filter**|The starting date.| - |**Currency Code Filter**|The currency code.| - -7. Enter information into the relevant fields. -8. To send the details to a recipient, choose the **Send To** action, and then select one of the following formats: - - - **Recipient as Attachment** - - **Microsoft Word** - - **Microsoft Excel** - -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[New Zealand Local Functionality](new-zealand-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5b447e71..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Bank Account Reconciliation Reports (New Zealand) - description: The **Bank Account Reconciliation** report displays open bank ledger entries as unpresented checks or unrecorded deposits. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Bank Account Reconciliation Reports (New Zealand) -The **Bank Account Reconciliation** report displays open bank ledger entries as unpresented checks or unrecorded deposits. - -## To print a bank account reconciliation report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reconciliation**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **New Page per Bank Account** check box. -3. On the **Bank Account** FastTab, select appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately](../../bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0dc05016..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Deposit Slip Reports (New Zealand) - description: The **Deposit Slip** report displays cash and check details in a format required by the bank. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Deposit Slip Reports (New Zealand) -The **Deposit Slip** report displays cash and check details in a format required by the bank. - -## To a print deposit slip report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Bank** journal. -3. Choose the **Edit Journal** action. -4. In the **Cash Receipt Journal** window, choose the **Print Deposit Slip** action. -5. On the **Gen. Journal Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -6. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[New Zealand Local Functionality](new-zealand-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/new-zealand-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/new-zealand-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 100a3bb3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/NewZealand/new-zealand-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: New Zealand Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the New Zealand version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# New Zealand Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the New Zealand version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - -## In This Section - [Addresses](addresses.md) - [Calculating Distribution Amounts](calculating-distribution-amounts.md) - [How to: Determine Sales Price by Cost Plus Percentage](how-to-determine-sales-price-by-cost-plus-percentage.md) - [How to: Print Deposit Slip Reports](how-to-print-deposit-slip-reports.md) - [How to: Print Bank Account Reconciliation Reports](how-to-print-bank-account-reconciliation-reports.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0c482c0c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: EHF Electronic Invoicing in Norway - description: Companies must send sales invoices and credit memos to the Norwegian public sector electronically in the Elektronisk Handelsformat (EHF) based on Universal Business Language (UBL). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# EHF Electronic Invoicing in Norway -Companies must send sales invoices and credit memos to the Norwegian public sector electronically in the Elektronisk Handelsformat (EHF) based on Universal Business Language (UBL). If a company does not send these documents electronically, the authorities can deny payment. The standard supported format for electronic exchange between parties is the Ehandel.no format. - -## Implementation in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - The current requirements for sending electronic invoices are based on the Universal Business Language (UBL) version 2.1 standard. The generated XML documents can then be sent to the customer. - - To send documents electronically, you must assign European Article Numbering (EAN) location numbers and account codes to the relevant customers in the **Customer Card** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Customers for EHF](how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md). These numbers are included when you create documents, and post or issue them. After the documents have been posted or issued, you can create electronic versions to be sent to the customer. - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] exports certain electronic documents in version 2.0, which uses UBL version 2.1. You can submit the following types of documents: - -- Sales invoice -- Service invoice -- Sales credit memo -- Service credit memo - - [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] exports other electronic documents in version 1.6, which uses UBL version 2.0. You can submit the following types of documents: - -- Finance charge memo -- Reminder - -The electronic documents are stored in the locations that are defined in the Sales & Receivables Setup. - -## VAT Treatment - VAT percentages and the type of transaction determine the VAT Type that is exported in the electronic document. - -|XML|Type|Percentage Rate| -|---------|----------|---------------------| -|S|Outgoing VAT, ordinary rate|25| -|H|Outgoing VAT, reduced rate – food and beverage|15| -|R|Outgoing VAT, reduced rate – raw fish|15| -|AA|Outgoing VAT, low rate|10| -|E|VAT Exempt|0| -|Z|VAT Exempt (goods and services not included in the VAT regulations)|None, reported as 0| -|K|Emission allowances for private or public businesses – buyer calculates VAT|None, reported as 0| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Customers for EHF](how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-banking-in-norway.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-banking-in-norway.md deleted file mode 100644 index e7c83f3b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-banking-in-norway.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Banking in Norway - description: Norwegian enhancements include electronic banking. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Banking in Norway -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes Norwegian enhancements to electronic banking. You can use this functionality to perform the following operations: - -- Receive electronic payments based on an optical character recognition (OCR) payment ID. -- Print Kunde ID (KID) numbers on sales and receivables documents. -- Send electronic payments to vendors. - -## Customer Identification Numbers - Kunde ID (KID) is a customer identification number that provides a payment reference to the vendor and ensures that the vendor is posting the payment correctly. If the vendor documents include the KID number, you should use this number as there may be a higher cost for the payment if you do not. - - The KID can be entered in the following locations: - -- Sales invoices -- Finance charge memos -- Reminders -- Purchase orders -- Purchase invoices -- Purchase journals -- Remittance journals - -> [!NOTE] -> The KID cannot be used for credit memos. If a credit memo is part of the payment, invoices in the same payment must be treated as payments without a KID. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) - [Norwegian Giro and OCR-B Font](norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md) - [How to: Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents](how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md) - [How to: Set Up OCR Payments](how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md) - [How to: Import and Post OCR Payments](how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md) - [Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Print the OCR Journal - Test Report](how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md deleted file mode 100644 index 38e5ae5b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway - description: Norwegian enhancements include automatically making payments to vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes Norwegian enhancements for automatically making payments to vendors. This reduces errors that occur from manual data entry. You can use this functionality to perform the following operations: - -- Search invoices that are due based on different conditions. -- Send payments to the bank. -- Receive messages from the bank on the status of payments. -- Receive paid transaction information to be posted. - -You can make electronic payments using the following formats: - -- TelePay -- Remittance payment - -## Electronic Payment Process -The following steps show how electronic payments are processed: - -1. The payment proposal is run in the electronic payments feature and transferred to the bank by using the bank’s software. -2. The bank's software receives the payments and transfers payments to the bank. -3. The bank receives the payments and sends the first-time return receipt to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] using the bank's software. -4. The bank executes the payments and sends the settlement return (second-time return receipt) to [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] using the bank's software where the payments are posted. - -## Vendor Payment Requirements -If the payment transactions do not fulfill the requirements, an error message appears and you cannot create a payment file for transfers to the bank. The following criteria must be met when you process payments to vendors: - -- The payment transaction must be positive or zero. A payment transaction must transfer a positive amount (or zero) to the payment receiver. This means that deducting a credit memo requires an invoice with the same or higher amount in the same payment transaction. Money cannot be deducted from the vendor's account. - -- A credit memo must be applied with the invoice. Generally a credit memo does not contain a Kunde ID (KID). You cannot pay a credit memo in a payment transaction with invoices that contain a KID. This is because payments are usually split into transactions with or without a KID. This means that if a credit memo without a KID is paid with an invoice in the same payment transaction, the invoice must be paid without a KID, and the recipient reference number must be used instead. - -- If the invoice and credit memo are paid in the same payment transaction, the payment must occur on the same date using the same currency and exchange rate. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries-in-closed-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries-in-closed-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 78871ab0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries-in-closed-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Apply General Ledger Entries in Closed Periods - description: You can post entries after a posting period is closed, even if no actual posting is performed during that period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Apply General Ledger Entries in Closed Periods -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] allows you to post entries after a posting period is closed, even if no actual posting is performed during that period. You can also choose the users who will make these entries. - -## To apply an entry in a closed period - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select the **Application always Allowed** check box to apply entries outside the allowed posting period. - - > [!NOTE] - > By default, the **Application always Allowed** check box is not selected. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **User Setup** window, select the **Application always Allowed** check box for each user who can apply entries to a closed period. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-calculate-proportional-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-calculate-proportional-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4b0438c9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-calculate-proportional-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Proportional VAT - description: You can use proportional VAT to calculate VAT when there is both deductible and non-deductible VAT. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Proportional VAT -You can use proportional VAT to calculate VAT when there is both deductible and non-deductible VAT. Because it is difficult to know where and how an item is used, you will have to contact the Norwegian tax authorities to determine whether a specified percentage of the VAT is deductible based on historical data. - -### To calculate proportional VAT - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Posting Setup** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Calc. Prop. Deduction VAT**|Select to indicate that you want to use the proportional VAT percentage. **Important:** This field is available in the **VAT Posting Setup** window, but it is not shown by default. [!INCLUDE[bp_customize](../../includes/bp_customize_md.md)]| - |**Proportional Deduction VAT %**|Enter the percentage of VAT to deduct.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Proportional VAT](proportional-vat.md) - [Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-cancel-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-cancel-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0e286ea7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-cancel-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Cancel Payments - description: Norwegian enhancements allow you to cancel payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Cancel Payments -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes Norwegian enhancements that allow you to cancel payments. If the payment has been sent to the bank, the bank must be contacted to cancel the remittance that they received. - -- A payment order can be canceled if the payments are not received by the bank and a new remittance must be made. You can also cancel a payment order if you do not want to transfer the payments to the bank, for example if the payments are incorrect. Only open payment orders can be canceled. - -- An individual payment can be canceled if the payment cannot be processed by the bank and a new remittance has to be made. You can also cancel a payment if you do not want to process the payment. Settled payments cannot be canceled. - -## To cancel a payment order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Remittance Payment Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the payment order, choose the **Export** action, and then choose the **Cancel Payment Order** action. -3. Choose the **Yes** button. - -## To cancel a payment - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Waiting Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the payment, and then choose the **Cancel Payment** action. -3. Choose the **Yes** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-electronic-documents-for-ehf.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-electronic-documents-for-ehf.md deleted file mode 100644 index 431cac30..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-electronic-documents-for-ehf.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Electronic Documents for EHF - description: When you sell goods or services to a customer in the public sector, you must submit documents electronically. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Electronic Documents for EHF -When you sell goods or services to a customer in the public sector, you must submit documents electronically. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create electronic documents for invoices, credit memos, reminders, and finance charge memos. Before you can create the electronic documents, you must have set up file locations and information about the customers. For more information, see [How to: Set Up EHF](how-to-set-up-ehf.md) and [How to: Set Up Customers for EHF](how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md). - -Electronic documents can only be created after a document has been posted or issued. The following procedures describe how to post a sales invoice with the required information and then create an electronic sales invoice, but the same steps also apply to sales credit memos, reminders, finance charge memos, service invoices, and service credit memos. - -> [!NOTE] -> The sum of lines in an exported electronic document will not reflect invoice rounding, even if it is enabled. Instead, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] sums the lines without rounding. - -## To post a sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the sales invoice that you want to post, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, make sure that the following fields contain values: - - - **External Document No.** - - **Your Reference** - - The **External Document No.** field contains the document number that the customer provided. - -4. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, make sure that the following fields have values: - - - **GLN No.** - - **Account Code** - - **Bill-to Customer** - - **Shipment Date** - - Select the **E-Invoice** check box. - - The default value of the **Shipment Date** field is the posting date of the document. - - > [!NOTE] - > For reminders and finance charge memos, the **GLN No.**, **Account Code**, and **E-Invoice** fields are on the **Posting** FastTab. - -5. Choose the **Post** action to post the invoice. - -## To create an electronic sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant sales invoice. -3. Choose the **Create Electronic Invoice** action. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The **E-Invoice** check box must be selected on the invoice in order to create an electronic invoice. - -4. Optionally, in the **Create Electronic Invoices** batch job window, set additional filters. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -An XML file is created and stored at the location that was defined in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. You can now submit the document to the customer. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[EHF Electronic Invoicing in Norway](ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 59a6576e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Manual Remittance Payments - description: Generally, payments are created automatically in the payment journal using the remittance suggestion function. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments -Generally, payments are created automatically in the payment journal using the remittance suggestion function. However, you can also create a payment manually, either as a payment of an existing invoice or as a payment without a link to an existing invoice, such as a payment to a vendor. - -## To create a manual remittance payment - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Info**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Info** window, choose the **Initialize Payment Info** action. - - If the payment is linked to an existing vendor ledger entry, information will be transferred from the entry. If the payment is not linked to a vendor ledger entry, only partial information will be created. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-recurring-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-recurring-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index de7c4371..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-recurring-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Recurring Orders - description: The create recurring orders process will find all of the recurring orders based on the options selected in the **Create Recurring Orders** window and will create the new sales orders. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Recurring Orders -The create recurring orders process will find all of the recurring orders based on the options selected in the **Create Recurring Orders** window and will create the new sales orders. This is a periodic activity that you must run regularly. - -## To create recurring orders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Recurring Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Processing Date**|Enter the date to process the blanket orders.| - |**Create only latest**|Select to create only the latest recurring order for the blanket orders processed. This option overrides the equivalent option for the recurring group.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Recurring Orders](recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Set Up Recurring Groups](how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md) - [How to: Set Up Recurring Orders](how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Create Blanket Sales Orders](../../sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 34afd588..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Remittance Accounts - description: You must create one remittance account for each bank account where payment is made. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Remittance Accounts -You must create one remittance account for each bank account where payment is made. If an account is used to make payments to both domestic and foreign vendors, this account must be created two times—one time for domestic payments and one time for foreign payments. - -> [!NOTE] -> The currency used for the bank account should be the same as the currency that the bank is using for this account. Exchange rates are based on the currency of the account and calculations are based on this currency. - -## To create a remittance account - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Remittance Account Overview**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Remittance Account Card** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify the identification code for the account.| - |**Remittance Agreement Code**|Select the agreement to which the account is connected.| - |**Type**|Select the payment type. Payment types include **Domestic**, **Foreign**, and **Payment Instr**.

If remitting to Bankernes Betalingssentral (BBS), you can only choose **Domestic**.| - |**Description**|Specify the description of the account.| - |**Bank Account No.**|Specify the account number of the bank.| - |**BBS Agreement ID**|Specify the agreement identification for each account in BBS.| - -4. On the **Finance** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Account Type**|Select the account type. Account types include **Finance account** and **Bank account**.| - |**Account No.**|Specify the account number depending on your selection in the **Account Type** field.| - |**Charge Account No.**|Specify the account number for the charge account.| - |**Round off/Divergence Acc. No.**|Specify the finance account to post the difference as a result of rounding.| - |**Max. Round off/Diverg. (LCY)**|Specify the maximum rounding or difference, which is accepted by settlement return.| - |**Document No. Series**|Specify the number series to be used when you post payments by using the remittance system.| - |**New Document Per.**|Select how documents will be numbered when you post a payment:

- **Date** - A new document is numbered according to the date the payment is made.
- **Vendor** - A new document is numbered according to the vendor.| - |**Return Journal Template Name**|Specify the general journal template to which settled payments are transferred.| - |**Return Journal Name**|Specify the general journal batch to which settled payments are transferred.| - -5. On the **Domestic** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Recipient ref. 1- Invoice**|Specify the text that will print on the payment invoice.| - |**Recipient ref. 1- Cr. Memo**|Specify the text that will print on the payment invoice when deducting a credit memo.| - -6. On the **Foreign** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - This information is only used if the account is used for foreign payments. For remittance to BBS, do not use this tab. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Currency Code**|Specify the currency that is used for the bank account.

If the account is a currency account, the currency code must be given.| - |**Recipient Ref. Aboard**|Specify the template text that displays on the vendor card. This field is for foreign payments only.| - |**Futures Contract No.**|Specify the number of the futures contract, if the transaction is linked to a futures contract.| - |**Futures Contract Exch. Rate**|Specify the exchange rate for the futures contract.| - -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8f58861..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Remittance Suggestions - description: You can create a remittance suggestion so that payment proposals are sent to vendors who are set up to receive remittance payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Remittance Suggestions -You can create a remittance suggestion so that payment proposals are sent to vendors who are set up to receive remittance payments. One payment transaction per posting date for each vendor is transferred to the bank. - -> [!NOTE] -> To avoid creating payment suggestions for vendors who are remitted when the usual vendor suggestion process is used, add a filter for **Remittance** in the **Suggest Vendor Payments** window and set the filter to **No**. - -## To create a remittance suggestion - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Remittance Suggestion** action. -3. In the **Suggest Remittance Payments** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Last Payment Date**|Specify the last payment date.| - |**Find Payment Discounts**|Select if you want to search for entries where a payment discount is available.| - |**Use Vendor Priority**|Select if the vendor priority should be used to search entries.| - |**Available Amount (LCY)**|Specify the payments for total amounts that are less than or equal to the given amount.| - |**Posting Date**|Specify a posting date.| - |**Replace Posting Date with Due Date**|Select to insert the due date of the entry as the posting date for the payments.| - |**Test Document Type**|Specify which of the following document types should be tested for payment:

- **All** - All document types are tested.
- **Invoice/Credit memo** - Only invoice or credit memo entries are tested.| - |**Invoice/Debit Vendor Ledger Entries only**|Select to pay only invoice or debit entries.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index f415fd5f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Delete Remittance Payment Orders - description: Orders can be deleted if they are managed in full and are in a closed financial year. An order is managed in full if no payments in the **Waiting Journal** window have a status of **Sent** or **Approved**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders -Orders can be deleted if they are managed in full and are in a closed financial year. An order is managed in full if no payments in the **Waiting Journal** window have a status of **Sent** or **Approved**. - -## To delete a remittance payment order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete rem. payment order**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Delete rem. payment order** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Start date**|Specify the start date of orders to be deleted.| - |**End date**|Specify the end date of orders to be deleted.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-export-remittance-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-export-remittance-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0de018e1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-export-remittance-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export Remittance Payments - description: You can use the export remittance payments process to export the payments file to your computer. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Remittance Payments -You can use the export remittance payments process to export the payments file to your computer. You can then transfer the remittance payments to the bank. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Before you can export a remittance payment, you must select a payment format in the **Payment Export Format** field in the **Bank Account Card** window. - -You export payments to a bank file by choosing the **Export Payments** button in the **Payment Journal** window. The process may be different, depending on the export format that you select: - -- Payments using the SEPA payment standard are directly exported to a file when you choose the **Export Payments** button. For more information, see [Making Payments](../../payables-make-payments.md). - -- Payments using local payment standards, such as **Telepay**, are exported with either the **Remittance - export (bank)** or the **Remittance - export (BBS)** report, which automatically opens when you choose the **Export Payments** button. - -The procedure for exporting payments using the **Remittance – Export** batch job is described in this topic. - -## To export remittance payments using the Remittance - Export batch jobs - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Prepare to export the payments from the journal. For more information, see [How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](../../payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md). -3. Choose the **Export Payments** action. -4. In the report window that opens, choose the **Options** FastTab, and fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Remittance agreement code**|Specify the code for the agreement.| - |**Operator**|Specify the operator number.| - |**Password**|Specify the password for the payments.| - |**Division**|Specify the division that is paying remittance.| - |**Current note**|Specify a note for the payment.| - |**Filename**|Specify the name and directory of the payment file.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -The payment information is exported to the file that is set up in the remittance agreement. - -The payment journal is deleted and the transactions are transferred to the waiting journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 57f8dc42..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import and Post OCR Payments - description: Before you can receive optical character recognition (OCR) payments, you must make certain preparations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import and Post OCR Payments -Before you can receive optical character recognition (OCR) payments, you must make the following preparations: - -- Set up a cash receipt journal template to balance OCR transactions according to the document number, instead of the document type. -- Import and post the OCR payment files to a cash receipt journal. - -## To import OCR payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, select a journal batch. - - > [!NOTE] - > OCR payments can only be posted to a cash receipt journal that does not use a balance account in the **Bal. Account No.** field on the cash receipt journal line. - -3. Choose the **Import Payments** action. -4. In the **OCR Payment-BBS** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |** File Name**|Enter the full path of the import file.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button to import the payment file to the journal. - -## To post OCR payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Post** action. - -The OCR payment files are posted to the cash receipt journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Norway](electronic-banking-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents](how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md) - [How to: Set Up OCR Payments](how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md) - [How to: Work With General Journals](../../ui-work-general-journals.md) - [How to: Print the OCR Journal - Test Report](how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payment-return-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payment-return-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2f938ed9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payment-return-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import Payment Return Data - description: To import receipt and settlement returns, use the **Rem. payment order – import** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import Payment Return Data -To import receipt and settlement returns, use the **Rem. payment order – import** window. If any errors are indicated when importing settlement returns, you can view this information in the **Settlement Info** window. - -## To import return data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Rem. payment order – import**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payment order note**|Enter a note that is transferred to the payment order.| - |**ControlBatch**|Select the check box to verify return files in advance to ensure if the import can be made. Return data is not imported.| - |**Return files**|Specifies how many return files are found and imported.| - -3. Choose the **Return Files** button to display the return files. -4. In the **Return Files** window, select the **Import** option next to each file to be imported. If the option is cleared, the file will not be imported. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To view settlement information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Settlement Info**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, view the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Remittance Handling Ref.**|Shows the reference that the bank enters for foreign payments.| - |**Remittance Warning**|If selected, the journal line contains a warning.| - |**Remittance Warning Text**|Shows the description of the warning, if applicable.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payroll-transactions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payroll-transactions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 11d08810..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-import-payroll-transactions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import Payroll Transactions (Norway) - description: You can import payroll transactions into a general journal from two external payroll solutions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import Payroll Transactions (Norway) -You can import payroll transactions into a general journal from two external payroll solutions: Huldt & Lillevik and Hogia. You can then use the general journal to post the imported payroll transactions to general ledger accounts or bank accounts. To import payroll transactions, you must first set up payroll integration. - -## To set up payroll integration - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payroll Integration Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payroll System**|Select a payroll system.| - |**File Name**|Enter the full path of the file.| - |**Save Payroll File**|Select to save the payroll file.| - |**Import Department and Project**|Select to import department and project information.| - |**Journal Template Name**|Select the name of the journal template.| - |**Journal Name**|Select a journal to receive the imported payroll transactions.| - |**Post to**|Select the account type to post the payroll transactions to. Account types include **G/L Account** and **Bank Account**.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To import payroll transactions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Import Payroll** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Posting Date**|Select a payroll system.| - |**Document text**|Enter the full path of the file.| - |**File Name**|Specify the file name for the payroll file.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-a-vat-reconciliation-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-a-vat-reconciliation-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index f74b7c46..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-a-vat-reconciliation-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print a VAT Reconciliation Report - description: The **VAT Reconciliation** report shows the reconciliation settlement for the base amount and the VAT amount for general ledger accounts. These amounts are grouped by different VAT types. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print a VAT Reconciliation Report -The **VAT Reconciliation** report shows the reconciliation settlement for the base amount and the VAT amount for general ledger accounts. These amounts are grouped by different VAT types. - -## To print the VAT reconciliation report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Reconciliation**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Details**|Select if you want to include individual transactions.

If cleared, only one accumulated total will be printed for each account.| - |**Show Transactions without VAT**|Select if you want to print a list of all transactions without VAT amounts.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3049c54c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the OCR Journal - Test Report - description: You can print the **OCR Journal – Test** report to test the imported payment transactions in the cash receipt journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the OCR Journal - Test Report -You can print the **OCR Journal – Test** report to test the imported payment transactions in the cash receipt journal. You can also view potential warnings and reconcile conflicts before the payments are posted to the journal. - -## To print the OCR Journal – Test report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **OCR Journal - Test**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show only Lines with OCR Errors**|Select to print only the journal lines that contain a warning in the test report.| - |**Show Dimensions**|Select to print dimension information on the test report.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Norway](electronic-banking-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents](how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md) - [How to: Set Up OCR Payments](how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md) - [How to: Import and Post OCR Payments](how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md) - [Working with General Journals](../../ui-work-general-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md deleted file mode 100644 index cb52d50b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Customers for EHF - description: To create Elektronisk Handelsformat (EHF) documents for customers in the public sector, you must add EHF information to the relevant customers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Customers for EHF -To create Elektronisk Handelsformat (EHF) documents for customers in the public sector, you must add EHF information to the relevant customers. - -This topic only describes fields that apply to EHF. For more information on setting up customers, in general, see [How to: Register New Customers](../../sales-how-register-new-customers.md). - -## To set up a customer that uses Elektronisk Handelsformat - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the customer that you want to enable for EHF. -3. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**GLN**|Required. Enter the Global Location Number (GLN) for the customer.| - |**Account Code**|Enter the account code for the customer.

Customers in the public sector provide an account code when they place an order or requisition. Based on the value of this field, the account code is included in the EHF documents that you create in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. For more information, see Account Code.| - |**E-Invoice**|Select the check box to use electronic invoicing with this customer.| - |**Responsibility Center**|Make sure that the Responsibility Center that you have selected has a Country/Region Code specified.| - -These fields are specific to EHF. The values are used in all EHF documents that you create for this customer. For more information, see [EHF Electronic Invoicing in Norway](ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Electronic Documents for EHF](how-to-create-electronic-documents-for-ehf.md) - [How to: Set Up EHF](how-to-set-up-ehf.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-document-printing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-document-printing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8d6a1af7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-document-printing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Document Printing - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can print the sales reports that use the required giro specifications by using different paper types and paper trays. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Document Printing -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can print the sales reports that use the required giro specifications by using different paper types and paper trays. - -When you use tray numbers and paper sources for Norwegian sales documents, you must consider how the printer and printer driver interpret this information. You may have to specify other tray numbers for your specific printer. - -> [!NOTE] -> KID information will also print where the giro information is printed. - -The following documents require a printed giro: - -- Invoices -- Credit memos -- Finance charge memos -- Reminders - -The Norwegian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] contains the following sets of sales documents. - -|**Set**|Description| -|-------------|---------------------------------------| -|1|The standard [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] documents. No giro information is printed.| -|2|The giro is printed on every page. The last page prints the giro total.| - -## To set up paper trays - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Printer Selections**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the report. -3. Choose the **Sales Document Paper Tray Setup** action. -4. Select a paper source from the **First Page - Paper Source** field. -5. The **First Page – Tray Number** field will automatically display the selected paper source. You can also manually enter a tray number. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > Not all printers will have the same paper source names. You can specify a number in the **Tray Number** field. The number may correspond to a paper source. To find the number that a specific printer is using, see the technical documentation for the printer. - - The **Other Pages** and **Giro Page** fields are set up the same way. - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Paper Sources and Tray Numbers](paper-sources-and-tray-numbers.md) - [Norwegian Giro and OCR-B Font](norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md) - [How to: Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents](how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ehf.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ehf.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5e21a3dd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ehf.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up EHF - description: You must define a location for storing Elektronisk Handelsformat (EHF) files when you create electronic documents such as invoices or credit memos. You must also define payment methods and set up relevant customers for EHF. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up EHF -You must define a location for storing Elektronisk Handelsformat (EHF) files when you create electronic documents such as invoices or credit memos. You must also define payment methods and set up relevant customers for EHF. - -## To set up EHF file locations for sales and receivables - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, on the **E-Invoice** FastTab, in the **Output Paths** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Invoice Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the EHF files for sales invoices.| - |**Cr. Memo Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the EHF files for sales credit memos.| - |**E-Invoice Reminder Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the EHF files for reminders.| - |**E-Invoice Fin. Charge Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the EHF files for finance charge memos.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up EHF file locations for service management - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Mgt. Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, on the **E-Invoice** FastTab, in the **Output Paths** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**E-Invoice Service Invoice Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the EHF files for service invoices.| - |**E-Invoice Serv. Cr. Memo Path**|The path and name of the folder where you want to store the EHF files for service credit memos.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Customers for EHF](how-to-set-up-customers-for-ehf.md) - [EHF Electronic Invoicing in Norway](ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 357997f0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents - description: Kunde ID (KID) is a customer identification number that provides a payment reference to the vendor and ensures that the vendor is posting the payment correctly. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents -Kunde ID (KID) is a customer identification number that provides a payment reference to the vendor and ensures that the vendor is posting the payment correctly. You can set up KID numbers on sales documents to identify document and customer information on electronic banking transactions. - -## To set up KID numbers on sales documents - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Documents** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**KID Setup**|Specifies a KID number format.| - |**Document No. length**|Enter the number of digits used for the document number.| - |**Customer No. length**|Enter the number of digits used for the customer number.| - |**Use KID on Fin. Charge Memo**|Select to print KID numbers on finance charge memos. **Note:** If selected, then you must also select the **Document Type + Document No.** format in the **KID Setup** field.| - |**Use KID on Reminder**|Select to print KID numbers on reminders. **Note:** If selected, then you must also select the **Document Type + Document No.** format in the **KID Setup** field.| - |**Print Receipt on Giro**|Select to print the receipt section on sales invoices, credit memos, reminders, or finance charge memos.There are several layout options available when printing the receipt section on sales documents that contain a Giro. For more information, see [Norwegian Sales Documents](norwegian-sales-documents.md)| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Norway](electronic-banking-in-norway.md) - [Norwegian Sales Documents](norwegian-sales-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2ac853bb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-ocr-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up OCR Payments - description: You can process electronic payments from customers according to a predefined payment ID. This is often referred to as an optical character recognition (OCR) payment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up OCR Payments -You can process electronic payments from customers according to a predefined payment ID. This is often referred to as an optical character recognition (OCR) payment. The payment ID is used with electronic payment transactions. Customers can refer to this ID when they make payments. The payment ID is also used to identify imported payment transactions and automatically apply imported payment data. - -## To set up OCR payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **OCR Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Format**|Select an OCR payment file format. Formats include **BBS** and **Data Dialog**.| - |**FileName**|Enter the full path of the OCR payment file.| - |**Delete Return File**|Select to rename the file after import and prevent the file from being imported more than one time.| - -3. On the **Gen. Ledger** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Bal. Account Type**|Select a balance account type. Balance account types include **Gen. Ledg. Account** and **Bank Account**.| - |**Bal. Account No.**|Select a balance account number.| - |**Max. Divergence**|Enter a maximum divergence value. If the divergence on a payment is less than or equal to the value entered, the divergence amount is automatically posted. Otherwise, the divergence is not automatically posted. In both situations, a warning is displayed in the cash receipt journal when importing OCR Giro payments.| - |**Divergence Account No.**|Enter the divergence account number that will receive posting.| - |**Journal Template Name**|Select the name of the journal template that should receive the imported OCR Giro payments.| - |**Journal Name**|Select the name of the journal that should receive the imported OCR Giro payments.

If the **Journal Template Name** and **Journal Name** fields are blank, you can import OCR Giro payments in any journal. Otherwise, you must import OCR Giro payments in the journal that is specified.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> OCR payments can only be posted to cash receipt journals when the **Force Doc. Balance** field has been cleared in the **Gen. Journal Template** table. For more information, see Gen. Journal Template. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Banking in Norway](electronic-banking-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up KID Numbers on Sales Documents](how-to-set-up-kid-numbers-on-sales-documents.md) - [How to: Import and Post OCR Payments](how-to-import-and-post-ocr-payments.md) - [How to: Print the OCR Journal - Test Report](how-to-print-the-ocr-journal-test-report.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 86c65be5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Payment Line Information - description: Payment journal line information for the remittance payment is set up in the **Payment Info** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Payment Line Information -Payment journal line information for the remittance payment is set up in the **Payment Info** window. - -## To set up payment line information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Payment Info** action. -3. In the **Payment Info** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Remittance Account Code**|Select the remittance account code.| - |**Remittance Agreement Code**|Specify the agreement code assigned to the account code.| - |**Remittance Type**|Specify the remittance type assigned to the account code. Remittance types include **Domestic** and **Foreign**.| - -4. On the **Domestic** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Recipient Ref. 1 – 3**|Specify the payment text which is sent to the vendor.| - |**KID (Cust. id number)**|Specify the number sent to the vendor during payment.| - |**Our Account. No.**|Specify the account number for your company.| - |**External Document No.**|Specify the number of the external document.| - |**Payment Type Code Domestic**|Specify the payment type code that is assigned to the payment.| - - > [!NOTE] - > The recipient reference and the KID number cannot be entered for the same payment. If the KID is used, this is the only information that the vendor receives. - -5. On the **Foreign** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Recipient Ref. Abroad**|Specify the payment text that is sent to the vendor.| - |**Payment Type Code Abroad**|Specify the payment type code that is assigned to the payment.| - |**Check**|Specify whether a check must be issued.

*
**No** - No check is issued.

* **Send to employer** - Check is issued and sent to the employer.

* **Send to beneficiary** - Check is issued and sent to the beneficiary.| - |**Urgent**|Select if the payment is urgent and should be treated as an urgent transfer.| - |**Agreed Exch. Rate**|Specify the exchange rate which the bank agrees upon.| - |**Agreed With**|Specify who the agreement is entered with, if an exchange rate is agreed upon.| - |**Futures Contract No.**|Specify the future contract number that is used for this payment.| - |**Futures Contract Exch. Rate**|Specify the future contract exchange rate that is used for this payment.| - -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5b121602..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Recurring Groups - description: The **Recurring Group Code** field in the **Blanket Sales Order** window defines date formulas that can be used both as a template and to create sales orders based on date intervals. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Recurring Groups -The **Recurring Group Code** field in the **Blanket Sales Order** window defines date formulas that can be used both as a template and to create sales orders based on date intervals. You must set up recurring groups before you can set up recurring orders. - -## To set up recurring groups - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Recurring Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Enter a code to identify the recurring group.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the recurring group.| - |**Date formula**|Enter a date formula to calculate the time interval between orders.| - |**Create only the latest**|Select if you want only the latest recurring order created if the recurring group interval created by the **Date formula** has been exceeded.

If the order date on the blanket sales order has exceeded more than one interval period, selecting this check box prevents how all orders are created, and will only create the latest order.| - |**Starting date**|Enter the first date of the recurring group.| - |**Closing date**|Enter the last date of the recurring group.| - -4. On the **Update** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Update Document Date**|Select one of the following options to update the document date:

- **Posting Date** - The document date is calculated using the posting date and the date formula specified in the **Document Date Formula** field.
- **Processing Date** - The document date is calculated using the processing date and the date formula specified in the **Document Date Formula** field.| - |**Document Date Formula**|Enter a date formula to calculate the document date on the order.| - |**Delivery Date Formula**|Enter a date formula to calculate the delivery date on the order.| - |**Update Price**|Select one of the following options for updating prices on new orders:

- **Fixed** - The price used on a new order is the same price that is specified in the blanket order.
- **Recalculate** - The price on a new order is recalculated to reflect the current price for the customer.
- **Reset** - The price on a new order is cleared to specify a new price.| - |**Update Number**|Select one of the following options to manage the quantity specified on the original order:

- **Constant** - The quantity on the blanket order remains unchanged. This enables you to make orders indefinitely from the blanket order.
- **Reduce** - The quantity on the blanket order is reduced with the quantity that is specified on the new order. The recurring order processing stops when the quantity specified on the blanket order is used on new orders.| - |**Reset Delivery**|Select to reset the delivery options for the recurring group.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Recurring Orders](recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Set Up Recurring Orders](how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Create Recurring Orders](how-to-create-recurring-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 38e07acc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Recurring Orders - description: After you create a recurring group, you can set up recurring orders on the blanket sales order by adding the group to the order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Recurring Orders -After you create a recurring group, you can set up recurring orders on the blanket sales order by adding the group to the order. For more information, see [How to: Create Blanket Sales Orders](how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md). - -## To set up a recurring order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Blanket Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Order Date**|Enter the order date. The order date is used when you create new recurring orders. Orders with an order date on or before the processing date are processed.| - |**Recurring Group Code**|Enter the recurring group code for the recurring group. When a blanket order contains a recurring group code, the blanket order is available as a recurring order.| - -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Quantity**|Enter the quantity for the blanket order.| - |**Qty. to Ship**|Enter the quantity to ship. This quantity is used when you create new orders as recurring orders.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Recurring Orders](recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Set Up Recurring Groups](how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md) - [How to: Create Recurring Orders](how-to-create-recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Work with Blanket Sales Orders](../../sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md deleted file mode 100644 index ec943794..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Remittance Agreements - description: You must sign an agreement of remittance with the bank when you set up electronic payments. You can create more than one remittance agreement if you have an agreement with two or more banks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements -You must sign an agreement of remittance with the bank when you set up electronic payments. You can create more than one remittance agreement if you have an agreement with two or more banks. For each agreement, you must specify one or more accounts from which the payment should be made. For each account, you must create a remittance account. For more information, see [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md). - -## To set up a remittance agreement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Remittance Agreement Overview**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify the agreement code from the bank.| - |**Description**|Specify a name for the agreement, such as the name of the bank.| - |**Payment System**|Select the payment system that will be used. Payment systems include **DnB Telebank**, **K-LINK**, **SparNett**, **Fokus Bank**, **Postbanken**, **Other bank**, and **BBS**.| - -4. On the **Bank** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Operator No.**|Specify the operator information given by the bank.| - |**Company/Agreement No.**|Specify the company information given by the bank.| - |**Division**|Specify the division information given by the bank.| - |**Latest Sequence No.**|Specify the latest sequence number.| - |**Latest Daily Sequence No.**|Specify the latest daily sequence number.| - |**Latest Export**|Specify the date of the latest export.| - -5. On the **BBS** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**BBS Customer Unit ID**|Specify the identification of the agreement for Bankernes Betalingssentral (BBS). This code is provided by BBS.| - |**Latest BBS Payment Order No.**|Specify the entry number that was used when payment was sent to BBS.| - -6. On the **Send** FastTab, fill in the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payment File Name**|Specify the path and the name of the file that contains the electronic payment order that was sent to the bank.| - -7. On the **Receive** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|---------------------------------------| - |**Save Return File**|Select to automatically name the return file after it is imported without errors.| - |**Receipt Return Required**|Select to verify that the first-time return report is imported.| - |**Return File Is Not In Use**|Select if you do not want to use return files for approval and settlement of payment. You can use this feature if you do not want to update payments with return information from the bank.| - |**On Hold Rejection Code**|Enter the code to update a rejected vendor ledger entry. The ledger entry will be marked as **On Hold**, which means that after rejection, it is not added to the remittance proposal again.

If the code is blank, the entry is not marked as **On Hold**, which means that after rejection it can be added to a remittance proposal again.| - -8. On the **Finance** FastTab, fill in the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**New Document Per Field**|Specify how documents are numbered when payments are posted. Options include **Date**, **Vendor**, and **Specified for account**.| - -9. Choose the **Return File Setup List** action. -10. In the **Return File Setup List** window, choose the **New** action. -11. Enter the return file name in the **Return File Name** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > At a minimum, you must set up one file name for each receipt return, rejected return, and settlement return. Contact your bank about the naming conventions that it uses. - -12. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md deleted file mode 100644 index f87589f0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Vendors for Remittance - description: Norwegian enhancements include automatically making payments to vendors. This reduces errors that occur from manual data entry. To pay vendors using the remittance system, you must set up vendor information. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes Norwegian enhancements for automatically making payments to vendors. This reduces errors that occur from manual data entry. To pay vendors using the remittance system, you must set up vendor information. - -## To set up a vendor for remittance - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Name**|Specify the vendor’s name. This field is used by remittance against Bankernes Betalingssentral (BBS).| - |**Address**|Specify the vendor’s address. This field is used by remittance against BBS.| - |**Address 2**|Specify an additional line for the vendor’s address, if necessary. This field is used by remittance against BBS.| - |**Post Code**|Specify a valid postal code of four digits for domestic remittance.| - |**Country/Region Code**|Specify a valid country/region code for a foreign address.| - -4. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Remittance**|Select if the vendor is to be remitted.| - |**Remittance Account Code**|Specify the account code to be used for the vendor.| - |**Recipient Bank Account No.**|Specify the account number used to remit the vendor.| - -5. Choose the **Remittance Info** action. -6. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Remittance Account Code**|Specify the code of the remittance account which the vendor is using.| - |**Remittance Agreement Code**|Specify the code of the agreement to which the account is linked.| - |**Recipient Bank Account No.**|Specify the vendor's account number used for remittance.| - -7. On the **Domestic** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Own vendor recipient ref.**|Select to use the recipient reference from the vendor.| - |**Recipient ref. 1 -- inv.**|Enter the text that will print on the payment invoice.| - |**Recipient ref. 1 - cred.**|Enter the text that will print on the payment invoice when deducting a credit memo.| - - If remittance to BBS is used, the text from **Recipient ref. - inv.** and **Recipient ref. -cred.** is displayed on the payment specification in lines one through three, columns one and two. You can insert a maximum of 80 characters on the payment specification. - - The text in the recipient reference fields can be formatted automatically with special codes. For more information, see [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md). - -8. On the **Payment abroad** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Recipient Ref. Abroad**|Enter the text that will print on the payment invoice.| - |**Warning Notice**|Select one of the following options to specify how a warning notice is sent from the recipient's bank to the recipient.

- **None** - No confirmation is sent.
- **Phone** - Confirmation is given by phone.
- **Fax** - Confirmation is sent by fax.
- **Other** - A text message in the **Warning Text** field is used.| - |**Warning Text**|Enter the warning text that is used if the **Warning Notice** field is set to **Other**.| - |**Recipient Confirmation**|Select to specify how confirmation of payment is sent to the recipient.| - |**Telex Country/Region Code**|Specify the country/region code if the confirmation is sent using telex.| - |**Telex/Fax No.**|Specify the telex or fax number if the confirmation is sent using telex or fax.| - |**Recipient Contact**|Specify the contact person’s name if a telex or fax confirmation is sent to the recipient.| - |**Charges Domestic**|Specify who is charged the domestic charges in connection with the payment.

- **Debitremitter** - The remitter is charged.
- **Debitrecipient** - The recipient is charged.
- **Default** - The bank's way of charging is used. Typically this is the remitter who is charged.| - |**Charges Abroad**|Specify who is charged for foreign payments.

- **Debitremitter** - The remitter is charged.
- **Debitrecipient** - The recipient is charged.
- **Default** - The bank's way of charging is used. Typically this is the remitter who is charged.| - |**Payment Type Code Abroad**|Enter a two-digit code for the payment type.| - |**Specification (Norges Bank)**|Specify information for your local government bank. Contact your bank for further information.| - -9. On the **Bank abroad** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**SWIFT**|Enter the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT) address by which the recipient’s bank is identified.| - |**Bank Name**|Specify the bank's name.| - |**Bank Address 1**|Specify the address of the recipient's bank.| - |**Rcpt. Bank Country/Region Code**|Specify the country/region code for the recipient. This field is required and must comply with ISO standards.| - |**SWIFT Remb. Bank**|Specify the SWIFT address for reimbursement that is the recipient’s corresponding bank.| - -10. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-test-remittance-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-test-remittance-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index e4e82075..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-test-remittance-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Test Remittance Payments - description: After you have set up remittance payments and generated suggestions, you can test the payment journal lines for errors before posting them. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Test Remittance Payments -After you have set up remittance payments and generated suggestions, you can test the payment journal lines for errors before posting them. - -To test the payment journal lines, you can use the **Remittance Test** report. This report prints an overview of all journal lines together with any errors, such as missing fields or incorrect bank accounts. - -If a warning is printed in the test report, you cannot transfer the payments to the bank before the problem is corrected. You should print the test report to make sure that all payments are made as expected. - -## To print a remittance test report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Test Report** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **Show Dimensions** field to print dimensions on the test report. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-use-one-vat-code-in-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-use-one-vat-code-in-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9c4427bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-use-one-vat-code-in-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Use One VAT Code in Journals - description: In Norway, you can use the feature one VAT code in a journal, so that you can post VAT by using a single field, **VAT Code**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use One VAT Code in Journals -In Norway, you can use the feature one VAT code in a journal, so that you can post VAT by using a single field, **VAT Code**. After it is set up, the one VAT code is a quick way to fill in the commonly used VAT fields. - -To set up the VAT code for purchase orders and sales orders, the corresponding VAT business posting groups and the VAT product posting groups have to be defined. - -The VAT rate is calculated from the combination of VAT business posting groups, buyer information, and VAT product posting groups. - -## To create a VAT code - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Enter information in the **Code**, **General Posting Type**, and **Description** fields for each VAT code. -4. Choose the **OK** button to close the **VAT Codes** window. - - he following procedure explains the VAT posting setup. - -## To set up VAT posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **VAT Posting Setup** card, fill in the following fields: - - - **VAT Business Posting Group** - - **VAT Product Posting Group** - - **VAT Identifier** - - **VAT Percentage** - - **Sales VAT Account** - - **Purchase VAT Account** - -4. In the **VAT Code** field, select a code from the list. - -Now, when you post a document in the general journal and close it, the information specified in the **VAT Posting Setup** card is applied. - -For example, the VAT rate posted in the journal is defined by the setup that you have specified in the **VAT Posting Setup** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **VAT Code** and the **Bal. VAT Code** fields have been added to the journal. The **Bal. VAT Code** is the VAT code that is used to calculate the balancing account. -> -> No changes are made to the posting. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norwegian VAT Codes](norwegian-vat-codes.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 54e49644..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Remittance Error Codes - description: For a remittance error, the error code from the bank and an explanation of the error will be shown for the payment in the **Waiting Journal** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Remittance Error Codes -For a remittance error, the error code from the bank and an explanation of the error will be shown for the payment in the **Waiting Journal** window. - -## To view error codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Return Error**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Return Error** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Waiting Journal Reference**|Specify the reference code from the waiting journal.| - |**Message Text**|Specify the message from the bank.| - -3. Choose the **Close** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norway-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norway-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 72b8c80c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norway-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Norway Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Norwegian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Norway Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Norwegian version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] - -## In This Section - [How to: Apply General Ledger Entries in Closed Periods](how-to-apply-general-ledger-entries-in-closed-periods.md) - [How to: Import Payroll Transactions](how-to-import-payroll-transactions.md) - [EHF Electronic Invoicing in Norway](ehf-electronic-invoicing-in-norway.md) - [Electronic Banking in Norway](electronic-banking-in-norway.md) - [Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [Norwegian Sales Documents](norwegian-sales-documents.md) - [Norwegian VAT Reporting](norwegian-vat-reporting.md) - [Recurring Orders](recurring-orders.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md deleted file mode 100644 index c517a839..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Norwegian Giro and OCR-B Font - description: A General Interbank Recurring Order (giro) is a payment system that operates like a credit transfer. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Norwegian Giro and OCR-B Font -A General Interbank Recurring Order (giro) is a payment system that operates like a credit transfer. - -The last line on the giro uses the OCR-B font. This is required by Bankenes Betalingssentral (BBS) for use with optical character recognition (OCR) when handling payments from customers. For more information, see the BBS website at [BBS.NO](http://www.nets.eu/no-nb/Pages/default.aspx) - -The OCR-B-10 BT font is generally available from software vendors. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], Norwegian sales documents use the OCR-B-10 BT font from BitStream Inc. has been used on the giro. For more information, see the BitStream website at [Bitstream](http://www.bitstream.com/). - -You can use any OCR-B font, but if other fonts are used, the sales documents must be updated by a Microsoft Certified Partner. Contact your partner for more information. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norwegian Sales Documents](norwegian-sales-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-sales-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-sales-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0de6a02f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-sales-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Norwegian Sales Documents - description: Norwegian enhancements support two sets of sales documents. A document set consists of a sales invoice, sales credit memo, reminder, and finance charge memo. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Norwegian Sales Documents -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] supports two sets of sales documents. A document set consists of a sales invoice, sales credit memo, reminder, and finance charge memo. - -Set 1 is based on international reports. You cannot print Norwegian giro or use paper sources/trays in this set of reports. - -Set 2 contains reports designed for use in Norway. These reports print Norwegian giro. When printing these reports, you can use paper sources/trays specified in the **Printer Selections** table. - -## Document Set 1 -The first document set consists of standard reports that do not contain any settings specific to Norway. For example, giro transactions are not printed and paper sources/trays cannot be processed. - -Document set 1 contains the following reports: - -- **Sales - Invoice** -- **Sales - Credit Memo** -- **Reminder** -- **Finance Charge Memo** - -## Document Set 2 -The second document set prints Norwegian giro on every page. The giro on the last page contains information about the amount. - -Document set 2 contains the following reports: - -- **Sales - Invoice 2** -- **Sales - Credit Memo 2** -- **Reminder 2** -- **Finance Charge Memo 2** - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norwegian Giro and OCR-B Font](norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md) - [Paper Sources and Tray Numbers](paper-sources-and-tray-numbers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 259d909f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Norwegian VAT Codes - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], VAT processing information can be easily set up using standard Norwegian VAT codes. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Norwegian VAT Codes -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], VAT processing information can be easily set up using standard Norwegian VAT codes. The following table shows the standard Norwegian VAT codes. - -|**Code**|**Description**| -|--------------|-------------------------------------------| -|**0**|Sale - No VAT| -|**1**|Purchase - VAT| -|**2**|Purchase - VAT and Inv. Tax| -|**3**|Sale - VAT| -|**4**|Purchase - VAT and 0% Inv. Tax| -|**11**|Purchase - Full VAT| -|**13**|Sale - Full VAT| -|**14**|Purchase - Reverse Charge VAT| - -Typically, you enter the **VAT Bus. Posting Group** and **VAT Prod. Posting Group** fields when you specify the VAT handling process. - -If you want to use only the **VAT Code** field when you specify the VAT handling process, you can assign a VAT code in the **VAT Posting Setup** table, and use this code instead of the posting group fields. The VAT code can be used as a shortcut in the **VAT Posting Setup** table and at the same time, you can use standard Norwegian VAT codes. - -## Set Up of Norwegian VAT Codes -You must create the Norwegian VAT codes in the **VAT Codes** window. Then assign the VAT codes in the **VAT Posting Setup** table, using the **VAT Code** field. For more information, see [How to: Use One VAT Code in Journals](how-to-use-one-vat-code-in-journals.md). - -## Use of VAT Codes -When you specify a VAT code, you can select the VAT posting setup information for this code. This information will be used in journals or on document lines when you specify the VAT setup information. If you use the VAT code in these cases, the posting group fields are used with the information from the corresponding VAT posting setup information. - -Alternatively, you will have to specify both the **VAT Bus. Posting Group** and the **VAT Prod. Posting Group** fields when you select or change the VAT posting setup information on the journal line or the document line. - -### Example: Using VAT Codes -There are two different VAT posting setup instances that can be used when you post a sales document. - -One VAT posting setup scenario will calculate 24 percent VAT for domestic customers: - -- VAT Bus. Posting Group: DOMESTIC -- VAT Prod. Posting Group: NORMAL -- VAT %: 24 -- VAT Code: 3 - -One VAT posting setup scenario will calculate without VAT for international customers: - -- VAT Bus. Posting Group: EXPORT -- VAT Prod. Posting Group: NORMAL -- VAT %: 0 -- VAT Code: 1 - -Typically, when you specify the VAT setup information on a journal line, the **VAT Bus. Posting Group** field must be set to **DOMESTIC** and the **VAT Prod. Posting Group** field must be set to **NORMAL** in order to choose the domestic setup. - -If you use standard Norwegian VAT codes, you could specify **VAT Code 3** for the domestic VAT posting setup information, and **VAT Code 1** for the international VAT posting setup information. This lets you choose between the VAT posting setup information using only one field and the familiar standard Norwegian VAT codes. - -### Example: Restricting the Use of VAT Codes -The standard Norwegian **VAT Code 3** is used for sales inclusive of VAT. Unless you restrict the use of this VAT code, it can be used for both sales and purchases in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -You can define the **Gen. Posting Type** field as a sale in the **G/L Account (Analysis View)** table. This general posting type will be used together with **VAT Code 3**. - -The general posting type will be handled in two ways, depending on the value in the **Test Gen. Posting Type** field. - -|Option|Description| -|-----------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------| -|**Mandatory**|The general posting type is automatically set to **Sale** on journal lines. Before you post, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] verifies if the general posting type is specified, but there is no verification if the field is set to **Sale**.

**VAT Code 3** can be used for both sales and purchase documents.| -|**Same**|The general posting type is automatically set to **Sale** on journal lines. Before you post, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] verifies if the general posting type is set to **Sale**.

**VAT Code 3** can be used for sales documents, but not on purchase documents.

This enables you to restrict the use of VAT codes to predefined general posting types.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norwegian VAT Reporting](norwegian-vat-reporting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-reporting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-reporting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0118d716..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/norwegian-vat-reporting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Norwegian VAT Reporting - description: Norwegian enhancements allow you to calculate and report VAT to the Norwegian tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Norwegian VAT Reporting -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] ../../includes Norwegian enhancements that allow you to calculate and report VAT to the Norwegian tax authorities. - -This topic shows the typical steps that you should follow when reporting Norwegian VAT. - -## Print the Trade Settlement -First, you must print the trade settlement. Use the **Tradesettlement** report to print the trade settlement that is required by the authorities. - -This report prints detailed information about the posted VAT in the specified period. On the last page of the report, the actual trade settlement to report is printed. - -This report can be printed as many times as required. No posting or other changes are made to the data when you use this report. - -## Check the Trade Settlement -Next, you must check the trade settlement. Verify that the amounts in the trade settlement are correct, and make any necessary adjustments. - -## Post VAT -If the information in the trade settlement is correct, the final step is to post the VAT using the **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement** report. It is required that you manually specify the correct VAT period in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields. Generally, these dates correspond to the period previously specified in the **Tradesettlement** report. - -When using this report, you can decide not to post if you want to check the results before you actually post VAT. - -When posting VAT, the corresponding VAT period is created and marked as closed in the **Settled VAT Period** table. If you specify a period that does not correspond to one of the typical six Norwegian VAT periods, all periods that are affected by the specified date interval are closed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/paper-sources-and-tray-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/paper-sources-and-tray-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 70a3a08e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/paper-sources-and-tray-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Paper Sources and Tray Numbers - description: When printing Norwegian sales documents, you can set up different tray numbers and paper sources on the first, last, and other pages. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Paper Sources and Tray Numbers -When printing Norwegian sales documents, you can set up different tray numbers and paper sources on the first, last, and other pages. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] uses the following standard tray numbers and paper sources. - -|Tray number|Paper source| -|-----------------|------------------| -|1|Upper or Only One Feed| -|2|Lower Feed| -|3|Middle Feed| -|4|Manual Feed| -|5|Envelope Feed| -|6|Envelope Manual Feed| -|7|Automatic Feed| -|8|Tractor Feed| -|9|Small-format Feed| -|10|Large-format Feed| -|11|Large-capacity Feed| -|14|Cassette Feed| -|15|Automatically Select| -|256|Printer Specific Feed 1| -|257|Printer Specific Feed 2| -|258|Printer Specific Feed 3| -|259|Printer Specific Feed 4| -|260|Printer Specific Feed 5| -|261|Printer Specific Feed 6| -|262|Printer Specific Feed 7| -|263|Printer Specific Feed 8| - -When you use tray numbers and paper sources for Norwegian sales documents, you must consider how the printer and printer driver interpret this information. Not all printers and drivers use this numbering or naming system. You may have to specify other tray numbers for your specific printer. - -If the printer supports other tray numbers, you can enter these numbers in the **First Page - Tray Number**, **Other Pages - Tray Number**, and **Giro Page - Tray Number** fields in the **Printer Selection** table. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norwegian Sales Documents](norwegian-sales-documents.md) - [Norwegian Giro and OCR-B Font](norwegian-giro-and-ocr-b-font.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/proportional-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/proportional-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9ace2ecf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/proportional-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Proportional VAT - description: Norwegian enhancements allow you to calculate VAT when there is both deductible and non-deductible VAT. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Proportional VAT -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] allows you to calculate VAT when there is both deductible and non-deductible VAT. Because it is difficult to know where and how an item is used, you will have to contact the Norwegian tax authorities to determine whether a specified percentage of the VAT is deductible based on historical data. - -## Example -A bus company owns both buses and trucks. When gasoline is purchased, the gasoline is stored in one holding tank. When the gasoline is used in a bus for transporting children, it is not deductible. When the gasoline is used in a truck, the gasoline may be deductible. The agreement between the bus company and the Norwegian tax authorities might be that 60 percent of the VAT is deductible. - -If you have a purchase invoice of $12,500 based on 25 percent VAT with the **Calc. Prop. Deduction VAT** field in the **VAT Posting Setup** window set to **Yes** and the **Proportional Deduction VAT %** field set to **60 percent**, only 60 percent of the VAT is deductible in a journal. When the invoice is posted, the postings are as follows: - -- To vendor general ledger account - $12,500 (credit) -- To cost account 4010 - $11,000 (debit) -- To VAT account 2720 - $1,500 (debit) - -Generally, based on 25 percent VAT, the VAT amount would be $2,500. However, only 60 percent is deductible; therefore the VAT amount is $2,500 x 60% = $1,500. The non-deductible amount of $1,000 is added to the cost account. The VAT base has corresponding values. This amount should have been $10,000, but because only 60 percent is deductible, the base is $6,000. - -This also works if the transaction with this VAT combination is posted through a purchase order. - -> [!NOTE] -> If this functionality is used on a purchase order that is used for buying items for inventory, the functionality will not influence the cost of the item. The cost of the item will be added by using the non-deductible VAT. This works on the general ledger level only. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Calculate Proportional VAT](how-to-calculate-proportional-vat.md) - [Norwegian VAT Reporting](norwegian-vat-reporting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recipient-reference-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recipient-reference-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 833fe051..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recipient-reference-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Recipient Reference Codes - description: The recipient reference code determines the message that is sent to the recipient. The code is displayed on the remittance account and is used for vendors that are paid from this account. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Recipient Reference Codes -The recipient reference code determines the message that is sent to the recipient. The code is displayed on the remittance account and is used for vendors that are paid from this account. For each vendor, a special recipient reference code can be created if the general reference text is not used. - -The text in recipient reference fields can be formatted automatically with special codes. For example, if you enter **Payment of Invoice %2** in a recipient reference field, the information that will print is **Payment of Invoice 10000**. - -The recipient reference codes are described in the following table. - -|**Code**|Description| -|--------------|---------------------------------------| -|**%1**|The document type. Either invoice or credit memo.| -|**%2**|The vendor's invoice number.| -|**%3**|The **Our Account No.** field from the **Vendor Card** window. This is usually the customer number that is used by the vendor.| -|**%4**|The invoice or credit memo number.| -|**%5**|The description from the vendor ledger entry.| -|**%6**|The original amount from the vendor ledger entries. The amount is shown as positive.| -|**%7**|The remaining amount from the vendor ledger entries. The amount is shown as positive.| -|**%8**|The local currency amount from the vendor ledger entry. The amount is shown as positive.| -|**%9**|The currency code from the vendor ledger entry.| -|**%10**|The due date from the vendor ledger entry.| -|**%11**|The Kunde ID number from the vendor ledger entry.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recurring-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recurring-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6bcea9d4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/recurring-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Recurring Orders - description: You can use recurring orders to create blanket order templates so that sales orders can be created based on date intervals that you define. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Recurring Orders -You can use recurring orders to create blanket order templates so that sales orders can be created based on date intervals that you define. For example, if you deliver the same sales order every two weeks, you can use a blanket sales order and create recurring orders. - -You can use recurring groups to define a range of parameters that show how you make the orders. These groups are assigned to blanket orders that have to be created regularly. To create the recurring orders, you will have to periodically run the create recurring orders process. For more information see [How to: Create Recurring Orders](how-to-create-recurring-orders.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Norway Local Functionality](norway-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Set Up Recurring Groups](how-to-set-up-recurring-groups.md) - [How to: Set Up Recurring Orders](how-to-set-up-recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Create Recurring Orders](how-to-create-recurring-orders.md) - [How to: Work with Blanket Sales Orders](../../sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/remittance-errors.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/remittance-errors.md deleted file mode 100644 index f1b6f4b3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/remittance-errors.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Remittance Errors - description: Remittance errors for payments may occur when data is transferred and after payments have been sent to the bank. Both kinds of errors are reported in the **Return Error** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Remittance Errors -Remittance errors for payments may occur when data is transferred and after payments have been sent to the bank. Both kinds of errors are reported in the **Return Error** window. - -The remittance system handles all error codes which can be sent through the return files. It is not required to manually cancel payments rejected by the bank. - -## Types of Errors -There are two types of remittance errors: - -- Transfer error -- Rejection - -## Transfer Errors -If errors occur during transfer and no return data is created, payments have not been received by the bank. - -If the payment file cannot be sent to the bank, you must cancel the payment order in the remittance system. - -## Rejections -If there is an error or information is missing with a payment that was sent to the bank, the return will contain a rejection of the payment. - -> [!NOTE] -> Rejections vary from bank to bank. Contact your bank regarding how to handle rejection of payments. - -If there is a rejection, the error code from the bank and an explanation is displayed for the payment in the **Waiting Journal** window. You will have to handle the rejection based how the remittance agreement was set up. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [Types of Payment Returns Files](types-of-payment-returns-files.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/types-of-payment-returns-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/types-of-payment-returns-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index a5bded66..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Norway/types-of-payment-returns-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Types of Payment Returns Files - description: Norwegian enhancements include two types of payment return files that can be imported. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Types of Payment Returns Files -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes two types of payment return files that can be imported: - -- Receipt returns -- Settlement returns - -You can also choose to not use return files by selecting the **Return File Is Not In Use** field in the **Remittance Agreement** table. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md). - -## Receipt Returns -The receipt return is received from the bank after you have sent the remittance file to the bank. When data is imported, information about the number of invoices that are received correctly and the number that are received with error is displayed. After you import a receipt return, the status of the payments in the **Waiting Journal** table is set to **Approved**. - -> [!NOTE] -> You may also receive a rejected return from the bank. If the remittance is rejected, the settlement return will not be received. - -## Settlement Returns -The settlement return is received from the bank after the payment is executed. When data is imported, information about the number of settled invoices is displayed. - -The following occurs when the settlement return is imported: - -- Payment status in the **Waiting Journal** table is set to **Settled**. -- Information will be transferred from the **Waiting Journal** window to the payment journal. -- A balancing account will be created for each transaction. -- Document numbers will be inserted for each transaction. - -## Exchange Rates by Settlement -For a payment, the exchange rates are managed in the following ways: - -- Payment from an account in local currency - If a payment in another currency is from an account in LCY, the bank will flag the settlement return with a warning about the exchange rate between LCY and the currency that is used as payment. - -- Payment from a currency account - If payment is made from a currency account, the exchange rate for this currency and LCY is used. This is because the bank does not inform the system about the exchange rate. - -## Warnings on Settlement Returns -When the settlement return is imported, warnings can occur. Payment journal lines with warnings are marked with a symbol. To view the information about the warning, you can open the **Settlement Info** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments to Vendors in Norway](electronic-payments-to-vendors-in-norway.md) - [How to: Set Up Remittance Agreements](how-to-set-up-remittance-agreements.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Accounts](how-to-create-remittance-accounts.md) - [How to: Set Up Vendors for Remittance](how-to-set-up-vendors-for-remittance.md) - [Recipient Reference Codes](recipient-reference-codes.md) - [How to: Create Remittance Suggestions](how-to-create-remittance-suggestions.md) - [How to: Create Manual Remittance Payments](how-to-create-manual-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Line Information](how-to-set-up-payment-line-information.md) - [How to: Test Remittance Payments](how-to-test-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Export Remittance Payments](how-to-export-remittance-payments.md) - [How to: Import Payment Return Data](how-to-import-payment-return-data.md) - [How to: Delete Remittance Payment Orders](how-to-delete-remittance-payment-orders.md) - [Remittance Errors](remittance-errors.md) - [How to: View Remittance Error Codes](how-to-view-remittance-error-codes.md) - [How to: Cancel Payments](how-to-cancel-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/account-schedules-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/account-schedules-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 186d7c15..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/account-schedules-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Account Schedules Overview - description: Account schedules are one of the main tools that you can use to provide information for required statutory reports. By using user-defined rows and columns, you can decide which data you want to compare and how. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Account Schedules Overview -Account schedules are one of the main tools that you can use to provide information for required statutory reports. By using user-defined rows and columns, you can decide which data you want to compare and how. This means that you can create as many customized financial statements as you want without using Report Designer. You can also choose to use a predefined column layout for any account schedule. - - To better manage the report data, you can: - -- Create general ledger correspondence. -- Create constants. -- Create extensions. -- Create expressions. - -Account schedules are set up in the **Account Schedule Names** window and the **Account Schedules** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> Be sure to print the following reports to review the general ledger account information that you will be using in account schedules: -> -> - **G/L Account Turnover** report -> - **G/L Account Card** report -> - **G/L Account Entries Analysis** report - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Import and Export Account Schedules](how-to-import-and-export-account-schedules.md) - [How to: Define an Account Schedule Extension](how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension.md) - [How to: Define an Account Schedule Constant](how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant.md) - [How to: Work with Account Schedules](../../bi-how-work-account-schedule.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-and-cash-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-and-cash-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3f96c952..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-and-cash-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Bank and Cash Management - description: Russian functionality for bank and cash management in described in several topics. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Bank and Cash Management -Russian functionality for bank and cash management in described in several topics. - -## In This Section -[Bank Management](bank-management.md) -[Petty Cash Management](petty-cash-management.md) -[How to: Set Up a Bank Payment Order](how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order.md) -[How to: Create Cash Account Cards](how-to-create-cash-account-cards.md) -[How to: Print the Cash Report CO-4 Report](how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md) -[How to: Print the Cash Order Journal CO-3 Report](how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md) -[How to: Print the Outgoing Cash Order Report](how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report.md) -[How to: Print the Ingoing Cash Order Report](how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7687a9fd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/bank-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Bank Management - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create bank directory structures to keep bank reference information in one location, create budget classifications, add bank account details to specific general ledger accounts, and print and post required documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Bank Management -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create bank directory structures to keep bank reference information in one location, create budget classifications, add bank account details to specific general ledger accounts, and print and post required documents. - -## Creating Bank Directory Structures - You can use a bank directory structure to keep reference information about all the banks in one location. This information can be used to automatically fill in the corresponding fields in the **Bank Account Card**, **Vendor Bank Account Card**, and **Customer Bank Account Card** windows. - -## Creating Budget Classification Codes - You can use a budget classification codes catalog in bank payments that are made to the state budget, such as tax payments. These codes allow you to track the classification of budget payment types in the state budget. - -## Creating Bank Account Details Records - You can use bank account details to define dimensions and other codes that are pertinent to bank payment orders and bank statements. Records in a bank operation that have the account type information set to **G/L Account** can have bank account details attached to the specified account. Bank account details are set up in the **Bank Account Details** window. - -## Printing and Posting Required Documents - You can prepare bank payment order documents, cash order documents, and payments in the payment journal by copying procedures from the posted bank payment order and cash order documents. Then you can create the printed documents and post them in the required format. - - You can print the following required bank management documents. - -|Report|Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Bank Payment Order**|This report is a copy of the bank payment order.| -|**Bank Account G/L Turnover**|This report is a list of general ledger turnover information.| -|**Bank Account Card**|This report contains information about bank operations.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Bank Payment Order](how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration.md deleted file mode 100644 index db23fa69..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Collecting Profit Tax Information for Tax Declaration - description: To reduce the labor required to complete a profit tax declaration and to simplify the company bookkeeping, the reporting document is split into supplements in accordance with the source. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Collecting Profit Tax Information for Tax Declaration -To reduce the labor required to complete a profit tax declaration and to simplify the company bookkeeping, the reporting document is split into supplements in accordance with the source. For each supplement, which is filled in by a taxpayer, a synthetic tax register is created in the tax accounting module, where all the declaration lines are stated and data sources and creation rules for each line are described. - -In the tax accounting module, the following synthetic registers of the Profit Tax Declaration Reporting document are realized: - -- Sheet 02 Profit Tax Calculation -- Supplement 1 to Sheet 02. Sales Income -- Supplement 2 to Sheet 02. Production and Sales Costs -- Supplement 3 to Sheet 02. Special Production and Sales Costs -- Supplement 4 to Sheet 02. Calculation of Loss Amount or Loss Amount Part decreasing the taxation basis -- Supplement 6 to Sheet 02. Non – Sales Costs -- Supplement 7 to Sheet 02. Non – Sales Costs and Losses to be understood as non–sale - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [How to: Set Up Tax Register Sections](how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/company-addresses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/company-addresses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 84e6d8eb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/company-addresses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Company Addresses - description: If your company has different types of addresses, such as a legal address or an address for use with tax inspection, you must set up these addresses in the Company Address table. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Company Addresses -If your company has different types of addresses, such as a legal address or an address for use with tax inspection, you must set up these addresses in the Company Address table. At a minimum, you must specify your legal address. - -## Types of Addresses - Some statutory reports require certain types of addresses, such as the address for tax inspection or the address for the pension fund that the company reports. You can define two or more of each type of address and use unique codes for each of them. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Statutory Reports](statutory-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/corrective-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/corrective-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6194fc84..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/corrective-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Corrective Documents - description: If you sell or purchase items, and you then reach an agreement to change the price or the quantity, you must issue a corrective document that specifies the new price or quantity. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Corrective Documents -If you sell or purchase items, and you then reach an agreement to change the price or the quantity, you must issue a corrective document that specifies the new price or quantity. You can also register corrective documents that you receive from a vendor, and you can issue and register corrections to corrective documents. - -If you discover a mistake in an invoice, credit memo, or corrective document, you must issue a revision document. - -## Corrective Invoices and Credit Memos - When you sell or purchase items, you can create corrective invoices and corrective credit memos to reflect changes in quantity and amounts after the items were shipped or received. You can also create corrective documents to reflect changes in item charges. - -For example, you sell 20 items to a customer, but one item is damaged during transport. You can then issue a corrective invoice for the reduced number of items. If you later agree with the customer that they want a substitute item, you must issue a correction to the corrective invoice. The same pattern applies to adjustments in price if you make a discount after shipping the items. - -The following table describes when to use which corrective document. - -|Corrective Document Type|Description| -|------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Corrective Invoice|Use this document type to post an increase in quantity or price after the items were shipped.| -|Corrective Credit Memo|Use this document type to post a reduction in quantity or price after the items were shipped.| - -When you create a corrective document, you can specify which document lines from the original document you want to correct. You can change the quantity of document lines where the type is **Item**. If the line is for an item charge, you can change both quantity and price. - -> [!WARNING] -> If the corrective document must change the price, the line can be for an item charge or a general ledger account, depending on your inventory setup. If you want to post the difference in the price between the original line and the corrective line to a general ledger account, you must change the line type. - -Before you can create corrective documents, you must have set up prerequisites. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Corrective Invoicing](how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing.md). - -### Revision Documents -If you discover a mistake in a posted document, you must issue a revision and send it to the customer or vendor. In contrast to corrective documents, a revision document can be issued without advance notification of the customer or vendor. Corrective documents can only be issued if both parties agree with the changes in quantity or price in advance - -You can create a revision document for sales invoices, sales credit memos, purchase invoices, purchase credit memos, and corrective documents. - -Before you create and post a revision, you must cancel the original invoice. When you cancel the original invoice, you can use the **Copy Document** batch job and select the **Include Header** field in the request window. This creates a link between the original invoice and the revision document. For more information, see [How to: Create Corrective Documents](how-to-create-corrective-documents.md). - -### VAT in Corrective Documents -The reports for VAT sales books and additional VAT ledgers include changes in VAT amounts from posted corrective documents. If a corrective document is created in the same VAT period as the original invoice, the amounts are included in the VAT sales book. If a corrective document is created in a VAT period that is later than the period for the original invoice, the amounts must be included in the additional VAT ledger for the period. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> To include a corrective invoice in an additional VAT ledger, you must select the **Additional VAT Ledger Sheet** field in the sales invoice window. The same applies to corrective sales credit memos, purchase invoices, and purchase credit memos. For more information, see [How to: Create Corrective Documents](how-to-create-corrective-documents.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Corrective Invoicing](how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing.md) - [How to: Create Corrective Documents](how-to-create-corrective-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/customer-card-and-vendor-card-fields.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/customer-card-and-vendor-card-fields.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1f6052bb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/customer-card-and-vendor-card-fields.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Customer Card and Vendor Card Fields - description: The **Customer Card** and **Vendor Card** windows include several additional fields. The **Default Bank Code** field has been added to the **Payments** FastTab on both cards. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Customer Card and Vendor Card Fields -The **Customer Card** and **Vendor Card** windows include several additional fields. The **Default Bank Code** field has been added to the **Payments** FastTab on both cards, and the following fields have been added to the **Invoicing** FastTab in the **Vendor Card** window: - -- **KPP Code** -- **OKPO Code** -- **OKONX Code** - -Every company uses these codes, and they must be shown in required documents such as payment documents and factura-invoices. - -- The **KPP Code** field is for the code of the company registration. -- The **OKPO Code** field is for the Classification of Enterprises and Organizations code. -- The **OKONX Code** field is for a federation-wide classifier of a sector of the national economy. - -The KPP code has also been added to the **Payments** FastTab of the **Customer Card** window. - -Each customer can specify several bank accounts in the **Customer Bank Account** window, but there is usually one default bank account for most of a customer's payments. This most widely used bank account can be selected in the **Default Bank Code** field. The same applies for vendors. - -The **Default Bank Code** field is added to the **Payments** FastTab of the customer card and the vendor card. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](../../sales-setup-sales.md) -[Setting Up Purchasing](../../purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) - [Bank Management](bank-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-bonus.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-bonus.md deleted file mode 100644 index 07185811..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-bonus.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Depreciation Bonus - description: Depreciation bonus is an accelerated depreciation method applied in tax accounting because of provisions in the Russian tax laws. A depreciation bonus enables you to include fixed asset and capital investment expenses in the current period at the rate of 10 percent or 30 percent. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Depreciation Bonus -*Depreciation bonus* is an accelerated depreciation method applied in tax accounting because of provisions in the Russian tax laws. A depreciation bonus enables you to include fixed asset and capital investment expenses in the current period at the rate of 10 percent or 30 percent. - -## Depreciation Bonus Calculation -A depreciation bonus can be calculated and applied for the following types of transactions: - -- Acquisition costs of fixed assets. -- Acquisition costs and appreciation of capital investments for all previous periods excluding the current period. - -The rate of the depreciation bonus is 10 percent or 30 percent, depending on the class of the fixed asset. The rate is set for a depreciation group using the **Depr. Bonus Percentage** field in the **Depreciation Group** window. - -After the depreciation bonus is calculated and posted for a period, all transactions are cleared in preparation for the next period. - -## Depreciation Bonus Settings -Before depreciation bonus is calculated, you will have to make sure that the appropriate settings have been applied in the **Tax Register Setup** window. Use the information in the following table to apply depreciation bonus settings. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Rel. Act as Depr. Bonus Base**|Select if you want fixed asset releases to be used to calculate the depreciation bonus base.| -|**Depr. Bonus TD Code**|Enter a tax difference code that is used to calculate the depreciation bonus. The selected tax difference code should be identified as a depreciation bonus during tax difference setup.| -|**Depr. Bonus Recovery from**|Enter the starting date from which depreciation is recovered if the fixed asset is sold. If the fixed asset is sold before this date and the depreciation bonus has already been applied, the depreciation bonus will not be recovered.| -|**Depr. Bonus Recov. Per. (Year)**|Enter the period in which the depreciation bonus is recovered if the fixed asset is sold.| -|**Depr. Bonus Recovery TD Code**|Enter the tax difference code that is used to calculate the depreciation bonus recovery amount in tax accounting.| - -## Selecting and Canceling Depreciation Bonus Transactions -Depreciation bonus transactions should be posted before the monthly depreciation amount is calculated and posted. - -To select depreciation bonus transactions for posting for a period, select **Depr. Bonus** in the **Fixed Asset Journal** window and the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window. - -You can cancel depreciation bonus transactions by running the **Cancel FA Ledger Entries** batch job. After posting the depreciation bonus cancellation, all operations that are included in the depreciation bonus base must be manually selected as the depreciation bonus base. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-methods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-methods.md deleted file mode 100644 index fa698f8a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/depreciation-methods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Depreciation Methods Unique to Russia -description: There are three depreciation methods that are unique to Russia that can be used in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Depreciation Methods Unique to Russia -There are three depreciation methods that are unique to Russia that can be used in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -- Straight-line method **(SL-RU)** -- Non-linear method **(DB/SL-RU)** -- Non-linear method for a group of fixed assets **(DB/SL-RU Tax Group)** - -## Straight-line Method - To use this method, select the **(SL-RU)** option in the appropriate fixed asset depreciation book. - - The main calculation formula for the straight-line method is K = 1/N * 100%, where K is the monthly rate of depreciation, and N is the number of depreciation in months. The straight line method works as follows: - -- The calculation of depreciation is based on the month’s principle, and every depreciation month has 30 days. These parameters are automatically set up during calculation of depreciation. - -- The start date of depreciation for any fixed asset acquisition is the first day of the month that follows the month in which the acquisition is released into operation. - -- The end date of depreciation is the end of the month when the fixed asset is disposed, written off, or sold. - -- During depreciation calculation, the depreciation of the previous month will be checked to see if it has been posted for the particular fixed asset. This feature enables you to avoid skipping depreciation periods. - -## Non-linear Method - To use this method, select the **(DB/SL-RU)** option in the appropriate fixed asset depreciation book. - - The calculation for the non-linear method consists of two formulas—one for the start of the depreciation and another for the end of the depreciation. - - The formula for the non-linear method is K = 2/N * 100%, where K is the monthly rate of depreciation, and N is the number of depreciation months. The constant in this formula, 2, is fixed in the code and should not be set up manually. - - When the book value of the fixed asset becomes equal to or less than 20 percent of the acquisition cost, the monthly depreciation will be calculated differently. From this point on, the straight line formula is used to calculate depreciation until the fixed asset is fully depreciated. - - The constant of the acquisition cost, 20 percent, is fixed in the code and should not be set up manually. - -## Non-linear Method for a Group of Fixed Assets - To use this method, select the **(DB/SL-RU Tax Group)** option in the appropriate fixed asset depreciation book. - - The non-linear depreciation method can be applied to groups of fixed assets using the depreciation groups set up in the **Depreciation Group** window. Each depreciation group should have a defined **Tax Depreciation Rate** and a **Depreciation Factor** with a value of **1**. - - Before you use this method, you will have to make sure that the appropriate settings have been applied in the **Tax Register Setup** window. Use the information in the following table to apply the correct settings. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Use Group Depr. Method from**|Enter the start date from which the non-linear depreciation method can be applied. The date should be the first day of the calendar year.| -|**Min. Group Balance**|Enter the minimum amount that is valid as the balance for the depreciation group. If the book value for the fixed assets is less than this amount, the depreciation can be written off in this period.| -|**Write-off in Charges**|Select if you want to write off fixed asset charges if the book value of the fixed assets is written off in the period when the book value is less than or equal to the **Min. Group Balance** amount. Otherwise, the book value will be written off in the next period.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Depreciation Bonus](depreciation-bonus.md) - [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-charges.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-charges.md deleted file mode 100644 index e6366717..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-charges.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Fixed Asset Charges - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use fixed asset charges to include additional charges on the purchase of fixed assets in the fixed asset acquisition cost. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fixed Asset Charges -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can use fixed asset charges to include additional charges on the purchase of fixed assets in the fixed asset acquisition cost. For more information, see [How to: Create a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md). - -You can change the fixed asset acquisition cost in the following scenarios: - -- After service -- Repair -- Modernization -- Partial write-off -- Revaluation - -In addition, you can also specify how the fixed asset will be depreciated. You can use various depreciation methods for your fixed assets. If you want to depreciate one or more fixed assets by several depreciation methods, you must set up multiple fixed asset depreciation methods. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md) - [How to: Allocate and Post Fixed Asset Charges](how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges.md) - [How to: Create a Credit Memo for a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge.md) - [How to: View Posted Entries on a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge.md) - [Setting Up Fixed Assets](../../fa-setup.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index 82818f0f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Fixed Asset Inventory - description: The fixed assets inventory feature enables you to process inventory auditing of fixed assets in accordance with legal requirements, generate electronic inventory lists of fixed assets that are to be inventoried with calculated quantities and amounts, and more. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fixed Asset Inventory -The fixed assets inventory feature enables you to: - -- Process inventory auditing of fixed assets in accordance with legal requirements. -- Generate electronic inventory lists of fixed assets that are to be inventoried with calculated quantities and amounts. -- Divide the inventory lists by the physical locations of fixed assets (by Fixed Asset Location code). -- Filter the inventory lists by other analytics (such as responsible employee). -- Print the forms with inventory lists that show all inventoried fixed assets, as well as lists that show the fixed assets with differences only in quantities or amounts. -- Print unified fixed asset forms. - -## Inventory Lists of Fixed Assets -You must create inventory lists of fixed assets with calculated quantities and amounts for inventory auditing. The lists are divided by analytics such as physical locations and employees responsible for certain fixed assets. - -You can create special templates in the **Fixed Asset Journal** window. - -The following procedure shows how to generate a list of fixed assets that are to be inventoried. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate FA** action. The request form of a report that makes fixed asset inventory lists is displayed. -2. On the **Fixed Asset** FastTab, filter the fixed assets. - - > [!NOTE] - > They can be filtered by any parameter from the Fixed Asset card, such fixed asset location or responsible employee. - -The parameters listed in the following table are on the **Options** FastTab. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|**Fixed Asset Journal Template**|Select the fixed asset journal template to work with the fixed assets list during the inventory auditing process. It is filled by default with the fixed asset journal template.| -|**Depreciation Book Code**|Select the depreciation book with the records, which will be calculated by quantities and amounts.| -|**Starting Document No.**|Specify the document number used to make lines in the fixed asset journal.| -|**Document Date**|Specify the document date.| -|**Posting Date**|Specify the posting date. The quantities and amounts are calculated on this date. The **Posting Date** field is also filled with this value.| -|**Show Fixed Asset with Book Value = 0**|Select this field to create fixed asset journal lines for fixed assets which have a book value of zero.| - -The report creates one batch in the fixed asset journal template for every fixed asset location that is filtered in the request form. For every fixed asset that is filtered, one journal line is created in the batch according to its location. A journal batch is created for fixed assets in each fixed asset location. - -The following procedure shows how to begin inventory auditing by fixed asset locations. - -1. Select the batch according to the fixed asset location, and choose **ОК**. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can view the fixed assets lines that are filtered in the report and the lines that are in this fixed asset location. - -2. Place the columns of the fixed asset journal so that you can view calculated and actual quantities and amounts. They are reflected in the following fields: - - - **Actual Quantity** - - **Calc. Quantity** - - **Actual Amount** - - **Calc. Amount** - -> [!NOTE] -> The amount value is the book value of the fixed asset. - -## Inventory Auditing of Fixed Assets -To begin inventory auditing of fixed assets, create the list of fixed assets to be inventoried in certain fixed asset locations, with calculated quantities and amounts, on the basis of system records. - -## Fixed Asset Physical Inventory INV-1 Report -You can print the **Fixed Asset Physical Inventory INV-1** report, which shows the list of fixed asset journal lines with all inventoried fixed assets filtered in the request form of the report. The report shows the calculated and actual quantities and amounts of inventoried fixed assets. - -The following procedure shows how to print the **Fixed Asset Physical Inventory INV-1** report. - -1. On the **FA Journal Line** FastTab of the request form, filter the fixed asset journal lines to be included in the report. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can filter them by location code to see all fixed assets in a certain physical location, or you can filter them by employee number to see all fixed assets that a certain employee is responsible for. - -2. The filters on the **Journal Template Name** and **Journal Batch Name** fields are filled in by default with the corresponding values from the journal batch from where the report is called. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, set other parameters for the report. All the parameters on this tab are shown on the printing form. - -## Fixed Asset Comparative Sheet INV-18 Report -The **Fixed Asset Comparative Sheet INV-18** report shows the list of fixed asset journal lines, but only those that have differences between calculated and actual quantities or amounts of inventoried fixed assets. The journal lines with inventoried fixed assets can be filtered in the request form of the report. The report shows the calculated and actual quantities and amounts of the inventoried fixed assets. You can print the **Fixed Asset Comparative Sheet INV-18** report. - -The procedure to print the Fixed Asset Comparative Sheet INV-18 report is similar to the Fixed Asset Comparative Sheet INV-1 report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Asset Locations and Employees](fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md deleted file mode 100644 index c68092d1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Fixed Asset Locations and Employees - description: The fixed assets locations and the fixed assets employees feature enable you, among other things, to control the movement of fixed assets and to keep the history of the movements of fixed assets between locations and responsible employees. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fixed Asset Locations and Employees -The fixed assets locations and the fixed assets employees feature enable you to: - -- Control the movement of fixed assets and to keep the history of the movements of fixed assets between locations and responsible employees. - -- Enter the fixed assets location and responsible employee in documents and journals for fixed asset posting. This information is reflected in fixed assets operations. - -- Create reports and calculations that use the history of the movements of fixed assets. You can also connect employees (by default), locations (item location), and regions in an official classification (OKATO code) to any fixed assets location. - -## Setup -The following procedure shows how to make sure the **FA Location Code** and **Employee No.** fields are always filled in for fixed assets. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Setup*, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select the **FA Location Mandatory** check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> When this field is selected, fixed asset posting procedures are controlled as long as they generate fixed asset operations with a non-zero value in the **Quantity** field. - -3. Select the **Employee No. Mandatory** check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> When this field is selected, fixed asset posting procedures are controlled as long as they generate fixed asset operations with a non-zero value in the **Quantity** field. - -## Added Fields -Fields with references to fixed asset locations and responsible employees have been added to the following: - -- Lines of purchase documents -- Fixed asset journals -- Fixed asset G/L journals -- Fixed asset reclassification journals -- Fixed asset acts - -If the **Employee No. Mandatory** or the **FA Location Mandatory** check box is selected in the **Fixed Asset Setup** window, then the fields with references to corresponding tables must be filled in for fixed asset operations. If you enter a value in the **FA Location Code** field in a line, then the **Employee No.** field and **Location Code** field (if it exists in the line) are filled with the corresponding default values from the Fixed Asset Location table. Then the values of the fields can be changed manually. - - When posting the documents and journals, the values of these fields are transferred to the corresponding new fixed asset operations and to corresponding fields in the Fixed Asset cards. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Asset Inventory](fixed-asset-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-turnover.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-turnover.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2a9caa9f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-asset-turnover.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Fixed Asset Turnover - description: The fixed asset turnover feature enables you to control the turnover of fixed assets or certain groups of fixed assets, view useful information about fixed assets in one place, and more. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fixed Asset Turnover -The fixed asset turnover feature enables you to: - -- Control the turnover of fixed assets or certain groups of fixed assets. -- View useful information about fixed assets in one place. -- Compare the posting of one fixed asset in different fixed asset depreciation books. -- Post fixed assets financial results monitoring. - -The following reports and windows are part of fixed assets: - -- **FA Turnover** report -- **Comparing Depr. Book Entries** report -- **FA Sheet** window -- **FA G/L Turnover** window -- **Fixed Asset G/L Turnover** report - -## Fixed Asset Turnover Report -The **FA Turnover** report shows the fixed asset turnover. Use the report to view information such as the fixed asset name, quantity, status, depreciation dates, and amounts. The report can be used as documentation for the correction of quantities or for auditing. - -## Comparing Depreciation Book Entries Report -The **Comparing Depr. Book Entries** report shows the amounts of fixed asset operations of the main types in two selected depreciation books for all selected fixed assets. You can view the amounts of the acquisition cost, write-down, appreciation, and depreciation. The report can be used for auditing the posting of fixed asset operations. - -## Fixed Asset Sheet Window -The **FA Sheet** window shows information similar to the **FA Turnover** report, but in a window. It has some differences in the options set, in extra filtering functionality, and in fields in the layout. The window shows fixed asset turnover. It runs on the basis of fixed asset depreciation books. - -## Fixed Asset General Ledger Turnover Window -The **FA G/L Turnover** window shows financial turnover as a result of fixed asset posting. General ledger entries are the basis for amounts shown in the window. You can define what is shown in the window by setting filters. - -## Fixed Asset General Ledger Turnover Report -The **Fixed Asset G/L Turnover** report is similar to the **FA G/L Turnover** window, but it is in a printing layout, and has differences in the options and in the information and fields that can be shown in the layout. You can define what is included in the report by setting filters. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Asset Locations and Employees](fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md) -[Fixed Asset Charges](fixed-asset-charges.md) -[Fixed Assets](fixed-assets.md) -[Fixed Asset Inventory](fixed-asset-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7573019b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Fixed Assets in Russia -description: In Russia, there are specific [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] features that you can use to track and manage your fixed assets. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Fixed Assets in Russia -In Russia, there are specific [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] features that you can use to track and manage your fixed assets. You can use fixed assets functionality to manage depreciation and maintenance costs, track the movement of fixed assets, manage the sale or disposal of fixed assets, and generate various reports and statistics. - -## Getting Started with Fixed Assets -Use the following table to learn more about the fixed asset features that are available for Russia. - -|Topic|Description| -|-----------|---------------------------------------| -|[How to: Calculate Assessed Tax](how-to-calculate-assessed-tax.md)|Enables you to calculate the assessed tax for fixed assets.| -|[Depreciation Bonus](depreciation-bonus.md)|Enables you to include fixed asset and capital investment expenses in the current period.| -|[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](../../fa-how-setup-depreciation.md)|Enables you to understand and use depreciation methods that are unique to Russia.| -|[Fixed Asset Charges](fixed-asset-charges.md)|Enables you to include additional charges on the purchase of fixed assets in the fixed asset acquisition cost.| -|[Fixed Asset Inventory](fixed-asset-inventory.md)|Enables you to generate, process, filter, and print fixed asset inventory lists for auditing in compliance with legal requirements.| -|[Fixed Asset Locations and Employees](fixed-asset-locations-and-employees.md)|Enables you to manage the movement and history of fixed assets.| -|[Fixed Asset Reclassification](assetId:///c3393fa7-8112-461c-b64c-a639488fa86b)|Enables you to reclassify depreciation books and posting groups for fixed assets.| -|[Fixed Asset Turnover](fixed-asset-turnover.md)|Enables you to manage the turnover of fixed assets.| -|[How to: Create Future Expense Journals](how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md)|Enables you to post expenses to a special account that are later included as expenses.| -|[How to: Allocate and Post Fixed Asset Charges](how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges.md)|Specifies how to allocate and post fixed asset charges.| -|[How to: Create a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md)|Specifies how to create a new fixed asset charge.| -|[How to: Create a Credit Memo for a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge.md)|Specifies how to fix an error on a fixed asset charge of an invoice using a credit memo.| -|[How to: Release, Track, and Write-Off Fixed Assets](how-to-release-track-and-write-off-fixed-assets.md)|Specifies how to release, track, and write-off the fixed assets of your organization.| -|[How to: View Posted Entries on a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge.md)|Specifies how to view all posted fixed asset entries for each fixed asset charge code.| -|[How to: Set Up an Intangible Assets Account](how-to-set-up-an-intangible-assets-account.md)|Enables you to post intangible asset transactions to a special intangible assets account.| -|[How to: Account for the Cost to Dispose a Fixed Asset](how-to-account-for-the-cost-to-dispose-a-fixed-asset.md)|Enables you to account for the cost to dispose a fixed asset as an expense.| -|[Undepreciable Fixed Assets](undepreciable-fixed-assets.md)|Enables you to recognize the complete cost of a fixed asset at the time of acquisition.| diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/future-expenses-deferrals-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/future-expenses-deferrals-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8826832a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/future-expenses-deferrals-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Future Expenses (Deferrals) - description: The future expenses (deferrals) feature enables you to post future expenses to the Future Expenses account, generate a list of future expenses and a card for each expense, to reflect the current status of the expense, and more. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Future Expenses (Deferrals) -The future expenses (deferrals) feature enables you to: - -- Post future expenses to the Future Expenses account. -- Generate a list of future expenses and a card for each expense, to reflect the current status of the expense. -- Purchase a future expense. -- Depreciate a future expense. - -## Purchase of Future Period Expenses -To account for future period expenses, you must: - -- Create a future expenses card. -- Create and post purchase invoices for the future expense. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Future Expense Journals](how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md) - [How to: Create and Post a Purchase Invoice on a Future Expense](how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense.md) - [How to: Set Up a Future Expense Card](how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md) - [How to: Set Up Future Expenses in a Depreciation Book](how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md) - [How to: Calculate Future Period Expenses Depreciation](how-to-calculate-future-period-expenses-depreciation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-journal-extension.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-journal-extension.md deleted file mode 100644 index a8b64d3a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-journal-extension.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: General Journal Extension - description: The general journal extension feature enables you to fill a journal line on a card and to view posted journal lines. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# General Journal Extension -The general journal extension feature enables you to: - -- Fill a journal line in a card. -- View posted journal lines. - -The additional General Journal forms are: - -- General Journal Line Card -- Posted General Journals - -## General Journal Line Card -The **General Journal Line Card** window enables you to fill journal lines on a card. - -The following procedure shows how to fill the journal lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a journal template, and then select the **Archive** check box to indicate that the posted general journal lines are automatically archived. - - Proceed to open the **General Journal**. - -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals **, and then choose the related link. -4. Choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Card** action. -5. Fill in the fields on the card for the general journal lines. - -## Posted General Journals -The **Posted General Journals** window enables you to archive journal lines and view posted journal lines. - -The following procedure shows how to view the posted journal lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the relevant journal batch and review the posted lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-ledger-correspondence.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-ledger-correspondence.md deleted file mode 100644 index 650bd0dd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/general-ledger-correspondence.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: General Ledger Correspondence - description: The general ledger correspondence feature enables you to create a correspondence transaction periodically, post correspondence operations when you post general ledger transactions, and analyze a number of reports for correspondence. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# General Ledger Correspondence -The general ledger correspondence feature enables you to: - -- Create a correspondence transaction periodically. -- Post correspondence operations when you post general ledger transactions. -- Analyze a number of reports for correspondence. - -## Creating a General Ledger Correspondence Entry -The following procedure shows how to periodically create general ledger correspondence entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create G/L Correspondence**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the **Transaction No.** field with the transaction number if general ledger correspondence is to be created only for the selected transaction. Otherwise, leave it blank. - -To set up automatic general ledger correspondence - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Automatic G/L Correspondence** check box. - -## Reports -The following reports have been added for the analysis of data from correspondence transactions: - -- General Ledger Correspondence General Ledger (page 12403; report 12431) -- General Ledger Correspondence Analysis (page 12401) -- General Ledger Correspondence Journal Order (report 12432) -- General Ledger Correspondence Entries Analysis (report 12435) - -### General Ledger Correspondence General Ledger Window -The **General Ledger Correspondence General Ledger** window shows turnovers in the chosen period in correspondence. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Correspondence**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **General Ledger** action. - -The header of the **G/L Corresp. General Ledger** window contains the following filters: - -- Date -- Business unit -- Global Dimension 1 Filter -- Global Dimension 2 Filter - -If you select a turnover in the left subform, the report shows the turnover in correspondence with other accounts in the right subform. - -1. Choose the **General Ledger** action. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, set parameters by filling in the fields with the information listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|--------------|-----------------| -|**Starting Date**|Enter the starting date of the period, for the entries that you want to include in the report.| -|**Ending Date**|Enter the ending date of the period, for the entries that you want to include in the report.| - -### General Ledger Correspondence Entries Analysis Report -The **General Ledger Correspondence Entries Analysis** report shows the correspondence entries for each account. The report can be used to get an overview of general ledger account entries with correspondence and totals. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Correspondence**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Entries Analysis** action. - -On the **Options** tab of the request form, you can set parameters by filling in the fields with the information listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Starting Date**|Enter the starting date of the period, for the entries that you want to include in the report.| -|**Ending Date**|Enter the ending date of the period, for the entries that you want to include in the report.| -|**Other parameters**

**Without Zero Net Changes**

**Without Zero Lines**

**Debit Credit Separately**

**New Page for GL Acc**|Specify the view of the report, such as whether the information for each account should be written without zero lines or net changes.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-account-for-the-cost-to-dispose-a-fixed-asset.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-account-for-the-cost-to-dispose-a-fixed-asset.md deleted file mode 100644 index 427b8dc3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-account-for-the-cost-to-dispose-a-fixed-asset.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Account for the Cost to Dispose a Fixed Asset - description: The maintenance on disposal feature enables you to account for the amount spent to dispose a fixed asset (FA) as an expense. You can post operations related to spending for the disposal of a fixed asset so that they will be reflected in the FA Write-Off Act forms. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Account for the Cost to Dispose a Fixed Asset -The maintenance on disposal feature enables you to account for the amount spent to dispose a fixed asset (FA) as an expense. You can post operations related to spending for the disposal of a fixed asset so that they will be reflected in the FA Write-Off Act forms. - -The expenses of a fixed asset disposal can be posted from general ledger journals, fixed asset journals, and purchase documents. The following procedure shows how to post the expenses for a fixed asset disposal by using the Fixed Asset General Ledger Journal. - -The expenses on a fixed asset disposal can be printed in the FA Write-off Act FA-4 report and the FA Writeoff Act FA-4a report. - -## To set up a maintenance code - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Fixed Asset Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, enter a maintenance code in the **On Disposal Maintenance Code** field. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To post expenses on a fixed asset disposal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Account Type**|Select **Fixed Asset** as the account type.| - |**Account No.**|Specifies the number of the fixed asset for disposal for which the expenses are made.| - |**FA Posting Type**|Select **Maintenance** as the fixed asset posting type.| - |**Maintenance Code**|Specifies the maintenance code that is entered in the **On Disposal Maintenance Code** field of the **Fixed Asset Setup** window.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To print a report with expenses on a fixed asset disposal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Writeoff Act**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **FA Writeoff Act** window, enter the expenses that are posted for the fixed asset. -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the expenses on the disposal of the fixed asset are made in advance, they are displayed on the second page of the report. - -After the fixed asset write-off report is posted, it becomes the posted fixed asset write-off report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges.md deleted file mode 100644 index 99d8143b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-allocate-and-post-fixed-asset-charges.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Allocate and Post Fixed Asset Charges - description: After an invoice has been created you can allocate and post fixed asset charges. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Allocate and Post Fixed Asset Charges -After an invoice has been created you can allocate and post fixed asset charges. The following procedure shows how to allocate and post a fixed asset charge. - -## To allocate and post a fixed asset charge - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Allocate FA Charges**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Source Document Type**|Specify the source document type. Types include **Invoice**, **Order**, and **Posted Invoice**.| - |**Source Document No.**|Specify the source document number that is associated with the fixed asset charge.| - |**Amount**|Specify the amount of the fixed asset charge.| - |**FA Charge No.**|Specify the number of the fixed asset charge.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button, and then post the invoice. If the fixed asset has already been released, lines with the relevant general ledger account will be displayed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-assessed-tax.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-assessed-tax.md deleted file mode 100644 index 84932b3c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-assessed-tax.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Assessed Tax - description: The assessed tax feature enables you to calculate the assessed tax for fixed assets. The assessed tax is based on the information provided in the **Fixed Asset Setup** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Assessed Tax -The assessed tax feature enables you to calculate the assessed tax for fixed assets. The assessed tax is based on the information provided in the **Fixed Asset Setup** window. You can also export the results of the calculated tax as a Microsoft Office Excel template. - -## To calculate assessed tax - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assessed Tax Allowances**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Assessed Tax Allowances** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specifies the code for the assessed tax that is associated with the fixed asset.| - |**Name**|Specifies the name of the assessed tax code.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assessed Tax Codes**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **Assessed Tax Codes** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specifies a code for an assessed tax allowance.| - |**Description**|Specifies a description for the assessed tax code.| - |**Region Code**|Specifies a two-character region code that is used together with the Tax Authority No. field to determine the OKATO code.| - |**Rate %**|Specifies the tax rate for the assessed tax. If there are any tax allowances that reduce the tax rate, they must be included in the rate percentage.| - |**Dec. Rate Tax Allowance Code**|Specifies a code for the assessed tax allowance code that reduces the calculated assessed tax amount according to the tax allowances directory. This code is defined in the **Assessed Tax Allowance** table.| - |**Dec. Amount Tax Allowance Code**|Specifies the amount of an assessed tax allowance.| - |**Decreasing Amount**|Specifies the value to be used in the assessed tax calculation if there is a tax allowance that reduces assessed taxes.| - |**Exemption Tax Allowance**|Specifies a code for an assessed tax allowance exemption. This code is defined in the **Assessed Tax Allowance** table.| - |**Decreasing Amount Type**|Specifies whether the decreasing amount value is a percentage or an amount.| - -6. Choose the **Close** button. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **OKATO Codes**, and then choose the related link. -8. In the **OKATO Codes** window, fill in the **Region Code** and the **Tax Authority No.** fields, and then choose the **OK** button. -9. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -10. On the **Assessed Tax** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Assessed Tax Code**|Specifies the assessed tax code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - |**Property Type**|Specifies the property type of the fixed the fixed asset. Property types include: **Immovable UGSS Property**, **Immovable Distributed Property**, **Other Property**, and **Special Economic Zone Property**.| - |**Book Value per Share**|Specifies the book value of the fixed asset, per share.| - |**OKATO Code**|Specifies the region where the current fixed asset is situated.| - |**Tax Amount Paid Abroad**|Specifies the amount of tax that was paid abroad for the fixed asset.| - -11. Choose the **OK** button. -12. To print the assessed tax declaration, you have to first import the declaration template. In the **Fixed Asset Setup** window, select the template name from the **Templates** FastTab. -13. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Calculate Assessed Tax**, and then choose the related link. -14. In the **Calculate Assessed Tax** window, fill in the **Tax Authority No.**, **Year**, and the **Reporting Period** fields. -15. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) - [Setting Up Fixed Assets](../../fa-setup.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-future-period-expenses-depreciation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-future-period-expenses-depreciation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3f153b2e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-future-period-expenses-depreciation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Future Period Expenses Depreciation - description: The following procedure shows how to calculate future period expenses depreciation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Future Period Expenses Depreciation -The following procedure shows how to calculate future period expenses depreciation. - -## To calculate future period expenses depreciation - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Calculate FE Depreciation**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the **Posting Date** field for the depreciation. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -5. Post the created lines with the calculated depreciation amounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Future Expense Card](how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md) - [Future Expenses (Deferrals)](future-expenses-deferrals-.md) - [How to: Create Future Expense Journals](how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md) - [How to: Set Up Future Expenses in a Depreciation Book](how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md) - [How to: Create and Post a Purchase Invoice on a Future Expense](how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-tax-differences.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-tax-differences.md deleted file mode 100644 index 978bef85..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-calculate-tax-differences.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Tax Differences - description: Tax differences are variations in tax amounts caused by the different rules for recognizing income and expenses between entries for book accounting and tax accounting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Tax Differences -Tax differences are variations in tax amounts caused by the different rules for recognizing income and expenses between entries for book accounting and tax accounting. - -## To calculate tax differences - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Tax Calc.**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Periodicity**|Select **Month**, **Quarter**, or **Year** to define the type of accounting period that is used for tax calculations.| - |**Accounting Period**|Select the appropriate accounting period that is used for tax calculations.| - |**G/L Entries**|Select to calculate tax difference registers based on financial transactions for the period.| - |**Item Entries**|Select to calculate tax difference registers based on item entries for the period.| - |**FA Entries**|Select to calculate tax difference registers based on fixed asset entries for the period.| - |**Templates**|Select to calculate tax difference registers based on data and standards for the tax difference registers counted for the period.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -The tax differences for the period are calculated. You can view the tax difference calculation entries by opening the **Tax Differences** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-combine-customer-or-vendor-cards.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-combine-customer-or-vendor-cards.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2efe4cbc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-combine-customer-or-vendor-cards.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Combine Customer or Vendor Cards - description: The change double links feature enables you to combine two Customer or Vendor cards that belong to one customer or vendor. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Combine Customer or Vendor Cards -The change double links feature enables you to combine two Customer or Vendor cards that belong to one customer or vendor. - -The following procedure shows how to combine the information of two cards. - -## To combine information on vendor or customer cards - -1. Open the customer or vendor card that you want to delete. -2. Choose the **Combine Customers** or the **Combine Vendors** action. - - The **Combine Customer/Vendor** window opens. The **Old Vendor/Customer No.** field is filled in by default with the current customer or vendor card information that you want to delete. - -3. Select a second customer or vendor card in the **New Customer No.** or **New Vendor No.** field. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The old customer or vendor card is deleted, and all documents with the old customer or vendor code are transferred to the new customer or vendor card. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1d5afad2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-credit-memo-for-a-fixed-asset-charge.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create a Credit Memo for a Fixed Asset Charge - description: If you need to fix an error on a fixed asset charge of an invoice, you can post a credit memo for the fixed asset charge. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create a Credit Memo for a Fixed Asset Charge -If you need to fix an error on a fixed asset charge of an invoice, you can post a credit memo for the fixed asset charge. The following procedure shows how to create a credit memo for the fixed asset charge. - -## To create a credit memo for a fixed asset charge - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Credit Memo**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the credit memo information for the erroneous fixed asset charge. -3. Post the credit memo. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also create a credit memo for the fixed asset charge by copying the original invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md deleted file mode 100644 index a56bcbc8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create a Fixed Asset Charge - description: The following procedure shows how to create a new fixed asset charge. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create a Fixed Asset Charge -The following procedure shows how to create a new fixed asset charge. - -## To create a fixed asset charge - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Charge Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specify the fixed asset charge code.| - |**Description**|Specify the description of the fixed asset charge.| - |**Gen. Prod. Posting Group**|Specify the default general product posting group that will be used for the fixed asset charge code.| - |**VAT Prod. Posting Group**|Specify the default VAT product posting group that will be used for the fixed asset charge code.| - |**Global Dimension 1 Code**|Specify the global dimension code that is associated with the fixed asset charge.| - |**Global Dimension 2 Code**|Specify the global dimension code that is associated with the fixed asset charge.| - |**Exclude Cost for TA**|Select if you want to exclude the fixed asset charge from tax accounting.| - |**G/L Acc. For Released FA**|Specify the general ledger account to post the fixed asset charge amount to when the fixed asset is released.| - |**Tax Difference Code FA**|Specify the tax difference code that is associated with the fixed asset charge.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](../../fa-setup.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-additional-sheets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-additional-sheets.md deleted file mode 100644 index f74970cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-additional-sheets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,142 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Additional Sheets - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create additional sheets based on VAT purchase ledgers and VAT sales ledgers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Additional Sheets -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create additional sheets based on VAT purchase ledgers and VAT sales ledgers. - -### To create entries for an additional sheet for a VAT purchase or sales ledger - -1. Select the VAT purchase or sales line in the **VAT Ledger List** window with the required accounting period. - -2. On the **Actions** tab, choose **Functions**, and then choose **Create Additional Sheet**. - -3. Fill in the batch job according to the guidelines at Create VAT Sales Led. Ad. Sh.. - - The parameters for creating a VAT purchase ledger additional sheet and VAT sales ledger additional sheet are the same as the parameters for creating the VAT Purchase Ledger and the VAT Sales Ledger. - -### To print additional sheets on a VAT Purchase Ledger report - -1. In the **VAT Ledger List**, on the **Actions** tab, choose **Print**, and then choose **Additional sheet**. - -2. In the **VAT Purch. Ledger Add. Sheet** window, choose the **Options** tab. - -3. In the **Period Type** field, select one of the following options: - - - **Day** - - - **Month** - - - **Quarter** - - > [!NOTE] - > In the **VAT Ledger** tab, the **Type** field and the **Code** field are automatically created. - -4. Choose **Preview** or choose **Print**. - -### To print additional sheets on a VAT Sales Ledger report - -1. In the **VAT Ledger List**, on the **Actions** tab, choose **Print**, and then choose **Additional sheet**. - -2. In the **VAT Sales Ledger Add. Sheet** window, choose the **Options** tab. - -3. In the **Sorting** field, select one of the following options: - - - **Document Date** - - - **Document No.** - - - **Customer No.** - -4. In the **Period Type** field, select one of the following options: - - - **Day** - - - **Month** - - - **Quarter** - - > [!NOTE] - > In the **VAT Ledger** tab, the **Type** field and the **Code** field are automatically created. - -5. Choose **Preview** or choose **Print**. - -## Creating Corrective Documents to Include in Additional Sheets - The information changed in the tax invoice after the invoice is registered in the previous purchase book must be reflected in the additional sheet of the previous book (corrected book). The additional sheet is part of the purchase book. - - The first line contains the totals of the purchase book at the end of the period when the tax invoice is registered. The next lines are the annulled tax invoices. The annulled tax invoices have a negative sign if the corrected invoice amount is lesser than the initial amount, and a positive sign if the corrected invoice amount is greater than the initial amount. The last line is calculated as the sum of the amounts of the first total line and the annulled tax invoices. - - The information changed in the tax invoice after the invoice is registered in the previous sales book must be reflected in the additional sheet of the previous book (corrected book). The additional sheet is part of the sales book. - - The first line contains totals of the sales book at the end of the period when the tax invoice is registered. The next lines are the annulled tax invoices with a negative sign. The corrected invoices with positive amounts belong to the previous period. The last line is calculated as the sum of the amounts of the first total line, annulled tax invoices, and the corrected invoices. - - Processing of corrective documents for sales book is similar to processing for purchases book with one difference. In additional sheets, the number and the date of initial factura must be reflected. - -#### To create a correction entry for posted purchase credit memos - -1. Create and post a purchase credit memo. - -2. Choose the **VAT** tab. - -3. Select the **Additional VAT Ledger Sheet** field. - -4. Enter information in the following fields: - - - **Corrected Document Date** - - - **Vendor VAT Invoice Date** - - - **Vendor VAT Invoice Rcvd Date** - - - **Vendor VAT Invoice No.** - -#### To create a correction entry for a posted purchase invoice - -1. Create and post a purchase invoice. - -2. Choose the **VAT** tab. - -3. Select the **Corrected Document Date** field. - -4. Enter information in the following fields: - - - **Vendor VAT Invoice Date** - - - **Vendor VAT Invoice Rcvd. Date** - - - **Vendor VAT Invoice No.** - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also create corrective documents in the general journal. General journal lines contain all the fields mentioned above. - -#### To post additional VAT - -1. In the **Sales Invoice** window or the **Credit Memo** window, choose the **VAT** tab. - -2. Enter the **Posting No.** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot post an invoice with the same number as the initial invoice. You must use an extra symbol in addition to the initial number. - -3. Select the **Additional VAT Ledger Sheet** field. - -4. Enter information in the **Corrected Document Date** field. - -5. In the additional sheet, the **Date of Facture** field reflects the corrected document date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Ledgers](vat-ledgers.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense.md deleted file mode 100644 index c6391c32..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-post-a-purchase-invoice-on-a-future-expense.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create and Post a Purchase Invoice on a Future Expense - description: To account for future period expenses, you have to create and post purchase invoices on the future expense. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create and Post a Purchase Invoice on a Future Expense -To account for future period expenses, you have to create and post purchase invoices on the future expense. Be sure you have set up a future expense card before you create a purchase invoice. For more information, see [How to: Set Up a Future Expense Card](how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md). - -## To create and post a purchase invoice on a future expense - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a purchase invoice. -3. In the **Type** field, select **Fixed Asset**. -4. In the **Document No.** field, enter the number of the future expense that was created. -5. Post the purchase invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Future Expense Card](how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md) - [Future Expenses (Deferrals)](future-expenses-deferrals-.md) - [How to: Create Future Expense Journals](how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md) - [How to: Set Up Future Expenses in a Depreciation Book](how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-print-general-ledger-account-turnover.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-print-general-ledger-account-turnover.md deleted file mode 100644 index 34d7ffcd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-and-print-general-ledger-account-turnover.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create and Print General Ledger Account Turnover - description: Russian enhancements enable you to create general ledger account turnover information in the **G/L Account Turnover** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create and Print General Ledger Account Turnover -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to create general ledger account turnover information in the **G/L Account Turnover** window. - - You can then verify this information in the following reports: - -- **G/L Account Turnover** -- **G/L Account Card** -- **G/L Account Entries Analysis** - -## To create a general ledger account turnover entry - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Account Turnover**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Date Filter**|Enter the date filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Business Unit Filter**|Select the business unit filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Department Filter**|Select the department filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Incexp Filter**|Select the income and expenses filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Switch Debit/Credit**|Specify if you want to show the debit and credit balance for the account.| - -3. On the **Source** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Source Type Filter**|Specify the source type filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Source No. Filter**|Select the source number filter for which you want to view account information.| - -## To print the general ledger account turnover report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Account Turnover**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Rounding Precision**|Specify the interval that you want to use as the rounding difference for the relevant currency.| - |**Replace zero values by blanks**|Select if you want to replace zero values with a blank entry.| - |**Skip accounts without net changes**|Select to exclude the accounts that do not have net changes.| - |**Skip accounts without zero ending balance**|Select to exclude the accounts that do have zero ending balances.| - |**Skip zero lines**|Select to exclude lines with zero values.| - -## To print the general ledger account card report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Account Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Correspondence**|Select if you want to show general ledger correspondence information on the report.| - |**New Page for GL Acc**|Select if you want to print a new page for each general ledger account.| - |**Including Closing Period Entries**|Select if you want to include the closing period entries on the report.| - -## To print the general ledger account entries analysis report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Account Entries Analysis**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Without Zero Net Changes**|Select to include the entries that do not have zero net changes.| - |**Without Zero Lines**|Select to include the entries that do not have zero lines.| - |**Debit Credit Separately**|Select if you want to separate the debit and credit entries on the report.| - |**New Page for GL Acc**|Select if you want to print a new page for each general ledger account.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-cash-account-cards.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-cash-account-cards.md deleted file mode 100644 index 606628c7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-cash-account-cards.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Cash Account Cards - description: Cash accounts are similar to bank accounts and are created identically. You can create as many cash account cards as needed. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Cash Account Cards -Cash accounts are similar to bank accounts and are created identically. You can create as many cash account cards as needed. - -## To create a cash account card - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cash Account Card** window, fill in the fields on the **Posting** FastTab as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Currency Code**|Specifies the currency code that is associated with the cash account.| - |**Debit Cash Order No. Series**|Specifies the serial numbers for outgoing cash orders.| - |**Credit Cash Order No. Series**|Specifies the serial numbers for ingoing cash orders.| - |**Last Cash Report Page No.**|Specifies the last printed cash additional sheet report page number.| - |**Bank Acc. Posting Group**|Specifies the bank account posting group that is associated with the cash account.| - |**VAT % for Document**|Specifies the VAT percentage for calculating VAT in cash or bank documents. This VAT percentage is not used in VAT posting calculations.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Petty Cash Management](petty-cash-management.md) - [Bank and Cash Management](bank-and-cash-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-corrective-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-corrective-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1c01b8c4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-corrective-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Corrective Documents - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create corrective invoices and credit memos to reflect a change in the invoiced amount or quantity. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Corrective Documents -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create corrective invoices and credit memos to reflect a change in the invoiced amount or quantity. - - You can also create revision documents if you discover a mistake in an issued invoice or credit memo. - - The following procedure shows how to create a corrective sales invoice, but the same steps apply to sales credit memos, purchase invoices, and purchase credit memos. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot create corrective documents for service documents. - -## To create a corrective invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Corrective Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](../../includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - Some fields are filled in automatically when you select a customer. Other fields you must fill in manually. You must make sure that the values of fields such as **Prices Including VAT** and **Currency Code**, relevant dimensions, and so on are the same in the corrective document as in the original invoice. - - > [!NOTE] - > On the **Invoicing** tab, fill in the **Agreement No.** field if you have set up an agreement. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Customer and Vendor Agreements](how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md). - -3. On the **VAT** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Additional VAT Ledger Sheet**|Optionally, select to include this document in the additional VAT ledger. For more information, see [VAT Ledgers](vat-ledgers.md).| - |**Corrected Document Date**|If you selected the **Additional VAT Ledger Sheet** field, specify the posting date of the document that you are correcting.

This ensures that the original invoice is listed as canceled in the additional sheet for the sales VAT book in the relevant report period.| - |**Corrective Document**|Select to make this document a corrective document.| - |**Corrective Doc. Type**|Choose **Correction** to make this a correction to an invoice.| - |**Corrected Doc. Type**|Specify if the original document was an invoice or a credit memo.| - |**Corrected Doc. No.**|Specify the original document.

Depending on the value of the **Corrected Doc. Type** field, you can select a posted invoice or a posted credit memo.| - |**Revision No.**|Optionally, specify a revision number if this document is a revision of a corrective document.| - -4. Choose the **Get Corr. Doc. Lines** action. -5. In the **Sales Invoice Lines** window, select the lines that you want to add to the corrective documents, and then choose the **OK** button. -6. In the dialog box that appears, specify if the correction if for quantity or price. -7. Make the appropriate changes to the document lines. For example, to change the invoiced amount, change the value of the **Amount (After)** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the document line is for an item, you can only change the value of the **Amount (After)** field. If the document line is for an item charge, you can change the value of the **Quantity (After)** field and the **Amount (After)** field. - -8. Post the document. - - The posted document is included in the list of posted invoices. This means that you can select it in the **Corrected Doc. No.** field if you must create a correction for this corrected document. - -The following procedure describes how to create a revision for a posted sales invoice but the same steps apply to sales credit memos, purchase invoices, purchase credit memos, and corrective documents. - -## To create a revision document for a sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Choose the **Copy Document** action. -4. In the **Copy Sales Document** window, fill in the fields to import information from the original sales invoice. - - > [!NOTE] - > Select the **Include Header** field. - -5. On the **VAT** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Additional VAT Ledger Sheet**|Optionally, select to include this document in the additional VAT ledger. For more information, see [VAT Ledgers](vat-ledgers.md).| - |**Corrected Document Date**|If you selected the **Additional VAT Ledger Sheet** field, specify the posting date of the document that you are revising.

This ensures that the original invoice is listed as canceled in the additional sheet for the sales VAT book in the relevant report period.| - |**Corrective Document**|Select to make this document a corrective document.| - |**Corrective Doc. Type**|Choose **Revision** to make this a revision document.| - |**Corrected Doc. Type**|Specify if the original document was an invoice or a credit memo.| - |**Corrected Doc. No.**|Specify the original document.

Depending on the value of the **Corrected Doc. Type** field, you can select a posted invoice or a posted credit memo.| - |**Revision No.**|Specify a revision number.

The revision number is not used by [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], but it is included in the printed document.| - -6. Make the relevant changes to the document lines. -7. Post the document. - -The posted document is included in the list of posted invoices. This means that you can select it in the **Corrected Doc. No.** field if you must create a correction for this corrected document. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Corrective Documents](corrective-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8ef9af2c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Future Expense Journals - description: Future expense journals are used to post expenses to a special account on a monthly basis. These future expenses are later included as expenses. VAT is deducted when future expenses are included in current expenses. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Future Expense Journals -Future expense journals are used to post expenses to a special account on a monthly basis. These future expenses are later included as expenses. VAT is deducted when future expenses are included in current expenses. - -You must select **Future Expenses** in the **Type** field of the **General Journal Templates** window. In addition, be sure you select the **Recurring** and **Copy VAT Setup to Jnl. Lines** check boxes in the **General. Journal Templates** window. - -## To create future expense journals - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. - - Use the **VAT Posting Setup** window to create VAT posting groups. For more information, see [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md). -2. On the **Settlement** FastTab, in the **VAT Settlement Template** field, select a template. -3. Select a batch in the **VAT Settlement Batch** field. This determines the batch where future expenses and VAT will be produced. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -5. Create a purchase invoice for the Deferral general ledger account (97). -6. Create and post the payment and apply the invoice and payment. - - VAT is not deducted at this time. It is deducted later, on a monthly basis through the Future Expense Journal. - -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Future Expense Journals**, and then choose the related link. -8. In the **Future Expense Journal** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**FA Posting Date**|Specifies the fixed asset posting date that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Document No.**|Specifies the document number that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**FA No.**|Specifies the fixed asset number that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Depreciation Book Code**|Specifies the depreciation book code that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**FA Posting Type**|Specifies the fixed asset posting type that is associated with the future expense journal. Fixed asset posting types include **Acquisition Cost**, **Depreciation**, **Write-Down**, **Appreciation**, **Custom 1**, **Custom 2**, **Disposal**, **Maintenance**, **Salvage Value**, and **Transfer**.| - |**Description**|Specifies the description that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Location Code**|Specifies the location code that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Amount**|Specifies the amount that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Depr. Amount w/o Normalization**|Specifies the depreciation amount without normalizations that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Actual Quantity**|Specifies the actual quantity that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Calc. Quantity**|Specifies the calculated quantity that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Actual Amount**|Specifies the actual amount that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Calc. Amount**|Specifies the calculated amount that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Actual Remaining Amount**|Specifies the actual remaining amount that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Salvage Amount**|Specifies the salvage amount that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**No. of Depreciation Days**|Specifies the number of depreciation days that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**Depr. Until FA Posting Date**|Specifies if the depreciation until fixed asset posting date is used with the future expense journal.| - |**Depr. Acquisition Cost**|Specifies if the depreciation acquisition cost is used with the future expense journal.| - |**Duplicate in Depreciation Book**|Specifies the duplicate in depreciation book that is associated with the future expense journal.| - |**FA Error Entry No.**|Specifies the fixed asset error entry number that is associated with the future expense journal.| - -9. Choose the **Post** action. - -The amount entered in the **Amount** field will be transferred from the Future Expenses account to the Current Expenses account. VAT will be calculated according to VAT setup (percentage) on the basis of the posted amount, and VAT deduction (realized VAT) will be posted. - -## See Also - [How to: Set Up a Future Expense Card](how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md) - [Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-statutory-report-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-statutory-report-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4026ed96..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-statutory-report-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Statutory Report Data - description: After you have defined the statutory reports that are required by the tax authorities, you can create the report data and generate files that you can submit to the authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Statutory Report Data -After you have defined the statutory reports that are required by the tax authorities, you can create the report data and generate files that you can submit to the authorities. - -## To create report data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Statutory Reports**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the statutory report that you want to create data for, and then choose the **Create Report Data** action. -3. In the **Create Report Data** window, fill in the fields. - - The **Creation Date** field is automatically set to the work date, but you can change this. - - The **Periodicity** field is set depending on the value of the **Report Type** field for the report. - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -This generates data for the report. Now, you can verify the data before you submit the statutory report. - -## To verify report data - -1. In the **Statutory Reports** window, select the statutory report that you want to create data for, and then choose the **Report Data** action. - - The **Report Data List** window contains a line for each set of report data that you have created for this statutory report. - -2. In the **Report Data List** window, select the set of report data that you want to verify, and then choose the **Overview** action. -3. In the **Statutory Report Data Overview** window, set the appropriate filters, and then choose the **Show Data** action. - - This opens a window that displays the data based on your filters. You can verify the report data before you generate the files for the statutory report. If you want to make changes, you must create the report data again. - -4. After you have verified that the report data is correct, choose the **OK** button. - - You can repeat these steps for all combinations of filters. - -Now, you can submit the report by generating a file that is based on the setup for the statutory report. - -## Generating Statutory Reports -Before you generate a statutory report, you should verify that the data is correct in the **Report Data List** window. Also, you should make sure that the statutory report is set up correctly in the **Statutory Reports** window. Before you do this, you must release the report data. - -### To release the report data for a statutory report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Statutory Reports**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the statutory report that you want to generate, and then choose the **Report Data** action. -3. Select the report data, and then choose the **Release** action. - -Now, you can generate the statutory report. - -### To generate a statutory report - -1. In the **Statutory Reports** window, select the statutory report that you want to generate, and then choose the **Report Data** action. - - Depending on the statutory report, you must export to Microsoft Excel or generate an XML file. - -2. To export to Microsoft Excel, select the report data, and then choose the **Export to Excel** action. - - This creates a Microsoft Excel workbook that has the data that you created for this statutory report. - -3. To export to an XML file, select the report data, and then choose the **Export Electronic File** action. - - This creates an XML file that has the data that you created for this statutory report. - -Now, you can submit the report. For more information, see [Statutory Reporting Directives](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=216142) on the Federal Tax Services website. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Statutory Reports](statutory-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Statutory Reports](how-to-set-up-statutory-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-tax-registers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-tax-registers.md deleted file mode 100644 index ee3df77b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-tax-registers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Tax Registers - description: The following procedure shows how to create tax registers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Tax Registers -The following procedure shows how to create tax registers. - -1. Choose **Financial Management**, choose **Tax Accounting**, choose **Setup**, choose **Tax Register**s, and then choose **Sections**. - -2. In the **Tax Register Sections** window, choose the **Functions** button. - -3. Select one of the following fields: - - - **Copy Section** -Copies data from one tax register to another. - - - **Clear Registers** -Clears data already created in the tax registers and is used for debugging conditions to re-count tax registers. - - - **Create Registers** -Creates data in the tax registers. - -4. To create data, choose **Create Register**. The **Tax Register Create** window opens. - -5. On the **General** tab, enter the fields described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Periodicity** | Enter a period to create data in tax accounting registers. The allowed values are:

- **Month**
- **Quarter**
- **Year** **Note:** If you select a month, the data in the selected registers will be created especially for that month. If you select a quarter, the data will be created for each of the three months of that quarter. If you select a year, the data will be created for each of the 12 months of that year. | - | **Accounting Period** | The value entered in this field depends on the value selected in the Periodicity field. Select the accounting period (**Month**, **Quarter**, or **Year**). | - | **From, To** | These fields are filled in automatically and show start and end dates of the chosen period. | - | **G/L Entries, Vend's/Cust's, Items, Fixed Asset, Fut. Exp., Payroll, Templates** | Select the fields to calculate registers of the appropriate type. | - | **Status** | This field displays information about the version of the tax register. | - | **Starting Date, Ending Date** | This field displays the dates given when setting the tax register version. | - - -6. Choose **OK** to create the tax register. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the creation of registers for an already counted period is selected, a warning is displayed. At this stage of the tax register creation, it is possible either to continue counting and delete all existing data, or stop. - -7. To view the calculated information in the **Tax Register Accumulation** window, choose **Financial Management**, choose **Tax Accounting**, choose **Reporting,** and then choose **Profit Tax**. - -8. Using the register list, you can view the contents of any register or using the arrows at the top of the window, you can view the information going from one register to another. - -9. With the arrows and buttons in the lower-left corner of the window, you can view the contents of the registers for previously counted periods. - -10. Choose the **Drill-down** button in the **Amount** field to view the sources based on which this was counted. A source can be a tax register or a list of transactions forming this amount, depending on the settings. If the source forming the sum is a tax register, choose the **Drill-down** button to open the window where the source tax register information is displayed. Then choose the **Drill-down** button in the **Amount** field on this form to get a list of transactions forming the amount. - -11. Select a document and choose **Navigate** to get all the transactions of the selected document. - -12. Choose **Show** to view all the transactions of any entry ledger that is created. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Set Up Tax Register Sections](how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md) - [Collecting Profit Tax Information for Tax Declaration](collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-1-report-for-acceptance-of-goods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-1-report-for-acceptance-of-goods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 12cc944c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-1-report-for-acceptance-of-goods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create the TORG-1 Report for Acceptance of Goods - description: The TORG-1 report is used for the registration of incoming goods. This report lists receipts with quantity, quality, mass, and package contents according to the terms of an agreement. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create the TORG-1 Report for Acceptance of Goods -The TORG-1 report is used for the registration of incoming goods. This report lists receipts with quantity, quality, mass, and package contents according to the terms of an agreement. Depending on your setup, the batch job can be run when you choose the **Print** button in document windows such as the **Purchase Order** window. - -## To create the TORG-1 report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Receipts Act TORG-1**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Actual Quantity**|Specifies if the TORG-1 report must include actual quantities for received items.| - |**Order No.**|Specifies the document number.| - |**Order Date**|Specifies the document date.| - |**Operation Type**|Specifies the report type.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-2-report-for-registering-mismatched-receipts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-2-report-for-registering-mismatched-receipts.md deleted file mode 100644 index a0d90ad4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-2-report-for-registering-mismatched-receipts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create the TORG-2 Report for Registering Mismatched Receipts - description: The TORG-2 report is used to document inconsistencies for deviations of received goods that are not imported. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create the TORG-2 Report for Registering Mismatched Receipts -The TORG-2 report is used to document inconsistencies for deviations of received goods that are not imported. - -## To create the TORG-2 report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Receipt Deviations TORG-2**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Order No.**|Specifies the document number.| - |**Order Date**|Specifies the document date.| - |**Operation Type**|Specifies the report type.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-29-goods-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-29-goods-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index bdc26122..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-the-torg-29-goods-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create the TORG-29 Goods Report - description: The TORG-29 report shows the item documents that you can use to submit for receipts and shipments for a location. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create the TORG-29 Goods Report -The TORG-29 report shows the item documents that you can use to submit for receipts and shipments for a location. - -When you run the report for a location, the **Last Goods Report No.** and **Last Goods Report Date** fields in the **Location Card** window are updated to ensure consistent reporting. - -## To create the TORG-29 report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Report TORG-29**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Location Code**|Specifies the location that the report is for.| - |**Report No.**|Specifies the number of times that the report has printed based on the value of the **Last Goods Report No.** field in the **Location Card** window.| - |**Responsible Employee**|Specifies the employee who is responsible for the validity of the data in the report.| - |**Report Acceptor**|Specifies the employee who is responsible for accepting the report.| - |**Report Date**|Specifies the date of the report.| - |**Start Date**|Specifies the start date for the report.| - |**End Date**|Specifies the start date for the report.| - |**Operation Type**|Optionally, specifies the type of operation. This information will be included in the report.| - |**Attaches No.**|Specifies the number of attachments to the report.| - |**Receipt Detailing**|Specifies what the detailed information for each entry is based on.

If you select **Document**, amounts are totaled for each document. If you select **Item**, the amount and quantity are totaled for each item. If you select **Operation**, the amount and quantity are included in a single transaction.| - |**Shipment Detailing**|Specifies what the detailed information for each entry is based on.

If you select **Total Amount**, the report summarizes amounts in a single line. If you select **Document**, amounts are totaled for each document. If you select **Item**, the amount and quantity are totaled for each item. If you select **Operation**, the amount and quantity are included in a single transaction.| - |**Amount Type**|Specifies what the amounts are based on, cost or sales price.

If you set this field to **Sales Price**, the **Sales Type**, **Show Cost Amount for Receipts**, and **Show Cost Amounts for Shipment** fields become available.| - |**Sales Type**|Specifies the type of price list.

If you select **Customer Price List** or **Campaign**, you can select the price list in the **Sales Code** field. If you select **All Customers**, a unified price list is used.| - |**Sales Code**|Specifies the price list. Depending on the selection in the **Sales Type** field, you can specify either a customer price group or a campaign number.| - |**Show Cost Amount for Receipts**|Specifies if each receipt line must be divided into two lines. If selected, the first line for a receipt represents item cost, and the second line represents the sales margin.| - |**Show Cost Amounts for Shipment**|Specifies if each shipment line must be divided into two lines. If selected, the first line for a receipt represents the item cost, and the second line represents the sales margin.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-entry-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-entry-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index c609f2b3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-entry-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create VAT Entry Codes - description: Invoices must specify a VAT entry type code. The VAT entry type codes are based on a list that is established by legislation. Some types of documents, such as corrective or revision invoices, have several codes from the list. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create VAT Entry Codes -Invoices must specify a VAT entry type code. The VAT entry type codes are based on a list that is established by legislation. Some types of documents, such as corrective or revision invoices, have several codes from the list. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> VAT entry type codes are not supported for service documents. - -## To set up VAT Type Codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Entry Types**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Entry Types** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify a unique code for the VAT entry type. The code must be two characters long.| - |**Description**|Specify a description of the VAT entry.| - |**Comment**|Specify a comment, such as a description of when the code must be used.

The maximum length of the comment is 250 characters.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT](vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7ef4f321..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create VAT Ledgers - description: You can create and store any number of VAT ledgers, such as for different groups of customers, for additional sales ledgers for amount differences and prepayments, and for joint sales ledgers for the whole company. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create VAT Ledgers -You can create and store any number of VAT ledgers. For example, you can create the following: - -- Sales ledgers for different groups of customers -- Additional sales ledgers for amount differences and prepayments -- Joint sales ledgers for the whole company - -## To create a VAT ledger - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Ledger List**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Ledger List** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Type**|Select the type of VAT ledger.| - |**Code**|Enter the code of the number series that is used for the VAT ledger. You can view the available codes in the **No. Series** window.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the VAT ledger.| - |**Accounting Period**|Enter the accounting period of the VAT ledger. You can view the available accounting periods in the **Accounting Periods** window.| - |**Start Date**|Specifies the start date of the accounting period of the VAT ledger.| - |**End Date**|Specifies the end date of the accounting period of the VAT ledger.| - -3. To add lines to the VAT ledger, choose the **Create** action. -4. In the **Create VAT Purchase Ledger** or the **Create VAT Sales Ledger** window, fill in the fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The VAT ledger is now created and available for use. - -5. To view the VAT ledger, choose the **Card** action. - -Now, you can print the VAT ledger as a VAT ledger or as an additional sheet. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Ledgers](vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Set Up VAT Ledgers](how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Create Additional Sheets](how-to-create-additional-sheets.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant.md deleted file mode 100644 index fd706b5d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Define an Account Schedule Constant - description: Russian enhancements enable you to define a constant for an account schedule line. Constants are useful if an account schedule value does not change. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Define an Account Schedule Constant -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to define a constant for an account schedule line. Constants are useful if an account schedule value does not change. - -## To define an account schedule constant - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedule**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Name** field, select the account schedule for which you want to define a constant. -3. In the **Row No.** field, select the number of the account schedule row for which you want to define a constant. -4. In the **Totaling Type** field, select **Constant**, and then enter a constant value in the **Totaling** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Account Schedules](../../bi-how-work-account-schedule.md) - [Account Schedules Overview](account-schedules-overview.md) - [How to: Define an Account Schedule Extension](how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension.md deleted file mode 100644 index 72a45539..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-an-account-schedule-extension.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Define an Account Schedule Extension - description: Russian enhancements enable you to define an extension for an account schedule line. Extensions are useful if you want to filter the data of your general ledger accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Define an Account Schedule Extension -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to define an extension for an account schedule line. Extensions are useful if you want to filter the data of your general ledger accounts. - -## To define an account schedule extension - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedule**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Name** field, select the account schedule for which you want to define an extension. -3. In the **Row No.** field, select the number of the account schedule row for which you want to define an extension. -4. In the **Totaling Type** field, select **Custom**, and then select the table that you want to use from the **Extension Source Table** field. - -Based on your selections, the account schedule information is filtered from the entry tables, and then new amounts are calculated for the specified account schedule line. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Account Schedules](../../bi-how-work-account-schedule.md) - [Account Schedules Overview](account-schedules-overview.md) - [How to: Define an Account Schedule Constant](how-to-define-an-account-schedule-constant.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-tax-registers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-tax-registers.md deleted file mode 100644 index c328b6db..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-define-tax-registers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Define Tax Registers - description: Tax registers are used to track and manage taxable profits and losses in accordance with Russian tax accounting principles. You can use the **Tax Register Card** window to define how tax registers calculate taxable profits and losses and record the results. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Define Tax Registers -Tax registers are used to track and manage taxable profits and losses in accordance with Russian tax accounting principles. You can use the **Tax Register Card** window to define how tax registers calculate taxable profits and losses and record the results. - -## To define tax registers - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Register Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies the entry number that is assigned to the tax register.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the tax register.| - |**Level**|Specifies the parent/child relationship between tax registers. Top-level parent tax registers should be **0**.| - |**Costing Method**|Select the inventory valuation costing method that is used for the tax register.| - |**G/L Corr. Analysis View Code**|Select the code of the general ledger correspondence analysis view that you want to use for the tax register.| - -3. On the **Register Lines** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Line Code**|Enter a code to identify the tax register line.| - |**Account Type**|Select the account type of the tax register line. Options include **Correspondence** and **G/L Account**.| - |**Amount Type**|Select the amount type of the tax register line. Options include **Debit**, **Credit**, and **Net Change**.| - |**Account No.**|Enter the general ledger account number for the tax register line.| - |**Bal. Account No.**|Enter the general ledger balance account number for the tax register line. The calculated tax register line balance amount will be stored in this account.| - |**Dimensions Filters**|Specifies if a dimension filter has been entered for the tax register line. If a dimension filter has been entered, the value will be **Present**.| - |**G/L Corr. Dimensions Filters**|Specifies if a general ledger correspondence dimension filter has been entered for the tax register line. If a dimension filter has been entered, the value will be **Present**.| - -4. On the **Template Line** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Line Code**|Enter a code to identify the tax register template line.| - |**Expression**|Enter a formula for the tax register template line.| - |**Term Line Code**|Enter the tax register line code that is used for the template line.| - |**Dimensions Filters**|Specifies if a dimension filter has been entered for the tax register template line. If a dimension filter has been entered, the value will be **Present**.| - |**G/L Corr. Dimensions Filters**|Specifies if a general ledger correspondence dimension filter has been entered for the tax register template line. If a dimension filter has been entered, the value will be **Present**.| - -5. Choose the **Close** button to close the window and save your entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7f9afd3e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter Custom Declarations Information - description: Use the following procedure to enter custom declaration information. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter Custom Declarations Information -Use the following procedure to enter custom declaration information. - -## To enter custom declarations information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Custom Declarations**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Custom Declaration** window, fill in the fields. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies the custom declaration number.| - |**Description**|Specifies the description of the custom declaration number.| - |**Source Type**|Select the source type for the custom declaration. Source types include **Blank**, **Customer**, **Vendor**, and **Item**.| - |**Source No.**|Specifies the source number from one of the following tables:

- **Customer**
- **Vendor**
- **Item List**| - |**Country of Origin Code**|Specifies the country/region for the customer if all the items in the custom declarations have come from the same country/region. Information from this field is copied to the custom declaration lines.| - |**Declaration Date**|Enter the date of the custom declaration.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Print the Factura-Invoice](how-to-print-the-factura-invoice.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-import-and-export-account-schedules.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-import-and-export-account-schedules.md deleted file mode 100644 index 77eef77f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-import-and-export-account-schedules.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import and Export Account Schedules - description: Russian enhancements enable you to import and export account schedules into other companies and databases. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import and Export Account Schedules -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to import and export account schedules into other companies and databases. - -## To import and export account schedules - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedule Names** or **Account Schedules**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Account Schedule Names**or **Account Schedules** window, choose the **Import Settings** or the **Export Settings** action. An extensible markup language (XML) file will be created for the import or export. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you import account schedules, all existing records with primary key values that are equal to imported values will be deleted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Account Schedules](../../bi-how-work-account-schedule.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-red-storno-corrections.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-red-storno-corrections.md deleted file mode 100644 index b2ba519d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-red-storno-corrections.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Red Storno Corrections - description: You can set up inventory to use the same column for original and corrective postings. This is often referred to as *red storno*. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Red Storno Corrections -You can set up inventory to use the same column for original and corrective postings. This is often referred to as *red storno*. You can use red storno posting to post the following inventory entries: - -- Corrective entries in the item journal. -- Reversal of item documents such as item receipts and item shipments. -- Posting item revaluation or item reclassification journals. -- Periodic adjustments of item costs. - -> [!NOTE] -> You must enable red storno in the **Inventory Setup** window before you can post corrective entries. For more information, see [Inventory Setup](inventory-setup.md). - -## To post corrective entries in the item journal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Entry Type**|Select the same entry type as the original posting.| - |**Quantity**|Enter the quantity with the opposite sign of the original posting, such as **-4**.| - |**Red Storno**|Select to post as a corrective posting.| - - You must also select the appropriate entries in the **Applies-to Entry** or **Applies-from Entry** fields. - -3. Post the journal. - -The correction is posted, and any general ledger account correspondence that you have set up will be considered. - -## To reverse item documents - -1. To reverse an item receipt, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Receipt**, and then choose the related link. - - To reverse an item shipment, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Shipment**, and then choose the related link. - -2. On the **General** FastTab, select the **Correction** check box. -3. Choose the **Copy Document** action. -4. In the **Copy Document** window, set the appropriate filters, and then choose the **OK** button. -5. Make the needed changes to quantity and amounts. - - You must also select the appropriate entries in the **Applies-to Entry** or **Applies-from Entry** fields. These fields identify the incorrectly posted document. - -6. Post the document. - -## To post item revaluation or item reclassification journals - -1. To post an item revaluation, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Revaluation Journal**, and then choose the related link. - - To post an item reclassification, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclass Journal**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Applies-to Entry**|Specifies the item entry that you want to revalue or reclassify.| - |**Applies-from Entry**|Specifies the item entry that you want to revalue or reclassify.| - |**Red Storno**|Select to post as a corrective posting.| - -3. Post the document. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-tax-differences.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-tax-differences.md deleted file mode 100644 index d3836b6c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-post-tax-differences.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Tax Differences - description: The **Tax Difference Journal** is used to create and post tax difference transactions. Tax differences are variations in tax amounts caused by the different rules for recognizing income and expenses between entries for book accounting and tax accounting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Tax Differences -The **Tax Difference Journal** is used to create and post tax difference transactions. Tax differences are variations in tax amounts caused by the different rules for recognizing income and expenses between entries for book accounting and tax accounting. - -You can use the **Tax Difference Journal** window to manually create tax difference journal entries or you can modify existing entries created by periodic tax difference calculation activities. When you post the **Tax Difference Journal** window, tax differences entries are posted to the selected posting groups. - -## To post tax differences - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Difference Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Posting Date**|Enter the transaction date.| - |**Document No.**|Enter the document number from the source transaction.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the transaction.| - |**Tax Diff. Type**|Select if the tax difference is **Constant** or **Temporary**.| - |**Tax Diff. Code**|Select an identifying income or expense code that defines the source of the tax difference.| - |**Source Type**|Select the source of tax difference. The options include **Future Expense**, **Fixed Asset**, and **Intangible Asset**.| - |**Source No.**|If the **Source Type** is **Future Expense**, enter an identifying code for the future period expenses. Otherwise, leave this field blank.| - |**Jurisdiction Code**|Select the identifying code for the jurisdiction that is used to calculate taxable profits and losses for tax differences.| - |**Norm Code**|Select the identifying code for the norm jurisdiction that is used to calculate taxable profits and losses for the tax differences.| - |**Tax Factor**|Enter the profit tax rate that is used to calculate tax differences.| - |**Amount (Base)**|Enter an expense amount based on book accounting transactions. This information is used if the tax difference calculation is for a set period of time.| - |**Amount (Tax)**|Enter an expense amount based on tax accounting transactions. This information is used if the tax difference calculation is for a set period of time.| - |**Difference**|Enter the value of the difference between the book accounting and tax accounting transactions.| - |**YTD Amount (Base)**|Enter the year-to-date value of the expense or income amount based on the book accounting data.| - |**YTD Amount (Tax)**|Enter the year-to-date value of the expense or income amount based on the tax accounting data.| - |**YTD Difference**|Enter the year-to-date value of the difference between the book accounting and tax accounting transactions.| - |**Tax Diff. Calc. Mode**|Specifies the difference of the counting mode. If **Balance** is selected, the difference will be calculated by a creating total starting from the start of the year. If not selected, the difference will be created for the current period.| - |**Tax Amount**|Specifies the counting result. The value of this field will correct the profit tax in the book accounting transactions.| - |**Asset Tax Amount**|Specifies the calculated asset tax amount.| - |**Liability Tax Amount**|Specifies the calculated liability tax amount.| - |**Disposal Tax Amount**|Specifies the tax amount that is written off at disposal of an item.| - |**DTA Starting Balance**|Specifies the starting disposal tax amount before counting.| - |**DTL Starting Balance**|Specifies the starting disposal tax liability amount before counting.| - |**DTA Ending Balance**|Specifies the disposal tax amount after counting.| - |**DTL Ending Balance**|Specifies the disposal tax liability amount after counting.| - |**Disposal Mode**|Select if you want to write down the tax difference or transform it into a constant difference.| - |**Disposal Date**|Enter the date of the item’s disposal.| - |**Partial Disposal**|Select if you want to dispose of an item that causes differences in the expense or income code. If this field is not selected, the tax differences are written off.| - -3. Choose the **Post** action. The tax difference journal transaction is posted. -4. Choose the **Ledger Entries** action to open the **Tax Diff. Ledger Entry** window and review the posted entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) - [Setting up Tax Difference Calculation](setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md) - [Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7618bcc6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Prepare VAT Entries for Posting - description: You may want to periodically remit the net VAT from sales and purchase transactions to the tax authorities. You can use the **VAT Settlement Worksheet** to prepare transactions with open VAT amounts for posting and copy the entries to the appropriate VAT settlement journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Prepare VAT Entries for Posting -You may want to periodically remit the net VAT from sales and purchase transactions to the tax authorities. You can use the **VAT Settlement Worksheet** to prepare transactions with open VAT amounts for posting and copy the entries to the appropriate VAT settlement journal. This is typically done before you run the **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement** batch job to post and close VAT entries. - -## To prepare VAT entries for posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Settlement Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the filters that define the VAT related transactions that you want to include in the VAT settlement. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Type**|Select the type of transactions that you want to include in the VAT settlement.| - |**View by**|Select the time period for the VAT settlement.| - |**View as**|Select how you want to view the net VAT. The options include **Net Change** and **Balance at Date**.| - -3. Choose **Suggest Documents**. Transactions with open VAT entries that match the filters that you selected will be displayed. -4. Review the transactions that are included to ensure accuracy. If necessary, adjust your filter selection. -5. Choose **Copy Lines to Journal**. - -The entries are copied to the appropriate VAT settlement journals. You can now run the **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement** batch job to close the VAT entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 74ca045e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Cash Order Journal CO-3 Report - description: The **Cash Order Journal CO-3** report shows the unified standard printing form (typically on a monthly basis). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Cash Order Journal CO-3 Report -The **Cash Order Journal CO-3** report shows the unified standard printing form (typically on a monthly basis). - -This report shows the register of posted ingoing and outgoing cash orders during a specified reporting period. - -## To print the cash order journal CO-3 report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Order Journal CO-3**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cash Order Journal CO-3** window, fill in the fields. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Cash Account No.**|Select the cash account number for which the journal is to be printed.| - |**Starting Date**|Enter the start date of cash orders to be included in the register.| - |**Ending Date**|Enter the end date of cash orders to be included in the register. This date is set automatically to the last day of the month.| - |**Employee No.**|Select the employee who is responsible for the report. The employee’s name – last, first, and middle – are printed on the title page of the report.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 498c6b06..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Cash Report CO-4 Report - description: The **Cash Report CO-4** report shows the unified standard printing form for cashiers reporting for one operational day of the cash account. It is required and can only be printed per day. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Cash Report CO-4 Report -The **Cash Report CO-4** report shows the unified standard printing form for cashiers reporting for one operational day of the cash account. It is required and can only be printed per day. - -This report shows the opening balance of all the posted ingoing and outgoing cash orders, and the closing balance of an operational day for one cash account. It repeats the information of the Cash Additional Sheet reports, but has a different standard unified printing form. - -## To print the cash report CO-4 - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Report CO-4**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cash Report CO-4** window, fill in the fields. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Cash Account No.**|Select a cash account number.| - |**Report Type**|Select the type of report to run. Reports include **Cash Report CO-4** and **Cash Additional Sheet**.| - |**Date**|Enter the operational date of the cash account transactions to be reported.| - |**Cashier**|Select the employee who is the contact for this cash account. This employee must sign the end of the report.| - |**Print Title Sheet**|Select to print a title sheet.| - |**Print Last Sheet**|Select to print a last sheet.| - |**Preview**|Select the check box to see a preview of the report.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-factura-invoice.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-factura-invoice.md deleted file mode 100644 index b2a4fcd2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-factura-invoice.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Factura-Invoice - description: You must print the Factura-Invoice document as part of customs declaration. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Factura-Invoice -You must print the Factura-Invoice document as part of customs declaration. - -## To print the posted factura-invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoice**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Posted Factura-Invoice** action. -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## To print the order factura-invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Order Factura-Invoice** action. -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enter Custom Declarations Information](how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3046a71c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Ingoing Cash Order Report - description: The **Cash Ingoing Order CO-1** report prints the Ingoing Cash Order form, which is a standard format required by Russian accounting legislation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Ingoing Cash Order Report -The **Cash Ingoing Order CO-1** report prints the Ingoing Cash Order form, which is a standard format required by Russian accounting legislation. - -## To print the ingoing cash order report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Ingoing Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cash Ingoing Order CO-1** window, fill in the fields. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Test Print**|Select to print a draft of the report.

If this option is cleared and the value of **Bank Payment Type** on the **Ingoing Cash Order** window is set to **Computer Check**, then the following actions are performed:

- If **Check Printed** is set to **No**, a record is created in **Check Ledger Entries** with the value of **Entry Status** set to **Printed**.
- If **Document No.** is blank, then it is filled with the next number from the No. Series for this cash account.
- The status of **Check Printed** is set to **Yes**.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index bd5a5ca5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print the Outgoing Cash Order Report - description: The **Cash Outgoing Order CO-2** report shows the outgoing cash order, which is a standard format required by Russian accounting legislation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print the Outgoing Cash Order Report -The **Cash Outgoing Order CO-2** report shows the outgoing cash order, which is a standard format required by Russian accounting legislation. - -It shows the register of posted ingoing and outgoing cash orders during a specified reporting period. - -## To print the outgoing cash order report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Outgoing Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cash Outgoing Order** window, fill in the fields. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Test Print**|Select to print a draft of the report.

If this option is not selected and the value in the **Bank Payment Type** field in the **Outgoing Cash Order** window is **Computer Check**, then the following actions are performed:

- If the **Check Printed** field is selected, a record is created in **Check Ledger Entries** with the value of **Entry Status** set to **Printed**.
- If the **Document No.** field is blank, then it is filled with the next number from the No. Series for this cash account.
- The status of the **Check Printed** is selected.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. Choose the **Cancel** button to save the information without printing the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Petty Cash Management](petty-cash-management.md) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index fe439c3c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Purchase and Release Undepreciable Fixed Assets - description: After posting the fixed assets, you must create a fixed asset release act of the fixed asset and post it. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Purchase and Release Undepreciable Fixed Assets -After posting the fixed assets, you must create a fixed asset release act of the fixed asset and post it. If you open the **Fixed Asset Card** window for that fixed asset, you can see that in the corresponding lines, the depreciation for operation contains a zero, and the book value also contains a zero. - -The posting of the fixed asset release act results in two fixed asset operations in the operation depreciation book. The first is the fixed asset operation with the acquisition cost and quantity posted. The second is the fixed asset operation with the acquisition on disposal posted with the same cost and quantity, but with the sign reversed for both. The fixed asset is released and disposed in amount and quantity in this depreciation book, which is integrated with the general ledger. The book value and quantity of the fixed asset are zero, and there is no depreciation operation. According to this depreciation book, the fixed asset is fully disposed without depreciation. - -In the **Fixed Asset Card** window, a new line automatically opens with the quantity depreciation book. The quantity, acquisition cost, and book value in this fixed asset depreciation book are equal to the corresponding amount and quantity in the purchase order. This book shows the existence of this fixed asset in terms of the quantity and amount. It is not integrated with the general ledger, so future operations will not influence financial accounting. - -The fixed asset is disposed financially in full at the time of release, but can be operated in quantities and amounts. - -The following procedures show how to create a purchase order and a release order for undepreciable fixed assets. - -## To create a purchase order for an undepreciable fixed asset - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Post** action. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To create a release order for an undepreciable fixed asset - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Releases**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a release. -3. In the **FA Release Act** window, choose the **Post** action. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Quantity Book](how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md) - [Undepreciable Fixed Assets](undepreciable-fixed-assets.md) - [How to: Set Up Undepreciable Fixed Assets](how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-register-vat-on-purchase-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-register-vat-on-purchase-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index e0986bdb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-register-vat-on-purchase-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Register VAT on Purchase Orders - description: In Russia, organizations are required to keep a journal of received and issued VAT invoices. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to register VAT on purchase orders so that the information is tracked in the VAT invoices journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Register VAT on Purchase Orders -In Russia, organizations are required to keep a journal of received and issued VAT invoices. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to register VAT on purchase orders so that the information is tracked in the VAT invoices journal. - -## To register VAT on a purchase order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Order**, and then choose the related link. Select the relevant purchase order. -2. On the **Shipping** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |--------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------| - | **Vendor Receipts No.** | Enter the identification number from the vendor receipt. | - | **Vendor Receipts Date** | Enter the date from the vendor receipt. | - - -3. On the **VAT** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Vendor VAT Invoice No.**|Enter the invoice number from the original VAT transaction.| - |**Vendor VAT Invoice Date**|Enter the invoice date from the original VAT transaction.| - |**Vendor VAT Invoice Rcvd Date**|Enter the date that the purchase was received.| - - The VAT transaction is now registered and will be tracked in the VAT invoices journal after the purchase order is posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up VAT Ledgers](how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Prepare VAT Entries for Posting](how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md) - [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-release-track-and-write-off-fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-release-track-and-write-off-fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9cd8d600..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-release-track-and-write-off-fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,137 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Release, Track, and Write-Off Fixed Assets - description: You can manage your fixed assets utilizing the fixed assets acts features in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. Fixed assets acts allow you to release, track, and write-off the fixed assets of your organization. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Release, Track, and Write-Off Fixed Assets -You can manage your fixed assets utilizing the fixed assets acts features in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. Fixed assets acts allow you to release, track, and write-off the fixed assets of your organization. - -The first step to managing your fixed assets is to set up fixed assets numbering and source codes. - -## To set up fixed asset numbering - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Asset Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Numbering** FastTab, select a number series for each type of fixed asset transaction. -3. Choose the **OK** button to close the window and save your entries. - -## To set up fixed asset source codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Source Code Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Fixed Assets** FastTab, select a source code for each type of fixed asset. -3. Choose the **OK** button to close the window and save your entries. - -## Releasing Fixed Assets into Service -An asset is recognized as a fixed asset after it is released into service for the organization. You can use the **FA Release Act** window to release fixed assets into service. - -### To release fixed assets into service - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Release Act**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Enter the identification number that is assigned to the fixed asset release.| - |**Posting Description**|Enter a description for the fixed asset release. A description is automatically created from the document type and release number.| - |**Reason Document No.**|Enter the identification number of the source document that is the reason for the fixed asset release.| - |**Reason Document Date**|Enter the date of the source document that is the reason for the fixed asset release. This information is used in fixed asset reports and entries.| - |**FA Posting Date**|Enter the date on which the fixed asset release is posted. This information is used in fixed asset reports and entries.| - |**External Document No.**|Enter the number of the external document that relates to this fixed asset release.| - |**Posting No.**|Enter an identifying posting number to use for the fixed asset release entry.| - |**Shortcut Dimension 1 Code**|Enter the department code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - |**Shortcut Dimension 2 Code**|Enter the incexp code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**FA No.**|Enter the identification number that is assigned to the fixed asset to be released.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the fixed asset.| - |**Depreciation Book Code**|Enter the code for the depreciation book that is used to post depreciation for the fixed asset. The value is set using information from the **Fixed Asset Setup** window.| - |**New Depreciation Book Code**|Enter an alternative depreciation book code that is used to post depreciation for the released fixed asset entry.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button to post your entries and release the fixed assets into service. - -## Tracking the Movement of Fixed Assets - Tracking the location and status of fixed assets is an important function within most organizations. For example, you may want to record the movement of office equipment from a previous location to a new location. You can use the **FA Movement Act** window to track the movement of fixed assets and record the status of your fixed assets. - -### To track the movement of fixed assets - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Movement Act**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Enter an identification number that is assigned to the fixed asset movement entry.| - |**Posting Description**|Enter a description for the fixed asset movement entry. A description is automatically created from the document type and movement number.| - |**Reason Document No.**|Enter the identification number of the source document that is the reason for the fixed asset movement.| - |**Reason Document Date**|Enter the date of the source document that is the reason for the fixed asset movement. This information is used in fixed asset reports and entries.| - |**FA Location Code**|Specifies the location of the fixed asset before it being moved.| - |**New FA Location Code**|Enter the new location for the fixed asset.| - |**FA Posting Date**|Enter the date on which the fixed asset movement entry is posted. This information is used in fixed asset reports and entries.| - |**External Document No.**|Enter the number of the external document that relates to this fixed asset movement entry.| - |**Posting No.**|Enter an identifying posting number to use for the fixed asset movement entry.| - |**Shortcut Dimension 1 Code**|Enter the department code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - |**Shortcut Dimension 2 Code**|Enter the incexp code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**FA No.**|Enter an identification number that is assigned to the fixed asset movement line entry.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the fixed asset movement line entry.| - |**Status**|Enter the status of the fixed asset. The options include **Inventory**, **Montage**, **Operation**, **Maintenance**, **Repair**, **Disposed**, and **Written Off**.| - |**Depreciation Book Code**|Enter the code for the depreciation book that is used to post depreciation for the fixed asset. The value is set using information from the **Fixed Asset Setup** window.| - |**New Depreciation Book Code**|Enter a new depreciation book code that is used to post depreciation after the fixed asset movement entry is posted.| - |**Reason Code**|Enter a reason code fixed asset movement entry.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button to post your entries and record the movement of the fixed asset. - -## Writing Off the Value of a Fixed Asset - During the sale or disposal of a fixed asset, you may want to write-off the remaining book value of the asset that has not been depreciated. You can use the **FA Writeoff Act** window to write-off the remaining value of a fixed assets. - -### To write-off the value of a fixed asset - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Writeoff Act**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Enter an identification number that is assigned to the fixed asset write-off entry.| - |**Posting Description**|Enter a description for the fixed asset write-off entry. A description is automatically created from the document type and write-off number.| - |**Reason Document No.**|Enter the identification number of the source document that is the reason for the fixed asset write-off.| - |**Reason Document Date**|Enter the date of the source document that is the reason for the fixed asset write-off. This information is used in fixed asset reports and entries.| - |**FA Location Code**|Specifies the location of the fixed asset.| - |**FA Employee No.**|Enter the employee number of the person who maintains possession of the fixed asset.| - |**FA Posting Date**|Enter the date on which the fixed asset write-off entry is posted. This information is used in fixed asset reports and entries.| - |**External Document No.**|Enter the number of the external document that relates to this fixed asset write-off entry.| - |**Posting No.**|Enter an identifying posting number to use for the fixed asset write-off entry.| - |**Shortcut Dimension 1 Code**|Enter the department code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - |**Shortcut Dimension 2 Code**|Enter the incexp code that is associated with the fixed asset.| - -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**FA No.**|Enter an identification number that is assigned to the fixed asset write-off line entry.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the fixed asset write-off line entry.| - |**Depreciation Book Code**|Enter the code for the depreciation book that is used to post depreciation for the fixed asset. The value is set using information from the **Fixed Asset Setup** window.| - |**Item Receipt No.**|Enter the receipt number from the item sale or disposal document.| - |**Reason Code**|Enter a reason code for the fixed asset write-off entry.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button to post your entries and record the write-off of the fixed asset. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7ec7a482..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-bank-payment-order.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up a Bank Payment Order - description: Bank payment orders must be used if a bank payment is for the official state budget. To use a bank payment order, a general journal template must be created as described in the following procedure. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Bank Payment Order -Bank payment orders must be used if a bank payment is for the official state budget. To use a bank payment order, a general journal template must be created as described in the following procedure. - -## To set up a bank payment order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a general journal batch for every bank operation. -3. In the **Bal. Account Type** field, select the bank account type. -4. In the **Bal. Account No.** field, enter the bank account. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Source Codes**, and then choose the related link. -6. Create a source code record. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Source Code Setup**, and then choose the related link. -8. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Bank Payments** field, select the source code that you entered in the **Source Codes** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Bank Interface Files](assetId:///e960b140-df19-4ff4-bcfa-5a034ceb4b53) - [Bank Management](bank-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6f4dcd9d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-future-expense-card.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up a Future Expense Card - description: To account for future period expenses you have to set up a future expense card. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Future Expense Card -To account for future period expenses you have to set up a future expense card. - -## To set up a future expense card - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Future Expenses**, and then choose the related link. - -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies the number that is associated with the future expense.| - |**Description**|Specifies the description of the future expense.| - |**Description 2**|Specifies an additional description of the future expense.| - |**Tax Difference Code**|Specifies the tax difference code that is associated with the future expense.| - |**Unrealized VAT Amount**|Specifies the unrealized VAT amount that is associated with the future expense.| - |**Search Description**|Specifies the search description for the future expense.| - |**Inactive**|Specifies if the future expense is inactive.| - |**Blocked**|Specifies if the future expense is blocked.| - |**Last Date Modified**|Specifies the date the future expense was last modified.| - |**Tax Amount**|Specifies the tax amount that is associated with the future expense.| - -3. In the **Depreciation Method** field, select **Straight-Line**. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Future Expenses (Deferrals)](future-expenses-deferrals-.md) - [How to: Create Future Expense Journals](how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md) - [How to: Set Up Future Expenses in a Depreciation Book](how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md deleted file mode 100644 index a9aecdd8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up a Quantity Book - description: Create a depreciation book to keep record of the fixed assets quantities that will be repaid at the time of release for the amount at which they were acquired. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Quantity Book -Create a depreciation book to keep record of the fixed assets quantities that will be repaid at the time of release for the amount at which they were acquired. - -## To set up a quantity book - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Posting Book Type** field, select **Analytical**. -3. On the **Integration** FastTab, make sure that no options are selected. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Setup**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **Quantitative Depr. Book** field, enter the code of the depreciation book that you created. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Undepreciable Fixed Assets](undepreciable-fixed-assets.md) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-an-intangible-assets-account.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-an-intangible-assets-account.md deleted file mode 100644 index 904460f2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-an-intangible-assets-account.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up an Intangible Assets Account - description: The intangible assets accounting feature allows you to post intangible assets to a special account called the Intangible Assets account. Intangible assets are non-monetary assets that cannot be physically measured. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up an Intangible Assets Account -The intangible assets accounting feature allows you to post intangible assets to a special account called the Intangible Assets account. Intangible assets are non-monetary assets that cannot be physically measured. You can also include current expenses by using monthly depreciation. - -The procedure for posting an intangible asset account is similar to the procedure used to post a fixed asset account. - -## To set up an intangible asset account - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for a fixed asset. -3. In the **Fixed Asset Card** window, select **Intangible Asset** in the **FA Type** field. -4. Purchase and release the intangible asset. For more information, see [How to: Purchase and Release Undepreciable Fixed Assets](how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-and-create-letters-of-attorney.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-and-create-letters-of-attorney.md deleted file mode 100644 index 843925ff..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-and-create-letters-of-attorney.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up and Create Letters of Attorney - description: The letter of attorney feature enables you to create and print a Letter of Attorney, and to also print a journal of Letters of Attorney. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up and Create Letters of Attorney -The letter of attorney feature enables you to create and print a Letter of Attorney, and to also print a journal of Letters of Attorney. - -Set up numbering for open and released Letters of Attorney. Numbers for open documents are generated after a new document is created. Numbers for released documents are generated after a document is printed. This number is documented in the printing form of the document and in the Letter of Attorney journal. - -The following procedure shows how to set up the numbering for Letters of Attorney. - -## To set up a letter of attorney - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Background Posting** FastTab, fill in the **Letter of Attorney Nos.** and **Released Letter of Attorney Nos.** fields. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -The following procedure shows how to create a Letter of Attorney. - -## To create a letter of attorney - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Letters of Attorney** and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new document and fill in the fields in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Letter of Attorney No.**|Enter the number of the printed document. This number is documented in the printing form of the document and in the Letter of Attorney journal. This field is filled in automatically from the numbering series.| - |**Employee No.**|Enter the employee number.| - |**Employee Full Name**|Specifies the name of the employee. The field is filled in automatically from the **Employee Card**.| - |**Employee Job Title**|Specifies the job title of the employee. The field is filled in automatically from the **Employee Card**.| - |**Source Document Type**|Enter the type of source document. You can create a Letter of Attorney (header and lines) on the basis of an existing purchase document that is not yet posted.| - |**Source Document No.**|Enter the source document number.| - |**Buy-from Vendor No.**|Specifies the vendor number. The field is filled in automatically from the purchase document when a source document is chosen. You can manually choose the vendor.| - |**Buy-from Vendor Name**|Specifies the name of the vendor. The field is filled in automatically from the **Vendor Card**.| - |**Document Description**|Specifies information about the source document. The field is filled in automatically, but you can also manually enter the document description.| - |**Realization Check**|Specifies the document that is realized.| - |**Document Date**|Enter the date of the Letter of Attorney. This field is filled in with the work date by default. Manually enter the date of the document, if needed.| - |**Validity Date**|Enter the validity date of the document. This field is filled in by default, with the date that occurs 15 days after the document date. Manually enter the validity date, if needed.| - |**Status**|Specifies the status of the document.| - |**No.**|Enter the number of the open document. This field is filled in automatically from the numbering series.| - -2. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Responsible Employees and Advance Statements](how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-company-addresses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-company-addresses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9230052f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-company-addresses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Company Addresses - description: If your company has different types of addresses, such as a legal address or an address for use with tax inspection, you must set up these addresses in the **Company Address** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Company Addresses -If your company has different types of addresses, such as a legal address or an address for use with tax inspection, you must set up these addresses in the **Company Address** window. - -## To set up company addresses - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Addresses** action. -3. Choose the **New** action. The **Company Address** window opens. -4. Fill in the various fields, including those fields that specify the language and the type of address: - - - **Language Code** - - **Address Type** - -5. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Company Addresses](company-addresses.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 96aeb31b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-corrective-invoicing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Corrective Invoicing - description: You can create corrective invoices and corrective credit memos to reflect changes in quantity and amounts after the items were shipped or received. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Corrective Invoicing -You can create corrective invoices and corrective credit memos to reflect changes in quantity and amounts after the items were shipped or received. First, you must set up [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] with prerequisites. - -## To set up number series for corrective documents - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, on the **Numbering** tab, specify the number series that must be used for posted corrective invoices and credit memos. - -## To set up inventory posting groups - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Posting Groups**, and choose the related link. -2. In the **Inventory Posting Groups** window, in the **Sales Corr. Doc. Charge (Item)** field, select the item charge code that you want to use in in value entries to correct the original price of items in the corrective documents. - -You can set up a separate code for each inventory posting group. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Corrective Documents](corrective-documents.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1fd2ec5f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Customer and Vendor Agreements - description: The customer and vendor agreements feature provides a list of agreements for customers and vendors, an agreement card where all the required information about agreements is stored, and more. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Customer and Vendor Agreements -The customer and vendor agreements feature provides the following: - -- A list of agreements for customers and vendors. -- An agreement card where all the required information about agreements is stored. -- Synchronization between agreements and dimensions, to enable use of existing reports and dimension analyses. - -The following procedure shows how to set up an agreement for a customer, but the procedure for a vendor is similar and starts from the **Purchases & Payables** window. - -## To set up an agreement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. To set up agreement, on the **Dimensions** FastTab and **Numbering** FastTabs, enter information in the fields listed in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Dimension Agreement**|Select a dimension code for agreements.| - |**Synch. Agreement Dimension**|Select this field to create a dimension value code after agreements is created, and the dimension value codes are equal to the agreement codes.| - |**Customer Agreement Nos.**|Select the customer agreement number series.| - -## To create a customer or vendor agreement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a customer from the list, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Expand the **Agreements** FastTab, and modify the **Agreement Posting** field. -4. Choose the **Agreements** action. In the **Customer Agreements** window, choose the **New** action. -5. In the **Customer or Vendor Agreement** card, enter the information in the following fields listed in the table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Code**|Enter the code for an agreement. Enter a maximum of 20 characters, both numbers and letters. It is created by default from the number series set up in the General Ledger Setup form.| - |**Description**|Enter the description of the agreement. Enter a maximum of 250 characters, both numbers and letters.| - |**Source No.**|Select this field to see the number of the vendor or customer for whom the agreement is created.| - |**Source Name**|Enter the name of the vendor or customer for whom the agreement is created. The source name is automatically retrieved from the Vendor or Customer table.| - |**Dimension Value Code**|Enter the dimension value code. Enter agreement and dimension functionality. The dimension value code is equal to the agreement code when the **Synch. Agreement Dimensions** field is selected in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window.| - |**Starting Date**|Enter starting date of the period for which you want to use the agreement.| - |**Expire Date**|Enter the expiration date of the agreement.| - |**Blocked**|Select this field to prevent posting of entries on the agreement. When you try to create a document with a blocked agreement, an error message is displayed. An agreement is usually blocked after the expiration date.| - -On the **Navigate** tab, you can find the following functions: - -- List - Shows a list of customer or vendor agreements. -- Ledger Entries - Shows customer or vendor ledger entries posted with this agreement code. - -The agreements are fully synchronized with dimensions. You can post transactions and choose the dimension value code of the appropriate agreement from the list of agreements. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russian Receivables Reports](russian-receivables-reports.md) - [Russian Payables Reports](russian-payables-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index eee077fc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-customer-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Customer Prepayments - description: Prepayments are advance payments on sales orders that are received, invoiced, and posted before the final invoice is issued. For example, you may require a deposit before you manufacture and ship an item to a customer. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Customer Prepayments -Prepayments are advance payments on sales orders that are received, invoiced, and posted before the final invoice is issued. For example, you may require a deposit before you manufacture and ship an item to a customer. Prepayments let you invoice and collect advance payments from customers and post the payments against the correct invoices and accounts. - -## To set up customer prepayments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Numbering** FastTab, verify that the number series for the **Posted Prepmt. Inv. Nos.** is the same as the **Posted Invoice Nos.**. Also verify that the number series for the **Posted Prepmt. Cr. Memo Nos.** is the same as the **Posted Credit Memo Nos.**. -3. On the **Prepayment** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Use Prepayment Account**|Select to post prepayments using the subaccount specified in the **Prepayment Account** field in the **Customer Posting Groups** window.| - |**Create Prepayment Invoice**|Select to create an invoice for the prepayment. If this field is not selected, an invoice for the prepayment will not be created.| - |**Posted Prepayment Nos.**|Enter the code of the number series that you want to use for prepayment invoices.| - |**Posted PD Doc. Nos.**|Enter the code of the number series that you want to use for prepayment documents.| - |**PD Doc. Nos. Type**|Select if you want to use a number series or symbol to identify prepayment documents.| - |**Symbol for PD Doc.**|Enter a symbol to be printed on prepayment documents.| - |**PD Gains Condition Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate conditional prepayment gains.| - |**PD Losses Condition Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate conditional prepayment losses.| - |**PD Gains Kind Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate payment in kind prepayment gains.| - |**PD Losses Kind Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate payment in kind prepayment gains.| - -4. Open the **Customer Posting Groups** window. -5. In the **Prepayment Account** field, specify the general ledger accounts that you want to use for posting customer prepayments. -6. Choose the **Close** button to close the window and save your entries. - -You can now invoice and collect advance payments from customers and post the payments to the correct invoices and accounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Invoicing Prepayments](../../finance-invoice-prepayments.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](../../walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md deleted file mode 100644 index 95b1308b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-future-expenses-in-a-depreciation-book.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Future Expenses in a Depreciation Book - description: To depreciate a future expense, you have to set up future period expenses in a depreciation book. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Future Expenses in a Depreciation Book -To depreciate a future expense, you have to set up future period expenses in a depreciation book. - -## To set up future expenses in a depreciation book - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specifies the code for the depreciation book.| - |**Description**|Specifies the description of the depreciation book.| - |**Default Final Rounding Amount**|Specifies the final rounding amount that will be used as the default for the depreciation book.| - |**Default Ending Book Value**|Specifies the ending book value that will be used as the default for the depreciation book.| - |**Disposal Calculation Method**|Specifies the disposal calculation method that is associated with the depreciation book. Disposal calculation methods include **Net** or **Gross**.| - |**Subtract Disc. in Purch. Inv.**|Specifies if discounts will be subtracted from the purchase invoice.| - |**Allow Correction of Disposal**|Specifies if disposals can be corrected.| - |**Allow Changes in Depr. Fields**|Specifies if changes can be made in the depreciation fields.| - |**VAT on Net Disposal Entries**|Specifies if VAT will be calculated on net disposal entries.| - |**Posting Book Type**|Specifies the posting book type of the depreciation book. Book types include **Accounting**, **Tax Accounting**, and **Analytical**.| - |**Currency Code**|Specifies the currency code that is associated with the depreciation book.| - |**Allow Identical Document No.**|Specifies if an identical document number can be used.| - |**Allow Depreciation**|Specifies if depreciations are allowed.| - |**Allow Indexation**|Specifies if indexation is allowed.| - |**Allow Depr. Below Zero**|Specifies if depreciation below zero is allowed.| - |**Allow more than 360/365 Days**|Specifies if depreciation is allowed for more than 360/365 days.| - |**Use FA Ledger Check**|Specifies if fixed asset ledger checks are used.| - |**Use Rounding in Periodic Depr.**|Specifies if rounding is used in periodic depreciation calculations.| - |**Use Same FA+G/L Posting Date**|Specifies if the same fixed asset general ledger posting date is used.| - |**Fiscal Year 365 Days**|Specifies if the fiscal year equals 365 days.| - |**Mark Errors as Corrections**|Specifies if errors are marked as corrections.| - |**Control FA Acquis.Cost**|Specifies if fixed asset acquisition costs are controlled.| - -3. On the **Integration** FastTab, select all options. -4. Choose the **FA Journal Setup** action. -5. In the **FA Journal Setup window**, fill in the **Gen. Jnl. Template Name** and **Gen. Jnl. Batch Name** fields. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Setup**, and then choose the related link. -8. In the **Fixed Asset Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the **Future Depr. Book** field and then choose the **OK** button. -9. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -10. Open the relevant account, and in the **G/L Account Card** window, on the **Posting** FastTab, fill in the **Gen. Prod. Posting Group** and the **VAT Prod. Posting Group** fields, and then choose the **OK** button. -11. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -12. In the **FA Posting Groups** window, enter information in the required fields. -13. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) - [Future Expenses (Deferrals)](future-expenses-deferrals-.md) - [How to: Create Future Expense Journals](how-to-create-future-expense-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-norm-jurisdictions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-norm-jurisdictions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5f9965cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-norm-jurisdictions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Norm Jurisdictions - description: Norm jurisdictions are based on Russian tax laws that define a variety of tax rates. Norm jurisdictions are used to calculate taxable profits and losses in tax accounting. You can use the **Norm Jurisdictions** window to set up and define norm jurisdictions that can be used when you calculate tax differences. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Norm Jurisdictions -Norm jurisdictions are based on Russian tax laws that define a variety of tax rates. Norm jurisdictions are used to calculate taxable profits and losses in tax accounting. You can use the **Norm Jurisdictions** window to set up and define norm jurisdictions that can be used when you calculate tax differences. - -## To set up norm jurisdictions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Norm Jurisdictions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter an identifying **Code** and **Description** for the norm jurisdiction that you want to set up. -3. Choose the **Groups** action to open the **Norm Groups** window. -4. In the **Norm Groups** window, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Enter a code to identify the norm group.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the norm group.| - |**Has Details**|Specifies if calculation details are defined for the norm group.| - |**Search Detail**|Select the method that you use for norm jurisdiction search. The options include **To Date** and **As of Date.**| - |**Storing Method**|Select **Calculation** if the norm jurisdiction is calculated with a specific formula. Leave this field blank if the norm is a constant value.| - -5. Choose the **Details** action to open the **Norm Details** window. In this window, you will define a constant tax rate for the norm. -6. In the **Norm Details** window, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Effective Date**|Enter an effective date for the norm.| - |**Norm**|Enter a value for the norm. This value is used to calculate tax differences.| - -7. Choose the **Close** button to close the **Norm Details** window and save your entries. - -The norm jurisdiction that you set up is now available for use in calculating tax differences. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) - [Setting up Tax Difference Calculation](setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md) - [Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index f78a6401..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,206 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Responsible Employees and Advance Statements - description: The **Advance Statement** report enables you to print and view information about payments made to and from responsible employees. This report also enables you to print and view primary documents of responsible employee expenses. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Responsible Employees and Advance Statements -The **Advance Statement** report enables you to print and view information about payments made to and from responsible employees. This report also enables you to print and view primary documents of responsible employee expenses. - -## Creating the Responsible Employee Card -The **Resp. Employee Card** window is created for each responsible employee on the basis of the **Employee Card** window, but it can also be created independently. - -It provides the following information: - -1. Responsible Employee card number -2. Data of the responsible employee (address, postal code or city, and telephone) -3. Contacts (telephone, e-mail address, Internet address) -4. General ledger entry postings of the responsible employee on the **Posting** FastTab (**Gen. Bus. Posting Group**, **VAT Bus. Posting Group**, and **Vendor Posting Group**) -5. Documents of the responsible employee (unposted and posted advance statements), which can be opened using the **Documents** button. - -The following procedure shows how to access the **Resp. Employee Card** window. - -### To create a Responsible Employee card - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resp. Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new card. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -### To create a Responsible Employee Card from an Employee card - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Create Resp. Employee** action. -3. The **Resp. Employee Card** window contains the following information entered manually or from the corresponding glossary and settings. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies the value that is filled automatically from the **Employee Card** window, or is entered manually.| - |**Name**|Specifies the value that is filled automatically from similar fields in the **Employee Card** window or is entered manually.| - |**Address**|Specifies the value that is filled automatically from similar fields in the **Employee Card** window or is entered manually.| - |**Post Code**|Specifies the value that is filled automatically from similar fields in the **Employee Card** window or is entered manually.| - |**Country/Region Code**|Specifies the value that is filled automatically from similar fields in the **Employee Card** window or is entered manually.| - |**Phone No.**|Specifies the value that is filled automatically from similar fields in the **Employee Card** window or is entered manually.| - |**Search Name**|Specifies the value of the **Name** field is entered from the displayed **Resp. Employee Card** window.| - |**Communication (E-Mail, Home Page)**|Specifies the values that are filled automatically from similar fields in the **Employee Card** window or is entered manually.| - |**Currency Code**|Specifies a blank by default.| - |**Gen. Bus. Posting Group**|Specifies the value of the **Adv. Stmt. Gen. Bus. Posting Gr** field from the Purchases and Payables setup on the **Advance Statement** FastTab.| - |**VAT Bus. Posting Group**|Specifies the value of the **Adv. Stmt. VAT Bus. Posting Gr** field from the Purchases and Payables setup on the **Advance Statement** FastTab.| - |**Vendor Posting Group**|Specifies the value of the **Adv. Stmt. Vendor Posting Gr** field from the Purchases and Payables setup on the **Advance Statement** FastTab.| - -## Creating the Advance Statement -The **Advance Statement** is created by the responsible employees. This statement contains information about payments received by the employees and about primary documents that are provided to confirm the expenses. - -The **Advance Statement** contains the following information: - -- Advance Statement number -- Posting date and document date -- Responsible employee data (code and name) -- Advance purpose and posting description -- Number of documents and pages -- Remainder or overdraft document to register the payment document for the advance statement -- Currency code to register currency expenses -- Expense lines, which are registered according to the value selected in the **Type in Advance Statement lines** field – **G/L Account**, **Item**, **Fixed Asset**, **Charge (Item)**, and **Employee Purchase** values - -The following expense lines are registered according to the value selected in the **Type** field and **No.** or **Employee Purchase Vendor No.** fields, in the lines of Advance Statement: - -- To write off the expense: - - - **Type** - G/L Account - - **No.** - General ledger account number - -- To account for the purchased items or materials: - - - **Type** - Item - - **No.** - Item cardnumber - -- To account for the purchased fixed asset: - - - **Type** - Fixed Asset - - **No.** - Fixed Asset card number - -- To account for additional charges for purchased items: - - - **Type** - Charge (Item) - - **No**. - Item charge code - -- To register the primary documents received from the vendor (in case primary documents have been received from the vendor for items, fixed assets, or expenses by responsible employee): - - - **Type** - Empl. Purchase - - **Employee Purchase Vendor No.** - Vendor number - -### To access the Advance Statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Advance Statements**, and then choose the related link. - - The **Advance Statement** window contains the following information in the **General** FastTab, in the header, entered manually or filled in from the corresponding glossary and settings. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies the number of the advance statement, which is calculated automatically. The number depends on the value of the **Advance Statement Nos.** field that was specified in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window on the **Advance Statement** FastTab.| - |**Posting Date**,

**Document Date**|Specifies the posting date and document date. By default, these fields are filled in with the value from the work date. It can also be filled in manually.| - |**Employee No.**|Specifies the number of responsible employee. The value is selected manually from the vendor list.| - |**Employee Name**|Specifies the name of responsible employee. This field is filled in automatically with the values of the **Name** and **Name2** fields of the **Resp. Employee Card** window.| - |**Advance Purpose**|Specifies the purpose of advance.| - |**Posting Description**|Specifies the posting description of the document. This field is filled in automatically with the value from the **Invoice No.** field. The field can be edited manually.| - |**Vendor Invoice No.**|Specifies the number of an external document. This field is filled in automatically.| - ||| - -2. The **Advance Statement** window contains the following information in the **Statement** FastTab in the header, entered manually or filled in from the corresponding glossary and settings. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No. of Documents**, **No. of Pages**|Specifies the number of documents that confirm expenses and number of pages of these documents. The fields are filled in manually with numeric values.| - |**Remaining or Overdraft Doc. No.**|Specifies the cash document that closes the remaining or overdraft amount for this advance statement. A payment document is selected from the vendor ledger entries of the responsible employee.| - - The **Advance statement** window contains the following information from the expense lines that are created. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Type**|Select G/L Account, Item, Fixed Asset, Charge (Item), Empl. Purchase depending on the type of expenses.| - |**No.**|If Type = **G/L Account**:

In the **No.** field, select a general ledger account from the General Ledger Account List glossary.

If Type = **Item**:

In the **No.** field, select an Item card from the Item List glossary.

If Type = **Fixed Asset**:

In the **No.** field, select a Fixed Asset card from the Fixed Asset List glossary.

If Type = **Charge (Item)**:

In the **No.** field, select an item charge from the Item Charges and Fixed Asset Charges glossary.| - |**Empl. Purchase Vendor No.**|If Type = **Empl. Purchase**:

In the **Empl. Purchase Vendor No.** field, select a Vendor card from the Vendor List glossary.| - |**Empl. Purchase Entry No**|If Type = **Empl. Purchase**:

In the **Empl. Purchase Entry No.** field, select a posted vendor entry from the vendor ledger entries. **Note:** You must post an invoice from the vendor before registering in advance statement, in case a responsible employee receives primary documents (invoice-facture for example) from the vendor.| - |**Empl.Purchase Document No,**

**Empl. Purchase Document Date**|The fields are filled in manually. In the **Empl.Purchase Document No**. field, enter the number of the document that confirmed expenses in the current line.

In the **Empl. Purchase Document Date** field, enter the date of the document that confirmed expenses in the current line.| - |**Description**|Description of expenses in the current line. The **Description** field is filled in with the value of the **Name** or **Description** field from the selected card by default.| - |**Quantity**

**Direct Cost Excl. VAT**|Quantity and cost of expenses (items and fixed assets). The fields are filled in with numeric values manually.| - - The **Created Document Status** field reflects the current document status. To change the current document status from **Open** to **Released**. - -3. Choose the **Release** action. The released advance statement will be accessible for printing. - -## Printing an Unposted Advance Statement -The following procedure shows how to print an unposted advance statement. - -### To print an unposted Advance Statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Advance Statements**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Advance Statement** window, choose the **Print** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > The report is usually printed after creating the document for signing and confirmation. - -3. On the **Purchase Header** FastTab, apply the following filters. - - |Field|Filter| - |---------------------------------|------------| - |**No.**|This field contains the unposted advance statement number. By default, a value from the open document is entered.| - |**Document Type**|This field is filled in automatically.| - -4. On the **Options** FastTab, specify the employees for signing the document as listed in the following table. - - |Parameter|Description| - |---------------|-----------------| - |Accountant

(Cashier)|Select an employee code (cashier) from the Employee List table to fill in the corresponding fields in the statement.| - |Accountant|Select an employee code (accountant) from the Employee List table to fill in the corresponding fields in the statement.| - -5. Choose the **Print** button. - -## Viewing the Posted Advance Statement - To following procedure demonstrates how to access the posted **Advance Statement**. - -### To view the posted advance statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Advance Statement**, and then choose the related link. - -A posted **Advance Statement** reflects all the information entered in the document in the Advance statement. - -## Printing the Posted Advance Statement -The following procedure shows how to print the posted **Advance Statement**. - -### To print a posted advance statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Advance Statements** and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Print** action. The **Posted Advance Statement** dialog box opens. - - > [!NOTE] - > The report is usually printed as an approved and confirmed document. - -3. On the **Purch. Inv. Header** FastTab of the report, apply the following filters. - - |Field|Filter| - |--------------------------------------|------------| - |**No.**|This field contains the number of the posted advance statement. By default, this value is entered from the open document.| - -4. On the **Options** FastTab, specify the employees to sign the document as listed in the following table. - - |Parameter|Description| - |---------------|-----------------| - |Accountant (Cashier)|Select the employee code (cashier) from the Employee List table to fill in the corresponding fields in the report.| - |Accountant|Select the employee code (accountant) from the Employee List table to fill in the corresponding fields in the report.| - -5. Choose the **Print** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Human Resources](../../hr-manage-human-resources.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-statutory-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-statutory-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2c400af0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-statutory-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Statutory Reports - description: The Russian federal tax authorities require companies to submit statutory reports in electronic formats such as XML or as Microsoft Excel documents. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you must set up the templates, formats, XML schemas, and other prerequisites so that you can generate the required files. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Statutory Reports -The Russian federal tax authorities require companies to submit statutory reports in electronic formats such as XML or as Microsoft Excel documents. In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you must set up the templates, formats, XML schemas, and other prerequisites so that you can generate the required files. - -After you have set up a report and specified the required information, you can export the report to Excel, and then print the report. - -For more information, see [Statutory Reporting Directives](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=216143) and [Statutory Reporting Software](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=216142) on the Federal Tax Service website. - -First, you must set up general information that applies to all statutory reports. - -## To set up general information about statutory reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Statutory Report Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields to describe XML formatting, file locations, and so on. -3. On the **Numbering** FastTab, fill in the fields to describe the number series to use for data export and data import logs. - -The following procedure is optional. It allows you to set up groups in which to group different types of reports. - -## To set up statutory report groups - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Statutory Report Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. In the **Code** field, enter a code for the group, and in the **Description** field, enter a description of the purpose of the group. - -Next, you must set up report versions. - -## To set up report versions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Format Versions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields to describe the format version of the statutory report. -3. Choose to import an Excel template or and XML schema. - - Depending on the type of report, you can import Microsoft Excel templates as .xls files or you can import XML schemas as .xml or .xsd files. You can also define the start date for when the statutory report must be used. - -When a new version of a report is announced, you can add it to the version list in this window. - -## Defining Statutory Reports -Next, you must define each statutory report. - -### To define a statutory report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Statutory Reports**, and then choose the related link. -2. Optionally, you can create one or more rows that group a range of statutory reports, such as reports for VAT reporting or reports for property tax. To specify a row as an internal grouping, enter information in the **Code** and **Description** fields, and the select the **Header** check box. Leave the other fields blank. -3. To specify a row as a statutory report, create a new entry and fill in the fields to describe the statutory report. - - For each statutory report, in the **Format Version Code** field, you can specify the current version to use for this kind of report. - -4. For each statutory report, choose the **Tables** action. - - 1. In the **Statutory Report Tables** window, fill in the fields to describe each table that must be created in the Microsoft Excel workbook. This includes specifying the name of the worksheet. - - For example, a statutory report can require that you submit a Microsoft Excel workbook with a separate table for each section of the report. - - 2. For each table, specify the table rows and table columns. - - You can also specify individual requisites. Close the table windows. - -5. For each statutory report, choose the **XML Element Lines** action. - - In the **XML Element Lines** window, fill in the fields to describe the XML structure of the file that you will export. You can use expressions to calculate values, or you can use table data directly. - - You can link each XML element line to a table that you defined in the **Statutory Report Tables** window for that statutory report. - -6. Optionally, if you want to define a statutory report that resembles an existing report, you can copy the existing report. - - 1. In the **Statutory Reports** window, create an entry by entering a code in the **Code** field. - 2. Choose the **Copy Report** action. - 3. In the **Copy Statutory Report** window, in the **Copy From Report Code** field, select the existing report, and then choose the **OK** button. - - This creates a copy of the existing report with the tables and XML element lines. Now, you can make the appropriate changes as described earlier in this section. - -You can now use the defined statutory reports to generate and submit reports to the authorities. For more information, see [How to: Create Statutory Report Data](how-to-create-statutory-report-data.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Statutory Reports](statutory-reports.md) - [How to: Create Statutory Report Data](how-to-create-statutory-report-data.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5545d507..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Tax Accounting - description: Tax accounting lets you apply rules for recognizing income and expenses that follow your local tax laws. You can activate tax accounting features in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] by setting up tax registers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Tax Accounting -Tax accounting lets you apply rules for recognizing income and expenses that follow your local tax laws. You can activate tax accounting features in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] by setting up tax registers. - -## To activate tax accounting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Register Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select codes for the following dimensions. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Condition Dimension Code**|Select a dimension code that describes the condition of the tax register.| - |**Kind Dimension Code**|Select a dimension code that describes the type of tax register.| - -3. Select the following fields to activate entries in the tax register. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Create Acquis. FA Tax Ledger**|Select to create fixed asset acquisition entries.| - |**Create Reclass. FA Tax Ledger**|Select to create fixed asset reclassification entries.| - |**Create Acquis. FE Tax Ledger**|Select to create future expense acquisition entries.| - -4. Select the appropriate depreciation books in the **Tax Depreciation Book** and **Future Exp. Depreciation Book** fields. The depreciation books that you select should not be integrated with the [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] finance module. - -5. Select the **Create Data for Printing Forms** check box to enable detailed tax register entry information to be printed on reports and forms. -6. Choose the **Close** button to close the window and save your entries. - -For more information about how to set up and customize tax registers, see [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-authority-fund-cards.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-authority-fund-cards.md deleted file mode 100644 index 39940412..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-authority-fund-cards.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Tax Authority-Fund Cards - description: The Tax Authority or Fund card enables you to compile a list of different tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Tax Authority-Fund Cards -The Tax Authority or Fund card enables you to compile a list of different tax authorities. - -The functionality of the Tax Authority or Fund card is the same as that of the Vendor card. - -The following procedure shows how to use the Tax Authority or Fund card. - -## To set up a Tax Authority or Fund Card - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Authorities**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Tax Authority and Fund** card, enter the required information. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md deleted file mode 100644 index aad5dd21..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Tax Register Sections - description: You can either create a new tax register section or select a tax register section to be used in a company during the current taxation period. You can select a tax register section that was valid during previous taxation periods and view tax information for any of the periods. You can copy tax registers from one tax register section into another. You can also set up tax registers and adjust the algorithm of information collection into tax registers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Tax Register Sections -You can either create a new tax register section or select a tax register section to be used in a company during the current taxation period. You can select a tax register section that was valid during previous taxation periods and view tax information for any of the periods. You can copy tax registers from one tax register section into another. You can also set up tax registers and adjust the algorithm of information collection into tax registers. - -The following procedure shows how to set up tax register sections. - -## To set up a tax register - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Registers**, and choose the related link. -2. In the **Tax Registers Sections** window, choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, enter the fields described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Code**|The code of the existing tax register version for a certain taxation period is displayed.

Create the code for a new tax register section, if necessary.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the tax register section.| - |**Status**|This field can have any one of the following values:

- **Blocked**
- **Open**
- **Reporting**
- **Closed**

The **Blocked** status is set by default when you create a new section. This shows that a new tax register section is created and that the register does not contain any data.

Change the status to **Open manually** to continue further set up. Using this status, during tax register calculation and recalculation, you cannot check the availability of data for the previous and following taxation periods. The continuity of creating tax registers in the current period is not controlled. This status target allows you to enable debugging of the tax register calculation accuracy.

If the Status has the value **Reporting**, the continuity of tax data creation is controlled. This is the production working mode with the Tax Accounting module. In this status, only the end date must be changed.

The status value **Closed** indicates a closed taxation period. It can be set after all tax registers for the taxation period are built.| - |**Starting Date**|Enter the start date of the tax register section.| - |**Ending Date**|Enter the end date of the tax register section.| - -4. On the **Dimensions** FastTab, enter the dimension codes to filter the information selected for tax registers. Dimension codes can be changed only when the **Status** field of the tax register version has the value **Open**. -5. On the **Balance** FastTab, enter the deadlines for debtor and creditor liabilities applied in accordance with the current taxation period. For example, Debit Balance Point 1 = - 45D, Debit Balance Point 2 = - 90D. -6. On the **System** FastTab, select the actual norm code for the current tax register version in the **Norm Jurisdiction Code** field. Select the form number **17209** in the **Form ID** field. - - Choose the **OK** button. - -7. In the **Tax Registers** window, choose the **Registers** action. -8. In the **Tax Register Names**window, you can add new registers to the list. To create a new tax register, do one of the following: - - 1. Place the cursor in an empty line at the end of the register list and enter the information on the new register. - 2. Place the cursor on the register you want to create the new one after. Then press F3 and enter the information on the new register. - -9. Enter the fields described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**No.**|Enter the number of the tax register.| - |**Description**|Enter the name of the tax register.| - |**Storing Method**|Select the tax register type.

You can choose one of the following options:

- Calculation (accumulating)
- Build entry (creation on the basis of posted ledgers entries)| - |**Table ID**|Select 17208 for the tax register with storing method calculation.

For the tax register with storing method build entry depending on the source entry of the register, select one of following: **17209**, **17210**, **17211**, **17212**, **17213**, **17214**.| - -Mapping of the source entries of the register and Table IDs are listed in the following table. - -|Value|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**17209**|For registers created based on general ledger entries| -|**17210**|For registers created based on customer and vendor entries| -|**17211**|For registers created based on fixed assets and immaterial assets entries| -|**17212**|For register created based on item entries| -|**17213**|For registers created based on expenses of future periods| -|**17214**|For registers created based on the payroll entry ledger| - -If a new version of the tax register is created, the window with the register list will be empty. In this window, you can manually enter all the tax registers to be used, or you can select the **Copy Section** action in the **Tax Register Section** window and copy the register list with its settings from any of the existing tax register sections. - -In the **Copy Tax Register Section** window, enter the section from which you want to copy the register. - -The following procedure shows how to remove a tax register from the register list. - -## To remove a tax register from the register list. - -1. Choose the **Registers** action, and then choose the **Edit** action to select the register card. -2. Choose the **OK** button. -3. Choose the **Delete** action to remove the register from the register list. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [Collecting Profit Tax Information for Tax Declaration](collecting-profit-tax-information-for-tax-declaration.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 51396150..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Undepreciable Fixed Assets - description: You need to create or select a card for the fixed asset that should be repaid. The following procedure shows how to open the fixed asset card. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Undepreciable Fixed Assets -You need to create or select a card for the fixed asset that should be repaid. The following procedure shows how to open the fixed asset card. - -## To set up an undepreciable fixed asset - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Fixed Asset Card** window, on the **Depreciation** FastTab, select the **Undepreciable FA** field. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Quantity Book](how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md) - [Undepreciable Fixed Assets](undepreciable-fixed-assets.md) - [Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md deleted file mode 100644 index b16a33e5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up VAT Ledgers - description: VAT ledgers are used to store details about VAT in transactions that involve goods and services in Russia or goods imported into Russia. You can create and store different kinds of VAT ledgers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up VAT Ledgers -VAT ledgers are used to store details about VAT in transactions that involve goods and services in Russia or goods imported into Russia. You can create and store different kinds of VAT ledgers. For example, you can create VAT ledgers for: - -- Sales to different groups of customers. -- Sales amount differences and prepayments. -- Purchases from different vendor groups. - -To use VAT ledgers, you must specify the relevant number series. - -## To set up VAT ledgers - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, on the **Numbering** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT Purch. Ledger No. Series**|Specifies the number series that you want to use for VAT ledgers for purchase documents.| - |**VAT Sales Ledger No. Series**|Specifies the number series that you want to use for VAT ledgers for sales documents.| - - You must ensure that vendor purchase documents cannot be posted without stating the invoice date and number. - -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **Vendor Posting Groups** window, for the relevant posting groups, select the **VAT Invoice Mandatory** field. - - Next, you must set up VAT posting. For each VAT posting setup you must specify if entries that use the setup must be included in VAT ledgers. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -6. In the **VAT Posting Setup** window, for each VAT posting setup, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Not Include into VAT Ledger**|Specifies if entries that use the setup must be included in VAT ledgers. For more information, see Not Include into VAT Ledger.| - |**VAT Exempt**|Specifies if entries that use this posting setup are VAT exempt. For more information, see VAT Exempt.| - -Now, you can create VAT ledgers for purchases and sales. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) - [How to: Register VAT on Purchase Orders](how-to-register-vat-on-purchase-orders.md) - [How to: Prepare VAT Entries for Posting](how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md) - [How to: Create VAT Ledgers](how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Create Additional Sheets](how-to-create-additional-sheets.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vendor-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vendor-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index c52bcf39..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-set-up-vendor-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Vendor Prepayments - description: Prepayments are advance payments on purchase orders that are paid before the final invoice is issued. For example, you may be required by a vendor to prepay 20 percent of the invoice amount on a manufactured item. Prepayments allow you track and record advance payments on purchase invoices. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Vendor Prepayments -Prepayments are advance payments on purchase orders that are paid before the final invoice is issued. For example, you may be required by a vendor to prepay 20 percent of the invoice amount on a manufactured item. Prepayments allow you track and record advance payments on purchase invoices. - -## To set up vendor prepayments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Numbering** FastTab, verify that the number series for the **Posted Prepmt. Inv. Nos.** is the same as the **Posted Invoice Nos.**. Also verify that the number series for **Posted Prepmt. Cr. Memo Nos.** is the same as the **Posted Credit Memo Nos.**. -3. On the **Prepayment** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Use Prepayment Account**|Select to post prepayments using the special subaccount specified in the **Prepayment Account** field in the **Vendor Posting Groups** window.| - |**Posted PD Doc. Nos.**|Enter the code of the number series that you want to use for prepayment documents.| - |**PD Doc. Nos. Type**|Select if you want to use a number series or symbol to identify prepayment documents.| - |**Symbol for PD Doc.**|Enter a symbol to be printed on prepayment documents.| - |**PD Gains Condition Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate conditional prepayment gains.| - |**PD Losses Condition Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate conditional prepayment losses.| - |**PD Gains Kind Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate payment in kind prepayment gains.| - |**PD Losses Kind Dim Value**|Enter the code for the dimension that is used to generate payment in kind prepayment losses.| - -4. Open the **Vendor Posting Groups** window. -5. In the **Prepayment Account** field, specify the general ledger accounts that you want to use for posting vendor prepayments. -6. Choose **Close** to close the window and save your entries. - -You can now track and record advance payments on purchase invoices. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Invoicing Prepayments](../../finance-invoice-prepayments.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](../../walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-and-print-account-turnover-information.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-and-print-account-turnover-information.md deleted file mode 100644 index 830589f8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-and-print-account-turnover-information.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View and Print Account Turnover Information - description: Russian enhancements enable you to view account turnover information in correspondence with other accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View and Print Account Turnover Information -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] enables you to view account turnover information in correspondence with other accounts. - -## To view account turnover information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Corresp. General Ledger**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Date Filter**|Enter the date filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Business Unit Filter**|Select the business unit filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Department Filter**|Select the department filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Incexp Filter**|Select the income and expenses filter for which you want to view account information.| - |**Switch Debit/Credit**|Specifies if you want to show the debit and credit balance for the account.| - -## To print account turnover information - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Corresp. General Ledger**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, enter the following information. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Period Beginning**|Select the start date for the information that you want to include in the report.| - |**Ending of Period**|Select the end date for the information that you want to include in the report.| - |**Without Double Entries**|Specifies if you want to print the report without including double entries.| - |**Without Account Title Type**|Specifies if you want to print the report without including account titles.| - |**Without Levels of Enclosure**|Specifies if you want to print the report without including levels of enclosure.| - |**Interim Total**|Specifies if you want to print the report including interim totals.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6073dfda..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/how-to-view-posted-entries-on-a-fixed-asset-charge.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Posted Entries on a Fixed Asset Charge - description: You can view all posted fixed asset entries for each fixed asset charge code. The following procedure shows how to view the posted entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Posted Entries on a Fixed Asset Charge -You can view all posted fixed asset entries for each fixed asset charge code. The following procedure shows how to view the posted entries. - -## To view a posted entry on a fixed asset charge - -- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Ledger Entries**, and then choose the related link. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create a Fixed Asset Charge](how-to-create-a-fixed-asset-charge.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-act-of-receivables-and-payables-inv-17.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-act-of-receivables-and-payables-inv-17.md deleted file mode 100644 index d8b9483e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-act-of-receivables-and-payables-inv-17.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Inventory Act of Receivables And Payables INV-17 - description: The inventory act of receivables and payables feature enables you to prepare an inventory of debts and liabilities, and print reports in different formats. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Inventory Act of Receivables And Payables INV-17 -The inventory act of receivables and payables feature enables you to prepare an inventory of debts and liabilities, and print reports in the following formats: - -- INV-17 -- Supplement to INV-17 - -## Setting Up a Number Series for Inventory Acts -The following procedure shows how to set up a number series for inventory acts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, fill in the **Contractor Invent. Act Nos.** field. - -## Inventory Act Processing -You can create and process inventory acts of contractors' accounts. You can print inventory acts. - -### Creating an Inventory Act Card -The following procedure shows how to create an inventory act card. - -1. Choose the **General Ledger** action, choose the **Analysis & Reporting** action, and then choose the **Contractor Invent. Act.** action. -2. In the **Inventory Account Card** window, enter information in the following fields: - - - | Field | Description | - |--------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **No.** | This field displays the number of the act, and is filled in automatically from the number series. | - | **Act Date** | This field displays the act date, and is filled in with the work date. | - | **Inventory Date** | This field displays the date of inventory, and is filled with the work date. Debts and liabilities will be calculated on this date. | - | **Reason Document Type** | Select the type of reason document from the following:

- **Order**
- **Resolution**
- **Regulation** | - - -3. Choose the **Add Lines** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must not set filters. - - Debts and liabilities for vendors and customers are calculated, and lines are created. For each customer and vendor, the total debt and the total liability amount (taking posting groups into account) on the inventory date are calculated, and shown in a separate line. The line fields are listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Contractor Type**|This field displays the contractor type (Customer, Vendor).| -|**Contractor No.**|This field displays the number corresponding to the contractor.| -|**Contractor Name**|This field displays the name of the contractor.| -|**Posting Group, G/L Account No.**|This field displays the posting group and the receivables or payables account for which the debt or liability amount is calculated.| -|**Category**|This field displays the amount category (Debts, Liabilities).| -|**Total Amount**|This field displays the total amount of debts or liabilities.| -|**Confirmed Amount**|This field displays the total amount of debts or liabilities by default.| - -### Changing Separate Lines in an Inventory Act -The following procedure shows how to change individual lines in an inventory act in the **Inventory Account Card** window. - -1. Specify whether the amount (or part of the amount) is one of the following: - -- Confirmed by contractor -- Not confirmed -- Overdue - -2. If the amount is not confirmed, enter the amount that is not confirmed in the **Not Confirmed Amount** field. -3. If the amount is overdue, enter the overdue amount in the **Overdue Amount** field. -3. To correct a line that has an incorrect amount (for instance, if some documents are not posted, or not applied), choose the **Add Lines** action. -5. Select the vendor or customer code, and then choose the **OK** button. - -The debts and liabilities amount for the selected vendor or customer is recalculated and the lines are inserted in the document. - -## Printing the INV-17 form and the Supplement to INV-17 form - The following procedure shows how to print the INV-17 form and the Supplement to INV-17 form. - -1. In the **Inventory Account Card** window, choose the **Release** action. -3. Choose the **Act** action, and then choose the **Signatures** action. -4. Select the following fields: - -- **Chairman** -- **Member1** -- **Member2** -- **Member3** -- **Accountant** - - > [!NOTE] - > All selected signatures will be reflected in the appropriate fields. - -5. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Invent. Act INV-17** action to print the inventory act. -6. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Supplement to Invent. Act INV-17** action to print the supplement to the inventory act. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russian Payables Reports](russian-payables-reports.md) - [Russian Receivables Reports](russian-receivables-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7667452e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory-setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Inventory Setup - description: As part of inventory management, you can set up inventory to assign item charges on purchases from foreign countries/regions based on weight or volume, and to use the same column for original and corrective postings. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Inventory Setup -As part of inventory management, you can set up inventory to: - -- Assign item charges on purchases from foreign countries/regions based on weight or volume. -- Use the same column for original and corrective postings. - -## Item Charge Assignment in Purchase Documents -In Russia, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] can assign item charges on purchases from foreign countries/regions based on weight or volume. For each item, in the **Item Card** window, on the **Foreign Trade** FastTab, if the **Gross Weight Mandatory** and **Unit Volume Mandatory** check boxes are selected, you must fill in the **Gross Weight** and **Unit Volume** fields. When you suggest an item charge assignment on a purchase order, you must specify that the distribution principle, weight, and volume are added to the options to choose from. For more information, see [How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](../../payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). - -## Item Corrections -You can set up inventory to use the same column for original and corrective postings. This is often referred to as *red storno*. - -You can use red storno posting to post corrections for the following inventory entries: - -- Corrective entries in the item journal. -- Reversal of item documents such as item receipts and item shipments. -- Posting item revaluation or item reclassification journals. -- Periodic adjustments of item costs. - -For more information, see [How to: Post Red Storno Corrections](how-to-post-red-storno-corrections.md). - -### Adjusting Item Cost -If you select the Enable Red Storno field in the **Inventory Setup** window, then negative deviations are posted according to red storno when you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Item Documents](item-documents.md) - [Item Obligatory Acts](item-obligatory-acts.md) - [How to: Post Red Storno Corrections](how-to-post-red-storno-corrections.md) - [How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](../../payables-how-assign-item-charges.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index 61fc6206..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Russian Inventory Functionality -description: Russian inventory functionality is described in several topics. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Russian Inventory Functionality -Russian inventory functionality is described in several topics. - -## In This Section -[Inventory Setup](inventory-setup.md) -[Item Documents](item-documents.md) -[Item Obligatory Acts](item-obligatory-acts.md) -[Inventory Act of Receivables And Payables INV-17](inventory-act-of-receivables-and-payables-inv-17.md) -[Item General Ledger Turnover](item-general-ledger-turnover.md) -[How to: Create the TORG-2 Report for Registering Mismatched Receipts](how-to-create-the-torg-2-report-for-registering-mismatched-receipts.md) -[How to: Create the TORG-29 Goods Report](how-to-create-the-torg-29-goods-report.md) -[How to: Create the TORG-1 Report for Acceptance of Goods](how-to-create-the-torg-1-report-for-acceptance-of-goods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index c2ce3412..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Item Documents - description: Russian enhancements include several documents that you can use to manage your warehouse. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Item Documents -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes several documents that you can use to manage your warehouse. This also includes reports that you must submit for official reporting, such as the Item Report TORG-29, Items Receipt Act TORG-1, and Receipt Deviations TORG-2 reports. - -The following types of documents are useful for managing your warehouse: - -- Item receipt act without the vendor invoice - This is applied to the account receipt of items based on the quality, quantity, and cost. -- Item writing-off act – This is applied to register damage for reasons such as the loss of quality of items that will no longer be sold. -- Item transfer – This is applied to receipt and delivery shipments for transfer of items within the organization. - -## Setting Up Warehouse Document Numbering -The following procedure shows how to set up warehouse document numbering. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Numbering** FastTab, specify in the following fields the series of numbers for documents: - - - **Item Receipt Nos** - - **Posted Item receipt Nos** - - **Item Shipment Nos** - - **Posted Item Shipment Nos** - -## Creating an Item Receipt Act Without a Vendor -The following procedure shows how to create an item receipt act without a vendor. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the header of the **Item Receipt** window, enter the fields described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No.**|Specifies the warehouse document header number.| - |**Posting Description**|Specifies the posting description.| - |**Location Code**|Specifies the value code that is filled in from the Location list.| - |**Gen. Bus. Posting Group**|Specifies the code of the general business posting group.| - |**Posting Date**

**Document Date**|Specifies the working date that is filled in by default.| - |**External Document No.**|Enter the primary document number.| - |**Purchaser Code**|Specifies the value code that is selected from salespeople or purchasers.| - |**Correction**|Specifies if the entry is a correction.| - |**Status**|Specifies if the document is Open or Released.| - -3. In the document lines of the **Item Receipt** window, enter the fields described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Item No.**|Specifies the item number from the Item List table.| - |**Description**|Specifies the item description.| - |**Quantity**|Specifies the number of item units.| - |**Reserve Quantity Inbnd**|Specifies the item quantity reserved at the warehouse of the receiver.| - |**Unit Amount**|Specifies the price of a unit item.| - |**Indirect Cost %**|Specifies the indirect cost percent.| - |**Unit Cost**|Specifies the item unit cost of the receipt shipment line.| - |**Amount**|Specifies the transaction amount.| - |**Unit of Measure Code**|Specifies the unit of measure code for the received items.| - -4. In the **Item Receipt** window, choose the **Employee Signatures** action to specify the signature of the person in charge. -5. Enter the fields described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Employee Type**|Specifies the type of the employee.| - |**Employee No.**|Specifies the employee number of the employee who must sign.| - |**Employee Name**|Specifies the values that are retrieved from the standard fields of the selected **Employee Card**.| - -6. To print an **Item Receipt** report from the **Item Receipt** window, choose the **Item Document** action. -7. Choose the **Print** button. - -The following functions are available in the **Item Receipt** window. - -|Function|Description| -|--------------|-----------------| -|Changing document status|Documents can be open or released for the next processing stage. Choose the **Release** or the **Reopen** action.| -|Reservation of document lines|Items can be reserved from the document line. Choose the **Reserve** action.| -|Warehouse adjustment calculation|Refers only to item quantity corrections in the warehouse bins. This is accessible only if advanced picking and placing is used in the warehouse.| -|Document posting|Choose the **Post** action to perform the following:

- **Post** Post the item receipt. The posted item receipt is created.
- **Post and Print** Post the receipt and print the test report.| - -## Analysis of a Posted Document Item Receipt Without a Vendor -The following procedure shows how to analyze a posted document item receipt without a vendor. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Item Receipts**, and then choose the related link. - - > [!NOTE] - > The posted item receipt displays all the information from the item receipt. - -2. Choose the **Sort** action to sort the list of documents selected for printing in ascending or descending order. -3. Choose the **Print** button. - -## Creating an Item Writing-Off Act -The following procedure shows how to create an item writing-off act. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the header of the **Item Shipment** window, enter the fields. These fields are the same as those on the **Item Receipt** window. -3. In the document lines of the **Item Shipment** window, enter the fields. These fields are the same as those on the **Item Receipt** window except for the following: - - - The **Indirect Cost** field is available only in the **Item Receipt** window. - - The fields in the following table are available only in the **Item Shipment** window. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**FA No.**|Specifies the fixed asset to write off items and materials.| - |**Depreciation Book Code**|Specifies the fixed asset depreciation book to which the additional cost will be added.| - -4. In the **Item Shipment** window, choose the **Employee Signatures** actionm to specify the signature of the person in charge. -5. Enter the fields described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Employee Type**|Specifies the type of the employee.| - |**Employee No.**|Specifies the employee number of the employee who must sign.| - |**Employee Name**|Specifies the values that are retrieved from the standard fields of the selected **Employee Card**.| - -6. Choose the **Print** action. - -The functions available in the **Item Shipment** window are same as those in the **Item Receipt** window. - -## Analysis of a Posted Document Item Writing-Off Act -The following procedure shows how to analyze a posted document item writing-off act. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Item Shipments**, and then choose the related link. - - > [!NOTE] - > The posted item shipment displays all the information from the item shipment. - -2. Choose the **Sort** action to sort the list of documents selected for printing in ascending or descending order. -3. Choose the **Print** action. - -## Report Transfer Order TORG-13 Based on an Unposted Transfer Document -The following procedure shows how to create a Transfer Order TORG-13 report based on transfer documents that are not posted. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transfer Orders**, and then choose the related link. - - Choose the **Print** action. - -## Report Transfer Order TORG-13 Based on a Posted Transfer Document - Transfer Receipt -The following procedure shows how to create a report based on a posted transfer document called a transfer receipt. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Transfer Receipt**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Print** action. - -## Report Transfer Order TORG-13 Based on a Posted Transfer Document - Transfer Shipment -The following procedure shows how to create a report based on a posted transfer document called a transfer shipment. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Transfer Shipments**, and then choose the related link. - - Choose the **Print** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Inventory Setup](inventory-setup.md) - [Item Obligatory Acts](item-obligatory-acts.md) - [Item General Ledger Turnover](item-general-ledger-turnover.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-general-ledger-turnover.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-general-ledger-turnover.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4d816b60..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-general-ledger-turnover.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,149 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Item General Ledger Turnover - description: The following pages and reports enable the creation of turnover sheet for goods and materials. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Item General Ledger Turnover -The following pages and reports enable the creation of turnover sheet for goods and materials. - -- Item General Ledger Turnover - Page 12449 -- Item Turnover (Qty.) - Report 12469 -- Item Turnover Checklist - Report 12489 - -## Item General Ledger Turnover Page (12449) -The **Item General Ledger Turnover** window shows the turnover for items in quantities and costs, the balance at the beginning of the month, positive and negative adjustment, and the balance at the end of the month. - -The **Item General Ledger Turnover** window is usually created monthly, and can also be created for the date of inventory. The data in the **Item General Ledger Turnover** window is checked with the warehouse accounting data. The cost data is checked with the net changes and balances of: - -- Account 41, Items -- Account 10, Materials - -To access the **Item General Ledger Turnover** window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item G/L Turnover**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|---|---| -|**Date Filter**|Enter the period the data is analyzed for. You can use the buttons in the lower left of the window, or you can specify the period manually.| -|**Location Filter**|Enter the location code that the information must be filtered for. You can enter a maximum of 10 characters, both numbers and letters.| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Enter the filter value for the analysis on the Global Dimension 1 filter.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Enter the filter value for the analysis on the Global Dimension 2 filter.| - -The window contains fields with the information listed in the following table. You cannot edit the fields. - -|Field|Definition| -|---|---| -|**No.**|This field displays the item number.| -|**Description**|This field displays the description of the item.| -|**Base Unit of Measure**|This field displays the base unit of measure of the item. The unit of measure is specified in the Item card as the Base.| -|**Starting Quantity**,

**Ending Quantity**,

**Debit Quantity**,

**Credit Quantity**|These fields provide information about the quantity of the item—item quantity at the beginning and at the end of the period, and positive and negative correction in quantities of the item. Quantities are specified in base units of measure.| -|**Starting Cost**,

**Ending Cost**,

**Debit Cost**,

**Credit Cost**|These fields provide information about the cost of the item, at the beginning and at the end of the period, and the item positive and negative adjustments in financial amounts. These field values are calculated on the basis of the cost amounts posted in the general ledger entry.| - -To display the selected item card - -- Choose the **Item** button and then **Card** (Shift+F5 Hot Key). - -To print the **Item Turnover (Qty.)** or **Item Turnover Checklist** reports. - -- Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Turnover Sheet** or the **Turnover Checklist** action. - -## Item Turnover (Qty.) Report (12469) -To analyze net changes and balances of items and materials, you can print the Item Turnover (Qty.) report and export it to Microsoft Office Excel. The report prints the following data from the Item General Ledger Turnover window: - -- Item number and description -- Balance at the beginning of the specified period (quantity and cost) -- Positive adjustment (quantity and cost) -- Negative adjustment (quantity and cost) -- Balance at the end of the specified period (quantity and cost ) -- Unit of measure - -The following procedure shows how to access the turnover sheet. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item General Ledger Turnover**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Turnover Sheet** action. - -The turnover sheet is printed monthly and on the date of inventory, but it can be printed for any given period. - -The **Item** FastTab of the request page contains fields with the information listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|---|---| -|**No.**|Enter an item number or a range of item numbers to print an item general ledger turnover for one item or for a group of items.| -|**Location Filter**|Enter the location code that the information must be filtered for, to print the Item General Ledger Turnover window for one or several locations.

You can enter a maximum of 10 characters, both numbers and letters. The field value is entered automatically in the **Location Filter** field| -|**Date Filter**|Enter the period that the report is printed for.| - -On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---|---| -|**Rounding Precision**|Choose the required rounding precision:

0.001, 0.01, 1, or 1000.| -|**Replace zero values by blanks**|Select this field if you want to replace zero values with blanks.| -|**Skip accounts without net changes**|Select this field to exclude from the report the accounts with zero turnovers for the given period.| -|**Skip accounts with zero ending balance**|Select this field to exclude from the report the accounts with zero ending balance at the end of the period.| -|**Skip zero lines**|Select this field to exclude from the report the lines with zero values.| -|**Unit of Measure**|Choose a unit of measure for calculating report quantities:

- **Base** – In base units of measure
- **Sale** – In units of measure for sales
- **Purchase** – In units of measure for purchases| -|**Print Quantity**|Select this field to print the quantity that is mentioned in the report.| -|**Print Cost**|Select this field to print the costs that are mentioned in the report.| -|**Export to Excel**|Select this field to export the report to Microsoft Office Excel.| - -## Item Turnover Checklist Report (12489) -The **Item Turnover Checklist** report provides accounting for the expected costs of items and materials that are received but not paid for. - -The **Item Turnover Checklist** report prints all the data about items and materials that are in the **Item Turnover (Qty.)** report and in addition, it prints expected cost balances: - -- Item number and description -- Balance at the beginning of the specified period (quantity, expected cost, and balance) -- Item positive adjustment (quantity, expected cost, and balance) -- Item negative adjustment (quantity, expected cost, and balance) -- Net change at the end of the specified period (quantity, expected cost, and balance) -- Unit of measure - -The following procedure shows how to access the turnover checklist. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item General Ledger Turnover**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Turnover Checklist** action. - -The turnover checklist is printed monthly and on the date of inventory, but can be printed for any given period. - -The **Item** FastTab of the request page contains the fields with the information listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|---|---| -|**No.**|Enter the item number or a range of item numbers if you want to print the report for one item or for a group of items.| -|**Item Category Code**|Enter the Item Category code. This code specifies the following default values:

- Standard General Product Posting Group
- Standard Inventory Posting Group
- Standard VAT Product Posting Group
- Standard Costing Method| -|**Product Group Code**|Enter the Product group code specifying the product type the item belongs to (such as paint, tools, and batteries).| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Enter a filter value for analysis on the Global Dimension 1 filter.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Enter a filter value for analysis on the Global Dimension 2 filter.| -|**Date Filter**|Enter the period that the report is printed for. The field is required.| - -On the **Parameters** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---|---| -|**Rounding Precision**|Choose the required rounding precision:

0.001, 0.01, 1, or 1000.| -|**Replace zero values by blanks**|Select this field to replace zero values with blanks.| -|**Skip accounts without net changes**|Select this field to exclude from the report the accounts with zero turnovers for the period.| -|**Skip accounts with zero ending balance**|Select this field to exclude from the report the accounts with zero ending balance at the end of the period.| -|**Skip zero lines**|Select this field to exclude from the report the lines with zero values.| -|**Print horizontal grid**|Select this field to print the horizontal grid in the report.| -|**Unit of Measure**|Choose a unit of measure for calculating report quantities:

- **Base** – In base units of measure
- **Sale** – In units of measure for sales
- **Purchase** – In units of measure for purchases| -|**Print Quantity**|Select this field to print the quantity that is mentioned in the report.| -|**Print Cost**|Select this field to print the costs that are mentioned in the report.| -|**Print Group Totals**|Select this field to print preliminary group totals.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Item Obligatory Acts](item-obligatory-acts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-obligatory-acts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-obligatory-acts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6e39455c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/item-obligatory-acts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Item Obligatory Acts - description: The item obligatory acts feature enables you to print the obligatory reports used for the material and production resources in your company. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Item Obligatory Acts -The item obligatory acts feature enables you to print the obligatory reports used for the material and production resources in your company. These reports contain item information such as the item number and description, item storage place, item information brand, sort, profile, size, unit of measure, and vendor information. - -You can print reports for the various accounts used for material and production resources. - -The following table provides the list of reports and how to print the reports. - -|Report|Description| -|------------|-----------------| -|Item Card M-17|The report is printed after registering a shipment transaction to get a signature confirming the receipt of items and materials in the primary document. It is also printed at the end of the reporting period to create a primary document with all the required signatures of responsible employees.

To print Item Card M-17

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Card M-17**, and then choose the related link.
For more information, see Item Card M-17.| -|Physical Inventory Form INV-3 (Inventory Description)|The report is required to register the inventory results.

To print Physical Inventory Form INV-3

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Journal**, choose **Print**, and then select the **Phys. Inventory Form INV-3** check box.
For more information, see Phys. Inventory Form INV-3.| -|Physical Inventory Form INV-19 (Comparison sheet)|On the request form, enter information such as inventory basis, document number, document date, inventory start date, inventory end date, inventory form date, and status at date. The report is required to register inventory results.

To print Physical Inventory Form INV-19

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Journal**, choose **Print**, and then select the **Phys. Inventory Form INV-19** check box.
For more information, see Phys. Inventory Form INV-19.| -|Transfer Order TORG-13 report (internal transfer order)|This report enables you to print an internal transfer order for items and packing.

- To print Transfer Order TORG-13 report
- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transfer Order**, and then choose the related link.
Open the transfer order, and on the Report tab, choose **Transfer Order TORG-13**.
For more information, see Transfer Order TORG-13.| -|Shipment Request M-11|Before printing this report, enter information such as entry type code, from whom, sent (employee), and received (employee) on the request form. This report enables you to print a shipment request for internal transfer of materials.

- To print Shipment Request M-11
- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclass. Journal**, choose **Print**, and then select the **Shipment Request M-11** check box.
For more information, see Shipment Request M-11.| -|Warehouse Purchase Receipt М-4 report|To print the report from the purchase order

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, select an order, choose **Print**, and then select the **Purchase Receipt M-4** check box.
For more information, see Purchase Receipt M-4

To print the report from a posted purchase invoice

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Purchase Invoices**, select an order, choose **Print**, and then select the **Purchase Receipt M-4** check box.

This report is usually printed at the time of receiving items and materials at the warehouse.| -|Sales Shipment M-15|To print Sales Shipment M-15 from the sales order

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, select an order, choose **Print**, and then select the **Sales Shipment M-15** check box.

To print Sales Shipment M-15 from the sales invoice

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, select an invoice, choose **Print**, and then select the **Sales Shipment M-15** check box.

To print from the posted sales invoice

- Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, select an invoice, choose **Print**, and then select the **Sales Shipment M-15** check box.

This report is usually printed at the time of shipment of materials out of the company.

For more information, see Sales Shipment M-15 and Posted Sales Shipment M-15.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Item Documents](item-documents.md) - [Item General Ledger Turnover](item-general-ledger-turnover.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/obligatory-sales-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/obligatory-sales-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 12b17e27..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/obligatory-sales-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Obligatory Sales Reports - description: The obligatory sales reports feature enables you to print several reports - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Obligatory Sales Reports -The obligatory sales reports feature enables you to print the following reports: - -- Payment Invoice report -- Shipment TORG-12 report -- Shipment Waybill 1-T report -- Factura-Invoice report -- Act Performed Work report -- Shipment report - -## Payment Invoice Report -The **Payment Invoice** report is sent to the customer and contains the following information: - -- Payment amount -- Agreement and invoice details -- Bank account requisites - -### Types of Payment Invoice Reports -The **Payment Invoice** reports are of the following types: - -|Report|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|Order Factura-Invoice report|Printed in portrait form from sales documents that are not yet posted.| -|Order Factura-Invoice (A) report|Printed in portrait form from sales documents that are not yet posted.| -|Posted Factura-Invoice report|Printed in portrait form from posted sales documents that are not yet posted.| -|Posted Factura-Invoice (A) report|Printed in landscape form from posted sales documents that are not yet posted.| -|Posted Credit Memo Factura-Invoice report|Printed from posted credit memos (portrait).| - -## Act Performed Work Report -The **Act Performed Work** report documents the completion of services. - -### Types of Act Performed Work Reports -The **Act Performed Work** reports can be of the following types: - -|Report|Description| -|------------|-----------------| -|Act Performed Work report|Printed from sales documents that are not yet posted.| -|Posted Act Performed Work report|Printed from posted sales invoices.| - -## Shipment Report -The **Order Shipment** report is printed from sales documents that are not yet posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russian Receivables Reports](russian-receivables-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/payables-and-receivables.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/payables-and-receivables.md deleted file mode 100644 index e1b08754..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/payables-and-receivables.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payables and Receivables - description: In Russia, there are specific [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] features that you can use to track and manage your accounts payable and accounts receivable. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# Payables and Receivables -In Russia, there are specific [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] features that you can use to track and manage your accounts payable and accounts receivable. - -## Getting Started with Payables and Receivables - Use the following table to learn more about the payables and receivables features that are available for Russia. - -|Topic|Description| -|-----------|---------------------------------------| -|[How to: Enter Custom Declarations Information](how-to-enter-custom-declarations-information.md)|Enables you to create and print customs declarations for import and export goods.| -|[How to: Set Up and Create Letters of Attorney](how-to-set-up-and-create-letters-of-attorney.md)|Enables you to create and print a Letter of Attorney that you can use to authorize an individual or organization to act on the behalf of another in a legal or business matter.| -|[Russian Payables Reports](russian-payables-reports.md)|Enables you to view and print general ledger turnover and finance reports that originate from vendor purchase transactions.| -|[Russian Receivables Reports](russian-receivables-reports.md)|Enables you to view and print general ledger turnover and finance reports that originate from customer sales transactions.| -|[How to: Set Up Customer Prepayments](how-to-set-up-customer-prepayments.md)|Enables you to set up advance payments on sales orders that are received before a final invoice is issued.| -|[How to: Set Up Vendor Prepayments](how-to-set-up-vendor-prepayments.md)|Enables you to set up advance payments on purchase orders that are paid before a final invoice is issued.| -|[How to: Set Up Customer and Vendor Agreements](how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md)|Enables you to set up agreements with customers and vendors.| -|[How to: Combine Customer or Vendor Cards](how-to-combine-customer-or-vendor-cards.md)|Enables you to combine two customer or vendor cards that belong to one customer or vendor.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/petty-cash-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/petty-cash-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index 079dc765..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/petty-cash-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Petty Cash Management -description: The petty cash management feature enables you to create multiple cash account cards, create ingoing and outgoing cash order documents, and more. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Petty Cash Management -The petty cash management feature enables you to: - -- Create multiple cash account cards. -- Create ingoing and outgoing cash order documents with the following specifications: - - - Number them using special numbering rules. - - Create printing windows of the documents in the required format. - - Post the documents. - -- Void posted cash documents (checks). -- Print the following required pages: - - - Cash Ingoing Order CO-1 - - Cash Outgoing Order CO-2 - -- Print the following required reports: - - - Cash Order Journal CO-3 - - Cash Additional Sheet - - Cash Additional Sheet (Curr.) - - Cash Report CO-4. - - Cash Register (Month) - -## Ingoing Cash Orders -To use the ingoing cash order feature, create one general journal template with the Cash Order Payment type. There can be several cash accounts in the company, and several cash points (for example cashiers) for each cash account. For each cash account, you must create a cash account with the Cash Account Card feature. - -For each cash point, create a General Journal batch. The value of the **Balance Account Type** field of the batch line should be chosen as Bank Account, and the appropriate cash account should be entered in the **Balance Account Number** field. - -The following procedure shows how to access the **Ingoing Cash Order** window. - -- In **Financial Management**, choose **Cash Management**, and then choose **Ingoing Cash Orders**. - - To create a new ingoing cash order, or to work with an existing unposted cash order, choose the correct batch name (and accordingly the cash point) in the **Cash** field. This field is required and matches the **Batch Name** field in financial journals. The **Ingoing Cash Order** window contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Posting Date**|Enter the **Posting Date** field in general journals.| -|**Document Type**|Enter the **Document Type** field in general journals. The options are:
  • Payment
  • Refund
If the value of the **Account Type** field is Client or Vendor, then the **Document Type** field is not editable, and is automatically filled in depending on the value in the **Account Type** field and the sign of the amount in the **Income** field.| -|**Prepayment**|In some cases, the financial posting of payments is different in relation to the date of payment, depending on whether if it is before or after the appropriate invoice financial posting. This field should be selected in case of prepayment.| -|**Document No.**|Enter the **Document Number** field in general journals.

If the value of the **Bank Payment Type** field is Computer Check, then the value of the **Document Number** field is automatically filled in after printing the ingoing cash order. The field is filled in with the next number from the number series that is specified in the **Debit Cash Order Number Series** field in the appropriate cash card. In this case, if you use the Void Check Print function on the card, clear the field.

The document number of the posted ingoing cash order is equal to the document number of the unposted ingoing cash order.| -|**Account Type**|Enter the **Account Type** field in general journals. This is the type of the object that is the posting source of a cash payment.| -|**Account Code**|Enter the **Account Code** field in general journals. This is the account code of the object that is the posting source of a cash payment.| -|**Posting Group**|Enter the **Posting Group** field in general journals. This field is not editable.| -|**Currency Code**|Enter the **Currency Code** field in general journals.| -|**Income**|Enter the amount of the payment. Enter the **Credit Amount** field in general journals. If it is positive, then it is an income to the cash account.| -|**Bank Payment Type**|Enter the **Bank Payment Type** field in general journals. If the value is Computer Check, the order cannot be posted before printing.| -|**From to**|Enter the **Description** field in general journals. It is used in the printing window of an order as a payment source description.| -|**Reason**, **Supplement**, **Including**|These fields are transferred to Check Ledger entries during posting and used in printing windows of posted and unposted ingoing cash orders. They can be filled in manually or with the Text Codes functionality.| -|**Debit Account**|This field indicates the general ledger account that is debited as a result of order posting. It is automatically shown according to the posting group's setup of the account (or balance account if the Income field contains a negative value). It is also used in the printing window. This field is not editable.| -|**Credit Account**|This field indicates the general ledger account that is credited as a result of order posting. It is automatically shown according to the posting group's setup of the balance account (or account if the **Income** field contains a negative value). It is used in printing windows. This field is not editable.| -|**Reason Code**, **Applies-to Doc. Type**, **Applies-to Doc. No**.,

**Global Dimension 1 Code**, **Global Dimension 2 Code**|Enter these fields in general journals.| - -## Ingoing Cash Order Window -The following functions in the table can be executed from the **Document** button. - -|Functions|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|Check List (F5 Hot Key)|Shows the list of ingoing cash orders (filtered by the current general journal batch name from the value of the **Cash** field).| -|Dimensions (Shift-Ctrl-D Hot Key)|Standard access to journal line dimensions.| - - The following functions in the table can be executed from the **Functions** button. - -|Functions|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|Copy Document|Runs a report that copies information to the current order from any check ledger entry (posted cash order). Select the check ledger entry from which to copy and a new posting date.| -|Void Check Print|This function changes the status of the ingoing cash order from **Check Printed** to **No**, and if there is a corresponding record in a check ledger entries table, then it changes the value in the **Entry Status** field in that record from **Printed** to **Voided**.| - -Choose **Posting** from the **Posting** button (Hot Key F11) to make posting to ledger entries similar to standard posting from payment journals and cash receipt journals. - -Choose the **Print** action to run the **Cash Ingoing Order CO-1** report, which shows the printing window of the ingoing cash order. Select the **Printing Test** check box to run the preview mode. - -The report shows the printing window of the ingoing cash order. To meet requirements, it can also change some database data. If the cash order is not printed, if the **Printing Test** check box is not selected, and the **Bank Payment Type** field is set to **Computer Check**, then the report carries out the following functions: - -- Creates a record in Check Ledger Entries according to the ingoing cash order with the value printed in the **Entry Status** field. -- If the **Document Number** field is empty, then this field is filled in with the next number from the number series indicated in the appropriate cash account. -- Changes the status of the ingoing cash order from **Check Printed** to **Yes**. - -## Posted Cash Debit Order Report -To print the ingoing cash order window after it has been posted, you can run a report that prints the same report from check ledger entries using **Print**. The report has no parameters. Before printing, the report ensures that this is really an ingoing cash order, and not an outgoing cash order or bank payment. - -## Outgoing Cash Orders -To use the outgoing cash order feature, create one general journal template with the Outgoing Cash Order type. The other basic setup of the functionality is the same as that for ingoing cash orders. - -To access the **Outgoing Cash Order** window - -- In **Financial management**, choose the **Cash Management** action, and then choose the **Outgoing Cash Orders** action. - -To create a new outgoing cash order, or to work with an existing unposted cash order, choose the appropriate batch name (and accordingly the cash point) in the **Cash** field. This field is required and matches the **Batch Name** field in financial journals. The Outgoing Cash Order window contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Definition| -|-----------|----------------| -|**Posting Date**|Enter the **Posting Date** field in general journals.| -|**Document Type**|Enter the **Document Type** field in general journals. The options are:

- **Payment**
- **Refund**

If the value of the **Account Type** field is Client or Vendor, then the **Document Type** field is not editable and is automatically filled in depending on the **Account Type** field and the sign of the value in the **Expenses** field.| -|**Prepayment**|In some cases, the financial posting of payments is different in relation to the date of payment, depending on whether if it is before or after the appropriate invoice financial posting. This field should be selected in case of prepayment.| -|**Document No.**|Enter the **Document Number** field in general journals. If the value of the **Bank Payment Type** field is Computer Check, then the value of the **Document Number.** field is automatically filled in after printing the outgoing cash order. The field is filled in with the next number from the number series that is specified in the **Credit Cash Order No. Series** field in the appropriate cash card. In this case, if you use the Void Check Print function on the card, the field is cleared.

The document number of a posted outgoing cash order is equal to the document number of the unposted outgoing cash order.| -|**Account Type**|Enter the **Account Type** field in general journals. This is the type of the object that is the posting source of a cash payment.| -|**Account Code**|Enter the **Account Code** field in general journals. This is the account code of the object that is the posting source of a cash payment.| -|**Posting Group**|Enter the **Posting Group** field in general journals. It is automatically filled. This field is not editable.| -|**Currency Code**|Enter the **Currency Code** field in general journals.| -|**Expenses**|Enter the amount of the payment. Enter the **Debit Amount** field in general journals. If it is positive, then it is an expense from the cash account.| -|**Bank Payment Type**|Enter the **Bank Payment Type** field in general journals.| -|**Given**|Enter the **Description** field in general journals. It is used in the printing window of an order as a payment recipient description.| -|**Reason**, **Supplement**, **Per**|These fields are transferred to Check Ledger entries during posting and used in printing windows of posted and unposted ingoing cash orders. They can be filled in manually or with the Text Codes.| -|**Analitic Code**|This field is not editable. This field is equal to the value of the **Account Number** field.| -|**Debit Account**|This field indicates the general ledger account that is debited as a result of order posting. It is automatically shown according to the posting group's setup of the account (or balance account if the Income field contains a negative value). It is also used in the printing window. This field is not editable.| -|**Credit Account**|This field indicates the general ledger account that is credited as a result of order posting. It is automatically shown according to the posting group's setup of the balance account (or account if the Income field contains a negative value). It is used in printing windows. This field is not editable.| -|**Reason Code**, **Applies-to Doc. Type**, **Applies-to Doc. No.**,

**Global Dimension 1 Code**, **Global Dimension 2 Code**|Enter these fields in general journals.| - -The functions executed from the window are the same as those for the **Ingoing Cash Order** window. - -## Posted Cash Credit Order Report -To print an outgoing cash order window after it has been posted; you can run a report that prints the same window from check ledger entries using the **Print** action. It has no parameters. Before printing, the report ensures that this is really an outgoing cash order, and not an ingoing cash order or bank payment. - -## Cash Order Journal CO-3 Report -The **Cash Order Journal CO-3** report shows the register of posted ingoing and outgoing cash orders during some reporting period in the unified standard printing window that is certified by Russian accounting legislation. For more information, see [How to: Print the Cash Order Journal CO-3 Report](how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md). - -## Cash Additional Sheet Reports -The **Cash Additional Sheet** and **Cash Additional Sheet (Curr.)** reports show the unified standard printing windows for the cash booking register for one operational day of the cash account. These reports are usually printed every day, and their numbering continues according to the value of the **Last Cash Report Page No.** field in the corresponding cash account card. The reports increase that number by one and use this number as a page number of the report (but only if the report parameter Repeat Printing is not selected). They can only be printed per day. - -They both show the opening balance of all the posted ingoing and outgoing cash orders, and the closing balance of an operational day for one cash account. The difference between them is that the **Cash Additional Sheet (Curr.)** report is for cash accounts in a currency other than the local currency. - -To access the reports - -Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Additional Sheet** or **Cash Additional Sheet (Curr.)**, and then choose the related link. - -The parameters of the reports are listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|Bank Account|Enter the codes of the cash accounts that the cash additional pages are printed for (one page for one cash account).| -|Date|Enter the operation date of the cash account for printing in the report.| -|Repeat printing|Select this field to ensure that the printing process does not increase the value of the **Last Cash Report Page No.** field in the corresponding cash account card and that the report is printed with this number (indicated in the cash account card). This serves repeated printing.| - -## Cash Report CO-4 -The **Cash Report CO-4** report shows mandatory daily cash transactions in standard format as required by Russian accounting legislation. For more information, see[How to: Print the Cash Report CO-4 Report](how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Bank Management](bank-management.md) - [How to: Create Cash Account Cards](how-to-create-cash-account-cards.md) - [How to: Print the Cash Order Journal CO-3 Report](how-to-print-the-cash-order-journal-co-3-report.md) - [How to: Print the Cash Report CO-4 Report](how-to-print-the-cash-report-co-4-report.md) - [How to: Print the Ingoing Cash Order Report](how-to-print-the-ingoing-cash-order-report.md) - [How to: Print the Cash Register (Month) Report](assetId:///10a26052-053a-408e-9015-9ef26ebb2b8d) - [How to: Print the Outgoing Cash Order Report](how-to-print-the-outgoing-cash-order-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/posting-vat-on-sales.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/posting-vat-on-sales.md deleted file mode 100644 index 68823d69..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/posting-vat-on-sales.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Posting VAT on Sales -description: Certain fields have been added to the VAT Posting Setup window. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Posting VAT on Sales -The following fields have been added to the **VAT Posting Setup** window (ID 472): - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Trans. VAT Type**|Used to define the rule for extracting VAT.| -|**Trans. VAT Account**|Used to specify an account to register the VAT amount from the gain and from the customer's prepayments to be paid to the federal budget.| -|**Tax Invoice Amount Type**|Used to select the value of VAT. Depending on the value in this field, VAT entry amounts are used in different columns of the VAT purchase or sales ledgers.| - -The above actions are taken for each combination of the Sales VAT Product posting group and Sales VAT posting group. - -In the **Trans. VAT Type** field, the following options are available: - -- **Amount + Tax** -- **Amount & Tax** - -To account for VAT, choose the **Amount + Tax** action. - -The following procedure shows how the accounting entries are created. - -1. In the **Trans. VAT Account No.** field, enter Subaccount 90-3, Gain VAT. -2. In the **Sales VAT Account** field, enter Subaccount 68, VAT to Federal Budget. - -The following accounting entries create the different settings. - - -| Accounting Entries | Settings | -|--------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| **Amount + Tax** | Debit 62 Payables and Receivables - Credit 90-1 Gain and Sales Amount Including VAT

Debit 90-3 Gain VAT

Credit 68 VAT to Federal Budget

Sales VAT Amount | -| **Amount & Tax** | Debit 62 Payables and Receivables

Credit 90-1 Gain

Amount Excluding VAT

Debit 62 Payables and Receivables

Credit 90-3 Gain VAT

Sales VAT Amount

Debit 90-3 Gain VAT

Credit 68 VAT to Budget

Sales VAT amount | -| | Debit 62 Payables and Receivables

Credit 90-1 Gain

Amount Excluding VAT

Debit 62 Payables and Receivables

Credit 68 VAT to Budget

Sales VAT Amount | -## Trans. VAT Account Field -In the **Trans. VAT Account** field, enter Subaccount 90-3 Gain VAT or Subaccount 62 Prepayment VAT. If this field is blank, the postings use the account from the Customer posting groups from the **Receivables Account** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Ledgers](vat-ledgers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/recurring-journal-extension.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/recurring-journal-extension.md deleted file mode 100644 index a5500a8f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/recurring-journal-extension.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Recurring Journal Extension - description: The recurring journal extension feature enables you to enter a line for a recurring journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Recurring Journal Extension -The recurring journal extension feature enables you to enter a line for a recurring journal. - -## Recurring General Journal Line Card -The **Recurring General Journal** window enables you to fill in the recurring journal information. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Recurring General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Card** action. -3. Fill the fields for the recurring general journal lines. -4. Post the journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with General Journals](../../ui-work-general-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/report-selection.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/report-selection.md deleted file mode 100644 index 77d90949..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/report-selection.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Report Selection - description: The report selection feature enables you to print a list of reports at the same time and set up reports from the list that is widely used. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Report Selection -The report selection feature enables you to: - -- Print a list of reports at the same time. -- Set up reports from the list that is widely used. - -The **Default** field has been added to all existing report selection windows. - -You can set up all reports that can be printed from a sales order window and set up default reports to be printed with the **Report Selection-Sales** window. You can also set up reports for various documents with various report selection windows. - -The following procedure shows how to print several reports at the same time. - -1. Create a sales order and ship it. -2. Choose the **Print** action. The **Report Selection-Print** window opens. -3. From the sales order, select the reports that you want to print at the same time. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also print a list of reports with the Report Selection-Print window for other documents such as purchase orders. - -You can select all lines in the **Report Selection-Print** window by choosing the **Set all** action. You can clear all lines by choosing the **Clear all** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russia-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russia-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index ef3a7516..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russia-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Russia Local Functionality - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to calculate VAT due based on Russian VAT rates and regulations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Russia Local Functionality -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], there are Russian-specific features that you can use to track and manage your business. For example, you can use the local functionality features in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to calculate VAT due based on Russian VAT rates and regulations. - -## Getting Started with Russia Local Functionality - Use the following table to learn more about local functionality that is available for Russia. - -|Topic|Description| -|-----------|---------------------------------------| -|[Account Schedules Overview](account-schedules-overview.md)|Enables you to define information for statutory reports by creating user-defined rows and columns.| -|[Bank and Cash Management](bank-and-cash-management.md)|Enables you to manage petty cash and amount differences.| -|[Bank Management](bank-management.md)|Enables you to create bank directory structures to keep bank reference information in one location, create budget classifications, and print and post required documents.| -|[Fixed Assets](fixed-assets.md)|Enables you to manage depreciation and maintenance costs, track the movement of fixed assets, manage the sale or disposal of fixed assets, and generate various reports and statistics.| -|[General Ledger Correspondence](general-ledger-correspondence.md)|Enables you to create, view, and print account turnover information.| -|[How to: Set Up Responsible Employees and Advance Statements](how-to-set-up-responsible-employees-and-advance-statements.md)|Enables you to print and view information about payments made to and from employees.| -|[Inventory](inventory.md)|Enables you to set up and manage your inventory including item documents, item and inventory acts, and general ledger turnover.| -|[Payables and Receivables](payables-and-receivables.md)|Enables you to manage your payables and receivables reports, prepayments, agreements, and cards.| -|[Statutory Reports](statutory-reports.md)|Enables you to import and export data for electronic tax reporting and other documents required by law.| -|[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md)|Enables you to follow tax accounting principles by setting up tax registers and calculating tax differences.| -|[VAT](vat.md)|Enables you to set up, calculate, and pay VAT amounts based on Russian VAT rates and regulations.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russian Chart of Accounts](russian-chart-of-accounts.md) - [Russian Receivables Reports](russian-receivables-reports.md) - [Russian Payables Reports](russian-payables-reports.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-chart-of-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-chart-of-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index ad98a231..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-chart-of-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Russian Chart of Accounts - description: The **Source Type** and Currency Code** fields are available in the Russian **Chart of Accounts** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Russian Chart of Accounts -In the **Chart of Accounts** window, the following fields are available: - -- **Source Type** -- **Currency Code** - - The following table shows the field, associated tab, description, and the usage. - -|Field|Tab|Description|Usage| -|-----------|---------|-----------------|-----------| -|**Source Type**|**General**|Specifies the type of source that must be posted to this general ledger account.|Reporting| -|**Currency Code**|**Consolidation**|Selects a default currency code for the general ledger account.|| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russia Local Functionality](russia-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-payables-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-payables-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index f1aa1440..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-payables-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,234 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Russian Payables Reports - description: The payables report feature enables you to view the vendor general ledger turnover for general ledger accounts for finance entries with the source type Vendor on the screen and in the form of a printed report. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Russian Payables Reports -The payables report feature enables you to view the vendor general ledger turnover for general ledger accounts for finance entries with the source type Vendor on the screen and in the form of a printed report. The following reports are also provided: - -- Vendor General Ledger Turnover (page 12407) -- Vendor General Ledger Turnover (report 12451) -- Vendor Accounting Card (report 12445) -- Vendor Turnover (report 12444) -- Vendor Posting Group Turnover (report 12443) -- Vendor Entries Analysis (report 12446) -- Vendor Reconciliation Act (report 14911) - -## Vendor General Ledger Turnover (Page 12407) -The **Vendor General Ledger Turnover** page is an electronic window that shows the vendor turnover for general ledger accounts in the context of vendors. - -To access this window, choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Payables** action, and then choose the **Turnover** action. This window contains all the information about a vendor's entries such as the general ledger entries with the source type Vendor with the amounts in local currency (LCY). - - The **Options** FastTab contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Date Filter**|Select this field to specify the period that the data is analyzed for. You can use the buttons on the lower-left corner of the window, or you can enter the dates manually.| -|**General Ledger Account Filter**|Select this field to filter the data by general ledger accounts.| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Select this field to define a value for the Global Dimension 1 filter.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Select this field to define a value for the Global Dimension 2 filter.| - - The lines of the window contain the information listed in the following table. - -|Column|Description| -|------------|-----------------| -|No.|Select this column to enter the vendor number. This column is not editable.| -|Name|Select this column to enter the vendor name. This column is not editable.| -|Vendor Posting Group|Select this column to enter the vendor posting group. This column is not editable.| -|Starting Balance LCY,

Debit Amount (LCY),

Credit Amount (LCY),

Ending Balance LCY,

Net Change (LCY).|Select this column to enter the balance at the beginning and the end of the period, debit amount, credit amount, and net change for the period. All amounts are shown in the local currency.

The values of these columns are calculated for all the general ledger entries with the source type Vendor.

These columns are not editable.| - -The following procedure shows how to access the window with the option for the **Vendor** action. - -- Choose the **Vendor** action, choose the **Vendor G/L Turnover** action, and then choose the **Card** action (SHIFT+F5 Hot Key) to view the vendor card for the selected line. - -The following procedure shows how to access the window that has the **Print** action with the following reports: - -1. Choose the **Vendor G/L Turnover** action, and then choose the **G/L Turnover** action to access the **Vendor G/L Turnover** report. -2. Choose the **Vendor G/L Turnover** action, and then choose **Accounting Period** action to access the **Vendor Accounting Card** report. - -## Vendor General Ledger Turnover Report (Report 12451) -The **Vendor General Ledger Turnover** report is used to analyze turnover as well as for analysis of the vendor account balances. It is usually printed monthly, but can be printed for any given period. - -The following procedure shows how to access the **Vendor General Ledger Turnover** report. - -1. Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Payables** action, and then choose the **Turnover** action. -2. Choose the **Vendor G/L Turnover** action, choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **G/L Turnover** action. - -The **Vendor** FastTab of the request page contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**No.**|Select this field to define the vendor number or a number range, depending on whether you want to print a Vendor General Ledger Turnover report of one vendor or of a group of vendors.| -|**Vendor Posting Group**|Select this field to specify one vendor posting group or a range of groups, according to the filtering rules that you set.| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Select this field to define a filter value for data analysis on Global Dimension 1.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Select this field to define a filter value for data analysis on Global Dimension 2.| -|**Date Filter**|Select this field to specify the period that the report is to be printed for.| - -The **Options** FastTab contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Rounding Precision**|Select this field to choose the required rounding precision such as 0.001, 0.01, 1, or 1000.| -|**Replace zero values by blanks**|Select this field to replace zero values with blanks during printing.| -|**Skip accounts without net changes**|Select this field to exclude lines without net changes within the period.| -|**Skip accounts with zero ending balance**|Select this field to exclude lines with zero ending balances at the end of the period.| -|**Skip zero lines**|Select this field to exclude lines with zero values.| -|**Print horizontal grid**|Select this field to print the horizontal grid.| - -## Vendor Accounting Card Report (Report 12445) -The **Vendor Accounting Card** report provides the following information for all of a vendor's entries for a specific period: - -- Starting balance -- Posting date -- Document number -- Description -- Net change debit -- Net change credit -- Document type -- Ending balance - -This report is usually printed monthly and on the date of inventory, but can be printed for any given period. - -The following procedure shows how to access the **Vendor Accounting Card** report. - -1. Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Payables** action, and then choose the **Turnover** action. -2. Choose the **Vendor G/L Turnover** action, choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Vendor Accounting Card** action. - -The **Vendor** FastTab of the request page contains the same fields as the **Vendor** FastTab of the **Vendor General Ledger Turnover** report. On the **Options** FastTab, you can select the **New page for Vendor** check box to print the information for each vendor on a separate page. - -## Vendor Turnover Report (Report 12444) -The **Vendor Turnover** report is used to print the data about a vendor's entries for a specific period in the context of separate contracts (agreements). The report prints the vendor's number and name. If the vendor has an agreement, then the name of the agreement is entered. The system fills in the following information about the vendor (if there are agreements, then the information is entered in the context of the agreements): - -- Starting balance (debit or credit at the start of the period) -- Net change (debit or credit) -- Ending balance (debit or credit at the end of the period) - -To access the Vendor Turnover report - -Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Turnover**, and then choose the related link. - -The **Vendor** FastTab of the request page contains the same fields as the **Vendor** FastTab of the **Vendor General Ledger Turnover** report. On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the same format options as on the **Options** FastTab of the **Vendor General Ledger** report. - -## Vendor Posting Group Turnover Report (Report 12443) -The **Vendor Posting Group Turnover** report is used to print information on the vendor's entries that are accumulated in the vendor posting groups. The printed data contains the following information: - -- Vendor posting group code -- Vendor posting group name -- Starting balance (debit or credit) -- Net change (debit or credit) -- Ending balance (debit or credit) - -To access the **Vendor Posting Group Turnover** report - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Payables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Vendor Posting Group Turnover** action. - -On the **Vendor Posting Group** FastTab of the request page, you can specify the vendor posting group code or a range of vendor posting group codes, depending on whether you want to print the report for one vendor posting group, or for a range of vendor posting groups. - -The **Vendor** FastTab contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Definition| -|-----------|----------------| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Select this field to can define a filter value for analysis on Global Dimension 1.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Select this field to define a filter value for analysis on Global Dimension 2.| -|**Date Filter**|Select this field to specify the period that the report is to be printed for.| - -On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the same format options as on the **Options** FastTab of the **Vendor General Ledger Turnover** report. - -## Vendor Entries Analysis Report (Report 12446) -The **Vendor Entries Analysis** report shows the vendor's liabilities at the beginning and at the end of the period, entry analysis, and invoice discharging. The printed data contains the following information: - -- Posting date -- Document number -- Document name -- Type (payment, invoice) -- Amount -- Amount closed -- Payment date - -This report enables you to determine the invoice and payment interdependence, and it also shows closed entries, due invoices, partially discharged invoices, and vendor prepayment amounts. - -To access the **Vendor Entries Analysis** report. - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Payables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Vendor Entries Analysis** action. - -On the **Vendor** FastTab of the request page, you can define the vendor number or a range of numbers, depending on whether you want to print the report for one vendor or for a number of vendors. On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|**Starting Date**|Select this option to specify the start date of the period.| -|**Ending of period**|Select this option to specify the end date of the period.| -|**Report Currency**|Select this option to specify the currency you want to use in the report. You can choose:

- **Local currency**
- **Transaction currency**| -|**New Page For Vendor**|Select this option to print the data for each vendor on a separate page.| - -## Vendor Reconciliation Act Report (Report 14911) -The **Vendor Reconciliation Act** report shows the payments or liabilities of the vendor. It is used for the reconciliation of mutual payments of contractors. - -To access the **Vendor Reconciliation Act** report - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Payables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Vendor Reconciliation Act** action. - -The following levels of details are possible: - -- Full Detail -- Partial Detail -- None - -### Full Detail -If Full Detail is selected as the detail level, the report prints the following data for each document for the current and previous periods: - -- Document number and the numbers of the documents connected with it. -- The balance on each document (debit or credit) -- Document date -- Description - -The report prints the following on the right side of the window (vendor's data) if **Print Contactor Data** is active on the **Options** FastTab of the request page: - -- Document amount -- Debit -- Credit - -### Partial Detail -If Partial Detail is selected as the detail level, the report displays the balance on each document for the current and previous periods, but does not display the connections to the invoices, credit notes, and payments. - -### None -If None is selected as the detail level, the report shows the following information for each vendor: - -- The balance at the beginning of the period -- Net changes for the period -- The balance at the end of the period -- Amount of the vendor liabilities -- General managers' signatures - -### Selecting Print Vendor Data -When the **Print Contractor Data** check box is selected, the right side of the report is filled in, based on data supplied by the vendor. Otherwise, the **Vendor Reconciliation Act** report is printed with the right side of the report not filled in. - -To reconcile the mutual payments of contractors, you can print the Vendor Reconciliation Act windows with the left side filled in. These windows are supplied to vendors. The vendors fill in their data on the right side. Then the company's data is compared with the vendor's data, and if it is the same, the **Print Vendor Data** check box is selected. A final **Vendor Reconciliation Act** document is printed, which is signed by general managers or other persons in charge of both parties. - -On the **Vendor** FastTab of the request page, you can define the vendor number or a range of numbers, depending on whether you want to print a report for one vendor or for a number of vendors. - -On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|**Starting Date**|Select this option to specify the start date of the period.| -|**Ending Date of the Period**|Select this option to specify the end date of the period.| -|**Report Currency**|Select this option to specify the currency that you want to use in the report. You can choose any currency from the glossary of currencies.| -|**Detailed**|Select this option to select one of these values:

- Full
- Partial
- None| -|**Print Contractor Data**|Select this option to fill in the right side of the report with the vendor's data.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russian Receivables Reports](russian-receivables-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Customer and Vendor Agreements](how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-receivables-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-receivables-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index abf047dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/russian-receivables-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,192 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Russian Receivables Reports - description: The receivables report feature enables you to view the customer general ledger turnover for finance entries of general ledger accounts with the source type Customer. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Russian Receivables Reports -The receivables report feature enables you to view the customer general ledger turnover for finance entries of general ledger accounts with the source type Customer. The following reports are also provided: - -- Customer General Ledger Turnover (report 12450) -- Customer Accounting Card (report 12441) -- Customer Turnover (report 12439) -- Customer Posting Group Turnover (report 12440) -- Customer Entries Analysis (report 12442) -- Customer Reconciliation Act (report 14910) - -## Customer General Ledger Turnover Report (Report 12450) -The **Customer General Ledger Turnover** report is used to analyze the turnover and to analyze customer account balances. It is usually printed monthly, but it can be printed for any given period. - -The **Customer** FastTab of the request page contains fields with the information listed in the following table. - -|Field|Definition| -|-----------|----------------| -|**No.**|Select this field to define the customer number or a number range, depending on whether you want to print a Customer General Ledger Turnover report for one customer or for a group of customers.| -|**Customer Posting Group**|Select this field to specify one customer posting group or a range of groups, according to the filtering rules that you set.| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Select this field to define a filter value for data analysis on Global Dimension 1.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Select this field to define a filter value for data analysis on Global Dimension 2.| -|**Date Filter**|Select this field to specify the period that the report is to be printed for.| - -The **Options** FastTab contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Rounding Precision**|Select this field to choose the required rounding precision: 0.001, 0.01, 1, or 1000.| -|**Replace zero values by blanks**|Select this field to replace zero values with blanks during printing.| -|**Skip accounts without net changes**|Select this field to exclude lines without net changes within the period.| -|**Skip accounts with zero ending balance**|Select this field to exclude lines with zero ending balances at the end of the period.| -|**Skip zero lines**|Select this field to exclude lines with zero values.| -|**Print horizontal grid**|Select this field to print the horizontal grid.| - -## Customer Accounting Card Report (Report 12441) -The **Customer Accounting Card** report provides the following information for all of a customer's entries for a specific period: - -- Starting balance -- Posting date -- Document number -- Description -- Net change debit -- Net change credit -- Document type -- Ending balance - -It is printed monthly and on the date of inventory, but can be printed for any given period. - -The following procedure shows how to access the **Customer Accounting Card** report. - -1. Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Receivables** action, and then choose the **Turnover** action. -2. Choose the **Customer G/L Turnover** action, choose the **Print** action, and then choose the **Customer Accounting Card** action. - -The **Customer** FastTab of the request page contains the same fields as the **Customer** FastTab of the Customer General Ledger Turnover report. On the **Options** FastTab, you can select the **New page per Customer** field to print the information for each customer on a separate sheet. - -## Customer Turnover Report (Report 12439) -The **Customer Turnover** report is used to print the data about a customer's entries for a specific period. It can also be created for customers separately for agreements. The printed data contains the following information: - -- Number -- Name -- Starting balance (debit or credit at beginning of the period) -- Net change (debit or credit) -- Ending balance (debit or credit at end of the period) - -To access the **Customer Turnover** report - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Receivables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Customer Turnover** action. - -The **Customer** FastTab of the request page contains the same fields as the **Customer** FastTab of the **Customer General Ledger Turnover** report. On the **Options** FastTab, specify the same format options as the **Options** FastTab of the **Customer General Ledger Turnover** report. It also contains the **Print by Agreements** option, if it is selected, all amounts in reports will be calculated and shown in the section of agreements. - -## Customer Posting Group Turnover Report (Report 12440) -The **Customer Posting Group Turnover** report is used to print information on the customer's entries that are accumulated in the customer posting groups. The printed data contains the following information: - -- Customer posting group code -- Customer posting group name -- Starting balance (debit or credit) -- Net change (debit or credit) -- Ending balance (debit or credit) - -To access the **Customer Posting Group Turnover** report - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Receivables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Customer Posting Group Turnover** action. - -On the **Customer Posting Group** FastTab of the request page, specify the customer posting group code or a range of customer posting group codes, depending on whether you want to print the report for one customer posting group or for a range of customer posting groups. - -The **Customer** FastTab contains the fields listed in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-----------|-----------------| -|**Global Dimension 1 Filter**|Enter a filter value for analysis on Global Dimension 1.| -|**Global Dimension 2 Filter**|Enter a filter value for analysis on Global Dimension 2.| -|**Date Filter**|Enter the period that the report is to be printed for. The field is required.| - -On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the same format options as on the **Options** FastTab of the **Customer General Ledger Turnover** report. - -## Customer Entries Analysis (Report 12442) -The **Customer Entries Analysis** report shows the customer's liabilities at the beginning and at the end of the period, entry analysis, and invoice discharging. The printed data contains the following information - -- Posting date -- Document number -- Document name -- Type (payment, invoice) -- Amount -- Amount closed -- Payment date - -This report shows all the entries of the customer for a certain period. The analysis of the report enables you to determine the invoice and payment interdependence, shows closed entries, due invoices, partially discharged invoices, and customer prepayment amounts. - -To access the **Customer Entries Analysis** report - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Receivables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Customer Entries Analysis** action. - -On the **Customer** FastTab of the request page, define the customer number or a range of numbers, depending on whether you want to print the report for one customer or for a range of customers. On the **Customer Ledger Entry** FastTab, you can enter a filter value for one document or for a range of documents. - -On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|**Starting Date**|Enter the start date of the period.| -|**Ending of period**|Enter the end date of the period| -|**Report Currency**|Enter currency that you want to use in the report. You can choose:

- Local currency
- Transaction currency| -|**New Page For Customer**|Select this field to print the data for each customer on a separate page.| - -## Customer - Reconciliation Act (Report 14910) -The **Customer – Reconciliation Act** report shows the payments or liabilities of the customer. It is used for the reconciliation of mutual payments of contractors. - -To access the **Customer – Reconciliation Act** report - -- Choose the **Financial Management** action, choose the **Receivables** action, choose the **Reports** action, and then choose the **Customer - Reconciliation Act** action. - -The following levels of detail are possible: - -- Full -- Partial -- None - -### Full Detail -If Full is selected as the detail level, the report prints the following data for each document for the current and previous periods: - -- Document number and numbers of documents connected with it -- The balance on each document (debit or credit) -- Document date -- Description - -The report prints the following information on the right side of the window (customer's data) in case the **Print Contactor Data** check box is selected on the **Options** FastTab of the request page: - -- Document amount -- Debit -- Credit - -### Partial Detail -If Partial Detail is selected as the detail level, the report shows the balance on each document for the current and previous periods, but no connections to the invoices, credit notes, and payments. - -### None -If None is selected as the detail level, the report shows, for each customer, the balance at the beginning of the period, net changes for the period, and the balance at the end of the period. It also shows the amount of the customer liabilities. - -### Selecting Print Contractor Data -When the **Print Contractor Data** check box is selected, the right side of the report is filled in based on data supplied by the customer. Otherwise, the **Customer Reconciliation Act** report is printed with the right side not filled in. To reconcile the mutual payments of contractors, you can print **Customer – Reconciliation Act** windows with the left side filled in with your data. These windows are supplied to the customers. The customers fill in their data on the right side. Then the company's data is compared with the customer's data, and if it is the same, the **Print Contractor Data** field can be selected. A final **Customer – Reconciliation Act** document is printed, which is signed by general managers or other persons in charge of both parties. - -On the **Customer** FastTab of the request page, define the customer number or a range of numbers, depending on whether you want to print a report for one customer or for a number of customers. - -On the **Options** FastTab, you can specify the format options listed in the following table. - -|Parameter|Description| -|---------------|-----------------| -|**Starting Date**|Enter the start date of the period.| -|**Ending Date of the Period**|Enter the end date of the period.| -|**Report Currency**|Enter the currency that you want to use in the report. You can choose any currency from the glossary of currencies.| -|**Detailed**|Select one of these values:

- **Full**
- **Partial**
- **None**| -|**Print Contractor Data**|Select this option to fill in the, the right side of the report with the customer's data.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Russian Payables Reports](russian-payables-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up Customer and Vendor Agreements](how-to-set-up-customer-and-vendor-agreements.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md deleted file mode 100644 index b8f86ea9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setting up Tax Difference Calculation - description: Tax difference calculations must be set up if there is a tax difference for the presentation of fixed asset entries, item cost entries, or finance transactions in bookkeeping and tax accounting for which expenses to write off must be fixed. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting up Tax Difference Calculation -Tax difference calculations must be set up if there is a tax difference for the presentation of fixed asset entries, item cost entries, or finance transactions in bookkeeping and tax accounting for which expenses to write off must be fixed. To set tax difference, choose the **Setup** action, and then choose the **Tax Differences** action. - -## Setting Up Posting Groups -In the menu sub-item **Posting Groups**, you must determine finance accounts from the set up chart of accounts, where finance transactions with tax differences are accounted for. - -In the **Tax Difference Posting Groups** form, enter the fields described in the following table. - -|Field|Description| -|-------------|-----------------| -|**FA Posting Date**|Enter the transaction date.| -|**Document No.**|Enter the document number that the current transaction is created with.| -|**FA No.**|Enter the code of the expense of the future period that the current transaction is created with.| -|**Depreciation Book Code**|Select the code of the depreciation book that the transaction will be formed with.| -|**FA Posting Type**|Select the **Transaction** type. The values are: **Purchase**, **Depreciation**, and **Sales**.| -|**Description**|Enter a description of the transaction.| -|**Amount**|Enter the amount of the transaction.| -|**Depr. Amount w/o Normalization**|Displays the depreciation amount before calculating norms of expenses to write off.| - -If there are journal lines that must be normalized before writing off expenses, those journals cannot be posted without running a periodic job of normalizing. - -The following procedure shows how to process a normalization function. - -1. In the **Future Expenses Journal** window, choose the **Calculate Depreciation by Norm.** action -2. In the **Calculate FE Depr. With Norm** window, on the **Tax Difference** FastTab, enter the filter for the tax difference. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, enter the accounting period for which the counting is done. -4. Choose the **Print** action to print the report. -5. Post the future expenses journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [Tax Differences](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Difference Registers](tax-difference-registers.md) - [How to: Set Up Norm Jurisdictions](how-to-set-up-norm-jurisdictions.md) - [How to: Post Tax Differences](how-to-post-tax-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/statutory-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/statutory-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index b3274ff7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/statutory-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Statutory Reports - description: Russian enhancements let you set up statutory reports so that you can import and export data for electronic tax reporting and other required documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Statutory Reports -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] lets you set up statutory reports so that you can import and export data for electronic tax reporting and other required documents. - -After you have set up a report and specified the required information, you can export the report to Excel, and then print the report. - -## Getting Started with Statutory Reports -Use the windows based on the following key tables to set up and create statutory reports. - -|Tables|Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|Statutory Report Setup|Specifies information that is used to set up statutory reports including templates, formats, number series, and export destinations.| -|Format Version|Specifies setup information about the different report formats. This includes when to use which report, the XML schema to use, and the required data format.| -|Statutory Report|Specifies a list of statutory reports with detailed information, such as type, format version, and if the statutory report is currently active. From this window, you can define statutory report tables, requisites groups, the XML element lines, and you can export data.| -|Statutory Report Table|Specifies information that is required to set up reporting tables including scalability limits, templates, and standard text.

From this window, you can define table rows, columns, individual requisites, and data source mapping.| -|Stat. Report Table Row|Allows you to define row formats and functions for your statutory report tables.| -|Stat. Report Table Column|Allows you to define column formats for your statutory report tables.| -|Stat. Report Requisites Group|Specifies the conditions used to format and process statutory reports including export type, Microsoft Excel mapping, and cell quantity.| - -## Data for Statutory Reports -The statutory reports are based on account schedules and tax registers. For each statutory report that you set up in the **Statutory Reports** window, you define how the data maps to fields on tables in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] by creating table mappings. In the **Statutory Report Tables** window, in the **Int. Source Type** field, you specify the area that the data comes from as described in the following table. - -|Option|Description| -|----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Acc. Schedule**|The data is based on an account schedule.| -|**Tax Register**|The data is based on a tax register. For more information, see [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md).| -|**Tax Difference**|The data is based on a tax difference. For more information, see [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md).| -|**Payroll Analysis Report**|The data is based on payroll analysis.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) - [Selecting the Report Data Source](assetId:///79db2621-6067-4421-8fe6-3ef2baba1ecc) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2d9f4474..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Tax Accounting - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up and maintain tax registers to track taxable profits and losses. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Tax Accounting -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up and maintain tax registers to track taxable profits and losses. This is based on the following tax accounting principles: - -- The financial database is used for tax accounting. -- The chart of accounts is used to track taxable profits and losses. -- Income and expenses are recorded using separate subaccounts and dimensions. -- Fixed asset transactions and expenses for future periods are tracked using the depreciation book for tax accounting. -- Tax registers are grouped and totaled monthly. Each register has 12 values for a 12 month tax period. - -Because [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] keeps the history of all transactions, detailed information from a transaction that changes taxable profits is automatically tracked. The information collected in tax registers meets the principles of tax reliability and tax validity. - -## Tax Registers -There are two types of tax registers that are used for tracking taxable profits and losses. - -|Tax Register Type|Description| -|-----------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Analytic Tax Register|An analytic register is based on ledger entries for taxable transactions. The information provides a continuous chronological reflection of business operations, which tracks taxable profits and losses based on tax codes.| -|Synthetic Tax Register|A synthetic register is based on summarized and calculated information from an analytic register or another synthetic register.| - -Transactions are processed using specific tax accounting principles that are applied to the following types of tax registers. - -|Tax Register|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|General Ledger Entry|An analytic register based on general ledger transaction entries.| -|CV Entry|A group of analytic registers based on information associated with debtor or creditor liabilities.| -|Fixed Asset Entry|A group of analytic registers based on tax data for fixed assets. This group is created by using a fixed asset ledger and a tax depreciation book that is not integrated with the financial accounting ledger.| -|Item Entry|An analytic register based on posted item transactions.| -|Future Expense Entry|A group of analytic registers based on tax data for future expenses. This group is created by using a fixed asset ledger and a tax depreciation book that is not integrated with the financial accounting ledger.| -|Accumulation|A synthetic register based on calculated algorithms defined during tax register set up.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Tax Accounting](how-to-set-up-tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [How to: Set Up Tax Register Sections](how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-difference-registers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-difference-registers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6c1e7074..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-difference-registers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Tax Difference Registers - description: You can view posted tax difference transactions with all the income or expense codes in the tax difference registers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Tax Difference Registers -You can view posted tax difference transactions with all the income or expense codes in the tax difference registers. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Tax Difference Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Place the pointer on the necessary register, choose the **Register Tax Diff.** action, and then choose the **Ledger Entries** action to view transactions that have created tax differences. -3. In the opened form, select a transaction, and then choose the **Navigate** action to get details about the creation of the transaction. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) - [Setting up Tax Difference Calculation](setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md) - [Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-differences.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-differences.md deleted file mode 100644 index a69e200c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-differences.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Tax Differences - description: Tax differences are variations in tax amounts caused by the different rules for recognizing income and expenses between entries for book accounting and tax accounting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Tax Differences -Tax differences are variations in tax amounts caused by the different rules for recognizing income and expenses between entries for book accounting and tax accounting. - -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up tax difference registers and tax difference journals to track and manage differences between book accounting and tax accounting amounts. - -## Preparing the Chart of Accounts -Before you set up tax differences, you will have to make sure that your chart of accounts is set up to correctly handle tax accounting and tax differences. At a minimum, your chart of accounts must contain tax difference accounts for income and expense transactions. - -## Getting Started with Tax Differences -To set up and view tax difference entries, you will use the following tables, which support tax differences windows. - -|Window|Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|Tax Diff. Posting Group|Specifies posting groups for tax difference transactions.| -|Tax Diff. Journal Template|Specifies the journals that are used for posting tax difference entries.| -|Tax Calc. Corresp. Entry|Specifies tax difference information that is needed for external reports and forms.| -|Tax Diff. Journal Line|Specifies posted tax difference journal entries.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting up Tax Difference Calculation](setting-up-tax-difference-calculation.md) - [Tax Difference Registers](tax-difference-registers.md) - [Tax Reports](assetId:///e42ca8e7-1cee-4fb8-9f71-e596f29cabc3) - [Tax Accounting](tax-accounting.md) - [Tax Registers](tax-registers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-registers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-registers.md deleted file mode 100644 index f25f1ef1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/tax-registers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Tax Registers - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up tax registers to track and manage taxable profits and losses in accordance with Russian tax accounting principles. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Tax Registers -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up tax registers to track and manage taxable profits and losses in accordance with Russian tax accounting principles. Tax registers allow you to group taxable transactions into logical categories and apply tax accounting rules for the recognition of revenue and expenditures. - -## Types of Tax Registers -There are two types of tax registers that are used for tracking taxable profits and losses. - -|Tax Register Type|Description| -|---------------|---------------------------------------| -|Tax Register Setup|Specifies tax register details where you can set up and manage taxable profits and losses.| -|Create Tax Registers|Creates the tax registers that you define using the **Tax Register Setup** window.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Tax Accounting](how-to-set-up-tax-accounting.md) - [How to: Create Tax Registers](how-to-create-tax-registers.md) - [How to: Set Up Tax Register Sections](how-to-set-up-tax-register-sections.md) - [Tax Differences](tax-differences.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/undepreciable-fixed-assets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/undepreciable-fixed-assets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 23cf0420..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/undepreciable-fixed-assets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Undepreciable Fixed Assets - description: The undepreciable fixed assets feature enables you to repay fixed assets with the whole amount of their acquisition at the time of their release. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Undepreciable Fixed Assets -The undepreciable fixed assets feature enables you to repay fixed assets with the whole amount of their acquisition at the time of their release. It also automatically creates quantity records for these fixed assets in order to keep records of their existence and movements in quantitative terms. - -Create a depreciation book to keep records of the quantities of fixed assets that will be repaid at the time of release for the amount that they were acquired for. For more information, see [How to: Set Up a Quantity Book](how-to-set-up-a-quantity-book.md). - -Create or select a card for the fixed asset that should be repaid. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Undepreciable Fixed Assets](how-to-set-up-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md). - -Create a purchase order and a release order for undepreciable fixed assets. For more information, see [How to: Purchase and Release Undepreciable Fixed Assets](how-to-purchase-and-release-undepreciable-fixed-assets.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](../../fa-manage.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat-ledgers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat-ledgers.md deleted file mode 100644 index a70520d4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat-ledgers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT Ledgers - description: The VAT ledger feature enables you to create and print different reports. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT Ledgers -The VAT ledger feature enables you to create and print the following windows: - -- VAT Purchase Ledger -- VAT Sales Ledger -- VAT Purchase Ledger Additional Sheet -- VAT Sales Ledger Additional Sheet - -## VAT Purchase Ledgers and VAT Sales Ledgers -Before you can create VAT ledgers, you must set up number series and vendor posting groups. You must also set up VAT posting groups to identify how VAT entries must be included in VAT ledgers. Also, for each VAT posting setup, you must specify if entries that use the setup must be included in VAT ledgers, and if the entries are VAT exempt. For more information, see [How to: Set Up VAT Ledgers](how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md). - -You can create and store any number of VAT ledgers. For example, you can create the following: - -- Sales ledgers for different groups of customers. -- Additional sales ledgers for amount differences and prepayments. -- Joint sales ledgers for the whole company. - -To create a VAT ledger, first you must define a VAT ledger type, and then you must add lines to the VAT purchase ledger or VAT sales ledger by using the **Create VAT Purchase Ledger** and **Create VAT Sales Ledger** batch jobs. When you have added lines to the VAT ledger, you can print it. - -For more information, see [How to: Create VAT Ledgers](how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md). - -## Marking a VAT Purchase Ledger -The VAT for purchase documents must be reflected in the purchase ledger. Return orders of the customers must be reflected in purchase books. - -The following procedure shows how to mark a VAT purchase ledger. - -1. In the **Sales Return Order** window or the **Sales Credit Memo** window, select the **Include in Purch. VAT Ledger** check box. - -These marked documents will be reflected in the purchase book or in the sales book. Sales return orders are marked by default. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up VAT Ledgers](how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Create VAT Ledgers](how-to-create-vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Create Additional Sheets](how-to-create-additional-sheets.md) - [Posting VAT on Sales](posting-vat-on-sales.md) - [Amount Difference](assetId:///ecc3830d-d498-44a3-bdb6-79e094d620e9) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2819a81d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Russia/vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT - description: VAT is charged on transactions that involve goods and services in Russia or goods imported into Russia. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT -VAT is charged on transactions that involve goods and services in Russia or goods imported into Russia. - -## VAT Calculation -VAT rates in Russia are tiered into three rate levels. Each of these levels can be applied to specific types of goods and services, for example: - -- The highest VAT rate is applied to transactions that involve most types of goods and services. -- The mid-level VAT rate is applied to transactions that involve a select group of food products, children’s products, and medical goods. -- The lowest VAT rate is a tax incentive that is applied to exported goods. - -There are several business activities that are exempt from VAT in Russia. For example, insurance, banking, and medical transactions are not subject to VAT. - -An organization’s VAT liability is calculated as the difference between the VAT due on sales and the VAT from the cost of the goods or services sold. VAT is calculated for a transaction according to the rates and rules that are in effect on the day of the transaction. - -## VAT Payment -For most organizations, VAT payments are required to be submitted no later than the 20th day of the month. The timely submission of VAT payments is the responsibility of the taxpayer. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) - [How to: Set Up VAT Ledgers](how-to-set-up-vat-ledgers.md) - [How to: Prepare VAT Entries for Posting](how-to-prepare-vat-entries-for-posting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/calculating-due-dates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/calculating-due-dates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 370745c2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/calculating-due-dates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Calculating Due Dates - description: In Spain, there is a legal limit for the number of days that a payment can be delayed. You must submit an annual report of purchases and sales for payments that were made before or after the due date. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Calculating Due Dates -In Spain, there is a legal limit for the number of days that a payment can be delayed. You must submit an annual report of purchases and sales for payments that were made before or after the due date. The legal requirements depend on whether the customer is a private company or a public administration. For more information, see the official declaration [BOE-A-2010-10708](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=224630) on the Boletín Oficial del Estado website. - -## Payment Terms -To help you meet the legal requirements, you can set up payment terms so that the due dates are calculated correctly. This includes specifying the maximum number of calendar days that a payment can be delayed after delivery. For example, you can create separate payment terms for sales to the public sector and sales to private companies. The following table illustrates how you can set up payment terms. - -|Field|Public sector|Private company| -|---------------------------------|-------------------|---------------------| -|**Code**|**1M(8D) PUB**|**1M(8D) PRI**| -|**Due Date Calculation**|**1M**|**1M**| -|**Max. No. of Days till Due Date**|**30**|**60**| - - For each customer and vendor, you must select the appropriate payment term code. Then, when you create a document for that customer or vendor, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will calculate a due date that does not exceed the limit for the relevant payment term. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You cannot post a document that creates a bill where one or more installments have a due date that is later than the limit that is specified in the **Max. No. of Days till Due Date** field. - - If a due date cannot be calculated based on the limit, the due date is set to blank. For example, if the calculated due date falls in a non-payment period and there is no available date before that period, you must specify a due date manually. You cannot post a document that has an empty due date. - - You can change the calculated due date manually, but you cannot make it later than the limit that you specify for the payment term. For example, the due date can be calculated to be very late because of conflicts with non-payment periods. In that case, you can decide to make the due date earlier than the non-payment period. - -## Overdue Payments - You must include information about overdue payments in the annual reports for the government. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes two reports to help you identify overdue payments from customers and payments that you are late in making. - - The **Customer - Overdue Payments** and **Vendor - Overdue Payments** reports include a section for each customer or vendor that lists the payments with the following information: - -- Invoice number -- Invoice description -- Document number -- Posting date -- Due date -- Days overdue -- Currency code -- Amount -- Amount in the local reporting currency (LCY) - -Each section has a summary section with the following information. - -|Information|Description| -|-----------------|---------------------------------------| -|Weighted average term exceeded|This formula is calculated based on the number of posted payments for the specified period, the number of days that payments were delayed, and the paid amount in (LCY). For more information, see the official declaration [BOE-A-2010-10708](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=224630) on the Boletín Oficial del Estado website.| -|Payments within the legal limit|The amounts in LCY and the percentage of the total payments that were made before the maximum allowed due date for each transaction.| -|Payments outside the legal limit|The amounts in LCY and the percentage of the total payments that were made after the maximum allowed due date for each transaction.| - - At the end of these reports, there is a section that summarizes this information for all payments. These reports will show information based on applied detailed customer ledger entries or applied detailed vendor ledger entries. The information is based on the date filters that you specify. For more information, see Customer - Overdue Payments and Vendor - Overdue Payments. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Limits for Due Dates](how-to-set-limits-for-due-dates.md) -[Managing Payables](../../payables-manage-payables.md) -[Managing Receivables](../../receivables-manage-receivables.md) - [Defining Payment Methods](../../finance-payment-methods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/cartera-module.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/cartera-module.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7fbce572..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/cartera-module.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Cartera Module - description: The Cartera module allows you to use specific documents, such as bills of exchange and promissory notes, to manage customer and vendor payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Cartera Module -The Cartera module allows you to use specific documents, such as bills of exchange and promissory notes, to manage customer and vendor payments. - -You can use the Cartera module to manage transactions made with different financial units based on: - -- Document type -- Cost -- Credit limit - -The balances are kept in local currencies and original currencies. - -The Cartera module contains the Receivables Cartera module and the Payments Cartera module. The Receivables Cartera module allows you to manage bills generated from sales invoices. The Payments Cartera module allows you to manage payables documents generated from purchase invoices or from the Cartera journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Receivables Cartera Module](receivables-cartera-module.md) - [Payments Cartera Module](payments-cartera-module.md) - [Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/corrective-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/corrective-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index 08392ac7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/corrective-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Corrective Invoices - description: The corrective invoice functionality allows you to send a corrective invoice when there is an error or dispute that affects a VAT amount or fiscal data. This invoice includes all legally required data and refers to the original invoice or invoices. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Corrective Invoices -The corrective invoice functionality allows you to send a corrective invoice when there is an error or dispute that affects a VAT amount or fiscal data. This invoice includes all legally required data and refers to the original invoice or invoices. The original invoices cannot be voided, and remain valid. The corrective invoice contains the corrections, and reasons for these corrections. - -The following options are available: - -- You can set parameters to ensure that all corrective invoices contain corrected invoice number information. -- When preparing a corrective invoice for posting, you can select posted invoices from a list. These invoice numbers are used as identifiers for the corrected invoices. -- You can print corrective invoices according to legal requirements. -- From a posted invoice, you can use a reference to look up the related corrective invoices. - -The corrective invoice must meet the following requirements: - -- You can correct several invoices by using a single corrective invoice. The corrective invoice must use all of the corrected invoice numbers. -- You must clearly indicate the invoice numbers for the invoices you are correcting. -- You can post a corrective invoice without corrected invoice numbers only when the corrections are necessary due to discounts or volume rebates. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n34.1.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n34.1.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7cb6edae..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n34.1.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Electronic Payments – AEB N34.1 File Format -description: Electronic payments export in standard AEB N34.1 file format and let you avoid printing paper checks to pay vendors. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Payments – AEB N34.1 File Format -With the electronic payments functionality, you can pay vendors using electronic payments rather than printing paper checks. Electronic payments are exported into a standard AEB N34.1 file format used by most banks in Spain. This file is then transmitted to your bank. - - You can create electronic payments from the payment journals or from the Cartera functionality (report list). This is intended to cover the following cases: - -- Invoices and open, non-grouped Cartera documents. If you select to pay using electronic payments, then the payment file is generated from the **Export Electronic Payments** report. - -- Invoices and Cartera documents that are grouped in a payment order. If you select to pay using electronic payments, the payment file is generated from the **PO - Export N34.1** report, available in the Cartera report list. - -> [!NOTE] -> Partners may need to modify this report to meet their customer’s bank individual requirements. - - Before you can transfer payments electronically to a vendor, you will need to set up a bank account for the vendor. You will also need to set up the electronic payment links with your bank and set up the bank account card in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] for your own bank to handle the electronic payments. The bank should provide the transmission program. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Pay Vendors by Using Electronic Payments](how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md) - Export Electronic Payments - PO - Export N34.1 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md deleted file mode 100644 index c5951ddf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Electronic Payments Functionality – AEB N34.1 -description: With the electronic payments functionality, you can pay vendors using electronic payments rather than printing paper checks. Electronic payments are exported into a standard AEB N34.1 file format used by most banks in Spain. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Electronic Payments Functionality – AEB N34.1 -With the electronic payments functionality, you can pay vendors using electronic payments rather than printing paper checks. Electronic payments are exported into a standard AEB N34.1 file format used by most banks in Spain. This file is then transmitted to your bank. - -You can create electronic payments from the payment journals or from the Cartera functionality (report list). This is intended to cover the following cases: - -- Invoices and open, non-grouped Cartera documents. If you select to pay using electronic payments, then the payment file is generated from the **Export Electronic Payments** report. - -- Invoices and Cartera documents that are grouped in a payment order. If you select to pay using electronic payments, the payment file is generated from the **PO - Export N34.1** report, available in the Cartera report list. - -> [!NOTE] -> Partners may need to modify this report to meet their customer’s bank individual requirements. - -Before you can transfer payments electronically to a vendor, you will need to set up a bank account for the vendor. You will also need to set up the electronic payment links with your bank and set up the bank account card in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] for your own bank to handle the electronic payments. The bank should provide the transmission program. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Pay Vendors by Using Electronic Payments](how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/equivalence-charges-ec-.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/equivalence-charges-ec-.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3851f8c7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/equivalence-charges-ec-.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Equivalence Charges (EC) - description: An Equivalence Charge (EC) is a tax that is used in retail sales and in activities that do not follow VAT rules. Under EC rules, companies must pay a surcharge to their vendors when purchasing goods, in addition to the usual VAT. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Equivalence Charges (EC) -An Equivalence Charge (EC) is a tax that is used in retail sales and in activities that do not follow VAT rules. Under EC rules, companies must pay a surcharge to their vendors when purchasing goods, in addition to the usual VAT. However, when selling goods, only VAT can be charged. Some general posting groups must have an EC percentage in addition to the VAT percentage. This information is tracked separately, but in order to minimize changes, both taxes are usually combined. - -The **EC %** field is a separate field in the **Purchase Line**, **Sales Line**, **Sales Line Archive** and **Purchase Line Archive** tables. However, in sales and purchase lines, both taxes are combined and the value is displayed in the **VAT %** field. The **VAT + EC %** field is used when these values are combined. At the time of posting, the VAT percentage and the EC percentage are inserted in the **VAT Entry** table. This makes it possible to print the **Sales Invoice Book** report and the **Purchases Invoice Book** report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-340.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-340.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4334632d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-340.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Report 340 - description: Report 340 includes all sales invoices and purchase invoices posted by a company during a given period. The report also includes the operation codes with related taxes and payments in cash. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Report 340 -Report 340 includes all sales invoices and purchase invoices posted by a company during a given period. The report also includes the operation codes with related taxes and payments in cash. - -This report is generated in a format approved by the tax authorities. You should submit this report on a monthly or quarterly basis, depending on the size of your company. - -## To create Report 340 - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Make 340 Declaration**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Make 340 Declaration** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Fiscal Year**|Enter the fiscal year for which you want to create the operation declaration.| - |**Month**|Select the month that you want to include in the operations declaration.| - |**Min. Payment Amount**|Enter the amount that you have received in cash for the selected **G/L Acc. for Payments in Cash**. **Important:** The field is designed for reporting payments in cash. The amount that you have selected decides the sum of customer entries in the report. If the total invoiced amount for a customer per year is less than the amount specified in the field, then the sum of the customer entries is not included in the report. If the total invoiced amount for a customer per year is greater than the amount specified in the field, then the sum of customer entries is included in the report. When you export the data to a declaration .txt file, you will see that the **Amount Received in Cash** field in the declaration .txt file contains the accumulated amount of customer entries in one line per year.| - |**G/L Acc. for Payments in Cash**|Select one or more on general ledger accounts to include only the entries that are posted to the filtered general ledger accounts in the report. **Important:** The field is designed for reporting payments in cash. When you export the data to a declaration .txt file, you will see that the **Amount Received in Cash** field in the declaration .txt file contains the accumulated value for the selected general ledger accounts. If you do not select any general ledger accounts, type 2 lines for payments in cash will not be created.| - |**Contact Name**|Enter the surname and name for the company that is creating the operations declaration.| - |**Telephone Number**|Enter the telephone number for the company that is creating the operations declaration.| - |**Non Deduct. Gen. Prod. Post. Groups**|Select the general product posting group. The selected posting groups are non-deductible VAT.| - |**Declaration Number**|Enter the number to identify the operations declaration.| - |**Electronic Code**|Specify the electronic code that is provided by the tax authorities.| - |**Declaration Media Type**|Select the media type for the declaration.| - |**Replacement Declaration**|Select if this is a replacement of a previously sent declaration.| - |**Previous Declaration Number**|If the **Replacement Declaration** option is selected, enter the previous declaration number.| - -3. Select the appropriate filters, and then choose the **OK** button. The text file for report 340 is created in the specified path. - -## To create a Modelo 340 report under the CAC regimen - -1. Perform the steps in the previous procedure. -2. As needed, adjust and modify the operation code information. In order for the report to pass validation when you submit it to the tax authority, any line that has an unrealized payment must be updated to include an operation code. You can change an operation code of Z or 3 to Z or 1 – 8 only for cash based payments. -3. Choose the **OK** button. The report is exported to the file location that you specified. The report will only contain lines for invoices, credit memos, whether applied or not, and payments that have unrealized VAT. - - Invoices will be exported and will contain the Z operation code. Collection data is blank. - - Payments against an invoice will be exported and will contain the collection data. - -If you print the posted document, for example, a posted sales invoice, it will include the following label: **Régimen especial del criterio de caja**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Report 340](report-340.md) - [Payments in Cash](payments-in-cash.md) - [Spanish Tax Agency](https://sede.agenciatributaria.gob.es/) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-347.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-347.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4036ca12..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-347.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Report 347 - description: All companies must provide an annual declaration, **Report 347**, to the tax authorities providing the sales and purchase transactions from the previous fiscal period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Report 347 -All companies must provide an annual declaration, **Report 347**, to the tax authorities providing the sales and purchase transactions from the previous fiscal period. - -The Report 347 declaration is generated in a format that is approved by the tax authorities for upload to their Virtual Office website or submission on CD-ROM. - -Before you create the Report 347 declaration, you can run a report to identify payments in cash that have not been applied to a document. - -## To identify unapplied payments in cash - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **347**, and then choose the link for the **347 Declaration** area. -2. Choose the **Unapplied Payments in Cash** action. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields. - -## To create a Report 347 declaration - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Make 347 Declaration**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields. For more information, see Make 347 Declaration. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -When you send the Report 347 declaration, you must include 347 declaration labels. The labels are required as part of the package for the tax authorities. - -## To create 347 declaration labels - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **347 Declaration Labels**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields. For more information, see Declaration Labels. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) - [Report 347](report-347.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-349.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-349.md deleted file mode 100644 index adcea4a3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-report-349.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Report 349 - description: You must submit a periodic report of trade with other EU countries/regions to the tax authorities. This declaration, Report 349, must be submitted to the tax authorities electronically on the tax agency website or on a CD-ROM. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Report 349 -You must submit a periodic report of trade with other EU countries/regions to the tax authorities. This declaration, Report 349, must be submitted to the tax authorities electronically on the tax agency website or on a CD-ROM. For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=238181) website. - -## To create Report 349 - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Make 349 Declaration**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Fiscal Year**|Specify the year of the reporting period.| - |**Period**|Select the period that the report covers. This can be a year, a month, or a quarter.| - |**Period Frequency Change**|Select to change the period frequency of the report.| - |**Contact Name**|Specify the contact name for your company.| - |**Telephone Number**|Specify the telephone number for contact.| - |**Declaration Number**|Specify the number of the declaration. For example, if this is your first 349 declaration, the number is **3490000000000**.| - |**Company Country/Region**|Enter the country/region for your company.| - |**Declaration Media Type**|Select the media type for the declaration.

To submit the declaration electronically, select **Telematic**.

To submit the declaration on CD-ROM, select **Physical support**. If you want to submit the 349 declaration on a CD-ROM, you must also print labels for the disk. For more information, see Declaration Labels.| - |**Excluded Gen. Product Posting Groups**|Specify the general product posting group that you do not want to include in the declaration.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -If the period includes a credit memo, a message appears, and if you choose the **OK** button, the **Customer/Vendor Warnings 349** window opens and shows all credit memos for that period. - -Entries related to credit memos display in the **Customer/Vendor Warnings 349** window because you may want to include them as corrections to invoices. For example, if you posted a sales invoice in October, and you then post a credit memo in November that corrects the October invoice, a warning displays. Then, you can make the appropriate changes in the **Customer/Vendor Warnings 349** window. You must specify which section of the total amount for that customer must be included in the November 349 declaration. - -## To correct warnings for Report 349 - -1. In the **Customer/Vendor Warnings 349** window, select the line for the relevant customer. -2. Make the appropriate changes to the line. - - The following table describes the key fields for correcting a 349 declaration that includes a credit memo. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Include Correction**|Select to accept the correction that the credit memo has resulted in.| - |**Delivery Operation Code**|Specifies the type of export delivery for the VAT transaction.

If you select a month in the **Original Declaration Period** field, the **Delivery Operation Code** field helps you identify the appropriate amount, which is shown in the **Previous Declared Amount** field.| - |**Previous Declared Amount**|Specifies the total amount that has been included in a 349 declaration.

This field is calculated only if you changed the **Original Declaration Period** field. It is calculated based on the specified delivery operation code.| - |**Original Declaration FY**|Specifies the fiscal year that the original 349 declaration was submitted to the tax authorities with the invoice that this credit memo corrects. **Warning:** Do not change this field if the credit memo applies to an invoice that has not yet been declared to the tax authorities because it is part of the current 349 declaration.| - |**Original Declaration Period**|Specifies the month, such as **01** for the month of January, for the original 349 declaration that included the invoice that this credit memo corrects. **Warning:** Do not change this field if the credit memo applies to an invoice that has not yet been declared to the tax authorities because it is part of the current 349 declaration.| - |**Original Declared Amount**|Specifies the correction for the original transaction.

For a credit memo for an invoice that was included in an earlier 349 declaration, enter the amount that should have been declared for this customer or vendor. This amount is the invoiced amount less the credit memo amount.

For a credit memo for an invoice that is part of the current 349 declaration, enter the credit memo amount.| - -3. When you have made the appropriate changes, choose the **Process** action. - - A window appears where you must confirm that you want to update the 349 declaration for those entries where the **Include Correction** check box is selected. - -For corrections to amounts that were included in an earlier 349 declaration, the window can show more than one warning for a customer or vendor with the same values in the **Original Declaration FY** and **Original Declaration Period** fields. In that case, you should combine the corrections in a single line so that the appropriate amounts for the **Previous Declared Amount** field and the **Original Declared Amount** field are included in the 349 declaration. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Report 349](report-349.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index b7372258..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in Text File Format - description: In order to submit VAT statements electronically, you must create templates to generate the required files. You can submit files in text format and in XML format. This procedure describes how to create templates for text files. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in Text File Format -In order to submit VAT statements electronically, you must create templates to generate the required files. You can submit files in text format and in XML format. This procedure describes how to create templates for text files. - -For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=238181) website. - -## To create a template for VAT statements in text file format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statement**, and then choose the appropriate link. -2. Select the required VAT statement, and then choose the **Design txt file** action. -3. In the **Transference Format** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The values for the fields are determined by the tax authorities. - > - > For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=238181) website. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT Stmt. Name**|Specify the VAT statement name that this template is for.| - |**No.**|Specify the field number in the text file.| - |**Position**|Specify the position of this field in the text file.| - |**Length**|Specify the length of the field.| - |**Type**|Specify the type of the field. The available options are **Alphanumerical**, **Numerical**, **Fix**, **Ask**, and **Currency**.| - |**Subtype**|Specify the subtype of the field.

The subtype specifies if the line must show only the integer part of an amount, the decimal part, or the full amount.| - |**Description**|Specify the text that you want to appear on the label.| - |**Value**|Specify the value for the label.| - |**Box**|Specify the box number from which to retrieve the data.| - -4. Repeat the previous step for additional lines in the VAT statement. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -This creates the template. Now, you can create a file that you can then submit to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Export VAT Statements in Text Format](how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format.md) - [How to: Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in XML File Format](how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index 17c1fa6e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in XML File Format - description: In order to submit VAT statements electronically, you must create templates to generate the required files. You can submit files in text format and in XML format. This procedure describes how to create templates for XML files. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in XML File Format -In order to submit VAT statements electronically, you must create templates to generate the required files. You can submit files in text format and in XML format. This procedure describes how to create templates for XML files. - -For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=238181) website. - -## To create a template for VAT statements in XML file format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statement**, and then choose the appropriate link. -2. Select the required VAT statement, and then choose the **Design XML file** action. -3. In the **XML Transference Format** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The values for the fields are determined by the tax authorities. - > - > For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=238181) website. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT Stmt. Name**|Specify the VAT statement name that this template is for.| - |**No.**|Specify the field number in the text file.| - |**Line Type**|Specify whether the VAT statement line type is an XML element or an XML attribute.| - |**Indentation Level**|Specify the indentation level for the label. This level is used to format the XML file.| - |**Parent Line No.**|Specify the line number of the parent line that the current line is indented under.| - |**Value Type**|Specify the subtype of the field.

The subtype specifies if the line must show only the integer part of an amount, the decimal part, or the full amount.| - |**Description**|Specify the text that you want to appear on the label.| - |**Value**|Specify the value for the label.| - |**Box**|Specify the box number from which to retrieve the data.| - |**Ask**|Specifies if the **Value** field can be changed before you create the XML file.| - |**Exists Amount**|Select to include the existing amount.| - -4. Repeat the previous step for additional lines in the VAT statement. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -This creates the template. Now, you can create a file that you can then submit to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Export VAT Statements in XML Format](how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format.md) - [How to: Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in Text File Format](how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-ccc-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-ccc-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1715ed43..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-ccc-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter CCC Codes - description: Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique bank account identification code. The following component fields make up the 20-digit (Spain) or 21-digit (Portugal) bank CCC code structure. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter CCC Codes -Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique bank account identification code. The following component fields make up the 20-digit (Spain) or 21-digit (Portugal) bank CCC code structure. - -If you change the CCC code structure, the **CCC No.** field updates automatically. Similarly, if you change the **CCC No.** field, the CCC code structure updates automatically. - -## To enter CCC codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table - - - | Field | Description | - |--------------------------|--------------------------------------------| - | **CCC Bank No.** | 1-4 | - | **CCC Bank Branch No.** | 5-8 | - | **CCC Control Digits** | 9-10 | - | **CCC Bank Account No.** | 11-20 (Spain)

11-21 (Portugal) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-nace-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-nace-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 486142aa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-enter-nace-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter NACE Codes - description: Nomenclature génerale des Activités économiques dans les Communautés Européennes (NACE) codes represent the statistical classification of economic activities within the European Union (EU). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enter NACE Codes -Nomenclature génerale des Activités économiques dans les Communautés Européennes (NACE) codes represent the statistical classification of economic activities within the European Union (EU). - -A NACE code serves as a basis to compile statistics for many things, including: - -- Production -- Factors of production such as labor, raw materials, or energy -- Fixed capital formation operations -- Financial operations - -You can enter NACE codes in the **Company Information** window. NACE codes are unique five- or six-digit codes that are assigned to industry sectors. For example, DA.15.83 - Manufacture of Sugar. - -## To enter NACE codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Industrial Classification** field, enter the NACE code. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-account-schedules-to-asc-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-account-schedules-to-asc-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4152123b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-account-schedules-to-asc-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export Account Schedules to ASC Format - description: You can export the account schedule data into a digital file format approved by the local tax authorities for certain reports. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Account Schedules to ASC Format -You can export the account schedule data into a digital file format approved by the local tax authorities for the following annual reports: - -- Balance de Situación Abreviado -- Balance de Situación Normal -- Cuenta de PyG Abreviado -- Cuenta de PyG Normal - -## To export account schedules into ASC format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedules**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, select the relevant account schedule name, and then choose the **Edit Account Schedule** action. -3. In the **Account Schedule** window, choose the **Export Schedules to ASC format** action. -4. In the **Export Schedules to ASC format** window, on the **Options** FastTab, enter information into the relevant fields. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-electronic-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-electronic-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6c8b5716..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-electronic-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export Electronic Payments - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can export payment journal entries into a file format according to four different payment standards. You must use the following windows to export according to the different payment standards. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Electronic Payments -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can export payment journal entries into a file format according to four different payment standards. You must use the following windows to export according to the different payment standards. - -|Payment standard|Window to export from| -|----------------------|---------------------------| -|AEB N34|**Payment Orders**| -|AEB N34.1|**Payment Orders**| -|E-PAY|**Payment Journal**| -|SEPA|**Payment Journal** or **Payment Orders**| - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Before you can export a payment, you must select a payment format in the **Payment Export Format** field in the **Bank Account Card** window. - -## To export electronic payments using the Payment Orders window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the documents that you want to pay. -3. Choose THE **Export to File** action. - - Payments of type SEPA will be exported to a file immediately. - - Payments of type N34 or N34.1 will be exported when you run the **Payment order - Export N34** or **PO - Export N34.1** report, which automatically opens when you choose **Export** in step 3. - -4. In the **PO - Export N34.1** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Bank Account No.**|Select the bank account from which the payments will be exported.| - |**Settle Date**|Specify the date that the export will be transmitted to the bank. This date will be the posting date for the payment journal entries that are exported.| - |**If Posting Date does not match Delivery Date**|Specify if you want to match the settle date, or if you want to skip any payment journal lines where the entered posting date does not match the settle date.| - |**Expenses Code**|Specify who is responsible for the payment expenses.| - |**Shared (Only International Transf.**|Specify if you want to share the expenses between the payer and the payee. This is only applicable for international transfers.| - |**Payment Order Concept.)**|Specify the payment order concept, either **Payroll**, **Retirement Payroll**, or **Others**.| - |**Relation**|Specify if you want the bank to send you a detailed list of all transfer charges. If you do not select this field, the bank will send the total of all charges for all the transfers made.| - |**Number Of Copies**|Specify the number of additional copies of the remittance advice that will be printed by this process. One document is always printed so that it can be mailed to the payee.| - -5. Choose the **Print** or the **Preview** action to see the created payment file. - - The payment journal entries which have the **Bank Payment Type** field set to **Electronic Payment** will be exported. The data will be exported to a file that is formatted according the N34 or N34.1 standard format. In addition, remittance advice will be printed, which is suitable for mailing to each payee. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only post the payment order after you have successfully exported the electronic payments. - -## To export electronic payments using the Payment Journal window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the documents that you want to pay. -3. On the **Navigate** tab, choose **Electronic Payments**, and then choose **Export**. - - Payments of type SEPA will be exported to a file immediately. - - Payments of type E-PAY will be exported when you run the **Export Electronic Payments** report, which automatically opens when you choose **Export** in step 3. - -4. In the **Export Electronic Payments** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Bank Account No.**|Select the bank account from which the payments will be exported.| - |**Settle Date**|Specify the date that the export will be transmitted to the bank. This date will be the posting date for the payment journal entries that are exported.| - |**If Posting Date does not match Delivery Date**|Specify if you want to match the settle date, or if you want to skip any payment journal lines where the entered posting date does not match the settle date.| - |**Expenses Code**|Specify who is responsible for the payment expenses.| - |**Shared (Only International Transf.**|Specify if you want to share the expenses between the payer and the payee. This is only applicable for international transfers.| - |**Payment Order Concept.)**|Specify the payment order concept, either **Payroll**, **Retirement Payroll**, or **Others**.| - |**Relation**|Specify if you want the bank to send you a detailed list of all transfer charges. If you do not select this field, the bank will send the total of all charges for all the transfers made.| - |**Number Of Copies**|Specify the number of additional copies of the remittance advice that will be printed by this process. One document is always printed so that it can be mailed to the payee.| - -5. Choose the **Print** or the **Preview** action to see the created payment file. - - The payment journal entries which have the **Bank Payment Type** field set to **Electronic Payment** will be exported. The data will be exported to a file that is formatted according to the selected payment standard. In addition, remittance advice will be printed, which is suitable for mailing to each payee. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only post the payment order after you have successfully exported the electronic payments. - - > [!NOTE] - > In the generic version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], the **Payment Journal** window is used in a similar way to export electronic payments in the SEPA Credit Transfer format. For more information, see [How to: Make Payments with Bank Data Conversion Service or SEPA Credit Transfer](../../finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md). - -## To export electronic payments from the Cartera module - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **PO - Export N34.1**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Delivery Date**|Specify the delivery date of the electronic payment.| - |**Expenses Code**|Specify who is responsible for the payment expenses.| - |**Payment Order Concept**|Specify the payment order concept, either **Payroll**, **Retirement Payroll**, or **Others**.| - |**Relation**|Specify if you want the bank to send you a detailed list of all transfer charges. If you do not select this field, the bank will send the total of all charges for all the transfers made.| - |**Number Of Copies**|Specify the number of additional copies of the remittance advice that will be printed by this process. One document is always printed so that it can be mailed to the payee.| - |**Shared (Only Internation Transf.)**|Specify if you want to share the expenses between the payer and the payee. This is only applicable for international transfers.| - -> [!NOTE] -> You can only post the payment order after you have successfully exported the electronic payments. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments – AEB N34.1](electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md) - Export Electronic Payments - [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Make Payments with Bank Data Conversion Service or SEPA Credit Transfer](../../finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index 770c24d8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export VAT Statements in Text Format - description: You can export a VAT statement in text format and then submit it electronically to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export VAT Statements in Text Format -You can export a VAT statement in text format and then submit it electronically to the tax authorities. - -For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=238181) website. - -## To export a VAT statement in text format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statements**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required VAT statement, and then choose the **Generate txt file** action. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The VAT statement name must be of the template type **One Column Report**. - > - > In the standard version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], the VAT statement name for the 320 telematic statement is of the type **One Column Report**. - -4. In the **Telematic VAT Declaration** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT entries included**|Specify if the VAT statement must include open entries, closed entries, or both open and closed entries.| - |**VAT entries included**|Specify if the VAT statement must include only entries from the period that is specified in the **Date Filter** field, or also entries from previous periods.| - |**Additional Currency**|Select to display the report amounts in the additional reporting currency.| - -5. On the **VAT Statement Line** FastTab, specify a value for the **Date Filter** field. - - Optionally, select additional filters. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. In the **Transference Format** window, verify that the VAT statement is set up as required, and then choose the **OK** button. -8. Choose the **Open** button or choose the **Save** button. - -You can now submit the VAT statement to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[VAT Reports](vat-reports.md) - [How to: Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in Text File Format](how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-text-file-format.md) - [How to: Export VAT Statements in XML Format](how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index 209f5fa4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-export-vat-statements-in-xml-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export VAT Statements in XML Format - description: You can export a VAT statement in XML format and then submit it electronically to the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export VAT Statements in XML Format -You can export a VAT statement in XML format and then submit it electronically to the tax authorities. - -For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=238181) website. - -## To export a VAT statement in XML format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Statement**, and then choose the appropriate link. -2. Select the required VAT statement, and then choose the **Generate XML file** action. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The VAT statement name must be of the template type **One Column Report**. - > - > In the standard version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], the VAT statement name for the 392 telematic statement is of the type **One Column Report**. - -3. In the **XML VAT Declaration** window, on the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT entries included**|Specify if the VAT statement must include open entries, closed entries, or both open and closed entries.| - |**VAT entries included**|Specify if the VAT statement must include only entries from the period that is specified in the **Date Filter** field, or also entries from previous periods.| - |**Additional Currency**|Select to display the report amounts in the additional reporting currency.| - -4. On the **VAT Statement Line** FastTab, specify a value for the **Date Filter** field. - - Optionally, select additional filters. -5. Choose the **OK** button. -6. In the **XML Transference Format** window, verify that the VAT statement is set up as required, and then choose the **OK** button. - -You can open or save the generated XML file. You can now submit the VAT statement to the tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Templates for Telematic VAT Statements in XML File Format](how-to-create-templates-for-telematic-vat-statements-in-xml-file-format.md) - [How to: Export VAT Statements in Text Format](how-to-export-vat-statements-in-text-format.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-ignore-discounts-in-general-ledger-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-ignore-discounts-in-general-ledger-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index f0c36aec..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-ignore-discounts-in-general-ledger-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Ignore Discounts in General Ledger Accounts - description: Some general ledger accounts do not accept payment discounts or invoice discounts. You can ignore the discounts for these general ledger accounts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Ignore Discounts in General Ledger Accounts -Some general ledger accounts do not accept payment discounts or invoice discounts. You can ignore the discounts for these general ledger accounts. - -## To ignore discounts in general ledger accounts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to open the **G/L Account Card** window. -3. Expand the **Posting** FastTab. -4. To ignore the discounts, select the **Ignore Discounts** check box. -5. Enter information into the required fields. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-indent-and-validate-chart-of-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-indent-and-validate-chart-of-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index bfecbc90..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-indent-and-validate-chart-of-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Indent and Validate Chart of Accounts - description: You can indent and validate the chart of accounts in the **G/L Account Card** window. You can enter a maximum of 20 numbers. Accounts are sorted in string order, as shown in the following example. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Indent and Validate Chart of Accounts -You can indent and validate the chart of accounts in the **G/L Account Card** window. You can enter a maximum of 20 numbers. Accounts are sorted in string order, as shown in the following example. - -1 -10 -101 -2 -20 -2100001 -3 -31 - -## To indent and validate the chart of accounts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, in the **No.** field, enter the number of the general ledger account that you are setting up. -4. In the **Account type** field, select **Posting** or **Heading**. **Posting** implies that entries can be posted to the account. **Heading** implies that entries cannot be posted to the account. - - > [!NOTE] - > For Portugal, select **Posting** or **Total** in the **Account type** field. - -5. In the **Income Stmt. Bal. Acc.** field, select the account to which the changes will be sent after correction. -6. Enter information into the other relevant fields. -7. Choose the **OK** button to close the **G/L Account Card** window. -8. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, select an account, and then choose **Indent Chart of Accounts**. -9. To validate the chart of accounts, choose the **Yes** button in the dialog box. After validation, you will be notified whether the chart of accounts is correct. -10. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To validate the chart of accounts in Portugal - -1. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, choose the **Check Chart of Accounts** action. -2. Choose the **Yes** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 15702fff..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Pay Vendors Using Electronic Payments - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can pay a vendor using electronic payments. Payments will be exported to a file, which will then be transmitted to your bank. The bank then electronically transfers the payments from your bank account to the payee’s (vendor) bank account. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 10/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Pay Vendors Using Electronic Payments -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can pay a vendor using electronic payments. Payments will be exported to a file, which will then be transmitted to your bank. The bank then electronically transfers the payments from your bank account to the payee’s (vendor) bank account. - -This process is similar to how computer checks are processed. - -## To pay a vendor electronically - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Bank Payment Type**|Specify **Electronic Payment** to create a corresponding check ledger entry for the amount.| - |**Payment Type**|Specify the payment type for the special transfer payment, if applicable. Select **Blank** if you do not want to use the special transfer payment type. Select **01** to create a special payment for “goods” on the journal line. Select **02** to create a special payment for “non-goods” on this journal line.| - |**Statistical Code**|Specify the statistical code for the special transfer payment, if applicable. The statistical code must be used at the same time as the payment type. Select **01** to create a special payment for “goods” on the journal line. Select **02** to create a special payment for “non-goods” on this journal line.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-post-and-print-all-transactions-for-a-period.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-post-and-print-all-transactions-for-a-period.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3d12c93d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-post-and-print-all-transactions-for-a-period.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post and Print All Transactions for a Period - description: Companies must submit their business transaction entries, grouped by transaction numbers, in an annual report to tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post and Print All Transactions for a Period -Companies must submit their business transaction entries, grouped by transaction numbers, in an annual report to tax authorities. Every general ledger transaction must have a sequential number for the fiscal year. Posting transactions will assign transaction numbers to general ledger entries. - -## To post all transactions for a period - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Batch Name**|Select the required general journal batch name.| - |**Transaction No.**|Enter the transaction number. **Note:** If the transaction is balanced, the next number displays automatically, and the related transaction details appear in the next row. If the transaction is not balanced, the same transaction number is displayed with related transaction details.| - -3. Choose the **Post** action, and then choose the **Yes** button to confirm posting. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - After the journal is posted, a final transaction number is assigned to entries in the journal. This number is a sequential, non-gap number. Thus, for each fiscal year, all of the entries grouped by their transaction number are sorted by date in sequential order, with no gaps or blanks. - -## To print all transactions for a period - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. To set the **Period Trans. No.** field for all of the general ledger entries in the period in a sequential order, choose the **Set Period Transaction No.** action. -3. Select the appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > All transactions are ordered by posting date, and a sequential number is assigned to each entry in the **Period Trans. No.** field. - -5. In the **G/L Registers** window, choose the **Print Page** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Transaction Numbers](transaction-numbers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-account-book-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-account-book-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 35afe07f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-account-book-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Account Book Reports - description: Account book reports display all the general ledger entries created in a specific period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Account Book Reports -Account book reports display all the general ledger entries created in a specific period. The two account book reports are: - -- **Official Account Book** report - Displays information for every general ledger entry, grouped by transaction. -- **Official Account Summarized Book** report - Displays a summary of general entries, grouped by heading or posting accounts. - -When sending these reports to the authorities or auditors, you can include additional pages that will precede your report. To do this, you need to manually set the report's first page number. For example, if you have three pages of information preceding your report, you can set the first page of the report to indicate that it is page 4. - -## To print an official account book report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account - Official Acc. Book**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Closing Transaction Description**|Enter the description for the closing period transaction.| - |**Opening Transaction Description**|Enter the description for the opening period transaction.| - |**First Page**|Enter the number that you want to include on the first page of the report.| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Currency**|Select to show the report amounts in additional reporting currency (ACY).| - -3. In the **GL Register** FastTab, select appropriate filters. -4. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## To print an official account summarized book report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Official Acc.Summarized Book**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Date**|Enter the start date of the report.| - |**To Date**|Enter the end date of the report.| - |**Include Closing Entries**|Select to include the closing entries in the report.| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Currency**|Select to show the report amounts in additional reporting currency (ACY).| - |**First page**|Enter the number that you want to include on the first page of the report.| - |**Account Type**|Select **Posting** or **Heading**. **Posting** implies that entries can be posted to the account, and **Heading** implies that entries cannot be posted to the account.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-intrastat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-intrastat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 289e215b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-intrastat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Intrastat Reports - description: All European Union (EU) companies must submit an Intrastat statistics report to the Instituto Nacional de Estatística (INE) detailing their trade with other EU countries/regions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Intrastat Reports -All European Union (EU) companies must submit an Intrastat statistics report to the Instituto Nacional de Estatística (INE) detailing their trade with other EU countries/regions. Companies do not have to submit statistical declarations for the Intrastat system if their import and export totals are lower than the threshold set by their country/region. - -You can print and send required trade information in a file format approved by the tax authorities. - -## To print an Intrastat checklist - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Batch Name**|The required journal batch name.| - |**Type**|Select **Receipt** or **Shipment**.| - -3. To get Intrastat entries, choose the **Get Entries** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also make entries manually in the **Intrastat Journal** window. - -4. Choose the **Make Declaration** action. -5. In the **Intrastat - Make Disk Tax Auth** batch job, expand the **Intrastat Jnl. Batch** FastTab, and then select the appropriate filters. -6. Expand the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTab, select the appropriate filters, and then choose the **OK** button. - -The Intrastat information is exported, and you can save the data to a file, or open the file in the appropriate program. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-invoice-books.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-invoice-books.md deleted file mode 100644 index c42a74f1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-invoice-books.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Sales and Purchase Invoice Books - description: The **Sales Invoice Book** report and **Purchases Invoice Book** report allow you to check all of the sales and purchase documents created for a specific period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Sales and Purchase Invoice Books -The **Sales Invoice Book** report and **Purchases Invoice Book** report allow you to check all of the sales and purchase documents created for a specific period. - -Invoices posted from a journal are displayed in these reports. When a sales or purchase general posting journal line is posted, the VAT entry that is created stores information about the customer or vendor. - -You can print the **Sales Invoice Book** report and **Purchases Invoice Book** report in additional reporting currency. You can also filter these reports to get a list of the following: - -- Invoices -- Credit memos -- Invoices and credit memos - -## To print sales invoice book and purchase invoice book reports - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoice Book** or enter **Purchases Invoice Book**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Option|Description| - |-------------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Currency**|Select to display amounts in an additional currency.| - |**Order by posting date**|Select to order the document by posting date.| - -3. Choose the **Print** button to print the report or choose the **Preview** button to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-limits-for-due-dates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-limits-for-due-dates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 316ff143..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-limits-for-due-dates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Limits for Due Dates - description: You can modify payment terms to have limits for the maximum number of days that can be between a delivery and the corresponding payment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Limits for Due Dates -You can modify payment terms to have limits for the maximum number of days that can be between a delivery and the corresponding payment. - -Legal limits for the gap between delivery and payment determine how due dates are calculated. For example, if you create a payment term that will be used for sales to the public sector, the **Max. No. of Days till Due Date** field for that payment term must be set to 30 days. - -## To set limits for due dates on payment terms - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the payment term that you want to modify, and then, in the **Max. No. of Days till Due Date** field, specify the number of calendar days to allow between delivery and payment. - -Next, you must make sure that you specify the appropriate payment terms for your public and private customers and vendors. When you create a document for that customer or vendor, the due date for the payment is calculated from the day that the customer received the items or services. Then, you must update the **Document Date** field for the document with the date of the receipt. For example, if you update a sales invoice when you are informed of delivery, the due date is calculated based on the new document date that you specified. The calculated due date cannot be further away than the limit that you specified for the payment term. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You cannot post a document that creates a bill where one or more installments have a due date that is later than the limit that is specified in the **Max. No. of Days till Due Date** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Calculating Due Dates](calculating-due-dates.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-340-reports-for-small-businesses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-340-reports-for-small-businesses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8ce35279..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-340-reports-for-small-businesses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up 340 Reports for Small Businesses - description: Use the following procedure to set up your business to report on a cash basis, that is, Cash Accounting Criteria (CAC). If you have not already done so, you can set up posting groups for cash-based VAT accounting for purchases and sales. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up 340 Reports for Small Businesses -Use the following procedure to set up your business to report on a cash basis, that is, Cash Accounting Criteria (CAC). If you have not already done so, you can set up posting groups for cash-based VAT accounting for purchases and sales. - -When you file a report 340, any transaction lines that are associated with unrealized VAT are assumed to have taken place under cash accounting. - -After VAT posting is set up to handle unrealized VAT, any printed sales order, purchase order, and so forth will be modified to have the following label in bold font added to the report just before the section reporting the document lines: **Régimen especial del criterio de caja**. - -## To set up reporting under CAC - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select the **Unrealized VAT** check box in the **General Ledger Setup** window. Choose the **OK** button. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **VAT Posting Setup** window, select a group to modify or create a posting group that has general ledger accounts to treat the VAT amounts for the various unrealized VAT accounts in your VAT Posting Setup, and then choose the **Edit** action. -5. On the **General** FastTab, set the **Unrealized VAT Type** to **Percentage**. -6. On the **Sales** and **Purchase** FastTabs, specify general ledger accounts for the various **VAT Unreal. Account** fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-and-close-income-statement-balances.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-and-close-income-statement-balances.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5f71bf16..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-and-close-income-statement-balances.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up and Close Income Statement Balances - description: You can use income statement balancing accounts to balance and track several accounts at the same time. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up and Close Income Statement Balances -You can use income statement balancing accounts to balance and track several accounts at the same time. The **Close Income Statement** batch job transfers income statement accounts to an account in the balance sheet, and closes the income statement accounts. When the **Close Income Statement** batch job is run, the entries are automatically posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> The fiscal year must be closed before the batch job can run. - -## To set up the income statement balance account - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an existing general ledger account, and then choose the **Edit** action to open the **G/L Account Card** window. -3. Expand the **General** FastTab. -4. In the **Income Stmt. Bal. Acc.** field, select the adjustment account for the auxiliary commercial account. - - > [!NOTE] - > During adjustment, balances will be expensed or credited to this account. - -5. Enter information into the required fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## To close income statement balances - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Close Income Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Fiscal Year Ending Date**|Select the date of the closed fiscal year.| - |**Gen. Journal Template**|Select the required general journal template.| - |**Gen. Journal Batch**|Select the required general journal batch.| - |**Document No.**|Enter the document number.| - |**Retained Earnings Acc.**|Select the account for the retained earnings entries.| - |**Posting Description**|Enter the required description.| - -3. In the **Close by** section, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Business Unit Code**|Select to create an entry for each business code.| - |**Dimensions**|Select to create an entry for each general ledger dimension.| - |**Inventory Period Closed**|Select to indicate that the inventory period with ending dates equal to or greater than the last date of the accounting period is closed.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2377633a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up bank accounts to make electronic payments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up bank accounts to make electronic payments. - -## To set up bank accounts for electronic payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Account Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Transfer** FastTab, make sure that the **CCC Bank No.**, **CCC Bank Branch No.**, **CCC Control Digits**, and **CCC Bank Account No.** fields are filled in correctly. -3. On the **Transfer** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**E-Pay Export File Path**|Enter the full path of the electronic payment file, start with the drive letter and end with a backslash (). The file name is not included here. You should use the directory where [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] is installed. For example: **C:NAV** would be a possible entry for this field. You can enter a maximum of 100 characters.| - |**Last E-Pay Export File Name**|Specify the name of the file with the .txt file name extension, without the path., Because the file name will be incremented every time that an electronic payment file is exported, this file name should have digits in it. This will create a permanent record of every file that you have exported to the bank. For example, **DD000000.txt** could be a possible first entry for this field. You can enter a maximum of 50 characters.| - -4. On the **Posting** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Last Remittance Advice No.**|Specify a number series that differs from the check number series. This is needed so that the numbers do not conflict with each other. The remittance advice is printed on blank paper in a form that is easy to mail to the vendor.| - -## To set up vendor bank accounts for electronic payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Bank Account Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Use For Electronic Payments**|Specify if this vendor bank account will be used for electronic payments. For electronic payments, only one bank account can be selected for each vendor.| - -3. On the **Transfer** FastTab, make sure that the **CCC Bank No.**, **CCC Bank Branch No.**, **CCC Control Digits**, and **CCC Bank Account No.** fields are filled in correctly. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Electronic Payments – AEB N34.1](electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 07bffa89..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-bank-ccc-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Bank CCC Codes - description: Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique account code used by banks to identify their customers. The CCC code is printed on bank documents such as checks and statements. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Bank CCC Codes -Código Cuenta Cliente (CCC) is a unique account code used by banks to identify their customers. The CCC code is printed on bank documents such as checks and statements. - -You can set up CCC codes in the following locations: - -- **Bank Account Card** window -- **Company Information** window -- **Customer Bank Account Card** window -- **Vendor Bank Account Card** window - -The following procedure describes how to set up bank CCC codes for your company. - -## To enter CCC codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Payments** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |--------------------------|--------------------------------------------| - | **CCC Bank No.** | 1-4 | - | **CCC Bank Branch No.** | 5-8 | - | **CCC Control Digits** | 9-10 | - | **CCC Bank Account No.** | 11-20 (Spain)

11-21 (Portugal) | - -The following procedure describes how to set up bank CCC codes for existing customer bank accounts, but the same steps apply to vendors, bank accounts, and company information. - -## To set up bank CCC codes for a customer bank account - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer Bank Account Card**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Transfer** FastTab, enter information into the relevant CCC fields. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must set up the company information on the **Payments** FastTab. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts](../../bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-operation-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-operation-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index ca5f34cb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-operation-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Operation Codes - description: You can add as many operation codes as you want to the table. However, the operation codes C, D, and I already exist in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Operation Codes -You can add as many operation codes as you want to the table. However, the operation codes C, D, and I already exist in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. For example, Credit Memos always have the operation code D. You cannot set up these values in the table because they are system-created codes. If you try to add them, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] will return an error. - -## To set up operation codes - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Operation Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Operation Codes** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Enter an operation code. You can only enter one letter or number.

Valid codes are numbers 1 – 8, and letters A – Z.

To submit a report under the CAC regimen, you must make certain that the code Z, which is required for these types of transactions, is in the list of operation codes.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the operation code. You can enter a maximum of 30 letters and numbers.| - -## To link operation codes to general product posting groups - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **General Product Posting Groups** action. -3. In the **General Product Posting Groups** window, link each operation code to a general product posting group. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |Code|Enter a code to create a new general product posting group.| - |Description|Enter a description for the general product posting group| - |Def. VAT Prod. Posting Group|Select a VAT percentage to link it to the general product posting group.| - |Operation Code|Select an appropriate operation code to link it to the general product posting group. You can assigne the same operation code to different posting groups. **Note:** It is important to link the operation code to the correct VAT product posting group. The Make 340 Declaration report uses the setup to create trade declarations.| - -When you add an operation code to the general product posting group, that association is in turn applied to the items that have that general product posting group. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Report 340](how-to-create-report-340.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-payment-days-and-non-payment-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-payment-days-and-non-payment-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4d8f04da..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-set-up-payment-days-and-non-payment-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Payment Days and Non-Payment Periods - description: Payment days and non-payment periods are used to calculate due dates. Due date calculation is used for sales and purchase documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Payment Days and Non-Payment Periods -Payment days and non-payment periods are used to calculate due dates. Due date calculation is used for sales and purchase documents. - -A payment day is a day on which invoices are paid. - -A non-payment period is a range of dates during which the company does not make payments. This functionality is often used for holiday periods. - -For sales and purchase invoices, the customer and vendor payment days and non-payment periods are taken into account. - -## To set up payment days and non-payment periods for a company - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. Expand the **Payments** FastTab. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payment Days Code**|Enter the payment day code.| - |**Non-Paymt. Periods Code**|Enter the non-payment periods code.| - -4. To open the **Payment Days** window, choose the **Payment Days** action. -5. In the **Payment Days** window, in the **Payment Day** field, enter the payment day for the company. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. To open the **Non-Payment Periods** window, choose the **Non-Payment Periods** action. -8. Enter information into the relevant fields. -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up payment days for customers and vendors - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers** or enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required customer or vendor, and then choose the **Payment Days** action. -3. In the **Payment Days** window, in the **Payment Day** field, enter the payment day for the customer or vendor. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up non-payment periods for customers and vendors - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers** or enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required customer or vendor, and then choose the **Non-Payment Periods** action. -3. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Date**|Enter the starting date for the non-payment period.| - |**To Date**|Enter the ending date for the non-payment period.| - |**Description**|Enter a description.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-void-electronic-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-void-electronic-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index c20521f3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/how-to-void-electronic-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Void Electronic Payments - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can void the exported payment file. By voiding the file, the entire payment journal from which the file was created, will be deleted. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Void Electronic Payments -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can void the exported payment file. By voiding the file, the entire payment journal from which the file was created, will be deleted. - -## To void electronic payments - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Void Electronic Payments**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Bank Account No.**|Specify the bank account number from which the payments will be voided.| - -## To void electronic payments in the Cartera module - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Void PO – Export N34.1**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Payment Order No.**|Specify the payment order number from which the payments will be voided.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts for Electronic Payments](how-to-set-up-bank-accounts-for-electronic-payments.md) - [How to: Pay Vendors by Using Electronic Payments](how-to-pay-vendors-by-using-electronic-payments.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-cartera-module.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-cartera-module.md deleted file mode 100644 index dc7e87f6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-cartera-module.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payments Cartera Module - description: The Payments Cartera module allows you to manage payables documents generated from purchase invoices or from the **Cartera Journal**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payments Cartera Module -The Payments Cartera module allows you to manage payables documents generated from purchase invoices or from the **Cartera Journal**. The documents can be managed by: - -- Bank -- Due date -- Value -- Currency - -## Payment Orders -A payment order is comprised of one or several documents that are grouped for delivery to a bank. - -There are different criteria for grouping documents into a single payment order. You can group documents sent to the same vendor, documents that have the same due date, documents sent to the same address, and so on. - -Use the Payments Cartera module to manage the following: - -- Drafts of payment orders to vendors (payment confirmation) -- Distinct payables documents - - > [!NOTE] - > The drafts, payment orders to vendors, and distinct payables documents can be managed in your local currency or original currency. - -Finance charges from financial entities are included. - -Payment confirmation is a service provided by a financial entity. With payment confirmation, you can manage a company’s payments to its suppliers, and use the invoice to charge the customers or vendors before the due date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Cartera Module](cartera-module.md) - [Receivables Cartera Module](receivables-cartera-module.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-in-cash.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-in-cash.md deleted file mode 100644 index 795f4d69..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/payments-in-cash.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payments in Cash - description: As of January 1, 2012, companies in Spain are required to submit a summary for payments in cash that are greater than EUR 6.000.00 for each customer for each year. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Payments in Cash -As of January 1, 2012, companies in Spain are required to submit a summary for payments in cash that are greater than EUR 6.000.00 for each customer for each year. - -## Reporting Payments in Cash -If you are reporting payments in cash, the following sequence of tasks are listed in the order in which they are generally performed: - -- Applying payments in cash to invoices. -- Making 340 Payments in cash declaration. - -## Applying Payments in Cash to Invoices -You apply payments in cash to invoices that you have received from customers. For information about how to apply payments to invoices, see [Managing Receivables](../../receivables-manage-receivables.md). Only the applied payments in cash are used for reporting payments in cash. If you do not apply payments in cash to invoices, you cannot report payments in cash. - -## Making 340 Payments in Cash Declaration -You use the **Make 340 Declaration** batch job to report 340 payments in cash declaration. For information about how to specify and select information to generate the declaration, see Make 340 Declaration. - -> [!NOTE] -> The payments made through banks are excluded. - -> [!NOTE] -> The amount received in cash in the declaration .txt file can contain values that differ from the total invoiced amount for a customer. This is because not all of the payments are made in cash. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](../../receivables-manage-receivables.md) - [Report 340](report-340.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/receivables-cartera-module.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/receivables-cartera-module.md deleted file mode 100644 index ba9e9c87..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/receivables-cartera-module.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Receivables Cartera Module - description: The Receivables Cartera module allows you to manage bills generated from sales invoices. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Receivables Cartera Module -The Receivables Cartera module allows you to manage bills generated from sales invoices. The documents can be managed by: - -- Due date -- Bank -- Value -- Document type -- Currency - -You can manually create bills using the **Cartera Journal**. You can also use the Receivables Cartera module to manage all sales invoices that the company yields to a factoring company. - -## Bill Groups -With the Receivables Cartera module, you can manage bill groups and discount bill groups in your local currency or original currency. - -There are various criteria for grouping documents in a bill group. You can group documents for the same customer, documents with the same due date, documents drawn in the same market, and so on. You can group one or more receivable documents in one bill group. - -A bill group consists of one or more documents grouped together to submit to a bank. A bill group can be submitted for collection or discount. - -If submitted for collection, the bank is only responsible for processing the collection of the documents on the due date. - -If the bill group is submitted for discount, the bank will advance the amount of the bill group (or a portion of it, in the case of factoring) to the company, and will take responsibility for collecting on the due dates of the documents that make up the bill group. - -A bill group of invoices can be submitted to a financial institution (factor) for risked factoring (the risk of insolvency is covered by the company) or unrisked factoring (the risk of insolvency is covered by the factor). - -Bill groups include: - -- Finance charges for collection or discount management -- Finance charges for returned bills -- Interest for discounts - -With the Receivables Cartera module, you can yield credits or factoring of sales invoice bill groups, including the finance charge calculation by the factoring company. You can request the anticipated value of the yielded invoices, or only the management of the collection. - -You can use bill groups for the following: - -- Factoring without risk - The factoring company takes on the risks associated with non-payment. -- Factoring with risk - You take on the risks associated with non-payment. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Cartera Module](cartera-module.md) - [Payments Cartera Module](payments-cartera-module.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-340.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-340.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4188d0e6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-340.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Report 340 - description: Report 340 contains information about invoices and taxes that were issued or received by your company in a given period. The report is generated in a format that is approved by the tax authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Report 340 -The **Report 340** report contains information about invoices and taxes that were issued or received by your company in a given period. The report is generated in a format that is approved by the tax authorities. This report should be submitted in the company’s monthly or quarterly liquidation period, depending on the size of the company. This file can be uploaded to the Spanish Tax Agency website or submitted on CD-ROM. For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://sede.agenciatributaria.gob.es/) website. If the number of operations exceeds 1,000,000, the report can be submitted electronically. - -## Reporting Requirements for Entrepreneurs and Small Companies -The reporting requirements for entrepreneurs and small businesses are modified to support businesses that use the cash accounting criteria (CAC). - -A company can use the cash accounting method if business sales do not exceed 2,000,000 euros per year. There is one exception to this rule for a business whose receipts in cash from any single customer exceeds the sum of 100,000 euros. - -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can set up posting groups for cash-based VAT accounting for purchases and sales. - - If you file a report under this regimen, the following label is applied to certain [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] reports: **Régimen especial del criterio de caja**. The modified reports are: - -|Report|Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|Report 117|Reminder| -|Report 118|Finance Charge Memo| -|Report 205|Order Confirmation| -|Report 206|Sales - Invoice| -|Report 207|Sales - Credit Memo| -|Report 405|Purchase Order| -|Report 406|Purchase – Invoice| -|Report 407|Purchase - Credit Memo| -|Report 5900|Service Order| -|Report 5911|Service - Invoice| -|Report 5912|Service - Credit Memo| - -## File Format -The file format for the **Report 340** report includes one deponent record, and at least one issued invoice or one received invoice. Deponent information comes from the **Company Information** table and the request form. Issued invoices come from the companies to which you have sold goods or services. Customer information comes from the **Customer** table. Received invoices come from the companies from which you have purchased goods or services. Vendor information comes from the **Vendor** table. - -> [!NOTE] -> If there are no file format records, the file is not created and an error message is displayed. - -## Entries Included in Report 340 -The entries included in **Report 340** must have been posted in the period and fiscal year entered in the request form. The entries that are included in the report of payments in cash can be posted from the previous year. - -### Businesses -**Report 340** must include the following entries: - -- Posted sales invoices and credit memos. -- Posted purchase invoices and credit memos. -- Posted service invoices and credit memos. -- Auto invoices and auto credit memos. -- Payments in cash. - -Entries in the **Sales Invoice Book** report must be included in the report as issued invoices. - -Entries in the **Purchase Invoice book** report must be included in the report as received invoices. - -### Small Businesses -For small businesses and entrepreneurs operating under the Cash Accounting Criteria (CAC), Report 340 reports invoices under the CAC. The invoice is marked with a "Z" for operation type. If the invoice is under the CAC, then the following is reported: - -- Payment/receipt method, that is, cash, check, transfer, and so forth. This field is blank in the report if no payment collection has occurred. -- Payment/receipt amount (full, partial) -- Payment/receipt dates - -### Invoices Including Different VAT Percentages or EC Percentages -If the invoice has more than one VAT percentage or equivalence charge (EC) percentage, the report must include all of the records with different VAT percentage and EC percentage. If the invoice includes equivalence charges (EC), the EC percentage and EC amount without VAT will be displayed. - -All of these records will show the same invoice ID and customer VAT number. - -## File Format Restrictions -Before creating the **Report 340** report, you should consider the following file format restrictions: - -- All amounts must be in euro. -- All amounts must be positive. In the fields where negative amounts are possible, **N** is specified. -- All text must be capitalized. -- All alphanumeric fields must be left-aligned. -- All numeric fields must be right-aligned. -- Special characters are converted to standard characters. -- If the field has no value, it will be empty for alphanumeric fields and populated with zeros for numeric fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Report 340](how-to-create-report-340.md) - [Payments in Cash](payments-in-cash.md) - [Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-347.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-347.md deleted file mode 100644 index 58ca4ac1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-347.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Report 347 - description: Report 347 is a required annual report sent by all companies to the tax authorities to reflect the sales or purchases in a given period. This report also includes entries such as payment in cash that was received in the period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Report 347 -The **Report 347** report is a required annual report sent by all companies to the tax authorities to reflect the sales or purchases in a given period. This report also includes entries such as payment in cash that was received in the period. The **Report 347** report is generated in a format that is approved by the tax authorities. This file can be uploaded to the Spanish Tax Agency website or submitted on CD-ROM. For more information, see the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://sede.agenciatributaria.gob.es/) website. - -## File Format for Report 347 -The file format for **Report 347** includes at least one responsible company, a deponent, and a customer/vendor register. A responsible company is a company that submits the information to the Spanish Tax Agency. Deponent information comes from the **Company Information** table and the request form. Customer information comes from the **Customer** table, the **Cust. Ledger Entry** table, and the **G/L Entry** table. Vendor information comes from the **Vendor** table and the **Vendor Ledger Entry** table. - -> [!NOTE] -> If there are no file records, the file is not created and an error message is displayed. - -## File Format Restrictions for Report 347 -Before creating **Report 347**, the following file format restrictions will be considered: - -- All amounts must be positive. -- All text must be capitalized. -- All alphanumeric fields must be left-aligned. -- All numeric fields must be right-aligned. -- If the company receives payments in cash that are over the predefined official threshold for these transactions, a four-digit year must be included. The year indicates when the invoices that are related to receivables were posted. -- Special characters must be converted to standard characters. -- If the field has no value, it will be blank for alphanumeric fields and populated with zeros for numeric fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) - [How to: Create Report 347](how-to-create-report-347.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-349.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-349.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0372218b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/report-349.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Report 349 - description: You must submit a periodic report of trade with other EU countries/regions to the tax authorities. In Spain, this Report 349 is part of the EU intra-community VAT Information Exchange System (VIES). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Report 349 -You must submit a periodic report of trade with other EU countries/regions to the tax authorities. In Spain, this Report 349 is part of the EU intra-community VAT Information Exchange System (VIES). - -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], the Report 349 declaration is based on VAT entries that are filtered by the EU country/region codes. You must create a 349 declaration and then submit the file to the [Spanish Tax Agency](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=238181) website or on CD-ROM. - -When you create a Report 349 declaration that includes credit memos, the entries will display in the **Customer/Vendor Warnings 349** window so that you can include them as corrections to invoices. You must make the appropriate changes to the lines in the **Customer/Vendor Warnings 349** window before you can submit the declaration. For more information, [How to: Create Report 349](how-to-create-report-349.md). - -## Delivery Operation Codes -The **Report 349** declaration must specify separate operation codes for the delivery of goods to other EU countries/regions. You can set up separate VAT product posting groups for each type of export delivery. Then, when you apply a VAT posting group to an item that is sold, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] stores the delivery operation code, and the transaction is included in the quarterly 349 declaration. - -Before you submit the 349 declaration, you must make sure that all VAT entries have the relevant delivery operation codes. The following table describes the delivery operation codes that are currently supported in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -|Delivery operation code|Description| -|-----------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**E**|Identifies transactions with items that were delivered to customers in another EU country/region and are not included in either the M or the H delivery operation code.| -|**M**|Identifies transactions with items that were delivered to customers in another EU country/region and which were previously imported into Spain as tax exempt according to the VAT law.| -|**H**|Identifies transactions with items that were delivered to customers in another EU country/region and which were previously imported into Spain as tax exempt according to the VAT law, and which were conducted by an official tax representative.| - - To help you manage exports to other EU countries/regions in [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], you can create VAT product posting groups for each operation code. Then, when you apply a VAT posting group to an item that is sold, the Delivery Operation Code field in the **VAT Entry** table identifies the VAT transactions according to the operation code. - -### Delivery Operation Codes and Item Setup -You can set up a VAT product posting group for each delivery operation type and then assign the appropriate VAT product posting group to items in the Item Card window. - -If you have an inventory item that can be imported in different ways, for example if it is tax exempt in some cases and not tax exempt in other cases, you can create separate item cards with the appropriate VAT product posting group. - -In the following example, you import chairs from another EU country/region, and you resell the chairs to customers in other countries/regions. One type of chair is exempt from VAT when you import it under certain circumstances, but otherwise it is not exempt. As a result, you create two item cards for it: - -- One item card with a VAT product posting group with the **Delivery Operation Code** field set to **M**. -- One item card with a VAT product posting group with the **Delivery Operation Code** field set to **E**. - -Then, when you create a sales order, you must make sure that you select the correct item in the sales lines. - -When you post the sales invoice, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] saves the delivery operation code in the **VAT Entry** table, and then, when you create the Report 349 declaration, the VAT amount is included in the section for the appropriate delivery operation code. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Report 349](how-to-create-report-349.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/spain-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/spain-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9cf8b970..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/spain-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Spain Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Spanish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Spain Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Spanish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Calculating Due Dates](calculating-due-dates.md) - [Cartera Module](cartera-module.md) - [Electronic Payments – AEB N34.1](electronic-payments-aeb-n341.md) - [Transaction Numbers](transaction-numbers.md) - [Corrective Invoices](corrective-invoices.md) - [How to: Enter CCC Codes](how-to-enter-ccc-codes.md) - [How to: Enter NACE Codes](how-to-enter-nace-codes.md) - [How to: Ignore Discounts in General Ledger Accounts](how-to-ignore-discounts-in-general-ledger-accounts.md) - [How to: Indent and Validate Chart of Accounts](how-to-indent-and-validate-chart-of-accounts.md) - [How to: Export Account Schedules to ASC Format](how-to-export-account-schedules-to-asc-format.md) - [How to: Print Account Book Reports](how-to-print-account-book-reports.md) - [How to: Print Sales and Purchase Invoice Books](how-to-print-sales-and-purchase-invoice-books.md) - [How to: Print Intrastat Reports](how-to-print-intrastat-reports.md) - [How to: Set Up and Close Income Statement Balances](how-to-set-up-and-close-income-statement-balances.md) - [How to: Set Up Payment Days and Non-Payment Periods](how-to-set-up-payment-days-and-non-payment-periods.md) - [VAT Reports](vat-reports.md) - [Report 340](report-340.md) - [Report 347](report-347.md) - [Report 349](report-349.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/transaction-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/transaction-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 57a6393e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/transaction-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Transaction Numbers - description: Transaction numbers allow you to group entries with the same document number and date, so that you can balance them together. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Transaction Numbers -Transaction numbers allow you to group entries with the same document number and date, so that you can balance them together. Transaction numbers usually begin with the number 2 each year. The number 1 is reserved for the opening transaction, which is automatically created each year. The only exception is for the first accounting period in the first year. In this case, the opening transaction is the number 1. - -When you enter a transaction number in the first line of a journal, the same transaction number is automatically entered into the other lines if the entries are not balanced. If the entries are balanced, the next number in the sequence is automatically entered into the other lines. - -Having a unique sequential transaction number, ordered by date, allows you to identify every transaction posted in a fiscal year. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post and Print All Transactions for a Period](how-to-post-and-print-all-transactions-for-a-period.md) - [Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/vat-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/vat-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7bc46434..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Spain/vat-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: VAT Reports - description: VAT is charged on transactions that involve goods and services in Spain or goods imported into Spain. The following information provides more details about VAT functionality. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# VAT Reports -VAT is charged on transactions that involve goods and services in Spain or goods imported into Spain. The following information provides more details about VAT functionality. - -## Equivalence Charge -Equivalence Charge (EC) tax applies to activities that do not follow VAT rules. According to EC rules, companies must pay a surcharge to their vendors in addition to VAT. However, they can only charge VAT without the surcharge on sales invoices. - -### VAT with EC Percentage -Preset general posting groups have an EC percentage in addition to their VAT percentage. Although the EC is tracked separately, both tax values are merged with VAT when it is possible. If the EC percentage is a separate field in the posting group, the EC is merged with the value in the **VAT %** column. - -For printing sales and purchase invoice books, the VAT percent and EC percentages are displayed in the **VAT Entry** table during posting. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the item has no taxable VAT, 0 is automatically displayed in the **VAT %** field in the VAT information windows. - -### Telematic VAT -With telematic VAT you can design and generate monthly and yearly tax reports as electronic files or printed files. You can submit these reports to the tax authorities using a third-party program or an XML file from the tax authorities' website. - -### VAT Statement -The VAT statement displays VAT amounts and base amounts in different columns. - -There are two report template types in the **VAT Statement Name** table: - -- **One-Column Report** -- **Two-Columns Report** - -### VAT-VIES Declaration -With VAT-VIES declaration you can run a batch file to generate European Union (EU) sales reports. The batch file exports the entries in the required file format for submission to customs and tax authorities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Spain Local Functionality](spain-local-functionality.md) - [Report 340](report-340.md) - [Report 347](report-347.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/automatic-account-codes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/automatic-account-codes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0565afc8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/automatic-account-codes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Automatic Account Codes - Sweden - description: Learn how to use customized posting groups to automate recurring transactions in journals, sales documents, or purchase documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Automatic Account Codes - Sweden -You can use customized posting groups to automate recurring transactions in journals, sales documents, or purchase documents. These posting groups can be used throughout [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] to trigger automatic postings and allocations across different accounts or dimensions. - -Automatic account codes can be used to automate postings related to payroll overhead. For example, when posting total salary expenses at the end of the month, you can use automatic account codes to assign a percentage of the total salary to automatically post as overhead expenses. - -You can also use automatic account codes to trigger cost or revenue allocations across different dimensions. For example, you can set up an automatic account group to divide total expenses across three departments when posting an invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Automatic Account Posting Groups](how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md) - [Setting Up Posting Groups](../../finance-posting-groups.md) - [Working with General Journals](../../ui-work-general-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-import-and-export-data-in-standard-import-export-format.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-import-and-export-data-in-standard-import-export-format.md deleted file mode 100644 index b4df1bcb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-import-and-export-data-in-standard-import-export-format.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Import and Export Data in Standard Import Export Format - description: You can import and export general ledger data according to the standard import export (SIE) format. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 01/10/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Import and Export Data in Standard Import Export Format -You can import and export general ledger data according to the standard import export (SIE) format. By specifying SIE dimensions and file types, you can specify the level of detail covered by import or export transactions. For more information, see [Standard Import Export Group](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=164870&clcid=0x41d). - -## To import data in SIE format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **SIE Import**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Gen. Journal Template**|Select a general journal template.| - |**Gen. Journal Batch**|Select a general journal batch.| - |**Dimensions**|Select the SIE dimensions to import.| - |**Insert G/L Account**|Select if the general ledger account in the import file is missing in the chart of accounts and needs to be set up during the import process.| - |**Use Number Series for Doc. No.**|Select if a document number is not provided in the import file.| - -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Select the file to import. - -## To export data in SIE format - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **SIE Export**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **G/L Account** FastTab, choose the appropriate filters. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**File Type**|Select the type of file to be created. Select from one of the following options:

- **Year - End Balances** - Contains the annual account balance carried forward for all accounts in the chart of accounts.
- **Periodic Balances** - Contains the annual account balance carried forward and monthly changes for all accounts in the chart of accounts.
- **Object Balances** - Contains the annual account balance carried forward, monthly changes, and balances on the object level, such as cost units and projects, for all accounts in the chart of accounts.
- **Transactions** - Contains all the general ledger entries for the period.| - |**Contact**|Enter the contact person. This field is optional.| - |**Comments**|Describe the content of the file.| - |**Dimensions**|Select the dimensions to export.| - |**Fiscal Year**|Enter the fiscal tax year.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. Choose the **Open** or **Save** button to decide where to place the exported file. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Standard Import Export Group](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=164870&clcid=0x41d) - [Sweden Local Functionality](sweden-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4004d520..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration - description: Use an inward registration to post a preliminary purchase invoice, which you overwrite later when you post the invoice normally. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration -Use an inward registration to post a preliminary purchase invoice, which you overwrite later when you post the invoice normally. For more information, see Inward Registration. - -## To post a preliminary invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an invoice, or create a new invoice. -3. Choose the **Inward Registration** action. -4. Choose **New**, enter a vendor invoice number on the header of the **Inward Registration** window, and then fill in the lines as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT Prod. Posting Group**|Enter a VAT posting group. This code is used in conjunction with the VAT business posting group to retrieve the VAT percentage and the VAT calculation type.| - |**Gen. Prod. Posting Group**|Enter a general posting group.| - -5. Choose the **Post** action to post the preliminary invoice. -6. Choose the **Yes** button to confirm that you want to post the inward registration. - -An inward registration is now created to represent the preliminary invoice posting until you overwrite it with the final invoice posting later. You can see the resulting positive entry in the **Inward Reg. Entry** window. - -If you want to cancel the inward registration before the final invoice posting, then you must reverse the inward registration manually. For more information, see [How to: Reverse Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration](how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Record Purchases](../../purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) - [How to: Reverse Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration](how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md) - [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) - [Sweden Local Functionality](sweden-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-print-balance-sheet-and-income-statement-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-print-balance-sheet-and-income-statement-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 821ad1af..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-print-balance-sheet-and-income-statement-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Print Balance Sheet and Income Statement Reports - description: You can print balance sheet reports and income statement reports to submit to banks and other authorities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Print Balance Sheet and Income Statement Reports -You can print balance sheet reports and income statement reports to submit to banks and other authorities. The **Balance Sheet** report displays assets, liabilities, and equity. The **Income Statement** report displays income and expenses. - -## To print a balance sheet report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Balance Sheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **G/L Account** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **Show all Accounts** check box to include accounts without balances. -4. Choose the **Print** action to print the report or choose the **Preview** action to view it on the screen. - -## To print an income statement report - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Income Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **G/L Account** FastTab, select the appropriate filters. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **Show all Accounts** check box to include accounts without balances. -4. Choose the **Print** action to print the report or choose the **Preview** action to view it on the screen. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with Reports](../../ui-work-report.md) - [Sweden Local Functionality](sweden-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md deleted file mode 100644 index bb9abcca..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Reverse Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration - description: Reverse an inward registration if you want to cancel it, for example, because you do not need the preliminary purchase invoice. For more information, see Inward Registration. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reverse Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration -Reverse an inward registration if you want to cancel it, for example, because you do not need the preliminary purchase invoice. For more information, see Inward Registration. - -## To reverse a preliminary invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an invoice that has been posted using inward registration. -3. Choose the **Inward Registration** action. -4. Choose the **Edit** action to open the **Inward Registration** window. -5. Choose the **Reverse** action. -6. Choose **Yes** to confirm that you want to reverse the inward registration. - - The inward registration has been reversed and deleted. You can see the resulting negative entry in the **Inward Reg. Entry** window. - -For information about creating a new inward registration, see [How to: Post Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration](how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Record Purchases](../../purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) - [How to: Post Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration](how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md) - [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) - [Sweden Local Functionality](sweden-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md deleted file mode 100644 index a8f50877..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-automatic-account-posting-groups.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Automatic Account Posting Groups - Sweden - description: Learn how to use automatic account codes by creating an automatic account posting group. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Automatic Account Posting Groups - Sweden -To use automatic account codes, you must create an automatic account posting group. - -## To set up automatic account posting groups - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Auto. Acc. Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**No.**|Enter a unique alphanumeric number for the automatic account posting group.| - |**Description**|Enter a description for the automatic account posting group.| - -4. On the **Automatic Acc. Line** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |-----------|-----------------| - |**Allocation Percentage**|Enter the percentage of the source line amount that is to be allocated.| - |**G/L Account No.**|Enter the general ledger account number to which the allocation should be posted.| - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Total Balance** field totals the **Allocation Percentage** field for automatic account lines in a posting group. If the total allocation percent for a posting group does not balance to zero, an error message will be displayed when the item is posted. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Automatic Account Codes](automatic-account-codes.md) - [Setting Up Posting Groups](../../finance-posting-groups.md) - [Working with General Journals](../../ui-work-general-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-eu-third-party-purchase-transactions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-eu-third-party-purchase-transactions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6dec1a4c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/how-to-set-up-eu-third-party-purchase-transactions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up EU Third-Party Purchase Transactions - description: European Union (EU) third-party trade occurs when you receive a purchase invoice from a customer in one EU country/region and the products are sent to a different EU country/region without entering Sweden. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 01/10/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up EU Third-Party Purchase Transactions -European Union (EU) third-party trade occurs when you receive a purchase invoice from a customer in one EU country/region and the products are sent to a different EU country/region without entering Sweden. The transaction amount must be identified and reported separately to comply with Swedish VAT reporting and VAT Information Exchange System (VIES) requirements. [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] includes Swedish enhancements that allow purchase transactions to be set up as EU third-party trade. Posted EU third-party transactions can then be filtered in VAT statements and excluded from the amount in the **Sales to Customer** column in the **VAT- VIES Declaration Tax Auth** report. - -## To set up EU third-party purchase transactions - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an existing purchase invoice, or choose the **New** action to create a new one. -3. On the **Invoice Details** FastTab, select the **EU 3-Party Trade** check box. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](../../finance-how-report-vat.md) - [Sweden Local Functionality](sweden-local-functionality.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/sweden-local-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/sweden-local-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9a4ac091..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Sweden/sweden-local-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Sweden Local Functionality - description: The following topics describe the local functionality in the Swedish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Sweden Local Functionality -The following topics describe local functionality that is unique to the Swedish version of [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -## In This Section - [Automatic Account Codes](automatic-account-codes.md) - [How to: Import and Export Data in Standard Import Export Format](how-to-import-and-export-data-in-standard-import-export-format.md) - [How to: Print Balance Sheet and Income Statement Reports](how-to-print-balance-sheet-and-income-statement-reports.md) - [How to: Post Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration](how-to-post-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md) - [How to: Reverse Preliminary Invoices by Using Inward Registration](how-to-reverse-preliminary-invoices-by-using-inward-registration.md) - [How to: Set Up EU Third-Party Purchase Transactions](how-to-set-up-eu-third-party-purchase-transactions.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)]](../../ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/balance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/balance.md deleted file mode 100644 index 46b5dc1e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/balance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Balance - description: Specifies a temporary general ledger balance. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Balance -Specifies a temporary general ledger balance. When you choose the **Balance** action in the **G/L Accounts** window, the **G/L Acc. Provisional Balance** window opens. It shows the balance of the final posted ledger entries and the balance of the postings entered in the current general journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: View Temporary Balances in General Ledger Journals](how-to-view-temporary-balances-in-general-ledger-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/delivery-reminders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/delivery-reminders.md deleted file mode 100644 index f10c1d04..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/delivery-reminders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Delivery Reminders - Switzerland - description: Learn about using delivery reminders to track overdue vendor shipments, and to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Delivery Reminders - Switzerland -Delivery reminders are used to track overdue vendor shipments, and to remind vendors about overdue deliveries. To create delivery reminders, you must set up the following: - -- Delivery reminder terms - - Delivery reminder terms are identified by a code that must be assigned to vendors. To use more than one combination of settings, you must set up a code for each setting separately. You can set up any number of delivery reminder terms. - -- Delivery reminder levels - - For every delivery reminder term, you must set up delivery reminder levels. These levels determine how often delivery reminders can be created for a specific term. Level 1 is the first delivery reminder that you create for an overdue delivery. Level 2 is the second delivery reminder, and so on. When delivery reminders are created, the number of reminders that were created previously is considered, and the current number is used to apply terms. - -- Delivery reminder texts messages - - You must set up delivery reminder text messages for every delivery reminder level. There are two types of delivery reminder text messages: beginning and ending. The beginning text message is printed under the header section, before the list of entries that are marked for reminder. The ending text message is printed after this list. - -For more information, see [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md). - -After you have set up the delivery terms, you must assign the delivery reminder term codes to vendors. For more information, see [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md). - -You can create delivery reminders manually or automatically. You can use the **Create Delivery Reminder** batch job to create delivery reminders automatically. This batch job allows you to select the purchase orders for which delivery reminders must be created. For more information, see [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md). - -You can also track documents in relation to purchase order lines and sales order lines. - -[!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] provides the following reports: - -- **Issued Delivery Reminder** - To view the delivery reminders for vendors. -- **Delivery Reminder - Test** - To verify the delivery reminders before you issue them. - -For more information, see [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors](how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md) - [How to: Generate Delivery Reminders](how-to-generate-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Print Test Reports for Delivery Reminders](how-to-print-test-reports-for-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-adjust-exchange-rates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-adjust-exchange-rates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 023c9eae..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-adjust-exchange-rates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Adjust Exchange Rates - description: If you have taxable sales in a foreign currency, you must use the official rate for VAT currency conversion as set by the Federal Tax Administration. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Adjust Exchange Rates -If you have taxable sales in a foreign currency, you must use the official rate for VAT currency conversion as set by the Federal Tax Administration. - -If these rates do not match the currency rates used in the purchase or sales invoices, you will have to adjust the VAT rates with a batch job later. These adjustments can only be run using an authorized VAT rate. - -You can run this batch job as often as you like, however make sure that you always run it before creating a VAT statement. - -> [!NOTE] -> When using a report currency, make sure that the **VAT Exchange Rate Adjustment** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window is set to **No Adjustment**. - -For more information about VAT and foreign currencies, see the [ESTV](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=285999) website. - -## To adjust an exchange rate - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Currencies**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Exch. Rates** action. -3. In the **Currency Exchange Rates** window, enter the official VAT rate per period for each currency in the **VAT Exch. Rate Amount** and the **Relational VAT Exch. Rate Amt** fields. -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Adjust Exchange Rates**, and then choose the related link. -6. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|Enter a date to specify the beginning of the period for which entries will be adjusted.| - |**Ending Date**|Enter the last date for which entries will be adjusted. This date is typically the same as the posting date in the **Posting Date** field.| - |**Adjust VAT exch. rate**|Specify if you want to adjust the VAT exchange rate.| - -7. Choose the **Print** button to start the batch job. This batch job controls whether VAT entries have to be adjusted and prepares an adjusting entry for each of these entries for the Unrealized/Realized Exchange Rate Adjustment accounts. The existing VAT entries are also corrected. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Swiss Value Added Tax](swiss-value-added-tax.md) - [VAT Rates for Switzerland](vat-rates-for-switzerland.md) -[How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates](../../finance-how-update-currencies.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3a6a629d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-assign-delivery-reminder-codes-to-vendors.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors - Switzerland - description: Learn how to enable delivery reminders for overdue purchases, you must assign delivery reminder terms to vendors. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Assign Delivery Reminder Codes to Vendors - Switzerland -In order to enable delivery reminders for overdue purchases, you must assign delivery reminder terms to vendors. For more information, see [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md). - -## To assign delivery reminders codes to vendors - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the vendor for whom you want to set up delivery reminders, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Receiving** FastTab, in the **Delivery Reminder Terms** field, select a delivery reminder terms code for the vendor. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Vendors](../../purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) - [Delivery Reminders](delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminders](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminders.md) - [How to: Set Up Delivery Reminder Terms, Levels, and Text](how-to-set-up-delivery-reminder-terms-levels-and-text.md) - [How to: Create Delivery Reminders Manually](how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md) - [How to: Issue Delivery Reminders](how-to-issue-delivery-reminders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-inventory-items-for-sales-or-purchases.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-inventory-items-for-sales-or-purchases.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5a03834a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-inventory-items-for-sales-or-purchases.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Block Inventory Items for Sales or Purchases - description: In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], an item can be marked as blocked for sales, blocked for purchase, or blocked for all purposes. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Block Inventory Items for Sales or Purchases -In [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)], an item can be marked as blocked for sales, blocked for purchase, or blocked for all purposes. - -The following table illustrates what occurs when items are blocked. - -|Item marked as|Result| -|--------------------|------------| -|**Sale blocked**|You cannot use the item in a sales document or in a sales item journal.| -|**Purchase blocked**|You cannot use the item in a purchase document, in a purchase item journal, or in purchase planning processes.| -|**Blocked**|You cannot use the item for any item transaction. For more information about blocking an item for all purposes, see Item Card.| - -## To block inventory items for sales - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item that you want to block, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. To block the selected item for sales transactions, on the **Invoicing** FastTab, select the **Sale blocked** check box. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To block inventory items for purchase - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item that you want to block, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. To block an item for purchase transactions, on the **Replenishment** FastTab, select the **Purchase blocked** check box. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -You will receive an error message if you try to do the following: - -- Enter sales lines and purchase lines in sales documents and purchase documents for blocked items. For more information, see the Sales Line table and the Purchase Line table. -- Create new lines in an item journal for blocked items. For more information, see the Item Journal window. -- Post item transactions for blocked items. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Swiss Inventory Management](swiss-inventory-management.md) - [How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory](how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md) - [How to: Copy Existing Items to New Items](how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md) - [How to: Deactivate Item Cost Tracking](how-to-deactivate-item-cost-tracking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index f181ad31..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-block-shipment-for-negative-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Block Shipment for Negative Inventory - Switzerland - description: Learn how to block outbound shipment for an item when a transaction results in a negative inventory for that item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Block Shipment for Negative Inventory - Switzerland -You can block outbound shipment for an item when a transaction results in a negative inventory for that item. - -## To block shipment for negative inventory - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivable Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivable Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Block ship. when neg. invent.** check box. - - When this check box is selected, the inventory for all items is calculated when you post a sales shipment. If the transaction leads to a negative quantity in inventory for an item, an error message appears. - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](../../sales-setup-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-close-an-lsv-collection.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-close-an-lsv-collection.md deleted file mode 100644 index b7c96d88..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-close-an-lsv-collection.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Close an LSV Collection - description: You must close Lastschrift Verfahren (LSV+) collections to write LSV files that can be sent to the bank for payment collection. When you close a collection, the collection is complete, and the postings in the LSV journal are combined. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Close an LSV Collection -You must close Lastschrift Verfahren (LSV+) collections to write LSV files that can be sent to the bank for payment collection. When you close a collection, the collection is complete, and the postings in the LSV journal are combined. - -When the collection is complete, the current collection number is assigned in the LSV journal, based on the last collection. This LSV number is transferred to the customer entries for all outstanding invoices. The collection file can be reconstructed at any time using the LSV number. The **On Hold** field is also populated with **LSV** in the customer entries to avoid the duplication of open entries. For more information, see the **LSV Journal** table and the **Cust. Ledger Entry** table. You can also reopen a closed collection. - -## To close an LSV collection - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **LSV Journal List**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required journal line, and then choose the **Modify Posting Date** action. This will modify the value in the **Credit Date** field by using the value suggested during the LSV collection. -3. In the **New Date** field, enter the new date. -4. Choose the **Close Collection* action*. - - > [!NOTE] - > The fields on the **Options** FastTab for the **LSV Close Collection** batch job cannot be modified, and correspond to the selected journal line. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - - In the **LSV Journal List** window, the value in the **LSV Status** field is changed from **Edit** to **Released**. The journal lines can no longer be modified. - -## To reopen an LSV collection - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **LSV Journal List**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the required journal line for which you want to reopen the collection, on then choose the **Reopen Collection** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only reopen the collection if you have not yet submitted the LSV+ file to the bank. - -3. Choose the **Yes** button to confirm the reopening of the collection. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Swiss Electronic Payments Using LSV+](swiss-electronic-payments-using-lsv-.md) - [How to: Process an LSV Collection](how-to-process-an-lsv-collection.md) - [How to: Post LSV+ Payments](how-to-post-lsv-payments.md) - [How to: Export Payments Using LSV](how-to-export-payments-using-lsv.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1fb5f629..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-copy-existing-items-to-new-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Copy Existing Items to New Items - Switzerland - description: Learn how to group items with similar settings in an item catalog. When you add a new item, to save time, you can use **Copy Item** to copy an existing item to use as a template for a new item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Copy Existing Items to New Items - Switzerland -You can group items with similar settings in an item catalog. When you add a new item, to save time, you can use the **Copy Item** function to copy an existing item to use as a template for a new item. - -## To copy existing items to new items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item that you want to copy, and then choose the **Copy Item** action. -3. In the **Item Copy** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Source Item No.**|Sets the item number from which the data is to be copied.| - |**Target Item No.**|Sets the item number for the item to which the data is to be copied.| - |**Target No. Series**|Sets the item number series to which the data is to be copied.| - - > [!NOTE] - > You can specify an item number in the **Target Item No.** field or in the **Target No. Series** field. The copy item will be assigned to the next available number in that number series. - -4. Select the appropriate check boxes for the data that you want to copy. -5. To copy your selections to the new item, choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](../../inventory-setup-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-and-print-a-swiss-vat-statement.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-and-print-a-swiss-vat-statement.md deleted file mode 100644 index a1529ff8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-and-print-a-swiss-vat-statement.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create and Print a Swiss VAT Statement - description: Based on the information that you have specified in the **VAT Posting Setup** window, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] can automatically create a new VAT Statement Setup for realized VAT reporting. Before proceeding with the procedures in this topic, make sure that you have set up VAT posting setup with values specified for the sales and purchase cipher fields. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create and Print a Swiss VAT Statement -Based on the information that you have specified in the **VAT Posting Setup** window, [!INCLUDE[navnow](../../includes/navnow_md.md)] can automatically create a new VAT Statement Setup for realized VAT reporting. Before proceeding with the procedures in this topic, make sure that you have set up VAT posting setup with values specified for the sales and purchase cipher fields. - -## To set up a Swiss VAT statement template - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Update VAT Statement Template**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a template in the **VAT Statement Template Name** field. -3. Choose the **OK** button. Choose the **Yes** button to confirm that you want to create a new template. -4. Check the resulting VAT Statement and adjust as needed. - - he VAT Statement page contains the **VAT Statement Cipher** field, which indicates in which cipher of the report the result will be printed. This field is automatically populated by the batch job based on the information in the **VAT Posting Setup** window. The field can be edited if needed. - -## To print the Swiss VAT statement - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](../../media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Swiss VAT Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Starting Date**|Enter the date that you want the time interval for VAT statement lines that appear in the report to start.| - |**Ending Date**|Enter the date that you want the time interval for VAT statement lines that appear in the report to end.| - |**Closed with VAT Register No.**|Select the VAT Register that contains the posting source of the VAT adjusting entries. This option evaluates accounting periods that have already been settled. When you choose this option, you do not specify options in the following **Include VAT Entries** fields.| - |**Include VAT Entries**|Select one of the available options.| - |**Include VAT Entries**|Select one of the available options.| - |**Normal Rate %**|Enter the standard VAT rate that applies to the time period.| - |**Reduced Rate %**|Enter the reduced VAT tax for certain goods and services.| - |**Hotel Rate %**|Enter the VAT rate for accommodation that applies to the time period.| - |**Normal (Other Rate) %**|Enter an alternative VAT rate for standard transactions that applies to certain transactions during the time period.| - |**Reduced (Other Rate) %**|Enter an alternative VAT rate for other transactions that applies to certain transactions during the time period.| - |**Hotel (Other Rate) %**|Enter an alternative VAT rate for accommodation that applies to certain transactions during the time period.| - |**Show Amounts in Add. Reporting Currency**|Select to show amounts in an additional reporting currency.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Swiss Value Added Tax](swiss-value-added-tax.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md b/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3af2f371..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/LocalFunctionality/Switzerland/how-to-create-delivery-reminders-manually.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Delivery Reminders Manually - Switzerland - description: In ADD INCLUDE - -### To exclude a company from consolidation -If you do not want to include a business unit in the consolidation, you can exclude it. To do that, go to the business unit card, and clear the **Consolidate** check box. - -### To include a partially-owned company in consolidation -If you own only part of a company, you can include a percentage of each transaction that corresponds to the percentage of the company you own. For example, if you own 70% of the company, consolidation will include $70 of an invoice for $100. To specify the percentage of the company you own, go to the business unit card, and enter the percentage in the **Consolidation %** field. - -### To test the data before you consolidate -You can test your data before you transfer it to the consolidated company. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] looks for differences in the information in the business units and the consolidated company. For example, whether account numbers or dimension codes are different. You must correct errors before you can run the report. You can test the database or, if you are importing data from an XML file, you can test the file. - -1. Open the consolidated company. -2. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Business Units**, and then choose the related link. -3. Do one of the following: - - * To test a file, choose the **Test File** action, enter the name of the file to test, and then choose **Print**. - * To test the database, choose **Test Database**. - -## To run the consolidation -After you have tested the data, you can transfer it to the consolidated company. - -1. Sign in to the consolidated company. -2. On the **Accountant Role Center**, choose the **Run Consolidation** action. -3. Fill in the required fields. -4. In the **Where** field, choose **Company Name**, and then choose the consolidated company in the **is** field. - -## To export data from Dynamics NAV and import it in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -If data for a business unit is in another database, you must export the data to a file before you can include it in the consolidation. Each company must be exported separately. For this purpose, use the **Export Consolidation** batch job. - -After you run the batch job, all entries in general ledger accounts are processed. For every combination of selected dimensions and date, the contents of the entries' **Amount** fields are totaled and exported. The next combination of selected dimensions and date with the same account number is processed, then the combinations in the next account number are processed, and so on. - -The exported entries contain the following fields: **Account No.**, **Posting Date**, and **Amount**. If dimensions information was also exported, dimension codes and dimension values are also included. - -1. For each exported line, if the total of the **Amount** fields is a debit, the account number that is set up in the business unit's **Consol. Debit Acc.** field is exported to the line. If the total is a credit, the corresponding number in the **Consol. Credit Acc.** field is exported to the line. -2. The date used for each exported line is either the period's ending date or, if the transfer occurs each day, the exact date of the calculation. -3. The dimension value exported for the entry will be the consolidated company dimension value that is set up in the **Consolidation Code** field for that dimension value. If no consolidated company dimension value has been entered in the **Consolidated Code** field for that dimension value, the dimension value itself will be exported to the line. -4. The XML files also contain the currency exchange rates in the consolidation period. These rates are included in a separate section at the beginning of the file. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Exporting Your Business Data to Excel](about-export-data.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md deleted file mode 100644 index 17a57440..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: About the Data Exchange Framework -description: The format of files for exchange of data in bank files, electronic documents, currency exchange rates, and other with ERP systems vary depending on the provider of the data file or stream and on the country/region. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 08/18/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About the Data Exchange Framework in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -The format of files for exchange of data in bank files, electronic documents, currency exchange rates, and other with ERP systems vary depending on the provider of the data file or stream and on the country/region. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports various bank file formats and data service standards. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you use the data exchange framework. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). - - The following diagrams show the architecture of the data exchange framework. - - ![Data Exchange Framework - Import](media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_import.png) - - ![Data Exchange Framework - Export](media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_export.png) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data](across-exchange-data.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-data-exchange.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-data-exchange.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8794d951..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-data-exchange.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Electronic documents in Dynamics NAV - description: Introduction to sending and receiving electronic documents in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/19/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Exchanging Data Electronically -You can use the Data Exchange Framework to exchange business documents, bank files, currency exchange rates, and any other data files with your business partners. - -## Electronic Documents -As an alternative to emailing as file attachments, you can send and receive business documents electronically. By electronic document is meant a standard-compliant file representing a business document, such as an invoice from a vendor that you can receive and convert to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] . The exchange of electronic documents between two trading partners is performed by an external provider of document exchange services. The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports sending and receiving electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format, which is supported by the largest providers of document exchange services. A major provider of document exchange services is preconfigured and ready to be set up for your company. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you must create new date exchange definitions using the Data Exchange Framework. - -From PDF or image files representing incoming documents, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) create electronic documents that you can then convert to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], like for electronic PEPPOL documents. For example, when you receive an invoice in PDF format from your vendor, you can send it to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** window. After a few seconds, you receive the file back as an electronic invoice that can be converted to a purchase invoice for the vendor. If you send the file to the OCR service by email, then a new incoming document record is automatically created when you receive the electronic document back. - -To send, for example, a sales invoice as an electronic PEPPOL document, you select the **Electronic Document** option in the **Post and Send** dialog box. From here, you can also set up the customer’s default document sending profile. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, customers, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when you convert data in fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to elements in the outgoing document file. The data conversion and sending of the PEPPOL sales invoice are performed by dedicated codeunits and XMLports, represented by the **PEPPOL** electronic document format. - -To receive, for example, an invoice from a vendor as an electronic PEPPOL document, you process the document in the **Incoming Documents** window to convert it to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You can either set up the Job Queue feature to process such files regularly or you can start the process manually. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, vendors, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when you convert data in elements in the incoming document file to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The receiving and data conversion of PEPPOL invoices are performed by the Data Exchange Framework, represented by the **PEPPOL - Invoice** data exchange definition. - - To receive, for example, an invoice as an electronic OCR document, you process it as when you receive an electronic PEPPOL document. The receiving and conversion of electronic documents from OCR are performed by the Data Exchange Framework, represented by the **OCR – Invoice** data exchange definition. - -## Bank Files - The formats of files for exchange of bank data with ERP systems vary depending on the supplier of the file and on the country/region. The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports import and export of SEPA bank files (Single Euro Payments Area) and a bank data conversion service provided by external provider, AMC Consult. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you use the Data Exchange Framework. - -To export SEPA credit transfers, you choose **Export Payments to File** button in the **Payment Journal** window and then upload the file to process the payments in your bank. First you must set up various master data, such as bank account, vendors, and payment methods. The data conversion and export of SEPA bank data is performed by a dedicated codeunit and XMLport, represented by the **SEPA Credit Transfer** bank export/import setup. Alternatively, you can set up the bank data conversion service to perform the export, represented by the **Bank Data Conversion Service - Credit Transfer** data exchange definition. - -To export SEPA direct debit instructions, you choose the **Export Direct Debit File** button in the **Direct Debit Collections** window and then send to your bank to automatically collect the involved customer payments. First you must set up bank accounts, customers, direct-debit mandates, and payment methods. The data conversion and export of SEPA bank data is performed by dedicated a codeunit and XMLport, represented by the **SEPA Direct Debit** bank export/import setup. - -To import SEPA bank statements, you choose the Import Bank Statement button in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** and **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** windows and then you proceed to apply each bank statement entry to payments or bank ledger entries, manually or automatically. First you must set up bank accounts. The import and data conversion of SEPA bank data is performed by the Data Exchange Framework, represented by the **SEPA CAMT** data exchange definition. Alternatively, you can set up the bank data conversion service to perform the import, represented by the **Bank Data Conversion Service – Bank Statement** data exchange definition. - - In addition, the local versions of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] support various other file formats for import/export of bank data, payroll transactions, and other data. For more information, see the “Local Functionality” Help section in your country/region version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] . - -## Currency Exchange Rates -You can set up an external service to keep your for currency exchange rates up to date. The service that provides updated currency exchange rates is enabled by a data exchange definition. Accordingly, the **Exch. Rate Update Setup Card** window is a condensed view of the **Data Exchange Definition** window for the data exchange definition in question. - -For all exchanges of data in XML files, you can prepare the data exchange setup by loading the related XML schema file in the **XML Schema Viewer** window. Here you select the data elements that you want to exchange with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and then you either initialize a data exchange definition or generate an XMLport. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|To|See| -|--------|---------| -|Learn how the Data Exchange Framework works.|[About the Data Exchange Framework](across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md)| -|Prepare to exchange data in a file by reusing the file’s XML schema. Set up data exchange definitions. Set up master data for electronic document sending. Set up various bank import/export fields.|[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md)| -|Based on data exchange definitions, send PEPPOL invoices, receive PEPPOL invoices, import bank statements, and export bank payment files.|[Exchanging Data](across-exchange-data.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[About the Data Exchange Framework](across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md) -[How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data](across-exchange-data.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-display-lists-different-views.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-display-lists-different-views.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6e6b2d11..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-display-lists-different-views.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Adjust the Amount of Detail You See in Lists -description: You can display lists in detailed views that provide more information, or as tiles that are easy to visually scan. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: personalization -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Displaying Lists in Different Ways -In the right corner of any list in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] you will find icons that let you switch view on the list. A list can be viewed as a detailed list, which is the standard view. But you can also switch to view as tiles, which will show less detail on the specific record and stack the entries as tiles. This view is very useful to gain an overview of several entries and is in particular useful on smaller devices, because it makes each entry easier to tap. - -## Items list -On the Items list, having pictures helps you get a quick overview of what you sell and switching to the tiles gives you an item catalogue to browse through. If a picture is defined for the specific item, you have a third option besides the detailed list and the tiles; the large tiles view. This view displays large pictures for each entry. - -You can import a picture for a specific item by going to the **Item** card and to the right select **Picture** and then choose **Import**. Likewise you can export a picture to a file or delete the picture for the item. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-exchange-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-exchange-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index d2438473..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-exchange-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Exchange Data - description: You can exchange data between [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and external files or streams in connection with common business tasks, such as sending and receiving electronic documents and importing and exporting bank files. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Exchanging Data -You can exchange data between [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and external files or streams in connection with common business tasks, such as sending and receiving electronic documents and importing and exporting bank files. - -Before you can send and receive electronic documents or import and export bank files, you must set up the data exchange framework to process the involved data files or streams. In addition, you must set up related areas. These include master data for customers that you send electronic invoices to and the bank data conversion service in case you distribute bank file conversions to an external service provider. For more information, see [Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md). - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Convert sales document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to a standardized format and send them as electronic documents that your customers can receive into their system.|[How to: Send Electronic Documents](sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md)| -|Send PDF or image files to a provider of OCR services, and receive them back as electronic documents that can be converted to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)].|[How to: Use OCR to Turn PDF and Image Files into Electronic Documents](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md)| -|Receive electronic documents, either from the OCR service or the document exchange service, in a standardized format that you convert to the relevant document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)].|[How to: Receive and Convert Electronic Documents](purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents.md)| -|Import a bank statement file into the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window as the first step in reconciling payments or into the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window as the first step in reconciling bank accounts.|[Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md)| -|Export payments from the **Payment Journal** window to a bank file that you upload to your electronic bank account for processing.|[How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md)| -|Instruct your bank to transfer payment amounts from your customers’ bank accounts to your company’s account according to your setup of SEPA direct debit.|[How to: Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File](finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md)| -|Use a service provider of currency exchange rates to update the **Currencies** window.|[How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates](finance-how-update-currencies.md)| -|View which file elements are mapped to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] when importing SEPA CAMT statement files.|[Field Mapping When Importing SEPA CAMT Files](across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files.md)| -|View which fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] are mapped to file elements when exporting payment files by using the Bank Date Conversion Service feature.|[Field Mapping When Exporting Payment Files Using Bank Data Conversion Service](across-field-mapping-when-exporting-payment-files-using-bank-data-conversion-service.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-faq.yml b/dynamics-nav-app/across-faq.yml deleted file mode 100644 index de6e2c10..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-faq.yml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -### YamlMime:FAQ -metadata: - title: FAQ About Using Dynamics NAV - description: Answers common questions about how to sign up for Dynamics NAV, and what to do to get started. - author: edupont04 - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: faq - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/27/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ROBOTS: NOINDEX,NOFOLLOW -title: Frequently Asked Questions -summary: | - This article was copied from Dynamics 365 Business Central and only applies if Dynamics NAV is deployed to Azure. - - -sections: - - name: Ignored - questions: - - question: | - What email address can I use with Dynamics NAV? - answer: | - Dynamics NAV requires that you use a work, or school, email address to sign up. Dynamics NAV does not support email addresses provided by consumer email services or telecommunication providers. This includes outlook.com, hotmail.com, gmail.com, and others. - - If you try to sign up with a personal email address, you will get a message indicating to use a work or school email address. For more information, see [Troubleshooting Self-Service Sign-Up](ui-troubleshoot-self-signup.md). - - - question: | - Do I have to buy Microsoft 365? - answer: | - No. But if you want to experience Dynamics NAV as fully integrated with Microsoft 365, you can sign up for a 1-month free trial of Microsoft 365 [here](https://products.office.com/try). - - - question: | - What is the integration with Microsoft 365 about? - answer: | - Dynamics NAV is fully integrated with Microsoft 365 so that you can navigate freely between Microsoft 365 apps and Dynamics NAV using the app launcher. In Dynamics NAV, you can open data in Excel, print reports using Word, and you can work with your Dynamics NAV data in Outlook, for example. For more information, see [Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] as your Business Inbox in Outlook](across-outlook.md). - - - question: | - Can I cancel my subscription? - answer: | - Yes, but depending on how you signed up to Dynamics NAV, your data can be deleted or preserved. For more information, see [Canceling Dynamics NAV](madeira-cancel.md). - - - question: | - Where do I go if I have questions? - answer: | - If you have questions about Dynamics NAV that you can't find an answer for in this documentation, you can ask the Dynamics NAV community. For more information, see [Dynamics NAV, Business edition community](https://community.dynamics.com/business). Also, our Support team post tips and tricks. For more information, see [Dynamics NAV Support Blog](https://blogs.msdn.microsoft.com/dyn365finsupport). - - - question: | - Is it possible to extend my 30-day “New Company” trial period? - answer: | - Yes. If you want to extend your trial, you should contact Microsoft at 1-888-477-7989 (US) or 1-800-741-9206 (Canada). NOTE: It may take up to 2 business days to complete the trial extension process. - - - question: | - Our administrator has moved me to another plan to give me another role, but I still see the same Home page in Dynamics NAV? - answer: | - This is a bit complicated, but it looks like your administrator didn't change your Role Center and assign user groups that match the new license. Essentially, your access to Dynamics NAV is determined by the type of plan (license) that you have - this sets permissions and your default Home page. You can change your Role Center manually in My Settings, but if you are moved to another plan, such as moving you from the Business plan to the Team Members plan, you might see the old Home because your permissions were not changed. - - - question: | - Why can't I find that capability in my Dynamics NAV? - answer: | - Did you read about a new capability in the roadmap or on our blog recently? In that case, your Dynamics NAV might not have been upgraded to the latest version yet. If the capability is published as an extension in AppSource, then there is a delay between the extension being announced and its availability in AppSource. - -additionalContent: | - - ## See Also - [Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) - [Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) - [Using Dynamics NAV as Your Business Inbox in Outlook](across-outlook.md) - [Using Dynamics NAV without Outlook](madeira-no-outlook.md) - [Change the Role Center](change-role.md) - [Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-exporting-payment-files-using-bank-data-conversion-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-exporting-payment-files-using-bank-data-conversion-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index d35ff52c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-exporting-payment-files-using-bank-data-conversion-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Field mapping for exporting bank payment files - description: When you export payment files using the Bank Data Conversion Service feature, the data that you export is exposed to the provider of the bank data conversion service. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Field Mapping When Exporting Payment Files Using Bank Data Conversion Service -When you export payment files using the Bank Data Conversion Service feature, the data that you export is exposed to the provider of the bank data conversion service. The service provider is responsible for the privacy of this data. For more information about how the Bank Data Conversion Service feature works, see [About the Data Exchange Framework](across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md). - -> [!CAUTION] -> When you export payment files by using the Bank Data Conversion Service feature, some of your business data will be exposed to the provider of the service. The service provider, AMC Consult A/S, is responsible for the privacy of this data. For more information, see [AMC Privacy Policy](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=510158). - -The following table lists the fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from which data can be exported to the service provider. - -|Mapped Field|Field in Table|Table|Description| -|------------------|--------------------|-----------|---------------------------------------| -|Creditor No.|Creditor No.|Bank Account|The identifier assigned to your company by your bank to collect payments| -|Sender Bank Account No.|Bank Account No./IBAN|Bank Account|Your company's bank account number (IBAN or other) that is specified on the bank account card| -|Sender Bank Clearing Standard|Bank Clearing Standard|Bank Account|The national/regional bank names register used for the sender bank account| -|Sender Bank Clearing Code|Bank Clearing Code|Bank Account|The identifier of the sender's bank in relation to the bank names register used| -|Sender Bank BIC|SWIFT Code|Bank Account|The SWIFT identifier of the sender bank account| -|Sender Bank Account Currency|Currency Code|Bank Account|The sender bank account Currency Code| -|Document No.|Document No.|General Journal Line|The document number of the payment line| -|Applies-to Ext. Doc. No.|Applies-to Ext. Doc. No.|General Journal Line|The external document number of the invoice or credit memo that the payment line is applied to| -|Recipient ID|Account No.|General Journal Line|The customer or vendor number that is specified on the payment line| -|Payment Type|Bank Data Conversion Pmt. Type|Payment Method|The type of bank transfer, such as domestic or international| -|Payment Reference|Payment Reference|General Journal Line|The payment reference of the payment line| -|Recipient Address|Address|Customer/Vendor|The recipient address that is specified on the customer or vendor card| -|Recipient City|City|Customer/Vendor|The recipient city that is specified on the customer or vendor card| -|Recipient Name|Name|Customer/Vendor|The recipient name that is specified on the customer or vendor card| -|Recipient Country/Region Code|Country/Region Code|Customer/Vendor|The recipient country/region code that is specified on the customer or vendor card| -|Recipient Post Code|Post Code|Customer/Vendor|The recipient post code that is specified on the customer or vendor card| -|Recipient Bank Acc. No.|Bank Account No./IBAN|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The recipient bank account number (IBAN or other) that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card| -|Recipient Bank Clearing Code|Bank Clearing Standard|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The national/regional bank names register used for the recipient bank account| -|Recipient Bank Clearing Std.|Bank Clearing Code|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The identifier of the recipient bank account in relation to the bank names register that is used| -|Recipient Email Address|E-Mail|Customer/Vendor|The email address of the recipient| -|Message To Recipient 1|Message to Recipient|General Journal Line|The message to recipient that is specified on the payment line| -|Amount|Amount|General Journal Line|The amount on the payment line| -|Currency Code|Currency Code|General Journal Line|The currency code on the payment line| -|Transfer Date|Posting Date|General Journal Line|The posting date of the payment line| -|Invoice Amount|Original Amount|Customer/Vendor Ledger Entry|The amount on the entry that the payment is applied to| -|Invoice Date|Document Date|Customer/Vendor Ledger Entry|The invoice date on the entry that the payment is applied to| -|Recipient Bank Address|Address|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The recipient bank account address that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card| -|The recipient bank account address that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card|City|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The recipient bank account city that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card| -|Recipient Bank Name|Name|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The recipient bank account name that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card| -|Recipient Bank Country/Region|Country/Region Code|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The recipient bank account country/region that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card| -|Recipient Bank Post Code|Post Code|Customer Bank Account/Vendor Bank Account|The recipient bank account post code that is specified on the customer or vendor bank account card| -|Sender Bank Address|Address|Bank Account|The sender bank account address that is specified on the bank account card| -|Sender Bank City|City|Bank Account|The sender bank account city that is specified on the bank account card| -|Sender Bank Name|Name|Bank Account|The sender bank account name that is specified on the bank account card| -|Sender Bank Country/Region|Country/Region Code|Bank Account|The sender bank account country/region that is specified on the bank account card| -|Sender Bank Post Code|Post Code|Bank Account|The sender bank account post code that is specified on the bank account card| -|General Journal Template|Journal Template Name|General Journal Line|The general journal template that is used for the payment line| -|General Journal Batch Name|Journal Batch Name|General Journal Line|The general journal batch name that is used for the payment line| -|Sender Bank Name - Data Conv.|Bank Name – Data Conv.|Bank Account|The sender bank account name that is requested by the bank data conversion service and specified on the bank account card| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md) -[Make Payments with Bank Data Conversion Service or SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index 69eb4c60..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Field Mapping When Importing SEPA CAMT Files - description: In European markets, you can import bank statement files in the regional SEPA standards (Single Euro Payments Area). - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Field Mapping When Importing SEPA CAMT Files -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports the regional SEPA standards (Single Euro Payments Area) for importing SEPA bank statements (CAMT format). For more information, see [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md). - - The SEPA CAMT standard itself has local variations. Therefore, you may have to modify the generic data exchange definition (represented by the **SEPA CAMT** code in the **Posting Exchange Definitions** window) to adapt it to a local variation of the standard. The following tables show the element-to-field mapping for tables 81, 273, and 274 in the SEPA CAMT implementation in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - For information about creating or adjusting a data exchange definition, see [How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). - -## CAMT data mapping to fields in the General Journal table (81) - -|Element Path|Message Element|Data Type|Description|Negative-Sign Identifier|Field No.|Field Name| -|------------------|---------------------|---------------|-----------------|-------------------------------|---------------|----------------| -|Stmt/Ntry/Amt|Amount|Decimal|The amount of money in the cash entry||13|Amount| -|Stmt/Ntry/CdtDbtInd|CreditDebitIndicator|Text|Indicates whether the entry is a credit or a debit entry|DBIT|13|Amount| -|Stmt/Ntry/BookgDt/Dt|Date|Date|The date when an entry is posted to an account on the account servicer's books||5|Posting Date| -|Stmt/Ntry/BookgDt/DtTm|DateTime|DateTime|The date and time when an entry is posted to an account on the account servicer's books||5|Posting Date| -|Stmt/Ntry/NtryDtls/TxDtls/RltdPties/Dbtr/Nm|Name|Text|The name of the party that owes an amount of money to the (ultimate) creditor||1221|Payer Information| -|Stmt/Ntry/NtryDtls/TxDtls/RmtInf/Ustrd|Unstructured|Text|Information supplied to enable the matching/reconciliation of an entry with the items that the payment is intended to settle, such as commercial invoices in an accounts-receivable system, in an unstructured form||8|Description| -|Stmt/Ntry/AddtlNtryInf|AdditionalEntryInformation|Text|Additional information about the entry||1222|Transaction Information| - -## CAMT data mapping to fields in the Bank Acc. Reconciliation table (273) - -|Element Path|Message Element|Data Type|Description|Negative-Sign Identifier|Field No.|Field Name| -|------------------|---------------------|---------------|-----------------|-------------------------------|---------------|----------------| -|Stmt/CreDtTm|CreationDateTime|Date|The date and time when the message was created||3|Statement Date| -|Stmt/Bal/Amt|Amount|Decimal|The amount resulting from the netted amounts for all debit and credit entries||4|Statement Ending Balance| - -## CAMT data mapping to fields in the Bank Acc. Reconciliation Line table (274) - -|Element Path|Message Element|Data Type|Description|Negative-Sign Identifier|Field No.|Field Name| -|------------------|---------------------|---------------|-----------------|-------------------------------|---------------|----------------| -|Stmt/Ntry/Amt|Amount|Decimal|The amount of money in the cash entry||7|Statement Amount| -|Stmt/Ntry/CdtDbtInd|CreditDebitIndicator|Text|Indicates whether the entry is a credit or a debit entry|DBIT|7|Statement Amount| -|Stmt/Ntry/BookgDt/Dt|Date|Date|The date when an entry is posted to an account on the account servicer's books||5|Transaction Date| -|Stmt/Ntry/BookgDt/DtTm|DateTime|DateTime|The date and time when an entry is posted to an account on the account servicer's books||5|Transaction Date| -|Stmt/Ntry/ValDt/Dt|Date|Date|The date when assets become available to the account owner in case of a credit entry, or cease to be available to the account owner in case of a debit entry||12|Value Date| -|Stmt/Ntry/ValDt/DtTm|DateTime|DateTime|The date and time when assets become available to the account owner in case of a credit entry, or cease to be available to the account owner in case of a debit entry||12|Value Date| -|Stmt/Ntry/NtryDtls/TxDtls/RltdPties/Dbtr/Nm|Name|Text|The name of the party that owes an amount of money to the (ultimate) creditor||15|Payer Information| -|Stmt/Ntry/NtryDtls/TxDtls/RmtInf/Ustrd|Unstructured|Text|Information supplied to enable the matching/reconciliation of an entry with the items that the payment is intended to settle, such as commercial invoices in an accounts-receivable system, in an unstructured form||6|Description| -|Stmt/Ntry/AddtlNtryInf|AdditionalEntryInformation|Text|Additional information about the entry||16|Transaction Information| - - Elements in the **Ntry** node that are imported into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] but not mapped to any fields are stored in the **Posting Exch. Column Def** table. Users can view these elements from the **Payment Reconciliation Journal**, **Payment Application**, and **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** windows by choosing the **Bank Statement Line Details** action. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md) -[How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-get-started.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-get-started.md deleted file mode 100644 index c04b5e1f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-get-started.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Welcome to Dynamics NAV" -author: edupont04 -ms.date: 11/30/2017 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.author: edupont ---- - -# Get Started with [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is a business management solution for small and mid-sized organizations that automates and streamlines business processes and helps you manage your business. The demonstration company contains sample data, but you can create your own sales documents, for example, or set up a bank account. - -## Get to know [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], some things will be familiar to you, and other things might be unfamiliar. - -For some quick, nice-to-know tricks, see: - -* [Find things](ui-search.md) -* [Searching, Filtering, and Sorting Lists](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md) -* [Entering Data](ui-enter-data.md) - -For more information, see [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md). - -When you're ready to do some heavier lifting, and want to look at some of the business processes that [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports, see [Overview of Business Functionality](madeira-business-functionality.md). - -## The Home pages -Home pages use a role-centric design to give you fast access to the business process and intelligence tools that you need to do your job. For example, an accountant can monitor payments and approvals, and view finance performance charts. Check out the various Home pages by choosing the **Settings** icon ![Settings](media/ui-experience/settings_icon_small.png "Settings icon for role center") in the top right corner, choosing **My Settings**, and then the Role Center to explore. Sign in again to apply the change. For more information, see [Changing the Role Center](change-role.md). - -Each Home page provides a **Setup and Extensions** button. Here you have access to a list of assisted setup that can help you get started by setting selected areas up quickly. If an area is not covered by an assisted setup, choose the **Manual Setup** action to access setup windows where you can fill in setup fields for all areas manually. For more information, see also [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as my Business Inbox in Outlook](across-outlook.md) -[Getting [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] on Your Mobile Device](install-mobile-app.md) -[Changing the Role Center](ui-change-role.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-connect-disconnect-income-document-records.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-connect-disconnect-income-document-records.md deleted file mode 100644 index 232acc17..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-connect-disconnect-income-document-records.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Incoming Documents From Documents -description: You can create records of incoming documents, such as e-invoices, and manage OCR tasks, eCommerce, and document exchange. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Incoming Document Records Directly from Documents and Entries -You can store external business documents in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] by attaching the document files to the related incoming document records. If the document, such as a purchase invoice, did not start its existence as an incoming document record, you can still create and connect an incoming document record to it later. You can also attach incoming document files to posted purchase and sales documents and to vendor, customer, and general ledger entries by using the **Incoming Document Files** FactBox in, for example, the **Posted Purchase Invoices** and **Vendor Ledger Entries** windows. - -From the **Chart of Accounts** and **General Ledger Entries** windows, you can use a search function to find general ledger entries for posted purchase and sales documents that do not have incoming document records and then centrally link to existing records or create new ones with attached document files. For more information, see [How to: Find Posted Documents without Incoming Document Records](across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records.md). - -The following procedures show how to attach a file to an existing purchase invoice that was not created from an incoming document record and how to attach a file to a vendor ledger entry. Attaching a file to posted purchase or sales documents works in a similar way. - -## To create and connect an incoming document record from a purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line for a purchase invoice that you want to attach a file to, and then choose the **Create Incoming Document from File** action. -3. Alternatively, select the line for a purchase invoice that you want to attach a file to, and then choose the **Attach File** action. -4. In the **Insert File** window, select the file that represents the incoming document in question, and then choose the **Open** button. - -## To create and connect an incoming document record from a vendor ledger entry -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Ledger Entries**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a line for a vendor ledger entry that you want to attach a file to, and then choose the **Create Incoming Document from File** action. -3. Alternatively, select a line for a vendor ledger entry that you want to attach a file to, and then choose the **Attach File** action. -4. In the **Insert File** window, select the file that represents the incoming document in question, and then choose the **Open** button. - -## To remove a connection from an incoming document record to a posted document -You can remove file attachments from non-posted documents at any time by deleting the related incoming document record. If the document is posted, then you must first remove the connection from the incoming document record. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line for an incoming document record connected to a posted document that you want to remove, and then choose the **Remove Reference to Record** action. - -The connection to the posted document is removed. You can now proceed to connect another incoming document record to the posted document as described in this topic. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-create-income-document-records.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-create-income-document-records.md deleted file mode 100644 index 19451b03..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-create-income-document-records.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Records of Incoming Documents -description: You can create records of incoming documents, such as e-invoices, and manage OCR tasks, eCommerce, and document exchange. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Incoming Document Records -In the **Incoming Documents** window, you can use different functions to review expense receipts, manage OCR tasks, and convert incoming document files, manually or automatically, to the relevant documents or journal lines. The external files can be attached at any process stage, including to posted documents and to the resulting vendor, customer, and general ledger entries. - -To record an external document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must first create or complete an incoming document record. You can do this manually, or you can take a photo of the external document and then create the incoming document record with the image file attached. - -Before you can use the Incoming Documents feature, you must perform the required setup. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Incoming Documents](across-how-setup-income-documents.md). - -## To approve or reject an incoming document -If you do want to allow users to create invoices or general journal lines from incoming document records unless they are approved, you can set up approvers who must approve the records before they can be processed. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line with the document that you want to approve or reject, and then choose the **Approve** or **Reject** actions. - -If you approve the incoming document record, the **Released** check box on the incoming document line is selected. The user in charge of creating, for example, purchase invoices can proceed to process the record. - -## To create an incoming document record by taking a photo -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure only applies to the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Tablet and Phone clients. - -1. On the app bar, choose the **Create Incoming Document from Camera** tile, and then go to step 4. -2. Alternatively, on the app bar, choose the options button, choose **Incoming Documents**, and then choose **All**. -3. In the **Incoming Documents** window, choose the ellipsis button, and then choose **Create from Camera**. The camera on the tablet or phone is activated. -4. Take a photo of a document, such as a purchase receipt, that you want to process as an incoming document, and then choose the **OK** button. - - A new incoming document record is created, with the image attached. - -## To attach an image to an incoming document record by taking a photo -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure only applies to the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Tablet and Phone clients. - -1. On the app bar, choose the options button, choose **Incoming Documents**, and then choose **All**. -2. Open the card for an existing incoming document record. -3. In the **Incoming Document** window, choose the ellipsis button, and then choose **Attach Image from Camera**. The camera on the tablet or phone is activated. -4. Take a photo of a document, such as a purchase receipt, that you want to process as an incoming document, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The image is attached to the incoming document record. - -## To create an incoming document record manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Create from File** action. -3. In the **Insert File** window, select a file, and then choose **Open**. The file is automatically attached. -4. Alternatively, choose the **New** action. -5. To attach a file, choose the **Attach File** action. -6. In the **Insert File** window, select the file that represents the incoming document in question, and then choose the **Open** button. -7. In the **Incoming Document** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records.md deleted file mode 100644 index 35b7bbb3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Search for Documents without Attachments -description: Learn how to find and manage posted documents without incoming records in Microsoft Dynamics NAV. Step-by-step guide included. -author: SorenGP -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont ---- - -# How to: Find Posted Documents without Incoming Document Records -From the **Chart of Accounts** and **General Ledger Entries** windows, you can use a search function to find general ledger entries for posted purchase and sales documents that do not have incoming document records and then centrally link to existing records or create new ones with attached document files. - -## To find posted documents without incoming document records -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a line for a G/L account for whose general ledger entries you want to see posted purchase and sales documents without incoming document records, and then choose the **Posted Documents without Incoming Document** action. -3. Alternatively, choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -4. In the **General Ledger Entries** window, choose the **Posted Documents without Incoming Documents** action. - -The **Posted Documents without Incoming Document** window opens showing posted purchase and sales documents without incoming document records represented by general ledger entries on the G/L account that you opened the window for. The window can show a maximum of 1000 lines. By default, the **Date Filter** field therefore contains a filter that limits the lines to entries with posting dates from the beginning of the accounting period to the work date. - -## To connect found documents to existing incoming document records -1. In the **Posted Documents without Incoming Document** window, select the line for a posted document that you want to connect to an existing incoming document record, and then choose the **Select Incoming Document** action. -2. In the **Incoming Documents** window, select the incoming document record that you want to connect to posted document found, and then choose the **OK** button. -3. In the **Posted Documents without Incoming Document** window, the selected incoming document record is now connected to the posted document, as you can see in the **Incoming Document Files** FactBox. - -If a relevant incoming document record does not exist in the **Incoming Documents** window, then you can create it. For more information, see [How to: Create Incoming Document Records](across-how-create-income-document-records.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-manage-many-income-document-records.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-manage-many-income-document-records.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7a78857d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-manage-many-income-document-records.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Define Which Incoming Docs to See -description: Adjust the default view of incoming documents, such as e-invoices, to improve your overview of processed and unprocessed records. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2016 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Many Incoming Document Records -As you create or process incoming document records, the number of lines in the **Incoming Documents** window may grow to an extent where you lose overview. Therefore, you can set incoming document records to Processed to remove them from the default view. When you choose the **Show All** action, you can view both processed and unprocessed records. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot edit information, attach files, or perform other processes on incoming document records that are set to Processed. You must first set it to Unprocessed. - -The **Processed** check box is automatically selected on incoming document records that have been processed, but you can also select or deselect the check box manually. Depending on your business process, an incoming document record may be processed when a related document has been created for it or a file has been attached. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you open the **Incoming Documents** window with the **My Incoming Documents** action on the Role Center, only unprocessed incoming document records are shown by default. This is referred to in this topic as "the default view". - -## To remove incoming document records from the default view -1. In the **Incoming Documents** window, select one or more lines for incoming document records that you want to remove from the default view. -2. Choose the **Set to Processed** action. - - The incoming document records are removed from the default view, and the **Processed** check box is selected on the lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also perform this action for the individual record in the **Incoming Document Card** window. - -## To view all incoming document records -1. In the **Incoming Documents** window, choose the **Show All** action. - -All incoming document records are displayed, including those where the **Processed** check box is not selected. - -## To add incoming document records to the default view -1. In the **Incoming Documents** window, choose the **Show All** action. -2. Select one or more lines for incoming document records that you want to appear in the default view. -3. Choose the **Set to Unprocessed** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also perform this action for the individual record in the **Incoming Document Card** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-publish-web-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-publish-web-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index f88a6477..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-publish-web-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Expose objects as web services -description: Publish [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] objects as web services, they are immediately available on the network. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 08/10/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Publish a Web Service -Web services are a lightweight way to make application functionality available to a variety of external systems and users. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes an number of objects that are exposed as web services by default due to integration with other Microsoft services, but you can also add other web services. - -You can set up a web service in the Windows client or in the Web client. You must then publish the web service so that it is available to service requests over the network. Users can discover web services by pointing a browser at the server location and requesting a list of available services. When you publish a web service, it is immediately available over the network for authenticated users. All authorized users can access metadata for web services, but only users who have sufficient permissions can access actual data. - -## Creating and Publishing a Web Service - The following steps explain how to create and publish a web service. - -#### To create and publish a web service - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Web Services**, and then choose the related link. - -2. In the **Web Services** page, choose **New**. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - > [!NOTE] - > **Codeunit** and **Page** are valid types for SOAP web services. **Page** and **Query** are valid types for OData web services. - Also, if the database contains multiple companies, you can choose an object ID that is specific to one of the companies. - Finally, the service name is visible to consumers of your web service and is the basis for identifying and distinguishing web services, so you should make the name meaningful. - -3. Select the check box in the **Published** column. - - When you publish the web service, in the **OData URL** and **SOAP URL** fields, you can see the URLs that are generated for the web service. You can test the web service immediately by choosing the links in the **OData URL** and **SOAP URL** fields. Optionally, you can copy the value of the field and save it for later use. - -After you publish a web service, it is available to external parties. You can verify the availability of that web service by using a browser, or you can choose the link in the **OData URL** and **SOAP URL** fields in the **Web Services** window. The following procedure illustrates how you can verify the availability of the web service for later use. - -#### To verify the availability of a web service - -1. In your browser, enter the relevant URL. The following table illustrates the types of URLs that you can enter. For SOAP web services, use the following format for your URI. - -> [!div class="mx-tdBreakAll"] -> |Type|Syntax|Example| -> |----------------|------|-------| -> |SOAP |https://*Server*:*SOAPWebServicePort*/*ServerInstance*/WS/*CompanyName*/salesDocuments/ |https://mycompany.financials.dynamics.com:7047/MS/WS/MyCompany/Page/salesDocuments?tenant=mycompany.financials.dynamics.com | -> |OData |https://*Server*:*ODataWebServicePort*/*ServerInstance*/OData/Company('*CompanyName*')|`https://MyCompany.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/OData/Company('MyCompany')/salesDocuments?tenant=MyCompany.financials.dynamics.com`
The company name is case-sensitive.| - -2. Review the information that is displayed in the browser. Verify that you can see the name of the web service that you have created. - - When you access a web service, and you want to write data back to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must specify the company name. You can specify the company as part of the URI as shown in the examples, or you can specify the company as part of the query parameters. For example, the following URIs point to the same OData web service and are both valid URIs. - -``` -https://localhost:7048/server/OData/Company('CRONUS International Ltd.')/Customer -``` - -``` -https://localhost:7048/server/OData/Customer?company='CRONUS International Ltd.' -``` - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setup and Administration in Dynamics NAV](admin-setup-and-administration.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-setup-income-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-setup-income-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 36376a6e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-setup-income-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Incoming Documents -description: Use the Incoming Documents feature to create electronic documents, manage OCR tasks, import invoices, and convert image files. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Incoming Documents -If you create general journal lines from incoming document records, you must specify in the **Incoming Documents Setup** window which journal template and batch to use. - -If you do not want users to create invoices or general journal lines from incoming document records unless the documents are first approved, you must set up approvers in the **Incoming Document Approvers** window. - -To turn PDF and image files into electronic documents that you can convert to, for example, purchase invoices inside [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must first set up the OCR feature and enable the service. - -When the Incoming Documents feature is set up, you can use different functions to review expense receipts, manage OCR tasks, and convert incoming document files, manually or automatically, to the relevant documents or journal lines. The external files can be attached at any process stage, including to posted documents and to the resulting vendor, customer, and general ledger entries. For more information, see [Processing Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md). - -## To set up the Incoming Documents feature -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Document Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set up approvers of incoming document records -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Document Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Incoming Documents Setup** window, choose the **Approvers** action. - - The **Incoming Document Approvers** window shows all users that are set up in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. -3. Select one or more users that can approve an incoming document before a related document or journal line can be created. - -When approvers have been set up in the **Incoming Document Approvers** window, only those users can approve an incoming document if the **Require Approval To Create** check box in the **Incoming Documents Setup** window is selected. - -> [!NOTE] -> This approval setup is not related to approval workflows. For more information, see [How to: Use Approval Workflows](across-how-use-approval-workflows.md). - -## To set up an OCR service -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **OCR Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To encrypt your login information -It is recommended that you protect the logon information that you enter in the **OCR Service Setup** window. You can encrypt data on the server by generating new or importing existing encryption keys that you enable on the server instance that connects to the database. - -1. In the **OCR Service Setup** window, choose the **Encryption Management** action. -2. In the **Data Encryption Management** window, enable encryption of your data. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-archive-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-archive-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 21e588a9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-archive-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Archive Sales and Purchase Documents | Microsoft Docs - description: You can archive sales and purchase orders, quotes, return orders, and blanket orders, and you can use the archived document to restore the document that it was archived from. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 11/21/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Archive Documents -You can archive sales and purchase orders, quotes, return orders, and blanket orders, and you can use the archived document to restore the document that it was archived from. - -## To set up automatic document archiving -You can set up automatic archiving of sales and purchase orders, quotes, blanket orders, and return orders, before you delete documents. - -The following procedure describes how to set up automatic archiving of sales documents. The steps are similar for purchase documents. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, fill in the fields as follows. - -|Field|Description| -|-----|-----------| -|**Archiving Sales Quotes**|**Never** to never archive sales quotes when they are deleted. **Question** to prompt the user to choose whether to archive sales quotes when they are deleted. **Always** to archive sales quotes automatically when they are deleted.| -|**Archiving Blanket Sales Orders**|Select to archive blanket sales orders automatically each time they are deleted.| -|**Arch. Orders and Ret. Orders**|Select to automatically archive sales orders each time they are deleted.| - -## To archive a sales order -The following procedure describes how to archive a sales order. The steps are similar for all orders, blanket orders, return orders, and quotes. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a sales order that you want to archive. -3. Choose the **Archive Document** action. - -The sales order is archived. You can view it in the **Archived Sales orders** window. From here, you can also use it to restore the sales order that it was archived from. - -## To restore a sales order from the archive -The following procedure describes how to restore a sales order. The steps are similar for all orders, blanket orders, return orders, and quotes. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Archived Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the archived sales order that you want to restore, and then choose the **Restore** action. - -The sales order is restored to the earlier state. - -NOTE: An archived version of a sales quote / sales order cannot be restored after deleting an original document. - -## To delete archived sales orders -The following procedure describes how to delete archived sales orders when the original sales order has been deleted. The steps are similar for other archived sales and purchase documents. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Archived Sales Order Versions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Delete Archived Sales Order Versions** window, select the appropriate filters. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Track Document Lines](across-how-to-track-document-lines.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0f29cbe1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,118 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Base Calendars - description: You can assign a base calendar to your company and its business partners, such as customers, vendors, or locations. Delivery and receipt dates on future sales order, purchase order, transfer order, and production order lines are calculated according to the calendar’s specified working days. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Base Calendars -You can assign a base calendar to your company and its business partners, such as customers, vendors, or locations. Delivery and receipt dates on future sales order, purchase order, transfer order, and production order lines are calculated according to the calendar’s specified working days. The main task in setting up a new base calendar is to specify and define the non-working days that you want to apply. - -## To set up a base calendar -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Base Calendar**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the **Code** field. -4. Choose the **Maintain Base Calendar Changes** action. -5. In the **Base Calendar Changes** window, use the **Recurring System** field to mark a particular date or day as a recurring nonworking day. You can select either the **Annual Recurring** or **Weekly Recurring** option. - - If you select **Annual Recurring**, you must also enter the relevant date in the **Date** field. - - If you select **Weekly Recurring**, you must also select the relevant day of the week in the **Day** field. If you leave the field empty, you must fill in the **Date** field. The **Day** field is filled in automatically. - -When you make an entry, the **Nonworking** field is selected. You can choose to clear the check mark to make it a working day. - When you return to the base calendar card, you will observe that the nonworking day entries that you made have been updated. These entries now appear in red and the **Nonworking** field is selected. - -> [!NOTE] -> When setting up a new base calendar, you can select and copy lines from an existing calendar. You do this in the relevant **Base Calendar Changes** window. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Any base calendar defined for the vendor or the location affects how the dates are calculated and rounded to working days. -Specifies a date formula for the time that it takes to replenish the item. It is used to calculate the **Planned Receipt Date** field, if calculating forward, and **Order Date** field, if calculating backwards. See the "Lead Time Calculation" section. - -## Lead Time Calculation -Any base calendar defined for the vendor or the location affects how the dates are calculated and rounded to working days. Accordingly, the two date fields on purchase order lines are calculated as follows under different conditions. - -|Calculation Direction|Vendor Calendar Defined|Vendor Calendar Not Defined| -|---------------------|-----------------------|---------------------------| -|Forward|planned receipt date = order date + vendor lead time (per the vendor calendar and rounded to the next working day in first the vendor calendar and then the location calendar)|planned receipt date = order date + vendor lead time (per the location calendar)| -|Backward|order date = planned receipt date - vendor lead time (per the vendor calendar and rounded to the previous working day in first the vendor calendar and then the location calendar)|order date = planned receipt date - vendor lead time (per the location calendar)| - -> [!NOTE] -> In addition to the lead time calculation that affects the planned receipt date and order date, as shown in the above table, warehouse handling time and safety lead time may be added to the formulas to make up the value in the **Expected Receipt Date** field, as follows: Planned Receipt Date + Safety Lead Time + Inbound Warehouse Handling Time = Expected Receipt Date. - -> [!Important] -> If your location uses a significantly different calendar than your vendors do, then it is important that you set up specific calendars for those vendors, to calculate optimal vendor lead times. For information about how to set up vendor calendars, see the "To assign a base calendar" section. - -The contents of the **Lead Time Calculation** field is copied from either the item card or the SKU card, if the lead time is defined for the item, or in the **Item Vendor Catalog** window, if the lead time is defined for the vendor. - -## To customize a calendar -The main task in customizing a base calendar for your company, or one of its business partners, is to enter any changes to working and nonworking day status. - -For example, while a base calendar would typically list all Saturdays as non-working days, the customized calendar for a particular location may list all Saturdays during the months of November and December, and leading up to the holiday season, as working days. - -The following procedure uses the case of the location as an example. Note that at this point, you have already assigned a base calendar to the location. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the location that you want to update, and then select the **Customized Calendar** field. Note that a calendar must be selected in the **Base Calendar Code** field. -3. In the **Customized Calendar Entries** window opens, choose the **Maintain Customized Calendar Changes** action. -4. In the **Customized Calendar Changes**, add lines for customized calendar entries. - - When you enter a line, the **Nonworking** check box is selected. You can clear the check box if you want to change the status to a working day. - - You can use the **Recurring System** field to set a particular date or day as a recurring nonworking day. You can select either the **Annual Recurring** or **Weekly Recurring** option. - - If you select **Annual Recurring**, you must also enter the relevant date in the **Date** field. If you select **Weekly Recurring**, you must also select the relevant day of the week in the **Day** field. If you leave the field empty, you must fill in the **Date** field. The **Day** field is then filled in automatically. This could be useful if you want to mark an individual date as a nonworking or working day. - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -In the **Customized Calendar Entries** window, you will observe that the date entries are updated with the changes that you made. - -On the Location card, you will observe that the **Customized Calendar** field contains **Yes**, indicating that a customized calendar has been set up. - -> [!Important] -> If you do not fill in the **Location Code** field on an order line, your company’s calendar is used. - - -If you do not fill in the **Shipping Agent Code** field on the order line, your company’s calendar is used. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you make changes to a base calendar for which customized calendar changes exist, all existing customized calendars are updated automatically. - -## To assign a base calendar -The following procedure schedules delivery dates on sales order lines for a customer as an example. - -Base calendars are assigned to your own company, customers, vendors, locations, and shipping agents as follows: - -- On the **Company Information** and **Customer** cards, the base calendar is assigned on the **Shipping** FastTab. -- On the **Vendor** card, the base calendar is assigned on the **Receiving** FastTab. -- On the **Location** card, the base calendar is assigned on the **Warehouse** FastTab. -- In the **Shipping Agents** window, the base calendar is assigned in the **Shipping Agent Services** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the **Customer** card for whom you will assign a base calendar. -3. On the **Shipping** FastTab, in the **Base Calendar Code** field, select the base calendar that you want to assign. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> - If you do not assign a base calendar to a company, all dates are calculated as working days. -> - If you enter a blank location on an order line, all dates are calculated as working days. -> - Any base calendar defined for the vendor or the location affects how the dates are calculated and rounded to working days. -> -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can make customized calendar entries, you must first assign a base calendar to the company. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9d9f473c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Create Workflows from Workflow Templates -description: To save time when creating new workflows, you can create workflows from workflow templates. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates -To save time when creating new workflows, you can create workflows from workflow templates. - - Workflow templates are non-editable workflows that exist in the generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The codes for workflow templates that are added by Microsoft are prefixed with “MS-“. - - Another way to quickly create a workflow is to import an existing workflow that you have on a file outside of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [How to: Export and Import Workflows](across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md). - -In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## To create a workflow from workflow template -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Create Workflow from Template** action. The **Workflow Templates** window opens. -3. Select a workflow template, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The **Workflow** window opens for a new workflow containing all the information of the selected template. The value in the **Code** field is extended with, for example, “-01” to indicate that this is the first workflow that is created from the workflow template. -4. Proceed to create the workflow by editing the workflow steps or add new steps. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [How to: Export and Import Workflows](across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md) - [How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances](across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md) - [How to: Delete Workflows](across-how-to-delete-workflows.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) - [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index 303cba5b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-create-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Workflows - description: You can create workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Workflows -You can create workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - -In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event moderated by event conditions and a workflow response with response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. - -When you create workflows, you can copy the steps from existing workflows or from workflow templates. Workflow templates represent non-editable workflows that exist in the generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The code for workflow templates that are added by Microsoft are prefixed with “MS-“, such as in “MS-PIW”. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates](across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md). - -If your business scenario requires workflow events or responses that are not supported, a Microsoft partner must implement them by customizing the application code. - -> [!NOTE] -> All notifications about workflow steps are sent through a job queue. Make sure that the job queue in your installation is set up to handle workflow notifications, and that the **Start Automatically From NAS** check box is selected. For more information, see [Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md). - -## To create a workflow -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. The **Workflow** window opens. -3. In the **Code** field, enter a maximum of 20 characters to identify the workflow. -4. To create the workflow from a workflow template, in the **Workflows** window, choose the **Create Workflow from Template** action. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates](across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md). -5. In the **Description** field, describe the workflow. -6. In the **Category** field, specify which category the workflow belongs to. -7. In the **When Event** field, specify the event that must occur to start the workflow step. - - When you choose the field, the **Workflow Events** window opens where you select from all the workflow events that exist. -8. In the **Condition** field, specify one or more conditions that must be met before the event in the **When Event** field can occur. - - When you choose the field, the **Event Conditions** window opens where you choose from a list of filter fields that are relevant as conditions for the event in question. You can add new filter fields that you want to use as event conditions. You set event condition filters just as you set filters on report request pages. - - If the workflow event is the change of a specific field on a record, then the **Event Conditions** window opens with options to select the field and the type of change. - - 1. To specify a field change for the event, in the **Event Conditions** window, in the **Field** field, select the field that changes. - 2. In the **Operator** field, select either **Decreased**, **Increased**, or **Changed**. -9. In the **Then Response** field, specify the response that will follow when the workflow event occurs. - - When you choose the field, the **Workflow Responses** window opens where you select from all workflow responses that exist and set response options for the selected response. -10. On the **Options for the Selected Response** FastTab, specify options for the workflow response, by selecting values in the different fields that appear, as follows: - - 1. To specify options for a workflow response that involves sending a notification, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Recipient User ID**|Specify the user who the notification must be sent to. Note: This option is only available for workflow responses with a placeholder for a specific user. For workflow responses without placeholders for users, the notification recipient is typically defined by the approval user setup.| - |**Link Target Page**|Specify another page in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] that the link in the notification opens instead of the default page.| - |**Custom Link**|Specify the URL of a link that is added to the notification in addition to the link to page in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)].| - 2. To specify options for a workflow response that involves creating an approval request, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Due Date Formula**|Specify in how many days the approval request must be resolved from the date when it was sent.| - |**Delegate After**|Specify if and when an approval request will automatically be delegated to the relevant substitute. You can select to automatically delegate one, two, or five days after the date when the approval was requested.| - |**Approver Type**|Specify who the approver is, according to the setup of approval users and workflow users.

The following options exist:

- **Salesperson/Purchaser** specifies that the user who is set up in the **Salespers./Purch. Code** field in the **Approval User Setup** window determines the approver. Approval request entries are then created according to the value in the **Approver Limit Type** field.
For more information, see [How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md).| - |**Show Confirmation Message**|Specify if a confirmation message is shown to users after they request an approval.| - |**Approver Limit Type**|Specify how approvers’ approval limits affect when approval request entries are created for them. A qualified approver is an approver whose approval limit is above the value on the request being made.

The following options exist:

1. **Approver Chain** specifies that approval request entries are created for all the requester’s approvers up to and including the first qualified approver.
2. **Direct Approver** specifies that an approval request entry is only created for the requester’s immediate approver, regardless of the approver’s approval limit.
3. **First Qualified Approver** specifies that an approval request entry is only created for the requester’s first qualified approver.
| - 3. To specify options for a workflow response that involves creating journal lines, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**General Journal Template Name**|Specify the name of the general journal template that the specified journal lines are created in.| - |**General Journal Batch Name**|Specify the name of the general journal batch that the specified journal lines are created in.| - -11. Choose the **Increase Indent** and **Decrease Indent** buttons to indent the event name in the **When** field to define the step’s position in the workflow. - 1. Indicate that the step is the next in the workflow sequence by indenting the event name under the event name of the previous step. - 2. Indicate that the step is one of more alternative steps that may start depending on its condition by placing the event name at the same indentation as the other alternative steps. Order such optional steps according to priority by placing the most important step first. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only change the indent of a step that does not have a subsequent step. - -12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 to add more workflow steps, either before or after the step that you have just created. -13. Select the **Enabled** check box to specify that the workflow will start as soon as the event on the first step of type **Entry Point** occurs. For more information, see [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Do not enable a workflow until you are sure that the workflow is completed and that the involved workflow steps can start. - -> [!TIP] -> To see relations between tables that are used in workflows, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, and then enter **Workflow – Table Relations**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates](across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md) -[How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) -[Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md) -[How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances](across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md) -[How to: Delete Workflows](across-how-to-delete-workflows.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) -[Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) -[Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) -[Workflow](across-workflow.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-delete-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-delete-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index 381cd1b2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-delete-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Delete Workflows - description: If you are certain that a workflow is no longer being used, you can delete it. All workflow step instances that are defined in the workflow must have status **Completed**. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Delete Workflows -If you are certain that a workflow is no longer being used, you can delete it. All workflow step instances that are defined in the workflow must have status **Completed**. - -> [!CAUTION] -> When you delete a workflow, all information in the workflow will be lost. - - In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## To delete a workflow -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the workflow that you want to delete. -3. Choose the **Delete** action. -4. Alternatively, open the workflow that you want to delete. -5. In the **Workflow** window, choose the **Delete** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [How to: Enable Workflows](across-how-to-enable-workflows.md) - [How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances](across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) - [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-enable-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-enable-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index fadec3b0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-enable-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enable Workflows - description: When you have created a workflow and you are sure that it is ready to start, you must enable the workflow. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enable Workflows -When you have created a workflow and you are sure that it is ready to start, you must enable the workflow. - - In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## To enable a workflow -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the workflow that you want to enable. -3. In the **Workflow** window, select the **Enabled** check box. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances](across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md) - [How to: Delete Workflows](across-how-to-delete-workflows.md) - [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) - [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index 13b65864..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Export and Import Workflows - description: To transfer workflows to other [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] databases, for example to save time when creating new workflows, you can export and import workflows. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export and Import Workflows -To transfer workflows to other [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] databases, for example to save time when creating new workflows, you can export and import workflows. - - Another way to quickly create workflows is to create workflows from workflow templates. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates](across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md). - - In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## To export a workflow -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a workflow, and then choose the **Export to File** action. -3. In the **Export File** window, choose the **Save** button. -4. In the **Export** window, select a file location, and then choose the **Save** button. - -## To import a workflow -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Import from File** action. -3. In the **Import** window, choose the XML file that contains the workflow, and then choose the **Open** button. - -> [!CAUTION] -> If the workflow code already exists in the database, the workflow steps will be overwritten with the steps in the imported workflow. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates](across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md) - [How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances](across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md) - [How to: Delete Workflows](across-how-to-delete-workflows.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) - [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4303dbef..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Manage Notification Templates - description: Notifications are sent to workflow users to notify them about steps they must make or to inform them about the status of workflow steps. You set up who receives notification and when by setting up approval users, the users’ notification schedule, and the involved workflow responses to define the notification recipient. For more information, see [Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md). - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Notification Templates -Notifications are sent to workflow users to notify them about steps they must make or to inform them about the status of workflow steps. You set up who receives notification and when by setting up approval users, the users’ notification schedule, and the involved workflow responses to define the notification recipient. For more information, see [Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md). - - Notifications are based on templates that define the content and layout of the notification. You can export the content of a notification template, edit it, and then import into the same or a new notification template. This is described in the following procedures. - - The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] contains three notification templates, one for notifying about approval requests, one for notifying about new records, and one for notifying about overdue approval requests. The three predefined notification templates support **Email** and **Note** as notification method. To view the content of the three notification templates, see the “Content of the Notification Templates” section in this topic. - -## To create a new notification template -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Notification Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Notification Templates** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Identify the notification template.| - |**Description**|Describe the notification template.| - |**Notification Method**|Specify if the notification is sent as an email or as a note.| - |**Type**|Specify the business process that the notification will be used for.

Select one of the following types:

- **Approval** specifies that the template is used to notify users in approval workflows.
- **New Record** specifies that the template is to notify approvers when a new record, such as a customer card, needs their approval.
- **Overdue** specifies that the template is used to notify users about overdue approval requests.| - |**Default**|Specify if the notification template will be used by default.| - -## To modify a notification template -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Notification Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Notification Templates** window, select the notification template that you want to modify. -3. Choose the **Export Template Content** action. -4. In the **Export File** window, choose the **Save** button, and then name and save the HTML file in an appropriate location. -5. Right-choose the file, choose **Open with**, and then choose the relevant program. - - > [!NOTE] - > Content for notification templates of type Email are in HTML format. Content for notification templates of type Note are in TXT format. -6. Edit the content of the notification template by adding, changing, or removing parameter variables to define the content that you want, and then save it. For more information, see the “Content of the Notification Templates” section. - - Proceed to import the modified content back into the same or a new notification template. -7. To modify the notification template that you exported, in the **Notification Templates** window, select the template that you selected in step 2. - - Alternatively, to import the modified template content into a new notification template, follow the “To create a new notification template” procedure, and then select the new notification template. -8. Choose the **Import Template Content** action. -9. If you are modifying an existing notification template, choose the **Yes** button on the message about overwriting the existing template. -10. In the **Select a file to import** window, choose the HTML file that you modified in step 6, and then choose the **Open** button. - -The existing or new notification template in the **Notification Templates** window is now updated with the modified content. - -### Content of the Notification Templates -The three notification template types, **New Record**, **Approval**, and **Overdue**, have different content. - -Parameter values are automatically inserted in notifications according to the notification template type. - -#### New Record - ![NAV_notification_template_new_record_type](media/nav_notification_template_new_record.png "NAV_notification_template_new_record") - -#### Approval - ![NAV_notification_template_approval_type](media/nav_notification_template_approval_type.png "NAV_notification_template_approval_type") - -#### Overdue - ![NAV_notification_overdue_type](media/nav_notification_overdue_type.png "NAV_notification_overdue_type") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md) - [How to: Set up Email](madeira-how-setup-email.md) - [How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md) - [How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) - [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-restrict-and-allow-usage-of-a-record.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-restrict-and-allow-usage-of-a-record.md deleted file mode 100644 index 53468487..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-restrict-and-allow-usage-of-a-record.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Restrict and Allow Usage of a Record - description: If you want to restrict a record from being used in certain activities, for example, until the record has been approved, you can incorporate two workflow responses in a workflow that controls the usage of the record. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Restrict and Allow Usage of a Record -If you want to restrict a record from being used in certain activities, for example, until the record has been approved, you can incorporate two workflow responses in a workflow that controls the usage of the record. One workflow response will restrict usage of the record as defined by the workflow event and conditions. Another workflow response will allow usage of the record as defined by the workflow event and conditions. Two responses exist in the generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] for this purpose: **Restrict usage of a record.** and **Allow usage of a record.**. - -> [!NOTE] -> The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers support for restricting a record from being posted, from being exported as a payment, and from being printed as a check. To support other restrictions, a Microsoft partner must customize the application code. - -> [!NOTE] -> The workflow functionality to restrict and allow records from being used is not related to the functionality to block item, customer, and vendor records from being posted. - -The following procedure describes how to restrict purchase orders from being posted until they have been approved. The new workflow will be based on the existing Purchase Invoice Approval Workflow workflow template. - -## To create a workflow step that restricts posting of unapproved purchase orders -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Workflows** window, create a new workflow named Purchase Order Approval Workflow. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). -3. Choose the **Copy From Workflow Template** action. -4. Choose the **Source Workflow Code** field, and then, in the **Workflow Templates** window, choose the Purchase Invoice Approval Workflow workflow template. - - Notice that the first two workflow steps are about restricting and then allowing usage of purchase invoices. Proceed to change the event condition on the first step of the new workflow to specify that it applies to purchase orders. -5. On the **Workflow Steps** FastTab, choose the **Event Conditions** field, and then, for the **Document Type** filter, select **Order**. -6. Proceed to edit, delete, or add other workflow steps to fit a business process that begins by restricting unapproved purchase orders from being posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) -[Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index 821c59b4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up a Document Exchange Service - description: You use an external service provider to exchange electronic documents with your trading partners. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Document Exchange Service -You use an external service provider to exchange electronic documents with your trading partners. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). - -## To set up a document exchange service -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Doc. Exch. Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**User Agent**|Enter any text that can be used to identify your company in document exchange processes.| - |**Doc. Exch. Tenant ID**|Enter the tenant in the document exchange service that represents your company. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Enabled**|Specify if the service is enabled. **Note:** As soon as you enable the service, at least two job queue entries are created to process the traffic of electronic documents in and out of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. When you disable the service, the job queue entries are deleted.| - |**Signup URL**|Specify the web page where you sign up for the document exchange service.| - |**Service URL**|Specify the address of the document exchange service, which will be called when you send and receive electronic documents.| - |**Login URL**|Specify the logon page for the document exchange service, which is where you enter your company’s user name and password to log on to the service.| - |**Consumer Key**|Enter the 3-legged OAuth key for the consumer key. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Consumer Secret**|Enter the secret that protects the consumer key. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Token**|Enter the 3-legged OAuth key for the token. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - |**Token Secret**|Enter the secret that protects the token. This is provided by the document exchange service provider.| - -> [!NOTE] -> It is recommended that you protect the logon information that you enter in the **VAN Service Setup** window. You can encrypt data on the server by generating new or importing existing encryption keys that you enable on the server instance that connects to the database. This is described in the following procedure. - -## To encrypt your logon information -1. In the **VAN Service Setup** window, choose the **Encryption Management** action. -2. In the **Data Encryption Management** window, enable encryption of your data. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0a4dba20..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Approval Users - description: Before you can create workflows that involve approval steps, you must set up the workflow users who are involved in approval processes. In the Approval User Setup window, you also set amount limits for specific types of requests and define substitute approvers to whom approval requests are delegated when the original approver is absent. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Approval Users -Before you can create workflows that involve approval steps, you must set up the workflow users who are involved in approval processes. In the **Approval User Setup** window, you also set amount limits for specific types of requests and define substitute approvers to whom approval requests are delegated when the original approver is absent. - -> [!NOTE] -> Approval users, both approval requesters and approvers, must first be set up as workflow users in the **Workflow User Group** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md). - - When you have set up approval users, you can use the setup to create workflow responses for approval workflows. For more information, see step 9 in [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To define that an approval request is not approved until multiple approvers in an approval chain have approved it, set up approvers in a hierarchy. For approver type **Approver**, set approvers up in the **Approval User Setup** window. For approver type, **Workflow User Group**, set approvers up in the **Workflow User Groups** window and define the hierarchy by assigning incremental numbers to each approver in the **Sequence No.** field. For more information, see this topic and [How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md). -> -> To define that an approval request is not approved until multiple equal approvers have approved it, regardless of a hirarchy, set up a flat workflow user group. For approver type, **Workflow User Group**, set up approvers in the **Workflow User Groups** window and assign the same number to each approver in the **Sequence No.** field. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md). - -## To set up an approval user -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Approval User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new line in the **Approval User Setup** window, and then fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**User ID**|Select the user ID of the user who is involved in the approval process.| - |**Salespers./Purch. Code**|Specify the salesperson or purchaser code that applies to the user in the **Salespers./Purch. Code** field.

You typically fill the **Salespers./Purch. Code** field if the salesperson or purchaser who is responsible for the customer or vendor is also the person who must approve the sales or purchase request in question.| - |**Approver ID**|Select the user ID of the user who must approve requests made by the user in the **User ID** field.| - |**Sales Amount Approval Limit**|Specify the maximum sales amount in LCY that the user in the **User ID** field can approve.| - |**Unlimited Sales Approval**|Specify that the user in the **User ID** field can approve all sales requests regardless of their amount.

If you select this check box, then you cannot fill the **Sales Amount Approval Limit** field.| - |**Purchase Amount Approval Limit**|Specify the maximum purchase amount in LCY that the user in the **User ID** field can approve.| - |**Unlimited Purchase Approval**|Specify that the user in the **User ID** field can approve all purchase requests regardless of their amount.

If you select this check box, then you cannot fill the **Sales Amount Approval Limit** field.| - |**Request Amount Approval Limit**|Specify the maximum amount in LCY that the user in the **User ID** field can approve for purchase quotes.

To use this field, you must select the **Approver Chain** option in the **Approver Limit Type** field in the **Workflow Response** window.| - |**Unlimited Request Approval**|Specify that the user in the **User ID** field can approve all purchase quotes regardless of their amount.

If you select this check box, then you cannot fill the **Request Amount Approval Limit** field.| - |**Substitute**|Select the user ID of the user who must approve requests made by the user in the **User ID** field if the user in the **Approver ID** is not available. **Note:** The substitute can either be the user in the **Substitute** field, the direct approver, or the approval administrator, in that order of priority. For more information, see [How to: Use Approval Workflows](across-how-use-approval-workflows.md).| - |**Email**|Specify the email address of the user in the **User ID** field.| - |**Approval Administrator**|Specify the user who has rights to unblock approval workflows, for example, by delegating approval requests to new substitute approvers and deleting overdue approval requests.| - - > [!NOTE] - > The behavior of **Approver Limit Type** field only applies to application areas where limits can be defined, namely sales and purchase approvals. Any other type of approval where limits do not apply will always behave as described for the **Direct Approver** option. - -3. To test the approval user setup, choose the **Approval User Setup Test** action. -4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for every user who you want to set up as an approval user. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md) -[Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) -[Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) -[Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7e0e44d0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Define how data is exchanged electronically - description: You can use an external provider of OCR services to have PDF or image files turned into electronic documents. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions -You can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to exchange data in specific tables with data on external files, for example to send and receive electronic documents, import and export bank data or other data, such as payroll, currency exchange rates, and item catalogues. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). - -As preparation for creating a data exchange definition for a data file or stream, you can use the related XML schema to define which data elements to include on the **Column Definitions** FastTab. See step 6 in the “To describe the formatting of lines and columns in the file” section. For more information, see the [How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md). - -You normally set up data exchange definitions in the **Data Exchange Definition** window. However, when you set up a data exchange definition for the service of refreshing currency exchange rates, you start the process in the simplified **Exch. Rate Update Setup Card** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the file that is being converted is in XML format, the term *“column”* in this topic should be interpreted as *“XML element containing data”*. - -This topic includes the following procedures: - -* To create a data exchange definition -* To export a data exchange definition as an XML file for use by others -* To import an XML file for an existing data exchange definition - -## To create a data exchange definition -Creating a data exchange definition involves two tasks: - -1. In the **Data Exchange Definition** window, describe the formatting of lines and columns in the file. -2. In the **Data Exchange Mapping** window, map columns in the data file to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - This is described in the following procedures. - -#### To describe the formatting of lines and columns in the file -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Data Exchange Definitions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, describe the data exchange definition and the data file type by filling the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Definition | - |---------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Code** | Enter a code to identify the data exchange definition. | - | **Name** | Enter a name for the data exchange definition. | - | **File Type** | Specify what type of file that the data exchange definition is used for. You can select between three file types:

- **XML**: Layered strings of content and markup surrounded by tags indicating function.
- **Variable Text**: Records have variable length and are separated by a character, such as comma or semi\-colon. Also known as *delimited file*.
- **Fixed Text**: Records have the same length, using pad characters, and each record is on a separate line. Also known as *fixed-width file*. | - | **Type** | Specify what type of business activity the data exchange definition is used for, such as **Payment Export**. | - | **Data Handling Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that transfers data in and out of tables in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. | - | **Validation Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that is used to validate data against pre-defined business rules. | - | **Reading/Writing Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that processes imported data prior to mapping and exported data after mapping. | - | **Reading/Writing XMLport** | Specify the XMLport through which an imported data file or service enters prior to mapping and through which exported data exits when it is written to a data file or service after mapping. | - | **Ext. Data Handling Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that transfers external data in and out of the data exchange framework. | - | **User Feedback Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that does various clean-up after mapping, such as marks the lines as exported and deletes temporary records. | - | **File Encoding** | Specify the encoding of the file. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Column Separator** | Specify how columns in the data file are separated, if the file is of type **Variable Text**. | - | **Header Lines** | Specify how many header lines exist in the file.

This makes sure that the header data is not imported. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Header Tag** | If a header line exists in several positions in the file, enter the text of the first column on the header line.

This makes sure that the header data is not imported. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Footer Tag** | If a footer line exists in several positions in the file, enter the text of the first column on the footer line.

This makes sure that the footer data is not imported. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - - -4. On the **Line Definitions** FastTab, describe the formatting of lines in the data file by filling the fields as described in the following table. - - > [!NOTE] - > For import of bank statements, you only create one line for the single format of the bank statement file that you want to import. - > - > For export of payments, you can create a line for each payment type that you want to export. In that case, the **Column Definitions** FastTab shows different columns for each payment type. - - | Field | Description | - |-------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Code** | Enter a code to identify the line in the file. | - | **Name** | Enter a name that describes the line in the file. | - | **Column Count** | Specify how many columns the line in data file has. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Data Line Tag** | Specify the position in the related XML schema of the element that represents the main entry of the data file. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Namespace** | Specify the namespace that is expected in the file, to enable namespace validation. You can leave this field blank if you do not want to enable namespace validation. | - - -5. Repeat step 4 to create a line for every type of file data that you want to export. - - Proceed to describe the formatting of columns in the data file by filling the fields on the **Column Definitions** FastTab as described in the table below. You can use the structure file, such as an .XSD file, for the data file to prefill the FastTab with the relevant elements. For more information, see [How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md). - -6. On the **Column Definitions** FastTab, choose **Get File Structure**. -7. In the **Get File Structure** window, select the related structure file, and then choose the **OK** button. The lines on the **Column Definitions** FastTab are filled according to the structure of the data file. -8. On the **Column Definitions** FastTab, edit or fill the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Column No.** | Specify the number that reflects the column’s position on the line in the file.

For XML files, specify the number that reflects the type of element in the file that contains the data. | - | **Name** | Specify the name of the column.

For XML files, specify the markup that marks the data to be exchanged. | - | **Data Type** | Specify if the data to be exchanged is of type **Text**, **Date**, or **Decimal**. | - | **Data Format** | Specify the format of the data, if any. For example, **MM-dd-yyyy** if the data type is **Date**. **Note:** For export, specify the data format according to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For import, specify the data format according to the .NET Framework. For more information, see [Standard Date and Time Format Strings](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=323466). | - | **Data Formatting Culture** | Specify the culture of the data format, if any. For example, **en-US** if the data type is **Decimal** to make sure that comma is used as the .000 separator, according to the US format. For more information, see [Standard Date and Time Format Strings](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=323466). **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Length** | Specify the length of the fixed-width line that holds the column if the data file is of type **Fixed Text**. | - | **Description** | Enter a description of the column, for information. | - | **Path** | Specify the position of the element in the related XML schema. | - | **Negative-Sign Identifier** | Enter the value that is used in the data file to identify negative amounts, in data files that cannot contain negative signs. This identifier is then used to reverse the identified amounts to negative signs during import. **Note:** This field is only relevant for import. | - | **Constant** | Specify any data that you want to export in this column, such as extra information about the payment type. **Note:** This field is only relevant for export. | - - -9. Repeat step 8 for every column or XML element in the data file that has data that you want to exchange with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - The next step in creating a data exchange definition is to decide which columns or XML elements in the data file map to which fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -> [!NOTE] -> The specific mapping depends on the business purpose of the data file to be exchanged and on local variations. Even the SEPA bank standard has local variations. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports import of SEPA CAMT bank statement files out\-of\-the\-box. This is represented by the **SEPA CAMT** data exchange definition record code in the **Data Exchange Definitions** window. For information about the specific field mapping of this SEPA CAMT support, see [Field Mapping When Importing SEPA CAMT Files](across-field-mapping-when-importing-sepa-camt-files.md). - -#### To map columns in the data file to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -1. On the **Line Definitions** FastTab, select the line for which you want to map columns to fields, and then choose **Field Mapping**. The **Data Exchange Mapping** window opens. -2. On the **General** FastTab, specify the mapping setup by filling the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |-------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Table ID** | Specify the table that holds the fields to or from which data is exchanged according to the mapping. | - | **Use as Intermediate Table** | Specify if the table that you select in the **Table ID** field is an intermediate table where the imported data is stored before it is mapped to the target table.

You typically use an intermediate table when the data exchange definition is used to import and convert electronic documents, such as vendor invoices into purchase invoices in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). | - | **Name** | Enter a name for the mapping setup. | - | **Pre-Mapping Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that prepares the mapping between fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and external data. | - | **Mapping Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that is used to map the specified columns or XML data elements to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. | - | **Post-Mapping Codeunit** | Specify the codeunit that completes the mapping between fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and external data. **Note:** When using the Bank Data Conversion Service feature, the codeunit converts exported data from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to a generic format that is ready for export. For import, the codeunit converts external data to a format that is ready for import into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. | - - -3. On the **Field Mapping** FastTab, specify which columns map to which fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] by filling the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Column No.**|Specify which column in the data file that you want to define a map for.

You can only select columns that are represented by lines on the **Column Definitions** FastTab in the **Data Exchange Definition** window.| - |**Field ID**|Specify which field the column in the **Column No.** field maps to.

You can only select from fields that exist in the table that you specified in the **Table** field on the **General** FastTab.| - |**Optional**|Specify that the map will be skipped if the field is empty. **Note:** If you do not select this check box, an export error will occur if the field is empty. **Note:** This field is only relevant for export.| - |**Target Table ID**|Only visible when the **Use as Intermediate Table** check box is selected.

Specify the table that the value in the **Column Caption** field is mapped to, when you are using an intermediate table for data import.| - |**Target Table Caption**|Only visible when the **Use as Intermediate Table** check box is selected.

Specify the name of the table in the **Target Table ID** field, which is the table that the value in the **Column Caption** field is mapped to, when you are using an intermediate table for data import.| - |**Target Field ID**|Only visible when the **Use as Intermediate Table** check box is selected.

Specify the field in the target table that the value in the **Column Caption** field is mapped to, when you are using an intermediate table for data import.| - |**Target Field Caption**|Only visible when the **Use as Intermediate Table** check box is selected.

Specify the name of the field in the target table that the value in the **Column Caption** field is mapped to, when you are using an intermediate table for data import.| - |**Optional**|Only visible when the **Use as Intermediate Table** check box is selected.

Specify if the map should be skipped if the field is empty. If you do not select this check box, then an export error will occur if the field is empty.| - - The data exchange definition is now ready to be enabled for users. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving](across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md), [How to: Set Up SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md), [How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md), and [Make Payments with Bank Data Conversion Service or SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md). - - When you have created the data exchange definition for a specific data file, you can export the data exchange definition as an XML file that can be used to quickly enable import of the data file in question. This is described in the following procedure. - -### To export a data exchange definition as an XML file for use by others -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Data Exchange Definitions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the data exchange definition that you want to export. -3. Choose the **Export Data Exchange Definition** action. -4. Save the XML file that represents the data exchange definition in an appropriate location. - - If a data exchange definition has already been created, you just have to import the XML file into the Data Exchange Framework. This is described in the following procedure. - -### To import an existing data exchange definition -1. Save the XML file that represents the data exchange definition in an appropriate location. -2. In the **Search** box, enter **Data Exchange Definitions**, and then choose the related link. -3. Choose the **New** action. The **Data Exchange Definitio** window opens. -4. Choose the **Import Data Exchange Definition** action. -5. Choose the file that you saved in step 1. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Data Exchange](across-set-up-data-exchange.md) -[How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving](across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md) -[How to: Set Up SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md) -[How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[Make Payments with Bank Data Conversion Service or SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md deleted file mode 100644 index 15f11f61..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,139 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving - description: As an alternative to emailing as file attachments, you can send and receive business documents electronically. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving -As an alternative to emailing as file attachments, you can send and receive business documents electronically. By electronic document is meant a standard\-compliant file representing a business document, such as an invoice from a vendor that can be received and converted to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The exchange of electronic documents between two trading partners is performed by an external provider of document exchange services. The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports sending and receiving electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format, which is supported by the largest providers of document exchange services. A major provider of document exchange services is preconfigured and ready to be set up for your company. - -From PDF or image files representing incoming documents, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) create electronic documents that you can then convert to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], like for electronic PEPPOL documents. For example, when you receive an invoice in PDF format from your vendor, you can send it to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** window. After a few seconds, you receive the file back as an electronic invoice that can be converted to a purchase invoice for the vendor. If you send the file to the OCR service by email, then a new incoming document record is automatically created when you receive the electronic document back. - -The **PEPPOL** electronic document format is preconfigured to enable you to send electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, customers, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when converting data in fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to elements in the outgoing document file. Last, you must select the format in the **Electronic Document Format** window for each customer who you will send electronic PEPPOL documents to. For more information, see [How to: Send Electronic Documents](sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md). - -The **PEPPOL – Invoice** and **PEPPOL – Credit Memo** data exchange definitions are preconfigured to enable you to receive electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, vendors, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when converting data in elements in the incoming document file to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Last, you must select the data exchange definition in the **Incoming Documents** window for each incoming electronic document that you want to convert to a purchase document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -The **OCR – Invoice** data exchange definition is preconfigured to enable you to receive electronic documents that are generated by the OCR service. To receive, for example, an invoice as an electronic OCR document, you set up master date and then process the document just as when receiving an electronic PEPPOL document. For more information, see [How to: Use OCR to Turn PDF and Image Files into Electronic Documents](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md). - -The preconfigured services for document exchange and OCR must be enabled before you send or receive. For more information, see [How to: Set Up a Document Exchange Service](across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md). - -The topic contains the following procedures: - -* To set up the company for electronic document sending and receiving -* To set up VAT posting for electronic document sending and receiving -* To set up countries/regions for electronic document sending and receiving -* To set up items for electronic document sending and receiving -* To set up units of measure for electronic document sending and receiving -* To set up customers for electronic document sending -* To select the **PEPPOL** electronic document format for electronic document sending -* To set up vendors for electronic document receiving -* To select the **PEPPOL – Invoice** data exchange definition for electronic document receiving -* To set up the G/L account to use on new purchase invoice lines for non\-identifiable items and non\-items - -### To set up the company for electronic document sending and receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**GLN**|Identify your company.

For example, when you send electronic invoices in the PEPPOL format, the value in this field is used to populate the **EndPointID** element under the **AccountingSupplierParty** node in the file. The number is based on the GS1 standard, which is compliant with ISO 6523.| - |**VAT Registration No.**|Specify your company’s VAT registration number.| - |**Responsibility Center**|If your company is set up with a responsibility center, make sure that the **Country/Region Code** field is filled.| - -### To set up VAT posting for electronic document sending and receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. For each VAT posting setup line that you will use for electronic documents, fill the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Tax Category**|Specify the VAT category.

For example, when you send electronic invoices in the PEPPOL format, the value in this field is used to populate the **TaxApplied** element under the **AccountingSupplierParty** node in the file. The number is based on the UNCL5305 standard.| - -### To set up countries/regions for electronic document sending and receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Country/Regions**, and then choose the related link. -2. For each country/region that you will exchange electronic documents with, fill the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**VAT Scheme**|Identify the national/regional body that issues the VAT registration number for the country\/region in connection with electronic document sending.

For example, when you send electronic invoices in the PEPPOL format, the value in this field is used to populate the **SchemeID** attribute for the **EndPointID** element under both the **AccountingSupplierParty** node and the **AccountingCustomerParty** in the file.

The **VAT Scheme** field is only used if the **GLN** field in the **Company Information** window is not filled. **Note:** The value in the **Code** field in the **Countries\/Regions** window must comply with ISO 3166\-1:Alpha2.| - -### To set up items for electronic document sending and receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. For each item that you buy or sell on electronic documents, fill the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**GTIN**|Identifies the item in connection with electronic document sending and receiving. For the PEPPOL format, the field is used as follows:

If the **StandardItemIdentification\/ID** element has the **SchemeID** attribute set to **GTIN**, then the element is mapped to the **GTIN** field on the item card.| - -### To set up units of measure for electronic document sending and receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Units of Measure**, and then choose the related link. -2. For each unit of measure that you will use for items on electronic documents, fill the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**International Standard Code**|Specify the unit of measure code expressed according to the UNECERec20 standard in connection with sending of electronic documents.

For example, when you send electronic invoices in the PEPPOL format, the value in this field is used to populate the **unitCode** attribute of the **InvoicedQuantity** element under the **InvoiceLine** node. **Note:** If the **Unit of Measure** field on the sales line is empty, the UNECERe20 standard value for “Piece” \(H87\) is inserted by default. For more information and a list of valid unit of measure codes, see [Recommendation No. 20 \- Units of Measure used in International Trade](http://www.unece.org/fileadmin/DAM/cefact/recommendations/rec20/rec20_rev3_Annex2e.pdf).| - -### To set up customers for electronic document sending -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. For each customer who you will send electronic documents to, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**GLN**|Identify the customer.

For example, when you send electronic invoices in the PEPPOL format, the value in this field is used to populate the **EndPointID** element under the **AccountingCustomerParty** node in the file. The number is based on the GS1 standard, which is compliant with ISO 6523.

If the **GLN** field is blank, the value in the **VAT Registration No.** field is used.| - |**VAT Registration No.**|Specify the customer's VAT registration number. **Tip:** Choose the DrillDown button to use the web service that verifies if the number exists in the country/region’s company register.| - |**Responsibility Center**|If the customer is set up with a responsibility center, make sure that the **Country/Region Code** field is filled.| - - You can set up each customer with a preferred method of sending business documents, so that you do not have to select a sending option every time that you send a document to the customer. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). - -### To select the PEPPOL electronic document format for electronic document sending -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Document Sending Profiles**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open an existing document sending profile, or create a new one. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). -3. In the **Document Sending Profile** window, choose the **Electronic Format**, select the line for PEPPOL, and then Choose the **OK** button. -4. In the **Electronic Document** field, select **Yes (Through Document Exchange Service)**. - - > [!NOTE] - > [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically detects if the document is an invoice or a credit memo and applies the PEPPOL format accordingly. - -5. To make this document sending profile apply to all customers, select the **Default** check box on the **General** FastTab. To make it apply to specific customers only, fill the **Document Sending Profile** field on the customer cards in question. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). - - You can now send the electronic document containing the converted data. For more information, see [How to: Send Electronic Documents](sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md). - -### To set up vendors for electronic document receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. For each vendor that you will receive electronic documents from, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**GLN**|Identify the vendor.

For example, when you receive electronic invoices in the PEPPOL format, the value in this field is used to populate the **EndPointID** element under the **AccountingSupplierParty** node in the file. The number is based on the GS1 standard, which is compliant with ISO 6523.

If the **GLN** field is blank, the value in the **VAT Registration No.** field is used.| - |**VAT Registration No.**|Specify the vendor’s VAT registration number. **Tip:** Choose the DrillDown button to use the web service that verifies if the number exists in the country’s company register.| - |**Responsibility Center**|If the vendor is set up with a responsibility center, make sure that the **Country/Region Code** field is filled.| - -### To select the PEPPOL - Invoice data exchange definition for electronic document receiving -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the line for the electronic document that you want to receive and convert, choose the **Data Exchange Type** field, and then select **PEPPOLINVOICE**. - - If the document to receive is a credit memo, select **PEPPOLCREDITMEMO**. - - You can now receive the electronic document by starting the data conversion process in the **Incoming Documents** window. For more information, see [How to: Receive and Convert Electronic Documents](purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents.md). - -### To set up the G/L account to use on new purchase invoice lines for non-identifiable items and non-items -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Purchases & Payables**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Data Exchange** FastTab, fill the field as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**G/L Account for Non-Item Lines**|Specifies the G/L account that is automatically inserted on purchase lines that are created from electronic documents when the incoming document line does not contain an identifiable item. Any incoming document line that does not have a GTIN or the vendor’s item number will be converted to a purchase line of type **G/L Account**, and the **No.** field on the purchase line will contain the account that you select in the **G/L Account for Non-Item Lines** field.

If you leave the **G/L Account for Non-Item Lines** field blank, and the incoming document has lines without identifiable items, then the purchase document will not be created. An error message will instruct you to fill the **G/L Account for Non-Item Lines** field before you can complete the task.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md deleted file mode 100644 index c5a9138a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Set Up Workflow Users -description: Before you can create workflows, you must set up the users who take part in workflows. This is necessary, for example, to specify who will receive a notification to act on a workflow step. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: reject, delegate, request -ms.date: 06/08/2020 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Workflow Users -Before you can create workflows, you must set up the users who take part in workflows. This is necessary, for example, to specify who will receive a notification to act on a workflow step. - -In the **Workflow User Group** window, you set up users under workflow user groups, and you specify the users’ number in a process sequence, such as an approver chain. - -Workflow users that function as approval users, both approval requesters and approvers, must also be set up in the **Approval User Setup** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To define that an approval request is not approved until multiple approvers in an approval chain have approved it, set up approvers in a hierarchy. For approver type **Approver**, set approvers up in the **Approval User Setup** window. For approver type, **Workflow User Group**, set approvers up in the **Workflow User Groups** window and define the hierarchy by assigning incremental numbers to each approver in the **Sequence No.** field. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) and the following section. -> -> To define that an approval request is not approved until multiple equal approvers have approved it, regardless of a hierarchy, set up a flat workflow user group. For approver type, **Workflow User Group**, set up approvers in the **Workflow User Groups** window and assign the same number to each approver in the **Sequence No.** field. For more information, see the following section. - -### To set up a workflow user - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflow User Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. The **Workflow User Group** window opens. -3. In the **Code** field, enter a maximum of 20 characters to identify the workflow. -4. In the **Description** field, describe the workflow. -5. On the **Workflow User Group Members** FastTab, fill the fields on the first line as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**User Name**|Specify the user who will take part in workflows.

The user must exist in the **User Setup** window. For more information, see [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md).| - |**Sequence No.**|Specify the order in which the workflow user engages in a workflow relative to other users. This field can be used, for example, to specify when the user approves relative to other approvers when you use the **Workflow User Group** option in the **Approver Type** field on the related workflow response. **TIP:** To define that an approval request is not approved until multiple equal approvers have approved it, irrespective of a hierarchy, set up a flat workflow user group by assigning the same sequence number to the relevant approvers.| -6. Repeat step 5 to add more workflow users to the user group. -7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to add more workflow user groups. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) -[Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) -[Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) -[Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0852043b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Specify When and How to Receive Notifications - description: When you set up users in approval workflows, you must specify in the Notification Setup and Notification Schedule windows how and when each user receives notifications about approval workflow steps. Individual users can also change their notification setup by choosing the Change Notification Settings button on any notification. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont ---- -# How to: Specify When and How to Receive Notifications -When you set up users in approval workflows, you must specify in the **Notification Setup** and **Notification Schedule** windows how and when each user receives notifications about approval workflow steps. Individual users can also change their notification setup by choosing the **Change Notification Settings** button on any notification. - - Before you can set up an approval user’s notification preferences, you must set the user up as an approval user. For more information, [How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md). - - You define the layout and content of notifications by setting up notification templates. For more information, see [How to: Manage Notification Templates](across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md). - - Many approval workflow steps are about notifying users that an event has occurred that they must act on. For example, on one workflow step, the event can be that User 1 requests approval of a new record. The related response is that a notification is sent to User 2, the approver. On the next workflow step, the event can be that User 2 approves the record. The related response is that a notification is sent to User 3 to start a process with the approved record. For workflow steps that are about approval, each notification is tied to an approval entry. For more information, see [Workflow](across-workflow.md). - -## Specify when and how users receive notifications - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Approval User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line for the user that you want to set up notification preferences for, and then choose the **Notification Setup** action. -3. In the **Notification Setup** window, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Notification Type**|Specify what type of event the notification is about.

Select one of the following options:

- **New Record** specifies that the notification is about a new record, such as a document, that the user must act on.
- **Approval** specifies that the notification is about one or more approval requests.
- **Overdue** specifies that the notification is to remind users that they are late in acting on an event.| - |**Notification Template Code**|Specify the code of the notification template that is used to create notifications for the user.| - |**Unaggregated Notifications**|Specify if the user receives one notification for each event or aggregated notifications.

If the **Unaggregated Notifications** check box is not selected, then the user receives notifications that aggregate information about events that occur within the same recurrence pattern in the notification schedule.| - - You have now specified how the user receives notifications. Proceed to specify when the user receives notifications. - -4. Choose the **Notification Schedule** action. -5. In the **Notification Schedule** window, fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Recurrence**|Specify the recurrence pattern in which the user receives notifications.| - |**Time**|Specify what time of the day the user receives notifications when the value in the **Recurrence** field is different from **Instantly**.| - |**Daily Frequency**|Specify on which type of days the user receives notifications when the value in the **Recurrence** field is **Daily**.

Select **Weekday** to receive notifications every work day of the week. Select **Daily** to receive notifications every day of the week, including weekends.| - |**Monday** through **Sunday**|Specify on which days the user receives notifications when the value in the **Recurrence** field is **Weekly**.| - |**Date of Month**|Specify if the user receives notifications on the first, last, or a specific date of the month.| - |**Monthly Notification Date**|Specify the date of the month on which the user receives notifications when the value in the **Date of Month** field is **Custom**.| - -## Change when and how you receive notifications -1. On one of the notifications that you have received, either as email or note, choose the **Change Notification Settings** button. -2. In the **Notification Setup** window, change your notification preferences as described in the previous procedure. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) - [How to: Manage Notification Templates](across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md) - [Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md) - [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) - [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-track-document-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-track-document-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index ba02e346..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-track-document-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Track Order Lines to Related Documents| Microsoft Docs - description: You can view documents that are related to sales order lines and purchase order lines, including from archived order lines. Related documents that you can track include quotes, shipments, receipts, and blanket orders. This helps you to identify documents used to process orders. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 12/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Track Document Lines -You can view documents that are related to sales order lines and purchase order lines, including from archived order lines. Related documents that you can track include quotes, shipments, receipts, and blanket orders. This helps you to identify documents used to process orders. - -## To track documents related to a sales order line -The following procedure describes how to track from a sales order line. The steps are similar for purchase order and blanket order lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a sales order that you want to track from. -3. Select a line, and then choose the **Document Line Tracking** action. -4. In the **Document Lines Tracking** window, select the document that you want to view, and then choose the **Show** action to see the related line. -5. To view the entire document for the selected document line, choose the **Show Document** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5f9756cb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Create XMLports based on XML schemas - description: Use XML schemas to set yup the document exchange framework. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions -To enable import/export of data in XML files through the data exchange framework in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can use XML schemas to define which data elements you want to exchange with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You perform this work in the **XML Schema Viewer** window by loading the XML schema file, selecting the relevant data elements, and then initializing either a data exchange definition or an XMLport. - - When you have defined which data elements to include based on the XML schema, you can use the **Generate XMLport** action to create the XMLport object. - - Alternatively, you can use the **Generate Data Exchange Definition** action to initialize a data exchange definition based on the selected data elements, which you then complete in the Data Exchange Framework. This creates a record in the **Posting Exchange Definition** window where you continue by defining which elements in the file map to which fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). - - This topic contains the following procedures: - -- To load an XML schema file - -- To select or clear nodes in an XML schema - -- To generate a data exchange definition that is based on an XML schema - -- To generate an XMLport for the file that is based on an XML schema - -- To import an XMLport into the Object Designer - -### To load an XML schema file - -1. Make sure that the relevant XML schema file is available. The file extension is .xsd. - -2. In the **Search** box, enter **XML Schemas**, and then choose the related link. - -3. On the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. - -4. Fill the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Code**|Specify a code to identify the XML schema.| - |**Description**|Specify a description of the XML schema.| - - The **Target Namespace** field specifies any namespace in the XML schema file that has been loaded for the line. - -5. On the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Load Schema**, and then select the XML schema file. - - When the file is loaded, the rest of the fields on the line are filled with information from the file, and the **Schema is Loaded** check box is selected. - - > [!NOTE] - > The tree of the loaded XML schema is collapsed by default. You expand each node by choosing the **+** button on the node. To expand all nodes, choose **Expand All** on the ribbon. - -### To select or clear nodes in an XML schema - -1. In the **Search** box, enter **XML Schema Viewer**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Fill the fields on the header as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**XML Schema Code**|Specify the XML schema file that you loaded in step 5 in the “To load an XML schema file” section.| - |**New XMLport No.**|Specify the number of the XMLport that is created from this XML schema when you choose the **Generate XMLport** action.| - - The lines are now filled with nodes representing all elements in the XML schema. Nodes for elements that are mandatory according to the XML schema are selected by default. - -3. On the first line, in the **Node Name** column, expand the **Document** node, and then gradually expand underlying nodes that you want to review. - - Alternatively, right-click on a node and then choose **Expand All**. - -4. On the **Home** tab, in the **View** group, choose either of the following actions to change which nodes are displayed. - - |**Action**|Description| - |----------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Show All**|All nodes are shown.| - |**Hide Non-Mandatory**|Only nodes representing elements that are required according to the XML schema are shown. These nodes are typically indicated by a **1** in the **MinOccurs** field.

Choose **Show All** to reverse the view.| - |**Hide Non-Selected**|Only nodes where the **Selected** check box is selected are shown.

Choose **Show All** to reverse the view.| - -5. On the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit**. - -6. In the **Selected** check box, specify for each node if you want the element to be supported in the data exchange definition for the related SEPA bank file. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you select a mandatory child node, all parent nodes above it are also selected. - -7. Choose the **Select All Mandatory Elements** action to reselect all nodes that represent elements that are mandatory according to the XML schema. - -8. Choose the **Deselect All** action to clear all selections. - - The **Choice** field specifies that the node has two or more sibling nodes that function as options. - -### To generate a data exchange definition that is based on an XML schema - -1. In the **Search** box, enter **XML Schemas**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the relevant XML schema, and then on the on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Open XML Schema Viewer**. - -3. Make sure the relevant nodes are selected. For more information, see the “To select or clear nodes in an XML schema” section. - -4. In the **XML Schema Viewer** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Generate Data Exchange Definition**. - - A data exchange definition is created in the **Posting Exchange Definition** window, which you can complete by specifying which elements in the file map to which fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also use the **Get File Structure** function from the **Posting Exchange Definition** window, which uses the functionality of the **XML Schema Viewer** window to prefill the **Column Definitions** TastTab. - -### To generate an XMLport that is based on an XML schema - -1. In the **Search** box, enter **XML Schemas**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the relevant XML schema, and then on the on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Open XML Schema Viewer**. - -3. In the **New XMLport No.** field, specify the number that the new XMLport object will be given when it is generated. - -4. Make sure the relevant nodes are selected. For more information, see the “To select or clear nodes in an XML schema” section. - -5. On the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Generate XMLport**, and then save the object as a .txt file in an appropriate location. - -6. Import the new XMLport into the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] development environment and compile it. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[About the Data Exchange Framework](across-about-the-data-exchange-framework.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md deleted file mode 100644 index edcd55d8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Archived Workflow Step Instances - description: All completed workflow step instances are saved in the **Archived Workflow Step Instances** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances -All completed workflow step instances are saved in the **Archived Workflow Step Instances** window. - - In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## To view archived workflow step instances -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the workflow for which you want to view all archived workflow step instances. -3. In the **Workflow** window, choose the **Archived Workflow Step Instances** action. - - The **Archived Workflow Step Instances** window opens showing the archived workflow step instances of the selected workflow. -4. Alternatively, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Archived Workflow Step Instances**, and then choose the related link. - -The **Archived Workflow Step Instances** window opens showing all archived workflow step instances. In the **Workflow Code** field, you can see which workflow the archived workflow step instance belonged to. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Delete Workflows](across-how-to-delete-workflows.md) - [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [How to: Enable Workflows](across-how-to-enable-workflows.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) - [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index a23c1e44..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-approval-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Approve or Reject Documents in Workflows -description: Request, reject, or delegate an approval of, for example, a purchase or sales document, as part of a workflow. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: reject, delegate, request -ms.date: 08/24/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use Approval Workflows -When a record, such as a purchase document or a customer card, needs to be approved by someone in your organization, you send an approval request as part of a workflow. Based on how the workflow is set up, the appropriate approver is then notified that the record requires their approval. - -You set up approval workflows in the **Workflow** window. For more information, see [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md). - -In addition to approval workflows described in this topic, you can perform various other workflow tasks. For more information, [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md). - -Core approval workflows for purchases documents, sales documents, payment journals, customer cards, and item cards are ready to start as assisted setup. For more information, see [Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md). - -## To request approval of a record -The following task is performed by an approval user. - -1. In the window that presents the record, choose the **Send Approval Request** action. -2. To see all your approval requests, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Approval Request Entries**, and then choose the related link. - -The status of the approval entry is updated from **Created** to **Open**. The status of the record, for example a purchase invoice, is updated from **Open** to **Pending Approval** and remains locked for processing until all approvers have approved the record. - -When the approver has approved the record, the status changes to **Released**. You can then continue your tasks with the record. - -## To cancel requests for approval -The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. - -A customer may want to change an order after it has been submitted for approval. In this case, you can cancel the approval process and make the necessary changes to the order before you request approval again. - -- In the window that displays the record, choose the **Cancel Approval Request** action. - -When the approval request has been canceled, the status of the related approval entry is changed to **Canceled**. The status of the record is updated from **Pending Approval** to **Open**. The approval process can then start again. - -## To approve or reject requests for approval -The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. - -You can process approval requests in the **Requests to Approve** window, for example to approve multiple requests at a time. Alternatively, you can process each request on the related record, such as the **Purchase Invoice** window, by choosing the link in the notification that you receive. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Requests to Approve**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select one or more lines for the record or records that you want to approve or reject. -3. Choose the **Approve**, **Reject**, or **Delegate** actions. - -When a record has been approved or rejected, the approval status in the **Status** field changes to **Approved** or **Rejected**. - -If an approver hierarchy is set up, the record status will be **Pending Approval** until all approvers have approved the record. Then the record status will change to **Released**. - -At the same time, the approval status changes from **Created** to **Open** as soon as an approval request for the record is created. If the request is rejected, the approval status changes to **Rejected**. The status remains **Open** or **Rejected** until all approvers have approved the request. - -## To delegate requests for approval -The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. - -To prevent documents from piling up or otherwise block the workflow, the approver and the approval administrator can delegate an approval request to a substitute approver. The substitute can either be a designated substitute, the direct approver, or the approval administrator, in that order of priority. You typically use this feature if an approver is out of office and is unable to approve requests before the due date. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Requests to Approve**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select one or more lines for the approval requests that you want to delegate to a substitute approver, and then choose the **Delegate** action. - -A notification to approve the request is sent to the substitute approver. - -## To manage overdue approval requests -The following task is performed by an approval user with approver rights. - -At regular intervals, you must remind approval workflow users of overdue approval requests that they must react on. You use the **Send Overdue Approval Notifications** function for this. - -The **Send Overdue Approval Notifications** function checks for all open approval requests that are currently overdue. Each approver that has at least one overdue approval entry receives a notification with the list of all their overdue approval requests. The notification is also sent to their approver and all the requesters of the overdue approvals. This helps if the overdue approval entry must be delegated to a substitute. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Overdue Approval Requests**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Overdue Approval Requests** window, choose the **Send Overdue Approval Notifications** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0bde6697..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Make a Power BI data source with your Dynamics NAV -description: You can make your Dynamics NAV data available as a data source in Power BI and build powerful reports of the state of your business. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: business intelligence, KPI, Odata, Power App, SOAP, analysis -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as a Power BI Data Source -You can make your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data available as a data source in Power BI and build powerful reports of the state of your business. - -> [!NOTE] -> You must have a valid account with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and with Power BI. Also, you must download [Power BI Desktop](https://powerbi.microsoft.com/en-us/desktop/). - -## To add [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as a data source in Power BI Desktop -1. In Power BI Desktop, in the left navigation pane, choose **Get Data**. -2. In the **Get Data** window, choose **Online Services**, choose **Dynamics NAV**, and then choose the **Connect** button. - - Power BI displays a wizard that will guide you though the connection process. The first step will be to enter an OData URL and the company name that is associated with your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] account. - - For the *OData URL*, you can copy the OData V4 URL of any of the web services that are listed in the **Web Services** page in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as `https://mycompany.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/`. - - For the *Company Name*, use the name that is shown in the **Name** field in the **Company Information** window in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. If your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] contains multiple companies, choose the relevant company name from the list in the **Companies** window. In both cases, make sure that the name that you specify in the Power BI wizard matches exactly the text shown in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as `My Company`. -3. Once you have entered the information, choose the OK button. The next step in the wizard will be to enter your username and password. - - > [!NOTE] - > If there are other authentication options available in the left hand navigation, choose *Basic*. -4. Enter your username and password. You can find this information in the **Users** window in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Use the **Web Access Key** as your password. - - For example, your username is *ADMIN*, and the web service access key that serves as your password is *EgzeUFQ9Uv0o5O0lUMyqCzo1ueUW9yRF3SsLU=*. -5. Choose the **Connection** button to continue. The Power BI wizard shows a list of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data sources. These data source represent all the web services that you have published from your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - Alternatively, create a new web service URL in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] by using the **Create Data Set** action in the **Web Services** page, using the **Set Up Reporting** Assisted Setup guide, or by choosing the **Edit in Excel** action in any lists. - -6. Specify the data you want to add to your data model, and then choose the **Load** button. -7. Repeat the previous steps to add additional [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data to your Power BI data model. - - > [!NOTE] - > Once you have successfully connected to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you will not be prompted again for the OData URL, username, or password. - -Once the data is loaded it will appear in the right navigation on the page. At this point, you have successfully connected to your Dynamics NAV data and are ready to begin building your Power BI report. For more information, see the [Power BI documentation](https://powerbi.microsoft.com/documentation/powerbi-landing-page/). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index dd9972a8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Use OCR to Turn PDF into E-Invoices| Microsoft Docs -description: Describes how you can use an OCR service to convert incoming PDF or image files to electronic documents in Financials. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 11/09/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use OCR to Turn PDF and Image Files into Electronic Documents -From PDF or image files that you receive from your trading partners, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) generate electronic documents that can be converted to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For example, when you receive an invoice in PDF format from your vendor, you can send it to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** window. This is described in the first procedure. - -As an alternative to sending the file from the **Incoming Documents** window, you can send the file to the OCR service by email. Then, when you receive the electronic document back, a related incoming document record is created automatically. This is described in the second procedure. - -After some seconds, you receive the file back from the OCR service as an electronic invoice that can be converted to a purchase invoice for the vendor. This is described in the third procedure. - -Because OCR is based on optical recognition, it is likely that the OCR service will interpret characters in your PDF or image files wrongly when it first processes a certain vendor’s documents, for example. It may not interpret the company logo as the vendor’s name or it may misinterpret the total amount on a receipt because of its layout. To avoid these errors going forward, you can correct the errors in a separate version of the **Incoming Document** window. Then you send the corrections back to the OCR service to train it to interpret the specific characters correctly next time it processes a PDF or image document for the same vendor. For more information, see the "To train the OCR service to avoid errors" section. - -The traffic of files to and from the OCR service is processed by a dedicated job queue entry, which are created automatically when you enable the related service connection. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Incoming Documents](across-how-setup-income-documents.md). - -## To send a PDF or image file to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** window -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new incoming document record and attach the file. For more information, see [How to: Create Incoming Document Records](across-how-create-income-document-records.md). -3. In the **Incoming Documents** window, select one or more lines, and then choose the **Send to Job Queue** action. - - The value in the **OCR Status** field changes to **Ready**. The attached PDF or image file is sent to the OCR service by the job queue according to the schedule, provided that no errors exist. -4. Alternatively, in the **Incoming Documents** window, select one or more lines, and then choose the **Send to OCR Service** action. - -The value in the **OCR Status** field changes to **Sent**, provided that no errors exist. - -## To send a PDF or image file to the OCR service by email -From your email application, you can send an email to the OCR service provider with the PDF or image file attached. For information about the email address to send to, see the OCR service provider’s web site. - -Because no incoming document record exists for the file, a new record will be created automatically in the **Incoming Documents** window when you receive the resulting electronic document from the OCR service. For more information, see [How to: Create Incoming Document Records](across-how-create-income-document-records.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If you work on a tablet or phone, you can send the file to the OCR service as soon as you have taken a photo of the document, or you can create an incoming document directly. For more information, see the "To create incoming document records by taking a photo" section in [How to: Create Incoming Document Records](across-how-create-income-document-records.md). - -## To receive the resulting electronic document from the OCR service. -The electronic document that is created by the OCR service from the PDF or image file is automatically received into the **Incoming Documents** window by the job queue entry that is set up when you enable the OCR service. - -If you are not using a job queue, or you want to receive a finished OCR document sooner than per the job queue schedule, you can choose the **Receive from OCR Service** button. This will get any documents that are completed by the OCR service. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the OCR service is set up to require manual verification of processed documents, then the **OCR Status** field will contain **Awaiting Verification**. In that case, perform the following steps to log in to the OCR service website to manually verify an OCR document. - -1. In the **OCR Status** field, choose the **Awaiting Verification** hyperlink. Alternatively, choose the **Awaiting Verification** tile on the Home page. -2. On the OCR service website, log in using the credentials of your OCR service account. These are the credentials you also used when setting up the service. For more information, see the "To set up an OCR service" section in [How to: Set Up Incoming Documents](across-how-setup-income-documents.md). - - If you access the website from the **OCR Status** field, the document in question is displayed immediately after your sign in. If you access the website by choosing the tile on the Home page, on the first OCR service page that opens, you must choose the **Start** button on the **Verify** tab or double-click the document that you want to verify. - - Information for the OCR document is displayed, showing both the source content of the PDF or image file and the resulting OCR field values. -3. Review the various field values and manually edit or enter values in fields that the OCR service has tagged as uncertain. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The OCR process is completed and the resulting electronic document is sent to the **Incoming Documents** window in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], according to the job queue schedule. - - If you access the website by choosing the tile on the Home page, then any other OCR document to be verified is automatically displayed on the website. -5. Repeat step 4 for any other OCR document to be verified. - -Now you can proceed to create document records for the received electronic documents in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], manually or automatically. For more information, see the next procedure. You can also connect the new incoming document record to existing posted or non-posted document so that the source file is easy to access from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md). - -## To create a purchase invoice from an electronic document received from the OCR service -The following procedure describes how to create a purchase invoice record from a vendor invoice received as an electronic document from the OCR service. The procedure is the same when you create, for example, a general journal line from an expense receipt or a sales return order from a customer. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Description** and **No.** fields on the created document lines will only be filled if you have first mapped text found on the OCR document to the two fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You can do this mapping as item cross-references, for document lines of type Item. You can also use the Text-to-Account Mapping function. For more information, see the "To map text on an incoming document to a specific vendor, G/L, or bank account" section. - -To map the item numbers on the document to your descriptions of the vendor's items, open the card of each item, and then choose the **Cross References** action to set up cross-references between your item descriptions and those of the vendor. For more information, see the tooltip for the **Cross References** action on item cards. - -1. Select the line for the incoming document, and then choose the **Create Document** action. - -A purchase invoice will be created in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] based on the information in the electronic vendor document that you received from the OCR service. Information will be inserted in the new purchase invoice based on the mapping that you have defined as a cross-reference or as text-to-account mapping. - -Any validation errors, typically related to wrong or missing master data in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], will be shown on the **Errors and Warnings** FastTab. For more information, see the "To handle errors when receiving electronic documents" section. - -### To map text on an incoming document to a specific vendor account -For incoming documents, you typically use the **Map Text to Account** action to define that a certain text on a vendor invoice received from the OCR service is mapped to a certain vendor account. Going forward, any part of the incoming document description that exists as a mapping text means that the **No.** field on resulting document or journal lines of type G/L Account are filled with the vendor in question. - -In addition to mapping to a vendor account or G/L accounts, you can also map to a bank account. This is practical, for example, for electronic documents for expenses that are already paid where you want to create a general journal line that is ready to post to a bank account. - -1. Select the relevant incoming document line, and then choose the **Map Text to Account** action. The **Text-to-Account Mapping** window opens. -3. In the **Mapping Text** field, enter any text that occurs on vendor invoices that you want to create purchase documents or journal lines for. You can enter up to 50 characters. -4. In the **Vendor No.** field, enter the vendor that the resulting purchase document or journal line will be created for. -5. In the **Debit Acc. No.** field, enter the debit-type G/L account that will be inserted on resulting purchase document or journal line of type G/L Account. -6. In the **Credit Acc. No.** field, enter the credit-type G/L account that will be inserted on resulting purchase document or journal line of type G/L Account. - - > [!NOTE] - > Do not use the **Bal. Source Type** and **Bal. Source No.** fields in connection with incoming documents. They are used for automatic payment reconciliation only. For more information, see [How to: Map Text on Recurring Payments to Accounts for Automatic Reconciliation](receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md). - -7. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for all text on incoming documents that you want to automatically create documents for. - -## To handle errors when receiving electronic documents -1. In the **Incoming Documents** window, select the line for an electronic document received from the OCR service with errors. This is indicated by the Error value in the **OCR Status** field. -2. Choose the **Edit** action to open the **Incoming Document** window. -3. On the **Errors and Warnings** FastTab, select the message, and then choose the **Open Related Record** action. -4. The window that contains the wrong or missing data, such as a vendor card with a missing field value, opens. -5. Correct the error or errors as described in each error message. -6. Proceed to process the incoming electronic document by choosing the **Create Manually** action again. -7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for any remaining errors until the electronic document can be received successfully. - -## To train the OCR service to avoid errors -Because OCR is based on optical recognition, it is likely that the OCR service will interpret characters in your PDF or image files wrongly when it first processes documents from a certain vendor, for example. It may not interpret the company logo as the vendor’s name or it may misinterpret the total amount on an expense receipt because of its layout. To avoid such errors going forward, you can correct data received by the OCR service and then send the feedback to the service. - -The **OCR Data Correction** window, which you open from the **Incoming Document** window, shows the fields from the **Financial Information** FastTab in two columns, one with the OCR data editable and one with the OCR data read-only. When you choose the **Send OCR Feedback** button, the content of the **OCR Data Correction** window is sent to the OCR service. Next time the service processes PDF or image files that contain the data in question, your corrections will be incorporated to avoid the same errors. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open an incoming document record that contains data received from OCR service, which you want to correct. -3. In the **Incoming Document** window, choose the **Correct OCR Data** action. -4. In the **OCR Data Correction** window, overwrite the data in the editable column for each field that has an incorrect value. -5. To undo corrections that you have made since you opened the **OCR Data Correction** window, choose the **Reset OCR Data** action. -6. To send the corrections to the OCR service, choose the **Send OCR Feedback** action. -7. To save the corrections, close the **OCR Data Correction** window. - -The fields on the **Financial Information** FastTab in the **Incoming Document** window are updated with any new values that you entered in step 4. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox.md deleted file mode 100644 index 25fbcebf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Display Custom Power BI Reports -description: You can use Power BI reports to gain additional insight into data in lists in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: business intelligence, KPI, Odata, Power App, SOAP, analysis -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Viewing List Data in Power BI Reports in Dynamics NAV -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a FactBox control element on a number of key list pages that provides additional insight into the data in the list. As you move between rows in the list, the report is updated and filtered for the selected entry. You can create custom reports to display in this control, but there are a few rules to follow when creating the reports to ensure they provide the desired behavior. - -> [!NOTE] -> You must have a valid account with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and with Power BI. Also, you must download [Power BI Desktop](https://powerbi.microsoft.com/en-us/desktop/). For more information, see [Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as a Power BI Data Source](across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md). - -## Report Data Set -When you create the report in Power BI Desktop, specify the data source or web service that contains the data related to the list that you want to associate the report with. For example, if you want to create a report for the Sales List, ensure that the data set contains information related to sales. - -To filter data on the reports based upon the record selected from the list page, the primary key must be used as a report filter. The primary keys will need to be part of your data set in order for the reports to filter correctly. In most cases, the primary key for a list is the **No.** field. - -## Defining the Report Filter -The report is required to have a basic report filter (not a page or visual filter and not advanced filter) to filter correctly in the Power BI Fact Box Control. The filter that is passed to the Power BI report from each list page will be based on the primary key as described in the previous section. - -To define a filter for the report, select the primary key from the list of available fields, and then drag and drop that field into the **Report Filter** section. - -![Setting the report filter for the Sales Invoice Activity report](./media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-filter.png) - -## Report Size and color -The size of the report must be set to 325 pixels by 310 pixels. This is required for the proper scaling of the report in the available space allowed by the Power BI Fact Box control. To define the size of the report, place focus outside of the report layout area, and then choose the paint roller icon. - -![Setting the report width and height for the Sales Invoice Activity report](./media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-sizing.png) - -You can change the width and height of the report by choosing **Custom** in the **Type** field. - -Similarly, if you want to have the background of the report blend into the background color of the Power BI Fact Box control, define a custom report background color of *E5E5E5*. This is optional. - -## Reports with Multiple Pages -With Power BI, you can create a single report with multiple pages. The visuals that you want to see in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] list pages must be on the first page of the report in Power BI. - -> [!NOTE] -> The Power BI Fact Box can show only the first page of your report; if you want to see other pages, you must expand the report and use tabs at the bottom of the report to navigate to other pages. - -## Saving Your Report - -When you save your report, it's a best practice that the name of the report contains the name of the list page that you want to display the report in. For example, the word *Vendor* must be contained somewhere in the report name for reports that you want to make available on the Vendor list. - -This is not a requirement; however, it will make the process of selecting reports quicker. When the report selection page is opened from a list page, we will pass in a filter based on the page name to limit the reports that are displayed. You may remove the filter to get a full list of reports available to you in Power BI. - -## Troubleshooting -This section provides a workaround for the most typical issues that can occur when you create the Power BI report. - -**User does not see a report on the Select Report page they want to select** -If you cannot select a report, a possible solution is to verify the name of the report to ensure it contains the name of the list page. You can also clear the filter to get a full list of Power BI reports available. - -**Report is loaded but blank, not filtered or filtered incorrectly** -Verify that the report filter contains the right primary key. In most cases, this is the **No.** field, but in the **G/L Entry** table, for example, you must use the **Entry No.** field . - -**Report is loaded, but it shows the page you have not expected** -Verify that the page you want displayed is the first page in your report. - -**Report appears with unwanted gray boarders, is too small or too large** - -Verify that the report size is set to 325 pixels x 310 pixels. Save the report, and then refresh the list page. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as a Power BI Data Source](across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-import-data-configuration-packages.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-import-data-configuration-packages.md deleted file mode 100644 index 29df90e4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-import-data-configuration-packages.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Use Excel to import data into Dynamics NAV -description: Use the default configuration package to add customer data in Excel and import the data back into Dynamics NAV. -author: edupont04 -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: migration, Excel -ms.date: 07/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Importing Data from Legacy Accounting Software using a Configuration Package -You can import master data and some transactional data from other finance systems based on the default configuration package in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. In the **Configuration Packages** window, you can work with the package to import and validate the data before you apply the package. - -If you are familiar with RapidStart Services for Microsoft Dynamics, you are also familiar with configuration packages. The default configuration package supports the most common types of data that you want to import from a legacy system. In Excel, you can then add the data from the legacy system and set it up according to the business logic of the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -> [!TIP] -> Alternatively, use data migration wizards to import data from QuickBooks or Dynamics GP. For more information, see [QuickBooks Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md) or [Dynamics GP Data Migration](ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md). - -## Working with Data in Excel -When you export the default configuration package to Excel, the generated workbook contains a worksheet for each table in the package. To simplify your tasks, you can take advantage of the XML manipulation tools that are built into Excel. You can also use Excel built-in functions to help with data formatting and to put data in the correct cell. For example, add a blank worksheet and copy the legacy data to it. Then make an Excel formula to map data in the transformation worksheet between the fields in the exported worksheet and customer legacy data. After you have mapped all of the data, copy the range of data onto the table worksheet. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Do not change the columns in the worksheets. If they are moved, changed, or deleted, the worksheet cannot be imported into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Tables in the Default Configuration Package -The default configuration package supports the following tables: - -- Payment Terms -- Customer Price Group -- Shipment Method -- Salesperson/Purchaser -- Location -- GL Account -- Customer -- Vendor -- Item -- Sales Header -- Sales Line -- Purchase Header -- Purchase Line -- Gen. Journal Line -- Item Journal Line -- Customer Posting Group -- Vendor Posting Group -- Inventory Posting Group -- Unit of Measure -- Gen. Business Posting Group -- Gen. Product Posting Group -- General Posting Setup -- Territory -- Item Category -- Sales Price -- Purchase Price - -## Importing Customer Data -After the customer data has been entered in Excel, you import the data into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. In the **Configuration Packages** window, you import the data from the Excel file, and you can validate that the data is consistent with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] before you apply the package. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[QuickBooks Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md) -[Dynamics GP Data Migration](ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-income-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-income-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 65e56d5e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-income-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work with Incoming Documents -description: You can manage incoming external business documents, such as payment receipts or PDFs, manage OCR tasks, and convert files to electronic documents and records in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Incoming Documents -Some business transactions are not recorded in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from the outset. Instead, an external business document comes into your company as an email attachment or a paper copy that you scan to file. This is typical of purchases, where such incoming document files represent payment receipts for expenses or small purchases. - -From PDF or image files representing incoming documents, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) generate electronic documents that can then be converted to document records inside [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -In the **Incoming Documents** window, you can use different functions to review expense receipts, manage OCR tasks, and convert incoming document files, manually or automatically, to the relevant documents or journal lines. The external files can be attached at any process stage, including to posted documents and to the resulting vendor, customer, and general ledger entries. - -The incoming document process can consist of the following main activities: - -* Record the external documents inside [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] by creating lines in the **Incoming Documents** window in either of the following ways: - * Manually, by using simple functions, either from a PC or from a mobile device, in one of the following ways: - * Use the **Create from File** button, and then fill relevant fields in the **Incoming Document** window. The file is automatically attached. - * Use the **New** button, and then fill relevant fields in the **Incoming Document** window and manually attach the related file. - * From a tablet or phone, use the **Create from Camera** button to create a new incoming document record, and then send the image to the OCR service, for example. - * Automatically, by receiving the document from the OCR service as an electronic document after you have emailed the related PDF or image file to the OCR service. The **Financial Information** FastTab is automatically filled in the **Incoming Document** window. -* Use the OCR service to have PDF or image files turned into electronic documents that can be converted to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. -* Create new documents or general journal lines for incoming document records by entering the information as you read it from incoming document files. -* Attach incoming document files to purchase and sales documents of any status, including to the vendor, customer, and general ledger entries that result from posting. -* View incoming document records and their attachments from any purchase and sales document or entry, or find all general ledger entries without incoming document records from the **Chart of Accounts** window. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up the Incoming Documents feature and set up the OCR service. |[How to: Set Up Incoming Documents](across-how-setup-income-documents.md) | -| Create incoming document records, attach files, use OCR to turn PDF files into electronic documents, convert electronic documents to document records, audit incoming document records from posted sales and purchase documents. |[Processing Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-log-changes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-log-changes.md deleted file mode 100644 index ad73abeb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-log-changes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Track User Activity in a Change Log -Description: You can activate a user log so that you have a history of any changes made to data in tracked tables. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: user log, user activity, tracking -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Logging Changes in Dynamics NAV -You can enable the change log in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] so you have a history of activities. The log is based on changes that are made to data in the tables that you track. In the change log, entries are chronologically ordered and show changes that are made to the fields on the specified tables. The change log collects all changes that are made to the table. - -## Working with the Change log -A common problem in many financial systems is to locate the origin of errors and changes in data. It could be anything from an incorrect customer telephone number to an incorrect posting to the general ledger. The change log lets you track all direct modifications a user makes to data in the database. You must specify each table and field that you want the system to log, and then you must activate the change log. - -You activate and deactivate the change log in the **Change Log Setup** window. When you activate or deactivate the change log, this activity is logged, so you can always see which user deactivated or reactivated the change log. This cannot be turned off. - -In the **Change Log Setup** window, if you choose the **Tables** action, you can specify which tables you want to track changes for, and which changes to track. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] also tracks a number of system tables. - -After you have set up the change log, activated it, and made a change to data, you can view and filter the changes in the **Change Log Entries** window. If you want to delete entries, you can do that in the **Delete Change Log Entries** window, where you can set filters based on dates and time. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Changing Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md) -[Sorting](ui-sorting.md) -[Using Search for Page or Report](ui-search.md) -[How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-outlook.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-outlook.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3bf8e39f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-outlook.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Using Dynamics NAV as your Business Inbox in Outlook" -description: Dynamics NAV has deep integration with Microsoft 365 enabling you to manage all your business interactions and mail with customers and vendors directly in Outlook. -author: edupont04 -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365 -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.author: edupont ---- - -# Using Dynamics NAV as your Business Inbox in Outlook -Dynamics NAV introduces the ability to manage business interactions with your customers and vendors, directly in Microsoft Outlook. With the Dynamics NAV Outlook Add-in, you can see financial data related to customers and vendors, as well as create and send financial documents, such as quotes and invoices. - -Some companies using Microsoft 365 restrict users' permissions to deploy add-ins. So you must make sure that you have a Microsoft 365 subscription that includes email and allows you to deploy add-ins. You can sign up for a 1-month free trial of Microsoft 365 [here](https://products.office.com/try). - -## Get the add-in -In Dynamics NAV, one of the assisted setup guides is **Set Up Office Add-Ins**. The guide helps you set up a connection between your Microsoft 365 account and Dynamics NAV. The Dynamics NAV add-in is then automatically added to your Outlook. - -The new add-in is added to the Outlook ribbon, and in Outlook Web Access, you can see it in the add-in ribbon, immediately above the body of the email message. - -## Using the add-in -When you get a message from a customer, directly in Outlook, you can open the Dynamics NAV add-in, which recognizes the customer, and opens the customer card for his company. From this dashboard, you can see overview information for the customer, as well as drill down for more detail on specific documents. You can also dig into the sales history for the customer. -In the add-in, you can create a sales quote and send it back to this customer without leaving Outlook. All of the information that you need to send the sales quote is available in your business inbox in Outlook. -Once you have the data entered, you can post the quote. You can then send it by email. Dynamics NAV generates a .PDF file with the sales quote and attaches it to the email message that you draft in the add-in. - -Similar experience applies to messages from your vendors and purchase documents. - -Sometimes you want to see more fields that you can see in the add-in, such as when you want to fill in lines in an invoice. To give you a bit more space to work with, you can pop out the add-in to a separate window. It's still part of Outlook, but you have more space. As you enter data for the document in the pop-out view, the changes are automatically saved. When you are done entering data for the document, you can close the page. Choosing the add-in frame in Outlook automatically refreshes the document with the changes you made in the pop-out view. - -## Quick document lookup -The Dynamics NAV Document Links add-in gives you quick access to documents mentioned in email messages. The add-in is available for an email message if a document number is recognized in the body of the message. Opening the add-in provides quick access to the document. - -For example, if you receive an email message that mentions the text *S-QUO100*, Dynamics NAV identifies that as a sales quote, and so you can open this document in Outlook. In Outlook, choose the **Document Links** button immediately above the body of the email message. In the Outlook Web App, choose the *S-QUO1001* text in the body of the email message. - -In the Document Links add-in, you can modify and take actions with the document, just like you can in Dynamics NAV. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to Dynamics NAV](across-get-started.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Manage Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Manage Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-powerbi.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-powerbi.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0ee71616..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-powerbi.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Using the Dynamics NAV Content Pack for Power BI" -description: Understanding and Working with Dynamics NAV content with Power BI. -author: edupont04 -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 08/10/2018 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.author: edupont ---- - -# Using the Dynamics NAV Content Pack for Power BI -Getting insights into your Dynamics NAV data is easy with Power BI and the Dynamics NAV content pack. Power BI retrieves your data and then builds an out-of-the-box dashboard and reports based on that data. - -The content pack is preconfigured to work with sales data and financial data from the demonstration company that you get when you sign up for the Dynamics NAV preview. - -- Choose any visual on the dashboard to bring up one of seven underlying reports. -- Filter the report or add fields that you want to monitor. -- Pin this customized view to the dashboard to continue tracking. -The dashboard and underlying reports refresh daily. You can control the refresh schedule and modify the frequency on the dataset. - -## Accessing Dynamics NAV in Power BI -To see your Dynamics NAV data in Power BI, you must have the following: - -- Access to Dynamics NAV. For more information, see [Dynamics NAV](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=759714). -- Access to Power BI. For more information, see [Power BI](https://powerbi.microsoft.com). - -On the Power BI site, you can find additional information about [adding the Dynamics NAV content pack to Power BI](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=760850). - -To access the Dynamics NAV content pack in Power BI, in the connection window, you must specify the following information: - - -| Field | Description | -|---------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| **OData Feed URL** | The OData URL so Power BI can access data from your company, such as `https://mybusiness.com:7048/MS/OData/Company('CRONUS%20US')`. | -| **Authentication method** | Choose **Basic**. | -| **User name** | The email account that you used to sign up for Dynamics NAV, such as me@mybusiness.com. | -| **Password** | This is the web service access key for your user account in Dynamics NAV. | - -This means that you must get two pieces of information from Dynamics NAV: The OData URL and the web service access key for your user account. -**Getting the URL** -When you add Dynamics NAV to Power BI, you must specify a URL so Power BI can access data from your company. In the connection window, the URL is referred to as the **OData Feed URL**, and it must have the following format: - -`https://mybusiness.projectmadeira.com:7048/MS/OData/Company('CRONUS%20US')` -In this example, *mybusiness* is the name of your Dynamics NAV service, and *CRONUS US* is the name of the demonstration company with *%20* representing the space in the name. -To get the URL, in Dynamics NAV, search for and open the **Web Services** window. This window lists the web services that are currently available, and you can copy the link from the **OData URL** field for one of the default OData web services. -**Getting the web service access key** -In order to use data from Dynamics NAV, in Power BI, in the **Connect to Dynamics NAV** window, you must specify your user name, which is your email account, and a password. The password is the web service access key that is set up for your user account in Dynamics NAV. -To get a web service access key, in Dynamics NAV, search for the **Users** window, and then open the card for your user account. On the **Web Service Access** FastTab, copy the contents of the **Web Service Access Key** field. If the field is blank, in the ribbon, choose **Change Web Service Access Key**, choose the **Key Never Expires** field, and then choose the OK button. You can then copy the key. - -## Getting Data from Dynamics NAV -The Dynamics NAV dashboard shows the most typical reports that you will want to use to track your business. The data is extracted from your Dynamics NAV company using web services to read live data. In Dynamics NAV, the **Web Services** window lists the web services that have been set up for you, including the following that are consumed by the content pack in Power BI: - -- ItemSalesAndProfit -- ItemSalesByCustomer -- powerbifinance-setup -- SalesDashboard -- SalesOpportunities -- SalesOrdersBySalesPerson -- TopCustomerOverview - -**Note**: If you change the name of any of these web services, the data will not show up in Power BI. -If you want to add use other data in Power BI, you must find the tables in Dynamics NAV, expose them as web services, and then add them to the content pack. This is an advanced scenario, and we recommend that you start with the data that is already available in Power BI. - -## Troubleshooting -The Power BI dashboard relies on the published web services that are listed above, and it will show data from the demonstration company or your own company if you import data from your current finance-setup solution. However, if something goes wrong, this section provides a workaround for the most typical issues. - -**"Parameter validation failed, please make sure all parameters are valid"** -If you see this error after you enter your Dynamics NAV URL, make sure the following requirements are satisfied: - -- The URL follows exactly this pattern: - - `https://mybusiness.projectmadeira.com:7048/MS/OData/Company('CRONUS%20US')` -- Delete any text after the company name in parenthesis -- Make sure there are no trailing forward slash at the end of the URL. -- Make sure that it is a secure connection as indicated by the URL starting with *https*. - - -**"Login failed"** -If you get a "login failed" error when you log in to the dashboard, using your Dynamics NAV credentials, then this can be caused by one of the following issues: - -* The account you are using does not have permissions to read the Dynamics NAV data from your account. - - Verify your user account in Dynamics NAV, and make sure that you have used the right web service access key as the password, and then try again. -* The Dynamics NAV instance that you are trying to connect to does not have a valid SSL certificate. In this case you'll see a more detailed error message ("unable to establish trusted SSL relationship"). - - **Note**: Self-signed certificates are not supported. - - -**"Oops"** -If you see an "Oops" error dialog after you pass the authentication dialog, this is most frequently caused by a problem connecting to the data for the content pack. - -* Verify that the URL follows the pattern that was specified earlier: - - `https://mybusiness.projectmadeira.com:7048/MS/OData/Company('CRONUS%20US')` -* A common mistake is to specify the full URL for a specific web service: - - `https://mybusiness.projectmadeira.com:7048/MS/OData/Company('CRONUS%20US')/powerbifinance-setup` -* Or you might have forgotten to specify the company name: - - `https://mybusiness.projectmadeira.com:7048/MS/OData/` - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to Dynamics NAV](across-get-started.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-process-income-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-process-income-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1d4f7738..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-process-income-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Process Incoming Documents -description: To record an external document, such as a PDF, in Dynamics NAV, you first create or complete an incoming document record. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, e-invoice, incoming document, OCR, ecommerce, document exchange, import invoice -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Processing Incoming Documents -To record an external document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must first create or complete an incoming document record. You can do this manually, or you can take a photo of the external document and then create the incoming document record with the image file attached. - -From PDF or image files that you receive from your trading partners, you can have an external OCR service (Optical Character Recognition) generate electronic documents that can be converted to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For example, when you receive an invoice in PDF format from your vendor, you can send it to the OCR service from the **Incoming Documents** window. Alternatively, you can send the file to the OCR service by email. Then, when you receive the electronic document back, a related incoming document record is created automatically. After some seconds, you receive the file back from the OCR service as an electronic invoice that can be converted to a purchase invoice for the vendor. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create incoming document records manually or automatically by taking a photo of a paper receipt, for example. |[How to: Create Incoming Document Records](across-how-create-income-document-records.md) | -| Use an OCR service to turn PDF and image files into electronic documents that can be converted to purchase invoices in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], for example. Train the OCR service to avoid errors next time it processes similar data. |[How to: Use OCR to Turn PDF and Image Files into Electronic Documents](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md) | -| Connect or remove incoming document records for any non-posted sales or purchase document and to any customer, vendor, or general ledger entry from the document or entry. |[How to: How to: Create Incoming Document Records Directly from Documents and Entries](across-how-connect-disconnect-income-document-records.md) | -| From the **Chart of Accounts** and **General Ledger Entries** windows, use a search function to find general ledger entries for posted documents that do not have incoming document records and then centrally link to existing records or create new ones with attached document files. |[How to: Find Posted Documents without Incoming Document Records](across-how-find-posted-documents-without-income-document-records.md) | -| Get better overview by setting incoming document records to Processed to remove them from the default view. |[How to: Manage Many Incoming Document Records](across-how-manage-many-income-document-records.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-data-exchange.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-data-exchange.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9d467077..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-data-exchange.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set up data exchange - description: Set up the data exchange framework in Dynamics NAV. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Data Exchange -Before you can send and receive electronic documents or import and export bank files, you must set up the data exchange framework to process the involved files. In addition, you must set up related areas, such as master data for customers that you send electronic invoices to or the bank data conversion service in case you use the external service provider to convert your bank files. For more information, see [Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md). - - When [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is set up to exchange data with external files, users can use the setup in common business tasks, such as sending and receiving electronic documents and importing and exporting bank files. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set up the preconfigured document exchange service to enable sending and receiving electronic documents from and to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)].|[How to: Set Up a Document Exchange Service](across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md)| -|Set up the preconfigured OCR service to turn PDF or image files into electronic documents that can be converted to document records in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]|[How to: Set Up Incoming Documents](across-how-setup-income-documents.md)| -|Set up one of two preconfigured services for updated exchange rates to get the latest currency exchange rates into the **Currencies** window.|[How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates](finance-how-update-currencies.md)| -|Set up various master data, such as company information, customers, vendors, items, and units of measure, related to mapping data in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]|[How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving](across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md)| -|Set up a bank account, a vendor, and a payment journal for SEPA credit transfer.|[How to: Set Up SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md)| -|Prepare bank account formats, payment methods, and customer agreements for SEPA direct debit.|[How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md)| -|Set up user authentication and the URL of the bank data conversion service provider that is required to have bank files converted to your bank’s format.|[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md)| -|Set up and enable an external service that enables you to import bank statements directly as bank feeds.|[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md)| -|After the bank data conversion service is enabled, link bank accounts in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]|[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts](bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md)| -|Prepare to set up a new data exchange definition for a data file or stream by using the file’s XML schema to prefill the **Column Definitions** FastTab in the **Posting Exchange Definition** window.|[How to: Use XML Schemas to Prepare Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-use-xml-schemas-to-prepare-data-exchange-definitions.md)| -|Set up the Data Exchange Framework to enable users to receive a new purchase document format, send a new sales document format, import a new bank file, or other data exchange.|[How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[Exchanging Data](across-exchange-data.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index a239d917..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-set-up-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setting Up Workflows - description: You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Workflows -You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. For more information, see [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md). - - Before you begin to use workflows, you must set up workflow users and approval users, specify how users receive notifications about workflow steps, and then create the workflows, potentially preceded by code customization. - - In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. - - If a business scenario requires a workflow event or response that is not supported, a Microsoft partner must implement them by customizing the application code. For more information, see [Walkthrough: Implementing New Workflow Events and Responses](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/developer/devenv-walkthrough-workflow-events-responses) in the developer and IT-pro help. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set up workflow users and user groups.|[How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md)| -|Set up workflow users who take part in approval workflows.|[How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md)| -|Specify how workflow users are notified of workflow steps, including approval requests.|[Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md)| -|Specify when users receive notifications and whether to aggregate notifications in a period to minimize the number of notifications.|[How to: Specify When and How to Receive Notifications](across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md)| -|Set up the layout and general content of new workflow notifications emails, or export, modify, and reimport existing templates.|[How to: Manage Notification Templates](across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md)| -|Set up an SMTP server to enable email communication in and out of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]|[How to: Set up Email](madeira-how-setup-email.md)| -|Specify the different steps of a workflow by connection workflow events with workflow responses.|[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md)| -|Use workflow templates to create new workflows.|[How to: Create Workflows from Workflow Templates](across-how-to-create-workflows-from-workflow-templates.md)| -|Share workflows with other [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] databases.|[How to: Export and Import Workflows](across-how-to-export-and-import-workflows.md)| -|Learn how to set up a workflow for approving sales documents by following an end-to-end procedure.|[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md)| -|Add support for a business scenario that requires new workflow events or responses by customizing the application code.|[Walkthrough: Implementing New Workflow Events and Responses](/dynamics_nav/Walkthrough--Implementing-New-Workflow-Events-and-Responses)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md deleted file mode 100644 index 99f1a6b7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setting Up Workflow Notifications - description: Many workflow responses are about notifying a user that an event has occurred that they must act on. For example, on one workflow step, the event can be that User 1 requests approval of a new record, and the response is that a notification is sent to User 2, the approver. On the next workflow step, the event can be that User 2 approves the record, and the response is that a notification is sent to User 3 to start a related processing of the approved record. For workflow steps that are about approval, each notification is tied to an approval entry. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Workflow Notifications -Many workflow responses are about notifying a user that an event has occurred that they must act on. For example, on one workflow step, the event can be that User 1 requests approval of a new record, and the response is that a notification is sent to User 2, the approver. On the next workflow step, the event can be that User 2 approves the record, and the response is that a notification is sent to User 3 to start a related processing of the approved record. For workflow steps that are about approval, each notification is tied to an approval entry. For more information, see [Workflow](across-workflow.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports notifications as email and as internal notes. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> All workflow notifications are sent through a job queue. Make sure that the job queue in your solution. For more information, see [Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md). - -You set up different aspects of workflow notifications in the following places: - -1. For approval workflows, you set up the recipients of workflow notifications by filling a line in the **Approval User Setup** window for each user that takes part in the workflow. For example, if User 2 is specified in the **Approver ID** field on the line for User 1, then the approval request notification is sent to User 1. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md). -2. You set when and how users receive workflow notifications by filling the **Notification Schedule** window for each workflow user. For more information, see [How to: Specify When and How to Receive Notifications](across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md). -3. You set up the general content and layout of notifications, including notifications about overdue workflow responses, by setting up notification templates in the **Notification Templates** window. You can use the default templates provided with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. -4. You set up specific content and rules of a workflow notification when you create the workflow in question. You do this by selecting options in the **Workflow Response Options** window for the workflow response that represents the notification. For more information, see step 9 in [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) - [How to: Set Up Workflow Users](across-how-to-set-up-workflow-users.md) - [How to: Specify When and How to Receive Notifications](across-how-to-specify-when-and-how-to-receive-notifications.md) - [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) - [How to: Manage Notification Templates](across-how-to-manage-notification-templates.md) - [Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md) - [How to: Set up Email](madeira-how-setup-email.md) - [Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md) - [Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-use-workflows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-use-workflows.md deleted file mode 100644 index fea2254e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-use-workflows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Using Workflows - description: You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Using Workflows -You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - - Before you can begin to use workflows, you must set up workflow users, create the workflows, potentially preceded by code customization and specify how users receive notifications. For more information, see [Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Typical workflow steps are about users who request approval of tasks and approvers accepting or rejecting approval requests. Therefore, many topics about how to use workflows refer to approvals. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set a workflow to start when the first entry-point event occurs.|[How to: Enable Workflows](across-how-to-enable-workflows.md)| -|Request approval of a task, as an approver, accept, decline, or delegate approvals, and send or view approval notifications.|[How to: Use Approval Workflows](across-how-use-approval-workflows.md)| -|Create workflow steps that restrict a certain record type from being used before a certain event occurs, for example that the record is approved.|[How to: Restrict and Allow Usage of a Record](across-how-to-restrict-and-allow-usage-of-a-record.md)| -|View workflow step instances of status Completed.|[How to: View Archived Workflow Step Instances](across-how-to-view-archived-workflow-step-instances.md)| -|Delete a workflow that you are sure will no longer be used.|[How to: Delete Workflows](across-how-to-delete-workflows.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md) -[Workflow](across-workflow.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-user-tasks.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-user-tasks.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1b87a08e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-user-tasks.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Assigning and managing tasks -description: Learn how to assign tasks to users, including your accountant, in Dynamics NAV -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: tasks, work -ms.date: 08/24/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Defining User Tasks -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can create tasks to remind you of work to be done. You can create tasks for yourself, but you can also assign tasks to others or be assigned a task by someone else in your organization. - -## Managing User Tasks -The **User Tasks** window shows all tasks, and you can easily create and assign new tasks. When you create a task, you can specify the start date and due date, and you can add a link to the window in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] where the user must do the work. - -For example, you can create a task for yourself to view all posted sales invoices. In that case, you link the task to page 143, Posted Sales Invoices. - -![Example of a User Task](media/across-user-tasks/sample-user-task.png "Example of a user task") - -> [!TIP] -> Use the look-up in the **Page** field and then use the **Search for Page or Report** field to find the page that you want. For more information, see [Searching for a Page or Report](ui-search.md). - -### Picking Up User Tasks -In the Business Manager, Bookkeeper, and Accountant Role Centers, a tile shows pending tasks that are assigned to that user. To pick up a task, simply choose it from the list of pending user tasks. In the ribbon, the link **Go to Task Item** opens the window where you can do the work. - -When you have completed a task, simply mark it as completed. - -### Deleting User Tasks -If you want to bulk delete all or some user tasks, you can use the **Delete User Tasks** report. In the request page, you can set filters to determine which tasks must be deleted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Searching for a Page or Report](ui-search.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/across-workflow.md b/dynamics-nav-app/across-workflow.md deleted file mode 100644 index cbdec50f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/across-workflow.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Workflow - description: You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Workflow -You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. - - In the **Workflow** window, you create a workflow by listing the involved steps on the lines. Each step consists of a workflow event, moderated by event conditions, and a workflow response, moderated by response options. You define workflow steps by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. - - The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a number of preconfigured workflows represented by workflow templates that you can copy to create workflows. The code for workflow templates that are added by Microsoft are prefixed with “MS-“. For more information, see the list of workflow templates in the Workflow Templates window. - - If a business scenario requires a workflow event or response that is not supported, a Microsoft partner must implement them by customizing the application code. For more information, see [Walkthrough: Implementing New Workflow Events and Responses](/dynamics365/business-central/dev-itpro/developer/devenv-walkthrough-workflow-events-responses) in the developer and IT-pro help. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set up workflow users, specify how users get notified, and create new workflows. For new workflows for unsupported scenarios, implement the required workflow elements by customizing the application code.|[Setting Up Workflows](across-set-up-workflows.md)| -|Enable workflows, act on workflow notifications, including request approvals and approve requests to perform a workflow step. Archive and delete workflows.|[Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-classifying-data-sensitivity.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-classifying-data-sensitivity.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5bb9a44a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-classifying-data-sensitivity.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Classifying Data Sensitivity" -description: You must specify which type of data you store about people so that you can respond to data subject requests. -author: bholtorf - -ms.author: bholtorf -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 03/09/2018 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: dynamics-nav-2018 ---- - -# Classifying Data Sensitivity -To classify the fields that hold sensitive or personal data, a Microsoft partner can set the ```DataClassification``` property on fields. This requires access to the database tables, either through the development environment or by running a Windows PowerShell script. For more information, see [Classifying Data](/dynamics-nav/classifying-data). - -As a customer, you can add a second level of classification by specifying sensitivity levels for the data you store in standard and custom fields. Classifying data sensitivity helps ensure that you know where you keep personal data in your system, and makes it easier to respond to requests from data subjects. For example, if a contact or customer asks you to export their personal data. For more information, see [Responding to Requests About Personal Data](admin-responding-to-requests-about-personal-data.md). - -> [!Important] -> Microsoft is providing this Data Sensitivity Classification feature as a matter of convenience only. It's your responsibility to classify the data appropriately and comply with any laws and regulations that are applicable to you. Microsoft disclaims all responsibility towards any claims related to your classification of the data. - -The following table describes data sensitivity levels you can assign. - -|Sensitivity|Description| -|----|----| -|Sensitive | Information about a data subject's racial or ethnic origin, political opinions, religious beliefs, involvement with trade unions, physical or mental health, sexuality, or details about criminal offenses. | -|Personal | Information that can be used to identify a data subject, either directly or in combination with other data or information.| -|Confidential | Business data that you use for accounting or other business purposes, and do not want to expose to other entities. For example, this might include ledger entries.| -|Normal | General data that does not belong to any other categories.| - -## How Do I Classify My Data? -Classifying the sensitivity of a large number of fields one-by-one would take a long time. To help speed up the process, we provide tools that you can use to bulk classify the sensitivity of fields, and then fine-tune classifications for specific fields. You can find tools on the Data Classification worksheet, which is available on the Administration of users, user groups, and permissions Role Center. You must be a system administrator to use the worksheet. - -> [!Important] -> When you open the Data Classification worksheet for the first time, it will be empty. You must run the Data Classification guide to generate the list of fields. To start the guide, choose the **Set Up Data Classifications** action. - -For example, the Data Classification worksheet lets you do things like: - -* Use the Data Classification guide to export your fields to an Excel worksheet where you can bulk classify them. Using the Excel worksheet is particularly useful if you are collaborating with a Microsoft partner. After you update the worksheet, you can use the guide to import and apply the classifications. You can also use the guide to classify fields manually. -* Choose a field and then filter the list to find similar fields that are likely to belong to the same classification as the field you based the search on. -* Investigate a field by viewing its contents. - -> [!Tip] -> We have defined sample sensitivity classifications for the tables and fields in the Cronus demonstration company. You can use those classifications as inspiration when you classify your own tables and fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Classifying Data](/dynamics-nav/classifying-data) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-configure-user-interface.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-configure-user-interface.md deleted file mode 100644 index 15105701..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-configure-user-interface.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Configuring the User Interface (UI) for Users -description: As an administrator, configure the company’s default user interfaces by customizing page layouts for different user profiles in the company. -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customize pages, configure user interface, customize UI -ms.date: 07/01/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Configuring the User Interface (UI) for Users -As an administrator, you configure the company’s default user interfaces by customizing page layouts for different user profiles in the company. To perform this work, you must be an administrator with the SUPER permission set. In addition, profiles must be set up and the appropriate users assigned to them. For more information, see [Managing Users, Profiles, and Role Centers](admin-users-profiles-roles.md). - -You configure the user interface for multiple users by customizing pages for a particular profile that the users are assigned to. You do this by using the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)], and customizing the same way that individual users personalize their own workspaces, that is, by using the **Customize** feature. The difference is that you open the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] in the configuration mode. Typical customizations include which actions to include on the ribbon, how fields are placed on FastTabs or in FactBoxes, and which menu items to include in the navigation pane. - -> [!TIP] -> A quick way to implement UI configurations for a profile is if you already have a configured profile in another [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] database. You can then export that profile, and then import it into the current database. For more information, see [Exporting and Importing Profiles](admin-profiles.md#ExportImportProfile). - -## General Information -Consider the following information before you begin to configure the UI: -- If you configure a page, then the page cannot be personalized by users in the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]. When users open the page for personalizing, a ![Personalization blocked](media/ui_personalization_blocked.png "Personalization blocked") icon displays in the banner, and the user is prevented from making changes. -- Before you begin to configure the UI, the application can be configured to show and hide UI elements (such as fields, FastTabs, and FactBoxes) based on license or user permissions. For more information about how this is done, see [Removing Elements from the User Interface According to Permissions](/dynamics-nav/Removing-Elements-from-the-User-Interface-According-to-Permissions). - - To see the effect of the UI Elements Removal option, you can log on as a test user with the permission set of the profile you are configuring. The reason is that you as the administrator have the SUPER permission set, and you can therefore not see and test the resulting user interface during your own logon. -- When you make UI configuration changes for a page that a user has personalized, the user’s UI personalization is preserved, and is not overwritten by the new page configuration. Likewise, when you cancel your UI configuration of a page that a user has since personalized, the user’s UI personalization is not canceled. -- The only situation where UI configuration does overwrite UI personalization is when a UI element is removed by configuration. For example, if the administrator removes a field that the user has renamed or moved, then the field is still removed from the user’s user interface. -- You can record UI configurations of the same page based on different access points to the page. For example, the **Sales Orders** window can be customized to look different when opened from the **Customer Card** window than when opened from the **Sales Order Processor** Role Center. The point from which you access the page to be customized is recorded in that specific page customization. Accordingly, there may be multiple page customization records in the database, as you can be seen in the **Delete Profile Configuration** window. -- Unlike when users change the size of windows or the width of columns on their own computer, any such basic view changes that you make during your configuration of the UI for a profile are not saved to the profile and will not be available for users assigned to the profile. Basic view changes are computer-specific. - -## Configuring a Profile with the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] in Configuration Mode -1. Open a command prompt, and type the following command to change to the installation folder of the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]. For example: - - ``` - cd "C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Dynamics NAV\110\RoleTailored Client" - ``` - -2. Type the following command to start the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] in the configuration mode for a specific profile: - - ``` - Microsoft.Dynamics.Nav.Client.exe -configure -profile:"profileid" - ``` - - Replace **profileid** with the name of the profile that you want to configure. - - For example, to configure the Accounting Manager profile, use this command: - - ``` - Microsoft.Dynamics.Nav.Client.exe -configure -profile:"Accounting Manager" - ``` - -3. You are now ready to start configuring the UI, which you do the same way as individual users personalize their own workspaces. For more information, see [Personalizing Your Workspace in the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]](ui-personalization-windows-client.md). - -## Canceling UI Configuration -You can cancel UI customizations that you have made as configuration for a profile in three ways: - -- Cancel all UI customization that you have made for a profile by using the **Clear Configured Pages** button in the **Profile Card** window. - -- Cancel UI customization that you have made for specific pages for a profile by deleting rows in the **Delete Profile Configuration** window. - -- Cancel UI customization that you have made for a specific UI area for a specific page for a profile by using the **Restore Defaults** button in the **Customize** window. - -### General Information -- Users can make UI customizations under their own user logon to personalize their user interface. When you cancel your UI configuration of a page that a user has since personalized, the user’s UI personalization is not canceled. Likewise, when you make new UI configuration for a page that a user has personalized, the user’s UI personalization is preserved, and is not overwritten by the new page configuration. - - The only situation where UI configuration does overwrite UI personalization is when a UI element is removed by configuration. For example, if the administrator removes a field that the user has renamed or moved, then the field is still removed from the user’s UI. - -- In the **Delete User Personalization** window and with the **Restore Defaults** button in the **Customize** window, users can cancel UI customization that they have made to pages under their own user logon. When they do so, the layout of those pages is reset to any UI customization that the administrator has configured for the profile. If the profile has not been configured, then the layout of the user’s pages is reset to the default profile configuration. For more information about how users cancel personalization, see [Cancelling Personalization](ui-personalization-windows-client.md#CancelPersonalization). - -### To cancel all UI customization that you have made for a profile - -1. In the **Search** box,, enter **Profiles**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the profile for which you want to cancel all UI customizations, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit**. - -3. In the **Profile Card** window, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Clear Configured Pages**. - -> [!NOTE] -> All UI customizations for the profile, both those installed with the application and those made by the administrator, are canceled. No page layouts specific to the profile remain in the database. - -### To cancel UI customization that you have made for specific page for a profile - -1. In the **Search** box,, enter **Delete Profile Configuration**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the profile/page set for which you want to cancel your UI customization, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Delete**. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > If you have configured different UI customizations of the same page based on different navigation paths to the page, then each page customization will be listed in the **Delete Profile Configuration** window with the same information. There is no information to identify which row relates to which navigation path. Therefore, you must either delete rows one by one followed by visual checks on the page, or you can delete all rows with UI customizations for the profile/page. - > - > All UI customization for the page for the profile that you have ever made on the installation or since you last used the **Delete Profile Configuration** window is canceled. The layout of the page is reset to the standard layout of the page object. - -### To cancel UI customization that you have made for a specific UI area for a specific page for a profile - -You can undo changes for that you have made to individual UI areas, such as a ribbon, by using the **Restore Defaults** button in the **Customize** window. Alternatively, you can undo all UI changes that you have made for a profile by using the **Delete Profile Configuration** window. - -The UI customization for the profile of the particular UI area on the particular page is canceled. The layout of the UI area on the page is reset to the default configuration, as made either by the administrator or as installed with the application. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-how-set-up-colored-indicator-on-cues.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-how-set-up-colored-indicator-on-cues.md deleted file mode 100644 index 34031c22..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-how-set-up-colored-indicator-on-cues.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Specify Colored Indicators to Customize Visual Signals About a Cue's Activity for the Company or Individual Users - description: As an administrator, you can set up Cues that appear on the users' Role Centers to include an indicator that changes color based on the data values in the Cues. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: jswymer - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Colored Indicator on Cues for the Company or Individual Users -As an administrator, you can set up Cues that appear on the users' Role Centers to include an indicator that changes color based on the data values in the Cues. - -The indicator appears as a colored bar along the top border of the Cue tile. It provides a visual signal of the status of the Cue's activity, which can indicate favorable or unfavorable conditions to prompt the user to take action. For example, if a Cue displays ongoing sales invoices, you can set up the indicator to appear green (favorable) when total number of ongoing sales invoices is below 10, and appears red (unfavorable) when the total is greater than 20. - -From the **Cue Setup** window, you set up indicators for all the Cues that are available in the company database. You can set up the indicators to apply to all users in the company or an individual user only. The indicator settings in the **Cue Setup** window act as the default indicator settings. If the **Cue Setup End User** window is made available to users, then they can personalize the indicators settings that you define in the **Cue Setup** window. - -To set up the indicator, you specify up to two threshold values that define three ranges of data values (low, middle, and high) to which you can apply a different color (or style). - -### To set up colored indicators on Cues -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cue Setup**, and then choose the related link. - - The **Cue Setup** window appears. The window lists the indicators that are currently setup up on Cues. Indicators that apply to all users in the company have a blank **User Name** field. Indicators that apply to a specific user include the user's name in the **User Name** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you set up a company-wide indicator and a user modifies the indicator later on, then a separate entry for the indicator appears in list for that user. - -2. Choose **Edit List** action. -3. To set up an indicator for a Cue that is not listed in the window, choose the **New** action, and then fill in the fields as described in the following. If you want to modify an existing indicator, go to the next step. - - | Field | Description | - |---------|---------------| - |**User Name**|If you want to set up the indicator for all users, leave this field blank.

If you want to set up the indicator for a specific user, then set this field to the user name.| - |**Table No**|Specifies the ID of the table object that contains the Cue. Use the drop down list to find the table. The drop down list includes all Cue tables in the company database.

The **Table Name** field will be automatically filled in based on your selection.| - |**Field No**|Specifies the ID of the Cue that you want to set up an indicator on. Use the drop down list to find the Cue that you want. **Note:** The Cue ID corresponds to the field number that is assigned to the Cue in the table.

The **Field Name** field is automatically filled in based on your selection| - -4. To set up the indicator for a Cue, set the fields as described in the following table. - - | Field | Description | - |---------|---------------| - |**LowStyle**|Specifies the color of the indicator when the Cue's value is below the value of the **Threshold 1** field.| - |**LowThreshold**|Specifies the value at or above which the indicator changes to the color specified by the **Middle Range Style** field.| - |**MiddleStyle**|Specifies the color of the indicator when Cue's value is greater than or equal to the value of the **Threshold 1** field but less than or equal to the value of the **Threshold 2** field.| - |**HighThreshold**|Specifies the value above which the indicator changes to the color specified by the **High Range Style** field.| - |**HighStyle**|Specifies the color to use when the Cue's value is above the value of the **Threshold 2** field.| - - The following table lists the colors that correspond to the options of the **LowStyle**, **MiddleStyle**, and **HighStyle** fields. - - | Option | Color | - |----------|---------| - |**None**|No color (same color as the Cue tile)| - |**Favorable**|Green| - |**Unfavorable**|Red| - |**Ambiguous**|Yellow| - |**Subordinate**|Gray| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Colored Indicator on Cues of Your Workspace](ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md deleted file mode 100644 index 900213fb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Schedule jobs to run automatically -description: Scheduled tasks are managed by the job queue. These jobs run reports and codeunits. You can set jobs to run one time, or on a recurring basis. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks -Job queues in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] enables users to schedule and run specific reports and codeunits. You can set jobs to run one time, or on a recurring basis. For example, you might want to run the **Salesperson - Sales Statistics** report weekly, to track sales by salesperson each week, or you might want to run the **Process Service E-mail Queue** codeunit daily, to make sure pending email messages to customers regarding their service orders are sent out in a timely manner. - -## Add Jobs to the Job Queue -The **Job Queue Entries** window lists all existing jobs. If you add a new job queue entry that you want to schedule, you must specify information about the type of object you want to run, such as a report or codeunit, and the name and object ID of the object that you want to run. You can also add parameters to specify the behavior of the job queue entry. For example, you can add a parameter to only send posted sales orders. You must have permission to run the particular report or codeunit, or an error will be returned when the job queue is run. - -Optionally, you can set a filter in the **Job Queue Category Filter** field. Job queue categories can be used to group jobs in the list. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically runs the jobs according to the specified schedules for each job queue entry. You can also start, stop, and put a job queue entry on hold manually. - -### Log Files -Errors are listed in the **Job Queue Log Entries** window that you can access from the ribbon. You can also troubleshoot job queue errors. Data that is generated when a job queue is run is stored in the database. - -### Background Posting with Job Queues -Job queues are an effective tool to schedule the running of business processes in the background. For example, there may be an instance in which multiple users are trying to post sales orders at the same time, but only one order can be processed at a time. By setting up a background posting routine, you can place the postings in a queue for processing in the background. - - Alternatively, you may want to schedule postings for hours when it is convenient for your organization. For example, it may make sense in your business to run certain routines when most of the data entry for the day has concluded. You can achieve this by setting the job queue up to run various batch post reports, such as the **Batch Post Sales Orders**, **Batch Post Sales Invoices**, and **Batch Post Sales Credit Memos** reports. - - [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports background posting for the following document types: - -- Sales: sales order, return order, credit memo, invoice - -- Purchases: purchase order, return order, credit memo, invoice - - If the job queue cannot post the sales order, the status is changed to **Error**, and the sales order is added to the list of sales orders that the user will have to handle. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you schedule a document for posting and the posting process begins, the posting routine is automatically configured to time out within two hours if the posting routine stops responding for any reason. - -You set up this use of the job queue in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window or the **Purchases & Payables** window, respectively. On the **Background Posting** FastTab, you choose the **Post Documents via Job Queue** check box and then fill in the relevant information. Here you can also use the **Job Queue Category Code** field to run all job queue entries with that code. For example, you can use a **SalesPost** category that filters to all sales orders that match any job queue that has the same category code. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you set up a job that will post and print documents, and the printer displays a dialog box, such as a request for credentials or a warning about low printer ink, your document is posted but not printed. The corresponding job queue entry eventually times out and the **Status** field is set to **Error**. Accordingly, we recommend that you do not use a printer setup that requires interaction with the display of printer dialog boxes in conjunction with background posting. - -## Use the My Job Queue Part -The **My Job Queue** part shows the job queues entries that a user has started, but which are not yet finished. By default, the part is not visible, so you have to add it to your Role Center. For more information, see [How to: Change Role Centers](change-role.md). - -In this part, you can see those documents that are being processed or that are queued for which your ID is specified in the **Assigned User ID** field. The part helps you keep track of all job queue entries, including those related to background posting. The part can tell you at a glance whether there has been an error in the posting of a document or if there are errors in a job queue entry. The part also lets you cancel a document posting if it is not running. - -## Security -Job queue entries run based on permissions. Those permissions must allow the execution of the report or codeunit. - -When a job queue is activated manually, it is run with the credentials of the user. When a job queue is activated as a scheduled task, it is run with the credentials of the server instance. When a job is run, it is run with the credentials of the job queue that activates it. However, the user who created that job queue entry must also have permissions. When a job is “run in user session” (such as during background posting), it is run with the credentials of the user who created that job. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you use the SUPER permissions set that comes with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you and your users have permissions to run all objects. In this case, access for each user is only limited by permissions for data. - -## Using Job Queues Effectively -The job queue entry record has many fields whose purpose is to carry parameters into a codeunit that you have specified to be run with a job queue. This also means that codeunits that are to be run via the job queue must be specified with the Job Queue Entry record as a parameter in the **OnRun** trigger. This helps provide an extra level of security, as this prevents users from running random codeunits via the job queue. If the user must pass parameters to a report, the only way to do this is by wrapping the report execution into a codeunit, which then parses the input parameters and enters them into the report before executing it. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setup and Administration in Dynamics NAV](admin-setup-and-administration.md) -[Setting Up Dynamics NAV](setup.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-manage-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-manage-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8421f3bd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-manage-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage, delete, or compress documents -description: Keep your historical data or delete it. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Manage Documents -A central role, such as the application administrator, must regularly deal with accumulating historic documents by deleting or compressing them. - -## Delete Documents -In certain situations, you may need to delete invoiced purchase orders that have not been deleted. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks that you have fully invoiced the deleted purchase orders. You cannot delete orders that you have not fully invoiced and received. - -Return orders are usually deleted after they are invoiced. When you post an invoice, it is transferred to the **Posted Purchase Credit Memo** window. If you selected the **Return Shipment on Credit Memo** check box in the **Purchases & Payable Setup** window, then the invoice is transferred to the **Posted Return Shipment** window. You can delete the documents using the **Delete Invd Purch. Ret. Orders** batch job. Before deleting, the batch job checks if the purchase return orders are fully shipped and invoiced. - -Blanket purchase orders are not deleted after you have processed and invoiced all the related purchase orders. You can delete blanket orders with the **Delete Invoiced Blanket Purchase Orders** batch job. - -Invoiced service orders are usually deleted automatically after having been fully invoiced. When an invoice is posted, a corresponding entry is created in the **Posted Service Invoices** window. The posted document can be viewed in the **Posted Service Invoice** window. - -Service orders are not deleted automatically, however, if the total quantity on the order has been posted not from the service order itself, but from the **Service Invoice** window. Then you may need to delete invoiced orders that were not deleted. You can do this by running the **Delete Invoiced Service Orders** batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setup and Administration in Dynamics NAV](admin-setup-and-administration.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-profiles.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-profiles.md deleted file mode 100644 index 382f0590..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-profiles.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Managing Profiles and Role Centers -description: Learn how to manage users and Role Centers in Dynamics NAV. -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: profiles, roles, role centers, user roles -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Managing Profiles and Role Centers -Profiles are collections of [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] users who share the same Role Center. A Role Center is a type of page on which you can place different parts. Each part is a container in which you can host other pages or pre-defined system parts, such as an Outlook part or parts for adding tasks, notifications, or notes. - -## About profiles and Role Centers -You use profiles to link users to pre-defined Role Centers. A Role Center is a home page for all users of a profile, which has been configured to reflect the tasks and priorities of users of the profile. For example, the Order Processor Role Center has been configured to reflect the tasks and priorities of an order processor. A Role Center provides easy access to information users need to perform their daily work. For example, the Role Center determines the Cues, or tile, that show when isers first sign in, and the links from the navigation page. - -The profile that is used appears in the header of the Role Center’s main content area. An administrator can customize this Role Center to meet the needs of a specific role in a specific company. The Order Processor Role Center can then be further personalized on a single computer to meet the needs of a person who is carrying out the job as an order processor. This person can personalize the Role Center by saving queries, adding filters, and adding or removing fields. - -Profiles and Role Centers align with the roles and responsibilities in your organization. [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] provides a set of default profiles, which each correspond to and link to a Role Center. Administrators can modify existing profiles or create new ones. - -> [!NOTE] -> Profiles are not explicitly linked to the roles and permissions that constitute the security system, but profile users must have permissions that align with their roles in the security system. For more information, see [Security Overview](/dynamics-nav/Security-Overview) in the developer and IT-pro help. - -## To create a profile -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Profiles**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Choose the **New** action to open the **New Profile Card** window. - -3. In the **Profile ID** field, enter a name that describes the intended role of the user. - -4. In the **Description** field, enter a description of the Profile ID, for example, **Order Processor**. - -5. Set the **Role Center ID** field to the Role Center that you want to assign to the profile. - -6. To make this Role Center the default for the profile, select the **Default Role Center** check box. - -7. Choose the **OK** button. . - -The procedure for modifying an existing profile is the same, except you select an existing profile in the Profiles page instead of choosing the **New** action. - - -## Copying a profile -Copying a profile can save you time if you want to use similar settings on a profile and you only want to change a few settings. - -1. Open the profile that you want to copy, and then choose the **Copy Profile** action. - -2. In **New Profile ID** field, enter a name for the profile that you want to copy. - -3. Set the **New Profile Scope** field to one of the following: - - - **System** to make the new profile available to all tenant databases that use the application. - - **Tenant** to make the new profile available to just the current tenant database. -4. Choose the **OK** buttom when done. - -## Exporting and importing profiles - -You can export and import profiles as XML files to and from the a [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] database. Exporting and importing a profile can save you time when configuring the user interface because you reuse an existing profile configuration instead of having to configure a profile from scratch. If you have a profile that is configured in a [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] database and you would like to reuse - all or some of the same profile configurations in another database, you can export the profile to an XML file. Then, you can import the profile XML file into the other database. - -- To export a profile, open search for and open the **Export Profiles** page, select the profile from the list, and then choose the **Export** action. Save the XML file to a location on your computer or network. - -- To import a profile, open search for and open the **Import Profiles** page, select the profile XML file, and then choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot import a profile that already exists in the database, even though the XML file is named differently or has different content. You must delete the existing profile before you can import the new profile. - - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md) -[Customizing the User Interface](ui-customizing-overview.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-responding-to-requests-about-personal-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-responding-to-requests-about-personal-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index 78ce8518..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-responding-to-requests-about-personal-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Responding to Requests About Personal Data -description: You must respond to data subject requests. -author: bholtorf - -ms.author: bholtorf -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 03/13/2018 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.service: excel ---- - -# Responding to Requests About Personal Data -Data subjects can request several types of actions regarding their personal data. If you have classified the sensitivity of your data, and are sure they are correct, an administrator can respond to requests by using the options under **Data Privacy** on the **Manage Users, User Groups, and Permissions** Role Center or, if you are using the Windows client, in the **IT Manager** Role Center. For more information about classifying data and classifying data sensitivity, see [Classifying Data](/dynamics-nav/classifying-data) and [Classifying Data Sensitivity](admin-classifying-data-sensitivity.md). - -The following table provides examples of the types of requests you can respond to. - -> [!Note] -> While we provide capabilities for responding to these types of request, and thereby accessing, personal data, it is your responsibility to ensure that personal and sensitive data are located and classified appropriately. - -|Request Type|Description and Suggested Response| -|-----|-----| -|Portability requests|A data subject can make a data portability request, meaning, in part, that you must export the data subject's personal data from your systems and provide it in in a structured, commonly used format. To respond to these requests you can use the **Data Privacy Utility** to export personal data to an Excel file or a RapidStart configuration package. Using Excel, you can edit the personal data and save it in a commonly used, machine-readable format, such as .csv or .xml. For RapidStart configuration packages, you can configure master data tables and their related tables that contain personal data.

**Note:** When you export data you specify a minimum sensitivity level. The export will include the minimum and all sensitivity levels above it. For example, if you choose to export data that is classified as Personal the export will also include data that is classified as Sensitive. | -|Requests for deletion|A data subject can request that you delete their personal data. There are several ways to delete personal data using the customization capabilities, but the decision and implementation is your responsibility. In some cases, you may choose to directly edit your data, for example deleting a contact and then running the Delete Canceled Interaction batch job to delete interactions for the contact.

**Note:** If you have specified a date in the **Allow Document Deletion Before** field on the **Sales & Receivables Setup** or **Purchases & Payables Setup** pages, you might need to change the date so that you can delete posted sales and purchase documents that you have printed and that have posting dates on or before that date.| -|Requests for correction|A data subject can request that you correct inaccurate personal data. There are several ways to do so. In some cases, you can export lists to Excel to quickly bulk-edit multiple records, and then import the updated data. For more information, see [Exporting your Business Data to Excel](/dynamics-nav-app/about-export-data). You can also manually edit fields that contain personal data, such as editing information about a customer in the Customer card. However, transaction records such as general, customer, and tax ledger entries are essential to the integrity of the enterprise resource planning system. If you store personal data in business transaction records, consider using the customization capabilities to modify such personal data.| - -## Restrict Data Processing for a Data Subject -A data subject can request that you temporarily stop processing their personal data. To honor such requests, you can mark their record as blocked due to privacy to stop processing their data. When a record is marked as blocked, you cannot create new transactions that use that record. For example, you cannot create a new invoice for a customer when either the customer or the salesperson is blocked. To mark a data subject as blocked, open the card for the data subject, for example the Customer, Vendor, or Contact cards, and choose the **Privacy Blocked** check box. You may need to choose **Show More** to display the field. - -## Handling Data About Minors -If a contact person's age is below the age of legal consent according to the laws in your region, you can indicate that by choosing the **Minor** check box on the **Contact** card. When you do, the **Privacy Blocked** check box is automatically selected. When you receive consent from the minor's parent or legal guardian, you can choose the **Parental Consent Received** check box to unblock the contact. Though you can process personal data for minors, you cannot use the profiling functionality in Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Sales. - -> [!Note] -> The Change Log can record details such as when, and by whom, the **Parental Consent Received** check box was chosen. An administrator can set that up by using the **Change Log Setup** guide, and also choosing the **Log Modification for Parental Consent Received** check box on the **Contact** card. For more information, see [Logging Changes](/dynamics-nav-app/across-log-changes). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Classifying Data](/dynamics-nav/classifying-data) -[Classifying Data Sensitivity](admin-classifying-data-sensitivity.md) -[Exporting your Business Data to Excel](about-export-data.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-setup-and-administration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-setup-and-administration.md deleted file mode 100644 index 654e961c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-setup-and-administration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Administrative tasks in Dynamics NAV -description: Some tasks in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] requires central administration and setup. See what they are and learn what to do. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setup and Administration in Dynamics NAV -Central administration tasks are usually performed by one role in the company. The scope of these tasks can depend on the company's size and the administrator's job responsibilities. These tasks can include managing database synchronization of job and email queues, setting up users, customizing the user interface, and managing encryption keys. - -Entering the correct setup values from the start is important to the success of any new business software. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a number of setup guides that help you set up core data. For more information, see [Setting Up Dynamics NAV](setup.md). - - - -A super user or an administrator can set up the Data Exchange Framework to enable users to export and import data in bank and payroll files, for example for various cash management processes. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Add users, manage permissions and access to data, assign roles.|[Users, Profiles, and Role Centers in Dynamics NAV](admin-users-profiles-roles.md)| -|Track all direct modifications that users make to data in the database to identify the origin of errors and data changes.|[Logging Changes in Dynamics NAV](across-log-changes.md)| -|Support your setup decisions with recommendations for selected fields that are known to potentially cause the solution to be inefficient if set up incorrectly|[Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md)| -|Expose pages, codeunits, and queries as web services.|[How to: Publish a Web Service](across-how-publish-web-service.md)| -|Set up an SMTP server to enable e-mail communication in and out of Dynamics NAV| [How to: Set Up Email Manually or Using the Assisted Setup](madeira-how-setup-email.md)| -|Enter single or recurring requests to run reports or codeunits.|[Use Job Queues to Schedule Tasks](admin-job-queues-schedule-tasks.md)| -|Manage, delete, or compress documents|[Manage Documents](admin-manage-documents.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Functionality](madeira-business-functionality.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts.md deleted file mode 100644 index b542356f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-synchronize-outlook-contacts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Share contacts between Dynamics NAV and Outlook| Microsoft Docs -description: You can share contacts between Outlook and Business Central. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: dynamics-nav-2018 -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: contacts, Microsoft 365 -ms.date: 04/09/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Synchronize Contacts in Dynamics NAV with Contacts in Microsoft Outlook -You can see the same contacts in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as you see in Outlook if you set up contact synchronization. For example, if you are a sales person, you might do some of your work in Outlook and some of your work in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. If the contacts are the same in both places, your work is more straightforward. - -A dedicated folder in Outlook makes contacts easy to find, and you can set a filter to synchronize only the contacts from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] that you want to see in Outlook. Once the contact synchronization is set up, you can start synchronization manually or set up an automatic synchronization that will keep the contacts in sync on a scheduled basis. - -## Set Up Synchronization -You set up how you want to synchronize contacts with Outlook in the **Exchange Sync. Setup** window in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. As a prerequisite, your user profile in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] must specify your Microsoft 365 email account. You can check this in the **Office 365 Authentication** section of your user profile in the **Users** list. - -Then, in the **Exchange Sync. Setup** window, you can validate that the connection to Exchange is working and then set up contact synchronization. Open the **Contact Sync. Setup** window and start the synchronization. Optionally, set a filter for which contacts to synchronize between [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and Outlook. For example, you can set a filter on name, type, company, or similar. You can also change the default name of the folder that the contacts will synchronize to in Outlook. The default name is *Dynamics NAV*. - -Once this synchronization has been set up, any changes to that you make to the contact in either Outlook or in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is synchronized to the other. - -Each of your coworkers can also set up their own Exchange synchronization and set their own filter on which contacts to synchronize. - -## Synchronize Contacts -If you are used to working with contacts in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], then you will find it easy to start the synchronization manually whenever it suits you from the **Contacts** list. Simply choose the **Sync with Office 365** action, and then decide if you want to change the filter that you have set up. When you choose the OK button, the synchronization starts immediately, and the latest changes are applied to your contacts in Outlook. - -In the **Contacts** list, you can synchronize contacts in two ways: - -* **Sync with Office 365** - - This action synchronizes all changes from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to Microsoft 365 since the previous synchronization, based on the last modified date. Any new contacts from Microsoft 365 will be synchronized back to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as well. This is typically faster than doing a full sync. - -* **Full Sync with Office 365** - - This action synchronizes all contacts in both directions regardless of the last sync date and last modified date. - -In both cases, contacts are only synchronized from Outlook if they have the required fields filled in. The required fields to synchronize to Microsoft 365 are **Name**, **Email address** and they must be of type Person. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is the master of the contact information, so the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] contact information will be saved in the event of duplicates. - -In Outlook, the contacts from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] are shown in a folder under **Other contacts** in the **People** view. If you are not familiar with the People view in Outlook, then you can get to it from the navigation options in the bottom left corner of Outlook. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Getting Started](across-get-started.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Using contacts (People) in Outlook on the web](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Using-contacts-People-in-Outlook-on-the-web-1e3438c7-26b2-420c-87de-3cea9d31b5cb?appver=OWB150) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-users-profiles-roles.md b/dynamics-nav-app/admin-users-profiles-roles.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9c27054e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/admin-users-profiles-roles.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Managing Users, Profiles, and Role Centers" -description: Learn how to manage users and Role Centers. -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Users, Profiles, and Role Centers -The people in your company who have access to [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] are all assigned a *profile* that gives them access to a *Role Center*. As an administrator, you can assign and change profiles in [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)], and you can add and remove users as part of your [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] subscription. - -## Adding Users -To add users in [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)], your company's Microsoft 365 administrator must first create the users in the Microsoft 365 admin center. For more information, see [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md). - -## Profiles -Profiles are collections of [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] users who share the same Role Center. A Role Center is a type of page on which you can place different parts. Each part is a container in which you can host other pages or pre-defined system parts, such as an Outlook part or parts for adding tasks, notifications, or notes. For more information, see [Managing Profiles](admin-profiles.md). - -## Configuration and Personalization -The concept of UI customization in [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] is divided in two: - -- Configuration, performed by the administrator - - The administrator configures the user interface for multiple users by customizing the user interface for a profile that the users are assigned to. For more information, see [Configuring the User Interface for Users](admin-configure-user-interface.md). - -- Personalization, performed by users - - Users personalize the user interface of their personal version by customizing the user interface under their own user logon. This personalization can be deleted by the administrator. For more information, see, [Personalizing Workspaces](ui-personalization-overview.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md) -[Customizing the User Interface](ui-customizing-overview.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5fe66ef2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Assembly Management - description: Support companies that supply products to their customers by combining components in simple processes without the need of manufacturing functionality but with features to assemble items that integrate with existing features, such as sales, planning, reservations, and warehousing. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Assembly Management -To support companies that supply products to their customers by combining components in simple processes without the need of manufacturing functionality, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes features to assemble items that integrate with existing features, such as sales, planning, reservations, and warehousing. - - An assembly item is defined as a sellable item that contains an assembly BOM. For more information, see [How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md). - - Assembly orders are internal orders, just like production orders, that are used to manage the assembly process and to connect the sales requirements with the involved warehouse activities. Assembly orders differ from other order types because they involve both output and consumption when posting. The assembly order header behaves similarly to a sales order line, and the assembly order lines behave similarly to consumption journal lines. - - To support a just-in-time inventory strategy and the ability to customize products to customer requests, assembly orders may be automatically created and linked as soon as the sales order line is created. The link between the sales demand and the assembly supply enables sales order processors to customize the assembly item on the fly, promise delivery dates according to component availability, and to post output and shipment of the assembled item directly from their sales order interface. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - - On one sales order line, you can sell a quantity that is available and must be picked from stock together with a quantity that must be assembled to the order. Certain rules exist to govern the distribution of such quantities to ensure that assemble-to-order quantities take priority over inventory quantities in partial shipping. For more information, see the “Combination Scenarios” section in [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - - Special functionality exists to govern the shipping of assemble-to-order quantities. When an assemble-to-order quantity is ready to be shipped, the warehouse worker in charge posts an inventory pick for the sales order line(s) in question. This, in turn, creates an inventory movement for the components, posts the assembly output, and the sales order shipment. For more information, see the "Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section in [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Learn about the difference between assembling items right before shipping sales orders and assembling items that are intended for storage.|[Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md)| -|Fill in fields on location cards and in inventory setup to define how items flow to and from the assembly department.|[How to: Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operations Areas](warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md)| -|Customize an assembly item to a customer’s request during the sales process, and convert to a sale when accepted.|[How to: Quote an Assemble-to-Order Sale](assembly-how-to-quote-an-assemble-to-order-sale.md)| -|Combine components to create an item in a simple process, to order or to stock.|[How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md)| -|Sell assembly items that are not currently available by creating a linked assembly order to supply the full or partial sales order quantity.|[How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md)| -|When some assemble-to-order items are already in inventory, deduct that quantity from the assembly order and reserve it from inventory.|[How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows](assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md)| -|When you are selling assembly items from inventory and all items are not available, initiate an assembly order to automatically supply a part or all of the sales order quantity.|[How to: Sell Assemble-to-Order Items and Inventory Items Together](assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md)| -|Undo a posted assembly order, for example because the order was posted with mistakes that must be corrected.|[How to: Undo Assembly Posting](assembly-how-to-undo-assembly-posting.md)| -|Learn about the difference between assembly BOMs and production BOMs and the involved processing differences.|[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md)| -|Learn how assembly consumption and output are handled when you post assembly orders and how the derived item and resource costs are processed and distributed to the general ledger.|[Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md deleted file mode 100644 index a2c434b6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock - description: Assembly items can be supplied either by assembling them when they are ordered or by assembling them to be kept in inventory until they are need on a sales order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock -Assembly items can be supplied in the following two processes: - -- Assemble to order. -- Assemble to stock. - -## Assemble to Order -You typically use *assemble to order* for items that you do not want to stock because you expect to customize them to customer requests or because you want to minimize the inventory carrying cost. The supporting functionality includes: - -- Ability to customize assembly items when taking a sales order. -- Overview of availability of the assembly item and its components. -- Ability to reserve assembly components immediately to guarantee order fulfillment. -- Function to determine profitability of the customized order by rolling up price and cost. -- Integration to the warehouse to make assembly and shipping easier. -- Ability to assemble to order at the point of making a sales quote or a blanket sales order. -- Ability to combine inventory quantities with assemble-to-order quantities. - -In the assemble-to-order process, the item is assembled in response to a sales order and with a one-to-one link between the assembly order and the sales order. - -When you enter an assemble-to-order item on a sales line, an assembly order is automatically created with a header that is based on the sales line and with lines that are based on the item’s assembly BOM multiplied by the order quantity. You can use the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window to see the linked assembly order lines to support you in customizing the assembly item and in a delivery date that is based on component availability information. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Although it is not part of the default process, you can sell inventory quantities with the assemble-to-order quantities. For more information, see [How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows](assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md). - - To enable this process, the **Assembly Policy** field on the item card must be **Assemble-to-Order**. - -## Assemble to Stock - You typically use *assemble to stock* for items that you want to assemble ahead of sales, such as to prepare for a kit campaign, and keep in stock until they are ordered. These items are usually standard items such as packaged kits that you do not offer to customize to customer requests. - - In the assemble-to-stock process, the item is assembled without an immediate sales demand and is stocked in the warehouse as an inventory item for later sale or consumption as a subassembly. For more information, see [How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md). From this point, the item is picked and processed as a single item and is treated like a finished production item. - - When you enter an assemble-to-stock item on a sales line, the line like any other item sold from inventory. For example, availability is checked for the assembly item only. - -> [!NOTE] -> Although it is not part of the default process, you can assemble an item to order even if it is set up to be assembled to stock. For more information, see [How to: Sell Assemble-to-Order Items and Inventory Items Together](assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md). - - To enable this process, the **Assembly Policy** field on the item card must be **Assemble-to-Stock**. - -## Combination Scenarios - A general principle in Assembly Management is that when combined on a sales order line, assemble-to-order quantities must be shipped before inventory quantities. - - If an assembly order is linked to a sales order line, then the value in the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field on the sales order line is copied to the **Quantity to Assemble** field, via the **Quantity** field on the assembly order header. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - - In addition, the value in the **Quantity to Assemble** field is related to the **Qty. to Ship** field on the sales order line, and this relation manages the shipping of assemble-to-order quantities, both partially and completely. This is true both when the full sales line quantity is assembled to order and in combination scenarios where one part of the sales line quantity is assembled to order and another part is shipped from inventory. However, in the combination scenario, you have additional flexibility when shipping partially in that you can modify the **Quantity to Assemble** field, within predefined rules, to specify how many units to ship partially from inventory and how many to ship partially by assembling to order. - - If the full sales line quantity must be assembled to order and shipped, then the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field is copied to **Quantity to Assemble** field on the linked assembly order when you change the quantity to ship. This ensures that the quantity being shipped is fully supplied by the assemble-to-order quantity. - - However, in combination scenarios, the full value in the **Qty. to Ship** is not copied to the **Quantity to Assemble** field on the assembly order header. Instead, a default value is inserted in the **Quantity to Assemble** field that is calculated from the **Qty. to Ship** field according to a predefined rule that ensures shipment of assemble-to-order quantities first. - - If you want to deviate from this default, for example because you only want to assemble more or less of the quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field, then you can modify the **Quantity to Assemble** field, but only within predefined rules, as illustrated below - - An example why you would want to modify the quantity to assemble is that you want to partially post shipment of inventory quantities before the assembly output can be shipped. - - The following explains the rules that define the minimum and maximum values that you can enter manually in the **Quantity to Assemble** to deviate from the default value in a combination scenario. The table shows a combination scenario where the **Qty. to Ship** field on the linked sales order line is changed from 7 to 4, and the **Quantity to Assemble** is therefore defaulted to 4. - - -| Status | Sales Order Line | Assembly Order Header | -|---------|------------------|------------------------| -| | **Quantity** | **Qty. to Ship** | -| Initial | 10 | 7 | -| Change | | 4 | - - Based on the above situation, you can only modify the **Quantity to Assemble** field as follows: - -- The minimum quantity that you can enter is 1. This is because you must at least assemble one unit to be able to sell the four units, assuming that the remaining three are available in the inventory. -- The maximum quantity that you can enter is 4. This is to ensure that you do not assemble more of this assemble-to-order item than what is needed on the sale. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 869873cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Assemble Items - description: If the **Replenishment System** field on the item card contains **Assembly**, then the default method of supplying the item is to assemble it from defined components and potentially by a defined resource. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Assemble Items -If the **Replenishment System** field on the item card contains **Assembly**, then the default method of supplying the item is to assemble it from defined components and potentially by a defined resource. - -The components and resources that go into this kind of an assembly item must be defined in an assembly BOM. For more information, see [How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md). - -Assembly items can be set up for two different assembly processes: - -- Assemble to stock. -- Assemble to order. - -You typically use **Assemble to Stock** for items that you want to assemble ahead of sales, such as to prepare for a kit campaign, and keep in stock until they are ordered. These items are usually standard items such as packaged kits that you do not offer to customize to customer requests. - -You typically use **Assemble to Order** for items that you do not want to stock because you expect to customize them to customer requests or because you want to minimize the inventory carrying cost by supplying them just in time. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - -For more information about how to set up an assembly item, see [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -These setup options are default settings that manage how sales and assembly order lines are initially processed. You can depart from these defaults and supply the assembly item in the most optimal way when processing a sale. For more information, see [How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows](assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md) and [How to: Sell Assemble-to-Order Items and Inventory Items Together](assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Assembly components are handled in a special way in basic warehouse configurations. For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section in [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -In this procedure, you create and process an assembly order for items that are assembled to stock, which means without a linked sales order. The steps include initiating the assembly order, handling potential component availability issues, and partially posting assembly item output. - -## To assemble an item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assembly Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. The **New Assembly Order** window opens. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. In the **Item No.** field, select the assembly item that you want to process. The field is filtered to show only items that are set up for assembly, which means that they have assembly BOMs assigned. -5. In the **Quantity** field, enter how many units of the item that you want assembled. - - > [!NOTE] - > If one or more components are not available to fulfill the entered assembly item quantity on the defined due date, then the **Assembly Availability** window automatically opens to provide detailed information about how many assembly items can be assembled based on component availability. For more information, see [How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md). When you close the window, the assembly order is created with availability alerts on the affected component lines. - - The assembly order lines are automatically filled with the contents of the assembly BOM and with line quantities according to the assembly order header. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the **Assembly Availability** window opened when you filled in the assembly order header, then each affected assembly order line contains a **Yes** in the **Avail. Warning** field with a link to detailed availability information. For more information, see Check Availability. You can resolve a component availability issue by postponing the starting date, replacing the component with another item, or selecting an available substitution if one is defined. - -6. In the **Quantity to Assemble** field, enter how many units of the assembly item that you want to post as output the next time that you post the assembly order. This quantity can be lower than the value in the **Quantity** field to reflect a partial output posting. - - > [!NOTE] - > To make sure that component consumption posting matches the assembly item output posting, the quantity fields in the assembly order lines automatically adjust to the value that you enter in the **Quantity to Assemble** field. -7. On assembly order lines of type **Item** or **Resource**, in the **Quantity to Consume** field, specify how many units you want to post as consumed the next time that you post the assembly order. By default, the expected quantity to consume according to the assembly BOM and the assembly order header quantity is inserted, but you can increase or decrease it, such as to reflect an overconsumption of components or that extra resources were used. -8. When you are ready to partially or fully post, choose the **Post** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > If warnings are still present in any of the assembly order lines, then the posting is blocked. A message about which component or components are not in inventory is displayed. - -After posting succeeds, the assembly item is posted as output to the location code and potential bin code that are defined on the assembly order. For manually created assembly orders, the location may be copied from the **Default Location for Orders** setup field. For assemble-to-order flows, the location code may be copied from the sales order line. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-quote-an-assemble-to-order-sale.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-quote-an-assemble-to-order-sale.md deleted file mode 100644 index fe0e2a16..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-quote-an-assemble-to-order-sale.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Quote an Assemble-to-Order Sale - description: You can use assembly management to customize an assembly item to a customer’s request during the sales process. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Quote an Assemble-to-Order Sale -You can use assembly management to customize an assembly item to a customer’s request during the sales process. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - -As when you sell any other type of item, you can also create a sales quote for a customized assembly item before converting it to a sales order. This process involves several extra steps when you compare it to creating a regular sales quote, and it uses a variation of a linked assembly order, which is an assembly quote. - -> [!NOTE] -> Like all types of quotes, the quantities on assembly quotes are not used in availability, planning, or reservations. - -## To create a sales quote for an assemble-to-order item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Quote**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a sales quote line with one line for an assembly item. For more information, see [How to: Make Offers](sales-how-make-offers.md). -3. In the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field, enter the full quantity. - - > [!NOTE] - > You should not quote a partial quantity. Therefore, you must enter the same quantity that you entered in the **Quantity** field on the sales quote line. - -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Line**, choose **Assemble to Order**, and then choose **Assemble-to-Order Lines**. Alternatively, choose the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field on the line. -5. In the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window, review or modify the assembly order lines according to the quote that the customer is requesting. If you want to view more information, choose the **Show Document** action to open the complete blanket quote order. You cannot change the contents of most fields, and you cannot post. -6. When you have adjusted the assembly order lines according to the quote, close the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window to return to the **Sales Quote** window. -7. If the customer accepts the quote, then create a sales order for the quoted assembly item. For more information, see [How to: Make Offers](sales-how-make-offers.md). The linked assembly quote and any customizations are linked to that new sales order to prepare for assembly of the item or items to be sold. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md deleted file mode 100644 index 25786b09..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Sell Assemble-to-Order Items and Inventory Items Together - description: If an assembly item is set up for assemble-to-stock, then the default sales order process assumes that the item is already assembled and can be picked from inventory, if it is available. But if a part (or all) of the quantity is not available, then you have the flexibility to create an assembly order for the remaining quantity on the fly. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Sell Assemble-to-Order Items and Inventory Items Together -If the **Assembly Policy** field on the item card of an assembly item contains **Assemble-to-Stock**, then the default sales order process assumes that the item is already assembled and can be picked from inventory, if it is available. Therefore, no assembly order is automatically created and linked to the sales order line. However, if a part (or all) of the quantity is not available, then you have the flexibility to create an assembly order for the remaining quantity by filling in the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field on the sales order line. In this manner, you can assemble the item to order although it is set up to be assembled to stock by default. - -Similar flexibility exists when you are selling items to be assembled to the order and a part of the quantity is in inventory, which you want to deduct from the assembly order. For more information, see [How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows](assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Certain rules apply to the **Qty. to Ship** field on sales order lines that contain a combination of assemble-to-order quantities and inventory quantities. For more information, see the Combination Scenarios section in [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure does not include the standard sales order steps that you need to follow before you create an assembly order for unavailable quantities. - -## To sell assemble-to-order items and inventory items together -1. On a sales order line for an item that is set up to be assembled to stock, enter a quantity in the **Quantity** field that exceeds inventory. The **Check Availability** window appears. For more information, see [How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md). -2. Note the **Total Quantity** field (a negative value), which you will enter in the next step. -3. In the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field, enter the value from the previous step. -4. Perform any changes to the assembly components. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). -5. Proceed to release the sales order, to prepare it for picking of the inventory items and for assembly of the unavailable items. For more information about these standard assembly steps, see [How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md). - -> [!CAUTION] -> The **Bin Code** field on the sales order may be prefilled according to the **Assemble-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** field or the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field on the location card. In that case, the **Bin Code** field on the sales order line may be incorrect in this combination of assemble-to-order and assemble-to-stock quantities. It is a good idea to examine the **Bin Code** field and make sure that the placement works for all quantities. Alternatively, enter the two different quantities on separate sales order lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md deleted file mode 100644 index 777208d6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows - description: If the item is set up for card of assemble-to-order, then the default sales order process assumes that the item is not in inventory and must be assembled for that specific sales order. Therefore, a linked assembly order is automatically created when you add the item to a sales order line. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows -If the **Assembly Policy** field on the item card of an assembly item contains **Assemble-to-Order**, then the default sales order process assumes that the item is not in inventory and must be assembled for that specific sales order. Therefore, a linked assembly order is automatically created when you add the item to a sales order line. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). However, if a part of the sales order quantity is already available in inventory, then you can decrease the assembly order quantity by changing the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field on the sales order line. - -This scenario is rare because assemble-to-order items are expected to always be customized, and the chance that they are in inventory in the configuration that is requested by another customer is low. However, if a company does have assemble-to-order quantities in inventory because of returns or order cancellations, then these quantities should be picked and sold before new ones are assembled. - -> [!NOTE] -> No functionality exists on sales orders that automatically alerts or helps you deduct assembly order quantities that are already available. Instead, you must monitor availability information, such as in the **Sales Line Details** FactBox. - -Similar functionality is available when you are selling assembly items from inventory and a part or all of the quantity is unavailable and can be supplied by an assembly order. For more information, see [How to: Sell Assemble-to-Order Items and Inventory Items Together](assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Certain rules apply to the **Qty. to Ship** field on sales order lines that contain a combination of assemble-to-order quantities and inventory quantities. For more information, see the Combination Scenarios section in [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -In this procedure, you replace assemble-to-order quantities with inventory quantities on a sales order line. The steps include detecting that availability exists, deducting that quantity from the linked assembly order, and then reserving the inventory quantity to make sure that it is picked and shipped for the order. - -## To sell inventory items in assemble-to-order flows -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a sales order. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -3. On a sales order line for an assemble-to-order item, in the **Quantity** field, enter the demanded quantity. -4. In the **Sales Line Details** FactBox, determine if all or some of the demanded quantity is available. -5. In the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field, deduct the available quantity so that only the unavailable quantity is assembled to the order. The **Reserved Quantity** field is decreased accordingly to reflect that the order-to-order link, or reservation, only applies to the quantity to be assembled. -6. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Functions**, and then choose the **Reserve** action. -7. In the **Reservation** window, select the item ledger entry line or lines that contain the available quantities, choose the **Reserve from Current Line** action, and then choose the **OK** button. - - In the **Sales Order** window, the **Reserved Quantity** field now shows that the whole order line quantity is reserved. The **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field still reflects the subquantity that has to be assembled. - -8. Release the sales order for picking of the inventory items and for assembly of the unavailable items. For more information, see [How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md). - -> [!CAUTION] -> The **Bin Code** field on the sales order may be prefilled according to the **Assemble-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** or the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field on the location card. In that case, the **Bin Code** field on the sales order line may be incorrect in this combination of assemble-to-order and assemble-to-stock quantities. It is a good idea to look in the **Bin Code** field and ensure that the placement works for all quantities. Alternatively, enter the two different quantities on separate sales order lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Reserve Items](inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md deleted file mode 100644 index 75adbc2d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Sell Items Assembled to Order - description: If the item is set up for assemble-to-order, then the item is not expected to be in inventory, and it must be assembled specifically to a sales order. When you enter the item on a sales order line, then an assembly order is automatically created and linked to the sales order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order -If the **Assembly Policy** field on the item card of an assembly item is **Assemble-to-Order**, then the item is not expected to be in inventory, and it must be assembled specifically to a sales order. When you enter the item on a sales order line, then an assembly order is automatically created and linked to the sales order. - -> [!NOTE] -> If some assemble-to-order items are already in inventory, then you can deduct that quantity from the assembly order and reserve it from inventory. For more information, see [How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows](assembly-how-to-sell-assemble-to-order-items-and-inventory-items-together.md). - -In this procedure, you process the sale of an item that will be assembled according to specifications that are requested by the customer. The steps include initiating the sales order line, customizing the assembly item by editing its components and resources, checking availability to establish a delivery date, and releasing the sales order to be assembled and immediately shipped. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure does not include the standard sales order steps before the step where you enter the assemble-to-order item on a sales order line. - -## To sell an item that is assembled to order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a sales order. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -3. In the **No.** field, enter an item that is set up to be assembled to order. -4. In the **Location Code** field, define which location the item will be sold from. The assembly process will occur at that location. -5. In the **Quantity** field, enter how many units to sell. - - > [!NOTE] - > If one or more components of the requested assembly item quantity are not available, then a detailed availability warning window opens. For more information, see Assembly Availability. - - An assembly order is now automatically created and linked to the sales order line. The due date of this assembly order is synchronized with the shipment date of the sales order line. - - The quantity to sell is copied to the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field, which indicates that the item setup expects the full quantity on the sales line to be assembled to the order. You can decrease the quantity to assemble to order, such as if you know that some items are already available. For more information, see [How to: Sell Inventory Items in Assemble-to-Order Flows](assembly-how-to-sell-inventory-items-in-assemble-to-order-flows.md). - -6. To reflect that the customer wants an additional item in a kit, on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Line** action, choose the **Assemble to Order** action, and then choose the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** action to view and change the standard assembly components. Alternatively, choose the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field. -7. In the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window, create a new line of type **Item** for the requested additional kit content. The line represents an additional assembly component. - - You could also customize the order by increasing the quantity of one standard item in the kit. You can do this by increasing the value in the **Quantity Per** field on the specific assembly order line. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window only contains the basic fields that a salesperson is expected to use to customize the component list, add item tracking numbers, or to solve component availability issues. To see more assembly order information, such as the assembly order starting date, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Show Documents**. This opens a full view of the assembly order that is linked to the sales order line. You cannot change the contents of most fields on the assembly order header, and you cannot post assembly output from it because you must use shipment posting of the sales order line. - > - > On the header of linked assembly orders, only the **Starting Date** field can be changed to enable assembly workers to specify a date that is earlier than the due date when they will start the process. All fields on the lines of the linked assembly order can be changed so that warehouse workers can enter consumption figures during the process. - -8. Review or react to component availability issues. For example, select an available substitute item or establish a later due date. -9. Close the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window. The linked assembly order is now ready to start to assemble the customized items by the due date. -10. On the sales order, choose the **Release** action to notify the assembly department that the assembly process can start. -11. In the assembly department, perform the steps of assembling the items that are sold in this procedure. For more information, see [How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-undo-assembly-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-undo-assembly-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6dd77649..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/assembly-how-to-undo-assembly-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Undo Assembly Posting - description: Sometimes you may need to undo a posted assembly order, for example when the order was posted with mistakes that must be corrected, or because it should not have been posted in the first place and must be rolled back. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Undo Assembly Posting -Sometimes you may need to undo a posted assembly order, for example when the order was posted with mistakes that must be corrected, or because it should not have been posted in the first place and must be rolled back. - -When you undo a posted assembly order, a set of corrective item ledger entries is created to reverse the original entries. Each positive output entry for the assembly item is reversed by a negative output entry. Each negative consumption entry for an assembly component is reversed by a positive consumption entry. Fixed cost application is automatically created between the corrective and original entries to ensure exact cost reversal. - -When you undo a fully posted assembly order, then you can choose to recreate the assembly order to its original state, for example to make corrections before reposting it. Alternatively, you can choose to not recreate the assembly order. - -When you undo a partially posted assembly order, then all affected quantity fields, such as the **Assembled Quantity**, **Consumed Quantity**, and **Remaining Quantity** fields are restored to the values they had before the posting in question. - -To recreate or restore assembly orders, the following conditions must apply to the assembly item that was output in the original posting: - -- It must still be in inventory, that is, it is not sold or otherwise consumed by outbound transactions. -- It must not be reserved. -- It must exist in the bin that it was output to. - -In addition, existing assembly orders can only be restored if the number of lines and the sequence of lines on the original assembly order are not changed. - -> [!TIP] -> To solve conflicts due to line changes, you can manually revert the changes on the lines in question before undoing the related posted assembly order. Alternatively, you can post the assembly order fully and then select to recreate it when undoing the posting. - -The following procedure describes how to undo posted assembly orders where the items were assembled to stock. If you want to undo posted assembly orders where the items were assembled to a sales order, then you must use the **Undo Shipment** function on the posted shipment that relates to the posted assembly order. For more information, see [How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md). The undoing of the posted assembly order then happens automatically in the same way as described in this topic. - -## To undo posting of an assembly order -1. To undo a fully or partially posted assembly order, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Assembly Orders**, and choose the related link. - - The **Posted Assembly Orders** window opens showing one or more posted assembly orders that are posted from the assembly order in question. Each partial posting creates a separate posted assembly order. -2. Open the posted assembly order that you want to undo, and then choose the **Undo Assembly** action. - - If the posted assembly order that you want to undo relates to a fully posted assembly order that is now deleted, then you have the option to recreate it, typically because you want to reprocess it. -3. If you want to recreate the assembly order, choose the **Yes** button. To undo the posting without recreating the related assembly order, choose the **No** button. - -The **Reversed** field on the assembly order header changes to **Yes**. The assembly order posting is now reversed, and you can proceed to process the entire assembly order if you chose to recreate it or the open assembly order that you have restored to its original state. - -> [!NOTE] -> To restore quantities from multiple partial postings in an assembly order, you must undo all the posted assembly orders in question by following steps 1 through 3 above for each posted assembly order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md) -[How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md deleted file mode 100644 index 749ccded..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately -description: Describes how your inventory value is reconciled with the general ledger. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bank account balance, bank statement -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately -To reconcile bank accounts in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] with statements received from the bank, you must fill in the lines in the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also reconcile bank accounts in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window. Any open bank account ledger entries related to the applied customer or vendor ledger entries will be closed when you choose the **Post Payments and Reconcile Bank Account** action. This means that the bank account is automatically reconciled for payments that you post with the journal. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -To enable import of bank statements as bank feeds, you must first set up and enable the bank data conversion service. For more information, see [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md). - -The lines in the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window are divided into two panes. The **Bank Statement Lines** pane shows either imported bank transactions or ledger entries with outstanding payments. The **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane shows the ledger entries in the bank account. - -The activity of finding and applying entries to be reconciled is referred to as *matching*. You can choose to perform matching automatically by using the **Match Automatically** function. Alternatively, you can manually select lines in both panes to link each bank statement line to one or more related bank account ledger entries, and then use the **Match Manually** function. The **Applied** checkbox is selected on lines where entries match. - -You can fill in the **Bank Statement Lines** pane in the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window in the following ways: - -* Automatically, by using the **Import Bank Statement** function to fill in the lines according to actual bank statements based on a file provided by the bank. -* Manually, by using the **Suggest Lines** function to fill in the lines with ledger entries for invoices that have outstanding payments. - -When the value in the **Total Balance** field in the **Bank Statement Lines** pane equals the value in the **Balance To Reconcile** field in the **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane, you can choose the **Post** action to reconcile the applied bank account ledger entries. Any non-applied bank account ledger entries will remain in the window, indicating that payments processed for the bank account are not reflected in the latest bank statement, or that some payments were received on checks. - -> [!NOTE] -> If bank statement lines relate to check ledger entries, then you cannot use the matching functions. Instead, you must choose the **Apply Entries** action, and then select the relevant check ledger entry to match the bank statement line with. - -## To fill bank reconciliation lines by importing a bank statement -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Account Reconciliation**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Bank Account No.** field, select the relevant bank account. The bank account ledger entries that exist on the bank account appear in the **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane. -4. In the **Statement Date** field, enter the date of the statement from the bank. -5. In the **Statement Ending Balance** field, enter the balance of the statement from the bank. -6. If you have a bank statement file, choose the **Import Bank Statement** action. -7. Locate the file, and then choose the **Open** button to import the bank transactions into the lines of the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window. - -## To fill bank reconciliation lines with the Suggest Lines function -1. In the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window, choose the **Suggest Lines** action. -2. In the **Starting Date** field, enter the earliest posting date for the ledger entries to be reconciled. -3. In the **Ending Date** field, enter the latest posting date for the ledger entries to be reconciled. -4. Select the **Include Checks** check box to any suggest check ledger entries instead of the corresponding bank account ledger entries. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To match bank statement lines with bank account ledger entries automatically -1. In the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window, choose the **Match Automatically**. **The Match Bank Entries** window opens. -2. In the **Transaction Date Tolerance (Days)** field, specify the span of days before and after the bank account ledger entry posting date within which the function will search for matching transaction dates in the bank statement. - - If you enter 0 or leave the field blank, then the **Match Automatically** function will only search for matching transaction dates on the bank account ledger entry posting date. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - All bank statement lines and bank account ledger entries that can be matched change to green font, and the **Applied** check box is selected. -4. To remove a match, select the bank statement line, and then choose the **Remove Match** action. - -## To match bank statement lines with bank account ledger entries manually -1. In the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window, select a non-applied line in the **Bank Statement Lines** pane. -2. In the **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane, select one or more banks account ledger entries that can be matched with the selected bank statement line. To choose multiple lines, press and hold the Ctrl key. -3. Choose the **Match Manually** action. - - The selected bank statement line and the selected bank account ledger entries change to green font, and the **Applied** check box in the right pane is selected. -4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all bank statement lines that are not matched. -5. To remove a match, select the bank statement line, and then choose the **Remove Match** action. - -## To create missing ledger entries to match bank transactions with -Sometimes a bank statement contain amounts for interest or fees charged. Such bank transactions cannot be matched because no related ledger entries exist in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You must then post a journal line for each transaction to create a related ledger entry that it can be matched with. - -1. In the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window, choose the **Transfer to General Journal** action. -2. In the **Trans. Bank Rec. to Gen. Jnl.** window, specify which general journal to use, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The **General Journal** window opens containing new journal lines for any banks statement lines with missing ledger entries. -3. Complete the journal line with relevant information, such as the balancing account. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). -4. Choose the **Post** action. - - When the entry is posted, proceed to match the bank transaction with to it. -5. Refresh or reopen the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window. The new ledger entry will appear in the **Bank Account Ledger Entries** pane. -6. Match the bank statement line with the bank account ledger entry, either manually or automatically. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 14e995d3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Bank Accounts -description: You can reconcile bank accounts in Financials with statements from the bank. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: Yodlee, feed, stream -ms.date: 11/14/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Bank Accounts -You use bank accounts in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to keep track of your banking transactions. Accounts can be denominated in your local currency or in a foreign currency. After you have set up bank accounts, you can also use the check printing option. - -## To set up bank accounts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Bank Accounts** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> To fill in the **Balance** field with an opening balance, you must post a bank account ledger entry with the amount in question. You can do this by performing a bank account reconciliation. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately](bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md). Alternatively, you can implement the opening balance as a part of general data creation in new companies by using the **Migrate Business Data** assisted setup. For more information, see [Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md). - -## To set up your bank account for import or export of bank files -Fields on the **Transfer** FastTab in the **Bank Account Card** window are related to import and export of bank feeds and files. For more information, see [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for a bank account that you will export or import bank files for. -3. On the **Transfer** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> Different file export services and their formats require different setup values in the **Bank Account Card** window. You will be informed about wrong or missing setup values as you try to export the file. So read the short descriptions of the fields carefully or refer to the related procedure topics. For example, exporting a payment file for North American electronic funds transfer (EFT) requires that both the **Last Remittance Advice No.** field and the **Transit No.** field are filled in. For more information, see [How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md). - -## To set up vendor bank accounts for export of bank files -Fields on the **Transfer** FastTab in the **Vendor Bank Account Card** window are related to export of bank feeds and files. For more information, see [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md) and [How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for a vendor whose bank account you will export payment bank files to. -3. Choose the **Bank Accounts** action. -3. In the **Vendor Bank Account Card** window, on the **Transfer** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3b9e37e0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Bank Data Conversion -description: You can set up bank accounts to keep track of transactions and import or export bank feeds. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: feed, stream, data exchange, AMC, bank file import, bank file export, re-export, bank transfer, AMC, bank data conversion service, funds transfer -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service -A global provider of services to convert payment information to any data format that your bank requires is connected and ready to be enabled in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. This is referred to in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as the bank data conversion service. - -You can export payment lines from the **Payment Journal** window to a file or a data stream that you then upload to your bank for automatic processing so that you do not have to make electronic payments individually. For more information, see [How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md). - -You can import bank statement files into the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window by using the bank data conversion service to convert a file that you receive from your bank to a data stream that [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can import. For more information, see [How to: Apply Payments Automatically and Reconcile Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md). - -To import or export bank files, you must set up your own bank account and your vendors' bank accounts. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts](bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> The bank data conversion service may impose a limit on the number of lines that can be exported in one file. You will receive an error message if the limit is exceeded. It is recommended that bank statement files do not exceed 1000 lines as the processing time in the bank data conversion service may otherwise increase significantly. - -## To sign your company up for the bank data conversion service -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. The **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup** window opens with three fields prefilled with relevant URLs of the provider of bank data conversion service. - - > [!NOTE] - > In the CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration database, the User Name and Password fields are prefilled with demonstration logon information, which you will replace with your company’s actual information as you sign up for the bank data conversion service. -3. In the **Sign-up URL** field, choose the browser button to open the service provider’s sign-up page. -4. On the sign-up page of the bank data service provider, enter the user name and password for your company’s subscription to the service, and then complete the sign-up process as instructed by the service provider. - - Your company is now signed up for the bank data conversion service. Proceed to enter the user name and password that you specified for the service in the related setup fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. -5. In the **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup** window, in the User **Name** field, enter the same value that you entered as logon name on the service provider’s page in step 4. -6. In the **Password** field, enter the same value that you entered in the **Password** field on the service provider’s page in step 4. - -## To encrypt your login information -It is recommended that you protect the logon information that you enter in the **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup** window. You can encrypt data on the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] server by generating new or importing existing encryption keys that you enable on the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] server instance that connects to the database. - -1. In the **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup** window, choose the **Encryption Management** action. -2. In the **Data Encryption Management** window, enable encryption of your data. - -## To view or update the list of currently supported bank data formats -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup** , and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Bank Data Conv. Service Setup** window, choose the **Bank Name - Data Conversion List** action to open the list of bank names representing bank data formats that are supported by the conversion service. -3. In the **Bank Name - Data Conversion List** page, choose the **Update Bank Name List** action. - -The list of bank data formats that are supported by the bank data conversion service is now updated. This is the list of bank names, filtered by the country/region, that you can select from in the **Bank Name - Data Conversion** field in the **Bank Account Card** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> The update of supported bank data formats also occurs when you select or enter a value in the **Bank Name - Data Conversion** field on the bank account. - -You have now signed up for the bank data conversion service. Proceed to reflect the sign-up information on every bank account that will use the service. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-transfer-bank-funds.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-transfer-bank-funds.md deleted file mode 100644 index b5ee2bbb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-how-transfer-bank-funds.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Transfer Bank Funds -description: You can transfer amounts from one bank account to another, including different currencies, by posting the transaction in the general journal. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bank account transfer, multiple currencies -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Transfer Bank Funds -You may sometimes need to transfer an amount from one bank account to another. To do this, you must post the a transaction in the general journal. The task varies depending on whether the bank accounts use the same currency or different currencies. - -## To post a transfer between bank accounts with the same currency code -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. On a journal line, fill in the **Posting Date** and **Document No.** fields. -3. In the **Account Type** field, select **Bank Account**. -4. In the **Account No.** field, select the bank from which you want to transfer the funds. -5. In the **Amount** field, enter the amount to be transferred. -6. In the **Bal. Account Type** field, select **Bank Account**. -7. In the **Bal. Account No.** field, select the bank account to which you want to transfer the funds. -8. Post the journal. - -## To post a transfer between bank accounts with different currency codes -To transfer funds between bank accounts that use different currencies, you must post two general journal lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create two journal lines, and fill in the **Posting Date** and **Document No.** fields. -3. On the first journal line, in the **Type** field, select **Bank Account**. -4. In the **Account No.** field, select the bank account from which you want to transfer the funds. -5. In the **Amount** field, enter the amount in the currency of the bank account. Enter credit amounts with a minus sign. Enter debit amounts without a minus sign. -6. In the **Bal. Account Type** field, select **Bank Account**. -7. In the **Bal. Account No.** field, select the bank account to which you want to transfer the funds. -8. On the second journal line, in the **Type** field, select **Bank Account**. -9. In the **Account No.** field, select the bank account to which you want to transfer the funds. -10. In the **Amount** field, enter the amount in the currency of the bank account. Enter credit amounts with a minus sign. Enter debit amounts without a minus sign. -11. In the **Bal. Account Type** field, select **Bank Account**. -12. In the **Bal. Account No.** field, select the bank account from which you want to transfer the funds. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the exchange rates used in the journal are different than the exchange rates in the **Currency Exchange Rates** window, enter a third line for the exchange rate gain or loss. Enter **G/L Account** in the **Account Type** field. Enter the G/L account number for exchange rate gain or loss in the **Account No.** field. Enter the exchange rate gain or loss in the **Amount** field with or without a minus sign for credits and debits respectively. -13. Post the journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-manage-bank-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bank-manage-bank-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6635a020..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-manage-bank-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage Bank Accounts -description: You must regularly reconcile bank ledger entries in Dynamics NAV with the related bank transactions in your bank accounts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: reconcile -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Managing Bank Accounts -At regular intervals, you must reconcile your bank ledger entries in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] with the related bank transactions in bank accounts at your bank, and then post the balance to your bank account. You can perform this task either as part of processing the payments represented on a bank statement in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal**. Alternatively, you can perform the task separately from payment processing, in the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window, which supports check ledger entries. In both cases, you fill in the windows by importing the bank statement into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -Sometimes, you need to transfer amounts between bank account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to reflect transfers at your bank. You perform this task in the **General Journal** window, in different ways depending on the currency of the funds. - -Before you can manage bank accounts, you must set each bank account up as a bank account card. In addition, you must set up electronic services that you may use for bank statement import and payment file export. For more information, see [Set Up Bank Accounts](bank-setup-banking.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Reconcile bank accounts in connection with payment processing in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window. |[Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md) | -| Reconcile bank accounts, including check ledger entries, as a separate task in the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window. |[How to: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately](bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md) | -| Post transfers between bank accounts in the same currency or in different currencies. |[How to: Transfer Bank Funds](bank-how-transfer-bank-funds.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-setup-banking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bank-setup-banking.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9a72750f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bank-setup-banking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Banking -description: You use bank account cards to keep track of your bank accounts and set up bank feeds to exchange data. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: feed, stream, data exchange, AMC, link -ms.date: 06/02/2016 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Banking -Using bank account cards, you can keep track of all your bank accounts, in any currency. After you have set up the bank accounts, you can also use the check printing option. - -To use electronic banking services to import bank statements and export payments, you must set up and enable the involved services. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up bank account cards for each of your bank accounts, so you can keep track of banking transactions. |[How to: Set Up Bank Accounts](bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md) | -| Set up an external service that enables you to export your payments to the bank for processing and import bank statements as bank files for payment application and bank reconciliation. |[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-create-reports-with-xbrl.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi-create-reports-with-xbrl.md deleted file mode 100644 index cffc4233..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-create-reports-with-xbrl.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Create Reports with XBRL -description: XBRL, which stands for eXtensible Business Reporting Language, is an XML-based language for tagging financial data, and enabling businesses to efficiently and accurately process and share their data. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 08/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Reports with XBRL -XBRL, which stands for eXtensible Business Reporting Language, is an XML-based language for tagging financial data, and enabling businesses to efficiently and accurately process and share their data. The XBRL initiative enables global financial reporting by numerous ERP software companies and international accounting organizations. The goal of the initiative is to provide a standard for the uniform reporting of financial information for banks, investors, and government authorities. Such business reporting can include: - - • Financial statements - • Financial information - • Non-financial information - • Regulatory filings, such as annual and quarterly financial statements - - [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] enables companies to implement data in XBRL, and take advantage of the flexibility and automation it provides for both collecting and sharing data. - -## eXtensible Business Reporting Language -XBRL (e **X**tensible **B**usiness **R**eporting **L**anguage) is an XML-based language for financial reporting. XBRL provides a standard for uniform reporting for all users of the financial information supply chain; such as public and private companies, the accounting profession, regulators, analysts, the investment community, capital markets and lenders, as well as key third parties such as software developers and data aggregators. - -Taxonomies are maintained by www.xbrl.org. You can download taxonomies or read more detailed information on the XBRL website. - -Someone who wants financial information from you, provides you with a taxonomy (an XML document) containing one or more schemas, each with one or more lines to fill out. The lines correspond to the individual financial facts required by the sender. You import this taxonomy into the program and then fill out the schema(s) by entering which account or accounts correspond to each line, what kind of timeframe to use, for example net change or balance at date. In some cases you can enter a constant instead, for example, number of employees. You are now ready to send the instance document (an XML document) to the someone who requests the information. The idea is that this might be a recurring event, so unless changes have been made to the taxonomy, you just export new instance documents for new periods on request. - -## XBRL is comprised of the following components -The XBRL **Specification** explains what XBRL is, how to build XBRL instance documents and XBRL taxonomies. The XBRL Specification explains XBRL in technical terms and is intended for a technical audience. - -The XBRL **Schema** are the core low-level components of XBRL. The schema is the physical XSD file which express how instance documents and taxonomies are to be built. - -The XBRL **Linkbases** are the physical XML files which contain various information about the elements defined in the XBRL Schema, such as labels in one or more languages, how they relate to each other, how to sum up elements, etc. - -An XBRL **Taxonomy** is a "vocabulary" or "dictionary" created by a group, compliant with the XBRL Specification, in order to exchange business information. - -An XBRL **Instance document** is a business report, such as a financial statement prepared to the XBRL specification. The meaning of the values in the instance document is explained by the taxonomy. An instance document is somewhat useless unless you know the taxonomy to which it is prepared. - -## Layered Taxonomies -A taxonomy can consist of a base taxonomy, for example, us-gaap or IAS, and then have one or more extensions. To reflect this, a taxonomy refers to one or more schemas which all are separate taxonomies. When the additional taxonomies are loaded into the database, the new elements are simply added to the end of the existing elements. - -## Linkbases - In XBRL Spec. 2, the taxonomy is described in several XML-files. The primary XML file is the taxonomy schema file itself (.xsd file) which only contains an unordered list of elements or facts to be reported. In addition to this, there are usually associated some linkbase files (.xml). The linkbase files contain data which is complementary to the raw taxonomy (.xsd file). There are six types of linkbases files of which four have relevance for Product Name XBRL. These are: - -- Label linkbase: This linkbase contains labels or names for the elements. The file may contain labels in different languages which are identified with an XML property called 'lang'. The XML language identifier usually contains a two-letter abbreviation, and although it should be easy to guess what the abbreviation means, there is no connection to the Windows language code or to the language codes defined in the demo data. Therefore, when the user looks up the languages for a specific taxonomy, he will see all the labels for the first element in the taxonomy, meaning that he can then see an example of each language. A taxonomy can have several label linkbases attached to it as long as these linkbases contain different languages. - -- Presentation linkbase: This linkbase contains information about the structure of the elements, or more precisely; how the issuer of the taxonomy suggests that the program presents the taxonomy to the user. The linkbase contains a series of links that each connect two elements as parent and child. When applying all these links, the elements can be shown in a hierarchical way. Note that the presentation linkbase deals with just that: the presentation of elements to the user. - -- Calculation linkbase: This linkbase contains information about which elements roll up to which. The structure is quite similar to the presentation linkbase, except that each link or ‘arc’, as they are called, has a weight property. The weight can be either 1 or –1 indicating whether the element should be added to or subtracted from its parent. Note that the rollups are not necessarily in keeping with the visual presentation. - -- Reference linkbase: This linkbase is an xml file that contains supplementary information about the data that is required by the taxonomy issuer. - -## To set up XBRL lines -After you import or update the taxonomy, the lines of the schemas must be supplied with all the information that is required. This information will include basic company information, the actual financial statements, notes to the financial statements, supplemental schedules, and other information that is required to satisfy the particular financial reporting requirements. - -You set up the XBRL Lines by mapping the data in the taxonomy to the data in your general ledger. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **XBRL Taxonomies**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **XBRL Taxonomies** window, select a taxonomy from the list. -3. Choose the **Lines** action. -4. Select a line and fill in the fields. -5. To read detailed information about what to fill in, choose the **Information** action. -6. To set up the mapping of the general ledger accounts in the chart of accounts to the XBRL lines, choose the **G/L Map Lines** action. -7. To add notes to the financial statement, choose the **Notes** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can only export data that correspond to the source type you have selected in the **Source Type** field that includes description and notes. - -> [!NOTE] -> Lines that are not relevant can be marked as line type **NOT APPLICABLE** so the lines are not exported. - - ## To import an XBRL taxonomy -The first step in working with the XBRL functionality is to import the taxonomy into your company database. A taxonomy consists of one or more schemas and some linkbases. After you have completed the import of both schemas and linkbases and have applied the linkbases to the schema, you can set up the lines and map the general ledger accounts in the chart of accounts to the appropriate taxonomy lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **XBRL Taxonomies**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **XBRL Taxonomies** window, create a new line and enter the name and description of the taxonomy. -3. Choose the **Schemas** action, and then insert the description of the schema. -4. To import the schema, in the **XBRL Schemas** window, choose the **Import** action, and the select a folder and an XSD file. Choose the **Open** button. -5. To import the linkbase, in the **XBRL Schemas** window, choose the **Linkbases** action, and then select a folder and an XML file. Choose the **Open** button.. -6. You can now choose to apply the linkbase to the schema. Repeat until you have imported all linkbases. -7. Choose the **Apply to Taxonomy** action to apply the linkbase to the schema. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Instead of individually applying the linkbases after the import, you can wait until you have imported all linkbases and then apply them at the same time. To do this, choose the **NO** button when you are prompted to apply the newly imported linkbase to the schema. Then select the lines with the linkbases that you want to apply. - -## To update an XBRL taxonomy -When a taxonomy changes you need to update the current taxonomy accordingly. The reason for the update can be an altered schema, an altered linkbase, or a new linkbase. After updating the taxonomy, you only need to map the lines for the changed or new lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **XBRL Taxonomies**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **XBRL Taxonomies** window, choose the **Schemas** action. -3. To update a schema, select the schema you want to update, and then choose the **Import** action. -4. To update or add a new linkbase, choose the **Linkbases** action. -5. Select the relevant linkbase or press Ctrl+N for a new line, select the type of linkbase, and then insert a description. -6. To import the linkbase, choose the **Import** action. -7. Choose the **Yes** button to apply the linkbase to the schema. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-actual-versus-budget.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-actual-versus-budget.md deleted file mode 100644 index e056d6a8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-actual-versus-budget.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Analyze Actual Versus Budget -description: Describes how to analyze actual amounts versus budgeted amounts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bi, power BI, analysis, KPI -ms.date: 06/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Analyze Actual Amounts Versus Budgeted Amounts -As a part of gathering, analyzing, and sharing your company data, you view actual amounts compared to budgeted amounts for all accounts and for several periods. - -To analyze budgeted amounts, you must first create budgets. For more information, see [How to: Create Budgets](finance-how-create-budgets.md). - -## To view a budget -In a budget with dimensions, you can filter the entries and see specific budgets. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Budgets**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **G/L Budgets** window, open the budget that you want to view. -3. At the top of the window, fill in the fields as necessary to define what is shown. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> If you have selected **Period** in either the **Show as Lines** or the **Show as Columns** field, then you must fill in the **View by** field. If you have not selected **Period** in either the **Show as Lines** or **Show as Columns** field, then enter the appropriate period in **Date Filter** field. - -> [!NOTE] -> Only entries from the general ledger budget with the filter codes that you enter on the **Filters** FastTab are included in the calculation. Budget entries with other filter codes or without any filter codes are not included. As long as the filter remains on the window, the budget only displays the budget entries with these filter codes. - -> [!TIP] -> If you want to modify the budget, you can modify the budget entries. Choose an amount to view the underlying general ledger budget entries. - -## To view actual and budgeted amounts for all accounts -You can view general ledger budgets and compare them with actual figures in several areas of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, choose the **G/L Balance/Budget** action. -3. At the top of the window, fill in the fields as necessary to define what is shown. -4. To see a specification that makes up the amount shown, choose the field. - -> [!NOTE] -> The filters you set in the window header will be applied to general ledger entries and also budget entries. - -The leftmost columns contain the chart of accounts. Of the five columns on the rightmost side, the first four columns show actual and budgeted debit and credit amounts for each account. The fifth column shows the proportional relationship between the actual and the budgeted amounts on the general ledger account. - -> [!TIP] -> Use the **View by** field in the **G/L Balance/Budget** window to select the period length. Use the **View as** field to select the way the amounts will be calculated, **Net Change** or **Balance at Date**. Choose the **Previous Period** or **Next Period** action to change the period. - -## To view actual and budgeted amounts for several periods -Instead of viewing the actual and budgeted amounts for all accounts within a single period, you can view a number of periods for a single account. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, select the relevant general ledger account, and then choose the **G/L Account Balance/Budget** action. -3. At the top of the window, fill in the fields as necessary to define what is shown. -4. To see a specification of an amount shown, choose the field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[How to: Work with Account Schedules](bi-how-work-account-schedule.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6e58ffb6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Analyze Data by Dimensions -description: Describes how to analyze various business data by dimensions. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bi, power BI, analysis, KPI -ms.date: 06/13/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Analyze Data by Dimensions -In financial analysis, a dimension is data that you can add to an entry as a kind of marker. This data is used to group entries with similar characteristics, such as customers, regions, products, and salesperson, and easily retrieve these groups for analysis. Dimensions can be used on entries in journals, documents, and budgets. The term dimension describes how analysis occurs. A two-dimensional analysis, for example, would be sales per area. However, by using more than two dimensions when creating an entry, you can carry out a more complex analysis, such as sales per sales campaign per customer group per area. For more information, see [Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md). - -Analyzing data by dimensions gives you greater insight into your business, so you can evaluate information, such as how well your business is operating, where it is thriving and where it is not, and where more resources should be allocated. - -> [!TIP] -> As a quick way to analyze transactional data by dimensions, you can filter totals in the chart of accounts and entries in all **Entries** windows by dimensions. Look for the **Set Dimension Filter** action. - -## To set up an analysis view -An analysis by dimensions displays a selected combination of dimensions. You can store and retrieve each analysis you have set up. The information for setting up an analysis is stored on an **Analysis View** card to simplify future analysis. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Analysis Views**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Analysis View List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. To add other dimension codes in addition to the four on the **Dimensions** FastTab, choose the **Filter** action, fill in the fields, and then choose the **OK** button. -5. To update the view, choose the **Update** action. - -## To analyze by dimensions -You can use the **Analysis by Dimensions** matrix to view the amounts in your general ledger by using the analysis views that you have already set up. You fill in the **Analysis by Dimensions** window to define what will be shown in the matrix, and then you choose the **Show Matrix** action to view the matrix. - -- The leftmost columns contain information based on what you have selected in the **Show as Lines** field in the header. -- The rightmost columns contain information based on to what you have selected in the **Show as Columns** field in the header. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Analysis by Dimensions**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant analysis view, and then choose the **Edit Analysis View** action. -3. At the top of the **Analysis by Dimensions** window, fill in the fields to define what is shown. -4. 5. To see a specification of an amount shown in the matrix window, choose the amount. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You cannot select a period length shorter than the period specified for the date compression on the **Analysis View** card. The **Next Set** and **Previous Set** commands are inactive if you have selected **Period** in either the **Show as Lines** or the **Show as Columns** field. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can use the **Dimensions - Detail** report to display a detailed classification of how dimensions have been used on entries over a selected period. You can use the **Dimensions - Total** report to display only the total amounts. - -> [!TIP] -> You can also change the view by changing the contents of the **Show as Lines** field and **Show as Columns** field. To reverse a view setting, choose the **Reverse Lines and Columns** action. - -## To update an analysis view -The amounts that are displayed in the **Analysis by Dimensions** window give you a picture of the company’s state at the time of the last update. To get a picture of the current state, you must update the analysis view by running the update function. - -The following procedure is for updating an analysis view from the **Analysis by Dimensions** window. The steps are similar from the **Analysis View Card** and the **Analysis View List** windows. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Analysis by Dimensions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Analysis by Dimensions** window, choose the **Analysis View Code** field. -3. Select the line with the relevant analysis view. -4. Choose the **Update** action. - -> [!TIP] -> If you select the **Update on Posting** check box on an analysis view card, the view is automatically updated when an involved transaction is posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> To update some or all analysis views at the same time, you must use the **Update Analysis Views** batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-create-analysis-views-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-create-analysis-views-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index f9342171..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-create-analysis-views-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Analysis Reports -description: Describes how to create new analysis reports for sales, purchases, and inventory, and set up analysis templates. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bi, power BI, analysis, KPI -ms.date: 06/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Analysis Reports -Sales managers need to analyze turnover, gross profit and other key sales performance indicators on a regular basis. Purchasers, are more interested in the dynamics of purchase volumes, vendors' performance and purchase prices. Whereas logistics/inventory managers need information on inventory turnover, analysis of inventory movement, and statistics on inventory value. - -You can use analysis reports to create customized reports based on records of your posted transactions, for example, sales, purchases, transfers and inventory adjustments. In a customizable report, the source data, which is derived from the item ledger (with associated value entries), can be combined, compared and presented in meaningful user-defined ways. In this sense, the analysis report is very similar to a PivotTable report in Microsoft Excel. - -You can create your personalized report that focuses on your key accounts in terms of total turnover both in amounts and quantities sold, gross profit and gross profit percentage during the current month, and have it compare those figures with the results from previous months or the same month last year, and calculate deviations. All this can be done in one and the same view, with the possibility to navigate to the cause of identified problem areas by choosing the drop-down button to access details on the level of individual transactions. - -The analysis report consists of the objects that you want to analyze, such as customers, customer groups, sales people and so on, represented as lines, and the analysis parameters, that is, the way you want to analyze the object, represented as columns, such as profit calculations, periodic comparisons of sales amounts and volumes or periodic comparisons of actual and budgeted figures. - -In addition to analysis reports, you can create and view similar information in analysis views, which are based on dimensions. For more information, see [How to: Analyze Data by Dimensions](bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md). - -## Example -You can set up lines like these: -- Computers -- Displays -- Spare Parts - -Then you can set up columns like these: - -- Sales Current Month -- Sales Last Month -- Sales in Pct. of last Month - -## Setting Up Line and Column Layouts - In the **Analysis Report** window, you can view different line and column layouts according to what you have set up. You set up your lines or line templates in the **Analysis Line Templates** window. In this window, you can define the name of the report and the objects you want to show in the lines of your report. You set up your columns in the **Analysis Column Templates** window. In this window, you can define the name of the column template and the analysis parameters that you want to show in the report as columns. In the **Analysis Column Templates** window, each line represents a column in your report. Note that analysis lines and analysis columns are independent from each other. - -Based on the lines and columns you have set up, the program will aggregate the result of your report in the **Analysis Report** matrix window, such as in this example: - -| Object Name |Sales Current Month|Sales Last Month|Sales Last Month %| -|-------------------|-------------------|----------------|------------------| -|Computers | | | | -|Displays | | | | -|Spare parts | | | | -|Total | | | | - - You can, for example, set up one set of lines and several sets of column layouts to show monthly and annual reports respectively. - - ## To set up analysis column templates -The following procedure is based on analysis views for sales. The steps are similar for purchase and inventory analysis views. - -In an analysis report, your analysis parameters are shown as columns. You can define the columns that you want to include in your analysis report by setting up analysis column templates. - -A template contains a set of lines each representing the analysis columns that you see in the analysis report. To define a column you must assign an analysis type code to a line. This analysis type code determines the type of source data in the item ledger entries that the analysis will be based on. Source data includes cost, sales amount, or quantity, and their associated value entries. You can set up as many column templates as you like, and then use them to create new analysis reports. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Column Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the first empty line, and then fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **Columns** action. -4. In the **Analysis Columns** window, fill in the fields to specify the columns that you want to include in your analysis report. - - > [!NOTE] - > To define a column, you must fill in the **Analysis Type Codes** field for all column types except **Formula**. Set up the analysis type codes in the **Analysis Types** window. - - **Note**. In the **Ledger Entry Type** field, if you select **Item Entries**, the actual figures from the item ledger entry are copied. If you select **Item Budget Entries**, the budgeted figures from the budget are copied. -5. Choose the **OK** button to save your changes. - -## To set up analysis line templates -The following procedure is based on analysis reports for sales. The steps are similar for purchase and inventory analysis reports. - -In an analysis report your analysis objects are shown on the lines. You can define the lines that you want to include in your analysis report by setting up analysis line templates. - -A template contains a set of lines representing the analysis lines that you see in the analysis report. A line can specify one or a range of items, customers, vendors, or groups. You can also create a formula in a line to sum up the other lines. You can set up as many line templates as you like, and then use them to create new analysis reports. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Line Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the first empty line, and then fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **Lines** action. -4. In the **Analysis Lines** window, create lines for the items, customers, vendors, or salespeople you want to view figures for in your analysis report. You must fill in the **Type**, **Range**, and the **Description** fields. - -> [!NOTE] -> Alternatively, when you want to create many individual lines for each item, customer, and so on, you can select the appropriate insert option to fill in all the relevant fields on the line. If you need to, you can then edit the lines manually. To insert lines, choose the **Insert Items** action or the **Insert Item Groups** action. - -## To create a new sales analysis report -The following procedure is based on analysis reports for sales. The steps are similar for purchase and inventory analysis reports. - -You use analysis reports to analyze the dynamics of your sales according to key sales performance indicators that you select, for example, sales turnover in both amounts and quantities, contribution margin, or progress of actual sales against the budget. You can also use the report to analyze your average sales prices and evaluate the sales performance of your sales force. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Analysis Reports**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Analysis Report Sale** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **Edit Analysis Report** action. -5. In the **Sales Analysis Report** window, choose the **Show Matrix** action - -> [!NOTE] -> Building combinations of line and column templates to create reports and assigning them unique names is optional. If you do this, selecting a report name means that you will not need to select line and column templates in the **Sales Analysis Report** window. After you have chosen a report name, you can change line and column templates independently and then later select the report name again to restore the original combination. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-to-set-up-and-publish-kpi-web-services-based-on-account-schedules.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-to-set-up-and-publish-kpi-web-services-based-on-account-schedules.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0b9393b5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-to-set-up-and-publish-kpi-web-services-based-on-account-schedules.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up and Publish KPI Web Services Based on Account Schedules - description: In the **Account Schedule KPI Web Service Setup** window, you set up how to show the account-schedule KPI data and which specific account schedules to base the KPIs on. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up and Publish KPI Web Services Based on Account Schedules -In the **Account Schedule KPI Web Service Setup** window, you set up how to show the account-schedule KPI data and which specific account schedules to base the KPIs on. When you choose the **Publish Web Service** button, the specified account-schedule KPI data is added to the list of published web services in the **Web Services** window. - -## To set up and publish a KPI web service that is based on account schedules - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedule KPI Web Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Forecasted Values Start**|Specify at what point in time forecasted values are shown on the account-schedule KPI graphic.

The forecasted values are retrieved from the general ledger budget that you select in the **G/L Budget Name** field. **Note:** To obtain KPIs that show forecasted figures after a certain date and actual figures before the date, you can change the **Allow Posting From** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window. For more information, see Allow Posting From.| - |**G/L Budget Name**|Specify the name of the general ledger budget that provides forecasted values to the account-schedule KPI web service.| - |**Period**|Specify the period that the account-schedule KPI web service is based on.| - |**View By**|Specify which time interval the account-schedule KPI is shown in.| - |**Web Service Name**|Specify the name of the account-schedule KPI web service.

This name will appear in the **Service Name** field in the **Web Services** window.| - - Proceed to specify one or more account schedules that you want to publish as a KPI web service according to the setup that you made in the previous table. - -3. On the **Account Schedules** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Acc. Schedule Name**|Specify the account schedule that the KPI web service is based on.| - |**Acc. Schedule Description**|Specify the description of the account schedule that the KPI web service is based on.| - -4. Repeat step 3 for all the account schedules that you want to base the account-schedule KPI web service on. -5. To view or edit the selected account schedule, on the **Account Schedule** FastTab, choose the **Edit Account Schedule** action. -6. To view the account-schedule KPI data that you have set up, choose the **Account Schedule KPI Web Service** action. -7. To publish the account-schedule KPI web service, choose the **Publish Web Service** action. The web service is added to the list of published web services in the **Web Services** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also publish the KPI web service by pointing to the **Account Schedule KPI Web Service Setup** page object from the **Web Services** window. For more information, see [How to: Publish a Web Service](across-how-publish-web-service.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-work-account-schedule.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-work-account-schedule.md deleted file mode 100644 index 429b0231..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi-how-work-account-schedule.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work with Account Schedules -description: Describes how to use account schedules to create various views and report for analyzing financials performance data. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bi, power BI, analysis, KPI -ms.date: 08/11/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Account Schedules -Use account schedules to get insight into the financial data stored in your chart of accounts. Account schedules analyze figures in G/L accounts, and compare general ledger entries with general ledger budget entries. The results display in charts on your Home page, such as the Cash Flow chart. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides a few sample account schedules that you can use right away, or you can set up your own rows and columns to specify the figures to compare. For example, you can create account schedules to calculate profit margins on dimensions like departments or customer groups. You can create as many customized financial statements as you want. - -Setting up account schedules requires an understanding of the financial data in the chart of accounts. For example, you can view general ledger entries as percentages of budget entries. This requires that budgets are created. For more information, see [How to: Create Budgets](finance-how-create-budgets.md). - -## Account Categories and Account Schedules -You can use account categories to change the layout of your financial statements. After you set up your account categories in the **G/L Account Categories** window, and you choose the **Generate Account Schedules** action, the underlying account schedules for the core financial reports are updated. The next time you run one of these reports, such as the balance statement, new totals and subentries are added, based on your changes. For more information, see [The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md). - -## To create new account schedules - You use account schedules to analyze figures in general ledger accounts or to compare general ledger entries with general ledger budget entries. For example, you can view the general ledger entries as percentages of the budget entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedules**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, choose the **New** action to create a new account schedule name. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **Edit Account Schedule** action. -5. In the **Account Schedule** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - When you have created a new account schedule and set up the rows, you must set up columns. You can either set them up manually or assign a predefined column layout to your account schedule. -6. Choose the **Edit Column Layout Setup** action. -7. In the **Column Layout** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you did not assign a default column layout to the account schedule, you must set the columns up manually. - -### To create a column that calculates percentages -Sometimes you may want to include a column in an account schedule to calculate percentages of a total. For example, if you have a number of rows that break down sales by dimension, you may want a column to indicate the percentage of total sales that each row represents. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedules**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, select an account schedule. -3. Choose the **Edit Account Schedule** action to set up an account schedule row to calculate the total on which the percentages will be based. -4. Insert a line immediately above the first row for which you want to display a percentage. -5. Fill in the fields on the line as follows: In the **Totaling Type** field, enter **Set Base for Percent**. In the **Totaling** field, enter a formula for the total that the percentage will be based on. For example, if row 11 contains the total sales, enter **11**. -6. Choose the **Edit Column Layout Setup** action to set up a column. -7. Fill in the fields on the line as follows: In the **Column Type** field, select **Formula**. In the **Formula** field, enter a formula for the amount that you want to calculate a percentage for, followed by %. For example, if column number N contains the net change, enter **N%**. -8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each group of rows that you want to break down by percentage. - -## To set up account schedules with overviews -You can use an account schedule to create a statement comparing general ledger figures and general leger budget figures. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedules**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, select an account schedule. -3. Choose the **Edit Account Schedule** action -4. In the **Account Schedule** window, in the **Name** field, select the default account schedule name. -5. Choose the **Insert Accounts** action. -6. Select the accounts that you want to include in your statement, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The accounts are now inserted into your account schedule. If you want you can also change the column layout. -7. Choose the **Overview** action. -8. On the **Dimension Filters** FastTab, set the budget filter to the desired filter name. -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -Now you can copy and paste your budget statement into a spreadsheet. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/bi.md b/dynamics-nav-app/bi.md deleted file mode 100644 index 389198a6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/bi.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Business Intelligence -description: Capture and analyze business data, such as sales figures, purchases, operational expenses, employee salaries, and budgets, that can be valuable information for business intelligence or for decision making. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bi, power BI, analysis, KPI -ms.date: 06/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Business Intelligence -Businesses capture a tremendous amount of data through daily activity. This data, which reflects such things as the organization's sales figures, purchases, operational expenses, employee salaries, and budgets, can become valuable information, or business intelligence, for decision makers. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] contains a number of features that help you gather, analyze, and share your company data. - -The Dimensions functionality plays an important role in business intelligence. A dimension is data that you can add to an entry as a kind of marker. This data is used to group entries with similar characteristics, such as customers, regions, products, and salesperson, and easily retrieve these groups for analysis. Among other uses, you use dimensions when defining analysis views and when creating account schedules for reporting. For more information, see [Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md). - -> [!TIP] -> As a quick way to analyze transactional data by dimensions, you can filter totals in the chart of accounts and entries in all **Entries** windows by dimensions. Look for the **Set Dimension Filter** action. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -|View actual amounts compared to budgeted amounts for all accounts and for several periods.|[How to: Analyze Actual Amounts Versus Budgeted Amounts](bi-how-analyze-actual-versus-budget.md)| -|Create new account schedules to define financial statements for reporting or for display as charts.|[How to: Work with Account Schedules](bi-how-work-account-schedule.md)| -|Analyze your financial performance by setting up KPIs based on account schedules, which you then publish as web services. The published account-schedule KPIs can be viewed on a web site or imported to Microsoft Excel using OData web services.|[How to: Set Up and Publish KPI Web Services Based on Account Schedules](bi-how-to-set-up-and-publish-kpi-web-services-based-on-account-schedules.md)| -|Set up analysis views to analyze data using dimensions.|[How to: Analyze Data by Dimensions](bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md)| -|Create new analysis reports for sales, purchases, and inventory, and set up analysis templates.|[How to: Create Analysis Reports](bi-how-create-analysis-views-reports.md)| -|Enable global financial reporting by to international accounting organizations with the eXtensible Business Reporting Language standard.|[How to: Create Reports with XBRL](bi-create-reports-with-xbrl.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Using Dynamics NAV as a Power BI Data Source](across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md) -[Closing Fiscal Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Importing from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/change-role.md b/dynamics-nav-app/change-role.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8f08c7e2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/change-role.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Description for Changing the Role Center -description: You can select a different profile in Dynamics NAV to change what you see on your Home page. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: Profile -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Description for Changing the Role Center -The Home page is your main point of entry into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Here you can get an overview of the daily work tasks and their status. Tasks that you perform often are accessed through the tiles in the content area, the navigation pane on the left, and through actions in the ribbon. - -The content on the Home page is based on the selected Role Center. The standard Role Center for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is **Business Manager**, but you can change this and choose between a number of Role Centers. - -## Changing the Role Center: Instructions -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Settings** icon ![Settings](media/ui-experience/settings_icon_small.png "Settings icon for role center"), and then choose **My Settings**. -2. In the **My Settings** window, in the **Role Center** field, select the Role Center that you want to set as the standard. For example, select **Accountant**. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index f57562ca..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Accounts in the General Ledger - description: To reconcile inventory and capacity ledger entries with the general ledger, the related value entries are posted to different accounts in the general ledger. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger -To reconcile inventory and capacity ledger entries with the general ledger, the related value entries are posted to different accounts in the general ledger. For more information, see [Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md). - -## From the Inventory Ledger -The following table shows the relationship between different types of inventory value entries and the accounts and balancing accounts in the general ledger. - -|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Value Entry Ttype**|**Variance Type**|**Expected Cost**|**Account**|**Balancing Account**| -|--------------------------------|--------------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------|---------------------------| -|Purchase|Direct Cost||Yes|Inventory (Interim)|Invt. Accrual Acc. (Interim)| -|Purchase|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|Direct Cost Applied| -|Purchase|Indirect Cost||No|Inventory|Overhead Applied| -|Purchase|Variance|Purchase|No|Inventory|Purchase Variance| -|Purchase|Revaluation||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Purchase|Rounding||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Sale|Direct Cost||Yes|Inventory (Interim)|COGS (Interim)| -|Sale|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|COGS| -|Sale|Revaluation||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Sale|Rounding||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Positive Adjmt.,Negative Adjmt., Transfer|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Positive Adjmt.,Negative Adjmt., Transfer|Revaluation||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Positive Adjmt.,Negative Adjmt., Transfer|Rounding||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|(Production) Consumption|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|WIP| -|(Production) Consumption|Revaluation||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|(Production) Consumption|Rounding||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly Consumption|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly Consumption|Direct Cost||No|Direct Cost Applied|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly Consumption|Indirect Cost||No|Overhead Applied|Inventory Adjmt.| -|(Production) Output|Direct Cost||Yes|Inventory (Interim)|WIP| -|(Production) Output|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|WIP| -|(Production) Output|Indirect Cost||No|Inventory|Overhead Applied| -|(Production) Output|Variance|Material|No|Inventory|Material Variance| -|(Production) Output|Variance|Capacity|No|Inventory|Capacity Variance| -|(Production) Output|Variance|Subcontracted|No|Inventory|Subcontracted Variance| -|(Production) Output|Variance|Capacity Overhead|No|Inventory|Cap. Overhead Variance| -|(Production) Output|Variance|Manufacturing Overhead|No|Inventory|Mfg. Overhead Variance| -|(Production) Output|Revaluation||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|(Production) Output|Rounding||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly Output|Direct Cost||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly Output|Revaluation||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly Output|Indirect Cost||No|Inventory|Overhead Applied| -|Assembly Output|Variance|Material|No|Inventory|Material Variance| -|Assembly Output|Variance|Capacity|No|Inventory|Capacity Variance| -|Assembly Output|Variance|Capacity Overhead|No|Inventory|Cap. Overhead Variance| -|Assembly Output|Variance|Manufacturing Overhead|No|Inventory|Mfg. Overhead Variance| -|Assembly Output|Rounding||No|Inventory|Inventory Adjmt.| - -## From the Capacity Ledger - The following table shows the relationship between different types of capacity value entries and the accounts and balancing accounts in the general ledger. Capacity ledger entries represent labor time consumed in assembly or production work. - -|**Work Type**|**Capacity Ledger Entry Type**|**Value Entry Type**|**Account**|**Balancing Account**| -|-------------------|------------------------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|---------------------------| -|Assembly|Resource|Direct Cost|Direct Cost Applied|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Assembly|Resource|Indirect Cost|Overhead Applied|Inventory Adjmt.| -|Production|Machine Center/Work Center|Direct Cost|WIP Account|Direct Cost Applied| -|Production|Machine Center/Work Center|Indirect Cost|WIP Account|Overhead Applied| - -## Assembly Costs are Always Actual - As shown in the table above, assembly postings are not represented in interim accounts. This is because the concept of work in process (WIP) does not apply in assembly output posting, unlike in production output posting. Assembly costs are only posted as actual cost, never as expected cost. - - For more information, see [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md). - -## Calculating the Amount to Post to the General Ledger - The following fields in the **Value Entry** table are used to calculate the expected cost amount that is posted to the general ledger: - -- Cost Amount (Actual) -- Cost Posted to G/L -- Cost Amount (Expected) -- Expected Cost Posted to G/L - -The following table shows how the amounts to post to the general ledger are calculated for the two different cost types. - -|Cost Type|Calculation| -|---------------|-----------------| -|Actual Cost|Cost Amount (Actual) – Cost Posted to G/L| -|Expected Cost|Cost Amount (Expected) – Expected Cost Posted to G/L| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md) - [Design Details: Expected Cost Posting](design-details-expected-cost-posting.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6562f6a7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Active versus Historic Item Tracking Entries - description: When parts of a document line quantity are posted, only that particular quantity is transferred to the item ledger entries and its item tracking numbers. However, you will want to access all relevant item tracking information directly from the active document line. That is, not only will you want to see the entries that are related to the remaining quantity, you will also want information about the units that have been posted. When you view or modify the **Item Tracking Lines** window, the collective contents of the **Tracking Specification** table (T336) and **Reservation Entry** table (T337) are presented in a temporary version of T336. This ensures that historic and active item tracking data is accessed as one. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Active versus Historic Item Tracking Entries -When parts of a document line quantity are posted, only that particular quantity is transferred to the item ledger entries and its item tracking numbers. However, you will want to access all relevant item tracking information directly from the active document line. That is, not only will you want to see the entries that are related to the remaining quantity, you will also want information about the units that have been posted. When you view or modify the **Item Tracking Lines** window, the collective contents of the **Tracking Specification** table (T336) and **Reservation Entry** table (T337) are presented in a temporary version of T336. This ensures that historic and active item tracking data is accessed as one. - - The following table shows how T336 and T337 are used in a purchase scenario. The bold figures represent values that the user manually enters in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. - - Step 1: Create a purchase order line of seven pieces with item tracking numbers. - -||**Quantity (Base)**|**Qty. to Handle**|**Qty. to Invoice (Base)**|**Quantity Handled (Base)**|**Quantity Invoiced (Base)**| -|-|----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------| -|**T337**|7|0|0|0|0| -|**T336**|0|0|0|0|0| - - Step 2: Receive four pieces. - -||**Quantity (Base)**|**Qty. to Handle**|**Qty. to Invoice (Base)**|**Quantity Handled (Base)**|**Quantity Invoiced (Base)**| -|-|----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------| -|**Item Tracking Lines** window|7|**4**|**0**|0|0| -|**T337**|3|0|0|0|0| -|**T336**|4|0|0|4|0| - - Step 3: Receive two pieces and invoice two pieces. - -||**Quantity (Base)**|**Qty. to Handle**|**Qty. to Invoice (Base)**|**Quantity Handled (Base)**|**Quantity Invoiced (Base)**| -|-|----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------| -|**Item Tracking Lines** window|7|**2**|**2**|4|0| -|**T337**|1|0|0|0|0| -|**T336**|6|0|0|6|2| - - Step 4: Receive one piece. - -||**Quantity (Base)**|**Qty. to Handle**|**Qty. to Invoice (Base)**|**Quantity Handled (Base)**|**Quantity Invoiced (Base)**| -|-|----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------| -|**Item Tracking Lines** window|7|**1**|**0**|6|2| -|**T336**|7|0|0|7|2| - - Invoice 5 pieces. - -||**Quantity (Base)**|**Qty. to Handle**|**Qty. to Invoice (Base)**|**Quantity Handled (Base)**|**Quantity Invoiced (Base)**| -|-|----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------| -|**Item Tracking Lines** window|7|0|**5**|7|2| -|**T336**|7|0|0|7|7| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) - [Design Details: Item Tracking Lines Window](design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-application-design.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-application-design.md deleted file mode 100644 index 74656060..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-application-design.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - description: This content contains detailed technical information about complex application features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details -This content contains detailed technical information about complex application features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - Design details content is aimed at implementers, developers, and super users who need deeper insight to implement, customize, or set up the features in question. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Learn about the design for storing and posting dimensions, including code examples on how to migrate and upgrade dimension code.|[Design Details: Dimension Set Entries](design-details-dimension-set-entries.md)| -|Learn how the planning system works and how to adjust the algorithms to meet planning requirements in different environments.|[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md)| -|Understand mechanisms in the costing engine, such as costing method and cost adjustment, and which accounting principles they are designed for.|[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md)| -|Learn about central principles behind advanced and basic warehouse features and how they integrate with other supply chain features.|[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md)| -|Learn about historic and the current design of item tracking functionality and how it integrates with the reservation system to include serial/lot numbers in availability calculations.|[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md)| -|Learn about the General Journal Posting Line feature, including recent simplifications to the design of codeunit 12.|[Design Details: General Journal Post Line](design-details-general-journal-post-line.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) - [Setting Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-assembly-order-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-assembly-order-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index a4a052c6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-assembly-order-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Assembly Order Posting - description: Assembly order posting is based on the same principles as when posting the similar activities of sales orders and production consumption/output. However, the principles are combined in that assembly orders have their own posting UI, like that for sales orders, while the actual entry posting happens in the background as direct item and resource journal postings, like that for production consumption, output, and capacity. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Assembly Order Posting -Assembly order posting is based on the same principles as when posting the similar activities of sales orders and production consumption/output. However, the principles are combined in that assembly orders have their own posting UI, like that for sales orders, while the actual entry posting happens in the background as direct item and resource journal postings, like that for production consumption, output, and capacity. - -Similarly to production order posting, the consumed components and the used resources are converted and output as the assembly item when the assembly order is posted. For more information, see [Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md). However, the cost flow for assembly orders is less complex, especially because assembly cost posting only occurs once and therefore does not generate work-in-process inventory. - -The following journal postings occur during assembly order posting: - -- The item journal posts positive item ledger entries, representing output of the assembly item, from the assembly order header -- The item journal posts negative item ledger entries, representing consumption of assembly components, from the assembly order lines. -- The resource journal posts usage of assembly resources (time units), from the assembly order lines. -- The capacity journal posts value entries relating to the resource usage, from the assembly order lines. - -The following diagram shows the structure of item and resource ledger entries that result from assembly order posting. - -![Resource and capacity costs](media/design_details_assembly_posting_1.png "design_details_assembly_posting_1") - -> [!NOTE] -> Machine and work centers are included to illustrate that capacity ledger entries are created from both production and assembly. - -The following diagram shows how assembly data flows into ledger entries during posting: - -![Data flow during posting](media/design_details_assembly_posting_2.png "design_details_assembly_posting_2") - -## Posting Sequence -The posting of an assembly order occurs in the following order: - -1. The assembly order lines are posted. -2. The assembly order header is posted. - -The following table outlines the sequence of actions. - -|Action|Description| -|------------|-----------------| -|Initialize Posting|1. Make preliminary checks.
2. Add posting number and modify the assembly order header.
3. Release the assembly order.| -|Post|
  1. Create the posted assembly order header.
  2. Copy comment lines.
  3. Post assembly order lines (consumption):

    1. Create a status window to calculate assembly consumption.
    2. Get the remaining quantity on which the item journal line will be based.
    3. Reset the consumed and remaining quantities.
    4. For assembly order lines of type Item:

      1. Populate fields on the item journal line.
      2. Transfer reservations to the item journal line.
      3. Post the item journal line to create the item ledger entries.
      4. Create warehouse journal lines and post them.
    5. For assembly order lines of type Resource:

      1. Populate fields on the item journal line.
      2. Post the item journal line. This creates capacity ledger entries.
      3. Create and post resource journal line.
    6. Transfer field values from the assembly order line into a newly created posted assembly order line.
  4. Post the assembly order header (output):

    1. Populate fields on the item journal line.
    2. Transfer reservations to the item journal line.
    3. Post the item journal line to create the item ledger entries.
    4. Create warehouse journal lines and post them.
    5. Reset the assembly quantities and remaining quantities.
| - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Unlike for production output, which is posted at expected cost, assembly output is posted at actual cost. - -## Cost Adjustment - Once an assembly order is posted, meaning that components (material) and resources are assembled into a new item, then it should be possible to determine the actual cost of that assembly item, and the actual inventory cost of the components involved. This is achieved by forwarding costs from the posted entries of the source (the components and resources) to the posted entries of the destination (the assembly item). The forwarding of costs is done by calculating and generating new entries, called adjustment entries that become associated with the destination entries. - - The assembly costs to be forwarded are detected with the Order Level detection mechanism. For information about other adjustment detection mechanisms, see [Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md). - -### Detecting the Adjustment -The order Level detection function is used in conversion scenarios, production and assembly. The function works as follows: - -- Cost adjustment is detected by marking the order whenever a material/resource is posted as consumed/used. -- Cost is forwarding by applying the costs from material/resource to the output entries associated with the same order. - -The following graphic shows the adjustment entry structure and how assembly costs are adjusted. - -![Adjustment entry structure](media/design_details_assembly_posting_3.png "design_details_assembly_posting_3") - -### Performing the Adjustment -The spreading of detected adjustments from material and resource costs onto the assembly output entries is performed by the **Adjust Cost – Item Entries** batch job. It contains the Make Multilevel Adjustment function, which consists of the following two elements: - -- Make Assembly Order Adjustment – which forwards cost from material and resource usage to the assembly output entry. Lines 5 and 6 in the algorithm below are responsible for that. -- Make Single Level Adjustments – which forwards costs for individual items using their costing method. Lines 9 and 10 in the algorithm below are responsible for that. - -![Assembly adjustment algorithm](media/design_details_assembly_posting_4.jpg "design_details_assembly_posting_4") - -> [!NOTE] -> The Make WIP Adjustments element, in lines 7 and 8, is responsible for forwarding production material and capacity usage to the output of unfinished production orders. This is not used when adjusting assembly order costs as the concept of WIP does not apply to assembly. - -For information about how costs from assembly and production are posted to the general ledger, see [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md). - -## Assembly Costs are Always Actual - The concept of work in process (WIP) does not apply in assembly order posting. Assembly costs are only posted as actual cost, never as expected cost. For more information, see [Design Details: Expected Cost Posting](design-details-expected-cost-posting.md). - -This is enabled by the following data structure. - -- In the **Type** field on item journal lines, in the **Capacity Ledger Entry** and **Value Entry** tables, *Resource* is used to identify assembly resource entries. -- In the **Item Ledger Entry Type** field on item journal lines, in the **Capacity Ledger Entry** and **Value Entry** tables, *Assembly Output* and *Assembly Consumption* are used to identify the output assembly item entries and the consumed assembly component entries respectively. - -In addition, posting group fields on the assembly order header and assembly order lines are populated by default as follows. - -|Entity|Type|Posting Group|Gen. Prod. Posting Group| -|------------|----------|-------------------|------------------------------| -|Assembly Order Header|Item|Inventory Posting Group|Gen. Prod. Posting Group| -|Assembly Order Line|Item|Inventory Posting Group|Gen. Prod. Posting Group| -|Assembly Order Line|Resource||Gen. Prod. Posting Group| - -Accordingly, only actual costs are posted to the general ledger, and no interim accounts are populated from assembly order posting. For more information, see [Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger](design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md) - -## Assemble to Order -The item ledger entry that results from posting an assemble-to-order sale is fixed applied to the related item ledger entry for the assembly output. Accordingly, the cost of an assemble-to-order sale is derived from the assembly order that it was linked to. - -Item ledger entries of type Sale that result from posting assemble-to-order quantities are marked with **Yes** in the **Assemble to Order** field. - -Posting sales order lines where a part is inventory quantity and another part is assemble-to-order quantity results in separate item ledger entries, one for the inventory quantity and one for the assemble-to-order quantity. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5c8d89e4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Availability in the Warehouse - description: The system must keep a constant control of item availability in the warehouse, so that outbound orders can flow efficiently and provide optimal deliveries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Availability in the Warehouse -The system must keep a constant control of item availability in the warehouse, so that outbound orders can flow efficiently and provide optimal deliveries. - - Availability varies depending on allocations at the bin level when warehouse activities such as picks and movements occur and when the inventory reservation system imposes restrictions to comply with. A rather complex algorithm verifies that all conditions are met before allocating quantities to picks for outbound flows. - -## Bin Content and Reservations - In any installation of warehouse management, item quantities exist both as warehouse entries, in the Warehouse application area, and as item ledger entries, in the Inventory application area. These two entry types contain different information about where items exist and whether they are available. Warehouse entries define an item’s availability by bin and bin type, which is called bin content. Item ledger entries define an item’s availability by its reservation to outbound documents. - - Special functionality in the picking algorithm exists to calculate the quantity that is available to pick when bin content is coupled with reservations. - -## Quantity Available to Pick - If, for example, the picking algorithm does not consider item quantities that are reserved for a pending sales order shipment, then those items might be picked for another sales order that is shipped earlier, which prevents the first sales from being fulfilled. To avoid this situation, the picking algorithm subtracts quantities that are reserved for other outbound documents, quantities on existing pick documents, and quantities that are picked but not yet shipped or consumed. - - The result is displayed in the **Available Qty. to Pick** field in the **Pick Worksheet** window, where the field is calculated dynamically. The value is also calculated when users create warehouse picks directly for outbound documents. Such outbound documents could be sales orders, production consumption, or outbound transfers, where the result is reflected in the related quantity fields, such as **Qty. to Handle**. - -> [!NOTE] -> Concerning the priority of reservations, the quantity to reserve is subtracted from the quantity available to pick. For example, if the quantity available in pick bins is 5 units, but 100 units are in put-away bins, then when you try to reserve more than 5 units for another order, an error message is displayed because the additional quantity must be available in pick bins. - -### Calculating the Quantity Available to Pick - The quantity available to pick is calculated as follows: - - quantity available to pick = quantity in pick bins - quantity on picks and movements – (reserved quantity in pick bins + reserved quantity on picks and movements) - - The following diagram shows the different elements of the calculation. - - ![Available to pick, with reservation overlap](media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_2.png "design_details_warehouse_management_availability_2") - -## Quantity Available to Reserve - Because the concepts of bin content and reservation co-exist, the quantity of items that are available to reserve must be aligned with allocations to outbound warehouse documents. - - It should be possible to reserve all items in inventory, except those that have started outbound processing. Accordingly, the quantity that is available to reserve is defined as the quantity on all documents and all bin types, except the following outbound quantities: - -- Quantity on unregistered pick documents -- Quantity in shipment bins -- Quantity in to-production bins -- Quantity in open shop floor bins -- Quantity in to-assembly bins -- Quantity in adjustment bins - - The result is displayed in the **Total Available Quantity** field in the **Reservation** window. - - On a reservation line, the quantity that cannot be reserved, because it is allocated in the warehouse, is displayed in the **Qty. Allocated in Warehouse** field in the **Reservation** window. - -### Calculating the Quantity Available to Reserve - The quantity available to reserve is calculated as follows: - - quantity available to reserve = total quantity in inventory - quantity on picks and movements for source documents - reserved quantity - quantity in outbound bins - - The following diagram shows the different elements of the calculation. - - ![Avaliable to reserve, per warehouse allocations](media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_3.png "design_details_warehouse_management_availability_3") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-average-cost.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-average-cost.md deleted file mode 100644 index a7d010b3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-average-cost.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,211 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Average Cost - description: The average cost of an item is calculated with a periodic weighted average, based on the average cost period that is set up in Dynamics NAV. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Average Cost -The average cost of an item is calculated with a periodic weighted average, based on the average cost period that is set up in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - The valuation date is set automatically. - -## Setting Up Average Cost Calculation - The following table describes the two fields in the **Inventory Setup** window that must be filled to enable average cost calculation. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Average Cost Period**|Specifies which period the average cost is calculated in. The following options exist:

- **Day**
- **Week**
- **Month**
- **Accounting Period**

All inventory decreases that are posted in the average cost period receive the average cost calculated for that period.| -|**Average Cost Calc. Type**|Specifies how the average cost is calculated. The following options exist:

- **Item**
- **Item, Variant, and Location**
With this option, the average cost is calculated for each item, for each location, and for each variant of the item. This means that the average cost of this item depends on where it is stored and which variant of the item that you have selected, such as color.| - -> [!NOTE] -> You can only use one average cost period and one average cost calculation type in a fiscal year. -> -> The **Accounting Periods** window shows which average cost period and which average cost calculation type is in effect during that period, for each accounting period. - -## Calculating Average Cost - When you post a transaction for an item that uses the Average costing method, an entry is created in the **Avg. Cost Adjmt. Entry Point** table. This entry contains the transaction’s item number, variant code, and location code. The entry also contains the **Valuation Date** field, which specifies the last date of the average cost period in which the transaction was posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> This field should not be confused with the **Valuation Date** field in the **Value Entry** table, which shows the date when the value takes effect and is used to determine the average cost period in which the value entry belongs. - - The average cost of a transaction is calculated when the item’s cost is adjusted. For more information, see [Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md). A cost adjustment uses the entries in the **Avg. Cost Adjmt. Entry Point** table to identify which items (or items, locations, and variants) to calculate average costs for. For each entry with a cost that has not been adjusted, the cost adjustment uses the following to determine the average cost: - -- Determines the cost of the item at the start of the average cost period. -- Adds the sum of the inbound costs that were posted during the average cost period. These include purchases, sales returns, positive adjustments, and production and assembly outputs. -- Subtracts the sum of the costs of any outbound transactions that were fixed-applied to receipts in the average cost period. These typically include purchase returns and negative outputs. -- Divides by the total inventory quantity for the end of the average cost period, excluding inventory decreases that are being valued. - - The calculated average cost is then applied to the inventory decreases for the item (or item, location, and variant) with posting dates in the average cost period. If any inventory increases exist that were fixed applied to inventory decreases in the average cost period, then the calculated average cost is forwarded from the increase to the decrease. - -### Example: Average Cost Period = Day - The following example shows the effect of calculating the average cost based on an average cost period of one day. The **Average Cost Calc. Type** field in the **Inventory Setup** window is set to **Item**. - - The following table shows item ledger entries for the sample average-cost item, ITEM1, before the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job has been run. - -|**Posting Date**|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Quantity**|**Cost Amount (Actual)**|**Entry No.**| -|---------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|20.00|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|40.00|2| -|01-01-20|Sale|-1|-20.00|3| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|-40.00|4| -|02-02-20|Purchase|1|100.00|5| -|02-03-20|Sale|-1|-100.00|6| - -> [!NOTE] -> Because cost adjustment has not yet occurred, the values in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field of the inventory decreases corresponding to the inventory increases that they are applied to. - - The following table shows the entries in the **Avg. Cost Adjmt. Entry Point** table that apply to value entries resulting from the item ledger entries in the preceding table. - -|**Item No.**|**Variant Code**|**Location Code**|**Valuation Date**|**Cost is Adjusted**| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------| -|ITEM1||BLUE|01-01-20|No| -|ITEM1||BLUE|02-01-20|No| -|ITEM1||BLUE|02-02-20|No| -|ITEM1||BLUE|02-03-20|No| - - The following table shows the same item ledger entries after the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job has been run. The average cost per day is calculated and applied to the inventory decreases. - -|**Posting Date**|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Quantity**|**Cost Amount (Actual)**|**Entry No.**| -|---------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|20.00|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|40.00|2| -|01-01-20|Sale|-1|-30.00|3| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|-30.00|4| -|02-02-20|Purchase|1|100.00|5| -|02-03-20|Sale|-1|-100.00|6| - -### Example: Average Cost Period = Month - The following example shows the effect of calculating the average cost based on an average cost period of one month. The **Average Cost Calc. Type** field in the **Inventory Setup** window is set to **Item**. - - If the average cost period is one month, then only one entry is created for each combination of item number, variant code, location code, and valuation date. - - The following table shows item ledger entries for the sample average-cost item, ITEM1, before the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job has been run. - -|**Posting Date**|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Quantity**|**Cost Amount (Actual)**|**Entry No.**| -|---------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|20.00|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|40.00|2| -|01-01-20|Sale|-1|-20.00|3| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|-40.00|4| -|02-02-20|Purchase|1|100.00|5| -|02-03-20|Sale|-1|-100.00|6| - -> [!NOTE] -> Because cost adjustment has not occurred yet, the values in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field of the inventory decreases corresponding to the inventory increases that they are applied to. - - The following table shows the entries in the **Avg. Cost Adjmt. Entry Point** table that apply to value entries resulting from the item ledger entries in the preceding table. - -|**Item No.**|**Variant Code**|**Location Code**|**Valuation Date**|**Cost is Adjusted**| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------| -|ITEM1||BLUE|01-31-20|No| -|ITEM1||BLUE|02-28-20|No| - -> [!NOTE] -> The valuation date is set to the last day in the average cost period, which in this case is the last day of the month. - - The following table shows the same item ledger entries after the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job has been run. The average cost per month is calculated and applied to the inventory decreases. - -|**Posting Date**|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Quantity**|**Cost Amount (Actual)**|**Entry No.**| -|---------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|20.00|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|40.00|2| -|01-01-20|Sale|-1|-30.00|3| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|-65.00|4| -|02-02-20|Purchase|1|100.00|5| -|02-03-20|Sale|-1|-65.00|6| - - The average cost of entry number 3 is calculated in the average cost period for January, and the average cost for entries 4 and 6 is calculated in the average cost period for February. - - To get the average cost for February, the average cost of the piece received in inventory (100.00) is added to the average cost at the beginning of the period (30.00). The sum of the two (130.00) is then divided by the total quantity in inventory (2).This gives the resulting average cost of the item in the February period (65.00). The average cost is assigned to the inventory decreases in the period (entries 4 and 6). - -## Setting the Valuation Date - The **Valuation Date** field in the **Value Entry** table is used to determine in which average cost period an inventory decrease entry belongs. This also applies to work in process (WIP) inventory. - - The following table shows the criteria that are used to set the valuation date. - -|Scenario|Posting Date|Valued Quantity|Revaluation|Valuation Date| -|--------------|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|-----------------|-----------------------------------------| -|1||Positive|No|Posting date of item ledger entry| -|2|Later than the latest valuation date of applied value entries|Negative|No|Posting date of item ledger entry| -|3|Earlier than the latest valuation date of applied value entries|Positive|No|Latest valuation date of the applied value entries| -|4||Negative|Yes|Posting date of the revaluation value entry| - -### Example - The following table of value entries illustrates the different scenarios. - -|Scenario|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valuation Date|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|--------------|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|1|01-01-20|Purchase|01-01-20|2|20.00|1|1| -|2|01-15-20|(Item Charge)|01-01-20|2|8.00|1|2| -|3|02-01-20|Sale|02-01-20|-1|-14.00|2|3| -|4|03-01-20|(Revaluation)|03-01-20|1|-.4.00|1|4| -|5|02-01-20|Sale|03-01-20|-1|-10.00|3|5| - -> [!NOTE] -> In entry number 5 in the preceding table, the user has entered a sales order with a posting date (02-01-20) that comes before the latest valuation date of applied value entries (03-01-20). If the corresponding value in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field for this date (02-01-20) were used for this entry, then it would be 14.00. This would give a situation where the quantity on inventory is zero, but the inventory value is –4.00. -> -> To avoid such a quantity-value mismatch, the valuation date is set to equal the latest valuation date of the applied value entries (03-01-20). The value in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field becomes 10.00 (after revaluation), which means that the quantity on inventory is zero, and the inventory value is also zero. - -> [!CAUTION] -> Because the **Inventory Valuation** report is based on posting date, the report will reflect any quantity-value mismatches in scenarios as in the above example. For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Valuation](design-details-inventory-valuation.md). - - If the quantity on inventory is less than zero after posting the inventory decrease, then the valuation date is first set to the posting date of the inventory decrease. This date may be changed later, according to the rules described in the note earlier in this section, when the inventory increase is applied. - -## Recalculating Average Cost - Valuing inventory decreases as a weighted average would be straightforward if purchases were always invoiced before sales are invoiced, postings were never backdated, and you never made mistakes. However, the reality is somewhat different from this ideal. - - As illustrated in the examples in this topic, the valuation date is defined as the date from which the value entry is included in the average cost calculation. This gives you the flexibility to do the following for items using the Average costing method: - -- Invoice the sale of an item before the purchase of the item has been invoiced. -- Backdate a posting. -- Recover an incorrect posting. - -> [!NOTE] -> Another reason for this flexibility is fixed application. For more information about fixed application, see [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md). - - Because of this flexibility, you may have to recalculate the average cost after the related posting has occurred. For example, if you post an inventory increase or decrease with a valuation date that comes before one or more inventory decreases. The recalculation of the average cost will occur automatically when you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, manually or automatically. - - It is possible to change the inventory valuation base within an accounting period by changing the **Average Cost Period** field and the **Average Cost Calc. Type** field. However, this should be done with care and in agreement with an auditor. - -### Example - The following example illustrates how the average cost is recalculated when a late posting is introduced on a date that comes before one or more inventory decreases. The example is based on an average cost period of **Day**. - - The following table shows the value entries that exist for the item before the posting is introduced. - -|Valuation Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|-----------------------------------------|--------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|1|10.00|1| -|01-02-20|1|20.00|2| -|02-15-20|-1|-15.00|3| -|02-16-20|-1|-15.00|4| - - The user posts an inventory increase (entry number 5) with a valuation date (01-03-20) that comes before one or more inventory decreases. To balance the inventory, the average cost must be recalculated and adjusted to 17.00. - - The following table shows the value entries that exist for the item after entry number 5 is introduced. - -|Valuation Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|-----------------------------------------|--------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|1|10.00|1| -|01-02-20|1|20.00|2| -|01-03-20|1|21.00|5| -|02-15-20|-1|-17.00|3| -|02-16-20|-1|-17.00|4| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) - [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md deleted file mode 100644 index 695ed660..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Balancing Demand and Supply - description: To understand how the planning system works, it is necessary to understand the prioritized goals of the planning system. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply -To understand how the planning system works, it is necessary to understand the prioritized goals of the planning system, the most important of which are to ensure that: - -- Any demand will be met by sufficient supply. -- Any supply serves a purpose. - -Generally, these goals are achieved by balancing supply with demand. - -## In This Section -[Design Details: Demand and Supply](design-details-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: The Concept of Balancing in Brief](design-details-the-concept-of-balancing-in-brief.md) -[Design Details: Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date](design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md) -[Design Details: Loading the Inventory Profiles](design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md) -[Design Details: Prioritizing Orders](design-details-prioritizing-orders.md) -[Design Details: Balancing Supply with Demand](design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand.md) -[Design Details: Closing Demand and Supply](design-details-closing-demand-and-supply.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand.md deleted file mode 100644 index 742eed37..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Balancing Supply with Demand - description: The core of the planning system involves balancing demand and supply by means of suggesting user actions to revise the supply orders in case of imbalance. This takes place per combination of variant and location. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Balancing Supply with Demand -The core of the planning system involves balancing demand and supply by means of suggesting user actions to revise the supply orders in case of imbalance. This takes place per combination of variant and location. - -Imagine that each inventory profile contains a string of demand events (sorted by date and priority) and a corresponding string of supply events. Each event refers back to its source type and identification. The rules for counterbalancing the item are straightforward. Four instances of matching demand and supply can occur at any point of time in the process: - -1. No demand or supply exists for the item => the planning has finished (or should not start). -2. Demand exists but there is no supply => supply should be suggested. -3. Supply exists but there is no demand for it => supply should be canceled. -4. Both demand and supply exist => questions should be asked and answered before the system can ensure that demand will be met and supply is sufficient. - - If the timing of the supply is not suitable, perhaps the supply can be rescheduled as follows: - - 1. If the supply is placed earlier than the demand, perhaps the supply can be rescheduled out so that inventory is as low as possible. - 2. If the supply is placed later than the demand, perhaps the supply can be rescheduled in. Otherwise, the system will suggest new supply. - 3. If the supply meets the demand on the date, the planning system can proceed to investigate whether the quantity of the supply can cover the demand. - - Once the timing is in place, the adequate quantity to be supplied can be calculated as follows: - - 4. If the supply quantity is less than the demand, it is possible that the supply quantity could be increased (or not, if limited by a maximum quantity policy). - 5. If the supply quantity is greater than the demand, it is possible that the supply quantity can be decreased (or not, if limited by a minimum quantity policy). - - At this point, either of these two situations exists: - - 6. The current demand can be covered, in which case it can be closed and planning for the next demand can start. - 7. The supply has reached its maximum, leaving some of the demand quantity uncovered. In this case, the planning system can close the current supply and proceed to the next one. - - The procedure starts all over with the next demand and the current supply or vice versa. The current supply might be able to cover this next demand as well, or the current demand has not yet been fully covered. - -## Rules Concerning Actions for Supply Events -When the planning system performs a top-down calculation in which supply must fulfill demand, the demand is taken as a given, that is, it lies outside the control of the planning system. However, the supply side can be managed. Therefore, the planning system will suggest creating new supply orders, rescheduling existing ones, and/or changing the order quantity. If an existing supply order becoming superfluous, the planning system will suggest that the user cancels it. - -If the user wants to exclude an existing supply order from the planning suggestions, he can state that it has no planning flexibility (Planning Flexibility = None). Then, excess supply from that order will be used to cover demand, but no action will be suggested. - -In general, all supply has a planning flexibility that is limited by the conditions of each of the suggested actions. - -- **Reschedule Out**: The date of an existing supply order can be scheduled out to meet the demand due date unless: - - - It represents inventory (always on day zero). - - It has an order-to-order linked to another demand. - - It lies outside the reschedule window defined by the time bucket. - - There is a closer supply that could be used. - - On the other hand, the user may decide not to reschedule because: - - The supply order has already been tied to another demand on a previous date. - - The needed rescheduling is so minimal that the user finds it negligible. - -- **Reschedule In**: The date of an existing supply order can be scheduled in, except in the following conditions: - - - It is linked directly to some other demand. - - It lies outside the reschedule window defined by the time bucket. - -> [!NOTE] -> When planning an item using a reorder point, the supply order can always be scheduled in if necessary. This is common in forward-scheduled supply orders triggered by a reorder point. - -- **Increase Quantity**: The quantity of an existing supply order can be increased to meet the demand unless the supply order is linked directly to a demand by an order-to-order link. - -> [!NOTE] -> Even though it is possible to increase the supply order, it may be limited due to a defined maximum order quantity. - -- **Decrease Quantity**: An existing supply order with a surplus compared to an existing demand can be decreased to meet the demand. - -> [!NOTE] -> Even though the quantity could be decreased, there may still be some surplus compared to the demand due to a defined minimum order quantity or order multiple. - -- **Cancel**: As a special incident of the decrease quantity action, the supply order could be canceled if it has been decreased to zero. -- **New**: If no supply order already exists, or an existing one cannot be changed to meet the necessary quantity on the demanded due date, a new supply order is suggested. - -## Determining the Supply Quantity -Planning parameters defined by the user control the suggested quantity of each supply order. - -When the planning system calculates the quantity of a new supply order or the quantity change on an existing one, the suggested quantity may be different from what is actually demanded. - -If a maximum inventory or fixed order quantity are selected, the suggested quantity may be increased to meet that fixed quantity or the maximum inventory. If a reordering policy uses a reorder point, the quantity may be increased at least to meet the reorder point. - - The suggested quantity may be modified in this sequence: - -1. Down to the maximum order quantity (if any). -2. Up to the minimum order quantity. -3. Up to meet the nearest order multiple. (In case of erroneous settings, this may violate the maximum order quantity.) - -## Order Tracking Links during Planning -Concerning order tracking during planning, it is important to mention that the planning system rearranges the dynamically created order tracking links for the item/variant/location combinations. - -There are two reasons for this: - -- The planning system must be able to justify its suggestions; that all demand has been covered, and that no supply orders are superfluous. -- Dynamically created order tracking links need to be rebalanced regularly. - -Over time, dynamic order tracking links become out of balance since the entire order tracking network is not rearranged until a demand or supply event is actually closed. - -Before balancing supply by demand, the program deletes all existing order tracking links. Then during the balancing procedure, when a demand or supply event is closed, it establishes new order tracking links between the demand and supply. - -> [!NOTE] -> Even if the item is not set up for dynamic order tracking, the planned system will create balanced order tracking links as explained above. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md deleted file mode 100644 index 03617243..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,288 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Central Concepts of the Planning System - description: The planning functions are contained in a batch job that first selects the relevant items and period to plan for and then suggests possible actions for the user to take based on the demand/supply situation and the items' planning parameters. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 11/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System -The planning functions are contained in a batch job that first selects the relevant items and period to plan for. Then, according to each item’s low-level code (BOM position), the batch job calls a code unit, which calculates a supply plan by balancing supply-demand sets and suggesting possible actions for the user to take. The suggested actions appear as lines in the planning worksheet or the requisition worksheet. - -![Planning Worksheet](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_planning_worksheet.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_planning_worksheet") - -The planner of a company, such as a purchaser or a production planner is presumed to be the user of the planning system. The planning system assists the user by performing the extensive but rather straightforward calculations of a plan. The user can then concentrate on solving the more difficult problems, such as when things differ from normal. - -The planning system is driven by anticipated and actual customer demand, such as forecast and sales orders. Running the planning calculation will result in the program suggesting specific actions for the user to take concerning possible supply from vendors, assembly or production departments, or transfers from other warehouses. These suggested actions could be to create new supply orders, such as purchase or production orders. If supply orders already exist, the suggested actions could be to increase or expedite the orders to meet the changes in demand. - -Another goal of the planning system is to ensure that the inventory does not grow unnecessarily. If demand decreases, the planning system will suggest that the user postpone, decrease in quantity, or cancel existing supply orders. - -MRP and MPS, Calculate Net Change Plan, and Calculate Regenerative Plan are all functions within one code unit that contains the planning logic. However, the supply plan calculation involves different sub systems. - -Note that the planning system includes no dedicated logic for capacity leveling or fine scheduling. Therefore, such scheduling work is performed as a separate discipline. The lack of direct integration between the two areas also means that substantial capacity or schedule changes will require that the planning is rerun. - -## Planning Parameters -Planning parameters that the user sets for an item or a group of items control which actions the planning system will suggest in the various situations. The planning parameters are defined on each item card to control when, how much, and how to replenish. - -Planning parameters can also be defined for any combination of item, variant, and location by setting up a stockkeeping unit (SKU) for each needed combination, and then specifying individual parameters. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) and [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md). - -## Planning Starting Date -To avoid a supply plan that incorporates open orders in the past and suggests potentially impossible actions, the planning system treats all dates before the planning starting date as a frozen zone where the following special rule applies: - -All supply and demand before the starting date of the planning period will be considered a part of inventory or shipped. - -In other words, it assumes that the plan for the past is executed according to the given plan. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date](design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md). - -## Dynamic Order Tracking (Pegging) -Dynamic Order Tracking, with its simultaneous creation of action messages in the planning worksheet, is not a part of the supply planning system in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. This feature links, in real-time, the demand and the quantities that could cover them, whenever a new demand or supply is created or changed. - -For example, if the user enters or changes a sales order, the dynamic order tracking system will instantly and search for an appropriate supply to cover the demand. This could be from inventory or from an expected supply order (such as a purchase order or a production order). When a supply source is found, the system creates a link between the demand and the supply, and displays it in view-only windows that are accessed from the involved document lines. When appropriate supply cannot be found, the dynamic order tracking system creates action messages in the planning worksheet with supply plan suggestions reflecting the dynamic balancing. Accordingly, the dynamic order tracking system offers a very basic planning system that can be of help both to the planner and other roles in the internal supply chain. - -Accordingly, Dynamic Order Tracking can be considered a tool that assists the user in assessing whether to accept supply order suggestions. From the supply side, a user can see which demand has created the supply, and from the demand side, which supply should cover the demand. - -![Comparison for Demand and Supply Tracking](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking") - -For more information, see [Design Details: Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md). - -In companies with a low item flow and less advanced product structures, it may be adequate to use the Dynamic Order Tracking as the main means of supply planning. However, in busier environments, the planning system should be used to ensure a properly balanced supply plan at all times. - -### Dynamic Order Tracking versus the Planning System -At a quick glance, it may be difficult to differentiate between the planning system and Dynamic Order Tracking. Both features display output in the planning worksheet by suggesting actions that the planner should take. However, the way this output is produced differs. - -The planning system deals with the entire supply-demand pattern of an item through all levels of the BOM hierarchy along the time line, whereas Dynamic Order Tracking only addresses the situation of the order that activated it. When balancing demand and supply, the planning system creates links in a user-activated batch mode, whereas Dynamic Order Tracking creates the links automatically and on the fly, whenever the user enters a demand or a supply in the program, such as a sales order or purchase order. - -Dynamic Order Tracking establishes links between demand and supply when data is entered, on a first-come/first-served basis. This may lead to some disorder in priorities. For example, a sales order entered first, with a due date next month, may be linked to the supply in inventory, while the next sales order due tomorrow may cause an action message to create a new purchase order to cover it, as illustrated below. - -![Order Tracking Graph](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking_graph.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking_graph") - -In contrast, the planning system deals with all demand and supply for a particular item, in prioritized order according to due dates and order types, that is, on a first-needed/first-served basis. It deletes all order tracking links that were created dynamically and reestablishes them according to due date priority. When the planning system has run, it has solved all imbalances between demand and supply, as illustrated below for the same data. - -![Supply Planning Graph](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_planning_graph.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_planning_graph") - -After the planning run, no action messages remain in the Action Message Entry table, because they have been replaced by the suggested actions in the planning worksheet - -For more information, see Order Tracking Links during Planning in [Design Details: Balancing Supply with Demand](design-details-balancing-supply-with-demand.md). - -## Sequence and Priority in Planning -When establishing a plan, the sequence of the calculations is important to get the job done within a reasonable timeframe. In addition, the prioritization of requirements and resources play an important role in obtaining the best results. - -The planning system in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is demand-driven. High-level items should be planned before low-level items, because the plan for high-level items might generate additional demand for the lower-level items. This means, for example, that retail locations should be planned before distribution centers are planned, because the plan for a retail location may include additional demand from the distribution center. On a detailed balancing level, this also means that a sales order should not trigger a new supply order if an already released supply order is can cover the sales order. Likewise, a supply carrying a specific lot number should not be allocated to cover a generic demand if another demand requires this specific lot. - -### Item Priority / Low-Level Code -In a manufacturing environment, the demand for a finished, sellable item will result in derived demand for components that comprise the finished item. The bill-of-material structure controls the component structure and can cover several levels of semi-finished items. Planning an item at one level will cause derived demand for components at the next level, and so on. Eventually, this will result in derived demand for purchased items. Consequently, the planning system plans for items in order of their ranking in the total BOM hierarchy, starting with finished saleable items at the top level and continuing down through the product structure to the lower level items (according to the low-level code). - -![Supply Planning Tree](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_BOM_planning.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_BOM_planning") - -The figures illustrates in which sequence the system makes suggestions for supply orders at the top level and, assuming that the user will accept these suggestions, for any lower-level items as well. - -For more information about manufacturing considerations, see [Design Details: Loading the Inventory Profiles](design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md). - -### Locations / Transfer-Level Priority -Companies that operate at more than one location may need to plan for each location individually. For example, an item’s safety stock level and its reordering policy may differ from one location to another. In this case, the planning parameters must be specified per item and also per location. - -This is supported with the use of SKUs, where individual planning parameters can be specified at the SKU level. An SKU can be regarded as an item at a specific location. If the user has not defined a SKU for that location, the program will default to the parameters that have been set on the item card. The program calculates a plan for active locations only, which is where there is existing demand or supply for the given item. - -In principle, any item can be handled at any location, but the program’s approach to the location concept is quite strict. For example, a sales order at one location cannot be fulfilled by some quantity on stock at another location. The quantity on stock must first be transferred to the location specified on the sales order. - -![Supply Planning Distribution Tree](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_SKU_planning.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_SKU_planning") - -For more information, see [Design Details: Transfers in Planning](design-details-transfers-in-planning.md). - -### Order Priority -Within a given SKU, the requested or available date represents the highest priority; the demand of today should be dealt with before the demand of the coming days. But apart from this some kind of priority, the different demand and supply types are sorted according to business importance to decide which demand should be satisfied before satisfying another demand. On the supply side, the order priority will tell what source of supply should be applied before applying other sources of supply. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Prioritizing Orders](design-details-prioritizing-orders.md). - -## Production Forecasts and Blanket Orders -Forecasts and blanket orders both represent anticipated demand. The blanket order, which covers a customer’s intended purchases over a specific period of time, acts to lessen the uncertainty of the overall forecast. The blanket order is a customer-specific forecast on top of the unspecified forecast as illustrated below. - -![Forecast plus Blanket Orders Table](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_forecast_and_blanket.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_forecast_and_blanket") - -For more information, see the “Forecast Demand is Reduced by Sales Orders” section in [Design Details: Loading the Inventory Profiles](design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md). - -## Planning Assignment -All items should be planned for, however, there is no reason to calculate a plan for an item unless there has been a change in the demand or supply pattern since the last time a plan was calculated. - -If the user has entered a new sales order or changed an existing one, there is reason to recalculate the plan. Other reasons include a change in forecast or the desired safety stock quantity. Changing a bill-of-material by adding or removing a component would most likely indicate a change, but for the component item only. - -The planning system monitors such events and assigns the appropriate items for planning. - -For multiple locations, the assignment takes place at the level of item per location combination. If, for example, a sales order has been created at only one location, the program will assign the item at that specific location for planning. - -The reason for selecting items for planning is a matter of system performance. If no change in an item’s demand-supply pattern has occurred, the planning system will not suggest any actions to be taken. Without the planning assignment, the system would have to perform the calculations for all items in order to find out what to plan for, and that would drain system resources. - -The full list of reasons for assigning an item for planning is provided in [Design Details: Planning Assignment Table](design-details-planning-assignment-table.md). - -The planning options in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] are: - -- Calculate Regenerative Plan – Calculates all selected items, whether it is necessary or not. -- Calculate Net Change Plan – Calculates only those selected items that have had some change in their demand-supply pattern and, therefore, have been assigned for planning. - -Some users believe that net change planning should be performed on the fly, for example, when sales orders are entered. However, this could be confusing because dynamic order tracking and action messaging are also calculated on the fly. Besides, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers real-time available-to-promise control, which provides pop–up warnings when entering sales orders if the demand cannot be fulfilled under the present supply plan. - -In addition to these considerations, the planning system only plans for those items that the user has prepared with appropriate planning parameters. Otherwise, it is assumed that the user will plan the items manually or semi-automatically by using the Order Planning feature. - -For more information about the automatic planning procedures, see [Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md). - -## Item Dimensions -Demand and supply can carry variant codes and location codes that must be respected when the planning system balances demand and supply. - -The system treats variant and location codes as item dimensions on a sales order line, inventory ledger entry, and so on. Accordingly, it calculates a plan for each combination of variant and location as if the combination were a separate item number. - -Instead of calculating any theoretical combination of variant and location, the program calculates only those combinations that actually exist in the database. - -For more information on how the planning system deals with location codes on demand, see [Design Details: Demand at Blank Location](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md). - -## Item Attributes -Apart from general item dimensions, such as item number, variant code, location code, and type of order, each demand and supply event can carry additional specifications in the form of serial/lot numbers. The planning system plans these attributes in certain ways depending on their level of specification. - -An order-to-order link between demand and supply is another type of attribute that affects the planning system. - -### Specific Attributes -Certain attributes on demand are specific and must be matched exactly by a corresponding supply. The following two specific attributes exist: - -- Demanded serial/lot numbers that require specific application (The **SN Specific Tracking** or **Lot Specific Tracking** check box is selected in the **Item Tracking Code Card** window for the item tracking code that is used by the item.) -- Links to supply orders created manually or automatically for a specific demand (order-to-order links). - -For these attributes, the planning system applies the following rules: - -- Demand with specific attributes can only be fulfilled by supply with matching attributes. -- Supply with specific attributes can also satisfy demand that does not ask specifically for those attributes. - -Accordingly, if a demand for specific attributes cannot be met by inventory or projected supplies, the planning system will suggest a new supply order to cover this specific demand with no regard of planning parameters. - -### Non-Specific Attributes -Serial/lot-numbered items without specific item tracking setup may carry serial/lot numbers that do not need to be applied to the exact same serial/lot number, but can be applied to any serial/lot number. This gives the planning system more freedom to match, for example, a serialized demand with a serialized supply, typically in inventory. - -Demand-supply with serial/lot numbers, specific or non-specific, are considered high priority and are therefore exempt from the frozen zone, meaning that they will be part of planning even if they are due before the planning starting date. - -For more information, see the “Serial/Lot Numbers are Loaded by Specification Level” section in [Design Details: Loading the Inventory Profiles](design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md). - -For more information about how the planning system balances attributes, see the “Serial/Lot Numbers and Order-to-Order Links are Exempt from the Frozen Zone” in [Design Details: Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date](design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md). - -## Order-to-Order Links -Order-to-order procurement means that an item is purchased, assembled, or produced to exclusively cover a specific demand. Typically it relates to A-items and the motivation for choosing this policy can be that the demand is infrequent, the lead-time is insignificant, or the required attributes vary. - -Another special case that uses order-to-order links is when an assembly order is linked to a sales order in an assemble-to-order scenario. - -Order-to-order links are applied between demand and supply in four ways: - -- When the planned item uses the reordering policy Order. -- When using the manufacturing policy Make-to-Order to create multi-level or project-type production orders (producing needed components on the same production order). -- When creating production orders for sales orders with the Sales Order Planning feature. -- When assembling an item to a sales order. (Assembly Policy is set to Assemble-to-Order. - -In these instances, the planning system will only suggest to order the required quantity. Once created, the purchase, production, or assembly order will continue to match the corresponding demand. For example, if a sales order is changed in time or quantity, the planning system will suggest that the corresponding supply order is changed accordingly. - -When order-to-order links exist, the planning system does not involve linked supply or inventory in the balancing procedure. It is up to the user to evaluate if the linked supply should be used to cover other or new demand and, in that case, delete the supply order or reserve the linked supply manually. - -Reservations and order tracking links will break if a situation becomes impossible, such as moving the demand to a date earlier than the supply. However, the order-to-order link adapts to any changes in the respective demand or supply and thereby the link is never broken. - -## Reservations -The planning system does not include any reserved quantities in the calculation. For example, if a sales order has been totally or partially reserved against the quantity in inventory, the reserved quantity in inventory cannot be used to cover other demand. The planning system does not include this demand-supply set in its calculation. - -However, the planning system will still include reserved quantities in the projected inventory profile because all quantities must be considered when determining both when the reorder point has been passed and how many to reorder to reach and not exceed the maximum inventory level. Consequently, unnecessary reservations will lead to increased risks that inventory levels run low because the planning logic does not detect reserved quantities. - -The following illustration shows how reservations can hinder the most feasible plan. - -![Supply Planning Reservations Graph](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_reservations.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_reservations") - -For more information, see [Design Details: Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md). - -## Warnings -The first column in the planning worksheet is for the warning fields. Any planning line created for an unusual situation will display a warning icon in this field, which the user can click for additional information. - -Supply on planning lines with warnings will normally not be modified according to planning parameters. Instead, the planning system only suggests a supply to cover the exact demand quantity. However, the system can be set up to respect certain planning parameters for planning lines with certain warnings. For more information, see the description of these options for the **Calculate Plan - Plan. Wksh.** batch job and the **Calculate Plan - Req. Wksh.** batch job respectively. - -The warning information is shown in the **Untracked Planning Elements** window, which is also used to show order tracking links to non-order network entities. The following warning types exist: - -- Emergency -- Exception -- Attention - -![Supply Warnings Visual Example](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_warnings.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_warnings") - -### Emergency -The emergency warning is displayed in two situations: - -- When the inventory is negative on the planning starting date. -- When back-dated supply or demand events exist. - -If an item’s inventory is negative on the planning starting date, the planning system suggests an emergency supply for the negative quantity to arrive on the planning starting date. The warning text states the starting date and the quantity of the emergency order. For more information, see [Design Details: Handling Projected Negative Inventory](design-details-handling-projected-negative-inventory.md). - -Any document lines with due dates before the planning starting date are consolidated into one emergency supply order for the item to arrive on the planning starting date. - -### Exception -The exception warning is displayed if the projected available inventory drops below the safety stock quantity. The planning system will suggest a supply order to meet the demand on its due date. The warning text states the item’s safety stock quantity and the date on which it is violated. - -Violating the safety stock level is considered an exception because it should not occur if the reorder point has been set correctly. For more information, see [Design Details: The Role of the Reorder Point](design-details-the-role-of-the-reorder-point.md). - -In general, exceptional order proposals ensure that the projected available inventory is never lower than the safety stock level. This means that the proposed quantity is just enough to cover the safety stock, without considering planning parameters. However, in some scenarios, order modifiers will be considered. - -> [!NOTE] -> The planning system may have consumed the safety stock intentionally and will then replenish it straight away. For more information, see the "Safety Stock May Be Consumed" section in [Design Details: Loading the Inventory Profile](design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md). - -### Attention -The attention warning is displayed in three situations: - -- The planning starting date is earlier than the work date. -- The planning line suggests changing a released purchase or production order. -- The projected inventory exceeds the overflow level on the due date. For more information, see [Design Details: Staying under the Overflow Level](design-details-staying-under-the-overflow-level.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> In planning lines with warnings, the **Accept Action Message** field is not selected, because the planner is expected to further investigate these lines before carrying out the plan. - -## Error Logs -In the Calculate Plan request page, the user can select the **Stop and Show First Error** field to have the planning run stop when it encounters the first error. At the same time, a message is displayed with information about the error. If an error exists, only the successful planning lines that were made before the error was encountered will be presented in the planning worksheet. - -If the field is not selected, the Calculate Plan batch job will continue until it has completed. Errors will not interrupt the batch job. If one or more errors exist, the program will display a message after completion saying how many items are affected by errors. The **Planning Error Log** window then opens to provide more details about the error and to provide links to the affected documents or setup cards. - -![Supply Planning Error Log: Visual Example](media/NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_error_log.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_1_error_log") - -## Planning Flexibility -It is not always practical to plan an existing supply order, such as when production has started or extra people are hired on a specific day to do the job. To indicate whether an existing order can be changed by the planning system, all supply order lines have a Planning Flexibility field with two options: Unlimited or None. If the field is set to None, the planning system will not try to change the supply order line. - -The field can be manually set by the user, however, in some cases it will be set automatically by the system. The fact that planning flexibility can be manually set by the user is important, because it makes it easy to adapt the usage of the feature to different workflows and business cases. - -For more information about how this field is used, see [Design Details: Transfers in Planning](design-details-transfers-in-planning.md). - -## Order Planning -The basic supply planning tool represented by the **Order Planning** window is designed for manual decision making. It does not consider any planning parameters and is therefore not discussed further in this document. For more information on the Order Planning feature, refer to Help in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -> [!NOTE] -> It is not advisable to use Order Planning if the company already uses the planning or requisition worksheets. Supply orders created through the **Order Planning** window may be changed or deleted during the automated planning runs. This is because the automated planning run uses planning parameters and these may not be considered by the user who made the manual plan in the Order Planning window. - -## Finite Loading -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is a standard ERP system, not a dispatching or shop floor control system. It plans for a feasible utilization of resources by providing a rough-cut schedule, but it does not automatically create and maintain detailed schedules based on priorities or optimization rules. - -The intended use of the Capacity-Constrained Resource feature is 1): to avoid overload of specific resources and 2): to ensure that no capacity is left unallocated if it could increase the turn-around time of a production order. The feature includes no facilities or options to prioritize or optimize operations as one would expect to find in a dispatching system. However, it can provide rough-cut capacity information useful to identify bottlenecks and to avoid overloading resources. - -When planning with capacity-constrained resources, the system ensures that no resource is loaded above its defined capacity (critical load). This is done by assigning each operation to the nearest available time slot. If the time slot is not big enough to complete the entire operation, then the operation will be split into two or more parts placed in the nearest available time slots. - -> [!NOTE] -> In case of operation splitting, the setup time is only assigned once because it is assumed that some manual adjustment is done to optimize the schedule. - -Dampener time can be added to resources to minimize operation splitting. This enables the system to schedule load on the last possible day by exceeding the critical load percent slightly if this can reduce the number of operations that are split. - -This completes the outline of central concepts relating to supply planning in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The following sections investigate these concepts deeper and place them in the context of the core planning procedures, balancing demand and supply as well as the use of reordering policies. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Transfers in Planning](design-details-transfers-in-planning.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Planning Assignment Table](design-details-planning-assignment-table.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-closing-demand-and-supply.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-closing-demand-and-supply.md deleted file mode 100644 index b2ad9db2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-closing-demand-and-supply.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - How to Close Demand and Supply - description: This topic provides a suggestion for what to do after you perform supply balancing procedures. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, planning, example, closing, supply - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: How to Close Demand and Supply -When the supply balancing procedures have been performed, there are three possible end situations: - -* The required quantity and date of the demand events have been met and the planning for them can be closed. The supply event is still open and may be able to cover the next demand, so the balancing procedure can start over with the current supply event and the next demand. -* The supply order cannot be modified to cover all of the demand. The demand event is still open, with some uncovered quantity that may be covered by the next supply event. Thus the current supply event is closed, so the balancing act can start over with the current demand and the next supply event. -* All of the demand has been covered; there is no subsequent demand (or there has been no demand at all). If there is any surplus supply, it may be decreased (or canceled) and then closed. It is possible that additional supply events exist further along in the chain, and they should also be canceled. - -Last, the planning system will create an order tracking link between the supply and the demand. - -## Creating the Planning Line (Suggested Action) -If any action – New, Change Quantity, Reschedule, Reschedule and Change Quantity, or Cancel – is suggested to revise the supply order, the planning system creates a planning line in the planning worksheet. Due to order tracking, the planning line is created not only when the supply event is closed, but also if the demand event is closed, even though the supply event is still open and may be subject to additional changes when the next demand event is processed. This means that when first created, the planning line may be changed again. - -To minimize database access when handling production orders, the planning line can be maintained in three levels, while aiming to perform the least demanding maintenance level: - -* Create only the planning line with the current due date and quantity but without the routing and components. -* Include routing: the planned routing is laid out including calculation of starting and ending dates and times. This is demanding in terms of database accesses. To determine the ending and due dates, it may be necessary to calculate this even if the supply event has not been closed (in the case of forward scheduling). -* Include BOM explosion: this can wait until just before the supply event is closed. - -This concludes the descriptions of how demand and supply is loaded, prioritized, and balanced by the planning system. In integration with this supply planning activity, the system must ensure that the required inventory level of each planned item is maintained according to its reordering policies. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md deleted file mode 100644 index f29cc213..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Closing Demand and Supply - description: When the supply balancing procedures have been performed, there are three possible end situations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Closing Demand and Supply -When the supply balancing procedures have been performed, there are three possible end situations: - -- The required quantity and date of the demand events have been met and the planning for them can be closed. The supply event is still open and may be able to cover the next demand, so the balancing procedure can start over with the current supply event and the next demand. - -- The supply order cannot be modified to cover all of the demand. The demand event is still open, with some uncovered quantity that may be covered by the next supply event. Thus the current supply event is closed, so the balancing act can start over with the current demand and the next supply event. - -- All of the demand has been covered; there is no subsequent demand (or there has been no demand at all). If there is any surplus supply, it may be decreased (or canceled) and then closed. It is possible that additional supply events exist further along in the chain, and they should also be canceled. - - Last, the planning system will create an order tracking link between the supply and the demand. - -## Creating the Planning Line (Suggested Action) - If any action – New, Change Quantity, Reschedule, Reschedule and Change Quantity, or Cancel – is suggested to revise the supply order, the planning system creates a planning line in the planning worksheet. Due to order tracking, the planning line is created not only when the supply event is closed, but also if the demand event is closed, even though the supply event is still open and may be subject to additional changes when the next demand event is processed. This means that when first created, the planning line may be changed again. - - To minimize database access when handling production orders, the planning line can be maintained in three levels, while aiming to perform the least demanding maintenance level: - -- Create only the planning line with the current due date and quantity but without the routing and components. - -- Include routing: the planned routing is laid out including calculation of starting and ending dates and times. This is demanding in terms of database accesses. To determine the ending and due dates, it may be necessary to calculate this even if the supply event has not been closed (in the case of forward scheduling). - -- Include BOM explosion: this can wait until just before the supply event is closed. - - This concludes the descriptions of how demand and supply is loaded, prioritized, and balanced by the planning system. In integration with this supply planning activity, the system must ensure that the required inventory level of each planned item is maintained according to its reordering policies. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) - [Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0856a54c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Codeunit 12 Changes in General Journal Post Procedures - description: The following changes have been implemented in this release of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Codeunit 12 Changes: Changes in General Journal Post Procedures -The following changes have been implemented in this release of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -|**Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 R2**|**Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013 R2**|**Comment**| -|----------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|-----------------| -|GetGLReg|GetGLReg|Updated| -|RunWithCheck|RunWithCheck|Updated| -|RunWithoutCheck|RunWithoutCheck|Updated| -|Code|Code|Updated| -||PostGenJnlLine|Added| -||InitAmounts|Added| -||InitLastDocDate|Added| -|InitVAT|InitVAT|Updated| -|PostVAT|PostVAT|Updated| -|InsertVAT|InsertVAT|Updated| -|SummarizeVAT|SummarizeVAT|Updated| -|InsertSummarizedVAT|InsertSummarizedVAT|Updated| -|PostGLAcc|PostGLAcc|Updated| -|PostCust|PostCust|Updated| -|PostVend|PostVend|Updated| -|PostBankAcc|PostBankAcc|Updated| -|PostFixedAsset|PostFixedAsset|Updated| -|PostICPartner|PostICPartner|Updated| -|InitCodeUnit|StartPosting|Updated| -||ContinuePosting|Added| -|FinishCodeunit|FinishPosting|Updated| -||PostUnrealizedVAT|Added| -||CheckPostUnrealizedVAT|Added| -||ExchangeAccounts|Added| -|InitGLEntry|InitGLEntry|Updated| -||InitGLEntryVAT|Added| -||InitGLEntryVATCopy|Added| -|InsertGLEntry|InsertGLEntry|Updated| -||CreateGLEntry|Added| -||CreateGLEntryBalAcc|Added| -||CreateGLEntryVAT|Added| -||CreateGLEntryVATCollectAdj|Added| -||CreateGLEntryFromVATEntry|Added| -||UpdateCheckAmounts|Added| -|ApplyCustLedgEntry|ApplyCustLedgEntry|Updated| -||CalcPmtDiscPossible|Added| -||CalcPmtTolerancePossible|Added| -|CalcPmtTolerance|CalcPmtTolerance|Updated| -|CalcPmtDisc|CalcPmtDisc|Updated| -|CalcPmtDiscIfAdjVAT|CalcPmtDiscIfAdjVAT|Updated| -|CalcPmtDiscTolerance|CalcPmtDiscTolerance|Updated| -||CalcPmtDiscVATBases|Added| -||CalcPmtDiscVATAmounts|Added| -||InsertPmtDiscVATForVATEntry|Added| -||InsertPmtDiscVATForGLEntry|Added| -|CalcCurrencyApplnRounding|CalcCurrencyApplnRounding|Updated| -|FindAmtForAppln|FindAmtForAppln|Updated| -|CalcCurrencyUnrealizedGainLoss|CalcCurrencyUnrealizedGainLoss|Updated| -|CalcCurrencyRealizedGainLoss|CalcCurrencyRealizedGainLoss|Updated| -|CalcApplication|CalcApplication|Updated| -|CalcRemainingPmtDisc|CalcRemainingPmtDisc|Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CalcAmtLCYAdjustment|CalcAmtLCYAdjustment|Added| -|InitNewCVLedgEntry|InitFromGenJnlLine|Moved to Table 383 Detailed CV Ledg. Entry Buffer| -|InitOldCVLedgEntry|CopyFromCVLedgEntryBuf|Moved to Table 383 Detailed CV Ledg. Entry Buffer| -|InsertDtldCVLedgEntry|InsertDtldCVLedgEntry|Moved to Table 383 Detailed CV Ledg. Entry Buffer| -||InitBankAccLedgEntry|Added| -||InitCheckLedgEntry|Added| -||InitCustLedgEntry|Added| -||InitVendLedgEntry|Added| -||InsertDtldCustLedgEntry|Added| -||InsertDtldVendLedgEntry|Added| -|CustUnrealizedVAT|CustUnrealizedVAT|Updated| -|CustPostApplyCustLedgEntry|CustPostApplyCustLedgEntry|Updated| -||PrepareTempCustLedgEntry|Added| -|UnapplyCustLedgEntry|UnapplyCustLedgEntry|Updated| -|TransferCustLedgEntry|CopyFromGenJnlLine|Moved to Table 21 Cust. Ledger Entry| -|PostDtldCustLedgEntries|PostDtldCustLedgEntries|Updated| -||PostDtldCustLedgEntry|Added| -||PostDtldCustLedgEntryUnapply|Added| -||GetDtldCustLedgEntryAccNo|Added| -|ZeroTransNoDtldCustLedgEntries|SetZeroTransNo|Moved to Table 379 Detailed Cust. Ledg. Entry| -|AutoEntrForDtldCustLedgEntries||Refactored to PostDtldCustLedgEntryUnapply| -|CustUpdateDebitCredit|UpdateDebitCredit|Moved to Table 379 Detailed Cust. Ledg. Entry| -|ApplyVendLedgEntry|ApplyVendLedgEntry|Updated| -||PrepareTempVendLedgEntry|Added| -|VendPostApplyVendLedgEntry|VendPostApplyVendLedgEntry|Updated| -|UnapplyVendLedgEntry|UnapplyVendLedgEntry|Updated| -|TransferVendLedgEntry|CopyFromGenJnlLine|Moved to Table 25 Vendor Ledger Entry| -|PostDtldVendLedgEntries|PostDtldVendLedgEntries|Updated| -||PostDtldVendLedgEntry|Added| -||PostDtldVendLedgEntryUnapply|Added| -||GetDtldVendLedgEntryAccNo|Added| -||PostDtldCVLedgEntry|Added| -||PostDtldCustVATAdjustment|Added| -||PostDtldVendVATAdjustment|Added| -|ZeroTransNoDtldVendLedgEntries|SetZeroTransNo|Moved to Table 380 Detailed Vend. Ledg. Entry| -|AutoEntrForDtldVendLedgEntries||Refactored to PostDtldVendLedgEntryUnapply| -|VendUpdateDebitCredit|UpdateDebitCredit|Moved to Table 380 Detailed Vend. Ledg. Entry| -|VendUnrealizedVAT|VendUnrealizedVAT|Updated| -||PostUnrealVATEntry|Added| -||PostApply|Added| -|PostUnrealVATByUnapply|PostUnrealVATByUnapply|Updated| -||PostUnapply|Added| -||InsertDtldCustLedgEntryUnapply|Added| -||InsertDtldVendLedgEntryUnapply|Added| -||InsertTempVATEntry|Added| -||ProcessTempVATEntry|Added| -||UpdateCustLedgEntry|Added| -||UpdateVendLedgEntry|Added| -|UpdateCalcInterest|UpdateCalcInterest|Updated| -|UpdateCalcInterest2|UpdateCalcInterest2|Updated| -|GLCalcAddCurrency|GLCalcAddCurrency|Updated| -|HandleAddCurrResidualGLEntry|HandleAddCurrResidualGLEntry|Updated| -|CalcLCYToAddCurr|CalcLCYToAddCurr|Updated| -|CalcAddCurrFactor||Deleted| -|GetCurrencyExchRate|GetCurrencyExchRate|Updated| -|ExchAmount|ExchangeAmount|Moved to Table 330 Currency Exchange Rate| -|ExchangeAmtLCYToFCY2|ExchangeAmtLCYToFCY2|Updated| -|CalcAddCurrForUnapplication|CalcAddCurrForUnapplication|Updated| -|CheckNonAddCurrCodeOccurred|CheckNonAddCurrCodeOccurred|Updated| -|CheckCalcPmtDisc||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CheckCalcPmtDiscCVCust||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CheckCalcPmtDiscCust||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CheckCalcPmtDiscGenJnlCust||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CheckCalcPmtDiscCVVend||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CheckCalcPmtDiscVend||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|CheckCalcPmtDiscGenJnlVend||Moved to Codeunit 426 Payment Tolerance Management| -|Reverse|Reverse|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|ReverseCustLedgEntry|ReverseCustLedgEntry|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|ReverseVendLedgEntry|ReverseVendLedgEntry|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|ReverseBankAccLedgEntry|ReverseBankAccLedgEntry|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|ReverseVAT|ReverseVAT|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|SetReversalDescription|SetReversalDescription|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|ApplyCustLedgEntryByReversal|ApplyCustLedgEntryByReversal|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|ApplyVendLedgEntryByReversal|ApplyVendLedgEntryByReversal|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|PostPmtDiscountVATByUnapply|PostPmtDiscountVATByUnapply|Moved to Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -||CheckDimComb|Added in Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -||CopyCustLedgEntry|Added in Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -||CopyVendLedgEntry|Added in Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -||CopyBankAccLedgEntry|Added in Codeunit 17 Gen. Jnl.-Post Reverse| -|HandlDtlAddjustment|HandleDtldAdjustment|Updated| -|CollectAddjustment|CollectAdjustment|Updated| -|SetOverDimErr|SetOverDimErr|Updated| -|PostJob|PostJob|Updated| -|InsertVATEntriesFromTemp|InsertVATEntriesFromTemp|Updated| -|CaptureOrRefundCreditCardPmnt|CaptureOrRefundCreditCardPmnt|Updated| -|UpdateDOPaymentTransactEntry|UpdateDOPaymentTransactEntry|Updated| -|ABSMin|ABSMin|Updated| -|GetApplnRoundPrecision|GetApplnRoundPrecision|Updated| -|CheckDimValueForDisposal|CheckDimValueForDisposal|Updated| -|CalculateCurrentBalance|CalculateCurrentBalance|Updated| -|IncludeVATAmount||Moved to Table 81 Gen. Journal Line| -|CalcVATAmountFromVATEntry|CalcVATAmountFromVATEntry|Updated| -||TotalVATAmountOnJnlLines|Added| -||SetGLRegReverse|Added| -||GetGLSetup|Added| -||ReadGLSetup|Added| -||CheckSalesExtDocNo|Added| -||CheckPurchExtDocNo|Added| -||CheckGLAccDimError|Added| -||GetCurrency|Added| -||PostDtldAdjustment|Added| -||GetNextEntryNo|Added| -||GetNextTransactionNo|Added| -||GetNextVATEntryNo|Added| -||IncrNextVATEntryNo|Added| -||IsNotPayment|Added| -||IsTempGLEntryBufEmpty|Added| -||IsVATAdjustment|Added| -||IsVATExcluded|Added| -||UpdateDimensions|Added| -||UpdateDimensionsFromCustLedgEntry|Added| -||UpdateDimensionsFromVendLedgEntry|Added| -||UpdateTotalAmounts|Added| -||CreateGLEntriesForTotalAmounts|Added| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Codeunit 12 Changes: Mapping Global Variables for General Journal Post Line](design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line.md deleted file mode 100644 index 81e74b50..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Codeunit 12 Changes in Mapping Global Variables for General Journal Post Line - description: The following changes have been implemented in this release of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Codeunit 12 Changes: Mapping Global Variables for General Journal Post Line -The following changes have been implemented in this release of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -|**Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 R2**|**Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013 R2**|**Comment**| -|----------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|-----------------| -|GLSetup@1009 : Record 98;|GLSetup@1009 : Record 98;|Unchanged| -|SalesSetup@1010 : Record 311;||Changed to Local| -|PurchSetup@1011 : Record 312;||Changed to Local| -|AccountingPeriod@1012 : Record 50;||Changed to Local| -|GLAcc@1013 : Record 15;||Changed to Local| -|GLEntry@1014 : Record 17;|GlobalGLEntry@1014 : Record 17;|Renamed| -|GLEntryTmp@1015 : TEMPORARY Record 17;|TempGLEntryBuf@1010 : TEMPORARY Record 17;|Renamed| -|TempGLEntryVAT@1016 : TEMPORARY Record 17;|TempGLEntryVAT@1016 : TEMPORARY Record 17;|Unchanged| -|OrigGLEntry@1017 : Record 17;||Deleted| -|VATPostingSetup@1019 : Record 325;||Changed to Local| -|Cust@1020 : Record 18;||Changed to Local| -|Vend@1021 : Record 23;||Changed to Local| -|GenJnlLine@1022 : Record 81;||Changed to Local| -|GLReg@1029 : Record 45;|GLReg@1029 : Record 45;|Unchanged| -|CustPostingGr@1030 : Record 92;||Changed to Local| -|VendPostingGr@1031 : Record 93;||Changed to Local| -|Currency@1032 : Record 4;||Changed to Local| -|AddCurrency@1033 : Record 4;|AddCurrency@1033 : Record 4;|Unchanged| -|ApplnCurrency@1034 : Record 4;||Changed to Local| -|CurrExchRate@1035 : Record 330;|CurrExchRate@1035 : Record 330;|Unchanged| -|VATEntry@1038 : Record 254;|VATEntry@1038 : Record 254;|Unchanged| -|BankAcc@1039 : Record 270;||Changed to Local| -|BankAccLedgEntry@1040 : Record 271;||Changed to Local| -|CheckLedgEntry@1041 : Record 272;||Changed to Local| -|CheckLedgEntry2@1042 : Record 272;||Changed to Local| -|BankAccPostingGr@1043 : Record 277;||Changed to Local| -|GenJnlTemplate@1044 : Record 80;||Changed to Local| -|TaxJurisdiction@1045 : Record 320;||Changed to Local| -|TaxDetail@1046 : Record 322;|TaxDetail@1046 : Record 322;|Unchanged| -|FAGLPostBuf@1047 : TEMPORARY Record 5637;||Changed to Local| -|UnrealizedCustLedgEntry@1084 : Record 21;|UnrealizedCustLedgEntry@1084 : Record 21;|Unchanged| -|UnrealizedVendLedgEntry@1085 : Record 25;|UnrealizedVendLedgEntry@1085 : Record 25;|Unchanged| -|GLEntryVATEntryLink@1087 : Record 253;|GLEntryVATEntryLink@1087 : Record 253;|Unchanged| -|TempVATEntry@1088 : TEMPORARY Record 254;|TempVATEntry@1088 : TEMPORARY Record 254;|Unchanged| -|ReversedGLEntryTemp@1089 : TEMPORARY Record 17;||Moved to Codeunit17| -|CostAccSetup@1092 : Record 1108;||Changed to Local| -|GenJnlCheckLine@1048 : Codeunit 11;|GenJnlCheckLine@1001 : Codeunit 11;|Unchanged| -|ExchAccGLJnlLine@1049 : Codeunit 366;||Changed to Local| -|FAJnlPostLine@1050 : Codeunit 5632;||Changed to Local| -|SalesTaxCalculate@1051 : Codeunit 398;||Changed to Local| -|GenJnlApply@1052 : Codeunit 225;||Changed to Local| -|DimMgt@1053 : Codeunit 408;||Changed to Local| -|JobPostLine@1028 : Codeunit 1001;||Changed to Local| -|TransferGlEntriesToCA@1091 : Codeunit 1105;||Changed to Local| -||PaymentToleranceMgt@1002 : Codeunit 426;|Added| -||AddCurrencyCode@1117 : Code[10];|Added| -|FiscalYearStartDate@1054 : Date;|FiscalYearStartDate@1011 : Date;|Unchanged| -|NextEntryNo@1055 : Integer;|NextEntryNo@1022 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|BalanceCheckAmount@1056 : Decimal;|BalanceCheckAmount@1056 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|BalanceCheckAmount2@1057 : Decimal;|BalanceCheckAmount2@1057 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|BalanceCheckAddCurrAmount@1058 : Decimal;|BalanceCheckAddCurrAmount@1058 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|BalanceCheckAddCurrAmount2@1059 : Decimal;|BalanceCheckAddCurrAmount2@1059 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|CurrentBalance@1060 : Decimal;|CurrentBalance@1060 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|SalesTaxBaseAmount@1061 : Decimal;||Changed to Local| -|TotalAddCurrAmount@1062 : Decimal;|TotalAddCurrAmount@1062 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|TotalAmount@1063 : Decimal;|TotalAmount@1063 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|UnrealizedRemainingAmountCust@1086 : Decimal;|UnrealizedRemainingAmountCust@1086 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|UnrealizedRemainingAmountVend@1074 : Decimal;|UnrealizedRemainingAmountVend@1074 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|NextVATEntryNo@1064 : Integer;|NextVATEntryNo@1064 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|FirstNewVATEntryNo@1065 : Integer;|FirstNewVATEntryNo@1065 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|NextTransactionNo@1066 : Integer;|NextTransactionNo@1066 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|NextConnectionNo@1067 : Integer;|NextConnectionNo@1067 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|InsertedTempGLEntryVAT@1068 : Integer;|InsertedTempGLEntryVAT@1027 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|LastDocNo@1069 : Code[20];|LastDocNo@1023 : Code[20];|Unchanged| -|LastLineNo@1070 : Integer;||Deleted| -|LastDate@1071 : Date;|LastDate@1021 : Date;|Unchanged| -|LastDocType@1072 : ' ,Payment,Invoice,Credit Memo,Finance Charge Memo,Reminder';|LastDocType@1025 : ' ,Payment,Invoice,Credit Memo,Finance Charge Memo,Reminder';|Unchanged| -|NextCheckEntryNo@1073 : Integer;|NextCheckEntryNo@1028 : Integer;|Unchanged| -|AddCurrGLEntryVATAmt@1075 : Decimal;|AddCurrGLEntryVATAmt@1017 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|CurrencyDate@1076 : Date;|CurrencyDate@1020 : Date;|Unchanged| -|CurrencyFactor@1077 : Decimal;|CurrencyFactor@1019 : Decimal;|Unchanged| -|UseCurrFactorOnly@1078 : Boolean;|UseCurrFactorOnly@1078 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|NonAddCurrCodeOccured@1079 : Boolean;|NonAddCurrCodeOccured@1079 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|FADimAlreadyChecked@1080 : Boolean;|FADimAlreadyChecked@1080 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|AllApplied@1081 : Boolean;||Changed to Local| -|OverrideDimErr@1018 : Boolean;|OverrideDimErr@1018 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|JobLine@1036 : Boolean;|JobLine@1036 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|Prepayment@1037 : Boolean;||Deleted| -|CheckUnrealizedCust@1082 : Boolean;|CheckUnrealizedCust@1082 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|CheckUnrealizedVend@1083 : Boolean;|CheckUnrealizedVend@1083 : Boolean;|Unchanged| -|GLEntryNo@1090 : Integer;|GLEntryNo@1026 : Integer;|Unchanged| -||GLSetupRead@1015 : Boolean;|Added| -||AmountRoundingPrecision@1012 : Decimal;|Added| -||CrCardTransactionEntryNo@1013 : Integer;|Added| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Codeunit 12 Changes: Changes in General Journal Post Procedures](design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index c1a4c82d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Codeunit 408 Dimension Management - description: Codeunit 408 Dimension Management is a function library that handles common tasks that are related to dimensions, such as copying from one table to another or from one document to another. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Codeunit 408 Dimension Management -Codeunit 408 Dimension Management is a function library that handles common tasks that are related to dimensions, such as copying from one table to another or from one document to another. This topic lists the functions that are modified in Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013 R2 and specifies what has to be done to the functions. Many functions are deleted because there is no need for copying between dimension tables. - -## Modified Functions - -|Function Name|Modification Description| -|-------------------|------------------------------| -|CheckDimSetIDComb|New function that substitutes the other check functions and takes a Dimension Set ID as an argument instead of a dimension table.| -|CheckDimSetIDComb

CheckDocDimComb

CheckServContractDimComb

CheckDimBuffer

CheckDimComb

CheckDimValueComb|Delete. All usage should be changed to CheckDimSetIDComb.| -|GetDefaultDim|Modify to return an integer Dimension Set ID instead of a set of records.| -|CopyJnlLineDimToICJnlDim

CopyICJnlDimToJnlLineDim

CopyDocDimtoICDocDim

CopyICDocDimtoICDocDim|Modify to work with DimSetID -> ICJnlLineDim| - -## Deleted Functions - Functions that are deleted from codeunit 408 in connection with the Dimension Set Entries feature are listed below. - -> [!CAUTION] -> During the upgrade of application code from Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 or earlier versions to Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2016, the following functions are not available in Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2016. If you have customizations that use one or more of the functions, you must upgrade that code accordingly. - - InsertJnlLineDim - - UpdateJnlLineDefaultDim - - GetJnlLineDefaultDim - - GetPreviousDocDefaultDim - - GetPreviousProdDocDefaultDim - - InsertDocDim - - UpdateDocDefaultDim - - ExtractDocDefaultDim - - InsertProdDocDim - - UpdateProdDocDefaultDim - - InsertServContractDim - - UpdateServcontractDim - - UpdateDefaultDimNewDimValue - - GetDocDim - - GetProdDocDim - - TypeToTableID1 - - TypeToTableID2 - - TypeToTableID3 - - TypeToTableID4 - - TypeToTableID5 - - DeleteJnlLineDim - - DeleteDocDim - - DeletePostedDocDim - - DeleteProdDocDim - - DeleteServContractDim - - ShowJnlLineDim - - SaveJnlLineDim - - ShowJnlLineNewDim - - SaveJnlLineNewDim - - ShowDocDim - - SaveDocDim - - ShowProdDocDim - - SaveProdDocDim - - ShowTempDim - - SaveTempDim - - ShowTempNewDim - - SaveTempNewDim - - SaveServContractDim - - MoveJnlLineDimToLedgEntryDim - - MoveDocDimToPostedDocDim - - MoveOneDocDimToPostedDocDim - - MoveLedgEntryDimToJnlLineDim - - MoveDimBufToJnlLineDim - - MoveDimBufToLedgEntryDim - - MoveDimBufToPostedDocDim - - MoveDimBufToGLBudgetDim - - CopyJnlLineDimToJnlLineDim - - CopyLedgEntryDimToJnlLineDim - - CopyDocDimToDocDim - - CopyPostedDocDimToPostedDocDim - - CopyDocDimToJnlLineDim - - CopyDimBufToJnlLineDim - - CopyDimBufToDocDim - - CopySCDimToDocDim - - MoveDocDimToLedgEntryDim - - MoveDocDimToDocDim - - MoveDocDimArchvToDocDim - - MoveLedgEntryDimToDocDim - - MoveProdDocDimToProdDocDim - - MoveJnlLineDimToProdDocDim - - MoveJnlLineDimToDocDim - - MoveJnlLineDimToJnlLineDim - - CopyLedgEntryDimToLedgEntryDim - - MoveTempFromDimToTempToDim - - TransferTempToDimToDocDim - - MoveJnlLineDimToBuf - - CopyICJnlDimToICJnlDim - - TestDimValue - - TestNewDimValue - - MoveDimBufToItemBudgetDim. (Delete because the ItemBudgetDim Table is deleted.) - - GetServContractDim - - MoveTempDimToBuf - - UpdateSCInvLineDim - - CopyJnlLineDimToBuffer - - UpdateDocDefaultDim2 - -## See Also - [Design Details: Dimension Set Entries](design-details-dimension-set-entries.md) - [Design Details: Dimension Set Entries Overview](design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md) - [Design Details: Searching for Dimension Combinations](design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md) - [Design Details: Table Structure](design-details-table-structure.md) - [Design Details: Code Examples of Changed Patterns in Modifications](design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-adjustment.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-adjustment.md deleted file mode 100644 index 711ef5f0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-adjustment.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,180 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Cost Adjustment - description: The main purpose of cost adjustment is to forward cost changes from cost sources to cost recipients, according to an item’s costing method, to provide correct inventory valuation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Cost Adjustment -The main purpose of cost adjustment is to forward cost changes from cost sources to cost recipients, according to an item’s costing method, to provide correct inventory valuation. - -An item can be sales invoiced before it has been purchase invoiced, so that the recorded inventory value of the sale does not match the actual purchase cost. Cost adjustment updates the cost of goods sold (COGS) for historic sales entries to ensure that they match the costs of the inbound transactions to which they are applied. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md). - -The following are secondary purposes, or functions, of cost adjustment: - -* Invoice finished production orders: - - * Change the status of value entries from **Expected** to **Actual**. - * Clear WIP accounts. For more information, see [Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md). - * Post variance. For more information, see [Design Details: Variance](design-details-variance.md). - -* Update the unit cost on the item card. - -Inventory costs must be adjusted before the related value entries can be reconciled with the general ledger. For more information, see [Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md). - -## Detecting the Adjustment -The task of detecting if cost adjustment should occur is primarily performed by the Item Jnl.-Post Line routine, while the task of calculating and generating cost adjustment entries is performed by the **Adjust Cost – Item Entries** batch job. - -To be able to forward costs, the detection mechanism determines which sources have changed in costs and to which destination these costs should be forwarded. The following three detection functions exist in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]: - -* Item Application Entry -* Average Cost Adjustment Entry Point -* Order Level - -### Item Application Entry -This detection function is used for items that use FIFO, LIFO, Standard, and Specific costing methods and for fixed applications scenarios. The function works as follows: - -* Cost adjustment is detected by marking the source item ledger entries as *Applied Entry to Adjust* whenever an item ledger entry or value entry is posted. -* Cost is forwarded according to the cost chains that are recorded in the **Item Application Entry** table. - -### Average Cost Adjustment Entry Point -This detection function is used for items that use the Average costing method. The function works as follows: - -* Cost adjustment is detected by marking a record in the **Avg. Cost Adjmt. Entry Point** table whenever a value entry is posted. -* Cost is forwarded by applying the costs to value entries with a later valuation date. - -### Order Level -This detection function is used in conversion scenarios, production and assembly. The function works as follows: - -* Cost adjustment is detected by marking the order whenever a material/resource is posted as consumed/used. -* Cost is forwarding by applying the costs from material/resource to the output entries associated with the same order. - -The Order Level function is used to detect adjustments in assembly posting. The following graphic shows the adjustment entry structure: - -![Adjustment entry structure](media/design_details_assembly_posting_3.png "design_details_assembly_posting_3") - -For more information, see [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md). - -## Manual versus Automatic Cost Adjustment -Cost adjustment can be performed in two ways: - -* Manually, by running the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. You can run this batch job either for all items or for only certain items or item categories. This batch job runs a cost adjustment for the items in inventory for which an inbound transaction has been made, such as a purchase. For items that use the average costing method, the batch job also makes an adjustment if any outbound transactions are created. -* Automatically, by adjusting costs every time that you post an inventory transaction, and when you finish a production order. The cost adjustment is only run for the specific item or items affected by the posting. This is set up when you select the **Automatic Cost Adjustment** check box in the **Inventory Setup** window. - -It is good practice to run the cost adjustment automatically when you post because unit costs are more frequently updated and therefore more accurate. The disadvantage is that the performance of the database can be affected by running the cost adjustment so often. - -Because it is important to keep the unit cost of an item up to date, it is recommend that you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job as often as possible, during nonworking hours. Alternatively, use automatic cost adjustment. This ensures that the unit cost is updated for items daily. - -Regardless if you run the cost adjustment manually or automatically, the adjustment process and its consequences are the same. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates the value of the inbound transaction and forwards that cost to any outbound transactions, such as sales or consumptions, which have been applied to the inbound transaction. The cost adjustment creates value entries that contain adjustment amounts and amounts that compensate for rounding. - -The new adjustment and rounding value entries have the posting date of the related invoice. Exceptions are if the value entries fall in a closed accounting period or inventory period or if the posting date is earlier than the date in the **Allow Posting From** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window. If this occurs, the batch job assigns the posting date as the first date of the next open period. - -## Adjust Cost - Item Entries Batch Job -When you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, you have the option to run the batch job for all items or for only certain items or categories. - -> [!NOTE] -> We recommend that you always run the batch job for all items and only use the filtering option to reduce the runtime of the batch job, or to fix the cost of a certain item. - -### Example -The following example shows if you post a purchased item as received and invoiced on 01-01-20. You later post the sold item as shipped and invoiced on 01-15-20. Then, you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** and **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch jobs. The following entries are created. - -**Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Cost Posted to G/L|Invoiced Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------|----------------------------|-------------------------|-----------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|10.00|10.00|1|1| -|01-15-20|Sale|-10.00|-10.00|-1|2| - -**Relation Entries in the G/L – Item Ledger Relation Table** - -|G/L Entry No.|Value Entry No.|G/L Register No.| -|--------------------|---------------------|-----------------------| -|1|1|1| -|2|1|1| -|3|2|1| -|4|2|1| - -**General Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|G/L Account|Account No. (En-US Demo)|Amount|Entry No.| -|------------------|------------------|---------------------------------|------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|10.00|1| -|01-01-20|[Direct Cost Applied Account]|7291|-10.00|2| -|01-15-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|-10.00|3| -|01-15-20|[COGS Account]|7290|10.00|4| - -Later, you post a related purchase item charge for 2.00 LCY invoiced on 02-10-20. You run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job and then run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job. The cost adjustment batch job adjusts the cost of the sale by -2.00 LCY accordingly, and the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job posts the new value entries to the general ledger. The result is as follows. - -**Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Cost Posted to G/L|Invoiced Quantity|Adjustment|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------|----------------------------|-------------------------|-----------------------|----------------|---------------| -|02-10-20|Purchase|2.00|2.00|0|No|3| -|01-15-20|Sale|-2.00|-2.00|0|Yes|4| - -**Relation Entries in the G/L – Item Ledger Relation Table** - -|G/L Entry No.|Value Entry No.|G/L Register No.| -|--------------------|---------------------|-----------------------| -|5|3|2| -|6|3|2| -|7|4|2| -|8|4|2| - -**General Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|G/L Account|Account No. (En-US Demo)|Amount|Entry No.| -|------------------|------------------|---------------------------------|-------------|---------------| -|02-10-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|2.00|5| -|02-10-20|[Direct Cost Applied Account]|7291|-2.00|6| -|01-15-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|-2.00|7| -|01-15-20|[COGS Account]|7290|2.00|8| - -## Automatic Cost Adjustment -To set up cost adjustment to run automatically when you post an inventory transaction, use the **Automatic Cost Adjustment** field in the **Inventory Setup** window. This field enables you to select how far back in time from the current work date that you want automatic cost adjustment to be performed. The following options exist. - -|Option|Description| -|----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Never|Costs are not adjusted when you post.| -|Day|Costs are adjusted if posting occurs within one day from the work date.| -|Week|Costs are adjusted if posting occurs within one week from the work date.| -|Month|Costs are adjusted if posting occurs within one month from the work date.| -|Quarter|Costs are adjusted if posting occurs within one quarter from the work date.| -|Year|Costs are adjusted if posting occurs within one year from the work date.| -|Always|Costs are always adjusted when you post, regardless of the posting date.| - -The selection that you make in the **Automatic Cost Adjustment** field is important for performance and the accuracy of your costs. Shorter time periods, such as **Day** or **Week**, affect system performance less, because they provide the stricter requirement that only costs posted in the last day or week can be automatically adjusted. This means that the automatic cost adjustment does not run as frequently and therefore affects system performance less. However, it also means that unit costs may be less accurate. - -### Example -The following example shows an automatic cost adjustment scenario: - -* On January 10, you post a purchased item as received and invoiced. -* On January 15, you post a sales order for the item as shipped and invoiced. -* On February 5, you receive an invoice for a freight charge on the original purchase. You post this freight charge, applying it to the original purchase invoice, which increases the cost of the original purchase. - -If you have set up the automatic cost adjustment to apply to postings that occur within a month or a quarter from the current work date, then the automatic cost adjustment runs and forwards the cost of the purchase to the sale. - -If you have set up the automatic cost adjustment to apply to postings that occur within a day or a week from the current work date, then the automatic cost adjustment does not run, and the cost of the purchase is not forwarded to the sale until you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) -[Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md) -[Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md) -[Design Details: Variance](design-details-variance.md) -[Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md) -[Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-components.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-components.md deleted file mode 100644 index 07b7bed6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-cost-components.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Cost Components - description: Cost components are different types of costs that make up the value of an inventory increase or decrease. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 05/20/2020 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Cost Components -Cost components are different types of costs that make up the value of an inventory increase or decrease. - - The following table shows the different cost components and any subordinate cost components that they consist of. - -|Cost Component|Subordinate Cost Component|Description| -|--------------------|--------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Direct cost|Unit cost (direct purchase price)|Cost that can be traced to a cost object.| -|Direct cost|Freight cost (item charge)|Cost that can be traced to a cost object.| -|Direct cost|Insurance cost (item charge)|Cost that can be traced to a cost object.| -|Indirect cost||Cost that cannot be traced to a cost object.| -|Variance|Purchase variance|The difference between actual and standard costs, which is only posted for items using the **Standard** costing method.| -|Variance|Material variance|The difference between actual and standard costs, which is only posted for items using the **Standard** costing method.| -|Variance|Capacity variance|The difference between actual and standard costs, which is only posted for items using the **Standard** costing method.| -|Variance|Subcontracted variance|The difference between actual and standard costs, which is only posted for items using the **Standard** costing method.| -|Variance|Capacity overhead variance|The difference between actual and standard costs, which is only posted for items using the **Standard** costing method.| -|Variance|Manufacturing overhead variance|The difference between actual and standard costs, which is only posted for items using the **Standard** costing method.| -|Revaluation||A depreciation or appreciation of the current inventory value.| -|Rounding||Residuals caused by the way in which valuation of inventory decreases are calculated.| - -> [!NOTE] -> Freight and insurance costs are item charges that can be added to an item’s cost at any time. When you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, the value of any related inventory decreases are updated accordingly. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Variance](design-details-variance.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-costing-methods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-costing-methods.md deleted file mode 100644 index d7d0b460..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-costing-methods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,159 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Costing Methods - description: The costing method determines if an actual or a budgeted value is capitalized and used in the cost calculation. Together with the posting date and sequence, the costing method also influences how the cost flow is recorded. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Costing Methods -The costing method determines if an actual or a budgeted value is capitalized and used in the cost calculation. Together with the posting date and sequence, the costing method also influences how the cost flow is recorded. The following methods are supported in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]: - -|Costing method|Description|When to use| -|--------------------|---------------------------------------|-----------------| -|FIFO|An item’s unit cost is the actual value of any receipt of the item, selected by the FIFO rule.

In inventory valuation, it is assumed that the first items placed in inventory are sold first.|In business environments where product cost is stable.

(When prices are rising, the balance sheet shows greater value. This means that tax liabilities increase, but credit scores and the ability to borrow cash improve.)

For items with a limited shelf life, because the oldest goods need to be sold before they pass their sell-by date.| -|LIFO|An item’s unit cost is the actual value of any receipt of the item, selected by the LIFO rule.

In inventory valuation, it is assumed that the last items placed in inventory are sold first.|Disallowed in many countries/regions, as it can be used to depress profit.

(When prices are rising, the value on the income statement decreases. This means that tax liabilities decrease, but the ability to borrow cash deteriorates.)| -|Average|An item’s unit cost is calculated as the average unit cost at each point in time after a purchase.

For inventory valuation, it is assumes that all inventories are sold simultaneously.|In business environments where product cost is unstable.

When inventories are piled or mixed together and cannot be differentiated, such as chemicals.| -|Specific|An item’s unit cost is the exact cost at which the particular unit was received.|In production or trade of easily identifiable items with fairly high unit costs.

For items that are subject to regulation.

For items with serial numbers.| -|Standard|An item’s unit cost is preset based on estimated.

When the actual cost is realized later, the standard cost must be adjusted to the actual cost through variance values.|Where cost control is critical.

In repetitive manufacturing, to value the costs of direct material, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

Where there is discipline and staff to maintain standards.| - - The following image shows how costs flow through the inventory for each costing method. - - ![Costing methods](media/design_details_inventory_costing_7_costing_methods.png "design_details_inventory_costing_7_costing_methods") - - Costing methods differ in the way that they value inventory decreases and if they use actual cost or standard cost as the valuation base. The following table explains the different characteristics. (The LIFO method is excluded, as it is very similar to the FIFO method.) - -|Characteristics |FIFO|Average|Standard|Specific| -|-|----------|-------------|--------------|--------------| -|General characteristic|Easy to understand|Based on period options: **Day**/**Week**/**Month**/**Quarter**/**Accounting Period**.

Can be calculated per item or per item/location/variant.|Easy to use, but requires qualified maintenance.|Requires item tracking on both inbound and outbound transaction.

Typically used for serialized items.| -|Application/Adjustment|Application keeps track of **the remaining quantity**.

Adjustment forwards costs according to quantity application.|Application keeps track of the **remaining quantity**.

Costs are calculated and forwarded per the **valuation date**.|Application keeps track of the **remaining quantity**.

Application is based on FIFO.|All applications are fixed.| -|Revaluation|Revalues invoiced quantity only.

Can be done per item or per item ledger entry.

Can be done backward in time.|Revalues invoiced quantity only.

Can be done per item only.

Can be done backward in time.|Revalues invoiced and un-invoiced quantities.

Can be done per item or per item ledger entry.

Can be done backward in time.|Revalues invoiced quantity only.

Can be done per item or per item ledger entry.

Can be done backward in time.| -|Miscellaneous|If you back-date an inventory decrease, then existing entries are NOT reapplied to provide a correct FIFO cost flow.|If you back-date an inventory increase or decrease, then the average cost is recalculated, and all affected entries are adjusted.

If you change the period or calculation type, then all affected entries must be adjusted.|Use the **Standard Worksheet** window to periodically update and roll up standard costs.

Is NOT supported per SKU.

No historic records exist for standard costs.|You can use specific item tracking without using the Specific costing method. Then the cost will NOT follow the lot number, but the cost assumption of the selected costing method.| - -## Example - This section gives examples of how different costing methods affect inventory value. - - The following table shows the inventory increases and decreases that the examples are based on. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|1|1| -|01-01-20|1|2| -|01-01-20|1|3| -|02-01-20|-1|4| -|03-01-20|-1|5| -|04-01-20|-1|6| - -> [!NOTE] -> The resulting quantity in inventory is zero. Consequently, the inventory value must also be zero, regardless of the costing method. - -### Effect of Costing Methods on Valuing Inventory Increases - **FIFO**/**LIFO**/**Average**/**Specific** - - For items with costing methods that use actual cost as the valuation base (**FIFO**, **LIFO**, **Average**, or **Specific**), inventory increases are valued at the item’s acquisition cost. - - The following table shows how inventory increases are valued for all costing methods except **Standard**. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|1|10.00|1| -|01-01-20|1|20.00|2| -|01-01-20|1|30.00|3| - - **Standard** - - For items using the **Standard** costing method, inventory increases are valued at the item’s current standard cost. - - The following table shows how inventory increases are valued for the **Standard** costing method. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|1|15.00|1| -|01-01-20|1|15.00|2| -|01-01-20|1|15.00|3| - -### Effect of Costing Methods on Valuing Inventory Decreases - **FIFO** - - For items using the **FIFO** costing method, items that were purchased first are always sold first (entry numbers 3, 2, and 1 in this example). Accordingly, inventory decreases are valued by taking the value of the first inventory increase. - - COGS is calculated using the value of the first inventory acquisitions. - - The following table shows how inventory decreases are valued for the **FIFO** costing method. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|-1|-10.00|4| -|03-01-20|-1|-20.00|5| -|04-01-20|-1|-30.00|6| - - **LIFO** - - For items using the **LIFO** costing method, items that were purchased most recently are always sold first (entry numbers 3, 2, and 1 in this example). Accordingly, inventory decreases are valued by taking the value of the last inventory increase. - - COGS is calculated using the value of the most recent inventory acquisitions. - - The following table shows how inventory decreases are valued for the **LIFO** costing method. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|-1|-30.00|4| -|03-01-20|-1|-20.00|5| -|04-01-20|-1|-10.00|6| - - **Average** - - For items using the **Average** costing method, inventory decreases are valued by calculating a weighted average of the remaining inventory on the last day of the average cost period in which the inventory decrease was posted. For more information, see [Design Details: Average Cost](design-details-average-cost.md). - - The following table shows how inventory decreases are valued for the **Average** costing method. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|-1|-20.00|4| -|03-01-20|-1|-20.00|5| -|04-01-20|-1|-20.00|6| - - **Standard** - - For items using the **Standard** costing method, inventory decreases are valued similar to the **FIFO** costing method, except valuation is based on a standard cost, not on the actual cost. - - The following table shows how inventory decreases are valued for the **Standard** costing method. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|-1|-15.00|4| -|03-01-20|-1|-15.00|5| -|04-01-20|-1|-15.00|6| - - **Specific** - - Costing methods make an assumption about how cost flows from an inventory increase to an inventory decrease. However, if more accurate information about the cost flow exists, then you can override this assumption by creating a fixed application between entries. A fixed application creates a link between an inventory decrease and a specific inventory increase and directs the cost flow accordingly. - - For items using the **Specific** costing method, inventory decreases are valued according to the inventory increase that it is linked to by the fixed application. - - The following table shows how inventory decreases are valued for the **Specific** costing method. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Applies-to Entry|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|-----------------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|-1|-20.00|**2**|4| -|03-01-20|-1|-10.00|**1**|5| -|04-01-20|-1|-30.00|**3**|6| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Variance](design-details-variance.md) - [Design Details: Average Cost](design-details-average-cost.md) - [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1a61f3e8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date - description: This topic describes the rules that planning applies to orders in the frozen zone. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: planning, frozen, design serial, lot - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date -To avoid that a supply plan shows impossible and therefore useless suggestions, the planning system regards the period up until the planning starting date a frozen zone where nothing is planned for. The following rule applies to the frozen zone: - -All supply and demand before the starting date of the planning period will be considered a part of inventory or shipped. - -Accordingly, the planning system will not, with a few exceptions, suggest any changes to supply orders in the frozen zone, and no order tracking links are created or maintained for that period. - -The exceptions to this rule are as follows: - -* If the projected available inventory, including the sum of supply and demand in the frozen zone, is below zero. -* If serial/lot numbers are required on the backdated order(s). -* If the supply-demand set is linked by an order-to-order policy. - -If the initial available inventory is below zero, the planning system suggests an emergency supply order on the day before the planning period to cover the missing quantity. Consequently, the projected and available inventory will always be at least zero when planning for the future period begins. The planning line for this supply order will display an Emergency warning icon and additional information is provided upon lookup. - -## Serial/Lot Numbers and Order-to-Order Links are Exempt from the Frozen Zone -If serial/lot numbers are required or an order-to-order link exists, the planning system will disregard the frozen zone and incorporate such quantities that are back-dated from the starting date and potentially suggest corrective actions if demand and supply is not synchronized. The business reason for this principle is that such specific demand-supply sets must match to ensure that this specific demand is fulfilled. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-and-supply.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-and-supply.md deleted file mode 100644 index f8750d0a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-and-supply.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Demand and Supply. - description: Demand is the common term used for any kind of gross demand, such as a sales order and component need from a production order. In addition, the program allows more technical types of demand, such as negative inventory and purchase returns. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Demand and Supply -Demand is the common term used for any kind of gross demand, such as a sales order and component need from a production order. In addition, the program allows more technical types of demand, such as negative inventory and purchase returns. - - Supply is the common term used for any kind of positive or inbound quantity, such as inventory, purchases, assembly, production, or inbound transfers. In addition, a sales return may also represent supply. - - To sort out the many sources of demand and supply, the planning system organizes them on two time lines called inventory profiles. One profile holds demand events, and the other holds the corresponding supply events. Each event represents one order network entity, such as a sales order line, an item ledger entry, or a production order line. - - When inventory profiles are loaded, the different demand-supply sets are balanced to output a supply plan that fulfills the listed goals. - - Planning parameters and inventory levels are other types of demand and supply respectively, which undergo integrated balancing to replenish stock items. For more information, see [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) - [Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6cc46db0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details for Demand and Supply - description: This topic introduces the concept of demand, which is the common term used for any kind of gross demand, such as a sales order and component need from a production order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, demand, supply, inventory, planning - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details for Demand and Supply -Demand is the common term used for any kind of gross demand, such as a sales order and component need from a production order. In addition, the program allows more technical types of demand, such as negative inventory and purchase returns. - -Supply is the common term used for any kind of positive or inbound quantity, such as inventory, purchases, assembly, production, or inbound transfers. In addition, a sales return may also represent supply. - -To sort out the many sources of demand and supply, the planning system organizes them on two time lines called inventory profiles. One profile holds demand events, and the other holds the corresponding supply events. Each event represents one order network entity, such as a sales order line, an item ledger entry, or a production order line. - -When inventory profiles are loaded, the different demand-supply sets are balanced to output a supply plan that fulfills the listed goals. - -Planning parameters and inventory levels are other types of demand and supply respectively, which undergo integrated balancing to replenish stock items. For more information, see [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index bbcd1178..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Dimension Set Entries Overview - description: This topic describes how dimension set entries are stored and posted in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: dimension - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dimension Set Entries Overview -This topic describes how dimension set entries are stored and posted in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Dimension Sets -A dimension set is a unique combination of dimension values. It is stored as dimension set entries in the database. Each dimension set entry represents a single dimension value. The dimension set is identified by a common dimension set ID that is assigned to each dimension set entry that belongs to the dimension set. - -The following example shows a dimension set that has three dimension set entries. The dimension set is identified by a dimension set ID, which is 108. - -|Dimension Set ID|Dimension Code|Dimension Value Code|Dimension Value Name| -|----------------------|--------------------|--------------------------|--------------------------| -|108|AREA|70|America North| -|108|BUSINESSGROUP|HOME|Home| -|108|DEPARTMENT|SALES|Sales| - -## Dimension Set Entries -Dimension sets are stored in the **Dimension Set Entry** table as dimension set entries with the same dimension set ID. - -![Dimension Entry overview](media/dimensionentrynav7.png "DimensionEntryNAV7") - -When you create a new journal line, document header, or document line, you can specify a combination of dimension values. Instead of explicitly storing each dimension value in the database, a dimension set ID is assigned to the journal line, document header, or document line to specify the dimension set. - -When you edit and close the **Edit Dimension Set Entries** window, a check is performed to see whether the combination of dimension values exists as a dimension set in the table. If the combination occurs in the table, then the corresponding dimension set ID is assigned to the journal line, document header, or document line. Otherwise, a new dimension set is added to the table, and the new dimension set ID is assigned to the journal line, document header, or document line. - -## Performance Improvement -By storing dimension sets once in the database, database space is preserved, and overall performance is improved. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Searching for Dimension Combinations](design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md) -[Design Details: Table Structure](design-details-table-structure.md) -[Design Details: Codeunit 408 Dimension Management](design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md) -[Design Details: Code Examples of Changed Patterns in Modifications](design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md) -[Design Details: Dimension Set Entries](design-details-dimension-set-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index ddfbbb47..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-dimension-set-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Dimension Set Entries - description: This documentation provides detailed technical insight into the concepts and principles that are used to redesign the dimension entry storing and posting feature. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, dimensions, codeunit - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Dimension Set Entries -This documentation provides detailed technical insight into the concepts and principles that are used to redesign the dimension entry storing and posting feature in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The documentation starts by describing conceptual overviews of the redesign. Then it explains the technical architecture to show how the redesign is made. Finally, it provides code examples to prepare you for dimension code migration and upgrade. - -## In This Section -[Dimension Set Entries Overview](design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md) -[Design Details: Searching for Dimension Combinations](design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md) -[Design Details: Table Structure](design-details-table-structure.md) -[Design Details: Codeunit 408 Dimension Management](design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md) -[Design Details: Code Examples of Changed Patterns in Modifications](design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-expected-cost-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-expected-cost-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 91a02a07..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-expected-cost-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Expected Cost Posting - description: Expected costs represent the estimation of, for example, a purchased item’s cost that you record before you receive the invoice for the item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Expected Cost Posting -Expected costs represent the estimation of, for example, a purchased item’s cost that you record before you receive the invoice for the item. - - You can post expected cost to inventory and to the general ledger. When you post a quantity that is only received or shipped but not invoiced, then a value entry is created with the expected cost. This expected cost affects the inventory value, but is not posted to the general ledger unless you set up the system up to do so. - -> [!NOTE] -> Expected costs are only managed for item transactions. Expected costs are not for immaterial transaction types, such as capacity and item charges. - - If only the quantity part of an inventory increase has been posted, then the inventory value in the general ledger does not change unless you have selected the **Expected Cost Posting to G/L** check box in the **Inventory Setup** window. In that case, the expected cost is posted to interim accounts at the time of receipt. After the receipt has been fully invoiced, the interim accounts are then balanced and the actual cost is posted to the inventory account. - - To support reconciliation and traceability work, the invoiced value entry shows the expected cost amount that has been posted to balance the interim accounts. - -## Example - The following example shows expected cost if the **Automatic Cost Posting** check box and the **Expected Cost Posting to G/L** check box are selected in the **Inventory Setup** window. - - You post a purchase order as received. The expected cost is LCY 95.00. - - **Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Cost Amount (Expected)|Expected Cost Posted to G/L|Expected Cost|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|------------------------------|----------------------------------|-------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|Direct Cost|95.00|95.00|Yes|1|1| - - **Relation Entries in the G/L – Item Ledger Relation Table** - -|G/L Entry No.|Value Entry No.|G/L Register No.| -|--------------------|---------------------|-----------------------| -|1|1|1| -|2|1|1| - - **General Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|G/L Account|Account No. (En-US Demo)|Amount|Entry No.| -|------------------|------------------|---------------------------------|------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|Inventory Accrual Account (Interim)|5530|-95.00|2| -|01-01-20|Inventory Account (Interim)|2131|95.00|1| - - At a later date, you post the purchase order as invoiced. The invoiced cost is LCY 100.00. - - **Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Cost Amount (Actual)|Cost Amount (Expected)|Cost Posted to G/L|Expected Cost|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------|------------------------------|-------------------------|-------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-15-20|100.00|-95.00|100.00|No|1|2| - - **Relation Entries in the G/L – Item Ledger Relation Table** - -|G/L Entry No.|Value Entry No.|G/L Register No.| -|--------------------|---------------------|-----------------------| -|3|2|2| -|4|2|2| -|5|2|2| -|6|2|2| - - **General Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|G/L Account|Account No. (En-US Demo)|Amount|Entry No.| -|------------------|------------------|---------------------------------|------------|---------------| -|01-15-20|Inventory Accrual Account (Interim)|5530|95.00|4| -|01-15-20|Inventory Account (Interim)|2131|-95.00|3| -|01-15-20|Direct Cost Applied Account|7291|-100|6| -|01-15-20|Inventory Account|2130|100|5| - -## See Also - [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) - [Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md) - [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md) - [Design Details: Variance](design-details-variance.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-fixed-reorder-qty.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-fixed-reorder-qty.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3e2ca5ea..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-fixed-reorder-qty.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Fixed Reorder Qty. - description: The Fixed Reorder Qty. policy is related to inventory planning of typical C-items (low inventory cost, low risk of obsolescence, and/or many items). This policy is usually used in connection with a reorder point reflecting the anticipated demand during the lead time of the item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Fixed Reorder Qty. -The Fixed Reorder Qty. policy is related to inventory planning of typical C-items (low inventory cost, low risk of obsolescence, and/or many items). This policy is usually used in connection with a reorder point reflecting the anticipated demand during the lead time of the item. - -## Calculated per Time Bucket - If the planning system detects that the reorder point has been reached or crossed in a given time bucket (reorder cycle) – above or on the reorder point at the start of the period and below or on the reorder point at the end of the period – it will suggest to create a new supply order of the specified reorder quantity and forward schedule it from the first date after the end of the time bucket. - - The bucketed reorder point concept reduces the number of supply suggestions. This reflects a manual process of frequently walking through the warehouse to check the actual contents in the various bins. - -## Creates only Necessary Supply - Before suggesting a new supply order to meet a reorder point, the planning system checks if supply has already been ordered to be received within the item’s lead time. If an existing supply order will solve the problem by bringing the projected inventory to or above the reorder point within the lead time, the system will not suggest a new supply order. - - Supply orders that are created specifically to meet a reorder point is excluded from ordinary supply balancing, and will not in any way be changed afterwards. Consequently, if an item using reorder point is to be phased out (not replenished), it is advisable to review outstanding supply orders manually or change the reordering policy to Lot-for-Lot, whereby the system will reduce or cancel superfluous supply. - -## Combines with Order Modifiers - The order modifiers, Minimum Order Quantity, Maximum Order Quantity, and Order Multiple, should not play a big role when the fixed reorder quantity policy is used. However, the planning system still takes these modifiers into account and will decrease the quantity to the specified maximum order quantity (and create two or more supplies in order to reach the total order quantity), increase the order to the specified minimum order quantity, or round the order quantity up to meet a specified order multiple. - -## Combines with Calendars - Before suggesting a new supply order to meet a reorder point, the planning system checks if the order is scheduled for a non-working day, according to any calendars that are defined in the **Base Calendar Code** field in the **Company Information** and **Location Card** windows. - - If the scheduled date is a non-working day, the planning system moves the order forward to the nearest working date. This may result in an order that meets a reorder point but does not meet some specific demand. For such unbalanced demand, the planning system creates an extra supply. - -## Should Not be Used with Forecast - Because the anticipated demand is already expressed in the reorder point level it is not necessary to include a forecast in the planning of an item using a reorder point. If it is relevant to base the plan on a forecast, use the lot-for-lot policy. - -## Must Not be Used with Reservations - If the user has reserved a quantity, for instance a quantity in inventory, for some distant demand, the planning foundation will be disturbed. Even if the projected inventory level is acceptable in relation to the reorder point, the quantities might not be available. The system may try to compensate for that by creating exception orders; however, it is recommended that the Reserve field is set to Never on items that are planned using a reorder point. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Maximum Qty.](design-details-maximum-qty.md) - [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) - [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7580f3f5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: General Journal Post Line Overview - description: This topic introduces changes to Codeunit 12, **Gen. Jnl.-Post Line**, which is the major application object for general ledger posting and is the only place to insert general ledger, VAT, and customer and vendor ledger entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, general ledger, post - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# General Journal Post Line Overview -Codeunit 12, **Gen. Jnl.-Post Line**, is the major application object for general ledger posting and is the only place to insert general ledger, VAT, and customer and vendor ledger entries. This codeunit is also used for all Apply, Unapply and Reverse operations. - -While the codeunit has been improved in each release over the last ten years, its architecture remained essentially unchanged. The codeunit became very large, with approximately 7,600 code lines. With this release of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the architecture is changed and the codeunit has been made simpler and more maintainable. This documentation introduces the changes and provides information that you will need for upgrade. - -## Old Architecture -The old architecture had the following features: - -* There was extensive use of global variables, which increased the possibility of hidden errors due to use of variables with the wrong scope. -* There were many long procedures (with more than 100 code lines) that also had high cyclomatic complexity (that is, a lot of CASE, REPEAT, IF nested statements), which made the code very difficult to read and maintain. -* Several procedures that were only used locally and were only meant to be used locally were not marked as local. -* Most procedures had no parameters and used global variables. Some used parameters and overrode global variables with locals. -* Code patterns for searching the general ledger accounts and creating general ledger and VAT entries was not standardized and varied from place to place. In addition, there was a lot of code duplication and broken symmetry between customer and vendor code. -* A large part of the code in codeunit 12, approximately 30 percent, related to payment discount and tolerance calculations, although these features are not needed in many countries or regions. -* Posting, Apply, Unapply, Reverse, Payment Discount and Tolerance, and Exchange Rate Adjustment were married together in codeunit 12 using a long list of global variables. - -### New Architecture -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], codeunit 12 has had the following improvements: - -* Codeunit 12 has been refactored into smaller procedures (all less than 100 code lines). -* Standardized patterns for the search of general ledger accounts have been implemented by using helper functions from Posting Group tables. -* A Posting Engine Framework has been implemented to manage the start and finish of transactions and to isolate the creation to general ledger and VAT entries, the collection of VAT adjustment, and the calculation of additional currency amounts. -* Code duplication has been eliminated. -* Many helper functions have been transferred to corresponding customer and vendor ledger entry tables. -* The use of global variables has been minimized, so that each procedure uses parameters and encapsulates its own application logic. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Posting Interface Structure](design-details-posting-interface-structure.md) -[Design Details: Posting Engine Structure](design-details-posting-engine-structure.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line.md deleted file mode 100644 index 766aa4dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-general-journal-post-line.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - General Journal Post Line - description: This topic provides insight into the concepts and principles that are used to redesign the general journal posting line feature in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, general journal, posting, codeunit 12 - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: General Journal Post Line -This documentation provides detailed technical insight into the concepts and principles that are used to redesign the general journal posting line feature in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The redesign makes codeunit 12 simpler and more maintainable. The documentation starts by describing conceptual overviews of the redesign. Then it explains the technical architecture to show the changes that result from the redesign. - -## In This Section -[General Journal Post Line Overview](design-details-general-journal-post-line-overview.md) -[Design Details: Posting Interface Structure](design-details-posting-interface-structure.md) -[Design Details: Posting Engine Structure](design-details-posting-engine-structure.md) -[Codeunit 12 Changes: Mapping Global Variables for General Journal Post Line](design-details-codeunit-12-changes-mapping-global-variables-for-general-journal-post-line.md) -[Codeunit 12 Changes: Changes in General Journal Post Procedures](design-details-codeunit-12-changes-changes-in-general-journal-post-procedures.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-projected-negative-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-projected-negative-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7ac39187..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-projected-negative-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Handling Projected Negative Inventory - description: The reorder point expresses the anticipated demand during the lead time of the item. When the reorder point is passed, it is time to order more. But the projected inventory must be large enough to cover the demand until the new order is received. Meanwhile, the safety stock should take care of fluctuations in demand up to a targeted service level. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Handling Projected Negative Inventory -The reorder point expresses the anticipated demand during the lead time of the item. When the reorder point is passed, it is time to order more. But the projected inventory must be large enough to cover the demand until the new order is received. Meanwhile, the safety stock should take care of fluctuations in demand up to a targeted service level. - - Consequently, the planning system considers it an emergency if a future demand cannot be served from the projected inventory, or expressed in another way, that the projected inventory goes negative. The system deals with such an exception by suggesting a new supply order to meet the part of the demand that cannot be met by inventory or other supply. The order size of the new supply order will not take the maximum inventory or the reorder quantity into consideration, nor will it take into consideration the order modifiers Maximum Order Quantity, Minimum Order Quantity, and Order Multiple. Instead, it will reflect the exact deficiency. - - The planning line for this type of supply order will display an Emergency warning icon, and additional information will be provided upon lookup to inform the user of the situation. - - In the following illustration, supply D represents an emergency order to adjust for negative inventory. - - ![Supply Planning Negatie Inventory Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_negative_inventory.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_2_negative_inventory") - -1. Supply **A**, initial projected inventory, is below reorder point. - -2. A new forward-scheduled supply is created (**C**). - - (Quantity = Maximum Inventory – Projected Inventory Level) - -3. Supply **A** is closed by demand **B**, which is not fully covered. - - (Demand **B** could try to schedule Supply C in but that will not happen according to the time-bucket concept.) - -4. New supply (**D**) is created to cover the remaining quantity on Demand **B**. - -5. Demand **B** is closed (creating a reminder to the projected inventory). - -6. The new supply **D** is closed. - -7. Projected Inventory is checked; reorder point has not been crossed. - -8. Supply **C** is closed (no more demand exists). - -9. Final check: No outstanding inventory level reminders exist. - -> [!NOTE] -> Step 4 reflects how the system reacts in versions earlier than Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 SP1. - - This concludes the description of central principles relating to inventory planning based on reordering policies. The following section describes the characteristics of the four supported reordering policies. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) - [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 65e3d337..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,295 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Handling Reordering Policies | Microsoft Docs - description: Overview of tasks for defining a reorder policy in supply planning. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: dynamics-nav-2018 - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 06/08/2020 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies -For an item to participate in supply planning, a reorder policy must be defined. The following four reordering policies exist: - -* Fixed Reorder Qty. -* Maximum Qty. -* Order -* Lot-for-Lot - -Fixed Reorder Qty. and Maximum Qty. policies relate to inventory planning. Although inventory planning is technically simpler than the balancing procedure, these policies must coexist with the step-by-step balancing of supply and order tracking. To control the integration between the two, and to provide visibility into the involved planning logic, strict principles govern how reordering policies are handled. - -## The Role of the Reorder Point -In addition to the general balancing of supply and demand, the planning system must also monitor inventory levels for the affected items to respect the defined reordering policies. - -A reorder point represents demand during lead time. When the projected inventory passes below the inventory level defined by the reorder point, it is time to order more quantity. Meanwhile, the inventory is expected to decrease gradually and possibly reach zero (or the safety stock level), until the replenishment arrives. - -Accordingly, the planning system will suggest a forward-scheduled supply order at the point when the projected inventory passes below the reorder point. - -The reorder point reflects a certain inventory level. However, inventory levels can move significantly during the time bucket and, therefore, the planning system must constantly monitor the projected available inventory. - -## Monitoring the Projected Inventory Level and the Reorder Point -Inventory is a type of supply, but for inventory planning, the planning system distinguishes between two inventory levels: - -* Projected inventory -* Projected available inventory - -### Projected Inventory -Initially, projected inventory is the quantity of gross inventory, including supply and demand in the past even if not posted, when starting the planning process. In the future, this becomes a moving projected inventory level that is maintained by gross quantities from future supply and demand because those are introduced along the time line (whether reserved or in other ways allocated). - -The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder point and to determine the reorder quantity when using the Maximum Qty. reordering policy. - -### Projected Available Inventory -The projected available inventory is the part of the projected inventory that at a given point in time is available to fulfill demand. The projected available inventory is used by the planning engine when monitoring the safety stock level. - -The projected available inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the safety stock level, since the safety stock must always be available to serve unexpected demand. - -### Time Buckets -Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to detect when the reorder point is reached or crossed and to calculate the right order quantity when using the Maximum Qty. reordering policy. - -As stated earlier, the projected inventory level is calculated at the start of the planning period. It is a gross level that does not consider reservations and similar allocations. To monitor this inventory level during the planning sequence, the system monitors the aggregated changes over a period of time, a time bucket. The system ensures that the time bucket is at least one day since it is the most precise unit of time for a demand or supply event. - -### Determining the Projected Inventory Level -The following sequence describes how the projected inventory level is determined: - -* When a supply event, such as a purchase order has been totally planned, it will increase the projected inventory on its due date. -* When a demand event has been fully satisfied, it will not decrease the projected inventory right away. Instead, it posts a decrease reminder, which is an internal record that holds the date and quantity of the contribution to the projected inventory. -* When a subsequent supply event is planned and placed on the time line, the posted decrease reminders are investigated one by one up until the planned date of the supply while updating the projected inventory. During this process, the reorder point level of the internal increase reminder may be reached or crossed. -* If a new supply order is introduced, the system checks if it is entered before the current supply. If it is, the new supply becomes current supply and the balancing procedure starts over. - -The following shows a graphical illustration of this principle: - -![Determining the Projected Inventory Level](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_projected_inventory.png "Determining the Projected Inventory Level") - -1. Supply **Sa** of 4 (fixed) closes Demand **Da** of -3. -2. CloseDemand: Create a decrease reminder of -3 (not shown). -3. Supply **Sa** is closed with a surplus of 1 (no more demand exists). - - This increases the projected inventory level to +4, while the projected **available** inventory becomes -1. - -4. The next supply **Sb** of 2 (another order) has already been placed on the timeline. -5. System checks if there is any decrease reminder preceding **Sb** (there is not, so no action is taken). -6. System closes supply **Sb** (no more demand exists)—either A: by reducing it to 0 (cancel) or B: by leaving as is. - - This increases the projected inventory level (A: +0 => +4 or B: +2 = +6). - -7. System makes a final check: Is there any decrease reminder? Yes, there is one on the date of **Da**. -8. System adds the decrease reminder of -3 reminder to the projected inventory level, either A: +4 -3 = 1 or B: +6 -3 = +3. -9. In case of A, the system creates a forward-scheduled order starting on date **Da**. - - In case of B, the reorder point is reached and a new order is created. - -## The Role of the Time Bucket -The purpose of the time bucket is to collect demand events within the time page in order to make a joint supply order. - -For reordering policies that use a reorder point, you can define a time bucket. This ensures that demand within the same time period is accumulated before checking the impact on the projected inventory and whether the reorder point has been passed. If the reorder point is passed, a new supply order is scheduled forward from the end of the period defined by the time bucket. The time buckets begin on the planning starting date. - -The time-bucketed concept reflects the manual process of checking the inventory level on a frequent basis rather than for each transaction. The user needs to define the frequency (the time bucket). For example, the user gathers all item needs from one vendor to place a weekly order. - -![Example of time bucket in planning](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_reorder_cycle.png "Example of time bucket in planning") - -The time bucket is generally used to avoid a cascade effect. For example, a balanced row of demand and supply where an early demand is canceled, or a new one is created. The result would be that every supply order (except the last one) is rescheduled. - -## Staying under the Overflow Level -When using the Maximum Qty. and Fixed Reorder Qty. policies, the planning system focuses on the projected inventory in the given time-bucket only. This means that the planning system may suggest superfluous supply when negative demand or positive supply changes occur outside of the given time bucket. If, for this reason, a superfluous supply is suggested, the planning system calculates which quantity the supply should be decreased to (or deleted) to avoid the superfluous supply. This quantity is called the “overflow level.” The overflow is communicated as a planning line with a **Change Qty. (Decrease)** or **Cancel** action and the following warning message: - -*Attention: The projected inventory [xx] is higher than the overflow level [xx] on the Due Date [xx].* - -![Inventory overflow level](media/supplyplanning_2_overflow1_new.png "Inventory overflow level") - -### Calculating the Overflow Level -The overflow level is calculated in different ways depending on planning setup. - -#### Maximum Qty. reordering policy -Overflow level = Maximum Inventory - -> [!NOTE] -> If a minimum order quantity exists, then it will be added as follows: Overflow level = Maximum Inventory + Minimum Order Quantity. - -#### Fixed Reorder Qty. reordering policy -Overflow level = Reorder Quantity + Reorder Point - -> [!NOTE] -> If the minimum order quantity is higher than the reorder point, then it will replace as follows: Overflow Level = Reorder Quantity + Minimum Order Quantity - -#### Order Multiple -If an order multiple exists, then it will adjust the overflow level for both Maximum Qty. and Fixed Reorder Qty. reordering policies. - -### Creating the Planning Line with Overflow Warning -When an existing supply causes the projected inventory to be higher than the overflow level at the end of a time bucket, a planning line is created. To warn about the potential superfluous supply, the planning line has a warning message, the **Accept Action Message** field is not selected, and the action message is either Cancel or Change Qty. - -#### Calculating the Planning Line Quantity -Planning Line Quantity = Current Supply Quantity – (Projected Inventory – Overflow Level) - -> [!NOTE] -> As with all warning lines, any maximum/minimum order quantity or order multiple will be ignored. - -#### Defining the Action Message Type - -- If the planning line quantity is higher than 0, then the action message is Change Qty. -- If the planning line quantity is equal to or lower than 0, then the action message is Cancel - -#### Composing the Warning Message -In case of overflow, the **Untracked Planning Elements** page displays a warning message with the following information: - -- The projected inventory level that triggered the warning -- The calculated overflow level -- The due date of the supply event. - -Example: “The projected inventory 120 is higher than the overflow level 60 on 28-01-11” - -### Scenario -In this scenario, a customer changes a sales order from 70 to 40 pieces between two planning runs. The overflow feature sets in to reduce the purchase that was suggested for the initial sales quantity. - -#### Item Setup - -|Reordering Policy|Maximum Qty.| -|-----------------------|------------------| -|Maximum Order Quantity|100| -|Reorder Point|50| -|Inventory|80| - -#### Situation Before Sales Decrease - -|Event|Change Qty.|Projected Inventory| -|-----------|-----------------|-------------------------| -|Day one|None|80| -|Sale|-70|10| -|End of time bucket|None|10| -|Suggest new purchase order|+90|100| - -#### Situation After Sales Ddecrease - -|Change|Change Qty.|Projected Inventory| -|------------|-----------------|-------------------------| -|Day one|None|80| -|Sale|-40|40| -|Purchase|+90|130| -|End of time bucket|None|130| -|Suggest to decrease purchase

order from 90 to 60|-30|100| - -#### Resulting Planning Lines - One planning line (warning) is created to reduce the purchase with 30 from 90 to 60 to keep the projected inventory on 100 according to the overflow level. - -![Plan according to overflow level](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_overflow2.png "Plan according to overflow level") - -> [!NOTE] -> Without the Overflow feature, no warning is created if the projected inventory level is above maximum inventory. This could cause a superfluous supply of 30. - -## Handling Projected Negative Inventory -The reorder point expresses the anticipated demand during the lead time of the item. When the reorder point is passed, it is time to order more. But the projected inventory must be large enough to cover the demand until the new order is received. Meanwhile, the safety stock should take care of fluctuations in demand up to a targeted service level. - - Consequently, the planning system considers it an emergency if a future demand cannot be served from the projected inventory, or expressed in another way, that the projected inventory goes negative. The system deals with such an exception by suggesting a new supply order to meet the part of the demand that cannot be met by inventory or other supply. The order size of the new supply order will not take the maximum inventory or the reorder quantity into consideration, nor will it take into consideration the order modifiers Maximum Order Quantity, Minimum Order Quantity, and Order Multiple. Instead, it will reflect the exact deficiency. - - The planning line for this type of supply order will display an Emergency warning icon, and additional information will be provided upon lookup to inform the user of the situation. - - In the following illustration, supply D represents an emergency order to adjust for negative inventory. - - ![Emergency planning suggestion to avoid negative inventory](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_negative_inventory.png "Emergency planning suggestion to avoid negative inventory") - -1. Supply **A**, initial projected inventory, is below reorder point. -2. A new forward-scheduled supply is created (**C**). - - (Quantity = Maximum Inventory – Projected Inventory Level) -3. Supply **A** is closed by demand **B**, which is not fully covered. - - (Demand **B** could try to schedule Supply C in but that will not happen according to the time-bucket concept.) -4. New supply (**D**) is created to cover the remaining quantity on Demand **B**. -5. Demand **B** is closed (creating a reminder to the projected inventory). -6. The new supply **D** is closed. -7. Projected Inventory is checked; reorder point has not been crossed. -8. Supply **C** is closed (no more demand exists). -9. Final check: No outstanding inventory level reminders exist. - -> [!NOTE] -> Step 4 reflects how the system reacts in versions earlier than Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 SP1. - -This concludes the description of central principles relating to inventory planning based on reordering policies. The following section describes the characteristics of the four supported reordering policies. - -## Reordering Policies -Reordering policies define how much to order when the item needs to be replenished. Four different reordering policies exist. - -### Fixed Reorder Qty. -The Fixed Reorder Qty. policy is related to inventory planning of typical C-items (low inventory cost, low risk of obsolescence, and/or many items). This policy is usually used in connection with a reorder point reflecting the anticipated demand during the lead time of the item. - -#### Calculated per Time Bucket -If the planning system detects that the reorder point has been reached or crossed in a given time bucket (reorder cycle) – above or on the reorder point at the start of the period and below or on the reorder point at the end of the period – it will suggest to create a new supply order of the specified reorder quantity and forward schedule it from the first date after the end of the time bucket. - -The bucketed reorder point concept reduces the number of supply suggestions. This reflects a manual process of frequently walking through the warehouse to check the actual contents in the various bins. - -#### Creates only Necessary Supply -Before suggesting a new supply order to meet a reorder point, the planning system checks if supply has already been ordered to be received within the item’s lead time. If an existing supply order will solve the problem by bringing the projected inventory to or above the reorder point within the lead time, the system will not suggest a new supply order. - -Supply orders that are created specifically to meet a reorder point is excluded from ordinary supply balancing, and will not in any way be changed afterwards. Consequently, if an item using reorder point is to be phased out (not replenished), it is advisable to review outstanding supply orders manually or change the reordering policy to Lot-for-Lot, whereby the system will reduce or cancel superfluous supply. - -#### Combines with Order Modifiers -The order modifiers, Minimum Order Quantity, Maximum Order Quantity, and Order Multiple, should not play a big role when the fixed reorder quantity policy is used. However, the planning system still takes these modifiers into account and will decrease the quantity to the specified maximum order quantity (and create two or more supplies in order to reach the total order quantity), increase the order to the specified minimum order quantity, or round the order quantity up to meet a specified order multiple. - -#### Combines with Calendars -Before suggesting a new supply order to meet a reorder point, the planning system checks if the order is scheduled for a non-working day, according to any calendars that are defined in the **Base Calendar Code** field in the **Company Information** and **Location Card** pages. - -If the scheduled date is a non-working day, the planning system moves the order forward to the nearest working date. This may result in an order that meets a reorder point but does not meet some specific demand. For such unbalanced demand, the planning system creates an extra supply. - -#### Should Not be Used with Forecast -Because the anticipated demand is already expressed in the reorder point level it is not necessary to include a forecast in the planning of an item using a reorder point. If it is relevant to base the plan on a forecast, use the lot-for-lot policy. - -#### Must Not be Used with Reservations -If the user has reserved a quantity, for instance a quantity in inventory, for some distant demand, the planning foundation will be disturbed. Even if the projected inventory level is acceptable in relation to the reorder point, the quantities might not be available. The system may try to compensate for that by creating exception orders; however, it is recommended that the Reserve field is set to Never on items that are planned using a reorder point. - -### Maximum Qty. -The Maximum Quantity policy is a way to maintain inventory using a reorder point. - -Everything regarding the Fixed Reorder Qty. policy also applies to this policy. The only difference is the quantity of the suggested supply. When using the maximum quantity policy, the reorder quantity will be defined dynamically based on the projected inventory level and will therefore usually differ from order to order. - -#### Calculated per Time Bucket -The reorder quantity is determined at the point of time (the end of a time bucket) when the planning system detects that the reorder point has been crossed. At this time, the system measures the gap from the current projected inventory level up to the specified maximum inventory. This constitutes the quantity that should be reordered. The system then checks if supply has already been ordered elsewhere to be received within the lead time and, if so, reduces the quantity of the new supply order by already ordered quantities. - -The system will ensure that the projected inventory at least reaches the reorder point level – in case the user has forgotten to specify a maximum inventory quantity. - -#### Combines with Order Modifiers -Depending on the setup, it may be best to combine the Maximum Quantity policy with order modifiers to ensure a minimum order quantity or round it to an integer number of purchase units of measure, or split it into more lots as defined by the maximum order quantity. - -### Combines with Calendars -Before suggesting a new supply order to meet a reorder point, the planning system checks if the order is scheduled for a non-working day, according to any calendars that are defined in the **Base Calendar Code** field in the **Company Information** and **Location Card** pages. - -If the scheduled date is a non-working day, the planning system moves the order forward to the nearest working date. This may result in an order that meets a reorder point but does not meet some specific demand. For such unbalanced demand, the planning system creates an extra supply. - -### Order -In a make-to-order environment, an item is purchased or produced to exclusively cover a specific demand. Typically it relates to A-items, and the motivation for choosing the order reordering policy can be that the demand is infrequent, the lead-time is insignificant, or the required attributes vary. - -The application creates an order-to-order link, which acts as a preliminary connection between the supply, a supply order or inventory, and the demand that it is going to fulfill. - -Apart from using the Order policy, the order-to-order link can be applied during planning in the following ways: - -* When using the Make-to-Order manufacturing policy to create multi-level or project type production orders (producing needed components on the same production order). -* When using the Sales Order Planning feature to create a production order from a sales order. - -Even if a manufacturing company considers itself as a make-to-order environment, it might be best to use a Lot-for-Lot reordering policy if the items are pure standard without variation in attributes. As a result, the system will use unplanned inventory and only accumulates sales orders with the same shipment date or within a defined time bucket. - -#### Order-to-Order Links and Past Due Dates -Unlike most supply-demand sets, linked orders with due dates before the planning starting date are fully planned for by the system. The business reason for this exception is that specific demand-supply sets must be synchronized through to execution. For more information about the frozen zone that applies to most demand-supply types, see [Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md). - -### Lot-for-Lot -The lot-for-lot policy is the most flexible because the system only reacts on actual demand, plus it acts on anticipated demand from forecast and blanket orders and then settles the order quantity based on the demand. The lot-for-lot policy is aimed at A- and B-items where inventory can be accepted but should be avoided. - -In some ways, the lot-for-lot policy looks like the Order policy, but it has a generic approach to items; it can accept quantities in inventory, and it bundles demand and corresponding supply in time buckets defined by the user. - -The time bucket is defined in the **Time Bucket** field. The system works with a minimum time bucket of one day, since this is the smallest time unit of measure on demand and supply events in the system (although, in practice, the time unit of measure on production orders and component needs can be seconds). - -The time bucket also sets limits on when an existing supply order should be rescheduled to meet a given demand. If the supply lies within the time bucket, it will be rescheduled in or out to meet the demand. Otherwise, if it lies earlier, it will cause unnecessary build-up of inventory and should be canceled. If it lies later, a new supply order will be created instead. - -With this policy, it is also possible to define a safety stock in order to compensate for possible fluctuations in supply, or to meet sudden demand. - -Because the supply order quantity is based on the actual demand it can make sense to use the order modifiers: round the order quantity up to meet a specified order multiple (or purchase unit of measure), increase the order to a specified minimum order quantity, or decrease the quantity to the specified maximum quantity (and thus create two or more supplies to reach the total needed quantity). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Planning Assignment Table](design-details-planning-assignment-table.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md deleted file mode 100644 index a22a8c7d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Inbound Warehouse Flow - description: The inbound flow in a warehouse begins when items arrive in the warehouse of the company location, either received from external sources or from another company location. An employee registers the items, typically by scanning a bar code. From the receiving dock, warehouse activities are performed at different complexity levels to bring the items into the storage area. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow -The inbound flow in a warehouse begins when items arrive in the warehouse of the company location, either received from external sources or from another company location. An employee registers the items, typically by scanning a bar code. From the receiving dock, warehouse activities are performed at different complexity levels to bring the items into the storage area. - - Each item is identified and matched to a corresponding inbound source document. The following inbound source documents exist: - -- Purchase order -- Inbound transfer order -- Sales return order - -In addition, the following internal source documents exist that function like inbound sources: - -- Production order with output posting -- Assembly order with output posting - -The last two represent inbound flows to the warehouse from internal operation areas. For more information about warehouse handling for internal inbound and outbound processes, see [Design Details: Internal Warehouse Flows](design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md). - -Processes and UI documents in inbound warehouse flows are different for basic and advanced warehouse configurations. The main difference is that activities are performed order-by-order in basic warehouse configurations, and they are consolidated for multiple orders in advanced warehouse configurations. For more information about different warehouse complexity levels, see [Design Details: Warehouse Overview](design-details-warehouse-setup.md). - -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the inbound processes of receiving and putting away can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - -|Method|Inbound Process|Bins|Receipts|Put-aways|Complexity Level (See [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md))| -|------------|---------------------|----------|--------------|----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -|A|Post receipt and put-away from the order line|X|||2| -|B|Post receipt and put-away from an inventory put-away document|||X|3| -|C|Post receipt and put-away from a warehouse receipt document||X||4/5/6| -|D|Post receipt from a warehouse receipt document and post put-away from a warehouse put-away document||X|X|4/5/6| - -Selecting an approach depends on the company's accepted practices and the level of their organizational complexity. In an order-by-order warehouse environment, where most of the warehouse staff works directly with order documents, a company might decide to use method A. An order-by-order warehouse that has a more complex put-away process, or where there are dedicated warehouse staff to perform warehousing functions, might decide to separate their put-away functions from the order document, method B. Additionally, companies that need to plan the handling of multiple orders may find it helpful to use warehouse receipt documents, methods C and D. - -In methods A, B, and C, the actions of receiving and putting away are combined in one step when posting the corresponding documents as received. In method D, the receipt is posted first to recognize the increase of inventory and that items are available for sale. The warehouse worker then registers the put-away to make items available to pick. - -## Basic Warehouse Configurations -The following diagram illustrates the inbound warehouse flows by document type in basic warehouse configurations. The numbers in the diagram correspond with the steps in the sections following the diagram. - -![Inbound flow in basic warehouse configurations](media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_basic_flow.png "design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_basic_flow") - -### 1: Release Source Document / Create Inventory Put-Away -When items are received in the warehouse, the user who is responsible for receiving releases the source document, such as a purchase order or an inbound transfer order, to signal to warehouse workers that the received items can be put away in inventory. Alternatively, the user creates inventory put-away documents for individual order lines, in a push fashion, based on specified bins and quantities to handle. - -### 2: Create Inbound Request -When the inbound source document is released, an inbound warehouse request is created automatically. It contains references to the source document type and number and is not visible to the user. - -### 3: Create Inventory Put-Away -In the **Inventory Put-away** window, the warehouse worker retrieves, in a pull fashion, the pending source document lines based on inbound warehouse requests. Alternatively, the inventory put-away lines are already created, in a push fashion, by the user who is responsible for the source document. - -### 4: Post Inventory Put-Away -On each line for items that have been put away, partially or fully, the warehouse worker fills in the **Quantity** field, and then posts the inventory put-away. Source documents that are related to the inventory put-away are posted as received. - -Positive item ledger entries are created, warehouse entries are created, and the put-away request is deleted, if fully handled. For example, the **Quantity Received** field on the inbound source document line is updated. A posted receipt document is created that reflects the purchase order, for example, and the received items. - -## advanced warehouse configurations -The following diagram illustrates the inbound warehouse flow by document type in advanced warehouse configurations. The numbers in the diagram correspond with the steps in the sections following the diagram. - -![Inbound flow in advanced warehouse configurations](media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_advanced_flow.png "design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_advanced_flow") - -### 1: Release Source Document -When items are received in the warehouse, the user who is responsible for receiving releases the source document, such as a purchase order or an inbound transfer order, to signal to warehouse workers that the received items can be put away in inventory. - -### 2: Create Inbound Request -When the inbound source document is released, an inbound warehouse request is created automatically. It contains references to the source document type and number and is not visible to the user. - -### 3: Create Warehouse Receipt -In the **Warehouse Receipt** window, the user who is responsible for receiving items retrieves the pending source document lines based on the inbound warehouse request. Several source document lines can be combined in one warehouse receipt document. - -The user fills in the **Qty. to Handle** field and selects the receiving zone and bin, if required. - -### 4: Post Warehouse Receipt -The user posts the warehouse receipt. Positive item ledger entries are created. For example, the **Quantity Received** field on the inbound source document line is updated. - -### 5: Create Warehouse Internal Put-Away -The user who is responsible for putting away from internal operations creates a warehouse internal put-away for items that have to be put away in the warehouse, such as production or assembly output. The user specifies quantity, zone, and bin from where the items should be put away, potentially with the **Get Bin Content** function. The user releases the warehouse internal put-away, which creates an inbound warehouse request so that the task can be retrieved in warehouse put-away documents or in the put-away worksheet. - -### 6: Create Put-away Request -When the inbound source document is posted, a warehouse put-away request is created automatically. It contains references to the source document type and number and is not visible to the user. Depending on the setup, output from a production order also creates a put-away request to put the finished items away in inventory. - -### 7: Generate Put-away Worksheet Lines (Optional) -The user who is responsible for coordinating put-aways retrieves warehouse put-away lines in the **Put-away Worksheet** based on posted warehouse receipts or internal operations with output. The user selects the lines to be put-away and prepares the put-aways by specifying which bins to take from, which bins to place in, and how many units to handle. The bins may be predefined by the setup of the warehouse location or operation resource. - -When all put-aways are planned and assigned to warehouse workers, the user generates the warehouse put-away documents. Fully assigned put-aways lines are deleted from the **Put-away Worksheet**. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field is not selected on the location card, then warehouse put-away documents are created directly based on posted warehouse receipts. In that case, step 7 is omitted. - -### 8: Create Warehouse Put-away Document -The warehouse worker who performs put-aways creates a warehouse put-away document in a pull fashion, based on the posted warehouse receipt. Alternatively, the warehouse put-away document is created and assigned to a warehouse worker in a push fashion. - -### 9: Register Warehouse Put-Away -On each line for items that have been put away, partially or fully, the warehouse worker fills in the **Quantity** field in the **Warehouse Put-away** window, and then registers the warehouse put-away. - -Warehouse entries are created, and the warehouse put-away lines are deleted, if fully handled. The warehouse put-away document remains open until the full quantity of the related posted warehouse receipt is registered. The **Qty. Put Away** field on the warehouse receipt order lines is updated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-integration-with-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-integration-with-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0e8f9049..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-integration-with-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Integration with Inventory - description: The Warehouse Management application area and the Inventory application area interact with one another in physical inventory and in inventory or warehouse adjustment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Integration with Inventory -The Warehouse Management application area and the Inventory application area interact with one another in physical inventory and in inventory or warehouse adjustment. - -## Physical Inventory - The **Whse. Phys. Inventory Journal** window is used with the **Phys. Inventory Journal** window for all advanced warehouse locations. The inventory on bin level is calculated, and a printed list is provided for the warehouse employee. The list shows which items in which bins must be counted. - - The warehouse employee enters the counted quantity in the **Whse. Phys. Inventory Journal** window and then posts the journal. - - If the counted quantity is greater than the quantity on the journal line, a movement is posted for this difference from the default adjustment bin to the counted bin. This increases the quantity in the counted bin and decreases the quantity in the default adjustment bin. - - If the quantity counted is less than the quantity on the journal line, a movement for this difference is posted from the counted bin to the default adjustment bin. This decreases the quantity in the counted bin and increases the quantity in the default adjustment bin. - - In advanced warehouse configurations, the value in the **Quantity (Calculated)** field is retrieved from item ledger entries and the value in the **Quantity (Phys. Inventory)** field is retrieved from warehouse entries, excluding the adjustment bin content. The **Quantity** field specifies the difference between the first two fields, which should be equal to the contents of the adjustment bin. - - When you post the physical inventory journal, the inventory and the default adjustment bin are updated. - -### Warehouse Adjustments to the Item Ledger - You use the **Item Journal** window and the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** function to adjust inventory on the item ledger in accordance with an adjustment that has been made to the item quantity in a warehouse bin. To create a link between the inventory and the warehouse, you must define a default adjustment bin per location. - - The default adjustment bin registers items in the warehouse when you post an increase for the inventory. However, if you post a decrease, the quantity on the default bin is also decreased. In both cases, item ledger entries and warehouse entries are created. - -> [!NOTE] -> The adjustment bin is not included in the availability calculation. - - If you want to adjust the bin content, you can use the warehouse item journal, from which you can enter the item number, zone code, bin code, and quantity that you want to adjust. - - If you enter a positive quantity and post the line, then the inventory stored in the bin increases, and the quantity of the default adjustment bin decreases correspondingly. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) - [Design Details: Availability in the Warehouse](design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6d3387e2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Internal Warehouse Flows - description: The flow of items between bins at a company location centers on picking components and putting away end items for assembly or production orders and ad-hoc movements, such as bin replenishments, without a relation to source documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Internal Warehouse Flows -The flow of items between bins at a company location centers on picking components and putting away end items for assembly or production orders and ad-hoc movements, such as bin replenishments, without a relation to source documents. The scope and nature of the involved activities vary between basic and advanced warehousing. - - Some internal flows overlap with inbound or outbound flows. Some of this overlap is shown as steps 4 and 5 in the graphical diagrams for advanced inbound and outbound flows respectively. For more information, see [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md). - -## Internal Flows in Basic Warehousing - In basic warehouse configuration, the flow of items between bins inside the company centers on picking component and putting away end items for production or assembly orders and ad-hoc movements, such as bin replenishments, without relation to source documents. - -### Flows to and from Production - The main integration between production orders and basic warehouse activities is represented by the ability to pick production components with the **Inventory Pick** or the **Inventory Movement** windows. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the **Inventory Pick** window, the component consumption is posted together with the pick posting. By using the **Inventory Movement** window, only bin adjustments are registered, no item ledger posting occurs. - - In addition to component handling, the integration is represented by the ability to put produced items away with the **Inventory Put-away** window. - - The **To-Production Bin Code**, **From-Production Bin Code**, and **Open Shop Floor Bin Code** fields on the location card or the machine/work center cards define default flows to and from production areas. - - For more information about how component consumption is flushed from the To-Production or Open Shop Floor bins, see the “Flushing Production Components in the Warehouse” section in this topic. - -### Flows to and from Assembly - The main integration between assembly orders and basic warehouse activities is represented by the ability to move assembly components to the assembly area. - - While no specific warehouse functionality exists for putting assembly items away, the bin code on the assembly order header may be set to a default put-away bin. Posting the assembly order then functions like posting a put-away. The warehouse activity to move assembly items into the warehouse can be managed in the **Internal Movement** window, with no relation to the assembly order. - - The following assembly flows exist. - -|Flow|Description| -|----------|---------------------------------------| -|Assemble-to-stock|The components are needed on an assembly order where the output is stored in the warehouse.

This warehouse flow is managed in the **Inventory Movement** window. One take line specifies where to take the components. One place line specifies where to place the components.| -|Assemble-to-order|The components are needed on an assembly order that is linked to a sales order that is shipped when the sold item is assembled.| - -> [!NOTE] -> If items are assembled to order, then the inventory pick of the linked sales order triggers an inventory movement for all the involved assembly components, not just for the sold item as when shipping inventory items. - - The **To-Assembly Bin Code**, **From-Assembly Bin Code**, and **Asm.-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** fields on the location card define default flows to and from assembly areas. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Asm.-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** field functions as the from-assembly bin in assemble-to-order scenarios. - -### Ad-Hoc Movements - In basic warehousing, the movement of items from bin to bin without relation to source documents is performed in the **Internal Movement** window, which functions together with the **Inventory Movement** window. - - Another way to move items ad hoc between bins is to post positive entries in the **New Bin Code** field in the **Item Reclass. Journal** window. - -## Internal Flows in Advanced Warehousing - In advanced warehouse configurations, the flow of items between bins inside the company centers on picking component and putting away end items for production orders and picking components for assembly orders. In addition, internal flows occur as ad-hoc movements, such as bin replenishments, without relation to source documents. - -### Flows To and From Production - The main integration between production orders and advanced warehouse activities is represented by the ability to pick production components, in the **Warehouse Pick** window and the **Pick Worksheet** window, and the ability to put produced items away with the **Whse. Internal-Put-away** window. - - Another integration point in production is provided with the **Warehouse Movement** window, together with the Movement Worksheet window, which enables you to place components and take produced items for released production orders. - - The **To-Production Bin Code**, **From-Production Bin Code**, and **Open Shop Floor Bin Code** fields on the location card or the machine/work center cards define default flows to and from production areas. - - For more information about how component consumption is flushed from the To-Production or Open Shop Floor Bins, see the “Flushing Production Components in the Warehouse” section in this topic. - -### Flows to and from Assembly - The main integration between assembly orders and advanced warehouse activities is represented by the ability to pick assembly components, both with the **Warehouse Pick** window and the **Pick Worksheet** window. This functionality works just like when picking components for production orders. - - While no specific warehouse functionality exists for putting assembly items away, the bin code on the assembly order header may be set to a default put-away bin. Posting the assembly order then functions like posting a put-away. The warehouse activity to move assembly items into the warehouse can be managed in the **Movement Worksheet** window or the **Whse. Internal Put-away** window, with no relation to the assembly order. - -> [!NOTE] -> If items are assembled to order, then the warehouse shipment of the linked sales order triggers a warehouse pick for all the involved assembly components, not just for the sold item as when shipping inventory items. - - The **To-Assembly Bin Code** and **From-Assembly Bin Code** fields on the location card define default flows to and from assembly areas. - -### Ad-Hoc Movements - In advanced warehousing, the movement of items from bin to bin without relation to source documents is managed in the **Movement Worksheet** window and registered in the Warehouse Movement window. - -## Flushing Production Components in the Warehouse - If set up on the item card, components picked with warehouse picks are posted as consumed by the production order when the warehouse pick is registered. By using the **Pick + Forward** method and the **Pick + Backward** flushing method, the pick registration triggers the related consumption posting when the first operation starts or when the last operation finishes, respectively. - - Consider the following scenario based on the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] demonstration database, WHITE location. - - A production order for 15 PCS of item LS-100 exists. Some of the items on the component list must be flushed manually in a consumption journal, and other items on the list can be picked and flushed automatically using the **Pick + Backward** flushing method. - -> [!NOTE] -> **Pick + Forward** only works if the second production routing line operation uses a routing link code. Releasing a planned production order initiates forward flushing of components set to **Pick + Forward**. However, the flushing cannot take place until the pick of the components is registered, which again can only take place when the order is released. - - The following steps describe the involved actions by different users and the related response: - -1. The shop floor supervisor releases the production order. Items with **Forward** flushing method and no routing link code are deducted from the open shop floor bin. -2. The shop floor supervisor chooses the **Create Warehouse Pick** button on the production order. A warehouse pick document is created pick for items with **Manual**, **Pick + Backward**, and **Pick + Forward** flushing methods. These items are placed in the To-Production bin. -3. The warehouse manager assigns the picks to a warehouse worker. -4. The warehouse worker picks the items from appropriate bins and places them in the To-Production bin or in the bin specified on the warehouse pick, which may be a work center or machine center bin. -5. The warehouse worker registers the pick. The quantity is subtracted from the pick bins and added to the consumption bin. The **Qty. Picked** field on the component list for all picked items is updated. - - > [!NOTE] - > Only the quantity that is picked can be consumed. - -6. The machine operator informs the production manager that the end items are finished. -7. The shop floor supervisor uses the consumption journal or production journal to post the consumption of component items that use either **Manual** flushing method or **Forward** or **Pick + Forward** flushing methods together with routing link codes. -8. The production manager posts the output of the production order and changes status to **Finished**. The quantity of component items that use **Backward** flushing method is deducted from the open shop floor bin, and the quantity of component items that use **Pick + Backward** flushing method is deducted from the To-Production bin. - - The following illustration shows when the **Bin Code** field on the component list is filled according to your location or machine/work center setup. - - ![Bin flow chart](media/binflow.png "BinFlow") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-costing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-costing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1fd9b80a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-costing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Inventory Costing - description: This documentation provides detailed technical insight to the concepts and principles that are used within the Inventory Costing features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, inventory, costing - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Inventory Costing -This documentation provides detailed technical insight to the concepts and principles that are used within the Inventory Costing features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -Inventory costing, also referred to as cost management, is concerned with recording and reporting business operating costs. - -## In This Section -[Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) -[Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md) -[Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) -[Design Details: Expected Cost Posting](design-details-expected-cost-posting.md) -[Design Details: Average Cost](design-details-average-cost.md) -[Design Details: Variance](design-details-variance.md) -[Design Details: Rounding](design-details-rounding.md) -[Design Details: Cost Components](design-details-cost-components.md) -[Design Details: Inventory Periods](design-details-inventory-periods.md) -[Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md) -[Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md) -[Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md) -[Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md) -[Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger](design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md) -[Design Details: Revaluation](design-details-revaluation.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1ee90446..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Inventory Periods - description: Backdated transactions or cost adjustments often affect balances and stock valuations for accounting periods that may be considered closed. This can have adverse effects on accurate reporting, especially within global corporations. The Inventory Periods feature can be used to avoid such problems by opening or closing inventory periods to limit posting in a set period of time. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Inventory Periods -Backdated transactions or cost adjustments often affect balances and stock valuations for accounting periods that may be considered closed. This can have adverse effects on accurate reporting, especially within global corporations. The Inventory Periods feature can be used to avoid such problems by opening or closing inventory periods to limit posting in a set period of time. - - An inventory period is a period of time, defined by an ending date, in which you post inventory transactions. When you close an inventory period, no value changes can be posted in the closed period. This includes new value postings, expected or invoiced postings, changes to existing values, and cost adjustments. However, you can still apply to an open item ledger entry that falls in the closed period. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md). - - To make sure that all transaction entries in a closed period are final, the following conditions must be met before an inventory period can close: - -- All outbound item ledger entries in the period must be closed (no negative inventory). -- All item costs in the period must be adjusted. -- All released and finished production orders in the period must be cost adjusted. - - When you close an inventory period, an inventory period entry is created by using the number of the last item register that falls in the inventory period. In addition, the time, date, and user code of the user closing the period are recorded in the inventory period entry. By using this information with the last item register for the previous period, you can see which inventory transactions were posted in the inventory period. It is also possible to reopen inventory periods if you need to post in a closed period. When you reopen an inventory period, an inventory period entry is created. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9994f479..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Inventory Posting - description: Each inventory transaction, such as a purchase receipt or a sales shipment, posts two entries of different types. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Inventory Posting -Each inventory transaction, such as a purchase receipt or a sales shipment, posts two entries of different types. - -|Entry type|Description| -|----------------|---------------------------------------| -|Quantity|Reflects the change of quantity in inventory. This information is stored in item ledger entries.

Accompanied by item application entries.| -|Value|Reflects the change of inventory value. This information is stored in value entries.

One or more value entries can exist for each item ledger entry or capacity ledger entry.

For information about capacity value entries related to the use of production or assembly resources, see [Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md).| - - In relation to quantity postings, item application entries exist to link inventory increase with inventory decrease. This enables the costing engine to forward costs from increases to the related decreases and vice versa. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md). - - Item ledger entries, value entries, and item application entries are created as a result of posting an item journal line, either indirectly by posting an order line or directly in the Item Journal window. - - At regular intervals, value entries that are created in the inventory ledger are posted to the general ledger to reconcile the two ledgers for financial control reasons. For more information, see [Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md). - - ![Entry flow between inventory and G/L](media/design_details_inventory_costing_1_entry_flow.png "design_details_inventory_costing_1_entry_flow") - -## Example - The following example shows how item ledger entries, value entries, and item application entries result in general ledger entries. - - You post a purchase order as received and invoiced for 10 items with a direct unit cost of LCY 7 and an overhead rate of LCY 1. The posting date is 01-01-20. The following entries are created. - - **Item Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|----------------------------|--------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|80.00|10|1| - - **Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|Direct Cost|70.00|1|1| -|01-01-20|Indirect Cost|10.00|1|2| - - **Item Application Entries** - -|Entry No.|Item Ledger Entry No.|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity| -|---------------|---------------------------|----------------------------|-----------------------------|--------------| -|1|1|1|0|10| - - Next, you post a sale of 10 units of the item with a posting date of 01-15-20. - - **Item Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|----------------------------|--------------|---------------| -|01-15-20|Sale|-80.00|-10|2| - - **Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-15-20|Direct Cost|-80.00|2|3| - - **Item Application Entries** - -|Entry No.|Item Ledger Entry No.|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity| -|---------------|---------------------------|----------------------------|-----------------------------|--------------| -|2|2|1|2|-10| - - At the end of the accounting period, you run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job to reconcile these inventory transactions with the general ledger. - - For more information, see [Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger](design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md). - - The following tables show the result of reconciling the inventory transactions in this example with the general ledger. - - **Value Entries** - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Cost Amount (Actual)|Cost Posted to G/L|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|----------------------------|-------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|Direct Cost|70.00|70.00|1|1| -|01-01-20|Indirect Cost|10.00|10.00|1|2| -|01-15-20|Direct Cost|-80.00|-80.00|2|3| - - **General Ledger Entries** - -|Posting Date|G/L Account|Account No. (En-US Demo)|Amount|Entry No.| -|------------------|------------------|---------------------------------|------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|70.00|1| -|01-01-20|[Direct Cost Applied Account]|7291|-70.00|2| -|01-01-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|10.00|3| -|01-01-07|[Overhead Applied Account]|7292|-10.00|4| -|01-15-20|[Inventory Account]|2130|-80.00|5| -|01-15-20|[COGS Account]|7290|80.00|6| - -> [!NOTE] -> The posting date of the general ledger entries is the same as for the related value entries. -> -> The **Cost Posted to G/L** field in the **Value Entry** table is filled. - - The relation between value entries and general ledger entries is stored in the **G/L - Item Ledger Relation** table. - - **Relation Entries in the G/L – Item Ledger Relation table** - -|G/L Entry No.|Value Entry No.|G/L Register No.| -|--------------------|---------------------|-----------------------| -|1|1|1| -|2|1|1| -|3|2|1| -|4|2|1| -|5|3|1| -|6|3|1| - -## Assembly and Production Posting -Capacity and resource ledger entries represent the time that is posted as consumed in production or assembly. These process costs are posted as value entries to the general ledger along with the involved material costs in a similar structure as described for item ledger entries in this topic. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger](design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md) - [Design Details: Cost Components](design-details-cost-components.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-valuation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-valuation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7899aa8f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-inventory-valuation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Inventory Valuation - description: Inventory valuation XE "Inventory Valuation" is the determination of the cost that is assigned to an inventory item, as expressed by the following equation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Inventory Valuation -Inventory valuation XE "Inventory Valuation" is the determination of the cost that is assigned to an inventory item, as expressed by the following equation. - -Ending inventory = beginning inventory + net purchases – cost of goods sold - -The calculation of inventory valuation uses the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field of the value entries for the item. The entries are classified according to the entry type XE "Entry Type" that corresponds to the cost components, direct cost, indirect cost, variance, revaluation, and rounding. For more information, see [Design Details: Cost Components](design-details-cost-components.md). - -Entries are applied against each other, either by the fixed application XE "Application; Fixed" , or according to the general cost-flow assumption defined by the costing method XE "Method; Costing" XE "Costing Method" . One entry of inventory decrease can be applied to more than one increase entry with different posting dates and possibly different acquisition cost XE "Acquisition Cost" s. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md). Therefore, calculation of the inventory value XE "Inventory Value" for a given date is based on summing up positive and negative value entries. - -## Inventory Valuation report -To calculate the inventory value in the **Inventory Valuation** report, the report begins by calculating the value of the item’s inventory at a given starting date. It then adds the value of inventory increases and subtracts the value of inventory decreases up to a given ending date. The end result is the inventory value on the ending date. The report calculates these values by summing the values in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field in the value entries, using the posting dates as filters. - -The printed report always shows actual amounts, that is, the cost of entries that have been posted as invoiced. The report will also print the expected cost of entries that have posted as received or shipped, if you select the Include Expected Cost field on the Options FastTab. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Values in the **Inventory Valuation** report is reconciled with the Inventory account in the general ledger, meaning the value entries in question have been posted to the general ledger. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Amounts in the **Value** columns of the report are based on the posting date of transactions for an item. - -## Inventory Valuation - WIP report -A manufacturing company needs to determine the value of three types of inventory: - -* Raw Materials inventory -* WIP inventory -* Finished Goods inventory - -The value of WIP inventory is determined by the following equation: - -* Ending WIP inventory = Beginning WIP inventory + manufacturing costs – cost of goods manufactured - -As for purchased inventory, the value entries provide the basis of the inventory valuation. The calculation is made using the values in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field of the item and capacity value entries associated with a production order. - -The purpose of WIP inventory valuation is to determine the value of the items whose manufacturing has not yet been completed on a given date. Therefore the WIP inventory value is based on the value entries related to the consumption and capacity ledger entries. Consumption ledger entries must be completely invoiced at the date of the valuation. Therefore, the **Inventory Valuation – WIP** report shows the costs representing the WIP inventory value in two categories: consumption and capacity. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger](design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md) -[Design Details: Revaluation](design-details-revaluation.md) -[Design Details: Production Order Posting](design-details-production-order-posting.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-application.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-application.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7768a6c2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-application.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,248 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details About Item Application - description: This topic describes where inventory quantity and value are recorded when you post an inventory transaction. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, items, ledger entries, posting, inventory - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details About Item Application -When you post an inventory transaction, the quantity posting is recorded in the item ledger entries, the value posting in the value entries. For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md). - -In addition, an item application is made to link the cost recipient to its cost source to provide cost forwarding according to the costing method. For more information, see [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md). - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] makes two types of item application. - -|Application type|Description| -|----------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Quantity application|Created for all inventory transactions| -|Cost application|Created for inbound entries together with a quantity application as a result of user interaction in special processes.| - -Item applications can be made in the following ways. - -|Method|Description|Application type| -|------------|---------------------------------------|----------------------| -|Automatic|Occurs as general cost forwarding according to the costing method|Quantity application| -|Fixed|Made by the user when:

- Processing returns
- Posting corrections
- Undoing quantity postings
- Creating drop shipments **Note:** The fixed application can be made either manually by entering an entry number in the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field or by using a function, such as the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse**.|Quantity application

Cost application **Note:** Cost application only occurs in inbound transactions where the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is filled to create a fixed application. See the next table.| - -Whether quantity applications or cost applications are made depends on the direction of the inventory transaction and whether the item application is made automatically or fixed, in connection with special processes. - -The following table shows, based on the central application fields on inventory transaction lines, how costs flow depending on the transaction direction. It also indicates when and why the item application is of type quantity or cost. - -|Application Direction|Appl.-to Item Entry field|Appl.-from Item Entry field| -|-|--------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|Application for outbound entry|The outbound entry pulls the cost from the open inbound entry.

**Quantity application**|Not supported| -|Application for inbound entry|The inbound entry pushes the cost onto the open outbound entry.

The inbound entry is the cost source.

**Quantity application**|The inbound entry pulls the cost from the outbound entry. **Note:** When making this fixed application, the inbound transaction is treated as a sales return. Therefore, the applied outbound entry remains open.

The inbound entry is NOT the cost source.

**Cost application**| - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> A sales return is NOT considered a cost source when fixed applied. -> -> The sales entry remains open until the real source is posted. - -An item application entry records the following information. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Item Ledger Entry No.**|The number of the item ledger entry for the transaction that this application entry is created for.| -|**Inbound Item Entry No.**|The item ledger entry number of the inventory increase to which the transaction should be linked, if applicable.| -|**Outbound Item Entry No.**|The item ledger entry number of the inventory decrease to which the transaction should be linked, if applicable.| -|**Quantity**|The quantity being applied.| -|**Posting Date**|The posting date of the transaction.| - -## Inventory Increase -When you post an inventory increase, then a simple item application entry is recorded without an application to an outbound entry. - -### Example -The following table shows the item application entry that is created when you post a purchase receipt of 10 units. - -|Posting Date|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity|Item Ledger Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|1|0|10|1| - -## Inventory Decrease -When you post an inventory decrease, an item application entry is created that links the inventory decrease to an inventory increase. This link is created by using the item’s costing method as a guideline. For items using FIFO, Standard, and Average costing methods, the linking is based on the first-in-first-out principle. The inventory decrease is applied to the inventory increase with the earliest posting date. For items using the LIFO costing method, the linking is based on the last-in-first-out principle. The inventory decrease is applied to the inventory increase with the most recent posting date. - -In the **Item Ledger Entry** table, the **Remaining Quantity** field shows the quantity that has not yet been applied. If the remaining quantity is more than 0, then the **Open** check box is selected. - -### Example -The following example shows the item application entry that is created when you post a sales shipment of 5 units of the items that were received in the previous example. The first item application entry is the purchase receipt. The second application entry is the sales shipment. - -The following table shows the two item application entries that result from the inventory increase and the inventory decrease, respectively. - -|Posting Date|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity|Item Ledger Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|1|0|10|1| -|01-03-20|1|2|-5|2| - -## Fixed Application -You make a fixed application when you specify that the cost of an inventory increase should apply to a specific inventory decrease, or vice versa. The fixed application affects the remaining quantities of the entries, but the fixed application also reverses the exact cost of the original entry that you are applying to, or from. - -To make a fixed application, you use the **Appl.-to Item Entry** field or the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field in the document lines to specify the item ledger entry that you want the transaction line to apply to, or from. For example, you might make a fixed application when you want to create a cost application that specifies that a sales return should apply to a specific sales shipment to reverse the cost of the sales shipment. In this case, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] ignores the costing method and applies the inventory decrease, or increase, for a sales return, to the item ledger entry that you specify. The advantage of making a fixed application is that the cost of the original transaction is passed to the new transaction. - -### Example – Fixed Application in Purchase Return -The following example, which illustrates the effect of fixed application of a purchase return of an item using the FIFO costing method, is based on the following scenario: - -1. In entry number 1, the user posts a purchase at a cost of LCY 10.00. -2. In entry number 2, the user posts a purchase at a cost of LCY 20.00. -3. In entry number 3, the user posts a purchase return. The user makes a fixed application to the second purchase by entering the item ledger entry number in the **Appl.-to Item Entry** field on the purchase return order line. - -The following table shows item ledger entries resulting from the scenario. - -|**Posting Date**|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Quantity**|**Cost Amount (Actual)**|**Item Ledger Entry No.**| -|----------------------|---------------------------------------------------|------------------|----------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------| -|01-04-20|Purchase|10|10.00|1| -|01-05-20|Purchase|10|20.00|2| -|01-06-20|Purchase (Return)|-10|-20.00|3| - -Because a fixed application is made from the purchase return to the second purchase entry, the items are returned at the correct cost. If the user had not performed the fixed application, then the returned item would be incorrectly valued at LCY 10.00 because the return would have been applied to the first purchase entry according to the FIFO principle. - -The following table shows the item application entry that results from the fixed application. - -|Posting Date|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity|Item Ledger Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------------| -|01-06-20|1|3|10|3| - -The cost of the second purchase, LCY 20.00, is passed correctly to the purchase return. - -### Example – Fixed Application with Average Cost -The following example, which illustrates the effect of fixed application, is based on the following scenario for an item that uses the Average costing method: - -1. In entry numbers 1 and 2, the user posts two purchase invoices. The second invoice has the incorrect direct unit cost of LCY 1000.00. -2. In entry number 3, the user posts a purchase credit memo, with a fixed application applied to the purchase entry with the wrong direct unit cost. The sum of the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field for the two fixed applied value entries becomes 0.00 -3. In entry number 4, the user posts another purchase invoice with the correct direct unit cost of LCY 100.00 -4. In entry number 5, the user posts a sales invoice. -5. The inventory quantity is 0, and the inventory value is also 0.00 - -The following table shows the result of the scenario on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-to Item Entry|Valued by Average Cost|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|200.00||No|1|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||No|2|2| -|01-01-20|Purchase|-1|-1000|2|No|3|3| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|100.00||No|4|4| -|01-01-20|Sale|-2|-300.00||Yes|5|5| - -If the user had not made the fixed application between the purchase credit memo and the purchase with the incorrect direct unit cost (step 2 in the previous scenario), then the cost would have been adjusted differently. - -The following table shows the result on the item’s value entries if step 2 in the previous scenario is performed without a fixed application. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-to Item Entry|Valued by Average Cost|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|200.00||No|1|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||No|2|2| -|01-01-20|Purchase|-1|433,33||Yes|3|3| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|100.00||No|4|4| -|01-01-20|Sale|-2|866,67||Yes|5|5| - -In entry number 3, the value in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field is valued by average and therefore includes the erroneous posting of 1000.00. Accordingly, it becomes -433,33, which is an inflated cost amount. The calculation is 1300 / 3 = .-433,33. - -In entry number 5, the value of the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field for this entry is also inaccurate for the same reason. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you create a fixed application for an inventory decrease for an item that uses the Average costing method, then the decrease will not receive the average cost for the item as usual, but will instead receive the cost of the inventory increase that you specified. That inventory decrease is then no longer part of the average cost calculation. - -### Example – Fixed Application in Sales Return -Fixed applications are also a very good means of reversing cost exactly, such as with sales returns. - -The following example, which illustrates how a fixed application ensures exact cost reversal, is based on the following scenario: - -1. The user posts a purchase invoice. -2. The user posts a sales invoice. -3. The user posts a sales credit memo for the returned item, which applies to the sales entry, to reverse the cost correctly. -4. A freight cost, related to the purchase order that was posted earlier, arrives. The user posts it as an item charge. - -The following table shows the result of scenario steps 1 through 3 on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-from Item Entry|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||1|1| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|1000.00||2|2| -|03-01-20|Sale (Credit Memo)|1|1000|2|3|3| - -The following table shows the value entry resulting from scenario step 4, posting the item charge. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-from Item Entry|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|04-01-20|(Item Charge)|1|100.00||1|4| - -The following table shows the effect of the exact cost reversal on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-from Item Entry|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||1|1| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|1100.00||2|2| -|03-01-20|Sale (Credit Memo)|1|1100.00|2|3|3| -|04-01-20|(Item Charge)|1|100.00||1|4| - -When you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, the increased cost of the purchase entry, due to the item charge, is forwarded to the sales entry (entry number 2). The sales entry then forwards this increased cost to the sales credit entry (entry number 3). The final result is that the cost is correctly reversed. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are working with returns or credit memos and you have set up the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** field in either the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window or the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, as appropriate for your situation, then [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically fills the various application entry fields when you use the **Copy Document** function. If you use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function, then the fields are always filled automatically. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you post a transaction with a fixed application, and the item ledger entry that you are applying to is closed, meaning that the remaining quantity is zero, then the old application is automatically undone and reapplies the item ledger entry using the fixed application that you specified. - -## Transfer Application -When an item is transferred from one location to another, inside the company inventory, then an application is created between the two transfer entries. Valuing a transfer entry depends on the costing method. For items using the Average costing method, valuation is made using the average cost in the average cost period in which the valuation date of the transfer occurs. For items using other costing methods, valuation is made by tracing back to the cost of the original inventory increase. - -### Example – Average Costing Method -The following example, which illustrates how transfer entries are applied, is based on the following scenario for an item using Average costing method and an average cost period of Day. - -1. The user purchases the item at a cost of LCY 10.00. -2. The user purchases the item again at a cost of LCY 20.00. -3. The user transfers the item from BLUE to RED location. - -The following table shows the effect of the transfer on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Location Code|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|BLUE|1|10.00|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|BLUE|1|20.00|2| -|02-01-20|Transfer|BLUE|-1|15.00|3| -|02-01-20|Transfer|RED|1|15.00|4| - -### Example – Standard Costing Method -The following example, which illustrates how transfer entries are applied, is based on the following scenario for an item using Standard costing method and an average cost period of Day. - -1. The user purchases the item at a standard cost of LCY 10.00. -2. The user transfers the item from BLUE to RED location at a standard cost of LCY 12.00. - -The following table shows the effect of the transfer on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Location Code|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|BLUE|1|10.00|1| -|02-01-20|Transfer|BLUE|-1|10.00|2| -|02-01-20|Transfer|RED|1|10.00|3| - -Since the value of the original inventory increase is LCY 10.00, the transfer is valued at that cost, not at LCY 12.00. - -## Reapplication -Because of the way an item’s unit cost is calculated, an incorrect item application could lead to a skewed average cost and unit cost. The following scenarios may cause incorrect item applications, which require that you undo item applications and reapply item ledger entries: - -* You have forgotten to make a fixed application. -* You have made an incorrect fixed application. -* You want to overrule the application created automatically when posting, according to the item’s costing method. -* You have to return an item to which a sale has already been manually applied, without using the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function, and you must therefore undo the application. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers a feature for analyzing and correcting item applications. This work is performed in the **Application Worksheet** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) -[Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) -[Design Details: Average Cost](design-details-average-cost.md) -[Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-planning.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-planning.md deleted file mode 100644 index 08753b82..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-planning.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,245 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details for Item Application - description: This topic describes how item application happens when you post an inventory transaction. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, item, item ledger, costing - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details for Item Application -When you post an inventory transaction, the quantity posting is recorded in the item ledger entries, the value posting in the value entries. For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md). - -In addition, an item application is made to link the cost recipient to its cost source to provide cost forwarding according to the costing method. For more information, see [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md). - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] makes two types of item application. - -|Application type|Description| -|----------------------|---------------------------------------| -|Quantity application|Created for all inventory transactions| -|Cost application|Created for inbound entries together with a quantity application as a result of user interaction in special processes.| - -Item applications can be made in the following ways. - -|Method|Description|Application type| -|------------|---------------------------------------|----------------------| -|Automatic|Occurs as general cost forwarding according to the costing method|Quantity application| -|Fixed|Made by the user when:

- Processing returns
- Posting corrections
- Undoing quantity postings
- Creating drop shipments **Note:** The fixed application can be made either manually by entering an entry number in the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field or by using a function, such as the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse**.|Quantity application

Cost application **Note:** Cost application only occurs in inbound transactions where the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is filled to create a fixed application. See the next table.| - -Whether quantity applications or cost applications are made depends on the direction of the inventory transaction and whether the item application is made automatically or fixed, in connection with special processes. - -The following table shows, based on the central application fields on inventory transaction lines, how costs flow depending on the transaction direction. It also indicates when and why the item application is of type quantity or cost. - -|Entry Point|Appl.-to Item Entry field|Appl.-from Item Entry field| -|-|--------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|Application for outbound entry|The outbound entry pulls the cost from the open inbound entry.

**Quantity application**|Not supported| -|Application for inbound entry|The inbound entry pushes the cost onto the open outbound entry.

The inbound entry is the cost source.

**Quantity application**|The inbound entry pulls the cost from the outbound entry. **Note:** When making this fixed application, the inbound transaction is treated as a sales return. Therefore, the applied outbound entry remains open.

The inbound entry is NOT the cost source.

**Cost application**| - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> A sales return is NOT considered a cost source when fixed applied. -> -> The sales entry remains open until the real source is posted. - -An item application entry records the following information. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Item Ledger Entry No.**|The number of the item ledger entry for the transaction that this application entry is created for.| -|**Inbound Item Entry No.**|The item ledger entry number of the inventory increase to which the transaction should be linked, if applicable.| -|**Outbound Item Entry No.**|The item ledger entry number of the inventory decrease to which the transaction should be linked, if applicable.| -|**Quantity**|The quantity being applied.| -|**Posting Date**|The posting date of the transaction.| - -## Inventory Increase -When you post an inventory increase, then a simple item application entry is recorded without an application to an outbound entry. - -### Example -The following table shows the item application entry that is created when you post a purchase receipt of 10 units. - -|Posting Date|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity|Item Ledger Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|1|0|10|1| - -## Inventory Decrease -When you post an inventory decrease, an item application entry is created that links the inventory decrease to an inventory increase. This link is created by using the item’s costing method as a guideline. For items using FIFO, Standard, and Average costing methods, the linking is based on the first-in-first-out principle. The inventory decrease is applied to the inventory increase with the earliest posting date. For items using the LIFO costing method, the linking is based on the last-in-first-out principle. The inventory decrease is applied to the inventory increase with the most recent posting date. - -In the **Item Ledger Entry** table, the **Remaining Quantity** field shows the quantity that has not yet been applied. If the remaining quantity is more than 0, then the **Open** check box is selected. - -### Example -The following example shows the item application entry that is created when you post a sales shipment of 5 units of the items that were received in the previous example. The first item application entry is the purchase receipt. The second application entry is the sales shipment. - -The following table shows the two item application entries that result from the inventory increase and the inventory decrease, respectively. - -|Posting Date|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity|Item Ledger Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------------| -|01-01-20|1|0|10|1| -|01-03-20|1|2|-5|2| - -## Fixed Application -You make a fixed application when you specify that the cost of an inventory increase should apply to a specific inventory decrease, or vice versa. The fixed application affects the remaining quantities of the entries, but the fixed application also reverses the exact cost of the original entry that you are applying to, or from. - -To make a fixed application, you use the **Appl.-to Item Entry** field or the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field in the document lines to specify the item ledger entry that you want the transaction line to apply to, or from. For example, you might make a fixed application when you want to create a cost application that specifies that a sales return should apply to a specific sales shipment to reverse the cost of the sales shipment. In this case, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] ignores the costing method and applies the inventory decrease, or increase, for a sales return, to the item ledger entry that you specify. The advantage of making a fixed application is that the cost of the original transaction is passed to the new transaction. - -### Example – Fixed Application in Purchase Return -The following example, which illustrates the effect of fixed application of a purchase return of an item using the FIFO costing method, is based on the following scenario: - -1. In entry number 1, the user posts a purchase at a cost of LCY 10.00. -2. In entry number 2, the user posts a purchase at a cost of LCY 20.00. -3. In entry number 3, the user posts a purchase return. The user makes a fixed application to the second purchase by entering the item ledger entry number in the **Appl.-to Item Entry** field on the purchase return order line. - -The following table shows item ledger entries resulting from the scenario. - -|**Posting Date**|**Item Ledger Entry Type**|**Quantity**|**Cost Amount (Actual)**|**Item Ledger Entry No.**| -|----------------------|---------------------------------------------------|------------------|----------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------| -|01-04-20|Purchase|10|10.00|1| -|01-05-20|Purchase|10|20.00|2| -|01-06-20|Purchase (Return)|-10|-20.00|3| - -Because a fixed application is made from the purchase return to the second purchase entry, the items are returned at the correct cost. If the user had not performed the fixed application, then the returned item would be incorrectly valued at LCY 10.00 because the return would have been applied to the first purchase entry according to the FIFO principle. - -The following table shows the item application entry that results from the fixed application. - -|Posting Date|Inbound Item Entry No.|Outbound Item Entry No.|Quantity|Item Ledger Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------|---------------------------------------------| -|01-06-20|1|3|10|3| - -The cost of the second purchase, LCY 20.00, is passed correctly to the purchase return. - -### Example – Fixed Application with Average Cost -The following example, which illustrates the effect of fixed application, is based on the following scenario for an item that uses the Average costing method: - -1. In entry numbers 1 and 2, the user posts two purchase invoices. The second invoice has the incorrect direct unit cost of LCY 1000.00. -2. In entry number 3, the user posts a purchase credit memo, with a fixed application applied to the purchase entry with the wrong direct unit cost. The sum of the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field for the two fixed applied value entries becomes 0.00 -3. In entry number 4, the user posts another purchase invoice with the correct direct unit cost of LCY 100.00 -4. In entry number 5, the user posts a sales invoice. -5. The inventory quantity is 0, and the inventory value is also 0.00 - -The following table shows the result of the scenario on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-to Item Entry|Valued by Average Cost|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|200.00||No|1|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||No|2|2| -|01-01-20|Purchase|-1|-1000|2|No|3|3| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|100.00||No|4|4| -|01-01-20|Sale|-2|-300.00||Yes|5|5| - -If the user had not made the fixed application between the purchase credit memo and the purchase with the incorrect direct unit cost (step 2 in the previous scenario), then the cost would have been adjusted differently. - -The following table shows the result on the item’s value entries if step 2 in the previous scenario is performed without a fixed application. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-to Item Entry|Valued by Average Cost|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|200.00||No|1|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||No|2|2| -|01-01-20|Purchase|-1|433,33||Yes|3|3| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|100.00||No|4|4| -|01-01-20|Sale|-2|866,67||Yes|5|5| - -In entry number 3, the value in the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field is valued by average and therefore includes the erroneous posting of 1000.00. Accordingly, it becomes -433,33, which is an inflated cost amount. The calculation is 1300 / 3 = .-433,33. - -In entry number 5, the value of the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field for this entry is also inaccurate for the same reason. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you create a fixed application for an inventory decrease for an item that uses the Average costing method, then the decrease will not receive the average cost for the item as usual, but will instead receive the cost of the inventory increase that you specified. That inventory decrease is then no longer part of the average cost calculation. - -### Example – Fixed Application in Sales Return -Fixed applications are also a very good means of reversing cost exactly, such as with sales returns. - -The following example, which illustrates how a fixed application ensures exact cost reversal, is based on the following scenario: - -1. The user posts a purchase invoice. -2. The user posts a sales invoice. -3. The user posts a sales credit memo for the returned item, which applies to the sales entry, to reverse the cost correctly. -4. A freight cost, related to the purchase order that was posted earlier, arrives. The user posts it as an item charge. - -The following table shows the result of scenario steps 1 through 3 on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-from Item Entry|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||1|1| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|1000.00||2|2| -|03-01-20|Sale (Credit Memo)|1|1000|2|3|3| - -The following table shows the value entry resulting from scenario step 4, posting the item charge. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-from Item Entry|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|04-01-20|(Item Charge)|1|100.00||1|4| - -The following table shows the effect of the exact cost reversal on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Appl.-from Item Entry|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|1|1000.00||1|1| -|02-01-20|Sale|-1|1100.00||2|2| -|03-01-20|Sale (Credit Memo)|1|1100.00|2|3|3| -|04-01-20|(Item Charge)|1|100.00||1|4| - -When you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, the increased cost of the purchase entry, due to the item charge, is forwarded to the sales entry (entry number 2). The sales entry then forwards this increased cost to the sales credit entry (entry number 3). The final result is that the cost is correctly reversed. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are working with returns or credit memos and you have set up the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** field in either the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window or the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, as appropriate for your situation, then [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically fills the various application entry fields when you use the **Copy Document** function. If you use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function, then the fields are always filled automatically. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you post a transaction with a fixed application, and the item ledger entry that you are applying to is closed, meaning that the remaining quantity is zero, then the old application is automatically undone and reapplies the item ledger entry using the fixed application that you specified. - -## Transfer Application -When an item is transferred from one location to another, inside the company inventory, then an application is created between the two transfer entries. Valuing a transfer entry depends on the costing method. For items using the Average costing method, valuation is made using the average cost in the average cost period in which the valuation date of the transfer occurs. For items using other costing methods, valuation is made by tracing back to the cost of the original inventory increase. - -### Example – Average Costing Method -The following example, which illustrates how transfer entries are applied, is based on the following scenario for an item using Average costing method and an average cost period of Day. - -1. The user purchases the item at a cost of LCY 10.00. -2. The user purchases the item again at a cost of LCY 20.00. -3. The user transfers the item from BLUE to RED location. - -The following table shows the effect of the transfer on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Location Code|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|BLUE|1|10.00|1| -|01-01-20|Purchase|BLUE|1|20.00|2| -|02-01-20|Transfer|BLUE|-1|15.00|3| -|02-01-20|Transfer|RED|1|15.00|4| - -### Example – Standard Costing Method -The following example, which illustrates how transfer entries are applied, is based on the following scenario for an item using Standard costing method and an average cost period of Day. - -1. The user purchases the item at a standard cost of LCY 10.00. -2. The user transfers the item from BLUE to RED location at a standard cost of LCY 12.00. - -The following table shows the effect of the transfer on the item’s value entries. - -|Posting Date|Item Ledger Entry Type|Location Code|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Entry No.| -|-------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------| -|01-01-20|Purchase|BLUE|1|10.00|1| -|02-01-20|Transfer|BLUE|-1|10.00|2| -|02-01-20|Transfer|RED|1|10.00|3| - -Since the value of the original inventory increase is LCY 10.00, the transfer is valued at that cost, not at LCY 12.00. - -## Reapplication -Because of the way an item’s unit cost is calculated, an incorrect item application could lead to a skewed average cost and unit cost. The following scenarios may cause incorrect item applications, which require that you undo item applications and reapply item ledger entries: - -* You have forgotten to make a fixed application. -* You have made an incorrect fixed application. -* You want to overrule the application created automatically when posting, according to the item’s costing method. -* You have to return an item to which a sale has already been manually applied, without using the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function, and you must therefore undo the application. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers a feature for analyzing and correcting item applications. This work is performed in the **Application Worksheet** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) -[Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) -[Design Details: Average Cost](design-details-average-cost.md) -[Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4b92f9e5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Item Tracking and Reservations - description: This topic talks about item tracking and reservations, and describes the concepts behind the two. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Item Tracking and Reservations -Simultaneous use of reservation and specific item tracking is uncommon, because they both create a coupling between supply and demand. Except for situations where a customer or production planner requests a specific lot, it rarely makes sense to reserve inventory items that already carry item tracking numbers for specific application. Although it is possible to reserve items that require specific item tracking, special functionality is needed to avoid availability conflicts between order processors that request the same item-tracked items. - -The concept of Late Binding ensures that a nonspecific reservation of a serial number or a lot number remains loosely coupled until posting. At posting time, the reservation system can reshuffle nonspecific reservations to ensure that fixed application is possible against the serial or lot number that is actually picked. Meanwhile, the serial or lot number is made available for specific reservation in other documents that request that particular serial or lot number. - -A nonspecific reservation is one in which the user does not care which specific item is picked, and a specific reservation is one in which the user does care. - -> [!NOTE] -> The Late Binding functionality relates only to items that are set up with specific item tracking, and it applies only to reservations against inventory, not against inbound supply orders. - -Reservation of item tracking numbers falls into two categories, as shown in the following table. - -|Reservation|Description| -|-----------------|---------------------------------------| -|Specific|You select a specific serial or lot number when you reserve the inventory item from a demand, such as a sales order.

This is a regular reservation. It is a rigid link between supply and demand that both carry serial or lot numbers. **Note:** The demand carries serial or lot numbers.

For example, you want to reserve a can of blue paint from Lot A, because the customer requests it. A can of blue paint from Lot A is shipped to the customer.| -|Nonspecific|You do not select a specific serial or lot number when you reserve the inventory item from a demand, such as a sales order.

This is a state that is imposed on a reservation entry for serial or lot numbers that are not selected specifically. **Note:** The demand does not carry serial or lot numbers.

For example, you want to reserve a can of blue paint from any lot for your sales order. A can of blue paint from a random serial or lot number is shipped to the customer.| - -The main difference between specific and nonspecific reservation is defined by the existence of serial or lot numbers on the demand side, as shown in the following table. - -|Reservation Type|Supply|Demand| -|-|-|-| -|**Specific**|Serial or lot number.|Serial or lot number.| -|**Nonspecific**|Serial or lot number.|No serial or lot number.| - -When you reserve inventory quantities from an outbound document line for an item that has item tracking numbers assigned and is set up for specific item tracking, the **Reservation** window leads you through different workflows depending on your need for the serial or lot numbers. - -## Specific Reservation -When you choose **Reserve** from the outbound document line, a dialog box appears that asks you if you want to reserve specific serial or lot numbers. If you choose **Yes**, then a list is displayed with all the serial or lot numbers that are assigned to the document line. The **Reservation** window opens after you select one of the serial or lot numbers, and you can then reserve among the selected serial or lot numbers in a typical fashion. - -If some of the specific item tracking numbers that you are trying to reserve are held in nonspecific reservations, then a message at the bottom of the **Reservation** window informs you how many of the total reserved quantity are held in nonspecific reservations and whether they are still available. - -## Nonspecific Reservation -If you choose **No** in the dialog box that appears, the **Reservation** window opens and allows you to reserve among all serial or lot numbers in inventory. - -Because of the structure of the reservation system, when you place a nonspecific reservation on an item-tracked item, the system must select specific item ledger entries to reserve against. Because the item ledger entries carry the item tracking numbers, the reservation indirectly reserves specific serial or lot numbers, even though you did not intend to. To handle this situation, the reservation system tries to reshuffle nonspecific reservation entries before posting. - -The system actually still reserves against specific entries, but then it uses a reshuffling mechanism whenever there is specific demand for the lot or serial number in the nonspecific reservation. This can be the case when you post a demand transaction, such as a sales order, consumption journal, or transfer order, for the serial or lot number, or when you try to specifically reserve the serial or lot number. The system reshuffles the reservations to make the lot or serial number available to the demand or to the specific reservation, thereby placing a different lot or serial number in the nonspecific reservation. If there is insufficient quantity in inventory, the system reshuffles as much as possible, and you receive an availability error if there is still insufficient quantity at the time of posting. - -> [!NOTE] -> On a nonspecific reservation the lot number or serial number field is blank in the reservation entry that points at the demand, such as the sale. - -## Reshuffle -When a user posts an outbound document after picking the wrong serial or lot number, other nonspecific reservations are reshuffled to reflect the actual serial or lot number that is picked. This satisfies the posting engine with a fixed application between supply and demand. - -For all supported business scenarios, reshuffling is possible only against positive item ledger entries that carry reservation and serial or lot numbers but without defined serial or lot numbers on the demand side. - -## Supported Business Scenarios -The Late Binding functionality supports the following business scenarios: - -* Entering a specific serial or lot number on an outbound document with nonspecific reservation of a wrong serial or lot number. -* Reserving a specific serial or lot number. -* Posting an outbound document with nonspecific reservation of a serial or lot number. - -### Entering Serial or Lot Numbers on an Outbound Document with Wrong Nonspecific Reservation -This is the most common of the three supported scenarios. In this case, the Late Binding functionality ensures that a user can enter a serial or lot number, which is actually picked, on an outbound document that already has a nonspecific reservation of another serial or lot number. - -For example, the need arises when an order processor has first made a nonspecific reservation of any serial or lot number. Later when the item is actually picked from inventory, the picked serial or lot number must be entered on the order before it is posted. The nonspecific reservation is reshuffled at posting time to ensure that the picked serial or lot number can be entered without losing the reservation and to ensure that the picked serial or lot number can be fully applied and posted. - -### Reserve Specific Serial or Lot Numbers -In this business scenario, Late Binding functionality ensures that a user who is trying to reserve a particular serial or lot number that is currently nonspecifically reserved can do so. A nonspecific reservation is reshuffled at the time of reservation to free the serial or lot number for the specific request. - -The reshuffle happens automatically, but embedded Help is displayed at the bottom of the **Reservation** window and shows the following text: - -**XX of the Total Reserved Quantity are nonspecific and may be available.** - -In addition, the **Nonspecific Reserved Qty.** field shows how many reservation entries are nonspecific. By default, this field is not visible to users. - -### Posting an Outbound Document with Nonspecific Reservation of Serial or Lot Numbers -This business scenario is supported with Late Binding functionality that enables fixed application and outbound posting of what is actually picked by reshuffling another nonspecific reservation of a serial or lot number. If reshuffling is not possible, then the following standard error message appears when the user tries to post the shipment: - -**Item XX cannot be fully applied.** - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-availability.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-availability.md deleted file mode 100644 index bda71ae3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-availability.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details for Item Tracking Availability - description: The **Item Tracking Lines** and **Item Tracking Summary** windows provide dynamic availability information for serial or lot numbers. The purpose of this is to increase transparency for users on outbound documents, such as sales orders, by showing them which serial numbers or how many units of a lot number are currently assigned on other open documents. This reduces uncertainty that is caused by double allocation and instills confidence in order processors that the item tracking numbers and dates that they are promising on unposted sales orders can be fulfilled. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details for Item Tracking Availability -The **Item Tracking Lines** and **Item Tracking Summary** windows provide dynamic availability information for serial or lot numbers. The purpose of this is to increase transparency for users on outbound documents, such as sales orders, by showing them which serial numbers or how many units of a lot number are currently assigned on other open documents. This reduces uncertainty that is caused by double allocation and instills confidence in order processors that the item tracking numbers and dates that they are promising on unposted sales orders can be fulfilled. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Tracking Lines Window](design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md). - - When you open the **Item Tracking Lines** window, availability data is retrieved from the **Item Ledger Entry** table and the **Reservation Entry** table, with no date filter. When you choose the **Serial No.** field or the **Lot No.** field, the **Item Tracking Summary** window opens and shows a summary of the item tracking information in the **Reservation Entry** table. The summary contains the following information about each serial or lot number on the item tracking line: - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Total Quantity**|The total quantity of the serial or lot number that is currently in inventory.| -|**Total Requested Quantity**|The total quantity of the serial or lot number that is currently requested in all documents.| -|**Current Pending Quantity**|The quantity that is entered in the current instance of the **Item Tracking Lines** window but is not yet committed to the database.| -|**Total Available Quantity**|The quantity of the serial or lot number that is available for the user to request.

This quantity is calculated from other fields in the window as follows:

total quantity – (total requested quantity + current pending quantity).| - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also see the information in the preceding table by using the **Select Entries** function in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. - - To preserve database performance, availability data is only retrieved once from the database when you open the **Item Tracking Lines** window and when you use the **Refresh Availability** function in the window. - -## Calculation Formula - As described in the preceding table, the availability of a given serial or lot number is calculated as follows. - - total available quantity = quantity in inventory – (all demands + quantity not yet committed to the database) - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> This formula implies that the serial or lot number availability calculation considers only inventory and ignores projected receipts. Accordingly, supply that is not yet posted to inventory does not affect item tracking availability, as opposed to regular item availability where projected receipts are included. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-design.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-design.md deleted file mode 100644 index c644c404..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-design.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Item Tracking Design - description: This topic describes the design behind item tracking in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, item, tracking, tracing - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Item Tracking Design -In the first version of Item Tracking in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] 2.60, serial numbers or lot numbers were recorded directly on item ledger entries. This design provided full availability information and simple tracking of historic entries, but it lacked flexibility and functionality. - -From [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] 3.00, item tracking functionality was in a separate object structure with intricate links to posted documents and item ledger entries. This design was flexible and rich in functionality, but item tracking entries were not fully involved in availability calculations. - -Since [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] 3.60, item tracking functionality is integrated with the reservation system, which handles reservation, order tracking, and action messaging. For more information, see “Design Details: Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging” in “Design Details: Supply Planning”. - -This latest design incorporates item tracking entries in total availability calculations throughout the system, including planning, manufacturing, and warehousing. The old concept of carrying serial and lot numbers on the item ledger entries is reintroduced to ensure simple access to historical data for item tracking purposes. In connection with item tracking improvements in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] 3.60, the reservation system was expanded to non-order network entities, such as journals, invoices, and credit memos. - -With the addition of serial or lot numbers, the reservation system handles permanent item attributes while also handling intermittent links between supply and demand in the form of order tracking entries and reservation entries. Another different characteristic of serial or lot numbers compared to the conventional reservation data is the fact that they can be posted, either partially or fully. Therefore, the **Reservation Entry** table (T337) now works with a related table, the **Tracking Specification** table (T336), which manages and displays summing across active and posted item tracking quantities. For more information, see [Design Details: Active versus Historic Item Tracking Entries](design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md). - -The following diagram outlines the design of item tracking functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -![Item tracking design](media/design_details_item_tracking_design.png "design_details_item_tracking_design") - -The central posting object is redesigned to handle the unique subclassification of a document line in the form of serial or lot numbers, and special relation tables are added to create the one-to-many relations between posted documents and their split item ledger entries and value ledger entries. - -Codeunit 22, **Item Jnl. – Post Line**, now splits the posting according to the item tracking numbers that are specified on the document line. Each unique item tracking number on the line creates its own item ledger entry for the item. This means that the link from the posted document line to the associated item ledger entries is now a one-to-many relation. This relation is handled by the following item tracking relation tables. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Item Entry Relation** (T6507)|Relates shipped or received lines to item ledger entries| -|**Value Entry Relation** (T6508)|Relates invoiced lines to value entries| - -For more information, see [Design Details: Item Tracking Posting Structure](design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-in-the-warehouse.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-in-the-warehouse.md deleted file mode 100644 index 22740c2a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-in-the-warehouse.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Item Tracking Availability - description: This topic discusses how to make sure that the people who process orders can rely on the availability of serial or lot numbers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, item, tracking, serial number, lot number, outbound documents - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Item Tracking Availability -The **Item Tracking Lines** and **Item Tracking Summary** windows provide dynamic availability information for serial or lot numbers. The purpose of this is to increase transparency for users on outbound documents, such as sales orders, by showing them which serial numbers or how many units of a lot number are currently assigned on other open documents. This reduces uncertainty that is caused by double allocation and instills confidence in order processors that the item tracking numbers and dates that they are promising on unposted sales orders can be fulfilled. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Tracking Lines Window](design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md). - -When you open the **Item Tracking Lines** window, availability data is retrieved from the **Item Ledger Entry** table and the **Reservation Entry** table, with no date filter. When you choose the **Serial No.** field or the **Lot No.** field, the **Item Tracking Summary** window opens and shows a summary of the item tracking information in the **Reservation Entry** table. The summary contains the following information about each serial or lot number on the item tracking line: - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Total Quantity**|The total quantity of the serial or lot number that is currently in inventory.| -|**Total Requested Quantity**|The total quantity of the serial or lot number that is currently requested in all documents.| -|**Current Pending Quantity**|The quantity that is entered in the current instance of the **Item Tracking Lines** window but is not yet committed to the database.| -|**Total Available Quantity**|The quantity of the serial or lot number that is available for the user to request.

This quantity is calculated from other fields in the window as follows:

total quantity – (total requested quantity + current pending quantity).| - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also see the information in the preceding table by using the **Select Entries** function in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. - -To preserve database performance, availability data is only retrieved once from the database when you open the **Item Tracking Lines** window and use the **Refresh Availability** function in the window. - -## Calculation Formula -As described in the preceding table, the availability of a given serial or lot number is calculated as follows: - -* total available quantity = quantity in inventory – (all demands + quantity not yet committed to the database) - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> This formula implies that the serial or lot number availability calculation considers only inventory and ignores projected receipts. Accordingly, supply that is not yet posted to inventory does not affect item tracking availability, as opposed to regular item availability where projected receipts are included. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md deleted file mode 100644 index e307ff4a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Item Tracking Lines Window - description: Read about how to managethe flow of serial and lot numbers in your inventory. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, inventory, item, tracking, serial number, lot number - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Item Tracking Lines Window -Item tracking records and reservation records are created in the reservation system, and their availability is calculated dynamically. Data that is entered in the **Item Tracking Lines** window is managed in a temporary version of the **Tracking Specification** table. When the window is closed, the active data is committed to the **Reservation Entry** table and the historic data is committed to the **Tracking Specification** table. For more information, see [Design Details: Active versus Historic Item Tracking Entries](design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md). - -Lookups from the **Serial No.** and **Lot No.** fields show availability based on both the **Item Ledger Entry** table and the **Reservation Entry** table, with no date filter. The matrix of quantity fields on the header of the **Item Tracking Lines** window dynamically displays the quantities and sums of item tracking numbers that are being entered on the lines of the window. The quantities must correspond to those of the document line, which is indicated by **0** in the **Undefined** fields in the header of the window. - -To coordinate the flow of serial and lot numbers through inventory, the following rules exist for entering data in the **Item Tracking Lines** window: - -* For both inbound and outbound item tracking lines, you cannot enter a serial number, with or without a lot number, more than once in the same instance of the **Item Tracking Lines** window. If you try to enter any combination of serial or lot numbers that is already present in the window, then an error message blocks the data entry. -* For inbound item tracking lines, you cannot post the related document if an item of the same variant and with the same serial number is already in inventory. If you try to post a positive line for an inventory item with the same variant and serial number, then an error message blocks the posting. However, for both inbound and outbound item tracking lines on open documents, you can have the same combination of serial or lot numbers that relate to different source document lines, that is, existing in different instances of the **Item Tracking Lines** window until the related document is posted. -* If the item is set up for serial number-specific tracking or lot number- specific tracking, then you cannot post an outbound document line unless an item with the defined serial or lot number exists in inventory. If you try to post an outbound document line for an item with a serial lot number that is not in inventory, then an error message blocks the posting. - -The rules for entering data in the **Item Tracking Lines** window also support the coupling principles that govern order tracking, planning, and reservation. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Tracking and Planning](design-details-item-tracking-and-planning.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8ec83b3a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Item Tracking Posting Structure - description: Learn how to use item ledger entries as the primary carrier of item tracking numbers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, item tracking, posting, inventory - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Item Tracking Posting Structure -To align with inventory costing functionality and to obtain a simpler and more robust solution, item ledger entries are used as the primary carrier of item tracking numbers. - -Item tracking numbers on order network entities and non-order network entities are specified in the **Reservation Entry** table (T337). Item tracking numbers that are related to historical information are retrieved directly from the item ledger entries that are related to the transaction in question. This means that item ledger entries reflect the item tracking specification of the posted order line. - -The **Item Tracking Lines** window retrieves the information from T337 and the item ledger entries and shows it through the temporary table, **Tracking Specification** (T336). T336 also hold the temporary data in the **Item Tracking Lines window** for item tracking quantities that remain to be invoiced. - -## One-to-Many Relation -The **Item Entry Relation** table, which is used to link a posted document line with its related item ledger entries, consists of two main parts: - -* A pointer to the posted document line, the **Order Line No.** field. -* An entry number pointing to an item ledger entry, the **Item Entry No.** field. - -The functionality of the existing **Entry No.** field, which relates an item ledger entry to a posted document line, handles the typical one-to-one relation when no item tracking numbers exist on the posted document line. If item tracking numbers exist, then the **Entry No.** field is left blank, and the one-to-many relation is handled by the **Item Entry Relation** table. If the posted document line carries item tracking numbers but only relates to a single item ledger entry, then the **Entry No.** field handles the relation, and the no record is created in the **Item Entry Relation** table. - -## Codeunits 80 and 90 -To split the item ledger entries during posting, the code in codeunit 80 and codeunit 90, is encircled by loops that run through global temporary record variables. This code calls codeunit 22 with an item journal line. These variables are initialized when item tracking numbers exist for the document line. To keep the code simple, this looping structure is always used. If no item tracking numbers exist for the document line, then a single record is inserted, and the loop runs only once. - -## Posting the Item Journal -Item tracking numbers are transferred via the reservation entries that relate to the item ledger entry, and the looping through item tracking numbers occurs in codeunit 22. This concept works in the same way when an item journal line is used indirectly to post a sale or purchase order as when an item journal line is used directly. When the item journal is used directly, the **Source Row ID** field points to the item journal line itself. - -## Code Unit 22 -Codeunits 80 and 90 loop the call of codeunit 22 during the invoice posting of item tracking numbers and during the invoicing of existing shipments or receipts. - -During quantity posting of item tracking numbers, codeunit 22 retrieves item tracking numbers from the entries in T337 that relate to the posting. These entries are placed directly on the item journal line. - -Codeunit 22 loops through the item tracking numbers and splits the posting into the respective item ledger entries that carry the item tracking numbers. Information about which item ledger entries are created is returned to T337 by using a temporary T336 record, which is called by a procedure in codeunit 22. This procedure is triggered when codeunit 22 has finished its run because at that point, the codeunit 22 object contains the information. When the temporary T336 record is retrieved, codeunits 80 and 90 create records in the **Item Entry Relation** table to link the created item ledger entries to the created shipment or receipt line. Codeunits 80 or codeunit 90 then converts the temporary T336 records to real T336 records that are related to the line in question. However, this conversion occurs only if the posted document line is not deleted, because it is only partially posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) -[Design Details: Item Tracking Design](design-details-item-tracking-design.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking.md deleted file mode 100644 index e90ce3c9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-item-tracking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Item Tracking - description: This topic provides an overview of design details for item tracking. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Item Tracking -As the flow of goods in today’s supply chain becomes more and more complex, the ability to keep track of items is increasingly important to the companies involved. Monitoring an item’s transaction flow is a legal requirement in the business of medical and chemical supply, but other businesses may want to monitor products with warranties or expiration dates for customer service reasons. - -An item tracking system should provide a company with easy handling of serial and lot numbers, considering each unique piece of merchandise: when and where received, where stored, when and where sold. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] has gradually expanded its coverage of this business requirement and today provides application-wide functionality and a solid core on which to develop extensions. - -## In This Section -* [Design Details: Item Tracking Design](design-details-item-tracking-design.md) -* [Design Details: Item Tracking Posting Structure](design-details-item-tracking-posting-structure.md) -* [Design Details: Active versus Historic Item Tracking Entries](design-details-active-versus-historic-item-tracking-entries.md) -* [Design Details: Item Tracking Lines Window](design-details-item-tracking-lines-window.md) -* [Design Details: Item Tracking Availability](design-details-item-tracking-availability.md) -* [Design Details: Item Tracking and Planning](design-details-item-tracking-and-planning.md) -* [Design Details: Item Tracking and Reservations](design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md) -* [Design Details: Item Tracking in the Warehouse](design-details-item-tracking-in-the-warehouse.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8c521277..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-loading-the-inventory-profiles.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Loading the Inventory Profiles - description: To sort out the many sources of demand and supply, the planning system organizes them on two timelines called inventory profiles. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Loading the Inventory Profiles -To sort out the many sources of demand and supply, the planning system organizes them on two timelines called inventory profiles. - - The normal types of demand and supply with due dates on or after the planning starting date are loaded into each inventory profile. When loaded, the different demand and supply types are sorted according to overall priorities, such as due date, low-level codes, location, and variant. In addition, order priorities are applied to the different types to ensure that the most important demand is fulfilled first. For more information, see [Design Details: Prioritizing Orders](design-details-prioritizing-orders.md). - - As previously mentioned, demand could also be negative. This means that it should be treated as supply; however, unlike the normal types of supply, negative demand is considered fixed supply. The planning system can take it into account, but will not suggest any changes to it. - - In general, the planning system considers all supply orders after the planning starting date as subject to change in order to fulfill demand. However, as soon as a quantity is posted from a supply order, it can no longer be changed by the planning system. Accordingly, the following different orders cannot be replanned: - -- Released production orders where consumption or output has been posted. - -- Assembly orders where consumption or output has been posted. - -- Transfer orders where shipment has been posted. - -- Purchase orders where receipt has been posted. - - Apart from loading demand and supply types, certain types are loaded with attention to special rules and dependencies that are described in the following. - -## Item Dimensions are Separated - The supply plan must be calculated per combination of the item dimensions, such as variant and location. However, there is no reason to calculate any theoretical combination. Only those combinations that carry a demand and/or supply need to be calculated. - - The planning system controls this by running through the inventory profile. When a new combination is found, the program creates an internal control record that holds the actual combination information. The program inserts the SKU as the control record, or outer loop. As a result, the proper planning parameters according to a combination of variant and location are set, and the program can proceed to the inner loop. - -> [!NOTE] -> The program does not require the user to enter a SKU record when entering demand and/or supply for a particular combination of variant and location. Therefore, if a SKU does not exist for a given combination, the program creates its own temporary SKU record based on the item card data. If Location Mandatory is set to Yes in the Inventory Setup window, then either a SKU must be created or Components at Location must be set to Yes. For more information, see [Design Details: Demand at Blank Location](design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md). - -## Serial/Lot Numbers are Loaded by Specification Level - Attributes in the form of serial/lot numbers are loaded into the inventory profiles along with the demand and supply that they are assigned to. - - Demand and supply attributes are arranged by order priority as well as by their level of specification. Because serial/lot number matches reflect the level of specification, the more specific demand, such as a lot number selected specifically for a sale line, will seek a match before less specific demand, such as a sale from any lot number selected. - -> [!NOTE] -> There are no dedicated prioritization rules for serial/lot-numbered demand and supply, other than the level of specification defined by their combinations of serial and lot numbers and the item tracking setup of the involved items. - - During balancing, the planning system regards supply that carries serial/lot numbers as inflexible and will not try to increase or reschedule such supply orders (unless they are used in an order-to-order relation). See Order-to-Order Links are Never Broken). This protects the supply from receiving several, possibly conflicting, action messages when a supply carries varying attributes—such as a collection of different serial numbers. - - Another reason that serial/lot numbered supply is inflexible is that serial/lot numbers are generally assigned so late in the process that it would be confusing if changes are suggested. - - The balancing of serial/lot numbers does not respect the [Frozen Zone](design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md). If demand and supply is not synchronized, the planning system will suggest changes or suggest new orders, regardless of the planning starting date. - -## Order-to-Order Links are Never Broken - When planning an order-to-order item, the linked supply must not be used for any demand other than what it was originally intended for. The linked demand should not be covered by any other random supply, even if, in its present situation, it is available in time and quantity. For example, an assembly order that is linked to a sales order in an assemble-to-order scenario cannot be used to cover other demand. - - Order-to-order demand and supply must balance precisely. The planning system will ensure the supply under all circumstances without regarding order sizing parameters, modifiers, and quantities in inventory (other than quantities relating to the linked orders). For the same reason, the system will suggest decreasing excess supplies if the linked demand is decreased. - - This balancing also affects the timing. The limited horizon that is given by the time bucket is not regarded; the supply will be rescheduled if the timing of the demand has changed. However, dampener time will be respected and will prevent order-to-order supplies from being scheduled out, except for the internal supplies of a multi-level production order (project order). - -> [!NOTE] -> Serial/lot numbers can also be specified on order-to-order demand. In that case, the supply is not regarded inflexible by default, as is normally the case for serial/lot numbers. In this case, the system will increase/decrease according to changes in demand. Furthermore, if one demand carries varying serial/lot numbers, such as more than one lot number, one supply order will be suggested per lot. - -> [!NOTE] -> Forecasts should not lead to creating supply orders that are bound by an order-to-order link. If the forecast is used, it should only be used as a generator of dependent demand in a manufacturing environment. - -## Component Need is Loaded according to Production Order Changes - When handling production orders, the planning system must monitor the needed components before loading them into the demand profile. Component lines that result from an amended production order will replace those of the original order. This ensures that the planning system establishes that planning lines for component need are never duplicated. - -## Safety Stock May Be Consumed - The safety stock quantity is primarily a demand type and is therefore loaded into the inventory profile on the planning starting date. - - Safety stock is an inventory quantity set aside to compensate for uncertainties in demand during the replenishment lead time. However, it may be consumed if it is necessary to take from it to fulfill a demand. In that case, the planning system will ensure that the safety stock is quickly replaced by suggesting a supply order to replenish the safety stock quantity on the date it is consumed. This planning line will display an Exception warning icon explaining to the planner that the safety stock has been partly or fully consumed by means of an exception order for the missing quantity. - -## Forecast Demand is Reduced by Sales Orders - The production forecast expresses anticipated future demand. While actual demand is entered, typically as sales orders for produced items, it consumes the forecast. - - The forecast itself is not actually reduced by sales orders; it remains the same. However, the forecast quantities used in the planning calculation are reduced (by the sales order quantities) before the remaining quantity, if any, enters the demand inventory profile. When the planning system examines actual sales during a period, both open sales orders and item ledger entries from shipped sales are included, unless they are derived from a blanket order. - - A user is required to define a valid forecast period. The date on the forecasted quantity defines the start of the period, and the date on the next forecast defines the end of the period. - - The forecast for periods prior to the planning period is not used, regardless of whether it was consumed or not. The first forecast figure of interest is either the date on or the closest date prior to the planning starting date. - - The forecast can be for independent demand, such as sales orders, or dependent demand, like production order components (module-forecast). An item can have both types of forecast. During planning, the consumption takes place separately, first for independent demand and then for dependent demand. - -## Blanket Order Demand is Reduced by Sales Orders - Forecasting is supplemented by the blanket sales order as a means of specifying future demand from a specific customer. As with the (unspecified) forecast, actual sales should consume the anticipated demand, and the remaining quantity should enter the demand inventory profile. Again, the consumption does not actually reduce the blanket order. - - The planning calculation considers open sales orders linked to the specific blanket order line, but it does not consider any valid time period. Nor does it consider posted orders, since the posting procedure has already reduced the outstanding blanket order quantity. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) - [Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) - [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-lot-for-lot.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-lot-for-lot.md deleted file mode 100644 index 446c63f3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-lot-for-lot.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Lot-for-Lot - description: Learn how to use the lot-for-lot policy to settle order quantity based on demand. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Lot-for-Lot -The lot-for-lot policy is the most flexible because the system only reacts on actual demand, plus it acts on anticipated demand from forecast and blanket orders and then settles the order quantity based on the demand. The lot-for-lot policy is aimed at A- and B-items where inventory can be accepted but should be avoided. - -In some ways, the lot-for-lot policy looks like the Order policy, but it has a generic approach to items; it can accept quantities in inventory, and it bundles demand and corresponding supply in time buckets defined by the user. - -The time bucket is defined in the **Time Bucket** field. The system works with a minimum time bucket of one day, since this is the smallest time unit of measure on demand and supply events in the system (although, in practice, the time unit of measure on production orders and component needs can be seconds). - -The time bucket also sets limits on when an existing supply order should be rescheduled to meet a given demand. If the supply lies within the time bucket, it will be rescheduled in or out to meet the demand. Otherwise, if it lies earlier, it will cause unnecessary build-up of inventory and should be canceled. If it lies later, a new supply order will be created instead. - -With this policy, it is also possible to define a safety stock in order to compensate for possible fluctuations in supply, or to meet sudden demand. - -Because the supply order quantity is based on the actual demand it can make sense to use the order modifiers: round the order quantity up to meet a specified order multiple (or purchase unit of measure), increase the order to a specified minimum order quantity, or decrease the quantity to the specified maximum quantity (and thus create two or more supplies to reach the total needed quantity). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-maximum-qty.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-maximum-qty.md deleted file mode 100644 index d0842003..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-maximum-qty.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Maximum Qty. - description: The Maximum Quantity policy is a way to maintain inventory using a reorder point. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Maximum Qty. -The Maximum Quantity policy is a way to maintain inventory using a reorder point. - - Everything regarding the Fixed Reorder Qty. policy also applies to this policy. The only difference is the quantity of the suggested supply. When using the maximum quantity policy, the reorder quantity will be defined dynamically based on the projected inventory level and will therefore usually differ from order to order. - -## Calculated per Time Bucket - The reorder quantity is determined at the point of time (the end of a time bucket) when the planning system detects that the reorder point has been crossed. At this time, the system measures the gap from the current projected inventory level up to the specified maximum inventory. This constitutes the quantity that should be reordered. The system then checks if supply has already been ordered elsewhere to be received within the lead time and, if so, reduces the quantity of the new supply order by already ordered quantities. - - The system will ensure that the projected inventory at least reaches the reorder point level – in case the user has forgotten to specify a maximum inventory quantity. - -## Combines with Order Modifiers - Depending on the setup, it may be best to combine the Maximum Quantity policy with order modifiers to ensure a minimum order quantity or round it to an integer number of purchase units of measure, or split it into more lots as defined by the maximum order quantity. - -## Combines with Calendars - Before suggesting a new supply order to meet a reorder point, the planning system checks if the order is scheduled for a non-working day, according to any calendars that are defined in the **Base Calendar Code** field in the **Company Information** and **Location Card** windows. - - If the scheduled date is a non-working day, the planning system moves the order forward to the nearest working date. This may result in an order that meets a reorder point but does not meet some specific demand. For such unbalanced demand, the planning system creates an extra supply. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) - [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-monitoring-the-projected-inventory-level-and-the-reorder-point.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-monitoring-the-projected-inventory-level-and-the-reorder-point.md deleted file mode 100644 index c2997443..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-monitoring-the-projected-inventory-level-and-the-reorder-point.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Monitoring the Projected Inventory Level and the Reorder Point - description: Learn how inventory planning distinguishes between projected inventory and projected available inventory levels. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, supply, inventory, planning - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Monitoring the Projected Inventory Level and the Reorder Point -Inventory is a type of supply, but for inventory planning, the planning system distinguishes between two inventory levels: - -* Projected inventory -* Projected available inventory - -## Projected Inventory -Initially, projected inventory is the quantity of gross inventory, including supply and demand in the past even if not posted, when starting the planning process. In the future, this becomes a moving projected inventory level that is maintained by gross quantities from future supply and demand because those are introduced along the time line (whether reserved or in other ways allocated). - -The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder point and to determine the reorder quantity when using the Maximum Qty. reordering policy. - -## Projected Available Inventory -The projected available inventory is the part of the projected inventory that at a given point in time is available to fulfill demand. The projected available inventory is used by the planning engine when monitoring the safety stock level. - -The projected available inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the safety stock level, since the safety stock must always be available to serve unexpected demand. - -## Time Buckets -Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to detect when the reorder point is reached or crossed and to calculate the right order quantity when using the Maximum Qty. reordering policy. - -As stated earlier, the projected inventory level is calculated at the start of the planning period. It is a gross level that does not consider reservations and similar allocations. To monitor this inventory level during the planning sequence, the system monitors the aggregated changes over a period of time, a time bucket. The system ensures that the time bucket is at least one day since it is the most precise unit of time for a demand or supply event. - -## Determining the Projected Inventory Level -The following sequence describes how the projected inventory level is determined: - -* When a supply event, such as a purchase order has been totally planned, it will increase the projected inventory on its due date. -* When a demand event has been fully satisfied, it will not decrease the projected inventory right away. Instead, it posts a decrease reminder, which is an internal record that holds the date and quantity of the contribution to the projected inventory. -* When a subsequent supply event is planned and placed on the time line, the posted decrease reminders are investigated one by one up until the planned date of the supply while updating the projected inventory. During this process, the reorder point level of the internal increase reminder may be reached or crossed. -* If a new supply order is introduced, the system checks if it is entered before the current supply. If it is, the new supply becomes current supply and the balancing procedure starts over. - -The following shows a graphical illustration of this principle: - -![Projected Inventory Graph Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_projected_inventory.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_2_projected_inventory") - -1. Supply **Sa** of 4 (fixed) closes Demand **Da** of -3. -2. CloseDemand: Create a decrease reminder of -3 (not shown). -3. Supply **Sa** is closed with a surplus of 1 (no more demand exists). - - This increases the projected inventory level to +4, while the projected **available** inventory becomes -1. - -4. The next supply **Sb** of 2 (another order) has already been placed on the timeline. -5. System checks if there is any decrease reminder preceding **Sb** (there is not, so no action is taken). -6. System closes supply **Sb** (no more demand exists)—either A: by reducing it to 0 (cancel) or B: by leaving as is. - - This increases the projected inventory level (A: +0 => +4 or B: +2 = +6). - -7. System makes a final check: Is there any decrease reminder? Yes, there is one on the date of **Da**. -8. System adds the decrease reminder of -3 reminder to the projected inventory level, either A: +4 -3 = 1 or B: +6 -3 = +3. -9. In case of A, the system creates a forward-scheduled order starting on date **Da**. - - In case of B, the reorder point is reached and a new order is created. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-order.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-order.md deleted file mode 100644 index 22826f1b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-order.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Order - description: This topic provides information about order-to-order links in a make-to-order environment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, order - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Order -In a make-to-order environment, an item is purchased or produced to exclusively cover a specific demand. Typically it relates to A-items, and the motivation for choosing the order reordering policy can be that the demand is infrequent, the lead-time is insignificant, or the required attributes vary. - -The program creates an order-to-order link, which acts as a preliminary connection between the supply, a supply order or inventory, and the demand that it is going to fulfill. - -Apart from using the Order policy, the order-to-order link can be applied during planning in the following ways: - -* When using the Make-to-Order manufacturing policy to create multi-level or project type production orders (producing needed components on the same production order). -* When using the Sales Order Planning feature to create a production order from a sales order. - -Even if a manufacturing company considers itself as a make-to-order environment, it might be best to use a Lot-for-Lot reordering policy if the items are pure standard without variation in attributes. As a result, the system will use unplanned inventory and only accumulates sales orders with the same shipment date or within a defined time bucket. - -## Order-to-Order Links and Past Due Dates -Unlike most supply-demand sets, linked orders with due dates before the planning starting date are fully planned for by the system. The business reason for this exception is that specific demand-supply sets must be synchronized through to execution. For more information about the frozen zone that applies to most demand-supply types, see [Design Details: Dealing with Orders Before the Planning Starting Date](design-details-dealing-with-orders-before-the-planning-starting-date.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md deleted file mode 100644 index c3bce6af..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Outbound Warehouse Flow - description: The outbound flow in the warehouse begins with a request from released source documents to bring the items out of the warehouse location, either to be shipped to an external party or to another company location. From the storage area, warehouse activities are performed at different complexity levels to bring the items out to the shipping docks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Outbound Warehouse Flow -The outbound flow in the warehouse begins with a request from released source documents to bring the items out of the warehouse location, either to be shipped to an external party or to another company location. From the storage area, warehouse activities are performed at different complexity levels to bring the items out to the shipping docks. - - Each item is identified and matched to a corresponding inbound source document. The following outbound source documents exist: - -- Sales order -- Outbound transfer order -- Purchase return order -- Service order - -In addition, the following internal source documents exist that function like outbound sources: - -- Production order with component need -- Assembly order with component need - - The last two documents represent outbound flows from the warehouse to internal operation areas. For more information about warehouse handling for internal inbound and outbound processes, see [Design Details: Internal Warehouse Flows](design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md). - - Processes and UI documents in outbound warehouse flows are different for basic and advanced warehouse configurations. The main difference is that activities are performed order-by-order in basic warehouse configurations, and they are consolidated for multiple orders in advanced warehouse configurations. For more information about different warehouse complexity levels, see [Design Details: Warehouse Overview](design-details-warehouse-setup.md). - - In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the outbound processes of picking and shipping can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - -|Method|Inbound Process|Bins|Picks|Shipments|Complexity Level (See [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md))| -|------------|---------------------|----------|-----------|---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -|A|Post pick and shipment from the order line|X|||2| -|B|Post pick and shipment from an inventory pick document||X||3| -|C|Post pick and shipment from a warehouse shipment document|||X|4/5/6| -|D|Post pick from a warehouse pick document and post shipment from a warehouse shipment document||X|X|4/5/6| - - For more information, see [Design Details: Outbound Warehouse Flow](). - - Selecting an approach depends on the company's accepted practices and the level of their organizational complexity. In an order-by-order environment with straightforward processes and simple bin structure, method A, picking and shipping from the order line is appropriate. In other order-by-order companies where items for one order line might come from more than one bin or where warehouse workers cannot work with order documents, the use of separate pick documents is appropriate, method B. Where a company's picking and shipping processes involve multiple order handling and therefore require greater control and overview, the company might choose to use a warehouse shipment document and warehouse pick document to separate the picking and shipping tasks, methods C and D. - - In methods A, B, and C, the actions of picking and shipping are combined in one step when posting the corresponding document as shipped. In method D, the pick is first registered, and then the shipment is posted at a later time from a different document. - -## Basic Warehouse Configurations - The following diagram illustrates the outbound warehouse flows by document type in basic warehouse configurations. The numbers in the diagram correspond with the steps in the sections following the diagram. - - ![Outbound flow in basic warehouse configurations](media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_basic_flow.png "design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_basic_flow") - -### 1: Release Source Document / Create Inventory Pick or Movement - When a user who is responsible for source documents, such as a sales order processor or production planner, is ready for the outbound warehouse activity, he or she releases the source document to signal to warehouse workers that sold items or components can be picked and placed in the specified bins. Alternatively, the user creates inventory pick or movement documents for the individual order lines, in a push fashion, based on specified bins and quantities to handle. - -> [!NOTE] -> Inventory movements are used to move items to internal operation areas in basic warehouse configurations, based on source documents or on an ad hoc basis. - -### 2: Create Outbound Request - When the outbound source document is released, an outbound warehouse request is created automatically. It contains references to the source document type and number and is not visible to the user. - -### 3: Create Inventory Pick or Movement - In the **Inventory Pick** or **Inventory Movement** window, the warehouse worker retrieves, in a pull fashion, the pending source document lines based on outbound warehouse requests. Alternatively, the inventory pick lines are already created, in a push fashion, by the user who is responsible for the source document. - -### 4: Post Inventory Pick or Register Inventory Movement - On each line for items that have been picked or moved, partially or fully, the warehouse worker fills in the **Quantity** field, and then posts the inventory pick or registers the inventory movement. Source documents related to the inventory pick are posted as shipped or consumed. Source documents related to inventory movements are not posted. - - For inventory picks, negative item ledger entries are created, warehouse entries are created, and the pick request is deleted, if fully handled. For example, the **Quantity Shipped** field on the outbound source document line is updated. A posted shipment document is created that reflects the sales order, for example, and the shipped items. - -## advanced warehouse configurations - The following diagram illustrates the outbound warehouse flow by document type in advanced warehouse configurations. The numbers in the diagram correspond with the steps in the sections following the diagram. - - ![Outbound flow in advanced warehouse configurations](media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_advanced_flow.png "design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_advanced_flow") - -### 1: Release Source Document - When a user who is responsible for source documents, such as a sales order processor or production planner, is ready for the outbound warehouse activity, he or she releases the source document to signal to warehouse workers that sold items or components can be picked and placed in the specified bins. - -### 2: Create Outbound Request - When the inbound source document is released, an outbound warehouse request is created automatically. It contains references to the source document type and number and is not visible to the user. - -### 3: Create Warehouse Shipment - In the **Warehouse Shipment** window, the shipping worker who is responsible retrieves pending source document lines based on the outbound warehouse request. Several source document lines can be combined in one warehouse shipment document. - -### 4: Release Shipment / Create Warehouse Pick - The shipping worker who is responsible releases the warehouse shipment, so that warehouse workers can create or coordinate warehouse picks for the shipment in question. - - Alternatively, the user creates warehouse pick document for individual shipment lines, in a push fashion, based on specified bins and quantities to handle. - -### 5: Release Internal Operation / Create Warehouse Pick - The user who is responsible for internal operations releases an internal source document, such as a production and assembly order, so that warehouse workers can create or coordinate warehouse picks for the internal operation in question. - - Alternatively, the user creates warehouse pick documents for the individual production or assembly order, in a push fashion, based on specified bins and quantities to handle. - -### 6: Create Pick Request - When the outbound source document is released, a warehouse pick request is created automatically. It contains references to the source document type and number and is not visible to the user. Depending on the setup, consumption from a production and assembly order also creates a pick request to pick the needed components from inventory. - -### 7: Generate Pick Worksheet Lines - The user who is responsible for coordinating picks, retrieves warehouse pick lines in the **Pick Worksheet** based on pick requests from warehouse shipments or internal operations with component consumption. The user selects the lines to be picked and prepares the picks by specifying which bins to take from, which bins to place in, and how many units to handle. The bins may be predefined by setup of the warehouse location or operation resource. - - The user specifies picking methods for optimized warehouse handling and then uses a function to create the corresponding warehouse pick documents, which are assigned to different warehouse workers who perform warehouse picks. When the warehouse picks are fully assigned, the lines in the **Pick Worksheet** are deleted. - -### 8: Create Warehouse Pick Documents - The warehouse worker who perform picks create a warehouse pick document, in a pull fashion, based on the released source document. Alternatively, the warehouse pick document is created and assigned to the warehouse worker in a push fashion. - -### 9: Register Warehouse Pick - On each line for items that have been picked, partially or fully, the warehouse worker fills in the **Quantity** field in the **Warehouse Pick** window and then registers the warehouse pick. - - Warehouse entries are created, and the warehouse pick lines are deleted, if fully handled. The warehouse pick document remains open until the full quantity of the related warehouse shipment is registered. The **Qty. Picked** field on the warehouse shipment lines is updated accordingly. - -### 10: Post Warehouse Shipment - When all items on the warehouse shipment document are registered as picked to the specified shipment bins, the shipping worker who is responsible posts the warehouse shipment. Negative item ledger entries are created. For example, the **Quantity Shipped** field on the outbound source document line is updated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-assignment-table.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-assignment-table.md deleted file mode 100644 index 33dcd2d2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-assignment-table.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Planning Assignment Table - description: This topic provides insight into what happens when you change how you plan for an item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Planning Assignment Table -All items should be planned for, however, there is no reason to calculate a plan for an item unless there has been a change in the demand or supply pattern since the last time a plan was calculated. - -If the user has entered a new sales order or changed an existing one, there is reason to recalculate the plan. Other reasons include a change in forecast or the desired safety stock quantity. Changing a bill of material by adding or removing a component would most likely indicate a change, but for the component item only. - -For multiple locations, the assignment takes place at the level of item per location combination. If, for example, a sales order has been created at only one location, the program will assign the item at that specific location for planning. - -The reason for selecting items for planning is a matter of system performance. If no change in an item’s demand-supply pattern has occurred, the planning system will not suggest any actions to be taken. Without the planning assignment, the system would have to perform the calculations for all items in order to find out what to plan for, and that would drain system resources. - -The **Planning Assignment** table monitors demand and supply events and assigns the appropriate items for planning. The following events are monitored: - -* A new sales order, forecast, component, purchase order, production order, assembly order, or transfer order. -* Change of item, quantity, location, variant, or date on a sales order, forecast, component, purchase order, production order, assembly order, or transfer order. -* Cancellation of a sales order, forecast, component, purchase order, production order, assembly order, or transfer order. -* Consumption of items other than planned. -* Output of items other than planned. -* Unplanned changes in inventory. - -For these direct supply-demand displacements, the order tracking and action messaging system maintains the Planning Assignment table and states a planning reason as an action message. - -The following changes in master data can also cause a planning imbalance: - -* Change of status to Certified in the production BOM header (for all items using that header). -* Deleted line (child item). -* Change of status to Certified in the routing header (for all items using that routing). -* Changes in the following item card fields. -* Safety Stock Quantity or Safety Lead Time. -* Lead Time Calculation. -* Reorder Point. -* Production BOM No. (and all children of old BOM reference). -* Routing No. -* Reordering Policy. - -In these cases, a new function, Planning Assignment Management, maintains the table and states the planning reason as Net Change. - -The following changes do not cause a planning assignment: - -* Calendars -* Other planning parameters on the item card - -When calculating an MPS or an MRP, the following restrictions apply: - -* MPS: The planning system checks that the item carries a production forecast or a sales order. If not, the item is not included in the plan. -* MRP: If the planning system detects that the item is being replenished by an MPS planning line or MPS supply order, the item will be left out of the planning. However, any demand from relevant components is included. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Transfers in Planning](design-details-transfers-in-planning.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-parameters.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-parameters.md deleted file mode 100644 index f0aa461d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-planning-parameters.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Planning Parameters - description: This topic describes the different planning parameters that you can use in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: planning, design - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Planning Parameters -This topic describes the different planning parameters that you can use in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -The way in which the planning system controls item supply is determined by various settings on the item card or SKU, and settings in manufacturing setup. The following table shows how these parameters are used for planning. - -|Purpose|Parameter| -|-------------|---------------| -|Define if the item is to be planned|Reordering Policy = Blank| -|Define when to reorder|Time Bucket

Reorder Point

Safety Lead Time| -|Define how much to reorder|Safety Stock Quantity

Reordering Policy:

- Fixed Reorder Qty. plus Reorder Quantity
- Maximum Qty. plus Maximum Inventory
- Order
- Lot-for-Lot| -|Optimize when and how much to reorder|Rescheduling Period

Lot Accumulation Period

Dampener Period| -|Modify the supply orders|Minimum Order Quantity

Maximum Order Quantity

Order Multiple| -|Delimit the planned item|Manufacturing Policy:

- Make-to-Stock
- Make-to-Order| - -## Define If the Item Will Be Planned -To include an item/SKU in the planning process, it must have a reordering policy otherwise it must be planned manually, for example, with the Order Planning feature. - -## Define When to Reorder -Reorder proposals are generally released only when the projected available quantity has fallen to or below a given quantity. This quantity is defined by the reorder point. Otherwise, it will be zero. Zero can be adjusted by entering a safety stock quantity. If the user has defined a safety lead time, it will cause the proposal to be delivered in the period prior to the required due date. - -The **Time Bucket** field is used by reorder point policies (**Fixed Reorder Qty.** and **Maximum Qty.**), where the inventory level is checked after each time bucket. The first time bucket begins on the planning starting date. - -> [!NOTE] -> When calculating time buckets, the planning system ignores any working calendars that are defined in the **Base Calendar Code** field in the **Company Information** and **Location Card** windows. - -The default safety lead time, in the **Manufacturing Setup** window, should be set to at least one day. The due date of the demand may be known, but not the due time. The planning schedules backward to meet gross demand, and, if no safety lead time is defined, the goods may arrive too late to meet the demand. - -Three additional reorder period fields, **Rescheduling Period**, **Lot Accumulation Period**, and **Dampener Period**, also play a role in defining when to reorder. For more information, see the "Optimize When and How Much to Reorder" section. - -## Define How Much to Reorder -If the planning system detects the need to reorder, the selected reordering policy is used to determine when and how much to order. - -Independent of the reordering policy, the planning system usually follows this logic: - -1. The quantity of the order proposal is calculated to meet the specified minimum inventory level of the item, usually the safety stock quantity. If nothing is specified, the minimum inventory level is zero. -2. If the projected available inventory is below the safety stock quantity, a backward-scheduled supply order is suggested. The order quantity will at least fill the safety stock quantity, and can be increased by gross demand within the time bucket, by the reordering policy, and by the order modifiers. -3. If the projected inventory is on or below the reorder point (calculated from aggregated changes within the time bucket) and above the safety stock quantity, a forward-scheduled exception order is suggested. Both the gross demand to be met and the reordering policy will determine the order quantity. At minimum, the order quantity will meet the reorder point. -4. If there is more gross demand due before the ending date of the forward-scheduled order proposal, and this demand brings the currently calculated projected available inventory below the safety stock quantity, the order quantity is increased to make up the deficit. The suggested supply order is then scheduled backward from the due date of the gross demand that would have violated the safety stock quantity. -5. If the **Time Bucket** field is not filled in, only the gross demand on the same due date will be added. - - The following reorder period fields also play a role in defining how much to reorder: **Rescheduling Period**, **Lot Accumulation Period**, and **Dampener Period**. For more information, see the "Optimize When and How Much to Reorder" section. - -### Reordering Policies -The following reordering policies affect the quantity that is being reordered. - -|Reordering policy|Description| -|-----------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Fixed Reorder Qty.**|At a minimum, the order quantity will be equal to the reorder quantity. It can be increased to meet the demand or the desired inventory level. This reordering policy is usually used with a reorder point.| -|**Maximum Qty.**|The order quantity will be calculated to meet the maximum inventory. If quantity modifiers are used, then maximum inventory can be violated. We do not recommend that you use the time bucket together with maximum quantity. The time bucket will usually be overruled. This reordering policy is usually used with a reorder point.| -|**Order**|The order quantity will be calculated to meet each single demand event and the demand-supply set will remain linked until execution. No planning parameters are considered.| -|**Lot-for-Lot**|The quantity is calculated to meet the sum of the demand that comes due in the time bucket.| - -## Optimize When and How Much to Reorder -To obtain a rational supply plan, a planner will fine-tune planning parameters to limit rescheduling suggestions, accumulate demand (dynamic reorder quantity), or to avoid insignificant planning actions. The following reorder period fields help optimize when and how much to reorder. - -|Field|Description| -|---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Rescheduling Period**|This field is used to determine whether the action message should reschedule an existing order or cancel it and create a new order. The existing order will be rescheduled within one rescheduling period before the current supply and until one rescheduling period after the current supply.| -|**Lot Accumulation Period**|With reordering policy Lot-for-Lot, this field is used to accumulate multiple supply needs into one supply order. From the first planned supply, the system accumulates all supply needs in the following lot accumulation period into one supply, which is placed on the date of the first supply. Demand outside the lot accumulation period is not covered by this supply.| -|**Dampener Period**|This field is used to avoid minor rescheduling of existing supply out in time. Changes from the supply date until one dampener period from the supply date will not generate any action messages.

As a result a positive delta between the suggested new supply date and the original supply date will always be larger than the dampener period.| - -The timing of rescheduling period, dampener period, and lot accumulation period is based on a supply date. The time bucket is based on the planning start date, as shown in the following illustration. - -![Time Bucket Elements](media/supply_planning_5_time_bucket_elements.png "supply_planning_5_time_bucket_elements") - -In the following examples, the black arrows represent existing supply (up) and demand (down). Red, green, and orange arrows are planning suggestions. - -**Example 1**: The changed date is outside the rescheduling period, which causes the existing supply to be canceled. A new supply is suggested to cover the demand in the lot accumulation period. - -![Rescheuling Period, Lot Accumulation Period](media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accumulation_period.png "supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accumulation_period") - -**Example 2**: The changed date is in the rescheduling period, which causes the existing supply to be rescheduled. A new supply is suggested to cover the demand outside the lot accumulation period. - -![Rescheduling Period, Lot Accum. Period, Reschedule](media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accum_period_reschedule.png "supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accum_period_reschedule") - -**Example 3**: There is a demand in the dampener period and the supply quantity in the lot accumulation period matches the supply quantity. The next demand is uncovered and a new supply is suggested. - -![Dampener Period, Lot Accumulation Period](media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accumulation_period.png "supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accumulation_period") - -**Example 4**: There is a demand in the dampener period and the supply remains on the same date. However, the current supply quantity is not enough to cover the demand in the lot accumulation period, so a change quantity action for the existing supply order is suggested. - -![Dampener Period, Lot Accum. Period, Change Qty.](media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accum_period_change_qty.png "supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accum_period_change_qty") - -**Default values:** The default value of the **Time Bucket** field and the three reorder period fields is blank. For all fields, except the **Dampener Period** field, this means 0D (zero days). If the **Dampener Period** field is blank, the global value in the **Default Dampener Period** field in the **Manufacturing Setup** window will be used. - -## Modify the Supply Orders -When the quantity of the order proposal has been calculated, one or more of the order modifiers can adjust it. For example, the maximum order quantity is larger than or equal to the minimum order quantity, which is larger than or equal to the order multiple. - -The quantity is decreased if it exceeds the maximum order quantity. Then, it is increased if it is below the minimum order quantity. Finally, it is rounded up so that it matches a specified order multiple. Any remaining quantity uses the same adjustments until the total demand has been converted into order proposals. - -## Delimit the Item -The **Manufacturing Policy** option defines which additional orders the MRP calculation will propose. - -If the **Make-to-Stock** option is used, the orders concern only the item in question. - -If the **Make-to-Order** option is used, the planning system will analyze the production BOM of the item and create additional linked order proposals for those lower-level items that are also defined as make-to-order. This continues as long as there are make-to-order items in the descending BOM structures. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-engine-structure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-engine-structure.md deleted file mode 100644 index cc0d244d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-engine-structure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Posting Engine Structure - description: Posting interface and some other functions in codeunit 12 use posting engine functions to prepare and insert general ledger entry and VAT entry records. The posting engine is also responsible for general ledger register creation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Posting Engine Structure -Posting interface and some other functions in codeunit 12 use posting engine functions to prepare and insert general ledger entry and VAT entry records. The posting engine is also responsible for general ledger register creation. - - The functions in the following table provide a standard framework for designing posting procedures (such as Code, CustPostApplyCustledgEntry, VendPostApplyVendLedgEntry, UnapplyCustLedgEntry, UnapplyVendLedgEntry, and Reverse) and exclusive access to table 17, G/L Entry. - -|Routine|Description| -|-------------|---------------------------------------| -|StartPosting|Initializes posting buffer TempGLEntryBuf, locks G/L Entry and VAT Entry tables, and initializes Accounting Period, G/L Register, and Exchange Rate. Should be called only once, then NextEntryNo is 0.| -|ContinuePosting|Checks and posts unrealized VAT for previous transaction increment NextTransactionNo and prepares post of next line.| -|FinishPosting|Completes posting by inserting G/L entries from temporary buffer into database table. Always used together with StartPosting. Checks for inconsistencies.| -|InitGLEntry|Used to initialize new G/L entry for Gen. Jnl Line. Returns GLEntry as parameter.| -|InitGLEntryVAT|Same as InitGLEntry, but also assigns Bal. Account No. and SummarizeVAT.| -|InitGLEntryVATCopy|Similar to InitGLEntryVAT, but also copies posting groups data from VAT Entry before SummarizeVAT.| -|InsertGLEntry|The only function that inserts G/L entry into global TempGLEntryBuf table. Always use this function for insert.| -|CreateGLEntry|Performs an InitGLEntry, assigns Additional Currency Amount, and then performs InsertGLEntry. Replaces several lines of code with a single function call.| -|CreateGLEntryBalAcc|Same as CreateGLEntry, but also assigns Bal. Account Type and Bal. Account No.| -|CreateGLEntryVAT|Same as CreateGLEntry, but with additional processing for posting groups and saving to temporary VAT buffer:

`GLEntry.CopyPostingGroupsFromDtldCVBuf(DtldCVLedgEntryBuf,GenJnlLine."Gen. Posting Type");`

`InsertVATEntriesFromTemp(DtldCVLedgEntryBuf,GLEntry);`| -|CreateGLEntryVATCollectAdj|Same as CreateGLEntry, but with additional collection of adjustments and saving to temporary VAT buffer:

`CollectAdjustment(AdjAmount,GLEntry.Amount,GLEntry."Additional-Currency Amount",OriginalDateSet);`

`InsertVATEntriesFromTemp(DtldCVLedgEntryBuf,GLEntry);`| -|CreateGLEntryFromVATEntry|Same as CreateGLEntry, but also copies posting groups from VAT entry.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Posting Interface Structure](design-details-posting-interface-structure.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-interface-structure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-interface-structure.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c57499f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-posting-interface-structure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Posting Interface Structure - description: This topic provides an overview of the global procedures in the posting interface structure. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: posting, interface, design - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Posting Interface Structure -In the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] posting interface structure, there are several global procedures that use the same structure: - -* RunWithCheck and RunWithoutCheck call procedure Code – generic posting interface for Gen. Jnl Line. -* CustPostApplyCustLedgEntry – post customer application, called from codeunit 226 CustEntry-Apply Posted Entries. -* VendPostApplyVendLedgEntry – post vendor application, called from codeunit 227 VendEntry-Apply Posted Entries. -* UnapplyCustLedgEntry – post unapply of customer application, called from codeunit 226 CustEntry-Apply Posted Entries -* UnapplyVendLedgEntry – post unapply of vendor application, called from codeunit 227 VendEntry-Apply Posted Entries - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Posting Engine Structure](design-details-posting-engine-structure.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-prioritizing-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-prioritizing-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 606e0ccf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-prioritizing-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Prioritizing Orders - description: Read about how to prioritize to meet both demand and supply requirements. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, priority, prioritize, order, sku, demand, supply - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Prioritizing Orders -Within a given SKU, the requested or available date represents the highest priority; the demand of today should be dealt with before the demand of next week. But in addition to this overall priority, the planning system will also suggest which type of demand should be fulfilled before fulfilling another demand. Likewise, it will suggest what source of supply should be applied before applying other sources of supply. This is done according to order priorities. - -Loaded demand and supply contribute to a profile for the projected inventory according to the following priorities: - -## Priorities on the Demand Side -1. Already shipped: Item Ledger Entry -2. Purchase Return Order -3. Sales Order -4. Service Order -5. Production Component Need -6. Assembly Order Line -7. Outbound Transfer Order -8. Blanket Order (that has not already been consumed by related sales orders) -9. Forecast (that has not already been consumed by other sales orders) - -> [!NOTE] -> Purchase returns are usually not involved in supply planning; they should always be reserved from the lot that is going to be returned. If not reserved, purchase returns play a role in the availability and are highly prioritized to avoid that the planning system suggests a supply order just to serve a purchase return. - -## Priorities on the Supply Side -1. Already in inventory: Item Ledger Entry (Planning Flexibility = None) -2. Sales Return Order (Planning Flexibility = None) -3. Inbound Transfer Order -4. Production Order -5. Assembly Order -6. Purchase Order - -## Priority Related to the State of Demand and Supply -Apart from priorities given by the type of demand and supply, the present state of the orders in the execution process also defines a priority. For example, warehouse activities have an impact, and the status of sales, purchase, transfer, assembly, and production orders is taken into account: - -1. Partly handled (Planning Flexibility = None) -2. Already in process in the warehouse (Planning Flexibility = None) -3. Released – all order types (Planning Flexibility = Unlimited) -4. Firm Planned Production Order (Planning Flexibility = Unlimited) -5. Planned/Open – all order types (Planning Flexibility = Unlimited) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-production-order-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-production-order-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6400976f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-production-order-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Production Order Posting - description: Similar to assembly order posting, the consumed components and the used machine time are converted and output as the produced item when the production order is finished. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Production Order Posting -Similar to assembly order posting, the consumed components and the used machine time are converted and output as the produced item when the production order is finished. For more information, see [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md). However, the cost flow for assembly orders is less complex, especially because assembly cost posting only occurs once and therefore does not generate work-in-process inventory. - - -Transactions that occur during the manufacturing process can be tracked through the following stages: - -1. Purchase of materials and other manufacturing inputs. -2. Conversion into work in process. -3. Conversion into finished goods inventory. -4. Sale of finished goods. - -Therefore, apart from regular inventory accounts, a manufacturing company must establish three separate inventory accounts to record transactions at various stages of production. - -|Inventory Account|Description| -|-----------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Raw Materials account**|Includes the cost of raw materials that are purchased but not yet transferred to production. The balance in the Raw Materials account indicates the cost of raw materials on hand.

When raw materials move into the production department, the cost of the materials is transferred from the Raw Materials account to the WIP account.| -|**Work in Process (WIP) account**|Accumulates the costs that are incurred during production in the accounting period. The WIP account is debited for the cost of raw materials that are transferred from the raw materials warehouse, the cost of direct labor performed, and the manufacturing overhead costs that are incurred.

The WIP account is credited for the total manufacturing cost of units that are completed in the factory and transferred to the finished goods warehouse.| -|**Finished Goods account**|This account includes the total manufacturing cost of units that are completed but not yet sold. At the time of sale, the cost of units sold is transferred from the Finished Goods account to the Cost of Goods Sold account.| - -The inventory value is calculated by tracking the costs of all increases and decreases, as expressed by the following equation: - -* inventory value = beginning balance of inventory + value of all increases - value of all decreases - -Depending on the type of inventory, increases and decreases are represented by different transactions. - -||Increases|Decreases| -|-|---------------|---------------| -|**Raw material inventory**|- Net purchases of material
- Output of subassemblies
- Negative consumption|Material consumption| -|**WIP inventory**|- Material consumption
- Capacity consumption
- Manufacturing overhead|Output of end items (cost of goods manufactured)| -|**Finished goods inventory**|Output of end items (cost of goods manufactured)|- Sales (cost of goods sold)
- Negative output| -|**Raw material inventory**|- Net purchases of material
- Output of subassemblies
- Negative consumption|Material consumption| - -The values of increases and decreases are recorded in the different types of manufactured inventory in the same way as for purchased inventory. Every time a transaction of inventory increase or decrease takes place, an item ledger entry and a corresponding general ledger entry are created for the amount. For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md). - -Although values of transactions that are related to purchased goods are posted only as item ledger entries with related value entries, transactions that are related to produced items are posted as capacity ledger entries with related value entries, in addition to the item ledger entries. - -## Posting Structure -Posting production orders to WIP inventory involves output, consumption, and capacity. - -The following diagram shows the involved posting routines in codeunit 22. - -![Production order posting routines](media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_1.png "design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_1") - -The following diagram shows the associations between the resulting entries and the cost objects. - -![Production entry flows](media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_2.png "design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_2") - -The capacity ledger entry describes the capacity consumption in terms of time units, whereas the related value entry describes the value of the specific capacity consumption. - -The item ledger entry describes the material consumption or output in terms of quantities, whereas the related value entry describes the value of this specific material consumption or output. - -A value entry that describes WIP inventory value can be associated with one of the following combinations of cost objects: - -- A production order line, a work or machine center, and a capacity ledger entry. -- A production order line, an item, and an item ledger entry. -- Only a production order line - -For more information about how costs from production and assembly are posted to the general ledger, see [Design Details: Inventory Posting](design-details-inventory-posting.md). - -## Capacity Posting -Posting output from the last production order routing line results in a capacity ledger entry for the end item, in addition to its inventory increase. - - The capacity ledger entry is a record of the time that was spent to produce the item. The related value entry describes the increase of the WIP inventory value, which is the value of the conversion cost. For more information, see “From the Capacity Ledger” in [Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger](design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md). - -## Production Order Costing - To control inventory and production costs, a manufacturing company must measure the cost of production orders, because the predetermined standard cost of each produced item is capitalized in the balance sheet. For information about why produced items use the Standard costing method, see [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> In environments that do not use the Standard costing method, the actual rather than the standard cost of produced items is capitalized on the balance sheet. - -The actual cost of a production order consists of the following cost components: - -- Actual material cost -- Actual capacity cost or subcontractor cost -- Manufacturing overhead - -These actual costs are posted to the production order and compared to the standard cost to calculate variances. Variances are calculated for each of the item cost components: raw materials, capacity, subcontractor, capacity overhead, and manufacturing overhead. The variances can be analyzed to determine problems, such as excessive waste in processing. - -In standard-cost environments, the costing of a production order is based on the following mechanism: - -1. When the last routing operation is posted, the production order cost is posted to the item ledger and set to the expected cost. - - This cost equals the output quantity that is posted in the output journal multiplied by the standard cost that is copied from the item card. The cost is treated as expected cost until the production order is finished. For more information, see [Design Details: Expected Cost Posting](design-details-expected-cost-posting.md). - - > [!NOTE] - > This differs from assembly order posting, which always posts actual costs. For more information, see [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md). -2. When the production order is set to **Finished**, the order is invoiced by running the **Adjust Cost-Item Entries** batch job. As a result, the total cost of the order is calculated based on the standard cost of the consumed materials and capacity. The variances between the calculated standard costs and the actual production costs are calculated and posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5e75aac7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reconciliation-with-the-general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Reconciliation with the General Ledger - description: This topic describes reconciliation with the general ledger when you post inventory transactions, such as sales shipments, production output, or negative adjustments. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, reconciliation, general ledger, inventory - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Reconciliation with the General Ledger -When you post inventory transactions, such as sales shipments, production output, or negative adjustments, the quantity and value changes to the inventory are recorded in the item ledger entries and the value entries, respectively. The next step in the process is to post the inventory values to the inventory accounts in the general ledger. - -There are two ways to reconcile the inventory ledger with the general ledger: - -* Manually, by running the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job. -* Automatically, every time that you post an inventory transaction. - -## Post Inventory Cost to G/L Batch Job -When you run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job, the general ledger entries are created based on value entries. You have the option to summarize general ledger entries for each value entry, or create general ledger entries for each combination of posting date, location code, inventory posting group, general business posting group, and general product posting group. - -The posting dates of the general ledger entries are set to the posting date of the corresponding value entry, except when the value entry falls in a closed accounting period. In this case, the value entry is skipped, and you must change either the general ledger setup or the user setup to enable posting in the date range. - -When you run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job, you might receive errors because of missing setup or incompatible dimension setup. If the batch job encounters errors in the dimension setup, it overrides these errors and uses the dimensions of the value entry. For other errors, the batch job does not post the value entries and lists them at the end of the report in a section titled, **Skipped Entries**. To post these entries, you must first fix the errors. To see a list of errors before you run the batch job, you can run the **Post Invt. Cost to G/L - Test** report. This report lists all of the errors that are encountered during a test posting. You can fix the errors, and then run the inventory cost posting batch job without skipping any entries. - -## Automatic Cost Posting -To set up cost posting to the general ledger to run automatically when you post an inventory transaction, select the **Automatic Cost Posting** check box in the **Inventory Setup** window. The posting date of the general ledger entry is the same as the posting date of the item ledger entry. - -## Account Types -During reconciliation, inventory values are posted to the inventory account in the balance sheet. The same amount, but with the reverse sign, is posted to the relevant balancing account. Usually the balancing account is an income statement account. However, when you post direct cost related to consumption or output, the balancing account is a balance sheet account. The type of the item ledger entry and value entry determines which general ledger account to post to. - -The entry type indicates which general ledger account to post to. This is determined either by the sign of the quantity on the item ledger entry or the valued quantity on the value entry, since the quantities always have the same sign. For example, a sales entry with a positive quantity describes an inventory decrease caused by a sale, and a sales entry with a negative quantity describes an inventory increase caused by a sales return. - -### Example -The following example shows a bike chain that is manufactured from purchased links. This example shows how the various general ledger account types are used in a typical scenario. - -The **Expected Cost Posting to G/L** check box in the **Inventory Setup** window is selected, and the following setup is defined. - -The following table shows how the link is set up on the item card. - -|Setup Field|Value| -|-----------------|-----------| -|**Costing Method**|Standard| -|**Standard Cost**|LCY 1.00| -|**Overhead Rate**|LCY 0.02| - -The following table shows how the chain is set up on the item card. - -|Setup Field|Value| -|-----------------|-----------| -|**Costing Method**|Standard| -|**Standard Cost**|LCY 150.00| -|**Overhead Rate**|LCY 25.00| - -The following table shows how the work center is set up on the work center card. - -|Setup Field|Value| -|-----------------|-----------| -|**Direct Unit Cost**|LCY 2.00| -|**Indirect Cost Percentage**|10| - -##### Scenario -1. The user purchases 150 links and posts the purchase order as received. (Purchase) -2. The user posts the purchase order as invoiced. This creates an overhead amount of LCY 3.00 to be allocated and a variance amount of LCY 18.00. (Purchase) - - 1. The interim accounts are cleared. (Purchase) - 2. The direct cost is posted. (Purchase) - 3. The indirect cost is calculated and posted. (Purchase) - 4. The purchase variance is calculated and posted (only for standard-cost items). (Purchase) -3. The user sells one chain and posts the sales order as shipped. (Sale) -4. The user posts the sales order as invoiced. (Sale) - - 1. The interim accounts are cleared. (Sale) - 2. Cost of goods sold (COGS) is posted. (Sale) - - ![Results of sale posting to G/L accounts](media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_sales.png "design_details_inventory_costing_3_GL_posting_sales") -5. The user posts consumption of 150 links, which is the number of links used to produce one chain. (Consumption, Material) - - ![Results of material posting to G/L accounts](media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_material.png "design_details_inventory_costing_3_GL_posting_material") -6. The work center used 60 minutes to produce the chain. The user posts the conversion cost. (Consumption, Capacity) - - 1. The direct costs are posted. (Consumption, Capacity) - 2. The indirect costs are calculated and posted. (Consumption, Capacity) - - ![Results of capacity posting to G/L accounts](media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_capacity.png "design_details_inventory_costing_3_GL_posting_capacity") -7. The user posts the expected cost of one chain. (Output) -8. The user finishes the production order and runs the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. (Output) - - 1. The interim accounts are cleared. (Output) - 2. The direct cost is transferred from the WIP account to the inventory account. (Output) - 3. The indirect cost (overhead) is transferred from the indirect cost account to the inventory account. (Output) - 4. This results in a variance amount of LCY 157.00. Variances are only calculated for standard-cost items. (Output) - - ![Results of output posting to G/L accounts](media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_output.png "design_details_inventory_costing_3_GL_posting_output") - - > [!NOTE] - > For the sake of simplicity, only one variance account is shown. In reality, five different accounts exist: - > - > * Material Variance - > * Capacity Variance - > * Capacity Overhead Variance - > * Subcontracting Variance - > * Manufacturing Overhead Variance - -9. The user revalues the chain from LCY 150.00 to LCY 140.00. (Adjustment/Revaluation/Rounding/Transfer) - - ![Results of adjustment posting to G/L accounts](media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_adjustment.png "design_details_inventory_costing_3_GL_posting_adjustment") - -For more information about the relationship between the account types and the different types of value entries, see [Design Details: Accounts in the General Ledger](design-details-accounts-in-the-general-ledger.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) -[Design Details: Expected Cost Posting](design-details-expected-cost-posting.md) -[Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reordering-policies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reordering-policies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 86fd1f53..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reordering-policies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Reordering Policies - description: This topic gives an overview of policies for item replenishment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Reordering Policies -Reordering policies define how much to order when the item needs to be replenished. Four different reordering policies exist. - -## In This Section -[Design Details: Fixed Reorder Qty.](design-details-fixed-reorder-qty.md) -[Design Details: Maximum Qty.](design-details-maximum-qty.md) -[Design Details: Order](design-details-order.md) -[Design Details: Lot-for-Lot](design-details-lot-for-lot.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md deleted file mode 100644 index 000d6d02..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,243 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging - description: The reservations system is comprehensive and includes the interrelated and parallel features of Order Tracking and Action Messaging. - - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, replenishment, reordering - ms.date: 06/08/2020 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging - -The reservations system is comprehensive and includes the interrelated and parallel features of Order Tracking and Action Messaging. - -At the core of the reservation system is the linking of a demand entry and a corresponding supply entry, either through reservation or order tracking. A reservation is a user-generated link, and an order tracking record is a system-generated link. An item quantity that is entered in the reservation system is either reserved or order tracked, but not both at the same time. How the systems handle an item depends on how the item is set up. - -The reservation system interacts with the planning system by creating action messages on planning lines during planning runs. An action message can be considered an appendage to an order tracking record. Action messages, whether created dynamically in order tracking or during the planning run, provide a convenient tool for efficient supply planning. - -> [!NOTE] -> Reserved quantities are ignored by the planning system, that is, the hard link that is made between supply and demand cannot be changed through planning. - - The reservations system also forms the structural foundation for the item tracking system. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md). - - For more detailed information about how the reservation system works, see the “Reservation Entry Table” white paper on [PartnerSource](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=258348). - -## Reservation - -A reservation is a firm link that connects a specific demand and a specific supply to each other. This link directly affects the subsequent inventory transaction and ensures the proper application of item entries for costing purposes. A reservation overrides the default costing method of an item. For more information, see “Design Details: Costing Methods”. - -The **Reservation** page is accessible from all order lines of both demand and supply type. In this page, the user can specify which demand or supply entry to create a reservation link to. The reservation consists of a pair of records that share the same entry number. One record has a negative sign and points to the demand. The other record has a positive sign and points to the supply. These records are stored in the **Reservation Entry** table with status value **Reservation**. The user can view all reservations on the **Reservation Entries** page. - -### Offsetting in Reservations - -Reservations are made against available item quantities. Item availability is calculated in basic terms as follows: - -*available quantity = inventory + scheduled receipts - gross requirements* - - The following table shows the details of the order network entities that are part of the availability calculation. - -||Field in T27|Source table|Table filter|Source field| -|-|------------------|------------------|------------------|------------------| -|**Inventory**|Inventory|Item Ledger Entry|N/A|Quantity| -|**Scheduled receipts**|FP Order Receipt (Qty.)|Prod. Order Line|=Firm Planned|Remaining Qty. (Base)| -|**Scheduled receipts**|Rel. Order Receipt (Qty.)|Prod. Order Line|=Released|Remaining Qty. (Base)| -|**Scheduled receipts**|Qty. on Assembly Order|Assembly Header|=Order|Remaining Qty. (Base)| -|**Scheduled receipts**|Qty. on Purch. Order|Purchase Line|=Order|Outstanding Qty. (Base)| -|**Scheduled receipts**|Trans. Ord. Receipt (Qty.)|Transfer Line|N/A|Outstanding Quantity| -|**Gross requirements**|Qty. On Sales Order|Sales Line|=Order|Outstanding Qty. (Base)| -|**Gross requirements**|Scheduled Need (Qty.)|Prod. Order Component|<>Simulated|Remaining Qty. (Base)| -|**Gross requirements**|Qty. on Asm. Component|Assembly Line|=Order|Remaining Qty. (Base)| -|**Gross requirements**|Trans. Ord. Shipment (Qty.)|Transfer Line|N/A|Outstanding Quantity| - - For more information, see [Design Details: Availability in the Warehouse](design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md). - -### Manual Reservation - -When a user intentionally creates a reservation, the user gains full ownership of and responsibility for these items. This means that the user must also manually change or cancel a reservation. Such manual changes may cause automatic modification of the involved reservations. - - The following table shows when and which modifications may occur: - -|User Action|System Reaction| -|-----------------|---------------------| -|Decreasing the reserved quantity|The related quantity fields are updated.| -|Changing date fields|The related date fields are updated.

**Note:** If the due date on a demand is changed to precede the shipment date or due date of the supply, then the reservation is canceled.| -|Deleting the order|The reservation is canceled.| -|Changing location, bin, variant, serial number, or lot number|The reservation is canceled.| - -> [!NOTE] -> The Late Binding functionality may also change reservations without informing the user, by reshuffling nonspecific reservations of serial or lot numbers. For more information, see “Design Details: Item Tracking and Reservations”. - -### Automatic Reservations - -The item card can be set up to always be reserved automatically from demand, such as sales orders. In that case, reservation is made against inventory, purchase orders, assembly orders, and production orders. A warning is issued if supply is insufficient. - -In addition, items are automatically reserved by various planning functions to keep a demand linked to a specific supply. The order tracking entries for such planning links contain **Reservation** in the **Reservation Status** field in the **Reservation Entry** table. Automatic reservations are created in the following situations: - -- A multilevel production order where the **Manufacturing Policy** field of the involved parent and child items is set to **Make-to-Order**. The planning system creates reservations between the parent production order and the underlying production orders to ensure that they are processed together. Such a reservation binding overrides the item’s default costing and application method. - -- A production, assembly, or purchase order where the **Reordering Policy** field of the involved item is set to **Order**. The planning system creates reservations between the demand and the planned supply to ensure that the specific supply is created. For more information, see [Order](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md#order). - -- A production order created from a sales order with the **Sales Order Planning** function is linked to the sales order with an automatic reservation. - -- An assembly order created automatically for a sales order line to fulfill the quantity in the **($ T_37_900 Qty. to Assemble to Order $)** field. This automatic reservation links the sales demand and the assembly supply so that sales order processors can customize and promise the assembly item to the customer directly. In addition, the reservation links the assembly output to the sales order line through to the shipping activity that fulfills the customer order. - -In the case of supply or demand that is not allocated, the planning system automatically assigns a reservation status of type **Surplus**. This could result from demand that is due to forecasted quantities or user-entered planning parameters. This is legitimate surplus, which the system recognizes, and it does not give rise to action messages. Surplus could also be genuine, excess supply or demand that remains untracked. This is an indication of an imbalance in the order network, which causes the system to issue action messages. Note that an action message that suggests a change in quantity always refers to type **Surplus**. For more information, see the “Example: Order Tracking in Sales, Production, and Transfers” section in this topic. - -Automatic reservations that are created during the planning run are handled in the following ways: - -- They are applied against item quantities that are part of the availability calculation, as are manual reservations. For more information, see the "Offsetting in Reservations” section in this topic. - -- They are included and potentially changed in subsequent planning runs, as opposed to manually reserved items. - -## Order Tracking - -Order Tracking helps the planner maintain a valid supply plan by providing an overview of the offsetting between demand and supply in the order network. The order tracking records serve as the foundation for creating dynamic action messages and planning line suggestions during planning runs. - -> [!NOTE] -> The order tracking system offsets available stock as orders are entered into the order network. This implies that the system does not prioritize orders that may be more urgent in terms of their due date. It is therefore up to the logic of the planning system or the wisdom of the planner to rearrange these priorities in a meaningful way. - -> [!NOTE] -> Order tracking policy and the Get Action Messages function are not integrated with Jobs. That means that demand related to a job is not automatically tracked. Because it is not tracked, it could cause the use of an existing replenishment with job information to be tracked to another demand, for example, a sales order. Consequently, you may encounter the situation in which your information about available inventory is out of sync. - -### The Order Network - -The order tracking system is based on the principle that the order network must always be in a state of balance, in which every demand that enters the system is offset by a corresponding supply and vice versa. The system provides this by identifying logical links between all demand and supply entries in the order network. - -This principle implies that a change in demand results in a corresponding imbalance on the supply side of the order network,. Conversely, a change in supply results in a corresponding imbalance on the demand side of the order network. In reality, the order network is in a state of constant flux as users enter, amend, and delete orders. Order Tracking processes orders dynamically, reacting to each change at the time that it enters the system and becomes a part of the order network. As soon as new order tracking records are created, the order network is in balance, but only until the next change occurs. - -To increase the transparency of calculations in the planning system, the **Untracking Planning Elements** page displays untracked quantities, which represent the difference in quantity between known demand and suggested supply. Each line on the page refers to the cause of the excess quantity, such as **Blanket Order**, **Safety Stock Level**, **Fixed Reorder Quantity**, **Minimum Order Qty.**, **Rounding**, or **Dampener**. - -### Offsetting in Order Tracking - - In contrast to reservations, which can only be made against available item quantities, order tracking is possible against all order network entities that are part of the net requirements calculation of the planning system. The net requirements are calculated as follows: - - net requirements = gross requirements + reorder point - scheduled receipts - planned receipts - projected available balance - -> [!NOTE] -> Demand that is related to forecasts or planning parameters is not order tracked. - -### Example: Order Tracking in Sales, Production, and Transfers - - The following scenario shows which order tracking entries are created in the **Reservation Entry** table as results of various order network changes. - - Assume the following data for two items that are set up for order tracking. - -|Item 1|Name|“Component”| -|-|-|-| -||Availability|100 units in RED location

- 30 units of LOTA
- 70 units of LOTB| -|Item 2|Name|“Produced Item”| -||Production BOM|1 qty. per of “Component”| -||Demand|Sale for 100 units at BLUE location| -||Supply|Released production order (generated with the **Sales Order Planning** function for the sale of 100 units)| - -On the **Manufacturing Setup** page, the **Components at Location** field is set to **RED**. - - The following order tracking entries exist in the **Reservation Entry** table based on the data in the table. - - ![Order tracking entries in Reservation Entry table](media/supply_planning_RTAM_1.png "supply_planning_RTAM_1") - -### Entry Numbers 8 and 9 - - For the component need for LOTA and LOTB respectively, order tracking links are created from the demand in table 5407, **Prod. Order Component**, to the supply in table 32, **Item Ledger Entry**. The **Reservation Status** field contains **Tracking** to indicate that these entries are dynamic order tracking links between supply and demand. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Lot No.** field is empty on the demand lines, because the lot numbers are not specified on the component lines of the released production order. - -### Entry Numbers 10 - -From the sales demand in table 37, **Sales Line**, an order tracking link is created to the supply in table 5406, **Prod. Order Line**. The **Reservation Status** field contains **Reservation**, and the **Binding** field contains **Order-to-Order**. This is because the released production order was generated specifically for the sales order and must remain linked unlike order tracking links with a reservation status of **Tracking**, which are created and changed dynamically. For more information, see the “Automatic Reservations” section in this topic. - -At this point in the scenario, the 100 units of LOTA and LOTB are transferred to BLUE location by a transfer order. - -> [!NOTE] -> Only the transfer order shipment is posted at this point, not the receipt. - - Now the following order tracking entries exist in the **Reservation Entry** table. - - ![Order tracking entries in Reservation Entry table](media/supply_planning_RTAM_2.png "supply_planning_RTAM_2") - -### Entry Numbers 8 and 9 - Order tracking entries for the two lots of the component reflecting demand in table 5407 are changed from a reservation status of **Tracking** to **Surplus**. The reason is that the supplies that they were linked to before, in table 32, have been used by the shipment of the transfer order. - - Genuine surplus, as in this case, reflects excess supply or demand that remains untracked. It is an indication of imbalance in the order network, which will generate an action message by the planning system unless it is resolved dynamically. - -### Entry Numbers 12 to 16 - - Because the two lots of the component are posted on the transfer order as shipped but not received, all related positive order tracking entries are of reservation type **Surplus**, indicating that they are not allocated to any demands. For each lot number, one entry relates to table 5741, **Transfer Line**, and one entry relates to the item ledger entry at the in-transit location where the items now exist. - - At this point in the scenario, the transfer order of the components from BLUE to RED location is posted as received. - - Now the following order tracking entries exist in the **Reservation Entry** table. - - ![Order tracking entries in Reservation Entry table](media/supply_planning_RTAM_3.png "supply_planning_RTAM_3") - - The order tracking entries are now similar to the first point in the scenario, before the transfer order was posted as shipped only, except entries for the component are now of reservation status **Surplus**. This is because the component need is still at RED location, reflecting that the **Location Code** field on the production order component line contains **RED** as set up in the **Components at Location** setup field. The supply that was allocated to this demand before has been transferred to BLUE location and can now not be fully tracked unless the component need on the production order line is changed to BLUE location. - - At this point in the scenario, the **Location Code** on the production order line is set to **BLUE**. In addition, on the **Item Tracking Lines** page, the 30 units of LOTA and the 70 units of LOTB are assigned to the production order line. - - Now the following order tracking entries exist in the **Reservation Entry** table. - - ![Order tracking entries in Reservation Entry table](media/supply_planning_RTAM_4.png "supply_planning_RTAM_4") - -### Entry Numbers 21 and 22 - Since the component need has been changed to BLUE location, and the supply is available as item ledger entries at BLUE location, all order tracking entries for the two lot numbers are now fully tracked, indicated by the reservation status of **Tracking**. - -The **Lot No.** field is now filled in the order tracking entry for table 5407, because the lot numbers were assigned to the production order component lines. - -## Action Messaging - -When the order tracking system detects an imbalance in the order network, it automatically creates an action message to notify the user. Action messages are system-generated calls for user action that specify the details of the imbalance and the suggestions about how to restore balance to the order network. They are displayed as planning lines on the **Planning Worksheet** page when you choose **Get Action Messages**. In addition, action messages are displayed on planning lines that are generated by the planning run to reflect the planning system’s suggestions about how to restore balance to the order network. In both cases, the suggestions are run on the order network, when you choose **Carry Out Action Messages**. - -An action message addresses one BOM level at a time. If the user accepts the action message, this may give rise to additional action messages at the next BOM level. - - The following table shows the action messages that exist. - -|Action message|Description| -|--------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Change Qty.**|Changes the quantity on an existing supply order to cover a changed or new demand.| -|**Reschedule**|Reschedules the due date on an existing order.| -|**Resched. & Chg. Qty.**|Reschedules the due date and changes the quantity on an existing order.| -|**New**|Creates a new order if demand cannot be fulfilled by either of the previous action messages.| -|**Cancel**|Cancels an existing order.| - - The order tracking system always attempts to resolve an imbalance in the existing order network. If this is not possible, it issues an action message to create a new order. Following is the prioritized list that the order tracking system uses when it determines how to restore balance. If an additional demand has entered the order network, the system seeks to order track through the following checks: - -1. Check for any excess supply in the existing order tracking record for this demand. -2. Check for planned and scheduled receipts in order of receipt date. The latest possible date is selected. -3. Check for available stock. -4. Check if a supply order exists in the current order tracking record. If so, the system issues an action message of type **Change** to increase the order. -5. Check that no supply order exists in the current order tracking record. If so, the system issues an action message of type **New** to create a new order. - - An open demand passes through the list and offsets the available supply at each point. Any remaining demand is always covered by check 4 or check 5. - - If a decrease in demand quantity occurs, the order tracking system attempts to resolve the imbalance by performing the previous checks in reverse order. This means that existing action messages could be modified or even deleted, if necessary. The order tracking system always presents the net result of its calculations to the user. - -## Order Tracking and Planning - -When the planning system runs, it deletes all existing order tracking records and action message entries and recreates them as planning line suggestions according to supply/demand pairs and priorities. When the planning run has finished, the order network is in balance. - -### Planning System versus Order Tracking and Action Messaging - -The following comparison shows the differences between the methods that are used by the planning system to create planning line suggestions and the methods that are used by the order tracking system to create order tracking records and action messages. - -- The planning system deals with the entire supply and demand pattern of a particular item, whereas order tracking deals with the order that activated it. - -- The planning system deals with all levels of the BOM hierarchy, whereas order tracking deals with one BOM level at a time. - -- The planning system establishes links between demand and supply according to the prioritized due date. Order tracking establishes links between demand and supply according to the order entry sequence. - -- The planning system takes planning parameters into account, whereas order tracking does not. - -- The planning system creates links in a user-activated batch mode when it balances demand and supply, whereas order tracking creates the links automatically and dynamically as the user enters orders. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-revaluation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-revaluation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0867fdd2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-revaluation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,184 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Revaluation - description: You can revalue the inventory based on the valuation base that most accurately reflects the inventory value. You can also backdate a revaluation, so that the cost of goods sold (COGS) is correctly updated for items that have already been sold. Items using the Standard costing method that have not been completely invoiced can also be revalued. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Revaluation -You can revalue the inventory based on the valuation base that most accurately reflects the inventory value. You can also backdate a revaluation, so that the cost of goods sold (COGS) is correctly updated for items that have already been sold. Items using the Standard costing method that have not been completely invoiced can also be revalued. - -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the following flexibility is supported regarding revaluation: - -- The revaluable quantity can be calculated for any date, also back in time. -- For items using Standard costing method, expected cost entries are included in revaluation. -- Inventory decreases affected by revaluation are detected. - -## Calculating the Revaluable Quantity - The revaluable quantity is the remaining quantity on inventory that is available for revaluation on a given date. It is calculated as the sum total of the quantities of completely invoiced item ledger entries that have a posting date equal to or earlier than the revaluation posting date. - -> [!NOTE] -> Items using the Standard costing method are treated differently when calculating the revaluable quantity per item, location, and variant. The quantities and values of item ledger entries that are not completely invoiced are included in the revaluable quantity. - -After a revaluation has been posted, you can post an inventory increase or decrease with a posting date that comes before the revaluation posting date. However, this quantity will not be affected by the revaluation. To balance the inventory, only the original revaluable quantity is considered. - -Because revaluation can be made on any date, you must have conventions for when an item is considered part of inventory from a financial point of view. For example, when the item is on inventory and when the item is work in process (WIP). - -### Example -The following example illustrates when a WIP item transitions to become part of inventory. The example is based on the production of a chain with 150 links. - -![WIP inventory and revaluation](media/design_details_inventory_costing_10_revaluation_wip.png "design_details_inventory_costing_10_revaluation_wip") - -**1Q**: The user posts the purchased links as received. The following table shows the resulting item ledger entry. - -|Posting Date|Item|Entry Type|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------|----------------|--------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|LINK|Purchase|150|1| - -> [!NOTE] -> Now an item using the Standard costing method is available for revaluation. - -**1V**: The user posts the purchased links as invoiced and the links become part of inventory, from a financial point of view. The following table shows the resulting value entries. - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Valuation Date|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-15-20|Direct Cost|01-01-20|150.00|1|1| - - **2Q + 2V**: The user posts the purchased links as consumed for the production of the iron chain. From a financial point of view, the links become part of WIP inventory. The following table shows the resulting item ledger entry. - -|Posting Date|Item|Entry Type|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------|----------------|--------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|LINK|Consumption|-150|1| - -The following table shows the resulting value entry. - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Valuation Date|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|02-01-20|Direct Cost|02-01-20|-150.00|2|2| - -The valuation date is set to the date of the consumption posting (02-01-20), as a regular inventory decrease. - -**3Q**: The user posts the chain as output and finishes the production order. The following table shows the resulting item ledger entry. - -|Posting Date|Item|Entry Type|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------|----------------|--------------|---------------| -|02-15-20|CHAIN|Output|1|3| - -**3V**: The user runs the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, which posts the chain as invoiced to indicate that all material consumption has been completely invoiced. From a financial point of view, the links are no longer part of WIP inventory when the output is completely invoiced and adjusted. The following table shows the resulting value entries. - -|Posting Date|Entry Type|Valuation Date|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|----------------|--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-15-20|Direct Cost|01-01-20|150.00|2|2| -|02-01-20|Direct Cost|02-01-20|-150.00|2|2| -|02-15-20|Direct Cost|02-15-20|150.00|3|3| - -## Expected Cost in Revaluation -The revaluable quantity XE "Revaluable Quantity" XE "Quantity;Revaluable" is calculated as the sum of quantity XE "quantity" for completely invoiced XE "Invoice" item ledger XE "Item Ledger" entries with a posting date equal to or earlier than the revaluation XE "Revaluation" date. This means that when some items are received/shipped but not invoiced, their inventory value cannot be calculated XE "Inventory Value" . Items using the Standard costing method are not limited in this respect. XE "Value" - -> [!NOTE] -> Another type of expected cost that can be revalued is WIP inventory, within certain rules. For more information, see the “WIP Inventory Revaluation” section in this topic. - -When calculating the revaluable quantity for items using the Standard costing method, item ledger entries that have not been completely invoiced are included in the calculation. These entries are then revalued when you post the revaluation. When you invoice the revalued entry, the following value entries are created: - -- The usual invoiced value entry with an entry type of **Direct Cost**. The cost amount on this entry is the direct cost from the source line. -- A value entry with an entry type of **Variance**. This entry records the difference between the invoiced cost and the revalued standard cost. -- A value entry with an entry type of **Revaluation**. This entry records the reversal of the revaluation of the expected cost. - -### Example -The following example, which is based on the production of the chain in the previous example, illustrates how the three types of entries are created. It is based on the following scenario: - -1. The user posts the purchased links as received with a unit cost of LCY 2.00. -2. The user then posts a revaluation of the links with a new unit cost of LCY 3.00, updating the standard cost to LCY 3.00. -3. The user posts the original purchase of the links as invoiced, which creates the following: - - 1. An invoiced value entry with an entry type of **Direct Cost**. - 2. A value entry with an entry type of **Revaluation** to record the reversal of the revaluation of the expected cost. - 3. A value entry with an entry type of Variance, recording the difference between the invoiced cost and the revalued standard cost. -The following table shows the resulting value entries. - -|Step|Posting Date|Entry Type|Valuation Date|Cost Amount (Expected)|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|----------|------------------|----------------|--------------------|------------------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|1.|01-15-20|Direct Cost|01-15-20|300.00|0.00|1|1| -|2.|01-20-20|Revaluation|01-20-20|150.00|0.00|1|2| -|3.a.|01-15-20|Direct Cost|01-15-20|-300.00|0.00|1|3| -|3.b.|01-15-20|Revaluation|01-20-20|-150.00|0.00|1|4| -|3.c.|01-15-20|Variance|01-15-20|0.00|450.00|1|5| - -## Determining if an Inventory Decrease Is Affected by Revaluation -The date of the posting or the revaluation is used to determine if an inventory decrease is affected by a revaluation. - -The following table shows the criteria that is used for an item that does not use the Average costing method. - -|Scenario|Entry No.|Timing|Affected by revaluation| -|--------------|---------------|------------|-----------------------------| -|A|Earlier than revaluation entry number|Earlier than revaluation posting date|No| -|B|Earlier than revaluation entry no.|Equal to revaluation posting date|No| -|C|Earlier than revaluation entry no.|Later than revaluation posting date|Yes| -|D|Later than revaluation entry no.|Earlier than revaluation posting date|Yes| -|E|Later than revaluation entry no.|Equal to revaluation posting date|Yes| -|F|Later than revaluation entry no.|Later than revaluation posting date|Yes| - -### Example -The following example, which illustrates revaluation of an item that uses the FIFO costing method, is based on the following scenario: - -1. On 01-01-20, the user posts a purchase of 6 units. -2. On 02-01-20, the user posts a sale of 1 unit. -3. On 03-01-20, the user posts a sale of 1 unit. -4. On 04-01-20, the user posts a sale of 1 unit. -5. On 03-01-20, the user calculates the inventory value for the item, and posts a revaluation of the item’s unit cost from LCY 10.00 to LCY 8.00. -6. On 02-01-20, the user posts a sale of 1 unit. -7. On 03-01-20, the user posts a sale of 1 unit. -8. On 04-01-20, the user posts a sale of 1 unit. -9. The user runs the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. - -The following table shows the resulting value entries. - -|Scenario|Posting Date|Entry Type|Valuation Date|Valued Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|--------------|------------------|----------------|--------------------|---------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -||01-01-20|Purchase|01-01-20|6|60.00|1|1| -||03-01-20|Revaluation|03-01-20|4|-8.00|1|5| -|A|02-01-20|Sale|02-01-20|-1|-10.00|2|2| -|B|03-01-20|Sale|03-01-20|-1|-10.00|3|3| -|C|04-01-20|Sale|04-01-20|-1|-10.00|4|4| -||04-01-20|Sale|04-01-20|-1|2.00|4|9| -|D|02-01-20|Sale|03-01-20|-1|-10.00|5|6| -||02-01-20|Sale|03-01-20|-1|2.00|5|10| -|E|03-01-20|Sale|03-01-20|-1|-10.00|6|7| -||03-01-20|Sale|03-01-20|-1|2.00|6|11| -|F|04-01-20|Sale|04-01-20|-1|-10.00|7|8| -||04-01-20|Sale|04-01-20|-1|2.00|7|12| - -## WIP Inventory Revaluation -Revaluation of WIP inventory implies revaluing components that are registered as part of WIP inventory at the time of the revaluation. - -With this in mind, it is important to establish conventions as to when an item is considered part of the WIP inventory from a financial point of view. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the following conventions exist: - -- A purchased component becomes part of the raw material inventory from the time of posting a purchase as invoiced. -- A purchased/subassembled component becomes part of the WIP inventory from the time of posting its consumption in connection with a production order. -- A purchased/subassembled component remains part of the WIP inventory until the time when a production order (manufactured item) is invoiced. - -The way the valuation date for the value entry of consumption is set, follows the same rules as for non-WIP inventory. For more information, see the “Determining if an Inventory Decrease Is Affected by Revaluation” section in this topic. - -WIP inventory can be revalued as long as the revaluation date is not later than the posting date of the corresponding item ledger entries of type Consumption and as long as the corresponding production order has not been invoiced yet. - -> [!CAUTION] -> The **Inventory Valuation - WIP** report shows the value of posted production order entries and may therefore be a little confusing for WIP items that have been revalued. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Design Details: Inventory Valuation](design-details-inventory-valuation.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-rounding.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-rounding.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1c919cf6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-rounding.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Rounding - description: Rounding residuals can occur when you value the cost of an inventory decrease that is measured in a different quantity than the corresponding inventory increase. Rounding residuals are calculated for all costing methods when you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Rounding -Rounding residuals can occur when you value the cost of an inventory decrease that is measured in a different quantity than the corresponding inventory increase. Rounding residuals are calculated for all costing methods when you run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. - - When you use the average costing method, the rounding residual is calculated and recorded on a cumulative, entry-by-entry basis. - - When you use a costing method other than Average, the rounding residual is calculated when the inventory increase has been fully applied, that is when the remaining quantity for the inventory increase is equal to zero. A separate entry is then created for the rounding residual, and the posting date on this rounding entry is the posting date of the last invoiced value entry of the inventory increase. - -## Example - The following example illustrates how different rounding residuals are handled for the average costing method and non-Average costing method, respectively. In both cases, the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job has been run. - - The following table shows the item ledger entries that the example is based on. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|3|1| -|02-01-20|-1|2| -|03-01-20|-1|3| -|04-01-20|-1|4| - - For an item using the Average costing method, the rounding residual (1/300) is calculated with the first decrease (entry number 2) and is carried forward to entry number 3. Therefore, entry number 3 is valued at –3.34. - - The following table shows the resulting value entries. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|3|10|1|1| -|02-01-20|-1|-3.33|2|2| -|03-01-20|-1|-3.34|3|3| -|04-01-20|-1|-3.33|4|4| - - For an item using a costing method other than Average, the rounding residual (0.01) is calculated when the remaining quantity for the inventory increase is zero. The rounding residual has a separate entry (number 5). - - The following table shows the resulting value entries. - -|Posting Date|Quantity|Cost Amount (Actual)|Item Ledger Entry No.|Entry No.| -|------------------|--------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|---------------| -|01-01-20|3|10|1|1| -|02-01-20|-1|-3.33|2|2| -|03-01-20|-1|-3.33|3|3| -|04-01-20|-1|-3.33|4|4| -|01-01-20|0|-0.01|1|5| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md deleted file mode 100644 index c65832a4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Searching for Dimension Combinations - description: When you close a window after you edit a set of dimensions, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] evaluates whether the edited set of dimensions exists. If the set does not exist, a new set is created and the dimension combination ID is returned. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Searching for Dimension Combinations -When you close a window after you edit a set of dimensions, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] evaluates whether the edited set of dimensions exists. If the set does not exist, a new set is created and the dimension combination ID is returned. - -## Building Search Tree - Table 481 **Dimension Set Tree Node** is used when [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] evaluates whether a set of dimensions already exists in table 480 **Dimension Set Entry** table. The evaluation is performed by recursively traversing the search tree starting at the top level numbered 0. The top level 0 represents a dimension set with no dimension set entries. The children of this dimension set represent dimension sets with only one dimension set entry. The children of these dimension sets represent dimension sets with two children, and so on. - -### Example 1 - The following diagram represents a search tree with six dimension sets. Only the distinguishing dimension set entry is displayed in the diagram. - - ![Dimension tree structure](media/nav2013_dimension_tree.png "NAV2013_Dimension_Tree") - - The following table describes a complete list of dimension set entries that make up each dimension set. - -|Dimension Sets|Dimension Set Entries| -|--------------------|---------------------------| -|Set 0|None| -|Set 1|AREA 30| -|Set 2|AREA 30, DEPT ADM| -|Set 3|AREA 30, DEPT PROD| -|Set 4|AREA 30, DEPT ADM, PROJ VW| -|Set 5|AREA 40| -|Set 6|AREA 40, PROJ VW| - -### Example 2 - This example shows how [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] evaluates whether a dimension set that consists of the dimension set entries AREA 40, DEPT PROD exists. - - First, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] also updates the **Dimension Set Tree Node** table to make sure that the search tree looks like the following diagram. Thus dimension set 7 becomes a child of the dimension set 5. - - ![NAV2013_Dimension_Tree_Example 2](media/nav2013_dimension_tree_example2.png "NAV2013_Dimension_Tree_Example2") - -### Finding Dimension Set ID - At a conceptual level, **Parent ID**, **Dimension**, and **Dimension Value**, in the search tree, are combined and used as the primary key because [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] traverses the tree in the same order as the dimension entries. The GET function (record) is used to search for dimension set ID. The following code example shows how to find the dimension set ID when there are three dimension values. - -``` -DimSet."Parent ID" := 0; // 'root' -IF UserDim.FINDSET THEN - REPEAT - DimSet.GET(DimSet."Parent ID",UserDim.DimCode,UserDim.DimValueCode); - UNTIL UserDim.NEXT = 0; -EXIT(DimSet.ID); - -``` - - However, to preserve the ability of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to rename a dimension and dimension value, table 348 **Dimension Value** is extended with an integer field of **Dimension Value ID**. This table converts the field pair **Dimension** and **Dimension Value** to an integer value. When you rename the dimension and dimension value, the integer value is not changed. - -``` -DimSet."Parent ID" := 0; // 'root' -IF UserDim.FINDSET THEN - REPEAT - DimSet.GET(DimSet.ParentID,UserDim."Dimension Value ID"); - UNTIL UserDim.NEXT = 0; -EXIT(DimSet.ID); - -``` - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[GET Function (Record)](/dynamics-nav/GET-Function--Record-) - [Design Details: Dimension Set Entries](design-details-dimension-set-entries.md) - [Dimension Set Entries Overview](design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md) - [Design Details: Table Structure](design-details-table-structure.md) - [Design Details: Codeunit 408 Dimension Management](design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md) - [Design Details: Code Examples of Changed Patterns in Modifications](design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-staying-under-the-overflow-level.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-staying-under-the-overflow-level.md deleted file mode 100644 index b41399de..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-staying-under-the-overflow-level.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Staying Under the Overflow Level - description: When using Maximum Qty. and Fixed Reorder Qty., the planning system focuses on the projected inventory in the given time-bucket only. This means that the planning system may suggest superfluous supply when negative demand or positive supply changes occur outside of the given time bucket. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Staying under the Overflow Level -When using the Maximum Qty. and Fixed Reorder Qty. policies, the planning system focuses on the projected inventory in the given time-bucket only. This means that the planning system may suggest superfluous supply when negative demand or positive supply changes occur outside of the given time bucket. If, for this reason, a superfluous supply is suggested, the planning system calculates which quantity the supply should be decreased to (or deleted) to avoid the superfluous supply. This quantity is called the “overflow level.” The overflow is communicated as a planning line with a **Change Qty. (Decrease)** or **Cancel** action and the following warning message: - -*Attention: The projected inventory [xx] is higher than the overflow level [xx] on the Due Date [xx].* - -![Inventory overflow level](media/supplyplanning_2_overflow1_new.png "supplyplanning_2_overflow1_new") - -## Calculating the Overflow Level -The overflow level is calculated in different ways depending on planning setup. - -### Maximum Qty. reordering policy -Overflow level = Maximum Inventory - -> [!NOTE] -> If a minimum order quantity exists, then it will be added as follows: Overflow level = Maximum Inventory + Minimum Order Quantity. - -### Fixed Reorder Qty. reordering policy -Overflow level = Reorder Quantity + Reorder Point - -> [!NOTE] -> If the minimum order quantity is higher than the reorder point, then it will replace as follows: Overflow Level = Reorder Quantity + Minimum Order Quantity - -### Order Multiple -If an order multiple exists, then it will adjust the overflow level for both Maximum Qty. and Fixed Reorder Qty. reordering policies. - -## Creating the Planning Line with Overflow Warning -When an existing supply causes the projected inventory to be higher than the overflow level at the end of a time bucket, a planning line is created. To warn about the potential superfluous supply, the planning line has a warning message, the **Accept Action Message** field is not selected, and the action message is either Cancel or Change Qty. - -### Calculating the Planning Line Quantity -Planning Line Quantity = Current Supply Quantity – (Projected Inventory – Overflow Level) - -> [!NOTE] -> As with all warning lines, any maximum/minimum order quantity or order multiple will be ignored. - -### Defining the Action Message Type - -- If the planning line quantity is higher than 0, then the action message is Change Qty. -- If the planning line quantity is equal to or lower than 0, then the action message is Cancel - -### Composing the Warning Message -In case of overflow, the **Untracked Planning Elements** window displays a warning message with the following information: - -- The projected inventory level that triggered the warning -- The calculated overflow level -- The due date of the supply event. - -Example: “The projected inventory 120 is higher than the overflow level 60 on 28-01-11” - -## Scenario -In this scenario, a customer changes a sales order from 70 to 40 pieces between two planning runs. The overflow feature sets in to reduce the purchase that was suggested for the initial sales quantity. - -### Item setup - -|Reordering Policy|Maximum Qty.| -|-----------------------|------------------| -|Maximum Order Quantity|100| -|Reorder Point|50| -|Inventory|80| - -### Situation before sales decrease - -|Event|Change Qty.|Projected Inventory| -|-----------|-----------------|-------------------------| -|Day one|None|80| -|Sale|-70|10| -|End of time bucket|None|10| -|Suggest new purchase order|+90|100| - -### Situation after sales decrease - -|Change|Change Qty.|Projected Inventory| -|------------|-----------------|-------------------------| -|Day one|None|80| -|Sale|-40|40| -|Purchase|+90|130| -|End of time bucket|None|130| -|Suggest to decrease purchase

order from 90 to 60|-30|100| - -### Resulting Planning Lines - One planning line (warning) is created to reduce the purchase with 30 from 90 to 60 to keep the projected inventory on 100 according to the overflow level. - -![Plan according to overflow level](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_overflow2.png "nav_app_supply_planning_2_overflow2") - -> [!NOTE] -> Without the Overflow feature, no warning is created if the projected inventory level is above maximum inventory. This could cause a superfluous supply of 30. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-supply-planning.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-supply-planning.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2b96b0e1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-supply-planning.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Supply Planning - description: This topic provides an overview of the the concepts and principles that are used within the Supply Planning features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, supply, planning, reordering, replenishment - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Supply Planning -This documentation provides detailed technical insight to the concepts and principles that are used within the Supply Planning features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -It explains how the planning system works and how to adjust the algorithms to meet planning requirements in different environments. It first introduces central solution concepts and then describes the logic of the central mechanism, supply balancing, before proceeding to explain how inventory planning is performed with the use of reordering policies. - -## In This Section -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Planning Assignment Table](design-details-planning-assignment-table.md) -[Design Details: Demand at Blank Location](design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md) -[Design Details: Transfers in Planning](design-details-transfers-in-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-table-structure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-table-structure.md deleted file mode 100644 index cde50c16..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-table-structure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Table Structure - description: To understand how the dimension entry storing and posting is redesigned, it is important to understand the table structure. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Table Structure -To understand how the dimension entry storing and posting is redesigned, it is important to understand the table structure. - -## New Tables - Three new tables have been designed to manage dimension set entries. - -### Table 480 Dimension Set Entry - Table 480 **Dimension Set Entry** is a new table. You cannot change this table. After data has been written to the table, you cannot delete or edit it. Deleting data requires that you check against all occurrences of the dimension set ID in the entire database, including partner solutions. - -|Field No.|Field Name|Data Type|Comment| -|---------------|----------------|---------------|-------------| -|1|**ID**|Integer|>0.0 is reserved for the empty dimension set. References field 3 in table 481.| -|2|**Dimension Code**|Code 20|Table relation to table 348.| -|3|**Dimension Value Code**|Code 20|Table relation to table 349.| -|4|**Dimension Value ID**|Integer|References field 12 in table 349. It is the secondary key that is used when traversing table 481.| -|5|**Dimension Name**|Text 30|CalcField. Lookup to table 348.| -|6|**Dimension Value Name**|Text 30|CalcField. Lookup to table 349.| - -#### Table 481 Dimension Set Tree Node - Table 481 **Dimension Set Tree Node** is a new table. You cannot change this table. It is used to search for a dimension set. If the dimension set is not found, a new set is created. - -|Field No.|Field Name|Data Type|Comment| -|---------------|----------------|---------------|-------------| -|1|**Parent Dimension Set ID**|Integer|0 for top level node.| -|2|**Dimension Value ID**|Integer|Table relation to field 12 in table 349.| -|3|**Dimension Set ID**|Integer|AutoIncrement. Used in field 1 in table 480.| -|4|**In Use**|Boolean|False if not in use.| - -##### Table 482 Reclas. Dimension Set Buffer - Table 482 **Reclas. Dimension Set Buffer** is a new table. The table is used to edit a dimension set ID. It is required when you edit a dimension value code and a new dimension value code, for example, in the **Item Reclas. Journal** table. - -|Field No.|Field Name|Data Type|Comment| -|---------------|----------------|---------------|-------------| -|1|**Dimension Code**|Code 20|Table relation to table 348.| -|2|**Dimension Value Code**|Code 20|Table relation to table 349.| -|3|**Dimension Value ID**|Integer|References field 12 in table 349.| -|4|**New Dimension Value Code**|Code 20|Table relation to table 349.| -|5|**New Dimension Value ID**|Integer|References field 12 in table 349.| -|6|**Dimension Name**|Text 30|CalcField. Lookup to table 348.| -|7|**Dimension Value Name**|Text 30|CalcField. Lookup to table 349.| -|8|**New Dimension Value Name**|Text 30|CalcField. Lookup to table 349.| - -## Modified Tables - All transaction and budget tables have been modified to manage dimension set entries. - -### Changes to Transaction and Budget Tables - A new field has been added to all transaction and budget tables. - -|Field No.|Field Name|Data Type|Comment| -|---------------|----------------|---------------|-------------| -|480|**Dimension Set ID**|Integer|References field 1 in table 480.| - -#### Changes to Table 83 Item Journal Line - Two new fields have been added to table 83 **Item Journal Line**. - -|Field No.|Field Name|Data Type|Comment| -|---------------|----------------|---------------|-------------| -|480|**Dimension Set ID**|Integer|References field 1 in table 480.| -|481|**New Dimension Set ID**|Integer|References field 1 in table 480.| - -##### Changes to Table 349 Dimension Value - A new field has been added to table 349 **Dimension Value**. - -|Field No.|Field Name|Data Type|Comment| -|---------------|----------------|---------------|-------------| -|12|**Dimension Value ID**|Integer|AutoIncrement. Used for references in table 480 and table 481.| - -###### Tables That Get New Field 480 Dimension Set ID - A new field, 480 **Dimension Set ID**, has been added to the following tables. For the tables that store posted data, the field only provides a non-editable display of dimensions, which is marked as Drill-down. For the tables that store working documents, the field is editable. The buffer tables that are used internally do not need editable or non-editable capabilities. - - The 480 field is non-editable in the following tables. - -|Table No.|Table Name| -|---------------|----------------| -|17|**G/L Entry**| -|21|**Cust. Ledger Entry**| -|25|**Vendor Ledger Entry**| -|32|**Item Ledger Entry**| -|110|**Sales Shipment Header**| -|111|**Sales Shipment Line**| -|112|**Sales Invoice Header**| -|113|**Sales Invoice Line**| -|114|**Sales Cr.Memo Header**| -|115|**Sales Cr.Memo Line**| -|120|**Purch. Rcpt. Header**| -|121|**Purch. Rcpt. Line**| -|122|**Purch. Inv. Header**| -|123|**Purch. Inv. Line**| -|124|**Purch. Cr. Memo Hdr.**| -|125|**Purch. Cr. Memo Line**| -|169|**Job Ledger Entry**| -|203|**Res. Ledger Entry**| -|271|**Bank Account Ledger Entry**| -|281|**Phys. Inventory Ledger Entry**| -|297|**Issued Reminder Header**| -|304|**Issued Fin. Charge Memo Header**| -|5107|**Sales Header Archive**| -|5108|**Sales Line Archive**| -|5109|**Purchase Header Archive**| -|5110|**Purchase Line Archive**| -|5601|**FA Ledger Entry**| -|5625|**Maintenance Ledger Entry**| -|5629|**Ins. Coverage Ledger Entry**| -|5744|**Transfer Shipment Header**| -|5745|**Transfer Shipment Line**| -|5746|**Transfer Receipt Header**| -|5747|**Transfer Receipt Line**| -|5802|**Value Entry**| -|5832|**Capacity Ledger Entry**| -|5907|**Service Ledger Entry**| -|5908|**Service Header**| -|5933|**Service Order Posting Buffer**| -|5970|**Filed Service Contract Header**| -|5990|**Service Shipment Header**| -|5991|**Service Shipment Line**| -|5992|**Service Invoice Header**| -|5993|**Service Invoice Line**| -|5994|**Service Cr. Memo Header**| -|5995|**Service Cr. Memo Line**| -|6650|**Return Shipment Header**| -|6651|**Return Shipment Line**| -|6660|**Return Receipt Header**| -|6661|**Return Receipt Line**| - - The 480 field is editable in the following tables. - -|Table No.|Table Name| -|---------------|----------------| -|36|**Sales Header**| -|37|**Sales Line**| -|38|**Purchase Header**| -|39|**Purchase Line**| -|81|**Gen. Journal Line**| -|83|**Item Journal Line**| -|89|**BOM Journal Line**| -|96|**G/L Budget Entry**| -|207|**Res. Journal Line**| -|210|**Job Journal Line**| -|221|**Gen. Jnl. Allocation**| -|246|**Requisition Line**| -|295|**Reminder Header**| -|302|**Finance Charge Memo Header**| -|5405|**Production Order**| -|5406|**Prod. Order Line**| -|5407|**Prod. Order Component**| -|5615|**FA Allocation**| -|5621|**FA Journal Line**| -|5635|**Insurance Journal Line**| -|5740|**Transfer Header**| -|5741|**Transfer Line**| -|5900|**Service Header**| -|5901|**Service Item Line**| -|5902|**Service Line**| -|5965|**Service Contract Header**| -|5997|**Standard Service Line**| -|7134|**Item Budget Entry**| -|99000829|**Planning Component**| - - The 480 field has been added to the following buffer tables. - -|Table No.|Table Name| -|---------------|----------------| -|49|**Invoice Post. Buffer**| -|212|**Job Posting Buffer**| -|372|**Payment Buffer**| -|382|**CV Ledger Entry Buffer**| -|461|**Prepayment Inv. Line Buffer**| -|5637|**FA G/L Posting Buffer**| -|7136|**Item Budget Buffer**| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Dimension Set Entries](design-details-dimension-set-entries.md) - [Dimension Set Entries Overview](design-details-dimension-set-entries-overview.md) - [Design Details: Searching for Dimension Combinations](design-details-searching-for-dimension-combinations.md) - [Design Details: Codeunit 408 Dimension Management](design-details-codeunit-408-dimension-management.md) - [Design Details: Code Examples of Changed Patterns in Modifications](design-details-code-examples-of-changed-patterns-in-modifications.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-concept-of-balancing-in-brief.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-concept-of-balancing-in-brief.md deleted file mode 100644 index 79134587..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-concept-of-balancing-in-brief.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - The Concept of Balancing in Brief - description: Demand is given by a company’s customers. Supply is what the company can create and remove to establish balance. The planning system starts with the independent demand and then tracks backwards to the supply. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: The Concept of Balancing in Brief -Demand is given by a company’s customers. Supply is what the company can create and remove to establish balance. The planning system starts with the independent demand and then tracks backwards to the supply. - - The inventory profiles are used to contain information about the demands and supplies, quantities, and timing. These profiles essentially make up the two sides of the balancing scale. - - The objective of the planning mechanism is to counterbalance the demand and supply of an item to ensure that supply will match demand in a feasible way as defined by the planning parameters and rules. - - ![Illustration Tree for Supply and Demand Planning Mechanism](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_balancing.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_2_balancing") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) - [Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-reorder-point.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-reorder-point.md deleted file mode 100644 index e5376862..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-reorder-point.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - The Role of the Reorder Point - description: This topic highlights the importance of setting a reorder point, so that you when to order more inventory. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: desigh, reorder, demand, supply - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: The Role of the Reorder Point -In addition to the general balancing of supply and demand, the planning system must also monitor inventory levels for the affected items to respect the defined reordering policies. - -A reorder point represents demand during lead time. When the projected inventory passes below the inventory level defined by the reorder point, it is time to order more quantity. Meanwhile, the inventory is expected to decrease gradually and possibly reach zero (or the safety stock level), until the replenishment arrives. - -Accordingly, the planning system will suggest a forward-scheduled supply order at the point when the projected inventory passes below the reorder point. - -The reorder point reflects a certain inventory level. However, inventory levels can move significantly during the time bucket and, therefore, the planning system must constantly monitor the projected available inventory. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-time-bucket.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-time-bucket.md deleted file mode 100644 index 48e22bfa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-the-role-of-the-time-bucket.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - The Role of the Time Bucket - description: The purpose of the time bucket is to collect demand events within the time window in order to make a joint supply order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: The Role of the Time Bucket -The purpose of the time bucket is to collect demand events within the time window in order to make a joint supply order. - - For reordering policies that use a reorder point, you can define a time bucket. This ensures that demand within the same time period is accumulated before checking the impact on the projected inventory and whether the reorder point has been passed. If the reorder point is passed, a new supply order is scheduled forward from the end of the period defined by the time bucket. The time buckets begin on the planning starting date. - - The time-bucketed concept reflects the manual process of checking the inventory level on a frequent basis rather than for each transaction. The user needs to define the frequency (the time bucket). For example, the user gathers all item needs from one vendor to place a weekly order. - - ![Illustration Graph for Time-Bucketed Concept](media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_reorder_cycle.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_2_reorder_cycle") - - The time bucket is generally used to avoid a cascade effect. For example, a balanced row of demand and supply where an early demand is canceled, or a new one is created. The result would be that every supply order (except the last one) is rescheduled. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) - [Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-transfers-in-planning.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-transfers-in-planning.md deleted file mode 100644 index 26c0a9df..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-transfers-in-planning.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Transfers in Planning - description: This topic describes how to use transfer orders as a source of supply when planning inventory levels. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: design, transfer, sku, locations, warehouse - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Transfers in Planning -Transfer orders are also a source of supply when working at the SKU level. When using multiple locations (warehouses), the SKU replenishment system can be set to Transfer, implying that the location is replenished by transferring goods from another location. In a situation with more warehouses, companies might have a chain of transfers where supply to GREEN location is transferred from YELLOW, and supply to YELLOW is transferred from RED and so on. In the beginning of the chain, there is a replenishment system of Prod. Order or Purchase. - -![Supply Planning Transfer Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers1.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers1") - -When comparing the situation where a supply order is directly facing a demand order to a situation where the sales order is supplied through a chain of SKU transfers, it is obvious that the planning task in the latter situation can become very complex. If demand changes, it might cause a ripple effect through the chain, because all transfer orders plus the purchase/production order in the opposite end of the chain will have to be manipulated to reestablish balance between demand and supply. - -![Order Transfer Illustration Graph](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers2.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers2") - -## Why is Transfer a Special Case? -A transfer order looks much like any other order in the program. However, behind the scene it is very different. - -One fundamental aspect that makes transfers in planning different from purchase and production orders is that a transfer line represents demand and supply at the same time. The outbound part, which is shipped from the old location, is demand. The inbound part, which is to be received at the new location, is supply at that location. - -![Image Example for Transfer Orders](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers3.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers3") - -This means that when the system manipulates the supply side of the transfer, it must make a similar change on the demand side. - -## Transfers are Dependent Demand -The related demand and supply has some resemblance with components of a production order line, but the difference is that components will be on the next planning level and with a different item, whereas the two parts of the transfer is situated on the same level, for the same item. - -An important similarity is that just as components are dependent demand, so is the transfer demand. The demand from a transfer line is dictated by the supply side of the transfer in the sense that if the supply is changed, the demand is directly affected. - -Unless the planning flexibility is None, a transfer line should never be treated as independent demand in planning. - -In the planning procedure, the transfer demand should only be taken into account after the supply side has been processed by the planning system. Before this, the actual demand is not known. The sequence of the changes made is therefore very important when it comes to transfer orders. - -## Planning Sequence -The following illustration shows what a string of transfers could look like. - -![Planning Sequence Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers4.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers4") - -In this example, a customer orders the item at location GREEN. Location GREEN is supplied through transfer from the central warehouse RED. The central warehouse RED is supplied by transfer from production on location BLUE. - -In this example, the planning system will start at the customer demand and work its way backwards through the chain. The demands and supplies will be processed one location at a time. - -![Planning System: Process order Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers5.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers5") - -## Transfer Level Code -The sequence in which the locations are processed in the planning system is determined by the transfer level code of the SKU. - -The transfer level code is an internal field which is automatically calculated and stored on the SKU when SKU is created or modified. The calculation runs across all SKUs for a given combination of Item/Variant and uses the location code and the transfer-from code to determine the route the planning will have to use when traversing through the SKUs to ensure that all demands are processed. - -The transfer level code will be 0 for SKUs with replenishment system Purchase or Prod. Order and will be -1 for the first transfer level, -2 for the second and so on. In the transfer chain described above, the levels would therefore be -1 for RED and -2 for GREEN, as shown in the following illustration. - -![Illustration Example of the Transfer Process](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers6.gif "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers6") - -When updating a SKU, the planning system will detect if SKUs with replenishment system Transfer are set up with circular references. - -## Planning Transfers without SKU - -Even if the SKU feature is not used, it is possible to use locations and make manual transfers between locations. For companies with less advanced warehouse setup, the planning system supports scenarios where existing inventory is transferred manually to another location, for example to cover a sales order at that location. At the same time, the planning system should react to changes in the demand. - -To support manual transfers, the planning will analyze existing transfer orders and then plan the order in which the locations should be processed. Internally, the planning system will operate with temporary SKUs carrying transfer level codes. - -![Planning Direction Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers7.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers7") - -If more transfers to a given location exist, the first transfer order will define the planning direction. Transfers running in the opposite direction will be canceled. - -## Changing Quantity with Reservations -When changing quantities on existing supply, the planning system takes reservations into account in the sense that the reserved quantity represents the lower limit for how much the supply can be reduced. - -When changing the quantity on an existing transfer order line, keep in mind that the lower limit will be defined as the highest reserved quantity of the outbound and inbound transfer line. - -For example, if a transfer order line of 117 pieces is reserved against a sales line of 46 and a purchase line of 24, it is not possible to reduce the transfer line below 46 pieces even though this might represent excess supply on the inbound side. - -![Transfer Order Bar Graph](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers8.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers8") - -## Changing Quantity in a Transfer Chain -In the following example, the starting point is a balanced situation with a transfer chain supplying a sales order of 27 on location RED with a corresponding purchase order on location BLUE, transferred via location PINK. Therefore, apart from sales and purchase, there are two transfer orders: BLUE-PINK and PINK-RED. - -![Changing Quantity in a Transfer Chain: Balanced Situation](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers9.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers9") - -Now the planner at PINK location chooses to reserve against the purchase. - -![Changing Quantity in a Transfer Chain: Reserving Against Purchase](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers10.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers10") - -This usually means that the planning system will ignore the purchase order and the transfer demand. As long as there is balance, there is no problem. But what happens when the customer at RED location partly regrets his order and changes it to 22? - -![Changing Quantity in a Transfer Chain: When Customer Changes an Order](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers11.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers11") - -When the planning system runs again, it should get rid of excess supply. However, the reservation will lock the purchase and the transfer to a quantity of 27. - -![Changing Quantity in a Transfer Chain: After Customer Adjustment](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers12.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers12") - -The PINK-RED transfer has been reduced to 22. The inbound part of the BLUE-PINK transfer is not reserved, but because the outbound part is reserved it is not possible to reduce the quantity below 27. - -## Lead Time Calculation -When calculating the due date of a transfer order different kinds of lead time will be taken into account. - -The lead times that are active when planning a transfer order are: - -* Outbound Warehouse Handling Time -* Shipping Time -* Inbound Warehouse Handling Time -* On the planning line, the following fields are used to provide information about the calculation. -* Transfer Shipment Date -* Starting Date -* Ending Date -* Due Date - -The shipment date of the transfer line will be shown in the Transfer Shipment Date field, and the receipt date of the transfer line will be shown in the Due Date field. - -The starting and ending dates will be used to describe the actual transportation period. - -The following illustration shows the interpretation of the starting date-time and ending date-time on planning lines related to transfer orders. - -![Starting and Ending Date-Times on Planning Lines for Transfer Orders](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers13.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers13") - -In this example, it means that: - -* Shipment date + Outbound handling = Starting Date -* Starting Date + Shipping time = Ending Date -* Ending Date + Inbound Handling = Receipt Date - -## Safety Lead Time -The Default Safety Lead Time field in the Manufacturing Setup window and the related Safety Lead Time field on the item card will not be taken into account in the calculation of a transfer order. However, the safety lead time will still influence the total plan like it will affect the replenishment order (purchase or production) in the beginning of the transfer chain when the items are put on the location from which they will be transferred. - -![Safety Lead Time Illustration: Production to Warehouse](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers14.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers14") - -On the production order line, the Ending Date + Safety Lead Time + Inbound Warehouse Handling Time = Due Date. - -On the purchase order line, the Planned Receipt Date + Safety Lead Time + Inbound Warehouse Handling Time = Expected Receipt Date. - -## Reschedule -When rescheduling an existing transfer line, the planning system must look up the outbound part and change the date-time on this. It is important to note that if lead time has been defined, there will be a gap between the shipment and the receipt. As mentioned, the lead time can consist of more elements, such as transportation time and warehouse handling time. On a time line, the planning system will move back in time while it balances the elements. - -![Illustration Example for Rescheduling an Existing Transfer Line](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers15.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers15") - -Therefore, when changing the due date on a transfer line, the lead time must be calculated in order to update the outbound side of the transfer. - -## Serial/Lot Numbers in Transfer Chains -If the demand carries serial/lot numbers, and the planning engine is run, it will give rise to some directly created transfer orders. For more information about this concept, see Item Attributes. If, however, serial/lot numbers are removed from the demand, the created transfer orders in the chain will still carry the serial/lot numbers and will therefore be ignored by planning (not deleted). - -## Order-to-Order Links -In this example, BLUE SKU is set up with the Order reordering policy, while PINK and RED use Lot-for-Lot. When a sales order of 27 is created on location RED, it will lead to a chain of transfers with the last joint at location BLUE being reserved with binding. In this example, the reservations are not hard reservations created by the planner at PINK location, but bindings created by the planning system. The important difference is that the planning system can change the latter. - -![Order-to-Order Links Illustration](media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers16.png "NAV_APP_supply_planning_7_transfers16") - -If demand is changed from 27 to 22, the system will lower the quantity down through the chain, with the binding reservation also being reduced. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) -[Design Details: Planning Assignment Table](design-details-planning-assignment-table.md) -[Design Details: Handling Reordering Policies](design-details-handling-reordering-policies.md) -[Design Details: Demand at Blank Location](design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md) -[Design Details: Central Concepts of the Planning System](design-details-central-concepts-of-the-planning-system.md) -[Design Details: Balancing Demand and Supply](design-details-balancing-demand-and-supply.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-variance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-variance.md deleted file mode 100644 index b058d7ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-variance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Variance - description: Variance is defined as the difference between the actual cost and the standard cost, as described in the following formula. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Variance -Variance is defined as the difference between the actual cost and the standard cost, as described in the following formula. - - actual cost – standard cost = variance - - If the actual cost changes, for example, because you post an item charge on a later date, then the variance is updated accordingly. - -> [!NOTE] -> Revaluation does not affect the variance calculation, because revaluation only changes the inventory value. - -## Example - The following example illustrates how variance is calculated for purchased items. It is based on the following scenario: - -1. The user purchases an item at LCY 90.00, but the standard cost is LCY 100.00. Accordingly, the purchase variance is LCY –10.00. -2. LCY 10.00 is credited to the purchase variance account. -3. The user posts an item charge of LCY 20.00. Accordingly, the actual cost is increased to LCY 110.00, and the value of the purchase variance becomes LCY 10.00. -4. LCY 20.00 is debited to the purchase variance account. Accordingly, the net purchase variance becomes LCY 10.00. -5. The user revalues the item from LCY 100.00 to LCY 70.00. This does not affect the variance calculation, only the inventory value. - - The following table shows the resulting value entries. - - ![Purchase variance calculation](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_purchase_variance.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_purchase_variance") - -## Determining the Standard Cost - The standard cost is used when calculating variance and the amount to capitalize. Since the standard cost can be changed over time because of manual update calculation, you need a point in time when the standard cost is fixed for variance calculation. This point is when the inventory increase is invoiced. For produced or assembled items, the point when standard cost is determined is when the cost is adjusted. - - The following table shows how different cost shares are calculated for produced and assembled items when you use the Calculate Standard Cost function. - -|Cost Share|Purchased Item|Produced/Assembled Item| -|----------------|--------------------|------------------------------| -|**Standard Cost**||Single-Level Material Cost + Single-Level Capacity Cost + Single-Level Subcontrd. Cost + Single-Level Cap. Ovhd. Cost + Single-Level Mfg. Ovhd. Cost| -|**Single-Level Material Cost**|Unit Cost|![Equation 1](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_1.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_1")| -|**Single-Level Capacity Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 2](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_2.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_2")| -|**Single-Level Subcontrd. Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 3](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_3.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_3")| -|**Single-Level Cap. Ovhd Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 4](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_4.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_4")| -|**Single-Level Mfg. Ovhd Cost**|Not applicable|(Single-Level Material Cost + Single-Level Capacity Cost + Single-Level Subcontrd. Cost) * Indirect Cost % / 100 + Overhead Rate| -|**Rolled-up Material Cost**|Unit Cost|![Equation 5](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_5.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_5")| -|**Rolled-up Capacity Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 6](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_6.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_6")| -|**Rolled-Up Subcontracted Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 7](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_7.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_7")| -|**Rolled-up Capacity Ovhd. Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 8](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_8.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_8")| -|**Rolled-up Mfg. Ovhd. Cost**|Not applicable|![Equation 9](media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_9.png "design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_9")| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3da287b5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Warehouse Management - description: This topic provides an overview of the design, concepts, and principles behind the Warehouse Management features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Warehouse Management -This documentation gives an overview of the concepts and principles that are used in the Warehouse Management features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. It explains the design behind central warehouse features and how warehousing integrates with other supply chain features. - -To differentiate the different complexity levels of the warehousing, this documentation is divided into two general groups, Basic and Advanced warehouse configurations, indicated by section titles. This simple differentiation covers different complexity levels as defined by product granules and location setup. For more information, see [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md). - -## In This Section -[Design Details: Warehouse Overview](design-details-warehouse-overview.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md) -[Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md) -[Design Details: Internal Warehouse Flows](design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md) -[Design Details: Availability in the Warehouse](design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md) -[Design Details: Outbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md) -[Design Details: Integration with Inventory](design-details-integration-with-inventory.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index de1dad70..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Warehouse Overview - description: To support the physical handling of items on the zone and bin level, all information must be traced for each transaction or movement in the warehouse. This is managed in the **Warehouse Entry** table. Each transaction is stored in a warehouse register. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Warehouse Overview -To support the physical handling of items on the zone and bin level, all information must be traced for each transaction or movement in the warehouse. This is managed in the **Warehouse Entry** table. Each transaction is stored in a warehouse register. - -Warehouse documents and a warehouse journal are used to register item movements in the warehouse. Every time that an item in the warehouse is moved, received, put away, picked, shipped, or adjusted, warehouse entries are registered to store the physical information about zone, bin, and quantity. For more information, see [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md). - -The **Bin Content** table is used to handle all the different dimensions of the contents of a bin per item, such as unit of measure, maximum quantity, and minimum quantity. The **Bin Content** table also contains flow fields to the warehouse entries, warehouse instructions, and warehouse journal lines, which ensures that the availability of an item per bin and a bin for an item can be calculated quickly. For more information, see [Design Details: Availability in the Warehouse](design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md). - -When item postings occur outside the warehouse module, a default adjustment bin per location is used to synchronize warehouse entries with inventory entries. During physical inventory of the warehouse, any differences between the calculated and counted quantities are recorded in the adjustment bin and then posted as correcting item ledger entries. For more information, see [Design Details: Integration with Inventory](design-details-integration-with-inventory.md). - -The following illustration outlines typical warehouse flows. - -![Overview of warehouse processes](media/design_details_warehouse_management_overview.png "design_details_warehouse_management_overview") - -## Basic or Advanced Warehousing -Warehouse functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can be implemented in different complexity levels, depending on a company’s processes and order volume. The main difference is that activities are performed order-by-order in basic warehousing when they are consolidated for multiple orders in advanced warehousing. - - To differentiate between the different complexity levels, this documentation refers to two general denominations, Basic and Advanced Warehousing. This simple differentiation covers several different complexity levels as defined by product granules and location setup, each supported by different UI documents. For more information, see [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> The most advanced level of warehousing is referred to as “WMS installations” in this documentation, since this level requires the most advanced granule, Warehouse Management Systems. - - The following different UI documents are used in basic and advanced warehousing. - -## Basic UI Documents - -- **Inventory Put-away** -- **Inventory Pick** -- **Inventory Movement** -- **Item Journal** -- **Item Reclassification Journal** -- (Various reports) - -## Advanced UI Documents - -- **Warehouse Receipt** -- **Put-away Worksheet** -- **Warehouse Put-away** -- **Pick Worksheet** -- **Warehouse Pick** -- **Movement Worksheet** -- **Warehouse Movement** -- **Internal Whse. Pick** -- **Internal Whse. Put-away** -- **Bin Creation Worksheet** -- **Bin Content Creation Worksheet** -- **Whse. Item Journal** -- **Whse. Item Reclass. Journal** -- (Various reports) - -For more information about each document, see the respective window topics. - -### Terminology -To align with the financial concepts of purchases and sales, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] warehouse documentation refers to the following terms for item flow in the warehouse. - -|Term|Description| -|----------|---------------------------------------| -|Inbound flow|Items moving into the warehouse location, such as purchases and inbound transfers.| -|Internal flow|Items moving inside the warehouse location, such as production components and output.| -|Outbound flow|Items moving out of the warehouse location, such as sales and outbound transfers.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index 347d3f18..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/design-details-warehouse-setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Design Details - Warehouse Setup - description: Warehouse functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] contains different levels of complexity, as defined by license permissions in the offered granules. The level of complexity in a warehouse solution is largely defined by the bin setup on location cards, which in turn is license-controlled so that access to bin setup fields is defined by the license. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/29/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Design Details: Warehouse Setup -Warehouse functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] contains different levels of complexity, as defined by license permissions in the offered granules. The level of complexity in a warehouse solution is largely defined by the bin setup on location cards, which in turn is license-controlled so that access to bin setup fields is defined by the license. In addition, the application objects in the license govern which UI document to use for the supported warehouse activities. - -The following warehouse-related granules exist: - -- Basic Inventory (4010) -- Bin (4170) -- Put Away (4180) -- Warehouse Receipt (4190) -- Pick (4200) -- Warehouse Shipment (4210) -- Warehouse Management Systems (4620) -- Internal Picks and Put-aways (4630) -- Automated Data Capture System (4640) -- Bin Setup (4660) - -For more information about each granule, see [[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Price Sheets](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=238341) (requires PartnerSource account). - -The following table shows which granules are required to define different warehouse complexity levels, which UI documents support each level, and which location codes reflect these levels in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] demonstration database. - -|Complexity Level|Description|UI Document|CRONUS Location|Minimum Granule Requirement| -|----------------------|---------------------------------------|-----------------|---------------------------------|---------------------------------| -|1|No dedicated warehouse activity.

Receive/ship posting from orders.|Order|BLUE|Basic Inventory| -|2|No dedicated warehouse activity.

Receive/ship posting from orders.

Bin code is required.|Order, with bin code|SILVER|Basic Inventory/Bin| -|3

**NOTE**: Even though the settings are called **Require Pick** and **Require Put-away**, you can still post receipts and shipments directly from the source business documents at locations where you select these check boxes.|Basic warehouse activity, order-by-order.

Receive/ship posting from inventory put-away/pick documents.

Bin code is required.|Inventory Put-away/Inventory Movement/Inventory Pick, with bin code|(SILVER + Require Put-away or Require Put-away)|Basic Inventory/Bin/Put Away/Pick| -|4|Advanced warehouse activity, for multiple orders.

Consolidated receive/ship posting based on warehouse put-away/pick registrations.|Warehouse Receipt/Warehouse Put-away/Warehouse Pick/Warehouse Shipment/Pick Worksheet|GREEN|Basic Inventory/Warehouse Receipt/Put Away/Pick/Warehouse Shipment| -|5|Advanced warehouse activity, for multiple orders.

Consolidated receive/ship posting based on warehouse put-away/pick registrations.

Bin code is required.|Warehouse Receipt/Warehouse Put-away/Warehouse Pick/Warehouse Shipment/Pick Worksheet/Put-away Worksheet, with bin code|(GREEN + Bin Mandatory)|Basic Inventory/Bin/Warehouse Receipt/Put Away/Pick/Warehouse Shipment| -|6

**Note**: This level is referred to as “WMS”, since it requires the most advanced granule, Warehouse Management Systems.|Advanced warehouse activity, for multiple orders.

Consolidated receive/ship posting based on warehouse put-away/pick registrations.

Bin code is required.

Zone/class code is optional.

Warehouse workers directed by workflow.

Bin replenishment planning.

Bin ranking.

Bin setup by capacity.

Slotting.

Hand-help device integration.|Warehouse Receipt/Warehouse Put-away/Warehouse Pick/Warehouse Shipment/Warehouse Movement/Pick Worksheet/Put-away Worksheet/Internal Whse. Pick/Internal Warehouse Put-away, with bin/class/zone code

Various worksheets for bin management

ADCS screens|WHITE|Basic Inventory/Bin/Put Away/Warehouse Receipt/Pick/Warehouse Shipment/Warehouse Management Systems/Internal Picks and Put-aways/Bin Setup/Automated Date Capture System/Bin Setup| - -For examples of how the UI documents are used per warehouse complexity level, see [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md). - -## Bin and Bin Content -A bin is a storage device designed to contain discrete parts. It is the smallest container unit in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Item quantities in bins are referred to as bin content. A lookup from the **Item** field or **Bin Code** field on any warehouse-related document line displays the calculated availability of the item in the bin. - -A bin content can be given a property of Fixed, Dedicated, or Default to define how the bin content can be used. Bins with none of these properties are referred to as floating bins. - -A fixed bin holds items that are assigned to the bin code in question. The Fixed bin property ensures that even if the bin content is momentarily emptied, the bin content does not disappear, and the bin is therefore selected again as soon as it has been replenished. - -A dedicated bin holds bin content that can only be picked for the dedicated resource, such as a machine center, that uses the bin in question. Other non-pick content, such as quantities outbound on a shipment posting, can still be consumed from a dedicated bin. Only bin content considered by the **Create Pick** algorithm is protected in a dedicated bin. - -The Default bin property is used by the system to suggest bins for warehouse activities. At WMS locations, the Default bin property is not used. At locations where bins are required, the property is used in inbound flows to specify where to place items. In outbound flows, the property is used to specify where to take items from. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the outbound items are placed in several bins, then items are first taken from the non-default bins, to empty that bin content, and then the remaining items are taken from the default bin. - -There can only be one default bin per item per location. - -## Bin Type -In WMS installations, you can restrict the warehouse activities that are allowed for a bin by assigning a bin type to it. The following bin types exist: - -|Bin Type|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|RECEIVE|Items posted as received but not yet put away.| -|SHIP|Items picked for warehouse shipment lines but not yet posted as shipped.| -|PUT AWAY|Typically, items to be stored in large units of measure but that you do not want to access for picking purposes. Because these bins are not used for picking, either for production orders or shipments, your use of a Put Away type bin might be limited, but this bin type could be useful if you have purchased a large quantity of items. Bins of this type should always have a low bin-ranking, so that when received items are put away, other higher-ranking PUTPICK bins fixed to the item are put away first. If you are using this type of bin, you must regularly perform bin replenishment so that the items stored in these bins are also available in PUTPICK or PICK type bins.| -|PICK|Items to be used for picking only. The replenishment of these bins can only be made by movement, not by put-away.| -|PUTPICK|Items in bins that are suggested for both the put-away and pick functions. Bins of this type probably have different bin rankings. You can set up your bulk storage bins as this type of bin with low bin rankings compared to your ordinary pick bins or forward picking area bins.| -|QC|This bin is used for inventory adjustments if you specify this bin on the location card in the **Adjustment Bin Code** field. You can also set up bins of this type for defective items and items being inspected. You can move items to this type of bin if you want to make them inaccessible to the usual item flow. **Note:** Unlike all other bin types, the **QC** bin type has none of the item handling check boxes selected by default. This indicates that any content you place in a QC bin is excluded from item flows.| - -For all bin types, except PICK, PUTPICK, and PUTAWAY, no other activity is allowed for the bin than what is defined by its bin type. For example, a bin of type **Receive** can only be used to receive items into or pick items from. - -> [!NOTE] -> Only movement can be made to bins of type RECEIVE and QC. Similarly, only movements can be made from bins of type SHIP and QC. - -## Bin Ranking -In advanced warehousing, you can automate and optimize how items are collected in put-away and pick worksheets by ranking bins so that items are suggested taken or placed according to rank criteria to use warehouse space optimally. - -Put-away processes are optimized according to bin ranking by suggesting higher-ranking bins before lower-ranking bins. Similarly, pick processes are optimized by first suggesting items from bin content with high bin ranking. Furthermore, bin replenishments are suggested from lower-ranking bins to higher-ranking bins. - -Bin ranking together with bin content information are the basic properties that allow users to slot items in the warehouse. - -## Bin Setup -In advanced warehousing, bins can be set up with capacity values, such as quantity, total cubage, and weight to control which and how items are stored in the bin. - -On each item card, you can assign a unit of measure (UOM) for the item, such as pieces, pallets, liters, grams, or boxes. You can also have a base UOM for an item and specify larger UOMs that are based on it. For example, you can define a pallet to equal 16 pieces, the latter being the base UOM. - -If you want to set a maximum quantity of a specific item to be stored in an individual bin and the item has more than one UOM, then you must set the maximum quantity for every UOM that exists on the item card. Accordingly, if an item has been set up to be handled in pieces and pallets, then the **Max. Qty.** field in the **Bin Content** window for that item must also be in pieces and pallets. Otherwise, the allowed quantity for that bin is not calculated correctly. - -Before you set capacity restrictions for bin contents on a bin, you must first make sure that the UOM and dimensions of the item have been set up on the item card. - -> [!NOTE] -> It is only possible to operate with multiple UOMs in WMS installations. I all other configurations, bin contents can only be in the base UOM. In all transactions with a UOM higher than the item’s base UOM, the quantity is converted to the base UOM. - -## Zone -In advanced warehousing, bins can be grouped in zones to manage how the workflow of warehouse activities is directed. - -A zone could be a receiving zone or a stocking zone, and each zone can consist of one or several bins. - -Most properties assigned to a zone will by default be assigned to the bin that is created from that zone. - -## Class -In advanced warehousing, you can assign warehouse class codes to items, bins, and zones to control where different item classes are stored, such as frozen goods. You can divide a zone into several warehouse classes. For example, items in the receiving zone can be stored as frozen, hazardous, or other class. - -When you work with warehouse classes and a default receiving/shipping bin, you must manually fill in the appropriate bins in the warehouse receipt and shipment lines. - -In inbound flows, the class code is only highlighted on inbound lines where the item class code does not match the default receiving bin. If the correct default bins are not assigned, then the quantity cannot be received. - -## Location -A location is a physical structure or place where inventory is received, stored, and shipped, potentially organized in bins. A location can be a warehouse, service car, showroom, plant, or an area in a plant. - -## First Expired First Out -If you select the **Pick According to FEFO** check box on the **Bin Policies** FastTab on the location card, then item-tracked items are picked according to their expiration date. The items with the earliest expiration dates are picked first. - -Warehouse activities in all pick and movement documents are sorted according to FEFO, unless the items in question already have serial/lot numbers assigned. If only a part of the quantity on the line already has serial/lot numbers assigned, then the remaining quantity to be picked is sorted according to FEFO. - -When picking by FEFO, the available items that expire first are gathered in a temporary item tracking list based on the expiration date. If two items have the same expiration date, then the item with the lowest lot or serial number is picked first. If the lot or serial numbers are the same, then the item that was registered first is selected first. Standard criteria for selecting items in pick bins, such as Bin Ranking and Break Bulk, are applied to this temporary FEFO item tracking list. - -## Put-away Template -The put-away template can be assigned to an item and to a location. The put-away template specifies a set of prioritized rules that must be respected when creating put-aways. For example, a put-away template may require that the item is placed in a bin with bin content that matches the UOM, and if a similar bin with enough capacity cannot be found, then the item must be placed in an empty bin. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Design Details: Availability in the Warehouse](design-details-availability-in-the-warehouse.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-depreciation-methods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-depreciation-methods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3ce2e676..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-depreciation-methods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,356 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics Nav - Depreciation Methods -description: Learn about the different methods to depreciate or write-down fixed assets. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: write down -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dynamics Nav - Depreciation Methods -There are eight methods of depreciation available: - -* Straight-Line -* Declining-Balance 1 -* Declining-Balance 2 -* DB1/SL -* DB2/SL -* User-defined -* Manual - - > [!NOTE] - > Use this method for assets that are not subject to depreciation, for example, land. You must enter depreciation in the fixed asset G/L journal. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job omits fixed assets that use this depreciation method. -* Half-Year Convention - - > [!NOTE] - > When you use this method, a fixed asset is depreciated by the same amount each year. - -## Straight-Line Depreciation -When you use the straight-line method, you must specify one of the following options in the fixed asset depreciation book: - -* The depreciation period (years or months) or a depreciation ending date -* A fixed yearly percentage -* A fixed yearly amount -* Depreciation period - -### Depreciation Period -If you enter the depreciation period (the number of depreciation years, the number of depreciation months, or the depreciation ending date), the following formula calculates the depreciation amount: - -*Depreciation Amount = ((Book value - Salvage Value) x Number of Depreciation Days) / Remaining Depreciation Days* - -Remaining depreciation days are calculated as the number of depreciation days minus the number of days between the depreciation starting date and the last fixed asset entry date. - -Book value may be reduced by posted appreciation, write-down, custom 1 or custom 2 amounts, depending on whether the **Include in Depr. Calculation** field is deactivated and whether the **Part of Book Value** field is activated in the **FA Posting Type Setup** window. This calculation ensures that the fixed asset is fully depreciated at the depreciation ending date. - -### Fixed Yearly Percentage -If you enter a fixed yearly percentage, the program uses the following formula to calculate the depreciation amount: - -Depreciation Amount = (Straight-Line % x Depreciable Basis x Number of Depr. Days) / (100 x 360) - -### Fixed Yearly Amount -If you enter a fixed yearly amount, the program uses this formula to calculate the depreciation amount: - -Depreciation Amount = (Fixed Depreciation Amount x Number of Depreciation Days) / 360 - -### Example - Straight-Line Depreciation -A fixed asset has an acquisition cost of LCY 100,000. The estimated life is eight years. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run biannually. - -For this example, the fixed asset ledger entry looks like this: - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 01/01/10 |Acquisition Cost |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 06/30/10 |Depreciation |180 |-6,250.00 |93,750.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |180 |-6,250.00 |87,500.00 | -| 06/30/11 |Depreciation |180 |-6,250.00 |81,250.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |180 |-6,250.00 |75,000.00 | -| 06/30/17 |Depreciation |180 |-6,250.00 |6,250.00 | -| 12/31/17 |Depreciation |180 |-6,250.00 |0 | - -* Depreciation starting date - -## Declining-Balance 1 Depreciation -This accelerated depreciation method allocates the largest portion of the cost of an asset to the early years of its useful lifetime. If you use this method, you must enter a fixed yearly percentage. - -The following formula calculates depreciation amounts: - -*Depreciation Amount = (Declining-Bal. % x Number of Depreciation Days x Depr. Basis) / (100 x 360)* - -The depreciable basis is calculated as the book value less posted depreciation since the starting date of the current fiscal year. - -The posted depreciation amount can contain entries with various posting types (write-down, custom1, and custom2) posted since the starting date of the current fiscal year. These posting types are included in the posted depreciation amount if there are check marks in the **Depreciation Type** and the **Part of Book Value** fields in the **FA Posting Type Setup** window. - -### Example - Declining-Balance 1 Depreciation -A fixed asset has an acquisition cost of LCY 100,000. The **Declining-Balance %** field is 25. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run biannually. - -The following table shows how the fixed asset ledger entries look. - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 01/01/10 |Acquisition Costs |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 06/30/10 |Depreciation |180 |-12,500.00 |87,500.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |180 |-12,500.00 |75,000.00 | -| 06/30/11 |Depreciation |180 |-9,375.00 |65,625.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |180 |-9,375.00 |56,250.00 | -| 06/30/12 |Depreciation |180 |-7,031.25 |49,218.75 | -| 12/31/12 |Depreciation |180 |-7,031.25 |42,187.50 | -| 06/30/13 |Depreciation |180 |-5,273.44 |36,914.06 | -| 12/31/13 |Depreciation |180 |-5,273.44 |31,640.62 | -| 06/30/14 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |27,685.54 | -| 12/31/14 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |23,730.46 | - -* Depreciation starting date - - Calculation Method: - - *1st Year: 25% of 100,000 = 25,000 = 12,500 + 12,500* - - *2nd Year: 25% of 75,000 = 18,750 = 9,375 + 9,375* - - *3rd Year: 25% of 56,250 = 14,062.50 = 7,031.25 + 7,031.25* - - The calculation continues until the book value equals the final rounding amount or the salvage value that you entered. - -## Declining-Balance 2 Depreciation -The Declining-Balance 1 and Declining-Balance 2 methods calculate the same total depreciation amount for each year. However, if you run the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job more than once a year, the Declining-Balance 1 method will result in equal depreciation amounts for each depreciation period. The Declining-Balance 2 method, on the other hand, will result in depreciation amounts that decline for each period. - -### Example - Declining-Balance 2 Depreciation -A fixed asset has an acquisition cost of LCY 100,000. The **Declining-Balance %** field is 25. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run biannually. The fixed asset ledger entries look like this: - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 01/01/10 |Acquisition Costs |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 06/30/10 |Depreciation |180 |-13,397.46 |86,602.54 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |180 |-11,602.54 |75,000.00 | -| 06/30/11 |Depreciation |180 |-10,048.09 |64,951.91 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |180 |-8,701.91 |56,250.00 | - -* Depreciation starting date - -Calculation Method: - -* BV = Book value -* ND = Number of depreciation days -* DBP = Declining-balance percent -* P = DBP/100 -* D = ND/360 - -The formula for calculating the depreciation amounts is: - -*DA = BV x (1 – (1 –P)D* - -The depreciation values are: - -| Date | Calculation | -| --- | --- | -| 06/30/10 |DA = 100,000.00 x (1 -(1 - 0.25)0.5) = 13,397.46 | -| 12/31/10 |DA = 86,602.54 x (1 - (1 - 0.25)0.5) = 11,602.54 | -| 06/30/11 |DA = 75,000.00 x (1 - (1 - 0.25)0.5) = 10,048.09 | -| 12/31/11 |DA = 64,951.91 x (1 - (1 - 0.25)0.5) = 8,701.91 | - -## DB1/SL Depreciation -DB1/SL is an abbreviated combination of Declining-Balance 1 and Straight-Line. The calculation continues until the book value equals the final rounding amount, or the salvage value that you entered. - -The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job calculates a straight-line amount and a declining balance amount, but only the greater of the two amounts is transferred to the journal. - -You can use various percentages to calculate declining-balance. - -If you use this method, you must enter the estimated useful lifetime and a declining balance percentage in the **FA Depreciation Books** window. - -### Example - DB1-SL Depreciation -A fixed asset has an acquisition cost of LCY 100,000. In the **FA Depreciation Books** window, the **Declining-Balance %** field contains 25 and the **No. of Depreciation Years** field contains 8. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run biannually. - -The fixed asset ledger entries look like this: - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 01/01/10 |Acquisition Costs |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 06/30/10 |Depreciation |180 |-12,500.00 |87,500.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |180 |-12,500.00 |75,000.00 | -| 06/30/11 |Depreciation |180 |-9,375.00 |65,625.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |180 |-9,375.00 |56,250.00 | -| 06/30/12 |Depreciation |180 |-7,031.25 |49,218.75 | -| 12/31/12 |Depreciation |180 |-7,031.25 |42,187.50 | -| 06/30/13 |Depreciation |180 |-5,273.44 |36,914.06 | -| 12/31/13 |Depreciation |180 |-5,273.44 |31,640.62 | -| 06/30/14 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |27,685.54 | -| 12/31/14 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |23,730.46 | -| 06/30/15 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |19,775.38 SL | -| 12/31/15 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |15,820.30 SL | -| 06/30/16 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |11,865.22 SL | -| 12/31/16 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.07 |7,910.15 SL | -| 06/30/17 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.08 |3,955.07 SL | -| 12/31/17 |Depreciation |180 |-3,955.07 |0.00 SL | - -* Depreciation starting date - -"SL" after the book value means that the straight-line method has been used. - -Calculation method: - -1st year: - -*Declining-balance amount: 25% of 100,000 = 25,000 = 12,500 + 12,500* - -*Straight-line amount = 100,000 / 8 = 12,500 = 6,250 + 6,250* - -The declining-balance amount is used because it is the greater amount. - -6th year (2015): - -*Declining-balance amount: 25% of 23,730.46 = 4,943.85= 2,471.92 + 2,471.92* - -*Straight-line amount = 23,730.46/3 = 7,910.15 = 3,995.07 + 3,995.08* - -The straight-line amount is used because it is the greater amount. - -## User-defined Depreciation -The program has a facility that allows you to set up user-defined depreciation methods. - -With a user-defined method, you use the **Depreciation Tables** window, where you must enter a depreciation percentage for each period (month, quarter, year, or accounting period). - -The formula for calculating the depreciation amounts is: - -Depreciation Amount = (Depreciation % x Number of Depreciation Days x Depr. Basis) / (100 x 360) - -### Depreciation Based on Number of Units -This user-defined method can also be used to depreciate based on number of units, for example, in the case of production machines with an established lifetime capacity. In the **Depreciation Tables** window, you can enter the number of units that can be produced in each period (month, quarter, year,or accounting period). - -### To set up user-defined depreciation methods -In the **Depreciation Table** window, you can set up user-defined depreciation methods. For example, you can set up depreciation based on number of units. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Tables**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Depreciation Table List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. **Depreciation Table Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -### Example - User-defined Depreciation -You use a depreciation method that allows you to depreciate assets in an accelerated manner for income tax purposes. - -You would use the following depreciation rates for a fixed asset with a three-year lifetime for tax purposes: - -* year 1: 25% -* year 2: 38% -* year 3: 37% - -The acquisition cost is LCY 100,000, and the depreciable lifetime is five years. Depreciation is calculated annually. - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 01/01/10 |Acquisition Cost |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |360 |-25,000.00 |75,000.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |360 |-38,000.00 |37,000.00 | -| 12/31/12 |Depreciation |360 |-37,000.00 |0 | -| 12/31/13 |Depreciation |None |None |0 | -| 12/31/14 |Depreciation |None |None |0 | - -* Depreciation starting date - -If you use a user-defined method, the **First User-Defined Depr. Date** and **Depreciation Starting Date** fields must be filled in in the **FA Depreciation Books** window. The **First User-Defined Depr. Date** field and the contents in the **Period Length** field in the **Depreciation Tables** window are used to determine the time intervals to be used for depreciation calculations. This ensures that the program will start using the specified percentage on the same day for all assets. The **Depreciation Starting Date** field is used to calculate the number of depreciation days. - -In the previous example, both the **First User-Defined Depr. Date** and **Depreciation Starting Date** fields contain 01/01/01. If, however, the **First User-Defined Depr. Date** field contained 01/01/10 and the **Depreciation Starting Date** field contained 04/01/11, the result would be: - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 01/01/10 |Acquisition Cost |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |270 |-18,750.00 |81,250.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |360 |-38,000.00 |42,250.00 | -| 12/31/12 |Depreciation |360 |-37,000.00 |6,250.00 | -| 12/31/13 |Depreciation |90 |-6,250.00 |0 | -| 12/31/14 |Depreciation |None |None |0 | - -* Depreciation starting date - -## Half-Year Convention Depreciation -The Half-Year Convention method will only be applied if you have placed a check mark in the **Use Half-Year Convention** field in the fixed **FA Depreciation Book** window. - -This depreciation method can be used in conjunction with the following depreciation methods in the program: - -* Straight-Line -* Declining-Balance 1 -* DB1/SL - -When you apply the Half-Year Convention, a fixed asset has six months of depreciation in the first fiscal year, regardless of the contents of the **Depreciation Starting Date** field. - -> [!NOTE] -> The estimated life of the fixed asset that is remaining after the first fiscal year will always contain a half-year using the Half-Year Convention Method. Thus, for the Half-Year Convention method to be applied correctly, the **Depreciation Ending Date** field in the **FA Depreciation Book** window must always contain a date which is exactly six months before the final date of the fiscal year in which the fixed asset will fully depreciate. - -### Example - Half-Year Convention Depreciation -A fixed asset has an acquisition cost of LCY 100,000. The **Depreciation Starting Date** is 03/01/10. The estimated life is five years, so the **Depreciation Ending Date** must be 06/30/15. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run annually. This example is based on a calendar fiscal year. - -The fixed asset ledger entries look like this: - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 03/01/10 |Acquisition Cost |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |270 |-10,000.00 |90,000.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |360 |-20,000.00 |70,000.00 | -| 12/31/12 |Depreciation |360 |-20,000.00 |50,000.00 | -| 12/31/13 |Depreciation |360 |-20,000.00 |30,000.00 | -| 12/31/14 |Depreciation |360 |-20,000.00 |10,000.00 | -| 12/31/15 |Depreciation |180 |-10,000.00 |0.00 | - -* Depreciation starting date - -## Example - DB1/SL Depreciation Using Half-Year Convention -A fixed asset has an acquisition cost of LCY 100,000. The **Depreciation Starting Date** is 11/01/10. The estimated life is five years, so the **Depreciation Ending Date** must be 06/30/15. In the **FA Depreciation Books** window, the **Declining-Balance %** field contains 40. The **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run annually. This example is based on a calendar fiscal year. - -The fixed asset ledger entries look like this: - -| Date | FA Posting Type | Days | Amount | Book Value | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| 11/01/10 |Acquisition Cost |* |100,000.00 |100,000.00 | -| 12/31/10 |Depreciation |60 |-20,000.00 |80,000.00 | -| 12/31/11 |Depreciation |360 |-32,000.00 |48,000.00 | -| 12/31/12 |Depreciation |360 |-19,200.00 |28,800.00 | -| 12/31/13 |Depreciation |360 |-11,520.00 |17,280.00 | -| 12/31/14 |Depreciation |360 |-11,520.00 |5,760.00 SL | -| 12/31/15 |Depreciation |180 |-5,760.00 |0.00 SL | - -* Depreciation starting date - -"SL" after the book value means that the straight-line method has been used. - -Calculation method: - -1st year: - -*Declining-balance amount = Full year amount = 40% of 100,000 = 40,000. Thus, for half a year 40,000 / 2 = 20,000* - -*Straight-line amount = Full year amount = 100,000 / 5 = 20,000. Thus, for half a year = 20,000 / 2 = 10,000* - -The declining-balance amount is used because it is the greater amount. - -5th year (2004): - -*Declining-balance amount = 40% of 17,280.00 = 6,912.00* - -*Straight-line amount = 28,800 / 1.5 = 11,520.00* - -The straight-line amount is used because it is the greater amount. - -## Duplicating Entries to More Depreciation Books -If you have three depreciation books, B1, B2 and B3, and you want to duplicate entries from B1 to B2 and B3, you can place a check mark in the **Part of Duplication List** field on the depreciation book cards for B2 and B3. This can be useful if depreciation book B1 is integrated with the general ledger and uses the fixed asset G/L journal, and depreciation books B2 and B3 are not integrated with the general ledger and use the fixed asset journal. - -When you enter an entry in B1 in the fixed asset G/L journal and place a check mark in the **Use Duplication List** field, the program will duplicate the entry in book B2 and B3 in the fixed asset journal when the entry is posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot duplicate in the same journal and journal batch as you are duplicating from. If you post entries in the fixed asset G/L journal, you can duplicate them in the fixed asset journal or in the fixed asset G/L journal using another batch. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot use the same number series in the fixed asset G/L journal and the fixed asset journal. When you post entries in the fixed asset G/L journal, you must leave the **Document No.** field empty. If you enter a number in the field, the the number is duplicated in the fixed asset journal. You'll have to manually change the document number before you can post the journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-acquire.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-acquire.md deleted file mode 100644 index 41c4cf9e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-acquire.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Acquire Fixed Assets -description: You can set up a fixed asset, assign a depreciation book, and record the fixed asset’s acquisition cost. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: purchase fixed asset -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Acquire Fixed Assets -For each fixed asset, you must set up a card containing information about the asset. You can set up buildings or production equipment as a main asset with a component list, and you can group them in various ways, such as by class, department, or location. A depreciation book must be set up and assigned to each fixed asset before you can acquire it. - -When a fixed asset is set up and a depreciation book assigned, you must acquire the fixed asset. To acquire a fixed asset, you record its acquisition cost in the relevant G/L account, bank account, or vendor by posting an acquisition transaction from the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window. You can use the **Assisted Fixed Asset Acquisition** window to create and post the required general journal lines automatically. - -The salvage value is the residual value of a fixed asset when it can no longer be used. You can post the salvage value at the same time as you post the acquisition cost. For more information, see [How to: Depreciate or Amortize Fixed Assets](fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md). - -Indexation is used to adjust values for general price-level changes. The **Index Fixed Assets** batch job can be used to calculate the acquisition costs at replacement costs. - -## To create a fixed asset and acquire it automatically -The following procedure describes how to create a fixed asset and then acquire it by using the **Assisted Fixed Asset Acquisition** window to create and post the required fixed asset G/L journal lines. You can also create and post the journal lines manually. For more information, see the "To post a fixed asset acquisition manually with the fixed asset G/L journal" section. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and then fill in the fields on the **General** FastTab as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. On the **Depreciation Book** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. This step assigns a depreciation book to the fixed asset. -4. If you need to assign more than one depreciation book to the fixed asset, choose the **Add More Depreciation Books** action. For more information, see the "To assign a depreciation book to a fixed asset" section in [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). - - When all fields required to acquire a fixed asset are filled in, the **You are ready to acquire the fixed asset. Acquire** notification appears at the top of the page. -5. Choose the **Acquire** action in the notification. -6. Follow the steps in the **Assisted Fixed Asset Acquisition** window to complete the automatic acquisition of the fixed asset. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also post acquisition cost as credits. In that case, remember that the value in the **Acquisition Cost Incl. VAT** field must be with a minus sign to indicate a credit. - -When you choose **Finish**, the **Book Value** field in the **Fixed Asset Card** window is filled, indicating that the fixed asset has been acquired at the specified acquisition cost. - -## To set up a component list for a main asset -You can group your fixed assets into main assets and their components. For example, you may have a production machine that consists of many parts that you want to group in this manner. - -Both the main asset and all its components must be set up as individual fixed asset cards. After you have set up a component list, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically fills in the **Main Assets/Component** and **Components of Main Asset** fields on the fixed asset cards. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that is the main asset, and then choose the **Main Asset Components** action. -3. In the **Main Asset Components** window, choose the **FA No**. field, and then select the fixed asset that you want to add as a component of the main asset. -4. Close the window. -5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each component asset that you want to add. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Asset Setup**, and then choose the related link. -7. Select the **Allow Posting to Main Assets** check box. - -## To post a fixed asset acquisition manually with the fixed asset G/L journal -The following procedure describes how to acquire a fixed asset manually by creating and posting lines in the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window. You can also acquire a fixed asset automatically by using the **Assisted Fixed Asset Acquisition** window. For more information, see step 5 in the "To create a fixed asset and acquire it automatically" section. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also post acquisition cost as credits. In that case, remember that the value in the **Amount** field must be with a minus sign to indicate a credit. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window, in the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Acquisition Cost**. -3. Fill in the remaining fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **Post** action. - -> [!TIP] -> If you fill in the **Insurance No.** field in the fixed asset G/L journal when you post an acquisition cost, then [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will also post the acquisition cost of the fixed asset to the insurance coverage ledger. For more information, see [How to: Insure Fixed Assets](fa-how-insure.md). - -## To cancel an acquisition cost posting for one fixed asset -If you make an error when posting an acquisition cost, you can remove the entry with the **Cancel FA Entries** batch job and then post the correct acquisition entry. The erroneous entries are transferred to the **FA Error Ledger Entries** window. - -For example, if you post an acquisition with the wrong date, you must correct it as soon as possible because the fixed asset posting date is used is many critical calculations. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You cannot use the **Reverse Transactions** function for fixed asset entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cancel FA Entries**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **OK** button to run the batch job. -4. When the incorrect entry or entries are canceled, proceed to post the correct acquisition cost. - -To cancel ledger entries for multiple fixed assets at a time, use the **Cancel FA Ledger Entries** batch job. - -## To post the salvage value together with the acquisition cost -You can post the salvage value together with the acquisition cost from a fixed asset G/L journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cancel FA Entries**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create the acquisition journal line. For more information, see the "To post a fixed asset acquisition manually with the fixed asset G/L journal" section. -3. In the **Salvage Value** field on the journal line, enter the salvage value amount as a credit (with a minus sign). -4. Choose the **Post** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Salvage Value** posting type is an option in the **Fixed Asset Journal** window only. It is not available in the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window because salvage value is never posted to the general ledger. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5e0533ed..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Depreciate or Amortize FA -description: You must define how you will write-down, depreciate, or amortize each of your fixed assets. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: write down -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Depreciate or Amortize Fixed Assets -Depreciation is used to allocate the cost of fixed assets, such as machinery and equipment, over their depreciable life. For each fixed asset, you must define how it will be depreciated. - - There are two ways to post depreciation: - -* Automatically, by running the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job. -* Manually, by using the fixed asset G/L journal. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can calculate daily depreciation, which allows you to calculate depreciation for any period. You can therefore analyze current operating results on, for example, a monthly, quarterly, or annual basis. The calculation uses a standard year of 360 days and a standard month of 30 days. For more information, see [Depreciation Methods](fa-depreciation-methods.md). - -If several departments use a fixed asset, periodic depreciation can be automatically allocated to these departments according to a user-defined allocation table. - -You can cancel incorrect depreciation entries by using the **Cancel FA Ledger Entries** batch job. Afterward, you can post the correct amount by running the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job again. The errors you correct are posted as fixed asset error ledger entries. - -Indexation is used to adjust values for general price-level changes. You can use the **Index Fixed Assets** batch job to recalculate the depreciation amounts. - -## To calculate depreciation automatically -Once a month, or whenever you choose, you can run the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job. The batch job ignores fixed assets that have been sold, are blocked or inactive, or use the manual depreciation method. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Calculate Depreciation**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - The batch job calculates the depreciation and creates lines in the fixed asset G/L journal. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. - - In the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window, in the **No. of Depreciation Days** field you can see how many days of depreciation have been calculated. -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To post depreciation manually from the fixed asset G/L journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Asset G/L Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create an initial journal line and fill in the fields as necessary. -3. In the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Depreciation**. -4. Choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action. A second journal line is created for the balancing account that is set up for depreciation posting. For more information, see the "To set up fixed asset posting groups" section in [How to: Set Up General Fixed Asset Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). -5. On the **Home** tab, choose **Post** to post the journal. - -If you have set up fixed asset allocation keys to allocate amounts to different departments or projects, the amounts are allocated during posting. For more information, see [How to: Set Up General Fixed Assets Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). - -## To calculate allocations in the fixed asset G/L journal -If a fixed asset is used by several departments, periodic depreciation can be automatically allocated to these departments according to a user-defined allocation table. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Asset G/L Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create an initial line and fill in the fields as necessary. -3. In the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Allocation**. -4. Choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action. A second journal line is created for the balancing account that is set up for allocation posting. -5. On the **Home** tab, choose **Post** to post the journal. - -## Use duplication lists to prepare to post to multiple depreciation books -When you fill in journal lines to post to a depreciation book, you can duplicate the lines in a separate journal so you can post to a different depreciation book. For more information, see the "To post entries to different depreciation books" section. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the depreciation book, and then select the **Part of Duplication List** check box. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you have selected the **Use Duplication List** field, do not use number series on the journal. The reason is that the number series for the fixed asset G/L journal does not the number series for the fixed asset journal. - -## To post entries to different depreciation books -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Asset G/L Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the journal that you want to post depreciation with, select the **Use Duplication List** check box. -3. Fill in the remaining fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **Post** action. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Journals**, and then choose the related link. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Fixed Asset Journal** window contains new lines for different depreciation books according to the duplication list. -6. Review or edit the lines, and then choose the **Post** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > Another way to duplicate an entry in a separate book is to enter a depreciation book code in the **Duplicate in Depreciation Book** field when you fill in a journal line. - -You can copy entries from one depreciation book to another by using the **Copy Depreciation Book** batch job. The batch job creates journal lines in the journal batch that you have specified in the **FA Journal Setup** window for the depreciation book that you want to copy to. For more information, see the following procedure. - -## To copy fixed asset ledger entries between depreciation books -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant depreciation book card, and then choose the **Copy Depreciation Book** action. -3. In the **Copy Depreciation Book** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The copied lines are created in either the fixed asset G/L journal or the fixed asset journal, depending on whether the depreciation book that you are copying has integration to the general ledger. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-dispose-retire.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-dispose-retire.md deleted file mode 100644 index e31a4665..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-dispose-retire.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dispose or Retire FA -description: You must post a disposal value when you scrap, sell, or retire a fixed asset. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: scrap -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Dispose of or Retire Fixed Assets -When you sell or otherwise dispose of a fixed asset, the disposal value must be posted to calculate and record the gain or loss. A disposal entry must be the last entry posted for a fixed asset. For partially disposed fixed assets, you can post more than one disposal entry. The total of all posted disposal amounts must be a credit amount. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you trade-in a fixed asset for another one, you must record both the sale of the old asset (disposal) and the purchase of the new one (acquisition). For more information, see [How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md). - -## To post a disposal from the fixed asset G/L journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create an initial journal line and fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. In the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Disposal**. -4. Choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action. A second journal line is created for the balancing account that is set up for disposal posting. - - > [!NOTE] - > Step 4 only works if you have set up the following: In the **FA Posting Group Card** window for the posting group of the fixed asset, the **Disposal Account** field contains the general ledger debit account and the **Disposal Bal. Account** field contains the general ledger account to which you want to post balancing entries for appreciation. For more information, see the "To set up fixed asset posting groups" section in [How to: Set Up General Fixed Asset Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). -5. Choose the **Post** action. - - If you sell or dispose of part of a fixed asset, you must split up the asset before you can record the disposal transaction. For more information, see [How to: Transfer, Split, or Combine Fixed Assets](fa-how-trans-split-combine.md). - -## To view disposal ledger entries -When you sell or dispose of a fixed asset, the disposal value is posted to the general ledger where you can view the result. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that you want to view entries for, and then choose the **Depreciation Books** action. -3. Select the depreciation book that you want to view entries for, and then choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -4. Select a line with **Disposal** in the **FA Posting Category** field, and then choose the **Navigate** action. -5. In the **Navigate** window, select the general ledger entry line, and then choose the **Show** action. - -The **General Ledger Entries** window opens where you can see the entries that the disposal posting resulted in. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-insure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-insure.md deleted file mode 100644 index 498ed7a8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-insure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,118 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Insure Fixed Assets -Description: You can assign a fixed asset to an insurance policy, which is represented by an insurance card. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: policy, coverage -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Insure Fixed Assets -An insurance policy for a fixed asset is represented by an insurance card. You can assign one fixed asset to one insurance policy or multiple fixed assets to one insurance policy. - -You assign a fixed asset to an insurance policy by posting to the insurance coverage ledger from the **Insurance Journal** window. - -In addition, you can assign a fixed asset to an insurance policy and create coverage ledger entries when you post its acquisition cost. You do this by posting an acquisition cost from the fixed asset journal with the **Insurance No.** field filled in. The **Automatic Insurance Posting** check box in the **Fixed Asset Setup** window must be selected. For more information, see the "To post a fixed asset acquisition manually with the fixed asset G/L journal" section in [How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md). - -If the **Automatic Insurance Posting** check box in the **Fixed Asset Setup** window is not selected, then posting acquisitions from the fixed asset journal will create lines in the **Insurance Journal** window, which you must then post manually. - -> [!WARNING] -> If you do not select the **Automatic Insurance Posting** check box in the **Fixed Asset Setup** window, then your insurance journal should be based on a journal template without a number series. This is because the inserted document numbers from the fixed asset journal line will otherwise conflict with the number series of the insurance journal. For more information about journal templates and batches, see [How to: Set Up General Fixed Assets Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). - -After you have assigned a fixed asset to an insurance policy, the **Insured** check box is selected on the fixed asset card. When you sell the fixed asset, the check box is automatically deselected. - -## To create or modify an insurance card -An insurance policy for a fixed asset must be represented by an insurance card. - -When you receive information about changes in the coverage amount, you must enter the new information in the **Insurance Card** window to ensure that you analyze insurance policy coverage correctly. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new card for an insurance policy. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Alternatively, select the insurance policy that you want to change, and then choose the **Edit** action. - -## To assign a fixed asset to an insurance policy by posting from the insurance journal -You assign a fixed asset to an insurance policy by posting to the insurance coverage ledger. - -The following procedure explains how to create an insurance journal line manually. If the **Automatic Insurance Posting** check box is selected in the **FA Setup** window, then insurance journal lines are automatically created when you post acquisition costs. In that case, all you have to do is to post the journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant journal, and fill in the journal lines as necessary. -3. To assign multiple fixed assets to one insurance policy, create journal lines with the same value in the **Insurance No.** field and different values in the **FA No.** field. -4. Choose the **Post** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > The entries from an insurance journal are only posted to the insurance coverage ledger. - -## To update the insurance value of a fixed asset -You can use the **Index Insurance** batch job to update the value of the fixed assets that are covered. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Index Insurance**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - - > [!NOTE] - > In the **Index Figure** field, you enter a decrease of 5%, for example, as 95, whereas you enter an increase of 2% as 102. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - The batch job calculates the new amount as a percentage of the total value insured, as stated in the **Insurance Statistics** window, and then creates a line in the insurance journal. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance Journals**, and then choose the related link. -5. Open the relevant insurance journal, review the created values, and then post them to the insurance coverage ledger. - -## To monitor insurance coverage -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides dedicated reports and statistics windows for use in analyzing insurance policies and whether your fixed assets are over- or under-insured. - -### Overview of Insurance Policies -To get an overview of your insurance policies, preview or print the **Insurance - List** report. The report shows all the policies and the most important fields from the insurance cards. - -### Insurance Coverage -To see which insurance policies cover each asset and by which amount, you can preview or print the **Insurance - Tot. Value Insured** report. - -### Over/Under Coverage -You can check if fixed assets are over- or under-insured in the following ways: - -* The **Insurance Statistics** window. A positive amount in the **Over/Under Insured** field means that the fixed asset is over-insured. A negative amount means that it is underinsured. -* The **Fixed Asset Statistics** window. Choose the **Total Value Insured** field to view the **Ins. Coverage Ledger Entries** window. -* The **Over/Under Coverage** report. -* The **Insurance Analysis** report. - -### Uninsured Fixed Assets -To check if you have forgotten to assign a fixed asset to an insurance policy, you can print or preview the **Insurance - Uninsured FAs** report. This report displays fixed assets for which amounts have not been posted to the insurance coverage ledger. - -## To view insurance coverage ledger entries -You can view the entries that you have made in the insurance coverage ledger. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant insurance policy, and then choose the **Coverage Ledger Entries** action. - -## To view the total insurance value of fixed assets -A dedicated matrix window shows the insurance values that are registered for each insurance policy for each fixed asset as a result of insurance-related amounts that you have posted. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant insurance policy, and then choose the **Total Value Insures per FA** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **Show Matrix** action. -5. To see the underlying insurance coverage ledger entries, choose a value in the matrix. - -## To correct insurance coverage entries -If a fixed asset has been attached to the wrong insurance policy, you can correct it by creating two reclassification entries from the insurance journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create one journal line for the fixed asset and the correct insurance policy where the value in the **Amount** field is positive. -3. Create another journal line for the fixed asset and the incorrect insurance policy where the value in the **Amount** field is negative. -4. Choose the **Post** action. - -The fixed asset will be detached from the incorrect insurance policy, on the second line, and attached to the correct insurance policy, on the first line. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-maintain.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-maintain.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2e0901d2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-maintain.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Maintain Fixed Assets -description: You keep a maintenance record of any repairs and service on a fixed asset. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: repair, service -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Maintain Fixed Assets -Maintenance expenses are routine periodic costs undertaken to preserve the value of fixed assets. Unlike capital improvements, they do not increase values. - -You can record and maintain an up-to-date file on maintenance and service of your fixed assets to have complete maintenance records on a fixed asset easily accessible. Each time a fixed asset is sent to service, you record all relevant information such as date of service, vendor number and service agent's phone number. Maintenance registration is recorded for each fixed asset from the relevant fixed asset card. - -Indexation is used to adjust values for general price-level changes. The **Index Fixed Assets** batch job can be used to recalculate the maintenance costs. - -## To record maintenance work on a fixed asset -Every time maintenance has been performed, such as a service visit, you can record it for the relevant fixed asset in the **Maintenance Registrations** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that you want to record maintenance for, and then choose the **Maintenance Registration** action. -3. In the **Maintenance Registration** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To post maintenance costs from a fixed asset G/L journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Book List**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the depreciation book that is assigned to the fixed asset, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Depreciation Book Card** window, make sure the **Maintenance** check box is not selected. This ensures that maintenance costs are not posted to the general ledger. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -5. Create an initial journal line and fill in the fields as necessary. -6. In the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Maintenance**. -7. Choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action. A second journal line is created for the balancing account that is set up for maintenance posting. - - > [!NOTE] - > Step 7 only works if you have set up the following: In the **FA Posting Group Card** window for the posting group of the fixed asset, the **Maintenance Account** field contains the general ledger debit account and the **Maintenance Bal. Account** field contains the general ledger account to which you want to post balancing entries for appreciation. For more information, see the "To set up fixed asset posting groups" section in [How to: Set Up General Fixed Asset Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). -8. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To follow up on fixed assets service visits -You can print the **Maintenance - Next Service** report to see which assets you have scheduled a service visit for. You can also use this report when you are updating the **Next Service Date** field on fixed asset cards. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Maintenance Next Service**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields. -3. Choose the **Print** or **Preview** button. - -## To monitor maintenance costs -You can view the maintenance costs when you look at the statistics of a fixed asset. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset you want to view maintenance costs for, and then choose the **Depreciation Books** action. -3. In the **FA Depreciation Books** window, select the relevant fixed asset depreciation book, and then choose the **Statistics** action. -4. In the **Fixed Asset Statistics** window, choose the **Maintenance** field. - -The **Maintenance Ledger Entries** window opens showing the entries that make up the amount in the **Maintenance** field. - -## To view or print maintenance costs for multiple fixed assets -In the **Maintenance - Analysis** report, you can select to see maintenance based on one, two, or three maintenance codes for a specified date or period. You can see the total of all selected assets or a total for each asset. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Maintenance Analysis**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **Print** or **Preview** button. - -## To view maintenance ledger entries -You can also study maintenance costs by viewing the maintenance ledger entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that you want to view ledger entries for, and then choose the **Depreciation Books** action. -3. In the **FA Depreciation Books** window, select the relevant fixed asset depreciation book, and then choose the **Maintenance Ledger Entries** action. - -## To view or print maintenance ledger entries for multiple fixed assets -In the **Maintenance - Details** report, you can view or print maintenance ledger entries for one or many fixed assets. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Maintenance Details**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **Print** or **Preview** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-manage-budgets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-manage-budgets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4f06a9e2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-manage-budgets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage FA Budgets -description: You set up information about future investments, disposals, and depreciation of fixed assets to help prepare budgets and forecasts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: forecast -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Budgets for Fixed Assets -You can set up budgeted fixed assets. For example, this lets you include anticipated acquisitions and sales in reports. - -To prepare your budgeted income statement, budgeted balance sheet, and cash budget, you need information about future investments, disposals and depreciation of fixed assets. You can get this information from the **Fixed Asset - Projected Value** report. Before you print this report, you must prepare the budget. - -## To budget the acquisition cost of a fixed asset -To prepare a budget, you have to set up fixed asset cards for fixed assets that you intend to buy in the future. The budget fixed assets are set up as ordinary fixed assets, but it must be set up to not post to the general ledger. - -When you post the acquisition cost, you enter the number of the budgeted fixed asset in the **Budgeted FA No.** field. This will post an acquisition cost with an opposite sign for the budgeted asset. This means that the total acquisition cost on the budgeted asset is the difference between the budgeted and the actual acquisition cost. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new fixed asset card for the budgeted fixed asset. -3. Select the **Budgeted Asset** check box to prevent posting to the general ledger. -4. Fill in the remaining fields, assign a depreciation book, and then post the first acquisition cost with the budgeted fixed asset entered in the **Budgeted FA No.** field on the journal line. For more information, see [How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md). - -## To budget the disposal of a fixed asset -If you plan to sell assets within the budget period, you can enter information about sales price and sales date. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset to be disposed of, and then choose the **Depreciation Books** action. -3. In the **FA Depreciation Books** window, fill in the **Projected Disposal Date** and **Projected Proceeds on Disposal** fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To view projected disposal values -To see the projected disposal values and have the gain and loss calculated, you can use the **FA Projected Value** report. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Projected Value**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **Print** or **Preview** button. - -## To budget depreciation -You can use the **Fixed Asset - Projected Value** report to calculate future depreciation. The report shows the book value and accumulated depreciation at the start of the selected period, changes during the period, and the book value and accumulated depreciation at the end of the selected period. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Projected Value**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. To see total values for all assets, clear the **Print per Fixed Asset** check box. -4. Leave the **Fixed Asset** FastTab blank to have all assets included. In the **Budgeted Asset** field, enter **No** to exclude budgeted assets or **Yes** to see budgeted assets only. -5. Choose the **Print** or **Preview** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-revalue.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-revalue.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0676713..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-revalue.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Revalue Fixed Assets -description: Learn how to adjust the value of fixed assets, recording new amounts as a write-down or appreciation, and post additional acquisition costs. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Revalue Fixed Assets -Revaluation of fixed assets can consist of appreciations, write-downs, or general value adjustments. - -When the value of a fixed asset has increased, you post a journal line with a higher amount, an appreciation, to the depreciation book. The new amount is recorded as an appreciation according to the fixed asset posting setup. - -When the value of a fixed asset has decreased, you post a journal line with a lower amount, a write-down, to the depreciation book. The new amount is recorded as a write-down according to the fixed asset posting setup. - -Indexation is used to adjust multiple fixed asset values, for example per general price changes. The **Index Fixed Assets** batch job can be used to change various amounts, such as write-down and appreciation amounts. - -## To post an appreciation from the fixed asset G/L journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create an initial journal line and fill in the fields as necessary. -3. In the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Revaluation**. -4. Choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action. A second journal line is created for the balancing account that is set up for appreciation posting. - - > [!NOTE] - > Step 4 only works if you have set up the following: In the **FA Posting Group Card** window for the posting group of the fixed asset, the **Appreciation Account** field contains the general ledger debit account and the **Appreciation Bal. Account** field contains the general ledger account to which you want to post balancing entries for appreciation. For more information, see the "To set up fixed asset posting groups" section in [How to: Set Up General Fixed Asset Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To post a write-down from the fixed asset G/L journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create an initial journal line, and fill in the fields as necessary. -3. In the **FA Posting Type** field, select **Write-Down**. -4. Choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action. A second journal line is created for the balancing account that is set up for write-down posting. - - > [!NOTE] - > Step 4 only works if you have set up the following: In the **FA Posting Group Card** window for the posting group of the fixed asset, the **Write-Down Account** field contains the general ledger credit account and the **Write-Down Expense Account** field contains the general ledger debit account to which you want to post balancing entries for write-downs. For more information, see the "To set up fixed asset posting groups" section in [How to: Set Up General Fixed Asset Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To perform general revaluation of fixed assets -Indexation is used to adjust multiple fixed asset values, for example per general price changes. The **Index Fixed Assets** batch job can be used to change various amounts, such as write-down and appreciation amounts. The **Allow Indexation** check box in the **Depreciation Book** window must be selected. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Index Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - Revaluation lines are created per your settings in step 2. The lines are created in either the fixed asset journal or the fixed asset G/L journal, depending on your template and batch setup in the **FA Journal Setup** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up General Fixed Asset Information](fa-how-setup-general.md). -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -5. Select the journal with the fixed assets that you want to revalue, and then choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -6. Check the created entries, and then choose the **Post** action to post the journal. - - > [!TIP] - > If the index figures are for simulation purposes only, you can create a special depreciation book to store them in. Then these entries will not affect any of the other depreciation books. - - ## To post additional acquisition costs - You post additional acquisition cost for a fixed asset in the same way as you post the original acquisition cost: from a purchase invoice or from a fixed asset journal. For more information, see [How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md). - -If depreciation has already been calculated for the fixed asset, select the **Depr. Acquisition Cost** check box to have the additional acquisition cost less the salvage value depreciated in proportion to the amount by which the previously acquired fixed asset has already been depreciated. This ensures that the depreciation period is not changed. - -The depreciation percentage is calculated as: - -*P = (total depreciation x 100) / depreciable basis* - -*Depreciation amount = (P/100) x (extra acquisition cost - salvage value)* - -Remember to select the **Depr. until FA Posting Date** check box on the invoice, the fixed asset G/L journal, or the fixed asset journal lines to ensure that depreciation is calculated from the last fixed asset posting date to the posting date of the additional acquisition cost. - -### Example - Posting Additional Acquisition Costs -A machine is purchased on August 1, 2000. The acquisition cost is 4,800. The depreciation method is straight-line over four years. - -On August 31, 2000, the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run. Depreciation is calculated as: - -*book value x number of depreciation days / total number of depreciation days = 4800 x 30 / 1440 = 100* - -On September 15, 2000, an invoice is posted for painting the machine. The invoice amount is 480. - -If you selected the **Depr. until FA Posting Date** check box on the invoice before posting, the following calculation is made: - -15 days of depreciation (from 09/01/00 to 09/15/00) is calculated as: - -*book value x number of depreciation days / remaining number of depreciation days = (4800 - 100) x 15 / 1410 = 50* - -If you selected the **Depr. Acquisition Cost** check box on the invoice before posting, the following calculation is made: - -*The additional acquisition cost is depreciated by ((150 x 100) / 4800) / 100 x 480 = 15* - -The depreciable basis is now *5280 = (4800 + 480)*, and the accumulated depreciation is *165 = (100 + 50 + 15)*, corresponding to 45 days of depreciation of the total acquisition cost. This means that the asset will be totally depreciated within the estimated lifetime of four years. - -When the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run on 09/30/00, the following calculation is made: - -*Remaining depreciable life is 3 years, 10 months and 15 days = 1395 days* - -*Book value is (5280 - 165) = 5115* - -*Depreciation amount for September 2000: 5115 x 15 / 1395 = 55.00* - -*Total of depreciation = 165 + 55 = 220* - -If you did not select the **Depr. until FA Posting Date** check box, the asset would lose 15 days of depreciation because the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job run on 09/30/00 would calculate depreciation from 09/15/00 to 09/30/00. This means that when the **Calculate Depreciation** batch job is run on 09/30/00, the calculation is as follows: - -*Remaining life time is 3 years, 10 months and 15 days = 1395 days* - -*Book value is (4800 + 480 - 100 - 15) = 5165* - -*Depreciation amount for September 2000: 5165 x 15 / 1395 = 55.54* - -*Total of depreciation = 100 + 15 + 55.54 = 170.54* - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-depreciation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-depreciation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 72e03c0b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-depreciation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up FA Depreciation -description: You specify in a depreciation book how you want fixed assets to be depreciated or written-down. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: write down -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation - You can use various methods of depreciation for preparing financial statements and income tax returns. Many large corporations use straight-line depreciation in their financial statements because this generally permits reporting higher earnings. For income tax purposes, however, many businesses use an accelerated depreciation method. For more information, see [Depreciation Methods](fa-depreciation-methods.md). - - When you have created the relevant depreciation books, you must assign one or more depreciation books to each fixed asset. A depreciation book that is assigned to a fixed asset is referred to as a fixed asset depreciation book. Accordingly, the window for assigned depreciation books is called **FA Depreciation Books**. - -## To create a depreciation book -In a fixed asset depreciation book, you specify how fixed assets are depreciated. To accommodate various methods of depreciation, you can set up multiple depreciation books. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Depreciation Books List** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Depreciation Book Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - > [!NOTE] - > You can record fixed asset transactions in the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window or in the **Fixed Asset Journal** window, depending on whether the transactions are for financial reporting or for internal management. Follow the next step to define which type of journal is used for the different fixed asset activities by default. -4. On the **Integration** FastTab, select the check box for each fixed asset activity whose transactions you want to post using the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window. -5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each depreciation method or posting method that you want to assign to fixed assets as a depreciation book. - -## To assign a depreciation book to a fixed asset -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that you want to set up a fixed asset depreciation book for. -3. On the **Depreciation Book** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. If you need to assign more than one depreciation book to the fixed asset, choose the **Add More Depreciation Books** action. -5. Alternatively, choose the **Depreciation Books** action to specify one or more fixed asset depreciation books. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you use the manual depreciation method, you must enter depreciation manually in the fixed asset G/L journal. The **Calculate Depreciation** function omits fixed assets that use the manual depreciation method. You can use this method for assets that are not subject to depreciation, such as land. - -## To assign a depreciation book to multiple fixed assets with a batch job -If you want to assign a depreciation book to several fixed assets, you can use the **Create FA Depreciation Books** batch job to create fixed asset depreciation books. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that you want to set up a assign a depreciation book to, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Depreciation Book Card** window, choose the **Create FA Depreciation Books** action. -4. In the **Create FA Depreciation Books** window, fill in the **Depreciation Book** field. -5. Choose the **Copy from FA No.** field, and then select the fixed asset number that you want to use as the basis for creating new fixed asset depreciation books. - - If you fill in this field, the depreciation fields in the new fixed asset depreciation books will contain the same information as the corresponding fields in the fixed asset depreciation book that you copy from. Leave the field blank if you want to create new fixed asset depreciation books with empty depreciation fields. -6. On the **Fixed Asset** FastTab, you can set a filter to select the assets that you want to create the fixed asset depreciation books for. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To set up depreciation posting types -For each depreciation book, you must set up how you want [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to handle various posting types. For example, whether posting should be debit or credit and whether the posting type should be included in the depreciable basis. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the depreciation book that you want to set up, and them choose the **FA Posting Type Setup** action. -3. In the **FA Posting Type Setup** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot insert or delete lines in the **FA Posting Type Setup** window. You can only modify the existing lines. - - We recommend that you do not change the setup for depreciation books for entries that have already been posted. Changes will not affect the entries that are already posted, which would make depreciation book statistics misleading. - -## To set up default templates and batches for fixed asset depreciation -For each depreciation book, you define a default setup of templates and batches. You use these defaults to duplicate lines from one journal to another, create journal lines using the **Calculate Depreciation** or **Index Fixed Assets** batch jobs, duplicate acquisition costs in the insurance journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the depreciation book that you want to define default journals for, and then choose the **FA Journal Setup** action. -3. If you want to have a default setup for each user, choose the **User ID** field to select from the **Users** window. -4. In the other fields, select the journal template or journal batch that must be used by default. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-general.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-general.md deleted file mode 100644 index 78acbe5c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-general.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up General Ledger FA -description: Before you work with fixed assets, you must set up default G/L accounts, posting groups, allocation keys, journal templates and batches, and class codes. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up General Fixed Assets Information -Before you can manage fixed assets, you must set up default G/L accounts, allocation keys, journal templates and batches for fixed asset posting and reclassification, and you can classify fixed assets in classes, such as Tangible and Intangible. - -## To set up general default values for fixed assets -You define the general behavior or the fixed asset functionality and set up document number series in the in the **Fixed Assets Setup** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set up fixed asset posting groups -You use posting groups to define groups of fixed assets. Entries for these posting groups are posted to the same general ledger accounts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **FA Posting Group Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - > [!NOTE] - > To make sure that balancing accounts for different fixed assets postings are automatically inserted when you choose the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action on journal lines, follow the next step, based on appreciation posting. -4. On the **Balancing Account** FastTab, in the **Appreciation Bal. Account** field, select the general ledger account to which you want to post balancing entries for appreciation. - -For more information about using the **Insert FA Bal. Account** action on fixed asset G/L journal lines, see, for example, [How to: Revalue Fixed Assets](fa-how-revalue.md). - -## To set up fixed asset allocation keys -Transactions can be allocated to various departments or projects, according to user-defined allocation keys. For example, you could set up an allocation key to allocate depreciation costs on cars with 35 percent to the administration department and 65 percent to the sales department. For more information, see [How to: Allocate Costs and Income](year-allocate-costs-income.md). - -Allocation keys apply to fixed asset classes, not to individual assets. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **FA Posting Groups** window, choose the **Allocations** action, and then choose a posting type. -3. In the **FA Allocations** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each posting type that you want to define allocation keys for. - -## To set up fixed asset journal templates -A template is a predefined layout for a journal. The template contains information about trace codes, reports, and number series. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically creates a fixed asset journal template the first time that you open the **Fixed Asset Journal** window, but you can set up additional journal templates. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up fixed asset journal batches -You can set up multiple journal batches, which are individual journals for each journal template. For example, employees can have their own journal batch that uses the employee’s initials as the journal batch name. For more information, see [Work with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant journal template, and then choose the **Batches** action. -3. In the **FA Journal Batches** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up fixed asset reclassification journal templates -You use dedicated reclassification journals when you need to transfer, split, or combine fixed assets. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically creates a fixed asset reclassification journal template the first time that you open the **FA Reclass. Journal** window, but you can set up additional reclassification journal templates. For more information, see [Work with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Reclass. Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up fixed asset reclassification journal batches -You can set up multiple journal batches, which are individual journals for each reclassification journal template. For example, employees can have their own reclassification journal batch that uses the employee’s initials as the reclassification journal batch name. For more information, see [Work with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Reclass. Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant journal template, and then choose the **Batches** action. -3. In the **FA Reclass. Journal Batches** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up fixed asset class codes -Fixed asset class codes can be used to group fixed assets, for example, in tangible and intangible assets. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Classes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter codes and names for the classes that you want to create. - -## To set up fixed asset subclass codes -You use fixed asset subclass codes to group your fixed assets into categories, such as buildings, vehicles, furniture, or machinery. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Subclasses**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter codes and names for the classes that you want to create. - -## To set up fixed asset location codes -You use fixed asset location codes to register the location of the fixed asset, such as sales department, reception, administration, production, or warehouse. This information is useful for insurance and inventory purposes. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter codes and names for the fixed asset locations that you want to create. - -## To register opening entries -If you are using the fixed assets in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] for the first time, you must set up the general ledger application area before you set up fixed assets. How you do this depends on whether fixed assets is integrated with general ledger. - - The following procedure is used if fixed asset transactions are to be posted to the general ledger. - -1. Make sure that you have completed the basic setup procedures for fixed assets. -2. Create a fixed asset card for each existing asset. -3. Set up fixed asset depreciation books. -4. Enable general ledger integration by following the next steps. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Depreciation Books**, and then choose the related link. -6. Select the relevant depreciation book. On the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit** to open the **Depreciation Book Card** window. -7. On the **Integration** FastTab, make sure all fields are blank by clearing all check marks. If you have more than one depreciation book, turn on general ledger integration for each one. -8. In the fixd asset journal, enter the following lines for each asset: - * A line with the acquisition cost. - * A line with the accumulated depreciation to the end of the previous fiscal year. - * A line with the accumulated depreciation from the start of the current fiscal year to the date that [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is set to start calculating the depreciation. - -If you have other opening balances you can also enter them now, such as write-down and appreciation. - -If the fixed assets are not integrated with the general ledger, skip steps 4 through 7. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-insurance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-insurance.md deleted file mode 100644 index cb507e2a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-insurance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up FA Insurance -description: You set up an insurance card and general insurance policy information to manage fixed asset insurance coverage. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: policy, coverage -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Insurance -To manage fixed asset insurance coverage, you must first set up some general insurance information and an insurance card per policy. - -## To set up general insurance information -To use the insurance features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must set up some general insurance information. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Setups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set up insurance types -You can group your insurance policies into categories, such as insurance against theft or fire insurance. The insurance types are used on the insurance card. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance Types**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up insurance cards -You may accumulate information about each insurance policy on the insurance card. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Insurance** window, choose the **New** action to create a new insurance card. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up insurance journal templates -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically creates an insurance journal template the first time that you open the **Insurance Journal** window, but you can set up additional journal templates. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up insurance journal batches -You can set up batches in an insurance journal template. The values in the journal batch are used as default values if the fields are not filled in on the journal lines. For more information, see [Work with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insurance Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an insurance journal template, and then choose the **Batches** action. -3. In the **Insurance Journal Batches** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -> [!NOTE] -> Numbers have a special function in journal names. If a journal template name or journal batch name contains a number, the number automatically advances by one every time that the journal is posted. For example, if HH1 is entered in the **Name** field, the journal name will change to HH2 after the journal named HH1 has been posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-maintenance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-maintenance.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8aff69e2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-setup-maintenance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up FA Maintenance -description: To manage fixed asset repairs and service, you specify general maintenance information, codes for the type of work, and a posting account for costs. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: repair, service -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Maintenance -To manage fixed asset maintenance, you must first set up some general maintenance information, a posting account for maintenance costs, and maintenance codes for types of work, such as Routine Service or Repair. - -## To set up general maintenance information -If you set up the fields for maintenance, you can post maintenance expenses from the fixed asset journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Fixed Assets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the fixed asset that you to define insurance coverage for, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Maintenance** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set up maintenance codes -When you post maintenance costs from a general journal, you fill in the **Maintenance Code** field to record what kind of maintenance has been performed, such as routine service or repair. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Maintenance**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Maintenance** window, set up codes for different types of maintenance work. - -## To set up maintenance expense accounts -To post maintenance costs, you must first enter an account number in the **FA Posting Groups** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the **Maintenance Expense Account** field for each posting group. - -> [!NOTE] -> To define that maintenance costs are allocated to departments or projects, set up an allocation keys. For more information, see [How to: Set Up General Fixed Assets Features](fa-how-setup-general.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-trans-split-combine.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-trans-split-combine.md deleted file mode 100644 index 06381971..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-how-trans-split-combine.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Reclassify Fixed Assets -description: You reclassify a fixed asset to transfer it to a different department, split it up, or combine it with other fixed assets. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Transfer, Split, or Combine Fixed Assets -You use the fixed asset reclassification journal to transfer, split up, and combine fixed assets. You view or print the results of fixed asset reclassification with the **Fixed Asset-Book Value 02** report. - -## To transfer a fixed asset to a different department -You may need to transfer a fixed asset to a different department when, for example, you place an asset in the production department while it is under construction and then move it to the administration department when it is finished. - -1. Set up a new fixed asset. Enter the new department in the **Department Code** field. -2. Assign a fixed asset depreciation book to the new fixed asset. For more information, see [How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md). -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Reclass. Journals**, and then choose the related link. -4. Create a reclassification journal where the **FA No.** field contains the original fixed asset, and the **New FA No.** field contains the new fixed asset to be moved. -5. Choose the **Reclassify** action. - - Two lines are now created in the fixed asset G/L journal using the template and batch that you have specified in the **FA Journal Setup** window for the specified depreciation book. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -7. In the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window, choose the **Post** action to post the reclassification that you performed in steps 4 and 5. - -If you have posted an acquisition cost for one asset, you can use the fixed asset reclassification journal to split the acquisition cost among several assets. - -## To split a fixed asset into three fixed assets -You can split one fixed asset into multiple fixed assets, for example when you need to distribute a fixed asset onto three different departments. In that case, you can move, for example, 25 percent of the acquisition cost and depreciation for the original fixed asset to the second fixed asset and 45 percent to the third asset. The remaining 30 percent will remain on the original fixed asset. - -1. Set up two new fixed assets. Enter the new department in the **Department Code** field. -2. Assign fixed asset depreciation books to the new fixed assets. For more information, see [How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md). -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Reclass. Journals**, and then choose the related link. -4. Create two reclassification journal lines, one for each new fixed asset. -5. On the first line, enter the second fixed asset in the **New FA No.** field and 25 in the **Reclassify Acq. Cost %** field. -6. On the second line, enter the third fixed asset in the **New FA No.** field and 40 in the **Reclassify Acq. Cost %** field. -7. On both lines, select the **Reclassify Acquisition Cost** and **Reclassify Depreciation** check boxes. -8. Choose the **Reclassify** action. - - Two lines are now created in the fixed asset G/L journal using the template and batch that you have specified in the **FA Journal Setup** window for the specified depreciation book. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). -9. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -10. In the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window, choose the **Post** action to post the reclassification that you performed in steps 4 through 8. - -## To combine two fixed assets into one -You can combine multiple fixed assets into one fixed asset, for example when you move distributed fixed assets into one department. If you have posted acquisition costs and depreciation for the fixed asset to be moved, those values will be combined in the single fixed asset. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Reclass. Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a reclassification journal where the **FA No.** field contains the fixed asset to be moved/combined, and the **New FA No.** field contains the fixed asset that it will be combined with. -3. Leave the **Reclassify Acq. Cost %** field empty to move/combine the entire acquisition cost. -4. Select the **Reclassify Acquisition Cost** and **Reclassify Depreciation** check boxes. -5. On the **Actions** tab, choose **Reclassify**. - - Two lines are now created in the fixed asset G/L journal using the template and batch that you have specified in the **FA Journal Setup** window for the specified depreciation book. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -7. In the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window, choose the **Post** action to post the reclassification that you performed in steps 2 through 5. - -## To view changed depreciation book values due to fixed asset reclassification -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **FA Book Value 02**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **Print** or **Preview** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-manage.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-manage.md deleted file mode 100644 index dcaf5407..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-manage.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage Fixed Assets -description: Learn about the fixed assets functionality in Dynamics NAV and get an overview of how to work with fixed assets. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: machinery, buildings -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Manage Fixed Assets -The Fixed Assets functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides an overview of your fixed assets and ensures correct periodic depreciation. It also enables you to keep track of your maintenance costs, manage insurance policies, post fixed asset transactions, and generate various reports and statistics. - -For each fixed asset, you must set up a card containing information about the asset. You can set up buildings or production equipment as a main asset with a component list, and you can group them in various ways, such as by class, department, or location. Then you can begin to acquire, maintain, and sell the fixed assets. You can also set up budgeted assets. This makes it possible to include any anticipated acquisitions and sales in reports. - -To keep track of fixed asset depreciations as well as other financial transactions related to fixed assets, you set up one or more depreciation books for each fixed asset in your company. Depreciation is done by running a report to calculate periodic depreciation and fill in a journal with the resulting entries, ready to be posted. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports several depreciation methods. For more information, see [Depreciation Methods](fa-depreciation-methods.md). You can set up multiple depreciation books per fixed asset for different purposes, such as one for tax reporting and another for internal reporting. - -For each asset, you can record maintenance costs and the next service date. Keeping track of maintenance expenses can be important for budgeting purposes and for making decisions about whether to replace a fixed asset. - -Each fixed asset can be attached to one or more insurance policies. You can therefore easily verify that insurance policy amounts are in accordance with the value of the assets that are linked to the policy. This also makes it easy to monitor annual insurance premiums. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can record fixed asset transactions in the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window or in the **Fixed Asset Journal** window, depending on whether the transactions are for financial reporting or for internal management. Help for Fixed Assets only describes how to use the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md). - -Before you can begin to manage fixed assets, you must set up default values, fixed asset accounting, posting groups, allocation keys, journals, and posting types. For more information, see [Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create fixed assets, assign depreciation methods, post acquisitions, salvage values, and print fixed asset lists. |[How to: Acquire Fixed Assets](fa-how-acquire.md) | -| Record service visits, post maintenance costs, and monitor maintenance costs. |[How to: Maintain Fixed Assets](fa-how-maintain.md) | -| Update insurance information, post acquisition costs to insurance policies, modify insurance coverage, view insurance statistics, and list insurance policies. |[How to: Insure Fixed Assets](fa-how-insure.md) | -| Reclassify fixed assets, transfer fixed assets to different locations, split up or combine assets. |[How to: Transfer, Split, or Combine Fixed Assets](fa-how-trans-split-combine.md) | -| Adjust values of fixed assets, post appreciation, and post write-down transactions. |[How to: Revalue Fixed Assets](fa-how-revalue.md) | -| Calculate depreciation, post depreciation, and analyze depreciation in fixed assets reports. |[How to: Depreciate or Amortize Fixed Assets](fa-how-depreciate-amortize.md) | -| Post disposal transactions, view disposal ledger entries, and post partial disposals. |[How to: Dispose of or Retire Fixed Assets](fa-how-dispose-retire.md) | -| Manage fixed asset budgets, budget acquisition costs, budget disposals of fixed assets, and budget depreciation. |[How to: Manage Budgets for Fixed Assets](fa-how-manage-budgets.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/fa-setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index a9c67ee1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/fa-setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Fixed Assets -description: Learn about the sequence of tasks you must do to set up fixed assets, such as machinery or buildings. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: machinery, buildings -ms.date: 08/15/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Fixed Assets -Before you can work with Fixed Assets, you need to define a few things: - -* How you insure, maintain, and depreciate fixed assets. -* How you record costs and other values in the general ledger. - -The table below has links to more information. After you set those things up, you can start various activities. For more information, see [Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> You can record fixed asset transactions in the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** or **Fixed Asset Journal** windows, depending on whether the transactions are for financial reporting or for internal management. Help for Fixed Assets only describes how to use the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window. - -When you enable a fixed asset activity in the **G/L Integration** section in the **Depreciation Book Card** window, the **Fixed Asset G/L Journal** window is used to post transactions for the activity. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up default G/L accounts, allocation keys, journal templates and batches for fixed asset posting, and set up fixed asset classes and subclasses, such as Tangible and Intangible. |[How to: Set Up General Fixed Assets Information](fa-how-setup-general.md) | -| Create depreciation books, define various depreciation methods, integrate with the general ledger, and enable duplication of entries in several depreciation books. |[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Depreciation](fa-how-setup-depreciation.md) | -| Enable insurance of fixed assets, set up general insurance information, an insurance card per policy, and prepare journals to post insurance costs. |[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Insurance](fa-how-setup-insurance.md) | -| Enable maintenance of fixed assets, set up general maintenance information, set up maintenance posting accounts, and define types of maintenance work. |[How to: Set Up Fixed Asset Maintenance](fa-how-setup-maintenance.md) | -| Learn about different fixed asset depreciation methods. |[Depreciation Methods](fa-depreciation-methods.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1b62d891..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: About Calculating Standard Cost - description: A standard cost system determines inventory unit cost based on some reasonable historical or expected cost. Studies of past and estimated future cost data can then provide the basis for standard costs. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About Calculating Standard Cost -Many manufacturing companies select a valuation base of standard cost. This also applies to companies that perform light manufacturing, such as assembly and kitting. A standard cost system determines inventory unit cost based on some reasonable historical or expected cost. Studies of past and estimated future cost data can then provide the basis for standard costs. These costs are frozen until a decision is made to change them. The actual cost to produce a product may differ from the estimated standard costs. For management control, the actual cost is compared to the standard cost for a specific item and differences, or *variances*, are identified and analyzed. - -Standard costs can be maintained for items that are replenished through purchase, assembly, and production. For each replenishment method, standard costs can consist of the following elements. - -|Replenishment System|Standard Cost Elements| -|--------------------------|----------------------------| -|**Purchase**|Direct material cost and overhead material cost if it is required.| -|**Assembly**|Direct material cost, direct or fixed labor cost, and overhead cost.| -|**Prod. Order**|Direct material cost, labor cost, subcontractor cost, and overhead cost.| - -## Setting Up Standard Costs -Because the standard cost of a produced or assembled item can consist of multiple cost elements, including material, capacity (labor) and direct and overhead subcontractor costs, standard costs must be established for each of these elements. - -The accounting task for an item-processing company using standard costing is to: - -- Estimate a standard cost of the finished item and set it up on the item card. -- Record and allocate the actual cost of the key cost elements and to account for variances. - -To determine the direct cost of a finished item, all component costs must be totaled. An assembled or produced item can include subassemblies, which also consist of multiple components. - -The following key cost elements make up the total direct cost of a finished processed item: - -- Material costs. -- Capacity cost. -- Subcontracting costs for produced items only. - -### Material Costs - Material costs are costs that are associated with subassemblies and purchased raw material. Material unit cost can consist of direct and indirect cost elements. - -- Direct material cost represents an invoiced amount for purchased raw materials or the processing cost of a subassembly. -- Indirect material cost, or *overhead*, can represent elements such as inventory carrying costs for the finished item after it is produced. - -The setup of the material cost for purchased items that affect direct and indirect cost depends on the costing method that you have selected for the specified item. You set up cost information for either costing method on the item card. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -The cost of scrap (production only) is an additional factor to consider when you calculate the total material cost. When a certain amount of raw material is scrapped when you assemble or produce an item, it generally causes an increase in the quantity of components that are required to produce this item. This increases the material cost of the components that are consumed when producing a parent item. You set up scrap cost for materials on either the production BOM or routing. - -The material cost of a produced item can be represented in two ways that correspond to the following cost calculation bases. - -|Cost Calculation Basis|Material Cost Calculation| -|----------------------------|-------------------------------| -|Single level|Produced item is equal to the total cost of all purchased or subassembled items on that item's production BOM.| -|Rolled-up level or multilevel|Produced item is the sum of the material cost for all subassemblies on that item's BOM and the cost of all purchased items on that item's production BOM.| - -### Capacity Costs -Capacity costs are the costs that are associated with internal labor and machine costs. You must set up these costs for each resource (in assembly management) and work or machine center on the routing (in production). As with materials, you can identify both direct and indirect elements of capacity cost. For example, the direct cost for a work center may be the established shop rate to perform a specific function. The indirect cost for a work center may represent some general factory expenses, such as lighting, heating, and so on. As with material costs, you can express capacity overhead as an indirect cost percentage or a fixed overhead rate. - -The setup of the capacity costs of assembled items consists of the following elements: - -- Direct and indirect unit cost of the resource. -- Fixed or direct resource usage type. - -The setup of the capacity costs of produced items consists of the following elements: - -- Direct and indirect unit cost of the machine or work center. -- Time and lot size setup. - -To calculate standard capacity cost, you have to establish the standard time rates that are required to perform operations on machine and work centers. The total time to complete an operation typically consists of setup, run time, and wait and move time. - -You set up the rates for each time type for each machine or work center on an individual routing. - -> [!NOTE] -> While run time rates apply for each item unit that is produced, the setup time rates apply for each lot. Therefore, you must prorate the routing setup time for each operation over the lot size. You specify the lot size in the corresponding field on the **Ordering** FastTab of the item card. - -To specify setup time on the routing for planning but not include this expense in the standard cost calculation, clear the **Cost Incl. Setup** field in the **Manufacturing Setup** window. - -On a single-level basis, this is the labor cost that is required to produce the finished production item and is specified on the production item's routing. On a multi-level basis, this is the capacity cost that is specified for each individually produced item that is included in the parent item's BOM. - -### Subcontractor Costs -Subcontractor costs are the costs that are associated with services that are provided by a company's outside vendors or subcontractors. Similar to material and capacity, subcontractor costs can consist of both direct and overhead amounts. Direct subcontractor cost represents the actual charge for each unit of services that is provided. For example, overhead subcontractor cost can represent freight and handling costs that are incurred by the company with a subcontracted order. - -Because subcontracting is an outsourced capacity, you set up the cost of both direct and indirect subcontracting services on the work center card that represents the subcontracting operation. - -## Updating Standard Costs -To update or calculate the standard cost of assembly items, use the function from the item card. - -The process of updating or calculating standard costs typically consists of the following tasks: - -1. Updating costs at the component and capacity levels. For more information, see the **Suggest Item Standard Cost** and **Suggest Capacity Standard Cost** batch jobs. -2. Consolidating and rolling up the component and capacity costs to calculate the total assembly or manufacturing cost of the items. For more information, see For more information, see the "To calculate the standard cost of an assembly item" section in [How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md). -3. Implementing the standard costs that are entered when you run the previous batch jobs. The standard costs do not take effect until they are implemented. For more information, see the **Implement Standard Cost Changes** batch job. -4. Implementing the changes to update the **Unit Cost** field on the item card and perform inventory revaluation. For more information, see [How to: Revalue Inventory](inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) - [How to: Update Standard Costs](finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md) - [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-cost-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-cost-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 159fd64f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-cost-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: About Cost Accounting - description: Cost accounting can help you understand the costs of running a business. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About Cost Accounting -Cost accounting can help you understand the costs of running a business. Cost accounting information is designed to analyze: - -- What types of costs that you incur when you run a business? -- Where do the costs occur? -- Who bears the costs? - -In cost accounting, you allocate actual and budgeted costs of operations, departments, products, and projects to analyze the profitability of your company. - -## Workflow in Cost Accounting -Cost accounting has the following main components: - -- Cost types, cost centers, and cost objects -- Cost entries and cost journals -- Cost allocations -- Cost budgets -- Cost reporting - -The following diagram shows the workflow in cost accounting. - -![Cost Accounting overview](media/costaccountingoverview.png "CostAccountingOverview") - -## Cost Types, Cost Centers, and Cost Objects -You define cost types, cost centers, and cost objects to analyze what the costs are, where the costs come from, and who should bear the costs. - -You define a chart of cost types with a structure and functionality that resembles the general ledger chart of accounts. You can transfer the general ledger income statement accounts or create your own chart of cost types. - -Cost centers are departments and profit centers that are responsible for costs and income. Often, there are more cost centers set up in cost accounting than in any dimension that is set up in the general ledger. In the general ledger, usually only the first level cost centers for direct costs and the initial costs are used. In cost accounting, additional cost centers are created for additional allocation levels. - -Cost objects are products, product groups, or services of a company. These are the finished goods of a company that carry the costs. - -You can link cost centers to departments and cost objects to projects in your company. However, you can link cost centers and cost objects to any dimensions in the general ledger and supplement them with subtotals and titles. - -## Cost Entries and Cost Journals -Operational costs can be transferred from the general ledger. You can automatically transfer the cost entries from the general ledger to cost entries with each posting. You can also use a batch job to transfer the general ledger entries to cost entries based on daily or monthly summary posting. - -In cost journals, you can post cost and activities that do not come from the general ledger or are not generated by allocations. For example, you can post pure operational costs, internal charges, allocations, and corrective entries between cost types, cost centers, and cost objects individually or on a recurring basis. - -## Cost Allocations -Allocations move costs and revenues between cost types, cost centers, and cost objects. Overhead costs are first posted to cost centers and later charged to cost objects. For example, this might be done in a sales department that sells several products at the same time. Direct costs can be directly allocated to a cost object, such as a material purchased for a specific product. - -The allocation base that is used and the accuracy of the allocation definition have an influence on the results of cost allocations. The allocation definition is used to allocate costs first from so-called pre-cost centers to main cost centers and then from cost centers to cost objects. - -Each allocation consists of an allocation source and one or more allocation targets. You can allocate actual values or budgeted values by using the static allocation method that is based on a definite value, such as square footage, or an established allocation ratio of 5:2:4. You can also allocate actual values or budgeted values by using the dynamic allocation method with nine predefined allocation bases and 12 dynamic date ranges. - -## Cost Budgets -You can create as many cost budgets as you want. You can copy the cost budget to the general ledger budget and vice versa. You can transfer budgeted costs as actual costs. - -## Cost Reporting -Most reports and statistics are based on the posted cost entries. You can set the sorting of the results and use filters to define which data must be displayed. You can create reports for cost distribution analysis. In addition, you can use the standard account schedules to define how your reports for the chart of cost types are displayed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) - [Finance](finance.md) - [Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-finished-production-order-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-finished-production-order-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1af3270d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-about-finished-production-order-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: About Finished Production Order Costs - description: Finishing the production order is an important task in completing the costing lifecycle of the item that is being produced. Final costs, including variances in a standard cost environment, actuals in a FIFO, Average, or LIFO cost environment, are calculated using the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About Finished Production Order Costs -Finishing the production order is an important task in completing the costing lifecycle of the item that is being produced. Final costs, including variances in a standard cost environment, actuals in a FIFO, Average, or LIFO cost environment, are calculated using the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, which allows for financial reconciliation of the costs of item production. For a production order to be considered for cost adjustment, the status must be **Finished**. It is therefore critical that upon completion, the status of a production order is changed to **Finished**. - -## Example - In a standard cost environment, when you consume material to produce an item, stated simply, the cost of the item plus labor and overhead go into WIP. When the item is produced, WIP is reduced by the amount of the standard cost of the item. Typically, these costs do not net to zero. So that these costs can net to zero, you must run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job, noting that only production orders with the status of **Finished** will be considered for adjustment. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-account-schedule.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-account-schedule.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6694f621..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-account-schedule.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Account Schedules" -description: "Account schedules" -author: edupont04 -ms.author: edupont -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# Account Schedules -With account schedules, you can get detailed insights into your financial data. You can set up various layouts to define the information that you want to extract from the chart of accounts -The chart of accounts stores your financial data, but sometimes you want to get a view on your data that the chart of accounts cannot really show. So you use account schedules to analyze figures in general ledger accounts and to compare general ledger entries with general ledger budget entries. -For example, you want to calculate subtotals for groups of accounts, and you want to include these subtotals in new totals, and so on. -Dynamics NAV includes sample account schedules that are used to generate the charts on your Home page. You can also create account schedules to calculate profit margins on such dimensions as departments or customer groups. - -Setting up account schedules requires an understanding of the financial data in the chart of accounts. -For example, you can view general ledger entries as percentages of budget entries. -You can use one of the default layouts for your account schedule, or you can set up your own rows and columns so that you can decide exactly which figures you wish to compare and how. -This means that you can create as many customized financial statements as you want. You use the **Account Schedule** window to set up account schedules. - -## Account Categories and Account Schedules -You can use account categories to change the layout of your financial statements. When you have set up your account categories in the **G/L Account Categories** window, and you choose the **Generate Account Schedules** action, the underlying account schedules for the core financial reports are updated. the next time you run one of these reports, such as the balance statement, new totals and subentries are added, based on your changes. For more information, see [The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md). -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Set Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 601898e6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics NAV accountant experience -description: Learn about the accountant portal for Dynamics NAV and the Accountant Role Center that supports internal and external accountants in the client company. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accountant, accounting, financial report -ms.date: 09/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Accountant Experiences in [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] -Any business must do its books and sign off on the accounting. Some businesses employ an external accountant, and others have an accountant on staff. No matter which type of accountant you are, you can use the **Accountant** Role Center as your Home in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. From here, you can access all windows that you need in your work. - -## Accountant Role Center -The Role Center is a dashboard with activity tiles that show you real-time key figures and give you quick access to data. In the ribbon at the top of the window, you have access to more actions, such as opening the most commonly used financial reports and statements in Excel. In the navigation pane to the left, you can quickly switch between the lists you use most often. If you expand the **Home** menu in the navigation pane, you will see other areas, such as **Posted Documents** with the various types of documents that the company has posted. - -If you are new to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can launch a list of videos right from your Home page. You can also launch a **Getting Started** tour that points out key areas. - -### Get Invited to a Client's [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -A company who use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can invite you to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as their external accountant. This requires that they have set up SMTP mail, so they might want to contact their [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] partner for assistance. For more information, see [Invite Your External Accountant](finance-invite-external-accountant.md). Also, we recommend that you give them the email address that you plan to use for your accounting work - that way, you can choose if you want to use me@accountant.com or me@client.com - -As a result, you will receive email from your client with a link to their [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] - -You can then access their financial data from the **Accountant** Role Center. If you use the accountant portal, you can also add that client to your list of clients in the accountant portal dashboard. - -## Accountant Portal -If you are an accountant with several clients, you can use the accountant portal as your dashboard for a better overview of your clients. From there, you can access each client's tenant in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and use the Accountant Role Center as described above. - -The accountant portal is a dedicated version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You can get access to the dashboard by signing up from [Dynamics NAV for Accountants on Microsoft.com](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/financial-insights-for-accountants). - -> [!TIP] -> When you sign up for the accountant portal, you must specify your work email address, such as me@accountant.com. We recommend that you use the same email address when you work in your clients' [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], so that you can easily switch between clients. - -When you first log in to the accountant portal, the dashboard shows a sample client to help you get started. Once you are comfortable, you can remove that sample client. - -### Working with Individual Clients -The dashboard shows the most important information about each client. -[![Accountant Portal](./media/ui-extensions-accportal/accountant-portal.png)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=851257) - -The **Company Name** column lists all companies that your clients have in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and the **Client Name** column shows the names of your clients. You can customize the dashboard to show the data points that you want to see by adding or removing columns. For example, you might want to see taxes that are due, how many open sales documents each client has, or the number of purchase invoices that are due next week. You can configure the view to suit your needs. If you have many clients, you can use filters to sort your view. - -Next to the company name, the ellipsis (...) reveals a short menu: - -* Refresh the current company and get fresh data for the client -* Go to the client's company -* Select more companies - -Similarly, you can use the **Client Summary** drop-down menu to refresh all companies or open the currently selected company, for example. - -### Company Details -You can see more information about your clients' data by choosing the name of the company that you want to learn more about. This opens the **Company Details** pane, where you can see additional information, such as the following: - -* Cash account balances -* Cash flow forecast -* Overdue purchase invoices -* Overdue sales invoices - -![Client company details in the accountant portal](./media/finance-accounting/accountant-company-details.png) - -Technically, you have now logged into your client's [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and data you see is live data. If you want to take a closer look at the data, such as an overdue purchase invoice, choose the link, and you are taken to the client company. - -> [!TIP] -> You can launch predefined Excel workbooks from the **Reports** tab in the ribbon. These Excel workbooks are designed as ready-to-print key financial statements and reports, but you can also modify them to fit your needs. For more information, see [Analyzing Financial Statements in Microsoft Excel](finance-analyze-excel.md). - -Otherwise, close the details pane and continue to the next client. - -### Working in the Client Company -If you want to do more work for a client, you can do this in the Accountant Role Center in their [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] - simply choose the **Go To Client** menu item, and you are logged in automatically. - -In the client's company, you have view and modify the data that you need in your work. For more information, see the top of this page. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you do not intend to return to this client in a few minutes, we recommend that you close the browser tab. - -### Adding Clients -You can add a client by using the **Clients** window, which you can open by choosing the **Manage Clients** action in the ribbon. Simply choose **New** and then fill in the fields. - -The data in the card for each client is specified by you, and you can change it as needed. However, the **Client URL** field is critical - this is how you can access each client's [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Use the **Test Client URL** action in the ribbon to test that you entered the right link. The URL that you must enter points at the client's [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as *`https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com`*. This URL is then used when you choose the **Go To Company** menu item. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) -[Analyzing Financial Statements in Excel](finance-analyze-excel.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Invite Your External Accountant to Your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](finance-invite-external-accountant.md) -[Dynamics NAV for Accountants on Microsoft.com](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/financial-insights-for-accountants) -[Setting Up Cash Flow Analysis](finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-cash-flow.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-cash-flow.md deleted file mode 100644 index 878808b7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-cash-flow.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Analyzing Cash Flows -description: Describes how to use the Cash Cycle, Income & Expense, Cash Flow, and Cash Flow Forecast charts to analyze the past and future flow of money in and out of your company. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: money flow, expense and income, liquidity, cash receipts minus cash payments, Cartera -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Analyzing Cash Flow in Your Company -As they say, cash is king. The charts on the Accountant Role Center provide insight that can help you make solid decisions about what to do with your cash. - -| To answer questions like these | Use this chart | -| --- | --- | -| How long does the sales process tie up my cash?
Should I increase or reduce inventory levels? |Cash Cycle | -| When did cash move in and out of my company?
Are some periods better than others? |Cash Flow | -| Do the numbers seem off for a period?
Should I investigate? |Income & Expense | -| When might a cash surplus or deficit happen?
Should I pay down debt, or borrow to meet upcoming expenses? |Cash Flow Forecasts | - -On the Accountant Role Center, under **Finance Performance**, the **Cash Cycle**, **Cash Flow**, and **Income & Expense** charts offer ways to analyze cash flow: - -* See figures for a period by using the timeline slider. -* Filter the chart by choosing the source in the legend. -* Change the length of the period, or go to the previous or next period, by choosing options on the **Finance Performance** drop down. -* View the entries by choosing a point in the chart. For example, a point on the timeline or a column segment. If the numbers seem off, this is where you can make adjustments. - -Although it's separate, the **Cash Flow Forecast** chart is similar. You view details, filter results, and change what is displayed in the same ways. If you change a setting, you can refresh the forecast by choosing **Cash Flow Forecast**, and then **Recalculate Forecast**. - -If you want to examine the forecast, in addition to forecast entries, you can also look at the cash flow worksheet. For example, you can see how the forecast: - -* Handles confirmed sales and purchases. -* Subtracts payables and adds receivables. -* Skips duplicate sales orders and purchase orders. - -## To view a cash flow worksheet -1. Search for **Cash Flow Forecasts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose a cash flow forecast, and then choose the **Cash Flow Worksheet** action. -3. On the **Cash Flow Worksheet** page, choose the **Suggest Worksheet Lines** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Setting Up Cash Flow Analysis](finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-excel.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-excel.md deleted file mode 100644 index 50933ccc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-analyze-excel.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work with financial overviews in Excel -description: Learn about how you can open the financial statements in Microsoft Excel from Dynamics NAV for better analysis. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accountant, accounting, financial report -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Analyzing Financial Statements in Microsoft Excel -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can see KPIs and get overviews of the company's financial state. You can also open lists in Excel and analyze the data there. But you can also export heavy financial statements such as the balance sheet or the income statement to Excel, analyze the data, and print the reports. - -In the Business Manager and Accountant Role Centers, you can choose which financial statements to view in Excel from a drop-down menu in the Reports section of the ribbon. When you choose a statement, it will be opened in Excel or Excel Online. An add-in connects the data to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. However, you have to sign in with the same account that you use with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Getting the Overview and the Details in Excel -In the ribbon, choose the relevant Excel report, and let it open so you can get the overview that you were looking for. In this version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], we offer the following Excel reports: - -- Balance Sheet -- Income Statement -- Cash Flow Statement -- Retained Earnings Statement -- Aged Accounts Payable -- Aged Accounts Receivable - -Let's say you want to dig deeper into your cash flow. From the Business Manager or Accountant Role Center, you can open the Cash Flow Statement report in Excel, but what actually happens is that we export the relevant data for you and create an Excel workbook based on a predefined template. Depending on your browser, you might be prompted to open or save the workbook. - -In Excel, you see a tab where the data is laid out for you on the first worksheet. All the data that was exported is also present in other worksheets in case you need it. You can print the report right away, or you can modify it until you have the overview and the details that you want. Use the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Excel Add-in to further filter and analyze data. - -## The [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Excel Add-in -Your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] experience includes an add-in for Excel. Depending on your subscription, you are logged in automatically, or you must specify the same login details that you use for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -With the add-in, you can get fresh data from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and you can push changes back into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. However, the ability to push data back to the database is disabled for the financial Excel reports in the list above. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3d45e731..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Automatic Transfer and Combined Entries - description: In cost accounting, you can transfer general ledger entries to a cost type by using a combined posting. You can specify if a cost type receives combined entries in the **Combine Entries** field in the cost type definition. The following table describes the different options. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Automatic Transfer and Combined Entries -In cost accounting, you can transfer general ledger entries to a cost type by using a combined posting. You can specify if a cost type receives combined entries in the **Combine Entries** field in the cost type definition. The following table describes the different options. - -|Combine entries|Description| -|---------------------|-----------------| -|None|Each general ledger entry is transferred individually to the corresponding cost type.| -|Day|General ledger entries with the same posting date are transferred as one entry to the corresponding cost type.| -|Month|All general ledger entries in the same calendar month are transferred as one entry to the corresponding cost type.| - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you have selected the **Auto Transfer from G/L** check box in the **Cost Accounting Setup** window, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] updates the cost accounting after every posting in the general ledger. Combined entries are not possible. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Transfer General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md) - [Criteria for Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md) - [Results of the Transfer](finance-results-of-the-transfer.md) - [Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object.md deleted file mode 100644 index e4362b85..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Balances Between Cost Type, Cost Center, and Cost Object - description: When you set up cost accounting, you must make sure that all entries are assigned to a cost type as well as a cost center or a cost object. The means that each cost entry must have a cost type assigned and a cost center code or a cost object assigned. This rule ensures that each cost entry appears in either the cost centers or the cost objects, but never in both places. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Balances Between Cost Type, Cost Center, and Cost Object -When you set up cost accounting, you must make sure that all entries are assigned to a cost type as well as a cost center or a cost object. The means that each cost entry must have a cost type assigned and a cost center code or a cost object assigned. This rule ensures that each cost entry appears in either the cost centers or the cost objects, but never in both places. - - By doing this, you create the following accounting equation: - - Cost Type Balance = Cost Center Balance + Cost Object Balance - - When you print the chart of cost type, the chart of cost centers, and the chart of cost objects reports, you can analyze this relationship. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) - [Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) - [Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) - [About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) - [Creating Cost Budgets](finance-create-cost-budgets.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-cashflow-how-use-cortana-intelligence.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-cashflow-how-use-cortana-intelligence.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5ff668d9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-cashflow-how-use-cortana-intelligence.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "How to: Make predictive cash flow forecasts" -description: "How to: Make predictive cash flow forecasts" -author: bholtorf -ms.author: bholtorf -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/16/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# How to: Make predictive cash flow forecasts -Cash flow forecasts help you ensure that your company has enough cash available to meet its financial obligations, and are useful for identifying adjustments. For example, if you have a cash surplus you might pay off some debts, and you'll appreciate an early warning if times look tight. - -Cortana Intelligence uses the Azure Machine Learning service to make reliable, predictive forecasts. For example, forecasts from Cortana Intelligence can help you predict, and avoid, cash deficits. The service combines historical information with current postings for payables and receivables, including postings with due dates that are in the future. These include: -* Purchase orders -* Sales orders -* Posted sales and purchase invoices -* Credit memos - -## Before you start -There are a few things to do before you can use Cortana Intelligence for cash flow forecasts: -* If you aren't already using cash flow forecasts, you will need to set up: - * One or more setups in **Cash Flow Setups**. - * Accounts for payables, receivables, sales orders, and purchase orders. Cortana Intelligence uses the postings in these accounts. - * One or more cash flow forecasts in **Cash Flow Forecast**. Be sure to include purchase orders, sales orders, receivables, and payables as sources. - For more information, search for _cash flow forecasts_ in the Help system. -* Know the API URL and API key for the predictive web service to use. - You can use Azure Machine Learning or another service, if you have one. Alternatively, a public model named _Forecasting model for Microsoft Dynamics NAV_ is available online in the Cortana Intelligence Gallery. To use the model, follow these steps: - - 1. In a browser, go to the [Cortana Intelligence Gallery](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=828352) - 2. Search for _Forecasting Model for Microsoft Dynamics NAV_, and then open the model in Azure Machine Learning Studio. - 3. Use your Microsoft account to sign up for a workspace, and then copy the model. - 4. Run the model, and publish it as a web service. - 5. Make a note of the API URL and API key. You will use these credentials when you set up Cortana Intelligence in [!INCLUDE[navnow](includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -* Consider how often to calculate the forecast. The Azure Machine Learning service has limitations regarding use. For example, if you have a lot of items, it might be better to calculate less frequently. -* Be assigned to the Accountant role center. - -## Set up Cortana Intelligence -You can use an assisted setup guide to set up cash flow forecasts. The guide helps you specify things like how often to update the forecast, the accounts to base it on, information about when you pay taxes, and whether to use Cortana Intelligence. - -If you are already using cash flow forecasts and just want to turn on Cortana Intelligence, you can also use a manual process. When you sign in, a notification displays in a blue bar at the top of the workspace. To set up Cortana Intelligence right away, choose **Yes please**. The message displays only once. If you close it, use the manual process to set up Cortana Intelligence. - -**Tip:** Consider the length of the periods that the service will use in its calculations. The more data you provide, the more accurate the predictions will be. Also, watch out for large variances in periods. They will also impact predictions. If Cortana Intelligence does not find enough data, or the data varies a lot, the service will not make a prediction. - -To use the assisted setup guide: -1. In the Accountant role center, under the **Cash Flow Forecast** chart, choose the **Open Assisted Setup** action. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary in each step of the guide. - -To use a manual process: -1. Search for **Cash Flow Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Expand the **Cortana Intelligence** FastTab, and then fill in the fields as necessary. - -## Turn on Cortana Intelligence for cash flow forecasts -1. Search for **Cash Flow Forecasts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Cash Flow Worksheet** action. -3. On the **Cash Flow Worksheet** page, choose the **Suggest Worksheet Lines** action. -4. Under **Source Types to Include**, choose the **Cortana Intelligence Forecast** check box. - -## Investigate a cash flow forecast -To take a good look at the data behind the forecast, including the variance, choose the **Cortana Intelligence** column. The first row in the table displays the variance. The other rows are arranged by source document. - -For example, you can see how the forecast: -* Handles confirmed sales and purchases -* Subtracts payables and adds receivables -* Skips duplicate sales orders and purchase orders - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Work With Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1ffeb793..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: SEPA Direct Debit in Dynamics NAV - description: You can collect payments directly from the customer’s bank account according to the SEPA format. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit -With your customer’s consent, you can collect payments directly from the customer’s bank account according to the SEPA format. - - First, set up the export format of the bank file that instructs your bank to perform a direct debit. Then, set up the customer’s payment method. Last, set up the direct-debit mandate that reflects your agreement with the customer to collect their payments in a certain agreement period. - - To instruct the bank to transfer the payment amount from the customer’s bank account to your company’s account, you create a direct-debit collection entry, which holds information about bank accounts, the affected sales invoices, and the direct-debit mandate. You then export an XML file that is based on the collection entry, which you send to your bank for processing. Any payments that could not be processed will be communicated to you by your bank, and you must then manually reject the direct debit-collection entries in question. - - You can set up standard customer sales codes with the direct-debit payment method and mandate information. You can then use the **Create Standard Cust. Invoices** batch job to generate multiple sales invoices with the direct-debit information prefilled. This is can be done manually or automatically, according to the payment due date. - - When payments are successfully processed, as communicated by your bank, you can post the payment receipts either directly from the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window or by moving the payment lines to the journal where you post payment receipts, such as the **Cash Receipt Journal** window. Alternatively, depending on your cash management process, you can wait and just apply the payments as a part of bank reconciliation. - -> [!NOTE] -> To collect payments using SEPA Direct Debit, the currency on the sales invoice must be EURO. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Prepare bank account formats, payment methods, and customer agreements for SEPA direct debit.|[How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md)| -|Instruct your bank to transfer payment amounts from your customers’ bank accounts to your company’s account according to your setup of SEPA direct debit.|[How to: Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File](finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md)| -|Set up standard customer sales codes for direct-debit invoices and generate sales invoices with direct-debit information when the invoices are due for payment.|[How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md)| -|Post payments made as SEPA direct debits.|[How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts](finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-create-cost-budgets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-create-cost-budgets.md deleted file mode 100644 index bd7d92b8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-create-cost-budgets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Creating Cost Budgets - description: This topic provides an overview of where to create and analyze cost budgets. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Creating Cost Budgets -Budgeting in cost accounting resembles budgeting in the general ledger. A cost budget is created based on cost types just as a budget for the general ledger is created based on general ledger accounts. - -A cost budget is created for a certain period of time, for example, a fiscal year. You can create as many cost budgets as needed. You can create a new cost budget manually, or by importing a cost budget, or by copying an existing cost budget as the budget base. For more information, see [How to: Create Budgets](finance-how-create-budgets.md). - -You use the following windows to create and analyze cost budgets. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon to find a window, and then read the tooltip for each. - -|To|See| -|--------|---------| -|Transfer budgets from the general ledger.|**Copy G-L Budget to Cost Acctg.** batch job| -|Copy cost budgets.|**Copy Cost Budget** batch job| -|Allocate budgets.|**Cost Allocation** page| -|See cost budget registers and cost budget entries.|**Cost Budget Registers** page| -|Print cost budget comparisons using various reports.|**Cost Acctg. Balance-Budget** report

**Cost Acctg. Statement-Budget** report

**Cost Budget by Cost Center** report

**Cost Budget by Cost Object** report| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[How to: Create Budgets](finance-how-create-budgets.md) -[Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) -[Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index 418516c7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Criteria for Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries - description: It is important to understand the criteria for transferring general ledger entries to cost entries. During the transfer, the **Transfer GL Entries to CA** batch job uses the following criteria to determine if and how the general ledger entries are transferred. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Criteria for Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries -It is important to understand the criteria for transferring general ledger entries to cost entries. During the transfer, the **Transfer GL Entries to CA** batch job uses the following criteria to determine if and how the general ledger entries are transferred. - -General ledger entries are transferred if: - -- The entries have dimension values corresponding to either a cost center or a cost object. -- The entries have dimension values that correspond to a cost center and a cost object. For these entries, the cost center takes precedence. This helps avoid a situation where a cost type appears in both a cost object and a cost center and is therefore counted twice in the statistics. -- The document number in the entries is empty, so it will appear with a document number of 0000 in the cost entries. -- The entries are transferred to a cost type that allows for combined entries and these entries are transferred as a combined entry either monthly or daily. - -General ledger entries are not transferred if: - -- The entries have dimension values that do not correspond to a cost center or a cost object. -- The entries have an amount of zero. -- The entries have a general ledger account that has been deleted. -- The entries have a general ledger account that is not of the type **Income Statement**. -- The entries have a general ledger account that is not assigned a cost type. -- The entries have a posting date before the **Starting Date for G/L Transfer**. -- The entries have been posted with a closing date. These are typically entries that set back the balance of the income statement at the end of the year. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) - [How to: Transfer General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md) - [Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md) - [About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 380a8425..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Defining and Allocating Costs - description: Cost allocations move costs and revenues between cost types, cost centers, and cost objects. You can define as many allocations as you need. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Defining and Allocating Costs -Cost allocations move costs and revenues between cost types, cost centers, and cost objects. You can define as many allocations as you need. Each allocation consists of: - -- An allocation source. -- One or more allocation targets. - -The allocation source establishes which costs must be allocated, and the allocation targets determine where the costs must be allocated. For example, an allocation source can be the costs for the Electricity and Heating cost type. You allocate all electricity and heating costs to three cost centers: Workshop, Production, and Sales. These cost centers are your allocation targets. - -For each allocation source, you define an allocation level, a validity period, and a variant as grouping identifier. You can use a batch job to set filters to select allocation definitions and then run cost allocations automatically. - -For each allocation target, you define an allocation base. The allocation base can be either static or dynamic. - -- Static allocation bases are based on a definite value, such as square footage or an established allocation ratio, such as 5:2:4. -- Dynamic allocation bases depend on changeable values, such as the number of employees in a cost center or sales revenue of a cost object throughout a certain time period. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|To|See| -|--------|---------| -|Set up allocation source and its targets.|[How to: Set Up Allocation Source and Targets](finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md)| -|Set up various filters for dynamic allocation bases.|[Setting Filters for Dynamic Allocation Bases](finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md)| -|See an example of how to define a static allocation.|[Scenario Example: Defining Static Allocations Based on Allocation Ratio](finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio.md)| -|See an example of how to define a dynamic allocation.|[Scenario Example: Defining Dynamic Allocations Based on Items Sold](finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) - [Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md) - [Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) - [Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) - [About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 69349f53..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Defining Cost Centers and Cost Objects for Chart of Accounts - description: You can automatically transfer the expense and income entries from the general ledger to cost accounting either for each general ledger posting or with a batch job. When you do the transfer, the system only transfers the entries that are already linked to a cost center or a cost object. To establish a meaningful transfer, you must ensure that the cost centers and cost objects are correctly defined. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Defining Cost Centers and Cost Objects for Chart of Accounts -You can automatically transfer the expense and income entries from the general ledger to cost accounting either for each general ledger posting or with a batch job. When you do the transfer, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] only transfers the entries that are already linked to a cost center or a cost object. To establish a meaningful transfer, you must ensure that the cost centers and cost objects are correctly defined. - -## Defining Default Dimension Values for General Ledger Accounts -For each general ledger account, you can define default dimension values in the **Default Dimension** table. The following example shows how to define that there should always be a DEPARTMENT cost center, but never be a PROJECT cost object when posting to a general ledger account. - -|**Dimension Code**|**Value Posting**| -|------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| -|Department|Code Mandatory| -|Project|No Code| - -## Defining Dimension Values for Overhead Costs and Direct Costs - You can transfer overhead costs to a cost center and direct costs to a cost object. The following table shows the optimal combination of the dimension setup values. - -|Transfer To|Cost Center Posting|Cost Object Posting| -|-----------------|-------------------------|-------------------------| -|Cost Center|Code Mandatory|No Code| -|Cost Object|No Code|Code Mandatory| - -> [!NOTE] -> To make sure that the predefined cost center and cost object that you set up in the general ledger are automatically carried over to cost accounting, select the **Check G/L Postings** check box in the Cost Accounting Setup window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[How to: Set Up Cost Centers](finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers.md) -[How to: Set Up Cost Objects](finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 83b1ce47..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Defining the Relationship Between Cost Types and General Ledger Accounts - description: Learn how to define the relationship between the cost type and the general ledger account. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: cost types, general ledger - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Defining the Relationship Between Cost Types and General Ledger Accounts -The relationship between the cost type and the general ledger account is created in the cost type and in the general ledger account. - -* The **G/L Account Range** field in the **Cost Type** table establishes which general ledger accounts belong to a cost type. -* The **Cost Type No.** field in the chart of accounts establishes which cost type a general ledger account belongs to. - -These two fields are filled automatically when you use the **Get Cost Types from Chart of Accounts** function. - -## Relationship Between General Ledger Accounts and Cost Types -There is an n:1 relationship between general ledger accounts and cost types. Several general ledger accounts can belong to one cost type, but each general ledger account belongs to only one cost type. The following table describes the details in the relationship. - - -| Relationship | **G/L Account Range** | **Cost Type No.** | -|---------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| One general ledger account for each cost type | One general ledger account | One cost type | -| Several general ledger accounts for one cost type | General ledger account range, for example, 7110..7193 for each general ledger account | For each general ledger account in the range, there is only one cost type | -| Cost types without corresponding general ledger accounts | \ | | -| General ledger accounts whose entries will not be transferred | | \ | - -## Cost Types Without a Relationship to the General Ledger -A cost type may not have a relationship to general ledger accounts if one of the following conditions is true: - -* Accounts for operational accounting, such as Calc. Interest and Depreciation, only take costs from the operational accounting. -* Helping cost types, such as cost types 9901, 9902, and 9903 in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] database, are used as credit and debit accounts for allocations. -* The helping account, 9920 in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] database, contains actual accruals that show the difference between costs and the expense from the general ledger. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) -[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-dimensions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-dimensions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4e5d8eb8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-dimensions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work with Dimensions -description: You use dimensions to categorize entries, for example, by department or project, so you can easily track and analyze data. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: analysis, history, track -ms.date: 06/14/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Working with Dimensions -To make it simpler to perform analysis on documents such as sales orders, you can use dimensions. Dimensions are attributes and values that categorize entries so you can track and analyze them. For example, dimensions can indicate the project or department an entry came from. - -For example, instead of setting up separate general ledger accounts for each department and project, you can use dimensions. This gives a rich opportunity for analysis, without creating a complicated chart of accounts. For more information, see [Business Intelligence](bi.md). - -Another example is to set up a dimension called *Department*, and use this dimension when you post sales documents. This will let you use business intelligence tools to see which department sold which items. -The more dimensions you use, the more detailed reports you can base your business decisions on. For example, a single sales entry can include multiple dimension information, such as: - -* The account the item sale was posted to -* Where the item was sold -* Who sold it -* The kind of customer who bought it - -## Analyzing by Dimensions -The Dimensions functionality plays an important role in business intelligence, such as when defining analysis views. For more information, see [How to: Analyze Data by Dimensions](bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md). - -> [!TIP] -> As a quick way to analyze transactional data by dimensions, you can filter totals in the chart of accounts and entries in all **Entries** windows by dimensions. Look for the **Set Dimension Filter** action. - -## Dimension Sets -A dimension set is a unique combination of dimension values. It is stored as dimension set entries in the database. Each dimension set entry represents a single dimension value. The dimension set is identified by a common dimension set ID that is assigned to each dimension set entry that belongs to the dimension set. - -When you create a journal line, document header, or document line, you can specify a combination of dimension values. Instead of explicitly storing each dimension value in the database, a dimension set ID is assigned to the journal line, document header, or document line to specify the dimension set. - -## Setting Up Dimensions -You can define the dimensions and dimension values to categorize journals and documents, such as sales orders and purchase orders. You set up dimensions in the **Dimensions** window, where you create one line for each dimension, such as *Project*, *Department*, *Area*, and *Salesperson*. - -You also set up values for dimensions. For example, values might be departments in your company. Dimension values can be set up in a hierarchical structure similar to the chart of accounts, so that data can be broken down into various levels of granularity, and subsets of dimension values can be totaled. You can define as many dimensions and dimension values as you need, and everyone in your company can use them. - -You can also set up some global and shortcut dimensions: - -* **Global dimensions** are used as filters, for example, on reports and batch jobs. You can use only two global dimensions, so choose dimensions you will use often. -* **Shortcut dimensions** are available as fields on journal and document lines. You can create up to six of these. - -### Setting Up Default Dimensions for Customers, Vendors, and Other accounts -You can assign a default dimension for a specific account. The dimension will be copied to the journal or document when you enter the account number on a line, but you can delete or change the code on the line if appropriate. You can also make a dimension required for posting an entry with a specific type of account. - -### Translating the Names of Dimensions -When you create a dimension, and especially a shortcut dimension, what you're actually creating is a custom field or column heading. If your business is international, you can provide translations for the name of the dimension. Documents that include the dimension will use the translated name, where applicable. - -### Example of Dimension Setup -Let's say that your company wants to track transactions based on organizational structure and geographic locations. To do that, you can set up two dimensions in the **Dimensions** window: - -* **AREA** -* **DEPARTMENT** - -| Code | Name | Code Caption | Filter Caption | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | -| AREA |Area |Area Code |Area Filter | -| DEPARTMENT |Department |Department Code |Department Filter | - -For **AREA**, you add the following dimension values: - -| Code | Name | Dimension Value Type | -| --- | --- | --- | -| 10 |Americas |Begin-Total | -| 20 |North America |Standard | -| 30 |Pacific |Standard | -| 40 |South America |Standard | -| 50 |Americas, Total |End-Total | -| 60 |Europe |Begin-Total | -| 70 |EU |Standard | -| 80 |Non-EU |Standard | -| 90 |Europe, Total |End-Total | - -For the two main geographic areas, Americas and Europe, you add subcategories for regions by indenting the dimension values. This will let you report on sales or expenses in regions, and get totals for the larger geographic areas. You could also choose to use countries or regions as your dimension values, or counties or cities, depending on your business. -> [!NOTE] -> To set up a hierarchy, the codes must be in alphabetical order. This includes the codes of the dimension values that are provided in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -For **DEPARTMENT**, you add the following dimension values: - -| Code | Name | Dimension Value Type | -| --- | --- | --- | -| ADMIN |Administration |Standard | -| PROD |Production |Standard | -| SALES |Sales |Standard | - -With this set up, you then add your two dimensions as the two global dimensions in the **General Ledger Setup** window. This means that you can use AREA and DEPARTMENT as filters for general ledger entries, as well as on all reports and account schedules. Both global dimensions are also automatically available for use on entry lines and document headers as shortcut dimensions. - -## Using Dimensions -In a document such as a sales order, you can add dimension information for both an individual document line and the document itself. For example, in the **Sales Order** window, you can enter dimension values for the first two shortcut dimensions on the individual sales lines, and you can add more dimension information if you choose the **Dimensions** button. - -If you work in a journal instead, you can add dimension information to an entry in the same way, if you have set up shortcut dimensions as fields directly on journal lines. - -You can set up default dimensions for accounts or account types, so that dimensions and dimension values are filled in automatically. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[How to: Analyze Data by Dimensions](bi-how-analyze-data-dimension.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index aac22e30..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Learn About General Ledger and COA -description: Describes the general ledger, the chart of accounts, and account categories. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: analysis, history, track -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Understanding the General Ledger and the COA -The general ledger stores your financial data, and the chart of accounts shows the accounts that all general ledger entries are posted to. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a standard chart of accounts that is ready to support your business. - -## General Ledger Setup and General Posting Setup -The setup of the general ledger is at the core of financial processes because it defines how you post data. - -In the **General Ledger Setup** window, you specify how to handle certain accounting issues in your company, such as: - -* Invoice rounding details -* Address formats -* Financial reporting - -Similarly, in the **General Posting Setup** window, you specify how you want to set up combinations of general business and general product posting groups. Posting groups map entities like customers, vendors, items, resources, and sales and purchase documents to general ledger accounts. You fill in a line for each combination of business posting group and product posting group. For more information, see [Posting Group Setups](finance-posting-groups.md) - -## The Chart of Accounts -The chart of accounts shows all general ledger accounts. From the chart of accounts, you can do things like: - -* View reports that show general ledger entries and balances. -* Close your income statement. -* Open the G/L account card to add or change settings. -* See a list of posting groups that post to that account. -* View separate debit and credit balances for a single account - -You can add, change, or delete general ledger accounts. However, to prevent discrepancies, you can't delete a general ledger account if it's data is used in the chart of accounts. - -## Account Categories -You can personalize the structure of your financial statements by mapping general ledger accounts to account categories. - -The **G/L Account Categories** window shows your categories and subcategories, and the G/L accounts that are assigned to them. You can create new subcategories and assign those categories to existing accounts. - -You create a category group by indenting other subcategories under a line in the **G/L Account Categories** window. This makes it easy for you to get an overview, because each grouping shows a total balance. For example, you can create subcategories for different types of assets, and then create category groups for fixed assets versus current assets. - -You can specify whether the accounts in each subcategory must be included in specific types of reports. The account categories help define the layout of your financial statements. - -For example, the default balance statement has a subcategory for Cash under Current Assets. If you want the balance statement consider petty cash and checking, you can: - -1. Add two new subcategories. One for petty cash, and one for your checking account. -2. Specify the additional report definition **Cash Accounts** for these subcategories. -3. Indent them under the **Cash** subcategory. - -The next time you generate account schedules your balance statement will show a total balance for cash and two lines with balances for petty cash and the checking account. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up or Changing the Chart of Accounts](finance-setup-chart-accounts.md) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-handle-inventory-and-manufacturing-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-handle-inventory-and-manufacturing-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index aa3ade76..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-handle-inventory-and-manufacturing-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Handle Inventory and Manufacturing Costs - description: Although much of the cost accounting functionality is expressed in underlying processes with no user interaction, such as entry application and automatic cost adjustment, a number of fields, windows, and reports are aimed at users who directly or indirectly manage the cost of items or operations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/09/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Handling Inventory and Manufacturing Costs -Although much of the cost accounting functionality is expressed in underlying processes with no user interaction, such as entry application and automatic cost adjustment, a number of fields, windows, and reports are aimed at users who directly or indirectly manage the cost of items or operations. - - Assigning item charges to purchase documents is an example of an indirect cost accounting task. Updating the unit cost of assembly or production BOM item is an example of a more direct cost accounting task. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Periodically or automatically update the unit cost of one or multiple items to forward any cost changes from inbound entries, such as those for purchases or production output, to the related outbound entries, such as consumption or transfers.|[How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md)| -|Get insight into average cost dynamics to make pricing decisions or to track cost fluctuations caused by data entry errors.|[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md)| -|Create a manufacturing item's standard cost by entering the three cost elements: material cost, capacity cost, and subcontractor cost.|[About Calculating Standard Cost](finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md)| -|Calculate the unit cost of a BOM item based on the unit costs of its underlying components.|[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md)| -|Complete the costing life cycle of a produced item by adjusting the costs and reconciling the value entries with the general ledger.|[About Finished Production Order Costs](finance-about-finished-production-order-costs.md)| -|Change the value of an item in inventory or the value of one item ledger entry, such as a purchase transaction.|[How to: Revalue Inventory](inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md)| -|Manually undo an item application or reapply item ledger entries created by the program.|[How to: Remove and Reapply Item Ledger Entries](finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md)| -|Use the **Applies-from Entry** field in the item journal to manually create a fixed application between an inbound transaction and the original outbound transaction.|[How to: Close Open Item Ledger Entries Resulting from Fixed Application in the Item Journal](finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-budgets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-budgets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1a11c37d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-budgets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Creating Budgets -description: Describes hos to create budgets to forecast different financial activities and assign dimensions for business intelligence purposes. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: postpone -ms.date: 06/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Budgets -You can have multiple budgets for identical time periods by creating budgets with separate names. First, you set up the budget name and enter the budget figures. The budget name is then included on all the budget entries you create. - - When you create a budget, you can define four dimensions for each budget. These budget-specific dimensions are called budget dimensions. You select the budget dimensions for each budget from among the dimensions you have already set up. Budget dimensions can be used to set filters on a budget and to add dimension information to budget entries. For more information, see [Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md). - - Budgets play an important role in business intelligence, such as in financial statement based on account schedules that include budget entries or when analyzing budgeted versus actual amounts in the chart of accounts. For more information, see [Business Intelligence](bi.md). - - Budgets play an important role in business intelligence, such as in financial statement based on account schedules that include budget entries or when analyzing budgeted versus actual amounts in the chart of accounts. For more information, see [Business Intelligence](bi.md). - -In cost accounting, you work with cost budgets in a similar way. For more information, see [Creating Cost Budgets](finance-create-cost-budgets.md). - -## To create a new budget - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **G/L Budgets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit List** action, and then fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **Edit Budget** action. -4. At the top of the **Budget** window, fill in the fields as necessary to define what is displayed. - - Only entries that contain the budget name that you entered in the **budget Name** field are shown. Because the budget name has just been created, there are no entries that match the filter. Therefore, the window is empty. -5. To enter an amount, choose the relevant cell in the matrix. The **G/L Budget Entries** window opens. -6. Create a new line and fill in the **Amount** field. Close the **G/L Budget Entries** window. -7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have entered all of the budget amounts. - -> [!NOTE] -> On the **Filters** FastTab, you can filter the budget information by budget dimensions you have set up under the budget name. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md deleted file mode 100644 index a60f4c3b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Export SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries - description: Create a direct-debit collection, which holds information about the customer’s bank account, the affected sales invoices, and the direct-debit mandate. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dynamics Nav - How to Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File -To instruct the bank to transfer the payment amount from the customer’s bank account to your company’s account, you create a direct-debit collection, which holds information about the customer’s bank account, the affected sales invoices, and the direct-debit mandate. From the resulting direct-debit collection entry, you then export an XML file that you send or upload to your electronic bank for processing. Any payments that could not be processed by the bank will be communicated to you by your bank, and you must then manually reject the direct debit-collection entries in question. - -> [!NOTE] -> To collect payments using SEPA Direct Debit, the currency on the sales invoice must be EURO. - -### To create a direct-debit collection - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Direct Debit Collections**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Direct Debit Collections** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **Create Direct Debit Collection**. -3. In the **Create Direct Debit Collection** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Due Date**|Specify the earliest payment due date on sales invoices that you want to create a direct-debit collection for.| - |**To Due Date**|Specify the latest payment due date on sales invoices that you want to create a direct-debit collection for.| - |**Partner Type**|Specify if the direct-debit collection is made for customers of type **Company** or **Person**.| - |**Only Customers With Valid Mandate**|Specify if a direct-debit collection is created for customers who have a valid direct-debit mandate. **Note:** A direct-debit collection is created even if the **Direct Debit Mandate ID** field is not filled on the sales invoice.| - |**Only Invoices With Valid Mandate**|Specify if a direct-debit collection is only created for sales invoices if a valid direct-debit mandate is selected in the **Direct Debit Mandate ID** field on the sales invoice.| - |**Bank Account No.**|Specify which of your company’s bank accounts the collected payment will be transferred to from the customer’s bank account.| - |**Bank Account Name**|Specifies the name of the bank account that you select in the **Bank Account No.** field. This field is filled automatically.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - A direct-debit collection is added to the **Direct Debit Collections** window, and one or more direct-debit collection entries are created. - -### To export a direct-debit collection entry to a bank file -1. In the **Direct Debit Collections** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Direct Debit Collect. Entries**. -2. In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, select the entry that you want to export, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Create Direct Debit** File. -3. Save the export file to the location from where you send or upload it to your electronic bank. - - In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, the **Direct Debit Collection Status** field is changed to File Created. In the **SEPA Direct Debit Mandates** window, the **Debit Counter** field is updated with one count. - -If the exported file cannot be processed, for example because the customer is insolvent, you can reject the direct-debit collection entry. If the exported file is successfully processed by the bank, the due payments of the involved sales invoices are automatically collected from the involved customers. In that case you can close the collection. - -### To reject a direct-debit collection entry - -* In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, select the entry that was not successfully processed, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Reject Entry**. - - The value in the **Status** field in the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window is changed to **Rejected**. - -### To close a direct-debit collection -* In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, select the entry that was successfully processed, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Close Collection**. - - The related direct-debit collection is closed. - -You can now proceed to post receipts of payment for the involved sales invoices. You can do this as you typically post payment receipts, such as in the **Payment Registration** window, or you can post the related payment receipts directly from the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window. For more information, see [How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts](finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts](finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-defer-revenue-expenses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-defer-revenue-expenses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 01bed530..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-defer-revenue-expenses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Defer Revenues and Expenses -description: To recognize revenues and expenses in periods other than the period in which the transaction was posted, you can automatically defer or postpone them over a specified schedule. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: postpone -ms.date: 06/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Defer Revenues and Expenses -To recognize a revenue or an expense in a period other than the period in which the transaction was posted, you can use functionality to automatically defer revenues and expenses over a specified schedule. - -To distribute revenues or expenses on the involved accounting periods, you set up a deferral template for the resource, item, or G/L account that the revenue or expense will be posted for. When you post the related sales or purchase document, the revenue or expense are deferred to the involved accounting periods, according to a deferral schedule that is governed by settings in the deferral template and the posting date. - -## To set up a G/L account for deferral -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary to create a G/L account for deferred revenues. For more information, see [The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md). -4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create a new G/L account for deferred expenses. - -For both types of deferral, select **Balance Sheet** in the **Type** field, and name the accounts appropriately, such as "Unearned Income" for deferred revenues and "Unpaid Expenses" for deferred expenses. - -## To set up a deferral template -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Deferral Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. -4. In the **Calc. Method** field, specify how the **Amount** field for each period in the **Deferral Schedule** window is calculated. You can choose between the following options: - - * **Straight-Line**: The periodic deferral amounts are calculated according to the number of periods, distributed according to period length. - * **Equal Per Period**: The periodic deferral amounts are calculated according to the number of periods, distributed evenly on periods. - * **Days Per Period**: The periodic deferral amounts are calculated according to the number of days in the period. - * **User-Defined**: The periodic deferral amounts are not calculated. You must manually fill the **Amount** field for each period in the Deferral Schedule window. For more information, see the “To change a deferral schedule from a sales invoice” section. -5. In the **Period Desc.** field, specify a description that will be shown on entries for the deferral posting. You can enter the following placeholder codes for typical values, which will be inserted automatically when the period description is displayed. - - * %1 = The day number of the period posting date - * %2 = The week number of the period posting date - * %3 = The month number of the period posting date - * %4 = The month name of the period posting date - * %5 = The accounting period name of the period posting date - * %6 = The fiscal year of the period posting date - -Example: The posting date is 02/06/2016. If you enter “Expenses deferred for %4 %6”, then the description displayed will be "Expenses deferred for February 2016". - -## To assign a deferral template to an item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Deferral Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the item for which revenues or expenses must be deferred to the accounting periods when the item was sold or purchased. -3. In the **Default Deferral Template** field, select the relevant deferral template. - -## To change a deferral schedule from a sales invoice -> [!NOTE] -> The steps in this procedure are the same as when you change a deferral schedule, for expenses, from a purchase invoice. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a sales invoice for an item that has a deferral template assigned. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md). - - Notice that as soon as you enter the item (or resource or G/L account) on the invoice line, the **Deferral Code** field is filled with the code of the assigned deferral template. -3. Choose the **Deferral Schedule** action. -4. In the **Deferral Schedule** window, change settings on the header or values on the lines, for example to defer the amount to an additional accounting period. -5. Choose the **Calculate Schedule** action. -6. Choose the **OK** button. The deferral schedule is updated for the sales invoice. The related deferral template is unchanged. - -## To preview how deferred revenues or expenses will be posted to the general ledger -> [!NOTE] -> The steps in this procedure are the same as when you preview how expense deferrals are posted. - -1. In the **Sales Invoice** window, choose the **Preview Posting** action. -2. In the **Posting Preview** window, choose the **G/L Entry** action, and then choose the **Show Related Entries** action. - -G/L entries to be posted to the specified deferral account, for example, Unearned Income, are denoted by the description that you entered in the **Period Desc.** field in the deferral template, for example, "Expenses deferred for February 2016". - -## To review posted deferrals in the Sales Deferral Summary report -> [!NOTE] -> The steps in this procedure are the same as when you review the Purchasing Deferral Summary report. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Deferral Summary**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales Deferral Summary** window, in the **Balance as of** field, enter the date up to which you want to see deferred revenues. -3. Choose the **Preview** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-define-check-layouts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-define-check-layouts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 97831108..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-define-check-layouts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Specify the Layout of a Check -description: You can design and print your checks in different formats to conform with standards. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: print check, customize -ms.date: 04/24/2019 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Define Check Layouts -You can design your checks to conform with the standards set by the local authorities. Check images can be printed in English, French, or Spanish. - -Checks are designed to print in both the United States and Canadian check image formats in either a check-stub-check format or a stub-stub-check format. - -## To define check layouts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Selections Bank Account**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Report Selection - Bank Acc.** window, in the **Usage** field, select **Check**. -3. Select one of the following report IDs. - -| Report ID | Report Name | Description | -| --- | --- | --- | -| 1401 |Check |This is the default report. | -| 10411 |Check (Stub/Stub/Check) |This report is designed to print checks in a stub/stub/check format. | -| 10412 |Check (Stub/Check/Stub) |This report is designed to print checks in a stub/check/stub format. | -| 10413 |Three Checks per Page |This report is designed to print three checks on each page. | - -When you have set up check layouts, you can print checks from the **Payment Journal** window. For more information, see [How to: Work with Checks](payables-how-work-checks.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Completing Period-End Processes](year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 20bfb09e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Apply Entries in Different Currencies -description: You can apply ledger entries in multiple currencies, for example, if you sell in one currency and receive payment in another. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: multiple currencies, payment, reconcile -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enable Application of Ledger Entries in Different Currencies -If you purchase from a vendor in one currency and submit payment in another currency, you can apply the payment to the purchase. - -Likewise, if you sell to a customer in one currency and receive payment in another currency, you can apply the payment to the sales invoice. - -The following procedure describes how to set this up for vendor ledger entries in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. The setup is similar for customer ledger entries in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. - -## To enable application of vendor ledger entries in different currencies -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Appln. between Currencies** field, select one of the following options. - -| Option | Description | -| --- | --- | -| None |Application between currencies is not allowed. | -| EMU |Application between EMU currencies is allowed. | -| All |Application between all currencies is allowed. | - -## To set up G/L accounts for currency application rounding differences -If you apply entries in different currencies, you must set up the general ledger accounts to which you want to post rounding differences. - -> [!NOTE] -> You must set up the general ledger accounts before you complete the task. For more information, see [Understanding the General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Debit Curr. Appln. Rndg. Acc.** and **Credit Curr. Appln. Rndg. Acc.** fields, enter the relevant general ledger accounts to post rounding differences. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **Debit Curr. Appln. Rndg. Acc.** and **Credit Curr. Appln. Rndg. Acc.** fields, enter the relevant general ledger accounts to post rounding differences. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md deleted file mode 100644 index eb1e0adc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Import Payroll Transactions -description: To manage salary, you import and post financial transactions from your payroll provider to the general ledger, using a payroll extension such as Ceridian or Quickbooks. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: Ceridian, Quickbooks, salary -ms.date: 06/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dynamics Nav - How to Import Payroll Transactions -To account for salary payments and related transactions, you must import and post financial transactions made by your payroll provider to the general ledger. To do this, you first import a file that you receive from the payroll provider into the **General Journal** window. Then you map the external accounts in the payroll file to the relevant G/L accounts. Lastly, you post the payroll transactions according to the account mapping. - -> [!NOTE] -> To use this functionality, an extension for payroll import must be installed and enabled. The Ceridian Payroll and the Quickbooks Payroll File Import extensions are pre-installed in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md). - -## To import a payroll file -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the relevant general journal batch, choose the **Import Payroll Transactions** action. An assisted setup guide opens. -3. Follow the steps in the **Import Payroll Transactions** window. - - > [!TIP] - > In the step about mapping the external payroll records to your G/L accounts, the mappings that you make will be remembered next time the same records are imported. This will save you time as you do not have to manually fill in the **Account No.** field in the general journal every time you have imported recurring payroll transactions. - - When you choose the **OK** button in the assisted setup guide, the **General Journal** window is filled with lines representing the transactions that the payroll file contains and with the relevant accounts prefilled in the **G/L Account** fields according to mappings you made in the guide. -4. Edit or post the journal lines as for any other general ledger transactions. For more information, see [How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9e312067..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create accounting periods and fiscal years -description: You must open a fiscal year and define accounting periods, before you can post in a fiscal year. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accounting year, fiscal period -ms.date: 07/17/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Open a New Fiscal Year and Create Accounting Periods -Before you can post in a fiscal year, you must open the fiscal year and define its accounting periods. - -For many companies, the fiscal year does not coincide with the calendar year. Fiscal periods can be measured in other units of time, such as months or quarters. You can use the **Create Fiscal Year** window to set up the accounting periods that suit your business needs. However, - -## To open a new fiscal year -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Accounting Periods** window, choose the **Create Year** action. -3. Fill in the fields to define the structure of the fiscal year. - - The fiscal year is typically 12 periods of one month each, but you can also divide it in other ways. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The accounting periods are added to the page with the **Starting Date** and **Name** fields filled in. The default names are based on the name of the month from the starting date, but you can change the name. After the last period in the fiscal year, an additional accounting period is inserted with the **New Fiscal Year** check box selected. - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Specify Posting Periods](finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md) -[How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-positive-pay.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-positive-pay.md deleted file mode 100644 index 67bc6c21..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-positive-pay.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Export Positive Pay Files -description: You can ensure your bank only clears validated checks and amounts by exporting a Positive Pay file that contains vendor and payment information. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: check, clearing -ms.date: 06/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export a Positive Pay file -To make sure that your bank only clears validated checks and amounts, you can export a Positive Pay file that contains vendor information, check number, and payment amount, which you send to the bank for reference when you process payments. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is preconfigured to support Positive Pay files for Bank of America and City Bank. - -## To set up a bank account for Positive Pay -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the bank that you want to use Positive Pay for. -3. In the **Positive Pay Export Code** field, enter POSPAYBANK. -4. Close the window. - -## To export a Positive Pay file -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account that you want to export a Positive Pay file for. -3. Choose **Positive Pay Export** action. - - The **Positive Pay Export** window opens displaying payments that have been made for the bank account since the last upload date, as shown in the **Last Upload Date** and **Last Upload Time** fields. -4. In the **Cutoff Upload Date** field, specify a date before which payments are not included in the exported file. -5. Choose the **Export** action. -6. In the **Export File** window, choose the **Save** button, and then save the file to a convenient location. -7. Upload the file to your electronic bank site. -8. Write down or copy the confirmation number that is displayed when the file upload is successful. - -To view exported Positive Pay records - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account that you want to view Positive Pay export records for. -3. Choose the **Positive Pay Entries** action. - - In the **Positive Pay Entries** window, you can see all the Positive Pay export records for the bank account. -4. In the **Confirmation Number** field, enter, for each export record, the confirmation number that you receive when the file upload to the bank is successful. -5. To view the related payment lines, choose the **Positive Pay Entry Details** action. - -To reexport Positive Pay files - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the bank account that you want to reexport Positive Pay files for. -3. Choose the **Positive Pay Entries** action. -4. Select the line for the Positive Pay export file that you want to reexport. -5. In the **Positive Pay Entries** window, choose the **Reexport Positive Pay to File** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1950f0b8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Record expenses or income directly in G/L -description: For business activities that are not represented by a document in, such as smaller expenses or cash receipts, you can create the related transactions by posting journal lines in the General Journal window. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: direct posting, general ledger -ms.date: 06/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger -Most financial transactions are posted to the general ledger through dedicated business documents, such as purchase invoices and sales orders. For business activities that are not represented by a document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as smaller expenses or cash receipts, you can create the related transactions by posting journal lines in the **General Journal** window. - -A typical use of the general journal is to post employees' expenditure of own money during business activities, for later reimbursement. For more information, see [How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md). - -General journals post financial transactions directly to general ledger accounts and other accounts, such as bank, customer, vendor, and employee accounts. Posting with a general journal always creates entries on general ledger accounts. This is true even when, for example, you post a journal line to a customer account, because an entry is posted to a general ledger receivables account through a posting group. You can personalize your version of a general journal by setting up a journal batch or template. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -Unlike for entries that are posted with documents, which require a credit memo process, you can correctly reverse entries that are posted with the general journal. For more information, see [How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md). - -## To post a transaction directly to a general ledger account -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant general journal batch. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). -3. On a new journal line, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Repeat step 3 for all the separate transactions that you want to post. - - > [!TIP] - > If you want to enter multiple transaction lines above one balance-account line, for example, for one bank account, then select the **Suggest Balancing Amount** check box on the line for your batch in the **General Journal Batches** window. Then the **Amount** field on the balance-account line is automatically prefilled with the value that is required to balance the transactions. -5. Choose the **Post** action to record the transactions on the specified G/L accounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md) -[How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md deleted file mode 100644 index ded89084..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Record and Reimburse Employees' Business-Related Expenses -description: Post employees' expenses with the general journal to the employee's account and later post a payment to the employee's bank account to reimburse for the business-related expense. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: reimbursement -ms.date: 06/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports transactions for employee in a similar way as for vendors. Accordingly, employee posting groups exist to make sure that employee ledger entries are posted to the relevant accounts in the general ledger. - -> [!NOTE] -> Employee transactions can be posted in the local currency only. Reimbursement payments to employees do not support discounts and payment tolerances. - -If employees spend their own money during business activities, you can post the expense to the employee's account. Then you can reimburse the employee by making a payment to the employee's bank account, similarly to how you pay vendors. - -## To record an employee's expense -You post employees' expenses in the **General Journal** window. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant general journal batch. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). -3. On a new journal line, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Repeat step 3 for all the expenses that the employee has incurred. - - > [!TIP] - > If you want to enter multiple expense lines above one balance-account line for the employee's bank account, then select the **Suggest Balancing Amount** check box on the line for your batch in the **General Journal Batches** window. Then the **Amount** field on the balance-account line is automatically prefilled with the value that is required to balance the expenses. -5. Choose the **Post** action to record the expenses on the employee's account. - -## To reimburse an employee -You reimburse employees by posting payments to their bank account in the **Payment Journal** window. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant payment journal batch. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. For more information, see [Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md). -4. Alternatively, choose the **Suggest Employee Payment** action to automatically insert journal lines for pending employee reimbursements. -5. Choose the **Post** action to register the reimbursement. - -## To reconcile reimbursements with employee ledger entries -You apply employee payments to their related open employee ledger entries in the same way as you do for vendor payments, for example in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, based on the related bank statement entries. For more information, see [Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md). Alternatively, you can apply manually in the **Employee Ledger Entries** window. For more information, see the related [How to: Reconcile Vendor Payments Manually](payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-report-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-report-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7c1a8ea1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-report-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Submit VAT Reports to Tax Authorities -description: Learn how to prepare reports that lists VAT from sales during a period, or from sales and purchases, and submit the report to a tax authority. -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: VAT, tax, report, EC sales list, statement -ms.date: 07/17/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# How To: Report VAT to a Tax Authority -This topic describes the reports in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] that you can use to submit information about value-added tax (VAT) amounts for sales and purchases to tax authorities in your region. - -You can use the following reports : - -* The **EC Sales List** European Community (EC) Sales List report lists the value added tax (VAT) amounts that you have collected for sales to VAT-registered customers in the European Union (EU) countries/regions. -* The **VAT Return** report includes VAT for sales and purchases to customers in all countries/regions that use VAT. - -If you want to view a complete history of VAT entries, every posting that involves VAT creates an entry on the **VAT Entries** page. These entries are used to calculate your VAT settlement amount, such as your payment and refund, for a specific period. To view VAT entries, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Entries**, and then choose the related link. - -## About the EC Sales List report -In the EU, all companies that sell goods and services to VAT-registered customers, including customers in other European Union (EU) countries/regions, must submit an electronic version of the European Community (EC) Sales List report in XML format through their local tax authority's website, for example in UK, Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs (HMRC). The EC Sales List report works only for countries/regions in the EU. - -The report includes one line for each type of transaction with the customer, and displays the total amount for each type of transactions. There are three types of transactions that the report can include: - -* B2B Goods -* B2B Services -* B2B Triangulated Goods - -B2B goods and services specify whether you sold a good or a service, and are controlled by the **EU Service** setting in the VAT posting setup. B2B Triangulated Goods indicate whether you engaged in trade with a 3rd party, and are controlled by the **EU 3-Party Trade** setting on sales documents, such as sales orders, invoices, credit memos, and so on. - -After the tax authority reviews your report, they will send an email to the contact person for your company. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the contact person is specified on the **Company Information** page. Before you submit the report, make sure that a contact person is chosen. - -## About the VAT Return report -Use this report to submit VAT for sales and purchase documents, such as purchase and sales orders, invoices, and credit memos. The information in the report is in the same format as on the declaration form from the customs and tax authorities. - -VAT is calculated based on the VAT posting setup and the VAT posting groups that you have set up. - -For the VAT return, you can specify the entries to include: - -* Submit open transactions only, or open and closed. For example, this is useful when you prepare your final annual VAT return. -* Submit only entries from the specified periods, or also include entries from previous periods. This is useful for updating a VAT return that you have already submitted, for example, if a vendor sends you a late invoice. - -## To connect to your tax authority's web service -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides service connections to tax authority websites. For example, if you are in the UK, you can enable the **GovTalk** service connection to submit the EC Sales List and VAT Return reports electronically. If you want to submit the report manually, for example by entering your data on the tax authority's website, this is not required. - -To report VAT to a tax authority electronically, you need to connect [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to the tax authority's web service. This requires that you set up an account with your tax authority. When you have an account, you can enable a service connection that we provide in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Connections**, and then choose appropriate link. -2. Fill in the required fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - > [!NOTE] - > It's a good idea to test your connection. To do this, choose the **Test Mode** check box, then prepare and submit your VAT report as described in the _To prepare and submit a VAT report_ section. While in Test Mode, the service tests whether the tax authority can receive your report, and the status of the report will indicate whether the test submission was successful. It's important to remember that this is not an actual submission. To submit the report for real, you must clear the **Test Mode** check box, and then repeat the submission process. - -## To set up VAT reports in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Report Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. To let users change and resubmit this report, choose the **Modify Submitted Reports** check box. -3. Choose the number series to use for each report. - -## To prepare and submit a VAT report -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **EC Sales List** or **VAT Return**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose **New**, and then fill in the required fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. To generate the content of the report, choose the **Suggest Lines** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > For the EC Sales List report, you can review the transactions included in the report lines before you submit the report. To do that, choose the line, and then choose the **Show VAT Entries** action. -4. To validate and prepare the report for submission, choose the **Release** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] validates whether the report is set up correctly. If the validation fails, the errors display under **Errors and Warnings** so that you know what to fix. Typically, if the message is about a missing setting in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can choose the message to open the page that contains the information to correct. -5. To submit the report, choose the **Submit** action. - -After you submit the report, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] monitors the service and keeps a record of your communications. The **Status** field indicates where the report is in the process. For example, when the authorities process your report, the status of the report changes to **Succeeded**. If the tax authority found mistakes in the report you submitted, the status of the report will be **Failed**. You can view the errors under **Errors and Warnings**, correct them, and then submit the report again. To view a list of all your EC Sales List reports, go to the **EC Sales List Reports** page. - -## Viewing communications with your tax authority -In some countries/regions, you exchange messages with the tax authority when you submit reports. You can view the first and the last message you sent or received by choosing the **Download Submission Message** and **Download Response Message** actions. - -## Submitting VAT reports manually -If you use another method to submit the report, for example by exporting the XML and uploading it to a tax authority website, afterward you can choose **Mark as Submitted** to close the reporting period. When you mark the report as released, it becomes non-editable. If you must change the report after you mark it as released, you must reopen it. - -## VAT settlement -Periodically, you must remit the net VAT to the tax authorities. If you need to settle VAT frequently, you can run the **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement** batch job to close the open VAT entries and transfer purchase and sales VAT amounts to the VAT settlement account. - -When you transfer VAT amounts to the settlement account, the purchase VAT account is credited, and the sales VAT account is debited with the amounts calculated for the specified period. The net amount is credited or debited, if the purchase VAT amount is larger, to the VAT settlement account. You can post the settlement immediately or print a test report first. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you use the **Calc. and Post VAT Settlement** batch job, if you don't specify a **VAT Bus. Posting Group** and a **VAT Prod. Posting group**, entries with all business posting groups and product posting group codes are included. - -## Configuring your own VAT reports -You can use the EC Sales List report out-of-the-box, however, you can also create your own reports. This requires that you create a few codeunits. If you need help with that, contact a Microsoft Partner. - -The following table describes the codeunits that you must create for your report. - -| Codeunit | What it must do | -|----|-----| -|Suggest Lines| Fetch information from the VAT Entries table, and display it in lines on the VAT report.| -|Content | Control the format of the report. For example, whether it is XML or JSON. The format to use depends on the requirements of your tax authority's web service. | -|Submission | Control how, and when, you submit the report based on the requirements of your tax authority. | -|Response Handler | Handle the return from the tax authority. For example, it might send an email message to your company's contact person. | -|Cancel | Send a cancellation of a VAT report that was submitted earlier to your tax authority. | - -> [!NOTE] -> When you create codeunits for the report, pay attention to the value in the **VAT Report Version** field. This field must reflect the version of the report that is, or was, required by the tax authority. For example, you might enter **2017** in the field to indicate that the report conforms to the requirements that were in place that year. To find the current version, contact your tax authority. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up to Calculations and Posting Methods for Value-Added Tax](finance-setup-vat.md) -[How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases](finance-work-with-vat.md) -[Set Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 11399ff9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Undo a Posting by Posting a Reversing Entry -description: If you have made an erroneous posting in the general journal, then you can use the Reverse Transaction function to undo the posting with a correct audit trail. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: reimbursement -ms.date: 08/03/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reverse Postings -To undo an erroneous journal posting, you select the entry and create a reverse entry (entries identical to the original entry but with opposite sign in the amount field) with the same document number and posting date as the original entry. After reversing an entry, you must make the correct entry. - -You can only reverse entries that are posted from a general journal line. An entry can only be reversed once. - -For more information about posting from a general journal, see [How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md). - -If you have made an incorrect negative quantity posting, such as a purchase order with the wrong number of items and posted it as received but not invoiced, then you can undo the posting. - -If you have made an incorrect positive quantity posting, such as a purchase return order with the wrong number of items and posted it as shipped but not invoiced, then you can undo the posting. - -## To reverse the journal posting of a general ledger entry -You can reverse entries from all **Ledger Entries** windows. The following procedure is based on the **General Ledger Entries** window. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Entries**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the entry that you want to reverse, and then choose the **Reverse Transaction** action. Note that is must originate from a journal posting. -3. In the **Reverse Transaction Entries** window, select the relevant entry, and then choose the **Reverse** action. -4. Choose the **Yes** button on the confirmation message. - -## To undo a quantity posting on a posted purchase receipt - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Purchase Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the posted receipt that you want to undo. -3. Select the line or lines that you want to undo. -4. Choose **Undo Receipt** action. - - A corrective line is inserted under the selected receipt line. - - If the quantity was received in a warehouse receipt, then a corrective line is inserted in the posted warehouse receipt. - - The **Quantity Received** and **Qty. Rcd. Not Invoiced** fields on the related purchase order are set to zero. - -## To undo and then redo a quantity posting on a posted return shipment - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Return Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the posted return shipment that you want to undo. -3. Select the line or lines you want to undo. - -4. Choose the **Undo Return Shipment** action. - - A corrective line is inserted in the posted document, and the **Return Qty. Shipped** and **Return Shpd. Not Invd.** fields on the return order are set to zero. - - Now go back to the purchase return order to redo the posting. - -5. In the **Posted Return Shipment** window, take a note of the number in the **Return Order No.** field. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. -7. Open the return order in question, and then choose the **Reopen** action. -8. Correct the entry in the **Quantity** field and post the purchase return order again. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4875465a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up and Report Intrastat -description: Learn how to set up Intrastat reporting features, and how to report trade with companies in other EU countries/regions. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: electronic document, Intrastat, trade, EU, European Union -ms.date: 08/15/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How To: Set Up and Report Intrastat -All companies in the European Union must report their trade with other EU countries/regions. You must report the movement of goods to the statistics authorities in your country/region every month, and the report must be delivered to the tax authorities. This is referred to as Intrastat Reporting. You use the **Intrastat Journal** page to complete periodic Intrastat reports. - -## Required and Optional Setups -Before you can use the Intrastat journal to report Intrastat information, there are several things you must set up: - -* **Intrastat journal templates**: You must set up the Intrastat journal templates and batches you will use. Because Intrastat is reported monthly, you must create 12 Intrastat journal batches based on the same template. -* **Commodity codes**: Customs and tax authorities have established numerical codes that classify items and services. You specify these codes on items. -* **Transaction nature codes**: Countries and regions have different codes for types of Intrastat transactions, such as ordinary purchase and sale, exchange of returned goods, and exchange of non-returned goods. Set up all of the codes that apply to your country/region. You use these codes on sales and purchase documents, and when you process returns. -* **Transport methods**: There are seven, one-digit codes for Intrastat transport methods. **1** for sea, **2** for rail, **3** for road, **4** for air, **5** for post, **7** for fixed installations, and **9** for own propulsion (for eample, transporting a car by driving it). Dynamics NAV does not require these codes, however, we recommend that the descriptions provide a similar meaning. - -Optionally, you can also set up: - -* **Transaction specifications**: Use these to supplement the descriptions from the transaction types. -* **Areas**: Use these to supplement information about countries and regions. -* **Entry/exit points**: Use these to specify the locations where you ship or receive items to or from other countries/regions. Heathrow Airport is an example of an entry or exit point. You enter entry or exit points on sales and purchase documents on the **Foreign Trade** FastTab. This information will also be copied from the item entries when you create the Intrastat journal. - -### To set up Intrastat templates and batches -The Intrastat batch jobs include only item entries, and not general ledger entries. If you have general ledger entries that qualify for Intrastat reporting, you must enter them manually. For example, if you purchase a computer from another EU country or region, the computer is not placed in inventory, but is posted to a general ledger account. You must manually enter this type of entry in the Intrastat journal. - -You can export the entries to a file that you can send to your Intrastat authorities. You can also print a report, manually enter the information on the forms from your authorities, and then submit the information. - -> [!Note] -> We recommended that you set up an Intrastat journal batch for each month. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. Create a template for each Intrastat form you use. -3. To create batches, choose the **Navigate** tab, and then choose **Batches**. -4. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. Create a template for each Intrastat form you use.. - -> [!Note] -> In the **Statistics Period** field, enter the statistics period as a four-digit number, where the first two digits represent the year and the next two digits represent the month. For example, enter 1706 for June, 2017. - -### To set up commodity codes -All items that you buy or sell must have a commodity code. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Commodity Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. To assign a commodity code to an item, go to the **Item Card** page, expand the **Costs & Posting** FastTab, and then enter the code in the **Commodity Code** field. - -### To set up transaction nature codes -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transaction Nature Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!Tip] -> If you frequently use a particular transaction nature code, you can make it the default. To do this, go to the **Intrastat Setup** page, and choose the code. - -### To set up transport methods -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transport Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To Report Intrastat -After you fill in the Intrastat journal, you can print the **Checklist** report to make sure that that all information in the journal is correct. Afterward, you can print an Intrastat report as a form, or create a file to submit to the tax authority in your country/region. - -### To fill in Intrastat journals -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal** and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Intrastat Journal** page, in the **Batch Name** field, choose the relevant journal batch, and then Choose the **OK** button. -3. Choose the **Suggest Lines** action. The **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields will already contain the dates specified for the statistics period on the journal batch. -4. In the **Cost Regulation %** field, you can enter a percentage to cover transport and insurance. If you enter a percentage, the content of the **Statistical Value** field in the journal is proportionally higher. -5. Choose **OK** to start the batch job. - -The batch job retrieves all the item entries in the statistics period and inserts them as lines in the Intrastat journal. You can edit the lines if needed. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The batch job retrieves only the entries that contain a country/region code for which an Intrastat code has been entered on the **Countries/Regions** page. Therefore, you must enter Intrastat codes for the country/region codes for which you will run the batch job. - -### How to: Report Intrastat on a form or a file -To get the information that is required on the Intrastat form from the statistical authorities, you must print the **Intrastat – Form** report. Before you can do this, you must prepare the Intrastat journal and fill it in. If you have both sales and purchase transactions, you must complete a separate form for each type, so that you must print the report two times. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Intrastat Journal** page, choose the relevant journal batch in the **Batch Name** field. -3. If you have not already done this, fill in the journal manually or choose **Suggest Lines**. -4. Choose the **Prints Intrastat Journal** action. -5. On the **Intrastat Jnl. Line** FastTab, add a **Type** filter and then specify whether this is a **Receipt** or a **Shipment**. -6. Choose **Send to** to print the report. - -### How to: Report Intrastat in a file -You can submit the Intrastat report as a file. Before creating the file, you can print a checklist that contains the same information that will be in the file. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Intrastat Journal** window, select the relevant journal batch in the **Batch Name** field. -3. If you have not already done this, fill in the journal manually or by choosing **Suggest Lines**. -4. Choose the **Create File** action. -5. In the batch job window, Choose the **OK** button. -6. Choose **Save**. -7. Browse to the location where you want to save the file, enter the file name, and then choose **Save**. - -## How to: Reorganize Intrastat Journals -Because you must submit an Intrastat report every month, and you create a new journal batch for each report, you will eventually have many journal batches. The journal lines are not deleted automatically. You may want to reorganize the journal batch names periodically. You do this by deleting the journal batches that you no longer need. The journal lines in these batches are also deleted. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intrastat Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. To view the options, choose the **Batch Name** field. -3. Choose the journal batches to deleted, and then choose **Delete**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Financial Management](finance.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6e361432..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Specify Posting Periods -description: You specify posting start and end dates to set up when users can post to the general ledger. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer -manager: edupont -editor: '' - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: user setup -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to Specify Posting Periods -Use posting periods to specify when users can post to the general ledger. - -## To specify posting periods -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, define the period by entering dates in the **Allow Posting From** and **Allow Posting To** fields. - -> [!NOTE] -> These posting periods apply to the company and to all users. To allow for exceptions, you can define different posting periods for specific users in the **User Setup** window. These posting periods overrule those specified in the **General Ledger Setup** window. For more information, see the "To set up user time constraints" section in [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Completing Period-End Processes](year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md deleted file mode 100644 index bb980a8a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Close Open Item Ledger Entries Resulting from Fixed Application in the Item Journal - description: You can use the **Applies-from Entry** field in the **Item Journal** window to create a fixed application between an inbound transaction and the original outbound transaction. For example, to correct the outbound transaction or to process its return. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/09/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Close Open Item Ledger Entries Resulting from Fixed Application in the Item Journal -You can use the **Applies-from Entry** field in the **Item Journal** window to create a fixed application between an inbound transaction and the original outbound transaction. For example, to correct the outbound transaction or to process its return. For more information, see Applies-from Entry. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Fixed applications made in this manner only apply the cost, not the quantity. Accordingly, the posted positive item ledger entry will not close the applied outbound entry and will itself remain open. This also applies when you post a fixed application for a positive entry to a negative entry that has not been closed by a regular positive entry, then both the negative and the positive entries will remain open. -> -> This also means that you cannot close an inventory period if such an entry exists. - -The following procedure shows how to close such entries by performing two corrective postings in the item journal. - -## To close open item ledger entries that result from a fixed application in the item journal - -1. Use the **Applies-from Entry** field to post a positive adjustment with the corresponding quantity. This closes the original negative entry with a fixed application. -2. Use the **Applies-to Entry** field to post a negative adjustment. This closes the original corrective positive entry with a fixed application. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[ How to: Remove and Reapply Item Ledger Entries](finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md) - [How to: Process Sales Returns and Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md) - [Setting Up Inventory Valuation and Costing](finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-correct-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-correct-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5f619225..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-correct-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Correct Prepayments - description: You can make a correction to an order after you have posted a prepayment invoice for the order. You can add new lines to an order after issuing a prepayment, and then you can post another prepayment invoice, but you cannot delete a line from an order after a prepayment has been invoiced for the line. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Correct Prepayments -You can make a correction to an order after you have posted a prepayment invoice for the order. You can add new lines to an order after issuing a prepayment, and then you can post another prepayment invoice, but you cannot delete a line from an order after a prepayment has been invoiced for the line. - -## To correct a prepayment -The following procedure shows how to issue a prepayment credit memo to cancel all invoiced prepayments for a sales order. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant sales order. -3. Choose the **Prepayment** action, and then choose the **Post Prepayment Credit Memo** action or the **Post and Print Prepmt. Cr. Memo** action. -4. In the **Sales Credit Memo** window, proceed to correct the relevant entries, as for any sales credit memo. For more information, see [How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md). - - > [!NOTE] - > To Reduce the amount in the **Line Amount** field, you must first increase the prepayment percentage on the line so that the value in the **Prepmt. Line Amount** field is not decreased below the value in the **Prepmt. Amt. Inv.** field. - -5. To make a prepayment invoice for any new lines in the sales credit memo, choose the **Prepayment** action, and then choose the **Post Prepayment Invoice** action or the **Post and Print Prepmt. Invoice** action. -6. To issue an additional prepayment invoice, increase the prepayment amount on one or more lines and post the prepayment invoice. A new invoice will be created for the difference between the prepayment amounts invoiced and the new prepayment amounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Invoicing Prepayments](finance-invoice-prepayments.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index ce55f439..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Prepayment Invoices - description: Learn how to handle situations where you require prepayment, or your vendor does. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Prepayment Invoices -If you require your customers to submit payment before you ship an order to them, or if your vendor requires you to submit payment before they ship an order to you, you can use the prepayment functionality. - -After you create a sales or purchase order, you can create a prepayment invoice. You can use the default percentages for each sales or purchase line, or you can adjust the amount as necessary. For example, you can specify a total amount for the entire order. - -The following procedure describes how to invoice a prepayment for a sales orders. The steps are similar for purchase orders. - -## To create a prepayment invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new sales order. For more information, see [How to: sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - - On the **Prepayment** FastTab, the **Prepayment %** field will be filled in automatically if there is a default prepayment percentage on the customer card. You can change the contents of the field. The prepayment percentage is only copied from the header to lines that do not copy the default prepayment percentage from the item. - - If the **Compress Prepayment** field is selected, lines will be combined on the invoice if: - - They have the same general ledger account for prepayments as determined by the general posting setup. - - They have the same dimensions. - - Leave the field blank if you want to specify a prepayment invoice with one line for each sales order line that has a prepayment percentage. - -3. Fill in the sales lines. - - If default prepayment percentages have been set up for your items, they are automatically copied to the **Prepayment %** field on the line. Otherwise, the prepayment percentage is copied from the header. You can change the contents of the **Prepayment %** field on the line. -4. If you want to apply one prepayment percentage to the entire order, change the **Prepayment %** field on the header after filling in the lines. -5. To view the total prepayment amount, choose the **Statistics** action. - - If you want to adjust the total prepayment amount for the order, you can change the contents of the **Prepayment Amount** field in the **Sales Order Statistics** window. - - If the **Prices Including VAT** field is selected, the **Prepayment Amount Incl. VAT** field is editable. - - If you change the contents of the **Prepayment Amount** field, the amount will be distributed proportionately between all lines, except those that have **0** in the **Prepayment %** field. -6. To print a test report before posting the prepayment invoice, choose the **Prepayment** action, and then choose the **Prepayment Test Report** action. -7. To post the prepayment invoice, choose the **Prepayment** action, and then choose the **Post Prepayment Invoice** action. - - To post and print the prepayment invoice, choose the **Post and Print Prepmt. Invoice** action. - -You can issue additional prepayment invoices for the order. To do this, increase the prepayment amount on one or more lines, adjust the document date if necessary, and post the prepayment invoice. A new invoice will be created for the difference between the prepayment amounts invoiced so far and the new prepayment amount. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are located in North America, you cannot change the prepayment percentage after the prepayment invoice has been posted. This is prevented in the North American version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] because the calculation of sales tax will otherwise be incorrect. - - When you are ready to post the rest of the invoice, post it as you would post any invoice, and the prepayment amount will automatically be deducted from the amount due. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Invoicing Prepayments](finance-invoice-prepayments.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-and-export-to-a-bank-file.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-and-export-to-a-bank-file.md deleted file mode 100644 index 06b36c06..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-and-export-to-a-bank-file.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: SEPA Direct Debit Collection - description: Create a direct-debit collection and export an XML file that you send or upload to your electronic bank for processing. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: direct-debit, collection, payment, sepa - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File -To instruct the bank to transfer the payment amount from the customer’s bank account to your company’s account, you create a direct-debit collection, which holds information about the customer’s bank account, the affected sales invoices, and the direct-debit mandate. From the resulting direct-debit collection entry, you then export an XML file that you send or upload to your electronic bank for processing. Any payments that could not be processed by the bank will be communicated to you by your bank, and you must then manually reject the direct debit-collection entries in question. - -> [!NOTE] -> To collect payments using SEPA Direct Debit, the currency on the sales invoice must be EURO. - -### To create a direct-debit collection -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Direct Debit Collections**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Direct Debit Collections** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **Create Direct Debit Collection**. -3. In the **Create Direct Debit Collection** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**From Due Date**|Specify the earliest payment due date on sales invoices that you want to create a direct-debit collection for.| - |**To Due Date**|Specify the latest payment due date on sales invoices that you want to create a direct-debit collection for.| - |**Partner Type**|Specify if the direct-debit collection is made for customers of type **Company** or **Person**.| - |**Only Customers With Valid Mandate**|Specify if a direct-debit collection is created for customers who have a valid direct-debit mandate. **Note:** A direct-debit collection is created even if the **Direct Debit Mandate ID** field is not filled on the sales invoice.| - |**Only Invoices With Valid Mandate**|Specify if a direct-debit collection is only created for sales invoices if a valid direct-debit mandate is selected in the **Direct Debit Mandate ID** field on the sales invoice.| - |**Bank Account No.**|Specify which of your company’s bank accounts the collected payment will be transferred to from the customer’s bank account.| - |**Bank Account Name**|Specifies the name of the bank account that you select in the **Bank Account No.** field. This field is filled automatically.| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - A direct-debit collection is added to the **Direct Debit Collections** window, and one or more direct-debit collection entries are created. - -### To export a direct-debit collection entry to a bank file -1. In the **Direct Debit Collections** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Direct Debit Collect. Entries**. -2. In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, select the entry that you want to export, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Create Direct Debit** File. -3. Save the export file to the location from where you send or upload it to your electronic bank. - - In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, the **Direct Debit Collection Status** field is changed to File Created. In the **SEPA Direct Debit Mandates** window, the **Debit Counter** field is updated with one count. - -If the exported file cannot be processed, for example because the customer is insolvent, you can reject the direct-debit collection entry. If the exported file is successfully processed by the bank, the due payments of the involved sales invoices are automatically collected from the involved customers. In that case you can close the collection. - -### To reject a direct-debit collection entry -* In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, select the entry that was not successfully processed, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Reject Entry**. - - The value in the **Status** field in the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window is changed to **Rejected**. - -### To close a direct-debit collection -* In the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window, select the entry that was successfully processed, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Close Collection**. - - The related direct-debit collection is closed. - -You can now post receipts of payment for the involved sales invoices. You can do this as you typically post payment receipts, such as in the **Payment Registration** window, or you can post the related payment receipts directly from the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window. For more information, see [How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts](finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts](finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-delete-cost-budget-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-delete-cost-budget-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index e05968b9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-delete-cost-budget-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Delete Cost Budget Entries - description: You use the **Delete Cost Budget Entries** batch job to cancel cost budget entries from the cost budget register. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Delete Cost Budget Entries -You use the **Delete Cost Budget Entries** batch job to cancel cost budget entries from the cost budget register. - -To prevent any gaps in the cost budget entries and cost register entries, you cannot delete a single entry or a batch of entries in the middle of the list of register entries. - -### To delete a cost budget entry - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Cost Budget Entries**, and then choose the related link. - - The **To Register No.** field contains the last register entry number and cannot be changed. - - You can use the **From Register No.** field to select a register entry number from which the deletion should begin. -2. Choose the **OK** button to delete the selected cost budget entries. - -> [!NOTE] -> To avoid an accidental deletion of cost budget entries, you can close register entries by marking the lines as **Closed** in the **Closed** field in the **Cost Budget Registers** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[Creating Cost Budgets](finance-create-cost-budgets.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index be77d4ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Post Inventory Costs to the General Ledger -description: How to manage the physical products that you trade in, for example, handling the stock in your warehouse. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: warehouse, stock -ms.date: 07/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Inventory Costs with the General Ledger -When you post inventory transactions, such as sales shipments, purchase invoices, or inventory adjustments, the changed item costs are recorded in item value entries. To reflect this change of inventory value in your financial books, the inventory costs are automatically posted to the related inventory accounts in the general ledger. For each inventory transaction that you post, the appropriate values are posted to the inventory account, adjustment account, and COGS account in the general ledger. - -Automatic cost posting is defined by the **Automatic Cost Posting** field in the **Inventory Setup** window. - -Even though inventory costs are automatically posted to the general ledger, it is still necessary to ensure that the costs of goods are forwarded to the related outbound sales transaction, especially in situations where you sell goods before you invoice the purchase of those goods. This is referred to as cost adjustment. Item costs are automatically adjusted when you post item transactions, but you can also adjust item costs manually. For more information, see [How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md). - -## To post inventory costs manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") ico, enter **Post Inventory Cost to G/L**, and then choose the related link. -2. Post inventory costs to the general ledger manually by running the batch job. When you run this batch job, general ledger entries are created on the basis of value entries. You can post the entries so that they are summarized per posting group. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you run this batch job, you might encounter errors having to do with missing setup or incompatible dimension setup. If the batch job encounters errors in the dimension setup, it overrides these errors and uses the dimensions of the value entry. For any other errors, the batch job skips posting the value entries and lists them at the end of the report in a section titled “Skipped Entries.” To post these entries, you must fix the errors. - -To see a list of errors before running the posting batch job, you can run the **Post Invt. Cost to G/L - Test** report. The test report lists all the errors encountered during a test posting. You can then fix the errors, and run the inventory cost posting batch job without skipping any entries. - -If you would like to simply get an overview of what values could be posted to the general ledger without actually performing the posting, you can run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job without actually posting the values to the general ledger. You do this by clearing the check mark from the **Post** field on the request page. This way, when you run the batch job, the report is produced showing the values that are ready to be posted to the general ledger, but they are not posted. - -## To audit the reconciliation between the inventory ledger and the general ledger -The **Inventory - G/L Reconciliation** window provides the following: - -- Exposes reconciliation differences by comparing what is recorded in G/L and what is recorded in the inventory ledger (value entries). -- Displays unreconciled cost amounts in the value entries in the inventory ledger as if they were mapped to corresponding inventory-related accounts in G/L and compares those to the totals actually recorded in the same accounts in G/L. -- Reflects the double entry structure of G/L by visually presenting data as such. For example, a COGS entry has a corresponding inventory entry. -- Lets users drill down and see the entries that make up the cost amounts. -- Includes filters to narrow the analysis by date, item, and location. -- Explains reasons for reconciliation differences in informative messages. - - -The **Name** column on the far left in the grid lists the various G/L account types that are associated with inventory. - -The **Inventory**, **Inventory (Interim)**, and **WIP Inventory** columns show the invoiced, non-invoiced, and WIP totals of each G/L account type. These are calculated from value entries, that is, they are projected onto the G/L account types where they will end when they are eventually posted to G/L. - -The **Total** column shows the sum (in bold font) of the value entry amounts in the three inventory columns. - -The **G/L Total** column shows the amounts (in bold font) for each G/L account type that exists in G/L. These are calculated from G/L entries, that is, they represent inventory costs already posted to G/L. - -The **Difference** column represents the difference between the value in the **G/L Total** and **Total** fields. - -In the top of the **Inventory - G/L Reconciliation** window, you can enter filters to limit, for example, the period of time for which you want information. - -If you select the **Show Warning** check box and if there are any discrepancies between the inventory totals and G/L totals, the program shows messages in the **Warning** field of the grid that explain the discrepancy. If you choose the Warning field, the program gives you more information on what the warning means. - -When you have entered all relevant filters, choose the **Show Matrix** action. The data is calculated and the matrix window appears. - -On the far left column in the grid, you see the various general ledger account types that are associated with inventory. The grid then shows the invoiced, non-invoiced (interim), and WIP inventory totals for each of these account types. These totals are calculated from the value entries. - -The next columns show the totals for the same account types calculated from the general ledger entries. - -Choose the amount in any of the total fields to see the inventory report entries that were used to calculate the totals. For inventory totals, the inventory report entries are the sums of the value entries for the items. For the G/L totals, the inventory report entries are the sums from the general ledger entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 07d2a11b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-post-sepa-direct-debit-payment-receipts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payments - description: When a direct debit collection is successfully processed by your bank, you can proceed to post receipt of the payment for the involved sales invoices. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post SEPA Direct Debit Payment Receipts -When a direct debit collection is successfully processed by your bank, you can proceed to post receipt of the payment for the involved sales invoices. For more information, see [How to: Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File](finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md). - -You can post the payment receipt directly from the **Direct Debit Collections** window or the **Direct Debit Collect. Entries** window. Alternatively, you can relay the work to another user by preparing the related journal lines. - -## To post a direct-debit payment receipt from the Direct Debit Collections window -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Direct Debit Collections**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a line for a direct debit collection that has been exported to a bank file and successfully processed by the bank. For more information, see [How to: Create SEPA Direct Debit Collection Entries and Export to a Bank File](finance-how-create-sepa-direct-debit-collection-entries-export-bank-file.md). -3. Choose the **Post Payment Receipts** action. -4. In the **Post Direct Debit Collection** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Direct Debit Collection No.**|Specify the direct debit collection that you want to post payment receipt for.| - |**General Journal Template**|Specify which general journal template to use for posting the payment receipt, such as the template for cash receipts.| - |**General Journal Batch Name**|Specify which general journal batch to use for posting the payment receipt.| - |**Create Journal Only**|Select this check box if you do not want to post the payment receipt when you choose the **OK** button. The payment receipt will be prepared in the specified journal and will not be posted until someone posts the journal lines in question.| - -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) - [Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-print-remittance-advice.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-print-remittance-advice.md deleted file mode 100644 index 08a3ace7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-print-remittance-advice.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Dynamics Nav How to Print Remittance Advice - description: You can help your vendors perform reconciliations by printing remittance advice before you post a payment journal, and after you post a payment. - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 10/26/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# How to Print Remittance Advice -You can print remittance advice before posting a payment journal and after posting a payment. This advice displays vendor invoice numbers, which helps vendors to perform reconciliations. - -## To print remittance advice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Journal** window, select the payment for which remittance advice must be printed. -3. Choose the **Print Remittance Advice** action. -4. In the **Remittance Advice - Journal** batch job, on the **Gen. Journal Line** FastTab, choose the appropriate filters. - - >[!Note] - > You can filter using the vendor's external document number to match payments with invoices. - -5. On the **Vendor** FastTab, choose the appropriate filters. -6. Choose **Print** to print the report, or choose **Preview** to view it now. - -## Using Remittance Advice Reports -The following table describes the reports that you can use with remittance advice: - -|Report|Description| -|----|----| -|Remittance Advice - Journal Report|This report indicates which documents are included in the payment. For general journal lines, you can specify the journal template and journal batch from which the remittance advices will be printed, the date of the first activity to print, and filter on a document number. For vendors, you can enter the vendor numbers to include in the report. | -|Remittance Advice - Entries Report| This report indicates which documents are included in the payment. You define the report contents by setting filters. You can set additional fields on the tab by choosing the **Field** field. For vendor ledger entries, you can specify the vendors to include in the report, the date of the first activity to print, the currency, and the entry number to include. | - -> [!Note] -> The Remittance Advice - Journal Report does not support cross currency application scenarios or payment tolerances. For more information, see [How to: Enable Application of Ledger Entries in Different Currencies](finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md). - -> [!Tip] -> For more information about how to work with reports, see [Viewing Test Reports before Posting](ui-how-view-test-reports-posting.md), [Work with Reports](ui-work-report.md), and [Searching, Filtering, and Sorting Data](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to Dynamics NAV](across-get-started.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8ab9258..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-remove-and-reapply-item-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Remove and Reapply Item Entries - description: You can view and manually change certain item application entries that are created automatically during inventory transactions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/10/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Remove and Reapply Item Ledger Entries -In the **Application Worksheet** window, you can view and manually change certain item application entries that are created automatically during inventory transactions. - -When you post a transaction where items are moved in or out of inventory, an item application is created between each inventory increase and inventory decrease. These applications determine the flow of costs from the goods that are received in inventory to the cost of goods going out of inventory. Because of the way the unit cost is calculated, an incorrect item application could lead to a skewed average cost and a skewed unit cost. For more information, see [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md). - -The following scenarios might require that you undo an application or reapply item ledger entries: - -- You have forgotten to make a fixed application. -- You have made an incorrect fixed application. -- You have to return an item to which a sale has already been applied. - -If possible, use a document to reapply an item ledger entry. For example, if you must make a purchase return of an item to which a sale has already been applied, you can reapply by creating and posting the purchase return document by using the correct application in the **Appl.-to Item Entry** field on the purchase return line. You can use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function or the **Copy Document** function in the purchase return document to make this easier. When you post the document, the item ledger entry is automatically reapplied. For more information, see [How to: Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md). - -If you cannot use a document to reapply, such as when you have to correct a fixed application, then use the **Application Worksheet** window to correct an application. - -> [!Warning] -> The following are important considerations to remember when you are working with the application worksheet: -> - You should not leave application entries unapplied for long periods of time because other users cannot process the items until you reapply the application entries or close the **Application Worksheet** window. Users who try to perform actions that involve a manually unapplied application entry receive the following error message: “You cannot perform this action because entries for item XXX are unapplied in the Application Worksheet by user XXX.” -> - You should only reapply item ledger entries during nonworking hours to avoid conflicts with other users who are posting transactions with the same items. -> - When you close the application worksheet, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] performs a check to make sure that all entries are applied. For example, if you remove a quantity application but do not create a new application, and then you close the application worksheet, a new application is created. This helps keep the cost intact. However, if you remove a fixed application, a new fixed application is not automatically created when you close the worksheet. You must do this manually by creating a new application in the worksheet. -> - It is possible to remove applications from more than one entry at a time in the application worksheet. However, because applying entries affects the set of entries that are available for application, you cannot create an application for more than one entry at a time. -> - The application worksheet cannot make an application in the following situation: If there is not enough quantity on stock to apply, the application worksheet cannot make an application when you are trying to apply an inventory decrease entry without item tracking information to an inventory increase entry with item tracking information. - -## To remove an item application by using the Application Worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Application Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. The **Application Worksheet** window opens displaying existing item ledger entries for all items. -3. Enter filters on the **General** FastTab to make it easier to find the item ledger entry for which you want to change the application. -4. Select the item ledger entry, and then choose the **Applied Entries** action. The **View Applied Entries – Applied Entries** window opens to show the item ledger entry or entries that are currently applied to the selected entry. -5. Select the item ledger entry for which you want to remove the application. -6. Choose the **Remove Application** action. This removes the item application entry that links the two item ledger entries and moves it to the **View Applied Entries – Unapplied Entries** window. -7. Close the **View Applied Entries – Applied Entries** window. - - The **Remaining Quantity** field of the two item ledger entries are increased by the quantity that has been unapplied. The removed item ledger entry is now available for reapplication in the **View Applied Entries – Unapplied Entries** window. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You should not leave application entries unapplied for longer periods of time because other users cannot process the affected items until you reapply the application entries or close the **Application Worksheet** window. The following error message is displayed if you try to perform actions that involve a manually unapplied application entry: -> -> **You cannot perform this action because entries for item \ are unapplied in the Application Worksheet by user \.** - -## To reapply an item application by using the Application Worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Application Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. The **Application Worksheet** window opens displaying existing item ledger entries for all items. -3. To reapply entries that were removed since the worksheet was opened, select the item ledger entry that you want to reapply. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Reapply**. - - > [!NOTE] - > This reapplication to the original balance also occurs automatically when you close the **Application Worksheet** window. -4. To apply an available open item ledger entry to another entry, select the item ledger entry that you want to apply. Choose the **Unapplied Entries** action. The **View Applied Entries – Unapplied Entries** window opens. -5. Select one or more item ledger entries that you want to apply to the entry selected in the **Application Worksheet** window, and then choose the **OK** button. - - An item application entry is created between the two item ledger entries. The **Remaining Quantity** fields of the two entries are reduced by the applied quantity. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you have chosen to make an application that would create an infinite loop in the cost adjustment process, then the application that you proposed is not made. This can occur when the original entries created negative stock. The application is not made. Therefore, you must select a different entry for the application. -6. If the **Automatic Cost Adjustment** field in the **Inventory Setup** is set to **Always**, then the cost adjustment batch job is automatically run after you make a reapplication. Otherwise, run the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** batch job to make sure that all costs are up to date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Close Open Item Ledger Entries Resulting from Fixed Application in the Item Journal](finance-how-to-close-open-item-ledger-entries-resulting-from-fixed-application-in-the-item-journal.md) - [How to: Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 66bb43bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Allocation Source and Targets - description: Each allocation consists of an allocation source and one or more allocation targets. The allocation source defines which costs will be allocated. The allocation targets determine where the costs will be allocated. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Allocation Source and Targets -Each allocation consists of an allocation source and one or more allocation targets. The allocation source defines which costs will be allocated. The allocation targets determine where the costs will be allocated. - -## To set up cost allocations -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cost Allocation**, and then chose the related link. -2. In the **Cost Allocation** window, choose the **Edit** action. -3. Enter an ID for the allocation source in the **ID** field. -4. Define a level as a number between 1 and 99 in the **Level** field. The allocation posting will follow the order of the levels. -5. Enter a cost type to define which cost types will be allocated in the **Cost Type Range** field. If all costs for a cost type are allocated, no range is defined. -6. Enter a cost center together with costs to be allocated in the **Cost Center Code** field. -7. Enter a cost object together with costs to be allocated in the **Cost Object Code** field. Most often, this field stays empty, because cost objects are rarely allocated to other cost objects. -8. Enter a cost type in the **Credit to Cost Type** field. The costs that are allocated will be credited to the source cost type. The credit posting will be posted to the cost type given here. -9. On the **Lines** FastTab, define the allocation targets. On the first line, enter a cost type in the **Target Cost Type** field. It defines which cost type the allocation is debited to. -10. On the first line, enter the first allocation target in the **Target Cost Center** field or **Target Cost Object** the field. These two fields define which cost center or cost object the allocation is debited to. You can only fill in one of these fields, but not both. -11. Repeat the same steps on the second line to set up additional allocation targets. -12. After you have set up the allocation target and sources, choose the **Calculate Allocation Key** action to calculate the total share values. - -> [!NOTE] -> Select the **Blocked** check box to deactivate the allocation setup. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) - [Setting Filters for Dynamic Allocation Bases](finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md) - [Scenario Example: Defining Static Allocations Based on Allocation Ratio](finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio.md) - [Scenario Example: Defining Dynamic Allocations Based on Items Sold](finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md) - [Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) - [Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cash-customers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cash-customers.md deleted file mode 100644 index e70bd642..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cash-customers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Cash Customers - description: This topic describes the steps to set up customer who pays in cash. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/11/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Cash Customers -You cannot create an invoice without a customer number. This is true, even if you make a cash sale and do not have anything to record in a customer account. - -## To set up a cash customer -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new **Customer** card. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md). -3. In the **No.** field, enter **Cash**, for example. -4. In the **Name** field, enter **Cash Sale**, for example. -5. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, fill in the **Customer Posting Group** and the **Gen. Bus. Posting Group** fields. - - Now you have set up a customer that contains sufficient information for invoicing. - -> [!NOTE] -> You may have chosen a posting group that is also used for domestic credit sales. If you want to maintain separate data on cash sales, for example, with a special sales or receivables account, you can set up an extra posting group for this purpose. -> -> You must enter a number for a receivables account for the posting group, even though the balance in this account will always be 0 after you post an invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md) -[Finance](finance.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers.md deleted file mode 100644 index ea508f11..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Cost Centers - description: Cost centers are departments that are responsible for costs and income. The chart of cost centers is similar to the dimension information for the general ledger. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Cost Centers -Cost centers are departments that are responsible for costs and income. The chart of cost centers is similar to the dimension information for the general ledger. You can set up the chart of cost centers in the following ways: - -- Transfer dimension values in the general ledger to the chart of cost centers. You can make any necessary adjustments after the transfer. -- Create a new chart of cost center that is independent of the general ledger or add a new cost center to an existing chart of cost center. You must create each cost center individually. - -## To transfer dimension values in the general ledger to the chart of cost centers -1. Set up a dimension to be the cost center dimension in the **Update Cost Acctg. Dimensions** window. Only the values from this dimension are transferred. -2. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Centers**, and then choose the related link. -3. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Get Cost Centers from Dimension** to transfer dimension values to the chart of cost centers. The function transfers the dimension values that you defined in step 1. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can set up the **Align Cost Center Dimension** field to define a one-way synchronization of dimension values from the general ledger to the chart of cost centers. You cannot define a synchronization of the chart of cost centers to dimension values from the general ledger. - -The chart of cost centers now contains all specified dimension values from the general ledger and includes titles and subtotals. - -## To create new cost centers in the Chart of Cost Centers window -You can set up and maintain cost centers in either the **Cost Center Card** card or in the **Chart of Cost Centers** window. In this procedure, you set up cost centers in the **Chart of Cost Centers** window. - -1. Open the **Chart of Cost Centers** window in edit mode. -2. In the **Code** field, enter the cost center code. All cost centers must have a code. -3. In the **Name** field, enter the cost center name. -4. Choose the drop-down arrow in the **Line Type** field to specify the purpose of the cost center. - - - For cost centers of the **Total** type, you must fill in the **Totaling** field. Use the **or** operator, which is a vertical line (**|**) to set ranges of cost centers. - - For cost centers of the **End-Total** line type, this field is filled in automatically when you use the indent function. -5. Fill in the **Sorting Order** and **Cost Subtype** fields. -6. Choose the next empty line to create a new cost center, and then repeat steps 2 through 5. -7. After you have set up all the cost centers, choose the **Indent Cost Centers** action. Choose the **Yes** button. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you have entered definitions in the **Totaling** fields for **End-Total** cost centers before you run the indent function, then you must enter them again. The function overwrites the values in all **End-Total** fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) -[Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) -[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects.md deleted file mode 100644 index aae15a93..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Cost Objects - description: Learn how to set up cost objects, which are similar to dimensions for the general ledger. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Cost Objects -Cost objects are projects, products, or services of a company. The chart of cost objects is similar to the dimension information for the general ledger. You can set up the chart of cost objects in the following ways: - -* Transfer dimension values in the general ledger to the chart of cost objects. You can make any necessary adjustments after the transfer. -* Create a new chart of cost object that is independent of the general ledger or add a new cost object to an existing chart of cost objects. You must create each cost object individually. - -## To transfer dimension values from the general ledger to the chart of cost objects -1. Set a dimension to be the cost object dimension in the **Update CA Dimensions** window. Only the values from this dimension are transferred. -2. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Objects**, and then choose the related link. -3. Choose the **Get Cost Objects from Dimension** action to transfer dimension values to the chart of cost objects. The function transfers the dimension values that you defined in step 1. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can set up the **Align Cost Object Dimension** field to define a one-way synchronization of dimension values from the general ledger to the chart of cost objects. You cannot define a synchronization of the chart of cost objects to dimension values from the general ledger. - -The chart of cost objects now contains all specified dimension values from the general ledger and includes titles and subtotals. - -## To create new cost objects in the Chart of Cost Objects window -You can set up and maintain cost objects in either the **Cost Object Card** card or in the **Chart of Cost Objects** window. In this procedure, you set up cost objects in the **Chart of Cost Objects** window. - -1. Open the **Chart of Cost Objects** window in edit mode. -2. In the **Code** field, enter the cost object code. All cost objects must have a code. -3. In the **Name** field, enter the cost object name. -4. Choose the drop-down arrow in the **Line Type** field to specify the purpose of the cost object. - - * For cost objects of the **Total** line type, fill in the **Total From/To** field. Use the **or** operator, which is a vertical line (**|**), to set ranges of cost objects. - * For cost objects of the **End-Total** line type, this field is filled in automatically when you use the indent function. -5. Fill in the **Sorting Order** field. -6. Chose the next empty line to create a new cost object, and then repeat steps 2 through 5. -7. After you have set up all the cost objects, choose the **Indent Cost Objects** action. Choose the **Yes** button. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you have entered definitions in the **Total From/To** fields for **End-Total** cost objects before you run the indent function, then you must enter them again. The function overwrites the values in all **End-Total** fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[Defining Cost Centers and Cost Objects for Chart of Accounts](finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts.md) -[Balances Between Cost Type, Cost Center, and Cost Object](finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object.md) -[Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) -[Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) -[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-types.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-types.md deleted file mode 100644 index e5e5be60..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-cost-types.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up a Chart of Cost Types - description: Chart of cost types are similar to the chart of accounts in the general ledger. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: cost types, general ledger, accounts - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Cost Types -The chart of cost types is similar to the chart of accounts in the general ledger. You can set up the chart of cost types in the following ways: - -- Structure the chart of cost types similar to the income statement accounts in the general ledger chart of accounts. Then, you can transfer the general ledger chart of accounts to the chart of cost types. You can make any necessary adjustments after the transfer. -- Create new chart of cost types or add new cost types to existing chart of cost types. You must create each new cost type individually. - -## To transfer the general ledger chart of accounts to the chart of cost types -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Types**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Cost Types from Chart of Accounts** action. In the dialog box, choose the **Yes** button to confirm the transfer. The function uses the chart of accounts to create a chart of cost types. - - The chart of cost types now contain all income statement accounts in the general ledger and include headings and subtotals. You can change the chart of cost types, as necessary. For example, you can delete duplicate existing cost types. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The **Register Cost Types in Chart of Accounts** function updates the relationship between the chart of accounts and the chart of cost types. The **No.** field is filled and verified to make sure that each general ledger account is related to only one cost type. The function runs automatically before transferring general ledger entries to cost accounting. - -## To set up new cost types in the Chart of Cost Types window -1. Open the **Chart of Cost Types** window in edit mode. -2. Fill in the fields as described as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - > [!NOTE] - > You can set up and maintain cost types in either the **Cost Type Card** window or in the **Chart of Cost Types** window. In this procedure, you set up cost types in the **Chart of Cost Types** window. - -3. After you have created all cost types, choose the **Indent Cost Types** action. In the dialog box, choose the **Yes** button. -4. Link the new cost type to the corresponding general ledger account. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > If you have entered definitions in the **Totaling** fields for the line type of **End-Total** before you run the **Indent Cost Types** function, then you must enter the definitions again because the function overwrites the values in all **End-Total** fields. - -## To update cost types -1. In the **Cost Accounting Setup** window, select if you want the chart of cost types to be automatically updated when the chart of accounts is changed. -2. In the **Align G/L Account** field, you can choose from the following options. - -- **No Alignment** - There is no corresponding change in the chart of cost types when you change the chart of accounts. -- **Automatic** - A corresponding change is made in the chart of cost types when you change the chart of accounts. -- **Prompt** - A message is displayed asking if you want to make a corresponding change in the chart of cost types when you change the chart of accounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[Defining the Relationship Between Cost Types and General Ledger Accounts](finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md) -[Defining Cost Centers and Cost Objects for Chart of Accounts](finance-defining-cost-centers-and-cost-objects-for-chart-of-accounts.md) -[Balances Between Cost Type, Cost Center, and Cost Object](finance-balances-between-cost-type-cost-center-and-cost-object.md) -[Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) -[Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) -[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates.md deleted file mode 100644 index a8ebbdaa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Multiple Interest Rates - description: You can calculate finance charges with multiple interest rates for a specific period. The interest calculation is similar for all financial charges, with variation only in the rate of interest for a specific period. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 12/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Multiple Interest Rates -Multiple interest rates are used for different periods for delayed payments in trade transactions. For example, a government specifies the maximum interest to be levied for a consumer. This interest rate can be changed twice a year on 01 January and 01 July. The interest rate between businesses (B2B) is agreed by the parties and there is no limit to that customer group. The announced rate is usually four percent more than the normal bank interest. - -When you create finance charge terms and reminder terms, for delayed payment penalty, you can specify multiple interest rates so that the penalty fee is calculated from different interest rates in different periods. For more information, see How to: Collect Outstanding Balances. For more information, see [How to: Collect Outstanding Balances](receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md). - -## To set up multiple interest rates -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Finance Charge Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Finance Charge Terms** window, select the required finance term, and then choose the **Interest Rates** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminder Terms**, and then choose the related link. -6. In the **Reminder Terms** window, select the required reminder term, and then choose the **Levels** action. -7. In the **Reminder Levels** window, select the **Calculate Interest** field. - -When you issue a finance charge memo, the memo shows the finance charges with multiple interest rates for a specific time period. The memo also contains the contact details of the customer, the company issuing the memo, the additional amount, and the total amount. The opening entry on the memo is displayed in bold. The finance charges are calculated with multiple interest rates for a specific time period and are printed after the opening entry of the memo. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Collect Outstanding Balances](receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md deleted file mode 100644 index bd653de7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set up SEPA credit transfer - description: Learn how to set up SEPA credit transfer in Dynamics NAV. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: sepa, credit, transfer, payment, - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up SEPA Credit Transfer -From the **Payment Journal** window, you can export payments to a file for upload to your electronic bank for processing of the related money transfers. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports the SEPA Credit Transfer format, but in your country/region, other formats for electronic payments may be available. - -To enable export of a bank file formats that are not supported out of the box in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can set up a data exchange definition by using the data exchange framework. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). - -Before you can process payment electronically by exporting payment files in the SEPA Credit Transfer format, you must perform the following setup steps: - -* Set up the bank account in question to handle the SEPA Credit Transfer format -* Set up vendor cards to process payments by exporting files in the SEPA Credit Transfer format -* Set up the related general journal batch to enable payment export from the **Payment Journal** window -* Connect the data exchange definition for one or more payment types with the relevant payment method or methods - -### To set up a bank account for SEPA Credit Transfer -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card of the bank account from which you will export payment files in the SEPA Credit Transfer format. -3. On the **Transfer** FastTab, in the **Payment Export Format** field, choose **SEPADD**. -4. In the **SEPA CT Msg. ID No. Series** field, choose a number series from which numbers are assigned to SEPA credit transfer entries. -5. Make sure the **IBAN** field is filled. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Currency Code** field must be set to **EUR**, because SEPA credit transfers can only be made in the EURO currency. - -### To set up a vendor card for SEPA Credit Transfer -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card of the vendor whom you will pay electronically by export payment files in the SEPA Credit Transfer format. -3. On the **Payment** FastTab, in the **Payment Method Code** field, choose **BANK**. -4. In the **Preferred Bank Account** field, choose the bank to which the money will be transferred when it is processed by your electronic bank. - - The value in the **Preferred Bank Account** field is copied to the **Recipient Bank Account** field in the **Payment Journal** window. - -### To set the payment journal up to export payment files -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the payment journal that you use to process payments by exporting files in the SEPA Credit Transfer format. -3. In the **Batch Name** field, choose the drop\-down button. -4. In the **General Journal Batches** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit List**. -5. On the line for the payment journal that you will use to export payments, select the **Allow Payment Export** check box. - -### To connect the data exchange definition for one or more payment types with the relevant payment method or methods -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Payment Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Methods** window, select the payment method that is used to export payments from, and then choose the **Pmt. Export Line Definition** field. -3. In the **Pmt. Export Line Definitions** window, select the code that you specified in the **Code** field on the **Line Definitions** FastTab in step 4 in the “To describe the formatting of lines and columns in the file” section in the [How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md) procedure. - - The direct-debit mandate is automatically inserted in the **Direct Debit Mandate ID** field when you create a sales invoice for the customer that you selected in step 2. For more information, see [How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md deleted file mode 100644 index a4995135..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-direct-debit.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set up SEPA Direct Debit -description: Learn how to set up SEPA Direct Debit in Dynamics NAV. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 08/21/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up SEPA Direct Debit -From the **Direct Debit Collections** window, you can export instructions to your electronic bank to perform a direct debit collection from the customer’s bank account to your bank account. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports the SEPA direct debit format, but in your country/region,other formats for electronic payments may be available. - -To enable export of a bank file formats that are not supported out of the box in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] , you can set up a data exchange definition by using the data exchange framework. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md). - -Before you can process customer payments electronically by exporting direct debit instructions in the SEPA Direct Debit format, you must perform the following setup steps: - -* Set up the export format of the bank file that instructs your bank to perform a direct debit collection from the customer’s bank account to your bank account. -* Set up the customer’s payment method. -* Set up the direct-debit mandate that reflects your agreement with the customer to collect their payments in a certain agreement period. - -### To set up your bank account for SEPA direct debit -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the bank account that you want to use for direct debit. -3. On the **Transfer** FastTab, in the **SEPA Direct Debit Export Format** field, choose the option for SEPA direct debit. - -### To set up the customer’s payment method for SEPA direct debit -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Payment Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Set up a payment method. Fill in the direct debit\-specific fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Direct Debit**|Specify if the payment method is for SEPA direct debit collection.| - |**Direct Debit Pmt. Terms Code**|Specify the payment terms, such as DON’T PAY, that are displayed on sales invoices that are paid with SEPA direct debit to indicate to the customer that the payment will be collected automatically. Alternatively, leave the field empty.| - - > [!NOTE] - > Do not enter a value in the **Bal. Account No.** field. - -4. Choose the **OK** button to close the **Payment Methods** window. -5. In the **Search** box, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -6. Open the customer card for the customer that you want to set up for SEPA direct debit collection. -7. Choose the **Payment Method Code** field, and then select the payment method code that you specified in step 3. -8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all customers that you want to set up for SEPA direct debit collection. - -#### To set up the direct-debit mandate that represents the customer agreement -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the customer that you want to set up for SEPA direct debits. -3. Choose the **Bank Accounts** action. -4. In the **Customer Bank Account List** window, select the customer bank account that will use direct debits, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Direct Debit Mandates**. -5. In the **SEPA Direct Debit Mandates** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Field | Description | - |--------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Customer Bank Account Code** | Specifies the bank account from which direct\-debit payments are collected. This field is filled automatically. | - | **Valid From** | Specify the date when the direct\-debit mandate starts. | - | **Valid To** | Specify the date when the direct\-debit mandate ends. | - | **Date of Signature** | Specify the date when the customer signed the direct\-debit mandate. | - | **Sequence Type** | Specify if the agreement covers multiple (**Recurring**) or a single (**One Off**) direct debit collection. | - | **Expected Number of Debits** | Specify how many direct debit collections you expect to make. This field is only relevant if you selected **Recurring** in the **Sequence Type** field. | - | **Debit Counter** | Specifies how many direct debit collections have been made using this direct\-debit mandate. This field is automatically updated. | - | **Blocked** | Specify that direct debit collections cannot be made using this direct\-debit mandate. | - - -6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all customers that you want to set up for SEPA direct debits. - - The direct-debit mandate is automatically inserted in the **Direct Debit Mandate ID** field when you create a sales invoice for the customer that you selected in step 2. For more information, see [How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) -[How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-settle-purchase-invoices-promptly.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-settle-purchase-invoices-promptly.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8f879015..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-settle-purchase-invoices-promptly.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Settle Purchase Invoices Promptly - description: If you need to pay the vendor by cash or check, you can have the necessary posting done when you post the invoice. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Settle Purchase Invoices Promptly -If you need to pay the vendor by cash or check, you can post the payment when you post the invoice. - -### To settle purchase invoices promptly -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Home** tab, choose **New**. -3. To pay either in cash or by bank transfer, enter the number of the general ledger cash account or the bank account in the **Bal. Account No.** field. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The **Bal. Account Type** and **Bal. Account No.** fields are not included in the standard layout of the invoice header. In order to post the payment of an invoice, you must first insert them with the design facilities. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you frequently pay purchase invoices in cash, it is a good idea to set up a specific payment method with a balancing account and enter this method in the **Payment Method** field on the vendor card. The balancing account number is inserted automatically on the invoice header every time you create a new invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index d5895733..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Transfer General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries - description: You can transfer general ledger entries to cost entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Transfer General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries -You can transfer general ledger entries to cost entries. - -Before you run the process for transferring general ledger entries to cost entries, you must prepare the transfer to avoid manual correction posting. - -## To prepare the transfer - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cost Accounting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cost Accounting Setup** window, verify that the **Starting Date for G/L Transfer** field is set to the correct value. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Cost Types**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **Cost Type Card** window, verify that the **G/L Account Range** field is linked correctly for each cost type to take entries from the general ledger. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -6. For each relevant general ledger account, in the **G/L Account Card** window, verify that the **Cost Type No.** field is linked correctly to a cost type. For more information, see [Defining the Relationship Between Cost Types and General Ledger Accounts](finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md). -7. Verify that all relevant general ledger entries have dimension values that correspond to a cost center and a cost object. - -## To transfer general ledger entries to cost entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transfer GL Entries to CA**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Yes** button to start the transfer. The process transfers all general ledger entries that have not already been transferred. - - During the transfer, the process creates connections in the entries in the **Cost Entry** table and the **Cost Register** table. This makes it possible to trace the source of cost entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Criteria for Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md) - [Automatic Transfer and Combined Entries](finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries.md) - [Results of the Transfer](finance-results-of-the-transfer.md) - [Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md) - [Defining the Relationship Between Cost Types and General Ledger Accounts](finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 531ce963..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Update Standard Costs -description: You must periodically update the standard costs of components and roll the new costs up to the parent item. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 08/09/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Update Standard Costs -You must periodically update the standard costs of components and roll the new costs up to the parent item. The process typically consists of the following four steps: - -1. Update costs at the component and capacity levels. For more information, see the **Suggest Item Standard Cost** batch job. -2. Consolidate and roll up the component and capacity costs to calculate the total manufacturing or assembly cost of the items. -3. Implement the standard costs that are entered when you run the previous batch jobs. The standard costs do not take effect until they are implemented. For more information, see Implement Standard Cost Changes. -4. Implement the changes to update the **Unit Cost** field on the item card and perform inventory revaluation. For more information, see [How to: Revalue Inventory](inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md). - -For more information, see [About Calculating Standard Cost](finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md). -## To update standard costs -1. Run the **Adjust Cost-Item Entries** batch job. -2. Run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job. -3. Open the **Standard Cost Worksheet** and use one or more of the following functions: - - 1. Run the **Suggest Item Standard Cost** batch job. - 2. Review the results and make changes as necessary. - 3. Run the **Suggest Capacity Standard Cost** batch job. - 4. Review the results and make changes as necessary. - 5. Run the **Roll Up Standard Cost** batch job. - 6. Review the results and make changes as necessary. - 7. Run the **Implement Standard Cost Changes** batch job. -4. Review and post the **Revaluation Journal** window, which has been populated with entries from the previous steps in this process. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[About Calculating Standard Cost](finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md) - [Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [[Finance](finance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6150eb4c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Work with Inventory Periods - description: You can control the timeframe in which people can post post changes to inventory by defining inventory periods. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: inventory, periods - ms.date: 08/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Inventory Periods -Inventory periods define a period of time in which you can post changes to inventory. An inventory period is defined by the date on which it ends, or the ending date. When you close an inventory period, you cannot post any changes to inventory, either expected or invoiced, before this ending date. You cannot post any new values to inventory before the ending date. If you have open item entries in the closed period, meaning positive quantities that have not yet been applied to outbound transactions, you can still apply outbound quantities to these entries, even if the period is closed. - -The following sections describe how to: - -* Create inventory periods. -* Close inventory periods. -* Reopen inventory periods. - -## To create an inventory period -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Periods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new line. -3. In the **Ending Date** field, enter the last date in the inventory period that you want to define. When the period is closed, you will not be able to post inventory changes before this date. -4. Enter a descriptive name in the **Name** field. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Closing Inventory Periods -The **Closed** field indicates whether or not the inventory period is closed to inventory value changes. You cannot edit this field. - -You can close any inventory period, provided that the following is true: - -* There are no open outbound item ledger entries, meaning negative inventory, in that period. -* The cost of all items has been adjusted using the **Adjust Cost – Item Entries** batch job. - -This means that all outbound transaction quantities, such as those from sales orders, outbound transfers, sales invoices, purchase returns, or purchase credit memos, must be applied to existing quantity in inventory. - -### To close an inventory period -1. Before closing an inventory period, run the **Adjust Cost – Item Entries** batch job to ensure that all cost adjustments are posted. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Adjust Cost – Item Entries**. - - Run the **Close Inventory Period – Test** report to determine if there are any open outbound item entries within the inventory period or any items whose cost has not yet been adjusted. -2. Choose the **Close Inventory Period – Test** action. - - Run the **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job to ensure that all costs are posted to the general ledger. -3. Choose the **Post Inventory to G/L** action. -4. In the **Inventory Periods** window, select the inventory period you want to close. -5. Choose the **Close Period** action. After the inventory period has been closed, you cannot post inventory changes before the ending date. The cost of all items must be adjusted with the **Adjust Cost – Item Entries** batch job before you close the inventory period. -6. Choose the **Yes** button to confirm that you want to close the period, or choose **No** to cancel the closing. -7. The inventory period is closed and a confirmation message is displayed when it is finished. - -## Reopening Inventory Periods -After you have closed the inventory period, you cannot delete the inventory period. You can, however, reopen it, if you would like to allow posting before the ending date of the inventory period. Reopening a period also reopens all inventory periods with ending dates later than the period you reopen. - -### To reopen an inventory period -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Periods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the inventory period you want to reopen. -3. Choose the **Reopen Period** period action. Confirm that you want to reopen the period. -4. All inventory periods with ending dates later than the period you selected are reopened. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Inventory Periods](design-details-inventory-periods.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-update-currencies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-update-currencies.md deleted file mode 100644 index b41c7e55..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-how-update-currencies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Updating Currency Exchange Rates -description: To use multiple currencies in your business, you can set up a code for each currency and use an external exchange rate service, such as Yahoo. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: multiple currencies, Yahoo -ms.date: 01/05/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates -You must set up a code for each currency you use if you buy or sell in currencies other than your local currency, have receivables or payables in other currencies, or record G/L transactions in different currencies. - -As companies operate in increasingly more countries/regions, it becomes more important that they be able to review or report financials in more than one currency. The program supports use of multiple currencies. Within the program, your general ledger is set up using your local currency (LCY), and another currency is set up as an additional currency, with a current exchange rate assigned. - - By designating a second currency as an additional reporting currency, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will automatically record amounts in both LCY and this additional reporting currency on each G/L entry and on other entries, such as VAT entries. When G/L entry amounts are calculated in an additional reporting currency, the information in the **Currency Exchange Rates** window is used to find the relevant exchange rate. - -> [!WARNING] -> The Additional Reporting Currency functionality should NOT be used as a basis for financial statement translation. It is not a tool that can perform translation of foreign subsidiary financial statements as part of a company consolidation. The additional reporting currency functionality only provides the option of preparing reports in another currency, as if that currency was the company’s local currency. - -## Adjusting Exchange Rates -Because exchange rates fluctuate constantly, additional currency equivalents in your system must be adjusted periodically. If these adjustments are not done, amounts that have been converted from foreign (or additional) currencies and posted to the general ledger in LCY may be misleading. In addition, daily entries posted before a daily exchange rate is entered into the program must be updated after the daily exchange rate information is entered. The Adjust Exchange Rates batch job is used to adjust the exchange rates of posted customer, vendor and bank account entries. It can also update additional reporting currency amounts on G/L entries. - -## Displaying Reports and Amounts in the Additional Reporting Currency -Using an additional reporting currency can assist the reporting process for a company in the following cases: - -- Companies in non-EU countries/regions that have a high proportion of transactions with EU country/region companies. In this case, the non-EU company may also wish to report in euro to make its financial reports more usable for its EU trade partners. - -- Companies that also wish to display reports in a more internationally traded currency than their own local currency. - -Several reports in the General Ledger application area are based on G/L entries. To display the financial data in the report in the additional reporting currency, you simply select the **Show in Add.-Currency** field in the relevant G/L report window. - -## To set up a currency exchange rate service -You can use an external service, such as Yahoo Currency Exchange Rates, to keep your currency exchange rates up to date. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Currency Exchange Rate Services**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Currency Exchange Rate Service** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **Enabled** check box to enable the service. - -## To update currency exchange rates through a service -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Currencies**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Update Exchange Rates** action. - -The value in the **Exchange Rate** field in the **Currencies** window is updated with the latest currency exchange rate. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-invite-external-accountant.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-invite-external-accountant.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6b9f5ad3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-invite-external-accountant.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Add your external accountant to your Dynamics NAV -description: Learn how you can invite your external accountant to your Dynamics NAV. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accountant, accounting -ms.date: 09/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Inviting Your External Accountant to Your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -If you use an external accountant to manage your books and financial reporting, you can invite them to your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] so they can work with you on your fiscal data. - -Once your accountant has gained access to your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], they can use the **Accountant** Role Center that gives easy access to the most relevant windows for their work. - -## Invite Your Accountant to Your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -In the latest version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], we have made it easy for you to invite your external accountant. Simply open the **Users** window, and then choose the **Invite External Accountant** action in the ribbon. An email is made ready for you, just add your accountant's work email, and send the invitation. - -![Invite your accountant](./media/finance-invite-accountant/invite-accountant.png) - -> [!TIP] -> This requires that you have set up SMTP email. You can do this yourself or ask your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] partner. Also, you must be logged in to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as a user administrator, not as the business owner or other users. - -### Separate License -Behind the scenes, the accountant is added to your Active Directory tenant. Your administrator can verify that the accountant accepts the invitation and is assigned the correct license. The steps for doing this depends on the type of account that you used when you signed up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. This topic is based on the use of a Microsoft 365 account, which uses Microsoft Azure Active Directory. - -If you have activated your subscription of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and are no longer using the evaluation company, you have an Azure Active Directory tenant. Your administrator or [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] partner manages this tenant in the [Azure portal](https://portal.azure.com). This is where new users are added and licenses are applied and removed. For more information, see the [Microsoft Azure portal overview](/azure/azure-portal-overview). - -One of the license types for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is the *External Accountant* license. This license type is intended for use by users such as external accountants. This means that you do not have to buy an extra seat in your current Active Directory or use one of your existing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] user accounts on your external accountant. For example, if your current Microsoft 365 subscription includes 10 users for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and you are currently using 10 *Full User* licenses, your administrator can simply add your external accountant as a guest user in the Azure portal and assign this user the *External Accountant* license at no additional cost. However, you can only have one user with the *External Accountant* license. If you want to add more users, you must update your Microsoft 365 subscription accordingly. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[How to: Set Up Email Manually or Using the Assisted Setup](madeira-how-setup-email.md) -[Accountant Experiences in Dynamics NAV](finance-accounting.md) -[Dynamics NAV for Accountants on Microsoft.com](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/financial-insights-for-accountants) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-invoice-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-invoice-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2a2f3582..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-invoice-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Invoice Prepayments - description: Prepayments are payments that are invoiced and posted to a sales or purchase prepayment order before final invoicing. You might require a deposit before you manufacture items to order, or you might require payment before you ship items to a customer. The prepayments functionality enables you to invoice and collect deposits required from customers or to remit deposits to vendors. Thus, you can ensure that all payments are posted against an invoice. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Invoicing Prepayments -Prepayments are payments that are invoiced and posted to a sales or purchase prepayment order before final invoicing. You might require a deposit before you manufacture items to order, or you might require payment before you ship items to a customer. The prepayments functionality enables you to invoice and collect deposits required from customers or to remit deposits to vendors. Thus, you can ensure that all payments are posted against an invoice. - - Prepayment requirements can be defined for a customer or vendor for all items or selected items. After you complete the required setup, you can generate prepayment invoices from sales and purchase orders for the calculated prepayment amount. You can change the amounts on the invoice as needed. For example, you can specify a total amount for the entire order. You can also send additional prepayment invoices if, for example, additional items are added to the order. You can increase quantities or add new lines to an order after issuing a prepayment, and then you can post another prepayment invoice. If you want to delete a line for which a prepayment has already been invoiced, you must issue a prepayment credit memo before you can delete the line. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set up prepayment posting groups and number series, and set up default prepayment percentages for customers, vendors, and items.|[How to: Set Up Prepayments](finance-set-up-prepayments.md)| -|Create an order, adjust the prepayment amounts, and issue an invoice for prepayment amounts.|[How to: Create Prepayment Invoices](finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices.md)| -|Issue an additional prepayment invoice, either for additional items or for an additional deposit on the original order, or issue a prepayment credit memo.|[How to: Correct Prepayments](finance-how-to-correct-prepayments.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-learn-about-costing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-learn-about-costing.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0cfff39..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-learn-about-costing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: About Inventory Costing - description: Managing inventory costs is concerned with recording and reporting business operating costs. It includes the reporting of manufacturing costs and inventory costs, that is, the value of items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About Inventory Costing -Managing inventory costs is concerned with recording and reporting business operating costs. It includes the reporting of manufacturing costs and inventory costs, that is, the value of items. - - Central principles to understand are that costing methods define how items are valued when they leave inventory, that cost adjustment updates the cost of goods sold with related purchase costs posted after the sale, and that inventory values must be posted to dedicated G/L accounts at regular intervals. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Distinguish the five different costing methods and their effect on cost flows.|[Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md)| -|Learn how item application entries dynamically link inventory decreases with increases to keep control of cost flows.|[Design Details: Item Application](design-details-item-application.md)| -|Learn how an item's unit cost is continuously updated with the cost of its latest transaction according to the item's costing method.|[Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md)| -|Learn how an item's average cost is dynamically calculated according to the selected average cost period.|[Design Details: Average Cost](design-details-average-cost.md)| -|Distinguish expected cost (not yet invoiced) from actual cost and learn how it is managed in the general ledger.|[Design Details: Expected Cost Posting](design-details-expected-cost-posting.md)| -|Understand the cost adjustment mechanism, which ensures that costs are brought forward even if inventory transactions happen in a random manner.|[Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md)| -|Read why standard costs are often used by manufacturing companies as a valuation base for components and end items.|[About Calculating Standard Cost](finance-about-calculating-standard-cost.md)| -|Understand how the value of inventory is reflected in the general ledger.|[Reporting Costs and Reconciling with the General Ledger](finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger.md)| -|Learn how item charges, such as freight and insurance, can assign additional cost components to an item's unit cost.|[How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md)| -|Read how inventory periods help a company to control inventory value over time by defining shorter periods that can be closed for posting as the fiscal year progresses.|[How to: Work with Inventory Periods](finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods.md)| -|Understand all mechanisms in the costing engine, including what happens when you post assembly and production transactions.|[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5d98adcf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-make-payments-with-bank-data-conversion-service-or-sepa-credit-transfer.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Choose the method of electronic payments - description: Process payments to your vendors by exporting a file together with the payment information from the journal lines. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Make Payments with Bank Data Conversion Service or SEPA Credit Transfer -In the **Payment Journal** window, you can process payments to your vendors by exporting a file together with the payment information from the journal lines. You can then upload the file to your electronic bank where the related money transfers are processed. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports the SEPA Credit Transfer format, but in your country/region, other formats for electronic payments may be available. - - To enable SEPA credit transfers, you must first set up a bank account, a vendor, and the general journal batch that the payment journal is based on. You then prepare payments to vendors by automatically filling the **Payment Journal** window with due payments with specified posting dates. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you have verified that the payments are successfully processed by the bank, you can proceed to post the payment journal lines. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Activate the Bank Data Conversion Service feature to have any bank statement file converted to a format that you can import or to have your exported payment files converted to the format that your bank requires.|[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md)| -|Set up a bank account, a vendor, and a payment journal for SEPA credit transfer.|[How to: Set Up SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md)| -|Fill the payment journal with lines for due payments to vendors, with the option to insert posting dates based on the due date of the related purchase documents.|[Manage Payables](payables-manage-payables.md)| -|Export payment journal lines to a file in the SEPA Credit Transfer format.|[How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md)| -|Review which payments have been exported and into which files.|Credit Transfer Registers| -|When the electronic payment is successfully processed by the bank, post the payments.|[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md) -[How to: Set Up SEPA Credit Transfer](finance-how-to-set-up-sepa-credit-transfer.md) -[Manage Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-cost-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-cost-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index ef9ab607..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-cost-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Accounting for Costs - description: Cost accounting is used to help you understand the costs of running a business. To get started with cost accounting, see the following topics. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Accounting for Costs -Cost accounting is used to help you understand the costs of running a business. To get started with cost accounting, see the following topics. - -|To|See| -|--------|---------| -|Understand the terminology that is used in cost accounting.|[Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md)| -|Get an overall understanding of cost accounting.|[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md)| -|Learn the processes in setting up cost accounting.|[Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md)| -|Learn the processes in transferring general ledger entries to cost entries.|[Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md)| -|Learn the processes in defining and allocating costs.|[Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md)| -|Learn the processes in creating cost budgets.|[Creating Cost Budgets](finance-create-cost-budgets.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-inventory-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-inventory-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index cbedc33a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-inventory-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Managing Inventory Costs - description: Cost management, also referred to as “costing”, is concerned with recording and reporting business operating costs. It includes the reporting of manufacturing costs and inventory costs, that is, the value of items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/29/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Managing Inventory Costs -Cost management, also referred to as “costing”, is concerned with recording and reporting business operating costs. It includes the reporting of manufacturing costs and inventory costs, that is, the value of items. - -Central principles to understand are that costing methods define how items are valued when they leave inventory, that cost adjustment updates the cost of goods sold with related purchase costs posted after the sale, and that inventory values must be posted to dedicated G/L accounts at regular intervals. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Read various conceptual information to understand the principles and definitions that govern the inventory costing accounting functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)].|[About Inventory Costing](finance-learn-about-costing.md)| -|Set up inventory periods, costing methods, and rounding methods.|[Setting Up Inventory Valuation and Costing](finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md)| -|Appreciate or depreciate the value of one or more items in inventory by posting their current, calculated value.|[How to: Revalue Inventory](inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md)| -|Adjust item costs, either automatically or manually, to forward cost changes from inbound entries to their related outbound entries.|[How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md)| -|Use special costing functions for every-day item transactions in the item operations.|[Handling Inventory and Manufacturing Costs](finance-handle-inventory-and-manufacturing-costs.md)| -|Periodically update the standard costs of components, in assembly or production BOMs, and roll the new costs up to the parent item.|[How to: Update Standard Costs](finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md)| -|Perform period-end control and reporting tasks, such calculate the value of inventory and post costs to the general ledger.|[Reporting Costs and Reconciling with the General Ledger](finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger.md)| -|Learn about all mechanisms in the costing system.|[Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) - [Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) - [Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) - [Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-payables.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-payables.md deleted file mode 100644 index 65d38390..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-manage-payables.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Managing Accounts Payable -description: Overview of how Dynamics NAV helps you manage accounts payable (AP), including vendor payments, creditors, debt, and balance due. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf -manager: edupont -editor: '' - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.workload: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.devlang: na -ms.topic: article -ms.search.keywords: vendor payment, creditor, debt, balance due, AP -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Managing Accounts Payable -[!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] has what you need to effectively manage accounts payable. - -## Payments -It's easy to prioritize payments, account for penalties for overdue payments, and handle discounts for early payments. - -You can record payments in a general journal, and then print checks before posting the payment journal. - -You can apply payments to close invoices when you post the payment, or after you post the payment. The **Application Method** specified for the vendor (on the **Vendor Card**) determines whether you apply the payment manually, or automatically. You can always apply transactions manually. However, if the application method for the vendor is **Apply to Oldest**, and you do not specify a document to apply the payment to, the payment is applied to the oldest open entry for the vendor. - -## Suggest Vendor Payments -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can suggest various payments to vendors, such as payments that will be due soon, or payments where a discount is available. The payment suggestion can consider an amount that you specify as available funds for payment, and eligibility for payment discounts. - -## Issue Checks -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] lets you issue checks to vendors manually and electronically. You do both in the **Payment Journals** window, where you can also void checks and view check ledger entries. - -## Export Payments to a Bank File -When you are ready to pay a vendor, from the **Payment Journal** window you can export a file with the payment information from the journal lines. You can then upload the file to your electronic bank to process the money transfers. - -If you do not want to post a payment journal line for an exported payment, for example because you are waiting for the bank to confirm the transaction, just delete the journal line. Later, when you create a payment journal line to pay the remaining amount on the invoice, the **Total Exported Amount** field shows how much of the payment amount has already been exported. Also, you can find detailed information about the exported total by choosing the **Credit Transfer Reg. Entries** button. - -If you wait to post payments until after your bank confirms that it has processed transactions, there are two ways to avoid accidently re-exporting payments for open documents: - -* In a payment journal with suggested payment lines, sort on either the **Exported to Payment File** or **Total Exported Amount** columns, and then delete payment suggestions for open invoices for which payments have already been made and you do not want to make payments for. - - **Note** You might have to add these columns to the list. For more information, see [Personalization in the Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) or [Personalization in the Windows Client](ui-personalization-windows-client.md). -* Alternatively, on the **Suggest Vendor Payments** batch job, where you specify the payments to include in the payment journal, you can specify not to insert journal lines for payments that have already been exported by choosing the **Skip Exported Payments** check box. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payment Methods](finance-payment-methods.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-methods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-methods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 47100f68..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-methods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Payment Methods -Description: You use payment methods, for example, check, bank transfer, cash, or PayPal, to define how an invoice will be paid. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: check, bank transfer, cash, PayPal -ms.date: 06/15/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Defining Payment Methods -Payment methods define how an invoice will be paid. You can set up any number of payment methods. Examples of payment methods can be BANK, CASH, CHECK, or ACCOUNT. -Payment methods are linked to vendors in order to specify how an invoice from the specific vendor must be paid. - -## To set up a payment methods -Several typical payment methods are already defined in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You can define new payment methods in the **Payment Methods** window, which you can find with the search function or open from the **Payment Method** field on an a vendor or customer card. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md deleted file mode 100644 index 86d00dce..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,261 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Payment Tolerance and Payment Discount Tolerance - description: You can set up payment tolerance to close an invoice when the payment does not fully cover the amount on the invoice. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/10/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Payment Tolerances and Payment Discount Tolerances -You can set up a payment tolerance to close an invoice when the payment does not fully cover the amount on the invoice. You can set up a payment discount tolerance to grant a payment discount after the payment discount date has passed. - -You can use payment tolerances so that every outstanding amount has a set maximum allowed payment tolerance. If the payment tolerance is met, then the payment amount is analyzed. If the payment amount is an underpayment, then the outstanding amount is fully closed by the underpayment. A detailed ledger entry is posted to the payment entry so that no remaining amount is left on the applied invoice entry. If the payment amount is an overpayment, then a new detailed ledger entry is posted to the payment entry so that no remaining amount is left on the payment entry. - -You can use payment discount tolerances so that if you accept a payment discount after the payment discount date, then it is always posted to either the payment discount account or a payment tolerance account. - -## Applying Payment Tolerance to Multiple Documents -A single document has the same payment tolerance whether it is applied on its own or with other documents. Acceptance of a late payment discount when you are applying payment tolerance to multiple documents automatically occurs for each document where the following rule is true: - -*payment discount date < payment date on the selected entry <= payment tolerance date* - -This rule also applies to determine whether to display warnings when you apply payment tolerance to multiple documents. The payment discount tolerance warning is displayed for each entry that meets the date criteria. For more information, see the "Example 2 - Tolerance Calculations for Multiple Documents" section. - -You can choose to display a warning that is based on different tolerance situations. - -- The first warning is for the payment discount tolerance. You are informed that you can accept a late payment discount. You can then choose whether to accept tolerance on the discount date. -- The second warning is for the payment tolerance. You are informed that all entries can be closed because the difference is in the sum of the maximum payment tolerance for the applied entries. You can then choose whether to accept tolerance on the payment amount. - -For more information, see the "To enable or disable payment tolerance warning" section. - -## To set up tolerances -Tolerance on days and amounts allows you to close an invoice even though the payment does not fully cover the amount on the invoice, whether this is because the due date for the payment discount has been exceeded, goods have been deducted or because of a minor error. This also applies to refunds and credit memos. - -To set up tolerance you have to set up various tolerance accounts, specify both payment discount tolerance and payment tolerance posting methods and then run the **Change Payment Tolerance** batch job. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Posting Setup** window, set up a debit and a credit sales payment tolerance account and a debit and a credit purchase payment tolerance account. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **Customer Posting Groups** window, set up a debit and a credit payment tolerance account. For more information, see [Setting Up Posting Groups](finance-posting-groups.md). -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendor Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -6. In the **Vendor Posting Groups** window, set up a debit and a credit payment tolerance account. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -8. Open the **General Ledger Setup** window. -9. On the **Application** FastTab, fill in the **Pmt. Disc. Tolerance Posting**, **Payment Discount Grace Period** and **Payment Tolerance Posting** fields. -10. Choose the **Change Payment Tolerance** action. -11. In the **Change Payment Tolerance** window, fill in the **Payment Tolerance %** and **Max Payment Tolerance Amount** fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You have now set up tolerance for local currency only. If you want [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to handle tolerance on payments, credit memos, and refunds in a foreign currency, you must run the **Change Payment Tolerance** batch job with a value in the **Currency Code** field. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you want to get a payment tolerance warning every time that you post an application in the tolerance, you must activate the payment tolerance warning. For more information, see the "To enable or disable payment tolerance warning" section. -> -> To deactivate tolerance for a customer or vendor, you must block tolerances on the relevant customer or vendor card. For more information, see the "To block payment tolerance for customers" section. -> -> When you set up tolerance, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] also checks if there are any open entries and calculates the tolerance for these entries. - -## To enable or disable payment tolerance warnings -The payment tolerance warning appears when you post an application that has a balance in the allowed tolerance. You can then choose how you want to post and document the balance. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Ledger Setup** window, on the **Application** FastTab, select the **Payment Tolerance Warning** check box to activate the warning. To deactivate the warning, clear the check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> The default option for the **Payment Tolerance Warning** window is **Leave the Balance as Remaining Amount**. The default option for the **Pmt. Disc. Tolerance Warning** window the is **Do Not Accept the Late Payment Discount**. - -## To block payment tolerance for customers -The default setting for payment tolerance is allowed. To disallow a certain customer or vendor payment tolerance you need to block tolerance on the respective customer or vendor card. The following describes how to do it for a customer. The steps are similar for a vendor. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer** or **Vendor**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Payments** FastTab, select the **Block Payment Tolerance** check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the customer or vendor has open entries, you must first remove payment tolerance from entries that are currently open. - -## Example 1 - Tolerance Calculations for a Single Document -The following are some example scenarios showing the expected tolerance calculations and postings occurring in different situations. - -The **G/L Setup** window contains the following setup: -- Payment Discount Grace Period: 5D -- Max Payment Tolerance: 5 - -Scenarios with alternative A or B represent the following: - -- **A** In this case, the payment discount tolerance warning has been turned off OR the user has the warning on and has selected to allow the late payment discount (Post the Balance as Payment Tolerance). -- **B** In this case, the user has the warning on and has selected not to allow the late payment discount (Leave the Balance as Remaining Amount). - -|—|Inv.|Pmt. Disc.|Max

Pmt. Tol.|Pmt. Disc. Date|Pmt. Disc. Tol. Date|Payment Date|Pmt.|Tolerance Type|All Entries closed|Pmt. Disc. Tol.
GL/CL|Pmt.

Tol.

G/L| -|-------|----------|----------------|-----------------------|---------------------|--------------------------|------------------|----------|--------------------|------------------------|------------------------------|----------------------------| -|1|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|<=01/15/03|985|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|-5| -|2|**1,000**|**20**|**5**|**01/15/03**|**01/20/03**|**<=01/15/03**|**980**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**|**0**| -|3|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|c|<=01/15/03|975|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|5| -|4A|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|1005|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|No, 25 on the Pmt.|20/-20|0| -|5A|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|1000|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|No, 20 on the Pmt.|20/-20|0| -|6A|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|995|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|No, 15 on the Pmt.|20/-20|0| -|4B|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|1005|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|-5| -|**5B**|**1,000**|**20**|**5**|**01/15/03**|**01/20/03**|**01/16/03 01/20/03**|**1000**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**|**0**| -|6B|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|995|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|5| -|7|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|985|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|20/-20|-5| -|8|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|980|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|Yes|20/-20|0| -|9|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|01/16/03 01/20/03|975|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|20/-20|5| -|10|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|>01/20/03|1005|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|-5| -|**11**|**1,000**|**20**|**5**|**01/15/03**|**01/20/03**|**>01/20/03**|**1000**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**|**0**| -|12|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|>01/20/03|995|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|5| -|13|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|>01/20/03|985|None|No, 15 on the invoice|0|0| -|14|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|>01/20/03|980|None|No, 20 on the invoice|0|0| -|15|1,000|20|5|01/15/03|01/20/03|>01/20/03|975|None|No, 25 on the invoice|0|0| - -### Payment Range Diagrams -In relation to the scenario above, the diagrams of payment ranges are as follows: - -#### (1) Payment Date <=01/15/03 (Scenarios 1-3) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Single payment tolerance rules (before 03/15)](media/singlePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif "singlePmtTolRules(Pre1503)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -#### (2) Payment Date is between 01/16/03 and 01/20/03 (Scenarios 4-9) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Single payment tolerance rules (grace period)](media/singlePmtTolRules(GracePeriod).gif "singlePmtTolRules(GracePeriod)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -#### (3) Payment Date is after 01/20/03 (Scenarios 10-15) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Single payment tolerance rules (before 01/20)](media/singlePmtTolRules(Post0120).gif "singlePmtTolRules(Post0120)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -## Example 2 - Tolerance Calculations for Multiple Documents -The following are some example scenarios showing the expected tolerance calculations and postings occurring in different situations. The examples are limited to being only those scenarios that result in all entries in the application being closed. - -The **G/L Setup** window contains the following setup: -- Payment Discount Grace Period 5D -- Max Payment Tolerance 5 - -Scenarios with alternative A, B, C, or D represent the following: - -- **A** In this case the payment discount tolerance warning has been turned off, OR the user has the warning on and has selected to allow the late payment discount (Post as Tolerance) in any invoice. -- **B** In this case, the user has the warning on and has selected not to allow the late payment discount on any invoice. -- **C** - In this case, the user has the warning on and has selected to allow the late payment discount on the first invoice but not the second. -- **D** - In this case, the user has the warning on and has selected not to allow the late payment discount on the first invoice but allowed it on the second. - -|—|Inv.|Pmt Disc.|Max Pmt. Tol.|Pmt. Disc. Date|Pmt. Disc. Tol. Date|Payment Date|Pmt|Tolerance Type|All Entries closed|Pmt. Disc. Tol.
GL/CL|Pmt. Tol.

G/L| -|-------|----------|---------------|-------------------|---------------------|--------------------------|------------------|---------|--------------------|------------------------|------------------------------|------------------------| -|1|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|<=01/15/03|1920|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|-5
-5| -|**2**|**1,000**
**1,000**|**60**
**30**|**5**
**5**|**01/15/03**
**01/17/03**|**01/20/03**
**01/22/03**|**<=01/15/03**|**1910**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**

**0**|0
0| -|3|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|<=01/15/03|1900|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|5
5| -|4B|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/16/03 01/17/03|1980|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|-5

-5| -|**5B**|**1,000**
**1,000**|**60**
**30**|**5**
**5**|**01/15/03**
**01/17/03**|**01/20/03**
**01/22/03**|**01/16/03 01/17/03**|**1970**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**

**0**|**0**

**0**| -|6B|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/16/03 01/17/03|1960|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|5

5| -|7A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/16/03 01/17/03|1920|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|60/60

0/0|-5
-5| -|8A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/16/03 01/17/03|1910|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|Yes|60/60

0/0|0
0| -|9A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/16/03 01/17/03|1900|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|60/60|5
5| -|10B|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|2010|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|-5

-5| -|**11B**|**1,000**
**1,000**|**60**
**30**|**5**
**5**|**01/15/03**
**01/17/03**|**01/20/03**
**01/22/03**|**01/18/03 01/20/03**|**2000**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**

**0**|**0**

**0**| -|12B|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1990|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|5

5| -|13D|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1980|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0/0

30/-30|-5
-5| -|14D|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1970|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|Yes|0/0

30/-30|0
0| -|15D|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1960|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0/0

30/-30|5
5| -|16D|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1950|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|60/-60

0/0|-5
-5| -|17D|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1940|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|Yes|60/-60

0/0|0
0| -|18D|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1930|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|60/-60

0/0|5
5| -|19A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1920|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|60/-60

30/-30|-5
-5| -|20A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1910|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|Yes|60/-60

30/-30|0
0| -|21A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/18/03 01/20/03|1900|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|60/-60

30/-30|5
5| -|22B|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/21/03 01/22/03|2010|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|-5

-5| -|**23B**|**1,000**
**1,000**|**60**
**30**|**5**
**5**|**01/15/03**
**01/17/03**|**01/20/03**
**01/22/03**|**01/21/03 01/22/03**|**2000**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**

**0**|**0**

**0**| -|24B|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/21/03 01/22/03|1990|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0

0|5

5| -|25A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/21/03 01/22/03|1980|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0/0

30/30|-5
-5| -|26A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/21/03 01/22/03|1970|Pmt.Disc.Tol.|Yes|0/0

30/30|0
0| -|27A|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|01/21/03 01/22/03|1960|Pmt.Disc.Tol. & Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0/0

30/30|5
5| -|28|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|>01/22/03|2010|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|-5| -|**29**|**1,000**
**1,000**|**60**
**30**|**5**
**5**|**01/15/03**
**01/17/03**|**01/20/03**
**01/22/03**|**>01/22/03**|**2000**|**None**|**Yes**|**0**|**0**| -|30|1,000
1,000|60
30|5
5|01/15/03
01/17/03|01/20/03
01/22/03|>01/22/03|1990|Pmt.Tol.|Yes|0|5| - -### Payment Range Diagrams -In relation to the scenario above, the diagrams of payment ranges are as follows: - -#### (1) Payment Date <=01/15/03 (Scenarios 1-3) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Multiple payment tolerance rules (before 03/15)](media/multiplePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif "multiplePmtTolRules(Pre1503)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -#### (2) Payment Date is between 01/16/03 and 01/17/03 (Scenarios 4-9) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Multiple payment tolerance rules (grace period)](media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1).gif "multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -#### (3) Payment Date is between 01/18/03 and 01/20/03 (Scenarios 10-21) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Multiple payment tolerance rules (grace period)](media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1-2).gif "multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1-2)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -#### (4) Payment Date is between 01/21/03 and 01/22/03 (Scenarios 22-27) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Multiple payment tolerance rules (grace period)](media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv2).gif "multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv2)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -#### (5) Payment Date is after 01/22/03 (Scenarios 28-30) -Remaining Amount per - -Normal Application Rules - -![Multiple payment tolerance rules (after 01/22)](media/multiplePmtTolRules(Post0122).gif "multiplePmtTolRules(Post0122)") - -(1) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries can be closed with or without tolerance. - -(2) If payment falls in these ranges, all application entries cannot be closed even with tolerance. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-posting-groups.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-posting-groups.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6f629783..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-posting-groups.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Posting Group Setup -description: Overview of the posting groups you can use to save time and avoid mistakes when you post transactions. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: posting setup, initialize -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Setting Up Posting Groups -Posting groups map entities like customers, vendors, items, resources, and sales and purchase documents to general ledger accounts. They save time and help avoid mistakes when you post transactions. The transaction values go to the accounts specified in the posting group for that particular entity. The only requirement is that you have a chart of accounts. For more information, see [Set Up the Chart of Accounts](finance-setup-chart-accounts.md). - -Posting groups are covered under three umbrellas: - -* General - Define who you sell to and buy from, and what you sell and what you buy. You can also combine groups to specify things like the income statement accounts to post to, or use groups to filter reports. -* Specific - Use sales documents, for example, instead of posting directly to the general ledger. When you create entries in the customer ledger, corresponding entries are made in the general ledger. -* Tax - Define the tax percentages and calculation types that apply to who you sell to and buy from, and what you sell and what you buy. - -The following tables describe the posting groups under each umbrella. - -| General Posting Groups | Description | -| --- | --- | -| General Business Posting Groups |Assign this group to customers and vendors to specify who you sell to, and who you buy from. Set these up in the **Gen. Business Posting Groups** window. When you do, think about how many groups you'll need to break down sales and purchases. For example, group customers and vendors by geographical area, or by the type of business. | -| General Product Posting Groups |Assign this group to items and resources to specify what you sell, and what you buy. Set these up in the **Gen. Product Posting Groups** window. When you do, consider the number of groups you'll need to break down sales by product (items and resources) and purchases by items. For example, divide these groups by raw materials, retail, resources, capacity, and so on. | -| General Posting Setups |Combine business and product posting groups and choose the accounts to post to. For each combination of business and product posting groups, you can assign a set of general ledger accounts. For example, this means you can post the sale of the same item to different sales accounts in the general ledger because customers are assigned to different business posting groups. Set these up in the **General Posting Setup** window. | - -| Specific Posting Groups | Description | -| --- | --- | -| Customer Posting Groups |Define the accounts to use when you post accounts receivable transactions. If you use inventory with receivables, the general business posting group assigned to your customer, and the general product posting group assigned to the inventory item determine the accounts the sales order lines post to. Set these up in the **Customer Posting Groups** window. | -| Vendor Posting Groups |Define where to post transactions for payables accounts, service charge accounts, and payment discount accounts. This is similar to customer posting groups. Set these up in the **Vendor Posting Groups** window. | -| Inventory Posting Groups |Define balance sheet inventory accounts. These also provide a good way to organize your inventory, so you can separate items by their posting group when you generate reports. Set these up in the **Inventory Posting Groups** window. | -| Bank Account Posting Groups |Define accounts for bank accounts. For example, this can simplify the processes of tracing transactions and reconciling bank accounts. Set these up in the **Bank Account Posting Groups** window. | -| Fixed Assets Posting Groups |Define accounts for different types of expenses and costs, such as acquisition costs, accumulated depreciation amounts, acquisition costs on disposal, accumulated depreciation on disposal, gains on disposal, losses on disposal, maintenance expenses, and depreciation expenses. Set these up in the **FA Posting Groups** window. | - -| Tax Posting Group | Description | -| --- | --- | -| Tax Business Posting Groups |Determine how to calculate and post sales tax for customers and vendors. Set these up in the **Tax Business Posting Groups** window. When you do, think about how many groups you need. For example, this can depend on factors like local legislation, and whether you trade both domestically and internationally. | -| Tax Product Posting Groups |Indicate the tax calculations needed for the types of items or resources you buy or sell. | -| Tax Posting Setup |Combine tax business posting groups and tax product posting groups. When you fill in a general journal line, purchase line, or sales line, we'll look at the combination to identify the accounts to use. | - -## Example of linking posting groups -Here's a scenario. - -These posting groups are chosen on the customer card: - -* General business posting group -* Customer posting group - -These posting groups are chosen on the item card: - -* General product posting group -* Inventory posting group - -When you create a sales document, the sales header uses the customer card information, and the sales lines use the item card information. - -* The revenue posting (income statement) is determined by the combination of the general business posting group and the general product posting group. -* The accounts receivable posting (balance sheet) is determined by the customer posting group. -* The inventory posting (balance sheet) is determined by the inventory posting group. -* The cost of goods sold posting (income statement) is determined by the combination of general business posting group and general product posting group. - -Your setup determines when posting happens. For example, the timing is affected by when you do periodic activities, such as posting inventory cost or adjusting cost item entries. - -## Copying posting setup lines -The more product and business posting groups you have, the more lines you see in the General Posting Setup window. This can mean a lot of data entry to set up the general posting setup for the company. While there may be many different combinations of business and product posting groups, different combinations may still post to the same general ledger accounts. To limit the amount of manual entry, copy the general ledger accounts from an existing line in the **General Posting Setup** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5532dbed..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-report-costs-and-reconcile-with-the-general-ledger.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Reporting Costs and Reconcile with the General Ledger - description: At the end of accounting periods, monthly, yearly or other, a sequence of cost control and auditing tasks must be performed to report a correct and balanced inventory value to the finance department. Apart from the posting routine that transfers the individual item value entries to dedicated general ledger accounts, several reports, tracing functions, and a special reconciliation tool are available to the auditor or controller responsible for this business-critical work. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Reporting Costs and Reconciling with the General Ledger -At the end of accounting periods, monthly, yearly or other, a sequence of cost control and auditing tasks must be performed to report a correct and balanced inventory value to the finance department. Apart from the posting routine that transfers the individual item value entries to dedicated general ledger accounts, several reports, tracing functions, and a special reconciliation tool are available to the auditor or controller responsible for this business-critical work. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|View the inventory value of selected items, including information about the quantities and values of increases and decreases in inventory over a selected period.|**Inventory Valuation** report| -|View the inventory value of selected production orders in your WIP (work in process) inventory, such as the quantities and values of consumption, capacity usage, and output in ongoing production orders.|**Inventory Valuation - WIP** report| -|View the inventory value of selected items, including their actual and expected cost on the date specified.|**Invt. Valuation - Cost Spec.** report| -|Use a report to analyze the reasons for cost variances or to gain insight into the cost shares of sold items (COGS).|**Cost Shares Breakdown** report| -|Periodically post the value entries of item transactions from the inventory ledger to the related G/L accounts to reconcile the two ledgers.|[How to: Reconcile Inventory Costs with the General Ledger](finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md)| -|Use one window to audit the reconciliation between the inventory ledger and the general ledger.|[How to: Reconcile Inventory Costs with the General Ledger](finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md)| -|Determine the WIP amount that needs to be posted to balance sheet accounts for period-end reporting.|[How to: Monitor Job Progress and Performance](projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory Valuation and Costing](finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-results-of-the-transfer.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-results-of-the-transfer.md deleted file mode 100644 index 501c4fd2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-results-of-the-transfer.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Results of the Transfer - description: This topic describes what happens after you transfer general ledger entries to cost entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: general ledger, transfer, cost entries - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Results of Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries -During the transfer of general ledger entries to cost entries, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] creates connections in the entries in the **G/L Entry** table, the **Cost Entry** table, and the **Cost Register** table to make it possible to trace the connections between cost entries and general ledger entries. - -## General Ledger Entries -For each general ledger entry that is transferred to cost accounting, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] fills the cost **Entry No.** field. - -## Cost Entries -For each cost entry, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] saves the entry number of the corresponding general ledger entry in the **G/L Entry No.** field in the **Cost Entry** table. - -For combined cost entries, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] saves the entry number of the last general ledger entry, which is the entry with the highest entry number. - -The **G/L Account** field in the **Cost Entry** table contains the number of the general ledger account that the cost entry came from. - -For single cost entries, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] transfers the posting text from the general ledger entry to the **Description** text field. For combined entries, the text field shows these entries are transferred as combined entries. For example, for a combined entry for the month of October in 2013, the text can be **Combined Entries, October 2013**. - -## Cost Register -In the **Cost Register** table, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] creates an entry with the source transfer from general ledger. The entry records the first and last entry numbers of the general ledger entries that are transferred, in addition to the first and last entry numbers of the cost entries that are created. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Transfer General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md) -[Criteria for Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md) -[Automatic Transfer and Combined Entries](finance-automatic-transfer-combined-entries.md) -[Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md deleted file mode 100644 index 127727cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Scenario Example - Defining Dynamic Allocations Based on Items Sold - description: This topic shows an example of how to define allocations by using the dynamic allocation method. In the example, you change the dynamic allocation of the costs for the SALES cost center to support the new cost object IT EQUIPMENT. IT EQUIPMENT packages have item numbers in the range from 8904-W to 8924-W. You use the previous year’s sales figures to calculate the share. The allocation is posted to the helping cost type 9903. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Scenario Example: Defining Dynamic Allocations Based on Items Sold -This topic shows an example of how to define allocations by using the dynamic allocation method. In the example, you change the dynamic allocation of the costs for the SALES cost center to support the new cost object IT EQUIPMENT. IT EQUIPMENT packages have item numbers in the range from 8904-W to 8924-W. You use the previous year’s sales figures to calculate the share. The allocation is posted to the helping cost type 9903. - -> [!NOTE] -> The example uses the demo data in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## To define dynamic allocations based on items sold in the previous year - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cost Allocations**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cost Allocation** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **ID** field, press Enter or enter an ID. -4. In the **Level** field, enter **1**. -5. In the **Valid From** and **Valid To** fields, enter appropriate dates. -6. In the **Cost Center Code** field, enter **SALES**. -7. In the **Credit to Cost Type** field, enter the cost type **9903**. -8. In the **Target Cost Type** field, enter the cost type **9903**. -9. In the **Target Cost Object** field, choose **New** to create a new cost object IT EQUIPMENT and fill in fields as necessary. Select **IT EQUIPMENT**. Leave the **Target Cost Center** field blank. -10. In the **Allocation Target Type** field, select **All Costs** to define how all accumulated costs are allocated. -11. In the **Base** field, select the allocation base **Items Sold (Amount)**. -12. In the **No. Filter** field, enter **8904-W..8924-W**. -13. In the **Date Filter Code** field, enter **Last Year**. -14. Choose the **Calculate Allocation Key** action to calculate the share. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] uses the previous years’ sales figures to calculate a share of 1596.50 LCY with 100 percent for the IT EQUIPMENT packages. This means that all of the items sold last year will be allocated to the cost object IT EQUIPMENT. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Filters for Dynamic Allocation Bases](finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md) - [How to: Set Up Allocation Source and Targets](finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md) - [Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) - [Terminology in Cost Accounting](finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md) - [About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio.md deleted file mode 100644 index 33f4af34..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-scenario-example-defining-static-allocations-based-on-allocation-ratio.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - - title: Defining Static Allocations Based on Allocation Ratio - description: Static allocation method is based on a definite value, such as square meters used, or an established allocation ratio such as 5:2:4. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Scenario Example: Defining Static Allocations Based on Allocation Ratio -Static allocation method is based on a definite value, such as square meters used, or an established allocation ratio such as 5:2:4. - -This topic describes how to define three new allocation target cost objects for the allocation source PROD cost center using the established allocation ratio 5:2:4. The three target cost objects are ACCESSO, PAINT, and FITTINGS. - -> [!NOTE] -> The example uses the demo data in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## To define the allocation source PROD cost center on the General FastTab - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cost Allocation**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Cost Allocation** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **ID** field, press Enter or enter an ID. -4. In the **Level** field, enter **1**. -5. In the **Valid From** and **Valid To** fields, enter appropriate dates. -6. In the **Cost Center Code** field, enter **PROD**. -7. In the **Credit to Cost Type** field, enter the cost type **9903**. - -## To define the allocation target cost objects on the Lines FastTab - -1. On the first line, in the **Target Cost Type** field, enter **9903**. -2. On the first line, in the **Target Cost Object** field, select **ACCESSO**. -3. On the first line, in the **Allocation Target Type** field, select **All Costs** to define how all accrued costs are allocated. -4. On the first line, in the **Base** field, select **Static** to use the static allocation method. -5. On the first line, in the **Share** field, enter the allocation ratio **5**. -6. On the second line, in the **Target Cost Type** field, enter **9903**. -7. On the second line, in the **Target Cost Object** field, select **PAINT**. -8. On the second line, in the **Allocation Target Type** field, select **All Costs** to define how all accrued costs are allocated. -9. On the second line, in the **Base** field, select **Static** to use the static allocation method. -10. On the second line, in the **Share** field, enter the allocation ratio **2**. -11. On the third line, in the **Target Cost Type** field, enter **9903**. -12. On the third line, in the **Target Cost Object** field, select **FITTINGS**. -13. On the third line, in the **Allocation Target Type** field, select **All Costs** to define how all accrued costs are allocated. -14. On the third line, in the **Base** field, select **Static** to use the static allocation method. -15. On the third line, in the **Share** field, enter the allocation ratio **4**. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculates the **Percent** field using a percentage rate that is dependent on all three allocation ratios that are entered in the **Share** field for all three lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Allocation Source and Targets](finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md) -[Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) -[Scenario Example: Defining Dynamic Allocations Based on Items Sold](finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md) -[Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index d5a90aca..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setting Up Cost Accounting - description: Before you start working with cost accounting, you must perform setup tasks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Cost Accounting -Before you start working with cost accounting, you must perform setup tasks. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|To|See| -|--------|---------| -|Create the chart of cost types.|[How to: Set Up Cost Types](finance-how-to-set-up-cost-types.md)| -|Learn about the connection between the cost type and the general ledger account.|[Defining the Relationship Between Cost Types and General Ledger Accounts](finance-defining-the-relationship-between-cost-types-and-general-ledger-accounts.md)| -|Create the chart of cost centers.|[How to: Set Up Cost Centers](finance-how-to-set-up-cost-centers.md)| -|Create the chart of cost objects.|[How to: Set Up Cost Objects](finance-how-to-set-up-cost-objects.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) -[Transferring and Posting Cost Entries](finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md) -[Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3e769b28..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-inventory-valuation-and-costing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Inventory Valuation and Costing - description: The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Inventory Valuation and Costing -To make sure that inventory costs are recorded correctly, you must set up various fields and windows before you begin to make item transactions. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set a costing method for each item to govern how its incoming cost is used to assess inventory value and the cost of goods sold.|[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md)| -|Ensure that the cost is automatically posted to the general ledger whenever an inventory transaction is posted.|**Automatic Cost Posting** field in the **Inventory Setup** page| -|Ensure that expected costs are posted to the general ledger to see from the interim G/L accounts an estimate of the amounts due and the cost of the traded items before they are actually invoiced.|**Expected Cost Posting to G/L** field in the **Inventory Setup** page| -|Set the system up to adjust for any cost changes automatically every time you post inventory transactions.|[How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md)| -|Define if the average cost is to be calculated per item only or per item for each stockkeping unit and for each variant of the item.|**Average Cost Calc. Type** field in the **Inventory Setup** page| -|Select the period of time you would like the program to use for calculating the weighted average cost of items that use the average costing method.|**Average Cost Period** field in the **Inventory Setup** page| -|Define inventory periods to control inventory value over time by disallowing transaction posting in closed inventory periods.|[How to: Work with Inventory Periods](finance-how-to-work-with-inventory-periods.md)| -|Ensure that sales returns are applied to the original outbound transaction to preserve inventory value.|**Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** field in the **Sales & Receivables** page| -|Ensure that purchase returns are applied to the original inbound transaction to preserve inventory value.|**Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** field in the **´Purchases & Payables** page| -|Set up the rounding rules to apply when adjusting or suggesting item prices and when adjusting or suggesting standard costs.|**Rounding Method** page| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) -[Finance](finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-invoice-rounding.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-invoice-rounding.md deleted file mode 100644 index f8facc76..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-invoice-rounding.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Invoice Rounding - description: You can round invoice amounts when you create invoices. Additionally, local regulations or custom may require you to round in a specific way, for example, to an amount divisible by 0.05. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Set Up Invoice Rounding -If you need to round invoice amounts when you create invoices, you can use the automatic rounding function. When an invoice is rounded, an extra line is added with the rounding amount and posted with the other invoice lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> Local regulations or local custom may require the invoice to be rounded in a specific way, for example, to an amount divisible by 0.05. - -To use automatic invoice rounding, you must: - -* Specify the general ledger accounts to which rounding differences will be posted. -* Set up rules for rounding invoices in local currency and in foreign currency. -* Activate the function. - -> [!NOTE] -> In addition to the invoice rounding features, you can round amounts on invoices by the unit-amount rounding feature and the amount rounding feature. - -## How to: Set up general ledger accounts for invoice rounding differences -To use the automatic invoice rounding function, you must set up the general ledger account or accounts where rounding differences will be posted. Before you can do this, you must set up VAT product posting groups. For more information, see [Set up VAT](finance-setup-vat.md). - -### To set up general ledger accounts for invoice rounding differences -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Chart of Accounts** page, set up the account and name it **Invoice Rounding** or something similar. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will use the account name as text for invoices that are rounded. -3. Depending on whether you use VAT or sales tax, in the **Tax Prod. Posting Group** or **VAT Prod. Posting Group** fields, choose a posting group for rounded amounts. You may want to set up a new group code to use for invoice rounding. -4. Leave the **Gen. Posting Type**, and either the **Tax Bus. Posting Group** or **VAT Bus. Posting Group** fields blank. - -Now you can assign the invoice rounding account to posting groups on the **Vendor Posting Groups** page. - -## How to: Set up rounding for foreign and local currencies -Before you can use the automatic invoice rounding function, you must set up rounding rules for foreign and local currencies. - -### To set up rounding for foreign currencies -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Currencies**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Currencies** page, choose the foreign currency to open the **Currency Card**, and then fill in the **Amount Rounding Precision**, **Unit-Amount Rounding Precision**, **Invoice Rounding Precision** and **Invoice Rounding Type** fields. - -### To set up rounding for your local currency -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Ledger Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General Ledger Setup** page, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the **Inv. Rounding Precision** and **Inv. Rounding Type** fields. - -## How to: Activate the invoice rounding function -To ensure that sales and purchase invoices are rounded automatically, you must activate the invoice rounding function. You activate invoice rounding separately for sales and purchase invoices. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup** or **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, choose the **Invoice Rounding** check box. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index fde37d6d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-set-up-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Prepayments - description: Prepayments are payments that are invoiced and posted to a sales or purchase prepayment order before final invoicing. You might require a deposit before you manufacture items to order, or you might require payment before you ship items to a customer. The prepayments functionality enables you to invoice and collect deposits required from customers or to remit deposits to vendors. Thus, you can ensure that all payments are posted against an invoice. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: edupont04 - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 01/15/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Prepayments -If you require your customers to submit payment before you ship an order to them, or if your vendor requires you to submit payment before they ship an order to you, you can use the Prepayment functionality. The functionality enables you to invoice and collect deposits required from customers or to remit deposits to vendors, and to ensure that all partial payments are posted against an invoice. For more information, see [How to: Create Prepayment Invoices](finance-how-to-create-prepayment-invoices.md). - -Before you can post prepayment invoices, you have to set up the posting accounts in the general ledger, and you have to set up number series for prepayment documents. - -You can define the percentage of the line amount that will be invoiced for prepayment, for a customer or vendor, for all items or selected items. After you complete the setup, you can generate prepayment invoices from sales and purchase orders. You can use the default percentages for each sales or purchase line, or you can change the amounts on the invoice as needed. For example, you can specify a total amount for the entire order. - -Because the prepaid amount belongs to the buyer until they have received the goods or services, you need to set up general ledger accounts to hold the prepayment amounts until the final invoice is posted. Sales prepayments must be recorded in a liabilities account until the items are shipped. Purchase prepayments must be recorded in an assets account until the items are received. In addition, you must set up a separate general ledger account for each VAT identifier. - -## To add prepayment accounts to the general posting setup - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Posting Setup** window, fill in the following fields: - - - **Sales Prepayments Account** - - **Purch. Prepayments Account** -If you have not already set up general ledger accounts for prepayments, you can do that in the **G/L Account List** window. - -## To set up number series for prepayment documents - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, fill in the following fields: - - - **Posted Prepmt. Inv. Nos.** - - **Posted Prepmt. Cr. Memo Nos.** - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window, fill in the following fields: - - - **Posted Prepmt. Inv. Nos.** - - **Posted Prepmt. Cr. Memo Nos.** - -> [!NOTE] -> You can use the same number series for prepayment invoices and regular invoices, or you can use different number series. If you use different series, they must not overlap because there must not be any numbers that exist in both series. - -## To set up prepayment percentages for items, customers, and vendors -For an item, you can set up a default prepayment percentage for all customers, a specific customer, or a customer price group. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an item, and then choose the **Prepayment Percentages** action. -3. In the **Sales Prepayment Percentages** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -For a customer or vendor, you can set up one default prepayment percentage for all items and all types of sales lines. You enter this on the customer or vendor card. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for a customer. -3. Fill in the **Prepayment %** field. -4. Repeat the steps for other customers or for vendors. - -### To determine which prepayment percentage has first priority -An order may have a prepayment percentage on the sales header, and a different percentage for the items on the lines. To determine which prepayment percentage applies to each sale line, the system looks for the prepayment percentage in the following order and will apply the first default that it finds: -1. A prepayment percentage for the item on the line and the customer that the order is for. -2. A prepayment percentage for the item on the line and the customer price group that the customer belongs to. -3. A prepayment percentage for the item on the line for all customers. -4. The prepayment percentage on the sales or purchase header. - -In other words, the prepayment percentage on the customer card will only apply if there is no prepayment percentage set up for the item. However, if you change the contents of the **Prepayment Percentage** field on the sales or purchase header after you create the lines, the prepayment percentage on all of the lines will be updated. This makes it easy to create an order with a fixed prepayment percentage, regardless of the percentage set up on items. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Invoicing Prepayments](finance-invoice-prepayments.md) -[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md) -[Understanding the General Ledger and the COA](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md deleted file mode 100644 index 961a4269..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setting-filters-for-dynamic-allocation-bases.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setting Filters for Dynamic Allocation Bases - description: The dynamic allocation method is based on changeable values. For example, the number of employees in a cost center or the items sold of a cost object in a specific time period. There are nine pre-defined allocation bases and twelve dynamic date ranges. You set different filters based on the allocation base. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Filters for Dynamic Allocation Bases -The dynamic allocation method is based on changeable values. For example, the number of employees in a cost center or the items sold of a cost object in a specific time period. There are nine pre-defined allocation bases and twelve dynamic date ranges. You set different filters based on the allocation base. - -## Setting Filters for Dynamic Allocation Bases - The following table shows which filters are possible for different allocation bases and which values are valid in the **No. Filter** and **Group Filter** fields. Press F1 in the **Date Filter Code** field to read detailed descriptions. - -|**Base**|**No. Filter**|**Date Filter Code**|**Cost Center Filter**|**Cost Object Filter**|**Group Filter**| -|--------------|----------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------| -|G/L Entries|G/L Account|Yes|Yes|Yes|N/A| -|G/L Budget Entries|G/L Account|Yes|Yes|Yes|G/L Budget Name| -|Cost Type Entries|Cost Type|Yes|Yes|Yes|N/A| -|Cost Budget Entries|Cost Type|Yes|Yes|Yes|Budget Name| -|No of Employees|N/A|Yes|Yes|Yes|N/A| -|Items Sold (Qty)|Item No.|Yes|Yes|Yes|Inventory Posting Group| -|Items Purchased (Qty)|Item No.|Yes|Yes|Yes|Inventory Posting Group| -|Items Sold (Amount)|Item No.|Yes|Yes|Yes|Inventory Posting Group| -|Items Purchased (Amount)|Item No.|Yes|Yes|Yes|Inventory Posting Group| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Scenario Example: Defining Dynamic Allocations Based on Items Sold](finance-scenario-example-defining-dynamic-allocations-based-on-items-sold.md) - [How to: Set Up Allocation Source and Targets](finance-how-to-set-up-allocation-source-and-targets.md) - [Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md deleted file mode 100644 index a78fe2db..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting up Cash Flow Analysis -description: Set up the charts on the Accounts Role Center to help analyze the flow of money in your business, including expenses and income, liquidity, and cash receipts minus cash payments. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: money flow, expense and income, liquidity, cash receipts minus cash payments, Cartera, funds -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Setting Up Cash Flow Analysis -If you want some help to decide what to do with your cash, have a look at the charts on the Accountant Role Center: - -* **Cash Cycle** -* **Income & Expense** -* **Cash Flow** -* **Cash Flow Forecasts** - -This topic describes where the data in the charts comes from and, if necessary, what to do to start using the charts. - -## The Cash Cycle and Income & Expense charts -The **Cash Cycle** and **Income & Expense** charts are ready to go, based on the Chart of Accounts and account schedules. The accounts are where the data comes from, and account schedules calculate the relationship between sales and receivables. Some accounts and account schedules are provided. You can use them as-is, change them, and add new ones. If you add G/L accounts to your chart of accounts, for example, by importing them from QuickBooks, you'll need to map to the accounts on the **Account Schedules** page for the following account schedule names: - -| Account Schedule Name | Where it's used | -| --- | --- | -| **I_CACYCLE** |Cash Cycle | -| **I_CASHFLOW** |Cash Flow | -| **I_INCEXP** |Income & Expense | -| **I_MINTRIAL** |As an income statement if you don't use the chart of accounts | - -**Note** It's a good idea to keep the calculations that are provided for the account schedule. - -Enter accounts in the **Totaling** field for **Total Revenue**, **Total Receivables**, **Total Payables**, and **Total Inventory**. To map to a range of accounts, or more than one specific account, enter the account numbers separated by ".." or by a vertical bar, respectively. For example, **1111..4444** or **2222|3333|5555**. - -**Tip** Verify your mapping by choosing the **Overview** action. - -## Set up the Cash Flow chart -The Cash Flow chart is based on the following: - -* A chart of cash flow accounts. -* One or more cash flow setups. These specify the accounts to use for general ledger, purchases, sales, services, and fixed assets. - -To help you get going, some accounts and cash flow setups are provided. You can add, change, or remove them. - -To set these up, search for **cash flow accounts**, choose the link, and then fill in the fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] Repeat these steps for **cash flow setup**. - -## Set up cash flow forecasts -The **Cash Flow Forecast** chart uses cash flow accounts, cash flow setups, and cash flow forecasts. Some are provided, however, you can set up your own by using an assisted setup guide. The guide helps you specify things like how often to update the forecast, the accounts to base it on, information about when you pay taxes, and whether to turn on [Cortana Intelligence](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/cloud-platform/what-is-cortana-intelligence-suite). - -Cash flow forecasts can use Cortana Intelligence to include documents with a due date in the future. The result is a more comprehensive prediction. The connection to Cortana Intelligence is already set up for you. You just need to turn it on. When you sign in to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)], a notification displays in a blue bar, and provides a link to the default cash flow setup. The notification displays only once. If you close it, but decide to turn on Cortana Intelligence, you can use the assisted setup guide, or a manual process. - -> [!NOTE] -> Alternatively, you can use your own predictive web service. For more information, see [Create and use your own predictive web service for cash flow forecasts](#AnchorText). - -To use the assisted setup guide: - -1. In the Accountant Role Center, under the **Cash Flow Forecast** chart, choose the **Open Assisted Setup** action. -2. Fill in the fields in each step of the guide. -3. On the Home page, choose **Cash Flow Forecast** above the chart, and then **Recalculate Forecast**. - -To use a manual process: - -1. In the Accountant Role Center, search for **Cash Flow Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Expand the **Cortana Intelligence** FastTab, and then choose the **Cortana Intelligence Enabled** check box. -3. On the Home page, choose **Cash Flow Forecast** above the chart, and then **Recalculate Forecast**. - -> [!TIP] -> Consider the length of the periods that the service will use in its calculations. The more data you provide, the more accurate the predictions will be. Also, watch out for large variances in periods. They will also impact predictions. If Cortana Intelligence does not find enough data, or the data varies a lot, the service will not make a prediction. - -## Create and use your own predictive web service for cash flow forecasts -You can also create your own predictive web service based on a public model named **Forecasting model for Microsoft Dynamics NAV**. This predictive model is available online in the Cortana Intelligence Gallery. To use the model, follow these steps: - -1. Open a browser and go to the [Cortana Intelligence Gallery](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=828352). -2. Search for **Forecasting Model for Microsoft Dynamics NAV**, and then open the model in Azure Machine Learning Studio. -3. Use your Microsoft account to sign up for a workspace, and then copy the model. -4. Run the model, and publish it as a web service. -5. Make a note of the API URL and API key. You will use these credentials for a cash flow setup. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Flow Setup**, and then choose the related link. -7. Expand the **Cortana Intelligence** FastTab, and then fill in the fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Analyzing Cash Flow in Your Company](finance-analyze-cash-flow.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-chart-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-chart-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 83f1f06b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-chart-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up the Chart of Accounts -description: You change the default accounts in the chart of accounts (COA), and you can add new accounts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: COA, cha of acc -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up or Changing the Chart of Accounts -The chart of accounts shows the ledger accounts that store your financial data. [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] includes a standard chart of accounts that is ready to support your business. -However, you can change the default accounts, and you can add new accounts. - -## Adding or Changing Accounts -From the chart of accounts, you can open each G/L account and add or change settings. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can delete a general ledger account. However, before you delete it, the following must be true: - -* The balance on the account must be zero. -* The **Allow G/L Acc. Deletion Before** field must be set in the **General Ledger Setup** window, and the account must not have ledger entries on or after that date. -* If the **Check G/L Account Usage** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window is selected, then the account must not be used in any posting groups or posting setup. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will prevent you from deleting a general ledger account that stores data that is needed in the chart of accounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[The General Ledger and the Chart of Accounts](finance-general-ledger.md) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) -[Importing from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-currencies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-currencies.md deleted file mode 100644 index b3474d65..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-currencies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Currencies" -description: Currencies -author: edupont04 -ms.author: edupont -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# Currencies -You must set up a code for each currency you use if you buy or sell in currencies other than your local currency, have receivables or payables in other currencies, or record G/L transactions in different currencies. - -## Set Up a Currency Exchange Rate Service -You can use an external service to get the latest currency exchange rates into the Currencies window. To update currency exchange rates, you must first set up the service. -The service that provides updated currency exchange rates is enabled by a data exchange definition in the **Currency Exchange Rate Service** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Close Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-dimensions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-dimensions.md deleted file mode 100644 index f2c8ac67..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-dimensions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Set Up Dimensions" -description: Set up dimensions -author: edupont04 -ms.author: edupont -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# Set Up Dimensions -You must define which dimensions and dimension values you want to use in your company. You should also define which dimensions you wish to use as global and shortcut dimensions. You should consider carefully which dimensions will be most effective as global and shortcut dimensions for your company. -You set up all of the different dimensions that you want to track in the **Dimensions** window. The Dimensions window contains one line for each dimension, such as *Project*, *Department*, *Area*, and *Salesperson*. - -For each dimension, you must also set up the dimension values, such as all of the departments in your company. Dimension values can be set up in a hierarchical structure similar to the chart of accounts, so that data can be broken down into various levels of granularity, and subsets of dimension values can be totaled. - -You can specify two global dimensions that will automatically be available everywhere, for example on reports and batch jobs. You can also specify six additional shortcut dimensions that will be available as a field on journal and document lines. The remaining dimensions can be used by accessing a separate window that displays dimensions for the line. - -You can define as many dimensions as you need in your company, and you can define an unlimited number of dimension values for each dimension. All dimensions defined by you can be used on entries in journals and documents, as well as in dimensions-related reports and batch jobs. - -## Set Up Default Dimensions for Customers, Vendors, and Other Accounts -You can set up a default dimension for a specific individual account. This code is then copied to the journal or document when the account number field is filled in on the line. However, you may delete or change the code if appropriate. You can also make a dimension required, so that it is not possible to post an entry with a specific type of account unless the account has a dimension value assigned to it. - -Furthermore, you can set up a default dimension for each type of account so that this code is copied to the journal or document when the account type is filled in on the line. However, you can always change the code on the document if relevant. - -Finally, you can also make a dimension required, so that it is not possible to post an entry with a specific type of account unless the account has a dimension value assigned to it. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) -[Set Up Core Financial Processes](finance-setup-finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-finance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-finance.md deleted file mode 100644 index 04e3e864..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-finance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Financial Processes -description: Learn about the tasks to set up finance in your business to suit all your accounting, auditing, or bookkeeping needs. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accounting, auditing, bookkeeping -ms.date: 08/10/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Finance -To help you get going quickly, [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] includes standard configurations for most financial processes. If you need to change the configurations to suit your business, go right ahead. For example, from the Home page you can use an assisted setup guide to set up sales tax rate for your location. - -However, there are some things you need to set up yourself. For example, if you want to use dimensions as a basis for business intelligence. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Choose how you pay your vendors. |[Defining Payment Methods](finance-payment-methods.md) | -| Specify the posting groups that map entities like customers, vendors, items, resources, and sales and purchase documents to general ledger accounts. |[Setting Up Posting Groups](finance-posting-groups.md)| -|Set up a tolerance by which the system closes an invoice even though the payment, including any discount, does not fully cover the amount on the invoice.|[How to: Work with Payment Tolerances and Payment Discount Tolerances](finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md)| -| Set up fiscal periods. |[How to: Open a New Fiscal Year](finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md) | -| Define how you report value-added tax amounts that you have collected for sales to the tax authorities. |[How To: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](finance-how-report-vat.md)| -| Set your Sales and Purchases features up to handle payments in foreign currencies.|[How to: Enable Application of Ledger Entries in Different Currencies](finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md) -| Add new accounts to the existing chart of accounts. |[Setting Up the Chart of Accounts](finance-setup-chart-accounts.md) | -| Set up business intelligence (BI) charts to analyze cash flow. |[Setting Up Cash Flow Analysis](finance-setup-cash-flow-analyses.md) | -|Enable invoicing of a customer who is not set up in the system.|[How to: Set Up Cash Customers](finance-how-to-set-up-cash-customers.md)| -| Set up Intrastat reporting, and submit the report to an authority | [How to: Set Up and Report Intrastat](finance-how-setup-report-intrastat.md)| -|Set up different interest rates that you can use on finance charges to charge different interests on late payments depending on the period.|[How to: Set Up Multiple Interest Rates](finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) -[Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) -[Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Analyzing Cash Flow in Your Company](finance-analyze-cash-flow.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-unrealized-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-unrealized-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 623f2b37..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-unrealized-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Unrealized Value Added Tax -description: If you're using cash-based accounting, you can specify how to handle unrealized VAT for sales and purchases. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: cash, VAT, unrealized, cash-based -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Unrealized VAT for Cash-Based Accounting -If you're using cash-based accounting methods, you can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] to handle unrealized VAT. - -## To use general ledger accounts for unrealized VAT -You can choose to have VAT amounts calculated and posted to a temporary general ledger account when an invoice is posted, and then posted to the correct general ledger account and included in VAT statements when the actual payment of the invoice is posted. Before you can do this, you must complete the VAT posting setup. - -To use accounts for unrealized VAT, follow these steps: -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, and enter **General Ledger Setup**. -2. On the **General Ledger Setup** page, on the **General** FastTab, choose **Show More**, and then choose the **Unrealized VAT** check box. -3. Close the page. -4. choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon"), and enter **VAT Posting Setup**. -5. On the **VAT Posting Setup** page, choose the VAT posting group, and then choose **Edit**. -6. In the **Unrealized VAT Type** field, choose an option to specify how to allocate payments to the invoice amount (excluding VAT) and the VAT amount itself, and how to transfer VAT amounts from the unrealized VAT account to the realized account. The following table describes the options. - -| Option | Description | -| --- | --- | -| Blank | Choose this option if you don't want to use the unrealized VAT feature. | -| Percentage | Payments covers both VAT and the invoice amount in proportion to the payment's percentage of the remaining invoice amount. The paid VAT amount is transferred from the unrealized VAT account to the realized VAT account. | -| First | Payments cover VAT first and then invoice amounts. In this case, the amount transferred from the unrealized VAT account to the VAT account will equal the amount of the payment until the total VAT has been paid. | -| Last | Payments cover the invoice amount first and then VAT. In this case, no amount will be transferred from the unrealized VAT account to the VAT account until the total amount of the invoice, excluding VAT, has been paid. | -| First (Fully Paid) | Payments will cover VAT first (like the _First_ option), but no amount will be transferred to the VAT account until the full amount of VAT has been paid. | -| Last (Fully Paid) | Payments will cover invoice amount first (like the _Last_ option), but no amount will be transferred to the VAT account until the full amount of VAT has been paid. | - -6. In the **Sales VAT Unreal. Account** field, choose the account for unrealized sales VAT. - - > [!NOTE] - > The VAT amount will be posted to this account, and stay there until the customer payment is posted. The amount is then transferred to the account for sales VAT. -7. In the **Purch. VAT Unreal. Account** field, enter the general ledger count for unrealized purchase VAT. - - > [!NOTE] - > The VAT amount will be posted to this account, and stay there until the customer payment is posted. The amount is then transferred to the account for sales VAT. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Value Added Tax](finance-setup-vat.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index 847d58b5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-setup-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,235 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: About Setting Up Value-Added Tax -description: Make sure that you correctly calculate, post, and report on VAT for sales and purchases. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: VAT, posting, tax, value-added tax -ms.date: 04/20/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# Setting Up to Calculations and Posting Methods for Value-Added Tax -Consumers and businesses pay value-added tax (VAT) when they purchase goods or services. The amount of VAT to pay can vary, depending on several factors. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you set up VAT to specify the rates to use to calculate tax amounts based on the following: - -* Who you sell to -* Who you buy from -* What you sell -* What you buy - -You can set up VAT calculations manually, but that can be tricky and time consuming. To make it easy, we provide an assisted setup guide named **VAT Setup** that will help you with the steps. We recommend that you use the assisted setup guide to set up VAT. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can use the guide only if you have created a My Company, and have not posted transactions that include VAT. Otherwise, it would be very easy to use different VAT rates by mistake, and make VAT-related reports inaccurate. - -If you want to set up VAT calculations yourself, or just want to learn about each step, this topic contains descriptions of each step. - -## To use the VAT Setup assisted setup guide to set up VAT (recommended) -We recommend that you use the VAT Setup assisted setup guide to set up VAT in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -To start the assisted setup guide, follow these steps: -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assisted Setup**. -2. Choose **VAT Setup**. - -## To set up VAT business posting groups -VAT business posting groups should represent the markets in which you do business with customers and vendors, and define how to calculate and post VAT in each market. Examples of VAT business posting groups are **Domestic** and **European Union (EU)**. - -Use codes that are easy to remember and describe the business posting group, such as **EU**, **Non-EU**, or **Domestic**. The code must be unique. You can set up as many codes as you need, but you cannot have the same code more than once in a table. - -To set up a VAT business posting group, follow these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Business Posting Group**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -You set up default VAT business posting groups by linking them to general business posting groups. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically assigns the VAT business posting group when you assign the business posting group to a customer, vendor, or general ledger account. - -## To set up VAT product posting groups -VAT product posting groups represent the items and resources you buy or sell, and determine how to calculate and post VAT according to the type of item or resource that is being bought or sold. -It is a good idea to use codes that are easy to remember and describe the rate, such as **NO-VAT** or **Zero**, **VAT10** or **Reduced** for 10% VAT, and **VAT25** or **Standard** for 25%. - -To set up a VAT business posting group, follow these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Product Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To combine VAT posting groups in VAT posting setups -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates VAT amounts on sales and purchases based on VAT posting setups, which are combinations of VAT business and product posting groups. For each combination, you can specify the VAT percent, VAT calculation type, and general ledger accounts for posting VAT for sales, purchases, and reverse charges. You can also specify whether to recalculate VAT when a payment discount is applied or received. - -Set up as many combinations as you need. If you want to group VAT posting setup combinations with similar attributes, you can define a **VAT Identifier** for each group, and assign the identifier to the group members. - -To combine VAT posting setups, follow these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To assign VAT posting groups by default to multiple entities -If you want to apply the same VAT posting groups to multiple entities, you can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to do so by default. There are a couple of ways to do this: - -* You can assign VAT business posting groups to general business posting groups, or customer or vendor templates -* You can assign VAT product posting groups on general product posting groups - -The VAT business or product posting group is assigned when you choose a business or product posting group for a customer, vendor, item, or resource. - -## To assign VAT posting groups to individual accounts, customers, vendors, items, and resources -The following sections describe how to assign VAT posting groups to individual entities. - -### To assign VAT posting groups to individual general ledger accounts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the **G/L Account** card for the account. -3. On the **Posting** FastTab, in the **Gen. Posting Type** field, choose either **Sale** or **Purchase**. -5. Choose the VAT posting groups to use for the sales or purchase account. - -### To assign VAT business posting groups to customers and vendors -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer** or **Vendor**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Customer** or **Vendor** card, expand the **Invoicing** FastTab. -3. Choose the VAT business posting group. - -### To assign VAT product posting groups to individual items and resources -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item** or **Resource**, and then choose the related link. -2. Do one of the following: - -* On the **Item** card, expand the **Price & Posting** FastTab, and then choose **Show more** to display the **VAT Product Posting Group** field. -* On the **Resource** card, expand the **Invoicing** FastTab. -* Choose the VAT product posting group. - -## To set up clauses to explain the use of non-standard VAT rates -You set up a VAT clause to describe information about the type of VAT that is being applied. The information may be required by government regulation. After you set up a VAT clause, and associate it with a VAT posting setup, the VAT clause is displayed on printed sales documents that use the VAT posting setup group. - -If needed, you can also specify how to translate VAT clauses to other languages. Then, when you create and print a sales document that contains a VAT identifier, the document will include the translated VAT clause. The language code specified on the Customer card determines the language. - -You can modify or delete a VAT clause, and your modifications will be reflected in a generated report. However, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not keep a history of the change. On the report, the VAT clause descriptions are printed and displayed for all lines in the report alongside the VAT amount and the VAT base amount. If a VAT clause has not been defined for any lines on the sales document, then the whole section is omitted when the report is printed. - -### To set up VAT clauses -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Clauses**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **VAT Clauses** page, create a new line. -3. In the **Code** field, enter an identifier for the clause. You use this code to assign the clause to VAT posting groups. -4. In the **Description** field, enter the text that you want to display on documents that can include VAT. In the **Description 2** field, enter additional text, if needed. The text displays on new lines. -5. Optional: To assign the VAT clause to a VAT posting setup right away, choose **Setup**, and then choosing the clause. If you want to wait, you can assign the clause later on the VAT Posting Setup page. -6. Optional: To specify how to translate the VAT clause, choose the **Translations** action. - -### To assign a VAT clause to a VAT posting setup -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **VAT Clause** column, choose the clause to use for each VAT posting setup it applies to. - -### To specify translations for VAT clauses -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Clauses**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Translations** action. -3. In the **Language Code** field, choose the language you are translating to. -4. In the **Description** and **Description 2** fields, enter the translations of the descriptions. This text displays in the translated VAT report documents. - -## To create a VAT posting setup to handle Import VAT -You use the Import VAT feature when you need to post a document where the entire amount is VAT. You will use this if you receive an invoice from the tax authorities for VAT for imported goods. - -To set up codes for import VAT, follow these steps: -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Product Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the VAT Product Posting Groups page, set up a new VAT product posting group for import VAT. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -4. On the VAT Posting Setup page, create a new line, or use an existing VAT business posting groups in combination with the new VAT product posting group for import VAT. -5. In the **VAT Calculation Type** field, choose **Full VAT**. -6. In the **Purchase VAT Account** field, enter the general ledger account to use for posting import VAT. All other accounts are optional. - -## To verify VAT registration numbers -It is important that the VAT registration numbers you have for customers, vendors, and contacts are valid. For example, companies sometimes change their tax liability status, and in some countries/regions tax authorities might ask you to provide reports, such as the EC Sales List report, that list the VAT registration numbers you use when you do business. - -The European Commission provides the VIES VAT Number Validation service on its website, which is public and free. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can save you a step and let you use the VIES service to validate and track VAT numbers for customers, vendors, and contacts straight from the customer, vendor, and contact cards. The service in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is named **EU VAT Reg. No. Validation Service**. The service is available on the **Service Connections** page, and you can start using it right away. The service connection is free, and signup is not required. - -> [!Note] -> To enable the EU VAT Reg. No. Validation Service, you must have administrator permissions. - -When you use our service connection, we record a history of VAT numbers and verifications for each customer, vendor, or contact, in the **VAT Registration Log**, so you can easily track them. The log is specific to each customer. For example, the log is useful for proving that you have verified that the current VAT number is correct. When you verify a VAT number, the **Request Identifier** column in the log will reflect that you have taken action. - -You can view the VAT Registration log on the Customer, Vendor, or Contact cards, on the **Invoicing** FastTab, by choosing the lookup button in the **VAT Registration No.** field. - -Our service can also save you time when you create a customer or vendor. If you know the customer's VAT number, you can enter it in the **VAT Registration No.** field on the Customer or Vendor cards, and we will fill out the customer name for you. Some countries/regions also provide company addresses in a structured format. In those countries/regions, we fill in the address too. - -> [!NOTE] -> There are a couple of things to note about the VIES VAT Number Validation service: - -* The service uses the http protocol, which means that data transferred through the service is not encrypted. -* You may experience downtime for this service for which Microsoft is not responsible. The service is part of a broad EU network of national VAT registers. - -## Using Reverse Charge VAT for Trade between EU Countries or Regions -Some companies must use reverse charge VAT when trading with other companies. For example this rule applies to purchases from EU countries/regions and sales to EU countries/regions. - -> [!NOTE] -> This rule applies when trading with companies that are registered as VAT liable in another EU country/region. If you do business directly with consumers in other EU countries/regions, then you should contact your tax authority for applicable VAT rules. - -> [!TIP] -> You can verify that a company is registered as VAT liable in another EU country/region by using the EU VAT Registration Number Validation service. The service is available for free in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see the section titled _Verify VAT registration numbers_ in this topic. - -### Sales to EU countries or regions -VAT is not calculated on sales to VAT-liable companies in other EU countries/regions. You must report the value of these sales to EU countries/regions separately on your VAT statement. - -To correctly calculate VAT on sales to EU countries/regions, you should: - -* Set up a line for sales with the same information for purchases. If you have already set up lines on the VAT Posting Setup page for purchases from EU countries/regions, then you can also use these lines for sales. -* Assign the VAT business posting groups in the **VAT Bus. Posting Group** field on the **Invoicing** FastTab of the customer card of each EU customer. You should also enter the customer's VAT registration number in the **VAT Registration No.** field on the **Foreign Trade** FastTab. - -When you post a sale to a customer in another EU country/region, the VAT amount is calculated, and a VAT entry is created by using the information about the reverse charge VAT and the VAT base, which is the amount that is used to calculate the VAT amount. No entries are posted to the VAT accounts in the general ledger. - -## Understanding VAT rounding for documents -Amounts in documents that are not yet posted are rounded and displayed to correspond with the final rounding of amounts that are actually posted. VAT is calculated for a complete document, which means that VAT is calculated based on the sum of all lines with the same VAT identifier in the document. - -## Understanding the VAT Rate Conversion Process -The VAT rate change tool performs VAT rate conversions for master data, journals, and orders in different ways. The selected master data and journals will be updated by the new general product posting group or VAT product post group. If an order has been fully or partially shipped, the shipped items will keep the current general product posting group or VAT product posting group. A new order line will be created for the unshipped items and updated to align current and new VAT or general product posting groups. In addition, item charge assignments, reservations, and item tracking information will be updated accordingly. - -There are, however, a few things that the tool does not convert: - -* Sales or purchase orders and invoices where shipments have been posted. These documents are posted using the current VAT rate. -* Documents that have posted prepayment invoices. For example, you have made or received prepayments on invoices that have not been completed before you use the VAT rate change tool. In this case, there will be a difference between the VAT that is due and the VAT that has been paid in the prepayments when the invoice is completed. The VAT rate change tool will skip these documents and you will have to manually update them. -* Drop shipments or special orders. -* Sales or purchase orders with warehouse integration if they are partially shipped or received. -* Service contracts. - -### To prepare VAT rate change conversions -Before you set up the VAT rate change tool, you must make the following preparations. - -* If you have transactions that use different rates, then they must be separated into different groups either by creating new general ledger accounts for each rate or by using data filters to group transactions according to rate. -* If you create new general ledger accounts, then you must create new general posting groups. -* To reduce the number of documents that get converted, post as many documents as possible and reduce unposted documents to a minimum. -* Back up data. - -### To set up the VAT rate change tool -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Rate Change Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Master Data**, **Journals**, and **Documents** FastTabs, choose a posting group value from the option list for needed fields. - -### To set up product posting group conversion -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Rate Change Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **VAT Rate Change Setup** page, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose either **VAT Prod. Posting Group Conv.** or **Gen Prod. Posting Group Conv.**. -3. In the **From Code** field, enter the current posting group. -4. In the **To Code** field, enter the new posting group. - -### To perform VAT rate change conversion -You use the VAT rate change tool to manage changes in the standard rate of VAT. You perform VAT and general posting group conversions to change VAT rates and maintain accurate VAT reporting. Depending on your setup, the following changes are made: - -* VAT and general posting groups are converted. -* Changes are implemented in general ledger accounts, customers, vendors, open documents, journal lines, and so on. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Before you perform VAT rate change conversion, you can test the conversion. To do so, follow the steps below, but make sure to clear the **Perform Conversion** and **VAT Rate Change Tool Completed** check boxes. During test conversion, the **Converted** field in the **VAT Rate Change Log Entry** table is cleared and the **Converted Date** field in the **VAT Rate Change Log Entry** table is blank. After the conversion is complete, choose **VAT Rate Change Log Entries** to view the results of the test conversion. Verify each entry before you perform the conversion. In particular, verify transactions that use an old VAT rate. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **VAT Rate Change**, and then choose the **VAT Rate Change Setup** link. -2. Verify that you have already set up the VAT product posting group conversion or general product posting group conversion. -3. Choose the **Perform Conversion** check box. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Clear the **VAT Rate Change Tool Completed** check box. The check box is automatically selected when the VAT rate change conversion is completed. - -4. Choose the **Convert** action. -5. After the conversion is complete, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **VAT Rate Change Log Entries** to view the results of the conversion. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> After the conversion, the **Converted** field in the **VAT Rate Change Log Entry** table is chosen and the **Converted Date** field in the **VAT Rate Change Log Entry** table displays the conversion date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Unrealized Value Added Tax](finance-setup-unrealized-vat.md) -[How To: Report VAT to a Tax Authority](finance-how-report-vat.md) -[How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases](finance-work-with-vat.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md deleted file mode 100644 index b7ad01c7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-terminology-in-cost-accounting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Terminology in Cost Accounting - description: This topic defines the key terms that are used in cost accounting. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Terminology in Cost Accounting -This topic defines the key terms that are used in cost accounting. - -## Key Terms - The following table shows definitions of the key terms in cost accounting. - -|**Term**|**Definition**| -|--------------|--------------------| -|Allocation key|The allocation key is the basis that is used to allocate costs. It is typically a quantity, such as square meters occupied, number of employees, or man-hours used. For example, two departments, with 20 and 10 employees respectively, share canteen costs. The costs are distributed between the departments by using an allocation key that represents the number of employees. Two thirds of the costs are allocated to the first department, and one third of the costs are allocated to the second department.| -|Allocation source|The allocation source establishes which costs are allocated. Allocations are defined in allocation source and allocation target tables. Each allocation consists of an allocation source and one or more allocation targets. For example, all costs for the heating cost type, which is an allocation source, can be allocated to the workshop, production, and sales cost centers, which are three allocation targets.| -|Allocation target|The allocation targets determine where the costs are allocated. Allocations are defined in allocation source and allocation target tables. Each allocation consists of an allocation source and one or more allocation targets. For example, all costs for the heating cost type, which is an allocation source, can be allocated to the workshop, production, and sales cost centers, which are three allocation targets.| -|Cost accounting|In cost accounting, actual costs of operations, processes, departments, or products are recorded. These costs are allocated to cost centers and cost objects by using different cost allocation methods. Managers use statistics and reports, such as cost distribution sheet and profit and loss analysis to make decisions and reduce costs. Cost accounting retrieves data from the general ledger, but works independently. Therefore transactions posted in cost accounting do not affect the data in the general ledger.| -|Cost type|The chart of cost types has the same function as the chart of accounts in the general ledger. They are often structured similarly. Therefore it is possible to transfer the general ledger chart of accounts to the chart of cost types and then modify it. The chart of cost types can also be created from scratch.| -|Cost center|Cost centers are most often departments and profit centers that are largely responsible for company’s costs and income. Cost centers can be synchronized with dimensions in the general ledger. It is also possible to add new cost centers and define their own sorting with subtotals.| -|Cost object|Cost objects are products, product groups or services of a company, the finished goods of a company, that in the end carry the costs. Cost objects can be synchronized with dimensions in the general ledger. It is also possible to add new cost objects and define their own sorting with subtotals.| -|Cost allocation|Cost allocation is a process of allocating costs to cost centers or cost objects. For example, the wage of the truck driver of the sales department is allocated to the sales department cost center. It is not necessary to allocate the wage cost to other cost centers. Another example is that the cost of an expensive computer system is allocated to the products of the company that use the system.| -|Dynamic allocation|Dynamic allocations are dependent on changeable allocation bases, for example, the number of department employees, or the sales revenue of the project within a certain period of time. There are nine predefined dynamic allocation bases that users can define by using five filters.| -|Direct cost|Direct costs are the costs that can be directly allocated to a cost object, for example, material purchase for a specific product.| -|Fixed cost|Fixed costs are the costs that are not dependent on the level of goods or services produced by the company. They tend to be time-related, such as salary or rent being paid per month. They are in contrast to variable costs, which are volume-related, and are paid per quantity produced.| -|Indirect cost|Indirect costs are not directly accountable to a cost object, such as a particular function or product. Indirect costs may be either fixed or variable. Indirect costs can be tax, administration, personnel, and security costs and are also known as overhead costs.| -|Level|Level is used to define allocation order. Level is defined as a number between 1 and 99. The allocation posting follows the order of the levels. For example, level ensures that first administration is allocated to workshop before workshop is allocated to vehicle and production.| -|Static allocation|Static allocations are based on a fixed set of values, for example, the square meters used, or an established allocation ratio, such as 5:2:4.| -|Operational cost|Operational costs are the recurring expenses which are related to the operation of a business, a device, and a component.| -|Overhead cost|Overhead costs refer to ongoing expenses of operating a business. They are all costs on the income statement except for direct labor, direct materials, and direct expenses. Overhead costs include accounting fees, advertising, depreciation, insurance, interest, legal fees, rent, repairs, supplies, taxes, telephone bills, travel, and utilities costs.| -|Step variable cost|Step variable costs are costs that change dramatically at certain points because they involve large purchases that cannot be spread out over time. For example, one employee can produce 100 tables in a month. The employee’s wage is constant over a production range of 1 to 100 tables. If the company wants to produce 110 tables, the company needs two employees. So the cost will double.| -|Share|The portion or part that is allocated among cost centers or cost objects.| -|Static weighting|Costs are allocated according to allocation keys, which can be modified by using a multiplier.
For example, two departments, with 20 and 10 employees respectively, share canteen costs. The costs are distributed between the departments by using an allocation key that represents the number of employees that eat in the canteen. In the first department, only 5 employees eat in the canteen, so this department has a multiplier of 0.25. The basis for allocation is 20 x 0.25 = 5. The total number of employees that eat in the canteen is 15. One third of the costs are allocated to the first department and two thirds of the costs are allocated to the second department.| -|Variable cost|Variable costs are expenses that change in proportion to the activity of a business. Variable costs are the sum of marginal costs over all units produced. Fixed costs and variable costs make up the two components of total costs.| -|Variant|A variant is used as an optional user-defined label for allocations. The purpose of the label is to filter groups of allocation.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) - [Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0e1818d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-transfer-and-post-cost-entries.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Transferring and Posting Cost Entries - description: Before you define cost allocations, you must understand where cost entries come from. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Transferring and Posting Cost Entries -Before you define cost allocations, you must understand how cost entries come from the following sources: - -- Automatic transfer of general ledger entries. -- Manual cost posting for pure cost entries, internal charges, and manual allocations. -- Automatic allocation postings for actual costs. -- Transfer of budget entries to actual. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Understand criteria for transferring cost entries from general ledger.|[Criteria for Transferring General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-criteria-for-transferring-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md)| -|Transfer general ledger entries to cost entries with a batch job.|[How to: Transfer General Ledger Entries to Cost Entries](finance-how-to-transfer-general-ledger-entries-to-cost-entries.md)| -|See the results of the transfer.|[Results of the Transfer](finance-results-of-the-transfer.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[About Cost Accounting](finance-about-cost-accounting.md) - [Setting Up Cost Accounting](finance-set-up-cost-accounting.md) - [Defining and Allocating Costs](finance-define-and-allocate-costs.md) - [Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-work-with-vat.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance-work-with-vat.md deleted file mode 100644 index b507a7f4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance-work-with-vat.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,173 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to work With VAT on Sales and Purchases - description: This topic describes how perform tasks such as correcting posted VATIn EU countries/regions, every sales and purchase transaction is subject to VAT calculations. This topic describes how. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: VAT, sales, purchases, - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases -If your country or region requires you to calculate value-added tax (VAT) on sales and purchase transactions so that you can report the amounts to a tax authority, you can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to calculate VAT automatically on sales and purchase documents. For more information, see [Setting Up to Calculations and Posting Methods for Value-Added Tax](finance-setup-vat.md). - -There are, however, some VAT-related tasks that you can do manually. For example, you might need to correct a posted amount if you discover that a vendor uses a different rounding method. - -## Calculating and Displaying VAT Amounts in Sales and Purchase Documents -You can calculate and display VAT amounts in sales and purchase documents differently, depending on the type of customer or vendor that you are dealing with. You can also override the calculated VAT amount to match the VAT amount calculated by your vendor on a given transaction. - -### Unit Price and Line Amount Including/Excluding VAT on sales documents -When you choose an item number in the **No.** field on a sales document, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] fills in the **Unit Price** field. The unit price comes from either the **Item** card or the item prices allowed for the item and customer. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]calculates the **Line Amount** when you enter a quantity for the line. - -If you are selling to retail consumers, you may want prices on sales documents to include VAT. To do this, choose the **Prices Including VAT** check box on the document. - -### Including or excluding VAT on prices -If the **Prices Including VAT** check box is chosen on a sales document, the **Unit Price** and **Line Amount** fields include VAT, and the field names will also reflect this. By default, VAT is not included in these fields. - -If the field is not selected, the program will fill in the **Unit Price** and **Line Amount** field excluding VAT and the field names will reflect this. - -You can set up the default setting of the **Prices Including VAT** for all sales documents for a customer in the **Prices Including VAT** field on the **Customer** card. You can also set up item prices to include or exclude VAT. Normally, item prices contained in the Item Card will be the price excluding VAT. The program uses the information from the **Price Includes VAT** field on the **Item** card to determine the unit price amount for sales documents. - -The following table provides an overview of how the program calculates the unit price amounts for a sales document when you have not set up prices in the **Sales Prices** window: - -|**Price Includes VAT field on Item Card**|**Prices Including VAT field in Sales Header**|**Action Performed**| -|-----------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------|--------------------------| -|No check mark|No check mark|The **Unit Price** on the Item Card is copied to **Unit Price Excl. VAT** field on the sales lines.| -|No check mark|Check mark|The program calculates the VAT amount per unit and adds to the **Unit Price** on the Item Card. This total Unit Price is then entered in the **Unit Price Incl. VAT field** on the sales lines.| -|Check mark|No check mark|The program calculates the VAT amount included in the **Unit Price** on the Item Card using the VAT% related to the VAT Bus. Posting Gr. (Price) and the VAT Prod. Posting Group combination. The **Unit Price** on the Item Card, reduced by the VAT amount, is then entered in the **Unit Price Excl. VAT** field in the sales lines.| -|Check mark|Check mark|The **Unit Price** on the Item Card is copied to **Unit Price Incl. VAT** field on the sales lines.| - -## Correcting VAT Amounts Manually in Sales and Purchase Documents -You can make corrections to posted VAT entries. This allows you to change the total sales or purchase VAT amounts without changing the VAT base. You may need to do this, for example, if you receive an invoice from a vendor that has calculated VAT incorrectly. - -Although you may have set up one or more combinations to handle import VAT, you must set up at least one VAT product posting group. For example, you can name it **CORRECT** for correction purposes, unless you can use the same general ledger account in the **Purchase VAT Account** field on the VAT posting setup line. For more information, see [Setting Up to Calculations and Posting Methods for Value-Added Tax](finance-setup-vat.md). - -If a payment discount has been calculated on the basis of an invoice amount that includes VAT, you revert the payment discount part of the VAT amount when the payment discount is granted. Note that you must activate the **Adjust for Payments Disc.** field in both the general ledger setup in general and the VAT posting setup for specific combinations of a VAT business posting group and a VAT product posting group. - -#### To manually enter VAT in sales documents -1. On the **General Ledger Setup** page, specify a **Max. VAT Difference Allowed** between the amount calculated by the program and the manual amount. -2. On the **Sales & Receivables Setup** page, place a check mark in the **Allow Vat Difference** field. - -#### To adjust VAT for a sales document -1. Open the relevant sales order. -2. Choose the **Statistics** action. -3. Choose the **Invoicing** FastTab. - - > [!NOTE] - > The total VAT amount for the invoice, grouped by VAT identifier, is displayed in the lines. You can manually adjust the amount in the **VAT Amount** field on the lines for each VAT identifier. When you modify the **VAT Amount** field, the program checks to ensure that you have not changed the VAT by more than the amount you have specified as the maximum difference allowed. If the amount is outside the range of the **Max. VAT Difference Allowed**, a warning will be displayed stating the maximum allowed difference. You will be unable to proceed until the amount is adjusted to within the acceptable parameters. Choose **OK** and enter another **VAT Amount** that is within the allowed range. If the VAT difference is equal to or lower than the maximum allowed, the VAT will be divided proportionally among the document lines that have the same VAT identifier. - -## Calculating VAT Manually Using Journals -You can also adjust VAT amounts in general, sales, and purchase journals. For example, you might need to do this when you enter a vendor invoice in your journal and there is a difference between the VAT amount that [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculated and the VAT amount on the vendor's invoice. - -#### Before you manually enter VAT on a general journal -1. On the **General Ledger Setup** page, specify a **Max. VAT Difference Allowed** between the amount calculated by the program and the manual amount. -2. On the **General Journal Templates** page, choose the **Allow VAT Difference** check box for the relevant journal. - -#### Before you manually enter VAT on sales and purchase journals -1. On the **Purchases & Payables Setup** page, choose the **Allow VAT Difference** check box. -2. After you complete the setup described above, you can adjust the **VAT Amount** field on the general journal line, or the **Bal. VAT Amount** field on the sales or purchase journal line. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will check that the difference is not greater than the specified maximum. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the difference is greater, a warning will be displayed stating the maximum allowed difference. To continue, you must adjust the amount. Choose **OK** and then enter an amount that is within the allowed range. If the VAT difference is equal to or lower than the maximum allowed, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will show the difference in the **VAT Difference** field. - -## To post import VAT with purchase invoices -Instead of using a general journal to post an import VAT invoice, you can use a purchase invoice. - -### To set up purchasing for posting import VAT invoices -1. Set up a vendor card for the import authority that sends you the import VAT invoice. The **Gen. Bus. Posting Group** and **VAT Bus. Posting Group** must be set up in the same way as the general ledger account for the import VAT. -2. Create a **Gen. Product Posting Group** for the import VAT and set up an import VAT **Def. VAT Product Posting Group** for the related **Gen. Product Posting Group**. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -4. Select the import VAT general ledger account, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit**. -5. On the **Posting** FastTab, select the **Gen. Prod. Posting Group** setup for import VAT. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically fills in the **VAT Prod. Posting Group** field. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -7. Create a combination of the **Gen. Bus. Posting Group** for the VAT authority and the **Gen. Prod. Posting Group** for import VAT. For this new combination, in the **Purchase Account** field, choose the import VAT general ledger account. - -### To create a new invoice for the import authority vendor once you have completed the setup -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new purchase invoice. -3. In the **Buy-from Vendor No.** field, choose the import authority vendor, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. In the purchase line, in the **Type** field, choose **G/L Account**, and in the **No.** field, choose the import VAT general ledger account. -5. In the **Quantity** field, type **1**. -6. In the **Direct Unit Cost Excl. VAT** field, specify the VAT amount. -7. Post the invoice. - -## To process certificates of supply -When you sell goods to a customer in another EU country/region, you must send the customer a certificate of supply that the customer must sign and return to you. The following procedures are for processing certificates of supply for sales shipments, but the same steps apply for service shipments of items, and return shipments to vendors. - -### To view certificate of supply details -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the relevant sales shipment to a customer in another EU country/region. -3. Choose **Certificate of Supply Details**. -4. By default, if the **Certificate of Supply Required** check box is selected for VAT Posting Group setup for the customer, the **Status** field is set to **Required**. You can update the field to indicate whether the customer has returned the certificate. - - > [!Note] - > If the VAT Posting Group setup does not have the **Certificate of Supply Required** check box selected, then a record is created and the **Status** field is set to **Not Applicable**. You can update the field to reflect the correct status information. You can manually change the status from **Not Applicable** to **Required**, and from **Required** to **Not Applicable** as needed. - - When you update the **Status** field to **Required**, **Received**, or **Not Received**, a certificate is created. - - > [!TIP] - > You can use the **Certificates of Supply** window to get a view of the status of all posted shipments for which a certificate of supply has been created. - -5. Choose **Print Certificate of Supply**. - - > [!Note] - > You can preview or print the document. When you choose **Print Certificate of Supply** and print the document, the **Printed** check box is automatically selected. In addition, if not already specified, the status of the certificate is updated to **Required**. If needed, you include the printed certificate with the shipment. - -### To print a certificate of supply -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the relevant sales shipment to a customer in another EU country/region. -3. Choose the **Print Certificate of Supply** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > Alternatively, you can print a certificate from the **Certificate of Supply** page. - -4. To include information from the lines on the shipment document in the certificate, select the **Print Line Details** check box. -5. Choose the **Create Certificates of Supply if Not Already Created** check box to have [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] create certificates for posted shipments that do not have one at the moment of execution. When you choose the check box, new certificates will be created for all posted shipments that do not have certificates within the selected range. -6. By default, the filter settings are for the shipment document that you have selected. Fill in the filter information to select a specific certificate of supply that you want to print. -7. On the **Certificate of Supply** page, choose the **Print** action to print the report, or choose the **Preview** action to view it on the screen. - - > [!Note] - > The **Certificate of Supply Status** field and the **Printed** field are updated for the shipment in the **Certificates of Supply** page. - -8. Send the printed certificate of supply to the customer for signature. - -### To update the status of a certificate of supply for a shipment -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the relevant sales shipment to a customer in another EU country/region. -3. In the **Status** field, choose the relevant option. - - If the customer has returned the signed certificate of supply, choose **Received**. The **Receipt Date** field is updated. By default, the receipt date is set to the current work date. - - You can modify the date to reflect the date that you received the customer's signed certificate of supply. You can also add a link to the signed certificate using standard [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] linking. - - If the customer does not return the signed certificate of supply, choose **Not Received**. You must then send the customer a new invoice that includes VAT, because the original invoice will not be accepted by the tax authority. - -To view a group of certificates, you start from the **Certificates of Supply** window, and then update the information about the status of outstanding certificates as you receive them back from your customers. This can be useful when you want to search for all certificates that have a certain status, for example, **Required**, for which you want to update their status to **Not Received**. - -### To update the status of a group of certificates of supply -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Certificates of Supply**, and choose the related link. -2. Filter the **Status** field to the value that you want in order to create the list of certificates that you want to manage. -3. To update the status information, choose **Edit List**. -4. In the **Status** field, choose the relevant option. - - If the customer has returned the signed certificate of supply, choose **Received**. The **Receipt Date** field is updated. By default, the receipt date is set to the current work date. - - You can modify the date to reflect the date that you received the signed the certificate of supply. You can also add a link to the signed certificate using standard [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] document linking. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot create a new certificate of supply in the **Certificate of Supply** window when you navigate to it using this procedure. To create a certificate for a shipment that was not set up to require one, open the posted sales shipment, and use either of two procedures described above: - > - > * To manually create a certificate of supply certificate - > * To print a certificate of supply. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up to Calculations and Posting Methods for Value-Added Tax](finance-setup-vat.md) -[How To: Report VAT to a Tax Authority](finance-how-report-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/finance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/finance.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4d4510d3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/finance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Financial Management -description: The tasks to set up finance in your business to suit all your accounting, auditing, or bookkeeping needs. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accounting, auditing, bookkeeping -ms.date: 06/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Finance -[!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] includes a standard configuration of most financial processes, but you can change the configuration to suit your business. For more information, see [Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md). - -The default configuration includes a chart of accounts and standard posting groups that make the process of assigning default general ledger posting accounts to customers, vendors, and items more efficient. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Apply incoming payments, reconcile bank accounts during payment application, and collect outstanding balances. |[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) | -| Make payments, apply outgoing payments, and work with checks. |[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) | -|Make your customers submit payment before you ship to them, or submit payment to your vendors before they ship to you.|[Invoicing Prepayments](finance-invoice-prepayments.md)| -| Reconcile bank accounts and transfer funds between bank accounts. |[Managing Bank Accounts](bank-manage-bank-accounts.md) | -|Set up intercompany partners and process transactions, manually or automatically, between legal entities within the same company.|[Managing Intercompany Transactions](intercompany-manage.md)| -|Analyze the costs of running your business by allocating actual and budgeted costs of operations, departments, products, and projects to cost centers.|[Accounting for Costs](finance-manage-cost-accounting.md)| -|Manage inventory and manufacturing costs, report costs, and reconcile costs with the general ledger.|[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md)| -| Understand the general ledger and the chart of accounts. |[Understanding the General Ledger and the COA](finance-general-ledger.md) | -| Add dimensions for richer business intelligence. |[Working with Dimensions](finance-dimensions.md) | -| Create budgets to forecast different financial activities and assign dimensions for business intelligence purposes. |[How to: Create Budgets](finance-how-create-budgets.md) | -|Record income or expenses directly in the general ledger without posting dedicated business documents.|[How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md)| -|Post reversing entries to undo value postings in the general journal or quantity postings on purchase and sales documents. |[How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md)| -|Allocate an entry in a general journal to several different accounts when you post the journal. |[How to: Allocate Costs and Income](year-allocate-costs-income.md) | -| Assign extra costs, such as freight and physical handling that you incur during trade, to the involved items so that the cost is reflected in inventory valuation. |[How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md) | -|Post employees' personal expenses for business-related activities and reimburse employees by making payment to their bank account.|[How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md)| -| Recognize revenues and expenses in other periods than when the transactions were posted. |[How to: Defer Revenues and Expenses](finance-how-defer-revenue-expenses.md)| -|Learn how to use additional currencies and update currency exchange rates automatically. |[How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates](finance-how-update-currencies.md)| -| Import salary transactions from your payroll provider into the general ledger. |[How to: Import Payroll Transactions](finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md)| -| Monitor the flow of cash in and out of your business. |[Analyzing Cash Flows in Your Company](finance-analyze-cash-flow.md) | -| Work with financial statements and overviews in Excel. |[Analyzing Financial Statements in Excel](finance-analyze-excel.md) | -| Prepare to close a fiscal year or period. |[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) | -|Prepare a report that lists VAT from sales, and submit the report to tax authorities in the EU. | [How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](finance-how-report-vat.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Closing Fiscal Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Importing from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/financials-requirements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/financials-requirements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 544f87a5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/financials-requirements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Minimum requirements for using Dynamics NAV -description: Learn about the minimum system and version requirements for using Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: version -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Minimum Requirements for Using Dynamics NAV -Before you access [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], we recommend that you verify that your computer or mobile device meets or exceeds the minimum system requirements for the product. This article lists the requirements. - -## Browsers -**Chrome for Windows and Firefox for Windows:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is designed to work with the current version of these desktop browsers. -**Safari:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is designed to work with the current version of Safari on OSX. -**Microsoft Edge:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is designed to work with the current version of Microsoft Edge. -**Internet Explorer:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is designed to work with Internet Explorer 11 (build 11.0.9600.17239) for Windows 10 and for Windows 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit versions). We recommend that you upgrade to the latest version of Internet Explorer supported for your version of Windows. - -## Mobile devices -**Windows:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] for Windows can be installed on devices with at least 1GB of RAM and Windows 10 Phone, Home, Pro, Enterprise, or Education (32-bit and 64-bit editions). -**iOS:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] for iPad and iPhone requires iOS 9.0 or later. -**Android:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] for Android tablet and Android phone can be installed on devices with at least 1GB of RAM and Android 5.0 or higher. -**Device size:** [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is supported on smartphones with a minimum screen size of 4” and tablets with a minimum screen size of 7”. - -## Outlook -**Outlook applications:** To use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as your business inbox in Outlook, you will need Outlook 2013 or later, Outlook Web App, OWA for iPhone, OWA for iPad, or OWA for Android. -**Browsers:** When using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as your business inbox in the Outlook Web App (OWA), the add-in requires that your computer is running one of the listed supported browsers that are listed earlier in this article. -**Platforms:** When using the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Outlook Add-In in OWA for iPhone, OWA for iPad, and OWA for Android, the add-in requires that your mobile device is running one of the listed supported mobile devices for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-manage-absence.md b/dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-manage-absence.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2c0c6f6a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-manage-absence.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: 'How to: Manage Employee Absence' -description: Describes how to record employees' absence and analyze absence statistics. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Employee Absence -To manage an employee's absence, you must record the absence in the **Absence Registration** window. It can then be viewed in different ways for analysis and reporting needs. - -You can view employee absence in two different windows: - -* The **Absence Registration** window, where you register all employee absences with a line for each absence. -* The **Employee Absences** window, where the absences for one employee only is shown. This is the information that you entered in the **Absence Registration** window, filtered by the particular employee. - -To obtain meaningful statistics, you should always use the same unit of measure (hour or day) when registering employee absences. - -## To register employee absence -You can register employee absences on a daily basis or at some other interval that meets your organizational needs. - -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Absence Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in a line for each employee absence you want to register. -4. Close the window. - - > [!Tip] - > To obtain meaningful statistics, always use the same unit of measure, hour or day, when registering employee absences. - -## To view an individual employee's absence -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant employee, and then choose the **Absences** action. - - The **Employee Absences** window opens showing all the absences and the date on which they started and ended. - -## To view an employee's absence by categories -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant employee, and then choose the **Absences by Categories** action. -3. In the **Empl. Absences by categories** window, fill in the filter fields as necessary, and then choose the **Show Matrix** action. - - The **Empl. Absences by Cat. Matrix** window opens showing all absences, broken down by causes of absence. - -## To view all employee absences by category -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Absence Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Absence Registration** window, choose the **Overview by Categories** action. -3. In the **Absence Overview by Categories** window, set a filter in the **Employee No. Filter** field to view employee absences for individual or a defined group of employees. -4. Choose the **Show Matrix** action. - - The **Absence Overview by Categories Matrix** window opens showing all employees’ absences broken down by the various causes of absence. - -## To view all employee absences by period -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Absence Registration**, and then choose the related link. - In the **Absence Registration** window, choose the **Overview by Periods** action. -2. In the **Absence Overview by Periods** window, set a filter in the **Cause of Absence Filter** field to view employee absences for specified causes of absence. -3. Choose the **Show Matrix** action. - - The **Abs. Overview by Periods Matrix** window opens showing employee absences broken down by periods. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Human Resources](hr-manage-human-resources.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working With [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-register-employees.md b/dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-register-employees.md deleted file mode 100644 index 43b16a2f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/hr-how-register-employees.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Employees and Modify Information -description: Describes how to register new personnel or edit information for existing staff. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: personnel, people, employee, staff, HR -ms.date: 08/11/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Register Employees -To use the Human Resources functionality, you must first register each employee by creating a card with all the core and related information. - -You can modify an employee's details at any time. Keeping up-to-date records about your employees simplifies personnel tasks. For example, if an employee's address changes, you register this on the employee card. - -The following procedures describe how to create an initial employee card and how to assign two types of employee details to an employee. In addition, you can assign various other related information, such as qualifications and causes of inactivity. You assign employee information either by choosing a field or an action in the **Employee Card** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can reimburse employees for their expenses during business activities. For this purpose, you must fill in the fields on the **Payments** FastTab in the **Employee Card** window. For more information, see [How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md). - -## To set up an employee -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Employee Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To insert a picture of an employee -If you have a picture of an employee in .bmp format, you can insert it on the employee card. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the relevant employee. -3. In the **Employee Picture** FactBox, choose the drop-down button, and then choose **Import**. -4. In the **Select a picture to upload** window, choose the **Choose** button. -5. Select the file, and then choose **Open**. - -The picture is inserted in the **Employee Picture** FactBox. - -## To register various information about an employee -On the employee card, you can set up information, such as union membership, relatives, and contracts for the employee. The following describes how to set up an alternate address. The steps are similar for all other information that you can set up from an employee card. - -You can use alternate addresses to keep track of your employees’ location, for example if they are stationed abroad, on a long business trip, or residing at a summer residence. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the relevant employee. -3. Choose the **Alternate Addresses** action. -4. **In the Alternate Address List** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -5. Repeat step 4 for each alternate address. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/hr-manage-human-resources.md b/dynamics-nav-app/hr-manage-human-resources.md deleted file mode 100644 index 05cd92eb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/hr-manage-human-resources.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using Human Resources Functionality -description: You can register new personnel, edit information about existing staff, and record and analyze absence. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: personnel, people, employee, staff, HR -ms.date: 08/09/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Manage Human Resources -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can keep detailed records of your employees. You can register and maintain employee information, such as employment contracts, confidential information, qualifications, and employee contacts. - -You can also register employee absences, which allows you to analyze registered absences as necessary. - -To start using the Human Resources functionality, you must set up employees and other basic information. You can then associate various codes to an employee, which allows you to filter information for specific employees. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Register new employees or edit records for existing employees, and attach related information, such as contracts and articles. |[How to: Register Employees](hr-how-register-employees.md) | -| Record employees' absence and view absence statistics by various filters. |[How to: Manage Employee Absence](hr-how-manage-absence.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bn_windows_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bn_windows_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index face9232..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bn_windows_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -To see the window topics in this section, choose the subentries in the table of contents. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_customize_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_customize_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 609cd2a7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_customize_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -You can change how certain UI elements are displayed. For more information, see [Personalizing Your Workspace](../ui-personalization-user.md). diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_fieldnoneditable_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_fieldnoneditable_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 795832be..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_fieldnoneditable_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -You cannot change the contents of this field. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_supcli_head_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_supcli_head_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5b2cf15a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_supcli_head_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Supported Display Targets diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_supcli_rtc_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_supcli_rtc_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index c9900947..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_supcli_rtc_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Windows client only \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tabledescription_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tabledescription_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6e37fcc1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tabledescription_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Description diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tablefield_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tablefield_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 63492a64..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tablefield_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Field diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tableoption_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tableoption_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 55135bfc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_tableoption_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Option \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_windownoneditable_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_windownoneditable_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index c1d1ebbc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/bp_windownoneditable_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -You cannot change the contents of this window. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/crm_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/crm_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 47430fad..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/crm_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics CRM \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365bc.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365bc.md deleted file mode 100644 index cece171b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365bc.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ ---- -author: edupont04 -ms.service: dynamics365-business-central -ms.topic: include -ms.date: 04/01/2021 -ms.author: edupont ---- -Dynamics 365 Business Central \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_early_release.md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_early_release.md.md deleted file mode 100644 index a9db1acc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_early_release.md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -This is early-release functionality that we’re still working on. The functionality, and the content on this page, are subject to change. To learn what’s coming, see the [Microsoft Dynamics NAV Roadmap](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=842139). \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_long_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_long_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6f5ce4aa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_long_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 29858236..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/d365fin_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Dynamics NAV \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demo_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demo_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index bc9a9709..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demo_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -CRONUS \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demolong_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demolong_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index b4f7bda5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demolong_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration database diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demolonglight_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demolonglight_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index ed1f24d5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demolonglight_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -CRONUS demonstration database \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demoname_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demoname_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index d635226c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/demoname_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -CRONUS International Ltd. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav-bc.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav-bc.md deleted file mode 100644 index 79aef37f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav-bc.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ ---- -author: edupont04 -ms.service: dynamics365-business-central -ms.topic: include -ms.date: 10/12/2021 -ms.author: edupont ---- -The content in this section applies to [!INCLUDE [navnow_md](navnow_md.md)] 2018. The product itself follows the [Fixed Lifecycle Policy](/lifecycle/products/dynamics-nav-2018). However, this content is no longer maintained or supervised by Microsoft. For more current documentation, see [Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/). \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav2017.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav2017.md deleted file mode 100644 index b731530c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav2017.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_admin_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_admin_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2130b0cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_admin_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Server Administration tool \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_long_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_long_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 25f567ee..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_long_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Development Environment \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_shell_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_shell_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 05135fdd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_shell_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 Development Shell \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_short_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_short_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6219680b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_dev_short_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -development environment \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_phone_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_phone_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index ec34ec2f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_phone_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Phone client \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_prov_long_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_prov_long_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 12e95f7a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_prov_long_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Provisioning Tools for Microsoft Azure \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_prov_short_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_prov_short_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6fc3b830..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_prov_short_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -provisioning tools \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_server_instance_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_server_instance_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8a2edd35..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_server_instance_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -DynamicsNAV100 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_server_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_server_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5dfa7bab..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_server_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Server \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_setup_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_setup_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index c513ddad..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_setup_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 Setup \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_shell_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_shell_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index a3a2fa52..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_shell_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 Administration Shell \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_tablet_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_tablet_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3e4793d1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_tablet_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Tablet client \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_uni_app_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_uni_app_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6fbcd67f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_uni_app_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Universal App \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index bc4e7346..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Web client \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_server_instance_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_server_instance_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6e116b5f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_server_instance_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Dynamics NAV Web Server \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_server_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_server_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index a301050d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_web_server_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Web Server components \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_windows_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_windows_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index fc7dcaa5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/nav_windows_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV Windows client \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navcorfu_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navcorfu_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index a2d06dde..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navcorfu_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2016 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navcrete_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navcrete_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index bf208f49..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navcrete_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2015 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_install_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_install_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9ebf91fc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_install_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft Dynamics NAV\\100 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 29858236..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Dynamics NAV \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_x86install_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_x86install_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index aafa7a7d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnow_x86install_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -C:\\Program Files \(x86\)\\Microsoft Dynamics NAV\\100 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnowlong_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnowlong_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 04122fd8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navnowlong_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2018 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navsicily_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navsicily_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index dc097496..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navsicily_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013 R2 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navxapp_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navxapp_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index fc0c1101..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/navxapp_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -NAV extension \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/overview-include-files.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/overview-include-files.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7dc926d3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/overview-include-files.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Include Files" -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/28/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.assetid: 0745a889-d9ba-4023-a4a8-dba74097ddd0 -caps.latest.revision: 15 -manager: edupont ---- - -# Include Files - -This table contains the INCLUDE expressions associated with the content of the include file for easier copy/paste in documentation. - -|File Name |Content | -|------------|---------| -|`[!INCLUDE[bn_windows_md](includes/bn_windows_md.md)]`|To see the window topics in this section, choose the subentries in the table of contents.| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_fieldnoneditable_md](includes/bp_fieldnoneditable_md.md)]`|You cannot change the contents of this field.| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_supcli_head_md](includes/bp_supcli_head_md.md)]`|Supported Display Targets| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_supcli_rtc_md](includes/bp_supcli_rtc_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Windows client only| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_tabledescription_md](includes/bp_tabledescription_md.md)]`|Description| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_tablefield_md](includes/bp_tablefield_md.md)]`|Field| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_tableoption_md](includes/bp_tableoption_md.md)]`|Option| -|`[!INCLUDE[bp_windownoneditable_md](includes/bp_windownoneditable_md.md)]`|You cannot change the contents of this window.| -|`[!INCLUDE[crm_md](includes/crm_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics CRM| -|`[!INCLUDE[d365fin_long_md](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]`|Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[d365fin_md](includes/d365fin_md.md)]`|Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[demo_md](includes/demo_md.md)]`|CRONUS| -|`[!INCLUDE[demolong_md](includes/demolong_md.md)]`|CRONUS Danmark A/S demonstration database| -|`[!INCLUDE[demolonglight_md](includes/demolonglight_md.md)]`|CRONUS demonstration database| -|`[!INCLUDE[demoname_md](includes/demoname_md.md)]`|CRONUS Danmark A/S| -|`[!INCLUDE[dyn_nav_md](includes/dyn_nav_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_4_md](includes/nav_4_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 4.0| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_5_md](includes/nav_5_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 5.0| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_2009_long_md](includes/nav_2009_long_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_2009_short_md](includes/nav_2009_short_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_admin_md](includes/nav_admin_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Server Administration tool| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_current_long_md](includes/nav_current_long_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_current_short_md](includes/nav_current_short_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_dev_long_md](includes/nav_dev_long_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Development Environment| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_dev_shell_md](includes/nav_dev_shell_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 Development Shell| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_dev_short_md](includes/nav_dev_short_md.md)]`|development environment| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_phone_md](includes/nav_phone_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Phone client| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_prov_long_md](includes/nav_prov_long_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Provisioning Tools for Microsoft Azure| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_prov_short_md](includes/nav_prov_short_md.md)]`|provisioning tools| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_server_instance_md](includes/nav_server_instance_md.md)]`|DynamicsNAV100| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_server_md](includes/nav_server_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Server| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_setup_md](includes/nav_setup_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 Setup| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_shell_md](includes/nav_shell_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017 Administration Shell| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_tablet_md](includes/nav_tablet_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Tablet client| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_uni_app_md](includes/nav_uni_app_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Universal App| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Web client| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_web_server_md](includes/nav_web_server_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Web Server components| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV Windows client| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav7long_md](includes/nav7long_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav2009_md](includes/nav2009_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav2009r2_md](includes/nav2009r2_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 R2| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav2009sp1_md](includes/nav2009sp1_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 SP1| -|`[!INCLUDE[navcorfu_md](includes/navcorfu_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2016| -|`[!INCLUDE[navcrete_md](includes/navcrete_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2015| -|`[!INCLUDE[nav2017](includes/nav2017.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017| -|`[!INCLUDE[navnow_install_md](includes/navnow_install_md.md)]`|C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft Dynamics NAV\\100| -|`[!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[navnow_x86install_md](includes/navnow_x86install_md.md)]`|C:\\Program Files \(x86\)\\Microsoft Dynamics NAV\\100| -|`[!INCLUDE[navnowlong_md](includes/navnowlong_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2017| -|`[!INCLUDE[navsicily_md](includes/navsicily_md.md)]`|Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013 R2| -|`[!INCLUDE[navxapp_md](includes/navxapp_md.md)]`|NAV extension| -|`[!INCLUDE[paymentsvcs_md](includes/paymentsvcs_md.md)]`|Payment Services for Microsoft Dynamics ERP| -|`[!INCLUDE[rim_md](includes/rim_md.md)]`|RapidStart Services| -|`[!INCLUDE[rimlong_md](includes/rimlong_md.md)]`|RapidStart Services for Microsoft Dynamics NAV| -|`[!INCLUDE[rtc_md](includes/rtc_md.md)]`|RoleTailored client| -|`[!INCLUDE[wps_2_md](includes/wps_2_md.md)]`|Windows PowerShell| diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/paymentsvcs_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/paymentsvcs_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 265a2f9a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/paymentsvcs_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Payment Services for Microsoft Dynamics ERP \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rim_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rim_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6279365c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rim_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -RapidStart Services \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rimlong_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rimlong_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 589b475e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rimlong_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -RapidStart Services for Microsoft Dynamics NAV \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rtc_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rtc_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5ee24ea1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/rtc_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -RoleTailored client \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index ed621869..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Choose a field to read a short description of the field or link to more information. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/wps_2_md.md b/dynamics-nav-app/includes/wps_2_md.md deleted file mode 100644 index e50353a5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/includes/wps_2_md.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -Windows PowerShell \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/index.md b/dynamics-nav-app/index.md deleted file mode 100644 index 47a58d7a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/index.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Welcome to Dynamics NAV 2018 Documentation -description: Learn about capabilities and work scenarios in Dynamics NAV 2018, a business management solution for small and mid-sized organizations. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: setup wizard -ms.date: 04/07/2021 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is a business management solution for small and mid-sized organizations that automates and streamlines business processes and helps you manage your business. Highly adaptable and rich with features, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] enables companies to manage their business, including finance, manufacturing, sales, shipping, project management, services, and more. Companies can easily add functionality that is relevant to the region of operation, and that is customized to support even highly specialized industries. - -> [!TIP] -> [!INCLUDE [nav-bc](includes/nav-bc.md)] - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is fast to implement, easy to configure, and simplicity guides innovations in product design, development, implementation, and usability. In this section, you can find information about using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] in your company. And if you are a partner or customer looking at extending the functionality, you will find relevant links under Development and Administration. - -|Section|Links| -|-|-| -|**Business Processes**|- [Getting Started](across-get-started.md)
- [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md)
- [Setting up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md)
- [Business Functionality](madeira-business-functionality.md)
- [Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md)| -|**Development and Administration**|- [Getting Started](/dynamics-nav/index)
- [Deployment](/dynamics-nav/deployment)
- [Development in C/AL](/dynamics-nav/development)
- [Development in AL](/dynamics-nav/developer/devenv-dev-overview)
- [Administration](/dynamics-nav/administration)
- [Upgrade](/dynamics-nav/upgrading-to-microsoft-dynamics-nav)
- [Windows PowerShell Cmdlets](/dynamics-nav/microsoft-dynamics-nav-windows-powershell-cmdlets)| -|**Community Resources**|- [Microsoft Dynamics NAV Team Blog](https://blogs.msdn.microsoft.com/nav/)
- [Microsoft Dynamics NAV Forum](http://community.dynamics.com/product/nav/f/34.aspx)
- [Microsoft Partner Network \(requires Microsoft Partner Network membership account\)](https://mspartner.microsoft.com/en/us/Pages/index.aspx)| - -## Previous Versions -If you are looking for online content for [!INCLUDE[navcorfu](includes/navcorfu_md.md)] and earlier versions of Dynamics NAV, this is available in the **Previous Versions** section of the Docs site. - -Direct links: - -* [[!INCLUDE[navcorfu](includes/navcorfu_md.md)]](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2016/hh173988(v=nav.90)) -* [[!INCLUDE[navcrete](includes/navcrete_md.md)]](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2015/hh173988(v=nav.80)) -* [Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013 R2](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2013r2/hh173988(v=nav.71)) -* [Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2013](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2013/hh173988(v=nav.70)) -* [Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009 R2](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2009r2/gg502505(v=nav.60)) -* [Microsoft Dynamics NAV 2009](/previous-versions/dynamicsnav-2009/dd355204(v=nav.60)) - -## Later Versions - -If you are looking for online content for [!INCLUDE [d365bc](includes/d365bc.md)], which is the continuation of [!INCLUDE [navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)], see [[!INCLUDE [d365bc](includes/d365bc.md)]](/dynamics365/business-central/). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as my Business Inbox in Outlook](across-outlook.md) -[Getting [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] on Your Mobile Device](install-mobile-app.md) -[Dynamics 365 documentation](/dynamics365/#pivot=solutions&panel=solutions_financials) -[Dynamics 365 Roadmap](https://roadmap.dynamics.com/#edition=1#application=a56e2c12-2a92-e611-80dc-c4346bac0910#status=3a708a86-ae97-e611-80df-c4346baceb68) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/install-mobile-app.md b/dynamics-nav-app/install-mobile-app.md deleted file mode 100644 index f0eeb35b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/install-mobile-app.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Use Dynamics NAV on Your Mobile Device -description: You can view and edit your Dynamics NAV data on your phone or tablet. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: phone, tablet -ms.date: 07/18/2019 -ms.author: solsen ---- - -# Getting Dynamics NAV on Your Mobile Device -Access your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data from your mobile device. You can navigate through your business data, use features such as send to Excel or Microsoft 365, view up-to-date charts and KPIs, email sales quotes and invoices, and shoot and attach pictures with your camera. Follow the steps below to download the app and get started. - -## To get the app on my mobile device -1. Install the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] app on your mobile device by downloading the app from the Windows Store, App Store, or Google Play. -[![Windows Store](./media/install-mobile-app/windowsstore.png)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=509974) -[![App Store](./media/install-mobile-app/appstore.png)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=509975) [![Google Play](./media/install-mobile-app/googleplay.png)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=509976) -2. Launch the app from your mobile device. -3. Enter your user name and password that you created during sign-up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and follow the instructions on the screen. - -You should now have access to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and be able to view and edit data. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md b/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0bcb58c4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Process Incoming and Outgoing IC Transactions -description: Intercompany transactions that you receive from your intercompany partners are listed in the intercompany inbox where you process them manually or automatically. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: incoming document -ms.date: 09/21/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage the Intercompany Inbox and Outbox -All of the intercompany transactions that you receive electronically from your intercompany partners are listed in the intercompany Inbox. - -## Organizing the Inbox - You can use the filter fields at the top of the inbox window to determine which transactions are shown in the window. For example, if you only want to look at transactions a particular partner created, you can enter filters in the **Transaction Source** and **Intercompany Partner Code** filters. - -### Transaction Source -What you can do with a transaction depends whether it was: - -- Created by your intercompany partner -- Rejected by your intercompany partner and returned to you - -You can use the **Show Transaction Source** field to filter the **Intercompany Inbox Transactions** window so that it displays only one of these types of transactions. (You can also filter by intercompany partner, or by the contents of the **Line Action** field.) - -#### Created by Intercompany Partner - When you receive a new transaction that was created by your partner, you can choose to either: - -- Accept the transaction -- Reject the transaction (Return to partner) -- Cancel the transaction (Delete the transaction but do not return it to your partner) - -#### Returned from Intercompany Partner - If the transaction was rejected by your intercompany partner, your only choice is to cancel the transaction in the inbox. Then you must create correction lines or reverse the journal or document in your company. - -## Re-creating Inbox Entries - If you accepted a transaction in your inbox but then deleted the document or journal instead of posting it, you can re-create the inbox entry and accept it again. - -## Getting an Overview of Intercompany Transactions for a Period - You can get an overview of all of the intercompany transactions that you have sent and received in a period. The **Intercompany Transactions** report lists all intercompany G/L entries, customer ledger entries, and vendor ledger entries. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the intercompany partners are in the same database, then transactions are transferred without the need for file or email. See the **Transfer Type** field in the **Intercompany Partner** window.

-In that case, you can set the system up to bypass the inbox and outbox by selecting the **Auto. Accept Transactions** check box in the **Intercompany Partner** window and the **Auto. Send Transactions** check box in the **Intercompany Setup** window respectively. The ability to automatically accept transactions is currently limited to sales and purchase documents. - -## To import intercompany transactions from a file -If you have an intercompany partner that is not in the same database as your company, you can receive intercompany transactions from that partner in an .xml file. Then you must import the transactions into your inbox. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information** , and then choose the related link. -2. Save the file to the location that you specified in the **Intercompany Inbox Details** field in the **Company Information** window. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intercompany Inbox Transactions**, and then choose the related link. -4. In the **Intercompany Inbox Transactions** window, choose the **Import Transaction File** action. -5. In the window that appears, select the .xml file that contains the transactions, and then choose the **Open** button. - -The transactions are imported into the inbox and you can now process them. - -## To process incoming intercompany transactions -When your intercompany partners send you intercompany transactions, the transactions end up in your intercompany inbox. You must evaluate each transaction in your inbox and act upon it. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intercompany Inbox Transactions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Intercompany Inbox Transactions** window, select a line, and then choose an action, such as **Accept**, to process the line. -3. In the **Complete IC Inbox Action** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -For lines that you processed with the **Accept** action, document or journal lines will be created in your company. Open each document or journal, make any necessary changes, and then post them. - -Lines that you processed with the **Return to Partner** action will be moved to the outbox from where you can then send them to your partner. - -For lines that you processed with the **Returned by Partner** action, you must now post a correction to the original transaction that you posted in your company. - -## To process outgoing intercompany transactions -When you post an intercompany journal or document, or send an intercompany order confirmation, the transactions are sent to your intercompany outbox. In order for them to be sent on to your intercompany partners, you must open the outbox and process them. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intercompany Outbox Transactions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Intercompany Outbox Transactions** window, select a line, and then choose an action, such as **Return to Inbox**, to process the line. - -Lines that you processed with the **Send to Intercompany Partner** action will be sent to the relevant partner's inbox. - -Lines that you processed with the **Return to Inbox** action will be moved to the inbox where you can then accept them to create documents or journal lines in your company. - -For lines that you processed with the **Cancel** action, you must now post a correction to the original transaction that you posted in your company. - -## To recreate intercompany inbox transactions -Occasionally, you may want to re-create a transaction in the inbox or outbox. For example, if you accepted a transaction in your inbox but then deleted the document or journal instead of posting it, you can re-create the inbox entry and accept it again. - -The following procedure describes to re-create inbox transactions, but the same steps also apply to the outbox. - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Handled IC Inbox Transactions**, and then choose the related link. - - 2. In the **Handled IC Inbox Transactions** window, select the line with the transaction that you want to re-create in the inbox, and then choose the **Re-create Inbox Transaction** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Intercompany Transactions](intercompany-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index 58331102..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,134 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Intercompany Transaction Posting -description: Create your intercompany vendors and customers as so-called intercompany partners, and set up an intercompany chart of accounts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: IC, group, consolidation, affiliate, subsidiary -ms.date: 06/20/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Intercompany -To send a transaction (such as a sales journal line) from one company and have the corresponding transaction (such as a purchase journal line) automatically created in the partner company, the companies involved must agree on a common chart of accounts and set of dimensions for use on intercompany transactions. The intercompany chart of accounts can be, for example, a simplified version of the parent company's chart of accounts. Each company maps their full chart of accounts to the shared intercompany chart of accounts, and each company maps their dimensions to the intercompany dimensions. - -You must also set up an intercompany partner code for each partner company, which is agreed upon by all of the companies, and then assign them to customer and vendor cards respectively by filling in the **Intercompany Partner Code** field. - -If you create or receive intercompany lines with items, you can either use your own item numbers, or you can set up your partner's item numbers for each relevant item, either in the **Vendor Item No.** field or in the **Common Item No.** field on the item card. You can also use the **Item Cross Reference** function: To map your items' numbers to your intercompany partners descriptions of the items, open the card of each item, and then choose the **Cross References** action to set up cross-references between your item descriptions and those of the intercompany partner. - -If you will make intercompany sales transactions that include resources, you must fill in the **IC Partner Purch. G/L Acc. No.** field on the resource card for each relevant resource. This is the number of the intercompany general ledger account that the amount for this resource will be posted to in your partner's company. For more information, see - -## To set up companies for intercompany transactions -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Company Information** window, fill in the **Intercompany Partner Code**, **Intercompany Inbox Type**. and **Intercompany Inbox Details** fields. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set intercompany partners -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Intercompany Partners**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Intercompany Partner** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set up intercompany vendors and intercompany customers -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Alternatively, access the vendor from the **Vendor No.** field in the **Intercompany Partner** window. -3. Open the card for a vendor that is an intercompany partner. For more information, see [How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md). -4. In the **Intercompany Partner Code** field, select the relevant intercompany partner code. -5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for customers. - -## To set up intercompany charts of accounts -In order for a group of companies to make intercompany transactions, they must agree on a chart of accounts to use as a common reference. You must agree with your partner companies on the account numbers that all of you will use when you create intercompany transactions. For example, the parent company of the group creates a simplified version of their own chart of accounts, exports this intercompany chart of accounts from their database into an XML file and distributes it to each of the companies in the group. - -If your company is the parent company and has the defining intercompany chart of accounts that your group will use as a common reference, follow the "To set up the intercompany chart of accounts" procedure. - -If your company is a subsidiary company and you receive an XML file containing the common intercompany chart of accounts, follow the ""To Import the intercompany chart of accounts"" procedure. - -### To set up the defining intercompany chart of accounts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IC Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **IC Chart of Accounts** window, enter each account on a line in the window. -3. If your intercompany chart of accounts will be identical or similar to your regular chart of accounts, you can fill in the window automatically by choosing the **Copy from Chart of Accounts** action. You can edit the new lines as needed. - -### To export an intercompany chart of accounts -To allow your intercompany partners to import the defining chart of accounts, you must export it to a file. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IC Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **IC Chart of Accounts** window, choose the **Export** action, and then choose the **Save** button. -3. Specify the file name and the location where you want to save the XML file, and then choose the **Save** button. - -### To import the intercompany chart of accounts -When a file exists for the defining intercompany chart of accounts, intercompany partners can import it to make sure they have the same accounts. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IC Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **IC Chart of Accounts** window, choose the **Import** action. -3. Select the file name and location of the XML file, and then choose the **Open** button. - -The **IC Chart of Accounts** window is filled with new or edited G/L account lines according to the intercompany chart of accounts in the file. Any existing, unrelated lines in the window remain unchanged. - -### To map the intercompany chart of accounts to your company's chart of accounts -When you have defined or imported the intercompany chart of accounts that you and your intercompany partners have agreed to use, you must associate each of the intercompany G/L accounts with one of your company's G/L accounts. In the **IC Chart of Accounts** window, you specify how intercompany G/L accounts on incoming transactions will be translated into G/L accounts from your company's chart of accounts. - -If the accounts in the intercompany chart of accounts have the same numbers as the corresponding accounts in the chart of accounts, you can map the accounts automatically. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IC Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the lines that you want to map automatically, and then choose the **Map to Acc. with Same No** action. -3. For each intercompany general ledger account that was not mapped automatically, fill in the **Map-to G/L Acc. No.** field. - -## To set up default intercompany partner general ledger accounts -When you create an intercompany sales or purchase line to send as an outgoing transaction, you enter an account from the intercompany chart of accounts as a default for which account in your partner's company the amount is posted to. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, for accounts that you often use on outgoing intercompany sales or purchase lines, you can specify a default intercompany partner general ledger account. For example, for your receivables accounts, you can enter the corresponding payables accounts from the intercompany chart of accounts. - -Then, when you enter a general ledger account in the **Bal. Account No.** field on an intercompany line with **Intercompany Partner** in the **Account Type** field, the **IC Partner G/L Account** field is automatically filled in. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the line for a G/L account that is used for intercompany transactions, in the **Default IC Partner G/L Account** field, enter the intercompany general ledger account that your partner will post to when you post to the general ledger account on the line. -3. Repeat step 3 for each account that you often enter in the **Bal. Account No.** field on a line in an intercompany journal or document. - -## To set up intercompany dimensions -If you and your intercompany partners want to be able to exchange transactions with dimensions linked to them, then you must agree on the dimensions that all of you will use. For example, the parent company of the group creates a simplified version of their own set of dimensions, exports these intercompany dimensions into an XML file and distributes it to each of the companies in the group. Each of the subsidiaries then imports the XML file into the **intercompany Dimensions** window and maps the intercompany dimensions to the dimensions in their own **Dimensions** window. - -If your company is the parent company and has the defining set of intercompany dimensions that your group will use as a common reference, follow the "To define the intercompany dimensions" procedure. - -If your company is a subsidiary company and you receive an XML file containing the intercompany dimensions that your group will use as a common reference, follow the "To import intercompany dimensions" procedure. - -### To define the intercompany dimensions -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **intercompany Dimensions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **intercompany Dimensions** window, enter each dimension on a line in the window. - - If your intercompany dimensions will be similar or identical to your company dimensions, you can fill in the window automatically by using the **Copy from Dimensions** function, and then you can edit the resulting lines. -3. To export the intercompany dimensions to an XML file for distribution to your partner companies, choose the **Export** action. -4. Specify the file name and the location where you want to save the XML file, and then choose the **Save** button. - -### To import the intercompany dimensions -When a file exists for the defining intercompany dimensions, intercompany partners can import it to make sure they have the same dimensions. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **intercompany Dimensions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **intercompany Dimensions** window, choose the **Import** action. -3. Specify the file name and location of the XML file, and then choose the **Open** button. - -The lines in the **intercompany Dimensions** window and the **intercompany Dimension Values** window are imported. - -### To map intercompany dimensions to your company's dimensions -When you have defined or imported the dimensions that you and your intercompany partners have agreed to use, you must associate each of the intercompany dimensions with one of your company's dimensions, and vice versa. In the **intercompany Dimensions** window, you specify how intercompany dimensions on incoming transactions will be translated into dimensions from your company's list of dimensions. In the **Dimensions** window, you specify how your dimensions will be translated into intercompany dimensions on outgoing transactions. - -If any of the intercompany dimensions have the same code as the corresponding dimensions in your company's list of dimensions, then you can have the program automatically map the dimensions, then you can map the accounts automatically. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **intercompany Dimensions**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **intercompany Dimensions** window, select the lines that you want to automatically map, and then choose the **Map to Dim. with Same Code** action. -3. For each intercompany dimension that is not mapped automatically, fill in the **Map-to Dimension Code** field. -4. Choose the **intercompany Dimension Values** action. -5. In the **intercompany Dimension Values** window, fill in the **Map-to Dimension Value Code** field. - - Proceed to map dimensions to intercompany dimensions by performing similar steps. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Dimensions**, and then choose the related link. -7. In the **Dimensions** window, select the lines that you want to automatically map, and then choose the **Map to IC Dim. with Same Code** action. -8. For each intercompany dimension that is not mapped automatically, fill in the **Map-to IC Dimension Value Code** field. -9. Choose the **Dimension Values** action. -10. In the **Dimension Values** window, fill in the **Map-to IC Dimension Value Code** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Intercompany Transactions](intercompany-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-work-documents-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-work-documents-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index ee5016d6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-how-work-documents-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Post Intercompany Documents and Journals -description: Use intercompany documents to post transactions with your intercompany partners. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: IC, group, consolidation, affiliate, subsidiary -ms.date: 06/21/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Intercompany Documents and Journals -You use intercompany documents or journals to post transactions with your intercompany partners. When you post an intercompany document or journal line in your company, a corresponding document or journal line is created in your intercompany outbox that you can transfer to your partner. Your partner can then post the corresponding transaction in their company, without having to re-enter the data. - -For sales and purchase documents, the intercompany partner code on the involved customer or vendor ensures that all orders and invoices generated pertaining to transactions with these companies will produce corresponding documents in the partner company, resulting in correct balancing of the accounts. - -For intercompany general journal lines, you do not need to specify the accounts for an individual set of books, but simply give the identification of the partner company. Corresponding intercompany general journal lines are then created in the partner company that result in the balancing of the books of both companies involved in a transaction. - -## To fill in and send an intercompany sales order -You can send sales and purchase orders and return orders before posting. Invoices and credit memos cannot be sent until they are posted. - -The following procedure describes how to fill in and send an intercompany sales order. The same steps apply to intercompany purchase orders and return orders, and to posted intercompany invoices and credit memos. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose **New** to create a new sales order. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Make sure the customer is an intercompany partner. -5. To send the sales order before you post it, choose the **Send IC Sales Order** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you do perform step 4, then the sales order will be moved to your intercompany outbox where you can send it later. For more information, see [How to: Manage the Intercompany Inbox and Outbox](intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md). - -## To fill in and post an intercompany journal -When you post an intercompany general journal line in your company, a corresponding journal line is created in your intercompany outbox that you can transfer to your partner. Your partner can then post the corresponding transaction in their company, without having to re-enter the data. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **IC General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant journal batch. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. -4. In the **IC Partner G/L Acc. No.** field, enter the intercompany general ledger account that the amount will be posted to in your partner's company. - - > [!NOTE] - > This field must be filled in on a line with a bank account or general ledger account in either the **Account No.** field or the **Bal. Account No.** field. -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -The involved entries are posted in your company and a journal with the corresponding entries are created in your intercompany outbox that you can send to your partner company. For more information, see [How to: Manage the Intercompany Inbox and Outbox](intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Intercompany Transactions](intercompany-manage.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-manage.md b/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-manage.md deleted file mode 100644 index e9210c4e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/intercompany-manage.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Transactions Between Companies in the Same Organization -description: With the Intercompany functionality, you can simplify business processes and transactions between companies within the same organization. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: IC, group, consolidation, affiliate, subsidiary -ms.date: 06/20/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Managing Intercompany Transactions -Your organization may consist of several companies, but might not have the equivalent number of accounting and administrative teams. The Intercompany functionality lets you do business with your subsidiary and internal partner organizations in the same way as you engage with your external vendors and customers. You enter intercompany transaction information only once in the appropriate documents. You can use the functionality you are already familiar with, such as receivables and payables management. Mapping facilities for the chart of accounts and dimensions help ensure that information appears in the right places. - -There are four main benefits to the Intercompany functionality: - -- Increased productivity as a result of time saved and simplified transactions -- Minimized error potential with one-time entry of information and system-wide, automated updates -- Complete audit trail and full visibility into business activities and transaction histories -- Efficient, cost-effective transactions with affiliate and subsidiary companies - -You are in full control of all transaction documents. For example, you can reject a document sent to you and, in this way, reverse postings that were incorrect. Or, when making a purchase from a partner or subsidiary company, you can update the purchase order as long as the selling company has not shipped any goods. - -When you enter a transaction, you do not need to specify the accounts for an individual set of books, but simply give the identification of the partner company. The Intercompany functionality creates general journal lines that result in the balancing of the books of both companies involved in a transaction. In receivables and payables, you assign an intercompany partner code to any customer or vendor. From that moment on, all orders and invoices generated pertaining to transactions with these companies will produce corresponding documents in the partner company, resulting in correct balancing of the accounts. - - After you set up business partners as customers and vendors in the system, and assign them intercompany partner codes, it is possible to exchange intercompany purchase and sales documents, including items and item charges. The Intercompany functionality allows intercompany transactions between multiple databases, for example, in different countries/regions, as well as multiple currencies, different charts of accounts, different dimensions, and different item numbering. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - - |To |See| - |---|---| - |Create your intercompany vendors and customers as so-called intercompany partners, and set up an intercompany chart of accounts.|[How to: Set Up Intercompany](intercompany-how-setup.md)| - |Use intercompany documents or journals to post transactions with your intercompany partners.|[How to: Work with Intercompany Documents and Journals](intercompany-how-work-documents-journals.md)| - |Organize and process incoming and outgoing transactions that you exchange with your intercompany partners.|[How to: Manage the Intercompany Inbox and Outbox](intercompany-how-manage-intercompany-inbox.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1e4b68d1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manually Adjust the Costs of Items -description: You can adjust the inventory valuation of an item using the FIFO or Average costing methods, for example, when item costs change for reasons other than transactions. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: cost adjustment, cost forwarding, costing method, inventory valuation, costing -ms.date: 08/07/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Adjust Item Costs -The cost of an item (inventory value) that you purchase and later sell may change during its lifetime, for example because a freight cost is added to its purchase cost after you have sold the item. Cost adjustment is especially relevant in situations where you sell goods before you invoice the purchase of those goods. To always know the correct inventory value, item costs must therefore regularly be adjusted. This ensures that sales and profit statistics are up to date and that financial KPIs are correct. For more information, see [Design Details: Cost Adjustment](design-details-cost-adjustment.md). - -As a rule, the value in the **Unit Cost** field on the item card is based on the standard cost for items with costing method standard. For items with all other costing methods, it is based on the calculation of the inventory available (invoiced costs and expected costs) divided by the quantity on hand. For more information, see the "Understanding Unit Cost Calculation" section. - -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], item costs are automatically adjusted every time that an inventory transaction occurs, such as when posting a purchase invoice for an item. - -You can also use a function to manually adjust the costs of one or more items. This is useful, for example, when you know that item costs have changed for other reasons than item transactions. - -Item costs are adjusted by the FIFO or the Average costing method, depending on your selection in the **Set Up My Company** assisted setup or in the **Costing Method** field on the item card. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -If you use the FIFO costing method, then an item’s unit cost is the actual value of any receipt of the item. Inventory is valuated with the assumption that the first items placed in inventory are sold first. - -If you use the Average costing method, then an item’s unit cost is calculated as the average unit cost at each point in time after a purchase. Inventory is valuated with the assumption that all inventories are sold simultaneously. For items that use this costing method, you can choose the **Unit Cost** field on the item card to view the history of transactions that the average cost is calculated from - -The cost adjustment function processes only value entries that have not yet been adjusted. If the function encounters a situation where changed inbound costs need to be forwarded to associated outbound entries, then new adjustment value entries are created, which are based on the information in the original value entries but contain the adjustment amount. The cost adjustment function uses the posting date of the original value entry in the adjustment entry, unless that date is in a closed inventory period. In that case, the program uses the starting date of the next open inventory period. If inventory periods are not used, then the date in the **Allow Posting From** field in the **General Ledger Setup** window will define when the adjustment entry is posted. - -## To adjust item costs manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Adjust Cost - Item Entries**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Adjust Cost - Item Entries** window, specify which items to adjust costs for. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To make general changes in the direct unit cost -If you need to change the direct unit cost for several items, you can use the **Adjust Item Costs/Prices** batch job. - - The batch job changes the contents in the **Unit Price** field on the item card. The batch job changes the content of the field in the same way for all items or selected items. The batch job multiplies the value in the field by an adjustment factor that you specify. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Adjust Item Costs/Prices**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Adjust Field** field, specify which item or SKU card field you want to adjust. -3. In the **Adjustment Factor** field, specify the factor by which the value will be adjusted. For example, enter **1.5** to increase the value by 50%. -4. On the **Item** FastTab, set filters to specify, for example, which items to process with the batch job. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Understanding Unit Cost Calculation -As a rule, the value in the **Unit Cost** field on the item card is based on the standard cost for items with costing method standard. For items with all other costing methods, it is based on the calculation of the inventory available (invoiced costs and expected costs) divided by the quantity on hand. - - How the contents of the **Costing Method** field influence the unit cost calculation for purchases and sales is described in more detail in the following sections. - -## Unit Cost Calculation for Purchases - When you purchase items, the value in the **Last Direct Cost** field on the item card is copied to the **Direct Unit Cost** field on a purchase line or to the Unit Amount line on an item journal line. - - What you select in the **Costing Method** field influences how [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates the contents of the **Unit Cost** field on the lines. - -### Costing Method FIFO, LIFO, Specific, or Average - [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates the contents of the **Unit Cost (LCY)** field on the purchase line or the contents of the **Unit Cost** field on the item journal line according to the following formula: - - Unit Cost (LCY) = (Direct Unit Cost – (Discount Amount / Quantity)) x (1 + Indirect Cost % / 100) + Overhead Rate - -### Costing Method Standard - The **Unit Cost (LCY)** field on the purchase line or the **Unit Cost** field is filled on the item journal line by copying the value in the **Unit Cost** field on the item card. By using costing method set as Standard, this is always based on the standard cost. - - When you post the purchase, the unit cost from the purchase line or item journal line is copied to the purchase item invoice entry, and it can be seen on the entry list for the item. - -### All Costing Methods - The unit cost from the source document line is used to calculate the contents of the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field, or if applicable, the **Cost Amount (Expected)** field that relates to this item entry, regardless of the costing method of the item. - -## Unit Cost Calculation for Sales - When you sell items, the unit cost is copied from the Unit Cost field on the item card to the sales line or the item journal line. - - When you post, the unit cost is copied to the sales invoice item entry, and it can be seen on the entry list for the item. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] uses the unit cost from the source document line to calculate the contents of the **Cost Amount (Actual)** field, or if applicable, the **Cost Amount (Expected)** field in the value entry related to this item entry. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-availability-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-availability-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 553d1933..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-availability-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Get an Availability Overview -description: You can get information about the availability of items or stock across locations, per sales or purchase events, by a time period, or by the item's position on an assembly or production BOM. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: stock -ms.date: 08/15/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View the Availability of Items -From the context of a business task, you can get advanced information about when and where an item is available, such as when talking to a customer about a delivery date. - -You can view the availability of all items per location, and you can view the availability of each item by event, by period, or by location. An event is any scheduled item transaction, such as a sales shipment or an inbound transfer receipt. - -> [!NOTE] -> Availability views by location require that you maintain inventory at more than one location. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Locations](inventory-how-setup-locations.md). - -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], availability figures are shown in two different fields, each with a different definition: - -* The **Quantity on Hand** field shows the actual quantity today according to posted item ledger entries. -* The **Projected Available Balance** field is calculated and shows the quantity on hand plus scheduled receipts minus gross requirements. (In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], scheduled receipts include quantities on purchase orders and inbound transfer orders. Gross requirements include quantities on sales orders and outbound transfer orders.) - -> [!TIP] -> The projected available balance is especially relevant to view in the **Item Availability by Periods** and **Item Availability by Event** windows as they contain the date dimension. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedures describe how to view advanced availability information from the items list and item card. You can also access the information from sales document lines, for the item on the line. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - -## To view the availability of an item according to when it will be received or shipped -You view the availability of an item according to scheduled item transactions in the **Availability by Event** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card of an item that you want to view availability for. -3. Choose the **Item Availability by** action, and then choose the **Event** action. - - The **Item Availability by Event** window shows how the inventory quantity of the item will develop over time according scheduled shipment and receipt events. The window gives a condensed view that shows one line of accumulated information per time interval in which inventory quantities change. Time intervals where no events occurred are not shown. You can expand each line to show details about the event or events that caused the accumulated quantity on the line. -4. Choose the value in the **Projected Available Balance** field to view the item ledger entries or open documents that make up the value. - -## To view the availability of an item in different periods -You view the availability of an item over time for specified time periods in the **Item Availability by Periods** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card of an item that you want to view availability for. -3. Choose the **Item Availability by** action, and then choose the **Period** action. - - The **Item Availability by Periods** window shows how the inventory quantity of the item will develop over time, shown for a period that you select, such as Day, Week, or Quarter. -4. Choose the value in the **Projected Available Balance** field to view the item ledger entries or open documents that make up the value. - -## To view the availability of an item at the locations where it is stored -You view the availability of an item at the different places where it is stored in the **Item Availability by Location** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card of an item that you want to view availability for. -3. Choose the **Item Availability by** action, and then choose the **Location** action. - - The **Item Availability by Location** window shows how the inventory quantity of the item will develop in the future, shown for each location where it is stored. -4. Choose the value in the **Qty. on Hand** field to view the item ledger entries that make up the value. -5. Choose the value in the **Projected Available Balance** field to view the item ledger entries or open documents that make up the value. - -## To view the availability of all items by the location where they are stored -You view the availability of all your items across all your locations in the **Items by Location** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Items by Location** action. - - The **Items by Location** window shows for all your items how many are available at each location. -3. Choose the value in the **Qty. on Hand** field to view the item ledger entries that make up the value. - -## To view the availability of an item by its use in assembly or production BOMs -If an item exists in assembly or production BOMs, either as a parent item or as a component, then you can view how many units of its are required in the **Item Availability by BOM Level** window. The window shows how many units of a parent you can make based on the availability of child items on underlying lines. Any item that has an assembly or production BOM is shown in the window as a collapsible line. You can expand this line to see the underlying components and lower-level subassemblies with their own BOMs. - -You can use the window to find out whether you can fulfill a sales order for an item on a specified date by looking at its current availability and the quantities that can be supplied by its components. You can also use the window to identify bottlenecks in related BOMs. - -On each line in the window for both parent items and child items, the following key fields specify the availability figures. You can use these figures to promise how many units of a parent you can supply if you start the related assembly process. - -|Field|Description| -|------|-----------| -|**Able to Make Parent**|Shows how many units of any subassembly in the top item you can make. The field specifies how many immediate parent units you can assemble. The value is based on availability of the item on the line.| -|**Able to Make Top Item**|Shows how many units of the top item you can make. The field specifies how many units of the top-line BOM item you can assemble. The value is based on availability of the item on the line.| - -### Item Availability by BOM Level Window -The **Item Availability by BOM Level** window shows information for the item on the card or document line that the window is opened for. The item is always shown on the top line. You can view information for other items or for all items by changing the value in the **Item Filter** field. - -> [!NOTE] -> By default, availability figures on the lines show the total availability of all items under the top item. These figures are displayed in the **Available Quantity** field, and the focus is on the top item. However, information about how many subassemblies you can make may be skewed. To get a true indication of how many of the shown subassemblies you can make, you must clear the **Show Total Availability** chack box and then see the figure in the **Able to Make Parent** field. - -The **Bottleneck** field specifies which item in the BOM structure restricts you from making a larger quantity than the quantity that is shown in the **Able to Make Top Item** field. For example, the bottleneck item can be a purchased component with an expected receipt date that is too late to make additional units of the top item by the date in the **Needed by Date** field. - -## Assembly Availability Window -The **Assembly Availability** window shows detailed availability information for the assembly item. It opens: - -- Automatically from a sales order line in assemble-to-order scenarios when you enter a quantity that causes a component availability issue. -- Automatically from an assembly order header when you enter a value in the Quantity field that causes a component availability issue. -- Manually when you open it from an assembly order. On the Actions tab, in the Functions group, choose Show Availability. - -The **Details** FastTab shows detailed availability information for the assembly item, including how many of the assembly order quantity can be assembled by the due date based on availability of the required components. This is shown in the Able to Assemble field on the Details FastTab. - -The value in the **Able to Assemble** field is shown in red font if the quantity is lower than the quantity in the **Remaining Quantity** field, indicating that there are not enough components available to assemble the full quantity. - -The **Lines** FastTab shows detailed availability information for the assembly components. - -If one or more assembly components are not available, then this is reflected in the **Able to Assemble** field on the line in question as a quantity less than the quantity in the **Remaining Quantity** field on the **Details** FastTab. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[How to: Work with Bills of Materials](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md) -[How to: Set Up Locations](inventory-how-setup-locations.md) -[How to: Transfer Inventory Between Locations](inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md) -[How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-categorize-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-categorize-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 54f7532a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-categorize-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Organize Items in Categories -description: To help you search for and find items, you can assign item attributes and organize items in categories. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: category, search, attribute, facet -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Categorize Items -To maintain an overview of your items and to help you sort and find items, it is useful to organize your items in item categories. - -To find items by characteristics, you can assign item attributes to items and also to item categories. For more information, see [How to: Work with Item Attributes](inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md). - -## To create an item category -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Categories**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Categories** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Item Category Card** window, on the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. On the **Attributes** FastTab, specify any item attributes for the item category. For more information, see the "To assign item attributes to an item category" section in [How to: Work with Item Attributes](inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If the item category has a parent item category, as indicated by the **Parent Category** field, then any item attributes that are assigned to that parent item category are prefilled on the **Attributes** FastTab. - -> [!NOTE] -> Item attributes that you assign to an item category will automatically apply to the item that the item category is assigned to. - -## To assign an item category to an item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the item that you want to assign to an item category. -3. Choose the lookup button in the **Item Category Code** field and select an existing item category. Alternatively, choose the **New** action to first create a new item category as explained in the "To create an item category" section. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Item Attributes](inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md) -[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md deleted file mode 100644 index d8cf28fe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,222 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory -description: Describes how to perform physical counting, make negative or positive adjustments, and how to change information, such as location or lot number, on item ledger entries or warehouse entries. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: adjustment, negative, positive, increase, decrease -ms.date: 08/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory -At least once every fiscal year you must take a physical inventory, that is, count all the items on inventory, to see if the quantity registered in the database is the same as the actual physical quantity in the warehouses. When the actual physical quantity is known, it must be posted to the general ledger as a part of period-end valuation of inventory. - -Although you count all items in inventory at least once a year, you may have decided to count some items more often, perhaps because they are more valuable, or because they are very fast movers and a large part of your business. For this purpose, you can assign special counting periods to those items. For more information, see the "To perform cycle counting" section. - -If you need to adjust recorded inventory quantities, in connection with counting or for other purposes, you can use an item journal to change the inventory ledger entries directly without posting business transactions. Alternatively, you can adjust for a single item on the item card. - -If you need to change attributes on item ledger entries as well as the quantities, you can use the item reclassification journal. Typical attributes to reclassify include serial/lot numbers, expiration dates, and dimensions. - -> [!NOTE] -> In advanced warehouse configurations, items are registered in bins as warehouse entries, not as item ledger entries. Therefore, you perform counting, adjusting, and reclassifying in special warehouse journals that support bins. Then, you use special functions to synchronize the new or changed warehouse entries with their related item ledger entries to reflect the changes in inventory quantities and values. This is described in specific procedures below where relevant. - -## To perform a physical inventory -You must take a physical inventory, that is, count the actual items on hand, to check if the quantity registered is the same as the physical quantity in stock at the end of a fiscal year, if not more often. If there are differences, you must post them to the item accounts before you do the inventory valuation. - -Apart from the physical counting task, the complete process involves the following three tasks: - -- Calculate the expected inventory. -- Print the report to be used when counting. -- Enter and post the actual counted inventory. - -You can perform the physical inventory in either of the following ways depending on your warehouse setup. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -- If your location is not using directed put-away and pick (basic warehouse configuration), you use the **Phys. Inventory Journal** window in the **Inventory** menu, and the procedure is much the same as when you conduct a physical inventory without cycle counting. -- If your location is using directed put-away and pick (advanced warehouse configuration), you first use the **Whse. Phys. Invt. Journal** window, and then you use the **Item Journal** window to run the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** function. - -### To calculate the expected inventory in basic warehouse configurations -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Inventory** action. -3. In the **Calculate Inventory** window, specify the conditions to use to create the journal lines, such as whether to include items that have zero recorded inventory. -4. Set filters if you only want to calculate inventory for certain items, bins, locations, or dimensions. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> The item entries are processed according to the information that you specified, and lines are created in the physical inventory journal. Notice that the **Qty. (Phys. Inventory)** field is automatically filled in with the same quantity as the **Qty. (Calculated)** field. With this feature, it is not necessary for you to enter the counted inventory on hand for items that are the same as the calculated quantity. However, if the quantity counted differs from what is entered in the **Qty. (Calculated)** field, you must overwrite it with the quantity actually counted. - -### To calculate the expected inventory in advanced warehouse configurations -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journal**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** action. -3. Fill in the batch job request window with the numbers of the items you want to count and with your location. -4. Choose the **OK** button, and post the adjustments if any. - - If you do not do this before you perform the warehouse physical inventory, the results you post to the physical inventory journal and item ledger in the second part of the process will be the physical inventory results combined with other warehouse adjustments for the items that were counted. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Phys. Invt. Journal**, and choose the related link. -6. Choose the **Calculate Inventory** action. The **Whse. Calculate Inventory** batch job request window opens. -7. Set the filters to limit the items that will be counted in the journal, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The program creates a line for each bin that fulfills the filter requirements. You can at this point still delete some of the lines, but if you want to post the results as a physical inventory, you must count the item in all the bins that contain it. - - If you only have time to count the item in some bins and not others, you can discover discrepancies, register them, and later post them in the item journal using the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** function. -8. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Phys. Inventory List**, and choose the related link. -9. Open the report request page and print the lists on which you want employees to record the quantity of items that they count in each bin. -10. When the counting is done, enter the counted quantities in the **Qty. (Phys. Inventory)** field in the warehouse physical inventory journal. - - > [!NOTE] - > In the warehouse physical inventory journal, **Qty. (Calculated)** field is filled in automatically on the basis of warehouse bin records and copies these quantities are copied to the **Qty. (Physical)** field on each line. If the quantity counted by the warehouse employee differs from what the program has entered in the Qty. (Physical) field, you must enter the quantity actually counted. - -11. When you have entered all the counted quantities, choose the **Register** action. - - When you register the journal, the program creates two warehouse entries in the warehouse register for every line that was counted and registered: - - - If the calculated and the physical quantities differ, a negative or positive quantity is registered for the bin, and a balancing quantity is posted to the adjustment bin of the location. - - If the quantity calculated is equal to the physical quantity, the program registers an entry of 0 for both the bin and the adjustment bin. The entries are the record that on the registering date, a warehouse physical inventory was performed, and there was no discrepancy in inventory for the item. - -When you register the warehouse physical inventory, you are not posting to the item ledger, the physical inventory ledger, or the value ledger, but the records are there for immediate reconciliation whenever necessary. If you like to keep precise records of what is happening in the warehouse, however, and you counted all of the bins where the items were registered, you should immediately post the warehouse results as an inventory physical inventory. For more information, see the "To enter and post the actual counted inventory in advanced warehouse configurations" section. - -### To print the report to be used when counting -1. In the **Phys. Inventory Journal** window containing the calculated expected inventory, Choose the **Print** action. -2. In the **Phys. Inventory List** window, specify if the report should show the calculated quantity and if the report should list inventory items by serial/lot numbers. -3. Set filters if you only want to print the report for certain items, bins, locations, or dimensions. -4. Choose the **Print** button. - -Employees can now proceed to count inventory and record any discrepancies on the printed report. - -### To enter and post the actual counted inventory in basic warehouse configurations -1. On each line in the **Phys. Inventory Journal** window where the actual inventory on hand, as determined by the physical count, differs from the calculated quantity, enter the actual inventory on hand in the **Qty. (Phys. Inventory)** field. - - The related fields are updated accordingly. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the physical count reveals differences that are caused by items posted with incorrect location codes, do not enter the differences in the physical inventory journal. Instead, use the reclassification journal or a transfer order to redirect the items to the correct locations. For more information, see Item Reclass. Journal or How to: Create Transfer Orders. - -2. To adjust the calculated quantities to the actual counted quantities, choose the **Post** action. - - Both item ledger entries and physical inventory ledger entries are created. Open the item card to view the resulting physical inventory ledger entries. - -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -4. To verify the inventory counting, open the item card in question, and then, choose the **Phys. Inventory ledger Entries** action. - -### To enter and post the actual counted inventory in advanced warehouse configurations - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journal**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** action. -3. Select the same items that you counted in the cycle counting physical inventory you just performed, and any other items that require adjustment, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The **Inventory Journal** window opens and lines are created for these items. Note that the net quantities that you just counted and registered bin by bin are now ready to be consolidated and synchronized as item ledger entries. - -4. Post the journal without changing any quantities. - -The quantities in the item ledger (item entries) and the quantities in the warehouse (warehouse entries) are now once again the same for these items, and the program has updated the last counting date of the item or stockkeeping unit. - -## To perform cycle counting -Although you count all items in inventory at least once a year, you may have decided to count some items more often, perhaps because they are more valuable, or because they are very fast movers and a large part of your business. For this purpose, you can assign special counting periods to those items. - -You can perform the cycle counting in either of the following ways depending on your warehouse setup. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -- If your location is not using directed put-away and pick (basic warehouse configuration), you use the **Phys. Inventory Journal** window in the **Inventory** menu, and the procedure is much the same as when you conduct a physical inventory without cycle counting. -- If your location is using directed put-away and pick (advanced warehouse configuration), you first use the **Whse. Phys. Invt. Journal** window, and then you use the **Item Journal** window to run the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** function. - -### To set up counting periods -A physical inventory is typically taken at some recurring interval, for example monthly, quarterly, or annually. You can set up whatever inventory counting periods necessary. - -You set up the inventory counting periods that you want to use and then assign one to each item. When you perform a physical inventory and use the **Calculate Counting Period** in the physical inventory journal, lines for the items are created automatically. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Invt. Counting Periods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -### To assign a counting period to an item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item to which you want to assign a counting period. -3. In the **Phys Invt Counting Period Code** field, select the appropriate counting period. -4. Choose the **Yes** button to change the code and calculate the first counting period for the item. The next time you choose to calculate a counting period in the physical inventory journal, the item appears as a line in the **Phys. Invt. Item Selection** window. You can then begin to count the item on a periodic basis. - -### To initiate a count based on counting periods in basic warehouse configurations -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Phys. Inventory Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Counting Period** action. - - The **Phys. Invt. Item Selection** window opens showing the items that have counting periods assigned and need to be counted according to their counting periods. -3. Perform the physical inventory. For more information, see the "To perform a physical inventory" section. - -### To initiate a count based on counting periods in advanced warehouse configurations -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Phys. Invt. Journal**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Counting Period** action. - - The **Phys. Invt. Item Selection** window opens showing the items that have counting periods assigned and need to be counted according to their counting periods. -3. Perform the physical inventory. For more information, see the "To perform a physical inventory" section. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must count the item in all the bins that contain the particular item. If you delete some of the bin lines that the program has retrieved for counting in the **Whse. Phys. Inventory** window, then you will not be counting all the items in the warehouse. If you later post such incomplete results in the Phys. Inventory Journal, the amounts posted will be incorrect. - -## To adjust the inventory of one item -After you have made a physical count of an item in your inventory area, you can use the **Adjust Inventory** function to record the actual inventory quantity. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the item for which you want to adjust inventory, and then choose the **Adjust Inventory** action. -3. In the **New Inventory** field, enter the inventory quantity that you want to record for the item. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The item’s inventory is now adjusted. The new quantity is shown in the **Current Inventory** field in the **Adjust Inventory** window and in the **Inventory** field in the **Item Card** window. - -You can also use the **Adjust Inventory** function as a simple way to place purchased items on inventory if you do not use purchase invoices or orders to record your purchases. For more information, [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> After you have adjusted inventory, you must update it with the current, calculated value. For more information, see [How to: Revalue Inventory](inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md). - -### To adjust the inventory quantity of multiple items in basic warehouse configurations -In the **Item Journal** window, you can post item transaction directly to adjust inventory in connection with purchases, sales, and positive or negative adjustments without using documents. - -If you often use the item journal to post the same or similar journal lines, for example, in connection with material consumption, you can use the **Standard Item Journal** window to make this recurring work easier. For more information, see the "Standard Journals" section in [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **Post** action to make the inventory adjustments. - -> [!NOTE] -> After you have adjusted inventory, you must update it with the current, calculated value. For more information, see [How to: Revalue Inventory](inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md). - -### To adjust bin quantities in advanced warehouse configurations -If your location uses directed put-away and pick, use the **Whse. Item Journal** to post, outside the context of the physical inventory, all positive and negative adjustments in item quantity that you know are real gains, such as items previously posted as missing that show up unexpectedly, or real losses, such as breakage. - -Unlike posting adjustments in the inventory item journal, using the warehouse item journal gives you an additional level of adjustment that makes your quantity records even more precise at all times. The warehouse thus always has a complete record of how many items are on hand and where they are stored, but each adjustment registration is not posted immediately to the item ledger. In the registering process, credits or debits are made to the real bin with the quantity adjustment and a counterbalancing entry is made in an adjustment bin, a virtual bin with no real items. This bin is defined in the **Invt. Adjustment Bin Code** on the location card. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Item Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the header information. -3. Fill in the **Item No.** field on the line. -4. Enter the bin in which you are putting the extra items or where you have found items to be missing. -5. Fill in the quantity that you observe as a discrepancy in the **Quantity** field. If you have found extra items, enter a positive quantity. If items are missing, enter a negative quantity. -6. Choose the **Register** action. - -## To synchronize the adjusted warehouse entries with the related item ledger entries -At appropriate intervals as defined by company policy, you must post the warehouse adjustment bin records in the item ledger. Some companies find it appropriate to post adjustments to the item ledger every day, while others may find it adequate to reconcile less frequently. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields on each journal line. -3. Choose the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** action, and fill in the filters as appropriate in the batch job request window. The adjustments are calculated only for the entries in the adjustment bin that meet filter requirements. -4. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the **Document No.** field with a number that you enter manually. Because no number series has been set up for this batch job, use the number scheme set up by the warehouse, or enter the date followed by your initials. -5. Choose the **OK** button. The positive and negative adjustments are totaled for each item and lines are created in the item journal for any items where the sum is a positive or negative quantity. -6. Post the journal lines to enter the quantity differences in the item ledger. The inventory in the warehouse bins now corresponds precisely to the inventory in the item ledger. - -## To reclassify an item's lot number -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclass. Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Reclass. Journal** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -3. To In the **Lot No.** field, enter the items current lot number. -4. In the **New Lot No.** field, enter the item's new lot number. -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -Special steps apply when you want to reclassify serial or lot numbers. For more information, see [How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-post-inventory-cost-gl.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-post-inventory-cost-gl.md deleted file mode 100644 index cd50bca5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-post-inventory-cost-gl.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "How to: Post Inventory Costs to the General Ledger" -description: "How to: Post Inventory Costs to the General Ledger" -author: SorenGP -ms.author: edupont -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# How to: Post Inventory Costs to the General Ledger -When you post inventory transactions, such as sales shipments, purchase invoices, or inventory adjustments, the changed quantities and costs are recorded in the item ledger entries and the value entries, respectively. To reflect this change of inventory value in your financial books, you must post inventory costs to the related inventory accounts in the general ledger. - -You can post inventory costs to the general ledger in two ways: - -- Automatically, so that inventory costs are posted to the general ledger every time you post an inventory transaction. -- Manually, so that inventory costs are only posted to the general ledger when you run a batch job. - - -## To post inventory costs automatically -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Inventory Setup** window, select the **Automatic Cost Posting** check box. - -For each inventory transaction that you post, the appropriate values are posted to the inventory account, adjustment account, and COGS account in the general ledger. - -Even if you use automatic cost posting, it is still necessary to periodically run the Adjust Cost - Item Entries batch job to ensure that the costs of goods are forwarded to the appropriate outbound transactions, such as sales or transfers. This is especially important in situations where you sell goods before invoicing the purchase of those goods. - -If an error occurs in the dimension setup while posting the inventory cost to the general ledger, the posting will end with an error. - -## To post inventory costs manually -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Post Inventory Cost to G/L**, and then choose the related link. -2. Post inventory costs to the general ledger manually by running the batch job. When you run this batch job, general ledger entries are created on the basis of value entries. You can post the entries so that they are summarized per posting group. - -**Note**: When you run this batch job, you may encounter errors having to do with missing setup or incompatible dimension setup. If the batch job encounters errors in the dimension setup, it overrides these errors and uses the dimensions of the value entry. For any other errors, the batch job skips posting the value entries and lists them at the end of the report in a section titled “Skipped Entries.” To post these entries, you must fix the errors. - -To see a list of errors before running the posting batch job, you can run the **Post Invt. Cost to G/L - Test** report. The test report lists all the errors encountered during a test posting. You can then fix the errors, and run the inventory cost posting batch job without skipping any entries. - -If you would like to simply get an overview of what values could be posted to the general ledger without actually performing the posting, you can run the Post Inventory Cost to G/L batch job without actually posting the values to the general ledger. You do this by clearing the check mark from the Post field on the request page. This way, when you run the batch job, the report is produced showing the values that are ready to be posted to the general ledger, but they are not posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md) -[Manage Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Manage Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-register-new-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-register-new-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 96c97cd3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-register-new-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Item Cards for Goods or Services -description: You create item cards for services that you sell as hours and for physical products, such as assembly items, finished goods, components, or raw material, that you sell from your inventory. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: item, finished good, component, raw material, assembly item -ms.date: 08/31/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Register New Items -Items, among other products, are the basis of your business, the goods or services that you trade in. Each item must be registered as an item card. - -Item cards hold the information that is required to buy, store, sell, deliver, and account for items. - -An item can be structured as a parent item with underlying child items in a bill of materials (BOM). In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], a bill of material can be either an assembly BOM or a production BOM, depending on its use. For more information, see [How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If item templates exist for different item types, then a window appears when you create a new item card from where you can select an appropriate template. If only one item template exists, then new item cards always use that template. - -If you purchase the same item from more than one vendor, you can connect those vendors to the item card. The vendors will then appear in the **Item Vendor Catalog** window, so that you can easily select an alternate vendor. - -## To create a new item card -1. On the Home page, choose the **Items** action to open the list of existing items. -2. In the **Items** window, choose the **New** action. - - If only one item template exists, then a new item card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -3. In the **Select a template for a new item** window, choose the template that you want to use for the new item card. -4. Choose the **OK** button. A new item card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the item card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> In the **Costing Method** field, you set up how the item's unit cost is calculated by making assumptions about the flow of physical items through your company. Five costing methods are available, depending on the type of item. For more information, see [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md). -> -> If you select **Average**, then the item’s unit cost is calculated as the average unit cost at each point in time after a purchase. Inventory is valuated with the assumption that all inventories are sold simultaneously. With this setting, you can choose the **Unit Cost** field to view, in the **Average Cost Calc. Overview** window, the history of transactions that the average cost is calculated from. - -On the **Price and Posting** FastTab, you can view special prices or discounts that you grant for the item if certain criteria are met, such as customer, minimum order quantity, or ending date. Each row represents a special price or line discount. Each column represents a criterion that must apply to warrant the special price that you enter in the **Unit Price** field, or the line discount that you enter in the **Line Discount %** field. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). - -The item is now registered, and the item card is ready to be used on purchase and sales documents. - -If you want to use this item card as a template when you create new item cards, you can save it as a template. For more information, see the following section. - -## To save the item card as a template -1. In the **Item Card** window, choose the **Save as Template** action. The **Item Template** window opens showing the item card as a template. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. To reuse dimensions in templates, choose the **Dimensions** action. The **Dimension Templates** window opens showing any dimension codes that are set up for the item. -4. Edit or enter dimension codes that will apply to new item cards created by using the template. -5. When you have completed the new item template, choose the **OK** button. - -The item template is added to the list of item templates, so that you can use it to create new item cards. - -## To set up multiple vendors for an item -If you purchase the same item from more than one vendor, you must enter information about each vendor of the item, such as prices, lead time, discounts, and so on. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant item, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Vendors** action. -4. Choose the **Vendor No.** field, and then select the vendor that you want to set up for the item. -5. Optionally, fill in the remaining fields. -6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each vendor that you want to buy the item from. - -The vendors will now appear in the **Item Vendor Catalog** window, which you open from the item card, so that you can easily select an alternate vendor. - -## See Also - [Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) - [Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) - [Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index c72ab06e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-revalue-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create New Value Entries for Items in the Inventory -description: Describes how to appreciate or depreciate the value entries of one or more items in the inventory by posting their current, calculated value. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: costing, inventory cost, value entries -ms.date: 08/07/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Revalue Inventory -If you want to appreciate or depreciate an item or a specific item ledger entry, you must use the revaluation journal. - -## To revalue inventory -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Revaluation Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Inventory Value** action. -3. In the **Calculate Inventory Value** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. On each line in the **Revaluation Journal** window, in the **Unit Cost (Revalued)** field, enter the new unit cost. Alternatively, enter the new total amount in the **Inventory Value (Revalued)** field. - - The relevant fields are automatically updated. Note that the **Amount** field shows the actual change in inventory value for the selected item ledger entry. It calculates the difference between the **Inventory Value (Calculated)** field and the **Inventory Value (Revalued)** field. -6. When you have completed all lines in the revaluation journal, choose the **Post** action. - -New value entries are now created to reflect the revaluations that you have posted. You can see the new values on the respective item cards. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Revaluation](design-details-revaluation.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-general.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-general.md deleted file mode 100644 index a8a53362..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-general.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Define the General Inventory Setup -description: Describes how to define the general inventory setup, such as number series and locations, so that you can, for example, manage your warehouse and stock. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: warehouse, stock -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up General Inventory Information -You specify your general inventory setup in the **Inventory Setup** window. - -## To set up general inventory information -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Inventory Setup** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -If you want to include warehouse handling time in the order promising calculation on the purchase line, you can set it up as a default for the inventory, in the **Inventory Setup** window, and for your location. For more information, see [How to: Calculate Order Promising Dates](sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Set Up Inventory](inventory-setup-inventory.md) -[Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-locations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-locations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 70ff3627..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-setup-locations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up a Location Card and Define Transfer Routes -description: You create a location card for each place you store inventory items, for example, a warehouse or distribution center, and set up routes to transfer items between locations. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: warehouse, distribution center -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Locations -If you buy, store, or sell items at more than one place or warehouse, you must set each location up with a location card and define transfer routes. - -You can then create document lines for a specific location, view availability by location, and transfer inventory between locations. For more information, see [Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md). - -## To create a location card -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Location Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for every location where you want to keep inventory. - -> [!NOTE] -> Many fields on the location card refer to the handling of items in inbound and outbound warehouse processes. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -## To create a transfer route -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transfer Routes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Alternatively, from any **Location Card** window, choose the **Transfer Routes** action. -3. Choose the **New** action. -4. In the **Location Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -You can now transfer inventory items between two locations. For more information, see [How to: Transfer Inventory Between Locations](inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[How to: Transfer Inventory Between Locations](inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 15903fa1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Reserve Items - description: You can reserve items for sales orders, purchase orders, and production orders. You can reserve items on inventory or inbound on open document lines. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reserve Items -You can reserve items for sales orders, purchase orders, service orders, assembly orders, and production orders. You can reserve items on inventory or inbound on open document or journal lines. You perform the work in the **Reservation** window. - -Each line in the **Reservation** window, which you open to reserve items, displays information about one type of line (sales, purchase, journal) or inventory entry. The lines describe how many items are available to be reserved from each type of line or entry. - -## To reserve items for sales -The following describes how to reserve items from a sales order. The steps are similar for purchase, service, and assembly orders. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. On a sales order, on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Reserve** action. The **Reservation** window opens. -3. Select the line that you want to reserve the items from. -4. Choose one of the following actions. - - |**Function**|**Description**| - |------------------|---------------------| - |**Auto Reserve**|To automatically reserve items in the **Reservation** window.| - |**Reserve from Current Line**|To reserve the items from the document on the line you have selected.| - |**Cancel Reservation from Current Line**|To cancel reservation of the items from the document on the line you have selected.| - -> [!NOTE] -> If item tracking lines exist for the sales order, the reservation system will take you through special steps. For more information, see the "To reserve a specific serial or lot number" section. - -## To reserve an item for a production order line -You can reserve items for production orders. You have to distinguish between production order lines, meaning the parent item, and production order components. - -In the following procedure, a firm planned production order is used. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the firm planned production order you want to reserve parent items for. -3. Select the relevant production order line. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Reserve** action. -5. In the **Reservation** window, select the **Sales Line, Order** line, and then choose the **Reserve from Current Line** action. - -The quantity you entered in the firm planned production order line is now reserved. - -## To reserve items for production order components -You can reserve items for production orders. You have to distinguish between production order lines, meaning the parent item, and production order components. - -In the following procedure, a firm planned production order is used. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the firm planned production order you want to reserve component items for. -3. Select the relevant production order line. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Line**, and then choose **Components**. -5. Select the relevant component line. -6. Choose On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Reserve** action. -7. In the **Reservation** window, select a line, and then choose the **Reserve from Current Line** action. - -The quantity you entered in the firm planned production component line is now reserved. - -## To change a reservation -Sometimes, you may want to change an item reservation. -1. From the document line that you have reserved from, on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Reserve** action. -2. In the **Reservation** window, choose the **Reservation Entries** action. -3. The **Reservation Entries** window, update the **Quantity** field on the line you want to change. -4. Confirm the subsequent message, by choosing the **OK** button. - -## To cancel a reservation -Sometimes, you may want to cancel an item reservation. -1. From the document line that you want to cancel a reservation from, on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Reserve** action. -2. In the **Reservation** window, choose **Reservation Entries** action. -3. In the **Reservation Entries** window, choose the **Cancel Reservation** action. -4. Confirm the subsequent message, by choosing the **OK** button. - -## To reserve a specific serial or lot number -From outbound documents for item-tracked items, such as sales orders or production component lists, you can reserve specific serial or lot numbers. This may be relevant, for example, if you need production components from a specific lot to ensure consistency with earlier production batches, or because a customer has requested a specific serial number. For more information, see [How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md). - -This is referred to as a specific reservation, because you reserve from the quantity of Item X that belongs to Lot X. If you simply reserve from quantities of Item X, then it is a normal, non-specific, reservation. For more information, see [Design Details - Item Tracking and Reservations](design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md). - -The following procedure is based on a sales order. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a sales order line for an item-tracked item. -3. Assign serial and lot numbers to the sales order line. For more information, see [How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md). -4. On the sales order line, choose the **Reserve** action. -5. Choose the **Yes** button to reserve specific serial or lot numbers. -6. In the **Item Tracking List** window, select the serial and lot number combination that you have just assigned. -7. Choose the **OK** button to open the **Reservation** window showing only supply with the specified item tracking number. If there are any non-specific reservations on any of the item tracking numbers that you have specified for this line, you are informed of the quantity that has already been reserved. -8. Choose either the **Auto Reserve** or the **Reserve from Current Line** action to create the reservation on the specific item tracking numbers. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Reservation, Order Tracking, and Action Messaging](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md) -[Design Details - Item Tracking and Reservations](design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md) -[How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-set-up-stockkeeping-units.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-set-up-stockkeeping-units.md deleted file mode 100644 index 69aac961..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-set-up-stockkeeping-units.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Stockkeeping Units - description: You can use stockkeeping units to record information about your items for a specific location or a specific variant code. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Stockkeeping Units -You can use stockkeeping units to record information about your items for a specific location or a specific variant code. - - Stockkeeping units are a supplement to item cards. They do not replace them, although they are related to them. Stockkeeping units allow you to differentiate information about an item for a specific location, such as a warehouse or distribution center, or a specific variant, such as different shelf numbers and different replenishment information, for the same item. - -## To set up a stockkeeping unit - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Stockkeeping Units**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields on the card. The following fields are required: **Item No.**, **Location Code**, and/or **Variant Code**. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -When you have set up the first stockkeeping unit for an item, the **Stockkeeping Unit Exists** check box on the **Item** card is selected. - -To create several stockkeeping units for an item, use the **Create Stockkeeping Unit** batch job. - -> [!NOTE] -> The information on the **Stockkeeping Unit** card has priority over the **Item** card. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index e63ea1bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Trace Item-Tracked Items - description: You can see where an item-tracked item was used, including how and when it was received or produced, transferred, sold, consumed, or returned. You can also find all current instances of a specific serial or lot number in the database. You do this by using the Item Tracing and the Navigate features. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Trace Item-Tracked Items -You can see where an item-tracked item was used, including how and when it was received or produced, transferred, sold, consumed, or returned. You can also find all current instances of a specific serial or lot number in the database. You do this by using the Item Tracing and the Navigate features. - - These features can be particularly useful in quality control when you need to find out which customers received products with a particular lot number or when you need to find out which lot a defective component came from. - - In the **Item Tracing** window, you can trace forwards and backwards in a sequence of posted inventory transactions for the serial or lot number. - - In the **Navigate** window, you cannot see the sequence of transactions, but you can see all records of the serial or lot number, both posted entries and open records. - - The two features can be used in combination by transferring a traced serial or lot number to the **Navigate** window to finish a complete trace scenario. For more information, see [Walkthrough: Tracing Serial-Lot Numbers](walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md). - -## To trace item-tracked items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Tracing**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the filter fields at the top of the window, enter the specific item numbers or a filter on the item numbers that you would like to trace. -3. In the **Show Components** field, select whether you would like to also see where the components for the items came from. Your options in this field are as follows. - - |Field|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No**|Select this option if you do not want to see any components.| - |**Item-tracked Only**|Select this option if you want to see only components that have lot or serial numbers.| - |**All**|Select this option if you want to see all components.| - -4. In the **Trace Method** field, select the method you would like to use for tracing the item. The options are as follows - - |Field|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Usage->Origin**|This method traces the item starting from where it was used to where it came from. For instance, if a manufactured item was sold to a customer, the **Item Tracing** window shows this with the sales shipment line first, which you can then expand to see from which production order it came.| - |**Origin->Usage**|This method traces the item starting from where it came into inventory to where it was used. For instance, if a manufactured item was sold to a customer, the **Item Tracing** window shows this with the finished production order first, which you can then expand to see sale shipment lines where the item was used.| - -5. Choose the **Trace** action to run the trace. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you have received the same lot on more transactions, then the **Item Tracing** window may not show all transactions. Only applied transactions are shown. - -> [!NOTE] -> If additional transaction history under an item tracing line has already been traced by another line above it, then the **Already Traced** check box is selected. To provide a simpler view, such underlying lines are not shown. -> -> To find the item tracing lines where the transaction history has already been traced, choose the **Go to Already Traced** button. The item tracing line in question is selected, and all underlying lines are expanded. - -## To find item-tracked items with Navigate - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Navigate**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Item Tracking** FastTab, in the **Serial No.** and **Lot No.** fields, enter the item tracking numbers that you want to trace. -3. Choose the **Find** action to find all instances of the serial or lot number in the database. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) -[Design Details - Item Tracking and Reservations](design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md) -[How to: Reserve Items](inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Walkthrough: Tracing Serial-Lot Numbers](walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md deleted file mode 100644 index e9a74e4a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Transfer Items Between Warehouse Locations -description: Describes how to move inventory from one place or warehouse to another, either with the reclassification journal or with transfer orders. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: move, warehouse -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Transfer Inventory Between Locations -You can transfer inventory items between locations by creating transfer orders. Alternatively, you can use the item reclassification journal. - -With transfer orders, you ship the outbound transfer from one location and receive the inbound transfer at the other location. This allows you to manage the involved warehouse activities and provides more certainty that inventory quantities are updated correctly. - -With the reclassification journal, you simply fill in the **Location Code** and the **New Location Code** fields. When you post the journal, the item ledger entries are adjusted at the locations in question. With this method, warehouse activities are not managed. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you have items recorded in your inventory without a location code, for example from a time when you only had one warehouse, then you cannot transfer those items using transfer orders. Instead, you must use the reclassification journal to reclassify the items from a blank location code to an actual location code. For more information, see step 3 in the "To transfer items with the item reclassification journal" section. - -To transfer items, locations and transfer routes must be set up. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Locations](inventory-how-setup-locations.md). - -## To transfer items with a transfer order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transfer orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Transfer Order** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - > [!NOTE] - > If you have filled in the **In-Transit Code**, **Shipping Agent Code**, and **Shipping Agent Service** fields in the **Trans. Route Spec.** window when you set up the transfer route, then the corresponding fields on the transfer order are filled in automatically. - - When you fill in the **Shipping Agent Service** field, the receipt date at the transfer-to location is calculated by adding the shipping time of the shipping agent service to the shipment date. - - As a warehouse worker at the transfer-from location, proceed to ship the items. -3. Choose the **Post** action, choose the **Ship** option, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The items are now in transit between the specified locations, according to the specifies transfer route. - - As a warehouse worker at the transfer-from location, proceed to receive the items. -4. Choose the **Post** action, choose the **Receive** option, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## To transfer items with the item reclassification journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclass. Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Reclass. Journal** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. In the **Location Code** field, enter the location where the items are currently stored. - - > [!NOTE] - > To transfer items that have no location code, leave the **Location Code** field blank. -4. In the **New Location Code** field, enter the location that you want to transfer the items to. -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[How to: Set Up Locations](inventory-how-setup-locations.md) - -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-BOMs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-BOMs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1d382b17..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-BOMs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work with Bills of Material to Manage Components -description: You create an assembly BOM or production BOM to specify the components or resources required to put together the item that the BOM represents. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 09/04/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Bills of Material -You use bills of materials (BOMs) to structure parent items that must be assembled or produced by resources or machine centers from components. An assembly BOM can also be used to sell a parent item as a kit consisting of its components. - -## Assembly BOMs or Production BOMs -You use assembly orders for making end items from components in a simple process that can be performed by one or more basic resources, which are not machine or work centers, or without any resources. For example, an assembly process could be to pick two wine bottles and one coffee sack and then pack them as a gift item. - -An assembly BOM is the master data that defines which component items go into an assembled end item and which resources are used to assemble the assembly item. When you enter an assembly item and a quantity in the header of a new assembly order, then the assembly order lines are automatically filled according to the assembly BOM with one assembly order line per component or resource. For more information, see [Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md). - -Assembly BOMs are described in this topic. - -You use production orders for making end items from components in a complex process that requires a production routing and work or machine centers, which represent production capacities. For example, a production process could be to cut steel plates in one operation, weld them in the next operation, and paint the end item in the last operation. For more information, see [Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md). - -A production BOM is the master data that defines a production item and the components that go into it. for assembly items, the production BOM must be certified and assigned to the production item before it can be used in a production order. When you enter the production item on a production order line, either manually or by refreshing the order, then the production BOM content becomes the production order components. For more information, see [How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md). - -The concept of resources in production is much more advanced than in assembly management. Work centers and machine centers function as resources, and production steps are represented by operations that are assigned to resources in production routings. For more information, see [How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md). - -Both assembly orders and production orders may be linked directly to sales orders. However, you can only use assembly orders to customize the end item directly for a customer request with the sales order. - -## To create an assembly BOM -To define a parent item that consists of other items, and potentially of resources required to put the parent together, you must create an assembly BOM. - -Assembly BOMs usually contain items but can also contain one or more resources that are required to put the assembly item together. - -Assembly BOMs can have multiple levels, which means that a component on the assembly BOM can be an assembly item itself. In that case, the **Assembly BOM** field on the assembly BOM line contains **Yes**. - -Special requirements apply to items on assembly BOMs with regards to availability. For more information, see the "To see the availability of an item by its use in assembly BOMs" section in [How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md). - -There are two parts to creating an assembly BOM: -- Setting up a new item -- Defining the BOM structure of the assembly item. - -1. Set up a new item. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - - Proceed to enter components or resources on the assembly BOM. -2. In the **Item Card** window for an assembly item, choose the **Assembly** action, and then choose the **Assembly BOM** action. -3. In the **Assembly BOM** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To view the components of an assembly item indented according to the BOM structure -From the **Assembly BOM** window, you can open a separate window that shows the components and any resources indented according to their BOM position under the assembly item. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for an assembly item. (The **Assembly BOM** field in the **Items** window contains **Yes**.) -3. In the **Item Card** window, choose the **Assembly** action, and then choose the **Assembly BOM** action. -4. In the **Assembly BOM** window, choose the **Show BOM** action. - -## To replace the assembly item with its components on document lines -From any sales and purchase document that contains an assembly item, you can use a special function to replace the line for the assembly item with new lines for its components. This function is useful, for example, if you want to sell the components as a kit that represents the assembly item. - -**Caution**: When you have used the **Explode BOM** function, you cannot easily undo it. You must delete the sales order lines representing the components and then reenter a sales order line for the assembly item. - -The following procedure is based on a sales invoice. The same steps apply to other sales documents and to all purchase documents. - -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a sales invoice that contains a line for an assembly item. -3. Choose the line for an assembly item, and then **Explode BOM** line action. - -All fields on the sales invoice line for the assembly item are cleared except for the **Item** and **Description** fields. Complete sales invoice lines are inserted for the components and possible resources that comprise the assembly item. - -**Note**: The Explode BOM function is also available in the **Assembly BOM** window. - -## To calculate the standard cost of an assembly item -You calculate the unit cost of an assembly item by rolling up the unit cost of each component and resource in the item’s assembly BOM. - -You can also calculate and update the standard cost for one or many items in the **Standard Cost Worksheet** window. For more information, see [How to: Update Standard Costs](finance-how-to-update-standard-costs.md). - -The unit cost of an assembly BOM always equals the total of the unit costs of its components, including other assembly BOMs, and any resources. - -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for an assembly item. (The **Assembly BOM** field in the **Items** window contains **Yes**.) -3. In the **Item Card** window, choose the **Assembly** action, and then choose the **Assembly BOM** action. -4. In the **Assembly BOM** window, choose the **Calc. Standard Cost** action. -5. Select one of the following options, and then choose the **OK** button. - -|Option |Description | -|-------|------------| -|**Top Level**|Calculates the assembly item's standard cost as the total cost of all purchased or assembled items on that assembly BOM regardless of any underlying assembly BOMs.| -|**All Levels**|Calculates the assembly's item standard cost as the sum of: 1) The calculated cost of all underlying assembly BOMs on the assembly BOM. 2) The cost of all purchased items on the assembly BOM.| - - - -The costs of the items that make up the assembly BOM are copied from the component item cards. The cost of each item is multiplied by the quantity, and the total cost is shown in the **Unit Cost** field on the item card. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) -[How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md deleted file mode 100644 index a5e9fc78..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Item Attributes and Assign Them to Items -description: Describes how to set up item attribute values, for example, that can be used as search words, and assign them to items and item categories. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: categories, search words, facets -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Item Attributes -When customers inquire about an item, either in correspondence or in an integrated web shop, they may ask or search according to characteristics, such as height and model year. To provide this customer service, you can assign item attribute values of different types to your items, which can then be used when searching for items. - -You can also assign item attributes to item categories, which then apply to the items that use the item categories. For more information, see [How to: Categorize Item](inventory-how-categorize-items.md). - -> [!Tip] -> If you attach pictures to items, the Image Analyzer extension can detect attributes in the image, and suggest the attributes so you can decide whether to assign them. The extension is ready to go. You just need to enable it. For more information, see [The Image Analyzer Extension for [!INCLUDE[navnow](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-extensions-image-analyzer.md). - -## To create item attributes -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Attributes**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Attributes** window, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Item Attribute** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> If you select **Option** in the **Type** field, then you can choose the **Item Attribute Values** action to create values for the item attribute. For more information, see the "To create values for item attributes of type Option" section. - -## To create values for item attributes of type Option -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Attributes**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Attributes** window, select an item attribute of type **Option** that you want to create values for, and then choose the **Item Attribute Values** action. -3. In the **Item Attribute Values** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign item attributes to items -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Items** window, select the item that you want to assign item attributes to, and then choose the **Attributes** action. -3. In the **Item Attribute Values** window, choose the **New** action. -4. Choose the lookup button in the **Attribute** field and select an existing item attribute. Alternatively, choose the **New** action to first create a new item attribute as explained in the "To create item attributes" section. -5. In the **Value** field, enter the item attribute value, such as "2010" for the **Model Year** attribute. -6. For item attributes of type **Option**, choose the lookup button in the **Value** field and select an item attribute value. Alternatively, choose the **New** action to first create a new item attribute value as explained in the "To create values for item attributes of type Option" section. -7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for all item attributes that you want to assign to the item. - -## To assign item attributes to item categories -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Categories**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Categories** window, select the item category that you want to assign item attributes to, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Item Category Card** window, on the **Attributes** FastTab, choose the **New** action. -4. Choose the lookup button in the **Attribute** field and select an existing item attribute. Alternatively, choose the **New** action to first create a new item attribute as explained in the "To create an item attribute" section. -5. In the **Default Value** field, choose the lookup button and select an item attribute value. -6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all item attributes that you want to assign to the item category. - -> [!NOTE] -> Item attributes for parent item categories will be inherited to child item categories. This is indicated by the **Inherited From** field on the **Attributes** FastTab. For more information, see [How to: Categorize Items](inventory-how-categorize-items.md). - -## To filter by item attributes -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Items** window, choose the **Filter by Attributes** action. -3. In the **Filter Items by Attribute** window, choose the lookup button in the **Attribute** field and select an item attribute. -4. In the **Value** field, choose the lookup button and select an attribute value to filter items by. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only select values directly for item attributes that have fixed values, such as Color. For item attributes that have variable values, such as Width, you must specify the item attribute value by first selecting a condition. See step 5. -5. In the **Value** field for a variable item attribute, choose the lookup button. -6. In the **Specify Filter Value** window, in the **Condition** field, choose the drop-down arrow and select a condition. -7. In the **Value** field, enter an attribute value to filter items by. - - **Example**: To filter on items where the material description begins with "blue", fill in the fields as follows: **Attribute** field: Material Description, **Condition** field: Begins With, **Value** field: blue. -8. Choose the **OK** button. - -The items in the **Items** window are filtered by the specified item attribute values. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Categorize Items](inventory-how-categorize-items.md) -[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md deleted file mode 100644 index a8e611df..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,264 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Assign Serial Numbers and Lot Numbers to Items for Tracking - description: You can add serial numbers and lot numbers to any outbound or inbound document, and its posted item tracking entries are displayed in the related item ledger entries. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers -You can assign serial numbers and lot numbers to any outbound or inbound document, and its posted item tracking entries are displayed in the related item ledger entries. You perform the work in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. - -The matrix of quantity fields at the top of the **Item Tracking Lines** window displays the quantities and sums of item tracking numbers being defined on the lines. The quantities must correspond to those of the document line, which is indicated by 0 in the **Undefined** fields. - -As a performance measure, the program collects the availability information in the **Item Tracking Lines** window only once, when you open the window. This means that the program does not update the availability information during the time that you have the window open, even if changes occur in inventory or on other documents during that time. - -Items with serial or lot numbers can be traced both backwards and forward in their supply chain. This is useful for general quality assurance and for product recalls. For more information, see [How to: Trace Item-Tracked Items](inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md). - -## About Picking Serial or Lot Numbers in the Warehouse -Outbound handling of serial or lot numbers is a frequent task in different warehouse processes. - -In some processes, the inventory items do not carry serial or lot numbers, and the warehouse worker must assign new during the outbound handling, typically from a predefined number series. - -In simple processes, the inventory items already carry serial or lot numbers, for example assigned during the put-away, and these numbers are automatically transferred through all outbound warehouse activities without interaction by warehouse workers. - -In special situations for serial- or lot-numbered inventory, specific serial or lot numbers are defined on the source document, such as a sales order, which the warehouse worker must respect during the outbound warehouse handling. This may be because the customer requested a specific lot during the order process. When the inventory pick or warehouse pick document is created from an outbound source document where serial or lot numbers are already defined, then all fields in the **Item Tracking Lines** window under the inventory pick are locked for writing, except the **Qty. to Handle** field. In that case, the inventory pick lines specify the item tracking numbers on individual take and place lines. The quantity is already split into unique serial or lot number combinations because the sales order specifies the item tracking numbers to ship. - -## Item Tracking Availability -When you work with serial and lot numbers, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates availability information for lot and serial numbers and shows it in the various item tracking windows. This lets you see how much of a lot or serial number is currently being used on other documents. This reduces errors and uncertainty caused by double allocations. - -In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, a warning icon is shown in the **Availability, Lot No.** or **Availability, Serial No.** field if some or all of the quantity you have selected is already being used in other documents or if the lot or serial number is not available. - -In the **Lot No./Serial No.-List** window, the **Lot No./Serial No.-Availability** window, and the **Item Tracking - Select Entries** window, information is displayed about how much quantity of an item is being used. This includes the following information. - -|Field|Description| -|-----|-----------| -|**Total Quantity**|The total number of item currently in inventory| -|**Total Requested Quantity**|The total number of items that are requested that will be used in this and other documents| -|**Current Pending Quantity**|The number of items that are requested that will be used on the current document but that is not yet committed to the database| -|**Current Requested Quantity**|The number of items that are requested that will be used on the current document| -|**Total Available Quantity**|The total number of items in inventory, minus the quantity of the item that are requested on this and other documents (total requested quantity), and minus the quantity that is requested but not yet committed on this document (current pending quantity)| - -If you work in the **Item Tracking Lines** window for a long period of time or if there is a great deal of activity with the item you are working with, then you can choose the **Refresh Availability** action. In addition, the availability of the item is automatically rechecked when you close the window to confirm that there are no availability problems. - -## To set up item tracking codes -An item tracking code reflects the different considerations a company has regarding the use of serial and lot numbers for items moving through the inventory. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Tracking Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. On the **Serial No.** and the **Lot No.** FastTabs, define policies of item tracking by serial and lot numbers respectively. - -### To set up expiration rules for serial or lot numbers -For some items you might want to set up specific expiration dates and rules in the item tracking code. This functionality allows you to keep track of when specific serial numbers and lot numbers expire. - -1. Select an existing item tracking code, and then choose the **Edit** action. -2. On the **Misc.** FastTab, select the following check boxes. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Strict Expiration Posting**|Specifies that an expiration date assigned to the item tracking number as it entered inventory must be respected when it exits inventory.| - |**Man. Expir. Date Entry Reqd.**|Specifies that you must manually enter an expiration date on the item tracking line.| - -### To set up warranties for serial or lot numbers -For some items, you might want to set up specific warranties in the item tracking code. This functionality allows you to keep track of when the warranties on specific serial or lot numbers in your inventory will run out. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Tracking Codes**, and then choose the related link. - -1. Select an existing item tracking code, and then choose the **Edit** action. -2. On the **Misc.** FastTab, fill in the **Warranty Date Formula** field, and then select the check box as follows. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Warranty Date Formula**|Specifies the last day of warranty for the item.| - |**Man. Warranty Date Entry Reqd.**|Specifies that you must manually enter a warranty date on the item tracking line.| - -## To record serial or lot number information -If you need to link special information to a specific item tracking number, for example, for quality assurance, you can do so in a serial or lot number information card. - -1. Open a document that has serial or lot numbers assigned. -2. Open the **Item Tracking Lines** window for the document. -3. Choose, for example, the **Serial No. Information Card** action. - - The **Serial No.** and **Lot No.** fields are prefilled from the item tracking line. -4. Enter a short piece of information in the **Description** field, for example about the condition of the item. -5. Choose the **Comment** action to create a separate comment record. -6. Select the **Blocked** check box to exclude the serial or lot number from any transactions. - -## To modify existing serial or lot number information -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an item that has an item tracking code and has serial or lot number information. -3. From the **Item Card** window, choose the **Entries** action, and then choose **Ledger Entries**. -4. Choose the **Lot No.** or **Serial No.** field. If information exists for the item tracking number, then the **Lot No. Information List** or **Serial No. Information List** window opens. -5. Select a card, and then choose the **Lot No./Serial No. Information Card** action. -6. Modify the short description text, the comment record, or the **Blocked** field. - -You cannot modify the serial or lot numbers or quantities. To do so, you must reclassify the item ledger entry in question. For more information, see the "To reclassifying lot or serial numbers" section. - -## To assign serial or lot numbers during an inbound transaction -Companies may want to keep track of items from the moment they enter the company. In this situation, the purchase order is often the central document, although item tracking may be handled from any inbound document and its posted entries displayed in the related item ledger entries. - -The exact rules for handling item tracking numbers across your company are governed by the setup in the **Item Tracking Code Card** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> To use item tracking numbers in warehouse activities, the **Lot Warehouse Tracking** and **SN Warehouse Tracking** setup fields must be selected, as they define the special principles in handling serial and lot numbers in warehouse activities. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant document line and on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. - - You can assign serial or lot numbers in the following ways: - - - Automatically, by choosing **Assign Serial No.** or **Assign Lot No.** to assign serial/lot numbers from predefined number series. - - Automatically, by choosing **Create Customized SN** to assign serial/lot numbers based on number series you define specifically for the arrived items. - - Manually, by entering serial or lot numbers directly, for example, the vendor's numbers. - - Manually, by assigning a specific number to each item unit. - -3. To assign automatically, choose the **Create Customized SN** action. -4. In the **Customized SN** field, enter the starting number of a descriptive serial number series, for example **S/N-Vend0001**. -5. In the **Increment** field, enter 1 to define that each sequential number increases by one. - - The **Quantity to Create** field contains the line quantity by default, but you can modify it. - -6. Select the **Create New Lot No.** check box to organize the new serial numbers in a distinct lot. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -A lot number with individual serial numbers is created according to the item quantity of the document line, starting from **S/N-Vend0001**. - -The matrix of quantity fields in the header displays dynamically the quantities and sums of the item tracking numbers you define in the window. The quantities must correspond to those of the document line, which is signified by 0 in the **Undefined** fields. - -When the document is posted, the item tracking entries are carried to the associated item ledger entries. - -## To assign a serial or lot number during an outbound transaction -There are two ways to add serial and lot numbers to outbound transactions: - -- Selecting from existing serial or lot numbers. This applies when item tracking numbers have already been assigned during an inbound transaction. For more information, see the "To select from existing serial numbers and lot numbers" section. -- Assigning new serial or lot numbers during outbound transactions. This applies when item tracking numbers are not assigned to items until they are sold and ready to be shipped. - -The different rules for item tracking numbers are set up in the **Item Tracking Code Card** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> To assign item tracking numbers in warehouse activities, the **SN Warehouse Tracking** and **Lot Warehouse Tracking** check boxes must be selected on the item’s item tracking code card. - -1. Select the relevant document and, on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Order** action, and then choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. - - You can assign item tracking numbers in the following ways: - - Automatically, from predefined number series: Choose the **Assign Serial No.** or **Assign Lot No.** action. - - Automatically, based on parameters you define specifically for the outbound item: Choose the **Create Customized SN** action. - - Manually, by entering serial or lot numbers, without using a number series. - -2. For this procedure, assign a serial number automatically by choosing **Assign Serial No.** - - The **Quantity to Create** field contains the line quantity by default, but you can modify it. -3. Select the **Create New Lot No.** field to organize the new serial numbers in a distinct lot. -4. Choose the **OK** button to create a lot number and new individual serial numbers according to the quantity to handle on the related document line. - -The matrix of quantity fields at the top displays dynamically the quantities and sums of the item tracking numbers that you define in the window. The quantities must correspond to those of the document line, which is signified by **0** in the **Undefined** fields. - -When the document is posted, the item tracking entries are carried to the associated item ledger entries. - -## To select from existing serial or lot numbers -When you are working with items that require item tracking and you are creating outbound transactions, where the items go out of inventory, you typically need to select the lot or serial numbers from those that already exist in inventory. - - The exact rules for handling item tracking numbers across your company are governed by the setup of the **Item Tracking Code** table. - -> [!NOTE] -> To handle item tracking numbers in warehouse activities, the item must be set up with SN/Lot Warehouse Tracking, as this dictates the special principles governing serial and lot numbers in the warehouse. - -1. From any outbound document, select the line that you want to select serial or lot numbers for. -2. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Actions** action, choose the **Line** or the **Item** action, and then choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -3. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, you have three options for specifying lot or serial number: - - - Select the **Lot No.** or **Serial No.** field, and then select a number from the **Item Tracking Summary** window. - - Choose the **Select Entries** action. The **Select Entries** window shows all lot or serial numbers along with availability information. - -4. In the **Selected Quantity** field, enter the quantity of each lot or serial number that you would like to use. -5. Choose the **OK** button, and the selected item tracking information is transferred to the **Item Tracking Lines** window. -6. Type or scan in the item tracking number. - -The matrix of quantity fields in the header dynamically displays the quantities and sums of the item tracking numbers you define in the window. The quantities must correspond to those of the document line, which is signified by **0** in the **Undefined** fields. - - When you post the document line, the item tracking information is transferred to the associated item ledger entries. - -## To handle serial and lot numbers on transfer orders -Procedures for handling serial and lot numbers that are being transferred between different locations are similar to those applied when items are sold and purchased. - -However, the transfer order is unique in that shipment and receipt are both done from the same transfer line and, therefore, use the same instance of the **Item Tracking Lines** window. This means that item tracking numbers shipped from one location must be received unchanged at the other location. - - The exact rules for handling item tracking numbers across your company are governed by the setup of the **Item Tracking Code** table. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Transfer Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the transfer order you want to process. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose choose the **Line** action, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action, and then choose the **Shipment** action. -3. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, assign or select serial or lot numbers as for any other outbound item transaction. - - When handling serial and lot numbers for transfer items, the items typically have numbers already assigned to them. Therefore, the process typically consists of selecting from existing serial or lot numbers. - -4. Post the transfer order, first ship and then receive, to record that the items are transferred carrying their item tracking entries. - -During the transfer, the **Item Tracking Lines** window remains locked for writing. - -## To handle serial and lot numbers when getting receipt lines from a purchase invoice -When you use functionality to get posted receipt or shipment lines from related invoices or credit memos, then any item tracking lines on the warehouse documents are transferred automatically, however, they are processed in a special way. - -The functionality supports the following inbound processes: -- **Get Receipt Lines** - from a purchase invoice. -- **Get Return Shipment Lines** - from a purchase credit memo. - -The functionality supports the following outbound processes: -- **Get Shipment Lines** - from a sales invoice or combined shipments. -- **Get Return Receipt Lines** - from a sales credit memo. - -In these situations, the existing item tracking lines are copied automatically to the invoice or credit memo, but the **Item Tracking Lines** window does not permit changes to the serial or lot numbers. Only the quantities can be changed. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a purchase invoice for items that are purchase with serial or lot numbers. -3. From a purchase invoice line, on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Get Receipt Lines** action. -4. In the **Get Receipt Lines** window, select a receipt lines that has item tracking lines, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The source document is copied to the purchase invoice as a new line, and its item tracking lines are copied to the underlying **Item Tracking Lines** window. - -5. In the purchase invoice, select the transferred receipt line. -6. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action to see the transferred item tracking lines. - -The contents of the **Serial No.** and **Lot No.** fields are not editable. However, you can delete complete lines or change the quantities to match changes being made on the source line. - -## To reclassify serial or lot numbers -Reclassifying item tracking for an item means changing a lot or serial number to a new lot or serial number or changing the expiration date to a new expiration date. If you are working with lots, you can also merge multiple lots into one. You perform these tasks using the item reclassification journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclass. Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the line with the relevant information. For more information, see [How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory](inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md). -3. Choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -4. In the **Serial No.** or **Lot No.** field, select the current serial or lot number. -5. If you want to enter a new item tracking number, enter it in the **New Serial No.** or **New Lot No.** field. If you want, you can merge one or more lots to one new or existing lot. - - > [!NOTE] - > Be aware that when you reclassify expiration dates, then the items with the earliest expiration dates for outbound transactions are suggested first. For more information, see [Picking by FEFO](warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md). - -5. If you would like to enter a new expiration date for the serial or lot number, enter it in the **New Expiration Date** field. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > If you are reclassifying a lot to the same lot number but with a different expiration date, you must reclassify the entire lot, using one item reclassification journal line. If you are reclassifying more than one lot to one new lot number, meaning that you are merging more than one lot into one new lot, you must enter the same new expiration date for all the lots. If you are reclassifying one existing lot to a second existing lot that has a different expiration date, you must use the expiration date from the second lot. If you leave the **New Expiration Date** field blank, the lot or serial number will be reclassified with a blank expiration date. - -6. If you have existing information on the old serial or lot number, you can copy it to the new serial or lot number. - - 1. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, choose the **New Serial No. Information** action or the **New Lot No. Information** action. - 2. To copy information from the old lot or serial number, choose the **Copy Info** action. - 3. In the information list window, select the lot or serial number that you would like to copy from, and choose the **OK** button. - -7. If you want to modify the existing information for the lot or serial number, you can record lot or serial information. -8. Post the journal to link the renewed item tracking numbers or expiration dates to the associated item ledger entry - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Trace Item-Tracked Items](inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Design Details: Item Tracking](design-details-item-tracking.md) -[Design Details - Item Tracking and Reservations](design-details-item-tracking-and-reservations.md) -[How to: Reserve Items](inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5c56155a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create and Manage Nonstock Items -description: Describes how to trade non-inventoriable items or items that are not maintained in your inventory. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: non-inventoriable -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Nonstock Items -You can offer certain items to your customers for their convenience, which you do not want to maintain in inventory until you start selling them. When you want to start maintaining such items in inventory, you can convert them to normal item cards in two ways. - -* From a nonstock item card, create a new item card based on a template. -* From a sales order line of type **Item** with an empty **No* field, select a nonstock item. An item card is automatically created for the nonstock item. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot select a nonstock item from the **Sales Invoice** window. You can select a nonstock item from the **Sales Quote** window, but the nonstock item will not be converted to a normal item when you use the **Make Order** function. - -A nonstock item typically has the item number of the vendor who supplies it. To enable conversion of a nonstock item card to a normal item card, you must first set up how vendor item numbering is converted to your own item numbering. - -## To create a nonstock item -Nonstock item cards have much less information than normal item cards because you only use them to offer on quotes and in other ways. For that reason, they must be converted to normal item cards before you can post sales transactions for them. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Nonstock Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set up how nonstock item numbers are converted to your own numbering -To enable conversion of a nonstock item card to a normal item card, you must first set up how the vendor's item numbering is converted to your own item number format. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Nonstock Item Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To convert a nonstock item to a normal item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Nonstock Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for a nonstock item that you want to convert to a normal item. -3. In the **Nonstock Item Card** window, choose the **Create Item** action. - -A new item card prefilled with information from the nonstock item and a relevant item template is created. You can then fill or edit fields on the new item card as necessary. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -## To sell a nonstock item, and convert it to a normal item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. Fill in the fields on the **General** FastTab as for any sales order. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -3. On a new sales line, in the **Type** field, select **Item**, but leave the **No.** field empty. -4. Choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Select Nonstock Items** action. - - The nonstock item is converted to a normal item. A new item card prefilled with information from the nonstock item and a relevant item template is created. -5. In the **Nonstock Items** window, select the nonstock item that you want to sell, and then choose the **OK** button. -6. When the sales order is complete, choose the **Post** action. - -You can then fill or edit fields on the new item card as necessary. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> An Item cross reference record is automatically created for the vendor of the item between the vendor's item number and your new item number. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) -[How to: Create Special Orders](sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md)| -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-manage-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-manage-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4425b5dd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-manage-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Managing Inventory -description: Describes how to manage the physical products that you trade in, for example, handling the stock in your warehouse. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: warehouse, stock -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont ---- - -# Managing Inventory -For each physical product that you trade in, you must create an item card of type **Inventory**. Items that you offer to customers but do not keep in inventory you can register as nonstock items, which you can convert to inventory items when necessary. You can increase or decrease the quantity of an item in inventory by posting directly to the item ledger entries, for example, after a physical count or if you do not record purchases. - -Inventory increases and decreases are naturally also recorded when you post purchase and sales documents respectively. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md), [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md), and [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md). Transfers between locations changes inventory quantities across your company's warehouses. - -To increase your overview of items and to help you find them, you can categorize items and give them attributes to search and sort by. - -> [!NOTE] -> The physical handling of items is referred to as warehouse activities. For more information, see [Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md). - -## Inventory Reconciliation -When you post inventory transactions, such as sales shipments, purchase invoices, or inventory adjustments, the changed item costs are recorded in item value entries. To reflect this change of inventory value in your financial books, the inventory costs are automatically posted to the related inventory accounts in the general ledger. For each inventory transaction that you post, the appropriate values are posted to the inventory account, adjustment account, and COGS account in the general ledger. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Inventory Costs with the General Ledger](finance-how-to-post-inventory-costs-to-the-general-ledger.md). - -Even though inventory costs are automatically posted to the general ledger, it is still necessary to ensure that the costs of goods are forwarded to the related outbound sales transaction, especially in situations where you sell goods before you invoice the purchase of those goods. This is referred to as cost adjustment. Item costs are automatically adjusted when you post item transactions, but you can also adjust item costs manually. For more information, see [How to: Adjust Item Costs](inventory-how-adjust-item-costs.md). - -|To |See | -|---|----| -|Create item cards for inventory items that you trade in.|[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md)| -|Structure parent items that you sell as kits consisting of the parent's components or that you assemble to order or to stock.|[How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md)| -|Maintain an overview of items and help you find and sort items by organizing them in categories.|[How to: Categorize Items](inventory-how-categorize-items.md)| -|Assign item attributes of different value types to your items to help you sort and find items.|[How to: Work with Item Attributes](inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md)| -|Create special item cards for items that you offer to customers but do not maintain inventory for.|[How to: Work with Nonstock Items](inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md)| -|Perform physical counting, make negative or positive adjustments, and change information, such as location or lot number, on item ledger entries.|[How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory Inventory](inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md)| -|View the availability of items per location, by period, by sales or purchase event, or by their use on assembly or production BOMs.|[How to: How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md)| -|Transfer inventory items between locations with transfer orders, to manage warehouse activities, or with the item reclassification journal.|[How to: Transfer Inventory Between Locations](inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md)| -|Reserve inventory or inbound items for sales orders, purchase orders, service orders, assembly orders, or production orders.|[How to: Reserve Items](inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md)| -|Assign serial numbers or lot numbers to any outbound or inbound document or journal line, for example to track items in case of recalls.|[How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md)| -|Find where any serial or lot number was used in its supply chain, for example in recall situations.|[How to: Trace Item-Tracked Items](inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md)| -|Manage business operations in sales offices, a purchasing departments, or plant planning offices across multiple locations.|[How to: Work with Responsibility Centers](inventory-responsibility-centers.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-responsibility-centers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-responsibility-centers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 82dea71b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-responsibility-centers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Work with Responsibility Centers - description: Responsibility centers providing the ability to handle administrative centers. A responsibility center can be a cost center, a profit center, an investment center, or other company-defined administrative center. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Responsibility Centers -Responsibility centers provide the ability to handle administrative centers. A responsibility center can be a cost center, a profit center, an investment center, or other company-defined administrative center. Examples of responsibility centers are a sales office, a purchasing department for several locations, and a plant planning office. Using this functionality, for example, companies can set up user-specific views of sales and purchase documents related exclusively to a particular responsibility center. - -Using multiple locations together with responsibility centers provides the ability to manage business operations in the most flexible, yet optimal way. - -Multiple locations allows companies to manage their inventory in multiple locations using one database. Two concepts, locations and stockkeeping units, are the cornerstones of this granule. A location is defined as a place that handles physical placement and quantities of items. The concept is broad enough to include locations such as plants or production facilities as well as distribution centers, warehouses, showrooms and service vehicles. A stockkeeping unit is defined as an item at a specific location and/or as a variant. Using stockkeeping units, companies with multiple locations are able to add replenishment information, addresses, and some financial posting information at the location level. As a result, they have the ability to replenish variants of the same item for each location as well as to order items for each location on the basis of location-specific replenishment information. - -Responsibility centers extends the multiple locations functionality by providing users the ability to handle administrative centers. A responsibility center can be a cost center, a profit center, an investment center, or other company-defined administrative center. Examples of responsibility centers are a sales office, a purchasing department for several locations, and a plant planning office. Using this functionality, for example, companies can set up user-specific views of sales and purchase documents related exclusively to a particular responsibility center. - -## To set up a responsibility center -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Responsibility Centers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - If you are using responsibility centers to administer your company, it can be useful to have a default responsibility center for your company. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Company Information**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **Responsibility Center** field, enter a responsibility center code. - -This code will be used on all purchase, sales, or service documents, if the user, customer, or vendor has no default responsibility center. On any sales, purchase, or service document, you can enter another responsibility center than the default. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you enter a responsibility center code on a document, it affects the address, dimensions, and prices on the document. - -## To assign responsibility centers to users -You can set up users so that in their daily routines the program retrieves only the documents relevant for their particular work areas. Users are usually associated with one responsibility center and work only with documents related to specific application areas at that particular center. - -To set this up, you assign responsibility centers to users in three functional areas: Purchases, Sales, and Service Management. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **User Setup** window, select the user you want to assign a responsibility center to. If the user not is on the list, you must enter a user ID in the **User ID** field. -3. In the **Sales Resp. Ctr. Filter** field, enter the responsibility center where the user will have tasks related to sales. -4. In the **Purchase Resp. Ctr. Filter** field, enter the responsibility center where the user will have tasks related to purchasing. -5. In the **Service Resp. Ctr. Filter** field, enter the responsibility center where the user will have tasks related to service management. - -> [!NOTE] -> Users will still be able to view all posted documents and ledger entries, not just those related to their own responsibility center. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](inventory-setup-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md)[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-setup-inventory.md b/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-setup-inventory.md deleted file mode 100644 index d4f2f0fe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/inventory-setup-inventory.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Inventory -description: Describes how to set up your stock and inventory processes, including transfer routes and locations, such as warehouses. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: warehouse, stock -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Inventory -Before you can manage warehouse activities and inventory costing, you must configure the rules and values that define the company's inventory policies. - -You can provide better customer service and optimize your supply chain by organizing your inventory at different addresses. You can then buy, store, or sell items at different locations and transfer inventory between them. - -When you have set up your inventory, you can manage various processes related to item transactions. For more information, see [Manage Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) and [Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md). - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Define the general inventory setup, such as number series and how to use locations. |[How to: Set Up General Inventory Information](inventory-how-setup-general.md) | -|Configure an efficient distribution model with a combination of different locations and responsibility centers assigned to business partners or employees.|[How to: Work with Responsibility Centers](inventory-responsibility-centers.md)| -| Organize your inventory at multiple locations, including transfer routes. |[How to: Set Up Locations](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) | -| Create item cards for inventory items that you trade in. |[How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md) | -|As a supplement to item cards, record information about your items in a specific location or of a specific variant.|[How to: Set Up Stockkeeping Units](inventory-how-to-set-up-stockkeeping-units.md)| -| Assign items to categories and give them attributes to help you and customers find items. |[How to: Categorize Items](inventory-how-categorize-items.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Managing Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Managing Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client.md b/dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5b687c7c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Keyboard Shortcuts in the Dynamics NAV Windows Clients - description: Describes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use to move through the user interface. - author: jswymer - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: accessibility, shortcuts, keyboarding - ms.date: 12/04/2019 - ms.author: jswymer ---- - -# Keyboard Shortcuts - -The following table provides an overview of shortcut key combinations in the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]. - -|Keyboard shortcut|Action| -|-----------------------------------|----------------| -|Right Arrow|Move to the next field or character| -|Left Arrow|Move to the previous field or character| -|Up Arrow|Move to the field above in the same column| -|Down Arrow|Move to the field below in the same column| -|Delete|Clear selected text| -|Esc|Close the window or undo the data entry| -|End|Move to the last field on a line| -|Home|Move to the first field on a line| -|Tab|Move to the next field on non-line FastTabs| -|Enter|Move to the next editable field| -|F1|Open Help| -|F2|Edit| -|F3|Select **Type** to filter (field filter)| -|F4|Drop-down or look up to select| -|F5|Refresh the active window| -|F6|Go to the next frame| -|F7|Display statistics| -|F8|Copy the field above| -|F9|Post| -|F10, Alt|Select the menu bar and display access keys| -|F12|Select the navigation pane| -|Shift+F1|View error message| -|Shift+F3|Select **Show Results** (FlowFilter)| -|Shift+F4|Open a lookup window (from an ellipsis button)| -|Shift+F6|Go to the previous frame| -|Shift+F7|Open the related card| -|Shift+F8|Drop-down or look up to view| -|Shift+F9|Post and print| -|Shift+F10|Display a shortcut menu| -|Shift+F11|Apply entries, get source documents, or get warehouse documents| -|Shift+F12|Open the Role Center from the navigation pane| -|Shift+Tab|Move to the previous field| -|Shift+left-click|On multiple column headers, the columns will all be sorted in the same ascending or descending direction.| -|Shift+double-click|If sorting on multiple column headers using Shift+left-click, use Shift+double-click on the first column that was clicked on and this will toggle ascending/descending direction of all the columns included in the sorting.| -|Left-click|Left-click on a column header to sort a column ascending, then left-click again to toggle between ascending and descending.| -|Ctrl+F1|Collapse or expand the ribbon| -|Ctrl+F2|Create a new document| -|Ctrl+F3|Select Search pages| -|Ctrl+F4|Look up to the related list| -|Ctrl+F7|View entries| -|Ctrl+F9|Release document| -|Ctrl+F10|Select the ribbon and display key tips| -|Ctrl+F11|Reconcile or split lines| -|Ctrl+F12|Select the address bar| -|Ctrl+C|Copy| -|Ctrl+G|Go to| -|Ctrl+E|Export to Microsoft Office Excel| -|Ctrl+L|Show links| -|Ctrl+N|Create a new record| -|Ctrl+O|Open the company| -|Ctrl+P|Print| -|Ctrl+T|Select sorting| -|Ctrl+V|Paste| -|Ctrl+W|Export to Microsoft Office Word| -|Ctrl+X|Cut| -|Ctrl+Z|Undo| -|Ctrl+Page Down|Display next document or card in a list| -|Ctrl+Page Up|Display previous document or card in a list| -|Ctrl+Up Arrow|Move up while the selected line stays selected| -|Ctrl+Down Arrow|Move down while the selected line stays selected| -|Ctrl+Left Arrow|Move to the first field on a line| -|Ctrl+Right Arrow|Move to the last field on a line| -|Ctrl+Alt+F1|Open the **About this Page/Report** window (Zoom)| -|Ctrl+Delete|Delete the selected line| -|Ctrl+Home|Move to the first line in a list| -|Ctrl+End|Move to the last line in a list| -|Ctrl+Enter|Save and close window (equivalent to choosing the OK button)| -|Ctrl+Insert|Insert new line| -|Ctrl+Shift+F3|Select **Limit totals to** (table filter)| -|Ctrl+Shift+A|Clear all filters| -|Ctrl+Shift+C|Copy Rows| -|Ctrl+Shift+D|Show dimensions| -|Ctrl+Shift+E|Edit list| -|Ctrl+Shift+R|View list| -|Ctrl+Shift+Q|Collapse/expand a line in a hierarchy| -|Ctrl+Shift+V|Paste rows| -|Ctrl+Shift+W|Open a list place in a separate window| -|Ctrl+Shift+Enter|Save and close the window and open a new window| -|Alt|Display access keys in the ribbon| -|Alt+F2|Toggle to display/hide FactBoxes| -|Alt+F3|Filter to the value in the field| -|Alt+F4|Close window or close program| -|Alt+F6|Collapse or expand the active frame| -|Alt+F12|Optimize space for the current page| -|Alt+Left Arrow|Go to the previous window in the navigation history| -|Alt+Right Arrow|Go to the next window in the navigation history| -|Alt+Enter|Move to the field below without opening the drop-down menu| -|Alt+Tab|Toggle between open windows| - -## See Also - -[Assistive Features](ui-accessibility.md) -[Keyboard Shortcuts in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]](keyboard-shortcuts.md) -[Keyboard Shortcuts in the AL](/dynamics-nav/developer/devenv-keyboard-shortcuts) -[Keyboard Shortcuts in the Development Environment](/dynamics-nav/Keyboard-Shortcuts-in-the-Development-Environment) -[Working with Product](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0397008b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/keyboard-shortcuts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Keyboard Shortcuts" -description: "List of keyboard shortcuts for navigating in lists." -author: jswymer -ms.prod: dynamics-nav-2018 -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accessibility, shortcuts, keyboarding -ms.date: 07/12/2017 -ms.author: jswymer ---- - -# Keyboard Shortcuts in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)] -This article provides an overview of some of the shortcut key combinations that you can use when you are working in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]. - -## General Keyboard Shortcuts -The following table describes keyboard shortcuts for navigating and accessing different elements of a page, such as actions, drop-down lists, lookups, and more. For details about keyboard shortcuts for navigating records once you get inside a list, see the next section. - -|Press these keys|To do this| -|----------------|-----------| -|Tab|Move focus to the next control or element on a page, such as actions, buttons, fields, or list headings.| -|Shift+Tab|Move focus to the previous control or element on a page, such as buttons, fields, or list headings.| -|Enter|Enable or access the element or control that is in focus.| -|Alt+Down Arrow|Open a drop-down list or look up a value for a field.| -|Alt+Right Arrow|See the transactions that resulted in a calculated value in a field.| - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Assistive Features](ui-accessibility.md) -[Keyboard Shortcuts in the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]](keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client.md) -[Keyboard Shortcuts in the AL](/dynamics-nav/developer/devenv-keyboard-shortcuts) -[Keyboard Shortcuts in the Development Environment](/dynamics-nav/Keyboard-Shortcuts-in-the-Development-Environment) -[Working with Product](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-business-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-business-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index e87bc214..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-business-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Business Functionality Supported by Dynamics NAV -Description: Provides a feature overview of all the business functions and departments that are supported by application areas, such as Finance, Inventory, and Project Management. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: feature overview -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Business Functionality -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides functionality for common business processes in small and mid-sized companies, mainly within wholesale and professional services. However, more complex processes, such as assembly, manufacturing, service, and directed warehouse management are also supported. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes standard configurations for most business processes, but you can change the configuration to suit your business' needs. From your Home page, you can access assisted setup guides that help you configure certain scenarios and add features to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Several areas of business functionality must be set up manually. For more information, see [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -|Make and collect payments, manage your cash flow, defer income and revenue, prepare year-end closing, and manage fixed assets.|[Finance](finance.md)| -|Get insight to the performance of your business activities through budgets, account schedules, and analysis views.|[Business Intelligence](bi.md)| -|Manage sales processes and information, such as quotes, orders, returns, and customer accounts, and make drop shipments.|[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md)| -|Manage purchasing processes and information, such as invoices, orders, returns, and vendor accounts, and purchase items from sales documents. |[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md)| -|Register new inventory or service-type items, categorize items for easy searching, adjust inventory levels, and perform common inventory costing tasks.|[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md)| -|Create jobs and schedule resources for project, manage job budgets, monitor progress, and track machine and employee hours.|[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md)| -|Organize your fixed assets, ensure correct periodic depreciation, and keep track of maintenance costs.|[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md)| -|Manage and support your sales efforts and focus your interactions on preferred customers and contacts.|[Relationship Management](marketing-relationship-management.md)| -|Keep detailed records of your employees, and register absence for analysis purposes. |[Human Resources](hr-manage-human-resources.md)| -|Plan the production operations that are required to transform inputs into finished goods.|[Planning](production-planning.md)| -|Put sellable items together in simple steps to make a new item, such as a kit.|[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md)| -|Define shop floor resources and their capacity, schedule operations, pull production components, and execute production operations.|[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md)| -|Ensure an effective flow of goods that are received and shipped.|[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md)| -|Schedule service calls and set up service orders, and track repair parts and supplies.|[Service Management](service-service.md)| -|Set up and use workflows that connect tasks performed by different users or by the system, such as automatic posting. Requesting and granting approval to create or post documents are typical workflow steps.|[Workflow](across-workflow.md)| -|Enable users to exchange data with external sources during daily tasks, such as sending/receiving electronic documents, importing/exporting bank files, and updating currency exchange rates.|[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md)| -|Record external documents in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], including their file attachments, and then manually create the related documents or automatically convert the files to electronic documents.|[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md)| - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-cancel.md b/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-cancel.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0a579209..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-cancel.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Cancelling Dynamics NAV -description: Describes how to remove or delete your Dynamics NAV experience. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: remove, delete -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Unsubscribe, Remove, or Reset [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -When you have signed up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can choose to cancel your subscription at any time. Similarly, you can choose to reset the company that you can been using in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For a quick overview, see [the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] blog](https://community.dynamics.com/business/b/financials/archive/2016/11/28/how-long-is-the-trial-period-and-how-do-i-cancel). - -## Unsubscribing by removing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from your Microsoft 365 experience -If you have subscribed for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] using an existing Microsoft 365 business account, you must ask your Microsoft 365 administrator to remove the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] license from your user account. -User accounts and licenses are managed in the [Office Portal](https://portal.office.com). Only administrators can remove [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] licenses from user accounts. The Microsoft 365 administrator can remove [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from your user account or remove the subscription from your company's account. If [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is removed from your user account, and other people from your company continue the subscription, they will still have access to your shared data in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company. - -## Unsubscribing from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] without Microsoft 365 -If you signed up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] using a non-Microsoft 365 business account, you do not have a Microsoft 365 administrator. Instead, you must unsubscribe by contacting the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Cancelation team. Currently, you must contact the team by sending an email message at cancel-madeira@microsoft.com. You must include the name of your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] tenant in the message so that we can identify you. The easiest way to do that is to copy the URL from your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Home page. - -## Resetting your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] experience -If you have added data to your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] preview and you want to start over with a fresh experience, you can create a new company and then reset the first company. If you open the **Companies** page, you can create a copy of your current company, sign out and then sign into your new company, and then reset the original company. -> [!NOTE] -> When you reset a company that you are sharing with other people from your organization, you must make sure other people are not logged in when you reset the company. - -## Removing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from your app launcher -If you want to hide [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from your app launcher, you can quite simply unpin it. This does not remove any data, and it does not cancel your subscription. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Office Portal](https://portal.office.com) -[How long is the trial period and how do I cancel?](https://community.dynamics.com/business/b/financials/archive/2016/11/28/how-long-is-the-trial-period-and-how-do-i-cancel) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-how-setup-email.md b/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-how-setup-email.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4f351a0d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-how-setup-email.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting up Email -description: Describes how to use the company's SMTP server to send and receive email messages within Dynamics NAV, or alternatively how to use the email server settings created with the Microsoft 365 subscription. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365 -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Email Manually or Using the Assisted Setup -To send and receive emails from within [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must fill in the fields in the **SMTP Mail Setup** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> Instead of entering the SMTP server details, you can use a function to enter them with information from your Microsoft 365 subscription. - -You can either set email up manually or you can get help by using the **Email Setup** assisted setup. For more information, see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md). - -## To set up email -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **SMTP Email Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Alternatively, choose the **Apply Microsoft 365 Server Settings** action to insert any information that is already defined for your Microsoft 365 subscription. -4. When all the fields are correctly filled in, choose the **Test Email Setup** action. -5. When the test succeeds, close the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as Your Business Inbox in Outlook](across-outlook.md) -[Getting [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] on My Mobile Device](install-mobile-app.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-no-outlook.md b/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-no-outlook.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0bc16326..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-no-outlook.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using Dynamics NAV without Outlook -description: You can use Dynamics NAV as your business inbox in Outlook because it is integrated with Microsoft 365, however, you can also work without Outlook in a browser or on your mobile device. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365 -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Using Dynamics NAV without Outlook -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] has deep integration with Microsoft 365, and you can use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as your business inbox in Outlook. But if you do not have Outlook, you can work with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] in the browser or on your mobile device. - -## Sending Email -You can send documents such as invoices as email using your business email address. From your Home page, you can access an assisted setup guide that helps you set up email. If you do not use a Microsoft 365 email account, you must specify technical information about your mail server. If you do not have this information available, please contact your IT support staff. - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to Dynamics NAV](index.md) -[Using Dynamics NAV as your Business Inbox in Outlook](across-outlook.md) -[Getting Dynamics NAV on my Mobile Device](install-mobile-app.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-powerbi.md b/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-powerbi.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4361af6f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-powerbi.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics NAV and Power BI Content Packs -description: Getting insight, business intelligence, and KPIs from your Dynamics NAV data is easy with Power BI and the Dynamics NAV content packs. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: account schedule, analysis, reporting, financial report, business intelligence, KPI -ms.date: 09/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Enabling Your Business Data for Power BI -Getting insights into your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data is easy with Power BI and the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] content packs. Power BI retrieves your data and then builds an out-of-the-box dashboard and reports based on that data. - -Microsoft has published the following content packs: - -| App | Description | -| --- | --- | -| Microsoft Dynamics NAV | Provides a dashboard with key financial data over time, such as earnings versus expenses, operating margin, and cash cycle.| -| Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Sales | Provides a dashboard with key data about sales opportunities and contacts. | -| Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Sales | Provides a dashboard with key data about sales and inventory. | - -## Using the Dashboards -Each content pack provides reports that you can drill into: - -* Choose any visual on the dashboard to bring up one of the underlying reports. -* Filter the report or add fields that you want to monitor. -* Pin this customized view to the dashboard to continue tracking. - You can refresh data manually, and you can set up a refresh schedule. For more information, see [Configuring scheduled refresh](https://powerbi.microsoft.com/en-us/documentation/powerbi-refresh-scheduled-refresh/). - -The content packs are preconfigured to work with data from the demonstration company that you get when you sign up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. When you install the apps in Power BI, and you connect to your own data, some reports may not work because they rely on data that your company does not have. In those cases, you can simply remove that report from your dashboard. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also build your own reports and dashboards in Power BI based on your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data. For more information, see [Connecting Your Business Data to Power BI](across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md). - -## Accessing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] in Power BI -To see your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data in Power BI, you must have the following: - -* Access to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [Dynamics NAV](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=759714). -* Access to Power BI. For more information, see [Power BI](https://powerbi.microsoft.com). - -On the Power BI site, you can find additional information about [connecting to services with content packs for Power BI](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=760850). - -To access your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data in Power BI, on the connection page, you must specify the following information: - - -| Field | Description | -|---------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| **OData Feed URL** | The OData URL so Power BI can access data from your company, such as `https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/Company('My%2Business>')`. | -| **Authentication method** | Choose **Basic**. | -| **User name** | Your name as it displays for your account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as *John Smith*. | -| **Password** | This is the web service access key for your user account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. | - -This means that you must get 2 pieces of information from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]: The *OData URL* and the *web service access key* for your user account. - -### Getting the URL -When you add [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to Power BI, you must specify a URL so Power BI can access data from your company. On the connection page, the URL is referred to as the **OData Feed URL**, and it must have the following format: -```markdown -https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/Company('CRONUS%20US') -``` -In this example, *mybusiness* is the name of your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] service, and *CRONUS US* is the name of the demonstration company with *%20* representing the space in the name. -To get the URL, in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], search for and open the **Web Services** window. This window lists the web services that are currently available, and you can copy the link from the **OData URL** field for one of the default OData web services. - -### Getting the user name and the web service access key -In order to use data from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] in Power BI, in the **Connect to Dynamics NAV** window, you must specify a user name and a password. The user name is your name as it displays for your account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] so that Power BI can log in to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The password is the web service access key that is set up for your user account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -To find this information, in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], search for the **Users** window, and then open the card for your user account. On the **General** FastTab, copy the content of the **User Name** field, and on the **Web Service Access** FastTab, copy the contents of the **Web Service Access Key** field. If the **Web Service Access Key** field is blank, in the ribbon, choose **Change Web Service Access Key**, choose the **Key Never Expires** field, and then choose the OK button. You can then copy the key. - -## Getting Data from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -The [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] dashboard shows the most typical reports that you will want to use to track your business. The data is extracted from your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company using web services to read live data. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the **Web Services** window lists the web services that have been set up for you. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you change the name of any of these web services, the data will not show up in Power BI. -If you want to add use other data in Power BI, you must find the tables in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], expose them as web services, and then add them to the content pack. This is an advanced scenario, and we recommend that you start with the data that is already available in Power BI. - -## Troubleshooting -The Power BI dashboard relies on the published web services that are listed above, and it will show data from the demonstration company or your own company if you import data from your current finance solution. However, if something goes wrong, this section provides a workaround for the most typical issues. - -**"Parameter validation failed, please make sure all parameters are valid"** -If you see this error after you enter your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] URL, make sure the following requirements are satisfied: - -* The URL follows exactly this pattern: - - `https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/Company('CRONUS%20US')` -* Delete any text after the company name in parenthesis -* Make sure there are no trailing forward slash at the end of the URL. -* Make sure that it is a secure connection as indicated by the URL starting with *https*. - -**"Login failed"** -If you get a "login failed" error when you log in to the dashboard, using your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] credentials, then this can be caused by one of the following issues: - -* The account you are using does not have permissions to read the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] data from your account. - - Verify your user account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and make sure that you have used the right web service access key as the password, and then try again. -* The [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] instance that you are trying to connect to does not have a valid SSL certificate. In this case you'll see a more detailed error message ("unable to establish trusted SSL relationship"). - - > [!NOTE] - > Self-signed certificates are not supported. - -**"Oops"** -If you see an "Oops" error dialog after you pass the authentication dialog, this is most frequently caused by a problem connecting to the data for the content pack. - -* Verify that the URL follows the pattern that was specified earlier: - - `https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/Company('CRONUS%20US')` -* A common mistake is to specify the full URL for a specific web service: - - `https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/Company('CRONUS%20US')/powerbifinance` -* Or you might have forgotten to specify the company name: - - `https://mybusiness.financials.dynamics.com:7048/MS/ODataV4/` - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Migrate Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Using [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] as a Power BI Data Source](across-how-use-financials-data-source-powerbi.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-sell.md b/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-sell.md deleted file mode 100644 index be10f2ea..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/madeira-sell.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Selling Dynamics NAV -description: Find out how you can expand your business opportunities and become a Microsoft partner and Dynamics NAV reseller. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: microsoft partner -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Become a Reseller of [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] -Expand your business opportunity with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]! - -If you specialize in Cloud solutions, Microsoft 365, SharePoint, industry solutions, analytics, ERP, CRM, accounting software, and/or business process optimization software/services, Dynamics NAV is a new opportunity. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can help you differentiate and deepen customer relationships by giving you the capability to deliver an end-to-end business management solution that’s connecting people and processes like never before, embedded within familiar Microsoft Office tools that small and medium businesses use every day. - -## Get started -Sign up for the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Preview at [https://microsoft.com/dynamics365/financials](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/financials). -Send feedback at [https://community.dynamics.com/business](https://community.dynamics.com/business/f/758). -If you're interested in learning more about becoming a [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] reseller, contact us at [d365-smb@microsoft.com](mailto:d365-smb@microsoft.com). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Migrate Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[https://appsource.microsoft.com](https://appsource.microsoft.com/en-us/?product=project-madeira) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-add-contact-segment.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-add-contact-segment.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5b13f1f4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-add-contact-segment.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Define the Contacts in a Segment -description: After you have created a segment, you can add contacts to the segment, for example, as part of a marketing campaign targeting particular customers or clients. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: marketing, campaign, promo, prospect, contact, client, customer -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Add Contacts to Segments -After you have created a segment and entered basic information about it, you may want to add contacts to the segment. You can do this by filling in the lines in the **Segment** window manually, but it is easier and faster to use the **Add Contacts** action. - -## To add a contact to a segment -1. On the Home page, choose **Active Segments**. Or, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Segments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the segment, and then choose the **Add Contacts** action. The **Add Contacts** batch job window opens. -3. In the **Contact** section, set filters to specify the information by which you want to select contacts. - -To enter additional filters, repeat this procedure on each of the remaining sections, and then choose the **OK** button. - -If you have added contacts by mistake and want to go back one step, then choose the **Go Back** action. - -## To refine the number of contacts -After you have selected the contacts within a segment, you may decide to remove some but keep others. You can manually remove contacts from the lines in the **Segment** window, but it is easier and faster to use the **Refine Contacts** action. - -1. Open the segment. -2. Choose **Contacts**, and then choose the **Refine Contacts** action. The **Remove Contacts - Refine** window opens. -3. In the **Contact** section, enter filters to specify the information that you want to use to select the contacts to be removed from the segment. -4. Add additional filters as needed, and then choose the **OK** button. - -You can refine a segment as many times as you want. If you have refined the segment by mistake and want to go one step back, choose the **Go Back**. - -To see a list of the segment criteria that you have used, in the **General** section, choose the **No. of Criteria Actions** field. - -## To reduce the number of contacts -After you have selected the contacts within a segment, you may want to remove some of them. You can do this by manually removing them from the lines in the Segment window, but it is easier and faster to use the Reduce Contacts function to specify which contacts to remove, and to use the Refine Contacts function to specify which contacts to keep. - -1. Open the segment. -2. Choose Contacts, and then choose the **Reduce Contacts** action. The **Remove Contacts - Reduce** window opens. -3. In the **Contact** section, enter filters to specify the information that you want to use to select the contacts to be removed from the segment. -4. Add additional filters as needed, and then choose the **OK** button. - -You can reduce a segment as many times as you want. If you have refined the segment by mistake and want to go one step back, then choose the **Go Back** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create a Segment](marketing-how-create-segment.md) -[Managing Segments](marketing-segments.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-auto-record-interactions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-auto-record-interactions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 01c4e521..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-auto-record-interactions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Automatic Recording of Interactions -description: You can automatically record your customer or client interactions, for example, for sales, purchase and service documents or phone calls. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: marketing, relationship, prospect, contact, client, customer -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Recording Interactions with Contacts Automatically -You can set up the application to automatically record interactions for sales, purchase and service documents, cover sheets, e-mails, phone calls, such as: - -* Print sales or purchase quotes, orders, invoices, credit memos, cover sheets. -* Create sales service orders. -* Post sales service orders. -* Send e-mails to your contacts. -* Call your contacts, if you have a TAPI-compliant telephone and the correct installation. - -To set up the automatic recording of these interactions, you specify interaction templates for these documents and actions by using the **Interaction Template Setup** window. -To open the **Interaction Template Setup** window, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Interaction Template Setup**, and then choose the related link. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Recording Interactions With Contacts](marketing-interactions.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-business-relations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-business-relations.md deleted file mode 100644 index ae9ad878..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-business-relations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Define Business Relation Codes on Contacts -description: Use business relations in Dynamics NAV to help with marketing and to indicate the business relationship you have with your prospects, clients, and customers, for example, a bank or service supplier. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: marketing, prospect, contact, client, customer -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Setting Up Business Relations on Contact Companies -You can use business relations to indicate the business relationship you have with your contacts, for example, a prospect, bank, consultant, service supplier, and so on. - -Using business relations on contacts is a two-step process. First, you define the business relation code. You only have to perform this step one time for each business relation. Once you have a business relation code, you can start to assign the code to contact companies. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you plan to synchronize your contacts with vendors, customers, or bank accounts in other parts of the application, you may want to set up a business relation for them. - -## To define a business relation code -The business relation code defines a category or type of the business relationship, such as BANK or Law. You can have several business relation codes. To define the business relation, you use the **Business Relations** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Business Relations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in a code and description. The code can be a maximum of 11 characters, and can be any combination of numbers and letters. - -## To assign business relations to a contact -You cannot assign business relations to a contact person - only companies. - -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Company** action, and then the **Business Relations** action. - - The **Contact Business Relations** window opens. -3. In the **Business Relation Code** field, select the business relation you want to assign. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many business relations as you want. You can also assign business relations from the contact list by following the same procedure. - -The number of business relations you have assigned to the contact is displayed in the **No. of Business Relations** field in the **Segmentation** section in the **Contact** window. - -After you have assigned business relations to your contacts, you can use this information to select contacts for your segments. For more information, see [How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-campaigns.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-campaigns.md deleted file mode 100644 index f92174fd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-campaigns.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Marketing Campaigns in Dynamics NAV -description: Describes how you can set up and conduct marketing campaigns in Dynamics NAV to help you identify and attract prospects and retain customers. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: marketing, campaign, promo, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont ---- -# Managing Marketing Campaigns -Having a strong marketing plan in place enables you to identify, attract, and retain customers. A marketing plan consists of various campaigns and other interactions in connection with your sales and marketing activities. While planning a campaign, you need to decide which contacts to target, what type of campaign (such as trade show or direct mail), and what salespeople will perform each task. - -Each campaign consists of various activities or tasks. You can combine multiple task, for example tasks that each represent a step, in activities. Activity tasks are related to each other by a date formula. Individual tasks can only be assigned to salespeople. Activities can be assigned to opportunities, salespeople, groups of sales people, and contacts. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Cycle Stages](marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md). - -## Defining individual campaigns -Before you can create a campaign, you must set up *campaign status codes*. Using these codes will help you manage your campaigns by assigning a status to the campaign. As you work through the stages of a campaign, you are able to see what step a campaign is at and what step comes next. You set up campaign status codes in the **Campaign Status** window. - -You can create a campaign card for each campaign that you want to keep track of. You can also view these campaign cards to view general information about your campaigns. -You can delete campaign entries, such as if the entry records an action that has been canceled. Only canceled campaign entries can be deleted. - -### Selecting the target audience -After you have created a campaign, you can start creating segments that specify the target audience of the campaign. For more information, see [Managing Segments](marketing-segments.md). - -### Registering discount percentages -When you have set up your campaign, decided what segments you want the campaign to cover, and set the starting and ending dates, you register the discount percentage that the customer will receive on the individual items on the lines in the **Sales Line Discounts** window. You can also register the sales prices for the individual items on the lines in the **Sales Prices** window. You can access both windows from the campaign card. - - When you have set up the sales prices/line discounts and the segments on the campaign card, you must activate them so that the campaign prices/discounts will be reflected on the lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> In order to activate the sales prices/line discounts, you must specify if the whole segment or only some contacts are targets of the campaign. If the sales prices/line discounts covers all the contacts in the segment, select the **Campaign Target** field on the **Campaign** FastTab of the **Segment** card. - -If the sales prices/line discounts are not to be offered to all the contacts in the segment, you can clear the **Campaign Target** field for the relevant contacts. If you cannot see this field, you can add it to your view. For more information, see [Personalization in the Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) or [Personalization in the Windows Client](ui-personalization-windows-client.md). - -## Conducting campaigns -As a campaign runs, all interactions with your contacts, or segment, are recorded so that you can get statistics and other information about the costs and success rates of the campaign. - -Campaigns are conducted by salespeople, and you must create activities to represent each task and assign them to the relevant salespeople. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Cycle Stages](marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Managing Segments](marketing-segments.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-contacts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-contacts.md deleted file mode 100644 index dc6f511d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-contacts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create and Manage Company Contacts -description: You set up all external entities that you have a business relationship with (such as prospects, customers, vendors, and consultants) as contacts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Creating and Managing Contacts -Different groups at your company will have business relationships with various companies. For example, a salesperson might regularly meet prospective customers and at the end of the week record the results of these visits. - -All of the external entities that you have business relationships with (for example, customers, prospective customers, vendors, lawyers, and consultants) should be recorded as contacts. Having this data recorded in one central location ensures every group in your company can view and use the information efficiently. Communication with your contacts will be more successful if all details are readily available. For example, a marketing person might like to know what other products a specific customer has purchased before attempting to interest them in a new product. - -You can record information based on a company or a person at that company. You can also create an independent contact person for people who do not work for a particular company, but who work independently or freelance. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up contact management prior to adding contacts. |[Preparing to Set Up Contacts](marketing-setup-contacts.md) | -| Create a contact card for each new company that you interact with, such as a customer or vendor. |[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) | -| Create a contact card for each contact person who works for the companies that you interact with. |[Creating Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-companies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-companies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 41852d9e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-companies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics Nav - Create Contact Companies and Assign Relevant Data -description: Outlines the tasks to create contact companies, including assigning relevant data about prospects and defining the business relationships you have with companies. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Creating Contact Companies -Your company regularly meets prospective companies that usually develop into future business relationships. When a new contact is made, this information needs to be recorded so that communication can continue. - -By assigning as much data as possible about a specific company ensures efficient communication. For example, assigning the relevant industry group, ensures that specific companies are included in any relevant communication. - -You can also define the business relationship that you have with a contact. For example, a contact could be a prospect, bank, or contractor. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up a contact for a new company, either from scratch or from a customer, vendor, or bank account. |[How to: Create Contact Companies](marketing-how-create-contact-companies.md) | -| Synchronize information in contacts with common information in customers, vendors, and bank accounts |[Synchronizing Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts](marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md) | -| Describe the business relationship of a company contact. |[Setting Up Business Relations on Contacts Companies](marketing-business-relations.md) | -| Place a contact company in the appropriate industry group, for example, retail. |[How to: Set Up Industry Groups on Contact Companies](marketing-industry-groups.md) | -| Set up the mailing groups that you can use to identify groups of contacts that you want to receive the same information. |[How to: Set Up Mailing Groups on Contact Companies](marketing-mailing-groups.md) | -| Set up an alternate address for a contact. |[How to: Assign Alternative Addresses to a Contact](marketing-how-assign-alternate-address.md) | -| Assign Web sources (search engines and Web sites) to your contacts to indicate where on the Internet you intend to search for information about the contacts. |[How to: Set Up Web Sources on Contacts](marketing-web-sources.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-persons.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-persons.md deleted file mode 100644 index 76bc5ea8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-create-contact-persons.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics Nav - Create Contact Card for a Person -description: Outlines the tasks to create a contact card for a person, for example, a prospect or supplier, helping to define the relationship and tailor communication. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Creating Contact Persons -You create a contact by setting up a contact card for the person. You can create contact persons from existing contact companies, or you can create independent contact persons. - -For example, after meeting with a prospective company, you meet the purchaser. You can create a contact card for this person so communication can be more tailored. - -You may also need some publications about your products translated and after some research decide on a freelance translator. You should record this contact as an independent contact person. - -By recording as many details as possible about a contact person ensures that all groups at your company can find the relevant information. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Provide information about a contact person. |[How to: Create Contact Persons](marketing-how-create-contact-persons.md) | -| Set up an alternate address for a contact. |[How to: Assign Alternative Addresses](marketing-how-assign-alternate-address.md) | -| Describe the business relationship of a company contact. |[How to: Set Up Job Responsibilities on Contacts](marketing-job-responsibilities.md) | -| Describe the organizational level of your contacts. |[How to: Set Up Organizational Levels for Contact Persons](marketing-organizational-levels.md) | -| Assign mailing groups your contacts |[Assigning Mailing Groups to a Contact](marketing-mailing-groups.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Creating and Managing Contacts]() -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternate-address.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternate-address.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5489e25b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternate-address.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Assign a Different Contact Address -description: Describes how to assign an alternate address for your contacts or prospects, where they are sometimes sent information. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Dynamics Nav - How to Set Up and Assign Alternative Addresses for Contacts -You can assign an alternate address where your contacts are sometimes sent mail and information, for example, their summer cottage. You can also assign one or several date ranges to each alternate address you have entered for your contacts to specify when each address is valid. - -## To assign an alternate address -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Alternative Address** action, and then choose **Card**. The **Contact Alt. Address List** window opens. -3. Enter a new alternate address and fill in the fields on the **Contact Alternative Address** window. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many alternate addresses as you want. For each alternate address you may want to specify one or several date ranges. - -You can also assign alternate addresses from the contact list window by following the same procedure. - -## To assign an alternate address date range -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Alternate Address** action, and then choose **Date Range**. The **Contact Alt. Addr. Date Ranges** window opens. -3. Choose **New** action. -4. In the **Contact Alt. Address Code** field, select an alternate address for this contact, and then fill in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many date ranges as you want. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Create Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternative-address.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternative-address.md deleted file mode 100644 index 305ca15f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-assign-alternative-address.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "How to: Set Up Alternative Addresses for Contacts" -description: Describes how to assign an alternate address for your contacts where they are sometimes sent information. -author: jswymer -ms.author: jswymer -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/16/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Dynamics Nav - How to Set Up Alternative Addresses for Contacts -You can assign an alternative address where your contacts are sometimes sent mail and information, for example, their summer cottage. You can also assign one or several date ranges to each alternative address you have entered for your contacts to specify when each address is valid. - -## To assign an alternative address -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Alternative Address** action, and then choose **Card**. The **Contact Alt. Address List** window opens. -3. Enter a new alternative address and fill in the fields on the **Contact Alternative Address** window. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many alternative addresses as you want. For each alternative address you may want to specify one or several date ranges. - -You can also assign alternative addresses from the contact list window by following the same procedure. - -## To assign an alternative address date range -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Alternative Address** action, and then choose **Date Range**. The **Contact Alt. Addr. Date Ranges** window opens. -3. Choose **New** action. -4. In the **Contact Alt. Address Code** field, select an alternative address for this contact, and then fill in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many date ranges as you want. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Create Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-companies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-companies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 07ec4cbc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-companies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics Nav - Create Contacts for New or Prospective Companies -description: Describes how to create a contact for each new company or prospective company you interact with or have a relationship with. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Dynamics Nav - How to Create Contact Companies -You can create a contact for each new company you interact with, for example, a customer, vendor, prospective customer, bank, law firm, consultant, and so on. - -There are two ways to create a contact: -from scratch or from an existing customer, vendor, or bank account. - -Before creating a contact, you may want to check the settings in the **Marketing Setup** window. For more information, see [Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md). - -## Create a company contact from scratch -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contacts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **No. field**, enter a number for the contact. - - Alternatively, if you have set up a number series for contacts in the **Marketing Setup** window, you can press the Enter key to select the next available contact number. -4. Set **Type** to **Company**. -5. Fill in the other fields as required. - -## To create a company contact from a customer, vendor, or bank account -If you have already set up a number of customers, vendors, and bank accounts, you can create contacts on the basis of the existing data. When you create a contact this way, the contact information is synchronized with the customer, vendor, or bank account information. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can create contact companies this way, you must specify a business relation code for customers, vendors, and bank accounts in the **Marketing Setup** window. If you will be creating contacts from a bank accounts, you must also specify numbers series for bank accounts in the **General Ledger Setup** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter one of the following, depending on from where you want to create contacts, and then choose the related link. - * **Create Contacts from Customers** - * **Create Contacts from Vendors** - * **Create Contacts from Bank Accounts** -2. In the batch job window that opens, in the **Customer**, **Vendor**, or **Bank Account** section, set filters if you want to create contacts from specific customers, vendors, or bank accounts. -3. Choose the **OK** button to start creating contacts. - - The next contact numbers in the number series are assigned to the new contacts. The business relation for vendors that is specified in the **Marketing Setup** window is assigned to the newly created contacts. - -> [!TIP] -> You can also create a customer, vendor, or bank account from a contact. For more information, see [Create a Customer, Vendor, or Bank Account From a Contact](marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Synchronizing Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts](marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md) -[Assign Business Relations to a Contact](marketing-business-relations.md#AssignBusRelContact) -[Assign Industry Groups to a Contact](marketing-industry-groups.md#AssignIndustryGroupContact) -[Assign Mailing Groups to a Contact](marketing-mailing-groups.md#AssignMailGroupContact) -[How to: Create Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-persons.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-persons.md deleted file mode 100644 index af516967..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contact-persons.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Dynamics Nav - Create a Contact Card for Persons or Prospects -description: Describes how to create a contact card for each new person or prospect you interact with or have a business relationship with. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Create Contact Persons -You can create a contact card for each contact who works for the companies you interact with. For each contact company you can enter as many contact persons as you want. You can also create contact cards for the persons that you want to record as independent. - -> [!TIP] -> Before creating a contact, you may want to check the **Inheritance** settings in the **Marketing Setup** window. Setting up inheritance enables information about contact companies that is common to contact persons, such as address details, to be automatically copied from the contact company to the contact person each time you create a contact person for a recorded contact company. - -## To create a contact card for a person -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contacts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **No.** field, enter a number for the contact. - - Alternatively, if you have set up a number series for contacts in the **Marketing Setup** window, you can press the Enter key to select the next available contact number. For more information, see [Creating Number Series](ui-create-number-series.md). -4. In the **Type** field, select **Person**. -5. Fill in the other fields on the contact card. - -> [!NOTE] -> The contents of the fields that you have selected in the **Inheritance** section of the **Marketing Setup** window are copied from the company to the persons within that company. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md) -[Assigning Mailing Groups to a Contact](marketing-mailing-groups.md#AssignMailGroupContact) -[How to: Set Up Job Responsibilities on Contacts](marketing-job-responsibilities.md) -[How to: Set Up Organizational Levels for Contact Persons](marketing-organizational-levels.md) -[Synchronizing Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts](marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5633c162..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Customer or VendorFrom a Contact -description: You can record an existing contact as a customer, vendor, or bank account using existing data and specifying a business relationship. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, client, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Create a Customer, Vendor, or Bank Account From a Contact -You may want to record some of your existing contacts as customers, vendors, or bank accounts. Creating a customer, vendor, or bank account from a contact enables you use existing data. When you create a customer, vendor, or bank account this way, it is synchronized with the contact. Synchronization makes information that is common between contacts and customers, vendors, or bank account the same. - -Before you can record contacts this way, you must specify a business relation code for customers, vendors, and bank accounts in the **Marketing Setup** window. If you will be recording contacts as bank accounts, you must also specify numbers series for bank accounts in the **General Ledger Setup** window. - -## To create a contact as a customer, vendor, or bank account -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contacts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the contact you want to create as a customer, vendor, or bank account. -3. Choose the **Create As** action, and then choose either **Customer**, **Vendor**, or **Bank**. -4. Confirm the subsequent message. - -The contact information is transferred from the **Contact** card to the **Bank Account** card, the **Customer** card, or the **Vendor** card. You may want to add specific information to each of the cards, such as invoicing and payment details. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[How to: Create Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) -[Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md) -[Synchronizing Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts](marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md) -[How to: Link Contacts to Existing Customers, Vendors, or Bank Accounts](marketing-how-link-contact.md) -[Assign Business Relations to a Contact](marketing-business-relations.md#AssignBusRelContact) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-interactions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-interactions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2baeaedc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-interactions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Interactions on Contacts and Segments -description: Describes how to create interactions for communication that you have with your contacts and segments in Dynamics NAV, for example, direct mail. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/15/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Create Interactions on Contacts and Segments -You can create interactions to record all the interactions and communications you have with your contacts and segments, for example, direct mail. - -Before you create interactions, you must set up interaction templates. For more information, see [Set Up Interaction Templates](marketing-interactions.md). - -## To create an interaction -1. Open the contact, salesperson, or interaction log entry. -2. Choose the **Create Interaction** action. -3. Fill in the fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you need to perform another task before finishing the interaction, you can choose **Cancel** and then finish the interaction at a later time. This postpones the interaction. - -## To finish and delete postponed interactions -1. Open the contact, salesperson, or interaction log entry. -2. Choose **Postponed Interactions**. -3. Select the interaction you want to finish, and then choose the **Resume** action. - -## To create an interaction on a segment -1. On the Home page, choose **Active Segments**, or choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Segments**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Segment window**, in the **Interaction** section, fill in the fields to specify which interaction you want to assign to the segment. - - After you have assigned an interaction to the segment, you can personalize the interaction for each particular contact within the segment, for example, by selecting another interaction template on the lines in the **Segment** window. -3. To log the segment and interactions, choose the **Log** action. The **Log Segment** window opens. -4. If you want to create a new segment containing the same contacts, select the **Create Follow-up Segment** check box. To create a follow-up segment, you must have specified number series for segments in the **Marketing Setup** window. - -An interaction is recorded for each contact within the segment in the **Interaction Log Entry** table, and the segment is logged. Logged segments can be found in the **Logged Segment** window. - -If you have selected the **Create Follow-up Segment** check box, a new segment is created that contains the same contacts as the segment you have just logged. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Recording Interactions](marketing-interactions.md) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-opportunities.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-opportunities.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0be49b91..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-opportunities.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Sales Opportunities -description: Describes how to create opportunities from a salesperson or a contact in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Create Sales Opportunities -You can create opportunities for the sales opportunities you have on your contacts. All opportunities must be assigned to a salesperson or purchaser and must have a contact. - -You can create opportunities from the **Opportunity List** window. But you typically will create opportunities from the specific contact or salespeople. - -Before you can create opportunities, you must set up opportunity sales cycles. For more information see [How to: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Stages](marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md). - -## To create an opportunity from a salesperson -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Salespeople**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the salesperson from the list for whom you want to create an opportunity. -3. Choose the **Opportunities** action, and then choose **List**. -4. Choose **New**, and then fill in the fields as relevant. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - - -## To create an opportunity from a contact -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contacts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the contact from the list for whom you want to create an opportunity. -3. Do one of the following: - * Choose the **Create Opportunity** action. - * Choose the **Opportunities** action, and then choose **New**. -4. Fill in the relevant fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Creating and Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-segment.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-segment.md deleted file mode 100644 index 194ed4a8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-create-segment.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create Segments -description: Describes how to create a segment for a group of contacts in Dynamics NAV, for example, in order to target several contacts with a direct mail. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Create Segments -You can create segments to select a group of contacts, for example, if you want to create an interaction involving several contacts, such as direct mail. - -## To create a segment -1. On the Home page, choose **Active Segments**. Or, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Segments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **General** section, in the **No.** field, enter a number for the segment. - - Alternatively, if you have set up number series for segments in the **Marketing Setup** window, you can press Enter to select the next available segment number. -4. Fill in the other fields on the header. - -You can now add contacts to the segment. For more information, see [How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Segments](marketing-segments.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-link-contact.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-link-contact.md deleted file mode 100644 index a384956b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-link-contact.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Linking Contacts With Customers and Vendors -description: Describes how to link a contact with a customer, vendor, or bank account from the same company, so that you can synchronize common data. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Link Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts -If you have contact and either a customer, vendor, or bank account for the same company, you can link the two entities. Linking the two entities enables you to synchronize data that is common so that it is the same in both places. - -## Link a Contact to an Existing Customer, Vendor, or Bank Account -1. Open the contact that you want to link. -2. Choose the **Link with existing** action, and then choose **Customer**, **Vendor**, or **Bank**. -3. Select the customer, vendor, or bank account to link to. - - In the **Current Master Fields**, you specify which fields should prioritize in case of conflicting information in fields common to the contact and customer, vendor, or account. For example, if the salesperson code is different in the contact than the customer, you can decide, by selecting **Contact**, to use the information in the contact. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Synchronizing Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts](marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md) -[Creating and Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md deleted file mode 100644 index 616338d8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Cycle Stages -description: Describes how to define sales stages, from initial contact to closing, to create a sales cycle and assign it to opportunities in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Cycle Stages -Before you can start using sales opportunities, you must set up sales cycles and sales cycle stages. A sales cycle is made up of a series of stages that go from the initial contact to the closing of a sale. Each stage can have certain requirements that must be met, such as requiring a sales quote, before an opportunity can go to the next stage. You can also specify whether a stage can be skipped. You can setup as many sales cycles as you need, and you can set up as many sales cycle stages as necessary within a sales cycle. - -Implementing opportunity sales cycles involves setting up the sales cycle, defining the different stages of the cycle, and then assigning the cycle to opportunities. Assigning the relevant activity or tasks to the opportunity may also be part of setting up a sales cycle. - -This topic also describes how to set up tasks and activities, and how to assign tasks to activities. For more information, see the "To set up activities with tasks" section. - -## To set up opportunity sales cycle codes -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Cycles**, and then choose the related link. The **Sales Cycles** window opens, and lists all the existing sales cycles. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -Repeat these steps to set up as many sales cycles as you want. After you have set up opportunity sales cycles, you may want to set up the different stages within each cycle. - -## To define opportunity sales cycle stages -1. In the **Sales Cycles** window, select the opportunity sales cycle for which you want to set up stages, and then choose the **Stages** action. The **Sales Cycle Stages** window opens. -2. Choose the **New** action to enter a new stage in the sales cycle. - -Repeat these steps to set up as many stages as you want within the sales cycle. - -## To assign stage cycles to opportunities -After you add the opportunities stage cycle, you can start to add sales opportunities, and then assign the stage cycle to opportunities by setting the **Sales Cycle Code** field. For more information, see [How to: Create Sales Opportunities](marketing-how-create-opportunities.md). - -## To set up activities with tasks -You can combine multiple task, for example tasks that each represent a step, in activities. Activity tasks are related to each other by a date formula. You can assign activities to opportunities, salespeople, or contacts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Activities**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in the fields as necessary. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary to define one or more tasks in the activity. - -## To assign tasks or activities of tasks to opportunities -When you have set up a task, you can assign it to a sales opportunity and thereby assign the activity that the task belongs to. - -> [!NOTE] -> This procedure describes how to assign activity tasks to opportunities. the steps are similar when you assign tasks to salespeople and contacts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Opportunities**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an opportunity, and then choose the **Tasks** action. -3. In the **Task List** window, choose the **Create Task** action. -4. The **Create Task** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - Notice in the **Opportunity** field, that it is automatically assigned to the opportunity in question. -5. Choose the **OK** button. -6. In the **Task List** window, select the new task, and then choose the **Assign Activities** action. -7. In the **Assign Activity** window, fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Processing Sales Opportunities](marketing-processing-sales-opportunities.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-industry-groups.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-industry-groups.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1a658ec7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-industry-groups.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Industry Groups for Contact Companies -description: Describes how to define an industry group and assign it to a contact company, for example, the retail industry or the automobile industry. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up Industry Groups for Contact Companies -You use industry groups to indicate the type of industry to which your contacts belong, for example, the retail industry or the automobile industry. - -Using industry groups on contacts is a two-step process. First, you define the industry group code. You only have to perform this step one time for each industry group. Once you have an industry group code, you can start to assign the code to contact companies. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you plan to synchronize your contacts with vendors, customers, or bank accounts in other parts of the application, you may want to set up a business relation for them. - -## To define an industry group code -The industry group code defines the type or category of the group, such as ADVERT for advertising, or PRESS, for TV and radio. You can have several industry group codes. To define the industry groups, you use the **Industry Groups** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Industry Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in a code and description. The code can be a maximum of 11 characters, and can be any combination of numbers and letters. - -## To assign industry groups to a contact -You cannot assign industry groups to a contact person - only companies. - -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Company** action, and then the **Industry Groups** action. The **Contact Industry Groups** window opens. -3. In the **Industry Groups Code** field, select the industry groups you want to assign. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many industry groups as you want. You can also assign industry groups from the contact list by following the same procedure. - -The number of industry groups that you have assigned to the contact is displayed in the **No. of Industry Groups** field in the **Segmentation** section in the **Contact** window. - -After you have assigned industry groups to your contacts, you can use this information to select contacts for your segments. For more information, see [How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-integrate-dynamicscrm.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-integrate-dynamicscrm.md deleted file mode 100644 index 160377a6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-integrate-dynamicscrm.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage Customers Using Dynamics 365 for Sales -description: You can use Dynamics 365 for Sales from inside Dynamics NAV to map data and have seamless integration and synchronization in the lead-to-cash process. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: integration, synchronize, map -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont ---- -# Managing Customers and Sales Created in Dynamics 365 for Sales -If you use Dynamics 365 for Sales for customer engagement, you can use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] for order processing and finances and have seamless integration in the lead-to-cash process. - -When your application is set up to integrate with Dynamics 365 for Sales, you have access to Sales data from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and the other way around in some cases. This integration enables you to work with and synchronize data types that are common to both services, such as customers, contacts, and sales information, and keep the data up to date in both locations. - -For example, the sales person in Dynamics 365 for Sales can use the price lists from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] when they create a sales order. When they add the item to the sales order line in Dynamics 365 for Sales, they are also able to see the inventory level (availability) of the item from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -Conversely, order processors in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can handle the special characteristics of sales orders transferred automatically or manually from Dynamics 365 for Sales, such as automatically create and post valid sales order lines for items or resources that were entered in Sales as write-in products. For more information, see the "Handling Special Sales Order Data" section. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can integrate with Dynamics 365 for Sales, you must make various technical preparations. For more information, see [Setting Up Dynamics 365 for Sales Integration](/dynamics-nav/Setting-Up-Dynamics-CRM-Integration) in the Developer and IT-pro help. - -## Setting Up the Connection -From Home, you can access the **Dynamics 365 for Sales Connection Setup** assisted setup guide that helps you set up the connection. Once that is done, you will have a seamless coupling of Dynamics 365 for Sales records with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] records. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following explains the assisted setup, but you can perform the same tasks manually in the **Dynamics 365 for Sales Connection Setup** window. - -In the assisted setup guide, you can choose which data to synchronize between the two services. You can also specify that you want to import your existing Dynamics 365 for Sales solution. In that case, you must specify an administrative user account. - -### Setting Up the User Account for Importing the Solution -To import an existing Dynamics 365 for Sales solution, the setup guide uses an administrative account. This account must be a valid user in Dynamics 365 for Sales with the following security roles: - -* System Administrator -* Solution Customizer - -For more information, see [Create users and assign Microsoft Dynamics NAV (online) security roles](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj191623.aspx) on techNet and [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md). - -This account is only used during the setup. Once the solution is imported into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the account is no longer needed. - -### Setting Up the User Account for Synchronization -The integration relies on a shared user account. So in your Microsoft 365 subscription, you must create a dedicated user that will be used for synchronization between the two services. This account must already be a valid user in Dynamics 365 for Sales, but you do not have to assign security roles to the account because the setup guide will do that for you. You must specify this user account one or more times in the setup guide, depending how much synchronization you want to enable. For more information, see [Create users and assign Microsoft Dynamics NAV (online) security roles](https://technet.microsoft.com/library/jj191623.aspx) on techNet. - -If you choose to enable *item availability*, the integration user account must have a web services access key. This is a two-step thing in the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] page for that user account, you must choose the **Change Web Service Key** button; and in the Dynamics 365 Connection Setup guide, you must specify that user as the OData web service user. - -If you choose to enable *sales order integration*, you must specify a user that can handle this synchronization - the integration user or another user account. - -### Coupling Records -In the assisted setup guide, you can choose to synchronize between the two services. But later, you can also set up synchronization of specific types of data. This is referred to as *coupling*, and this section provides recommendations for what you must take into consideration. - -For example, if you want to see Dynamics 365 for Sales accounts as customers in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you must couple the two types of records. It is not very complicated - you open the **Customer List** window in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and there is an action in the ribbon to couple this data with Dynamics 365 for Sales. Then you specify which [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] customers match which accounts in Dynamics 365 for Sales. - -In certain areas, the functionality relies on you couple certain sets of data before other sets of data as shown in the following list: - -* Customers and accounts - * Couple salespeople with Dynamics 365 for Sales users first -* Items and resources - * Couple units of measure with Dynamics 365 for Sales unit groups first -* Items and resource prices - * Couple customer price groups with Dynamics 365 for Sales prices first - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are using prices in foreign currencies, make sure that you couple currencies to Dynamics 365 for Sales transaction currencies. - -Dynamics 365 for Sales sales orders depends on additional information like customers, units of measure, currencies, customer price groups, items and/or resources. In order for Dynamics 365 for Sales sales orders to work seamlessly, you must couple customers, units of measure, currencies, customer price groups, items and/or resources first. - -### Synchronizing Records Fully -At the end of the assisted setup guide, you can choose the **Run Full Synchronization** action to start synchronizing all [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] records with all related records in the connected Dynamics 365 for Sales solution. In the **CRM Full Synch. Review** window, you choose the **Start** action. The synchronization then begins to execute jobs according to dependencies. For example, currency records are synchronized before customer records. The full synchronization may take a long time and will therefore run in the background so that you can continue to work in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -To check the progress of individual jobs in a full synchronization, drill down on the **Job Queue Entry Status**, **To Int. Table Job Status**, or **From Int. Table Job Status** field in the **CRM Full Synch. Review** window. - -From the **Dynamics 365 Connection Setup** window, you can get details about full synchronization at any time. From here, you can also open the **Integration Table Mappings** window to see details about the tables in Dynamics NAV and in the Dynamics 365 for Sales solution that must be synchronized. - -## Handling Special Sales Order Data -Sales orders in Dynamics 365 for Sales will be transferred to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically if you select the **Automatically Create Sales Orders** check box in the **Microsoft Dynamics 365 for Sales Connection Setup** window. On such sales orders, the **Name** field on the original order is transferred and mapped to the **External Document Number** field on the sales order in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -This can also work if the original sales order contains write-in products, meaning items or resources that are not registered in either product. In that case, you must fill in the **Write-in Product Type** and **Write-in Product No.** fields in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, so that such non-registered product sales are mapped to a specified item/resource number for financial analysis. - -If the item description on the original sales order is very long, then an additional sales order line of type Comment is created to hold the full text on the sales order in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Relationship Management](marketing-relationship-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) -[How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interaction-segments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interaction-segments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c28f071..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interaction-segments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Keep Track of Segments and Related Interactions -description: Learn about creating segments to define groups of contacts and specifying interactions for segments. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Managing Interactions for Segments -The **Segment** window is a type of worksheet where you can: - -* Create segments. -* Save the segmentation criteria you have used to select contacts. -* Log the segment and record interactions involving the contacts within the segment. - -## Segmenting -There are several ways to create segments: - -* You can manually enter the contacts you want to include in the segment in the segment lines. -* You can select contacts. -* You can reuse a logged segment as the basis to create a new one. -* You can reuse saved segmentation criteria. - -## Interactions -In the **Segment** window, you can create interactions for several contacts simultaneously. For example, you can merge a segment with a Microsoft Word document, so that you can send a letter to all the contacts in the segment. - -You can specify information about the interaction for the segment on the **Segment** header. For example, you can decide which interaction template you want to use for all the contacts, specify a description, a correspondence type, and so on. However, you can modify this information in the segment line for each particular contact, for example, by specifying another description for one contact. If you are merging a segment with a Microsoft Word document, you can personalize the document to be sent for one or several of the contacts within the segment, for example, by adding individualized comments to the document. - -## Logging -In the **Segment** window, when you choose **Log**, the application records the interactions in the **Interaction Log Entry** window, and logs the segment. After you have logged the segment, you can only find it in the **Logged Segments** window. - -In the **Logged Segments** window, you can decide to create a follow-up segment containing the same contacts as the segment you have logged. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Segments](marketing-how-create-segment.md) -[How to: Create Interactions for Segments](marketing-how-create-interactions.md) -[Managing Segments](marketing-segments.md) -[Recording Interactions With Contacts](marketing-interactions.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Creating and Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interactions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interactions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 25d0b80f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-interactions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage Interactions With Your Contacts -description: You can manage all types of communication or interactions between your company and your contacts, for example, letters, phone calls, meetings, and so on. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Managing Interactions With Contacts -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)], interactions are all types of communications between your company and your contacts. For example, communications can be by letter, fax, email, telephone, meetings, and so on. - -The relationship management area enables you to record all the interactions you have with your contacts in order to keep track of the sales and marketing efforts you have directed at your contacts and to improve your future business interactions with them. Setting up your application to record interactions consists of these tasks: - -* Setting up interaction templates -* Creating interactions on contacts or segments -* View and manage recorded interactions - -## Setting up Interaction Templates -Before you can create and record interactions, you must set up interaction templates. When creating interactions, you must specify the interaction templates they are based on. An interaction template is a model that defines the basic characteristics of an interaction. -You set up an interaction template in the **Interaction Templates** window. - -## Creating Interactions -There are two ways of recording interactions: - -* You can manually create interactions that are linked to a single contact or to a segment. For more information, see [How to: Create Interactions on Contacts and Segments](marketing-how-create-interactions.md). -* You can automatically record interactions when you perform actions in the application, for example, when you print an invoice, or quote. For more information, see [Automatically Record Interactions with Contacts](marketing-auto-record-interactions.md). - -## Viewing and managing Recorded Interactions -You can view all the recorded interactions that have not been deleted in the **Interaction Log Entries** window. You can open this window by: - -* Using the **Search for Page or Report** icon to search on **Interaction Log Entries**. -* Choosing the **Interaction Log Entries** action on a contact or segment. - The **Interaction Log Entry** window contains the interactions you create manually and the interactions that the application records automatically. - -In this window, you can: - -* View the status of interactions. -* Mark interactions as canceled. - -You can delete interaction log entries that have been canceled. To delete interaction log entries, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Canceled Interaction Log Entries**, and then choose the related link, and then fill in the information. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-job-responsibilities.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-job-responsibilities.md deleted file mode 100644 index ba943096..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-job-responsibilities.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Job Responsibilities for Contacts -description: You can define a job responsibility code and assign it to a contact to indicate the tasks that your contact is responsible for in their company, for example, IT or production. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: task, to-do, relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up Job Responsibilities for Contact Persons -You can add information about the job responsibilities of contact persons to indicate what the contact person is responsible for within their company, for example, IT, management, or production. You can use this information when entering information about your contacts. - -Using job responsibilities on contacts is a two-step process. First, you define the job responsibility code. You only have to perform this step one time for each job responsibility. Once you have a job responsibility code, you can start to assign the code to contact persons. - -## to define a job responsibility code -The job responsibility code defines the type or category of the job, such a MARKETING or PURCHASE. You can have several job responsibility codes. To define the job responsibility, you use the **Job Responsibilities** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Responsibilities**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in a code and description. The code can be a maximum of 11 characters, and can be any combination of numbers and letters. - -## to assign job responsibilities to a contact person -You cannot assign job responsibilities to contact companies. - -1. Open the contact person. -2. Choose the **Person** action, and then choose the **Job Responsibilities** action. The **Contact Job Responsibilities** window opens. -3. In the **Job Responsibility Code** field, select the job responsibility that you want to assign. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many job responsibilities as you want. You can also assign job responsibilities from the contact list by following the same procedure. - -The number of job responsibilities you have assigned to the contact is displayed in the **No. of Job Responsibilities** field in the **Segmentation** section in the **Contact** window. - -After you have assigned job responsibilities to your contacts, you can use this information to select contacts for your segments. For more information, see [How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-mailing-groups.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-mailing-groups.md deleted file mode 100644 index 66155ae1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-mailing-groups.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Mailing Groups for Contacts -description: You can use mailing groups to identify groups of contacts that you want to receive the same information, for example, for a marketing campaign or promo. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: marketing, campaign, promo, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up Mailing Groups for Contacts -You can use mailing groups to identify groups of contacts that you want to receive the same information. For example, you can set up a mailing group for the contacts that you want to send a notification of an office move, or another group for sending holiday gifts. - -Using mailing groups on contacts is a two-step process. First, you define the mailing group code. You only have to perform this step one time for each mailing group. Once you have a mailing group code, you can start to assign the code to contact companies. - -## To define mailing group codes -The mailing group code defines the type or category of the group, such as MOVE for office move, or GIFT for holiday gift. You can have several industry group codes. To define the industry groups, you use the **Mailing Groups** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Mailing Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in a code and description. The code can be a maximum of 11 characters, and can be any combination of numbers and letters. - -## To assign mailing groups to a contact -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Mailing Groups** action. The **Contact Mailing Groups** window opens. -3. In the **Mailing Groups Code** field, select the mailing group that you want to assign. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many mailing groups as you want. You can also assign mailing groups from the contact list by following the same procedure. - -The number of mailing groups you have assigned to the contact is displayed in the **No. of Mailing Groups** field in the **Segmentation** section in the **Contact** window. - -After you have assigned mailing groups to your contacts, you can use this information to select contacts for your segments. For more information, see [How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Creating Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) -[Working with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md deleted file mode 100644 index d27ef7f4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage Sales Opportunities and Leads -description: Describes managing any incoming lead or sales opportunity in Dynamics NAV, and associating the opportunity with a salesperson to keep track of potential sales. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Managing Sales Opportunities -Any incoming lead can be considered a sales opportunity. You can create opportunities and associate them to a salesperson so that you can keep track of potential sales. - -Before you can start using opportunity management, you must set up sales cycles and sales cycle stages. As you create opportunities, you should provide information about the contact, salesperson, sales cycle, and dates, as well as your estimates for the sales value of the opportunity and your estimation of the chances of its success. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up the sales cycles that you usually follow, and the different stages within each opportunity sales cycle. |[How to: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Cycle Stages](marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md) | -| Create sales opportunities that you have from your contacts. |[How to: Create Opportunities](marketing-how-create-opportunities.md) | -| Move a sales opportunity through the sales cycle to completion. |[Processing Sales Opportunities](marketing-processing-sales-opportunities.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Creating and Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-organizational-levels.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-organizational-levels.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4aa83d9a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-organizational-levels.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Organizational Levels for Contact Persons -description: You can define an organizational level and assign it to your contact to indicate the position they have in their company, for example, top management. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, client, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up Organizational Levels for Contact Persons -You can use organizational levels on your contacts to specify which position they have in the company, for example, top management. You can use this information when entering information about your contacts. - -Using organizational levels on contacts is a two-step process. First, you define the organizational level code. You only have to perform this step one time for each organizational level. Once you have an organizational level code, you can start to assign the code to contact persons. - -## To define an organizational level code -The organizational level code defines the type or category of the organizational level, such a CEO or CFO. You can have several organizational level codes. To define the organizational level, you use the **Organizational Levels** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Organizational Levels**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and fill in a code and description. The code can be a maximum of 11 characters, and can be any combination of numbers and letters. - -## To assign organizational levels to a contact person -You can assign organizational levels to contact persons only, not contact companies. You can only assign one organizational level to each contact. - -1. Open the contact. -2. In the **Organizational Levels** field, select the code you want to assign. - -After you have assigned organizational levels to your contacts, you can use this information to create segments. - -After you have assigned job responsibilities to your contacts, you can use this information to select contacts for your segments. For more information, see [How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Creating Contact Persons](marketing-create-contact-persons.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-processing-sales-opportunities.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-processing-sales-opportunities.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5cd72a22..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-processing-sales-opportunities.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Process Sales Opportunities in Sales Cycles -description: You can view, close, or delete sales opportunities, and you can also create quotes and sales orders for opportunities, and move an opportunity through the stages of a sales cycle. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Process Sales Opportunities -After you create an opportunity, there are several features for managing the opportunity and moving it through to completion. - -## To view opportunities -The existing sale opportunities are available from the **Opportunity List** window. There are different ways to access this window for processing sales opportunities: - -| To view opportunities for | Then | -| --- | --- | -| All salespeople and contacts |Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Opportunity List**, and then choose the related link. | -| A specific sales person |Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Salespeople**, and then choose the related link. Select the salesperson, choose the **Opportunities** action, and then choose the **List** action. | -| A specific contact |Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contacts**, and then choose the related link. Select the contact from the list, and then choose the **Opportunities** action. | - -Each of these tasks opens the **Opportunity List** window. - -## To close opportunities -You can close opportunities when the negotiations are over. When closing an opportunity, you can specify whether it was won or lost, and the reasons for closing it. To specify a reason, you must set up closed opportunity codes. - -1. In the **Opportunity List** window, select the opportunity, and the choose the **Close** action. The **Close Opportunity** window opens. -2. Fill in the relevant fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The **Close Opportunity Code** and **Date Closed** fields are required fields and must be filled in before you can choose the **OK** button. - - In the **Close Opportunity Code** field, you can choose from one of the existing close opportunity codes or add a new code. To add a new code, from the drop-down list, choose **Select from full list**, and then choose **new**. On the new blank line, fill in the **Code**, **Type**, and **Description** fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## To create quotes for opportunities -You can create sales quotes for contacts that are not recorded as customers. - -1. In the **Opportunity List** window, select the opportunity, and then choose the **Assign Sales Quote** action. The **Sales Quote** window opens. -2. Fill in the relevant fields. - -## To create sales orders for opportunities -You can make sales orders from the sales quotes that you have created for your opportunities. Before you can create sales orders for your contacts, you must create the contact as a customer. For more information, see [Create a Customer, Vendor, or Bank Account From a Contact](marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md). - -1. In the **Opportunity List** window, find the opportunity that you have created a sales quote for. -2. Choose the **Assign Sales Quote** action. The **Sales Quote** window opens to show the sales quote that you have assigned to the opportunity. -3. Fill in the additional fields, and then choose the **Make Order** action. - -When handling sales opportunities, you may need to create a quote for the contact that the opportunity is linked to. - -## To delete opportunities -You can delete opportunities, for example, after you have concluded a deal. However, you can only delete closed opportunities. There are two ways to delete closed opportunities. You can delete individual closed opportunities from the **Opportunity List** window or you can run the **Delete Closed Opportunities** batch job to delete multiple opportunities based on a specified criteria. - -To delete closed opportunities from the **Opportunity List** window, select the opportunity, and then choose the **Delete** action. - -To delete closed opportunities by using the **Delete Closed Opportunities** batch job, follow these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Opportunities**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Opportunity** section, set up the filters that specify the closed opportunities to delete. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -After you have deleted an opportunity, it is removed it from the **Opportunity List** window. - -## To move an opportunity through sales cycle stages -If an opportunity follows a sales cycle, you can move it forward or back through the different stages, such as moving the next or previous stage, and even skipping a stage. - -1. In the **Opportunity List** window, choose the **Update** action. The **Update Opportunity** opens, -2. Use the **Action Type** field to move the opportunity through the sales cycle stages: - * **Next** moves the opportunity forward one stage. - * **Skip** moves the opportunity forward one or several stages in the sales cycle, which you specify in the **Presentation** field. You can only skip stages that have been set up to allow skipping. - * **Previous** moves the opportunity back one stage. - * **Jump** moves the opportunity back one or several stages in the sales cycle, which you specify in the **Presentation** field. - * **Update** enables you to change information (such as to modify your evaluation of their chances of success and estimated values) without moving to another stage. -3. Fill in the other fields as needed, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Creating and Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-relationship-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-relationship-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index e9ef21f4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-relationship-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Relationship Management -description: The relationship management features in Dynamics NAV support your sales efforts and let you access information about contacts and prospects so you can serve customers efficiently. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: contact, prospect, client -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Managing Relationships -The relationship management features of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] help you manage and support your sales efforts. With these features, you have access to complete and accurate information so you can focus your interactions on preferred customer/contact segments. - -Good sales and marketing practices are all about how to make the best decisions at the right time. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides a precise and timely overview of your contact information so that you can serve your prospective customers more efficiently and increase customer satisfaction. - -To get started, see the following topics: - -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Managing Segments](marketing-segments.md) -[Recording Interactions](marketing-interactions.md) -[Managing Marketing Campaigns](marketing-campaigns.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md) -[Managing Customers and Sales Created in Dynamics 365 for Sales](marketing-integrate-dynamicscrm.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-segments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-segments.md deleted file mode 100644 index d94d38d7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-segments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Manage Segments and Select Contacts to Include -description: Outlines the tasks to create a segment to select a group of contacts according to specific criteria, for example, contacts in a particular industry that you want to target. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Managing Segments -You create segments to select a group of contacts according to specific criteria. For example, a segment could be the industry that the contacts belong to or your business relationship with the contacts. You can create a segment to select the contacts you want to target with a campaign. - -There are two main tasks in creating a segment: - -* Enter general information about the segment. Before you can select the contacts within the segment, you must first create the segment. -* Select the contacts to be included within the segment. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create segments which allow you to select a group of contacts. For example, direct mail. |[How to: Create Segments](marketing-how-create-segment.md) | -| Manage the contacts that are assigned to segments. |[How to: Add Contacts to Segments](marketing-add-contact-segment.md) | -| Learn about using interactions and segments, including logging. |[Managing Interaction and Segments](marketing-interaction-segments.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-contacts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-contacts.md deleted file mode 100644 index f29f62d1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-contacts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Information for Contacts -description: Outlines the tasks to specify information and codes, for example, about industry groups and business relationships, before you set up contacts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Preparing to Set Up Contacts -When creating contacts, you can enter specific information, such as the industry that the contact companies belong to and your business relationship with the contacts. - -Before you create contacts and record details about your business relationships, you must set up the different codes that you will use to assign this information to your contact companies and people. Codes can be set up for mailing groups, industry groups, business relationships, Web sources, organizational levels and job responsibilities. - -By having this information set up, creating contacts is much more organized and being able to find all contacts based on a certain group will be more efficient. Every group at your company will be able to find the is information making communication with the contacts more successful. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up the business relationship that you have with your contacts, for example, prospect, bank, consultant, and service supplier. |[Setting Up Business Relations on Contacts Companies](marketing-business-relations.md) | -| Set up the industry to which your contacts belong, for example, the retail industry and the automobile industry. |[How to: Set Up Industry Groups on Contact Companies](marketing-industry-groups.md) | -| Set up the mailing groups that you can use to identify groups of contacts that you want to receive the same information. |[How to: Set Up Mailing Groups on Contact Companies](marketing-mailing-groups.md) | -| Set up the job responsibilities of your contact persons. |[Set Up Job Responsibilities on Contacts](marketing-job-responsibilities.md) | -| Set up the organizational levels that you want to use about your contact persons. |[How to: Set Up Organizational Levels on Contacts](marketing-organizational-levels.md) | -| Set up web sources (search engines and web sites) that you can use when you look up information about your contacts on the Internet. |[How to: Set Up Web Sources on Contacts](marketing-web-sources.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Managing Sales Opportunities](marketing-manage-sales-opportunities.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-marketing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-marketing.md deleted file mode 100644 index af783bee..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-setup-marketing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Marketing and Contact Management Information -description: You can set up marketing and contact management in Dynamics NAV to optimize relationships with prospects or customers, and improve campaigns and promotions. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, prospect, client, customer, campaign, promo -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Setting Up Relationship Management -Before you get started working with your contacts and marketing interests, there are a few decisions and steps that you should take to set up how the marketing area manages certain aspects of your contacts. For example, you can decide whether to synchronize the contact card with the customer card, vendor card, and bank account card, how number series are defined, or what the standard salutation should be when writing to your contacts. - -Managing your contacts and having a strategy in place to identify, attract, and retain customers will help optimize your business and increase customer satisfaction. Using a good contact management system will also help you create and maintain relationships with your customers. Communication is the key to these relationships. Being able to tailor communication with potential and existing customers, vendors, and business partners according to their needs, is necessary for companies to succeed. Establishing a strategy and defining how your company uses contact information is a primary step. This information will be viewed by many different groups in your company, so having a good system in place will help everyone be more productive. - -You set up the marketing and contact management from the **Marketing Setup** window. To open the **Marketing Setup** window, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Marketing Setup**, and then choose the related link. - -## Automatically Copying Specific Information from the Contact Companies to the Contact Persons -Some information about contact companies is identical to the information about the contact persons working within these companies, for example, the address details. In the **Inheritance** section of the **Marketing Setup** window, you can set the application to automatically copy specific fields from the contact company card to the contact person card each time you create a contact person for a contact company. For example, you can select to copy the salesperson code, address details (address, address 2, city, post code, and county), communication details (fax number, telex answer back, and phone number), and more. - -When you modify one of these fields on the contact company card, the program will automatically modify the field on the contact person card (unless you have manually modified the field on the contact person card). - -For more information, see [How to: Create Contact Persons](marketing-how-create-contact-persons.md). - -## Using Predefined Defaults on New Contacts -You can decide that the application automatically assigns a specific language code, territory code, salesperson code, and country/region code as defaults to each new contact you create. You can also enter a default sales cycle code that the program automatically assigns to each new opportunity you create. - -The inheritance of fields overwrites the default values you have set up. For example, if you have set up English as the default language, but the contact company's language is German, the program will automatically assign German as the language code for the contact persons recorded for that company. - - - -## Automatically Recording Interactions -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can automatically record sales and purchase documents as interactions (for example, orders, invoices, receipts, and so on), as well as emails, phone calls, and cover sheets. - -For more information, see [Automatically Record Interactions with Contacts](marketing-auto-record-interactions.md). - -## Synchronizing Contacts with Customers and More -In order to synchronize the contact card with the customer card, the vendor card and the bank account card, you must select a business relation code for customers, vendors, and bank accounts. For example, you can only link a contact with an existing customer if you have selected a business relation code for customers in the **Marketing Setup** window. - -For more information, see [Synchronizing Contacts with Customers, Vendors and Bank Accounts](marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md). - -## Assigning a Number Series to Contacts and Opportunities -You can set up a number series for contacts and opportunities. If you have set up a number series for contacts, when you create a contact, and press Enter in the No. field on the contact card, the program automatically enters the next available contact number. - -For more information about number series, see [How to: Create Number Series](ui-create-number-series.md). - -## Searching for Duplicate Contacts when Contacts are Created -You can choose to have the program automatically search for duplicates each time you create a contact company, or you can choose to search manually after you have created contacts. You can also choose to have the program update the search strings automatically each time you modify contact information or create a contact. You can decide the search hit percentage, that is, the percentage of identical strings two contacts must have for the program to consider them as duplicates. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 56bbf4c4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-synchronize-contacts-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Synchronize Contacts With Customers and Vendors -description: You couple or synchronize contact information of contacts who are also customers, vendors, or bank accounts, so you only update information in one place. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: relationship, CRM, integration, couple -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Synchronizing Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts -If some of your contacts are also customers, vendors, or bank accounts, you can synchronize the contact information with the related customer, vendor, or bank account. Synchronization makes information that is common between contacts and customers, vendors, or bank account the same. - -Before you can synchronize your contacts with customers, vendors, or bank accounts, you must specify a business relation code for customers, vendors, and bank accounts in the **Marketing Setup** window. For more information, see [Setting Up Relationship Management](marketing-setup-marketing.md). - -## Different Ways to Synchronize Contacts with Customers, Vendors and Bank Accounts -You can synchronize your contacts with customers, vendors, or bank accounts by three methods: - -* Link contacts with existing customers, vendors, or bank accounts from the contact card. For more information, see [How to: Link Contacts With Customers, Vendors, and Bank Accounts](marketing-how-link-contact.md). -* Create customers, vendors, or bank accounts from the contact. For more information, see [Create a Customer, Vendor, or Bank Account From a Contact](marketing-how-create-contacts-new-customers-vendors-bank-accounts.md). -* Create contacts from customers, vendors or bank accounts. For more information, see [Create a company contact from a customer, vendor, or bank account](marketing-how-create-contact-companies.md). - -## Consequences of Synchronization -When the contact is synchronized with the customer, vendor, bank account: - -* You only have to update information in one place. For example, if you modify the phone number on the contact, the phone number is automatically updated with the same modification on the customer, the vendor, or the bank account. -* If you have specified a number series for contacts, when you create a customer card, a vendor card, or a bank account card, a contact card is automatically created for the customer, vendor or bank account. -* You can create sales quotes and orders, and purchase quotes and orders from the contact. -* You can have your interactions recorded when you perform actions such as printing orders, blanket orders, creating sales service orders, sending e-mails, and so on. -* If you delete a contact linked to a customer, vendor or bank account, only the contact is removed. The customer, vendor, or bank account remains. -* If you delete a customer, vendor, bank account linked to a contact, the contact remains. - -> [!NOTE] -> Some details, such as invoicing and posting details, do not appear on the contact card. Therefore, you may want to add them manually on the customer card, vendor card, or bank account card when you create contacts as customers, vendors or bank accounts. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Contacts](marketing-contacts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-web-sources.md b/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-web-sources.md deleted file mode 100644 index e981e9e0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/marketing-web-sources.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Web Sources for Contact Companies -description: You can define internet or web sources and assign them to a contact company to help identify how you want to search for information about your contacts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: internet -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Set Up Web Sources for Contact Companies -You can use web sources with your contact companies to identify, for example, search engines and web sites, on the Internet that you want to use to search for information about the contacts. When assigning web sources, you specify which search engine and search word the application will use to find the requested information. - -Using web sources on contacts is a two-step process. First, you define the web source code. You only have to perform this step one time for each web source. Once you have a web source code, you can start to assign the code to contact persons. - -## To define a web source code -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Web Sources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** actions. -3. Fill in the **Code**, **Description**, and **URL** fields. - - Type %1 in the **URL** field to insert a placeholder for a search word in the URL. When you launch the web source from a contact, the %1 is replaced with the search word, for example, the name of the company that you have entered in the **Contact Web Sources** window. - -Repeat these steps to set up as many web sources as you want. - -## To assign web sources to a contact company -When assigning web sources, you specify which search engine and search word that the application will use to find the requested information. - -1. Open the contact. -2. Choose the **Company** action, and then choose the **Web Sources** action. The **Contact Web Sources** window opens. -3. In the **Web Source Code** field, choose the web source you want to assign. -4. In the **Search Word** field, enter the search word that you want to use to find the information. - -Repeat these steps to assign as many web sources as you want. - -You can also assign web sources from the **Contact List** window by following the same procedure. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Creating Contact Companies](marketing-create-contact-companies.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/abc_classification.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/abc_classification.png deleted file mode 100644 index 041a01df..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/abc_classification.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_export.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_export.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2eb04feb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_export.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_import.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_import.png deleted file mode 100644 index d775c225..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-data-exchange/dataexchangeframework_import.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-filter.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-filter.png deleted file mode 100644 index 36a75b55..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-filter.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-sizing.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-sizing.png deleted file mode 100644 index 353d2172..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-how-use-powerbi-reports-factbox/financials-powerbi-report-sizing.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-user-tasks/sample-user-task.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-user-tasks/sample-user-task.png deleted file mode 100644 index bb6bc899..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/across-user-tasks/sample-user-task.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/applicationmenuicon.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/applicationmenuicon.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9dc935a3..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/applicationmenuicon.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/binflow.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/binflow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5f3041dd..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/binflow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/costaccountingoverview.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/costaccountingoverview.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4ec8d222..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/costaccountingoverview.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_1.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_1.png deleted file mode 100644 index d39f9ddf..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5ae259a7..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_3.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 66652db3..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_4.jpg b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_4.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index 9d277880..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_assembly_posting_4.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_10_revaluation_wip.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_10_revaluation_wip.png deleted file mode 100644 index 604dd1cb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_10_revaluation_wip.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_1.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 21a795e3..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_2.png deleted file mode 100644 index cb455119..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_3.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 484e2a46..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_4.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_4.png deleted file mode 100644 index c4115edb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_5.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_5.png deleted file mode 100644 index 73e29150..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_5.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_6.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_6.png deleted file mode 100644 index b033f6fe..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_6.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_7.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_7.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1ce23c60..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_7.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_8.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_8.png deleted file mode 100644 index f4bfaae2..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_8.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_9.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_9.png deleted file mode 100644 index 72b060b9..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_equation_9.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_purchase_variance.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_purchase_variance.png deleted file mode 100644 index aa707b34..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_11_purchase_variance.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_1.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_1.png deleted file mode 100644 index b871ef93..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 06742bb8..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_14_production_posting_2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_1_entry_flow.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_1_entry_flow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7ef62020..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_1_entry_flow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_adjustment.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_adjustment.png deleted file mode 100644 index b3fe2e5d..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_adjustment.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_capacity.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_capacity.png deleted file mode 100644 index e526d0ac..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_capacity.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_material.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_material.png deleted file mode 100644 index c4ddcaca..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_material.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_output.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_output.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2a9f2274..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_output.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_sales.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_sales.png deleted file mode 100644 index c65a1855..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_3_gl_posting_sales.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_7_costing_methods.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_7_costing_methods.png deleted file mode 100644 index 83bd79de..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_inventory_costing_7_costing_methods.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_item_tracking_design.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_item_tracking_design.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5b20e93e..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_item_tracking_design.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 310d32cc..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_3.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 635fdb71..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_availability_3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_advanced_flow.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_advanced_flow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 08f51bb7..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_advanced_flow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_basic_flow.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_basic_flow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1f1087aa..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_inbound_basic_flow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_advanced_flow.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_advanced_flow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7a3735f5..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_advanced_flow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_basic_flow.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_basic_flow.png deleted file mode 100644 index 22b2edff..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_outbound_basic_flow.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_overview.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_overview.png deleted file mode 100644 index 759c039e..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/design_details_warehouse_management_overview.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/dimensionentrynav7.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/dimensionentrynav7.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7a2674b1..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/dimensionentrynav7.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/finance-accounting/accountant-company-details.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/finance-accounting/accountant-company-details.png deleted file mode 100644 index f625d75b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/finance-accounting/accountant-company-details.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/finance-invite-accountant/invite-accountant.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/finance-invite-accountant/invite-accountant.png deleted file mode 100644 index 693d5cc9..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/finance-invite-accountant/invite-accountant.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/appstore.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/appstore.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0e91f4d9..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/appstore.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/googleplay.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/googleplay.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3c3481b4..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/googleplay.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/windowsstore.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/windowsstore.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2689ae5d..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/install-mobile-app/windowsstore.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 42a747db..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1-2).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1-2).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 8abd2ebd..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv1-2).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv2).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv2).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 5efb20de..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(GracePeriodInv2).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(Post0122).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(Post0122).gif deleted file mode 100644 index fb526ac0..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(Post0122).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 7a1fcf98..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/multiplePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav2013_dimension_tree.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav2013_dimension_tree.png deleted file mode 100644 index c0bfb9cb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav2013_dimension_tree.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav2013_dimension_tree_example2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav2013_dimension_tree_example2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 57db7328..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav2013_dimension_tree_example2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_bom_planning.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_bom_planning.png deleted file mode 100644 index acc72ee8..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_bom_planning.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking.png deleted file mode 100644 index 32dbbf87..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking_graph.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking_graph.png deleted file mode 100644 index 55b66acb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_dynamic_order_tracking_graph.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_error_log.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_error_log.png deleted file mode 100644 index 478bf932..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_error_log.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_forecast_and_blanket.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_forecast_and_blanket.png deleted file mode 100644 index 951ad66a..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_forecast_and_blanket.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_planning_graph.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_planning_graph.png deleted file mode 100644 index e10b3d5f..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_planning_graph.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_planning_worksheet.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_planning_worksheet.png deleted file mode 100644 index ddc14395..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_planning_worksheet.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_reservations.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_reservations.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9b6f6c2e..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_reservations.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_sku_planning.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_sku_planning.png deleted file mode 100644 index c979a9f1..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_sku_planning.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_warnings.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_warnings.png deleted file mode 100644 index 11230856..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_1_warnings.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_balancing.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_balancing.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2e9a8ff5..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_balancing.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_negative_inventory.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_negative_inventory.png deleted file mode 100644 index f56c15bb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_negative_inventory.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_overflow2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_overflow2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 0207bfb5..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_overflow2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_projected_inventory.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_projected_inventory.png deleted file mode 100644 index e23fd05f..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_projected_inventory.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_reorder_cycle.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_reorder_cycle.png deleted file mode 100644 index b7d75f9a..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_2_reorder_cycle.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers1.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers1.png deleted file mode 100644 index 48bcdb48..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers10.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers10.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4dcc2ec9..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers10.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers11.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers11.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1f3f7175..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers11.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers12.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers12.png deleted file mode 100644 index 75e0ceef..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers12.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers13.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers13.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8e4d945b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers13.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers14.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers14.png deleted file mode 100644 index 974a89ef..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers14.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers15.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers15.png deleted file mode 100644 index 33169fa2..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers15.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers16.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers16.png deleted file mode 100644 index 1f3f7175..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers16.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers2.png deleted file mode 100644 index 00f7bd5e..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers3.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers3.png deleted file mode 100644 index a2da0677..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers4.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers4.png deleted file mode 100644 index 9c2c6d60..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers5.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers5.png deleted file mode 100644 index bbb57c5c..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers5.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers6.gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers6.gif deleted file mode 100644 index 3719dedc..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers6.gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers7.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers7.png deleted file mode 100644 index 3d914695..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers7.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers8.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers8.png deleted file mode 100644 index 8390e10d..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers8.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers9.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers9.png deleted file mode 100644 index c817ff54..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_app_supply_planning_7_transfers9.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_overdue_type.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_overdue_type.png deleted file mode 100644 index 319b696b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_overdue_type.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_template_approval_type.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_template_approval_type.png deleted file mode 100644 index b38efa43..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_template_approval_type.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_template_new_record.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_template_new_record.png deleted file mode 100644 index 7dc0e70b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_notification_template_new_record.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_reportlayout_xmlmappingpane.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_reportlayout_xmlmappingpane.png deleted file mode 100644 index c4a85e6c..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_reportlayout_xmlmappingpane.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_wordreportlayout_edit_in_word_example.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_wordreportlayout_edit_in_word_example.png deleted file mode 100644 index 59e23c03..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_wordreportlayout_edit_in_word_example.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_wordreportlayouts_contentcontrol.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_wordreportlayouts_contentcontrol.png deleted file mode 100644 index 23956635..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/nav_wordreportlayouts_contentcontrol.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/personalization-lock-icon.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/personalization-lock-icon.png deleted file mode 100644 index b9c434d2..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/personalization-lock-icon.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/personalization-locked.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/personalization-locked.png deleted file mode 100644 index 4e22c2d1..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/personalization-locked.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/report_viewer.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/report_viewer.png deleted file mode 100644 index be767778..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/report_viewer.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(GracePeriod).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(GracePeriod).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 09405590..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(GracePeriod).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(Post0120).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(Post0120).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 974a3866..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(Post0120).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif b/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif deleted file mode 100644 index 974a3866..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/singlePmtTolRules(Pre1503).gif and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accum_period_change_qty.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accum_period_change_qty.png deleted file mode 100644 index 2ef05a3d..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accum_period_change_qty.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accumulation_period.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accumulation_period.png deleted file mode 100644 index a44dfeb3..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_dampener_period_lot_accumulation_period.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accum_period_reschedule.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accum_period_reschedule.png deleted file mode 100644 index 07eb54c7..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accum_period_reschedule.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accumulation_period.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accumulation_period.png deleted file mode 100644 index c9adb449..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_recheduling_period_lot_accumulation_period.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_time_bucket_elements.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_time_bucket_elements.png deleted file mode 100644 index e0a631d6..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_5_time_bucket_elements.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_1.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_1.png deleted file mode 100644 index fe12b11b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_1.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_2.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_2.png deleted file mode 100644 index b9e649eb..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_2.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_3.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_3.png deleted file mode 100644 index 91523e29..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_3.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_4.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_4.png deleted file mode 100644 index f5377e6b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supply_planning_rtam_4.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supplyplanning_2_overflow1_new.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/supplyplanning_2_overflow1_new.png deleted file mode 100644 index af29e57b..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/supplyplanning_2_overflow1_new.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-enter-date-ranges/customer-top10-list.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-enter-date-ranges/customer-top10-list.png deleted file mode 100644 index debecf31..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-enter-date-ranges/customer-top10-list.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-experience/settings_icon_small.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-experience/settings_icon_small.png deleted file mode 100644 index 908f198a..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-experience/settings_icon_small.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-extensions-accportal/accountant-portal.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-extensions-accportal/accountant-portal.png deleted file mode 100644 index 6c5e02d5..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-extensions-accportal/accountant-portal.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-search/search_small.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-search/search_small.png deleted file mode 100644 index fabea92d..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui-search/search_small.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_personalization_blocked.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_personalization_blocked.png deleted file mode 100644 index 995a5192..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_personalization_blocked.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_personalize_mode_small.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_personalize_mode_small.png deleted file mode 100644 index efe1765c..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_personalize_mode_small.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_show_as_list_icon.png b/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_show_as_list_icon.png deleted file mode 100644 index 5a74ae6a..00000000 Binary files a/dynamics-nav-app/media/ui_show_as_list_icon.png and /dev/null differ diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md deleted file mode 100644 index a09ab63f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Reconcile Vendor Payments Manually -description: To process, match, or reconcile vendor payments or refunds manually, you apply the amount to one or more open vendor ledger entries. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment application, payment processing, match payments -ms.date: 06/15/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Vendor Payments Manually -When you send a payment or receive a refund from a vendor, you must decide whether to apply the payment or refund to one or more open entries. You can specify the exact amount that you want to apply to the payment receipt or refund, and then only partially apply vendor ledger entries. You must apply all vendor ledger entries to obtain correct vendor statistics and reports of the account statements and finance charges. - -> [!NOTE] -> Vendors may sometimes give a payment refund instead of a credit memo to offset against future invoices, especially when you return items that you have already paid for or when you have overpaid an invoice. - -You can apply vendor ledger entries in three different ways: - -* By entering information in dedicated windows, such as the **Payment Journal** window and the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window. -* From purchase credit memo documents. -* From vendor ledger entries after purchase documents are posted but not applied. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the **Application Method** field on the vendor card contains **Apply to Oldest**, then payments will automatically be applied to the oldest open credit entry if you do not manually specify which entry to apply to. If the application method for a customer is **Manual**, then you must apply entries manually. - -You can apply vendor payments manually to their related purchase documents when you post the payments in the **Payment Journal** window. For information about filling the payment journal, see [Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md). - -You can also apply vendor payments, and customer payments, after the payments appear as negative bank transactions in your bank. In the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, you can use functions for bank statement import, automatic application, and bank account reconciliation. For more information, see [Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -## To apply a payment to a single or multiple vendor ledger entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Journal** window, on the first journal line, enter the relevant information about the payment entry. -3. To apply a single vendor ledger entry: - 1. In the **Applies-to Doc. No.** field, choose the field to open the **Apply Vendor Entries** window. - 2. In the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, select the entry to apply the payment to. - 3. On the line in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount to apply to the entry. -4. Or, to apply multiple vendor ledger entries: - - 1. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. - 2. In the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, select the lines with the entries to apply the payment to. - 3. Choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. - 4. On each line in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount to apply to the individual entry. - - If you do not enter an amount, then the maximum amount is automatically applied. At the bottom of the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, you can see the amount in the Applied Amount field, and you can see whether the application balances. -5. Choose the **OK** button. -6. Choose the **Post** action to post the payment journal. - -## To apply a credit memo to a single or multiple vendor ledger entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Credit Memo**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the credit memo that you want to apply. -3. Enter the relevant information in the header. -4. To apply a single vendor ledger entry, on the **Application** FastTab, in the **Applies-to Doc. No.** field, select the entry to apply the credit to, and then, in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount to apply to the entry. -5. Or, to apply multiple vendor ledger entries: - - 1. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. - 2. Select the lines with the entries to apply the credit memo to. - 3. Choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. - 4. On each line in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount to apply to the individual entry. - - If you do not enter an amount, then the maximum amount is automatically applied. At the bottom of the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, you can see the amount in the **Applied Amount** field, and you can see whether the application balances. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - The **Purchase Credit Memo** window shows the entry that you have selected in the **Applies-to Doc. Type** field and the **Applies-to Doc. No.** field. The window also shows the amount of the credit memo to be posted, adjusted for any payment discounts. -7. Choose the **Post** button to post the purchase credit memo. - -## To apply posted vendor ledger entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant vendor with entries that have already been posted. -3. Choose the **Ledger Entries** action, and then choose the **Apply Entries** action. -4. In the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, you can see the open entries for the vendor. -5. Select the line with the entry that will be applied. -6. Choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. - - The **Applies-to ID** field displays three asterisks if you work in a single-user system or your user ID if you work in a multiuser system. -7. For each line in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount to apply to the individual entry. - - If you do not enter an amount, then the maximum amount is automatically applied. You can see the amount in the **Applied Amount** field at the bottom of the **Apply Vendor Entries** window. -8. Choose the **Post Application** action. - - The **Post Application** window opens with the document number of the applying entry and the posting date of the entry with the most recent posting date. -9. Choose the **OK** button to post the application. - -## To apply vendor ledger entries in different currencies to one another -If you buy from a vendor in one currency and make payment in another currency, you can still apply the invoice to the payment. - -If you apply an entry (Entry 1) in one currency to an entry (Entry 2) in a different currency, the posting date on Entry 1 is used to find the relevant exchange rate to convert amounts on Entry 2. The relevant exchange rate is found in the **Currency Exchange Rates** window. In that case, you must enable application of vendor ledger entries in different currencies. For more information, see [How to: Enable Application of Ledger Entries in Different Currencies](finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md) - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the journal you want, and fill in the first empty journal line using a currency code. -3. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. -4. Select the line with the entry you want to apply to the entry in the payment journal, choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action, and then select the entry you want to apply to. -5. Choose the **OK** button to return to the payment journal. -6. Post the payment journal. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> When you apply entries in different currencies to one another, the entries are converted to USD. Even though the exchange rates for the two relevant currencies are fixed, for example between USD and EUR, there may be a small residual amount when these foreign-currency amounts are converted to USD. These small residual amounts are posted as gains and losses to the account specified in the **Realized Gains Account** or **Realized Losses Account** field in the **Currencies** window. The **Amount (USD)** field is also adjusted on the relevant vendor ledger entries. - -## To unapply an application of vendor entries -When you unapply an erroneous application, correcting entries that are identical to the original entry but with opposite sign in the amount field are created and posted for all entries, including all general ledger posting derived from the application, such as payment discount and currency gains/losses. The entries that were closed by the application are reopened. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant vendor card. -3. Choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -4. Select the relevant ledger entry, and then choose the **Unapply Entries** action. -5. Alternatively, choose the **Detailed Ledger Entry** action. -6. Select the application entry, and then choose the **Unapply Entries** action. -7. Fill in the fields in the header, and then choose the **Unapply** action. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If an entry has been applied by more than one application entry, you must unapply the latest application entry first. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-assign-item-charges.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-assign-item-charges.md deleted file mode 100644 index ef263b37..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-assign-item-charges.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Assign Item Charges to Sales and Purchases -description: 'If you want your inventory items to carry added costs, such as freight, physical handling, insurance, and transportation that you incur when purchasing or selling items, you can use the Item Charges feature.' - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: transportation, added cost -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs -To ensure correct valuation, your inventory items must carry any added costs, such as freight, physical handling, insurance, and transportation that you incur when purchasing or selling the items. For purchases, the landed cost of a purchased item consists of the vendor's purchase price and all additional direct item charges that can be assigned to individual receipts or return shipments. For sales, knowing the cost of shipping sold items can be as vital to your company as knowing the landed cost of purchased items. - -In addition to recording the added cost in you inventory value, you can use the Item Charges feature for the following: - -- Identify the landed cost of an item for making more accurate decisions on how to optimize the distribution network. -- Break down the unit cost or unit price of an item for analysis purposes. -- include purchase allowances into the unit cost and sales allowances into the unit price. - -Before you can assign item charges, you must set up item charge numbers for the different types of item charges, including to which G/L accounts costs related to sales, purchases, and inventory adjustments are posted to. An item charge number contains a combination of general product posting group, tax group code, VAT product posting group, and item charge. When you enter the item charge number on a purchase or sales document, the relevant G/L account is retrieved based on the setup of the item charge number and the information on the document. - -For both purchase and sales documents, you can assign an item charge in two ways: -- On the document where the items that the item charge relates to are listed. This you typically do for documents that are not yet fully posted. -- On a separate invoice by linking the item charge to a posted receipt or shipment where the items that the item charge relate to are listed. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can assign item charges to orders, invoices, and credit memos, for both sales and purchases. The following procedures describe how to work with item charges for a purchase invoice. The steps are similar for all other purchase and sales documents. - -## To set up item charge numbers -You use item charge numbers to distinguish between the different kinds of item charges that are used in your company. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Charges**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Charges** window, choose the **New** action to create a new line. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign an item charge directly to the purchase invoice for the item -If you know the item charge at the time when you post a purchase invoice for the item, follow this procedure. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new purchase invoice. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). -3. Make sure the purchase invoice has one or more lines of type Item. -4. On a new line, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. -5. In the **Quantity** field, enter the units of the item charge that you have been invoiced for. -6. In the **Direct Unit Cost** field, enter the amount of the item charge. -7. Fill in the remaining fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - In the following steps, you will perform the actual assignment. Until the item charge is fully assigned, the value in the **Qty. to Assign** field is in red font. -8. On the **Lines** tab, choose the **Item Charge Assignment** action. - - The **Item Charge Assignment** window opens showing one line for each line of type Item on the purchase invoice. To assign the item charge to one or more invoice lines, you can use a function that assigns and distributes it for you or you can manually fill in the **Qty. to Assign** field. The following steps describe how to use the Suggest Item Charge Assignment function. - -9. In the **Item Charge Assignment** window, choose the **Suggest Item Charge Assignment** action. -10. If there are more than one invoice lines of type Item, choose one of the four distribution options. - -It the item charge is fully assigned, the value in the **Qty. to Assign** field on the purchase invoice is zero. - -The item charge is now assigned to the purchase invoice. When you post the receipt of the purchase invoice, the items' inventory values are updated with the cost of the item charge. - -## To assign an item charge from a separate invoice to the purchase invoice for the item -If you received an invoice for the item charge after you posted the original purchase receipt, follow this procedure. -1. Repeat steps 1 through 8 in the "To assign an item charge directly to the purchase invoice for the item" section. -2. In the **Item Charge Assignment** window, choose the **Get Receipt Lines** action. -3. In the **Purch. Receipt Lines** window, select the posted purchase receipt for the item that you want to assign the item charge to, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. Choose the **Suggest Item Charge Assignment** action. - -The item charge on the separate purchase invoice is now assigned to the item on the posted purchase receipt, thereby updating the item's inventory value with the cost of the item charge. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md deleted file mode 100644 index 24388298..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Export Payments to an Electronic Payment File -description: To make vendor payments, you enable a bank data conversion service, export a bank file, and upload the file to your electronic bank to transfer the funds. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bank file export, re-export, bank transfer, AMC, bank data conversion service, funds transfer -ms.date: 06/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Export Payments to a Bank File -When you are ready to make payments to your vendors, or reimbursements to your employees, you can export a file with the payment information on the lines in the **Payment Journal** window. You can then upload the file to your bank to process the related money transfers. - -In the generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)], a global provider of services to convert bank data to any file format that your bank requires is set up and connected. In North American versions, the same service can be used to send payment files as electronic funds transfer (EFT), however with a slightly different process. See step 6 in the "To export payments to a bank file" section. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can export payment files from the payment journal, you must specify the electronic format for the involved bank account, and you must enable the bank data conversion service. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bank Accounts](bank-how-setup-bank-accounts.md) and [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md). In addition, you must select the **Allow Payment Export** check box in the **General Journal Batches** window. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -You use the **Credit Transfer Registers** window to view the payment files that have been exported from the payment journal. From this window, you can also re-export payment files in case of technical errors or file changes. Note, however, that exported EFT files are not shown in this window and cannot be re-exported. - -## To export payments to a bank file -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill payment journal lines, for example, by using the **Suggest Vendor Payments** function. For more information, see [How to: Suggest Vendor Payments](payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md). -3. Fill in the fields on the payment journal lines as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are using EFT, you must select either **Electronic Payment** or **Electronic Payment–IAT** in the **Bank Payment Type** field. Different file export services and their formats require different setup values in the **Bank Account Card** and **Vendor Bank Account Card** windows. You will be informed about wrong or missing setup values as you try to export the file. - -4. When you have completed all payment journal lines, choose the **Export** action. -5. In the **Export Electronic Payments** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - Any error messages will be shown in the **Payment File Errors** FactBox where you can also choose an error message to see detailed information. You must resolve all errors before the payment file can be exported. - - > [!TIP] - > When you use the bank data conversion service, a common error message states that the bank account number does not have the length that your bank requires. To avoid or resolve the error, you must remove the value in the **IBAN** field in the **Bank Account Card** window and then, in the **Bank Account No.** field, enter a bank account number in the format that your bank requires. - -6. In the **Save As** window, specify the location that the file is exported to, and then choose **Save**. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you are using EFT, save the resulting vendor remittance form as a Word document or select to have it emailed directly to the vendor. The payments are now added to the **Generate EFT File** window from where you can generate multiple payment orders together to save transmission cost. For more information, see the following steps. -7. In the **Payment Journal** window, choose the **Generate EFT File** action. - - In the **Generate EFT File** window, all payments set up for EFT that you have exported from the payment journal for a specified bank account but not yet generated are listed on the **Lines** FastTab. -8. Choose the **Generate EFT File** action to export one file for all the EFT payments. -9. In the **Save As** window, specify the location that the file is exported to, and then choose **Save**. - -The bank payment file is exported to the location that you specify, and you can proceed to upload it to your electronic bank account and make the actual payments. Then you can post the exported payment journal lines. - -## To export payments that represent customer refunds -The following describes a work-around for exporting electronic refund payments. - -> [!CAUTION] -> The resulting payment journal lines cannot be posted, deleted, or voided. -> 1. Set up the customer as a vendor. Name it "Customer X for Refunds", for example. For more information, see [How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md). -> 2. On the payment journal line for the customer, set the **Account Type** field to **Customer**, and the **Document Type** field to **Refund**. -> 3. Perform the normal steps for payment export as described in the "To export payments to a bank file" section. - -## To plan when to post exported payments -If you do not want to post a payment journal line for an exported payment, for example because you are waiting for confirmation that the transaction has been processed by the bank, you can just delete the journal line. When you later create a payment journal line to pay the remaining amount on the invoice, the **Total Exported Amount** field shows how much of the payment amount has already been exported. Also, you can find detailed information about the exported total by choosing the **Credit Transfer Reg. Entries** button to see details about exported payment files. - -If you follow a process where you do not post payments until you have confirmation that they have been processed in the bank, you can control this in two ways. - -* In a payment journal with suggested payment lines, you can sort on either the **Exported to Payment File** column or the **Total Exported Amount** and then delete payment suggestions for open invoices for which payments have already been made and you do not want to make payments for. -* In the **Suggest Vendor Payments** window, where you specify which payments to insert in the payment journal, you can select the **Skip Exported Payments** check box if you do not want to insert journal lines for payments that have already been exported. - -To see information about exported payments, choose the **Payment Export History** action. - -## To re-export payments to a bank file -You can re-export payment files from the **Credit Transfer Registers** window. Before you delete or post payment journal lines, you can also re-export the payment file from the **Payment Journal** window by simply exporting it again. If you have deleted or posted the payment journal lines after exporting them, you can re-export the same payment file from the **Credit Transfer Registers** window. Select the line for the batch of credit transfers that you want to re-export, and then use the **Reexport Payments to File** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> Exported EFT files are not shown in the **Credit Transfer Registers** window and cannot be re-exported. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Credit Transfer Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a payment export that you want to re-export, and then choose the **Reexport Payment to File** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index b3b4ace6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Use the Suggest Vendor Payments Batch Job -description: You can specify vendor payment settings to get suggestions or proposals for payments that are due soon or where a discount is available. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: vendor payment, creditor, debt, balance due, AP -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Suggest Vendor Payments -In the **Payment Journal** window, you can use the **Suggest Vendor Payments** batch job to suggest payment lines. Lines for things like payments that are due soon, or payments where a payment discount is available, are suggested based on your settings. - -To benefit fully from suggested lines, you must first prioritize your vendors. For more information, see [How to: Prioritize Vendors](purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors.md). - -Vendor entries that are not **On Hold** are not included. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you want to take advantage of payment discounts, and have entered an available amount, the amount will be used for: - -* Prioritized overdue vendor entries first in order of priority. -* Overdue vendor entries that are not prioritized. -* Open vendor entries that qualify for payment discounts, arranged by vendor number. - -## To use the Suggest Vendor Payments function -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant journal, and then choose the **Suggest Vendor Payments** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To insert the due date as posting date on payment journal lines -When you use the **Suggest Vendor Payments** batch job to create payment lines for your vendors, you can fill two special fields to make sure that the generated lines use the due date to calculate the posting date. These fields are **Calculate Posting Date from Applies-to-Doc Due Date** and **Applies-to-Doc Due Date Offset**. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You cannot use the **Calculate Posting Date from Applies-to-Doc Due Date** field together with the **Find Payment Discounts** field or the **Summarize per Vendor** field. If the posting date is based on the due date, some payment discounts may not calculate correctly because the posting date is after the payment discount date. - -Also, if the calculated posting date is in the past, then the posting date is moved up to the work date, and a warning is displayed. - -Alternatively, you can manually create payment lines using the due date to calculate the posting date. After you apply vendor ledger entries, you can use the **Calculate Posting Date** action to update the posting date on the journal line with the due date of the related purchase invoice. For more information, see [How to: Apply Purchase Transactions Manually](payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If the purchase invoice is overdue, the posting date is set to the work date, and the font on the line becomes red. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-work-checks.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-work-checks.md deleted file mode 100644 index e3636c8b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-how-work-checks.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Issue, Print, Cancel, and Void Checks -description: Describes how to issue checks using the payment journal, print checks, and void or view check ledger entries in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment journal, print check, vendor payment, creditor, debt, balance due, AP -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work With Checks -You can issue electronic and manual checks in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Both methods use the payment journal to issue checks to vendors. You can also void checks and view check ledger entries. - -The process of issuing checks suggests payments, creates ledger entries, and prints the computer checks. - -> [!NOTE] -> To make sure that your bank only clears validated checks and amounts, you can send them a file that contains vendor, check, and payment information. For more information, see [How to: Export a Positive Pay file](finance-how-positive-pay.md). - -Your printer must be correctly set up with the check forms, and you must define which check layout to use. For more information, see [How to: Define Check Layouts](finance-how-define-check-layouts.md) - -## To issue checks -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the journal with relevant payments, for example by using the Suggest Vendor Payments function. For more information, see [How to: Suggest Vendor Payments](payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md). -3. In the **Bank Payment Type** field on journal lines for payment that you want to make with checks, select one of the following options: - - * **Computer Check**: Select this option if you want to print a check for the amount on the payment journal line. You must print the checks before you can post the journal lines. You can only select **Computer Check** if the **Bal. Account Type** or the **Account Type** is **Bank Account**. - * **Manual Check**: Select this option if you have created a check manually and want to create a corresponding check ledger entry for this amount. By using this option, you cannot print checks from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You can only select **Manual Check** if the **Bal. Account Type** or the **Account Type** is **Bank Account**. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must print computer checks before you post the related journal lines. -4. In case of computer checks, choose **Print Check**. -5. In the **Check** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -6. Choose the **Print** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you want to print checks in more than one currency from different bank accounts, you must run the **Print Check** batch job separately for each currency and specify the appropriate bank account. - -## To cancel printed checks that are not posted -You can cancel non-posted checks after they have been printed by using the **Void Check** action in the **Payment Journal** window. - -1. In the **Payment Journal** window, choose the **Void Check**, and then choose which checks to cancel. - -## To void checks -When check payment have been posted, you can only cancel (void) checks from the resulting bank ledger entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bank Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant bank account, choose the **Edit** action, and then choose the **Check Ledger Entries** action. -3. In the **Check Ledger Entries** window, choose the **Void Check** action. -4. Select the **Void Check Only** check box. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) -[How to: Export a Positive Pay file](finance-how-positive-pay.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-make-payments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-make-payments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 72544cfe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-make-payments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Manage Payments to Vendors -description: Outlines tasks to manage payments to vendors or creditors, including posting payment lines and getting an overview of the balance due. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: print check, vendor payment, creditor, debt, balance due, AP -ms.date: 06/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Making Payments -When you make payments to vendors or reimbursements to employees, you post the related payment lines in the **Payment Journal** window. You can use the **Suggest Vendor Payments** function to find vendor payments that are due. You can also use the **Vendor - Summary Aging** report to get an overview of due vendor payments. - -From the payment journal, you can print computer checks or record when checks are written. If you select **Computer Check** in the **Bank Payment Type** field, then any lines representing checks must be printed before the payment journal can be posted. - -When the payments are posted, you can export them to a bank file for upload to your bank for processing. - -After the payments are made at your bank, you must apply them to their related open vendor or employee ledger entries. You can do this manually or by importing a bank statement file and applying the payments automatically. For more information, see [Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -|Use the **Payment Journal** window, which is a based on the general journal, to post payments to vendors or employees.|[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md)| -| Use a function to suggest vendor payments according to selected criteria, such as due date, discount eligibility, and your liquidity. |[How to: Suggest Vendor Payments](payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md) | -|Reimburse employees for personal expenses during business activities by making payment to their bank account.|[How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md)| -| Issue checks for vendor payments, either as print-outs or as computer checks. Void checks before or after posting. |[How to: Work With Checks](payables-how-work-checks.md) | -| Pay the vendor by cash or check, and post the payment when you post the invoice. |[How to: Settle Purchase Invoices Promptly](finance-how-to-settle-purchase-invoices-promptly.md) | -| Make sure that your bank only clears validated checks and amounts by sending them a file that contains vendor, check, and payment information. |[How to: Export a Positive Pay file](finance-how-positive-pay.md) | -|Export payments from the **Payment Journal** window to a bank file that you upload to your bank for processing, including EFT (electronic funds transfer) in North America. |[How to: Export Payments to a Bank File](payables-how-export-payments-bank-file.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-manage-payables.md b/dynamics-nav-app/payables-manage-payables.md deleted file mode 100644 index 06acf287..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/payables-manage-payables.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Manage Accounts Payable -description: Outlines tasks to manage accounts payable, for example, paying creditors or applying outgoing payments to ledger entries to close invoices or credit memos. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: vendor payment, creditor, debt, balance due, AP -ms.date: 06/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Dynamics Nav - Managing Payables -A big part of managing accounts payable is paying your vendors, or reimbursing your employees for expenses. You can use functions to add payments lines for purchase invoices that are due in the **Payment Journal** window. To send transactions to your bank, you can export multiple payment journal lines to a file, and then upload the file to your bank. You can also make payments by check, including transmitting checks as electronic payments. - -Another typical task is to apply outgoing payments to their related vendor or employee ledger entries in order to close purchase invoices, purchase credit memos, or employee accounts as paid. You can do this in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window by importing a bank statement file to register the payments. The payments are applied to open vendor, customer, or employee ledger entries by matching payment text and entry information. There are various ways to review and change the matches before you post the journal. You can choose to close any open bank account ledger entries related to the applied ledger entries when you post the journal. The bank account is automatically reconciled when all payments are applied. - -Alternatively, you can apply outgoing payments manually in the **Payment Journal** window or from the related vendor or employee ledger entries. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks within accounts payable, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Generate due vendor payments or employee reimbursements, prepare check payments, and export payments to a bank file when posting. |[Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md) | -| Apply vendor payments automatically to unpaid purchase invoices by importing a bank statement file. |[Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md) | -| Apply vendor payments to unpaid purchase invoices manually. |[How to: Reconcile Vendor Payments Manually](payables-how-apply-purchase-transactions-manually.md) | -|Ensure correct inventory valuation by assigning added item costs, such as freight, physical handling, insurance, and transportation that you incur when purchasing.|[How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-about-planning-functionality.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-about-planning-functionality.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0281a618..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-about-planning-functionality.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,138 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: About Planning Functionality - description: The planning system takes all demand and supply data into account, nets the results, and creates suggestions for balancing the supply to meet the demand. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About Planning Functionality -The planning system takes all demand and supply data into account, nets the results, and creates suggestions for balancing the supply to meet the demand. - -For detailed information, see [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> For all the fields that are mentioned in this topic, read the tooltip to understand their function. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## Demand and Supply -Planning has two elements: demand and supply. These must be held in balance to ensure that the demand is met in a timely and cost-efficient manner. - -- Demand is the common term used for any kind of gross requirement such as a sales order, service order, component need from assembly or production orders, outbound transfer, blanket order or forecast. In addition to these, the program allows some other technical types of demand - such as a negative production or purchase order, negative inventory, and purchase return. -- Supply is the common word used for any kind of replenishment such as inventory, a purchase order, assembly order, production order, or inbound transfer. Correspondingly, there can be a negative sales or service order, negative component need or sales return – all of which in some way also represent supply. - -Another goal of the planning system is to ensure that the inventory does not grow unnecessarily. In the case of decreasing demand, the planning system will suggest that you postpone, decrease in quantity, or cancel existing replenishment orders. - -## Planning Calculation -The planning system is driven by anticipated and actual customer demand, as well as inventory reordering parameters. Running the planning calculation will result in the program suggesting specific actions (Action Messages) to take concerning possible replenishment from vendors, transfers between warehouses, or production. If replenishment orders already exist, the suggested actions could be to increase or expedite the orders to meet the changes in demand. - -The basis of the planning routine is in the gross-to-net calculation. Net requirements drive planned order releases, which are scheduled based on the routing information (manufactured items) or the item card lead time (purchased items). Planned order release quantities are based on the planning calculation, and are affected by the parameters set on the individual item cards. - -## Planning with Manual Transfer Orders -As you can see from the **Replenishment System** field on a SKU card, the planning system can be set up to create transfer orders to balance supply and demand across locations. - -In addition to such automatic transfer orders, you may sometimes need to perform a general move of inventory quantities to another location, irrespective of existing demand. For this purpose you would manually create a transfer order for the quantity to move. To ensure that the planning system does not try to manipulate this manual transfer order, you must set the **Planning Flexibility** on the transfer line(s) to None. - -Contrarily, if you do want the planning system to adjust the transfer order quantities and dates to existing demand, you must set the **Planning Flexibility** field to the default value, Unlimited. - -## Planning Parameters -The planning parameters control when, how much, and how to replenish based on the various settings on the item card (or stockkeeping unit - SKU), and the manufacturing setup. - -The following planning parameters exist on the item or SKU card: - -- Dampener Period -- Dampener Quantity -- Reordering Policy -- Reorder Point -- Maximum Inventory -- Overflow Level -- Time Bucket -- Lot Accumulation Period -- Rescheduling Period -- Reorder Quantity -- Safety Lead Time -- Safety Stock Quantity -- Assembly Policy -- Manufacturing Policy - -The following order modifiers exist on the item or SKU card: - -- Minimum Order Quantity -- Maximum Order Quantity -- Order Multiple - -Global planning setup fields on the **Manufacturing Setup** window include: - -- Dynamic Low-Level Code -- Current Production Forecast -- Use Forecast on Locations -- Default Safety Lead Time -- Blank Overflow Level -- Combined MPS/MRP Calculation -- Components at Location -- Default Dampener Period -- Default Dampener Quantity - -For more information, see [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) - -## Other Important Planning Fields -### Planning Flexibility -On most supply orders, such as production orders, you can select **Unlimited** or **None** in the **Planning Flexibility** field on the lines. - -This specifies whether the supply represented by the production order line is considered by the planning system when calculating action messages. -If the field contains **Unlimited**, then the planning system includes the line when calculating action messages. If the field contains **None**, then the line is firm and unchangeable, and the planning system does not include the line when calculating action messages. - -### Warning -The **Warning** information field in the **Planning Worksheet** window informs you of any planning line created for an unusual situation with a text, which the user can choose to read additional information. The following warning types exist: - -- Emergency -- Exception -- Attention -- Emergency - -The emergency warning is displayed in two situations: - -- The inventory is negative on the planning starting date. -- Back-dated supply or demand events exist. - -If an item’s inventory is negative on the planning starting date, the planning system suggests an emergency supply order for the negative quantity to arrive on the planning starting date. The warning text states the starting date and the quantity of the emergency order. - -Any document lines with due dates before the planning starting date are consolidated into one emergency supply order for the item to arrive on the planning starting date. - -### Exception -The exception warning is displayed if the projected available inventory drops below the safety stock quantity. - -The planning system will suggest a supply order to meet the demand on its due date. The warning text states the item’s safety stock quantity and the date on which it is violated. - -Violating the safety stock level is considered an exception because it should not occur if the reorder point has been set correctly. - -> [!NOTE] -> Supply on planning lines with Exception warnings is normally not modified according to planning parameters. Instead, the planning system only suggests a supply to cover the exact demand quantity. However, you can set the planning run up to respect certain planning parameters for planning lines with certain warnings. For more information, see “Respect Planning Parameters for Exception Warnings” in Calculate Plan - Plan. Wksh. - -### Attention -The attention warning is displayed in two situations: - -- The planning starting date is earlier than the work date. -- The planning line suggests to change a released purchase or production order. - -> [!NOTE] -> In planning lines with warnings, the **Accept Action Message** field is not selected, because the planner is expected to further investigate these lines before carrying out the plan. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-about-production-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-about-production-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5c5069cd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-about-production-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,236 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: About Production Orders - description: Production orders are used to manage the conversion of purchased materials into manufactured items. Production orders (job or work orders) route work through various facilities (work or machine centers) on the shop floor. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# About Production Orders -Production orders are used to manage the conversion of purchased materials into manufactured items. Production orders route work through various work or machine centers on the shop floor. - -Before proceeding with production, most companies perform supply planning, typically once a week, to calculate how many production orders and purchase orders to execute to fulfill that week’s sales demand. Purchase orders supply the components that are required according to the production BOM to produce the end items. - -Production orders are the central components of the program's manufacturing functionality and they contain the following information: - -- Products planned for manufacturing -- Materials required for the planned production orders -- Products that have just been manufactured -- Materials that have already been selected -- Products that have been manufactured in the past -- Materials that were used in previous manufacturing operations - -Production orders are the starting points for: - -- Planning future manufacturing -- Controlling current manufacturing -- Tracking of finished manufacturing - -## Production Order Creation -Production orders can be created on an order-by-order basis manually from the **Production Order** window, or generated from the **Sales Order Planning** or **Order Planning** windows. Multiple orders are created from the **Planning Worksheet** window. - -Production orders are created using information from: - -- Items -- Production BOMs -- Routings -- Machine centers -- Work centers - -## Limitations on Production Order Creation -Production orders are automatically reserved and tracked to their source when: - -- Created from the **Planning Worksheet** -- Created with the Order function in the **Sales Order Planning** window -- Created from the **Order Planning** window -- Using the **Replan** function on production orders - -For more information, see [How to: Track Relations Between Demand and Supply](production-how-track-demand-supply.md). - -Production orders created through other means are not automatically reserved and tracked. - -## Production Order Status -The production order status controls how the production order behaves within the program. The form and content of the production are dictated by the order's status. The production orders are displayed in different windows according to their status. You cannot change the status of a production order manually; you must use the **Change Status** function. - -### Simulated Production Order -The Simulated Production Order is unique based on the following characteristics: - -- As its name implies, it is a simulation and its main purpose is for quoting and costing - such as when the Research and Development department wants to get a cost estimate on a proposed item. A simulated production order serves as an example of a production order. -- It does not influence the planning of orders. Planning (MPS and MRP) neither considers nor is affected by simulated production orders. Also, a simulated production order cannot be used as a template because it disappears when you change its status. - -### Planned Production Order -The Planned Production Order is unique because of the following characteristics: - -- You can automatically create a planned production order from a sales order. -- Planned production orders are like released production orders and provide input to capacity requirements planning by showing the total capacity requirements by work center or machine center. -- A planned production order represents the best estimate of the future load for the work center or machine center load based on available information. Typically, they are generated from planning, but can also be created manually. Because they are erased during subsequent planning generations, manual creation is not practical. -- Their generation in planning results in a suggested "planned order release" that includes quantity, release date, and due date. The planning system logic is based on the replenishment system, reorder policies, and order modifiers that it encounters in the net requirements planning process. -- To view their impact, look at the load for each work center or machine center on the planned production order's routing. - -### Firm Planned Production Order -The Firm Planned Production Order is unique because of the following characteristics: - -- You can automatically create a firm planned production order from a sales order. -- A firm planned production order acts as a placeholder in the planning schedule for some future job released to the floor. -- A firm planned production order can be generated from planning or created manually or from sales orders. They are not erased during subsequent planning. -- Their generation in planning results in a suggested "planned order release" that includes: quantity, release date, and due date. The planning system logic is based on the replenishment system, reorder policies, and order modifiers that it encounters in the net requirements planning process. -- To view their impact, look at the load for each work center or machine center on the firm planned production order's routing. - -### Released Production Order -The Released Production Order is unique based on the following characteristics: - -- You can automatically create a released production order from a sales order. -- When a production order has been released, it does not necessarily mean that materials have been picked or the job has physically moved to its first operation. -- In a MTO (Make-to-Order) environment, it is not unusual to create a released production order immediately after the entry of the sales order. -- Actual material consumption and product output can be recorded manually with a released production order. In addition, automatic flushing of consumption and product output only occurs for released production orders. - -### Finished Production Order -The Finished Production Order is unique based on the following characteristics: - -- A finished production order is typically one that has been manufactured. -- Finishing the production order is an important task in completing the costing lifecycle of the item that is being produced. By finishing a production order, costing can be adjusted and reconciled. -- Finished production orders are used for statistical reporting and to support the ability to track back to other orders (sales, production, and purchase, for example). The ability to track back to a finished production order allows you to review the detailed history. -- Finished production orders can never be changed. - -## Production Order Execution -Once a production order has been created and scheduled, it has to be released to the shop floor to be executed. During execution of the order, you record: - -- Materials picked or consumed -- How much time was spent working on the order -- Quantity of the parent item produced - -This information can be recorded manually or through automatic reporting, according to the items setup in the Flushing Method field. - -### Material Consumption -The program offers a variety of options for how a manufacturing company might want to record material consumption. For example, material consumption may be recorded manually, which might be desirable if there are frequent component substitutions or greater than expected scrap. - -Consumption of materials may be processed through the consumption journal, but also may be recorded automatically by the program, known as automatic reporting. The reporting methods are: - -- Manual -- Forward -- Backward - -Manual consumption reporting uses the consumption journal to specify material picking. - -Forward consumption reporting assumes the expected quantity of all materials for the entire order is consumed at the release of a production order, unless using routing link codes. When using routing link codes, the material consumed after the start of the operational step is recorded in the Output Journal. To forward flush the entire production order, you need to do two things: - -- All items in the top-level production BOM need to have forward flushing selected on their respective item card. -- All routing link codes on the production BOM must be removed. - -Backward consumption reporting records the actual quantity of all material picked or consumed when the status of a production order is changed to *Finished,* unless using routing link codes. When using routing link codes, the material is consumed after a quantity of the parent item is recorded for the operational step in the Output Journal. - -When the Production Order is refreshed, the flushing method is copied from the item card. Because the flushing method for each production order component controls how and when the consumption is recorded, it is important to note that you can change flushing method for specific items directly on the Production Order. - -#### Automatic Consumption Posting (Flushing) -The advantage of automatic flushing is that it greatly reduces data entry. With the ability to automatically flush an operation, the entire consumption and output recording process can be automated. The disadvantage of using automatic flushing is that you may not be accurately recording, or even aware of, scrap. The Automatic Reporting methods are: - -- Forward Flush the Entire Order -- Forward Flushing by Operation -- Back Flushing by Operation -- Back Flushing the Entire Order - -#### Automatic Reporting - Forward Flush the Entire Order -If you forward flush the production order at the start of the job, the behavior of the program is very similar to a manual consumption. The major difference is that consumption happens automatically. - -- The entire contents of the production BOM are consumed and deducted from inventory at the time the released production order is refreshed. -- The consumption quantity is the quantity per assembly stated on the production BOM, multiplied by the number of parent items you are building. -- There is no need to record any information in the consumption journal if all of the items are to be flushed. -- When consuming items from inventory, it does not matter when output journal entries are made, because the output journal has no effect on this mode of consumption posting. -- No routing link codes can be set. - -Forward flushing an entire order is suited in production environments with: - -- A low number of defects -- A low number of operations -- High component consumption in early operations - -#### Automatic Reporting - Forward Flushing by Operation -Flushing by operation allows you to deduct inventory during a specific operation in the routing of the parent item. Material is tied to the routing using routing link codes, which correspond to routing link codes applied to components in the production BOM. - -The flush takes place when the operation that has the same routing link code is started. Started means that some activity is recorded in the output journal for that operation. And that activity might just be that a setup time is entered. - -The amount of the flush is for the quantity per assembly stated on the production BOM multiplied by the number of parent items being built (expected quantity). - -This technique is best employed when there are many operations and certain components are not needed until late in the assembly sequence. In fact, a Just-in-Time (JIT) setup might not even have the items on hand when the RPO is begun. - -Material can be consumed during operations by using routing link codes. Some components may not be used until final assembly operations and should not be withdrawn from stock until that time. - -#### Automatic Reporting - Back Flushing by Operation -Back flushing by operation records consumption after the operation is posted in the output journal. - -The advantage of this method is that the number of parent parts finished in the operation is known. - -Material in the production BOM is linked to the routing records using routing link codes. The back flush takes place when an operation with a particular routing link code is posted with a finished quantity. - -The amount of the flush is for the quantity per assembly stated on the production BOM multiplied by the number of parent items that were posted as output quantity at that operation. This might be different from the expected quantity. - -#### Automatic Reporting - Back Flushing the Entire Order -This reporting method does not consider routing link codes. - -No components are picked until the released production order status is changed to *Finished*. The amount of the flush is the quantity per assembly stated on the production BOM multiplied by the number of parent items that were finished and placed into inventory. - -Backward flushing the entire production order requires the same setup as for forward flushing: The reporting method must be set to backward on each item card for all items within the parent BOM to be reported. In addition, all routing link codes must be removed from the production BOM. - -### Production Output -The program provides you with the capability to track how much time is spent working on a production order, in addition to recording the quantity produced. This information can help you more accurately determine the costs of production. Also, manufacturers using a standard costing system may want to record actual information in order to help them develop better standards. - -Output may be processed through the output journal, but also may be recorded automatically by the program. The program copies the flushing method from the machine center or work center card to the production order routing when refreshing. As with material consumption, there are three reporting methods for output: - -- Manual -- Forward -- Backward - -Manual method uses the Output Journal to specify time consumed and quantity produced. - -Forward method records the expected output (and time), which is automatically recorded at the release of a Production Order. Routing link codes are not a factor in the forward flushing of the output. - -Backward method records the expected output (and time), which is automatically recorded at the finish of a Production Order. Routing link codes are not a factor in the back flushing of the output. - -### Posting Consumption and Output -You can use any combination of automatic flushing and manually recorded information for both consumption and output. For example, you may want to automatically forward flush components, but still use the Consumption Journal to record scrap. Similarly, you may want to automatically record output, but use the Output Journal to record scrap of the parent item or additional time spent on the order. - -Finally, if you enter consumption and output manually, you need to determine the sequence in which you are going to record this information. You can record consumption first and use a shortcut method to enter the information, which is based on expected quantity of output. Or, you can enter output first, using the **Explode Routing** function. You would then record consumption based on actual quantity of output. - -### Production Journal -The Production Journal combines the functions of the Consumption Journal and Output Journals into one journal, which is accessed directly from the Released Production Order. - -The purpose of the Production Journal is to provide a single interface for you to register consumption and output from a Production Order. - -The Production Journal has a simple view and provides you with the ability to: - -- Easily record output and consumption related to a Production Order -- Relate the components to operations -- Relate actual operation data with the standard estimates on the Production Order routing and component lines -- Post and print an overview of registered operation data for the Production Order - -The Production Journal performs many of the same functions as the Consumption and Output journals. Dimensions, Item Tracking, and Bin Contents are handled in the same way as on the Consumption and Output journals. - -However, the Production Journal differs from the Consumption and Output journals in the following ways: - -- It is called directly from a released production order line and preset with the relevant data. -- It allows you to define which types of components to handle based on a flushing method filter on the journal. -- Quantities and times already posted for the order are displayed at the bottom of the journal as actual entries. -- Fields where data entry is irrelevant are blank and non-editable. -- The user can set up the way output quantities are preset in the journal - for example, that the last operation must have zero as Output Quantity. -- If you happen to exit the journal without posting your changes, a request message is displayed allowing you to stay in the journal. -- It displays operations and components together in a logical structure that provides an overview of the production process. - -In the production journal, consumption quantities are posted as negative item ledger entries, output quantities are posted as positive ledger entries, and times spent are posted as capacity ledger entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-configure-production-processes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-configure-production-processes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 19beb6b6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-configure-production-processes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Configure Production Processes - description: To convert material into produced end items, production resources, such as bills of material, routings, machine operators, and machinery must be set up in the system. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Manufacturing -To convert material into produced end items, production resources, such as bills of material, routings, machine operators, and machinery must be set up in the system. - -Operators and machines are represented in the system as machine centers that may be organized in work centers and work center groups. When these resources are established, they can be loaded with operations according to the item's defined material (BOM) and process (routing) structure, and according to the capacity of the machine or work center. You can also set the production capacity of each resource. Capacity is defined by the work time available in the machine and work centers, and is governed by calendars for each level. A work center calendar specifies the working days or hours, shifts, holidays, and absence that determine the work center’s gross available capacity (typically measured in minutes). All of this is determined by defined efficiency and capacity values. - -When you have set up manufacturing, you can plan and execute production orders. For more information, see [Planning](production-planning.md) and [Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md). - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Configure the manufacturing features, such as defining shop floor work hours and selecting planning principles.|The **Manufacturing Setup** page.| -|Define a standard working week in the manufacturing department in terms of starting and ending times of each work day and related work shift.|[How to: Create Shop Calendars](production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md)| -|Organize fixed values and requirements of production resources as work centers or machine centers to govern their output of production performed.|[How to: Set Up Work Centers and Machine Centers](production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md)| -|Organize production operations in the required order and assign them to work or machine centers with the required work times.|[How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md)| -|Organize production components or subassemblies under a produced parent item and certify the BOM for execution at work centers.|[How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md)| -|Make sure that the right component quantity is available when produced items are stocked in one unit of measure but produced in another.|[How to: Work With Manufacturing Batch Units of Measure](production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure.md)| -|Define families of production items with similar manufacturing processes to save consumption. For example, four pieces of the same item can be produced from one sheet and 10 pieces of another, different, item at the same time.|[How to: Work With Production Families](production-how-work-family.md)| -|Use standard tasks to simplify the creation of routings by quickly attaching extra information to recurring operations.|[How to: Set Up Standard Routing Lines](production-how-set-up-standard-routing-lines.md)| -|Prepare work centers and routings to represent subcontracted production operations.|[How to: Subcontract Manufacturing](production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-set-up-standard-routing-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-set-up-standard-routing-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index a5bc3e98..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-set-up-standard-routing-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Standard Tasks for Operations - description: You can enter descriptions of standard tasks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/05/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Standard Routing Lines -The use of standard tasks simplifies the creation and maintenance of routings. They allow you to quickly attach extra information to recurring operations. - -## To set up a standard task -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Standard Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Choose the **Tools**, **Personnel**, **Description**, or **Tools** action. -5. In the window that opens, describe the standard task in question. - -## To add a standard task to an operation -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Routings**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant routing. -3. Select a relevant routing line, choose the **Operations** action, and then choose the **Tools**, **Personnel**, **Description**, or **Tools** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md) -[How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-a-forecast.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-a-forecast.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1123c49e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-a-forecast.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create a Production Forecast - description: You can create sales and production forecasts with the **Production Forecast** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create a Production Forecast -You can create sales and production forecasts with the **Production Forecast** window. - -Forecasting functionality is used to create anticipated demand; actual demand is created from sales and production orders. During creation of the Master Production Schedule (MPS), the forecast is netted against the sales and production orders. The *Component* option on the forecast determines which type of requirements to take into consideration in the netting process. If the forecast is for a sales item, only sales orders net the forecast. If it is for components, only dependent demand from production order components net the forecast. - -Forecasting allows your company to create "what if" scenarios and efficiently and cost-effectively plan for and meet demand. Accurate forecasting can make a critical difference in customer satisfaction levels with regard to order promising dates and on-time delivery. - -## Sales Forecasts and Production Forecasts -The forecasting functionality in the program can be used to create sales or production forecasts, in combination or independently. For example, most make-to-order companies don't carry finished goods inventory, because each item is produced when it is ordered. Anticipating orders (sales forecasting) is critical for a reasonable turnaround time on the finished goods (production forecasting). As an example, component parts with lengthy delivery times, if not on order or on inventory, can delay production. - -- The sales forecast is the sales department's best guess at what will be sold in the future, and is specified by item and by period. However, the sales forecast is not always adequate for production. -- The production forecast is the production planner's projection of how many end items and derived subassemblies to produce in specific periods to meet the forecasted sales. - -In most cases, then, the production planner modifies the sales forecast to fit the conditions of production, yet still satisfies the sales forecast. - -You create forecasts manually in the **Production Forecast** window. Multiple forecasts can exist in the system, and are differentiated by name and type. Forecasts can be copied and edited as necessary. Note that only one forecast is valid for planning purposes at a time. - -The forecast consists of a number of records each stating item number, forecast date, and forecasted quantity. The forecast of an item covers a period, which is defined by the forecast date and the forecast date of the next (later) forecast record. From a planning point of view, the forecasted quantity should be available at the start of the demand period. - -You must designate a forecast as *Sales Item*, *Component*, or *Both*. The forecast type *Sales Item* is used for sales forecasting. The production forecast is created using the *Component* type. The forecast type *Both* is only used to give the planner an overview of both the sales forecast and the production forecast. With this option, the forecast entries are not editable. By designating these forecast types here, you can use the same worksheet to enter a sales forecast as you do a production forecast, and use the same sheet to view both forecasts simultaneously. Note that the system treats the different inputs (sales and production) differently when calculating planning, based on item, manufacturing, and production setup. - -## Component Forecast -The component forecast can be seen as an option forecast in relation to a parent item. This can, for example, be useful if the planner can estimate the demand for the component. - -As the component forecast is designed to define options for a parent item, the component forecast should be equal or less than the sales item forecast quantity. If the component forecast is higher than the sales item forecast, the system treats the difference between these two types of forecast as independent demand. - -## Forecasting Periods - The forecast period is valid from its starting date until the date the next forecast starts. The time interval window gives you multiple choices to insert the demand at a specific date in a period. It is therefore recommended not to change the forecast period scope unless you want to move all forecast entries to the starting date of this period. - -## Forecast by Locations -It can be stated in the manufacturing setup if. Note, though, that if location-based forecasts are viewed in isolation, the overall forecast may not be representative. - -## To create a production forecast - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Production Forecast**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, select a forecast in the **Production Forecast Name** field. Multiple forecasts can exist and are differentiated by name and forecast type. -3. In the **Location Filter** field, select the location to which this forecast will apply. -4. In the **Forecast Type** field, select **Sales Item**, **Component**, or **Both**. If you select **Sales Item** or **Component**, then you can edit the quantity by period. If you select **Both**, then you cannot edit the quantity, but you can choose the drop-down arrow button and view the production forecast entries. -5. Specify a **Date Filter** if you want to limit the amount of data displayed. -6. On the **Production Forecast Matrix** FastTab, enter the forecasted quantities of **Sales Item** or **Component** forecast for the various periods. -7. On the **Matrix Options** FastTab, set the time interval in the **View by** field to change the period that is displayed in each column. You can select from the following intervals: **Day**, **Week**, **Month**, **Quarter**, **Year**, or the **Accounting Period**, as set up in Financial Management. - - > [!NOTE] - > You should consider which time interval that you want to use for future forecasts so that the time interval is consistent throughout. When you enter a forecast quantity, it is valid on the first day of the time interval that you select. For example, if you select a month, then you enter the forecast quantity on the first day of the month. If you select a quarter, then you enter the forecast quantity on the first day of the first month in the quarter. - -8. In the **View as** field, select how the forecast quantities are shown for the time interval. If you select **Net Change**, then the net change in balance is displayed for the time interval. If you select **Balance at Date**, then the window displays the balance as of the last day in the time interval. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also edit an existing forecast. In the **Production Forecast Matrix** window, choose the **Copy Production Forecast** action and populate the **Production Forecast** window with an existing forecast. You can then edit quantities as appropriate. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-boms.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-boms.md deleted file mode 100644 index 706be27a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-boms.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Production BOMs - description: A production BOM holds master data that describes the components and subassemblies used in the production of a parent item. Once a production order is created for that parent item, its production BOM will govern the calculation of material requirements as represented in the **Prod. Order Components** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/05/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Production BOMs -A production bill of material (BOM) holds master data that describes the components and subassemblies used in the production of a parent item. Once a production order is created for that parent item, its production BOM will govern the calculation of material requirements as represented in the **Prod. Order Components** window. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] also support assembly BOMs. You use assembly orders for making end items from components in a simple process that can be performed by one or more basic resources, which are not machine or work centers, or without any resources. For example, an assembly process could be to pick two wine bottles and one coffee sack and then pack them as a gift item. For more information, see the "Assembly BOMs or Production BOMs" section in [How to: Work with Bills of Material](inventory-how-work-BOMs.md). - -Before you can set up a routing, the following must be in place: - -- Item cards are created for parent items that take part in manufacturing. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). -- Production resources are set up. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Work Centers and Machine Centers](production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md). - -## To create a production BOM -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Production BOM**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. To edit the BOM, set the **Status** field to **New** or **Under Development**. To activate it, set the **Status** field to **Certified**. - - Proceed to fill in the production BOM lines. -5. In the **Type** field, select whether the item on this BOM line is an ordinary item or a production BOM. If the item on the line is a production BOM, then it must already exist as a certified production BOM. -6. In the **No.** field, look up and select the item or production BOM in question, or type it in the field. -7. In the **Quantity Per** field, enter how many units of the item go into the parent item, for example, 4 wheels for 1 car. -8. In the **Scrap %** field you can enter a fixed percentage of components that are scrapped during production. When the components are ready to be consumed in a released production order, this percentage will be added to the expected quantity in the **Consumption Quantity** field in a production journal. For more information, see [How to: Register Consumption and Output](production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output.md). - - > [!NOTE] - > This scrap percentage represents components that are scrapped during production when picking from inventory, whereas the scrap percentage on routing lines represents scrapped output before putting on inventory. - -9. In the **Routing Link Code** field, enter a code to connect the component to a specific operation. For more information, see the "To create routing links" section in [How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md). -10. To copy lines from an existing production BOM, choose the **Copy BOM** action to select existing lines. -11. Certify the production BOM. -12. You can now attach the new production BOM to the card of the parent item in question. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> To recalculate the item’s standard cost from the item card, choose the **Manufacturing** action, and then choose the **Calc. Standard Cost** action. - -## To create a new versions of a production BOM -New versions of production BOMs are used when, for example, an item is replaced by another item, or when a customer requires a special version of a product. The version principle enables various versions of a production BOM to be managed. The structure of the production BOM version corresponds to the structure of the production BOM. The basic difference is in the time validity of the versions. The validity is defined by the starting date. - -The starting date indicates the start of the period in which this version is valid. For all other considerations, the starting date is a filter criterion for calculations and evaluations. The BOM version is valid until the next version becomes valid for its starting date. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Production BOM**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the production BOM to be copied, and then choose the **Versions** action. -3. On the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. -4. Fill in the fields as necessary. -5. In the **Version Code** field, enter the unique identification of the version. Any combination of numbers and letters is permitted. - - The newly created version is automatically assigned the status **New**. -6. When the BOM version is completed, setting the **Status** field to **Certified**. - -The time validity of the version is specified by the **Starting Date** field. - -> [!NOTE] -> Select the **Item** option in the **Type** field to use an item from your item master data in the production BOM. If the item also has a production BOM, whereby the **Production BOM No.** field is filled in on the item card, this production BOM is also considered. -> -> Select the **Production BOM** option if you want to use a phantom production BOM on the line. -> -> Phantom production BOMs serve for structuring products. This production BOM type never leads to a finished product, but is used exclusively for determining the dependent demand. Phantom production BOMs do not have their own item master data. - -## Quantity Calculation Formula on Production BOMs -The quantity is calculated taking into consideration different dimensions which are also entered on the production BOM lines. The dimensions refer to an order unit of the respective item. The length, width, depth and weight can be entered as dimensions. - -The Calculation Formula, Length, Width, Depth and Weight columns are not displayed, because they are only used by some users. If you wish to use the calculation of the quantity, you must first display these columns. - -The relation of the individual components is defined by the calculation formula. The following possibilities are available as a calculation formula: - -- **Empty** - No consideration of dimensions. (Quantity = Quantity per.) -- **Length** - Quantity = Quantity per * Length -- **Length x Width** - Quantity = Quantity per * Length x Width -- **Length x Width x Depth** - Quantity = Quantity per x Length x Width x Depth -- **Weight** - Quantity = Quantity per x Weight - -### Example -In a production BOM, seventy metal parts with the dimensions length = 0.20 m and width = 0.15 m are required. The values are entered as follows: Calculation Formula = Length x Width, Length = 20, Width = 15, Quantity per = 70. The quantity is given by the Quantity per x Length * Width, that is, Quantity = 70 x 0.20 m x 0.15 m = 2.1 m2. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders-from-sales-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders-from-sales-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index b4ad0a3d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders-from-sales-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Production Orders from Sales Orders - description: You can create production orders from sales orders in the Sales & Marketing department. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Production Orders from Sales Orders -You can create production orders for produced items directly from sales orders. - -## To create a production order from a sales order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the sales order you want to create a production order for. -3. Choose the **Planning** action. In the **Sales Order Planning** window, you can view the availability of the sales order item. -4. Choose the **Create Prod. Order** action. -5. Select the status and order type. -6. Choose the **Yes** button to create the production order. - -You can also choose to make a project production order. For more information, see [How to: Plan Project Orders](production-how-to-plan-project-orders.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index b032e8f8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-production-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Production Order Headers - description: You can create a production order manually, and the first step is to create a production order header. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Production Order Headers -You can create a production order manually, and the first step is to create a production order header. - -Production orders are typically created automatically by a planning function to fulfill a known demand. For more information, see [Planning](production-planning.md). - -In the following procedure, a firm planned production order is created. You can also create production orders with a different status. - -## To create a production order header -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **No.** field, insert the next number in the series. -4. In the **Source Type** field, select the source of the production order. - - Here you can select to produce for a family of items. For more information, see [How to: Work With Production Families](production-how-work-family.md). -5. In the **Source No.** field, select the item number, family, or sales header for which the production order is to be generated. -6. Fill in the **Quantity** and **Due Date** fields according to your specifications. - -When production requirements change, such as components or operations, you can quickly replan the production order. For more information, see [How to: Replan or Refresh Production Orders Directly](production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-routings.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-routings.md deleted file mode 100644 index 29e7bab1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-routings.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Routings - description: A routing holds master data that captures the process requirements of a given produced item. Once a production order is created for that item, its routing will govern the scheduling of operations as represented in the **Prod. Order Routing** window under the production order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Routings -Manufacturing companies use routings to visualize and direct the manufacturing process. - -The routing is the basis of process scheduling, capacity scheduling, scheduled assignment of material needs, and manufacturing documents. - -As for production BOMs, the routings are assigned to the manufacturing end item. A routing holds master data that captures the process requirements of a given produced item. Once a production order is created for that item, its routing will govern the scheduling of operations as represented in the **Prod. Order Routing** window under the production order. - -Before you can set up a routing, the following must be in place: - -- Item cards are created for parent items that take part in manufacturing. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). -- Production resources are set up. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Work Centers and Machine Centers](production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md). - -## To create a routing -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Routings**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. In the **Type** field, select **Serial** to calculate the production routing according to the value in the **Operation No.** field. - Select **Parallel** to calculate the operations according to the value in the **Next Operation No.** field. -5. To edit the routing, set the **Status** field to **New** or **Under Development**. To activate it, set the **Status** field to **Certified**. - - Proceed to fill in the routing lines. -6. In the **Operation No.** field, enter the number of the first operation, for example, **10**. -7. In the **Type** field, specify which kind of resource is used, for example, **Work Center**. -8. In the **No.** field, select the resource to be used, or type it in the field. -9. In the **Routing Link Code** field, enter a code to connect the component to a specific operation. For more information, see the "To create routing links" section. -10. In the **Run Time** and **Setup Time** fields, enter the process times needed to perform the operation. - - > [!NOTE] - > Setup time is calculated per production order, whereas run time is calculated per produced item. - -11. In the **Concurrent Capacities** field, specify how many units of the selected resource are used to perform the operation. For example, two people allocated to one packing operation will halve the run time. -12. Continue to fill in lines for all operations involved in producing the item in question. -13. To copy lines from an existing routing, choose the **Copy Routing** action to select existing lines. -14. Certify the routing. -15. You can now attach the new routing to the card of the production item in question, by filling in the **Routing No.** field. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Remember also to recalculate the item’s standard cost from the **Item** card: Choose the **Manufacturing** action, select the **Calc. Standard Cost** action, and then select the **All Levels** action. - -## To create routing links -You can create routing links to connect components to specific operations in order to retain their relationship even though the production BOM or routing is modified. It also facilitates just-in-time flushing of components, namely when the specific linked operation starts, not when the complete production order is released. For more information see [How to: Flush Components According to Operation Output](production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output.md). - -Another important benefit is that linked components and operations are displayed in a logical process structure when you use the **Production Journal** window for output and consumption posting. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Routings**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the routing that contains the operations that you want to link. - - Make sure the routing status is **Under Development**. - -3. On the relevant routing line, in the **Routing Link Code** field, select a code. -4. Proceed to add different routing link codes to other operations in the routing, if relevant. - - > [!NOTE] - > You should not use the same routing link code in different operations on a routing because you may incorrectly link a component to two different operations, so that it is consumed two times. - > - > It is a good idea to name the routing link code after the operation in order to ensure operation-specific routing links. - -5. Set the routing status to **Certified**. - - Routing link codes are now assigned to operations. Next, you must create the actual link by assigning the same codes to specific components in the relevant production BOM. - -6. Open the **Production BOM** that contains the components that you want to link to the above operations. For more information, see [How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md). -7. Make sure the BOM status is **Under Development**. -8. On the relevant production BOM line, in the **Routing Link Code** field, select the code that you have just assigned to the relevant operation. -9. Proceed to add routing link codes to other components according to the unique operations where they are used. -10. Set the production BOM status to **Certified**. - - > [!NOTE] - > To enable the routing links on an existing production order, you must refresh the productio1n order. For more information, see [How to: Create Production Orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md). - -The selected components will now be linked to the selected operations when you create or refresh a production order using the production BOM and routing in question. This is visible in the **Prod. Order Components** window under the production order, and here you can also remove and add the defined routing link codes at any time. - -## To assign personnel, tools, and quality measures to routing operations. -If you require personnel with qualifications, special knowledge, or special authorization for an operation, you can assign these personnel to the operation. In addition, you can assign tools and quality requirements to the operation. This procedure describes how to assign personnel. The steps are similar for other types of operation information. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Routings**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant routing. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, select the line that you want to process, and then choose the **Personnel** action. -4. Fill in the fields in the **Routing Personnel** window. -5. Choose the **OK** button to exit the window. The entered values are copied and assigned to the operation. - -## To create a new versions of a routing -The version principle enables you to manage several versions of a routing. The structure of the routing version corresponds to the structure of the routing consisting of the routing version header and the routing version lines. The basic difference is defined by the starting date. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Routings**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the routing to be copied, and then choose the **Versions** action. -3. In the **Routing Versions** window, choose the **New** action. -4. Fill in the fields as necessary. -5. In the **Version Code** field, enter the unique identification of the version. Any combination of numbers and letters is permitted. - - The newly created version is automatically assigned the status **New**. -6. To create operation lines, select the first blank line, and then fill in the **Operation No.** field according to the sequence of operations. - - The operation lines are sorted in ascending order by operation numbers. To be able to make changes later, we recommend you to select adequate step widths. The **Next Operation No.** field refers to the following operation. The number of the operation can be entered directly. - -7. When the routing version is completed, setting the **Status** field to **Certified**. - -The time validity of the version is specified by the **Starting Date** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md deleted file mode 100644 index f860fba0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Shop Calendars - description: A work center calendar specifies the working days and hours, shifts, holidays, and absences that determine the work center’s gross available capacity, measured in time, according to its defined efficiency and capacity values. Creating and enabling a work center calendar involves several preparatory tasks. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Shop Calendars -A work center or machine calendar specifies the working days and hours, shifts, holidays, and absences that determine the center’s gross available capacity, measured in time, according to its defined efficiency and capacity values. - -As a foundation for calculating a specific work or machine center calendar, you must first set up one or more general shop calendars. A shop calendar defines a standard work week according to start and end times of each working day and the work shift relation. In addition, the shop calendar defines the fixed holidays during a year. - -The following describes how to set up work center calendars. The steps are similar when setting up machine center calendars. - -## To create work shifts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Work Shifts**, and then choose the related link. -2. On a blank line, enter a number in the **Code** field to identify the work shift, for example, **1**. -3. Describe the work shift in the **Description** field, for example, **1st shift**. -4. Optionally, fill in lines for a second or third work shift. - -Even if your work centers do not work in different work shifts, enter at least one work shift code. - -## To set up a shop calendar -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Shop Calendars**, and then choose the related link. -2. On a blank line, enter a number in the **Code** field to identify the shop calendar. -3. Describe the shop calendar in the **Description** field. -4. Choose the **Working Days** action. -5. In the **Shop Calendar Working Days** window, define a complete work week, with the start and end times for each day. - - In the **Work Shift Code** field, select one of the shifts that you previously defined. Add a line for every working day and every shift. For example: - - Monday 07:00 15:00 1 - Tuesday 07:00 15:00 1 - - If you need a shop calendar with two work shifts, you must fill it in in this manner: - - Monday 07:00 15:00 1 - Monday 15:00 23:00 2 - Tuesday 07:00 15:00 1 - Tuesday 15:00 23:00 2 - - Any week days that you do not define in the shop calendar, such as Saturday and Sunday, are considered non-working days and will have zero available capacity in a work center calendar. - - When all the working days of a week are defined, you can close the **Shop Calendar Working Days** window and proceed to enter holidays. - -6. In the **Shop Calendars** window, select the shop calendar, and then choose the **Holidays** action. -7. In the **Shop Calendar Holidays** window, define the holidays of the year by entering the start date and time, the end time, and description of each holiday on individual lines. For example: - - 04/07/14 0:00:00 23:59:00 Summer Holiday - 05/07/14 0:00:00 23:59:00 Summer Holiday - 06/07/14 0:00:00 23:59:00 Summer Holiday - -The defined holidays will have zero available capacity in a work center calendar. - -The shop calendar can now be assigned to a work center to calculate the work shop calendar that will govern all operation scheduling at that work center. - -## To calculate a work center calendar - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Work Centers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the work center that you want to update. -3. In the **Shop Calendar Code** field, select which shop calendar to use as the foundation for a work center calendar. -4. Choose the **Calendar** action. -5. In the **Work Center Calendar** window, choose the **Show Matrix** action. - - The left side of the matrix window lists the work centers that are set up. The right side shows a calendar displaying the available capacity values for each working day in the defined unit of measure, for example, **480** minutes. Each line represents the calendar of one work center. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also select to view the capacity values for each week or month by changing the selection in the **View By** field in the **Work Center Calendar** window. - - To reflect the new shop calendar as a line on the selected work center, it must first be calculated. - -6. Choose the **Calculate** action. -7. On the **Work Center** FastTab, you can set a filter to only calculate for one work center. If you do not set a filter, all existing work center calendars will be calculated. -8. Define the starting and ending dates of the calendar period that should be calculated, for example, one year from 01/01/14 to 31/12/14. -9. Choose the **OK** button to calculate capacity. - -Calendar entries are now created or updated displaying the available capacity for each period according to the following three sets of master data: - -- The working days and shift defined in the assigned shop calendar. -- The value in the **Capacity** field on the work center card. -- The value in the **Efficiency** field on the work center card. - -The calculated work center calendar will now define when and how much capacity is available at this work center. This controls the detailed scheduling of operations performed at the work center. - -## To record work center absence -1. In the **Work Center Calendar** window, choose the **Show Matrix** action. -2. In the **Work Center Calendar Matrix** window, select the work center and calendar day when the absence time should be recorded, and then choose the **Absence** action. -3. In the **Absence** window, define the starting time, ending time, and description of that day’s absence. For example: - - 25/01/01 08:00 10:00 Maintenance - -4. Choose the **Update** action, and then close the **Absence** window. - -The capacity of the selected day has now decreased by the recorded absence time. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Base Calendars](across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md) -[How to: Set Up Work Centers and Machine Centers](production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output.md deleted file mode 100644 index a3af1c3e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Flush Components According to Operation Output - description: For items that are set up with backward flushing method, the default behavior is to calculate and post component consumption when you change the status of a released production order to **Finished**. For more information, see Flushing Method. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Flush Components According to Operation Output -For items that are set up with backward flushing method, the default behavior is to calculate and post component consumption when you change the status of a released production order to **Finished**. - -If you also define routing link codes, then calculation and posting occurs when each operation is finished, and the quantity that was actually consumed in the operation is posted. For more information, see [How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md). - -For example, if a production order to produce 800 meters requires 8 kg of a component, then when you post 200 meters as output, 2 kg are automatically posted as consumption. - -This functionality is useful for the following reasons: - -- **Inventory Valuation** - Value entries for output and consumption are created in parallel as the production order progresses. Without routing link codes, the inventory value will increase as output is posted and then decrease at a later point in time when the value of component consumption is posted together with the finished production order. -- **Inventory Availability** - With gradual consumption posting, the availability of component items is more up-to-date, which is important to maintain the internal balance between demand and supply. Without routing link codes, other demands for the component may believe that it is available as long as it is pending a delayed consumption posting. -- **Just-in-Time** – With the ability to customize products to customer requests, you can minimize waste by making sure that work and system changes only occur when it is necessary. - -The following procedure shows how to combine backward flushing and routing link codes so that the quantity that is flushed for each operation is proportional to the actual output of the finished operation. - -## To flush components according to operation output -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Replenishment** FastTab, in the **Flushing Method** field, select **Forward**. - - > [!NOTE] - > Select **Pick+ Forward** if the component is used in a location that is set up for directed put-away and pick. - -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Routings**, and then choose the related link. -5. Define routing link codes for every operation that consumes the component. For more information, see [How to: Create Routings ](production-how-to-create-routings.md). -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Production BOM**, and then choose the related link. -7. Define routing link codes from each instance of the component to the operation where it is consumed. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > The component must have a routing link to the last operation in the routing. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-modify-planning-suggestions-in-a-graphical-view.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-modify-planning-suggestions-in-a-graphical-view.md deleted file mode 100644 index a103e75c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-modify-planning-suggestions-in-a-graphical-view.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Modify Planning Suggestions in a Graphical View - description: A typical planning activity is to change or add planning worksheet lines to modify the suggested supply orders before you commit them by running the **Carry out Action Message** function. An alternative to doing this in the planning worksheet is to use a graphical view. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Modify Planning Suggestions in a Graphical View -A typical planning activity is to change or add planning worksheet lines to modify the suggested supply orders before you commit them by running the **Carry out Action Message** function. An alternative to doing this in the planning worksheet is to use a graphical view. - -In the **Item Availability by Timeline** window, you can modify certain supply orders and suggestions by dragging elements on the x-axis to change quantity or dragging elements on the y-axis to change due date. - - In the **Item Availability by Timeline** window and the **Planning Worksheet** window you can make the following changes: - -- Modify a suggested supply order that only exists as a planning line. -- Modify an existing supply order that the planning system suggests to change. -- Create a new suggested supply order and modify it. - -For more information about the planning line types that are shown, see the Description field on the **Event Changes** FastTab. - -When you choose **Save Changes** in the **Item Availability by Timeline** window, the modifications that you have made are copied to the planning or requisition worksheet. You can now implement them using the **Carry Out Action Msg.-Plan.** function. - -The following procedure shows how to modify supply suggestions by drag and drop. As an alternative, you can change the **Due Date** and **Quantity** fields on the **Event Changes** FastTab and immediately see the changes graphically on the **Timeline** FastTab in the **Planning Worksheet** window. - -## To modify suggested supply orders in the graphical view -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Availability by Timeline**, and then choose the related link. - - The **Item Availability by Timeline** window opens with the item number, location, and variant of the item on the selected planning line prefilled in the **Options** FastTab. The **Timeline** FastTab shows a graphical representation of the item’s projected inventory, including planning suggestions. - -2. Make sure that the **Include Planning Suggestions** field is selected. -3. Find the suggested supply order that you want to modify. You can identify modifiable elements by the green circle and the disk icon. For more information about the different symbols, see the "Symbols and Icons on the Timeline FastTab" section. -4. Place the pointer over the green circle until it enlarges and the pointer changes to Move shape (four arrows). -5. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the pointer up or down to modify the quantity. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the pointer left or right to modify the due date. -6. In addition to moving elements by drag and drop, you can modify planning suggestions by using a number of drop-down menu functions. Access the drop-down menu for the green circle of a suggested supply element and select one the following functions - - |Function|Description| - |--------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Create New Supply**|Creates a new element point where you access the drop-down menu, which represents a new suggested supply order. It becomes a new line in the planning worksheet when you choose **Save Changes**.

**NOTE:** If the **Location Filter** or **Variant Filter** fields on the **Options** FastTab are empty or have more than one filter value, then the new supply is created and later saved to the planning or requisition worksheet with the following codes:

* If the filter field is empty, then the new supply is created without a location or variant code.

* If more than one filter value is defined, then the new supply is created for the first filter value according to the sorting method.

If you want another variant or location code, then you must manually change it on the new planning line.| - |**Auto-Adjust Supply**|Optimizes a new supply that you have created in the graph by making sure that it results in zero inventory before the next supply.| - |**Delete Supply**|Deletes the element in the **Timeline** FastTab and deletes the planning line when you choose **Save Changes**. The icon changes to a disk that has a red cross when the supply has been deleted.

**NOTE:** You can only delete a supply of action message type **New**. After you choose **Save Changes**, you must manually delete the planning line in question in the planning or requisition worksheet.| - -7. Choose the **Reload** action if you want to reset all the changes that you have made after you last opened the **Item Availability by Timeline** window or selected **Reload**. -8. When the elements are placed where you want them in the diagram, choose **Save Changes** to copy modified quantity and date changes to the planning or requisition lines that represent the graphical elements. - -To implement the supply plan changes, you must follow the resulting action messages from the planning or requisition worksheet. For more information, see Carry Out Action Msg.-Plan.. - -## Symbols and Icons on the Timeline FastTab - - |Symbol/Icon|Description| - |------------------|---------------------------------------| - |Black cross|Orders (both supply and demand).

- Cannot be modified.
- Visible when the **Show Projected Inventory** field is selected (orange graph).| - |Red circle|Existing supply orders that are not in planning suggestions.

- Cannot be modified.
- Visible when the **Show Projected Inventory** field is selected (orange graph).| - |Yellow star|Forecast demand.

- Cannot be modified.
- Visible when the **Forecast Name** field has a value.

When both the **Show Projected Inventory** and the **Include Planning Suggestions** fields are selected, then each yellow star has a linked counterpart in the opposite graph. This illustrates how a suggested supply fulfills the forecasted demand.| - |Green circle with an icon shaped as a disk that has a red cross|Suggested supply order with action message *Cancel*.

- Cannot be modified.
- Visible when the **Include Planning Suggestions** field is selected (green graph).| - |Green circle with an icon shaped as a disk that has a star|Suggested supply orders with action message *New*.

- Can be modified.
- Visible when the **Include Planning Suggestions** field is selected (green graph).| - |Green circle with an icon shaped as a disk that has one or two arrows|Suggested supply orders with action message *Reschedule*, *Change Qty.*, or *Resched. and Chg. Qty.*

- Can be modified.
- Visible when the **Include Planning Suggestions** field is selected (green graph).

The arrows reflect the direction of the planning suggestion. For example, a left arrow together with an up arrow reflects a *Resched. and Chg. Qty.* action message that consists of a backward rescheduling and a quantity increase.| - || - -When you access the drop-down menu for the **Timeline** FastTab, the following functions appear depending what you choose - - |Function|Description| - |--------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Create New Supply**|Creates a new element on the point where you access the drop-down menu, which represents a new suggested supply order. It becomes a new line in the planning worksheet when you choose **Save Changes** on the **Process** tab.

Any filter values that are defined in the **Location Filter** or **Variant Filter** fields on the **Options** FastTab will be applied to the new supply order. **Note:** If the filter fields are empty or have more than one filter value, then the new supply order is created by using the following codes:
  • If the filter field is empty, then the new supply is created without a location or variant code.
  • If more than one filter value is defined, then the new supply is created by using the first filter value according to the sorting order.
If you want another variant or location code in the new supply order, then you must manually change it on the new planning line.| - |**Auto-Adjust Supply**|Optimizes a new supply that you have created in the graph by making sure that it creates zero inventory before the next supply.| - |**Delete Supply**|Deletes the element in the **Timeline** FastTab and deletes the planning line when you choose **Save Changes** on the **Process** tab. The icon changes to a disk that has a red cross when the supply has been deleted. **Note:** You can only delete a supply of action message type *New*. After you choose **Save Changes** on the **Process** tab, you must manually delete the planning line in question in the planning or requisition worksheet.| - |**Show Document**|Opens the order, planning line, or forecast that the element represents.| - |**Zoom Out (Ctrl++)**|Makes the scale of the x-axis larger, so that fewer days are shown. **Note:** You can also do this by pressing Ctrl + scroll mouse wheel.| - |**Zoom In (Ctrl+-)**|Makes the scale of the x-axis smaller, so that more days are shown. **Note:** You can also do this by pressing Ctrl + scroll mouse wheel.| - |**Reset Zoom (Ctrl+0)**|Reverts the scale of the x-axis to what was used before you zoomed.| - -In addition to the keyboard actions that were mentioned earlier, you can also use the following keyboard actions in the **TimeLine** FastTab. - - |Keyboard Action|Description| - |---------------------|---------------------------------------| - |Ctrl + scroll mouse wheel|Changes the scale of the x-axis.| - |Select an element, then press Shift+Arrow|Moves the element in the direction of the arrow stroke.| - |Tab|Moves to the next element.| - |Shift+Tab|Moves to the previous element.| - |While moving an element, press Esc.|Cancels the move. **Note:** Does not work if you have released the mouse button.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9e239c89..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,118 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Plan Order by Order - description: This planning task can be performed in the **Order Planning** window, which displays all new demand along with availability information and suggestions for supply. It provides the visibility and tools needed to effectively plan demand from sales lines and component lines and then create different types of supply orders directly. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Plan for New Demand Order by Order -This planning task can be performed in the **Order Planning** window, which displays all new demand along with availability information and suggestions for supply. It provides the visibility and tools needed to effectively plan demand from sales lines and component lines and then create different types of supply orders directly. - -You can enter the **Order Planning** window in two ways depending on your focus: From an order that you want to plan for specifically or in batch mode because you want to plan for all and any new demand. - - -## To plan for new production order demand -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planned Production Orders**, and then choose the related link. (You can perform these steps for planned, firm planned, or released production orders). -2. Open the production order you want to plan for, and then choose the **Planning** action. -3. In the **Order Planning** window, choose the **Calculate Plan** action. - -The window displays planning lines according to the view filter **Production Demand**, meaning unfulfilled component lines of all existing production orders. Demand for only the one production order is not shown because it is necessary to plan for one production order with an overview of demand for potentially earlier components lines. Planning lines for the production order in context are expanded. - -## To plan for any new demand -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Order Planning**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Order Planning** window, choose the **Calculate Plan** action. -3. Choose the **Expand (+)** button in front of the date in the **Demand Date** field to see the underlying planning lines that represent demand lines with insufficient availability. -4. For each expanded planning line, that is, demand line, you can see values in information fields at the bottom of the window. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Qty. on Other Locations**|Shows if the item exists on another location. You can then look up and select it.| - |**Substitutes Exist**|Shows if a substitute item is created for the item. You can then look up and select it. Note that this feature only applies to components, that is, from demand lines of type **Production**.| - |**Quantity Available**|Shows the total availability of the item, that is, the Projected Available Balance.| - |**Earliest Date Available**|Shows the arrival date of an inbound supply order that can cover the needed quantity on a date later than the demand date.| - -5. In the **Replenishment System** field, select which type of supply order to create. - - The default value is that of the item card, or SKU card, but you can change it to one of three options: - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Purchase**|Creates a purchase order.| - |**Transfer**|Creates a transfer order.| - |**Prod. Order**|Creates a production order.| - - In the **Supply From** field you must select a value according to the selected replenishment system. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the field is not filled in, the system will display an error message when you use the **Make Supply Order** function, and no supply order will be created for the planning line in question. This, however, is not the case if the replenishment system is **Prod. Order**. - -6. From the **Supply From** field, you can look up in the relevant list and select where the supply should come from: - - - If replenishment system is **Purchase**, the look-up button in this field looks up in the **Item Vendor Catalog** window. - - If replenishment system is **Transfer**, the look-up button in this field looks up in the **Location List** window. - - In case the item exists in another location, the **Qty. on Other Location** field at the bottom shows a value and you can then look up and select the location from which the item should be supplied when you make the transfer order. - - If a substitute exists for the demanded item, the **Substitute Exists** field is set to **Yes**, and you can then look up to the **Item Substitution Entries** window and select the substitute. - -7. Select the **Reserve** check box if you want to make a reservation between the supply order you are creating and the demand line that it is created for. It is empty by default. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only select this check box if the item has **Optional** or **Always** in the **Reserve** field on its item card. - -8. In the **Qty. to Order** field, you can enter the quantity that will go on the supply order you are creating. - The default value is the same quantity as that in the **Needed Quantity** field. But you may decide to order more or less than this quantity based on your knowledge of the demand situation. If, for example, you see in the **Order Planning** window that several unrelated demand lines are for the same purchased item, and they are due around the same date, you can consolidate these by entering the total needed quantity in the **Qty. to Order** field of one line, and then delete the other, obsolete planning lines for that item. - -9. In the **Due Date** and **Order Date** fields, you can enter the dates that should apply to the created supply orders. - - These two fields are interrelated according to the **Default Safety Lead Time** field, which can be found in the **Manufacturing Setup** window. By default, the due date is the same as the demand date, but you can change this as you like. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you enter a date later than the demand date, you will receive a warning message. - -## To make supply orders -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planned Production Orders**, and then choose the related link. You can perform these steps for a planned, firm planned, or released production order. -2. Open the production order you want to plan for, and then choose the **Planning** action. -3. Place the cursor on a relevant planning line, and then choose the **Make Orders** action. -4. In the **Make Supply Orders** window, on the **Order Planning** FastTab, in the **Make Orders for** field, select one of the following options. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**The Active Line**|Make a supply order only for the line where the cursor is placed.| - |**The Active Order**|Make supply orders for all lines in the order where the cursor is placed.| - |**All Lines**|Make supply orders for all lines in the **Order Planning** window.| - -5. On the **Options** FastTab, define what kind of supply orders, or requisition worksheet lines, should be made. - - > [!NOTE] - > The settings you last made in the **Make Supply Orders** window will be saved under your user ID so that they are the same the next time you use the window. - -6. Choose the **OK** button to make the suggested supply orders or requisition worksheet lines. - -You have now planned for the unfulfilled demand by making respective supply orders. Details about specific work flows when using the **Order Planning** window would depend on a company’s internal policies. - -When you have finished your planning work in the **Order Planning** window, for example defined an alternative way to supply the quantity, you can proceed to create supply orders for one or more of the planning lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> The supply orders you create may introduce new dependent demand, for example for underlying production orders, and you should therefore choose **Calculate Plan** again to find and resolve this before moving down the list. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-project-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-project-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index e1bc13e9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-plan-project-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Plan Project Orders - description: This planning task starts from a sales order and uses the **Sales Order Planning** window. Once you have created a project production order, you can plan it further by using the **Order Planning** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Plan Project Orders -This planning task starts from a sales order and uses the **Sales Order Planning** window. Once you have created a project production order, you can plan it further by using the **Order Planning** window. - -## To create a project production order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the sales order that represents the production project, and then choose the **Planning** action. -4. In the **Sales Order Planning** window, choose the **Create Prod. Order** action. -5. In the **Create Order from Sales** window, in the **Order Type** field, select **Project Order**. -6. Choose the **Yes** button. -7. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Production Orders**, and then choose the related link. -8. Open the production order just created. - - Notice that the **Source Type** field of the production order contains **Sales Header** and the order has multiple lines, one for each sales line item that must be produced. -9. Choose the **Planning** action. -10. In the **Order Planning** window, choose the **Refresh** action to calculate new demand. - -The order header line for the project order is displayed with all unfulfilled demand lines expanded under it. Although the production order contains lines for several produced items, the total demand for all production order lines is listed under one order header line in the **Order Planning** window, and the original customer name is displayed. You can now proceed to plan for the demand as described in [How to: Plan for New Demand Order by Order](production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> Demand lines in the project production order that have **Prod. Order** in their **Replenishment System** field represent underlying production orders. After you have generated these production orders, you must again calculate a plan in the **Order Planning** window to identify any unfulfilled component demand for them. In that case, they are displayed as demand lines under a normal production order header line, meaning, the project relation is no longer visible in the window. However, if you are using the Order Tracking feature, then you can look back and forth to all supply orders made under the original sales order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-capacities.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-capacities.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c3e00b8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-capacities.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Capacities - description: In the capacity journal, you post consumed capacities that are not assigned to the production order. For example, maintenance work must be assigned to capacity, but not to a production order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Capacities -In the capacity journal, you post consumed capacities that are not assigned to the production order. For example, maintenance work must be assigned to capacity, but not to a production order. - -## To post capacities -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Capacity Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the **Posting Date** and **Document No.** fields. -3. In the **Type** field, enter the type of the capacity, either **Machine Center** or **Work Center**, that you are posting. -4. In the **No.** field, enter the number of the machine center or work center. -5. Enter the relevant data in the other fields, such as **Starting Time**, **Ending Time**, **Quantity**, and **Scrap**. -6. Choose the **Post** action to post the capacities. - -## To view work center ledger entries -In the **Work Center Card** and **Machine Center Card** windows, you can view the posted capacities as a result of finished production orders. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Work Centers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant **Work Center** card from the list, and then choose the **Capacity Ledger Entries** action. - -The **Capacity Ledger Entries** window displays the posted entries from the work center in the order they were posted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-consumption.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-consumption.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4256611a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-consumption.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Batch Post Consumption - description: If the flushing method is **Manual**, you must post the components manually, using a consumption journal. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Batch Post Production Consumption -If the flushing method is **Manual**, you must post the components manually, using a consumption journal. - -You can also set the system up to automatically post (*flush*) components when you start or finish production orders. For more information, see [Enable Flushing of Components According to Operation Output](production-how-to-flush-components-according-to-operation-output.md). - -## To post consumption for one or more production order lines -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Consumption Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields with the production order data and the consumption data. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - If the warehouse location where the components are stored is set up to use bins but does not require pick processing, assign a bin code to the journal line to indicate where the items should be taken from in the warehouse. For more information, see [How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md). -3. Choose the **Post** action to post the consumption. The related item ledger entries are reduced. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8e51a33d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Batch Post Production Output and Run Times - description: The output quantity represents the work progress in the form of the finished quantity. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Batch Post Output and Run Times -The output quantity represents the work progress in the form of the finished quantity. - -> [!NOTE] -> Only when you post output quantity on the last operation, the inventory is updated automatically. - -## To post output quantities for one or more production order lines -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Output Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields with the production order data and the output data. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. If the operation has been completed, select the **Finished** field. - - If the warehouse location where the items should be put away uses bins but does not require put-away processing, assign a bin code to the journal line to specify where the items should be placed in the warehouse. For more information, see [How to: Put Away Production or Assembly Output](warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output.md). - -4. Choose the **Post** acto post the operations. The output quantity will be posted. The item is now available for shipping. - -## To post run times for one or more production order lines -The run time represents work progress in the form of the necessary working time. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Output Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields with the production order data and the output data. -3. If the operation is completed, select the **Finished** field. -4. Choose the **Post** action to post the time spent per operation. Capacity ledger entries are updated for the used work or machine centers. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-scrap.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-scrap.md deleted file mode 100644 index 342e3268..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-post-scrap.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Scrap Manually - description: If scrap is produced during processing, it can be entered in the output journal. Note that the scrap quantity does not increase the output quantity. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Scrap Manually -If scrap is produced during processing, it can be entered in the output journal. - -> [!NOTE] -> The scrap quantity does not increase the output quantity. - -## To post scrap manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Output Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. In the **Scrapped Quantity** field, enter the scrap quantity. -4. In the **Scrap Code** field, enter the scrap code. -5. Choose the **Post** action to post the specified scrap per operation. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output.md deleted file mode 100644 index 595d077e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Register Consumption and Output for One Production Order - description: This execution task is performed in the **Production Journal** window. The journal combines the functions of the separate consumption journal and output journals into one journal. The combined journal is accessed directly from a released production order. Its main purpose is to manually post the consumption of components, the quantity of end items produced, and the time spent in operations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Register Consumption and Output for One Released Production order line -This execution task is performed in the **Production Journal** window. The journal combines the functions of the separate consumption journal and output journals into one journal. The combined journal is accessed directly from a released production order. Its main purpose is to manually post the consumption of components, the quantity of end items produced, and the time spent in operations. The values are posted to ledger entries under the released production order. Consumption quantities are posted as negative item ledger entries, output quantities are posted as positive ledger entries, and times spent are posted as capacity ledger entries. Such posted values can also be viewed at the bottom of the journal as actual quantities. - -> [!NOTE] -> Because consumption data is processed together with output data, this journal offers an opportunity to display linked components and operations in a logical process structure. Components are indented under their respective operation. This requires that you use routing link codes. - -> [!NOTE] -> Components without routing link codes are listed first in the journal. - -## To register consumption and output -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon enter **Released Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a released production order line that is ready for registration, and then on the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Production Journal** action. - - The **Production Journal** window opens showing journal lines for the production order line according to the **Prod. Order Component** and **Prod. Order Routing** windows. These lines originate from the production BOM and routing assigned to the item that is being produced. For more information, see [How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-routings.md). - -3. In the **Posting Date** field at the top of the journal, enter a posting date that applies to all lines. The work date is entered by default. The field is meant as a quick way to align posting dates on all lines, if relevant. - - > [!NOTE] - > Posting dates entered on individual lines will override this field. - -4. In the **Flushing Method Filter** field at the top of the journal, you can choose to also view consumption and output that is posted automatically according to the flushing methods defined for the item and resource respectively. - - On each type of line in the journal, only the relevant fields are shown. The rest are blank and write-protected. - - When the journal is opened, it is preset with the quantities to be posted. If nothing is posted so far, all quantity fields will show by default the expected quantities carried from the production order. If partial postings have been made, the quantity fields on the lines will show the remaining quantities. The quantities and times already posted for the order are displayed at the bottom of the journal as actual entries. - - Concerning the quantities in the **Output Quantity** field, you have the option to set up which values to preset when the journal is first opened. This is done from the **Manufacturing Setup** window, **General** FastTab, in the **Preset Output Quantity** field. - -5. Proceed to enter the relevant consumption and output quantities in the editable fields. - - > [!NOTE] - > Only the output quantity on the last journal line of entry type **Output** will adjust the inventory level when posting the journal. Therefore, do not to post the journal, with the expected output quantity preset on the last output line, until all end items are actually produced. - -6. Select the **Finished** field of output lines to indicate that the operation is finished. This field is related to the **Routing Status** field on a production order routing line. -7. Choose the **Post** action to register the quantities you have entered and then close the journal. - -If values remain to be posted, the journal will contain these remaining values next time it is opened. Posted values are shown as actual values in the bottom of the journal. - -> [!NOTE] -> If an item that is being consumed is blocked, the journal will not post consumption quantities for that item. If a machine or work center is blocked, the journal will not post output quantities or process times for the output line in question. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you close the journal without posting, the changes will be lost. - -> [!WARNING] -> The **Production Journal** window cannot be used by two users simultaneously. This means that if User 2 opens the window and enters data when User 1 is already working in the window, then User 2 may lose data when User 1 closes the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8a91e638..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Replan or Refresh Production Orders Directly - description: The production order lines contain the items that are to be produced in the production order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Replan or Refresh Production Orders Directly -The **Replan** function on production orders is typically used after you have added or changed components that constitute underlying production orders. The function calculates changes made to components and routings lines, and it includes items on lower production BOM levels for which it may generate new production orders. - -Based on the changes you have made to the components and routing lines, the Replan function calculates and plans for any new demand for the production order. - -The **Refresh** function on production orders is typically used after you have done one of the following: - -- Created a production order header manually to calculate and create line data for the first time. -- Made changes to the production order header to recalculate all the line data. - -The Refresh function calculates changes made to a production order header and does not involve production BOM levels. The function calculates and initiates the values of the component lines and routing lines based on the master data defined in the assigned production BOM and routing, according to the order quantity and due date on the production order’s header. - -You can either insert the production order lines manually or use the function that calculates the production order lines from the header. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you use the Refresh function to recalculate production order lines, the old production order lines are deleted and new lines are calculated. - -## To replan a production order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the production order you want to replan. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Lines** action, and then choose the **Components** action. -4. Add a component, which is a produced item or subassembly. -5. From the production order, choose the **Replan** action. - - In the **Replan Production Order** window, proceed to define how and what to replan. -6. In the **Scheduling Direction** field, select one of the following options. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Back**|Calculates the operation sequence backwards from the earliest possible ending date, defined by due date and/or other scheduled orders, to the latest possible starting date. **Note:** This default option is relevant in the majority of situations.| - |**Forward**|Calculates the operation sequence forward from the earliest latest possible starting date, defined by due date and/or other scheduled orders, to the earliest possible ending date. **Note:** This option is only relevant for expedite orders.| - -7. In the **Plan** field, select whether to calculate production requirements for produced items on the production BOM, as follows. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**No Levels**|Do not consider lower level production. This only updates the item’s schedule, like refresh.| - |**One Level**|Plan for first-level production demand. First-level production orders may be created.| - |**All Levels**|Plan for all-level production demand. All-level production orders may be created.| - -8. Select **One Level**, and choose the **OK** button to replan the production order, and calculate and create a new underlying production order for the introduced subassembly, if it is not fully available. - -> [!NOTE] -> Changes implemented with the **Replan** function are very likely to change the capacity need of the production order and you may therefore have to reschedule operations afterwards. - -## To refresh a production order -If you have amended production order lines, components, or routing lines, you must also refresh the information on the production order. In the following procedure, the components are calculated for a firm planned production order. The steps are similar for routing lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. For more information, see [How to: Create Production orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md). -3. Choose the **Refresh** action. -4. In the **Refresh Production Order** window, select one of the following options: - - - | Option | Description | - |--------------------------|----------------------------| - | **Scheduling Direction** | **Forward** | - | | **Backward** | - | **Calculate** | **Lines** | - | | **Routings** | - | | **Component Need** | - | **Warehouse** | **Create Inbound Request** | - - -5. Choose the **OK** button to confirm your selection. Now the production order lines are calculated. - -> [!NOTE] -> Calculating production order components deletes previous changes in the components. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-reverse-output-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-reverse-output-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index d5702af9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-reverse-output-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Reverse Output Posting - description: There are times when output posting must be reversed. An example of this would be if a data entry error occurred and an incorrect amount of output is posted to a production order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reverse Output Posting -There are times when output posting must be reversed. An example of this would be if a data entry error occurred and an incorrect amount of output is posted to a production order. - -## To reverse an output posting -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Output Journal**, and then choose the related link. Select your batch. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. For more information, see [How to: Batch Post Output and Run Times](production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md). -3. In the **Applies-To Entry** field, select the associated item ledger entry. This reverses the capacity and item ledger entries. -4. Post the reversal by posting the journal. - -The output journal entries are posted to the item ledger as a positive adjustment. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) - [Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) - [Planning](production-planning.md) - [Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) - [Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-run-mps-and-mrp.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-run-mps-and-mrp.md deleted file mode 100644 index 91226b12..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-run-mps-and-mrp.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Run Full Planning, MPS and MRP - description: The terms "running the planning worksheet" or "running MRP" refer to the calculation of the master production schedule and material requirements based on actual and forecasted demand. The planning system can calculate either Master Planning Schedule (MPS) or Material Requirements Planning (MRP) on request, or it can calculate both at the same time. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Run Full Planning, MPS or MRP -The terms "running the planning worksheet" or "running MRP" refer to the calculation of the master production schedule and material requirements based on actual and forecasted demand. The planning system can calculate either Master Planning Schedule (MPS) or Material Requirements Planning (MRP) on request, or it can calculate both at the same time. - -- MPS is the calculation of a master production schedule based on actual demand and the production forecast. The MPS calculation is used for end items that have a forecast or a sales order line. These items are called MPS items and are identified dynamically when the calculation starts. -- MRP is the calculation of material requirements based on actual demand for components and the production forecast on the component level. MRP is calculated only for items that are not MPS items. The purpose of MRP is to provide time-phased formal plans, by item, to supply the appropriate item, at the appropriate time, in the appropriate location, in the appropriate quantity. - -The planning algorithms used for both MPS and MRP are identical. The planning algorithms pertain to netting, reuse of existing replenishment orders, and action messages. The planning system process examines what is needed or will be needed (demand) and what is on-hand or expected (supply). When these quantities are netted against each other, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides action messages. Action messages are suggestions to create a new order, change an order (quantity or date), or cancel an order already on order. The term "order" includes purchase orders, assembly orders, production orders, and transfer orders. - -Links created by the planning engine between demand and its related supply can be tracked in the **Order Tracking** window. For more information, see [How to: Track Relations Between Demand and Supply](production-how-track-demand-supply.md). - -Proper planning results depend on the set up done on item cards, assembly BOMs, production BOMs, and routings. - -## Methods for Generating a Plan - -- **Calculate Regenerative Plan:** This function processes or regenerates the material plan. This process starts by deleting all planned supply orders that are currently loaded. All items in the database are replanned. -- **Calculate Net Change Plan**: This function processes a net change plan. Items are considered in net change planning from two types of changes: - - **Demand/supply changes:** These include modifications to quantities on sales orders, production forecasts, assembly orders, production orders, or purchase orders. An unplanned inventory level change is also considered a quantity change. - - **Planning parameter changes:** These include changes in safety stock, reorder point, routing, bill of material, and changes to the time bucket or lead time calculation. -- **Get Action Messages:** This function serves as a short-term planning tool by issuing action messages to alert the user of any modifications made since the last regenerative or net change plan was calculated. - -With each planned method, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] generates worksheet entries assuming infinite capacity. Work center and machine center capacity is not considered when you develop schedules. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The Calculate Regenerative Plan function is the most common process. The Calculate Plan and Carry out Action Messages functions, however, can be used to run the Calculate Net Change Plan process. -> -> The Get Action Messages Plan function can be run between regenerative and net change planning runs to obtain an immediate view of the effect of schedule changes, but it is not intended as a replacement of full regenerative or net change planning processes. - -## To calculate the planning worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planning Worksheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Regenerative Plan** action to open the **Calculate Plan** window. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**MPS**|Select to initiate the calculation of a master production schedule. Items with open sales orders or production forecasts are considered in this run.| - |**MRP**|Select to initiate the calculation of material requirements planning. Items with dependent requirements are considered in this run. Typically, MPS and MRP are run at the same time. To run MPS and MRP at the same time, the **Combined MPS/MRP Calculation** field must be selected on the **Planning** FastTab in the **Manufacturing Setup** window.| - |**Starting Date**|This date is used to evaluate inventory availability. If an item's on-hand quantity is below the reorder point, the system forward-schedules a replenishment order from this date. If an item is below its safety stock (as of the starting date), the system back-schedules a replenishment order due on the planning starting date.| - |**Ending Date**|This is the ending date of the planning horizon. Neither demand nor supply is considered after this date. If the reorder cycle for an item extends beyond the ending date, the effective planning horizon for that item is equal to the order date + reorder cycle.

The planning horizon is the time that the plan is extended to. If the horizon is too short, items with a longer lead time are not ordered on time. If the horizon is too long, too much time is spent reviewing and processing information that likely changes before it is needed. It is possible to set one planning horizon for production and a longer one for purchases, although it is not required. A planning horizon for purchases and production should be set to cover the cumulative lead time for components.| - |**Stop and Show First Error**|Select if you want the planning run to stop as soon as it encounters an error. At the same time, a message is displayed with information about the first error. If an error exists, only the successful planning lines made before the error was encountered will be presented in the planning worksheet. If you do not select this field, the **Calculate Plan** batch job will continue until it has completed, that is, errors will not interrupt the batch job. If one or more errors exist, a message will display after completion with information about how many items are affected. The **Planning Error Log** window will then open to provide more details about the error and links to the affected item cards.| - |**Use Forecast**|Select a forecast that should be included as demand when you run the planning batch job. The default forecast is set up on the **Planning** FastTab in the **Manufacturing Setup** window.| - |**Exclude Forecast Before**|Define how much of the selected forecast to include in the planning run by entering a date before which forecast demand is not included, thus allowing you to exclude old information.| - |**Respect Planning Parameters for Exception Warnings**|By default, this field is selected.

Supply on planning lines with warnings is normally not modified according to planning parameters. Instead, the planning system only suggests a supply to cover the exact demand quantity. However, you can define certain planning parameters for planning lines to be respected with certain warnings.

| - -4. On the **Item** FastTab, set filters to run the planning based on item, item description, or location. -5. Choose the **OK** button. The batch job runs and then the planning worksheet is populated with the planning lines. - -## To perform action messages -1. In the **Planning Worksheet** window, choose the **Carry Out Action Message** action. -2. On the **Options** FastTab, specify how to create the supplies. Fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Field|Description| - |---------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Production Order**|Specify how you want to create production orders. You can do this directly from the planning line proposals. You can create either planned or firm planned production orders.| - |**Assembly Order**|Specify how you want to create assembly orders. You can do this directly from the planning line proposals.| - |**Purchase Order**|Specify how you want to create purchase orders. You can do this directly from the planning line proposals.

If you chose to copy the planning line proposals for purchase orders to the requisition worksheet, select the template and worksheet name.| - |**Transfer Order**|Specify how you want to create transfer orders. You can do this directly from the planning line proposals.

If you chose to copy the planning line proposals for transfer orders to the requisition worksheet, select the template and worksheet name.| - |**Combine Transfer Orders**|Select if you want to combine transfer orders.| - |**Stop and Show First Error**|Select if you want the **Carry Out Action Msg. - Plan.** batch job to stop as soon as it encounters an error. At the same time, a message is displayed with information about the firsterror. If an error exists, only the planning lines processed before the error was encountered will create supply orders.| - -3. On the **Planning Line** FastTab, you can set filters to limit the perform action messages. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -The batch job deletes the lines in the planning worksheet after it has performed the action message. The other lines remain in the planning worksheet until they are either accepted at a later date or else deleted. You can also delete the lines manually. - -## Action Messages -Action messages are issued by the order tracking system when balance is unattainable in the existing order network. They can be viewed as a suggestion for you to process changes that reestablish equilibrium between supply and demand. - -The generation of action messages occurs one level at a time, for each item's low-level code. This makes sure that all items that experience or will experience changes in supply or demand are considered. - -To avoid small, superfluous, or unimportant action messages, the user can establish dampeners, which serve to restrict the generation of action messages to only those changes that exceed the defined quantity or number of days. - -After you have reviewed the action messages and determined whether to accept some or all of the suggested changes, select the **Accept Action Message** field, and then you are ready to update the schedules accordingly. - -> [!NOTE] -> An action message is a suggestion to create a new order, cancel an order, or change the quantity or date of an order. An order is a purchase order, transfer order, or production order. - -In response to any supply/demand imbalances, the following action messages are generated. - -|Action Message|Description| -|--------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**New**|If a demand cannot be fulfilled by suggesting action messages to **Change Qty.**, **Reschedule**, or **Reschedule & Change Qty.** on existing orders, the action message **New** is generated, which suggests a new order. In addition, the message **New** is generated if there are no existing supply orders in the reorder cycle of the item in question. This parameter determines the number of periods forward and backward in the availability profile when it searches for an order to reschedule.| -|**Change Quantity**|When demand that is tracked to a supply order experiences a quantity change, the action message **Change Qty.** is generated, which indicates that the related supply should be changed relative to the change in demand. If a new demand emerges, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] searches for the nearest existing unreserved supply order in the reorder cycle, and issues a change of action message for that order.| -|**Reschedule**|When a supply or demand order experiences a date modification causing an imbalance in the order network, the action message **Reschedule** is generated. If there is a one-to-one relationship between demand and supply, an action message is generated suggesting that the supply order be moved accordingly. If the supply-order covers demand from more than one sales order, the supply order is re-scheduled equal to the date of the first demand.| -|**Resch. & Chg. Qty.**|If both the dates and quantities of an order have been modified, you must change plans with regard to both circumstances. Action messaging gathers both actions in one message, **Resched. and Chg. Qty.**, to ensure that the order network returns to balance.| -|**Cancel**|If a demand, which has been covered on an order-to-order basis, is deleted, an action message is generated to cancel the related supply order. If the relationship is not order-to-order, an action message is generated to change in order to reduce the supply. If through other factors, such as inventory adjustments, a supply order is not required at the time the action messages are generated by the user, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] suggests an action message of **Cancel** in the worksheet.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1e010110..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-set-up-work-and-machine-centers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Work Centers and Machine Centers - description: A **Work Center** card organizes the fixed values and requirements of the production resource, and thus governs the output of production performed in that work center. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/19/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Work Centers and Machine Centers -The program distinguishes between three types of capacities. These are arranged hierarchically. Each level contains the subordinate levels. - -The top level is the work center group. Work centers are assigned to the work center groups. Every work center can only belong to one work center group. - -You can assign various machine centers to every work center. A machine center may only belong to one work center. - -The planned capacity of a work center consists of the availability of the corresponding machine centers and the additional planned availability of the work center. The planned availability of the work center group is, therefore, the sum of all corresponding availabilities of the machine centers and work centers. - -The availability is stored in calendar entries. Before you set up work or machine centers, you must set up shop calendars. For more information, see [How to: Create Shop Calendars](production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md). - -## To set up a work center -The following primarily describes how to set up a work center. The steps to set up a machine center calendar are similar except for the **Routing Setup** FastTab. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Work Centers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. In the **Work Center Group** field, select the higher-level resource grouping that the work center is organized under, if relevant. Choose the **New** action in the drop-down list. -5. Select the **Blocked** field if you want to prevent the work center from being used in any processing. This means that output cannot be posted for an item that is produced at the work center. For more information, see [How to: Post Production Output](production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md). -6. In the **Direct Unit Cost** field, enter the cost of producing one unit of measure at this work center, excluding any other cost elements. This cost is often referred to as the *direct labor rate*. -7. In the **Indirect Cost %** field, enter the general operation costs of using the work center as a percentage of the direct unit cost. This percentage amount is added to the direct cost in the calculation of the unit cost. -8. In the **Overhead Rate** field, enter any non-operational costs, for example maintenance expenses, of the work center as an absolute amount. - - The **Unit Cost** field contains the calculated unit cost of producing one unit of measure at this work center, including all cost elements, as follows: - - Unit Cost = Direct Unit Cost + (Direct Unit Cost x Indirect Cost %) + Overhead Rate. - -9. In the **Unit Cost Calculation** field, define whether the above calculation should be based on the amount of time used: **Time**, or on the number of produced units: **Units**. -10. Select the **Specific Unit Cost** field if you want to define the work center’s unit cost on the routing line where it is being used. This may be relevant for operations with dramatically different capacity costs than what would normally be processed at that work center. -11. In the **Flushing Method** field, select whether output posting at this work center should be calculated and posted manually or automatically, using either of the following methods. - - |Option|Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Manual**|Concumption is posted manually in the output journal or production journal.| - |**Forward**|Consumption is calculated and posted automatically when the production order is released.| - |**Backward**|Consumption is calculated and posted automatically when the production order is finished.| - - > [!NOTE] - > If necessary, the flushing method selected here and on the **Item** card, can be overridden for individual operations by changing the setting on routing lines. - -12. In the **Unit of Measure Code** field, enter the time unit in which this work center’s cost calculation and capacity planning are made. - In order to be able to constantly monitor consumption, you must first set up a method of measure. The units you enter are basic units. For example, the processing time is measured in hours and minutes. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you select to use Days then remember that 1 day = 24 hours - and not 8 (working hours). - -13. In the **Capacity** field, define whether the work center has more than one machine or person working at the same time. If your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] installation does not include the Machine Center functionality, then the value in this field must be **1**. -14. In the **Efficiency** field, enter the percentage of the expected standard output that this work center actually outputs. If you enter **100**, it means that the work center has an actual output that is the same as the standard output. -15. Select the **Consolidated Calendar** check box if you are also using machine centers. This ensures that calendar entries are rolled up from machine center calendars. -16. In the **Shop Calendar Code** field, select a shop calendar. For more information, see [How to: Create Shop Calendars](production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md). -17. In the **Queue Time** field, specify a fixed time span that must pass before assigned work can begin at this work center. Note that queue time is added to other non-productive time elements such as wait time and move time that you may define on routing lines using this work center. - -## Example - Different Machine Centers Assigned to a Work Center -It is important to plan which capacities are to make up the total capacity when setting up the machine centers and work centers. - -If different machine centers (such as 210 Packing table 1, 310 Painting Cabin ...) are assigned to a work center, the consideration of the single capacities of the machine centers is significant because failure of one machine center can interrupt the entire process. The machine groups can be entered according to their capacity but may not be included in the planning. By deactivating the **Consolidated Calendar** field only the capacity of the work center but not the machine center is assigned in the planning. - -If, however, identical machine centers (such as 210 Packing table 1 and 220 Packing table 2) are combined in a work center, the consideration of the work center as a sum of the assigned machine centers is of interest. Therefore, the work center would be listed with zero capacity. By activating the **Consolidated Calendar** field, the common capacity is assigned to the work center. - -If capacities of work centers are to make no contribution to the total capacity, you can achieve this with efficiency = 0. - -## To set up a capacity constrained machine or work center -You must set up production resources that you regard as critical and mark them to accept a finite load instead of the default infinite load that other production resources accept. A capacity-constrained resource can be a work center or machine center that you have identified as a bottleneck and would like to establish a limited, finite load for. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not support detailed shop floor control. It plans for a feasible utilization of resources by providing a rough-cut schedule, but it does not automatically create and maintain detailed schedules based on priorities or optimization rules. - -In the **Capacity-Constrained Resources** window, you can make setup that avoids overload of specific resources and ensure that no capacity is left unallocated if it could increase the turn-around time of a production order. In the **Dampener (% of Total Capacity)** field, you can add dampener time to resources to minimize operation splitting. This enables the system to schedule load on the last possible day by exceeding the critical load percent slightly if this can reduce the number of operations that are split. - -When planning with capacity-constrained resources, the system ensures that no resource is loaded above its defined capacity (critical load). This is done by assigning each operation to the nearest available time slot. If the time slot is not big enough to complete the entire operation, then the operation will be split into two or more parts placed in the nearest available time slots. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Capacity Constrined Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -> [!NOTE] -> Operations on work centers or machine centers that are set up as constrained resources will always be planned serially. This means that if a constrained resource has multiple capacities, then those capacities can only be planned in sequence, not in parallel as they would be if the work or machine center was not set up as a constrained resource. In a constrained resource, the Capacity field on the work center or machine center is greater than 1. -> -> In case of operation splitting, the setup time is only assigned once because it is assumed that some manual adjustment is done to optimize the schedule. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Shop Calendars](production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 45a32ce2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Subcontract Manufacturing - description: When the purchase order has been created from the subcontractor worksheet, then it can be posted. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Subcontract Manufacturing -Subcontracting selected operations to vendor is common in many manufacturing companies. Subcontracting can be a rare occurrence or can be an integral part of all production processes. - -The program provides several tools for managing subcontract work: - -- Work Centers with assigned vendor: This feature enables you to set up a work center that is associated with a vendor (subcontractor). This is called a subcontract work center. You can specify a subcontract work center on a routing operation, which allows you to easily process the subcontracted activity. In addition, the cost of the operation can be designated at the routing or the work center level. -- Work Center cost based on units or time: This feature enables you to specify whether costs associated with the work center are based on the production time or a flat charge per unit. Although subcontractors commonly use a flat charge per unit to charge for their services, the program can handle both options (production time and flat charge per unit). -- Subcontracting Worksheet: This feature allows you to find the production orders with material ready to send to a subcontractor and to automatically create purchase orders for subcontract operations from production order routings. Then the program automatically posts the purchase order charges to the production order during the posting of the purchase order. Only production orders with a status of released can be accessed and used from a subcontracting worksheet. - -## Subcontract Work Centers -Subcontract Work Centers are set up the same as regular work centers with additional information. They are assigned to routings in the same manner as other work centers. - -### Subcontract Work Center Fields -This **Subcontractor No.** field designates the work center as a subcontract work center. You can enter the number of a subcontractor who supplies the work center. This field can be used to administer work centers, which are not in-house but perform processing under contract. - -If you subcontract with the vendor for a different rate for each process, then select the **Specific Unit Cost** field. This lets you set up a cost on each routing line and saves the time of re-entering each purchase order. The cost on the routing line is used in processing instead of the cost on the work center cost fields. Selecting the **Specific Unit Cost** field calculates costs for the vendor by the routing operation. - -If you subcontract at a single rate per vendor, leave the **Specific Unit Cost** field blank. The costs will be set up by filling in **Direct Unit Cost**, **Indirect Cost %**, and **Overhead Rate** fields. - -### Routings that use Subcontract Work Centers -Subcontract work centers can be used for operations on routings in the same way as regular work centers. - -You can set up a routing that uses an outside work center as a standard operational step. Alternatively, you can modify the routing for a particular production order to include an outside operation. This might be needed in an emergency such as a server not working correctly, or during a temporary period of higher demand, where the work generally performed in-house must be sent to a subcontractor. - -For more information, see [How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md). - -## Subcontracting Worksheet -Once you have calculated the subcontracting worksheet, the relevant document, in this case a purchase order, is created. - -### How to: Calculate Subcontracting Worksheets and Create Subcontract Purchase Orders -The **Subcontracting Worksheet** window functions like the **Planning Worksheet** by calculating the needed supply, in this case purchase orders, which you review in the worksheet and then create with the **Carry Out Action Message** function. - -> [!NOTE] -> Only production orders with status **Released** can be accessed and used from a subcontracting worksheet. - -### To calculate the subcontracting worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Subcontracting Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. To calculate the worksheet, choose the **Calculate Subcontracts** action. -3. In the **Calculate Subcontracts** window, set filters for the subcontracted operations, or the work centers where they are performed, to calculate only the relevant production orders. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - Review the lines in the **Subcontracting Worksheet** window. The information in this worksheet comes from the production order and production order routing lines and flows to the purchase order when that document is created. You can delete a row from the worksheet without affecting the original information, just as you can with the other worksheets. The information will reappear the next time you run the **Calculate Subcontracts** function. - -### To create the subcontract purchase order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Subcontracting Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Carry Out Action Message**. -3. Select the **Print Orders** field to print the purchase order as it is created. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -If all subcontracted operations are sent to the same vendor location, then only one purchase order is created. - -The worksheet line that was turned into a purchase order is deleted from the worksheet. Once a purchase order is created, it will not appear in the worksheet again. - -## Posting Subcontract Purchase Orders -Once the Subcontractor Purchase Orders have been created, they can be posted. Receiving the order posts a Capacity Ledger Entry to the production order and invoicing the order posts the direct cost of the purchase order to the production order. - -When the purchase is posted as received, then an output journal entry is automatically posted for the production order. This only applies if the subcontract operation is the last operation on the production order routing. - -> [!CAUTION] -> Posting output automatically for an ongoing production order when subcontracted items are received may not be desired. Reasons for this could be that the expected output quantity that is posted may be different from the actual quantity and that the posting date of the automatic output is misleading. -> -> To avoid that the expected output of a production order is posted when subcontract purchases are received, make sure the subcontracted operation is not the last one. Alternatively, insert a new last operation for the final output quantity. - -## To post a subcontract purchase order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a purchase order that is created from the subcontracting worksheet. - - On the purchase order lines, you see the same information that was in the worksheet. The **Prod. Order No.**, **Prod. Order Line No.**, **Operation No.**, and **Work Center No.** fields are filled in with the information from the source production order. - -3. Choose the **Post** action. - -When the purchase is posted as received, then an output journal entry is automatically posted for the production order. This only applies if the subcontract operation is the last operation on the production order routing. - -> [!CAUTION] -> Posting output automatically for an ongoing production order when subcontracted items are received may not be desired. Reasons for this could be that the expected output quantity that is posted may be different from the actual quantity and that the posting date of the automatic output is misleading. -> -> To avoid that the expected output of a production order is posted when subcontract purchases are received, make sure the subcontracted operation is not the last one. Alternatively, insert a new last operation for the final output quantity. - -When the purchase order is posted as invoiced, then the direct cost of the purchase order is posted to the production. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure.md deleted file mode 100644 index b01f80e0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-use-the-manufacturing-batch-unit-of-measure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Use the Manufacturing Batch Unit of Measure - description: If an item is stocked in one unit of measure but produced in another, then the production order must be use a manufacturing batch unit of measure to calculate the correct quantity of components. An example of a manufacturing batch unit of measure calculation is when a manufactured item is stocked in pieces but produced in tons. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Manufacturing Batch Units of Measure -If an item is stocked in one unit of measure but produced in another, a production order is created that uses a manufacturing batch unit of measure to calculate the correct quantity of the components during the **Refresh Production Order** batch job. An example of a manufacturing batch unit of measure calculation is when a manufactured item is stocked in pieces but produced in tons. - -## To create a production BOM using a batch unit of measure -1. The manufacturing batch unit of measure is set up as an alternative unit of measure in the **Item Units of Measure** window on the item to be produced. The batch unit of measure will not replace the base unit of measure on the item. -2. Create a production BOM for the item set up with the manufacturing batch unit of measure. For more information, see [How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md). -3. In the **Unit of Measure Code** field, select the manufacturing batch unit of measure. -4. For each production BOM line, in the **Quantity Per** field, enter the quantity of this component item that is required to create this batch unit of measure. -5. Open the **Item Card** for the related item. - - On the **Replenishment** FastTab, in the **Production BOM No.** field, select the production BOM created above. -6. Create a production order header using the item set up with the manufacturing batch unit of measure. For more information, see [How to: Create Production Orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md). -7. Choose the **Refresh** action, and then choose the **OK** button. - -On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Components** action to view the result. The program calculates the correct quantity of the components needed to satisfy the production BOM based on the manufacturing batch unit of measure. - -## To calculate a manufacturing batch unit of measure on a production order -1. Create a production order header using the item set up with the manufacturing batch unit of measure. -2. In the **Item No.** field in the Production Order line, type the same item number used in the header. -3. In the **Quantity** field, enter the same quantity used in the header. -4. In the **Unit of Measure Code** field, select the manufacturing batch unit of measure code. -5. Choose the **Refresh** action. -6. On the **Calculate** FastTab, clear the **Lines** check box. -7. Choose the **OK** button. -8. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Components** action to view the result. The correct quantity of the components needed to satisfy the production BOM is calculated based on the manufacturing batch unit of measure. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Routings](production-how-to-create-routings.md) -[How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-view-the-load-on-work-centers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-view-the-load-on-work-centers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 93d54be0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-to-view-the-load-on-work-centers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to View Load on Work and Machine Centers - description: From the **Work Center** card, you can view the load on the work centers as a result of released production orders. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: View Load on Work and Machine Centers -In the **Work Center Card** and **Machine Center Card** windows, you can view the shop floor load as a result of planned and released production orders. - -## To view the load on work centers -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Work Centers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant **Work Center** card from the list, and then choose the **Load** action. - -Use the **View by** and **View as** fields on the **Options** FastTab to select the required period. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-track-demand-supply.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-track-demand-supply.md deleted file mode 100644 index 17e53c6f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-track-demand-supply.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Track Relations Between Demand and Supply - description: From any supply or demand document in the so-called order network, you can track the order demand (tracked quantity), forecast, blanket sales order, or planning parameter (untracked quantity) that has given rise to the planning line in question. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Track Relations Between Demand and Supply -From any supply or demand document in the so-called order network, you can track the order demand (tracked quantity), forecast, blanket sales order, or planning parameter (untracked quantity) that has given rise to the planning line in question. - -The planning worksheets also offers supporting planning information about non-order entities to help the planner obtain an optimal supply plan. For more information, see the "Untracked Planning Elements" section. - -## To track linked items -Order tracking shows how sales orders, production orders, and purchase orders are related to the manufacturing order through the planning and reservation systems. - -The following describes how to track linked items on a firm planned production order. The steps are similar for all other order types, and from planning worksheet lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant firm planned production order from the list. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Functions** action, and then choose the **Order Tracking** action. - -The lines in the **Order Tracking** display the documents that are related to the current production order line. - -## Untracked Planning Elements -The **Untracked Planning Elements** window opens when you choose the **Untracked Qty.** field in the **order Planning** window. It serves two purposes: - -1. To hold information about untracked quantities displayed when the user looks up from the Order Tracking window to see untracked quantities. -2. To hold warning messages displayed when the user chooses the **Warning** icon in the **Planning Worksheet** window. - -The window contains entries which account for an untracked surplus quantity in order tracking network. These entries are generated during the planning run and explain where the untracked surplus quantity in the order tracking lines came from. This untracked surplus can come from: - -- Production forecast -- Blanket orders -- Safety stock quantity -- Reorder point -- Maximum inventory -- Reorder quantity -- Maximum order quantity -- Minimum order quantity -- Order multiple -- Dampener (% of lot size) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Reservation, Tracking, and Action Messaging](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-work-family.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-work-family.md deleted file mode 100644 index 69613dd9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-how-work-family.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Use Item Families in Manufacturing -description: The main task in customizing a base calendar for your company, or one of its business partners, is to enter any changes to working and nonworking day status. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 11/20/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Production Families -A production family is a group of individual items whose relationship is based on the similarity of their manufacturing processes. By forming production families, some items can be manufactured twice or more in one production, which will optimize material consumption. - -In the **Quantity** field in the **Family** window, you enter the quantity that will be produced when the whole family has been manufactured once. - -## Example -In punching processes, four pieces of the same item can be produced from one sheet and 10 pieces of another, different, item at the same time. The punching machine will punch all 14 pieces in one step. - -Forming production families reduces the scrap quantity because what would normally be leftover scrap, when producing big pieces, will be used instead to produce small items. - -## To set up a production family -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Families**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To produce based on a production family -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new production order. For more information, see [How to: Create Production orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md). -3. In the **Source Type** field, select **Family**. -4. In the **Source No.** field, select the relevant production family. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Production BOMs](production-how-to-create-production-boms.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-manage-manufacturing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-manage-manufacturing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8d42e564..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-manage-manufacturing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Execute Production - description: When demand is planned for and the materials have been issued according to production BOMs, then the actual production operations can start and be executed in the sequence defined by the production order routing. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/26/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Manufacturing -When demand is planned for and the materials have been issued according to production BOMs, then the actual production operations can start and be executed in the sequence defined by the production order routing. - -An important part of executing production, from a system point of view, is to post production output to the database to report progress and to update inventory with the finished items. Output posting can be done manually, by filling and posting journal lines after production operations. Or, it can be done automatically with the use of backward flushing. In that case material consumption is automatically posted along with output when the production order changes to finished. - -As an alternative to the batch journal for output posting for multiple production orders, you can use the **Production Journal** window to post consumption and/or output for one production order line. - -Before you can begin to produce items, you must make various setup, such as work centers, routings, and production BOMs. For more information, see [Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Understand how production orders work.|[About Production Orders](production-about-production-orders.md)| -|Create production orders manually.|[How to: Create Production Orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders.md)| -|Outsource all or selected operations in a production order to a subcontractor.|[How to: Subcontract Manufacturing](production-how-to-subcontract-manufacturing.md)| -|Record and post production output along with material and time consumption for a single released production order line.|[How to: Post Consumption and Output for One Released Production Order Line](production-how-to-register-consumption-and-output.md)| -|Batch post the quantity of components used per operation in a journal that can processes multiple planned production orders.|[How to: Batch Post Consumption](production-how-to-post-consumption.md)| -|Post the quantity of finished items and the time spent per operation in a journal that can processes multiple released production orders.|[How to: Batch Post Output and Run Times](production-how-to-post-output-quantity.md)| -|Post the number of items produced in each finished operation which do not qualify as finished output, but as scrapped material.|[How to: Post Scrap](production-how-to-post-scrap.md)| -|View the shop floor load as a result of planned and released production orders.|[How to: View the Load in Work and Machine Centers](production-how-to-view-the-load-on-work-centers.md)| -|Use the **Capacity Journal** window to post consumed capacities that are not assigned to a production order, such as maintenance work.|[How to: Post Capacities](production-how-to-post-capacities.md)| -|Calculate and adjust the cost of finished production items and consumed components for financial reconciliation.|[About Finished Production Order Costs](finance-about-finished-production-order-costs.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-planning-with-without-locations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-planning-with-without-locations.md deleted file mode 100644 index c1a8ccef..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-planning-with-without-locations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,145 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Planning With or Without Locations - description: Planning with or without location codes on demand lines is important to understand. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Planning With or Without Locations -Concerning planning with or without location codes on demand lines, the planning system operates in a straight forward way when: - -- demand lines always carry location codes and the system fully uses stockkeeping units, including the relevant location setup. -- demand lines never carry location codes and the system does not use SKUs or any location setup (see last scenario below). - -However, if demand lines sometimes have location codes and other times do not, the planning system will follow certain rules depending on setup. - -## Demand at Location -When the planning system detects demand at a location (a line with a location code), it will behave in different ways depending on 3 critical setup values. - -During a planning run, the system checks for the 3 setup values in sequence and plans accordingly: - -1. Is there a check mark in the **Location Mandatory** field? - - If yes, then: - -2. Does SKU exist for the item? - - If yes, then: - - The item is planned according to planning parameters on the SKU card. - - If no, then: - -3. Does the **Components at Location** field contain the demanded location code? - - If yes, then: - - The item is planned according to planning parameters on the item card. - - If no, then: - - The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot*, Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. (Items using reordering policy *Order* remain using *Order* as well as the other settings.) - -> [!NOTE] -> This minimal alternative only covers the exact demand. Any planning parameters defined are ignored. - -See variations in the scenarios below. - -## Demand at "Blank Location" -Even if the **Location Mandatory** check box is selected, the system will allow demand lines to be created without a location code – also referred to as *BLANK* location. This is a deviation for the system because it has various setup values tuned to dealing with locations (see above) and as a result, the planning engine will not create a planning line for such a demand line. If the **Location Mandatory** field is not selected but any of the location setup values exist, then that is also considered a deviation and the planning system will react by outputting the "minimal alternative": -The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot* ( *Order* remains *Order)*, Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. - -See variations in the setup scenarios below. - -### Setup 1: - -- Location Mandatory = *Yes* -- SKU is set up for *RED* -- Component at Location = *BLUE* - -#### Case 1.1: Demand is at *RED* location - -The item is planned according to planning parameters on the SKU card (including possible transfer). - -#### Case 1.2: Demand is at *BLUE* location - -The item is planned according to planning parameters on the item card. - -#### Case 1.3: Demand is at *GREEN* location - -The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot* ( *Order* remains *Order*), Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. - -#### Case 1.4: Demand is at *BLANK* location - -The item is not planned because no location is defined on the demand line. - -### Setup 2: - -- Location Mandatory = *Yes* -- No SKU exists -- Component at Location = *BLUE* - -#### Case 2.1: Demand is at *RED* location - -The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot* ( *Order* remains *Order*), Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. - -#### Case 2.2: Demand is at *BLUE* location - -The item is planned according to planning parameters on the item card. - -### Setup 3: - -- Location Mandatory = *No* -- No SKU exists -- Component at Location = *BLUE* - -#### Case 3.1: Demand is at *RED* location - -The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot* ( *Order* remains *Order*), Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. - -#### Case 3.2: Demand is at *BLUE* location - -The item is planned according to planning parameters on the item card. - -#### Case 3.3: Demand is at *BLANK* location - -The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot* ( *Order* remains *Order*), Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. - -### Setup 4: - -- Location Mandatory = *No* -- No SKU exists -- Component at Location = *BLANK* - -#### Case 4.1: Demand is at *BLUE* location - -The item is planned according to: Reordering Policy = *Lot-for-Lot* ( *Order* remains *Order*), Include Inventory = *Yes*, all other planning parameters = Empty. - -#### Case 4.2: Demand is at *BLANK* location - -The item is planned according to planning parameters on the item card. - -As you can see from the last scenario, the only way to get a correct result for a demand line without a location code is to disable all setup values relating to locations. Similarly, the only way to get stable planning results for demand at locations is to use stockkeeping units. - -Therefore, if you often plan for demand at locations, it is strongly advised to use the Stockkeeping Units feature. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning](production-planning.md) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/production-planning.md b/dynamics-nav-app/production-planning.md deleted file mode 100644 index 11660193..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/production-planning.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Supply Planning - description: Prepare a detailed executable plan and the final-assembly production schedule for sales and production demand. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Planning -The production operations required to transform inputs into finished goods must be planned daily or weekly depending on the volume and nature of the products. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers features to supply for anticipated and actual demand from sale, assembly, and production as well as features for distribution planning using stockkeeping units and location transfers. - -> [!NOTE] -> This topic mainly describes planning for companies involved in manufacturing or assembly management where the resulting supply orders can be either production, assembly, transfer, or purchase orders. The main interface for this planning work is the **Planning Worksheet** window. -> -> [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] also supports supply planning for wholesale companies where the resulting supply orders can only be transfer and purchase orders. The main interface for this planning work is the **Requisition Worksheet** window, which is described indirectly in this topic as most planning functionality applies to both worksheets. - -Before you can plan and execute production orders, you must configure production capacities, such as creating shop calendars, routings, production BOMs, and machine centers. For more information, see [Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md). - -Planning can be seen as the preparation required supply orders in the assembly or manufacturing departments to fulfill demand. For more information, see [Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) and [Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Get a brief introduction to how the planning system can be used to detect and prioritize demand and suggest a balanced supply plan.|[About Planning Functionality](production-about-planning-functionality.md)| -|Understand how all aspects of the planning system works and how to adjust the algorithms to meet planning requirements in different environments.|[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md)| -|Learn how the planning logic differentiates between demand at locations according to the SKU setup and demand without location codes.|[Planning With or Without Locations](production-planning-with-without-locations.md)| -|Forecast production demand presented by expected sales and production orders.|[How to: Create a Production Forecast](production-how-to-create-a-forecast.md)| -|Create one-to-one production orders automatically from a sales order to cover the exact demand of that sales order line.|[How to: Create Production Orders from Sales Orders](production-how-to-create-production-orders-from-sales-orders.md)| -|Create a project production order directly from a multiline sales order representing a production project.|[How to: Plan Project Orders](production-how-to-plan-project-orders.md)| -|Use the **Order Planning** window to manually plan for sales or production demand one production BOM level at a time.|[How to: Plan for New Demand Order by Order](production-how-to-plan-for-new-demand.md)| -|Use the **Planning Worksheet** window to run both the MPS and MRP options to automatically create either a high-level or detailed supply plan at all item levels.|[How to: Run Full Planning, MPS or MRP](production-how-to-run-mps-and-mrp.md)| -|Run the requisition worksheet to automatically create a detailed supply plan to cover demand for items that are replenished by purchase or transfer only.|**Requisition Worksheet** page| -|Initiate or update a production order as rough-scheduled operations in the master production schedule.|[How to: Replan or Refresh Production Orders Directly](production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md)| -|Recalculate work or machine center calendars due to planning changes.|"To calculate a work center calendar" section in [How to: Set Up Shop Calendars](production-how-to-create-work-center-calendars.md)| -|Track the order demand (tracked quantity), forecast, blanket sales order, or planning parameter (untracked quantity) that has given rise to the planning line in question.|[How to: Track Relations Between Demand and Supply](production-how-track-demand-supply.md)| -|View an item's projected available inventory by different views and see which gross requirements, planned order receipts, and other events influence it over time.|[How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md)| -|Perform selected planning activities, such as changing or adding planning worksheet lines, in a graphical view of the supply plan.|[How to: Modify Planning Suggestions in a Graphical View](production-how-to-modify-planning-suggestions-in-a-graphical-view.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-create-jobs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-create-jobs.md deleted file mode 100644 index d1765d40..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-create-jobs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Job Card for a Job and Specify Tasks' -description: For a new project, you create a job card that contains job tasks and planning lines, to help you manage progress and budgets. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, task -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Jobs -When you start a new project, you must create a job card with integrated job tasks and job planning lines, structured in two layers. - -The first layer consists of job tasks. You must create at least one job task per job because all posting refers to a job task. Having at least one job task in your job enables you to set up job planning lines and to post consumption to the job. - -The second layer consists of job planning lines, which specify the detailed use of resources, items and various general ledger expenses. - -The layer structure enables you to divide the job into smaller tasks, and therefore use more specific details in budgeting, quotes, and registration. In addition, it gives you insight into how a job is progressing. For example, you can track whether you are meeting designated milestones or if you are on target to meet budget expectations. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **New Job** action on the **Project Manager** Role Center launches an assisted setup that guides you through the steps of creating a job with integrated tasks and planning lines. The following procedure describes how to perform the steps manually. - -## To create a job card -You create a job card and then create job task lines and job planning lines for it. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and then fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. To specify the job with information on other jobs, choose the **Copy Job** action, fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are using time sheets with your job, you must also designate a person responsible. This person can approve time sheets for the employee tasks associated with the job. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Timesheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md). - -## To create tasks for a job -A key part of creating a job is to specify the various tasks involved in the job. You do this by adding new lines on the **Tasks** FastTab in the **Job Card** window, one task per line. Every job must have at least one task. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the job card for a relevant job. -3. On the **Tasks** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary on a new line. -4. To indent tasks and create a hierarchy, Choose the **Tasks** action, the then choose **Indent Job Tasks** action. -5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all the tasks that you need for the job. -6. To specify the job tasks with information on other job tasks, choose the **Copy Job Tasks from** action, fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## To create planning lines for a job -You can refine your new job tasks on job planning lines. A planning line can be used to capture any information that you want to track for a job. You can use planning lines to add information such as what resources are required or to capture what items are needed to perform the job. For example, if you have a task to obtain customer approval of a job, you can associate that task with planning lines for items such as meeting with the customer and assigning a resource. - -A job planning line can have one of the following types. - -| Type | Description | -| --- | --- | -| **Budget** |Provides estimated usage and costs for the job, typically in a time and materials type project. Planning lines of this type cannot be invoiced. | -| **Billable** |Provides estimated invoicing to the customer, typically in a fixed price project. | -| **Both Budget and Billable** |Provides budgeted usage equal to what you want to invoice. | - -**Note**. As you enter information on job planning lines, cost information is automatically filled in. For example, the cost, price, and discount for resources and items are initially based on the information that is defined on the resource and item cards. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a relevant job card. -3. Select a job task for which the **Job Task Type** field contains **Posting**, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -4. In the **Job Planning Lines** window, on a new line, fill in the fields as necessary. -5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all planning lines that you need for the job task. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-invoice-jobs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-invoice-jobs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7d23e58f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-invoice-jobs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Job Sales Invoice to Invoice a Job -description: Describes how to invoice customers for job expenses as a project progresses. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project invoice -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Invoice Jobs -During the project, job costs from resource usage, materials, and job-related purchases can accumulate. As the job progresses, these transactions get posted to the job journal. It is important that all costs get recorded in the job journal before you invoice the customer. - -You can invoice the whole job from the **Job Task Lines** window or only invoice selected billable lines from the **Planning Lines** window. Invoicing can be done after the job is finished or at certain intervals during the job's progress based on an invoicing schedule. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you select **Billable** in the **Job Line Type** field on the purchase documents for job-related purchases, then job planning lines that are ready to be invoiced to the customer are created. For more information, see [How to: Manage Project Supplies](projects-how-manage-project-supplies.md). - -## To create and post a job sales invoice -You can create an invoice for a job or for one or more job tasks for a customer when either the work to be invoiced is complete or the date for invoicing based on an invoicing schedule has been reached. - -From the **Jobs** window, you can invoice a customer by selecting the job, and then choosing the **Create Job Sales Invoice** action. The following procedure shows how to use a batch job to invoice multiple jobs. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Create Sales Invoice**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Set filters if you want to limit the jobs that the batch job will process. -4. Choose the **OK** button to create the invoices. - -## To create multiple job sales invoices from job planning lines -You can create an invoice from a job planning lines, and indicate at that time the quantity of the item, resource, or general ledger account that you want to invoice. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a relevant job. -3. Select a job task for which the **Job Task Type** field contains **Posting**, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -4. On a job planning line, in the **Qty. To Transfer to Invoice** field, enter the quantity of the item, resource, general ledger account type that you want to invoice. -5. Choose the **Create Sales Invoice** action. -6. In the **Job Create Sales Invoice** window, enter the posting date and whether you want to create a new invoice or append this invoice to an existing one. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - - On the job planning line, in the **Qty. Transferred to Invoice** field, you can see the quantity. -8. In the **Job Planning Lines** window, choose the **Sales Invoices/Credit Memos** action. - - The **Sales Invoice** window opens, showing the quantity that you have transferred to the invoice. -9. Make any additional changes, and then choose the **Post** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> The above procedure is similar for creating, reviewing, and posting a job-related sales credit memo. - -## To calculate and post job completion entries -When you have completed all activities for a job, including usage posting and invoicing, you must update the job to have a **Status** of **Completed**. Then, you must reverse any WIP that has been posted to the general ledger. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an open job, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Status** field, select **Completed**. -4. Follow the assistance steps to calculate and post WIP. Alternatively, follows steps 5 and 6 to do so manually. -5. Choose the **Calculate WIP** action. -6. In the **Job Calculate WIP** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - The job WIP entries created by running the batch job will have the **Job Complete** check box selected to show that they are completion entries. -7. Choose the **Job Post WIP to G/L** action. -8. In the **Job Post WIP to G/L** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - - The job WIP general ledger entries created by running the batch job will have the **Job Complete** check box selected to show they are completion entries. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-budgets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-budgets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0edf441d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-budgets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up and Manage a Budget for a Job -description: Describes how to plan resources and forecast and control the costs of a project by setting up a budget for each job. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project budget, forecast -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Job Budgets -You can set up a budget for each job. The budget is used to plan the resources that you allocate to a job. The budget can be either general with few entries or it can contain more entries that are divided into activity levels. You can then compare the budgeted amounts with the actual usage as recorded in the job journal. By monitoring differences between actual usage and budgeted usage, you can control an ongoing project and improve the quality of future jobs by reducing the risk of underestimating costs. - -The following procedure describes how to estimate budgeted costs during planning. For information about recording budgeted versus actual job prices and costs, see [How to: Record Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md). - -## To estimate the budgeted costs for a job -When a customer wants to know the price of a job that will be invoiced based on usage, you must have to determine the budgeted costs for the job. You use the **Job Task Lines** window to do this. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a relevant job. -3. Select a task line of type Posting, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -4. On a new line, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -For the **Line Type** field, refer to the following information. - -| Line Type | Description | -| --- | --- | -| **Both Budget and Billable** |The cost and price amounts entered on the planning line are the budgeted costs for the particular planning line. The price amount will be invoiced. | -| **Budget** |The customer is not charged for usage. Usage is not transferred to an invoice, but will still be used in the calculation of WIP. | -| **Billable** |The customer is charged for usage. Usage is transferred to the invoice, based on the quantity specified in the Qty. to Transfer to Invoice field. | - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Planning Date** field for the planning line contains the date when usage related to the planning line is expected to be completed. It is also the date when the planning line may be transferred to a sales invoice and posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you fill in the **Quantity** field, all total price and total cost information will be calculated and filled in for that planning line. You can edit them at any time. - -In the **Job Card** window, you can now see a summary of the total budgeted costs, budgeted price, billable cost and billable price for each task. - -For information about recording budgeted versus actual job prices and costs, see [How to: Record Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-project-supplies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-project-supplies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6a27b4dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-manage-project-supplies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Purchase Items or Services for a Job and Manage Supplies -description: Describes how to manage the supply and purchase of material and services to jobs. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, material, purchase -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Job Supplies -Managing project supplies of items, services, and expenses is an integral and critical aspect of the execution of all jobs. You can use inventory quantities or make job-specific purchases using purchase orders or purchase invoices. For example, a service job on a computer requires a new disk. You create a purchase invoice to buy a new disk and record the job that it will be used on. - -If the purchase process does not require that the physical transaction be recorded separately, then a purchase may be processed in the **Job G/L Journal** window. For more information, see [How to: Record Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md). - -## To purchase items or services for a job -The following procedure shows how to use a purchase invoice to purchase products for a job. The same steps apply when using a purchase order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action and fill in the fields as necessary. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). -3. In the **Job No.** and **Job Task No.** fields, select the information of the job that you want to purchase items or services for. If these fields are not visible, you will have to add them. For more information, see [Personalization in the Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) or [Personalization in the Windows Client](ui-personalization-windows-client.md). - - The value that you select in the **Job Line Type** field defines whether a planning line is created when you post the usage of the item. If the field contains **Billable**, then job planning lines that are ready to be invoiced to the customer are created. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Jobs](projects-how-invoice-jobs.md). -4. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To view the value of purchases for a job -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a relevant job card. - - On the **Tasks** FastTab, the **Outstanding Orders** field shows the total outstanding amount, in local currency, of inventory items and services on purchase documents for the job task line. - - The **Amt. Rec. Not Invoiced** field shows the value of items delivered on purchase documents, but not yet invoiced. -3. Choose either of the fields to open the **Purchase Lines** window where you can review information about the related purchase document lines, including which items or services have been received. - -## To post a job-related expense -If you incur extraordinary or one-time job expenses, you can use the **Job G/L Journal** window to post them directly to the relevant job account. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job G/L Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new line and enter information about the expense, including information in the **Job No.** and **Job Task No** fields. -3. When the journal is complete, choose the **Post** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md deleted file mode 100644 index c424939a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Define a WIP Method and Monitor Job Progress -descrition: Describes how you can create a work in process (WIP) method and calculate WIP to estimate the financial value of jobs while they are ongoing. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, KPI, work in process, work in progress -ms.date: 07/04/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Monitor Job Progress and Performance -As a job progresses, materials, resources, and other expenses are consumed and must be posted to the job. Work in Process (WIP) is a feature that enables you to estimate the financial value of jobs in the general ledger while the jobs are ongoing. In many cases, you might post expenses for a job before invoicing a job. When only expenses have been posted, your financial statement will be inaccurate. For more information, see [Understanding WIP Methods](projects-understanding-wip.md). - -To track the value in the general ledger, you can calculate WIP and post the value to the general ledger. - -You can calculate WIP based on the following: - -* Cost Value -* Sales Value -* Recognizable Cost -* Percentage of Completion -* Completed Contract - -If you want to view the result using a different method, you can change the method and calculate WIP again. There is no limit to the number of times that you calculate WIP. WIP is only calculated, it does not get posted to the general ledger. After you have calculated WIP, you can post to the general ledger. - -## To create a job WIP method -You can create a job WIP method that reflects the needs of your organization. After you have created it, you can set it as the default job WIP calculation method that will be used in your organization. - -> [!NOTE] -> After you have used your new method to create WIP entries, you cannot delete the method or modify it. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job WIP Methods**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and then fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Close the window. -4. To make this new method the default, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs Setup**, and then choose the related link. -5. In the **Default WIP Method** field, choose the method from the list. - -## To define a WIP method for a job -When you create a new job, you must specify which job WIP method that applies. In some cases, which Job WIP method that you can use has been set up for you as a default. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. For more information, see [How to: Create Jobs](projects-how-create-jobs.md). -3. In the **Job Card** window, in the **WIP Method** field, select a WIP method from the list. If a default method has been defined, you can select another option if needed. - -## To calculate WIP -You can determine the WIP amount that is to be posted to balance sheet accounts for the period end reporting. You use the **Job Calculate WIP** batch job to do this. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Calculate WIP**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate WIP** action. -3. In the **Job Calculate WIP** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> The batch job only calculates the WIP. It is not posted to the general ledger. To do so, you must run the **Post WIP to G/L** batch job when you have calculated the WIP. For more information, see the following procedure. - -## To post WIP -When you have calculated WIP, you can post it to balance sheet accounts for the period end reporting. You use the **Job Post WIP to G/L** batch job to do this. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Post WIP to G/L**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Job Post WIP to G/L** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To view job usage estimates and post updates -You can view job usage up to the completion of a project in one step. To do so, you use the **Job Calc. Remaining Usage** batch job for all the tasks up to and including the end of a job. - -This lets you track and compare your original estimates against actual results and make modifications or new entries as needed. For example, you may have estimated that a job required 10 hours, and to date, it has taken 15 hours. You can add the extra five hours to the existing journal line or create a new journal line to report these five hours as overtime, which is another work type. The appropriate cost and price are calculated, and you can then post to the journal. - -> [!NOTE] -> Item entries create item ledger entries and reduce the inventory quantity. The **Post Inventory Cost to G/L** batch job transfers the cost from inventory to the general ledger. Resource entries create resource ledger entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a relevant job journal, and then choose the **Calc. Remaining Usage** action. -3. In the **Job Calc. Remaining Usage** window, enter the document number and posting date that is to be inserted in the journal, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. Update the journal with any modifications that may be needed. -5. Choose the **Post**. - -## To view job ledger entries -All job-related entries are recorded in job registers and are numbered sequentially, starting with 1. From the job register, you can get an overview of all job ledger entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Registers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a relevant register, and then choose **Job Ledger** action. - -In the **Job Ledger Entries** window you can review the entries that are associated with any job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Managing Inventory Costs](finance-manage-inventory-costs.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-record-job-usage.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-record-job-usage.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8fbdb71c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-record-job-usage.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Record Billable and Budgeted Usage of Job Resources -description: Describes how to record the consumption or usage of items or resources on jobs to facilitate project management. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, consumption -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Record Usage for Jobs -In the **Job Planning Lines** window, you can review and record usage on various parts of your job, which is automatically updated as you modify and transfer information between jobs and job journals or job invoices. This requires that you have set up a job so that the **Apply Usage Link** is turned on. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Jobs](projects-how-setup-jobs.md). - -For example, for planning lines of type **Budget**, you can enter the quantity of a resource, and indicate what quantity to transfer to the job journal. If the type of the planning line is **Billable**, you can enter the quantity of the resource, and indicate what quantity to transfer to an invoice. By comparing the quantity that has been transferred to the journal or invoice with the remaining quantity, you can quickly review usage information. - -The following procedures describe how to record actual (billable) or budgeted job prices and costs. For information about estimating budgeted values during planning, see [How to: Manage Job Budgets](projects-how-manage-budgets.md). - -## To record usage for a job planning line of type Budget -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant job, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -3. Select a job planning line of type **Budget** or **Both Budget and Billable** for which you want to record usage. -4. In the **Qty. To Transfer to Journal** field, enter the number that you want to transfer. The default quantity is the value that you enter in the **Quantity** field. - - The **Remaining Quantity** field shows the quantity that remains to complete the job and be transferred to the journal. -5. Choose the **Create Job Journal Lines** action. -6. In the **Job Transfer Job Planning Line** window, fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -7. Choose the **Open Job Journal** action. -8. In the **Job Journal** window, select the relevant line and then choose the **Post** action. -9. In the **Job Planning Lines** window, review the recorded usage by observing the **Quantity**, **Remaining Quantity**, and **Qty. To Transfer to Journal** fields. -10. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to record additional usage. - -## To record usage for a job planning line of type Billable -In the next task, you also record usage, but for a job planning line of type **Billable**. Typically, in this case, you invoice your usage, but you can also transfer it to a journal. However, when you do that, a job planning line of type **Budget** is created to match the billable line. For more information, see [How to: Manage Job Budgets](projects-how-manage-budgets.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant job, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -3. Select a job planning line of type **Billable** for which you want to record usage. -4. In the **Qty. To Transfer to Invoice** field, enter the number that you want to transfer. The default quantity is the value that you enter in the **Quantity** field. - - The **Quantity to Invoice** field shows the quantity that remains to complete the job and be invoiced. -5. Choose the **Create Sales Invoice** action. -6. In the **Job Transfer to Sales Invoice** window, fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. -7. In the **Job Planning Lines** window, select the relevant line, and then choose the **Post** action. -8. Review the recorded usage by observing the **Quantity**, **Quantity to Invoice**, **Qty. To Transfer to Invoice** fields, and, if the sales invoice is posted, the **Qty. Invoiced** fields. -9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to record additional usage. -10. To review a related posted sales invoice, choose the **Sales Invoices/Credit Memos** action. -11. In the **Job Invoices** window, select the relevant invoice, and then choose the **Open Sales Invoice/Credit Memo** action. - -## To create job journal lines from job planning lines -When you are ready to post financial information for jobs, you must create job journal lines that you can post. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a relevant open job, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -3. In the **Job Planning Lines** window, on a relevant job planning line, in the **Qty. to Transfer to Journal** field, enter the quantity that you want to transfer to a job journal. -4. Choose the **Create Job Journal Lines** action. -5. In the **Job Transfer Job Planning Line** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -6. Choose the **OK** button. Job journal lines are created. -7. To verify the transfer, open the relevant job journal batch and check the entries. -8. When the job journal lines are complete, choose the **Post** action. - -## To create job journal lines manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Batch Name** field, choose a relevant job journal batch. -3. On a new line, enter document number, job number, job task number, type, and the quantity of the type being consumed. -4. When the job journal lines are complete, choose the **Post** action. - -## To review planning lines for a job ledger entry -After you have posted job journal lines, you can see the planning lines that are associated with the job journal entries that have been posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> This requires that the **Apply Usage Link** check box has been selected for the job, or is the default setting for all jobs in your organization. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Jobs](projects-how-setup-jobs.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a relevant job journal, and then choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -3. In the **Job Ledger Entries** window, choose **Show Linked Job Planning Lines** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-jobs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-jobs.md deleted file mode 100644 index e3bc561b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-jobs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Jobs Prices and Job Posting Groups -description: Describes how to set up general jobs information, and set up prices for job items, resources, and G/L accounts and jobs posting groups. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Jobs -In the **Jobs Setup** window, you must specify how you want to use certain job features. - -On the individual job cards, you must set up prices for job items, job resources, and job G/L accounts, and you must set up job posting groups. - -## To set general information for jobs -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Apply Usage Link** check box is rather complex and is therefore explained in the following section. - -## To set up job usage tracking -When you are executing a job, you might want to know how your usage is tracking against your plan. To easily do this, you can create a link between your job planning lines and the actual usage. This lets you track your costs and to easily see at how much work remains to be done. By default, the job planning line type is **Budget**, but using the line type **Both Budget and Billable** has similar effects. - -If you select the **Apply Usage Link** check box, then you can review information on the job planning line. You can set the quantity of the resource, item, or general ledger account and then indicate what quantity you want to transfer to the job journal. The **Remaining Quantity** field on the job planning line will tell you what remains to be transferred and posted to the job journal. - -When the **Apply Usage Link** check box is selected, and the job planning line type is **Billable**, the Financial creates a job planning line of type **Budget** after you post the journal line. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the **Apply Usage Link** check box on the job card is selected, and the **Line Type** field on the job journal line is blank, then new job planning lines of line type **Budget** are created when you post job journal lines. If the **Apply Usage Link** check box on the job card is not selected, and the **Line Type** field on the job journal line is blank, then no job planning lines are created when you post job journal lines. For more information, see [How to: Record Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select or deselect the **Apply Usage Link** check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can make a different setting of the **Apply Usage Link** check box on the individual job cards. In that case, the setting for that job overrides the general default described above. - -## To set up prices for job resources -You can set up specific prices for resources for a job. You use the **Job Resource Prices** window to do this. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant job, and then choose the **Resource** action. -3. In the **Job Resource Prices** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -The optional information in the **Job Task No.**, **Work Type**, **Currency Code**, **Line Discount %**, and **Unit Cost Factor** fields will be used on the job planning lines and usage journals when this resource is entered and added to the job. - -The value in the **Unit Price** field for the resource will be used on the job planning lines and job journals when this resource, a resource assigned to the resource group, or any resource is entered. - -> [!NOTE] -> This price will always override any prices set up in the existing **Resource Price/Resource Group Prices** window. - -## To set up prices for job items -You can set up specific prices for items for a job. You use the **Job Item Prices** window to do this. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant job, and then choose the **Item** action. -3. In the **Job Item Prices** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -The optional information in the **Job Task No.**, **Currency Code**, and **Line Discount %** fields will be used in the job planning lines and job journals when this item is entered or added to the job. - -The value in the **Unit Price** field for the item will be used on the job planning lines and job journals when this item is entered. - -> [!NOTE] -> This price will always override the regular customer price (the “best price” mechanism) for items. If you want to use the regular customer price mechanisms, then you should not create any job item prices for the job. - -## To set up prices for job general ledger accounts -You can set up specific prices for general ledger expenses for a job. You use the **Job G/L Account Prices** window to do this. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant job, and then choose the **G/L Account** action. -3. In the **Job G/L Account Prices** window, fill in the fields as necessary. - -The optional information in the **Job Task No.**, **Currency Code**, **Line Discount %**, **Unit Cost Factor**, and **Unit Cost** fields will be used on the job planning lines and job journals when this general ledger account is entered and added to a job. - -The value in the **Unit Price** field for the general ledger job expense will be used on the job planning lines and job journals when this general ledger account is entered. - -## To set up job posting groups -One aspect of planning jobs is deciding which posting accounts to use for job costing. To be able to post jobs, you set up accounts for posting for each job posting group. A posting group represents a link between the job and how it should be treated in the general ledger. When you create a job, you specify a posting group, and by default, each task you create for the job is associated with that posting group. However, as you create tasks, you can override the default and select a posting group that is more appropriate. - -> [!NOTE] -> The necessary accounts in the chart of accounts must be set up before you set up posting groups. For more information, see [Set Up or Change the Chart of Accounts](finance-setup-chart-accounts.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Posting Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and then fill in the account fields as described in the following table. - -| Account field | Description | -| --- | --- | -| **Code** |A code for the posting group. You can enter up to 10 characters, including spaces. | -| **WIP Costs Account** |The WIP account for the calculated cost of the job WIP, which is a balance sheet capital asset account. | -| **WIP Accrued Costs Account** |An account for the Cost Value or Cost of Sales method of WIP calculation, which is a balance sheet accrued expense liability account. This will be posted to when the WIP adjustment requires that usage costs posted to the income statement be increased. | -| **Job Costs Applied Account** |A balancing account to the WIP Costs Account, which is a contra for a negative expense account. | -| **Item Costs Applied Account** |A balancing account to the WIP Costs Account, which is a contra for a negative expense account. | -| **Resource Costs Applied Account** |A balancing account to the WIP Costs Account, which is a contra for a negative expense account. | -| **Costs Applied Account** |A balancing account to the WIP Costs Account, which is a contra for a negative expense account. | -| **Job Costs Adjustment Account** |The balancing account to the WIP Accrued Costs account, which is an expense account. | -| **G/L Expense Acc. (Budget)** |The sales account that will be used for general ledger expenses in job tasks with this posting group. If left empty, the general ledger account entered on the job planning line is used. | -| **WIP Accrued Sales Account** |The WIP account for the calculated sales value of the WIP, which is a balance sheet Accrued Revenue account. This is posted to when the WIP adjustment requires the recognized revenue to be increased. | -| **WIP Invoiced Sales Account** |The account for the invoiced sales value of the WIP that is not able to be recognized. It is a balance sheet Unearned Revenue account. | -| **Job Sales Applied Account** |The balancing account to the WIP Invoiced Sales account, which is a contra income account. | -| **Job Sales Adjustment Account** |The balancing account to the WIP Job Sales Account, which is an income account. | -| **Recognized Costs Account** |The expense account that contains the recognized costs for the job. It is a debit expense account ordinarily. | -| **Recognized Sales Account** |The income account that contains the recognized income for the job. It is a credit income account ordinarily. | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Set Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-resources.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-resources.md deleted file mode 100644 index b6856ca4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-resources.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Resource Costs, Prices, and Capacity -description: To use resources and facilitate project management, you specify costs and prices for individual resources or resource groups, and set the resource capacity. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, capacity, staff -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Resources -To correctly manage resource activities, you must set up your resources and the related costs and prices. The job-related prices, discounts, and cost factor rules are set up on the job card. You can specify the costs and prices for individual resources, resource groups, or all available resources of the company. - -When resources are used or sold in a job, the prices and costs associated with them are retrieved from the information that you set up. - -You specify the default amount per hour when the resource is created. For example, if you use a specific machine on a job for five hours, the job would be calculated based on the amount per hour. - -## To set up a resource -Create a card for each resource that you want to use in projects. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To set up a resource group -You can combine several resources in one resource group. All capacities and budgets of resource groups are accumulated from the individual resources. It is also possible to enter capacities for resource groups either independently of the accumulated values or in addition to them. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resource groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## To set capacity for a resource -To calculate how much time a resource can spend on jobs, their capacity must first be set up as available time per period on the work calendar. This setup is used when you fill in job planning lines that contain the resource. For more information, see [How to: Create Jobs](projects-how-create-jobs.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant resource card, and then choose the **Resource Capacity** action. -3. In the **Resource Capacity** window, in the **View By** field, specify the length of the period, such as **Day**, that is shown on columns on the **Resource Capacity Matrix** FastTab. -4. For each resource on a line, specify for each period on the columns the number of hours that the resource is available. -5. Alternatively, to detail the resource's weekly capacity within a starting and ending date, choose the **Set Capacity** action. -6. In the **Resource Capacity Settings** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -7. Choose the **Update Capacity** action. The **Resource Capacity** window is updated with the entered capacity. -8. Close the window. - -## To set up alternate resource costs -In addition to the cost specified on the resource card, you can set up alternate costs for each resource. For example, if you pay an employee a higher hourly rate for overtime, you can set up a resource cost for the overtime rate. The alternate cost that you set up for the resource will override the cost on the resource card when you use the resource in the resource journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the resource for that you want to set up one or more alternate costs for, and then choose the **Costs** action. -3. In the **Resource Costs** window, fill in the fields on a line as necessary. -4. Repeat step 3 for each alternate resource cost that you want to set up. - -**Note**. To set up resource costs that will apply to all resources and resource groups, open the **Resource Costs** window and fill in the fields. - -## To set up alternate resource prices -In addition to price specified on the resource card, you can set up alternate prices for each resource. These alternate prices can be conditional. They can depend on whether the resource is used with a specific job or work type. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the resource for that you want to set up one or more alternate prices for, and then choose the **Prices** action. -3. In the **Resource Prices** window, fill in the fields on a line as necessary. -4. Repeat step 3 for each alternate resource price that you want to set up. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md deleted file mode 100644 index e520830a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Time Sheets and Their Approval -description: You set up time sheets to track the time used on jobs and using resources, helping you with project management, staffing, and capacity - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, capacity, staff, resource -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Time Sheets -Time sheets in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] handle time registration in weekly increments of seven days. You use them to track the time used on jobs, and you can use them to record simple resource time registration. Before you can use time sheets, you must specify how you want them to be set up and configured. - -After you have set up how your organization will use time sheets, you can specify if and how time sheets are approved. Depending on the needs of your organization, you can designate: - -* One or more users as the time sheet administrator and approver for all time sheets. -* A time sheet approver for each resource. - -When you have set up time sheets, you can create time sheets for resources, assign them to job planning lines, and post time sheet lines. For more information, see [How to: Use Time Sheets](projects-how-use-time-sheets.md). - -## To set up general information for time sheets -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. For the **Time Sheet by Job Approval** field, select one of the following options. - -| Option | Description | -| --- | --- | -| **Never** |The user in the **Time Sheet Approver User ID** field on the resource card approves the time sheet. | -| **Always** |The user in the **Person Responsible** field on the job card approves the time sheet. | -| **Machine Only** |If the machine time sheet is linked with a job, then the user in the **Person Responsible** field on the job card approves the time sheet. If the machine time sheet is linked with a resource, then the user in the **Time Sheet Approver User ID** field on the resource card approves the time sheet. | - -## To assign a time sheet administrator -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Add a new user if the user list does not include the person who you want to be the time sheet administrator. For more information, see [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md). -3. Select a user to be a time sheet administrator, and then select the **Time Sheet Admin.** check box. - -> [!TIP] -> It is recommended that you designate only one user to be the time sheet administrator for a company. In the following procedure, you set up a time sheet owner and approver where the time sheet approver is assigned for each resource. - -## To assign a time sheets owner and approver -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the resource for which you want to set up the ability to use time sheets, and then select the **Use Time Sheet** check box. -3. In the **Time Sheet Owner User ID** field, enter the ID of the owner of the time sheet. The owner can enter time usage on a time sheet and submit it for approval. In general, when the resource is a person, that person is also the owner. -4. In the **Time Sheet Approver User ID** field, enter the ID of the approver of the time sheet. The approver can approve, reject, or reopen a time sheet. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot change the ID of the time sheet approver if there are time sheets that have not yet been processed and have the status of **Submitted** or **Open**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-resources.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-resources.md deleted file mode 100644 index b5e89a19..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-resources.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Record and Adjust Resource Usage and Prices -description: Describes how you can record the resource usage or consumption associated with a job, to keep track and manage costs, prices, and work types. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, capacity, staff -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use Resources for Jobs -You record the usage of resources in the job journal to keep track of costs, prices, and the work types that are linked to jobs. For more information, see [How to: Record Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md). - -You can also post the usage of a resource in a resource journal. Entries posted in a resource journal have no effect on the general ledger. - -## To assign resources to jobs -You assign resources to jobs by creating job planning lines for the job. For more information, see [How to: Create Jobs](projects-how-create-jobs.md). - -## To record resource usage for a job -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a relevant job journal batch, and then fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. When the journal is complete, choose the **Post** action. - -## To adjust resource prices -If you want to change costs or prices for a large number of resources, you can use a batch job. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Adjust Resource Costs/Prices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields on a line as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> This batch job does not create or adjust alternate costs or prices for resources. It only changes the contents of the field on the resource card for the **Adjust Field** field that you selected in the batch job. The adjustment will take effect immediately for resources, so check your adjustment factors before you run the batch job. - -## To get resource price change suggestions based on existing alternate prices -If you have already set up alternate resource price for some resources, you can use a batch job to set up multiple alternate resource prices. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resource Price Changes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Suggest Res. Price Chg. (Price)** action, and then fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. When the batch job is finished, the **Resource Price Changes** window shows the results of the batch job. - -## To get resource price change suggestions based on standard prices -If you want to set up multiple alternate resource prices based on the standard prices on the resource cards, you can use a batch job. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resource Price Changes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Suggest Res. Price Chg. (Res.)** action, and then fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. When the batch job is finished, open the **Resource Price Changes** window to see the results of the batch job. - -## To get resource price change suggestions based on alternate prices -If you have already set up alternate resource price for some resources, you can use a batch job to set up multiple alternate resource prices. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Suggest Res. Price Chg. (Price)**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. When the batch job is finished, open the **Resource Price Changes** window to see the results of the batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 440c94db..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-how-use-time-sheets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,154 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work with Time Sheets for Jobs -description: Describes how to create a time sheet for a job, copy planning lines to it, define work types, fill in the time sheet, and submit it for approval. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: project management, capacity, staff, resource -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use Time Sheets for Jobs -You use the **Create Time Sheets** batch job to set up time sheets for a specified number of time periods or weeks. You must have permissions to be able to create time sheets. - -You can copy and use your job planning lines in a time sheet. In that way, you must only enter the information in one place and the line information is always correct. - -After you have approved time sheet entries for a job, you can post them to the relevant job journal or resource journal. - -Before you can use time sheets, you must set up general information and specify an administrator and one or more approvers of time sheets. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Time Sheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md). - -## To create a time sheet -You can use the **Create Time Sheets** batch job to set up time sheets for a specified number of time periods or weeks. Then, the time sheet owner can open it and record time that has been spent on a task. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Time Sheet List** window, choose the **Create Time Sheets** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Use Time Sheet** and **Time Sheet Owner User ID** fields must be filled in on the card for the resource of the time sheet. - -1. Choose the **OK** button. - -You can view the time sheets that you have created in the **Time Sheet list** window. - -## To copy job planning lines to a time sheet -The following procedure describes how to quickly add job planning lines to a time sheet. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Time Sheet List** window, select a time sheet for the relevant time period, and then choose the **Edit Time Sheet** action. -3. Choose the **Create lines from job planning** action. Any job planning lines in the time sheet time period are copied to the time sheet for the person or machine in the **Resource No.** field on the time sheet. - -## To define work types and add one to a time sheet -You can define the work type for all time sheet lines for jobs. In this way, you can add information that you need to bill the customer for different types of work. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant time sheet. -3. Choose the **Description** field. -4. In the **Time Sheet Line Job Detail** window, choose the **Work Type Code** field, and select a work type from the list, such as **Miles**. -5. If no work types exist, chose the **New** action. -6. In the **Work Types** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -7. Repeat step 4 to assign the new work type to the time sheet. - -## To reuse time sheet lines in other time sheets -If your time sheet information remains the same from time period to time period, you can save time by copying the lines from the previous time period. Then, you just enter your time usage for the new period. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the time sheet for a period later than the period for an existing time sheet with lines. -3. Choose the **Copy Lines from Previous Time Sheet** action. - -The lines are copied, including details such as type and description. For example, if the line is related to a job, the **Job No.** is copied. All copied lines have the status **Open**. You can now modify the lines as needed. - -## To fill in a time sheet lines and submit for approval -Time sheet registration is tracked in hours, the standard base unit of measure for resources. By default, a time sheet shows the common work days of Monday through Friday. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a time sheet for the relevant time period, and then choose the **Edit Time Sheet** action. -3. Fill in the fields on a line as necessary. Enter the number of hours used by the resource on each day of the week. - - > [!TIP] - > You can review the sum of time sheet hours that you have entered in the **Actual/Budgeted Summary** FactBox. -4. Repeat step 3 for other work types that the resource performs. -5. Choose the **Submit** action, and then choose the **All open lines** action to submit all lines or the **Selected lines only** action to submit only the lines that are selected in the **Time Sheet** window. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only submit time sheet lines for which you have entered time. -6. To modify information on a line that has been set to **Submitted**, select the line, and then choose the **Reopen** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > A manager may reject a time sheet line that is submitted for approval. If a line has a status of **Rejected**, you can make changes to the line, and then choose **Submit** again. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To approve or reject a time sheet -A time sheet must be submitted for approval before it can be used. You can approve and reject individual lines on a time sheet or send them back to the submitter for additional action. A time sheet can be approved in two ways: - -* A time sheet administrator can approve any time sheet. -* The person who is specified in the **Time Sheet Approver User ID** field on a resource card can approve that resource's time sheets. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Time Sheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Manager Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a time sheet from the list. -3. In the **Time Sheet** window, choose the **Approve** action, and then choose the **All submitted lines** action to approve all lines or the **Selected lines only** action to approve only the lines that are selected in the **Time Sheet** window. -4. Choose the **OK** button. -5. Alternatively, choose the **Reject** action and follow steps 4 through 5. - -> [!TIP] -> Use the **Time Sheet Status** and **Actual/Budgeted Summary** FactBoxes to get an overview of time sheet information. - -After you have approved or rejected a time sheet, it cannot be modified unless it is first reopened. The following procedure explains how to reopen an approved or rejected time sheet. - -## To reopen a time sheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Manager Time Sheets** or **Time Sheets**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a time sheet from the list. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can only reopen lines that have the status **Approved**. You cannot reopen lines that have the status **Rejected**. You cannot reopen a time sheet if it has been posted. -3. In the **Time Sheet** window, choose the **Reopen** action, and then choose the **All submitted lines** action to reopen all lines or the **Selected lines only** action to reopen only the lines that are selected in the **Time Sheet** window. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The status of the time sheets line or lines is changes to **Submitted**. - -## To post time sheet lines in a resource journal -After you have approved time sheet entries for a resource, you can post them to the relevant resource journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resource Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Suggest Lines from Time Sheets** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. Entries for usage are created in the resource journal, where you can modify the information as needed. -5. Choose the **Post** action. -6. To verify the posting, choose the **Ledger Entries** action. The **Resource Ledger Entries** window opens showing the result of posting the resource journal. - -## To post time sheet lines in a job journal -After you have approved time sheet entries for a job, you can post them to the relevant job journal. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Suggest Lines from Time Sheets** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. Entries for usage are created in the job journal, where you can modify the information as needed. - - > [!NOTE] - > Information about work type and whether the work is chargeable is copied from the time sheet line. If needed, you can reduce the quantity of hours and do a partial posting. If you reduce the quantity, then the next time that you choose the **Suggest Lines From Time Sheets** action, the line that is created will contain the remaining quantity of hours. -5. Choose the **Post** action. -6. To verify the posting, choose the **Ledger Entries** action. The **Job Ledger Entries** window opens showing the result of posting the resource journal. - -## To archive time sheets -After you have posted time sheets, you can archive them for future reference. All time sheets lines must be posted before a time sheet can be archived. - -> [!NOTE] -> When you archive a time sheet, it is removed from the lists in both the **Time Sheets** window and the **Manager Time Sheets** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Move Time Sheets to Archive**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. -3. To review archived time sheets, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Time Sheet Archives** or **Manager Time Sheet Archives**, and then choose the related link. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-manage-projects.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-manage-projects.md deleted file mode 100644 index d0f74d66..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-manage-projects.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Job Tasks using Resources and Time Sheets -description: Outlines how to use resources, time sheets, and jobs to manage projects. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: projects -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Project Management -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can perform common project management tasks, such as configuring a job and scheduling a resource, as well as providing the information needed to manage budgets and monitor progress. You can track machine and employee hours on the project by using time sheets. As a project manager, you have a good overview, not only of individual jobs, but also of the allocation of employees, machinery and other resources being used in all projects. - -Before you can use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to manage projects, you must set up resources, time sheets, and jobs. For more information, see [Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create jobs, assign job tasks, and prepare job planning lines. |[How to: Create Jobs](projects-how-create-jobs.md) | -| Allocate resources to jobs and manage resource prices. |[How to: Use Resources for Jobs](projects-how-use-resources.md) | -| Create a time sheet with integrated job task and planning lines and post time sheet lines to a job journal. |[How to: Use Time Sheets for Jobs](projects-how-use-time-sheets.md) | -| Budget for resources to be used in jobs and compare actual item and resource usage to budgeted usage to improve the quality and cost efficiency of future projects. |[How to: Manage Job Budgets](projects-how-manage-budgets.md) | -| Review and record usage on various parts of your job, which is automatically updated as you modify and transfer information from job planning lines to job journals or job invoices for posting. |[How to: Record Usage for Jobs](projects-how-record-job-usage.md) | -| Purchase supplies for a job, either on purchase orders or invoices, and record item and time usage. |[How to: Manage Job Supplies](projects-how-manage-project-supplies.md) | -| Learn about WIP (Work in Process), a feature that ensures correct financial statements and enables you to estimate the financial value of jobs that are ongoing. |[Understanding WIP Methods](projects-understanding-wip.md) | -| Post the consumption of materials, resources, and other expenses of job work in process (WIP) to monitor its financial value and to maintain correct financial statements even though you post job expenses before invoicing the job. |[How to: Monitor Job Progress and Performance](projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md) | -| Record job costs for resource usage, materials, and job-related purchases on an on-going basis and invoice the customer, either when the job is finished or according to an invoicing schedule. |[How to: Invoice Jobs](projects-how-invoice-jobs.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-setup-projects.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-setup-projects.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3342a98d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-setup-projects.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Resources, Time Sheets, and Jobs -description: Outlines how to set up resources, time sheets, and jobs to manage projects. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: projects -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Project Management -Before you can use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to manage projects, you must set up resources, time sheets, and jobs. - -Then you can create jobs and schedule resources for projects as well as manage budgets and track machine and employee hours with time sheets. For more information, see [Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up your resources and the related costs and prices, either for individual resources, resource groups, or for all available resources of the company. |[How to: Set Up Resources](projects-how-setup-resources.md) | -| Enable resources to report time usage for an individual or a machine and enable a manager to review the usage and its allocation. |[How to: Set Up Time Sheets](projects-how-setup-time-sheets.md) | -| Create job cards and prepare job tasks. Set up prices for job items and job resources and define job posting groups. |[How to: Set Up Jobs](projects-how-setup-jobs.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-understanding-wip.md b/dynamics-nav-app/projects-understanding-wip.md deleted file mode 100644 index 65b38a52..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/projects-understanding-wip.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: WIP Methods for Calculating and Recording Job Progress -description: Describes the different work in process (WIP) methods you can use to post, monitor, and calculate financial information for ongoing jobs that are in progress. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: work in process, work in progress, calculate project WIP -ms.date: 06/06/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Understanding WIP Methods -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports the following methods of calculating and recording the value of work in process. - -| WIP Method | Calculation Formula | Calculation Description | -| --- | --- | --- | -| Cost Value |Recognized Revenue = Billable Invoiced Price

Estimated Total Costs = Billable Total Price x Budget Cost Ratio

WIP Costs = (Percentage of Completion - Invoiced %) x Estimated Total Costs

Percentage of Completion = Usage Total Costs / Budget Total Costs
Invoiced % = Billable Invoiced Price

Billable Total Price Recognized Costs = Usage Total Costs - WIP |Cost value calculations start by calculating the value of what has been provided by taking a proportion of the estimated total costs based on percentage of completion. Invoiced costs are subtracted by taking a proportion of the estimated total costs based on the invoiced percentage.

This calculation requires that the billable total price, budget total price, and budget total costs be correctly entered for the whole job. | -| Cost of Sales |Recognized Revenue = Billable Invoiced Price

Recognized Costs = Budget Total Cost x Invoiced Percentage

Invoiced % = Billable Invoiced Price / Billable Total Price

(Invoiced % exists as column on job task lines)

WIP Costs = Usage Total Costs – Recognized Costs |Cost of sales calculations begin by calculating the recognized costs. Costs are recognized proportionally based on budget total costs.

This calculation requires that the billable total price and budget total costs be correctly entered for the whole job. | -| Sales Value |Recognized Costs = Usage Total Costs

Recognized Revenue = Usage Total Price x Expected invoicing ratio

Cost Recovery % = Billable Total Price / Budget Total Price

WIP Sales = Recognized Sales - Billable Invoiced Price |Sales value calculations recognize revenue proportionally based on usage total costs and the expected cost recovery ratio.

This calculation requires that the billable total price and budget total price be correctly entered for the whole job. | -| Percentage of Completion |Recognized Costs = Usage Total Costs

Recognized Revenue = Billable Total Price x Percentage of Completion

Percentage of Completion = Usage Total Costs / Budget Total Costs
(Referred to as "Cost Completion %" on job task lines)

WIP Sales = Recognized Sales - Billable Invoiced Price |Percentage of completion calculations recognize revenue proportionally based on the percentage of completion, that is, usage total costs vs. budget costs.

This calculation requires that the billable total price and budget total costs be correctly entered for the whole job. | -| Completed Contract |WIP Amount = WIP Cost Amount = Usage (Total Cost)

WIP Sales Amount = Billable (Invoiced Price) |Completed contract does not recognize revenue and costs until the job is complete. You may want to do this when there is high uncertainty around the estimates of costs and revenue for the job.

All usage is posted to the WIP Costs account (asset) and all invoiced sales are posted to the WIP Invoiced Sales account (liability) until the job is complete. | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md deleted file mode 100644 index 90a614a2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Date Calculation for Purchases - description: The program automatically calculates the date on which you must order an item to have it in inventory on a certain date. This is the date on which you can expect items ordered on a particular date to be available for picking. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/10/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Date Calculation for Purchases -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculates the date on which you must order an item to have it in inventory on a certain date. This is the date on which you can expect items ordered on a particular date to be available for picking. - -If you specify a requested receipt date on a purchase order header, then the calculated order date is the date on which the order must be placed to receive the items on the date that you requested. Then, the date on which the items are available for picking is calculated and entered in the **Expected Receipt Date** field. - -If you do not specify a requested receipt date, then the order date on the line is used as the starting point for calculating the date on which you can expect to receive the items and the date on which the items are available for picking. - -## Calculating with a Requested Receipt Date -If there is a requested receipt date on the purchase order line, then that date is used as the starting point for the following calculations. - -- requested receipt date - lead time calculation = order date -- requested receipt date + inbound whse. handling time + safety lead time = expected receipt date - -If you entered a requested receipt date on the purchase order header, then that date is copied to the corresponding field on all the lines. You can change this date on any of the lines, or you can remove the date on the line. - -## Calculating without a Requested Delivery Date -If you enter a purchase order line without a requested delivery date, then the **Order Date** field on the line is filled with the date in the **Order Date** field on the purchase order header. This is either the date that you entered or the work date. The following dates are then calculated for the purchase order line, with the order date as the starting point. - -- order date + lead time calculation = planned receipt date -- planned receipt date + inbound whse. handling time + safety lead time = expected receipt date - -If you change the order date on the line, such as when items are not available at your vendor until a later date, then the relevant dates on the line are automatically recalculated. - -If you change the order date on the header, then that date is copied to the **Order Date** field on all the lines, and all the related date fields are then recalculated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Date Calculation for Sales](sales-date-calculation-for-sales.md) - [How to: Calculate Order Promising Dates](sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index 242114ff..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Amend or Cancel Unpaid Purchase Invoices -description: Explains how to correct, cancel, or undo a posted purchase invoice and automatically create a purchase credit memo. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: undo, credit memo, return -ms.date: 08/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Purchase Invoices -You can correct or cancel a posted purchase invoice. This is useful if you want to correct a typing mistake, or if you want to change the purchase early in the order process. - -If you have already paid for products on the posted purchase invoice, you cannot correct or cancel it from the posted purchase invoice itself. Instead, you must manually create a purchase credit memo to reverse the purchase, optionally managed with a purchase return order. For more information, see [How to: Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md). - -In the **Posted Purchase Invoice** window, you can choose the **Correct** button or the **Cancel** button. When you correct or cancel a posted purchase invoice, the corrective purchase credit memo is applied to all general ledger and inventory ledger entries that were created when the initial purchase invoice was posted. This reverses the posted purchase invoice in your financial records and leaves the corrective posted purchase credit memo for your audit trail. In the following the use of **Correct** and **Cancel** is described. - -## To correct a posted purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the posted purchase invoice that you want to correct. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the **Canceled** check box is selected, then you cannot correct the posted purchase invoice because it has already been corrected or canceled. -3. In the **Posted Purchase Invoice** window, choose **Correct**. - - A new purchase invoice with the same information is created where you can make the correction. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). The **Canceled** field on the initial posted purchase invoice is changed to **Yes**. - - A purchase credit memo is automatically created and posted to void the initial posted purchase invoice. -4. Choose **Show Corrective Credit Memo** to view the posted purchase credit memo that voids the initial posted purchase invoice. - -## To cancel a posted purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the posted purchase invoice that you want to cancel. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the **Canceled** check box is selected, then you cannot cancel the posted purchase invoice because it has already been canceled or corrected. -3. In the **Posted Purchase Invoice** window, choose **Cancel**. - - A purchase credit memo is automatically created and posted to void the initial posted purchase invoice. The **Canceled** field on the initial posted purchase invoice is changed to **Yes**. -4. Choose **Show Corrective Credit Memo** to view the posted purchase credit memo that voids the initial posted purchase invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors.md deleted file mode 100644 index ddfa50a7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Assign a Priority Level to a Vendor -description: You can assign numbers to your vendors or suppliers to prioritize them and facilitate payment suggestions in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: supplier, payment priority -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Prioritize Vendors -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can suggest various payments to vendors, for example, payments that will be due soon or payments where a discount is available. For more information, see [How to: Suggest Vendor Payments](payables-how-suggest-vendor-payments.md). - -First, you must prioritize your vendors by assigning numbers to them. - -## To prioritize vendors -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant vendor, and then choose **Edit**. -3. In the **Priority** field, enter a number. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] considers the lowest number, except 0, to have the highest priority. So, for example, if you use 1, 2, and 3, then 1 will have the highest priority. - -If you do not want to prioritize a vendor, leave the **Priority** field blank. Then, if you use the payment suggestion feature, the vendor will be listed after all the vendors that have a priority number. You can enter as many priority levels as necessary. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1f156f60..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Use Purchase Credit Memos to Process Returns or Cancellations -description: Explains how to create and post a purchase credit memo when you want to return items to a vendor or cancel purchased services. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: cancel, undo, correct -ms.date: 08/03/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations -If you want to return items to your vendor or cancel services that you have purchased, then you can create and post a purchase credit memo that specifies the requested change with regard to the original purchase invoice. To include the correct purchase invoice information, you can create the purchase credit memo directly from the posted purchase invoice or you can create a new purchase credit memo with copied invoice information. - -If you need more control of the purchase return process, such as warehouse documents for the item handling or better overview when shipping back items from multiple purchase documents with one purchase return, then you can create purchase return orders. A purchase return order automatically issues the related purchase credit memo. For more information, see the "To create a purchase return order based on one or more a posted purchase documents" section. - -> [!NOTE] -> If a posted purchase invoice has not yet been paid, then you can use the **Correct** or **Cancel** functions on the posted purchase invoice to automatically reverse the involved transactions. These functions only work for unpaid invoices, and they do not support partial returns or cancellations. For more information, see [How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Purchase Invoices](purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md). - -Typically, you create a purchase credit memo or purchase return order in reaction to a credit memo sent to you by a vendor. The purchase credit memo or purchase return order functions as your internal documentation of the credit memo process for accounting purposes or to control the shipping of the involved items. - -The change may relate to all the products on the original purchase invoice or only to some of the products. Accordingly, you can partially return received items or demand partial reimbursement of received services. In that case, you must edit the information on the purchase credit memo or purchase return order. - -In addition to the original posted purchase invoice, you can apply the purchase credit memo or purchase return order to other purchase documents, for example another posted purchase invoice because you are also returning items delivered with that invoice. - -The credit memo posting will also revert any item charges that were assigned to the posted document, so that the item’s value entries are the same as before the item charge was assigned. - -## Inventory Costing -To preserve correct inventory valuation, you typically want to pick return items from inventory at the unit cost that they were purchased at, not at their current unit cost. This is referred to as exact cost reversing. - -Two functions exist to assign exact cost reversing automatically. - -|Function|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function in the **Purchase Return Order** window|Copies lines of one or more posted documents to be reversed into the purchase return order. For more information, see the "To create a purchase return order, and related purchase credit memo, for on one or more a posted purchase invoices" section.| -|**Copy Document** function in the **Purchase Credit Memo** and **Purchase Return Order** windows|Copies both the header and lines of one posted document to be reversed.

Requires that the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window.| - -To assign exact cost reversing manually, you must choose the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on any type of return document line, and then select the number of the original purchase entry. This links the purchase credit memo or purchase return order to the original purchase sales entry and ensures that the item is valued at the original unit cost. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md). - -## To create a purchase credit memo from a posted purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Posted Purchase Invoices** window, select the posted purchase invoice that you want to reverse, and then choose the **Create Corrective Credit Memo** action. - - Most fields on the purchase credit memo header are filled with the information from the posted purchase invoice. You can edit all the fields, for example with new information that reflects the return agreement. -3. Edit information on the lines according to the agreement, such as the number of items returned or the amount to be reimbursement. -4. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. -5. In the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, select the line with the posted purchase document that you want to apply the purchase credit memo to, and then choose the **Applies-to ID** action. The number of the purchase credit memo is inserted in the **Applies-to ID** field. -6. In the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount that you want to apply if smaller than the original amount. - - At the bottom of the **Apply Vendor Entries** window, you can see the total amount to apply to reverse all involved entries, namely when the value in the **Balance** field is zero. -7. Choose the **OK** button. When you post the purchase credit memo, it will be applied to the specified posted purchase documents. - - When you have created or edited the needed purchase credit memo lines and the single or multiple applications are specified, you can proceed to post the purchase credit memo. -8. Choose the **Post** action. - -The posted purchase invoices that you apply the credit memo to are now reversed. If you have already paid the original invoice, the vendor should now refund the payment to you. If the credit memo is only for part of the product on the original invoice, you may only pay the remaining amount on the original purchase invoice to close it. - -The purchase credit memo is removed and replaced with a new document in the list of posted purchase credit memos. - -## To create a purchase credit memo by copying a posted purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to open a new empty purchase credit memo. -3. In the **Vendor** field, enter the name of an existing vendor. -4. Choose the **Copy Document** action. -5. In the **Copy Purchase Document** window, in the **Document Type** field, select **Posted Invoice**. -6. Choose the **Document No.** field to open the **Posted Purchase Invoices** window, and then select the posted purchase invoice that contains lines that you want to reverse. -7. Select the **Recalculate Lines** check box if you want the copied posted purchase invoice lines to be updated with any changes in item price and unit cost since the invoice was posted. -8. Choose the **OK** button. The copied invoice lines are inserted in the purchase credit memo. -9. Complete the purchase credit memo as explained in the "To create a purchase credit memo from a posted purchase invoice" section in this topic. - -## To create a purchase return order based on one or more a posted purchase documents -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields on the **General** FastTab as necessary. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill the lines manually, or copy information from other documents to fill the lines automatically: - - - Use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to copy one or more posted document lines from one or more posted documents. This function always exactly reverses the costs from the posted document line. This function is described in the following steps. - - Use the **Copy Document** function to copy an existing document to the return order. Use this function to copy the entire document. It can be either a posted document or a document that is not yet posted. This function only enables exact cost reversing when the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected in the **Sales and Receivables Setup** window. - -5. Choose the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** action. -6. At the top of the **Posted Purchase Document Lines** window, select the **Show Reversible Lines Only** check box if you want to see only lines that have quantities that have not yet been returned. For example, if a posted purchase invoice quantity has already been returned, you may not want to include that quantity on a new purchase return document. - - > [!NOTE] - > This field only works for posted receipts and posted invoice lines, not for posted return or posted credit memo lines. - - At the left side of the window, the different document types are listed, and the number in brackets shows the number of documents available of each document type. - -7. In the **Document Type Filter** field, select the type of posted document lines you would like to use. -8. Select the lines that you would like to copy to the new document. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you use Ctrl+A to select all lines, all lines within the filter you have set are copied, but the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** filter is ignored. For example, suppose you have filtered the lines to a particular document number with two lines, one of which has already been returned. Even if the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** field is selected, if you press Ctrl+A to copy all lines, both lines are copied, instead of only the one that has not yet been reversed. - -9. Choose the **OK** button to copy the lines to the new document. - - The following processes occur: - - - For posted document lines of the type **Item**, a new document line is created that is a copy of the posted document line, with the quantity that has not yet been reversed. The **Appl.-to Item Entry** field is filled in as appropriate with the number of the item ledger entry of the posted document line. - - - For posted document lines that are not of the type **Item**, such as item charges, a new document line is created that is a copy of the original posted document line. - - - Calculates the **Unit Cost (LCY)** field on the new line from the costs on the corresponding item ledger entries. - - - If the copied document is a posted shipment, posted receipt, posted return receipt, or posted return shipment, the unit price is calculated automatically from the item card. - - - If the copied document is a posted invoice or credit memo, the unit price, invoice discounts, and line discounts from the posted document line are copied. - - - If the posted document line contains item tracking lines, the **Appl.-to Item Entry** field on the item tracking lines is filled with the appropriate item ledger entry numbers from the posted item tracking lines. - - When you copy from a posted invoice or posted credit memo, the program copies any relevant invoice discounts and line discounts as valid at the time of posting that document from the posted document line to the new document line. Be aware, however, that if the **Calc. Inv. Discount** option is activated in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window, then the invoice discount will be newly calculated when you post the new document line. The line amount for the new line may therefore be different than the line amount for the posted document line, depending on the new calculation of the invoice discount. - - > [!NOTE] - > If part of the quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed or sold or consumed, a line is created for only the quantity that remains in inventory or that has not been returned. If the full quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed, a new document line is not created. - > - > If the flow of goods in the posted document is the same as the flow of goods in the new document, a copy of the original posted document line in the new document is created. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is not filled in because, in this case, exact cost reversing is not possible. For example, if you use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to get a posted purchase credit memo line for a new purchase credit memo, only the original posted credit memo line is copied to the new credit memo. - -10. In the **Purchase Return Order** window, in the **Return Reason Code** field on each line, select the reason for the return. -11. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To create a replacement purchase order from a purchase return order -You may agree with your vendor that they compensate you for a purchased item by replacing the item. The replacement item can be the same or it can be different. This situation could occur if the vendor mistakenly shipped the wrong item. -1. In the **Purchase Return Order** window for an active return process, on an empty line, make a negative entry for the replacement item by inserting a negative amount in the **Quantity** field. -2. Choose the **Move Negative Lines** action. -3. In the **Move Negative Purchase Lines** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The negative line is deleted from the purchase return order, and a new purchase order is created. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). - -## To create a purchase allowance -If you receive items from your vendor that are not what you wanted, for example, if they are slightly damaged, the wrong color or the wrong size, the vendor may offer you a purchase allowance. - -You can post this reduced purchase cost as an item charge on a credit memo or return order and link it to the posted receipt. The following describes it for a purchase return order, but the same steps apply to a purchase credit memo. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to open a new empty purchase credit memo. -3. Fill in the credit memo header with information about the vendor who sent you the purchase allowance. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. -5. In the **No.** field, select the appropriate item charge value. - - You may want to create a special item charge number to cover purchase allowances. -6. In the **Quantity** field, enter **1**. -7. In the **Direct Unit Cost** field, enter the amount of the purchase allowance. -8. Assign the purchase allowance as an item charge to the items in the posted receipt. For more information, see [How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). When you have assigned the allowance, return to the **Purchase Credit Memo** window. - -When you post the purchase return order, the purchase allowance is added to the relevant purchase entry amount. In this way, you can maintain accurate inventory valuation. - -## To combine return shipments -If you want to return items covered by different purchase return orders to the same vendor, then you can use the **Combine Return Shipments** function. - -When you ship the items, you post the related purchase return orders as shipped and this creates posted purchase return shipments. - -When you are ready to invoice these items, instead of invoicing each purchase return order separately, you can create a purchase credit memo and automatically copy the posted purchase return shipment lines to this document. Then you can post the purchase credit memo and conveniently invoice all the open purchase return orders at the same time. - -When return shipments are combined on a credit memo and posted, then a posted purchase credit memo is created for the invoiced lines. The **Quantity Invoiced** field on the originating purchase return order is updated based on the invoiced quantity. However, this original purchase return order is not deleted, even if it has been fully received and invoiced, and you must therefore delete the purchase return order manually. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure assumes that there are several purchase return orders for the vendor, and that they have been posted as shipped. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **Get Return Shipment Lines** action. -5. Select multiple return shipment lines that you want to include in the invoice. - - If an incorrect return shipment line was selected or you want to start over, you can just delete the lines on the purchase credit memo and then use the **Get Return Shipment Lines** function again. -6. Choose the **Post** action. - -### To remove open purchase return orders after combined return shipment posting - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Purchase Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary, and then choose the **OK** button. -3. Alternatively, delete the individual purchase return orders manually. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[How to: How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Purchase Invoices](purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale.md deleted file mode 100644 index f940e24b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Purchase Invoice from a Sales Invoice to Buy Items for a Sale -description: From a sales invoice, to purchase products, you can create a purchase invoice for a vendor or supplier. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: supply planning, sales demand, replenish -ms.date: 05/16/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Purchase Items for a Sale -From sales orders and sales invoices, you can use functions to quickly create purchase documents for missing item quantities that are required by the sale. You can use two different functions depending on the document type. - -|Function|Description| -|--------|-----------| -|**Create Purchase Orders**|From a sales order, this function creates a purchase order for each vendor of items on the sales order. You can edit the purchase quantity before you create the purchase orders. Only unavailable sales quantities are suggested. -|**Create Purchase Invoice**|From a sales order and from a sales invoice, this function creates a purchase invoice for a selected vendor for all lines or selected lines on the sales document. The full sales quantity is suggested.| - -## To create one or more purchase orders from a sales order -To create a purchase order for each unavailable item quantity on the sales order, you use the **Create Purchase Orders** function. - -1. On the Home page, choose the **Ongoing Sales Orders** tile. -2. Open a sales order that you want to purchase items for. -3. Choose the **Create Purchase Orders** action. - - The **Create Purchase Orders** window opens showing a line for each different item on the sales order. Lines for both fully available sales quantities and unavailable sales quantities (grayed) are shown by default. You can choose the **Show Unavailable** action to only see lines for unavailable sales quantities. - - The **Quantity to Purchase** field contains the unavailable sales quantity by default. -4. To purchase another quantity than the unavailable sales quantity, edit the value in the **Quantity to Purchase** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also change the **Quantity to Purchase** field on grayed lines even though they represent fully available sales quantities. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - - A purchase order is created for each vendor of items on the sales order, including any quantity changes that you made in the **Create Purchase Orders** window. -6. Proceed to process the purchase order or orders, for example, by editing or adding purchase order lines. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). - - -## To create a purchase invoice from a sales order or sales invoice -To create a single purchase invoice for one or more lines on a sales document by first selecting which vendor to buy from, you use the **Create Purchase Invoice** function. - -> [!NOTE] -> This function creates a purchase invoice for the exact item quantity on the selected sales document. To change the purchase quantity, you must edit the purchase invoice after it is created. - -1. On the Home page, choose the **Ongoing Sales Invoices** tile. -2. Open a sales invoice that you want to purchase items for. -3. Select one or more sales invoice lines that you want to use on the purchase invoice. To use all the sales invoice lines, select either all of them or do not select any lines. -4. Choose the **Create Purchase Invoice** action. -5. Select either **All Lines** or **Selected Lines**, and then choose the **OK** button. -6. In the list of vendors that appears, select the vendor that you want to buy all the items from, and then choose the **OK** button. - - A purchase invoice is created that contains one, more, or all the lines on the sales invoice. -7. Proceed to process the purchase invoice, for example, by editing or adding purchase invoice lines. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchase-price-discount-payment-agreements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchase-price-discount-payment-agreements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4d3e81c9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchase-price-discount-payment-agreements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Special and Alternate Pricing and Discounts for Vendors ' -description: You can define different or alternate prices and discount agreements and apply them to purchase documents for vendors. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: special price, alternate price, pricing -ms.date: 07/03/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Record Special Purchase Prices and Discounts -The different price and discount agreements that apply when you buy from different vendors must be defined so that the agreed rules and values are applied to purchase documents that you create for the vendors. - -When you have recorded special prices and line discounts for sales and purchases, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] ensures that your profit on item trade is always optimal by automatically calculating the best price on sales and purchase documents and on job and item journal lines. For more information, see the "Best Price Calculation" section. - -Concerning prices, you can have a special purchase price inserted on purchase lines if a certain combination of vendor, item, minimum quantity, unit of measure, or starting/ending date exists. - -Concerning discounts, you can set up and use two types of purchase discounts: - -| Discount Type | Description | -| --- | --- | -| **Purchase Line Discount** |An amount discount that is inserted on purchase lines if a certain combination of vendor, item, minimum quantity, unit of measure, or starting/ending date exists. This works in the same way as for purchase prices. | -| **Invoice Discount** |A percentage discount that is subtracted from the document total if the value amount of all lines on a purchase document exceeds a certain minimum. | - -Because purchase line discounts and purchase prices are based on a combination of item and vendor, you can also enter this configuration from the item card, where the rules and values are defined. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -## To set up a special purchase price for a vendor -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant vendor card, and then choose the **Prices** action. - - The **Purchase Type** field is prefilled with **Vendor**, and the **Purchase Code** field is prefilled with the vendor number. -3. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Fill a line for each combination for which the vendor grants you a purchase line discount. - -## To set up a line discount for a vendor -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant vendor card, and then choose the **Line Discounts** action. - - The **Purchase Type** field is prefilled with **Vendor**, and the **Purchase Code** field is prefilled with the vendor number. -3. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Fill a line for each combination for which the vendor grants you a purchase line discount. - -## To set up an invoice discount for a vendor -When your vendors have informed you which invoice discounts they grant, enter the invoice discount code on the vendor cards and set up the terms for each code. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the vendor card for a vendor that will be eligible for invoice discounts. -3. In the **Invoice Disc. Code** field, select a code for the relevant invoice discount terms to use to calculate invoice discounts for the vendor. - - > [!NOTE] - > Invoice discount codes are represented by existing vendor cards. This enables you to quickly assign invoice discount terms to vendors by picking the name of another vendors who will have the same terms. - - Proceed to set up new the purchase invoice discount terms. -4. In the **Vendor Card** window, choose the **Invoice Discounts** action. The **Vend. Invoice Discounts** window opens. -5. In the **Currency Code** field, enter the code for a currency that the invoice discount terms on the line applies to. Leave the field blank to set up invoice discount terms in USD. -6. In the **Minimum Amount** field, enter the minimum amount that an invoice must have to be eligible for the discount. -7. In the **Discount %** field, enter the invoice discount as a percentage of the invoice amount. -8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each currency that the vendor will receive a different invoice discount for. - -The invoice discount is now set up and assigned to the vendor in question. When you select the vendor code in the **Invoice Disc. Code** field on other vendor cards, the same invoice discount is assigned to those vendor. - -## To choose a principle for posting purchase discounts -When you post a purchase invoice that includes one or more discounts, you can choose between two principles for posting discount amounts. You can post discounts separately or you can subtract discounts from invoice discounts. - -Before you can do this, you must have already set up the necessary accounts for posting discount amounts in the chart of accounts. You must also check that you have entered the correct account numbers in the general posting setup in the **Purch. Line Disc. Account** and **Purch. Inv. Disc. Account** fields. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchases & Payables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Discount Posting** field, choose one of the following principles for posting discounts. - -|**Discount Posting Principle**|**Invoice Discount**|**Line Discount**| -|------------------------------------|--------------------------|-----------------------| -|**All Discounts**|Posted separately|Posted separately| -|**Invoice Discounts**|Posted separately|Subtracted| -|**Line Discounts**|Subtracted|Posted separately| -|**No Discounts**|Subtracted|Subtracted| - -## Purchase Invoice Discounts and Service Charges -If you have fixed terms for invoice discounts with any vendors, you can enter them for those vendors. Then the discount will be calculated when you fill in a purchase invoice. - - Before you can use invoice discounts with purchases, you must specify the vendors that offer you the discounts. - - You link discount percentages to specific invoice amounts in **Vend. Invoice Discounts** windows. You can enter any number of percentages in each window. Each vendor can have its own window, or you can link several vendors to the same window. - - In addition to a discount percentage, you can link a service charge amount to a specific invoice amount. - - You can define the terms of the invoice discount in LCY for domestic vendors and in foreign currency for foreign vendors. - - You can choose to have [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculate the invoice discounts for quotes, blanket orders, orders, invoices, or credit memos. - -> [!TIP] -> Before you enter this information, it is a good idea to prepare an outline of the discount structure that you want to use. This makes it easier to see which vendors can be linked to the same invoice discount window. The fewer windows that you have to set up, the faster that you can enter the basic information. - -## Best Price Calculation -When you have recorded special prices and line discounts for sales and purchases, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] ensures that your profit on item trade is always optimal by automatically calculating the best price on sales and purchase documents and on job and item journal lines. - -The best price is the lowest permissible price with the highest permissible line discount on a given date. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculates this when it inserts the unit price and the line discount percentage for items on new document and journal lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following describes how the best price is calculated for sales. The calculation is the same for purchases. - -1. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks the combination of the bill-to customer and the item and then calculates the applicable unit price and line discount percentage, using the following criteria: - - - Does the customer have a price/discount agreement, or does the customer belong to a group that does? - - Is the item or the item discount group on the line included in any of these price/discount agreements? - - Is the order date (or the posting date for the invoice and credit memo) within the starting and ending date of the price/discount agreement? - - Is a unit of measure code specified? If so, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks for prices/discounts with the same unit of measure code, and prices/discounts with no unit of measure code. - -2. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks if any price/discount agreements apply to information on the document or journal line, and then inserts the applicable unit price and line discount percentage, using the following criteria: - - - Is there a minimum quantity requirement in the price/discount agreement that is fulfilled? - - Is there a currency requirement in the price/discount agreement that is fulfilled? If so, the lowest price and the highest line discount for that currency are inserted, even if LCY would provide a better price. If there is no price/discount agreement for the specified currency code, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] inserts the lowest price and the highest line discount in LCY. - -If no special price can be calculated for the item on the line, then either the last direct cost or the unit price from the item card is inserted. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchases.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchases.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1bcdcd9d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-record-purchases.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Purchase Invoice and Record Purchases -description: Describes how to purchase inventory and service items by creating and posting purchase invoices or orders. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: procurement -ms.date: 08/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Record Purchases -You create a purchase invoice or purchase order to record the cost of purchases and to track accounts payable. If you need to control an inventory, purchase invoices and purchase orders are also used to dynamically update inventory levels so that you can minimize your inventory costs and provide better customer service. The purchasing costs, including service expenses, and inventory values that result from posting purchase invoices or orders contribute to profit figures and other financial KPIs on your Home page. - -> [!NOTE] -> You must use purchase orders if your purchasing process requires that you record partial receipts of an order quantity, for example, because the full quantity was not available at the vendor. If you sell items by delivering directly from your vendor to your customer, as a drop shipment, then you must also use purchase orders. For more information, see [How to: Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md). In all other aspects, purchase orders work the same way as purchase invoices. The following procedure is based on a purchase invoice. The steps are similar for a purchase order. - -When you receive the inventory items, or when the purchased service is completed, you post the purchase invoice or order to update inventory and financial records and to activate payment to the vendor according to the payment terms. For more information, see [Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md). - -> [!CAUTION] -> Do not post a purchase invoice until you receive the items and know the final cost of the purchase, including any additional charges. Otherwise, your inventory value and profit figures may be skewed. - -You can easily correct or cancel a posted purchase invoice before you pay the vendor. This is useful if you want to correct a typing mistake or if you want to change the purchase early in the order process. For more information, see [How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Purchase Invoices](purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md). If you have already paid for items on the posted purchase invoice, then you must create a purchase credit memo to reverse the purchase. For more information, see [How to: Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-process-purchase-returns-cancellations.md). - -Items can be type **Inventory** or **Service**. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). The purchase invoice process is the same for both item types. - -You can fill vendor fields on the purchase invoice in two ways depending on whether the vendor is already registered. - -## To create a purchase invoice -1. On the Home page, choose the **Purchase Invoice** action. -2. In the **Vendor** field, enter the name of an existing vendor. - - Other fields in the **Purchase Invoice** window are now filled with the standard information of the selected vendor. If the vendor is not registered, then follow these steps: -3. In the **Vendor** field, enter the name of the new vendor. -4. In the dialog box about registering the new vendor, choose the **Yes** button. -5. In the **Select a template for a new vendor** window, choose a template to base the new vendor card on, and then choose the **OK** button. -6. A new vendor card opens, prefilled with the information on the selected vendor template. The **Name** field is prefilled with the new vendor’s name that you entered on the purchase invoice. -7. Proceed to fill in the remaining fields on the vendor card. For more information, see [How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md). -8. When you have completed the vendor card, choose the **OK** button to return to the **Purchase Invoice** window. - - Several fields in the **Purchase Invoice** window are filled with information that you specified on the new vendor card. -9. Fill in the remaining fields in the **Purchase Invoice** window as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - You are now ready to fill in the purchase invoice lines with inventory items or services that you have purchased from the vendor. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you have set up recurring purchase lines for the vendor, such as a monthly replenishment order, then you can insert these lines on the invoice by choosing the **Get Recurring Purchase Lines** action. -10. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Item No.** field, enter the number of an inventory item or service. -11. In the **Quantity** field, enter the number of items to be purchased. - - > [!NOTE] - > For items of type **Service**, the quantity is a time unit, such as hours, as indicated in the **Unit of Measure Code** field on the line. - - The **Line Amount** field is updated to show the value in the **Direct Unit Cost** field multiplied by the value in the **Quantity** field. - - The price and line amount are shown with or without sales tax depending on what you selected in the **Prices Including Tax** field on the vendor card. -12. In the **Invoice Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field at the bottom of the invoice. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you have set up invoice discounts for the vendor, then the specified percentage value is automatically inserted in the **Vendor Invoice Discount %** field if the criteria are met, and the related amount is inserted in the **Invoice Discount Amount** field. -13. When you receive the purchased items or services, choose **Post**. - -The purchase is now reflected in inventory and financial records, and the vendor payment is activated. The purchase invoice is removed from the list of purchase invoices and replaced with a new document in the list of posted purchase invoices. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[How to: Request Quotes](purchasing-how-request-quotes.md) -[How to: Purchase Items for a Sale](purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale.md) -[How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) -[How to: Prepare Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md deleted file mode 100644 index 153bb744..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Vendor Card to Register a New Vendor -description: Learn how to create a vendor card to register a new vendor or supplier. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: supplier -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Register New Vendors -Vendors provide the products that you sell. Each vendor that you purchase from must be registered as a vendor card. - -Before you can register new vendors, you must set up various purchase codes that you can select from when you fill vendor cards. When all of the required master data is created, you can perform additional configuration of the vendor, such as prioritize the vendor for payment purposes and list items that the vendor and other vendors can supply. Another group of setup tasks for vendors is to record your agreements concerning discounts, prices, and payment methods. For more information, see [Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md). - -Vendor cards hold the information that is required to buy products from the vendor. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) and [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If vendor templates exist for different vendor types, then a window appears when you create a new vendor card from where you can select an appropriate template. If only one vendor template exists, then new vendor cards always use that template. - -## To create a new vendor card -1. On the Home page, choose **Vendors** to open the list of existing vendors. -2. In the **Vendors** window, Choose **New**. - - If more than one vendor template exists, then a window opens from which you can select a vendor template. In that case, follow the next two steps. -3. In the **Select a template for a new vendor** window, choose the template that you want to use for the new vendor card. -4. Choose the **OK** button. A new vendor card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the vendor card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!NOTE] -> If you do not know the invoicing address that will be used for every invoice from a vendor, do not fill in the **Pay-to** field. Instead, choose the pay-to vendor number after you have set up a purchase quote, order, or invoice header. - -The vendor is now registered, and the vendor card is ready to be used on purchase documents. - -If you want to use this vendor card as a template when you create new vendor cards, you can save it as a vendor template. For more information, see the following section. - -## To save the vendor card as a template -1. In the **Vendor Card** window, choose the **Save as Template** action. The **Vendor Template** window opens showing the vendor card as a template. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. To reuse dimensions in templates, choose the **Dimensions** action. The **Dimension Templates** window opens showing any dimension codes that are set up for the vendor. -4. Edit or enter dimension codes that will apply to new vendor cards created by using the template. -5. When you have completed the new vendor template, choose the **OK** button. - The vendor template is added to the list of vendor templates, so that you can use it to create new vendor cards. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-request-quotes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-request-quotes.md deleted file mode 100644 index f1a7b2a7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-request-quotes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Purchase Quote to Request an Offer from Your Vendor -description: Describes how to create a sales offer or a request for proposal (RFQ) document to record your offer to a customer to sell products under certain terms. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: rfq -ms.date: 08/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Request Quotes -A purchase quote can be used as a preliminary draft for a purchase order, and the order can then be converted to a purchase invoice or a order. - - -## To create a purchase quote -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Quotes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new document, in the same way as you make a purchase order. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). - -## To convert a purchase quote to a purchase order -When you have accepted the vendors quote, you can convert it to a purchase invoice or ordfer to process the purchase. - -1. Open a purchase quote that is ready to convert, and then choose the **Make Order** action. - -The purchase quote is removed from the database. A purchase invoice or a sales order is created based on the information in the purchase quote in which you can process the purchase. In the **Quote No.** field on the purchase invoice or purchase order, you can see the number of the purchase quote that it was made from. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-setup-purchasers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-setup-purchasers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 877e30d0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-setup-purchasers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Purchasers and Assign Purchasers to Vendors -description: If several purchasers, or purchasing agents, work at your company, you can organize them for statistical analysis. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: purchasing agent -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont ---- -# How to: Set Up Purchasers -If several purchasers work at your company, you can set them up in a window and assign them each a code. You can then use the codes to prepare statistics and to filter information in printed reports. - -## To set up purchasers -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Salespeople/Purchasers**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Salespeople/Purchasers** window, choose **New**. -3. In the **Salesperson/Purchaser Card** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign purchasers to vendors -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Vendors**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant vendor card for the vendor that will be assigned a purchaser. -3. In the **Purchaser Code** field, select the applicable purchaser code and then close the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-combine-receipts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-combine-receipts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 94449225..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-combine-receipts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Combine Receipts - description: If you want to invoice more than one purchase receipt at a time, you can use the Combine Receipts function. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Combine Receipts on a Single Invoice -If you want to invoice more than one purchase receipt at a time, you can use the **Combine Receipts** function. - -Before you can create a combined purchase receipt, more than one receipt from the same vendor in the same currency must be posted. In other words, you must have filled in two or more purchase orders and posted them as received, but not invoiced. - -When purchase receipts are combined on an invoice and posted, then a posted purchase invoice is created for the invoiced lines. The **Quantity Invoiced** field on the originating purchase order, or blanket purchase order, is updated based on the invoiced quantity. However, this original purchase document is not deleted, even if it has been fully received and invoiced, and you must therefore delete the purchase document. - -## To combine receipts -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Get Receipt Lines** action. -4. Select multiple receipt lines that you want to include in the invoice. - - If an incorrect receipt line was selected or you want to start over, you can just delete the lines on the purchase invoice and then use the **Get Receipt Lines** function again. -5. To post the invoice, choose the **Post** action. - -## To remove open purchase orders after combined receipt posting -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Purchase Orders**, and select the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -Alternatively, delete the individual orders manually. - -Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other affected documents, such as blanket purchase orders. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6f215968..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-how-to-receive-and-convert-electronic-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Receive and Convert Electronic Documents - description: You can receive electronic documents directly from trading partners or from an OCR service. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Receive and Convert Electronic Documents -The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports receiving electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format, which is supported by the largest providers of document exchange services. To receive an invoice from a vendor as an electronic PEPPOL document, you process the document in the Incoming Documents window to convert it to a purchase invoice or general journal line in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - - In addition to receiving electronic documents directly from trading partners, you can receive electronic documents from an OCR service that has turned your PDF or image files into electronic documents. - - Before you can receive electronic documents through the document exchange service, you must set up various master data, such as company information, vendors, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when converting data in elements in the incoming document file to fields in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [How to: Set Up a Document Exchange Service](across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md). - - Before you can receive electronic documents through the OCR service, you must set up and enable the preconfigured service connection. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Incoming Documents](across-how-setup-income-documents.md). - - The traffic of electronic documents in and out of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is managed by the Job Queue feature. Before you can receive electronic documents, the relevant job queue must be started. - - You can either start the conversion of electronic documents manually, as described in this procedure, or you can enable a workflow to convert electronic documents automatically when they are received. The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a workflow template, *From Incoming Electronic through OCR to Open Purchase Invoice Workflow*, which is ready to be copied to a workflow and enabled. For more information, see [Workflow](across-workflow.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> When you convert electronic documents received from the OCR service to documents or journal lines in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], multiple lines on the source document will be summed on one line. The single line will be of type G/L Account and the **Description** and (G/L account) **No.** fields will be empty. The value in the **Amount** field will equal the total amount excluding VAT of all lines in the source document. -> -> To make sure that the **Description** and **No.** fields are filled, you can choose the **Map Text to Account** button in the **Incoming Documents** window to define that a certain invoice text is always mapped to a certain debit or credit account in the general ledger. Going forward, the **Description** field on document or journal lines created from an electronic document for that vendor or customer will be filled with the text in question and the (G/L account) **No.** field with the account in question. -> -> Instead of mapping to a G/L account, you can also map to a bank account. This is practical, for example, for electronic documents for expenses that are already paid where you want to create a general journal line that is ready to post to a bank account. - - The following procedure describes how to receive a vendor invoice and convert it to a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The procedure is the same when you convert a vendor invoice to a general journal line. - -### To receive and convert an electronic invoice to a purchase invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Incoming Documents**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the line for the incoming document record that represents a new incoming electronic invoice, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit**. - - In the **Incoming Document Card** window, the related XML file is attached, and most of the fields are prefilled with information from the electronic invoice. For more information, see [How to: Create Incoming Document Records](across-how-create-income-document-records.md). - -3. In the **Data Exchange Type** field, choose **PEPPOL - Invoice** or **OCR – Invoice** depending on the source of the electronic document. - -4. To map text on the vendor invoice to a specific debit account, on the **Actions** tab, in the **General** group, choose **Map Text to Account**, and then fill the **Text-to-Account Mapping Worksheet** window. - -5. On the **Actions** tab, in the **General** group, choose **Create Document**. - - A purchase invoice will be created in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] based on the information in the electronic document. - - Any validation errors, typically related to wrong or missing master data in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will be shown on the **Error Messages** FastTab. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Manage Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md) -[How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving](across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-manage-purchasing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-manage-purchasing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2065ffef..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-manage-purchasing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Manage Purchasing -description: Outlines tasks to manage your purchasing or procurement processes, including how purchase invoices and purchase orders work. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: procurement, supply, vendor order -ms.date: 08/10/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Purchasing -You create a purchase invoice or purchase order to record the cost of purchases and to track accounts payable. If you need to control an inventory, purchase invoices are also used to dynamically update inventory levels so that you can minimize your inventory costs and provide better customer service. The purchasing costs, including service expenses, and inventory values that result from posting purchase invoices contribute to profit figures and other financial KPIs on your Home page. - -You must use purchase orders if your purchasing process requires that you record partial receipts of an order quantity, for example, because the full quantity was not available at the vendor. If you sell items by delivering directly from your vendor to your customer, as a drop shipment, then you must also use purchase orders. For more information, see [How to: Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md). In all other aspects, purchase orders work the same way as purchase invoices. - -You can have purchase invoices created automatically by using the OCR (Optical Character Recognition) service to convert PDF invoices from your vendors to electronic documents, which are then converted to purchase invoices by a workflow. To use this functionality, you must first sign up for the OCR service, and then perform various setup. For more information, see [How to: Process Incoming Documents](across-process-income-documents.md). - -Products can be both inventory items and services. For more information, see [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -For all purchase processes, you can incorporate an approval workflow, for example, to require that large purchases are approved by the accounting manager. For more information, see [Using Approval Workflows](across-how-use-approval-workflows.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create a purchase invoice to record your agreement with a vendor to purchase products on certain delivery and payment terms. |[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) | -|Create a purchase quote to reflect a request for quote from your vendor, which you can later convert to a purchase order.|[How to: Request Quotes](purchasing-how-request-quotes.md)| -| Create a purchase invoice for all or selected lines on a sales invoice. |[How to: Purchase Items for a Sale](purchasing-how-purchase-products-sale.md) | -| Perform an action on an unpaid posted purchase invoice to automatically create a credit memo and either cancel the purchase invoice or recreate it so you can make corrections. |[How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](purchasing-how-correct-cancel-unpaid-purchase-invoices.md) | -| Create a purchase credit memo to revert a specific posted purchase invoice to reflect which products you are returning to the vendor and which payment amount you will collect. |[How to: Process Purchase Returns or Cancellations](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) | -|Prepare to invoice multiple receipts from the same vendor once by combining the receipts on one invoice.|[How to: Combine Receipts on a Single Invoice](purchasing-how-to-combine-receipts.md)| -| Learn how [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates when you must order an item to receive it on a certain date.|[Date Calculation for Purchases](purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) -[How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-setup-purchasing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-setup-purchasing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 10f793fb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/purchasing-setup-purchasing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Set Up Purchasing -description: Describes the tasks to define your company's procurement policies and set up your purchasing processes. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: procurement, supply, vendor order -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Purchasing -Before you can manage purchase processes, you must configure the rules and values that define the company's purchase policies. - -You must define the general setup, such as which purchase documents are required and how their values are posted. This general setup is typically performed once during the initial implementation. - -A separate series of tasks related to registering new vendors is to record any special price or discount agreements that you have with each vendor. - -Finance-related purchase setup, such as payment methods and currencies, are covered in the Finance Setup section. For more information, see [Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md). - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create a vendor card for each vendor that you purchase from|[How to: Register New Vendors](purchasing-how-register-new-vendors.md) | -| Enter the different discounts and special prices that vendors grant you depending on item, quantities, and/or date |[How to: Record Purchase Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](purchasing-how-record-purchase-price-discount-payment-agreements.md) | -| Prioritize vendors |[How to: Prioritize Vendors](purchasing-how-prioritize-vendors.md) | -| Set up purchasers |[How to: Set Up Purchasers](purchasing-how-setup-purchasers.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md deleted file mode 100644 index c63b7fb9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Tasks to Reconcile Bank Accounts and Apply Payments to Related Entries -description: Outlines tasks to reconcile your bank, receivables, and payables accounts, post cash receipts or expenses, and apply payments automatically. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment process, direct payment posting, reconcile payment, expenses, cash receipts -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts -You must regularly reconcile your bank, receivables, and payables accounts by applying payments recorded in the bank to their related unpaid invoices and credit memos or other open entries in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]. - -You can perform this task in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window by importing a bank statement file or feed to quickly register the payments. Payments are applied to open customer or vendor ledger entries based on matches between payment text and entry information. You can review and change automatic applications before you post the journal. You can choose to close any open bank account ledger entries related to the applied ledger entries when you post the journal. The bank account is automatically reconciled when all payments are applied. - -To import bank statements as a bank feed, you must first set up and enable the bank data conversion service. For more information, see [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Apply payments to open customer or vendor ledger entries by importing a bank statement, and reconcile the bank account when all payments are applied. |[How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md) | -| Manually apply payments by viewing detailed information about matched data and suggestions for candidate open entries to apply payments to. |[How to: Review or Apply Payments After Automatic Application](receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md) | -| Resolve payments that cannot be applied automatically to their related open ledger entries. For example because the amounts differ, or because a related ledger entry does not exist. |[How to: Reconcile Payments That Cannot be Applied Automatically](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md) | -| Link text on payments to specific customer, vendor, or general ledger accounts to always post recurring cash receipts or expenses to those accounts when no documents exist to apply to. |[How to: Map Text on Recurring Payments to Accounts for Automatic Reconciliation](receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md deleted file mode 100644 index cc9c10e6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,249 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Remind or Fine Customers of Overdue Payments -description: Describes how to send a reminder to a customer about a payment that is due and add charges, or fees to the payment because of the delay. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment due, debt, overdue, fee, charge, reminder -ms.date: 12/21/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Collect Outstanding Balances -Managing receivables includes checking whether amounts due are paid on time. If customers have overdue payments, you can begin by sending the Customer Statement report as a reminder. Alternatively, you can issue reminders. - -You can use reminders to remind customers about overdue amounts. You can also use reminders to calculate finance charges, such as interest or fees and include them on the reminder. Use finance charge memos if you want to debit customers for interest or fees without reminding them of overdue amounts. - -## Reminders -Before you can create reminders, you must set up reminder terms and assign them to your customers. Each reminder term has predefined reminder levels. Each reminder level includes rules about when the reminder will be issued, for example, how many days after the invoice due date or the date of the previous reminder. The contents of the **Finance Charge Terms** window determines whether interest is calculated on the reminder. - -You can periodically run the **Create Reminders** batch job to create reminders for all customers with overdue balances, or you can manually create a reminder for a specific customer and have the lines calculated and filled in automatically. - -After you create the reminders, you can modify them. The text that appears at the beginning and end of a reminder is determined by the reminder level terms, and can be seen in the **Description** column. If a calculated amount has been inserted automatically in the beginning or ending text, the text will not be adjusted if you delete lines. Then you must use the **Update Reminder Text** function. - -A customer ledger entry with the **On Hold** field filled in will not prompt the creation of a reminder. However, if a reminder is created on the basis of another entry, an overdue entry marked on hold will also be included on the reminder. Interest is not calculated on lines with these entries. - -After you have created reminders and made any needed modifications, you can either print test reports or issue the reminders, typically as email. - -## Finance Charges -When a customer does not pay by the due date, you can have finance charges calculated automatically and add them to the overdue amounts on the customer's account. You can inform customers of the added charges by sending finance charge memos. - -> [!NOTE] -> You use finance charge memos to calculate interest and finance charges and to inform your customers about interest and finance charges without reminding them of overdue payments. Alternatively, you can calculate interest on overdue payments when you create reminders. - -You can manually create a finance charge memo for an individual customer, and fill in the lines automatically. Alternatively, you can use the **Create Finance Charge Memos** function job to create finance charge memos for all or selected customers with overdue balances. - -After you create the finance charge memos, you can modify them. The text that appears at the beginning and end of the finance charge memo is determined by the finance charge terms, and can be seen in the **Description** column on the lines. If a calculated amount has been inserted automatically in the beginning or ending text, the text will not be adjusted if you delete lines. Then you must use the **Update Finance Charge Text** function. - -After you have created finance charge memos and made any needed modifications, you can either print test reports or issue the finance charge memos, typically as email. - -## Multiple Interest rates - -When you set up finance charge terms and reminder terms, for delayed payment penalty, you can specify multiple interest rates so that the penalty fee is calculated from different interest rates in different periods. If multiple interest rates are not set up, then the interest rate and period that is defined in the **Finance Charge Terms** and **Reminder Terms** windows for the whole period of calculation will be used. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Multiple Interest Rates.](finance-how-to-set-up-multiple-interest-rates.md). - -## To send the Customer Statement report -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer Statement**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Under **Output Options**, select how to send the report to the customer. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are using multiple currencies, the Customer Statement report is always printed in the customer's currency. The last date in a statement period is also used as the statement date and the aging date, if aging is included. - -## To set up reminder terms -If customers have overdue payments, you must decide when and how to send them a reminder. In addition, you may want to debit their accounts for interest or fees. You can set up any number of reminder terms. For each reminder terms code, you can define an unlimited number of reminder levels. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminder Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. To use more than one combination of reminder terms, set up a code for each one. - -## To set up reminder levels -The first time a reminder is created for a customer, the setting from level 1 is used. When the reminder is issued, the level number is registered on the reminder entries that are created and linked to the individual customer ledger entries. If it is necessary to remind the customer again, all reminder entries linked to open customer ledger entries are checked to locate the highest level number. The conditions from the next level number will then be used for the new reminder. - -If you create more reminders than you have defined levels for, the conditions for the highest level will be used. You can create as many reminders as are allowed by the **Max. No of Reminders** field in the reminder terms. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminder Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Reminder Terms** window, select the line with the terms you want to set up levels for, and then choose **Levels** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. - - For each reminder level, you can specify individual conditions, which can include additional fees in both LCY and in foreign currency. You can define many additional fees in foreign currencies for each code in the **Reminder Levels** window. -4. Choose the **Currencies** action. -5. In the **Currencies for Reminder Levels** window, define for each reminder level code and corresponding reminder level number a currency code and an additional fee. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you create reminders in a foreign currency, the foreign currency conditions that you set up here will be used to create reminders. If there are no foreign currency reminder conditions set up, the LCY reminder conditions that are set up in the **Reminder Levels** window will be used and then converted to the relevant currency. - - For each reminder level, you can specify text that will be printed before (**Beginning Text**) or after (**Ending Text**) on the entries on the reminder. - -6. Choose the **Beginning Text** or **Ending Text** actions respectively, and fill in the **Reminder Text** window. -7. To automatically insert related values in the resulting reminder text, enter the following placeholders in the **Text** field. - -|Placeholder|Value| -|-----------------|-----------| -|%1|Content of the **Document Date** field on the reminder header| -|%2|Content of the **Due Date** field on the reminder header| -|%3|Content of the **Interest Rate** field on the related finance charge terms| -|%4|Content of the **Remaining Amount** field on the reminder header| -|%5|Content of the **Interest Amount** field on the reminder header| -|%6|Content of the **Additional Fee** field on the reminder header| -|%7|The total amount of the reminder| -|%8|Content of the **Reminder Level** field on the reminder header| -|%9|Content of the **Currency Code** field on the reminder header| -|%10|Content of the **Posting Date** field on the reminder header| -|%11|The company name| -|%12|Content of the **Add. Fee per Line** field on the reminder header| - -For example, if you write **You owe %9 %7 due on %2.**, then the resulting reminder will contain the following text: **You owe USD 1.200,50 due on 02-02-2014.**. - -After you have set up the reminder terms, with additional levels and text, enter one of the codes on each of the customer cards. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md). - -## To create a reminder automatically -A reminder is similar to an invoice. When you create a reminder, a reminder header as well as one or more reminder lines must be filled in. You can use a function to create reminders for all customers automatically. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminders**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Reminder** window, choose the **Create Reminders** action. -3. In the **Create Reminders** window, fill in the fields to define how and to whom the reminders are created. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To create a reminder manually -In the **Reminder** window, you can fill in the **General** FastTab manually and then have the lines filled in automatically. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **Suggest Reminder Lines** action. -5. In the **Suggest Reminder Lines** batch job, fill in the fields to define how and to whom the reminders are created. -6. Select the **Include Entries On Hold** check box if you want the reminders to contain overdue open entries that are on hold. - - > [!Important] - > Open entries that are on hold will be inserted, irrespective of the setting in the Only Entries with Overdue Amounts check box. - -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -## To replace reminder texts -There are several ways you can determine the text that appears on the printed reminder. In some cases, you may want to replace the beginning and ending texts that have been defined for the current level with those from a different level. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant reminder, and then choose the **Update Reminder Text** action. -3. In the **Update Reminder Text** window, enter the required level in the **Reminder Level** field. -3. Choose the **OK** button to update the beginning and ending texts. - -## To issue a reminder -After you have created reminders and made any needed modifications, you can either print test reports or issue the reminders. - -When you issue a reminder, the data is transferred to a separate window for issued reminders. At the same time, reminder entries are posted. If interest or an additional fee has been calculated, entries are posted to the customer ledger and the general ledger. - -When a reminder is issued, the entries are posted according to your specifications in the **Reminder Terms** window. This specification determines whether interest and/or additional fees are posted to the customer's account and the general ledger. Setup in the **Customer Posting Groups** window determines which accounts are posted to. - -For each customer ledger entry on the finance charge memo, an entry is created in the **Reminder/Fin. Charge Entries** window. - -If the **Post Interest** or the **Post Additional Fee** check boxes are selected in the **Reminder Terms** window, then the following entries are also created: - -- One entry in the **Cust. Ledger Entries** window -- One receivables entry in the relevant G/L account -- One interest and/or one additional fee entry in the relevant G/L account - -In addition, issuing the reminder may result in VAT entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Reminders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant reminder, and then choose the **Issue** action. -3. In the **Issue Reminders** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button - -The reminder is either printed for sent to an specified email as a PDF attachment. - -## To set up finance charge terms -You must set up a code representing each finance charge calculation. Then you can enter this code in the **Fin. Charge Terms Code** field on customer or vendor cards. - -Finance charges can be calculated using either the average daily balance method or the balance due method. - -With the balance due method, the finance charge is simply a percentage of the overdue amount: -```markdown -Balance Due method - Finance Charge = Overdue Amount x (Interest Rate / 100) -``` -With the average daily balance method, the number of days the payment is overdue is taken into account: -```markdown -Average Daily Balance method - Finance Charge = Overdue Amount x (Days Overdue / Interest Period) x (Interest Rate/100) -``` -In addition, each code in the Finance Charge Terms table is linked to a subtable, the Finance Charge Text table. For each set of finance charge terms, you can define a beginning and/or an ending text to be included on the finance charge memo. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Finance Charge Terms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. -3. To use more than one combination of finance charge terms, set up a code for each one. - - For each finance charge term, you can specify individual conditions, which can include additional fees in both LCY and in foreign currency. You can define many additional fees in foreign currencies for each code in the **Finance Charge Terms** window. -4. Choose the **Currencies** action. -5. In the **Currencies for Fin. Chrg. Terms** window, define for each term a currency code and an additional fee. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you create finance charges in a foreign currency, the foreign currency conditions that you set up here will be used to create finance charge memos. If there are no foreign currency finance charge conditions set up, then the LCY finance charge conditions that are set up in the **Finance Charge Terms** window will be used and then converted to the relevant currency. - - For each finance charge term, you can specify text that will be printed before (**Beginning Text**) or after (**Ending Text**) on the entries on the finance charge memo. -6. Choose the **Beginning Text** or **Ending Text** actions respectively, and fill in the **Finance Charge Text** window. -7. To automatically insert related values in the resulting finance charge text, enter the following placeholders in the **Text** field. - -|Placeholder|Value| -|-----------------|-----------| -|%1|Content of the **Document Date** field on the finance charge memo header| -|%2|Content of the **Due Date** field on the finance charge memo header| -|%3|Content of the **Interest Rate** field on the related finance charge terms| -|%4|Content of the **Remaining Amount** field on the finance charge memo header| -|%5|Content of the **Interest Amount** field on the finance charge memo header| -|%6|Content of the **Additional Fee** field on the finance charge memo header| -|%7|The total amount of the reminder| -|%8|Content of the **Currency Code** field on the finance charge memo header| -|%9|Content of the **Posting Date** field on the finance charge memo header| - -## To create a finance charge memo manually -A finance charge memo is similar to an invoice. You can fill in a header manually and have the lines filled in for you, or you can create finance charge memos for all customers automatically. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Finance Charge Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and then fill in the fields as necessary. -3. Choose **Suggest Fin. Charge Memo Lines** action. -4. In the **Suggest Finance Charge Memo Lines** window, set a filter on the **Cust. Ledger Entry** FastTab if you want to create finance charge memos only for specific entries. -5. Choose the **OK** button to start the batch job. - -## To update finance charge memo texts -In some cases, you may want to modify the beginning and ending text that you have set up for the finance charge terms. If you do this at a time when you have created, but not yet issued, finance charge memos, you can update the memos with the modified text. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Finance Charge Memo**, and then choose the related link. -2. open the finance charge memo that you want to change text for, and then choose the **Update Finance Charge Text** action. -3. In the **Update Finance Charge Text** window, you can set a filter if you want to update several memos. -4. Choose the **OK** button to update the beginning and ending texts. - -## To issue finance charge memos -After you have created finance charge memos and made any needed modifications, you can either print test reports or issue the finance charge memos. - -When a reminder is issued, the entries are posted according to your specifications in the **Finance Charge Terms** window. This specification determines whether interest and/or additional fees are posted to the customer's account and the general ledger. Setup in the **Customer Posting Groups** window determines which accounts are posted to. - -For each customer ledger entry on the finance charge memo, an entry is created in the **Reminder/Fin. Charge Entries** window. - -If the **Post Interest** or the **Post Additional Fee** check boxes are selected in the **Finance Charge Terms** window, then the following entries are also created: - -- One entry in the **Cust. Ledger Entries** window -- One receivables entry in the relevant G/L account -- One interest and/or one additional fee entry in the relevant G/L account - -In addition, issuing the finance charge memo may result in VAT entries. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Finance Charge Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant memo, and then choose the **Issue** action. -3. In the **Issue Finance Charge Memos** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button - -The finance charge memo is either printed for sent to an specified email as a PDF attachment. - -## To view reminder and finance charge entries -When you issue a reminder, a reminder entry is created in the **Reminder/Fin. Charge Entries** window for each reminder line that contains a customer ledger entry. You can then get an overview of the created reminder entries for a specific customer. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant customer card, and then choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -3. In the **Customer Ledger Entries** window, select the line with the ledger entry you want to see the reminder entries for, and then choose the **Reminder/Fin. Charge Entries** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md deleted file mode 100644 index b6aa0c9b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,158 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Apply Customer Ledger Entries to Manually Reconcile Customer Payments -description: Describes how to apply customer cash receipts or refunds to one or more open customer ledger entries and reconcile customer payments. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment process, cash receipt -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Customer Payments Manually -When you receive a cash receipt from a customer, or you make a cash refund, you must decide whether to apply the payment or refund to close one or more open debit or credit entries. You can specify the amount you want to apply. For example, you can apply partial payments to customer ledger entries. Closing customer ledger entries makes sure that information such as customer statistics, account statements, and finance charges are correct. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the **Customer Ledger Entries** window, red font means that the related payment is past its due date. - -You can apply customer ledger entries in several ways: - -* By entering information in dedicated windows, such as the **Cash Receipt Journal** and **Payment Reconciliation Journal** windows. -* From sales credit memo documents. -* From customer ledger entries after sales documents are posted but not applied. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the **Application Method** field on the customer card contains **Apply to Oldest**, payments are applied to the oldest open credit entry, unless you manually specify an entry. If the application method is **Manual**, you always apply entries manually. - -You can apply customer payments manually in the **Cash Receipt Journal** window. A cash receipt journal is a type of general journal, so you can use it to post transactions to general ledger, bank, customer, vendor, and fixed assets accounts. You can apply the payment to one or more debit entries when you post the payment, or you can apply from the posted entries later. - -You can also apply customer and vendor payments in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, by using functions for bank statement import, automatic application, and bank account reconciliation. For more information, see [Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). Alternatively, you can reconcile customer payments based on a list of unpaid sales documents in the **Payment Registration** window. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Customer Payments From a List of Unpaid Sales Documents](receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md) - -## To fill and post a cash receipt journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit Journal** action. -3. Select the relevant batch in the **Batch Name** field. -4. Fill in the **Posting Date** field. -5. In the **Document Type** field, select **Payment**. - - The **Document No.** field is filled by the number series assigned to the batch. -6. Use the **External Document No.** field to store an identifier, such as the customer's check number. -7. In the **Account Type** field, select **Customer**. -8. In the **Account No.** field, select the relevant G/L account. -9. If you want to post the application at the same time as you post the journal, do one of the following. -10. In the **Balancing Account Type** field, select **G/L Account** for cash payments, and **Bank Account** for other payments. -11. In the **Balancing Account No.** field, select the cash account for cash payments, or the relevant bank account for other payments. -12. Post the journal. - -## To apply a payment to a single customer ledger entry -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journal** and choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit Journal** action. -3. On the first journal line, enter the relevant information about the entry to be applied. -4. In the **Document Type** field, enter **Payment**. -5. In the **Account Type** field, enter **Customer**. -6. In the **Bal. Account Type** field, enter **Bank Account**. -7. In the **Applies-to Doc. No.** field, choose the field to open the **Apply Customer Entries** window. -8. In the **Apply Customer Entries** window, select the entry to apply the payment to. -9. In the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount you want to apply to the entry. If you do not enter an amount, the maximum amount is applied. - - At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** window, you can see the specific amount in the **Applied Amount** field and also whether the application balances. -10. Choose the **OK** button. The **Cash Receipt Journal** window now shows the entry you have selected entered in the **Applies-to Doc. Type** and **Applies-to Doc. No.** fields. -11. Post the cash receipt journal. - -## To apply a payment to multiple customer ledger entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Edit Journal** action. -3. On the first journal line, enter the relevant information about the entry to be applied. -4. In the **Document Type** field, enter **Payment**. -5. In the **Account Type** field, enter **Customer**. -6. In the **Bal. Account Type** field, enter **Bank Account**. -7. In the **Amount** field, enter the full payment as a negative amount. -8. To apply the payment to multiple customer ledger entries when posting, choose the **Apply Entries** action. -9. Select the lines with the entries that you want the applying entry to be applied to, and then choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. -10. On each line, in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount you want to apply to the individual entry. If you do not enter an amount, the maximum amount is applied. - - At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** window, you can see the specific amount in the **Applied Amount** field and also whether the application balances. -11. Choose the **OK** button. -12. Post the cash receipt journal. - -## To apply a credit memo to a single customer ledger entry -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant sales credit memo. -3. To apply the credit memo to a single customer ledger entry when posting, in the **Applies-to Doc. No.** field, select the entry to which you want to apply the payment. -4. On the line in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount you want to apply to the entry. - - If you do not enter an amount, the program automatically applies the maximum amount. At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** window, you can see the specific amount in the **Applied Amount** field and also whether the application balances. -5. Choose the **OK** button. The **Sales Credit Memo** window now shows the entry you have selected entered in the **Applies-to Doc. Type** and **Applies-to Doc. No.** fields. And the amount of the credit memo to be posted, adjusted for any possible payment discounts. -6. Post the credit memo. - -## To apply a credit memo to multiple customer ledger entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant sales credit memo. -3. To apply the credit memo to multiple customer ledger entries when posting, choose the **Apply Entries** action. -4. Select the lines with the entries that you want the applying entry to be applied to, and then choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. -5. On each line, in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount you want to apply to the individual entry. If you do not enter an amount, the maximum amount is applied. - - At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** window, you can see the specific amount in the **Applied Amount** field and also whether the application balances. -6. Choose the **OK** button. The **Sales Credit Memo** window now shows the amount of the credit memo to be posted, adjusted for any possible payment discounts. -7. Post the credit memo. - -## To apply posted customer ledger entries -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the customer card for the customer with entries that you want to apply. -3. Choose the **Ledger Entries** action, and then select the line with the entry that will be the applying entry. -4. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. The **Apply Customer Entries** window opens showing the open entries for the customer. -5. Select the lines with the entries that you want the applying entry to be applied to, and then choose the **Set Applies-to ID.** action. -6. For each line in the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount you want to apply to the individual entry. If you do not enter an amount, the maximum amount is applied. - - At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** window, you can see the specific amount in the **Applied Amount** field. -7. Choose the **Post Application** action. The **Post Application** window appears with the document number of the applying entry and the posting date of the entry with the most recent posting date. -8. Choose the **OK** button to post the application. - - If the posted application has resulted in closed customer ledger entries, the **Open** field is cleared for these ledger entries. -9. To see the ledger entries, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. Browse to the card for the relevant customer to see the ledger entries. - -On the ledger entry list, on the line that contains the ledger entry that was fully applied to, you can see that the **Open** check box is not selected. - -> [!NOTE] -> After you select an entry in the **Apply Customer Entries** window, or several entries by setting the **Applies-to ID**, the **Applied Amount** field on the journal line will contain the sum of the remaining amounts for the posted entries you have selected, unless the field contains something already. If you select **Apply to Oldest** in the **Application Method** field on the customer card, the application occurs automatically. - -## To apply customer ledger entries in different currencies to one another -If you sell to a customer in one currency and receive payment in another currency, you can still apply the invoice to the payment. - -If you apply an entry (Entry 1) in one currency to an entry (Entry 2) in a different currency, the posting date on Entry 1 is used to find the relevant exchange rate to convert amounts on Entry 2. The relevant exchange rate is found in the **Currency Exchange Rates** window. - -Applying customer ledger entries in different currencies must be enabled. For more information, see [How to: Enable Application of Ledger Entries in Different Currencies](finance-how-enable-application-ledger-entries-different-currencies.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipts Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the journal you want, and fill in the first empty journal line using a currency code. -3. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. -4. Select the line with the entry you want to apply to the entry in the cash receipt journal, choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action, and then select the entry you want to apply to. -5. Choose the **OK** button to return to the cash receipt journal. -6. Post the sales journal. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> When you apply entries in different currencies, the entries are converted to USD. Although the exchange rates for the two currencies are fixed, for example between USD and EUR, there may be a small residual amount when they are converted to USD. These small residual amounts are posted as gains and losses to the account specified in the **Realized Gains Account** or **Realized Losses Account** fields in the **Currencies** window. The **Amount (USD)** field is also adjusted on the vendor ledger entries. - -## To correct an application of customer entries -When you correct an application, correcting entries that are identical to the original entry but with opposite sign in the amount field are created and posted for all entries, including all general ledger posting derived from the application, such as payment discount and currency gains/losses. The entries that were closed by the application are reopened. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant customer card. -3. Choose the **Ledger Entries** action. -4. Select the relevant ledger entry, and then choose the **Unapply Entries** action. -5. Alternatively, choose the **Detailed Ledger Entry** action. -6. Select the application entry, and then choose the **Unapply Entries** action. -7. Fill in the fields in the header, and then choose the **Unapply** action. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If an entry has been applied by more than one application entry, you must unapply the latest application entry first. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md deleted file mode 100644 index 652547e0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Text-to-Account Mapping for Recurring Payments | Microsoft Docs -description: Link text on payments with specific accounts, so that payments are posted to the accounts when you post the payment reconciliation journal. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: account linking, direct payment posting, automatic payment processing, reconcile payment, recurring expense, recurring cash receipt -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Map Text on Recurring Payments to Accounts for Automatic Reconciliation -In the **Text-to-Account Mapping** window, which you open from the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, you can set up mappings between text on payments and specific debit, credit, and balancing accounts so that such payments are posted to the specified accounts when you post the payment reconciliation journal. - -Similar functionality exists to reconcile excess amounts on payment reconciliation journal lines on an ad-hoc basis. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments That Cannot be Applied Automatically](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md). - -Payments posted based on text-to-account mapping are not applied to open entries, but are merely posted to the specified accounts in addition to creating bank account ledger entries. Accordingly, text-to-account mapping is suited for recurring cash receipts or expenses, such as frequent purchases of car fuel or bank fees and interest, that regularly occur on the bank statement and do not need a related business document. For more information, see the “Example - Text-to-Account Mapping for Fuel Expense” section in this topic. - -> [!NOTE] -> Payments on reconciliation journal lines are only set to posting according to text-to-account mapping if the automatic application function can only provide a match confidence of **Low** or **Medium**. If the automatic application function provides a match confidence of High, then the payment is automatically applied to one or more open entries, and the payment is not posted to the accounts specified in the **Text-to-Account Mapping** window. In other words, a match confidence of **High** overrules a text-to-account mapping. - -On a payment reconciliation journal line where the payment has been set to posting according to text-to-account mapping, the **Match Confidence** field contains **High - Text-to-Account Mapping**, and the **Account Type** and **Account No.** fields contain the mapped accounts. - -## To map text on recurring payments to accounts for automatic reconciliation -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Reconciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a payment reconciliation journal. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). -3. Choose the **Map Text to Account** action. The **Text-to-Account Mapping** window opens. -4. In the **Mapping Text** field, enter any text that occurs on payments that you want to post to specified accounts without applying to an open entry. You can enter up to 50 characters. - - > [!NOTE] - > If no other payments exist with the mapping text in question, then the text-to-account mapping will occur even when only a part of the text on the payment exists as a mapping text. -5. In the **Vendor No.** field, enter the vendor that the payments will be posted to. -6. In the **Bal. Source Type** field, specify if the payment will be posted to a general ledger account or to a customer or vendor account. -7. In the **Bal. Source No.** field, specify the account that the payment will be posted to, depending on your selection in the **Bal. Source Type** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > Do not use the **Debit Acc. No.** and **Credit Acc. No.** fields in connection with payment reconciliation. They are used for incoming documents only. For more information, see [How to: Use OCR to Turn PDF and Image Files into Electronic Documents](across-how-use-ocr-pdf-images-files.md). - -8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for all text on payments that you want to map to accounts for direct posting without application. - -Next time you import a bank statement file or choose the **Apply Automatically** action in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, journal lines for the payments that contain the specified mapping text will contain the mapped accounts in the **Account Type** and **Account No.** fields. The **Match Confidence** field will contain **High - Text-to-Account Mapping**. This is on the condition that the automatic application function can only provide a match confidence of **Low** or **Medium**. - -## Example: Text-to-Account Mapping for Fuel Expense -To always post fuel expenses incurred at Shell gas stations to the general ledger account for gasoline (account 8510), fill a line in the **Text-to-Account Mapping** window as follows. - -| Mapping Text | Debit Acc. No. | Credit Acc. No. | Bal. Source Type | Bal. Source No. | -| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | -| Shell |BLANK |8510 |G/L Account |BLANK | - -> [!TIP] -> For more information about how to work with fields and columns, see [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md). For more information about how to find specific pages, see [Search](ui-search.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index a02f275f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Apply Payments to Unpaid Sales Documents -description: You apply amounts paid by customers to related sales documents and post the payment to update the customer, general ledger, and bank ledger entries. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment process, cash receipts, customer payment -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Customer Payments Manually From a List of Unpaid Sales Documents -When your customers have made payments to your electronic bank account, you must apply each amount paid to the related sales document and then post the payment to update the customer, general ledger, and bank ledger entries. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can perform the same tasks, including vendor payments, in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window using functions for bank statement import, automatic application, and bank account reconciliation. For more information, see [Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -The **Payment Registration** window is designed to support you in tasks involved in balancing internal accounts by using actual cash figures to make sure that payments are collected efficiently from customers. This payment processing tool enables you to quickly verify and post individual or lump payments, process discounted payments, and find specific unpaid documents for which payment is made. - -Payments for different customers that have different payment dates must be posted as individual payments. Payments for the same customer that have the same payment date can be posted as a lump payment. This is useful, for example, when a customer has made a single payment that covers multiple sales invoices. - -## To set up the payment registration journal -Because you can post different payment types to different balancing accounts, you must select a balancing account in the **Payment Registration Setup** window before you start processing customer payments. If you always post to the same balancing account, you can set that account as the default and avoid this step every time that you open the **Payment Registration** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration Setup**, and then choose the related link. - - Alternatively, in the **Payment Registration** window, choose the **Setup** action. -2. Fill in the fields in the **Payment Registration Setup** window. Choose a field to read a short description of the field or link to related information. - -## To reconcile payments individually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Payment Made** check box on the line that represents the posted document for which a payment has been made. - - If the **Auto Fill Date Received** check box is selected in the **Payment Registration Setup** window, then the work date is entered in the **Date Received** field. -3. In the **Date Received** field, enter the date when the payment was made. This date may be different from the work date. -4. In the **Amount Received** field, enter the amount that has been paid. - - For full payments, this is the same as the amount in the **Remaining Amount** field on the line. For partial payments, this is lower than the amount in the **Remaining Amount** field on the line. -5. Repeat steps 2-4 for other lines that represent posted documents for which payments are made. -6. Choose the **Post Payments** action. - -The payment information is posted for documents represented by lines where the **Payment Made** check box is selected. - -Payments entries are posted to general ledger, bank, and customer accounts. Each payment is applied to the related posted sales document. - -## To reconcile lump payments -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Payment Made** check box on the lines that represent posted documents for the same customer for which a lump payment has been made. - - > [!NOTE] - > The customer in the **Name** field must be the same on all lines that will be posted as a lump payment. - - If the **Auto Fill Date Received** check box is selected in the **Payment Registration Setup** window, then the work date is filled in the **Date Received** field. -3. In the **Date Received** field, enter the date when the payment was made. This date may be different from the work date. - - > [!NOTE] - > This date must be the same on all lines that will be posted as a lump payment. -4. In the **Amount Received** field, enter amounts on multiple lines that sum up to the lump payment amount. - - > [!TIP] - > Try to post as many full payments as possible with the lump amount. Enter amounts that are the same as the amount in the **Remaining Amount** field on as many lines as possible. -5. Repeat steps 2-4 for other lines that represent posted documents for the same customer for which a lump payment has been made. -6. Choose the **Post As Lump Payment** action. The entered payment information is posted for documents represented by lines where the **Payment Made** check box is selected. - -Payment entries are posted to general ledger, bank, and customer accounts. Each payment is applied to the related posted sales document. - -If a payment in the bank is not represented by line in the **Payment Registration** window, it may be because the related document has not yet been posted. In that case, you can use a search function to quickly find the document and post it to process the payment. For more information, see the "To find a specific sales document that is not fully invoiced" section. - -If a payment in the bank is not represented by any document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], then you can open a prefilled general journal from the **Payment Registration** window to post the payment directly to the balancing account without applying the payment to a document. Alternatively, you may want to record the payment in the journal until the origin of the payment has been resolved. For more information, see the "To record or post a payment without a related document" section. - -## To process customer payments with discounts manually -If you have agreed on a payment discount with your customer, then the payment amounts can be lower than the invoice amounts if payment occurs before the agreed discount date. - -The following procedures explains four different ways to post discounted payments in the **Payment Registration** window. - -* The payment amount is equal to the remaining discounted amount, and the payment date is before the discount date. You post the payment as is. -* The payment amount is equal to the remaining discounted amount, but the payment date is after the discount date. You post the payment as partial. The document remains open to collect/pay the remaining amount. Alternatively, you set the discount date later to allow the payment in full. -* The payment amount is lower than the remaining discounted amount. You post the payment as partial. The document remains open to collect/pay the remaining amount. -* The payment amount is more than the remaining discounted amount. You post the payments as is. Only the remaining amount is posted. The additional amount is credited to the customer. - -### To process a payment amount that is equal to the discounted amount and where the payment date is before the discount date -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the payment amount in the **Amount Received** field. The amount is equal to the amount in the **Rem. Amt. after Discount** field. - - The **Payment Made** check box is automatically selected, and the **Date Received** field is filled with the work date. -3. In the **Date Received** field, enter the payment date. The date is before the date in the **Pmt. Discount Date** field. -4. Verify that the **Remaining Amount** field contains zero (0). -5. Choose the **Post Payments** action to post the full payment to general ledger, bank, and customer accounts. - -### To process a payment amount that is equal to the discounted amount but where the payment date is after the discount date -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the payment amount in the **Amount Received** field. The amount is equal to the amount in the **Rem. Amt. after Discount** field. - - The **Payment Made** check box is automatically selected, and the **Date Received** field is filled with the work date. -3. In the **Date Received** field, enter a payment date that is after the date in the **Pmt. Discount Date** field. Date fields change to red font, and an error message is shown at the bottom of the window. - - > [!TIP] - > If you want to make an exception and grant the discount even though the payment is late, follow these steps: -4. Choose the **Details** action. -5. In the **Payment Registration Details** window, in the **Pmt. Discount Date** field on the **Payment Discount** FastTab, enter a date that is after the date in the **Date Received** field in the **Payment Registration** window. - - The error message and the red font disappear, and you can proceed to process the discounted payment. -6. Verify that the **Remaining Amount** field contains the amount that remains to pay the full invoice amount. -7. Choose the **Post Payments** action to post the partial payment to general ledger, bank, and customer accounts. - -The related document remains open. - -### To process a payment that is lower than the remaining discounted amount -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the payment amount in the **Amount Received** field. The amount is lower than the amount in the **Rem. Amt. after Discount** field. - - The **Payment Made** check box is automatically selected, and the **Date Received** field is filled with the work date. -3. In the **Date Received** field, enter the payment date. The date is before the date in the **Pmt. Discount Date** field. -4. Verify that the **Remaining Amount** field contains the amount that remains to pay the discounted amount. -5. Choose the **Post Payments** action to post the partial payment to general ledger, bank, and customer accounts. - -The related document remains open. - -### To process a payment that is more than the remaining discounted amount -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the payment amount in the **Amount Received** field. The amount is more than the amount in the **Rem. Amt. after Discount** field. - - The **Payment Made** check box is automatically selected, and the **Date Received** field is filled with the work date. -3. In the **Date Received** field, enter the payment date. The date is before the date in the **Pmt. Discount Date** field. -4. Verify that the **Remaining Amount** field contains zero (0). -5. Choose the **Post Payments** action to post the full payment to general ledger, bank, and customer accounts. - -The related document is closed, and the customer is credited the excess payment amount. - -## To find a specific sales document that is not fully invoiced -The **Payment Registration** window supports you in tasks needed to balance internal accounts with actual cash figures to ensure effective collection from customers. It shows outstanding incoming payments as lines that represent sales documents where an amount is due for payment. - -Typically, when a payment has been made, recorded in the bank or otherwise, the related sales or purchase document is represented as a line in the **Payment Registration** window because the document in question is waiting for the payment to be posted against the outstanding amount. However, sometimes a payment that has been made is not represented by a line in the **Payment Registration** window, typically because the document in question has not been fully invoice posted. - -In the **Document Search** window, you can search among documents that are not fully invoiced. You can search based on one or more of the following criteria: - -* Document number -* Amount or amount range - -The following procedure explains how to find a specific document by using both search criteria. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. -2. With the pointer on any line, Choose the **Search Documents** action. -3. In the **Document Search** window, enter a search value in the **Document No.** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > The value that you enter in this field is enclosed in hidden wildcard characters. This means that the function searches for all document numbers that contain the entered value. -4. In the **Amount** field, enter the specific amount that exists on the document that you want to find. -5. In the **Amount Tolerance %** field, enter a percentage value to define the range of amounts that you want to search to find the open document. - - If you enter 10, then the function will search for amounts in a range between ten percent lower and ten percent higher than the value in the **Amount** field. -6. Choose the **Search** action. - -The Search function searches among documents that are not fully invoiced based on the specified criteria. - -If one or more documents match the criteria, then the **Document Search Result** window opens to display lines that represent those documents. Each line contains a document number, description, and amount so that you can easily find a specific document, for example based on information on your bank statement. - -If a payment in the bank is not represented by any document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], then you can open a prefilled general journal from the **Payment Registration** window to post the payment directly to the balancing account without applying the payment to a document. Alternatively, you may want to record the payment in the journal until the origin of the payment has been resolved. - -## To record or post a payment without a related document -If a payment in the bank is not represented by any document [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], then you can open a prefilled general journal line from the **Payment Registration** window to post the payment directly to the balancing account without applying the payment to a document. Alternatively, you may want to record the payment in the journal until the origin of the payment has been clarified. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration**, and then choose the related link. - -Proceed to record an undocumented payment. - -1. Choose the **General Journal** action. - - The **General Journal** window opens with one line prefilled with the balancing account of the journal batch that is set up in the **Payment Registration Setup** window. -2. Fill in the remaining fields on the general journal line, such as the amount and the customer number or other information from the bank statement. For more information, see [How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md). - -You can either post the journal line to update the total on the balancing account. Alternatively, you can leave the journal line unposted, and perhaps append it with a note that the payment needs more analysis. - -If you leave the journal line unposted, it will add to the value in the **Unposted Balance** field at the bottom of the **Payment Registration** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md deleted file mode 100644 index 00f883b0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Use Automatic Application to Reconcile Payments -description: Describes how to use the automatic application function to apply payments or cash receipts to their related open entries, and reconcile payments. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment process, direct payment posting, reconcile payment, expenses, cash receipts -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application -The **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window specifies payments, either incoming or outgoing, that have been recorded as transactions on your online bank account and that you can apply to their related open customer, vendor, and bank account ledger entries. The lines in the journal are filled by importing a bank statement as a bank feed or file. - -A payment reconciliation journal is related to one bank account in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] that reflects the online bank account where the payment transactions are recorded. Any open bank account ledger entries related to the applied customer or vendor ledger entries will be closed when you choose the **Post Payments and Reconcile Bank Account** action. This means that the bank account is automatically reconciled for payments that you post with the journal. - -If you want to import bank statements as bank feeds, you must first enable the bank data conversion service. The payment reconciliation journal will then automatically detect bank feeds when you choose the **Import Bank Transactions** action. In addition, you can set a bank account up to automatically import new bank statement feeds every hour. Transactions for payments that have already been posted as applied and/or reconciled will not be imported. For more information, see [How to: Set Up the Bank Data Conversion Service](bank-how-setup-bank-data-conversion-service.md)). - -With the **Map Text to Account** action, you can set up mappings between text on payments and specific debit, credit, and balancing accounts so that such payments are posted to the specified accounts when you post the payment reconciliation journal. See step 8. For more information, see [How to: Map Text on Recurring Payments to Accounts for Automatic Reconciliation](receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md). - -Similar functionality exists to reconcile excess amounts on payment reconciliation journal lines on an ad-hoc basis. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments That Cannot be Applied.](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md) - -You use the **Apply Automatically** function, either automatically when you import a bank file or feed with payment transactions or when you activate it, to apply payments to their related open entries based on a matching of data on a journal line with data on one or more open entries. - -On journal lines where a payment has been applied automatically to one or more open entries, the **Match Confidence** field has a value between Low and High to indicate the quality of the data matching that the suggested payment application is based on. In addition, the **Account Type** and **Account No.** fields are filled with information about the customer or vendor that the payment is applied to. If you have set up a text-to-account mapping, the automatic application can result in a match confidence value of **High - Text-to-Account Mapping**. - -For each journal line in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, you can open the **Payment Application** window to see all candidate open entries for the payment and view detailed information for each entry about the data matching that a payment application is based on. Here, you can manually apply payments or reapply payments that were applied automatically to a wrong entry. For more information, see [How to: Review or Apply Payments After Automatic Application](receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> You can start the bank transactions import at the same time as you open the **Payment Reconciliation** Journal window for an existing payment reconciliation journal in the **Payment Reconciliation Journals** window. The following procedure describes how to import bank transactions into the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window after you have created a new journal. - -## To reconcile payments using automatic application -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Reconciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. To work in a new payment reconciliation journal, choose the **New Journal** action. -3. In the **Payment Bank Account List** window, select the bank account that you want to reconcile payments for, and then choose the **OK** button. - The **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window opens prepared for the selected bank account. -4. Choose the **Import Bank Transactions** action. - If the bank account for the selected journal is not set up for import of bank transactions, then a dialog box will open to help you fill in the relevant fields. -5. In the **Select a file to import** window, select the file that contains the bank transactions for payments that you want to reconcile, and then choose the **Open** button. -6. If the Bank Statement service is enabled, in the **Bank Statement Filter** window that opens automatically, specify the date interval for the bank statements to be imported. - - The **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window is filled with lines for payments representing bank transactions in the imported bank statement. - - On lines for payments that have been automatically applied to their related open entries, the **Match Confidence** field has a value between **Low** and **High** to indicate the quality of the data matching that the suggested payment application is based on. In addition, the **Account Type** and **Account No.** fields are filled with information about the customer or vendor that the payment is applied to. -7. Select a journal line, and then, choose the **Apply Manually** action to review, reapply, or apply the payment manually in the **Payment Application** window. For more information, see [How to: Review or Apply Payments After Automatic Application](receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md). - - When you have finished your manual application, the **Match Confidence** field on the journal line that you have processed manually contains **Accepted**. -8. Select an unapplied journal line for a recurring cash receipt or expense, such as a car gasoline purchase, and then choose the **Map Text to Account** action. For more information, see [How to: Map Text on Recurring Payments to Accounts for Automatic Reconciliation](receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md) -9. When you have finished your mapping of payment text to accounts, choose the **Apply Manually** action. -10. When you are content that all payments on the journal lines are correctly applied or set to direct posting, choose the **Post** action. - -When you post the payment reconciliation journal, the applied open entries memos are closed, and the related customer, vendor, or general ledger accounts are updated. For payments on journal lines based on text-to-account mapping, the specified customer, vendor, and general ledger accounts are updated. For all journal lines, bank account ledger entries are created. If you choose the **Post Payments and Reconcile Bank Account** action, any open bank account ledger entries related to the applied customer or vendor ledger entries will be closed. This means that the bank account is automatically reconciled for payments that you post with the journal. - -You can compare the value in the **Balance on Bank Account After Posting** field together with the value in the **Statement Ending Balance** field to track when the bank account is reconciled based on payments that you post. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you do not want to reconcile the bank account from the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, then you must use the **Bank Acc. Reconciliation** window. For more information, see [Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately](bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9c19d636..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-reconcile-payments-cannot-apply-auto.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Transfer Difference to Account Feature to Reconcile Payments ' -description: Describes how to process payments that cannot be applied to a document, for example, when an exchange rate causes amounts to differ. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment process, cash receipts -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Reconcile Payments That Cannot be Applied Automatically -You may sometimes have to handle payments to your bank account that cannot be applied to a related open customer, vendor or bank account ledger entry. Reasons may be that no document exists in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] that the payment can be applied to, or the related document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] has a different amount than the transaction amount, for example, because of currency exchange. In the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, all transaction amounts for payments that are not yet applied appear in the **Difference** field, including amounts that cannot be applied because of reasons such as the above. - -Payments that cannot be applied can appear on payment reconciliation journal lines in the following different ways: - -* The value in the **Difference** field is equal to the value in the **Transaction Amount** field, which indicates that no part of the payment can be applied to a related open customer, vendor, or bank account ledger entry. -* The value in the **Difference** field is lower than the value in the **Transaction Amount** field, which indicates that a part of the payment can be applied to a related open customer, vendor, or bank account ledger entry. The remaining part of the payment cannot be applied and must be reconciled manually or by posting it directly to an account. - -To reconcile such payments, you can choose the **Transfer Difference to Account** button and then specify to which account the amount in the **Difference** field will be posted when you post the payment reconciliation journal. - -> [!TIP] -> Similar functionality exists to set up automatic reconciliation of recurring payments that cannot be applied to related open customer, vendor, or bank account ledger entries. For more information, see [How to: Map Text on Recurring Payments to Accounts for Automatic Reconciliation](receivables-how-map-text-recurring-payments-accounts-auto-reconcilliation.md). - -## To reconcile payments that cannot be applied -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Reconciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open a payment reconciliation journal. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). -3. Choose the **Transfer Difference to Account**. The **Transfer Difference to Account** window opens. -4. In the **Account Type** field, specify if the type of account that the payment amount will be posted to. -5. In the **Account No.** field, specify the account that the payment amount will be posted to. -6. In the **Description** field, specify text that describes this direct payment posting. By default, the text in the **Transaction Text** field on the payment reconciliation journal line is inserted. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -If the value in the **Difference** field was equal to the value in the **Transaction Amount** field when you post the payment reconciliation journal, the whole payment on the journal line will be posted directly to the specified balancing account. - -If the value in the **Difference** field was lower than the value in the **Transaction Amount** field, then an additional journal line will be created with the same text and date and with the difference inserted in the **Transaction Amount** field. On the original journal line, the difference will be deducted from the value in the **Transaction Amount** field, and the payment will remain applied to its related customer, vendor, or bank account ledger entry. When you post the payment reconciliation journal, one part of the payment will be posted as an applied payment. The other part of the payment will be posted directly to the specified account. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9da0ac8d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-how-review-apply-payments-auto-application.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Verify Automatically Applied Payments, and Reapply Payments Manually -description: After payments are applied automatically, you can review all the entries for a payment and manually reapply those that were applied incorrectly. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: payment process, reconcile payment, expenses, cash receipts -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Review or Apply Payments Manually After Automatic Application -For each journal line representing a payment in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, you can open the **Payment Application** window to see all candidate open entries for the payment and view detailed information for each entry about the data matching that a payment application is based on. Here, you can manually apply payments or reapply payments that were applied automatically to a wrong entry. For more information about automatic application, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> When the bank account that you are reconciling payments for is set up for the local currency, then the **Payment Application** window will show all open entries in the local currency, including open entries for documents that were originally invoiced in foreign currencies. Payments applied to entries with converted currencies may therefore be posted with different amounts than on the original document because of the potentially different exchange rates used by the bank and [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] respectively. - -Therefore, we recommend that you look for foreign currency codes in the **Currency Code** field in the **Payment Application** window to check if applications are based on converted currencies. To review the original document amount in the foreign currency and to see the exchange rate used, choose the **Applies-to Entry No.** field, and then, on the shortcut menu, choose the drilldown button to open the **Customer Ledger Entries** or **Vendor Ledger Entries** window. - -Any gains-and-loss adjustment required due to currency conversions is not handled automatically by [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot apply entries with a different sign than the sign on the payment. For example, to close both a negative-sign credit memo and its related positive-sign invoice, you must first apply the credit memo to the invoice, and then apply the payment to the invoice with the reduced remaining amount. - -> [!WARNING] -> If you use payment discounts, and if the payment date is before the payment due date, then the **Remaining Amt. Incl. Discount** field in the **Payment Application** window will be used for matching. Otherwise, the value in the **Remaining Amount** field will be used. If the payment was made with a discounted amount after the payment due date, or the full amount was paid but a discount was granted, then the amount will not be matched. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can only apply a payment to one account. If you want to split the application on multiple open entries, for example to apply a lump-sum payment, then the open entries must be for the same account. For more information, see steps 7 and 8 in the procedure in this topic. - -## To review or apply payments after automatic application -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Reconciliation Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the payment reconciliation journal for a bank account that you want to reconcile payments for. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). -3. In the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, select a payment that you want to review or manually apply to one or more open entries, and then choose the **Apply Manually** action. -4. Select the **Applied** check box on the line for the open entry that you want to apply the payment to. -5. The payment amount, which is also shown in the **Transaction Amount** field in the **Payment Application** window, is inserted in the **Applied Amount** field, but you can modify the field, for example if you want to apply the amount to several open entries. -6. To apply a part of the paid amount to another open entry for the account, for example to apply a lump-sum payment, select the **Applied** check box for the line. The applied amount is automatically deducted from the transactions amount to reflect the distribution on the two open entries. -7. To apply a part of a payment to one or more open entries that does not exist in the database, create a new line under the line for the same account. In the **Applied Amount** field, enter the amount to apply on the new line, and then adjust the **Applied Amount** field on the existing line. -8. Repeat steps 5, 6, or 7 for other open entries that you want to apply a full or partial payment amount to. -9. When you have reviewed a payment application or manually applied to one or more open entries, choose the **Accept Application** action. - -The **Payment Application** window closes, and in the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window, the value in the **Match Confidence** field is changed to **Accepted** to indicate to you that you have reviewed or manually applied the payment. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-manage-receivables.md b/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-manage-receivables.md deleted file mode 100644 index b76354c2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/receivables-manage-receivables.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Manage Receivables -description: Outlines tasks to manage receivables and apply payments to customer or vendor ledger entries. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customer payment, debtor, balance due, AR -ms.date: 08/10/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Managing Receivables -A regular step in any financial rhythm is to reconcile bank accounts, which requires that you apply payments to customer or vendor ledger entries to close sales invoices and purchase credit memos. - -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], one of the fastest ways to register payments from the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window by importing a bank statement file or feed. The payments are applied to open customer or vendor ledger entries based on data matches between payment text and entry information. You can review and change the matches before you post the journal, and close bank account ledger entries for ledger entries when you post the journal. The bank account is reconciled when all payments are applied. - -There are, however, other handy places to apply payments and reconcile bank accounts: - -* The **Bank Account Reconciliations** window, which also lets you check ledger entries. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Bank Accounts Separately](bank-how-reconcile-bank-accounts-separately.md). -* The **Payment Registration** window, where you can apply and manually check payments received as cash, check, or bank transaction against a generated list of unpaid sales documents. Note that this functionality is available only for sales documents. -* The **Cash Receipt Journal** window, where you manually post receipts to the relevant general ledger, customer, or other account by entering a payment line. You can either apply the receipt or refund to one or more open entries before you post the cash receipt journal, or from the customer ledger entries. - -Another part of managing receivables is to collect outstanding balances, including finance charges, and issue reminders. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers ways to do those things as well. For more information, see [How to: Collect Outstanding Balances](receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - - -| To | See | -|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| Apply payments to open customer or vendor ledger entries based on an imported bank statement file or feed, and reconcile the bank account when all payments are applied. | [Applying Payments Automatically and Reconciling Bank Accounts](receivables-apply-payments-auto-reconcile-bank-accounts.md) | -| Apply payments to open customer ledger entries based on manual entry in a list of unpaid sales documents. | [How to: Reconcile Customer Payments Manually From a List of Unpaid Sales Documents](receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md) | -| Post cash receipts or refunds for customers in the cash receipt journal and apply to customer ledger entries, either from the journal or from posted ledger entries. | [How to: Reconcile Customer Payments Manually](receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md) | -| Remind customers of overdue amounts, calculate interest and finance charges, and manage accounts receivable. | [How to: Collect Outstanding Balances](receivables-collect-outstanding-balances.md) | -| Ensure that you know the cost of shipped items by assigning added item costs, such as freight, physical handling, insurance, and transportation that you incur after selling. | [How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md) | -| Set up a tolerance by which the system closes an invoice even though the payment, including any discount, does not fully cover the amount on the invoice. | [How to: Work with Payment Tolerances and Payment Discount Tolerances](finance-payment-tolerance-and-payment-discount-tolerance.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/reports-saving-reusing-settings.md b/dynamics-nav-app/reports-saving-reusing-settings.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1bd9c76c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/reports-saving-reusing-settings.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Apply and Modify Saved Settings on Reports -description: Describes using predefined options and filters to customize a report, and to generate the correct data. -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customization, personalization -ms.date: 11/24/2020 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Managing Saved Settings on Reports -Depending on the report that is run, you might be presented with a page that lets you to set certain options and filters for changing the data that is included in the generated report. This page is known as the report request page. A report can include one or more *saved settings* that you can apply to the report from the request page. *Saved settings* are basically predefined options and filters. Using saved settings is a fast and reliable way to consistently generate reports that contain the correct data. - -You can see the saved settings that are available to you for a report in **Saved Settings** section of the report request page. - -## To apply saved settings to a report -1. Open the report. - - The report request page appears. -2. In the **Saved Settings** section of the page, set the **Name** field to the saved settings that you want to use. - - The **Saved Settings** section only appears if the report has been run before or if there are existing saved settings entries. The saved settings entry called **Last used options and filters** is always available. These settings are the option and filter values that were used the last time you ran the report. - -## Administer saved report settings for users -If you have the proper permissions, you can view, create, and modify the saved settings for all reports for all users in company. You can assign saved settings for a report to individual users or all users in the company. - -You manage saved settings from page 1560 **Reports Settings**. To open this page, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Settings**, and then choose the related link. - -From the **Report Settings** page, you can create a new settings from scratch or you can make a copy and modify existing settings. To modify the options and filters for a settings, choose the **Edit** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> The saved settings feature on reports is only relevant when the SaveValues property of the request page is set to Yes. The SaveValues property property is set in the development environment. - -> [!Important] -> If you create a saved settings item for all users, and it has the same name as an existing saved settings for a specific user, then that user will not be able to use the saved settings that is assigned to everyone. In the Saved Settings field on the report request page, the user will see two saved settings options with the same name. However, no matter which option he chooses, the user-specific saved settings will be used. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with Reports](ui-work-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-date-calculation-for-sales.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-date-calculation-for-sales.md deleted file mode 100644 index cd473503..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-date-calculation-for-sales.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Date Calculation for Sales - description: The program automatically calculates the date on which you must order an item to have it in inventory on a certain date. This is the date on which you can expect items ordered on a particular date to be available for picking. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Date Calculation for Sales -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculates the earliest possible date that an item on a sales order line can be shipped. - -If the customer has requested a specific delivery date, then the date on which the items must be available to pick to meet that delivery date is calculated. - -If the customer does not request a specific delivery date, then the date on which the items can be delivered is calculated, starting from the date on which the items are available for picking. - -## Calculating a Requested Delivery Date -If you specify a requested delivery date on the sales order line, then that date is used as the starting point for the following calculations. - -- requested delivery date - shipping time = planned shipment date -- planned shipment date - outbound whse. handling time = shipment date - -If the items are available to pick on the shipment date, then the sales process can continue. - -If the items are not available to be picked on the shipment date, then a stock-out warning is displayed. - -## Calculating the Earliest Possible Delivery Date -If you do not specify a requested delivery date on the sales order line, or if the requested delivery date cannot be met, then the earliest date on which that the items are available is calculated. That date is then entered in the Shipment Date field on the line, and the date on which you plan to ship the items as well as the date on which they will be delivered to the customer are calculated using the following formulas. - -- shipment date + outbound whse. handling time = planned shipment date -- planned shipment date + shipping time = planned delivery date - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Date Calculation for Purchases](purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md) - [How to: Calculate Order Promising Dates](sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6ba94516..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Correct or Cancel a Posted Sales Invoice -description: Describes how to correct, undo, or cancel a posted sales invoice and apply a sales credit memo. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: undo, credit memo, return -ms.date: 04/16/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can correct or cancel a posted sales invoice by issuing a corrective credit memo. This is useful if you make a mistake or if the customer requests a change. - -In the **Posted Sales Invoice** window, you can choose the **Create Corrective Credit Memo** action to achieve the effect of cancelling or correcting the sales invoice. For more information, see [How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md). - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-drop-shipment.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-drop-shipment.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2880ec5f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-drop-shipment.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Sales Order Linked to a Purchase Order for a Direct Shipment -description: Describes how to create a sales order linked to a purchase order to enable shipment directly from the vendor to the customer. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: direct shipment -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Make Drop Shipments -A drop shipment is the shipment of items from one of your vendors directly to one of your customers. - -When a sales order is marked for drop shipment, and you create a purchase order specifying the customer in the **Sell-to Customer No.** field, you can link the two documents and thereby instruct the vendor to ship directly to the customer. - -## To create a sales order for drop shipment -To prepare a drop shipment, you create a sales order for an item as normal, except you must indicate on the sales line that the sale requires drop shipment. - -1. Create a sales order for an item. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -2. On the sales order line for the drop shipment, select the **Drop Shipment** check box. If this field is not visible, you will have to add it. For more information, see [Personalization in the Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) or [Personalization in the Windows Client](ui-personalization-windows-client.md). - -## To create the purchase order for drop shipment -To prepare a drop shipment for the item to be sold, you create a purchase order as normal, except you must indicate on the purchase order that it must be shipped to your customer, not to yourself. - -1. Create a purchase order. Do not fill any fields on the lines. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). -2. In the **Sell-to Customer No.** field, select the customer that you are selling to. -3. Choose the **Drop Shipments** action, and then choose the **Get Sales Order** action. -4. In the **Sales List** window, select the sales order that you prepared in the "To create a sales order for drop shipment" section. -5. Choose the **OK** button. - -The line information from the sales order is inserted on the purchase order line(s). - -You can now instruct the vendor to ship the items to your customer, for example, by mailing the purchase order as a PDF. - -## To view the linked purchase order from the sales order -* Select the drop-shipment sales order line, choose the **Order** action, choose the **Drop Shipment** action, and then choose the **Purchase Order** action. - -## To post a drop shipment -After the vendor ships the items, you can post the sales order as shipped. You can also post the purchase order, but only with the **Receive** option until the sales order has been invoiced. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the sales order that you created in the "To create a sales order for a drop shipment" section. -3. In the **Qty. to Ship** field, specify how many of the order quantity to ship, the full or a partial order quantity. -4. Choose the **Post** or **Post and Send** action. -5. Choose either the **Ship** option to invoice later, or the **Ship and Invoice** option to invoice immediately. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Special Orders](sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md)| -[How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md) -[How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-customer-payments-paypal.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-customer-payments-paypal.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0727f13e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-customer-payments-paypal.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "How to: Enable Customer Payments Through PayPal" -description: Describes how to enable customer payments through PayPal. -author: SorenGP -ms.author: edupont -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# How to: Enable Customer Payments Through PayPal# -As an alternative to collecting payments through bank transfer or credit cards, you can offer your customers to pay you through their PayPal account. - -When a customer chooses the PayPal link on a sales invoice or sales order document, the service page for their PayPal account appears showing the payment details for the sale. The customer can then pay the invoice as any other PayPal payment. - -To enable customer payments through PayPal, you must do the following: - -1. Set up PayPal Payments Standard as a payment service in the **Payments Services** window. -2. Select PayPal Payments Standard in the **Payment Service** field on the sales document in question. - -The PayPal Payments Standard service is installed as an extension to Dynamics NAV and ready to enabled. For more information, see [Customizing Dynamics NAV Using Extensions ](ui-extensions.md). - -## To enable the PayPal Payments Standard service -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, **Payment Services**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Services** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Select **PayPal Standard**, and then close the window. -4. In the **Payment Services** window, choose the **Setup** action. -5. Fill in the fields as necessary. Choose a field to read a short description of the field or link to more information. - - **Note**: Select the **Always Include on Documents** check box if the hyperlink for the PayPal payment service should always be visible on sales documents where payment through PayPal is enabled. - -6. Close the window. - -## To select PayPal Payments Standard on a sales invoice -1. On the Home page, choose **Sales Invoices**. -2. Open the sales invoice that you want to enable PayPal payments for. -3. In the **Payment Service** field, choose PayPal Payments Standard. - -**Note**: The **Payment Service** field is only visible if the PayPal Payments Standard service is enabled. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Set Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Manage Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Customizing Dynamics NAV Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 75d77207..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Enable Customer Payments Through Payment Services -description: Make it easier for customers to pay their invoices by enabling payment services. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: online payment -ms.date: 07/07/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enable Customer Payments Through Payment Services -As an alternative to collecting payments through bank transfer or credit cards, your customers can pay you through their account with payment services, such as PayPal and WorldPay. - -After you enable a payment service in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], a link to the service is available on sales documents that you send by email to your customers. Customers can use the link to go to the payment service and pay the bill, directly from the sales document. If you don't want to include the link, for example, if a customer will pay with cash, you can remove the payment service from the invoice before posting. - -The PayPal Payments Standard and WorldPay Payments Standard extensions are installed in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], and are ready for you to enable. - -## To enable a payment service in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Services**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Payment Services** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Select the payment service, and then close the window. -4. In the **Payment Services** window, choose the **Setup** action. -5. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -6. Close the window. - -## To select a payment service on a sales invoice -1. On the Home page, choose **Sales Invoices**. -2. Open the sales invoice that you want to pay by using the payment service. -3. In the **Payment Service** field, choose the payment service. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Payment Service** field is available only if you've enabled the payment service. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-invoice-sales.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-invoice-sales.md deleted file mode 100644 index 71d014ab..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-invoice-sales.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Sales Invoice or Sales Order -description: Describes how to create a bill of sale, or a sales invoice or sales order, to record your agreement with a customer to sell products under specific terms. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: bill, sale, invoice, order -ms.date: 08/10/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Invoice Sales -You create a sales invoice or sales order to record your agreement with a customer to sell certain products on certain delivery and payment terms. - -There are a couple of scenarios where you must use a sales order instead of a sales invoice: - -* If you need to ship only part of an order quantity, for example, because the full quantity is not on hand. -* If you sell items that your vendor delivers directly to your customer, known as drop shipment. For more information, see [How to: Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md). - -In all other aspects, sales orders and sales invoices work in the same way. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - -You can negotiate with the customer by first creating a sales quote, which you can convert to a sales invoice when you agree on the sale. For more information, see [How to: Make Offers](sales-how-make-offers.md). - -If the customer decides to buy, you post the sales invoice to create the related quantity and value entries. When you post the sales invoice, you can also email the document as a PDF attachment. You can have the email body prefilled with a summary of the invoice and payment information, such as a link to PayPal. For more information, see [How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md). - -In business environments where the customer must pay before products are delivered, such as in retail, you must wait for the receipt of payment before you deliver the products. In most cases, you process incoming payments some weeks after delivery by applying the payments to their related posted, unpaid sales invoices. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -You can easily correct or cancel a posted sales invoice before it is paid. For example, this is useful if you want to correct a typing mistake or if the customer requests a change early in the order process. For more information, see [How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md). If the posted sales invoice is paid, then you must create a sales credit memo to reverse the sale. For more information, see [How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md). - -You can fill customer fields on the sales invoice in two ways depending on whether the customer is already registered. See steps 2 and 3 in the following procedure. - -## To create a sales invoice -1. On the Home page, choose the **Sales Invoice** action. -2. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. - - Other fields in the **Sales Invoice** window contain standard information about the selected customer. If the customer is not registered, follow these steps: -3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of the new customer. -4. In the dialog box about registering the new customer, choose the **Yes** button. -5. In the **Select a template for a new customer** window, choose a template to base the new customer card on, and then choose the **OK** button. -6. A new customer card displays the information on the selected customer template. Fill in the remaining fields. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md). -7. When you have completed the customer card, choose the **OK** button to return to the **Sales Invoice** window. - - Several fields on the sales invoice are now filled with information that you specified on the new customer card. -8. Fill in the remaining fields in the **Sales Invoice** window as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - You are now ready to fill in the sales invoice lines for products that you are selling to the customer or for any transaction with the customer that you want to record in a G/L account. - - If you have set up recurring sales lines for the customer, such as a monthly replenishment order, then you can insert these lines on the order by choosing the **Get Recurring Sales Lines** action. -9. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select what type of product, charge, or transaction that you will post for the customer with the sales line. -10. In the **No.** field, select a record to post according to the value in the **Type** field. - - You leave the **No.** field empty in the following cases: - * If the line is for a comment. Write the comment in the **Description** field. - * If the line is for a nonstock item. Choose the **Select Nonstock Items** action. For more information, see [How to: Work With Nonstock Items](inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md). - -11. In the **Quantity** field, enter how many units of the product, charge, or transaction that the line will record for the customer. - - The value in the **Line Amount** field is calculated as *Unit Price* x *Quantity*. - - The price and line amounts are with or without sales tax, depending on what you selected in the **Prices Including Tax** field on the customer card. -12. If you want to give a discount, enter a percentage in the **Line Discount %** field. The value in the **Line Amount** field updates accordingly. - - If special item prices are set up on the **Sales Prices and Sales Line Discounts** FastTab on the customer or item card, the price and amount on the sales line automatically update if the price criteria is met. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -13. Repeat steps 9 through 12 for every product or charge you want to sell to the customer. - - The totals under the lines are automatically calculated as you create or modify lines. -14. In the **Invoice Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field. - - If you have set up invoice discounts for the customer, then the specified percentage value is automatically inserted in the **Invoice Discount %** field if the criteria are met, and the related amount is inserted in the **Inv. Discount Amount Excl. Tax** field. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -15. When the sales invoice lines are completed, choose the **Post and Send** action. - -The **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box displays the customer's preferred method of receiving documents. You can change the sending method by choosing the lookup button for the **Send Document to** field. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). - -The related item and customer ledger entries are now created in your system, and the sales invoice is output as a PDF document. The sales invoice is removed from the list of sales invoices and replaced with a new document in the list of posted sales invoices. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-make-offers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-make-offers.md deleted file mode 100644 index c8bce0dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-make-offers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Sales Offer to a Customer -description: Describes how to create a sales offer or a request for proposal (RFQ) document to record your offer to a customer to sell products under certain terms. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: rfq -ms.date: 08/10/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Make Offers -You create a sales quote to record your offer to a customer to sell certain products on certain delivery and payment terms. You can send the sales quote to the customer to communicate the offer. You can email the document as a PDF attachment. You can also have the email body prefilled with a summary of the quote. For more information, see [How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md). - -While you negotiate with the customer, you can change and resend the sales quote as much as needed. When the customer accepts the quote, you convert the sales quote to a sales invoice or a sales order in which you process the sale. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) or [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - -You can fill customer fields on the sales quote in two ways depending on whether the customer is already registered. See steps 2 and 3 in the following procedure. - -## To create a sales quote -1. On the Home page, choose the **Sales Quote** action. -2. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. - - Other fields in the **Sales Quote** window contain standard information of the selected customer. If the customer is not registered, follow these steps: -3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of the new customer. -4. In the dialog box about registering the new customer, choose the **Yes** button. -5. In the **Select a template for a new customer** window, choose a template to base the new customer card on, and then choose the **OK** button. -6. A new customer card displays the information on the selected customer template. Fill in the remaining fields. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md). -7. When you have completed the customer card, choose the **OK** button to return to the **Sales Quote** window. - - Several fields on the sales quote are now filled with information that you specified on the new customer card. -8. Fill in the remaining fields in the **Sales Quote** window as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -You are now ready to fill in the sales order lines for products that you are selling to the customer or for any transaction with the customer that you want to record in a G/L account. -If you have set up recurring sales lines for the customer, such as a monthly replenishment order, then you can insert these lines on the order by choosing the **Get Recurring Sales Lines** action. -9. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select what type of product, charge, or transaction that you will post for the customer with the sales line. -10. In the **No.** field, select a record to post according to the value in the **Type** field. - - You leave the **No.** field empty in the following cases: - * If the line is for a comment. Write the comment in the **Description** field. - * If the line is for a nonstock item. Choose the **Select Nonstock Items** action. For more information, see [How to: Work With Nonstock Items](inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md). - -11. In the **Quantity** field, enter how many units of the product, charge, or transaction that the line will record for the customer. - - The value in the **Line Amount** field is calculated as *Unit Price* x *Quantity*. - - The price and line amounts are with or without sales tax, depending on what you selected in the **Prices Including Tax** field on the customer card. -12. If you want to give a discount, enter a percentage in the **Line Discount %** field. The value in the **Line Amount** field updates accordingly. - - If special item prices are set up on the **Sales Prices and Sales Line Discounts** FastTab on the customer or item card, the price and amount on the sales line automatically update if the price criteria is met. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -13. Repeat steps 9 through 12 for every product you want to offer the customer. - - The totals under the lines are automatically calculated as you create or modify lines. -14. In the **Invoice Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field. - - If you have set up invoice discounts for the customer, then the specified percentage value is automatically inserted in the **Invoice Discount %** field if the criteria are met, and the related amount is inserted in the **Inv. Discount Amount Excl. Tax** field. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -15. When the sales quote lines are completed, choose the **Send by Email** action. -16. In the **Send Email** window, fill in any remaining fields and review the embedded sales quote. For more information, see [How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md). -17. If the customer accepts the quote, choose the **Make Invoice** or the **Make Order** action. - -The sales quote is removed from the database. A sales invoice or a sales order is created based on the information in the sales quote in which you can process the sale. In the **Quote No.** field on the sales invoice or sales order, you can see the number of the sales quote that it was made from. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) or [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md deleted file mode 100644 index f83dc6c6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,216 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using a Sales Credit Memo to Process Sales Returns or Cancellations -description: Describes how to create a sales credit memo, directly or through a sales return order, to process a return, cancellation, or reimbursement for items or services you have been received payment for. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: undo, credit memo, return -ms.date: 04/16/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations -If a customer wants to return items or be reimbursed for items or services that you have sold and received payment for, you must create and post a sales credit memo that specifies the requested change. To include the correct sales invoice information, you can create the sales credit memo directly from the posted sales invoice or you can create a new sales credit memo with copied invoice information. - -If you need more control of the sales return process, such as warehouse documents for the item handling or better overview when receiving items from multiple sales documents with one sales return, then you can create sales return orders. A sales return order automatically issues the related sales credit memo and other return-related documents, such as a replacement sales order, if needed. For more information, see the "To create a sales return order based on one or more a posted sales documents" section. - -A return or reimbursement may relate to only some of the items or services on the original sales invoice. In that case, you must edit information on the lines on the sales credit memo or sales return order. When you post the sales credit memo or sales return order, the sales documents that are affected by the change are reversed and a refund payment can be created for the customer. For more information, see [Making Payments](payables-make-payments.md). - -In addition to the original posted sales invoice, you can apply the sales credit memo or sales return order to other sales documents, for example another posted sales invoice because the customer is also returning items delivered with that invoice. - -You can send the posted sales credit memo to the customer to confirm the return or cancellation and communicate that the related value will be reimbursed, for example when the items are returned. - -The credit memo posting will also revert any item charges that were assigned to the posted document, so that the item’s value entries are the same as before the item charge was assigned. - -## Inventory Costing -To preserve correct inventory valuation, you typically want to put returned items back in inventory at the unit cost that they were sold at, not at their current unit cost. This is referred to as exact cost reversing. - -Two functions exist to assign exact cost reversing automatically. - -|Function|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function in the **Sales Return Order** window|Copies lines of one or more posted documents to be reversed into the sales return order. For more information, see the "To create a sales return order, and related sales credit memo, for on one or more a posted sales invoices" section.| -|**Copy Document** function in the **Sales Credit Memo** and **Sales Return Order** windows|Copies both the header and lines of one posted document to be reversed.

Requires that the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window.| - -To assign exact cost reversing manually, you must choose the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on any type of return document line, and then select the number of the original sales entry. This links the sales credit memo or sales return order to the original sales entry and ensures that the item is valued at the original unit cost. - -For more information, see [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md). - -## To create a sales credit memo from a posted sales invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and the choose the related link. -2. In the **Posted Sales Invoices** window, select the posted sales invoice that you want to reverse, and then choose the **Create Corrective Credit Memo** action. - - The sales credit memo header contains some information from the posted sales invoice. You can edit this, for example, with new information that reflects the return agreement. -3. Edit information on the lines according to the agreement, such as the number of returned items or the amount to reimburse. -4. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. -5. In the **Apply Customer Entries** window, select the line with the posted sales document that you want to apply the sales credit memo to, and then choose the **Applies-to ID** action. - - The identifier of the sales credit memo displays in the **Applies-to ID** field. -6. In the **Amount to Apply** field, enter the amount that you want to apply if it's smaller than the original amount. - - At the bottom of the **Apply Customer Entries** window, you can see the total amount to apply to reverse all involved entries, namely when the value in the **Balance** field is zero. -7. Choose the **OK** button. When you post the sales credit memo, it is applied to the posted sales documents. - - After you create or edit sales credit memo lines, and the single or multiple applications are specified, you can post the sales credit memo. -8. Choose the **Post and Send** action. - -The **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box opens showing the preferred sending method for the customer. You can change the sending method by choosing the lookup button for the **Send Document** to field. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). - -The posted sales documents that you applied the credit memo to are now reversed, and a refund payment can be created for the customer. The sales credit memo is removed and replaced with a new document in the list of posted sales credit memos. - -## To create a sales credit memo by copying a posted sales invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to open a new empty sales credit memo. -3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. -4. Choose the **Copy Document** action. -5. In the **Copy Sales Document** window, in the **Document Type** field, select **Posted Invoice**. -6. Choose the **Document No.** field to open the **Posted Sales Invoices** window, and then select the posted sales invoice that contains lines that you want to reverse. -7. Select the **Recalculate Lines** check box if you want the copied posted sales invoice lines to be updated with any changes in item price and unit cost since the invoice was posted. -8. Choose the **OK** button. The copied invoice lines are inserted in the sales credit memo. -9. Complete the sales credit memo as explained in the "To create a sales credit memo from a posted sales invoice" section in this topic. - -## To create a sales return order based on one or more a posted sales documents -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Return Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields on the **General** FastTab as necessary. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill the lines manually, or copy information from other documents to fill the lines automatically: - - - Use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to copy one or more posted document lines from one or more posted documents. This function always exactly reverses the costs from the posted document line. This function is described in the following steps. - - Use the **Copy Document** function to copy an existing document to the return order. Use this function to copy the entire document. It can be either a posted document or a document that is not yet posted. This function only enables exact cost reversing when the **Exact Cost Reversing Mandatory** check box is selected in the **Sales and Receivables Setup** window. - -5. Choose the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** action. -6. At the top of the **Posted Sales Document Lines** window, select the **Show Reversible Lines Only** check box if you want to see only lines that have quantities that have not yet been returned. For example, if a posted sales invoice quantity has already been returned, you may not want to return that quantity on a new sales return document. - - > [!NOTE] - > This field only works for posted shipments and posted invoice lines, not for posted return or posted credit memo lines. - - At the left side of the window, the different document types are listed, and the number in brackets shows the number of documents available of each document type. - -7. In the **Document Type Filter** field, select the type of posted document lines you would like to use. -8. Select the lines that you would like to copy to the new document. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you use Ctrl+A to select all lines, all lines within the filter you have set are copied, but the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** filter is ignored. For example, suppose you have filtered the lines to a particular document number with two lines, one of which has already been returned. Even if the **Show Reversible Quantity Only** field is selected, if you press Ctrl+A to copy all lines, both lines are copied, instead of only the one that has not yet been reversed. - -9. Choose the **OK** button to copy the lines to the new document. - - The following processes occur: - - - For posted document lines of the type **Item**, a new document line is created that is a copy of the posted document line, with the quantity that has not yet been reversed. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is filled in as appropriate with the number of the item ledger entry of the posted document line. - - - For posted document lines that are not of the type **Item**, such as item charges, a new document line is created that is a copy of the original posted document line. - - - Calculates the **Unit Cost (LCY)** field on the new line from the costs on the corresponding item ledger entries. - - - If the copied document is a posted shipment, posted receipt, posted return receipt, or posted return shipment, the unit price is calculated automatically from the item card. - - - If the copied document is a posted invoice or credit memo, the unit price, invoice discounts, and line discounts from the posted document line are copied. - - - If the posted document line contains item tracking lines, the **Appl.-from Item Entry** field on the item tracking lines is filled with the appropriate item ledger entry numbers from the posted item tracking lines. - - When you copy from a posted invoice or posted credit memo, the program copies any relevant invoice discounts and line discounts as valid at the time of posting that document from the posted document line to the new document line. Be aware, however, that if the **Calc. Inv. Discount** option is activated in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, then the invoice discount will be newly calculated when you post the new document line. The line amount for the new line may therefore be different than the line amount for the posted document line, depending on the new calculation of the invoice discount. - - > [!NOTE] - > If part of the quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed or sold or consumed, a line is created for only the quantity that remains in inventory or that has not been returned. If the full quantity of the posted document line has already been reversed, a new document line is not created. - > - > If the flow of goods in the posted document is the same as the flow of goods in the new document, a copy of the original posted document line in the new document is created. The **Appl.-from Item Entry** field is not filled in because, in this case, exact cost reversing is not possible. For example, if you use the **Get Posted Document Lines to Reverse** function to get a posted sales credit memo line for a new sales credit memo, only the original posted credit memo line is copied to the new credit memo. - -10. In the **Sales Return Order** window, in the **Return Reason Code** field on each line, select the reason for the return. -11. Choose the **post** action. - -## To create a replacement sales order from a sales return order -You may decide to compensate a customer for an item that you have sold them by replacing the item. You can make a replacement with the same item or a different item. This situation could occur if you mistakenly shipped the wrong item to the customer, for example. - -1. In the **Sales Return Order** window for an active return process, on an empty line, make a negative entry for the replacement item by inserting a negative amount in the **Quantity** field. -2. Choose the **Move Negative Lines** action. -3. In the **Move Negative Sales Lines** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The negative line for the replacement item is deleted from the sales return order and inserted in a new **Sales Order** window. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). - -## To create return-related documents from a sales return order -You can have replacement sales orders, purchase return orders, and replacement purchase orders created automatically during the sales return process. This is useful, for example, in situations where you want to handle items with warranties provided by vendors. - -1. In the **Sales Return Order** window for an active return process, choose the **Create Return-Related Documents** action. -2. In the **Vendor No.** field, enter the number of a vendor if you want to create vendor documents automatically. -3. If a returned item must be returned to the vendor, select the **Create Purch. Ret. Order** check box. -4. If a returned item must be ordered from the vendor, select the **Create Purchase Order** check box. -5. If a replacement sales order must be created, select the **Create Sales Order** check box. - -## To create a restock charge -You may decide to charge your customer a restock fee to cover the physical handling costs of returning an item. This could occur if the customer mistakenly ordered the wrong item or changed their mind after receiving the item you sold them, for example. - -You can post this increased cost as an item charge in a credit memo or a return order and assign it to the posted shipment. The following describes it for a sales return order, but the same steps apply to a sales credit memo. - -1. Open the **Sales Return Order** window for an active return process. -2. On a new line, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. -3. Fill in the fields as for any item charge line. For more information, see [How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). - -When you post the sales return order, the restock charge is added to the relevant sales entry amount. In this way, you can maintain accurate inventory valuation. - -## To create a sales allowance -You can send a customer a credit memo with a price reduction if the customer has received slightly damaged items or received the items late. -You can post this reduced price as an item charge in a credit memo or a return order and assign it to the posted shipment. The following describes it for a sales credit memo, but the same steps apply to a sales return order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to open a new empty sales credit memo. -3. Fill in the credit memo header with relevant information about the customer that you want to give the sales allowance to. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select **Charge (Item)**. -5. In the **No.** field, select the appropriate item charge value. - You may want to create a special item charge number to cover sales allowances. -6. In the **Quantity** field, enter **1**. -7. In the **Unit Price** field, enter the amount of the sales allowance. -8. Assign the sales allowance as an item charge to the items in the posted shipment. For more information, see [How to: Use Item Charges to Account for Additional Trade Costs](payables-how-assign-item-charges.md). When you have assigned the allowance, return to the **Sales Credit Memo** window. - -When you post the sales return order, the sales allowance is added to the relevant sales entry amount. In this way, you can maintain accurate inventory valuation. - -## To combine return receipts -You can combine return receipts if your customer returns several items that are covered by different sales return orders. - -When you receive the items into your warehouse, post the relevant sales return orders as received. This creates posted return receipts. - -When you are ready to invoice this customer, instead of invoicing each sales return order separately, you can create a sales credit memo and automatically copy the posted return receipt lines to this document. Then you can post the sales credit memo and conveniently invoice all the open sales return orders at once. - -To combine return receipts, the **Combine Shipments** check box must be selected in the **Customer Card** window. - -### To manually combine return receipts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Credit Memo**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the fields as necessary. -4. Choose the **Get Return Receipt Lines** action. -5. Select the return receipt lines that you want to include in the credit memo: - - - To insert all lines, select all lines, and then choose the **OK** button. - - - To insert specific lines, select the lines, and then choose the **OK** button. - -6. If an incorrect shipment line was selected or you want to start over, you can simply delete the lines on the credit memo and re-run the **Get Return Receipt Lines** function. -7. Post the invoice. - -### To automatically combine return receipts -You can automatically combine return receipts and have the option of automatically posting the credit memos using the **Combine Return Receipts** function. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Combine Return Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Combine Return Receipts** window, fill in the fields to select the relevant return receipts. -3. Select the **Post Credit Memos** check box. If not, you must manually post the resulting purchase credit memos. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -### To remove a received and invoiced return order -When you invoice return receipts in this way, the return orders from which the return receipts were posted still exist, even if they have been fully received and invoiced. - -When return receipts are combined on a credit memo and posted, a posted sales credit memo is created for the credited lines. The **Quantity Invoiced** field on the originating sales return order is updated based on the invoiced quantity. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Sales Return Orders**, and then select the link. -2. Specify in the **No.** filter field which return orders to delete. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -Alternatively, delete individual sales return orders manually. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md deleted file mode 100644 index d484f7e7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Special Sales Prices and Discounts for Customers -description: Describes how to define the alternate pricing and discount agreements that you want to apply to sales documents when selling to different customers. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: special price, alternate price, pricing -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Record Special Sales Prices and Discounts -The different price and discount agreements that apply when selling to different customers must be defined so that the agreed rules and values are applied to sales documents that you create for the customers. - -When you have recorded special prices and line discounts for sales and purchases, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] ensures that your profit on item trade is always optimal by automatically calculating the best price on sales and purchase documents and on job and item journal lines. For more information, see "Best Price Calculation" section. - -Concerning prices, you can have a special sales price inserted on sales lines if a certain combination of customer, item, minimum quantity, unit of measure, or starting/ending date exists. - -Concerning discounts, you can set up and use two types of sales discounts: - -| Discount Type | Description | -| --- | --- | -| **Sales Line Discount** |An amount discount that is inserted on sales lines if a certain combination of customer, item, minimum quantity, unit of measure, or starting/ending date exists. This works in the same way as for sales prices. | -| **Invoice Discount** |A percentage discount that is subtracted from the document total if the value amount of all lines on a sales document exceeds a certain minimum. | - -Because sales prices and sales line discounts are based on a combination of item and customer, you can also perform this configuration from the item card of the item where the rules and values apply. - -## To set up a sales price for a customer -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant customer card, and then choose the **Prices** action. - - The **Sales Type** field is prefilled with **Customer**, and the **Sales Code** field is prefilled with the customer number. -3. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] Fill a line for each combination that will grant a special sales price to the customer. - -## To set up a sales line discount for a customer -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant customer card, and then choose the **Line Discounts** action. - - The **Sales Type** field is prefilled with **Customer**, and the **Sales Code** field is prefilled with the customer number. -3. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] Fill a line for each combination that will grant a sales line discount to the customer. - -## To set up an invoice discount for a customer -When you have decided which customers are eligible for invoice discounts, enter the invoice discount code on the customer cards and set up the terms for each code. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the customer card for a customer that will be eligible for invoice discounts. -3. In the **Invoice Disc. Code** field, select a code for the relevant invoice discount terms to use to calculate invoice discounts for the customer. - - > [!NOTE] - > Invoice discount codes are represented by existing customer cards. This enables you to quickly assign invoice discount terms to customers by picking the name of another customer who will have the same terms. - - Proceed to set up new the sales invoice discount terms. -4. In the **Customer Card** window, choose the **Invoice Discounts** action. The **Cust. Invoice Discounts** window opens. -5. In the **Currency Code** field, enter the code for a currency that the invoice discount terms on the line applies to. Leave the field blank to set up invoice discount terms in USD. -6. In the **Minimum Amount** field, enter the minimum amount that an invoice must have to be eligible for the discount. -7. In the **Discount %** field, enter the invoice discount as a percentage of the invoice amount. -8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each currency that the customer will receive a different invoice discount for. - -The invoice discount is now set up and assigned to the customer in question. When you select the customer code in the **Invoice Disc. Code** field on other customer cards, the same invoice discount is assigned to those customers. - -## To work with sales invoice discounts and service charges -When you use invoice discounts, the size of the invoice amount determines the size of the discount that is granted. - -In the **Cust. Invoice Discounts** window, you can also add a service charge to invoices over a certain amount. - -Before you can use invoice discounts with sales, you must enter certain information in the program. You must decide: - -- which customers will be granted this type of discount. -- which discount percentages you will use. - -If you invoice discounts to be calculated automatically, you can specify this in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. - -For each customer, you can specify whether you will grant invoice discounts if the requirement is satisfied (that is, if the invoice amount is large enough). You can define the terms of the invoice discount in local currency for domestic customers and in foreign currency for foreign customers. - -You link discount percentages to specific invoice amounts in **Cust. Invoice Discounts** windows. You can enter any number of percentages in each window. Each customer can have its own window, or you can link several customers to the same window. - -In addition to (or instead of) a discount percentage, you can link a service charge amount to a specific invoice amount. - -> [!TIP] -> Before you start entering this information in the program, it is a good idea to prepare an outline of the discount structure you want to use. This makes it easier to see which customers can be linked to the same invoice discount window. The fewer windows you have to set up, the faster you can enter the basic information. - -## Best Price Calculation -When you have recorded special prices and line discounts for sales and purchases, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] ensures that your profit on item trade is always optimal by automatically calculating the best price on sales and purchase documents and on job and item journal lines. - -The best price is the lowest permissible price with the highest permissible line discount on a given date. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculates this when it inserts the unit price and the line discount percentage for items on new document and journal lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following describes how the best price is calculated for sales. The calculation is the same for purchases. - -1. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks the combination of the bill-to customer and the item and then calculates the applicable unit price and line discount percentage, using the following criteria: - - - Does the customer have a price/discount agreement, or does the customer belong to a group that does? - - Is the item or the item discount group on the line included in any of these price/discount agreements? - - Is the order date (or the posting date for the invoice and credit memo) within the starting and ending date of the price/discount agreement? - - Is a unit of measure code specified? If so, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks for prices/discounts with the same unit of measure code, and prices/discounts with no unit of measure code. - -2. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks if any price/discount agreements apply to information on the document or journal line, and then inserts the applicable unit price and line discount percentage, using the following criteria: - - - Is there a minimum quantity requirement in the price/discount agreement that is fulfilled? - - Is there a currency requirement in the price/discount agreement that is fulfilled? If so, the lowest price and the highest line discount for that currency are inserted, even if local currency would provide a better price. If there is no price/discount agreement for the specified currency code, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] inserts the lowest price and the highest line discount in your local currency. - -If no special price can be calculated for the item on the line, then either the last direct cost or the unit price from the item card is inserted. - -## To copy sales prices -If you want to copy sales prices, such as an individual customer's sales prices to use for a customer price group, you must run the **Suggest Sales Price on Wksh.** batch job. You find the batch job in the **Sales Price Worksheet** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Price Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Suggest Sales Price on Wksh.** action. -3. On the **Sales Prices** FastTab, fill in the **Sales Type** and **Sales Code** fields with the original sales prices you want to copy. -4. In the top section of the request window, fill in the **Sales Type** and **Sales Code** with the type and name you want the sales prices copied to. -5. If you want the batch job to create new prices, select the **Create New Prices** field. -6. Choose the **OK** button to fill in the lines on the **Sales Price Worksheet** window with the suggested new prices, indicating that they are valid for the selected **Sales Type**. - -> [!NOTE] -> This batch job only creates suggestions and it does not implement the suggested changes. If you are satisfied with the suggestions and want to implement them, that is insert them in the **Sales Prices** table, you can use the **Implement Price Changes** batch job, which is found on the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, in the **Sales Price Worksheet** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-register-new-customers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-register-new-customers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3fe02d3a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-register-new-customers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Customer Card to Register New Customers -description: Describes how to create a customer card to register information about each new customer or client that you sell to. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: client -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Register New Customers -Customers are the source of your income. You must register each customer you sell to as a customer card. Customer cards hold the information that is required to sell products to the customer. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) and [How to: Register New Items](inventory-how-register-new-items.md). - -Before you can register new customers, you must set up various sales codes that you can select from when you fill in customer cards. For more information, see [Set Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If customer templates exist for different customer types, then a window appears when you create a new customer card from where you can select an appropriate template. If only one customer template exists, then new customer cards always use that template. - -## To create a new customer card -1. On the Home page, choose the **Customers** action to open the list of existing customers. -2. In the **Customers** window, choose the **New** action. - - If only one customer template exists, then a new customer card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. - - If more than one customer template exists, then a window opens from which you can select a customer template. In that case, follow the next two steps. -3. In the **Select a template for a new customer** window, choose the template that you want to use for the new customer card. -4. Choose the **OK** button. A new customer card opens with some fields filled with information from the template. -5. Proceed to fill or change fields on the customer card as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -On the **Sales Prices** FastTab, you can view special prices or discounts that you grant for the customer if certain criteria are met, such as item, minimum order quantity, or ending date. Each row represents a special price or line discount. Each column represents a criterion that must apply to warrant the special price that you enter in the **Unit Price** field, or the line discount that you enter in the **Line Discount %** field. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). - -The customer is now registered, and the customer card is ready to be used on sales documents. - -If you want to use this customer card as a template when you create new customer cards, you can save it as a template. For more information, see the following section. - -## To save the customer card as a template -1. In the **Customer Card** window, choose the **Save as Template** action. The **Customer Template** window opens showing the customer card as a template. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. To reuse dimensions in templates, choose the **Dimensions** action. The **Dimension Templates** window opens showing any dimension codes that are set up for the customer. -4. Edit or enter dimension codes that will apply to new customer cards created by using the template. -5. When you have completed the new customer template, choose the **OK** button. - -The customer template is added to the list of customer templates, so that you can use it to create new customer cards. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-sell-products.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-sell-products.md deleted file mode 100644 index 50a06cfe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-sell-products.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create a Sales Order and Sell Products -description: Describes how to create a sales order to record your agreement with a customer to sell or trade products under specific terms. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: trade -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Sell Products -You create a sales order or sales invoice to record your agreement with a customer to sell certain products on certain delivery and payment terms. - -> [!NOTE] -> You use sales orders if your sales process requires that you can ship parts of an order quantity, for example, because the full quantity is not available at once. If you sell items by delivering directly from your vendor to your customer, as a drop shipment, then you must also use sales orders. For more information, see [How to: Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md). In all other aspects, sales orders work the same way as sales invoices. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md). - -You can negotiate with the customer by first creating a sales quote, which you can convert to a sales order when you agree on the sale. For more information, see [How to: Make Offers](sales-how-make-offers.md). - -After the customer has confirmed the agreement, for example after a quote process, you can send an order confirmation to record your obligation to deliver the products as agreed. - -When you deliver the products, either fully or partially, you post the sales order as shipped or as shipped and invoiced to create the related item and customer ledger entries in your system. When you post the sales order, you can also email the document as a PDF attachment. You can have the email body prefilled with a summary of the order and payment information, such as a link to PayPal. For more information, see [How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md). - -In business environments where the customer must pay before products are delivered, such as in retail, you must wait for the receipt of payment before you deliver the products. In most cases, you process incoming payments some weeks after delivery by applying the payments to their related posted, unpaid sales invoices. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -You can easily correct or cancel a posted sales invoice resulting from a sales order before it is paid. This is useful if you want to correct a typing mistake or if the customer requests a change early in the order process. For more information, see [How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md). If the posted sales invoice is paid, then you must create a sales credit memo to reverse the sale. For more information, see [How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md). - -You can fill customer fields on the sales order in two ways depending on whether the customer is already registered. See steps 2 and 3 in the following procedure. - -## To create a sales order -1. On the Home page, choose the **Sales Order** action. -2. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of an existing customer. - - Other fields in the **Sales Order** window are now filled with the standard information of the selected customer. If the customer is not registered, then follow these steps: -3. In the **Customer** field, enter the name of the new customer. -4. In the dialog box about registering the new customer, choose the **Yes** button. -5. In the **Select a template for a new customer** window, choose a template to base the new customer card on, and then choose the **OK** button. - - A new customer card opens, prefilled with the information on the selected customer template. The **Name** field is prefilled with the new customer’s name that you entered on the sales order. -6. Proceed to fill in the remaining fields on the customer card. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md). -7. When you have completed the customer card, choose the **OK** button to return to the **Sales Order** window. - - Several fields on the sales order are now filled with information that you specified on the new customer card. -8. Fill in the remaining fields in the **Sales Order** window as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - You are now ready to fill in the sales order lines with inventory items or services that you want to sell to the customer. - - If you have set up recurring sales lines for the customer, such as a monthly replenishment order, then you can insert these lines on the order by choosing the **Get Recurring Sales Lines** action. -9. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Item** field, enter the number of an inventory item or service. -10. In the **Quantity** field, enter the number of items to be sold. - - The **Line Amount** field is updated to show the value in the **Unit Price** field multiplied by the value in the **Quantity** field. - - The price and line amounts are shown with or without sales tax depending on what you selected in the **Prices Including Tax** field on the customer card. -11. In the **Line Discount %** field, enter a percentage if you want to grant the customer a discount on the product. The value in the **Line Amount** field is updated accordingly. - - If you have set up special item prices on the **Sales Prices and Sales Line Discounts** FastTab on the customer or item card, then the price and amount on the quote line are automatically updated if the agreed price criteria are met. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -12. To add a comment about the quote line that the customer can see on the printed sales quote, write a text in the **Description** field on an empty line. -13. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for every item that you want to offer to the customer. - - The totals under the lines are automatically calculated as you create or modify lines. -14. A new customer card displays the information on the selected customer template. Fill in the remaining fields. For more information, see [How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md). -15. When you have completed the customer card, choose the **OK** button to return to the **Sales Order** window. - - Several fields on the sales Order are now filled with information that you specified on the new customer card. -16. Fill in the remaining fields in the **Sales Order** window as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - You are now ready to fill in the sales order lines for products that you are selling to the customer or for any transaction with the customer that you want to record in a G/L account. - - If you have set up recurring sales lines for the customer, such as a monthly replenishment order, then you can insert these lines on the order by choosing the **Get Recurring Sales Lines** action. -17. On the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Type** field, select what type of product, charge, or transaction that you will post for the customer with the sales line. -18. In the **No.** field, select a record to post according to the value in the **Type** field. - - You leave the **No.** field empty in the following cases: - -If the line is for a comment. Write the comment in the **Description** field. - -If the line is for a nonstock item. Choose the **Select Nonstock Items** action. For more information, see [How to: Work With Nonstock Items](inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md). - -19. In the **Quantity** field, enter how many units of the product, charge, or transaction that the line will record for the customer. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the item is of type **Item - Service** or **Resource**, the quantity is a time unit, such as hours, as indicated in the **Unit of Measure Code** field on the line. - - The value in the **Line Amount** field is calculated as *Unit Price* x *Quantity*. - - The price and line amounts are with or without sales tax, depending on what you selected in the **Prices Including Tax** field on the customer card. -20. If you want to give a discount, enter a percentage in the **Line Discount %** field. The value in the **Line Amount** field updates accordingly. - - If special item prices are set up on the **Sales Prices and Sales Line Discounts** FastTab on the customer or item card, the price and amount on the sales line automatically update if the price criteria is met. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -21. Repeat steps 9 through 12 for every product or charge you want to sell to the customer. - - The totals under the lines are automatically calculated as you create or modify lines. -22. In the **Invoice Discount Amount** field, enter an amount that should be deducted from the value shown in the **Total Incl. Tax** field. - - If you have set up invoice discounts for the customer, then the specified percentage value is automatically inserted in the **Invoice Discount %** field if the criteria are met, and the related amount is inserted in the **Inv. Discount Amount Excl. Tax** field. For more information, see [Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md). -23. To only ship a part of the order quantity, enter that quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field. The value is copied to the **Qty. to Invoice** field. -24. To only invoice a part of the shipped quantity, enter that quantity in the **Qty. to Invoice** field. The quantity must be lower than the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field. -25. When the sales order lines are completed, choose the **Post and Send** action. - -The **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box displays the customer's preferred method of receiving documents. You can change the sending method by choosing the lookup button for the **Send Document to** field. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). - -The related item and customer ledger entries are now created in your system, and the sales order is output as a PDF document. When the sales order is fully posted, it is removed from the list of sales orders and replaced with new documents in the list of posted sales invoices and the list of posted sales shipments. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8b2c88cf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Preferred Methods of Sending Sales Documents -description: Describes how to set up each customer’s preferred method of sending sales documents, for example, email, PDF, electronic document, and so on. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: email, PDF, electronic document -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles -You can set each customer up with a preferred method of sending sales documents, so that you do not have to select a sending option every time you choose the **Post and Send** action. - -In the **Document Sending Profiles** window, you set up different sending profiles that you can select from in the **Document Sending Profile** field on a customer card. You can select the **Default** check box to specify that the document sending profile is the default profile for all customers, except for customers where the **Document Sending Profile** field is filled with another sending profile. - -When you choose the **Post and Send** action on a sales document, the **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box shows the sending profile used, either the one set up for the customer or the default for all customers. In the dialog box, you can change the sending profile for the sales document. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md). - -## To set up a document sending profile -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Document Sending Profiles**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Document Sending Profiles** window, choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To specify a sending profile on a customer card -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card of the customer who you want to set up a sending profile for. -3. In the **Document Sending Profile** field, select a profile that you have set up as described in the previous procedure. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-salespeople.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-salespeople.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7197efea..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-setup-salespeople.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up a Salesperson ' -description: You can set up a identifier for each of your salespeople, so you can track an individual’s performance or assign a salesperson to a contact. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: sales rep -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Salespeople -Many companies want to follow an individual employee's performance as a basis for calculating the sales commission or bonus. See, for example, the **Salesperson Commissions** report. A company may also want to assign a salesperson to each of their contacts. - -When yo have set up a salesperson in the **Salespeople** window, you can select it in the **Salesperson Code** field on all relevant records, such as G/L account, customer, vendor, contacts, and campaign cards. Then, when you post or set up invoices, credit memos, journal lines, finance charge activities, and so on, the salesperson code is carried to the resulting ledger entries. - -## To set up a salesperson code -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Salespeople**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Salespeople** window, choose the **New** action. - -You can use salespeople in various relationship management and marketing work. For example, you can assign tasks to salespeople, so that the tasks are incorporated in sales opportunities that the salesperson are assigned to. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Opportunity Sales Cycles and Cycle Stages](marketing-how-setup-opportunity-sales-cycles-stages.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md deleted file mode 100644 index acd11d8b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Order Promising Dates - description: The order promising function is a tool for calculating the earliest possible date that an item is available for shipment or delivery. It also creates requisition lines for those dates that you accept. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/10/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Order Promising Dates -A company must be able to inform their customers of order delivery dates. The **Order Promising Lines** window enables you to do this from a sales order line. - -Based on an item’s known and expected availability dates, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] instantly calculates shipment and delivery dates, which can then be promised to the customer. - -If you specify a requested delivery date on a sales order line, then that date is used as the starting point for the following calculations: - -- requested delivery date - shipping time = planned shipment date -- planned shipment date - outbound whse. handling time = shipment date - -If the items are available to pick on the shipment date, then the sales process can continue. If the items are not available to be picked on the shipment date, then a stock-out warning is displayed. - -If you do not specify a requested delivery date on a sales order line, or if the requested delivery date cannot be met, then the earliest date on which that the items are available is calculated. That date is then entered in the **Shipment Date** field on the line, and the date on which you plan to ship the items as well as the date on which they will be delivered to the customer are calculated using the following calculations: - -- shipment date + outbound whse. handling time = planned shipment date -- planned shipment date + shipping time = planned delivery date - -## About Order Promising -The Order Promising functionality enables you to promise an order to be shipped or delivered on a specific date. The date that an item is available to promise or capable to promise is calculated, and order lines are created for those dates that you accept. The functionality calculates the earliest possible date that an item is available for shipment or delivery. It also creates requisition lines, in case the items must first be purchases, for those dates that you accept. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] uses two fundamental concepts: - -- Available to Promise (ATP) -- Capable to Promise (CTP) - -### Available to Promise -Available to promise (ATP) calculates dates based on the reservation system. It performs an availability check of the unreserved quantities in inventory with regard to planned production, purchases, transfers, and sales returns. Based on this information, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] automatically calculates the delivery date of the customer’s order because the items are available, either in inventory or on planned receipts. - -### Capable to Promise -Capable to promise (CTP) assumes a “what if” scenario where the item is not in inventory and no orders are scheduled. Based on this scenario, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates the earliest date that the item can be available if it is to be produced, purchased, or transferred. - - -### Calculations -When [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates the customer’s delivery date, it performs two tasks: - -- Calculates the earliest delivery date when the customer has not requested a specific delivery date. -- Verifies if the delivery date requested by the customer or promised to the customer is realistic. - -If the customer does not request a specific delivery date, the shipment date is set to equal the work date, and availability is then based on that date. If the item is in inventory, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates forward in time to determine when the order can be delivered. This is accomplished by the following formulas: - -- Shipment Date + Outbound Warehouse Handling Time = Planned Shipment Date -- Planned Shipment Date + Shipping Time = Planned Delivery Date - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] then verifies if the calculated delivery date is realistic by calculating backward in time to determine when the item must be available to meet the promised date. This is accomplished by the following formulas: - -- Planned Delivery Date - Shipping Time = Planned Shipment Date -- Planned Shipment Date - Outbound Warehouse Handling = Shipment Date - -The shipment date is used to make the availability check. If the item is available on this date, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] confirms that therequested/promised delivery can be met by setting the planned delivery date to equal the requested/promised delivery date. If the item is unavailable, it returns a blank date and the order processor can then use the CTP functionality. - -Based on new dates and times, all related dates are calculated according to the formulas listed earlier in this section. The CTP calculation takes longer but it gives an accurate date when the customer can expect to have the item delivered. The dates that are calculated from CTP are presented in the **Planned Delivery Date** and **Earliest Shipment Date** fields in the **Order Promising Lines** window. - -The order processor finishes the CTP process by accepting the dates. This means that a planning line and a reservation entry are created for the item before the calculated dates to ensure that the order is fulfilled. - -In addition to the external order promising that you can perform in the **Order Promising Lines** window, you can also promise internal or external delivery dates for bill-of-material items. For more information, see [How to: View the Availability of Items](inventory-how-availability-overview.md). - -## To set up order promising -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Order Promising Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter a number and time unit code in the **Offset(Time)** field. Select one of the following codes. - - |Code|Description| - |----------|-----------------| - |**d**|Calendar day| - |**w**|Week| - |**m**|Month| - |**q**|Quarter| - |**y**|Year| - - For example, "3w" indicates that the offset time is three weeks. To indicate the current period, prefix to any of these codes with the letter “c”. For example, if you want the offset time to be the current month, enter **cm**. -3. Enter a number series in the **Order Promising Nos.** field by selecting a line from the list in the **No. Series** window. -4. Enter an order promising template in the **Order Promising Template** field by selecting a line from the list in the **Req. Worksheet Template List** window. -5. Enter a requisition worksheet in the **Order Promising Worksheet** field by selecting a line from the list on the **Req. Wksh. Names** window. - -### To enter inbound warehouse handling time in the inventory setup window -If you want to include warehouse handling time in the order promising calculation on the purchase line, you can set it up as a default for the inventory and for your location. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Inbound Whse. Handling Time** field, enter the number of days that you want to include in the order promising calculation. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you have filled in the **Inbound Whse. Handling Time** field on the **Location Card** for your location this field is used as the default inbound warehouse handling time. - -### To enter inbound warehouse handling time on location cards -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Location**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant location card. -3. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, in the **Inbound Whse. Handling Time** field, enter the number of days that you want to be included in the order promising calculation. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you leave the **Inbound Whse. Handling Time** field blank, then the calculation uses the value in the **Inventory Setup** window. - -### To enter outbound warehouse handling time in the inventory setup window -If you want to set up an outbound warehouse handling time to be included in the order promising calculation on the sales line, you can set this up as a default for the inventory. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Outbound Whse. Handling Time** field, enter the number of days you want to include in the order promising calculation. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you have filled in the **Outbound Whse. Handling Time** field on the Location card for your location, this field is used as the default outbound warehouse handling time. - -### To enter outbound warehouse handling time on location cards -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant location card. -3. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, in the **Outbound Whse. Handling Time** field, enter the number of days that you want to include in the order promising calculation. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you leave the **Outbound Whse. Handling Time** field blank, then the calculation uses the value in the **Inventory Setup** window. - -## To make an item critical -Before an item can be included in the order promising calculation, it must be marked as critical. This setup ensures that non-critical items do not cause irrelevant order promising calculations. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant item card. -3. On the **Planning** FastTab, select the **Critical** field. - -## To calculate an order promising date -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant sales order and select the sales order lines that you want the program to calculate. -3. Choose the **Order Promising** action, and then choose the **Order Promising Lines** action. -4. Select a line, and then select one of the following options: - - - Select **Available-to-Promise** if you want to calculate the earliest date that the item will be available with respect to inventory, scheduled receipts, and gross requirements. - - Select **Capable-to-Promise** if you know that the item is presently out of stock and you want to calculate the earliest date that the item can be available by issuing new replenishment requisitions. -5. Choose the **Accept** button to accept the earliest shipment date available. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Date Calculation for Purchases](purchasing-date-calculation-for-purchases.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice.md deleted file mode 100644 index f0ed66e7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Combine Shipments on a Single Invoice - description: If you want to invoice more than one shipment at a time, you can use the combined shipments feature. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/14/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Combine Shipments on a Single Invoice -If you want to invoice more than one shipment at a time, you can use the combined shipments feature. - - Before you can create a combined shipment, more than one sales shipment for the same customer in the same currency must be posted. In other words, you must have filled in two or more sales orders and posted them as shipped, but not invoiced. To combine shipments, the **Combine Shipments** check box must be selected on the **Shipping** FastTab of the **Customer** card. - -## To manually combine shipments on a single invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. For more information, see [How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md). -3. In the **Sell-to Customer No.** field, enter the customer who will receive the invoice for the shipped items. -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Get Shipment Lines** action. -5. Select the shipment line that you want to include in the invoice: - - - To insert all lines, select all lines and choose the **OK** button. - - To insert specific lines, select the lines and choose the **OK** button. You can use the Ctrl key to select multiple nonsequential lines. - - If an incorrect shipment line was selected or you want to start over, you can simply delete the lines on the invoice and re-run the **Get Shipment Lines** function. -6. To post the invoice, choose the **Post** action. - -## To automatically combine shipments on a single invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Combine Shipments**, and then choose the related link. The batch job request window opens. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Select the **Post Invoices** check box. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> You will need to manually post the invoices if the **Post Invoices** check box was not selected on the batch job. - -## To remove open sales orders after combined shipment posting -When shipments are combined on an invoice and posted, a posted sales invoice is created for the invoiced lines. The **Quantity Invoiced** field on the originating blanket sales order or sales order is updated based on the invoiced quantity. - -When you invoice shipments in this way, the orders from which the shipments were posted still exist, even if they have been fully shipped and invoiced. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Sales Orders**, and then select the link. -2. Specify in the **No.** filter field which sales orders to delete. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -Alternatively, delete individual sales orders manually. - -Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other affected documents, such as blanket sales orders. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index a7eaaaa8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Blanket Sales Orders - description: Use blanket orders when a customer has agreed to buy large quantities that are to be delivered in several smaller shipments over a certain period of time. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work with Blanket Sales Orders -A blanket sales order represents a framework for a long-term agreement between you and your customer. - -A blanket order is typically made when a customer has committed to purchasing large quantities that are to be delivered in several smaller shipments over a certain period of time. Often blanket orders cover only one item with predetermined delivery dates. The main reason for using a blanket order rather than a sales order is that quantities entered on a blanket order do not affect item availability and thus can be used as a worksheet for monitoring, forecasting, and planning purposes. - -On the blanket order, each separate shipment can be set up as an order line, which can then be converted into a sales order at the time of shipping. - -An example of when a blanket sales order could be used is if a customer calls and places an order of 1000 units of an item and they want the items to be delivered in 250 units every week over the next month. - -> [!NOTE] -> Blanket purchase orders work in a similar way as blanket sales orders. This documentation does not cover blanket purchase orders. - -## To create a blanket sales order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Blanket Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Leave the **Order Date** field blank. When the separate sales orders are created from the blanket order, the order date of the sales order is set to equal the actual work date. -5. On the **Lines** FastTab, create separate lines for each shipment. For instance, if your customer wants 1000 units split out equally between four weeks, you would enter four separate lines of 250 units each. - -## To create a sales order from a blanket sales order - -1. To create an order for any of the lines in the blanket assembly order, remove the quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field on all the lines that you DO NOT wish to ship at this time. -2. When you are ready to create orders, choose the **Make Order**m action, and then choose **Yes**. A message appears informing you that the blanket order has been assigned an order number. Note that the blanket order has not been deleted. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. To see the results of the preceding steps, choose the **Line** action, choose the **Unposted Lines** action, and then choose the **Orders** action. -5. In the **Sales Lines** window, select the appropriate sales order, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Show Document** action. - -The following applies to sales orders after they have been created from blanket sales orders: - -- After the blanket order is converted into a sales order, the sales order contains all the lines from the blanket order. The lines where the quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field was deleted appear, but with blank **Quantity** fields. You may choose to leave, edit, or delete the lines. -- It is important to remember that the sales order line quantity must not exceed the quantity of the associated blanket order line. Otherwise, posting of the sales order will not be possible. -- When the sales order is posted as shipped and/or invoiced, the **Quantity Shipped** and **Quantity Invoiced** fields are updated on the related blanket order. -- The blanket order number and line number are recorded as properties of the sales lines when created from a blanket order. -- When sales orders are not created directly from the blanket order but still relate to it, a link between a sales order and a blanket order can be established by entering the associated blanket order number in the **Blanket Order No.** field on the sales order line. -- After the sales order has been created for the total quantity of a blanket order line, no other sales order can be created for the same line. Users are prevented from entering a quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field. If, however, additional quantities need to be added to a blanket order, the value in the **Quantity** field can be increased and additional orders can then be created. -- The invoiced blanket sales order remains in the system until it is deleted, either by deleting individual blanket orders or by running the **Delete Invoiced Blanket Sales Orders** batch job. -- If a customer is also recorded as a contact in the Marketing application area, and if you have specified an interaction template code for blanket sales order in the **Marketing Setup** window, an interaction is recorded in the Interaction Log Entry table when you select **Print** to print the blanket sales order. - -## To view the status of a blanket purchase order -You can see the status of a blanket sales order in the **Purchase Blanket Order Statistics** window. This may be relevant when you start to invoice the order that is created from the blanket purchase order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Blanket Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a blanket purchase order, and then choose the **Statistics** action. -3. In the **Purchase Blanket Order Statistics** window, on the **General** FastTab, you can see summary information about the entire order based on the total quantity in the various **Quantity fields** on the blanket purchase order lines. - - - On the **Invoicing** FastTab, you can see summary information based on the total quantity in the **Qty. to Invoice** fields on the purchase blanket order lines. - - On the **Shipping** FastTab, you can see summary information based on the total quantity in the **Qty. to Receive** fields on the purchase blanket order lines. - - On the **Prepayment** FastTab, you can see summary information about any prepaid amounts. - - On the **Vendor** FastTab, you can see certain basic information about the vendor. - -## To view unposted and posted blanket sales order lines -The link between the blanket sales order and the originating sales order, and any other sales document, is retained after posting as a list of posted and unposted sales order invoice lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon enter **Blanket Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the blanket sales order you want to view. -3. To view unposted entries, select the line in question, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Unposted Lines** action. Choose one of the following options. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
OptionDescription
OrdersSpecifies open orders associated with the selected line.
InvoicesSpecifies open invoices that have been associated with the selected line. Open invoices are manually associated with a blanket order by entering the blanket order number on the sales invoice line.
Return OrdersSpecifies open return orders that have been associated with the selected line.
Credit MemosSpecifies open credit memos that have been associated with the selected line.
-4. To view posted entries, select the line in question, choose the **Line** action, and then choose the **Posted Lines** action. Choose one of the following options. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
OptionDescription
ShipmentsPosted shipments associated with the selected line.
InvoicesPosted invoices associated with the selected line.
Return ReceiptsPosted return receipts that have been associated with the selected line.
Credit MemosPosted credit memos that have been associated with the selected line.
-5. In the **Sales Lines** window, choose the **Show Document** action to view the entry. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index e6e250b6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Special Orders - description: You can create a special order for a specific nonstock item to be shipped to a specific customer. Your vendor ships the item to your warehouse and you can then ship the item on to your customer either independently or together with other items on another order. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Special Orders -You can create a special order for a specific nonstock item to be shipped to a specific customer. Your vendor ships the item to your warehouse and you can then ship the item on to your customer either independently or together with other items on another order. - -Special orders imply that the purchase and sales order are linked to ensure that the specific nonstock item is picked and delivered to the customer. - -Before you can use this feature, you must first set up the customer, vendor, and item cards necessary for the order. - -## To create a special order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. Create and fill in a sales order for the item. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, fill in the sales line. In the **Purchasing Code** field, select a purchasing code that has the **Special Order** field selected. - - You must now create a purchase order from a requisition worksheet. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Requisition Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -5. Choose the **Special Order** action, and then choose the **Get Sales Orders** action. -6. In the **Get Sales Orders** window, show results where the **Document No.** is the sales order number. Choose the **OK** button. A requisition worksheet line is created for the item. -7. On the requisition worksheet line, in the **Action Message** field, select **New**. -8. In the **Req. Worksheet** window, choose the **Carry Out Action Message** action. The **Carry Out Action Msg. - Req.** window opens. Choose the **OK** button. - - A message appears telling you that the purchase orders have been created. Choost the **OK** button. - -A purchase order created as a special order for a sales order is respected by the planning system as it balances demand and supply. That is, the purchase order (supply) remains linked to the sales order (demand), even if that purchase order could supply another earlier demand. For more information, see [Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot use the special order functionality if the item is already reserved. Therefore, for items that are sold on special orders, make sure the **Reserve** field on the item card is not set to **Always**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Nonstock Items](inventory-how-work-nonstock-items.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[How to: Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md) -[Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reservation-order-tracking-and-action-messaging.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md deleted file mode 100644 index d1bdd3f1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-send-electronic-documents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Send Electronic Documents - description: learn how to send invoices electronically. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Send Electronic Documents -The generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] supports sending electronic invoices and credit memos in the PEPPOL format, which is supported by the largest document exchange service providers. A document exchange service provider dispatches electronic documents between trading partners. To provide support for other electronic document formats, you use the data exchange framework. - - In the generic version of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], a document exchange service is preconfigured and ready to be set up for your company. For more information, see [How to: Set Up a Document Exchange Service](across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md). - - To send a sales invoice as an electronic PEPPOL document, you select the **Electronic Document** option in the **Post and Send** dialog box from where you can also set up the customer’s default document sending profile. First, you must set up various master data, such as company information, customers, items, and units of measure. These are used to identify the business partners and items when converting data in fields in [How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving](across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md). - -### To send an electronic sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Create a new sales invoice. - -3. When the sales invoice is ready to be invoiced, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Posting** group, choose **Post and Send**. - - If the customer’s default sending profile is **Electronic Document**, then it will be shown in the **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box and you just have to choose the **Yes** button to post and send the invoice electronically in the selected format. - -4. In the **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box, choose the AssistEdit button to the right of the **Send Document to** field. - -5. In the **Send Document to** dialog box, in the **Electronic Document** field, choose **Through Document Exchange Service**. - -6. In the **Format** field, choose **PEPPOL**. - -7. Choose the **OK** button. The **Post and Send Confirmation** dialog box appears. **Electronic Document (PEPPOL)** is added to the **Send Document to** field. - -8. Choose the **Yes** button. - - The sales invoice is posted and sent to the customer as an electronic document in the PEPPOL format. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also send a posted sales invoice as an electronic document. The procedure is the same as described in this topic for non-posted sales documents. In the **Posted Sales Invoice** window, on the **Actions** tab, in the **General** group, choose **Activity Log** to view the status of the electronic document. For more information, see **Activity Log**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md) -[How to: Set Up Electronic Document Sending and Receiving](across-how-to-set-up-electronic-document-sending-and-receiving.md) -[How to: Set Up a Document Exchange Service](across-how-to-set-up-a-document-exchange-service.md) -[How to: Set Up Data Exchange Definitions](across-how-to-set-up-data-exchange-definitions.md) -[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 222980c6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Shipping Agents - description: You can set up a code for each of your shipping agents and enter information about them. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Shipping Agents -You can set up a code for each of your shipping agents and enter information about them. - -If you enter an Internet address for the shipping agent, and the agent provides package tracking services on the Internet, you can use the automatic package tracking feature. For more information, see [How to: Track Packages](sales-how-track-packages.md). - -When you set up shipping agents on your sales orders, you can also specify the services that each shipping agent offers. -For each shipping agent, you can set up an unlimited number of services, and you can specify a shipping time for each service. - -When you have assigned a shipping agent service to a sales order line, the shipping time of the service will be included in the order promising calculation, for that line. For more information, see [How to: Calculate Order Promising Dates](sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md). - -## To set up a shipping agent -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Shipping Agents**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. -3. Choose the **Shipping Agent Services** action. -4. In the **Shipping Agent Services**, fill in the fields as necessary. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you delete the shipping agent on the order line, the shipping agent service code is also deleted. The contents of fields that were based in part on the shipping agent service are recalculated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Track Packages](sales-how-track-packages.md) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-track-packages.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-track-packages.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3d79f10d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-track-packages.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Track Packages -description: Use the shipping agents tracking service to see the progress of a delivery. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: rfq -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Track Packages -A number of shipping agents provide services on the Internet that allow you to track parcels you have handed over to the agent. If you use one or more of these shipping agents, you can set up certain basic information and use the automatic tracking feature from posted shipments. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Shipping Agents](sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md). - -## To track a package -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant shipment. -3. In the **Package Tracking No.** field, enter the package number you have received from the shipping agent. -4. Choose the **Track Package** action. - -Your default browser opens the shipping agent's tracking page. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Shipping Agents](sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-work-standard-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-work-standard-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7de5deb6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-how-work-standard-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setup and Use Standard Lines for Recurring Sales and Purchases -description: You can set up sales lines and purchase lines that you frequently make and then insert them on sales and purchase documents to quickly fill the lines with standard information. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: trade, sell, replenishment -ms.date: 07/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines -If you often need to create sales and purchase lines with similar information, you can set up standard lines that you can then insert on recurring sales and purchase documents, for example, for recurring replenishment orders. - -The following procedure shows how to work with standard sales lines. It works in a similar way for standard purchase lines. - -## To set up standard sales lines -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Standard Sales Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Standard Sales Lines** window, choose the **New** action. -3. On the **General** FastTab, fill the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, enter information in the fields to prepare sales lines that reflect the standard lines that you expect to use as recurring lines on sales documents. - -## To insert standard sales lines on a sales invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the sales invoice that you want to insert one or more standard sales lines on. -3. Choose the **Get Recurring Sales Lines** action. -4. In the **Recurring Sales Lines** window, choose the lookup button in the **Code** field, and then select a set of standard sales lines. -5. Choose the **OK** button to insert the standard sales lines on the invoice, where you can reuse as is or edit the information. - -## To create multiple sales invoices based on standard sales lines -You can use the **Create Recurring Sales Inv.** batch job to create sales invoices according to standard sales lines that are assigned to the customers and with posting dates within the valid-from and valid-to dates that you specify on the standard sales code. - -In the **Recurring Sales Lines** window, you can also specify a direct-debit payment method and a direct-debit mandate. The sales invoices that are created with the **Create Recurring Sales Inv.** batch job will then include information required to collect payment for the sales invoices with SEPA direct debit. For more information, see [Collecting Payments with SEPA Direct Debit](finance-collect-payments-with-sepa-direct-debit.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Recurring Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Create Recurring Sales Inv.** window, fill in the fields as necessary. -3. In the **Code** field, enter the code for standard sales lines assigned to a customer that you want to create sales invoices for. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -Sales invoices are created for the customers with the specified standard customer sales code, and any specified direct-debit information, for posting on the specified date. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-manage-sales.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-manage-sales.md deleted file mode 100644 index e21c8bf2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-manage-sales.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Manage Sales -description: Describes how to manage sales activities. -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: trade, sell -ms.date: 09/08/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Sales -You create a sales invoice or sales order to record your agreement with a customer to sell certain products on certain delivery and payment terms. - -You must use sales orders if your sales process requires that you can ship parts of an order quantity, for example, because the full quantity is not available at once. If you sell items by delivering directly from your vendor to your customer, as a drop shipment, then you must also use sales orders. In all other aspects, sales orders work the same way as sales invoices. With sales orders, you can also use the Order Promising functionality to communicate certain delivery dates to your customers. - -You can negotiate with the customer by first creating a sales quote, which you can convert to a sales invoice or sales order when you agree on the sale. After the customer has confirmed the agreement, you can send an order confirmation to record your obligation to deliver the products as agreed. - -You can easily correct or cancel a posted sales invoice before it is paid. This is useful if you want to correct a typing mistake or if the customer requests a change early in the order process. If the posted sales invoice is paid, then you must create a sales credit memo or a sales return order to reverse the sale. - -Good sales and marketing practices are all about how to make the best decisions at the right time. Marketing functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides precise and timely overview of your contact information so that you can serve your prospective customers more efficiently and increase customer satisfaction. For more information, see [Relationship Management](marketing-relationship-management.md). - -In business environments where the customer must pay before products are delivered, such as in retail, you must wait for the receipt of payment before you deliver the products. In most cases, you process incoming payments some weeks after delivery by applying the payments to their related posted, unpaid sales invoices. For more information, see [How to: Reconcile Payments Using Automatic Application](receivables-how-reconcile-payments-auto-application.md). - -Sales documents can be sent as PDF files attached to email. The email body will contain an extract of the sales document, such as products, total amount, and a link to the PayPal site. For more information, see [How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md). - -For all sales processes, you can incorporate an approval workflow, for example, to require that large sales to certain customers are approved by the accounting manager. For more information, see [Using Workflows](across-use-workflows.md). - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create a sales quote where you offer products on negotiable terms before converting the quote to a sales invoice. |[How to: Make Offers](sales-how-make-offers.md) | -| Create a sales invoice to record your agreement with a customer to sell products on certain delivery and payment terms. |[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) | -| Process a sales order that involves partial shipping or drop shipment. |[How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md) | -|Set up standard sales or purchase lines that you can quickly insert on documents, for example, for recurring replenishment orders.|[How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md)| -| Link a sales order to a purchase order to sell a drop-shipment item that will be delivered directly from your vendor to your customer. |[How to: Make Drop Shipments](sales-how-drop-shipment.md) | -|Have a nonstock item shipped from a vendor to your warehouse so that you can ship the item on to your customer.|[How to: Create Special Orders](sales-how-to-create-special-orders.md)| -| Perform an action on an unpaid posted sales invoice to automatically create a credit memo and either cancel the sales invoice or recreate it so you can make corrections. |[How to: Correct or Cancel Unpaid Sales Invoices](sales-how-correct-cancel-sales-invoice.md) | -| Create a sales credit memo to revert a specific posted sales invoice to reflect which products the customer returns and which payment amount you will refund. |[How to: Process Sales Returns or Cancellations](sales-how-process-sales-returns-cancellations.md) | -|Manage your customer's commitment to purchase large quantities delivered in several shipments over time.|[How to: Work with Blanket Sales Orders](sales-how-to-create-blanket-sales-orders.md)| -|Sell assembly items that are not currently available by creating a linked assembly order to supply the full or partial sales order quantity.|[How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md)| -|Invoice a customer once for multiple shipments by combining the shipments on one invoice.|[How to: Combine Shipments on a Single Invoice](sales-how-to-combine-shipments-on-a-single-invoice.md)| -|Inform your customers of order delivery dates by calculating either the capable-to-promise date or the available-to-promise date.|[How to: Calculate Order Promising Dates](sales-how-to-calculate-order-promising-dates.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Managing Payables](payables-manage-payables.md) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-setup-sales.md b/dynamics-nav-app/sales-setup-sales.md deleted file mode 100644 index c7c8bdbe..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/sales-setup-sales.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Configure Sales Processes -description: Outlines tasks to set up rules and values to define your sales policies and processes. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: trade, sell, configure -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Sales -Before you can manage sales processes, you must configure the rules and values that define the company's sales policies. - -You must define the general setup, such as which sales documents are required and how their values are posted. This general setup is typically performed once during the initial implementation. - -A separate series of tasks related to registering new customers is to record any special price or discount agreements that you have with each customer. - -Finance-related sales setup, such as payment methods and currencies, are covered in the Finance Setup section. For more information, see [Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md). - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Create a customer card for each customer that you sell to. |[How to: Register New Customers](sales-how-register-new-customers.md) | -| Enable customers to pay through PayPal by choosing the PayPal logo on sales documents. |[How to: Enable Customer Payment Through PayPal](sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md) | -| Enter the different discounts and special prices that you grant to customers depending on item, quantities, and/or date. |[How to: Record Sales Price, Discount, and Payment Agreements](sales-how-record-sales-price-discount-payment-agreements.md) | -| Set up salespeople so that you can assign them to customer contacts or measure salespeople's performance as a basis for calculating the sales commission or bonus. |[How to: Set Up Salespeople](sales-how-setup-salespeople.md) | -| Specify for individual customers or for all customers how sales documents are sent by default when you choose the **Post and Send** action. |[How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md) | -| Set your email up to contain a summary of information in the sales document that is being sent. |[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md). | -|Use an EU web service to verify a customer's VAT registration number.|[How to: Verify VAT Registration Numbers](finance-setup-vat.md)| -|Enter information about the different transportation vendors you use, including a link to their package tracking service.|[How to: Set Up Shipping Agents](sales-how-to-set-up-shipping-agents.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8fcf6fb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Allocation Status and Repair Status - description: Learn about the relationship between the repair status of service items and the allocation status of the allocation entries for them. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: resources, allocation, status, repairs - ms.date: 08/28/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Allocation Status and Repair Status of Service Items -The repair status of service items and the allocation status of the allocation entries for the service items have a certain relationship in Service Management. The allocation status changes when you change the repair status of the service item to **Finished** or **Partly Serviced** and when you convert a service quote to a service order. The repair status of the service item changes when you cancel the service item allocation or reallocate the service item to another resource. You can view the repair status of service items in the **Service Tasks** window and you can update the repair status in the **Repair Status Code** field in the **Service Item Worksheet** window. You can view the allocation status in the **Status** field in the **Resource Allocations** window. - -## Changing Repair Status -When you change the repair status of a service item on a service item line, there is a search for a corresponding allocation entry for this service item that has the status **Active**. If such an allocation entry is found, the status is updated in one of the following ways: - -* If you change the repair status to **Finished**, the allocation status is changed from **Active** to **Finished**. -* If you change the repair status to **Partly Serviced**, that is, some of the service has been completed, or **Referred**, that is, no service has been done, the allocation status is changed from **Active** to **Reallocation Needed**. -* When a service order allocation entry is created that indicates that no resource has been allocated, the **Status** field in the **Resource Allocation** window is set to **Nonactive**. -* The allocation entry status is set to **Canceled** when you reallocate the referred service item in the service order allocation entry, which indicates that the allocated resource or resource group has not attempted the service task. - -The allocation status reflects when the service process is finished, or when another resource is necessary in order to finish the service of the service item. - -## Converting Service Quotes to Service Orders -When you convert a service quote to a service order, the service order, the service items in the order and their allocation entries are updated in the following ways: - -* The repair status of the service items is changed to **Initial**. -* The service order status is changed to **Pending**. -* There is a search for allocation entries for all the service items in the service order that have the status **Active**. If such allocation entries are found, their allocation status is changed from **Active** to **Reallocation Needed**. - -## Canceling Allocations -When you cancel an allocation for a service item, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] updates the allocation status of the corresponding allocation entry from **Active** to **Reallocation Needed**. - -The repair status of the service item in the allocation entry is updated in the following ways: - -* If the repair status is **Initial**, the repair status is changed to **Referred** (no service has been started). -* If the repair status is **In Process**, the repair status is changed to **Partly Serviced** (some service has been completed). - -## Reallocating an Active Allocation Entry -When you reallocate a service item in an allocation entry that is **Active**, the allocation entry is updated in the following ways: - -* If service was started when the allocation was **Active** (that is, if the repair status of the service item in the entry was changed to **In Process**), the allocation status is changed from **Active** to **Finished**. -* If service was not started when the allocation was **Active**, the allocation status is changed from **Active** to **Canceled**. - -The repair status of the service item in the allocation entry is updated in the same way as if you had canceled the allocation: - -* If the repair status is **Initial**, the repair status is changed to **Referred** (no service has been started). -* If the repair status is **In Process**, the repair status is changed to **Partly Serviced** (some service has been completed). - -A new allocation entry that contains the new resource is created that has the status **Active**. - -## Reallocating a Service Item -When you reallocate a service item in an allocation entry that has the status **Reallocation Needed**, the allocation entry is updated in the following ways: - -* If service was started when the allocation was **Active** (that is, if the repair status of the service item in the entry was changed to **In Process**), the allocation status is changed from **Reallocation Needed** to **Finished**. -* If service was not started when the allocation was **Active**, the allocation status is changed from **Reallocation Needed** to **Canceled**. - -A new allocation entry that contains the new resource is created that has the status **Active**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Resource Allocations](service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md) -[How to: Allocate Resources](service-how-to-allocate-resources.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-deliver-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-deliver-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index 57afa365..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-deliver-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Deliver Service -description: Outlines tasks to set up make sure that you deliver quality service and live up to agreements with customers. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: service, service items, respond, response -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Delivering Service -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides features to help you deliver service according to the contracts that you have created and the service orders that you have committed to fulfilling. Your service technicians or dispatcher will find outstanding service orders easy to locate when they use the **Dispatch Board**. At a glance, the **Dispatch Board** shows which orders are in progress and which orders are complete. - -Another way to review pending service orders is to use the **Service Tasks** window. In this view of your service obligations, you can see where in your service workflow an order is and change that status to reflect interactions with your customer. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -A service management application must interface with a customer request for service. That service request usually is translated into a service order. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides tools to create an order both directly in response to a customer request or as part of the contract process, if that is how your application is set up. - -If needed, you can manage a loaner program for your customers. You can also determine your pricing structure, put service pricing offerings into logical groupings, and create price adjustments. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Create quotes that are drafts of service orders, and then convert the quotes to service orders.|[How to: Create Service Quotes](service-how-to-create-service-quotes.md)| -|Create documents that contain information about a service, such as repairs and maintenance, on service items.|[How to: Create Service Orders](service-how-to-create-service-orders.md)| -|Plan the delivery of service by using the **Dispatch Board**. You can also use project management tools in the Jobs department to help in planning.|[How to: Allocate Resources](service-how-to-allocate-resources.md)| -|Deliver service to customers by performing service tasks.|[How to: Work on Service Tasks](service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md)| -|Post service orders for services, so that your accounting is up-to-date.|[How to: Post Service Orders and Credit Memos](service-how-to-post-service-orders.md)| -|Create and post invoices for services that you have delivered.|[How to: Create Service Invoices or Credit Memos](service-how-create-invoices.md)| -|Keep customers happy by lending them an item while you work on theirs.| [How to: Lend and Receive Loaner Items](service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning Service](service-plan-service.md) -[Fulfilling Service Contracts](service-fulfill-service-contracts.md) -[Managing Projects](projects-manage-projects.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-fulfill-service-contracts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-fulfill-service-contracts.md deleted file mode 100644 index c3060d61..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-fulfill-service-contracts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Fulfill Service Contracts -description: Outlines tasks to manage service contracts with customers. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: contract, agreement, configure -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Fulfilling Service Contracts -One way to set up a service management business is to have standard contractual agreements between you and your customers that describe the level of service and the service expectations. You can create contract templates that include necessary information, such as customer, start date of contract, and invoice period. - -After you set up the template, you can customize the resulting contract to keep track of service hours, or other items that may vary from customer to customer. You can also set up a contract manually from a service contract quote. Finally, you can adjust your service pricing to keep track of discounts that a specific customer qualifies for, by specifying the discount amount in the **Service Contract** window. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Handle a service item under multiple contracts. | [Multiple Contracts](service-multiple-contracts.md)| -|Create service contracts either manually, or from a service contract quote.| [How to: Create Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes](service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md)| -|Adjust the annual amount of a service contract or contract quote, so make sure that you invoice the right amount.|[How to: Change the Annual Amount on Service Contracts or Contract Quotes](service-how-to-change-the-annual-amount-on-service-contracts-or-contract-quotes.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Planning Service](service-plan-service.md) -[Delivering Service](service-deliver-service.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[How to: Create Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes](service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-create-invoices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-create-invoices.md deleted file mode 100644 index b97403a1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-create-invoices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Create Invoices or Credit Memos for Services - description: Learn how to create invoices, so you can get paid for your service. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Create Service Invoices or Credit Memos -Ease in invoicing your service orders is a key feature of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You can send an invoice to your customers at any time, or create invoices periodically. - -To create an invoice directly, you can use the **Service Contract** window. You can also set up your system so that a service technician in the field can create an invoice for service that is not connected to a contract or order. - -## To invoice a service contract from the Service Contract page -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Service Contract Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Set the filters you want to apply. -3. In the **Posting Date** field, enter the date to use as the posting date on the service invoices. -4. In the **Invoice to Date** field, enter the date up to which you want to invoice contracts. The batch job will include the contracts with the next invoice dates, up to this date. -5. In the **Action** field, choose **Create Invoices**. -6. Choose **OK** to create the service invoices. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot create service invoices for the service contract when the **Change Status** field value is set to **Open**. - -## To post an invoice from a service order -The following procedure describes how to define the part of service that you will charge the customer for. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service order to invoice, and open the order card. -3. Choose the **Service Lines** action. -4. Find the required entries, and then specify the quantities for which you will charge the customer in the **Qty. to Invoice** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can invoice the customer for the registered service either fully or in parts. If you choose to invoice the customer fully, the value in the **Qty. to Invoice** field must be equal to the value in the **Quantity** field. You can post a full invoice together with a full shipment, and you can post a full invoice for an already posted full shipment that has been neither invoiced nor consumed previously. - > - > When you post a partial invoice, there are two ways of specifying the quantity to invoice. If you are going to post the service with **the Ship and Invoice** option, the value in the **Qty. to Invoice** field must be equal to that in the **Qty. to Ship** field. If you want to invoice an already posted shipment, the quantity to invoice must be no larger than the value in the **Quantity Shipped** field. - -5. Choose **Post**, and then either **Invoice** or **Ship and Invoice**. For more information about these options, see [Posting in Service Management](service-service-posting.md). - - The service line you have selected is posted. You can post several service lines at once by selecting them all and choosing **Post**. If you do this, make sure you have filled in all the necessary information on the lines you want to post. - - When you post the order with the **Invoice** option, a posted service invoice is created along with the corresponding ledger entries and updates to the relevant fields on the service lines of the order. In addition, previously posted shipment documents are updated with the quantities that have been invoiced. If you select the **Ship and Invoice** posting option, a posted shipment is created. - -## To create a service invoice manually -Typically, after you post a service order with the **Invoice** or **Ship and Invoice** option, a service invoice is posted automatically. Yet, you may need to issue an invoice that is not linked either to a service contract or to a service order. This procedure explains how to issue an invoice at the same time that the customer receives the service. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service invoice. -3. Fill in the **No.** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you have set up number series for service invoices in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you can press Enter to select the next available service invoice number. - -4. In the **Customer No.** field, enter the number of a customer. Select the relevant customer from the list. - - The customer fields are filled in with information from the **Customer** card. - -5. Enter a date in the **Posting Date** field. This date will appear on the posted entries. This field is filled with the current working date, but you can change it manually. -6. Fill in the **Document Date** field. The date you enter here will appear on the printed invoice and will be used to calculate the due date. -7. Fill in the service lines of the invoice. Fill in the **Type**, **No.**, and **Quantity** fields to register items, resources and costs that have been used in servicing. - -## To invoice posted shipment lines -You might need to create a service invoice for the service that has already been shipped, either from one or several service orders, but not yet invoiced or consumed. You can fill in the invoice lines automatically with the selected posted shipment lines for a specific customer. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Create invoice lines for services shipped but not invoiced. Alternatively, you can use the **Get Shipment Lines** action to add posted shipment lines to the invoice. -4. Post the service invoice. - - The posted service invoice and the corresponding ledger entries are created. Previously posted shipment documents are updated with the invoiced quantities and the relevant quantities on the service lines of the source orders. - -## To create a combined invoice -You can invoice the customer for services provided on different service orders. Invoice lines are created for items, resource hours, or costs that have already been shipped from different service orders but not yet invoiced. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **Get Shipment Lines** action. The **Get Service Shipment Lines** page displays all lines that are shipped but not invoiced for the customer. -4. Choose the lines for the service to invoice, and then choose **OK** to add the service shipment lines to the invoice. - -## To create a service credit memo -A service credit memo document is typically used when a customer returns an item, but it can also be used to give a customer some compensation or to correct an erroneous invoice. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. The **Posting Date** and **Document Date** fields display the work date. If needed, you can change it. -4. On the credit memo lines, enter information about the items that have been returned or removed, or the compensation that will be given to the customer. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post Service Invoices](service-how-to-post-service-orders.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[Service Posting](service-service-posting.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md deleted file mode 100644 index dd4171ab..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Fault Reporting in Service Management - description: Learn how to set up fault reporting processes. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Fault Reporting -Fault reporting lets you establish standards for recording fault information for service items. For example, you can specify what the problem is, the symptoms you see, the reason for the problem, and how to resolve it. - -Fault codes describe the typical service item faults or the actions taken on service items. Depending on the level of fault reporting in your company, you might need to set up fault area codes and symptom codes before you set up fault codes. Fault areas descrive areas of service item faults. Fault reason codes describe the reason for service item faults and, if needed, whether to exclude warranty and contract discounts. For example, you might want to exclude warranty and contract discounts if the customer was somehow responsible for the fault in the service item. You assign fault reason codes to service orders. For more information, see [How to: Work on Service Tasks](service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md). - -## To specify the overall level of fault reporting to use -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Fault Reporting Level** field, choose one of the options described in the following table. - - |**Fault Level**|**Description**| - |------------|-------------| - |None | No reporting codes are used.| - |Fault | Codes are listed in the **Fault Codes** table. These codes identify service item faults or actions to take on service items. You can cluster related codes into **Fault Area Code** groupings.| - |Fault + Symptom | You provide a combination of codes in the **Fault Codes** and **Symptom Codes** tables. Typical symptom codes include indicators that a customer might use to describe a problem, such as a noise or a quality.| - |Fault + Symptom + Area | You use fault, symptom, and fault area codes as an implementation of the International Repair Coding System (IRIS).| - -To complete the setup of fault reporting, you can also specify what repairs or resolutions are associated with a fault or defect. You set that up on the **Fault/Resolution Code Relationships** page, where you set up combinations of codes for the service item group of the service item from which you accessed the witndow and the number of occurrences for each one. - -## To create fault and resolution code relationships - -To be able to see the most common methods of repair for particular item faults when you are servicing the items, you need to build up information on fault/resolution codes relationships. Use the **Insert Fault/Resol. Codes Relationships** batch job to find all the combination of fault and resolution codes in posted service orders and record them on the **Fault/Resol. Codes Relationships** page. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Insert Fault/Resol. Codes Relationships**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter dates to define the period you want to include in the batch job. -3. To group the relationships by service item group, choose the **Relation Based on Service Item Group** check box. -4. To retain the records that you have already inserted manually in the **Fault/Resol. Codes Relationships** page, choose the **Retain Manually Inserted Rec.** check box. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[Service Management](service-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-loaner-program.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-loaner-program.md deleted file mode 100644 index b4733015..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-loaner-program.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Loaners - description: You can set up loaners that you can lend to customers to replace service items while they are in service. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/31/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Loaner Program -Sometimes you must provide a customer a loaner item for use when your customer service team makes a repair. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can set up a loaner program, loan items to your customers, and track receipts when customers return the items. Additionally, you can add comments about loaners in one of two ways: - -* Enter a note or comment about the loaner itself. -* Enter a note on a service item about the need for a loaner. - -## To set up a loaner -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Loaners**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new loaner card. -3. In the **No.** field, enter a number for the loaner. Alternatively, if you have set up number series for loaners in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you can press the Enter key to enter the next available loaner number. -4. Fill in the **Description**, **Description 2**, and **Serial No.** fields. -5. In the **Unit of Measure Code** field, choose the relevant unit of measure. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Lend and Receive Loaners](service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[Delivering Service](service-deliver-service.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md deleted file mode 100644 index fc23129d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Resource Allocation - description: Learn how the system can help ensure that you assign someone who has the skills required to provide a service. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: resource, skill, service, zones - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Resource Allocation -To ensure that a service task is performed well, it's important to find a resource who is qualified to do the work. You can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] so that it's easy to allocate someone who has the right skills for the job. In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], we call this _resource allocation_. You can allocate resources based on their skill, availability, or whether they are in the same service zone as the customer. - -To use resource allocation, you must set up: - -* The skills required to repair and maintain service items. You assign these to service items and resources. -* Geographic regions, called zones, that you define for your market. For example, East, West, Central, and so on. You assign these to customers and resources. -* Whether to display resource skills and zones, and whether to display a warning if someone chooses unqualified resource, or a resource that is not in the customer zone. - -## To set up skills -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Skills**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign skills to service items and resources -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Items** or **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the service item or resource, and then choose one of the following: - - * For service items, choose **Resource Skills**. - * For resources, choose **Skills**. - -## To set up zones -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Zones**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign zones to customers and resources -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers** or **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the service item or resource, and then choose one of the following: - - * For customers, choose a zone in the **Service Zone Code** field. - * For resources, choose the **Service Zones** action. - -## To specify what to show when a resource is chosen -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Resource Skills Option** field, choose one of the options described in the following table. - - |**Option**|**Description**| - |------------|-------------| - |Code Shown | Displays the code only.| - |Warning Displayed | Shows the information and displays a warning if you choose a resource that is not qualified.| - |Not Used | Does not show this information.| - -## To update resource capacity -You may need to change the capacity of resources. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resource Capacity**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the resource, and then choose the **Set Capacity** action. -3. Make the changes, and then choose **Update Capacity**. - -## To update skills for items, service items, or service item groups -If you want to change the skill codes assigned to items, for example from **PC** to **PCS**, you can do so either for an item, service item, or for all items in a service item group. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items** or **Service Item**, or **Service Item Group**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the entity to update, and then choose the **Resource Skills** action. -3. On the line with the code to be changed, in the **Skill Code** field, choose the relevant skill code. -4. If the item has associated service items, a dialog box opens with the following two options: - - * Change the skill codes to the selected value: Select this option if you want to replace the old skill code with the new one on all the related service items. - * Delete the skill codes or update their relation: Select this option if you want to change the skill code on this item only. The skill code on the related service items will be reassigned, that is, the **Assigned From** field will be updated. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Allocate Resources](service-how-to-allocate-resources.md) -[How to: Set Up Work Hours and Service Hours](service-how-setup-work-service-hours.md) -[How to: Set Up Fault Reporting](service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md) -[How to: Set Up Codes for Standard Services](service-how-setup-service-coding.md) - - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-coding.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-coding.md deleted file mode 100644 index a92264ed..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-coding.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Codes for Standard Services - description: Learn how to set up codes for service activities that you often perform. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: service, service item, service order, repairs, maintenance - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Standard Service Codes -When you perform typical service, you often have to create service documents that use service lines that contain similar information. To make it easy to create these lines, you can set up standard service codes that have a predefined set of service lines. When you choose the code on a service document, the lines are entered automatically. You can set up any number of standard service codes, and each code can have an unlimited number of service lines of different types, including item, resource, cost, or standrd text linked to it. You create service lines of each standard serice code on the **Standard Service Code** card. You then assign standard service codes to service item groups on the **Standard Serv. Item Gr. Codes** page. Later, when you create a service document, you can use the **Get Standard Service Codes** action to add service lines. - -> [!Tip] -> You can use the same concept to create lines on sales and purchase documents. For more information, see [How to: Create Recurring Sales and Purchase Lines](sales-how-work-standard-lines.md). - -## To set up a standard service code -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Standard Service Codes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -4. Fill in the service lines linked to this service code. - -## To assign a standard service code to a service item group -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service item Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Fill in the service lines linked to this service code. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Service Management](service-service.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-contracts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-contracts.md deleted file mode 100644 index a9e1cec5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-contracts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Service Contractss - description: Learn how to set up service contracts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: service, cost, service order - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Service Contracts -Before you can work with contracts, you must set up the following: - -* **Service contract groups**, which gather service contracts that are related in some way. -* **Service contract account groups**, which are used to group the service contract accounts together for service invoices created for service contracts. You assign these groups to service contracts. -* **Contract templates** that define contract layouts of contracts that include the most commonly used service contract details. When you create service contract quotes, you can create them by using templates. When you create a contract quote, the fields automatically contain the contents of the template fields. -* **Customer templates** that let you create quotes for contacts or potential customers who are not registered as customers in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## To set up a service contract group -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contract Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **Disc. on Contr. Orders Only** check box if you want contract or service discounts to be valid only for contract service orders, such as maintenance. - -## To set up a service contract account group -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Serv. Contract Account Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service contract account group. -3. Fill in the **Code** and **Description** fields. These fields describe the service account group. -4. Fill in the **Non-Prepaid Contract Acc.** field, choose general ledger account number for the non-prepaid account. -5. In the **Prepaid Contract Acc.** field, choose the general ledger account number for the prepaid account. - -## To set up a contract template -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contract Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service contract template. -3. In the **No.** field, enter a number for the contract template. - - Alternatively, if you have set up number series for contract templates in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you can press the Enter key to enter the next available contract template number. Fill in the other fields if appropriate. - -4. On the **Invoice** FastTab, fill in the **Serv. Contract Acc. Group Code** field, the **Invoice Period**, and so on. Fill in the other fields if appropriate. -5. Choose the **Service Discounts** action to add contract discounts. - -## To set up a customer template -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customer Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new customer template card. -3. On the **General** FastTab, enter a code and a description for the customer template in the **Code** and **Description** fields respectively. -4. To define search criteria, fill in the other fields, such as **Country/Region Code**, **Territory Code**, and **Language Code**. -5. Fill in the **Gen. Bus. Posting Group** and **Customer Posting Group** fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md deleted file mode 100644 index ff283420..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Pricing and Costs for Services - description: Learn how to set up prices and additional costs for services. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: service, cost, service order - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Pricing and Additional Costs for Services -You can use the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] pricing features to set up and customize your application so that you apply and adjust pricing on service items, repairs, and orders. These pricing decisions are then easily transmitted to the invoicing process. - -As your implementation requires, you can set up pricing groups and map them to specific time periods, customers, or currency. You can set up fixed, minimum, or maximum pricing, depending on the service contracts that you have with customers. Finally, as you adjust your prices, you can view and approve the changes before committing them to the ledger. - -## To set up a service price group -You can set up groups containing service items that you want to receive the same special service pricing. You assign service price groups to service items on service item lines. You can also assign service price groups to service item groups. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Price Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service price group. -3. Fill in the **Code** and **Description** fields. -4. Choose the **Setup** action. -5. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - - > [!Tip] - > The **Adjustment Type** and **Amount** fields work together to specify whether an adjustment concerns a fixed amount, or applies only when the total service price exceeds or is lower than the amount in the **Amount** field. - -## To set up a service price adjustment group -You can set up price adjustment groups to adjust service pricing of service items. For example, you can set up price adjustment groups that adjust price of freight or spare parts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Price Adjustment Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service price adjustment group. -3. Fill in the **Code** and **Description** fields. -4. In the **Type** field, enter the type of the entry that you want to adjust. - - * To adjust only one specific entry, enter the number of this entry in the **No.** field. When you leave this field blank, your adjustment group will adjust all entries of the type defined in the **Type** field. - * To adjust service prices related to only one specific service, fill in the **Work Type** field. When you leave this field blank, it will just be ignored. - -5. In the **Description** field, enter a short description of the service price adjustment. -6. To adjust service prices related to only one specific general product posting group, fill in the **Gen. Prod. Posting Group** field. - -> [!Tip] -> You can choose **Details** to add additional information about the adjustment group. For example, you can specify which item belongs to the service price adjustment group, and whether this is an item, a resource, a resource group, or a service charge. - -## To set up additional costs for services -When you work with service items and service orders, you may need to register additional costs, such as travel costs to particular service zones or starting fees. When you create a service order, you can insert these costs and a line with the type **Cost** will be added to the order. Alternatively, if you want to apply the cost to all service orders, you can set up a default cost. For example, if you always want to apply a starting fee. - -### To set up service costs -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Costs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -### To specify a default cost for service orders -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Service Order Starting Fee** field, choose the appropriate service cost. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[Service Management](service-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6bfe1773..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Overview of Setups for Service Items and Service Item Components - description: Learn about the things you must set up before you can use service items, including default values such as response time, contract discount percent, and service price group. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Service Items and Service Item Components -To work with service items, you must set up the following - -* Service item groups. -* Optional - -## To set up service item groups -You can set up groups of items that are related in terms of repair and maintenance. You can define default values for service items in a service item group, such as response time, contract discount percent, and service price group. For items in a service item group, you can select whether you want them to be automatically registered as service items when they are sold. - -You assign service item groups to items on the **Item** card, and to service items on the **Service Item** card. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Item Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service item group. -3. Fill in the **Code** and **Description** fields. -4. In the **Default Contract Discount %** field, enter the default contract discount percentage that you want the service items in the group to have. -5. In the **Default Serv. Price Group Code** field, enter the default service price group code that you want the service items in the group to have. -6. In the **Default Response Time (Hours)** field, enter the default response time in hours that you want the service items in the group to have. -7. If you want to register the items in the group as service items when they are sold, select the **Create Service Item** field. - -## To set up service item components -A service item can consist of several components, which can be replaced with spare parts when the item is serviced. These components are set up on the **Service Item Component List** page. Additionally, if you want to set up components for service items that are BOMs, you can copy the BOM items and create them as service item components. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service item for which you want to set up components. -3. Choose the **Components** action. The **Service Item Component List** window opens. -4. Add a new component. -5. In the **Type** field, choose **Service Item** if the component itself is a registered service item. Otherwise, select **Item**. -6. In the **No.** field, choose the item or service item that is a component of the service item. - -## To set up service item components from a BOM -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service item for which you want to set up components from a BOM. -3. Choose the **Components** action. The **Service Item Component List** window opens. -4. Choose the **Copy from BOM** action. - - If the item that the service item is linked to is a BOM, the components for all the items in the BOM are created automatically. - -## To set up a service shelf -You can set up service shelves that identify where you store your service items. You assign service shelves to service items on the **Service Order** and **Service Item Worksheet** pages. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Shelves**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Codes for Standard Services](service-how-setup-service-coding.md) -[How to: Set Up Troubleshooting](service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-offerings.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-offerings.md deleted file mode 100644 index b23cfd55..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-service-offerings.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Service Offerings - description: Learn how to set up the services that you offer to your customers. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: components, service item, service - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# How to: Set Up Service Offerings -When you set up service management, you must decide what services to offer customers and the schedule for those services. A service is a type of work performed by one or more resources and provided to a customer. For example, a service could be a type of computer repair. A service item is the equipment or item that needs servicing, for example, the computer that needs repair, installed at a specific customer. You can set up services as part of a group of related repair or maineenance items. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Enter information about the service items that your service organization is tracking.|[How to: Create Service Items](service-how-to-create-service-items.md)| -|Establish a workflow for service when the service items consists of several components. The component list is always connected to a service item, but these components can also be based on bill of materials (BOMs).|[How to: Set Up Service Items and Service Item Components](service-how-setup-service-items.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 03708b43..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Troubleshooting Processes - description: Learn how to set up processes that help service representatives identify and resolve issues with service items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: service, service item, troubleshoot, repairs, maintenance - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# Setting Up Troubleshooting for Service Items -You can set up troubleshooting guidelines that help technicians solve problems when providing service. For example, guidelines might be a list of steps to perform a repair, or a series of questions to ask about the items. After you set up troubleshooting guidelines, you can assign them to service item groups, service items, and items. There is an inheritance hierarchy for guidelines. If you assign them to a service item group, the items included in the group will inherit the guidelines unless you specify them for the items. Similarly, service items will inherit guidelines from items. - -## To set up troubleshooting guidelines -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Troubleshooting**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign troubleshooting guidelines to items, service items, or service item groups -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, **Service Items**, or **Service Item Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the relevant entity, and then choose the **Troubleshooting** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Service Management](service-service.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-work-service-hours.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-work-service-hours.md deleted file mode 100644 index c9d701e3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-setup-work-service-hours.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Work Hours and Service Hours - description: You can specify the usual service working hours in your company. These service hours are used to calculate the response date and time for service orders and quotes, and to send response time warnings. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Work Hours and Service Hours -Typically, a service management system tracks resource hours and service order status in order to forecast workloads and service needs. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] has built-in tools that you can customize to record this kind of information. - -After you set the default service hours of your company, you can calculate response times for service orders or send warnings or alerts when service calls come in. The alert feature is implemented together with the job scheduler. - -As you work on a service order, you will want to update it's status so that you can monitor progress. The service order status reflects the repair status of all the service items in the service order. For more information, see [Understanding Service Order and Repair Status](service-order-repair-status.md). - -## To set up default service hours -You use the **Default Service Hours** window to set up the usual service working hours in your company. These service hours are used to calculate the response date and time for service orders and quotes and to send response time warnings. The default service hours are used for service contracts unless you specify special service hours for a contract. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Default Service Hours**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> If you leave the lines in the **Default Service Hours** window empty, the default value is 24 hours, valid only for calendar working days. - -## To set up work-hour templates -You can use the **Work-Hour Template** window to set up templates that contain the typical working hours in your company. For example, you can create templates for full time technicians and part time technicians. You can use work-hour templates when you add capacity to resources. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Work Hour Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -> [!Note] -> After you enter work hours for each day, the value in the **Total per Week** field is calculated automatically. - -## To set up contract specific service hours -You can use the **Service Hours** window to set up specific service hours for the customer that owns the service contract. Service hours are used to calculate the response date and time for service orders and quotes that belong to the service contract. - -If you do not set up specific service hours for the service contract, the default service hours for service contracts are used. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service contract you want to set up specific service hours for, and choose **Service Hours**. -4. To set up service hours based on default service hours, choose the **Copy Default Service Hours** action. -5. Edit the fields in the service hours entries. Insert or delete entries to set up the service hours for the contract. Note that the fields **Day**, **Starting Time** and **Ending Time** are required for each line. -6. If you want the service hours to be valid from a specific date, fill in the **Starting Date** field. -7. If you want the service hours to be valid on holidays, select the check box in the **Valid on Holidays** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Understanding Allocation Status and Repair Status](service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[Understanding Service Order and Repair Status](service-order-repair-status.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-allocate-resources.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-allocate-resources.md deleted file mode 100644 index d9e3a546..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-allocate-resources.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Allocate Resources - description: You can change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote to correct the amount that will be invoiced annually. - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# How to: Allocate Resources -The key element to service management is the people who supply service. You can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to assign the appropriate people to the appropriate jobs. Assignments can be based on service zones where the people are located or where the service occurs. In addition, you can group resources together when responding to service requests. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Resource Allocation](service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md). - -You can allocate resources, for example, technicians, by using the **Dispatch Board**, or from a service order. You can use resource availability to allocate resources to perform the service tasks in the orders or quotes. - -You can allocate the same resource, for example, a technician, or resource group to all the service items in a service order. Allocation entries are created for the other service items in the order with the same resource number and allocation date as the line you allocated. The allocated hours are the hours you allocated divided by the number of service items in the order. The **Status** field is automatically set to **Active** for all the entries that were created. - -## To see an overview of service orders and service quotes -You may often need to see the list of service orders or service quotes that meet certain requirements to be able to perform specific actions with them one by one. For example,you may need to allocate resources to service orders that belong to a specific customer. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Dispatch Board**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Document Filter** field, choose the type of the documents you want to see. -3. To get a list of documents that contain service tasks a certain resource or resource group is allocated to, fill in the **Resource Filter** and **Resource Group Filter** fields and press Enter. -4. To get a list of documents with a certain response date or response dates within a certain date period, fill in the **Response Date Filter** field and press **Enter**. -5. To get a list of documents with a specified allocation state or document status, fill in the **Allocation Filter/Status Filter** field and press **Enter**. -6. To get a list of documents that belong to a certain contract, customer, or zone, fill in the **Contract Filter/Customer Filter/Zone Filter** field and press **Enter**. -7. Choose a line that corresponds to a service order or service quote, and then choose the **Show Document** action. - - The **Service Order** or **Service Quote** page opens, and you can work with the document. To return to the **Dispatch Board** page, Choose the **OK** button. - -## To allocate a resource using resource or resource group availability -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Dispatch Board**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the service order, and then choose the **Resource Allocations** action. -3. Choose the entry with the service task to which you want to allocate a resource. -4. Choose either the **Resource Availability** or **Res. Group Availability** action. -5. In the **Res. Availability (Service)** window, choose **Show Matrix**. -6. Choose a resource to allocate. You can base your selection on whether the resource is skilled for the task, whether it is located in the customer zone, and/or whether it is preferred by the customer. -7. Specify a date on which the resource has enough available hours for the task, and which is close to the response date of the service order. -8. In the **Qty. to Allocate** field, enter the number of hours you want to allocate the resource to the service task for. -9. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Allocate** to allocate the selected resource on the selected date. - - The **Status** field is automatically set to **Active**. - - Repeat these steps for each date that you want to allocate the resource to the service task. - -> [!NOTE] -> For a service item in a service order, there can only be **Active** allocation entries with one resource or resource group at a time. - -## To allocate a resource using a service order -After you have created and filled in a service order or service quote, you can allocate resources, for example, technicians, to perform service tasks registered as service item lines in the document. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service order, and then choose **Edit**. -3. Choose the service item line corresponding to the service task you want to allocate a resource to. -4. Choose **Resource Allocations**. -5. In the **Resource Allocations** window, choose a nonactive allocation entry with the service task you want to allocate the resource to. If the allocation entry does not exist, you can create a new one by choosing **New**. -7. Specify the service task by filling in the **Service Item No.** field on the same line. -8. In the **Resource No.** field, choose the resource. If the resource is a member of a resource group, the number of the resource group is entered automatically into the **Resource Group No.** field. -9. Fill in the **Allocation Date** and **Allocated Hours** fields. The **Status** field is set to **Active**. This means that the resource is allocated to the service task. -10. Optionally, to assign the resource to all items, choose **Allocate to All Service Items**. - -> [!NOTE] -> For a service item in a service order, there can only be active allocation entries with one resource or resource group at a time. - -## To reallocate resources on a service order -You can reallocate resources directly from a service order or service quote when you are working with it. The original entry will still exist, but its status is updated as follows: - -* If service was started while the allocation was **Active**, that is, if the repair status of the service item in the entry was changed to **In Process**, the allocation status changes from **Reallocation Needed** to **Finished**. -* If service was not started while the allocation was **Active**, allocation status changes from **Reallocation Needed** to **Canceled**. -* If you are reallocating a service order that you have converted from a quote, the status of the allocation entries registered for the quote always changes to **Finished** when you reallocate the service items in the service order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service order. -3. Select the service item line corresponding to the service task you want to allocate a resource to. Choose **Actions**, choose **Line**, and then choose **Resource Allocations**. -4. In the **Resource Allocations** window, select an allocation entry with the service task you want to reallocate the resource to. In the **Resource No.** field, select the relevant resource. This overwrites the resource number already in the field. -5. Press the Enter key. A dialog box opens, asking whether you want to reallocate this entry. Fill in the **Reason Code** field if appropriate and choose the **Yes** button to confirm the reallocation. -6. Fill in the **Allocation Date** and **Allocated Hours** fields. The entry now contains the new resource and its status is **Active**. - -## To reallocate a resource using the dispatch board -If the resource allocated to a service task cannot accomplish the work, it means that this service task needs reallocation. Usually you reallocate resources to a service task by using the **Dispatch Board**. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Dispatch Board**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Allocation Filter** field, select **Reallocation Needed**. The **Dispatch Board** window now shows the list of service orders that include service tasks that need reallocation. -3. Select the relevant service order. On the **Navigate** tab, in the **Planning** group, choose **Resource Allocations**. The **Resource Allocations** window opens. -4. Select the allocation entry with the service task you want to reallocate a resource to. -5. In the **Resource No.** field, select the relevant resource. It overwrites the resource number already in the field. -6. Press Enter. The **Reallocation Entry Reasons** dialog box opens, asking whether you want to reallocate this entry. Fill in the **Reason Code** field if appropriate and choose the **Yes** button to confirm the reallocation. -7. Fill in the **Allocation Date** and **Allocated Hours** fields. The entry now contains the new resource and its status is **Active**. - - > [!NOTE] - > The old entry still exists but the status is updated in the following ways: - > - > * If service was started while the allocation was **Active**, that is, if the repair status of the service item in the entry was changed to **In Process**, the allocation status changes from **Reallocation Needed** to **Finished**. - > * If service was not started while the allocation was **Active**, the allocation status changes from **Reallocation Needed** to **Canceled**. - > * If you are reallocating a service order that you have converted from a quote, the status of the allocation entries registered for the quote always changes to **Finished** when you reallocate the service items in the service order. - -## To register resource hours -When working on service items in service orders, you need to register the resource hours used for the service. The following procedure shows how to register the resource hours in the **Service Item Worksheet** window. - -You can use the same procedure to register the hours in the **Service Lines** window, which you can open from the Service Order window. Open the relevant service card, and then choose **Actions**, choose **Order**, and then choose **Service Lines**. - -If the same resource works on all the service items in the service order, you can register the total resource hours for one service item only and then split the resource line to assign the resource hours to the other service items. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line that includes the relevant service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To assign a resource to all service items in an order -If the same resource, for example a technician, works on all the service items in the service order, you can register the total resource hours for one service item only and then split the resource line to divide the resource hours onto the resource lines for the other service items. - -The following procedure shows how to split resource lines in the **Service Invoice Lines** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service order. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Actions**, choose **Order**, and then choose **Service Lines**. The **Service Lines** window opens. -4. Select the resource line you want to split. The contents of the **Quantity** field is divided between all the service items in the order. -5. On the **Actions** tab, choose the **Split Resource Line** action. Choose **Yes** to confirm. - - Resource lines for the other service items in the order are created with the same resource number as the line you split. The quantity is the quantity for the line you split divided by the number of service items in the order. - -## To cancel an allocation -You can cancel resource allocations for service tasks without reallocating the tasks. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Dispatch Board**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service order, and then choose the **Resource Allocations** action. -3. Choose the allocation entry with the service task that you want to cancel allocation for. -4. Choose the **Cancel Allocation** action. -5. In the **Reason Code** field, select the appropriate reason code. -6. Choose **Yes** to confirm the cancellation. - - > [!NOTE] - > In the **Status** field, the **Reallocation Needed** option is automatically selected. If the repair status of the service item in the entry is **Initial**, the repair status is changed to **Referred**, that is, no service has been started. If the repair status is **In Process**, it is changed to **Partly Serviced**, that is, some service has been completed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Resource Allocation](service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md) -[Allocation Status and Repair Status](service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-change-the-annual-amount-on-service-contracts-or-contract-quotes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-change-the-annual-amount-on-service-contracts-or-contract-quotes.md deleted file mode 100644 index af332580..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-change-the-annual-amount-on-service-contracts-or-contract-quotes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,188 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Change the Annual Amount on Service Contracts or Contract Quotes - description: You can change the amount that will be invoiced annually on service contracts or service contract quotes. - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Change the Annual Amount on Service Contracts or Contract Quotes -You can change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote to correct the amount that will be invoiced annually. - -## To change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts** or **Service Contract Quotes**,and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the contract or contract quote. -3. Choose the **Open Contract** action to open the contract or contract quote for editing. -4. Choose the **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box if you want to change the annual amount and distribute the annual amount difference manually on the contract lines. Otherwise, clear the check box to automatically distribute the annual amount difference on the contract lines after you change the annual amount. -5. Change the contents of the **Annual Amount** field. You cannot sign, that is, convert into a service contract if you are working on a contract quote, or lock a service contract that has a negative annual amount. If you set the annual amount to zero, the contents of the **Invoice Period** field must be **None** when either signing or locking the service contract. -6. Depending on whether the **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box is selected, run either the manual or automatic distribution of the annual amount difference. The contract lines will be updated so that the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field value is equal to the new annual amount. - -## Distributing Differences Between New and Calculated Annual Amounts -If you change the annual amount of a service contract or contract quote, you may want to distribute the difference between its new and calculated ammual amounts on the contract lines. There are three ways to distribute amounts: - -* Even distribution -* Distribution based on line amounts -* Distribution based on Profit - -### Even Distribution -If you change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote, you may want to distribute the difference between its new and calculated annual amounts on the contract lines. Even distribution is one of the automatic distribution methods that can help you spread equally the new and calculated annual amounts difference between line amounts on the contract lines. The following list of distribution procedure steps describe the main idea of this method: - -1. The difference between the new **Annual Amount** and **Calcd. Annual Amount** field values is divided by the number of the contract lines in the service contract or contract quote. -2. The **Line Amount** field value is updated by adding the result of the previous operation. -3. The contents in the **Line Discount Amount**, **Line Discount %**, and **Profit** fields are updated with regard to the new value in the **Line Amount** field in the following way: - * Line Discount Amount = Line Value - Line Amount. - * Line Discount % = Line Discount Amount / Line Value * 100. - * Profit = Line Amount - Line Cost. - - The steps are repeated for each contract line. - -#### Example -The **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box is not selected in the service contract that contains three contract lines with such information. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|30.00|40.00|0.00|0.00|40.00|10.00| -|Item 2|40.00|50.00|10.00|5.00|45.00|5.00| -|Item 3|50.00|70.00|10.00|7.00|63.00|13.00| - -The **Annual Amount** field value is equal to the contents of the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field, which is always set to the sum of the line amounts. In this case, it is equal to the following: 40 + 45 + 63 = 148. - -If you change the **Annual Amount** to 139, the amount is calculated that should be added to each **Line Amount** field value. This amount is calculated by subtracting the **Calcd. Annual Amount** from the new **Annual Amount** field value and dividing the result by the number of the contract lines in the service contract. In this case, it will be equal to the following: (139 - 148) / 3 = -3. Then, the last calculated figure is added to each **Line Amount** field value and the **Line Discount %**, **Line Discount Amount**, and **Profit** field values are updated using the formulas in the procedure described above. - -Finally, the contract lines will contain this data. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|30.00|40.00|7.50|3.00|37.00|7.00| -|Item 2|40.00|50.00|16.00|8.00|42.00|2.00| -|Item 3|50.00|70.00|14.29|10.00|60.00|10.00| - -### Distribution Based on Line Amount -If you change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote, you may want to distribute the difference between its new and calculated annual amounts on the contract lines. Distribution Based on Line Amount is an automatic method that can help you spread the new and calculated annual amounts difference between the line amounts on the contract lines. This distribution will be performed proportionally to their line amount shares in the calculated annual amount. The following list of distribution procedure steps for each contract line describe the main idea of this method: - -1. The line amount percentage contribution is calculated as follows: the contents of the **Line Amount** field is divided by the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field values on all contract lines. -2. The **Line Amount** field value is updated by adding to it the difference between the new and calculated annual amounts, which is multiplied by the line amount percentage contribution. -3. The contents in the **Line Discount Amount**, **Line Discount %**, and **Profit** fields are updated with regard to the new value in the **Line Discount Amount** field in the following way: - - * Line Discount Amount = Line Value - Line Amount - * Line Discount % = Line Discount Amount / Line Value * 100 - * Profit = Line Amount - Line Cost - -### Distribution Based on Line Amount -If you change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote, you may want to distribute the difference between its new and calculated annual amounts on the contract lines. Distribution Based on Line Amount is an automatic method that can help you spread the new and calculated annual amounts difference between the line amounts on the contract lines. This distribution will be performed proportionally to their line amount shares in the calculated annual amount. The following list of distribution procedure steps for each contract line describe the main idea of this method: - -1. The line amount percentage contribution is calculated as follows: the contents of the **Line Amount** field is divided by the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field values on all contract lines. -2. The **Line Amount** field value is updated by adding to it the difference between the new and calculated annual amounts, which is multiplied by the line amount percentage contribution. -3. The contents in the **Line Discount Amount**, **Line Discount %**, and **Profit** fields are updated with regard to the new value in the **Line Discount Amount** field in the following way: - - * Line Discount Amount = Line Value - Line Amount - * Line Discount % = Line Discount Amount / Line Value * 100 - * Profit = Line Amount - Line Cost - -The steps are repeated for each contract line. - -#### Example -The **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box is not selected in the service contract that contains three contract lines with such information. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|15.00|17.00|3.00|0.51|25.00|1.49| -|Item 2|20.00|23.00|None|0.00|55.10|3.00| -|Item 3|24.00|27.00|3.00|0.81|112.70|2.19| - -The **Annual Amount** field value is equal to the contents of the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field which is always set to the sum of the line amounts. In this case, it is equal to the following: 16.49 + 23.00 + 26.19 = 65.68. - -If you change the **Annual Amount** to 60, the profit percentage contributions for each contract line is calculated: - -* Item 1 – 5 / (5 + 5.1 +12.7) = 0.2193 % -* Item 2 – 5.1 / (5 + 5.1 + 12.7) = 0.2237 -* Item 3 – 12.7 / (5 + 5.1 + 12.7) = 0.557 - -The **Line Amount** field value is updated on each contract line using the following formula: Line Amount = Line Amount + difference between the new and calculated annual amounts * Percentage Contribution. After that, the **Line Discount Amount**, **Line Discount %**, and **Profit** field values are updated using the formulas described in the procedure above. - -Finally, the contract lines will contain this data. - - -| Item | Line Cost | Line Value | Line Discount % | Line Discount Amount | Line Amount | Profit | -|--------|-----------|------------|-----------------|----------------------|-------------|--------| -| Item 1 | 15.00 | 17.00 | 11.41 | 1.94 | 15.06 | 0.06 | -| Item 2 | 20.00 | 23.00 | 8.65 | 1.99 | 21.01 | 1.01 | -| Item 3 | 24.00 | 27.00 | 11.37 | 3.07 | 23.93 | -0.07 | - -#### Example -The **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box is not selected in the service contract that contains three contract lines with such information. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|15.00|17.00|3.00|0.51|25.00|1.49| -|Item 2|20.00|23.00|None|0.00|55.10|3.00| -|Item 3|24.00|27.00|3.00|0.81|112.70|2.19| - -The **Annual Amount** field value is equal to the contents of the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field which is always set to the sum of the line amounts. In this case, it is equal to the following: 16.49 + 23.00 + 26.19 = 65.68. - -If you change the **Annual Amount** to 60, the profit percentage contributions for each contract line is calculated: - -* Item 1 – 5 / (5 + 5.1 +12.7) = 0.2193 % -* Item 2 – 5.1 / (5 + 5.1 + 12.7) = 0.2237 -* Item 3 – 12.7 / (5 + 5.1 + 12.7) = 0.557 - -The **Line Amount** field value is updated on each contract line using the following formula: Line Amount = Line Amount + difference between the new and calculated annual amounts * Percentage Contribution. After that, the **Line Discount Amount**, **Line Discount %**, and **Profit** field values are updated using the formulas described in the procedure above. - -Finally, the contract lines will contain this data. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|15.00|17.00|11.41|1.94|15.06|0.06| -|Item 2|20.00|23.00|8.65|1.99|21.01|1.01| -|Item 3|24.00|27.00|11.37|3.07|23.93|-0.07| - -### Distribution Based on Profit -If you change the annual amount of the service contract or contract quote, you may want to distribute the difference between its new and calculated annual amounts on the contract lines. Distribution Based on Profit is one of the automatic methods that can help you spread the new and calculated annual amounts difference between the line amounts on the contract lines. This distribution will be performed proportionally to their profit shares in the total contract or contract quote profit. The following list of distribution procedure steps for each contract line describe the main idea of this method: - -1. The profit percentage contribution is calculated as follows: the contents of the **Profit** field is divided by the sum of **Profit** field values on all contract lines. -2. The **Line Amount** field value is updated by adding to it the difference between the new and calculated annual amounts, which is multiplied by the profit percentage contribution. -3. The contents in the Line Discount Amount, Line Discount %, and Profit fields are updated with regard to the new value in the **Line Amount** field in the following way: - - * Line Discount Amount = Line Value - Line Amount - * Line Discount % = Line Discount Amount / Line Value * 100 - * Profit = Line Amount - Line Cost - -#### Example -The **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box is not selected in the service contract that contains three contract lines with such information. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|20.00|25.00|0.00|0.00|25.00|5.00| -|Item 2|50.00|58.00|5.00|2.90|55.10|5.10| -|Item 3|100.00|115.00|2.00|2.30|112.70|12.70| - -The **Annual Amount** field value is equal to the contents of the **Calcd. Annual Amount** field, which is always set to the sum of the line amounts. In this case, it is equal to the following: 25.00 + 55.10 + 112.70 = 192.80. - - If you change the **Annual Amount** to 180, the profit percentage contributions for each contract line are calculated: - -* Item 1 – 5 / (5 + 5.1 +1 2.7) = 0.2193 % -* Item 2 – 5.1 / (5 + 5.1 + 12.7) = 0.2237 -* Item 3 – 12.7 / (5 + 5.1 + 12.7) = 0.557 - -The **Line Amount** field value is updated on each contract line using the following formula: Line Amount = Line Amount + difference between the new and calculated annual amounts * Percentage Contribution. After that, the **Line Discount Amount**, **Line Discount %**, and **Profit** field values are updated using the formulas in the step 3 of the procedure described above. - -Finally, the contract lines will contain this data. - -|Item|Line Cost|Line Value|Line Discount %|Line Discount Amount|Line Amount|Profit| -|----------|---------------|----------------|---------------------|--------------------------|-----------------|------------| -|Item 1|20.00|25.00|11.24|2.81|22.19|2.19| -|Item 2|50.00|58.00|9.93|5.76|52.24|2.24| -|Item 3|100.00|115.00|8.20|9.43|105.57|5.57| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes](service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-convert-service-contracts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-convert-service-contracts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8494af01..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-convert-service-contracts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Convert Service Contracts - description: Because the VAT rate change tool cannot convert service contracts, these contracts must be converted manually. This topic describes several alternative methods that you can use for service contract conversion. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Convert Service Contracts that Include VAT Amounts -Because the VAT rate change tool cannot convert service contracts, these contracts must be converted manually. This topic describes several alternative methods that you can use for service contract conversion. - -> [!NOTE] -> This topic provides a high-level workflow. - - The following procedure describes how to correct an invoice for a prepaid service contact that has been created a year in advance. - -> [!NOTE] -> For this example, you must change your work date to 01.01.2017. - -### To correct an invoice for a prepaid service contract -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contract Management**, and then choose the related link. -2. Under **Lists**, choose **Service Contracts**. -3. Create a new prepaid service contract. Enter a start date of **01.01.2017** and an invoice period year for customer **20000**. -4. This contract must be signed. On the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Sign Contract**. -5. Create a service invoice. -6. The invoice is listed as an unposted service invoice. To view the service invoice, choose **Service**, choose **Contract Management**, and then choose **Service Invoices**. -7. Post the service invoice. - -> [!NOTE] -> Do not change the unposted service invoice. Since the service ledger entries are created when the invoice is created, a change in the unposted invoice will not change the already created service ledger entries. However, the VAT entries are created when the invoice is posted. This lets you change the general product posting group and the GSP product posting group on the unposted service invoice. - -### To create a credit memo for VAT difference -The following procedure describes how to create a credit memo that only includes the VAT difference for the already invoiced period starting on **01.07.2017**. In this example, the VAT amount is only posted to the Financial Management module, not to the Service Management module. The VAT entries that are linked to the service ledger entry will not be corrected. - -1. Create a new general ledger account for the VAT difference. This account will be used for direct posting of the VAT correction. -2. Add a new line to the VAT posting setup. - -### To create contract expiration dates in contract lines -The following procedure describes how to create new contracts by working with contact expiration dates in service contract lines. - -1. In the **Service Contract** window, set the contract expiration date to **30.06.2017**. -2. Choose the **Create Credit Memo** action to automatically create a credit memo for July 2017 to December 2017. -3. Because the contract has expired, you need to create a new contract for the period with the new VAT rate for July 1, 2017 to December 31, 2017. - -### To create a new credit memo -The following procedure describes how to create a new credit memo using the **Get Prepaid Contract Entries** batch job. Entries that you do not want to correct from January 2017 to June 2017 will be deleted. - -1. Run the VAT rate change tool on July 1, 2017. The general product posting group or the VAT product posting group is changed. For more information, see [How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases](finance-work-with-vat.md). -2. After running the VAT rate change tool, enter a contract expiration date for the service contract. You can now delete the service contract line and create a new line that is identical to the old one. -3. Create a new invoice for the period of January 2017 to December 2012 using the new VAT rate. -4. To create another credit memo, in the **Service Credit Memos** window, choose **New** to create a new service credit memo. -5. Choose the **Get Prepaid Contract Entries** action. -6. After the conversion is complete, VAT and service ledger entries will be correct. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes](service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[How to: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](finance-how-report-vat.md) -[How to: Work with VAT on Sales and Purchases](finance-work-with-vat.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0d09fe3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,201 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Work with Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes - description: You can create a service contract either manually or from a service contract quote. You can create a contract based on a service contract quote. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/29/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Work with Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes -You can create a service contract either manually or from a service contract quote. You can use a service contract quote as a forerunner of a service contract, in which your company makes an offer to the customer and obtains customer approval before you can convert it to a service contract. The procedures for creating either a service contract or service contract quote are similar. - -## To create a service contract or service contract quote -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts** or **Service Contract Quotes**,and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service contract or service contract quote. -3. Fill in the **No.** field. A dialog box opens, asking whether you want to fill it with the common data from a contract template. If you want to create such a service contract or service contract quote, choose the **Yes** button. The **Service Contract Template List** window opens. -4. Select the appropriate template, and then choose **OK** to use it to create the service contract or service contract quote. -5. In the **Customer No.** field, choose the customer. -6. If you do not want an annual amount difference to be distributed automatically, choose the **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box. The values in the **Annual Amount** and **Calcd. Annual Amount** fields are not automatically equalized. If you want the program to do automatically distribute any annual amount difference that might occur from a change in the service contract, leave the **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** check box clear. -7. Add contract lines to the service contract or service contract quote. -8. Fill in the rest of the fields as necessary. - -## To convert a service contract quote to service contract -When a customer has accepted a service contract quote, you convert it to a service contract. At the same time, you can create a service invoice for the starting period of the contract if the starting date of the contract is before the beginning of the next invoice period. - -After you complete the following steps, a service contract is created with the status **Signed**. If a service invoice is created for the starting period of the contract, the invoiced amount is calculated in the following way, depending on whether the contract is detailed or not. - -For detailed contracts, the invoiced amount is calculated as follows: - -* Invoiced amount = sum of the invoiced amount for each contract line. -* Invoiced amount for each contract line = ((quote value ÷ 12) × number of months in the starting period) + ((quote value ÷ number of days in the year) × number of days left in the starting period). -* If the contract line expires before the starting period ends, the expiration date becomes the ending date of the starting period for the line. - -For contracts that are not detailed, the invoiced amount is calculated as follows: - -* Invoiced amount = (annual amount ÷ number of days in the year) × number of days in the starting period. -* If the contract expires before the starting period ends, the expiration date becomes the ending date of the starting period. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contract Quotes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service contract quote you want to convert to a service contract. -3. Choose the **Make Contract** action. -4. If the starting date of the contract is before the beginning of the next invoice period, you are asked if you want to create an invoice for the starting period of the contract. Choose **Yes**. - - The service invoice is posted to the service account of the contract, even if the contract is prepaid. - -## To create contract service credit memos -You can use a contract service credit memo when a customer cancels a prepaid service contract or removes a service item from a prepaid contract. You can also use it to correct an erroneous service invoice. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service credit memo. -3. Fill in the **No.** field. -4. In the **Customer No.** field, enter the number of the customer in the service contract. - - The **Invoicing** FastTab shows information copied from the **Customer** card. If you want to post the credit memo to a different customer than the one specified on the **General** FastTab, enter the number of that customer in the **Bill-to Customer No.** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can compare the credit memo to the original posted document in the **Posted Service Invoices** window. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Service Invoices**, and then choose the related link. - -5. Fill in the **Posting Date** and **Document Date** fields. -6. On the credit memo lines, enter information about the items that have been returned or removed, or the allowance that will be sent. You can also use the **Get Prepaid Contract Entries** batch job. - - To automatically create a credit memo when contract lines are removed from a service contract, in the **Service Contract** window, on the **Invoice Details** FastTab, select the **Automatic Credit Memos** check box. - - To manually create a credit memo when contract lines are removed from a service contract, in the **Service Contract** window, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Credit Memo**. - -## Updating and evaluating contracts -Sometimes you have to change the terms of a contract after it has been created. In most cases, you open the relevant contract in the **Service Contract** window, and change it as necessary. - -You can change the status of the contract, initially set to **Locked**, add and remove contract lines, and cancel a contract. If you want to see how your business is doing as measured by gain and loss, you can do quick business analysis using the contract trendscape feature. - -## To add a contract line to a service contract or contract quote -When a customer purchases a new item and wants to include it in the existing service contract or contract quote, you can register the item as a service item and then add it as a new contract line to the contract or contract quote. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service contract or service contract quote that you want to add a new contract line for. -3. Choose the **Open Contract** action to open the service contract or service contract quote for editing. -4. On the **Invoice Details** FastTab, select the **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** field if you want to change the annual amount and distribute the annual amount difference manually on the contract lines. Otherwise, clear the check box in the **Allow Unbalanced Amounts** field. This will distribute the annual amount difference automatically on the contract lines after you change the annual amount. -5. On the **Lines** FastTab, add a service item or item, or text description, on each contract line. Alternatively, you can add contract quote lines. Note that you can create multiple contracts per service item to have it included in different service contracts or contract quotes at the same time. -6. Verify and correct the numbers in the **Line Discount %**, **Line Discount Amount**, **Response Time**, **Service Period**, and other fields as needed. - -## To remove contract lines -You may need to remove contract lines from the service contract as you remove corresponding service items from the service contract. Usually you remove a contract line that is expired or corresponds to the service item that has broken down. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service contract from which you want to remove contract lines. -3. Choose the **Open Contract** action to open the service contract for editing. -4. Choose the contract line you want to remove. Fill in the **Contract Expiration Date** field with the date as of which you want to remove the line. For example, you could enter the date when the service item broke down. -5. Choose the **Remove Contract Lines** action. The **Remove Lines from Contract** window opens. -6. Fill in the default filters: **Contract No.**, **Service Item No.**, and **Contract Type**. If needed, you can apply more filters or change the existing ones. -7. Fill in the fields on the **Options** FastTab. In the **Action** field, select **Delete Lines**. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the contract is not detailed, you must update the value in the **Annual Amount** field on the **Invoice Details** FastTab in the **Service Contract** window, reflecting the loss of the service item from the contract. -> -> If the contract is detailed and prepaid, and you have posted invoices for the contract, you can create a credit memo for the contract. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Create Credit Memo**. This is unnecessary if the check box in the **Automatic Credit Memos** field on the **Invoice Details** FastTab is selected. In that case, a credit memo is created automatically when you remove a contract line. - -## Service Line Cost and Value -On a service contract lines, the amounts in the **Line Cost** and **Line Value** are calculated as described in the following tables. - -| Line Cost Options | Description| -|----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Service item** | The cost is automatically retrieved from the **Default Contract Cost** field in the **Service Item** table and copied into the **Line Cost** field. The following formula is used to calculate the line cost:

Sales Unit Cost × Contract Value % ÷ 100| -|**Item** | The cost is automatically retrieved from the **Unit Cost** field in the **Item** table and the **Contract Value %** field value in the **Service Mgt. Setup** table. The following formula is used to calculate the line cost:

Unit Cost × Contract Value % ÷ 100| -|**Text description** | The value in the **Line Cost** field is set to zero.| - -| Line Value Options | Description| -|----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Service item** | The price is automatically retrieved from the **Default Contract Value** field in the **Service Item** table and copied into the **Line Value** field.| -|**Item** | Depending on the value in the **Contract Value Calc. Method** field in the **Service Mgt. Setup** table, the amount is retrieved from either the **Unit Price** or the **Unit Cost** field in the **Item** table. After that, this value is multiplied by the contents of the **Contract Value %** field in the **Service Mgt. Setup** table and divided by 100. This amount is copied into the **Line Value** field.

**NOTE:** If the **Contract Value Calc. Method** field is set to **None**, the contents of the **Line Value** field are not calculated.| -|**Text description** | The contents of the **Line Value** field are set to zero.| - -## To add a contract discount to service contract quotes -You can add contract discounts on services for contract quotes and service contracts. The discounts can be on spare parts in particular service item groups, on resource hours for resources in particular resource groups, and on particular service costs. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contract Quotes**, and choose the related link. -2. Choose the quote to add discounts for. -3. Choose the **Service Discounts** action. The **Contract/Service Discounts** window opens. -4. To create a new contract discount, choose the **New** action. -5. Fill in the fields on the line as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)]. - -> [!Tip] -> To add contract discounts directly to a service contract, perform similar steps from the **Service Contract** window. - -## To change the owner of a service contract -You may need to change the owner of a service contract. If a service item in a service contract is registered in noncanceled multiple contracts owned by the same customer, then the owner of all service contracts that include this service item and of all other service items included in these contracts is updated automatically. - -> [!NOTE] -> In this case, only noncanceled contracts are considered. The status of the contract quotes is not taken into account. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Service items and contracts can be related. Changing the owner of a service contract can affect these relationships. -> -> For example, suppose service item No. 8 is included in contracts SC00003 and SC00015. Contract SC00015 also contains service item No. 15, which is also included in the contract SC00080. In this case, the owner for all three contracts and service items will be changed. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts**, and then choose the related link. Open the relevant service contract whose owner you want to change. -2. Choose the **Open Contract** action to open the contract for editing. -3. Choose the **Change Customer** action. The **Change Customer in Contract** window opens. -4. In the **Contract No.** and **Service Item No**. fields you can see the numbers of the contract and service item owned by the selected customer. If the customer owns more than one contract with more than one service item included, then the value of these fields will be **Multiple**. To see the list of related contracts or service items, select these field values. -5. In the **New Customer No.** field, choose the new customer. -6. In the **New Ship-to Code** field, choose the address. -7. Choose **OK** to change the customer and ship-to code of the service contracts. -8. Choose the **Lock Contract** action to lock the contract and to make sure that the changes will be part of the contracts. - -## To update a service contract price -You can update the prices on service contracts by specifying a price update percentage. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Update Service Contract Prices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service contract. -3. In the **Update to Date** field, enter a date. The batch job will update prices for contracts with next price update dates on or before this date. -4. In the **Price Update %** field, enter the percentage that you want to update the prices by. -5. In the **Action** field, select **Update Contract Prices**. - -## To post prepaid contract entries -If you work with prepaid service contracts, you must regularly post prepaid contract entries, thereby transferring the prepaid payments from the prepaid contract accounts to the regular contract accounts. - -Before you can post prepaid contract entries, you must specify a number series in the **Prepaid Posting Document Nos.** field in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Post Prepaid Contract Entries**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Post until Date** field, enter a date. The batch job posts prepaid service ledger entries with posting dates up to this date. -4. In the **Posting Date** field, enter the date you want to use as the posting date on the general journal line. -5. In the **Action** field, choose **Post Prepaid Transactions**. -6. Choose **OK** to post the entries. - -## Changing the Service Contract Status -After the service contract is signed, the **Change Status** field value is automatically set to **Locked**. If you want to modify information in the service contract or service contract quote, first you have to change the status of the contract or contract quote from **Locked** to **Open**. Note that you cannot create service invoices for the service contract with the **Open** change status. After the contract or contract quote is modified, you have to change the status back to **Locked** to make it possible to create service invoices and ledger entries for the service contract, which includes the changes that you made to it. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Change Status** field is not related to the **Release Status** field on the service order header, which governs the warehouse handling of service items. - -## To cancel a service contract -You may need to cancel a service contract when the contract has expired or has been canceled by you or the customer. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot reopen a contract after it is canceled. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contracts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service contract to cancel. -3. Choose the **Open Contract** action to open the service contract for editing. -4. In the **Cancel Reason Code** field, choose the relevant reason code. To add more reason codes, choose the **Advanced** action. - - If the check box in the **Use Contract Cancel Reason** field in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window is selected, you must specify a cancel reason code when canceling contracts. - -5. In the **Status** field, choose **Canceled**. -6. If there are unposted invoices, credit memos, or opened prepaid entries for the contract, a confirmation message will appear. In the message box, choose **No** to return to the contract and post the documents, or **Yes** to continue the cancellation process. - -## Filing a service contract or contract quote -You can file service contracts and contract quotes at any time to record and archive a copy of the contract or contract quote. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] files service contracts automatically when you convert contract quotes to service contracts or cancel service contracts. You can file a contract or quote yourself by choosing the **File Contract** action on the **Service Contracts** or **Service Contract Quotes** pages. If you want to view your archived contracts of quotes by searching for **Filed Contracts**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Service Contracts](service-how-setup-service-contracts.md) -[Service Management](service-service.md) -[How to: Convert Service Contracts that Include VAT Amounts](service-how-to-convert-service-contracts.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0db07e0e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Service Items - description: When you receive an unregistered item for servicing, you can register it as a service item. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Service Items -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the term "service item" refers to equipment or items that require service. When you create a service order, you specify the items that need service. In the order, you can link a service item to an item in inventory or a service item group. - -When you receive an item that needs service, you can register it as a service item. There are several ways to do so. For example, you can create a service item on the **Service Items** page, or as part of another process, such as when working with a service order. - -## To create a service item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To create service items within a service order -When you receive items for service that you want to register as service items, you can create them as service items in the **Service Order** or **Service Quote** windows. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] -3. Choose the **Create Service Item** action. - - A number is assigned to the service item and a service item card is created. The **Service Item No.** field is filled in with the number of the new service item. - -## To create a service item when shipping items -When you ship items by posting either service orders or service invoices, the shipped items are automatically registered as service items if the following condition is met. The items must belong to a service item group with the **Create Service Item** check box selected. If the items have serial numbers registered in the Item Tracking Lines window, this information is copied automatically to the **Serial No.** field on the service item card when creating service items. - -The following procedure shows how to create service items when you ship items on service orders. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service order. -3. Choose the **Post** or **Post and Print** action. -4. Choose the **Ship** or **Ship and Invoice** action. -5. The service items are automatically created for the items on the order, provided these belong to a service item group that you have set up to create service items. If you registered specific serial numbers in the **Item Tracking Lines** window, they will be assigned to these service items. - -> [!NOTE] -> If an item is a BOM and you have exploded the BOM, the exploded BOM items are processed in the same way as regular items. Service items are created based on the service items group condition and, optionally, the serial numbers condition. Additionally, if a service item is created for an exploded BOM item that is made up of other BOM components, these items are created as service item components for the exploded BOM service item. -> -> If an item is a BOM and you have not exploded the BOM, a service item is created for it based on the service item group condition and, optionally, the serial numbers condition. - -## To insert a starting fee for a service item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Item Worksheet** action. -3. Choose the service line, and then choose **Actions**, choose **Functions**, and then choose **Insert Starting Fee** action. - - A service line of type **Cost** is inserted with the starting fee. The starting fee applies to the selected service item. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Service Items and Service Item Components](service-how-setup-service-items.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[Service Management](service-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9ca6e41e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Service Orders - description: You can use the **Service Order** window to create documents where you enter information about a service, such as repairs and maintenance, on service items by customer request. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Service Orders -You can use the **Service Order** window to create documents where you enter information about a service, such as repairs and maintenance, on service items by customer request. - -When creating a service order, you only have to fill in a few fields. Some fields are optional and many are automatically filled in when you fill in related fields. - -## To create a service order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service order. -3. In the **No.** field, enter a number for the service order. - - Alternatively, if you have set up number series for service orders in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you can press Enter to select the next available service order number. - -4. In the **Customer No.** field, select the relevant customer from the list. The customer-relevant fields are filled in with information from the **Customer** table. - -5. Depending on the settings on the **Mandatory Fields** FastTab in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you may need to fill in the **Service Order Type** field and the **Salesperson Code** field. -6. Optionally, fill in the rest of the fields. -7. Register the service item lines. - -## To create a service order from a contract -You can automatically create service orders for the maintenance of service items based on service contracts. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Contract Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Service Contract Header** FastTab, set the filters you want to apply. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields with the starting date and ending date for the period that you want to create contract service orders for. The batch job creates service orders that include service items in service contracts with next planned service dates within this period. - - > [!NOTE] - > There is a limit to the number of days you can use as the date range each time you use this batch job. You set this limit in the **Contract Serv. Ord. Max. Days** field in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window. - -4. In the **Action** field, choose **Create Service Order**. - -## To convert a service quote to a service order -When a customer has accepted a service quote, you convert it to a service order. The quote is deleted and a new service order is set up with the same description as the service quote. The response date and time are recalculated for the service order and the status is set to **Pending**. The repair status of the service items in the order are changed to **Initial**. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] searches for allocation entries for all the service items in the service quote that have the status **Active**. If it finds such allocation entries, their allocation status is updated to **Reallocation Needed**. When you reallocate the service items in the service order, the status of the allocation entries registered for the quote are updated to **Finished**. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Contract Quotes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service quote to convert to a service order. -3. Choose the **Make Order** action. - -## To check item availability for one or more orders -You can check and see if an item you need to fulfill an order is in stock, and if it is not, when the item will be in stock. In addition, if an item is available to reserve, you can reserve it to make sure it is available for your use. You can check availability for a particular order, or for all orders. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Dispatch Board**, and then choose the related link. -2. Do one of the following: - - * For a particular order, choose the order, and then choose the **Demand Overview** action. - * For all orders, choose **Show Document**. The **Service Order** window opens. - -3. On the **Demand Overview** page, expand the item grouping, and view information about the availability of the item. For example, you can see how many items are in inventory. You can also see if and when an item will be available if it is on back order, that is, Source Type = Purchase, or whether it has been reserved. - -## To reserve an item for a service order -If you need to be sure that an item is available for a service order, you can reserve the item. - -1. In the **Search** box, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service order, and then choose **Edit**. -3. Choose **Actions**, choose **Order**, and then choose **Service Lines**. -4. On the **Service Lines** page, choose the item to reserve, and then choose the **Reserve** action. -5. On the **Reservation** page, choose **Reserve from Current Line**. - -## To insert lines based on standard service codes -If you have set up standard service codes and assigned them to service item groups, you can insert the standard lines linked to the standard service codes on service documents. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Standard Service Codes](service-how-setup-service-coding.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service order. -3. Fill in the fields as necessary.. -4. Fill in the service item lines with the required information. -5. Choose the line with the service item that you want to create service lines for, and then choose **Get Std. Service Codes**. The **Standard Serv. Item Gr. Codes** window opens with the standard codes for the service item group specified on the line. -6. Choose the appropriate code, and choose the **OK** button to enter standard service lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the **Service Item Group Code** field on the service item line of the document is blank, this means that the service item does not belong to any service item group. In this case, the **Standard Serv. Item Gr. Codes** window will contain a list of all standard service codes. You should select from the list to insert standard service lines in the document. You may also select from the list of standard service codes assigned to a specific service item group. To view the list, select the relevant code in the **Service Item Group Code** field in the **Standard Serv. Item Gr. Codes** window. - -## To register internal or public comments -You can add comments that will be printed on service orders and service quotes to provide additional information. You can add up to 80 characters, including spaces. If you need to enter additional text, choose another line. To register a comment, choose a line, and then choose the **Comments** action. - -## To delete invoiced service orders -Orders are usually deleted automatically after having been fully invoiced. When an invoice is posted, a corresponding entry is created in the **Posted Service Invoices** window. The posted document can be viewed on the **Posted Service Invoice** page. - -Service orders are not deleted automatically, however, if the total quantity on the order has been posted not from the service order itself, but from the **Service Invoice** window. Then you may need to delete invoiced orders that were not deleted. You can do this by running the **Delete Invoiced Service Orders** batch job. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Invoiced Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. The **Delete Invoiced Service Orders** batch job request window opens. -2. To select the orders to be deleted, you can set filters in the **No.**, **Customer No.**, and **Bill-to Customer No.** fields. -3. Choose the **OK** button. - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Service Posting](service-service-posting.md) -[How to: Post a Service Order](service-how-to-post-service-orders.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) -[How to: Work on Service Tasks](service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md) -[How to: Allocate Resources](service-how-to-allocate-resources.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-quotes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-quotes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 239737b8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-create-service-quotes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Service Quotes - description: You can use the **Service Quote** window to create documents where you enter information about a service, such as repairs and maintenance, on service items by customer request. You can use a service quote as a preliminary draft for a service order, and then convert the quote to a service order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Service Quotes -You can think of service quotes as the basis for service orders. In fact, they are almost identical. They both contain information such as who the customer is, the type of order, the item that needs service, billing and shipping information, and information about the actual service work. - -You can use a service quote as a preliminary draft for a service order, and then convert the quote to a service order. - -## To create a service quote -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Quotes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service quote. -3. In the **No.** field, enter a number for the service quote. Alternatively, if you have set up a number series for service quotes in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you can press Enter to select the next available service quote number. -4. In the **Customer No.** field, select the relevant customer from the list. - - > [!Note] - > The customer fields are filled in automatically with information from the **Customer** card. If a **Customer** card does not exist for the customer, and you have set up a customer template, you can create the customer from the service quote. Fill in the relevant fields, and then choose the **Create Customer** action. - -5. Depending on the settings on the **Mandatory Fields** FastTab in the **Service Mgt. Setup** window, you may need to fill in the **Service Order Type** field and the **Salesperson Code** field. -6. Fill in the service item lines. -7. Register estimated costs on the service lines. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Service Orders](service-how-to-create-service-orders.md) -[How to: Work on Service tasks](service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md) - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners.md deleted file mode 100644 index ab1adeaf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-lend-receive-loaners.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Lend Service Items as Substitutes - description: You can lend customers loaner items to temporarily replace service items that you have received for servicing. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/28/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Lend and Receive Loaners -You can lend customers loaners to temporarily replace service items that you have received for servicing. - -## To lend a loaner item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service order card. -3. Select the service item line with the service item you want to replace with a loaner. -4. In the **Loaner No.** field, choose the relevant loaner item. -5. Choose **Yes** to confirm the loan. - -## To receive a loaner -When you receive a loaner from a customer, you must register the receipt. You do this in the **Service Order**, **Posted Service Shipment**, and **Loaner Card** windows. This procedure shows how to receive loaners in the **Service Order** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service order. -3. Choose the service item line with the loaner you want to receive. -4. Choose **Actions**, choose **Functions**, and then choose **Receive Loaner**. - -## To register loaner comments -You can use the **General Service Comment Sheet** window to register comments on registered loaners. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Loaners**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant loaner card. -3. Choose the **Comments** action. The **General Service Comment Sheet** window opens. -4. In the **Date** field, enter a date. -5. In the **Comment** field, enter a comment. You can enter a maximum of 80 characters. If you need to enter additional text, go to the next line. You can fill in as many lines as necessary. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up a Loaner Program](service-how-setup-loaner-program.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-post-service-orders.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-post-service-orders.md deleted file mode 100644 index b7a2d895..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-post-service-orders.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Post Service Orders - description: When you have created a service order, filled in all the necessary information and made any modifications, you can post the service order. The order must contain at least one service item line and one service line before you can post it. Should the order contain more than one service line, all the lines are posted at one time. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Post Service Orders and Credit Memos -When you have created a service order, filled in all the necessary information and made any modifications, you can post the service order. The order must contain at least one service item line and one service line before you can post it. Should the order contain more than one service line, all the lines are posted at one time. - -If you have a large number of service orders, you can save time by using a batch job to post them at the same time. You can run the batch job from any service order. - -> [!Tip] -> Before you post a service document, it's a good idea to use the **Test Report** action to to check for any errors or missing information. If there are errors, you must correct the problem. You can print a new test report to verify the fix, and then post the document. - -## To post a service order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the relevant service order. -3. On the **Service Order** page, choose one of the following actions. - - |**Action**|**Result**| - |------------------|----------------| - |**Test Report** | Checks all parts of the document and presents the result in a report. If the report indicates any errors or a lack of information, you must correct the problem. You can then print a new test report.| - |**Post** | Posts the order without printing a shipment or an invoice.| - |**Post and Print** | Posts the order and prints a shipment (if you ship the order without invoicing it) or an invoice (if you invoice the order).| - |**Post Batch** | Posts multiple service orders at one time once.| - -4. When you post the order, you must specify one of the following options for how you want to post the order. - - |**Posting Option**|**Result**| - |------------------------|----------------| - |**Ship** | Posts shipment of the items.| - |**Invoice** | Invoices items that have already been shipped.| - |**Ship and Invoice** | Invoices and ships the items.| - |**Ship and Consume** | Posts shipment and consumption on the order. It updates the relevant quantities on the service lines of the order and on the previously posted service shipment document.| - -You can post consumption only if the line contains a quantity that has shipped but not invoiced or consumed. - -When posting the order, the corresponding ledger entries and posted documents are created. The relevant fields are updated in the service order document. - -## To batch post service orders -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Post Batch** action. -3. You can set a filter to select specific service order numbers or an interval of order numbers for the batch job to process. -4. Choose **OK** to start the batch job. - -## To post a service credit memo -When you have created a service credit memo and filled it in, you can post the credit memo. If there are errors or a lack of information on the credit memo while posting, the process will be interrupted by an error message. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Credit Memos**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new service credit memo. On the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. -3. Fill in the necessary fields. -4. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Posting** group, choose **Post**. If you want to print the credit memo at the same time as you post, choose **Post and Print** instead. -5. To test credit memos before you post them, choose **Test Report**. When you run the report, the posting dates specified in the document are verified. -6. To post several service credit memos at the same time. run the **Batch Post Service Cr. Memos** batch job. This can be an advantage if you have a large number of credit memos that must be posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> It is important to enter all the necessary information on the credit memos before they are batch posted. Otherwise, it is possible that they will not be posted. When the batch job has finished posting, a message is displayed that shows how many of the service credit memos have been posted. - -## To post consumption from a service order -The following procedure describes how to post the items, resource hours, and or costs used for a specific service operation for which you will not charge your customer. Note that you can post consumed items, hours, or costs only for a posted shipment that has no posted invoices or consumption. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service order to post consumption for. -3. Choose the service item. Choose **Actions**, choose **Order**, and then choose **Service Lines**. -4. Find the required entries, and specify the quantities for which you will post consumption in the **Qty. to Consume** field. The quantity cannot be larger than the quantity already shipped and the quantity remaining but not invoiced after partial invoicing of this shipment. - - > [!NOTE] - > To register consumption with respect to a job, fill in the **Job No.**, **Job Task No.**, and the **Job Line Type** fields on the service line. - -5. Choose the lines to post, and then choose the **Post** action. On the page that opens, select **Ship and Consume**. - -The service is posted as consumed either partially or fully, depending on the value in the **Qty. to Consume** field, and the relevant ledger entries are created. In addition,previously posted service shipment documents are updated chronologically with the consumed quantities. The relevant quantities will be updated on the service lines of the order. - -## To post shipments from service orders -After specifying the details of a service, you can adjust and post the quantities of items used, time spent, and costs incurred. As a result, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] makes the necessary changes to reflect the new state of your inventory and current status of the specific order processing. - -The following procedure shows how to post shipment of service line items in locations that are not set up to require warehouse handling. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Order**, and then choose the related link. 2. In the window for the selected service order, choose **Actions**, **Order**, **Service Lines**. -3. In the **Service Lines** window, find the required entries and specify the quantity to be posted in the **Qty. to Ship** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > The quantity to ship value depends on whether you want to post shipment fully or partially. If you choose to ship fully, the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field must be equal to the value in the **Quantity** field. When you post a partial shipment, you must specify the quantity you want to ship initially. If you have already shipped part of the service on the order, make a note of the value in the **Quantity Shipped** field. The maximum quantity you can enter in the **Quantity to Ship** field is the number of units that have not yet been shipped. - -4. Choose **Actions**, **Posting**, **Post**. In the window that appears, choose **Ship**. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] creates ledger entries (in the warranty ledger, item ledger, service ledger, or G/L), produces the posted service shipment document, and updates the relevant fields on the service lines of the service order. - -If the location is set up to require warehouse handling, then the shipping and moving of service line items function in the same ways as for other source documents. The only difference is that service line items can be consumed either externally or internally and therefore require two different release functions. - -For information about shipping service line items in advanced warehouse configurations, see [Picking Items for Warehouse Shipment](warehouse-pick-items.md). - -## To undo posted consumption -You can cancel the consumption on the service orders. For example, because it was posted by mistake. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Service Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the posted service shipment for which the erroneous consumption was posted. -3. Choose **Actions**, choose **Shipment**, and then choose **Service Shipment Lines**. -4. Choose the lines that contain the incorrect consumption, and then choose the **Undo Consumption** action. - - A balancing service shipment line is inserted with negative values in the quantity fields for the selected lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot undo service consumption if: -> -> * The service order has been closed. -> * It has been posted to the Jobs area, so there are job ledger entries linked to it. - -## To post service lines -If you have to work on a service order for a considerable time without posting it, you may want to post some of the service lines linked to it as a way, for example, of keeping your inventory updated. You can post by specifying the relevant quantities on the lines to be posted. You may choose to post the lines one by one or by selecting several lines at a time. - -The following procedure describes shipment posting directly from a service order in locations without warehouse handling set up. If the location is set up to require warehouse handling, then shipment posting happens in a different warehouse document, depending on the location setup. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service order, and then choose the **Service Lines** action. -4. On the lines you are going to post, fill in the **Qty. to Ship**, **Qty. to Invoice**, and **Qty. to Consume** fields, depending on how you will post the lines. -5. Choose the **Post** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Posting in Service Management](service-service-posting.md) -[How to: Create a Service Order](service-how-to-create-service-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md deleted file mode 100644 index 88f52e15..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-how-to-work-on-service-tasks.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Work on Service Tasks - description: After you have created a service order or service quote, registered service item lines, and allocated resources to the service items in the order or quote, you can start repairing and maintaining the service items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Work on Service Tasks -After you have created a service order or service quote, registered service item lines, and allocated resources to the service items in the order or quote, you can start repairing and maintaining the service items. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] features a **Service Tasks** window that gives an overview of all the service items that need attention. Think of it as your service dashboard where you can see what orders are pending, look for and register spare parts, and keep your inventory up-to-date. - -To track changes and get a graphical view of your service business, use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] statistics tools for quick, automatically generated charting and analysis. - -## To work on a service task -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. If you want a list of service tasks a certain resource or resource group is allocated to, fill in the **Resource Filter** or **Resource Group Filter** field and press Enter. -3. If you want a list of service tasks with a certain response date or response dates within a certain time period, fill in the **Response Date Filter** field and press Enter. -4. If you want a list of service tasks with a certain allocation status or repair status, fill in the **Allocation Status Filter** or **Repair Status Code Filter** field and press Enter. -5. Select the service task you want to work on. On the **Navigate** tab, in the **Service Tasks** group, choose **Item Worksheet**. The **Service Item Worksheet** window opens. -6. Register standard texts, spare parts, resource hours, and costs as appropriate using the corresponding options in the **Type** field: \, **Item**, **Resource**, and **Cost**. -7. In the **Repair Status** field, select the appropriate status. - - > [!NOTE] - > Fill in the **Repair Status** field with the **Finished** or **Partly Serviced** status if the service item has been completely serviced or another resource will continue servicing. The **Finished** or **Reallocation Needed** status is specified automatically for the allocation entry corresponding to the service item. - -## To register service operations -When performing a service on a service order, you can register the details specifying the items used, costs incurred, and the time spent. The data you specify is stored in the **Service Item Worksheet** window. You can update the data when necessary. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service order to register the service for, and choose the item line. -3. Choose **Actions**, choose **Line**, and then choose **Service Item Worksheet.** -4. On the lines, specify the items used, costs incurred, and the time spent on the service. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can also register service directly on the service lines linked to the service order. - -## To register spare parts -When working on service items in service orders, you may need to use spare parts for the service. The following procedure shows how to register the spare parts you use in the **Service Item Worksheet** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the line that includes the relevant service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. -3. Enter a new service line. -4. In the **Type** field, choose **Item**. -5. In the **No.** field, choose the relevant spare part. -6. In the **Quantity** field, enter the quantity of items you want to use. - - You can use a similar procedure to register the spare parts on the **Service Lines** page, which you can open from the **Service Order** page. - -## To register spare parts from a service order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the service order you want to register spare parts for. -3. Choose the line that includes the relevant service item. Choose **Actions**, choose **Order**, and then choose **Service Lines**. -4. enter a new service line. - -## To replace a service item or a service item component -When you service a service item that is composed of components, you may need to replace a faulty component with a new one. Every time that you enter a spare part for a service item with components, you have the option of replacing a component or creating a new one. The new item is not registered as a component of the service item until you post this service line or the service order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the line that includes the service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. -3. Enter a new service line. -4. In the **Type** field, choose **Item**. -5. In the **No.** field, choose the component to replace. -6. Press **Enter**. A dialog box opens with three options: **Replace Component**, **New Component**, and **Ignore**. The following table describes the options. - - |Option | Description| - |----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |**Replace Component**|Changes the status of the component you are replacing to not active, and it will appear on the replaced component list for the service item.| - |**New Component**|Enters the new component in the component list of the service item.| - |**Ignore**|Does nothing to the component list of the service item.| - -7. Choose **Replace Component**. -8. Choose the component to replace, and then Choose the **OK** button. - -## To change the response time for a service item line -When you register a service item line in a service order or quote, depending on whether the service item is on a service contract the response time in hours is automatically entered and the response date and time are calculated accordingly. You can change the response time in hours and the response date and time if you need to. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Orders** or **Service Quotes**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the service order or quote to open the card. -3. On the service item line you want to change the response time for, either in the **Response Time (Hours)** field or in the **Response Date** and **Response Time** fields, enter the new response hours or response date and time. - -## To register fault/resolution codes -After repairing a service item, you can register both the fault code and the resolution code for the item by selecting a combination from the existing fault/resolution codes relationships. The fault and resolution codes will appear in the corresponding fields in the **Service Item Worksheet** window. You can also register the codes directly in this window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Tasks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the line that includes the relevant service item, and then choose the **Item Worksheet** action. -3. On the **Service Item Worksheet** page, choose **Fault/Resol. Codes Relationships**. The **Fault/Resolution Codes Relationships** window opens. - - > [!Note] - > Filters are set on the relationships that are shown in the window by copying the service item group and the fault codes from the **Service Item Worksheet** window. - -4. Fill out the line. Choose the combination of fault and resolution codes, and then choose **OK** to copy it to the service item. If an appropriate combination cannot be found, you can create a new combination in the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Fault Reporting](service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md) -[Allocation Status and Repair Status](service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md) -[Service Posting](service-service-posting.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-multiple-contracts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-multiple-contracts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 096085ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-multiple-contracts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Multiple Contracts - description: Depending on your service level agreements with a customer, you may have to handle a service item under more than one service contract. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Multiple Contracts -Depending on your service level agreements with a customer, you may have to handle a service item under more than one service contract. - -By handling a service item under multiple contracts, you can do the following: - -* Issue different contracts for the same service item. -* Service parts separately. -* Consider different skills that are required to service different aspects of a service item, such as mechanical components and software. -* Specify different response times and frequencies in servicing different parts of a service item. -* Address different kinds of activities to be performed on a service item when the service item requires different types of service in different time periods. -* Select and assign an appropriate contract number to a service item line when you are creating a service order. -* Handle relevant financial information about service items and service level agreements. - -You can consider the following examples of using the multiple contracts functionality. - -## Creating Multiple Contracts per Service Item -You can manually create a service contract or contract quote for service items already registered in non-canceled contracts owned by the same customer. To do this, follow the standard procedure of creating service contracts and service contract quotes. For more information, see [How to: Work with Service Contracts and Service Contract Quotes](service-how-to-create-service-contracts-and-service-contract-quotes.md). - -When you add a service item on a contract line that is registered in other service contracts or contract quotes, a warning message is displayed stating that the service item already belongs to one or more service contracts or contract quotes. If you confirm this message, all relevant service item information is copied to a newly created contract line. - -## Copying Documents -You can automatically create a service contract or contract quote for service items that are already registered in other service contracts or contract quotes by using the **Copy Document** action. - -## Creating Service Orders for Multiple Contracts -You can manually create a service order for a service item that is registered in multiple active contracts. A service contract is active when it is signed and not expired. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fulfilling Service Contracts](service-fulfill-service-contracts.md) -[How to: Create Service Orders](service-how-to-create-service-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-order-repair-status.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-order-repair-status.md deleted file mode 100644 index 00a8a741..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-order-repair-status.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Statuses for Service Orders and Repairs - description: You must set up nine repair status options that identify the progress of repair and maintenance of service items in service orders. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Statuses for Service Orders and Repairs -You must set up repair status options that identify the progress of repair and maintenance of service items in service orders. You must set up at least nine repair status options that identify situations or actions taken when servicing service items. - -You can set the priority level for service order status options. There four priorities are High, Medium High, Medium Low, and Low. - -When you change the repair status of a service item in a service order, the service order status is updated. The repair status of each service item is linked to the service order status. If the service items are linked to two or more service order status options, the service order status with the highest priority is selected. - -## To set up a repair status -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Repair Status**, and then choose the related link. 2. Create a new repair status. -3. Fill in the **Code** and **Description** fields. -4. In the **Service Order Status** field, choose the order status to link the repair status to. The **Priority** field displays the priority of the service order status you have chosen. -5. Choose a repair status. You can choose only one. -6. To be able to post service orders, including service items, with this repair status, choose the **Posting Allowed** field. -7. To be able to manually change the service order status option to **Pending** in service orders including service items with this repair status, choose the **Pending Status Allowed** check box. -8. Choose the **In Process Status Allowed**, **Finished Status Allowed**, and **On Hold Status Allowed** check boxes in the same way. - -## To set up service status priorities -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Order Status**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the service order status you want to set a priority for. -3. In the **Priority** field, choose the priority you want for this service order status. Repeat this step for each status. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Understanding Service Order Status and Repair Status]() -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-plan-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-plan-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index d4bcc432..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-plan-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Planning Service Processes -description: Outlines tasks to set up rules and values to define your service policies and processes. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: service, work hours, configure, price, pricing -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Planning Services -With [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can set up the standard tasks that you need to fulfill your customer service requirements. To do this, you must determine what service items and offerings your service organization supports, and at what price. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] also provides some statistics tools that you can use to determine how well things are going, and identify areas where you can improve. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Establish pricing for the services you provide.|[Managing Service Pricing](service-service-price-management.md)| -|Set up and customize service items and service groups. This includes establishing which skills a service requires and troubleshooting guidance.| [How to: Create Service Items](service-how-to-create-service-items.md)| -|Know how to manage the status of repairs on service orders, and how to identify their priority.|[Understanding Service Order and Repair Status](service-service-order-status-and-repair-status.md)| -|Understand the relationship between the status of a repair, and the effect they have on allocated resources, and vice versa.|[Understanding Allocation Status and Repair Status](service-allocation-status-and-repair-status.md)| -|Use statistics to analyze your service processes. | [Viewing Service Statistics](service-service-statistics.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Fulfilling Service Contracts](service-fulfill-service-contracts.md) -[Delivering Service](service-deliver-service.md) -[How to: Set Up Pricing and Additional Costs for Services](service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md) -[How to: Set Up Service Items and Service Item Components](service-how-setup-service-items.md) -[How to: Set Up Statuses for Service Orders and Repairs](service-order-repair-status.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-order-status-and-repair-status.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-order-status-and-repair-status.md deleted file mode 100644 index c444750e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-order-status-and-repair-status.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Service Order Status and Repair Status - description: The **Status** field in the **Service Order** window and the service item repair status, which is represented by the **Repair Status Code** field in the **Service Order** window have a certain relationship in Service Management. The service order status reflects the repair status of all the service items in the service order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Service Order Status and Repair Status -The **Status** field in the **Service Order** window and the service item repair status, which is represented by the **Repair Status Code** field in the **Service Order** window have a certain relationship in Service Management. The service order status reflects the repair status of all the service items in the service order. - -> [!NOTE] -> These two status field are not related to the **Release Status** field on the service order header, which determines how the warehouse handles service items. - - Each time the repair status of a service item is changed in a service order, the status of the order is updated. To display the status that reflects the overall repair status of the individual service items, you must specify the following: - -* The service order status that each repair status is linked to. For more information, see Service Order Status. -* The level of priority of each service order status option. For more information, see Priority. - - When you convert a service quote to a service order, the repair status of each service item is changed in the order to **Initial** and the service order status is changed to **Pending**. - -## Specifying Service Order Status for Repair Status -Each repair status is linked to a particular service order status. The options for the service order status are as follows: **Pending**, **In Process**, **On Hold**, and **Finished**. The repair status options are as follows: **Initial**, **In Process**, **Referred**, **Partly Serviced**, **Quote Finished**, **Waiting for Customer**, **Spare Part Ordered**, **Spare Part Received**, and **Finished**. - -### Pending -The service order status **Pending** indicates that the service can start or continue at any time. Therefore, the repair status options of **Initial**, **Referred**, **Partly Serviced**, and **Spare Part Received** can be linked to this service order status. - -### In Process -The service order status **In Process** indicates that the service is in process. Therefore, the repair status options **In Process** and **Spare Part Ordered** can both be linked to this service order status. If you link the **Spare Part Ordered** status to an **In Process** service order status, you must also link the **Spare Part Received** status to this service order status. - -### On Hold -The service order status **On Hold** indicates that the service is temporarily on hold because you are waiting for a customer response or spare parts before the service can start. Therefore, the repair status options of **Quote Finished**, **Spare Part Ordered**, and **Waiting for Customer** can be linked to this service order status. - -### Finished -The service order status **Finished** indicates that the service has been completed. Therefore, the **Finished** repair status is linked to this status. - -## Assigning Priority to Service Order Status -When a repair status of a service item is changed, the service order status options linked to the different repair status options of all the service items in the order are identified. If the service items are linked to two or more service order status options, the service order status option with the highest priority is selected. - -You must decide which service order status contains the most important information about the status of the service order and assign that status the highest priority, and so on. - -### Example -A typical priority level assignment could be as follows: - -* In Process - High -* Pending - Medium high -* On Hold - Medium low -* Finished - Low - -For example, if one service item has the repair status **Initial**, linked to the service order status **Pending**, another has the repair status **In Process**, linked to the service order status **In Process**, and a third has the repair status **Spare Part Ordered**, linked to the service order status **On Hold**, the resulting service order status will be **In Process** because this has the highest priority. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Statuses for Service Orders and Repairs](service-order-repair-status.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index a20ac835..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Service Posting - description: Service posting functionality lets you process your documents efficiently and maintain successful customer service policy. You can create and update posted documents, and create ledger entries both in the service area and in other modules to ensure the correct update. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Service Posting -Service posting functionality lets you process your documents efficiently and maintain successful customer service policy. You can create and update posted documents, and create ledger entries both in the service area and in other modules to ensure the correct update. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following describes service posting regardless of how items are physically handled in the warehouse. -> -> In a location that is not set up to require warehouse handling, you perform the posting actions directly from the **Service Lines** window. In locations that involve warehouse handling, the described posting actions, except Ship and Consume, are performed indirectly through varying warehouse ship functions, depending on setup. For more information, see [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -## Ship -The ship option lets you register the relevant items and time entered on the lines of a service order after you complete the service. A posted shipment is created and updates occur in the Inventory module and other modules in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to reflect that the items have been taken out of the inventory and sent to the customer. In particular, the item ledger entries, value ledger entries, service ledger entries, and warranty ledger entries are produced. - -If the location is set up to require warehouse handling, then the shipping and moving of service line items functions in the same ways as for other source documents. The only difference is that service line items can be consumed either externally or internally, which requires two different release functions. - -## Invoice -You have to use the invoice option to issue an invoice to the customer you want to charge for the service. Usually, it is the difference between the shipped quantity registered by the **Post Shipment** function and the consumed quantity registered by the **Post Consumption** function that is subject to invoice. You cannot invoice what has not been shipped. When you run the **Post Invoice** function, you create a posted service invoice and update the documents posted before to make them consistent with the quantities that are contained in the issued invoice. Like in other posting procedures, the relevant ledger entries that includes general ledger entries, are generated. - -## Ship and Invoice -The ship and invoice option lets you issue both a service shipment and an invoice at the same time. - -## Ship and Consume -With the ship and consume option, you can register and post items, costs, or hours that have been used for servicing but that cannot be included in the invoice to the customer. An invoice is not issued, but you can issue both a service shipment and service consumption at the same time to reflect the fact that some items or hours have been given to the customer free of charge. The corresponding ledger entries are also created to register consumption. - -> [!NOTE] -> The service posting procedure enables you to perform partial posting. You can create a partial shipment or a partial invoice by filling in the **Qty. to Ship** and **Qty. to Invoice** fields on the individual service lines of the service orders before you post. Note that you cannot create an invoice for something that is not shipped. That is, before you can invoice, you must have registered a shipment, or you must choose to ship and invoice at the same time. - -After the posting has been completed, you will be able to view the posted service documents from the corresponding **Posted Service Shipment** and **Posted Service Invoice** windows. The posted entries created can be seen in various windows that contain posted entries, such as **G/L Entries**, **Item Ledger Entries**, **Warehouse Entries**, **Service Ledger Entries**, **Job Ledger Entries**, and **Warranty Ledger Entries**. - -## To view information about a posted service document -When you post a service invoice, a service shipment, or a service credit memo, the information on the document is transferred to the **Posted Service Invoice**, **Posted Service Shipment**, or **Posted Service Credit Memo** windows respectively. You cannot enter, change, or delete anything in these windows. You can print a shipment, invoice, or credit memo from these windows. - -The following procedure uses a posted service invoice as an example, but the same procedure can apply to posted service shipments and posted credit memos. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Service Invoice**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the posted service invoice you want to view. -3. To get an overview of the posted invoice, choose the **Statistics** action. - - The **Service Order Statistics** window opens. The window displays information such as quantity, amount, VAT, cost, profit, and customer credit limit for the posted document. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post Service Orders](service-how-to-post-service-orders.md) -[How to: Create Service Orders](service-how-to-create-service-orders.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-price-management.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-price-management.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0e69439d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-price-management.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Service Price Management - description: This topic describes how to apply the best price to service orders, set up personalized service price agreements for customers, improve service employees' efficiency, and accelerate the invoicing process. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/28/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Service Price Management -The service price management functionality lets you apply the best price to service orders, set up personalized service price agreements for customers, improve service employees' efficiency, and accelerate the invoicing process. - -Service price management lets you set up different service price groups so you can consider the service item or service item group, in addition to the type of fault that the service task involves. You can set up these groups for a limited period of time, or for a specific customer or currency. You can use price calculation structures as templates to assign a specific price to a specific service task. - -For example, this makes it possible to assign specific items included in the service price, in addition to the type of work included. This also makes it possible to use different VAT and discount amounts for different service price groups. To make sure that the correct prices are applied, you can assign fixed, minimum, or maximum prices, depending on the agreements that you have with your customers. - -Before adjusting the price of a service item on a service order, you are provided with an overview of what the results of the price adjustment will be. You can approve of these results, or you can make additional changes, if you want to have a different result. The whole adjustment is performed line by line, which means that there are no additional lines created. - -Finally, service price group statistics and standard reports let you keep track of the profitability of each service price group. - -## Service Price Adjustment Groups -You use service price adjustment groups to set up the different types of price adjustments. For example, you can set up a service price adjustment group that adjusts prices for spare parts, one that adjust prices for labor, one that adjusts prices for costs, and so on. You can also specify whether the service price adjustment should be applied to just one specific item or resource, or to all items or resources. - -Each service price adjustment group holds the information about the adjustments that you want to make on the service lines. - -The service price adjustment function does not apply to service items that belong to service contracts. You can only adjust the service prices of items that are part of a service order. You cannot adjust the price of a service item if it has a warranty. You cannot adjust the price of a service item on a service order if the service line linked to it has been posted as invoice, either fully or in part. - -When you run the service price adjustment function, all of the discounts in the order will be replaced by the values of the service price adjustment. - -## Service Price Groups -You can set up service price groups to create groups of service items that receive the same special service pricing. When you have set up service price groups, you can then assign them to service items on service item lines. You can also assign service price groups to service item groups. - -Before you can assign a service price group to a service item, you have to determine to which fault area, currency, or service price adjustment group the service price group applies. You have to determine to which amount the service price should be adjusted, and whether this amount should include VAT and discounts. You also have to determine whether this adjustment concerns a fixed amount, or should only be applied under certain conditions. - -When you assign a service price group to a service item, all the special service pricing that you set up in this group will then apply for this service item. - -## Service Pricing -You set up the actual types of service pricing (price adjustment type and price) for a combination of service price groups and customer price groups. For each type of service pricing, you select a service price adjustment group. You also specify the service price adjustment type, fixed, maximum, or minimum, and the actual price. - -For example, you can set up types of service pricing for a radio service price group. For customers without a price group, you can decide to have service pricing with maximum price on labor, which is the labor price adjustment group. For customers with a particular price group, you can decide to have service pricing with a fixed price on labor, the same labor price adjustment group. - -## Service Price Adjustment -Service price adjustment lets you adjust the price of an item, resource, general ledger account, or cost on a service order. - -After you have entered an item on the service item line, you then enter all information about the costs of this item on the service lines. When you run the Adjust Service Price function, you can preview the price adjustments. You can make modifications if you have to. When you acknowledge the modifications, the adjustments are calculated, and are then transferred to the service lines. You then post the service order. - -Depending on the type of service price adjustment, the total amount of the adjustments is calculated. - -The following table describes the calculations. - -|Option | Description | -|----------------------------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Fixed Price**|This means that you charge a fixed price for the service item, resource, general ledger account, or cost, regardless of the real costs or regular charges. Selecting this option means that the service price adjustment will reach the exact amount specified in the service price group.| -|**Maximum**|This means that you put an upper limit on the charge to your customer, regardless of the real costs or regular charges. Selecting this option means that the service price adjustment will only be performed if the total price exceeds the amount specified in the service price group.| -|**Minimum**|This means that you put a lower limit on the charge to your customer, regardless of the real costs or regular charges. Selecting this option means that the service price adjustment will only be performed if the total amount is less than the amount specified on the service price group.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Pricing and Additional Costs for Services](service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md) -[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-statistics.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-statistics.md deleted file mode 100644 index b732191a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service-statistics.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Service Statistics - description: Get a quick overview of the contents of service documents such as orders, quotes, invoices, or credit memos, the details on the specific service lines, and the service items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/04/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# Viewing Service Statistics -Dynamics NAV can provide some statistics that you can use to analyze service documents and determine how well you are managing your service processes. You can analyze service contracts, items, quotes, orders, invoices, and credit memos by choosing the **Statistics** action. For service items and contracts, you can also use the **Service Item Trendscape** or **Contract Trendscape** to view a summary of service ledger entries for a specific service item. - -## Viewing Statistics for Service Orders -The service order statistics feature gives you a quick overview of the contents of the entire service order, the details on the specific service lines, and information related to invoicing, shipping and consuming, and the customer's balance. - -The statistical data is displayed for a service order in the **Service Order Statistics** window for the relevant order. You can open the relevant statistics window from a service order. In the **Service Orders** window, choose **Statistics**. The FastTabs in this window show information such as quantity, amount, VAT, cost, profit, and customer credit limit. The amounts in the window are in the currency of the service order, unless otherwise indicated. - -### View totals for a service order -You can view the total amount on the service lines, including and excluding VAT, VAT part, cost, and profit on the service lines. The window also displays item-specific information, such as weight, volume, and the quantity of parcels. - -### View shipping information -You can see information about the items, resources, or costs to be shipped. To provide the information, the values specified in the **Qty. to Ship** field are used on each service line in the order. - -### View order details -You can view information about the items, resource hours, and costs to be invoiced and consumed. The following table describes this information. - -|Column | Description| -|------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Invoicing**|Displays amounts that are to be posted as invoiced from the service order.| -|**Consuming**|Displays the quantity and cost of items, or resources that will be posted as consumed.| -|**Total**|Displays the total amounts on the service order that result from adding the invoicing amounts to the consuming amounts.| - -### Analyze service order lines -You can analyze the information by the types of service lines included in the service order. The amounts are shown separately for: - -* Items -* Resources -* Costs and general ledger accounts - -### View customer information -See the balance on the customer's account, in addition to the maximum credit that can be endued to the customer who you created the service document for. - -## Viewing Service Item Statistics -In the **Service Item Statistics** window, you can see up-to-date information about a service item based the following service ledger entry types: - -* Resources -* Items -* Service cost -* Service contracts -* Total - -For each entry type, you can see the invoiced amount, usage (amount), cost amount, quantity, quantity invoiced and quantity consumed, profit amount and profit percentage. The profit percentage is calculated according to the following formula: - -* (Invoiced Amount - Usage (Cost)) x 100 / Invoiced Amount - -## Using Trendscapes -For service items and service contracts, the **Service Item Trendscape** or **Service Contract Trendscape** windows provides a scrollable summary of service ledger entries in a period of time for a specific service item or contract. To view the trendscape, open the service item or service contract, choose the **Statistics** action, and then choose **Trendscape**. - -When you scroll the list, the amounts are calculated in the local currency according to the specified time interval. All amounts are calculated from service ledger entries, which are entries that are created when you post service orders or service invoices. - -You can filter the list by specifing the service items to include. - -> [!Tip] -> If you have set the time interval to **Day** and you want to scroll over a long period, you can do it faster by shifting to a larger interval such as **Quarter**. When you have found the desired period, you can shift back to the original interval to see the data in more detail. - -## Viewing Gains and Losses on Contracts -A contract gain or loss entry is generated when a contract quote is converted to a service contract, when contract lines are added or removed from a service contract, or when a contract is canceled. You can view contract gains or losses on the following pages. - -|Page | Description| -|----------------|---------------------------------------| -|**Contract Gain/Loss (Contracts)**|To view the contract gain/loss by service contract.| -|**Contract Gain/Loss (Groups)**|To view the contract gain/loss by service contract group.| -|**Contract Gain/Loss (Customers)**|To view the contract gain/loss by customer.| -|**Contract Gain/Loss (Reasons)**|To view the contract gain/loss by reason code.| -|**Contract Gain/Loss (Resp.Ctr)**|To view the contract gain/loss by responsibility center.| - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter the name of the page to display, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the filter criteria you want to apply. For example, in the **Contract Gain/Loss (Reasons)** window, choose a value for **Reason Code Filter**. -3. Choose the **Show Matrix** action. - -## Viewing Statistics for Posted Service Documents -The service statistics feature lets you gain a statistical overview of the contents of posted service documents, such as a posted shipment, posted invoice, and posted credit memo. - -The statistical information is displayed in the statistics window for the corresponding posted service document. You can open the relevant statistics window from posted service shipment, posted service invoice, or posted service credit memo documents. For each of these document types, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Statistics**. For example, from the **Posted Service Invoices** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Statistics**. - -### Posted Service Shipment Statistics -The **Service Shipment Statistics** window provides an overview of a posted service shipment. This includes information about the physical contents of the shipment, such as quantity of the shipped items, resource hours or costs, and weight and volume of the shipped items. - -### Posted Service Invoice Statistics -You can see a statistical summary on a posted service invoice in the **Service Invoice Statistics** window. You can view the totals of the posted service invoice. The data includes total amount on the service lines (including and excluding VAT) that has been posted as invoiced, VAT part, cost, and profit on the posted invoice. The window also displays information about the following: - -* The items on the service invoice lines, such as weight, volume, and the quantity of parcels. -* The balance on the customer's account, and the maximum credit that you can extend the customer. - -### Posted Service Credit Memo Statistics -You can use the **Service Credit Memo Statistics** window to get a statistical overview of the lines in a posted service credit memo. The overview can include: - -* The total amounts on the posted credit memo, displayed as quantity, amount, VAT, cost and profit. There is also information about the items on the service lines of the posted credit memo, such as quantity, weight, and volume. -* General information about the customer, such as the customer's credit limit and balance on the account. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create Service Orders](service-how-to-create-service-orders.md) -[How to: Create Service Items](service-how-to-create-service-items.md) -[Planning Service](service-plan-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9fb30c43..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Service Management - description: Learn to use features designed to support repair shop and field service operations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Service Management -Providing ongoing service to customers is an important part of any business and one that can be a source of customer satisfaction and loyalty, in addition to revenue. However,managing and tracking service is not always easy, and [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides a set of tools to help. These tools are designed to support repair shop and field service operations, and can be used in business scenarios such as complex customer service distribution systems, industrial service environments with bills of materials, and high volume dispatching of service technicians with requirements for spare parts management. - - With these tools you can accomplish the following: - -* Schedule service calls and set up service orders. -* Track repair parts and supplies. -* Assign service personnel based on skill and availability. -* Provide service estimates and service invoices. - -In addition, you can standardize coding, set up contracts, implement a discounting policy, and create route maps for service employees. - -In general, there are two aspects to service management: configuring and setting up your system, and using it for pricing, contracts, orders, service personnel dispatch, and job scheduler. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Set up Service Management, including fault codes, policies, default documents and templates.|[Setting Up Service Management](service-setup-service.md)| -|Manage service pricing, create service items, and understand how to monitor progress.|[Planning Service](service-plan-service.md)| -|Create and manage contractual agreements between you and your customers.|[Fulfilling Service Contracts](service-fulfill-service-contracts.md)| -|Provide service to customers, and invoice service orders.|[Delivering Service](service-deliver-service.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Receivables](receivables-manage-receivables.md) -[Jobs](projects-how-create-jobs.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] ](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service-processes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service-processes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 1566e2af..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service-processes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Service Management Processes - description: Learn how to set up processes that help ensure your customers are satisfied with your customer service. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: bholtorf - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: service, number sequences, setup, warnings, fee, contracts, warranties - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# How to: Configure Service Processes -The following are some examples of the settings that you can apply to service management processes: - -* Some overall settings for various processes, such as warnings, next service calculations for service items, the starting fee to assess, the fault reporting level to use, and so on. -* The types if information that a technician must enter on service documents. For example, you can require them to specify the type of order, the start and/or end dates for the work, and the type of work that was done. -* Some default settings for response times and warranties. These include a default response time for starting service, warranty discount percentages for parts and labor, and how long warranties are valid for. -* Settings for contracts, such as the maximum number of days that you can use for contract service orders, whether to use reason codes when a contract is canceled, standard texts for contract descriptions, and contract values. -* The number sequences to use for service-related documents and items. - -## To enter general and mandatory settings -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Fault Reporting](service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md) -[How to: Set Up Resource Allocation](service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md) -[How to: Set Up Codes for Standard Services](service-how-setup-service-coding.md) -[How to: Set Up Additional Costs for Services](service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md) -[How to: Set Up Troubleshooting](service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md) -[Service Management](service-service.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service.md b/dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service.md deleted file mode 100644 index b59d0c8b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/service-setup-service.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setting Up Service Management - description: Overview of tasks to set up Service Management to suit the way that your organizations manages its services. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: service, service items, repairs, maintenance, fix - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- - -# Setting Up Service Management -Before you can start using Service Management features in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], there are a few things to set up. For example, you can establish coding for standard services, symptoms, and fault codes, and the service items and service item types that your company's customer service needs require. - -When you set up Service Management, you must decide what services to offer customers and the schedule for those services. A service is a type of work performed by one or more resources and provided to a customer. For example, a service could be a type of computer repair. A service item is the equipment or item needing servicing, for example, the computer needing repair, installed at a specific customer. You can set up services as part of a group of related repair or maintenance items. - -When you define a service, you can associate it with the skills required to perform the service. To help your service representatives be efficient, you can also set up real time troubleshooting guidelines and assign typical startup costs, such as travel costs or other fees. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up codes that automatically assign lines on service documents for services you deliver often. |[How to: Set Up Codes for Standard Services](service-how-setup-service-coding.md)| -| Establish general settings that control aspects of Service Management Processes.|[How to: Configure Service Processes](service-setup-service-processes.md)| -| Define how your organization works with fault reporting. |[How to: Set Up Fault Reporting](service-how-setup-fault-reporting.md) | -| Set up the service offerings that your company delivers to customers.|[How to: Set Up Service Offerings](service-how-setup-service-offerings.md)| -| Provide troubleshooting guidelines that help service reps deliver faster service. |[How to: Set Up Troubleshooting](service-how-setup-troubleshooting.md) | -| Set up resource allocation to make it easy to assign the right resource to a service task. |[How to: Set Up Resource Allocation](service-how-setup-resource-allocation.md) | -| Define pricing for services, and set up additional service costs to assess on service orders. |[How to: Set Up Pricing and Additional Costs for Services](service-how-setup-service-costs-pricing.md)| -| Set things up so you can track resource hours and service order status in order to forecast workloads and service needs.|[How to: Set Up Work Hours and Service Hours](service-how-setup-work-service-hours.md)| -| Set up repair status options so that you can monitor progress on repairs. | [How to: Set Up Statuses for Service Orders and Repairs](service-order-repair-status.md)| -| Set up a loaner program, so you can lend a substitute while you work on a service item. |[How to: Set Up a Loaner Program](service-how-setup-loaner-program.md) | -| Set up service items and service item components. |[How to: Set Up Service Items](service-how-setup-service-items.md) | -| Lay the groundwork for creating service contracts and contract quotes. |[How to: Set Up Service Contracts](service-how-setup-service-contracts.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Service Management](service-service.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md b/dynamics-nav-app/set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md deleted file mode 100644 index c6398cfa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices - description: Entering the correct setup values from the start is important to the success of any new business software. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices -Entering the correct setup values from the start is important to the success of any new business software. - - Whether you use Rapid Start to implement setup values or you manually enter them in the new company, you can support your setup decisions with some general recommendations for selected setup fields that are known to potentially cause the solution to be inefficient if defined incorrectly. - - Help in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes best-practice information about how to set up key fields in the following application areas: - -- [Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) - -- [Setup Best Practices: Costing Method](setup-best-practices-costing-method.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) - [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-costing-method.md b/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-costing-method.md deleted file mode 100644 index e4ed95ca..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-costing-method.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setup Best Practices - Costing Method - description: The **Costing Method** on the item card defines item’s cost flow is recorded and whether an actual or budgeted value is capitalized and used in the cost calculation. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setup Best Practices: Costing Method -The **Costing Method** on the item card defines item’s cost flow is recorded and whether an actual or budgeted value is capitalized and used in the cost calculation. - - Setting the correct costing method according to item type and business environment is important to ensure economical inventories. - - The following table provides best practices on how to set up the **Costing Method** field. For more information, see [Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md). - -|Setup option|Best practice|Comment| -|------------------|-------------------|-------------| -|FIFO|Use where the product cost is stable.

Use for items with a limited shelf life, because the oldest goods need to be sold before they pass their sell-by date.|An item’s unit cost is the actual value of any receipt of the item, selected by the FIFO rule.

In inventory valuation, it is assumed that the first items placed in inventory are sold first. **Note:** When prices are rising, the balance sheet shows greater value. This means that tax liabilities increase, but credit scores and the ability to borrow cash improve.| -|LIFO|Use where levels of inventories are consistently maintained or increased over time.|An item’s unit cost is the actual value of any receipt of the item, selected by the LIFO rule.

In inventory valuation, it is assumed that the last items placed in inventory are sold first. **Note:** When prices are rising, the value on the income statement decreases. This means that tax liabilities decrease, but the ability to borrow cash deteriorates. **Important:** Disallowed in many countries/regions, as it can be used to depress profit.| -|Average|Use where the product cost is unstable.

Use where inventories are piled or mixed together and cannot be differentiated, such as chemicals.|An item’s unit cost is the exact cost at which the particular unit was received.| -|Specific|Use in production or trade of easily identifiable items with fairly high unit costs.

Use for items that are subject to regulation.

Use for items with serial numbers.|An item’s unit cost is calculated as the average unit cost at each point in time after a purchase.

For inventory valuation, it is assumes that all inventories are sold simultaneously.| -|Standard|Use where cost control is critical.

Use in repetitive manufacturing, to value the costs of direct material, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

Use where there is discipline and staff to maintain standards.|An item’s unit cost is preset based on estimated.

When the actual cost is realized later, the standard cost must be adjusted to the actual cost through variance values.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Costing Methods](design-details-costing-methods.md) - [Design Details: Inventory Costing](design-details-inventory-costing.md) - [Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-global-planning-setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-global-planning-setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index 02829ed9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-global-planning-setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Best practices for global planning setup - description: The **Planning** FastTab in the **Manufacturing Setup** window contains several fields that define global rules for supply planning. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setup Best Practices: Global Planning Setup -The **Planning** FastTab in the **Manufacturing Setup** window contains several fields that define global rules for supply planning. - - The following table provides best practices on how to set up selected global planning parameter fields. For more information about a field, choose the link in the **Setup field** column. - -|Setup field|Best practice|Comment| -|-----------------|-------------------|-------------| -|Use Forecast on Locations|Select if you have forecasts for specific locations.|| -|Components at Location|If items are not defined as SKUs, select the location code of your main warehouse.|This also applies if you only use the requisition worksheet.| -|Blank Overflow Level|Select **Allow Default Calculation** if you are migrating from Microsoft Dynamics NAV 5.0 or earlier.|Use only if you want to allow all or some of your items to overflow the reorder point.| -|Default Dampener Period|Set between 1D and 5D.

If new to planning in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], then set a longer period.|When users are more familiar with the different reasons for action messages, then shorten the dampener period to allow more change suggestions.| -|Default Dampener Quantity|Set between 5 and 20 percent of the item’s lot size.|| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) - [Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-planning-parameters.md b/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-planning-parameters.md deleted file mode 100644 index 099aabc2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-planning-parameters.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setup Best Practices - Planning Parameters - description: The **Planning** FastTab on the item card is the center of a company’s supply chain. Setting the correct planning parameters is very important for cost-effective inventory control and high customer service. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setup Best Practices: Planning Parameters -The **Planning** FastTab on the item card is the center of a company’s supply chain. Setting the correct planning parameters is very important for cost-effective inventory control and high customer service. - - The following table provides best practices on how to set up selected planning parameter fields. For more information about a field, choose the link in the **Setup field** column. - -|Setup field|Best practice|Comment| -|-----------------|-------------------|-------------| -|Reordering Policy||For more information, see [Setup Best Practices: Reordering Policies](setup-best-practices-reordering-policies.md).| -|Reserve|Select **Never** when the item is planned using a reorder point.

In manufacturing, select **Never** to allow the planning system to cover all demands.

Select **Optional** for items that you may want to reserve for top-priority customers.

Select **Always** for non-unique items, such as items of type miscellaneous that are inbound for specific demands.|Reservations generally counteract the purpose of planning, which is to balance demand and supply. Therefore, items that are set up for planning should generally not be reserved.

If the user reserves an inventory quantity for future demand, then the planning foundation will be disturbed, and the reorder point may not work correctly. Even if the projected inventory level is acceptable with regard to the reorder point, the quantities may not be available because of the reservation.| -|Dampener Period|Set with regard to the supplier’s flexibility.|If the supplier accepts last-minute changes to orders, then use a longer period. If the supplier requires firm planning, then shorten your period as much as possible.

For information about the global setup, see [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md).| -|Dampener Quantity||For information about the global setup, see [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md).| -|Include Inventory|Always select when you are using the Lot-for-Lot reordering policy.|Do not select only in special situations, such as when inventory items are not sellable.| -|Safety Lead Time|Set between 1D and 6D.

Set a safety lead time of at least one day to make sure that supplies are available on the day before they are needed.

If using a new supplier, define a longer time until their delivery performance is known.

In manufacturing, define longer safety lead times for critical components.|Supply that is planned by the system to avoid a stock-out will arrive on the same day that the stock-out occurs. This may be several hours too late if, for example, the demand is needed in the morning and the supply arrives in the afternoon. **Note:** The **Safety Lead Time** field uses the base calendar. Therefore, 14D is not necessarily two weeks.| -|Safety Stock Quantity|Use for items with large demand fluctuations.

In manufacturing, use for critical components.

Use for items that are subject to service agreements.|If the **Reorder Point** field is not filled, then the safety stock quantity also functions as a reorder point.| -|Lot Accumulation Period|If you want only few big orders and you accept to carry inventory, then set a long lot accumulation period.

If you want multiple small orders and minimal inventory, then set a short lot accumulation period.|The lot accumulation period is generally the longest period that you will carry inventory.| -|Reorder Point|Base the reorder point on the item’s demand profile.|If historical data shows that the item’s average demand is 100 units during a lead time of seven days, then the reorder point can be set to 100 as a minimum.

This means that when the inventory level falls below 100 units, then the planning system will suggest to replenish because it takes seven days to supply the item, and there must be enough to cover the demand within those seven days.| -|Time Bucket|Leave blank, meaning that the inventory level is checked every day.|Checking the inventory level every day ensures optimal reorder point planning. **Note:** A time bucket of 1W means that the inventory level may be below the reorder point for one week before a supply order is suggested.| -|Rounding Precision|In expensive manufacturing, set to 0.00001.|Large rounding quantities of scrap or material consumption can amount to very large inventory costs. It may therefore be relevant to set the smallest rounding precision to minimize this potential cost.| - -> [!NOTE] -> The best practices for planning parameters on item cards also apply to the same fields on SKU cards. -> -> If companies plan for demand at different locations, then it is strongly advised to define SKUs for each location and that all demand is created by using a value in the **Location Code** field. For more information, see [Design Details: Demand at Blank Location](design-details-demand-at-blank-location.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) - [Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-reordering-policies.md b/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-reordering-policies.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8dafe7b7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-reordering-policies.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setup Best Practices - Reordering Policies - description: The **Reordering Policy** field on item cards offers four different planning methods that determine how the individual planning parameters interact. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setup Best Practices: Reordering Policies -The **Reordering Policy** field on item cards offers four different planning methods that determine how the individual planning parameters interact. - -One best-practice foundation for selecting a reordering policy is the item’s ABC classification. When you use ABC classification for inventory control and supply planning, items are managed according to three different classes depending on their value and volume relative to the total stock. The value-volume distribution of the three classes is shown in the following table. - -|Class|Percent of total stock volume|Percent of total stock value| -|-----|-----------------------------|----------------------------| -|A|10-20|50-70| -|B|20|20| -|C|60-70|10-30| - -The ABC classification states that effort and money can be saved by applying looser control to items of low value-volume than to items of high value-volume. The following illustration shows which reordering policy in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is best suited for A, B, and C items respectively. - -![ABC Classification](media/abc_classification.png "abc_classification") - -The following table provides best practices for selecting between the four policies. - -|Setup option|Best practice|Comment| -|------------------|-------------------|-------------| -|**Order**|Use for A items.

Use for make-to-order items.

In manufacturing, use for top-level items and for expensive components and subassemblies.

Use for items that are purchased as drop shipments and special orders.

Do not use if you do not accept automatic reservation.|A items, such as leather couches in a furniture store, are high-value items with low and irregular order velocity where inventory is unacceptable, or the required attributes vary. The best reordering policy is therefore one that plans specifically for each demand.| -|**Lot-for-Lot**|Use for B items.

In manufacturing, use for components that occur in multiple BOMs. This ensures that purchase orders are combined for the same vendor, so better prices can be negotiated.

Use if you are not sure about which reordering policy to select.|B items, such as dining chairs, have a regular and fairly high order velocity, but also high carrying costs. The best reordering policy for B items is therefore one that is economical by bundling demand in the reorder cycle.

80 percent of items can use this policy.

Can be used successfully without planning parameters.| -|**Fixed Reorder Qty.**|Use for C items.

Combine with reorder-point parameters.

In manufacturing, use for lowest-level components.

Do not use if the item is often reserved.|C items, such as tea cups, are low-value items with high and regular order velocity. The best reordering policy for C items is therefore one that guarantees constant availability by always staying above a reorder point.

If the user reserves a quantity for some distant demand, then the planning foundation will be disturbed. Even if the projected inventory level is acceptable with regard to the reorder point, the quantities may not be available because of the reservation.| -|**Maximum Qty.**|Use for C items with high carrying costs or storing limitations.

Combine with one or more order modifiers (Minimum/Maximum Order Quantity or Order Multiple).|C items, such as tea cups, are low-value items with high and regular order velocity. The best reordering policy for C items is therefore one that guarantees constant availability by always staying above a reorder point, but below a maximum inventory quantity.

To modify the suggested order, you may want the order quantity to be decreased to a specified maximum order quantity, increased to a specified minimum order quantity, or rounded up to meet a specified order multiple. **Note:** If used with a reorder point, then inventory stays between the reorder point and the maximum quantity.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning](setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md) - [Design Details: Reordering Policies](design-details-reordering-policies.md) - [Design Details: Order](design-details-order.md) - [Design Details: Lot-for-Lot](design-details-lot-for-lot.md) - [Design Details: Fixed Reorder Qty.](design-details-fixed-reorder-qty.md) - [Design Details: Maximum Qty.](design-details-maximum-qty.md) - [Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md b/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md deleted file mode 100644 index c0abc606..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/setup-best-practices-supply-planning.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Setup Best Practices - Supply Planning - description: Supply planning is a critical business area. When set up and used correctly, supply planning helps a company avoid stock out and reduce both ordering costs and inventory costs. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setup Best Practices: Supply Planning -Supply planning is a critical business area. When set up and used correctly, supply planning helps a company avoid stock out and reduce both ordering costs and inventory costs. - - It is not possible to prescribe one optimal setup of all planning fields as this varies from company to company because of business variables, such as market situation and business strategy. However, there are best practices for selecting options in items cards and global setup fields to help get the company started with timely and cost-effective inventory flows. - - The following topics provide best-practice information about how to set up selected planning fields that are key to inventory and supply planning. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Learn the best practices for selecting the best reordering policy to plan efficiently and economically for an item according to carrying costs and demand patterns.|[Setup Best Practices: Reordering Policies](setup-best-practices-reordering-policies.md)| -|Learn the best practices for specifying selected planning parameters under the defined reordering policy to plan efficiently and economically for an item according to critical elements, such as lead time, carrying costs, and seasonality.|[Setup Best Practices: Planning Parameters](setup-best-practices-planning-parameters.md)| -|Learn the best practices for applying a general supply strategy to all item cards, such as always receiving items one day before they are needed or dampening the system’s reaction to small demand fluctuations.|[Setup Best Practices: Global Planning Setup](setup-best-practices-global-planning-setup.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) - [Design Details: Planning Parameters](design-details-planning-parameters.md) - [Set Up Complex Application Areas Using Best Practices](set-up-complex-application-areas-using-best-practices.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/setup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/setup.md deleted file mode 100644 index d887f8ab..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/setup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Set Up Dynamics NAV -description: Outlines tasks to set up, initialize, and configure Dynamics NAV to suit your needs. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: configure, initialize -ms.date: 09/01/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Dynamics NAV -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes standard configurations for most business processes, but you can change the configuration to suit the needs of company. - -For example, your chart of accounts is prefilled with a number of posting accounts ready for use. You can, of course, change the chart of accounts to suit your needs. For more information, see [Finance](finance.md). - -From your Home page, you can access assisted setup guides that help you configure certain scenarios and add features to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For information about how to access all assisted and manual setup windows, see [Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md). - -Some functionality, either general or for specific business processes, can be set up manually in addition to the assisted setup. The following lists some of functionality that can you can set up manually. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up payment methods, currencies, and the chart of accounts, and define rules and defaults for managing financial transactions. |[Setting Up Finance](finance-setup-finance.md) | -| Set up your own and your vendors' bank accounts and enable services for importing and exporting bank files. |[Setting Up Banking](bank-setup-banking.md) | -| Configure the rules and values that define your company's sales policies, register new customers, and set up how you communicate with customers. |[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) | -| Configure the rules and values that define your company's purchasing policies, register new vendors, and prioritize your vendors for payment processing. |[Setting Up Purchasing](purchasing-setup-purchasing.md) | -| Configure the rules and values that define the company's inventory policies, set up locations if you keep inventory in multiple warehouses, and categorize your items to improve searching and sorting . |[Setting Up Inventory](inventory-setup-inventory.md) | -| Set up resources, time sheets, and jobs to manage projects. |[Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) | -| Configure how to insure, maintain, and depreciate fixed assets, and how you record the costs of fixed assets in your company books. |[Setting Up Fixed Assets](fa-setup.md) | -|Define the general rules and values for warehouse processes and the specific handling at each location.|[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md)| -|Prepare production BOMs and routings to define how end items are produced, and prepare machine or work centers to perform the required operations.|[Setting Up Manufacturing](production-configure-production-processes.md)| -| Set up unique identification codes for records, such as cards, documents, and journal lines, to track them in the system. |[Creating Number Series](ui-create-number-series.md) | -| Set up the **SMTP Mail Setup** window to send and receive emails from documents within [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. |[How to: Set up Email](madeira-how-setup-email.md) | -| Set up unique identification codes. |[How to: Create Number Series](ui-create-number-series.md) | - -Some areas require you to be an administrator in your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] subscription. For more information, see [Setup and Administration in Dynamics NAV](admin-setup-and-administration.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Project Management](projects-manage-projects.md) -[Fixed Assets](fa-manage.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Manufacturing](production-manage-manufacturing.md) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Setup and Administration in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](admin-setup-and-administration.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-accessibility.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-accessibility.md deleted file mode 100644 index ccbcffa2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-accessibility.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Assistive features -description: Provides an overview of keyboard shortcuts and other assistive features. -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: accessibility, assistive technology, keyboarding -ms.date: 12/20/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Accessibility and Keyboard Shortcuts in [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] -This topic provides information about the features that make [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] readily available to people with disabilities. [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] supports the following accessibility features: - -- Keyboard shortcuts - - For more information, see [Keyboard Shortcuts in [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]](keyboard-shortcuts.md) and [Keyboard Shortcuts [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]](keyboard-shortcuts-windows-client.md). - -- Navigation - -- Headings - -- Alternative text for images and links - -- Support for common assistive technologies - -## Navigation - You can navigate between the tabs and actions in the ribbon, elements in the navigation pane, and other controls on [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] pages and reports using the keyboard. To move the focus from one tab, action, or control to another, press the Tab key to move forward. Press Shift+Tab to move backward. - - By using the tab order, you can also switch between the main browser window and dialog boxes that request confirmation, for example, or the login window. - -## Headings - The HTML source for [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] content uses tags to help users of assistive technology to understand the structure and content of the page. For example, on list pages, the columns are defined in TH tags and the column headings are set with TITLE attribute inside the tag. Captions for elements, such as FastTabs, FactBoxes, and fields are included in heading tags (H1, H2, H3, and H4). - -## Image and Links - A descriptive text for images is set with the ALT attribute inside the IMG tag. A descriptive text for hyperlinks is set with the title attribute inside the A tag. - -## Assistive Technologies -[!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] supports various assistive technologies, such as high contrast, screen readers, and voice recognition software. Some assistive technologies may not work well with certain elements in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] pages. - -## For more accessibility information -You can find additional information about accessibility with Microsoft products and assistive technologies on the [Microsoft Accessibility](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=262160) site. - -## See Also -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-across-business-areas.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-across-business-areas.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6dd111c9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-across-business-areas.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using General Functionality Across Business Areas -description: Learn about the functionality and features that are used across business areas in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: feature overview, functionality -ms.date: 08/21/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# General Business Functionality -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides dedicated functionality for typical business areas, such as finance and sales. For more information, see [Business Functionality](madeira-business-functionality.md). - -To support those business area-specific tasks, you can use a variety of general business functionality, such as defining extended text for document lines and organizing connecting business tasks in workflows. - -The following table lists these general business areas with links to topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Set up standard text codes so you can extend standard text by adding extra lines, and set up conditions for use of the extra lines. |[How to: Define Extended Text](ui-how-define-ext-text.md) | -| Learn how to work with general journals, which are used to post to general ledger accounts and other accounts such as bank, customer, vendor, and fixed assets accounts. |[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) | -|Archive sales and purchase orders, quotes, return orders, and blanket orders, and use the archived document to recreate the document that it was archived from.|[How to: Archive Documents](across-how-to-archive-documents.md)| -|View documents that are related to sales order lines and purchase order lines, including from archived order lines.|[How to: Track Document Lines](across-how-to-track-document-lines.md)| -| Communicate the contents of business documents quickly to your business partners, such as the payment information on sales documents to customers. |[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) | -| Schedule a report to run at a specific date and time. |[Schedule a report to run](ui-work-report.md#ScheduleReport) | -| Manage different types of report layouts. |[Managing Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) | -| Track users' activities.|[Logging Changes in Dynamics NAV](across-log-changes.md)| -|Assign permissions to users, modify permission sets, and group users per permissions.|[How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md)| -| Change [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] by installing extensions that add functionality, changes behavior, or gives you access to new online services. |[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) | -|Set up and use workflows that connect tasks performed by different users or by the system, such as automatic posting. Requesting and granting approval to create or post documents are typical workflow steps.|[Workflow](across-workflow.md)| -|Record external documents in Dynamics NAV, including their file attachments, and then manually create the related documents or automatically convert the files to electronic documents.|[Incoming Documents](across-income-documents.md)| -| Set up data exchange definitions to you can send and receive electronic documents. |[Exchanging Data Electronically](across-data-exchange.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-basic-settings.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-basic-settings.md deleted file mode 100644 index 57fa4b02..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-basic-settings.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Viewing and Editing Basic Settings in Dynamics NAV -description: Learn how to change some of the basic settings in Dynamics NAV, for example, the Role Center, company, or the work date. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: change Role Center, notification, change company, change work date -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Changing Basic Settings -In the **My Settings** window, you can see and change basic settings for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Role Center -The Role Center represents the Home page, a starting page that is designed for the needs of the role. On the Home page, you have an overview of the business. To the left you see a navigation bar that gives you easy access to customers, vendors, items, and so on. - -In the center you find the Activities tiles. Activities show current data and can be chooseed or tapped for easy access to the selected document. The Key Performance Indicators can be set up to display a selected chart for a visual representation of, for example, cash flow or income and expenses. - -You can also build up a list of Favorite Customers on the Home page for accounts that you do business with often or need to pay special attention to. Use the arrows to collapse part of the page and make more room to show specific data. At the top of the Home page you will find all of the actions that can be applied to the current content. This too can be collapsed and you only need to choose or tap within the collapsed area to view it again. - -The default Role Center is **Business Manager**, but you can select another Role Center that fits your needs better. For more information, see [How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md). - -## Company -A company functions as a container for data in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. There can be multiple companies in a database, but only one can be selected at a time. - -The default company is called CRONUS and contains demonstration data only. - -> [!TIP] -> If you want to display a different name for your company in the application (such as on the Home page), set the **Name** field on the **Company Information** page or the **Display Name** field on the **Companies** page. - -## Work Date -The default work date is usually today's date. You may have to temporarily change the work date to be able to perform tasks, such as completing transactions for a date that is not the current date. - -> [!TIP] -> Type **w** to quickly enter the work date in a date field. Write **t** to quickly enter the current date in the date field. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The work date is only changed until you close the company or until the date changes. If you open a different company or open the same company the next day and still have to use a different work date, then you must set the work date again. - -## Region -The **Region** setting determines how dates, times, numbers, and currencies are shown or formatted. - -## Changing When I Receive Notifications -Choose this link to view or change the notifications that you get about certain events or changes in status, such as when you are about to invoice a customer who has an overdue balance, or the available inventory is lower than the quantity you are about to sell. For more information, see [Smart Notifications](ui-smart-notifications.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-role.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-role.md deleted file mode 100644 index 369917fd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-change-role.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "How to: Change the Role Center" -description: Learn how to change roles using the Role Center for Dynamics NAV. -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen -ms.author: solsen -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# How to: Change the Role Center for Dynamics NAV -The Home page is your main point of entry into Dynamics NAV. Here you can get an overview of the daily work tasks and their status. Tasks that you perform often are accessed through the tiles in the content area, the navigation pane on the left, and through actions in the ribbon. - -The content on the Home page is based on the selected Role Center. The standard Role Center for Dynamics NAV is **Business Manager**, but you can change this and choose between a number of Role Centers. - -## To change role center -1. In the top right corner, under the **Settings** menu, choose **My Settings**. -2. In the **My Settings** window, in the **Role Center** field, select the Role Center that you want to set as the standard. For example, select **Accountant**. -3. Choose the **OK** button. -4. Sign out of Dynamics NAV and then sign in again to have the change take effect. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to Dynamics NAV](across-get-started.md) -[Work With Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-create-number-series.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-create-number-series.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0c0120a1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-create-number-series.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: 'How to: Create Number Series ' -description: Learn how to set up number series that assign unique ID codes to accounts and documents in Dynamics NAV. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: numbers, numbering -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# How to: Create Number Series -For each company that you set up, you need to assign unique identification codes to things such as general ledger accounts, customer and vendor accounts, invoices, and other documents. Numbering is important not only for identification. A well-designed numbering system also makes the company more manageable and easy to analyze, and can reduce the number of errors that occur in data entry. - -> [!NOTE] -> We recommend that you use the same number series codes as you see listed in the **No. Series List** window in the CRONUS demonstration company. Codes such as *P-INV+* might not make immediate sense to you, but [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] has a number of default settings that depend on these number series codes. - -You create a numbering system by setting up one or more codes for each type of master data or document. For example, you can set up one code for numbering customers, another code for numbering sales invoices, and another code for numbering documents in general journals. After you have set up a code, you set must set up at least one number series line. The number series line contains information such as the first and last number in the series and the starting date. You can set up more than one number series line per number series code, with a different starting date for each line. The series will be used consecutively, starting each series on the respective starting date. - -You typically set up your number series to automatically insert the next consecutive number on new cards or documents that you create. However, you can also set a number series up to allow that you manually enter the new number. You specify this with the **Manual Nos.** check box. - -If you want to use more than one number series code for one type of master data - for example, if you want to use different number series for different categories of items - you can use number series relationships. - -## To create a new number series -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **No. Series**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. On the new line, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -**TIP**: To allow manual entry of a number on new cards or documents, deselect the **Default Nos.** check box and select the **Manual Nos.** check box. - -Now when you create a new card or document that is set up to use the number series in question, you can manually fill in the **No.** field with any value. - -## To set up where a number series is used -The following procedure shows how to set number series up for the Sales area. The steps are similar for other areas. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables** window, on the **Number Series** FastTab, select the desired number series for each sales card or document. - -The selected number will now be used to fill in the **No.** field on the card or document in question, according to the settings you made on the number series line. - -## To create relationships between number series -If you have set up more than one number series code for the same kind of basic information or transactions, you can create relationships between the codes. This feature can assist you in deciding among the codes when you use a number. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **No. Series**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line with the number series you want to create relationships for and then choose **Relationships**. -3. In the **Series Code** field, enter the code for the number series that you want to relate to the series you selected in step 2. -4. Add a line for each code that you want to relate to the selected number series. -5. Close the window. - -Now when you set up something that requires a number, you can use the relationships you created to select among the related number series. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-customizing-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-customizing-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index 389693dc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-customizing-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Customizing Dynamics NAV -description: Learn about adding functionality and customizing Dynamics NAV. -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: personalize, add-in, extend, customize -ms.date: 07/07/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Customizing Dynamics NAV -There are different ways to customize the application to give you and your colleagues access to the features, functionality, and data that you need most, in a manner that bests suits your daily work. This table outlines who typically performs each customization type, and who the customizations affect. - -| Customization |Who does it| Description | Who sees the changes | More information | -|-----------------|---|---------------|------------------------|--------------------| -|Permissions-based|IT Pro, developer|Show or hide user interface elements based on the license or the user's permissions to the underlying tables. All elements, fields, actions, and page parts, can be removed from the user’s view.|All users in all companies.|[Removing Elements from the User Interface According to Permissions](/dynamics-nav/Removing-Elements-from-the-User-Interface-According-to-Permissions)| -|Install an extension|Administrator|Extensions are like small applications that add functionality, change behavior, provide access to new online services, and more. For example, Microsoft provides an extension that provides integration with PayPal Payments Standard.|All users in all companies.|[Customizing Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md)| -|Configuration|Administrator| Customize the user interface for multiple users by adding/removing user interface elements based on permissions, or by customizing a profile that the users are assigned to (using the same personlaization features available to users).|All users of a profile. |[Configuring the User Interface for Users](admin-configure-user-interface.md)| -|Personalizing the Workspace|Any user|Change the layout and content of your pages.|User only.|[Personalizing Workspaces](ui-personalization-overview.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-criteria-filters.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-criteria-filters.md deleted file mode 100644 index 61d6bc4f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-criteria-filters.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,190 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Searching Data and Entering Filter Criteria -description: Describes how to work with filters, such as the Quick Filter, to refine the results you get when you search for data. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: delimit, FlowFilter -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Searching, Filtering, and Sorting Data -There are a few things that you can do that will help you find, pinpoint, and scan records in a list. These include sorting, searching and filtering. - -When you want to search for data, such as customer names, addresses, or product groups, you enter criteria. In search criteria you can use all the numbers and letters that you normally use in the specific field. In addition, you can use special symbols to further filter the results. There are two ways to search: using the Quick Filter or column filters. - -## Sorting -Sorting makes it easy for you to get a quick overview of your data. If you have many customers, for example, you can choose to sort them by **Customer No.**, **Customer Posting Group**, **Currency Code**, **Country Region Code**, or **Sales Tax Registration No.** to get the overview you need. - -To sort a list, you can either choose a column heading text to toggle between ascending and descending order, or choose the small downs arrow in the column heading, and then choose **Ascending** or **Descending**. - -> [!NOTE] -> Sorting is not supported images, BLOB fields, FlowFilters, and fields that do not belong to a table. - -## Searching by using the Quick Filter -You can add filters to all pages by using the Quick Filter. The Quick Filter is enabled by choosing the magnifier icon in the top right corner of a page. This filtering type is used for a fast entry of criteria. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> The Quick Filter provides an easy access to filter data by entering plain text, but does also provide a lot of search criteria options. Depending on whether you enter plain text or text including symbols, the Quick Filter behaves differently. - -* If you enter plain text in the search criteria, the search criteria is interpreted as a case insensitive search that contains certain text. -* If you enter text including symbols in the search criteria, the search criteria is interpreted exactly as you entered it, and the search is case sensitive. - -### Quick filter criteria - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Search CriteriaInterpreted as...Returns...
man@*man*All records that contain the text man and case insensitive.
se@*se*All records that contain the text se and case insensitive.
Man*Starts with Man and case sensitive.All records that start with the text Man.
'man'An exact text and case sensitive.All records that match man exactly.
Starts with and case insensitive.All records that start with man.
@*manEnds with and case insensitive.All records that end with man.
- -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot use a wildcard when filtering on enumeration fields, such as the **Status** field on sales orders. To enter a filter for this type of field, you can enter the numeric value as a filtering parameter. For example, in the **Status** field on a sales order that has the values **Open**, **Released**, **Pending Approval**, and **Pending Prepayment**, use the values **0**, **1**, **2**, and **3** to filter for these options. - -## Searching by using column Filters -You can add a filter on one or more columns in a list. Filtering on columns is more flexible and enhanced than the Quick Filter. - -### To add a filter on a column -1. Before you add a filter, choose ![Show as list](media/ui_show_as_list_icon.png "Show as list arrow left") icon to change to the list view. -2. Choose the downwards arrow in the column heading, and then choose **Filter**. -3. Do one of the following: - - Choose *...* next to the box to select a value from a list. - - Enter filter criteria in the box. See the next section for details. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Filter criteria and symbols -When you enter criteria, you can use all the numbers and letters that you can normally use in the field. In addition, you can use special symbols to further filter the results. The following tables show the symbols which can be used in filters. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> There may be instances where field values contain these symbols and you want to filter on them. To do this, you must include the filter expression that contains the symbol in quotation marks (''). For example, if you want to filter on records that start with the text *S&R*, the filter expression is 'S&R*'. - -### (..) Interval - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|1100..2100|Numbers 1100 through 2100| -|..2500|Up to and including 2500| -|..12 31 00|Dates up to and including 12 31 00| -|P8..|Information for accounting period 8 and thereafter| -|..23|From the beginning date until 23-current month-current year 23:59:59| -|23..|From 23-current month-current year 0:00:00 until the end of time| -|22..23|From 22-current month-current year 0:00:00 until 23-current month-current year 23:59:59| - -### (|) Either/or - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|1200|1300|Numbers with 1200 or 1300| - -### (<>) Not equal to - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|<>0|All numbers except 0

The SQL Server Option allows you to combine this symbol with a wild card expression. For example, <>A* meaning not equal to any text that starts with A.| - -### (>) Greater than - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|>1200|Numbers greater than 1200| - -### (>=) Greater than or equal to - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|>=1200|Numbers greater than or equal to 1200| - -### (<) Less than - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|<1200|Numbers less than 1200| - -### (<=) Less than or equal to - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|<=1200|Numbers less than or equal to 1200| - -### (&) And - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|>200&<1200|Numbers greater than 200 and less than 1200| - -### ('') An exact character match - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|'man'|Text that matches man exactly and is case sensitive.| - -### (@) Case insensitive - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|@man*|Text that starts with man and is case insensitive.| - -### (*) An indefinite number of unknown characters - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|*Co*|Text that contains "Co" and is case sensitive.| -|*Co|Text that ends with "Co" and is case sensitive.| -|Co*|Text that begins with "Co" and is case sensitive.| - -### (?) One unknown character - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|Hans?n|Text such as Hansen or Hanson| - -### Combined format expressions - -|Sample Expression|Records Displayed| -|-----------------------|-----------------------| -|5999|8100..8490|Include any records with the number 5999 or a number from the interval 8100 through 8490.| -|..1299|1400..|Include records with a number less than or equal to 1299 or a number equal to 1400 or greater (all numbers except 1300 through 1399).| -|>50&<100|Include records with numbers that are greater than 50 and less than 100 (numbers 51 through 99).| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index c5d8b587..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enter Data in Fields - description: There are many general functions that help you enter data in a quick and easy way. The general functions for entering data are described in this topic. - author: jswymer - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 05/12/2020 - ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to Enter Data in Fields - -## Entering Data - -There are many general functions that help you enter data in a quick and easy way. The general functions for entering data are described in this article. - -The examples in this article use the demonstration data. - -### Mandatory Fields - -When you enter data on pages, certain fields are marked with a red asterisk. The red asterisk means that the field must be filled to complete a certain process that uses the field, such as posting a transaction that uses the value in the field. - -Even though the field contains a red asterisk, you are not forced to fill the field before you continue to other fields or close the page. The red asterisk only serves as a reminder that you will be blocked from completing a certain process. - - -### Finding Data As You Type - - When you start to type characters in a field, a drop-down list is displayed and shows possible field values. The list changes as you type more characters, and you can select the correct value when it is displayed. - - Many fields have a down arrow button that you can choose. You choose the arrow to get a list of data that is available to enter in the field. The button has two functions depending on the type of field: - -- Lookup - Displays information from another table that you can enter in the field. You can select one piece of data at a time. - -- Drop-down - Displays the set of options that exist for the field. You can select only one of the options. - -### Copy Fields or Lines - - Depending on the type of writable document, you can copy individual line fields or whole lines to other lines in the document. Read-only data, such as posted entries, cannot be copied. - - Several database dependencies are used to determine if fields or lines can be copied. One way to determine these dependencies is to view the shortcut menu. The content of the shortcut menu indicates which copy functions are supported by displaying either of these functions: - -- Copy Cell - -- Copy Rows - -- Paste Rows - - For example, database records, such as lines on a sales order, and master data, such as cards in the **Items** window, cannot be duplicated. For this kind of data, the shortcut menu typically has the **Copy Cell** or **Copy Rows** functions. If the **Paste** function is not available this indicates that you can only paste the data into external documents. Single fields on a sales line, however, can be copied to the same column in other sales lines. - - Journal lines are very flexible and can be copied freely in the same journal, indicated by the presence of **Paste** on the shortcut menu. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you copy a journal line or document line, the fields that are not in your view are not copied to the new line. - -#### To copy previous field - -- To enter the value of the field immediately above the active field, select **Copy Previous** from the shortcut menu. - -### Entering Quantities by Calculation - - When entering numbers into quantity fields, such as the **Quantity** field on an item journal line, you can enter the formula instead of the sum quantity. - -### Examples - -- If you enter 19+19, the field is calculated to 38. - -- If you enter 41-9, the field is calculated to 32. - -- If you enter 12*4, the field is calculated to 48. - -- If you enter 12/4, the field is calculated to 3. - -## Entering Negative Numbers - -You can enter negative numbers in two ways. The number -20.5 can be entered as: - -- -20.5 - - or -- 20.5- - - In both cases, the amount will be recorded in as -20.5. - - If the last character of the expression is a **+** or a **-**, the entire expression will be recorded with that sign. An example, **10-20+** will result in 10 and not -10. - -### Entering Dates and Times - -You can enter dates and times in all the fields that are specifically assigned to dates (date fields). You can enter dates with or without separators. - -> [!NOTE] -> How you enter dates and times depends on your **Region** settings. For more information, see [Changing Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md). - -#### Entering Dates - - In a date field you can enter two, four, six, or eight digits: - -- If you enter only two digits, this is interpreted as the day, and it will add the month and the year of the work date. - -- If you enter four digits, this is interpreted as the day and the month, and it will add the year of the work date. - -- If the date you want to enter is in the range 01/01/1930 through 12/31/2029, you can enter the year with two digits; otherwise, enter the year with four digits. - - You can also enter a date as a weekday followed by a week number and, optionally, a year (for example, Mon25 or mon25 means Monday in week 25). - - Instead of entering a specific date, you can enter one of two codes. - -|Code|Result| -|--------------|----------------| -|t|This is today's date (the system date for the computer).| -|w|This is the work date that is setup in the application. To change the work date, see [Changing Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md). You may want to use a work date if you have many transactions with a date other than today's date.| - -<## Closing Date - When you close a fiscal year, you can use closing dates to indicate that an entry is a closing entry. A closing date technically is between two dates, for example between Dec 31 and Jan 1. - - To specify that a date is a closing date, put C just before the date: C123101. - -### Entering Times - - When you enter times, you can insert any separator sign that you want between the units, but it is not required. You do not have to write minutes, seconds, or AM/PM. - - The following table lists the various ways in which times can be entered and how they are interpreted. - -|Entry|Interpretation| -|---------------|------------------------| -|5|05:00:00| -|5:30|05:30:00| -|0530|05:30:00| -|5:30:5|05:30:05| -|053005|05:30:05| -|5:30:5,50|05:30:05.5| -|053005050|05:30:05.05| - - You must enter two digits for each unit of time if you do not enter a separator. - -### Entering Datetimes - - When you enter datetimes you must enter a space between the date and the time. - - The following table lists the various ways in which you can enter datetimes and how they are interpreted. - -|Entry|Interpretation| -|---------------|------------------------| -|131202 132455|13-12-02 13:24:55| -|1-12-02 10|01-12-02 10:00:00| -|1.12.02 5|01-12-02 05:00:00| -|1.12.02|01-12-02 00:00:00| -|11 12|11-current month-current year 12:00:00| -|1112 12|11-12-current year 12:00:00| -|t or today|today's date 00:00:00| -|t time|today's date actual time| -|t 10:30|today's date 10:30:00| -|t 3:3:3|today's date 03:03:03| -|w or workdate|the working date 00:00:00| -|m or Monday|Monday of the current week 00:00:00| -|tu or Tuesday|Tuesday of the current week 00:00:00| -|we or Wednesday|Wednesday of the current week 00:00:00| -|th or Thursday|Thursday of the current week 00:00:00| -|f or Friday|Friday of the current week 00:00:00| -|s or Saturday|Saturday of the current week 00:00:00| -|su or Sunday|Sunday of the current week 00:00:00| -|tu 10:30|Tuesday of the current week 10:30:00| -|tu 3:3:3|Tuesday of the current week 03:03:03| - -### Entering Duration - - You enter a duration as a number followed by its unit of measure. - - Here are some examples. - -|Duration|Unit of measure**| -|------------------|-------------------------| -|2h|2 hrs| -|6h 30 m|6 hrs 30 mins| -|6.5h|6 hrs 30 mins| -|90m|1 hr 30 mins| -|2d 6h 30m|2 days 6 hrs 30 mins| -|2d 6h 30m 56s 600ms|2 days 6 hrs 30 mins 56 secs 600 msecs| - - You can also enter a number and it is automatically converted to a duration. The number you enter is converted according to the default unit of measure that has been specified for the duration field. - - To see what unit of measure is being used in a duration field, enter a number and see which unit of measure it is converted to. - - The number 5 is converted to 5 hrs, if the unit of measure is hours. - -### Setting Date Ranges - - You can set filters containing a start date and an end date to display only the data contained in that date range or time interval. Special rules apply to the way you set date ranges. - -|**Meaning**|**Sample expression**|**Entries included**| -|-----------------|---------------------------|--------------------------| -|**Equal to**|12 15 00|Only those posted on 12 15 00.| -|**Interval**|12 15 00..01 15 01

..12 15 00|Those posted on dates between and including 12 15 00 and 01 15 01.

Those posted on 12 15 00 or earlier.| -|**Either/or**|12 15 00|12 16 00|Those posted on either 12 15 00 or 12 16 00. If there are entries posted on both days, they will all be displayed.| - - You can also combine the various format types. - -|**Sample expression**|**Entries included**| -|---------------------------|--------------------------| -|12 15 00|12 01 00..12 10 00|Entries posted either on 12 15 00 or on dates between and including 12 01 00 and 12 10 00.| -|..12 14 00|12 30 00..|Entries posted on 12 14 00 or earlier, or entries posted on 12 30 00 or later - that is, all entries except those posted on dates between and including 12 15 00 and 12 29 00.| - -### Using Date Formulas - - A date formula is a short, abbreviated combination of letters and numbers that specifies how to calculate dates. You can enter date formulas in various date calculation fields and in recurring frequency fields in recurring journals. - -> [!NOTE] -> In all data formula fields, one day is automatically included to cover today as the day when the period starts. Accordingly, if you enter 1W, for example, then the period is actually eight days because today is included. To specify a period of seven days (one true week) including the period starting date, then you must enter 6D or 1W-1D. - - Here are some examples of how date formulas can be used: - -- The date formula in the recurring frequency field in recurring journals determines how often the entry on the journal line will be posted. - -- The date formula in the Grace Period field for a specified reminder level determines the period of time that must pass from the due date (or from the date of the previous reminder) before a reminder will be created. - -- The date formula in the Due Date Calculation field determines how to calculate the due date on the reminder. - - The date calculation formula can contain a maximum of 20 characters, both numbers and letters. You can use the following letters, which are abbreviations for time specifications. - -| Character | Description | -|-|-| -|C|Current| -|D|Day(s)| -|W|Week(s)| -|M|Month(s)| -|Q|Quarter(s)| -|Y|Year(s)| - - You can construct a date formula in three ways. - - The following example shows how current plus a time unit. - -| Character | Description | -|-|-| -|CW|Current week| -|CM|Current month| - - The following example shows how a number and a time unit. A number cannot be larger than 9999. - -| Character | Description | -|-|-| -|10D|10 days from today| -|2W|2 weeks from today| - - The following example shows how a time unit and a number. - -| Character | Description | -|-|-| -|D10|The next 10th day of a month| -|WD4|The next 4th day of a week (Thursday)| - - The following example shows how you can combine these three forms as needed. - -| Character | Description | -|-|-| -|CM+10D|Current month + 10 days| - - The following example shows how you can use a minus sign to indicate a date in the past. - -| Character | Description | -|-|-| -|-1Y|1 year ago from today| - -[!CAUTION] -> If the location uses a base calendar, then the date formula that you enter in, for example, the **Shipping Time** field is interpreted according to the calendar working days. For example, a 1W means seven working days. For more information, see Base Calendar Card. - -## See Also - - [Searching, Filtering, and Sorting Data](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-date-ranges.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-date-ranges.md deleted file mode 100644 index c823de07..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-enter-date-ranges.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting date ranges in Dynamics NAV -description: Learn about getting a report to show data from specific time periods using date ranges in Dynamics NAV. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: dates, reporting, filter -ms.date: 05/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Entering Date Ranges in Dynamics NAV -You can set filters containing a start date and an end date to display only the data contained in that date range or time interval. Special rules apply to the way you set date ranges. Let's take the **Customer Top 10** as an example: - -![Setting a date range in the request page for the Customer Top 10 list](./media/ui-enter-date-ranges/customer-top10-list.png) - -Here you can limit the report to a date range such as the past 2 weeks, or a total of 6 weeks, or whatever range you want. To set date ranges, you enter dates and then use either **..** or **|** to set the range. In our example, to show the top 10 customers for the first two weeks of May, you would set the date filter to *05 01 17..05 14 17*. -Here are a couple of other examples: - -| Meaning | Example | Entries included | -|---|---|---| -|Equal to| 12 15 16 |Only those posted on December 15 2016.| -|Interval| 12 15 16..01 15 17

..12 15 16|Those posted on dates between and including December 15 2016 and January 15 2017.

Those posted on December 15 2016 or earlier.| -|Either/or|12 15 16|12 16 16|Those posted on either December 15 or December 16 2016. If there are entries posted on both days, they will all be displayed.| - -You can also combine the various format types. - -| Example | Entries included | -|---|---| -|12 15 16|12 01 16..05 31 17 | Entries posted either on December 15 2016 or on dates between and including December 01 2016 and May 31 2017. | -|..12 14 16|12 30 16.. | Entries posted on December 14 or earlier, or entries posted on December 30 or later - that is, all entries except those posted on dates between and including December 15 and 29. | - -Note that we have used the US date format MMDDYY here. As [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] becomes available in other markets, you'll be able to use the formats that you are used to. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Entering Criteria in Filters ](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-accountant-portal.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-accountant-portal.md deleted file mode 100644 index edd6da08..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-accountant-portal.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Accountant Portal -description: Provides information about the Accountant Portal extension. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize, accountant -ms.date: 09/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Accountant Portal for Dynamics NAV -This application provides a dashboard with summary data for each client of an accountant. The portal displays financial KPIs as well as a direct link to the client’s financial application. - -The dashboard is a highly specialized Role Center for a better overview of your clients. -[![Accountant Portal](./media/ui-extensions-accportal/accountant-portal.png)](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=851257) - -When you first install the extension, a sample company helps you get started. You can delete the sample company at any time. - -## Installing the Extension -When you install the extension in your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you will be asked if you want to use it now. If you do, then you must sign out and sign in again, because the extension replaces your current Role Center and adds permissions to your user profile. - -For more information, see [Accountant Experiences in Dynamics NAV](finance-accounting.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> The current version of the extension requires that your clients use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Using the extension -This extension is used when you sign up at [Dynamics NAV for Accountants on Microsoft.com](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/financial-insights-for-accountants). If you install the extension in your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], it will replace your current Role Center. If you then want to return to the other Role Center, then you can do that in My Settings. For more information, see [How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Accountant Experiences in Dynamics NAV](finance-accounting.md) -[Finance](finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-ceridian-payroll.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-ceridian-payroll.md deleted file mode 100644 index 937a6fca..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-ceridian-payroll.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Importing Payroll or Salary Data Using the Ceridian Payroll Extension -description: Use this extension to import payroll transactions from the Ceridian HR/Payroll (US) and Ceridian PowerPay (Canada) services. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize, salary, wage -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# The Ceridian Payroll Extension to Dynamics NAV -To account for salary payments and related transactions, you must import and post financial transactions made by your payroll provider to the general ledger. - -To do this, you first import a file that you receive from the payroll provider into the **General Journal** window. Then you map the external accounts in the payroll file to the relevant G/L accounts. Lastly, you post the payroll transactions according to the account mapping. For more information, see [How to: Import Payroll Transactions](finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md). - -The Ceridian Payroll extension allows you to import payroll transactions from the Ceridian HR/Payroll (US) and Ceridian PowerPay (Canada) services. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions ](ui-extensions.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2e990e8f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Migrate Data from Dynamics GP with the Data Migration Extension -description: Use the Dynamics GP Data Migration extension to migrate customers, vendors, inventory items, and accounts from Dynamics GP to Dynamics NAV. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize, import, implement -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# The Dynamics GP Data Migration Extension for Dynamics NAV -This extension makes it easy to migrate customers, vendors, inventory items, and accounts from Dynamics GP to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. If your business uses Dynamics GP today, you can export the relevant master records and then open an assisted setup guide to add the data to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For more information, see [Migrate Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md). - -## Exporting Data from Dynamics GP -You must have exported some or all of your existing customers, vendors, inventory items, and accounts to a file, using the Dynamics GP functionality for data export. For the purposes of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can export the following types of data: - -* Account -* Customer -* Item -* Vendor - -The Dynamics GP Data Migration extension automatically maps the exported data so that your data is quickly available to you in your new [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company. During the process, supporting setup information is created, such as posting groups. Inventory items will be brought into the system with FIFO as the cost valuation method. Accounts will be set up as the main account segment from Dynamics GP with dimensions, because [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] does not have account segments. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions ](ui-extensions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-getaddressio.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-getaddressio.md deleted file mode 100644 index 68f72cba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-getaddressio.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the GetAddress.io UK Postcodes Extension -description: Retrieve addresses for entities like customers, vendors, employees, and banks in the United Kingdom from the GetAddress.io service. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: get-started -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: GetAddress.io, postcodes, postal, address, extension -ms.date: 04/20/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf ---- - -# The GetAddress.io UK Postcodes Extension to Microsoft Dynamics NAV -The GetAddress.io UK Postcodes extension can save time and prevent mistakes when you enter addresses for entities like customers, vendors, bank accounts, and employees. For example, when you're creating a customer, you just choose a postcode and [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] shows a list of addresses. Pick the address you want, and presto, the address fields are filled out. - -## To use the GetAddress.io UK Postcodes extension when you enter an address -1. Under **Address**, choose **Look up address from postcode**. - - > [!NOTE] - > The **Look up address from postcode** option is available only if the **Country/Region Code** field is either empty, or contains **GB**. -2. In the **Postcode Search** window, in the **Postcode** field, enter or choose the postcode. -3. In the **Address Selection** window, choose the address. - -> [!TIP] -> If you know the street number, you can filter the addresses by entering some or all of the number in the **Delivery Point** field. diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-image-analyzer.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-image-analyzer.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0790f895..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-image-analyzer.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Image Analyzer Extension -description: This extensions lets you analyze images of contact persons and items to find attributes, so you can quickly assign them in Dynamics NAV. -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: API, extension, Cognitive Services, image, computer vision, attribute, tag, recognition -ms.date: 06/19/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# The Image Analyzer Extension for [!INCLUDE[navnow](includes/navnow_md.md)] -The Image Analyzer extension uses powerful image analytics provided by the Computer Vision API for Microsoft Cognitive Services to detect attributes in the images that you import for items and contact persons, so you can easily review and assign them. For items, attributes could be whether the item is a table or a car, and whether it is red or blue. For contact persons, attributes can be gender or age. - -Image Analyzer suggests attributes based on tags that the Computer Vision API finds, and a confidence level. By default, it suggests attributes only if it is at least 80% sure that the attribute is correct. You can set another confidence level, if needed. To learn more about how the tags and confidence level are determined, see [Computer Vision API](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=851476). - -Image Analyzer is free in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], but there is a limit to the number of items that you can analyze during a certain period of time. By default, you can analyze 100 images per month. - -After you enable the extension, Image Analyzer runs each time you import an image to an item or contact person. You will see the attributes, confidence level, and details right away, and can decide what to do with each attribute. If you imported images before you enabled the Image Analyzer extension, you must go to the item or contact cards and choose the **Analyze Picture** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> By enabling this extension you agree that Microsoft may store your data and use it to improve Microsoft services, such as making the Computer Vision API better. To help protect your privacy, we take steps to make your data anonymous and keep it secure. We will not publish your data or let other people use it. You can remove the image from the item in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], however, the Computer Vision API will still have the image in its de-identified form. For more information, see [Microsoft Trust Center](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=851463). - -## Requirements -There are a few requirements for the images: - -* Image formats: JPEG, PNG, GIF, BMP -* Maximum file size: Less than 4 MB -* Image dimensions: Greater than 50 x 50 pixels - -## Blocking suggested attributes -If the analysis suggests an attribute that you do not want to see you can block the attribute. Use caution, however. Blocked attributes are not suggested for other items or contact persons either. If you regret blocking an attribute, you can choose **Blocked Attributes**, and then delete the attribute from the list. - -## To enable Image Analyzer -The Image Analyzer extension is built-in to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You just need to turn it on. - -> [!NOTE] -> To enable the Image Analyzer extension, you must be an administrator. Make sure that you are assigned the **SUPER** user permission set. - -1. To enable the Image Analyzer extension, do one of the following: - -* Open an item or contact card. In the notification bar, choose **Analyze Images**, and then follow the steps in the assisted setup guide. -* Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Connections**, and then choose **Image Analysis Setup**. Choose the **Enable Image Analyzer** check box, and then complete the steps in the assisted setup guide. - -> [!TIP] -> The **Image Analysis Setup** page is also where you can change the degree of confidence for attribute suggestions. For example, if you want to require a greater degree of confidence, you can enter a higher percentage. - -## To analyze an image of an item -The following steps describe how to analyze an image that was imported before you enabled the Image Analyzer extension. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the item, and then choose the **Analyze Picture** action. -3. The **Image Analyzer Attributes** page displays the detected attributes, the confidence level, and other details about the attribute. Use the **Action to perform** options to specify what to do with the attribute. - -> [!TIP] -> You can add the name of the attribute to the item description by choosing **Add to item description**. For example, this can be useful for quickly adding detail. - -## To analyze a picture of a contact person -The following steps describe how to analyze an image that was imported before you enabled the Image Analyzer extension. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Contacts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the contact person, and then choose the **Analyze Picture** action. -3. On the **Profile Questionnaire** FastTab, review the suggestions, and make corrections if needed. - -## To use your own account for the Computer Vision API -You can also use your own account for the Computer Vision API, for example, if you want to analyze more images than we allow. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Image Analyzer Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the **API URI** and **API Key** that you received for Computer Vision API. - -> [!NOTE] -> You must add **/analyze** at the end of the API URI, if it isn't already there. For example: ```https://cronus.api.cognitive.microsoft.com/vision/v1.0/analyze```. - -## To see how many analyses you have left in the current period -You can view the number of analyses you've done, and how many you can still do, in the current period. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Image Analyzer Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. The **Limit type**, **Limit value**, and **Analyzes performed** provide the usage information. - -## To stop using the Image Analyzer extension -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Service Connections**, and then choose **Image Analyzer Setup**. -2. Clear the **Enable Image Analyzer** check box. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Item Attributes](inventory-how-work-item-attributes.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-other.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-other.md deleted file mode 100644 index b78cc3ad..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-other.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Extensions for Dynamics NAV Provided by Other Companies -description: Lists the apps and extensions to customize Dynamics NAV provided by other companies. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize -ms.date: 07/05/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Microsoft Dynamics NAV Extensions by Other Providers -At [AppSource.microsoft.com](https://appsource.microsoft.com/), you can get extensions for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Some extensions are provided by Microsoft, and other extensions are provided by other companies. We refer to the websites that these companies provide for more information about the extensions that are not published by Microsoft. You can find this information at [AppSource.microsoft.com](https://appsource.microsoft.com/en-us/marketplace/apps?product=dynamics-365%3Bdynamics-365-for-financials&page=1). - -The list of the extensions by other companies grows each month. So keep an eye out for [AppSource.microsoft.com](https://appsource.microsoft.com/en-us/marketplace/apps?product=dynamics-365%3Bdynamics-365-for-financials&page=1) and get apps to help you in your work in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-paypal-payments-standard.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-paypal-payments-standard.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0f31a12b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-paypal-payments-standard.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the PayPal Payments Standard Extension -description: Describes how to use the extension to enable customers to make payments with PayPal. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# The PayPal Payments Standard Extension to Dynamics NAV -Customers continuously require higher customer service, both in terms of product quality but also in terms of delivery and payment options. The PayPal Payments Standard service helps you increase your customer service. - -As an alternative to collecting payments through bank transfer or credit cards, you can offer your customers to pay you through their PayPal account. When you send a sales invoice or sales order by email, there is a PayPal link in the email body and in the attached PDF document. When the customer chooses the link, the service page for their PayPal account appears showing the payment details for the sale. The customer can then pay the invoice as any other PayPal payment. - -The PayPal Payments Standard service provides the following benefits: - -* Customer payments arrive faster in your bank account. -* Customers have more ways to pay invoices. -* PayPal offers a trustworthy payment service, which customers prefer to entering credit card information on web sites. -* PayPal offers multiple ways of handling payments, including credit card processing, PayPal accounts, and other sources. -* The PayPal link can be added automatically to sales documents or manually by the user. -* The PayPal Payments Standard service does not involve monthly fees or setup fees. -* Because it is an extension, you can easily enable the PayPal Payment Standard service when and if your business requires it. - -For more information, see [How to: Enable Customer Payment Through PayPal](sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8c320ea2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the QuickBooks Data Migration Extension -description: Describes how to use the extension to import customers, vendors, items, and accounts from QuickBooks Desktop to Dynamics NAV. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize, import, implement -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# The QuickBooks Data Migration Extension for Dynamics NAV -This extension makes it easy to migrate customers, vendors, items, and accounts from QuickBooks Desktop to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. If your business uses QuickBooks today, you can export the relevant information and then open an assisted setup guide to upload the data to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. -For more information, see [Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md). - -## Exporting Data from QuickBooks Desktop -You must have exported some or all of your existing customers, vendors, inventory items, and accounts to an Intuit Interchange Format (IIF) file. The QuickBooks Data Migration extension includes a default mapping of QuickBooks data so that you can use your existing data to test your new [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company. The default mapping will be sufficient in the vast majority of cases, but you can change the mapping in the assisted setup guide. -In QuickBooks, the File menu includes a utility to export lists. For the purposes of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can export the following lists: - -* Customer List -* Vendor List -* Item List -* Account List - -The exported data is saved as an IIF file that you can then upload to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Finding the QuickBooks Data Migration Extension -The QuickBooks Data Migration extension is installed and ready to go as an integrated part of the Data Migration assisted setup guide. If you are ready to get started now, and have exported your data from QuickBooks, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assisted Setup**, and then choose the related link. Choose **Migrate business data**, and then follow the steps in the guide. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions ](ui-extensions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration.md deleted file mode 100644 index 64a5860b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the QuickBooks Online Data Migration Extension -description: Describes how to use the extension to migrate customers, vendors, items, and accounts from QuickBooks Online to Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: extension, migrate, data, QuickBooks, import -ms.date: 05/24/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# The QuickBooks Online Data Migration Extension for Dynamics NAV -This extension is included in the **Data Migration** assisted setup guide to help you migrate important business data from QuickBooks Online to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. For example, this is useful when your business is growing, and you've decided to upgrade your business management app by starting to use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## What data can I import from QuickBooks Online? -You can import the following data from QuickBooks Online to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]: - -* Customers -* Vendors -* Items -* Chart of accounts -* Beginning balance transaction in the general ledger -* On-hand quantities for inventory items -* Open documents for customers and vendors, such as invoices, credit memos, and payments - -We migrate only full amounts on sales and purchase documents. We do not update partially paid amounts. For example, if a customer has paid 300 of a total of 500 dollars on a sales invoice, we migrate the full 500. If you have received partial payments, you must update these manually, either before or after you migrate data. We recommend that you apply outstanding transactions before you migrate, just to make things easier afterward. - -> [!NOTE] -> We do not migrate purchase orders or sales orders. - -## Before you start -An important part of the migration process is to specify the accounts to migrate transactions to. It's a good idea to plan this mapping before you migrate data. For example, the accounts where you post transactions for: - -* The sale of items or services to customers. -* The purchase of items or services from vendors. -* Adjustments in the general ledger. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] requires that general ledger accounts have account numbers assigned to them. Make sure that account numbers are assigned to your accounts in QuickBooks Online. - -If transactions in QuickBooks Online have tax amounts, you must set up a tax account for your tax jurisdictions in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] before you can post transactions. - -## How do I start using the extension? -Getting started is easy. All you need to do is run the **Data Migration** assisted setup guide. Here's how: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assisted Setup**, and then choose **Migrate business data**. -2. Follow the instructions on each step in the assisted setup guide. - -## What do I do after I migrate data? -After you migrate data, transactions have the status **Unposted**, so you can review them and make adjustments. To review the transactions, go to the page where you would normally find them. For example, to review unposted sales invoices, go to the **Sales Invoices** page. To review payment journals, go to the **Payment Journals** page. - -There are a few things in particular that you should do: - -* If the transactions in QuickBooks Online had markup or discount amounts, you must manually add the amounts to the related transactions in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] before you post them. -* If you are using value added tax (VAT), you may need to add a business posting group and a product posting group to the posting setup so that you can post VAT amounts. -* Verify the beginning balances for accounts in the general ledger. QuickBooks Online does not store the current balance for all accounts, so you might need to correct beginning balances. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-payroll.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-payroll.md deleted file mode 100644 index 30c9631f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-quickbooks-payroll.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Quickbooks Payroll File Import Extension -description: Describes how to use the extension to import salary and wage transactions from the Quickbooks Payroll service. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize, salary, wage -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# The Quickbooks Payroll File Import Extension to Dynamics NAV -To account for salary payments and related transactions, you must import and post financial transactions made by your payroll provider to the general ledger. - -To do this, you first import a file that you receive from the payroll provider into the **General Journal** window. Then you map the external accounts in the payroll file to the relevant G/L accounts. Lastly, you post the payroll transactions according to the account mapping. For more information, see [How to: Import Payroll Transactions](finance-how-import-payroll-transactions.md). - -The Quickbooks Payroll File Import extension allows you to import payroll transaction from the Quickbooks Payroll service. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions ](ui-extensions.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md deleted file mode 100644 index be405f6e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Sales and Inventory Forecast Extension to Manage Inventory -description: This extension helps you predict sales, get a clear overview of expected stock-outs, and even helps you create replenishment requests to vendors. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize, budget -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Sales and Inventory Forecast for Dynamics NAV -Inventory management is a trade-off between customer service and managing your cost. On one hand, a low inventory requires less working capital, but, on the other hand, stock-outs potentially lead to missed sales. The Sales and Inventory Forecast extension predicts potential sales using historical data and gives a clear overview of expected stock-outs. Based on the forecast, the extension helps create replenishment requests to your vendors and saves you time. - -## Setting up forecasting -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the connection to [Cortana Intelligence](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/cloud-platform/what-is-cortana-intelligence-suite) is already set up for you. But you can configure the forecast to use a different type of period to report by, such as changing from forecasting by month to forecasting by quarter. You can also choose the number of periods to calculate the forecast by, depending on how granular you want the forecast to be. We suggest that you forecast by month and with a 12 month horizon for the forecast. - -## Using the forecasts -The extension uses Cortana Intelligence to predict future sales based on your sales history to help you avoid inventory shortage. For example, when you choose an item in the **Items** window, the chart in the **Item Forecast** pane shows the estimated sales of this item in the coming period. This way you can see if you are likely to run out of stock of the item soon. - -You can also use the extension to suggest when to stock up on inventory. For example, if you crate a purchase order for Fabrikam because you want to buy their new desk chair, the Sales and Inventory Forecast extension will suggest that you also restock on the LONDON swivel chair that you usually buy from this vendor. This is because the extension forecasts that you will run out of stock of the LONDON swivel chair in the coming two months, so you might want to order more chairs already now. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-tax-file-formats-dk.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-tax-file-formats-dk.md deleted file mode 100644 index ac3235ec..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-tax-file-formats-dk.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using the Tax File Formats (DK) Extension -description: This extension makes it easy to export files that are pre-formatted to meet bank requirements for electronic submissions. - - -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms. search.keywords: extension, bank, formats -ms.date: 09/15/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- - -# The Tax File Formats (DK) Extension for Dynamics NAV -If you engage in trade with companies, or internal branches or subsidiaries, in other EU countries/regions you must report information about the activities to SKAT and to Statistics Denmark. If you use the VAT and Intrastat reporting features in Finance and Operations, Business Edition, this extension can ensure that the file you export is compatible with requirements from these organizations. The extension adds the MS-ECSL Report Export File and Intrastat Export Lines submission codeunits to your VAT Report Configuration, so you can export data in the new format right away. - -The extension is free, you just need to install it. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing Dynamics NAV Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-worldpay-payments-standard.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-worldpay-payments-standard.md deleted file mode 100644 index 29c6e2d6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions-worldpay-payments-standard.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: WorldPay Payments Standard -description: Provides information about the WorldPay Payments Standard extension - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 02/22/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# The WorldPay Payments Standard Extension to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] -The WorldPay Payments Standard extension lets you offer customers a convenient alternative to making payments through bank transfers or credit cards. Not only that, payments made through payment services will typically land in your bank account more quickly. -If you enable the extension, and send a sales invoice or sales order by email, the document includes a link to the payment service in the email body and in the attached PDF document. A customer can choose the link, and then use the payment service to make the payment. - -Enabling payment service extensions is free in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], however, you will need to contact the payment service to get an account. For more information, see [How to: Enable Customer Payment Through Payment Services](sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Setting Up Sales](sales-setup-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions.md deleted file mode 100644 index bad79b9a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-extensions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Installing Extensions to Customize Dynamics NAV -description: Learn about adding functionality and customizing Dynamics NAV by installing extensions. -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: app, add-in, manifest, customize -ms.date: 11/28/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Customizing Dynamics NAV Using Extensions -You can customize [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] by installing extensions that add functionality, change behavior, or give you access to online services. For example, Microsoft offers an extension that provides integration with PayPal Payments Standard, and several that make it easy to import data from other finance apps. - -You manage the extensions in the **Extension Management** window. You can access this window from Home. Alternatively, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") in the top right corner, enter **Extension**, and then choose the related link. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you think you should have access to an extension but you cannot find its functionality, check the **Extension Management** window - if the extension is not listed there, you can install it as described in the following section. - -## Installing an Extension -In the **Extension Management** window, you can see the extensions that are currently available, and are either installed or ready to be installed. - -> [!NOTE] -> Extensions might need to be published before they are available in the list. Typically, this is something a Microsoft Partner helps with. For more information, see [How to: Publish and Install an Extension v2.0](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=864046). - -If you choose an extension, you can read about what the extension does, and you can access Help for the extension to learn more. When you choose to install an extension, you must agree to the terms of use. - -When you install an extension, you might have to set it up, such as specifying an account for use with the **PayPal Payments Standard** extension. -Other extensions simply add fields to an existing page, or they add a new page, for example. - -If you uninstall an extension, and you then change your mind, you can install it again. When you uninstall an extension that you have been using, the data is preserved so that if you install the extension again, your data is still available. - -All extensions are tested before they are made available to you, but we recommend that you access the links that are provided with each extension to learn more about the extension before you choose to install it. - -Microsoft provides the following extensions: - -* [C5 2012 Data Migration](LocalFunctionality/Denmark/ui-extensions-c5-data-migration.md) (DK) -* [Ceridian Payroll](ui-extensions-ceridian-payroll.md) -* [Image Analyzer](ui-extensions-image-analyzer.md) -* [Microsoft Pay](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=857276) -* [PayPal Payments Standard](ui-extensions-paypal-payments-standard.md) -* [QuickBooks Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md) -* [Quickbooks Payroll File Import](ui-extensions-quickbooks-payroll.md) -* [Sales and Inventory Forecast](ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md) - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Enable Customer Payment Through PayPal](sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md) -[Migrating Business Data from Other Finance Systems](upload-data.md) -[[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Extensions by Other Providers](ui-extensions-other.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin_long](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-get-ready-business.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-get-ready-business.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4aebc6dd..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-get-ready-business.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Welcome -description: Outlines the assisted setup guides, videos, help topics, and pages and windows to use to get ready for doing business in Dynamics NAV. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365, setup, wizard, experience -ms.date: 03/21/2017 -ms.author: solsen ---- -# Getting Ready for Doing Business -Congratulations, you have just initiated your first company in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -To help you get ready for doing business, you can visit the **Business Assistance** window where you can launch assisted setup guides, videos, or help topics for selected setup tasks. You access the window from the chart on the **Business Manager** Role Center by choosing the **Business Assistance** drop-down, and then choosing the **Show Setup and Help Resources** action. When you refresh the page, the chart is replaced with the setup and help resources. - -On the Home page, at the bottom of the navigation pane, you will find the **Setup and Extensions** menu. Expand the **Home** button to see the navigation pane. Here you have access to a list of assisted setup that can help you get started. Once you have migrated data such as vendors, customers, and items from your existing financial system, you are ready to begin. But depending on your needs, consider if the other assisted setup can help you. If an area is not covered by an assisted setup, choose the **Manual Setup** action to access setup windows where you can fill in setup fields for all areas manually. For more information, see also [Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md). - -| Assisted Setup | Description | -| --- | --- | -| Set Up Your Company |Creates a new trial company for you to enter data and try our [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. If you went through the Getting Started tour this is probably already **Completed**. | -| Migrate Business Data |Lets you import your existing company data such as vendors, customers, and items from Excel or Quickbooks. | -| Set Up Sales Tax |Gets you started with default Tax groups and assigning Tax area codes that you can assign to customers and vendors in order to automatically calculate sales tax in sales or purchase documents. | -| Set Up Email |Gets you ready for sending email messages directly from, for example, sales orders or contacts in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. | -| Set Up Office Add-Ins |Sets up the ability to use and launch [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] from Outlook. | -| Set Up Approval Workflow |Sets up the ability to automatically notify an approver when a user tries to create or change certain values on documents, journal lines, or cards, such as an amount above a specified limit. | -| Set Up Email Logging |Sets up the capability to log email correspondence in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to follow up on interactions. | -| Set Up Dynamics NAV Connector |Sets up a connection to Dynamics 365 for Sales which allows you to synchronize data such as contacts and sales order information. | - -When you have run an assisted setup, it is marked as **Completed**. To run the assisted setup, you choose the three dots also called the context menu, and then you select **Start Setup**. - -## Home -On the Home page, you have an overview of the business. To the left you see a navigation bar that gives you easy access to customers, vendors, items, and so on. In the center you find the **Activities** tiles. **Activities** show current data and can be chooseed or tapped for easy access to the selected document. The **Key Performance Indicators** can be set up to display a selected chart for a visual representation of, for example, cash flow or income and expenses. You can also build up a list of **Favorite Customers** on the Home page for accounts that you do business with often or need to pay special attention to. -Use the arrows to collapse part of the page and make more room to show specific data. At the top of the Home page you will find all of the actions that can be applied to the current content. This too can be collapsed and you only need to choose or tap within the collapsed area to view it again. - -## Company Information -Under **Company Settings** you can view and edit setup information about the current company, much of this was prefilled if you completed the **Set Up Company** assisted setup when signing up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. If you want to change the company logo, contact information, bank settings, or tax information, you can do it from this window. - -## Adding Users and Permissions -If you need to add more users, this is done from Microsoft 365 admin center. For more information, see [Add Users to Microsoft 365 for business](https://support.office.com/en-us/article/Add-users-to-Office-365-for-business-435ccec3-09dd-4587-9ebd-2f3cad6bc2bc). Once users are created in Microsoft 365, they can be imported into the **Users** window by using the **Get Users from Office 365** action. You can then proceed to assign permissions to users and to organize them in user groups. For more information, see [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md). - -## Getting Help -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] you will find tooltips that can help guide you through the various business processes. In each tooltip you will find a link called **Learn More** that takes you to product Help. The question mark in the upper right corner also points you to product Help. -## Next Steps -Based on your migrated data, you can now proceed to create new sales or purchase documents. Use the **My Company** section of your **Home** page to quickly create a new sales quote, sales invoice, sales order, purchase invoice, or payment registration. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-fields-word-report-layout.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-fields-word-report-layout.md deleted file mode 100644 index 95b28246..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-fields-word-report-layout.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Add Fields to a Word Report Layout -description: Describes how to add fields of a report dataset to an existing Word report layout for a report. -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 11/08/2018 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Add Fields to a Word Report Layout -A report dataset can consist of fields that display labels, data, and images. This topic describes the procedure for adding fields of a report dataset to an existing Word report layout for a report. You add fields by using the Word custom XML part for the report and adding content controls that map to the fields of the report dataset. Adding fields requires that you have some knowledge of the report's dataset so that you can identify the fields that you want to add to the layout. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot modify built-in report layouts. - -## To open the Custom XML part for the Report in Word - -1. If not already open, then open the Word report layout document in Word. - - For more information, see [How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md). - -2. Show the **Developer** tab in the ribbon of Microsoft Word. - - By default, the **Developer** tab is not shown in the ribbon. For more information, see [How to: Show the Developer Tab on the Ribbon](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=389631). - -3. On the **Developer** tab, choose **XML Mapping Pane**. - -4. In the **XML Mapping** pane, in the **Custom XML Part** dropdown list, choose the custom XML part for ADD INCLUDE report, which is typically last in the list. The name of the custom XML part has the following format: - - urn:microsoft-dynamics-nav/reports/*report_name*/*ID* - - *report_name* is the name that is assigned to the report. - - *ID* is the identification number of the report. - - After you select the custom XML part, the XML Mapping pane displays the labels and field controls that are available for the report. - -### To add a label or data field - -1. Place your cursor in the document where you want to add the control. - -2. In the **XML Mapping** pane, right-click the control that you want to add, choose **Insert Content Control**, and then choose **Plain Text**. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot add a field by manually typing the dataset field name in the content control. You must use the **XML Mapping** pane to map the fields. - -### To add repeating rows of data fields to create a list - -1. In a table, add a table row that includes a column for each field that you want repeated. - - This row will act as a placeholder for the repeating fields. - -2. Select the entire row. - -3. In the **XML Mapping** pane, right-click the control that corresponds to the report data item that contains the fields that you want repeated, choose **Insert Content Control**, and then choose **Repeating**. - -4. Add the repeating fields to the row as follows: - - 1. Place your pointer in a column. - - 2. In the **XML Mapping** pane, right-click the control that you want to add, choose **Insert Content Control**, and then choose **Plain Text**. - - 3. For each field, repeat steps a and b. - -## Adding Image Fields - A report dataset can include a field that contains an image, such as a company logo or a picture of an item. To add an image from the report dataset, you insert a **Picture** content control. - - Images align in the top-left corner of the content control and resize automatically in proportion to fit the boundary of the content control. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You can only add images that have a format that is supported by Word, such as .bmp, .jpeg, and .png file types. If you add an image that has a format that is not supported by Word, you will get an error when you run the report from the ADD INCLUDE client. - -#### To add an image - -1. Place your pointer in the document where you want to add the control. - -2. In the **XML Mapping** pane, right-click the control that you want to add, choose **Insert Content Control**, and then choose **Picture**. - -3. To increase or decrease the image size, drag a sizing handle away from or towards the center of the content control. - -## Custom XML Part Overview -Word report layouts are built on *custom XML parts*. A custom XML part for a report consists of elements that correspond to the data items, columns, and labels that comprise the report's dataset. The custom XML part is used to map the data into a report when the report is run. - - -### XML Structure of Custom XML Part -The following table provides a simplified overview of the XML of a custom XML part. - -|XML Elements|Description| -|------------------|-----------------| -|``|Header| -|`` is the name that is assigned to the report. `` is the ID that is assigned to the report.| -|`..`

`....ColumnNameCaption`

`....LabelCaption`

`..
`|Contains all the labels for the report.
- Label elements that are related to columns have the format `ColumnNameCaption`.
- Label elements have the format `LabelName.
- Labels are listed in alphabetical order.| -|`..`

`....DataItem1Column1`|Top-level data item and columns. Columns are listed in alphabetical order.| -|`....`

`......DataItem2Column1`

`....
`

`....`

`......DataItem3Column1`

`....
`|Data items and columns that are nested in the top-level data item. Columns are listed in alphabetical order under the respective data item.| -|`..
`

`
`|Closing element.| - -### Custom XML Part in Word - In Word, you open the custom XML part in the **XML Mapping** pane, and then use the pane to map elements to content controls in the Word document. The **XML Mapping** pane is accessible from the **Developer** tab (for more information, see [How to: Show the Developer Tab on the Ribbon](https://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=389631)). - - The elements in the **XML Mapping** pane appear in a structure that is similar to the XML source. Label fields are grouped under a common **Labels** element and data item and columns are arranged in a hierarchal structure that corresponds to the XML source, with columns listed in alphabetical order. Elements are identified by their name as defined by the Name property in Report Dataset Designer in ADD INCLUDE. - - The following figure illustrates the simple custom XML part from the previous section in the **XML Mapping** pane of a Word document. - - ![Clip of the XML Mapping pane in word](media/nav_reportlayout_xmlmappingpane.png "NAV_ReportLayout_XMLMappingPane") - -- To add a label or field to the layout, you insert a content control that maps to the element in the **XML Mapping** pane. - -- To create repeating rows of columns, insert a **Repeating** content control for the parent data item element, and then add content control for the columns. - -- For labels, the actual text that appears in the generated report is the value of the **Caption** property for the field in the data item table (if the label is related to the column in the report dataset) or a label in the Report Label Designer (if the label is not related to a column in the dataset). - -- The language of the label that is displayed when you run the report depends on the language setting of the report object. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md deleted file mode 100644 index f248c825..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-add-link-to-record.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Link from Records to External Information or Programs - description: Attach a hyperlink to a document or website to a specific record, such as a customer or document. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: jswymer - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: jswymer ---- -# Adding Links to Websites, Documents, or Programs on Records -On a specific record, such as a customer, document, or sales order, you can add a link to an external document, website, or program. Or, you may want a link that opens a new empty email to a specific recipient when you select it. The card page for some records, such as customer and vendor cards, include a **Home Page** field where you can enter an Internet address (URL). To include other links, you can use the method described in this article. - -Another example could be when you receive printed invoices from vendors. You can scan them and store them as .pdf files on a SharePoint site. Then you can make a link from a purchase invoice in [!INCLUDE[d365fin_md](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to the corresponding invoice on SharePoint. Or, you can make a link from an item card to the corresponding page in your vendor's online catalog. - -## To add a link on a record - -1. Open the record that you want to attach the link to, such as a customer card or sales order. If you want to attach the link to a specific line, such as a journal line, select the line. - -2. Choose the **Links** action to open the **Links** windows that shows all the current links that are added to the record. - -3. To add a new link, choose **+new**. - -4. In the **Link Address** field, enter - - - To link to a file on your computer or network, enter the full path and file name, such as **C:My Documentsinvoice1.doc**. - - To link to website, enter the Internet address (URL), such as www.microsoft.com. - - To link to website, enter the Internet address (URL), such as www.microsoft.com. - - To link to a program, enter a specific string to open the program. For example, to open OneNote with a specific page, enter **onenote:///C:My Documentstest.one**. Or, to open Outlook with a new empty email to a specific alias, enter **mailto:testalias**. - -5. Fill in the **Description** field with information about the link. - -6. Choose the **Save** button. - -## To delete a link from a record - -To delete a link, in the **Links** window, you can select **...** and then **Delete**. - -If you delete a single record, such as a sales order line, a sales order, or a customer, then all the links attached to the record are deleted. However, if you delete records using a batch job, such as the **Delete Invoiced Sales Orders** batch job, then the links are still stored in the database. To delete the links from the database, run the **Delete Orphaned Record Links** codeunit. To do this, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete Orphaned Record Links**, and then choose the related link. - - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index c9e12158..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Change the Way a Report Looks by Selecting a Different Layout -description: You can use different layouts for a report, and switch between layouts to change how a report looks. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customized report, document layout, logo, personalize -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Change Which Layout is Currently Used on a Report -A report can be set up with more than one report layout, which you can then switch among as needed. - -Depending on the layouts that are available for a report, you can choose to use a built-in RDLC report layout, a built-in Word report layout, or a custom layout. For more information about RDLC and Word report layouts, built-in and custom layouts, and more, see [Manage Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md). - -## To change the layout that is used on a report -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Layout Selection**, and then choose the related link. - The **Report Layout Selection** window lists all the reports that are available for the company that is specified in the Company field at the top of the window. The Selected Layout field specifies the layout that is currently used on the report. -2. Set the **Company** field at the top of the window to the company that includes the report. -3. To change the layout that is used by a report, in the row for the report in the list, set the **Selected Layout** field to one of the following options: - * RDLC (built-in), uses the built-in RDLC report layout on the report. - * Word (built-in), uses the built-in Word report layout on the report. - * Custom, uses a custom layout on the report. - You can see which custom layouts are available for the report in the Report Layouts Part FactBox. If there are no custom layouts for the report, then you will have to create one first. If you choose this option, go to the next procedure to specify the custom layout that you want to use. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you choose **RDLC (built-in)** or **Word (built-in)** and you get an error message that the report does not have a layout of the specified type, then you must choose another layout option or create a custom report layout of the type that you want to use. - -If you selected a built-in RDLC or Word report layout, then no further action is required and the layout will be used the next time the report is run. - -## To specify a custom layout on a report -1. You specify which custom layout to use on the report from the **Custom Report Layouts** window. If the **Custom Report Layouts** window is not open, then in the **Report Layout Description** field, choose the lookup button. -2. In the **Custom Report Layouts** window, select the row for custom layout that you want to use, and then close the window. - -You return to the **Report Layout Selection** window. The name of the selected custom layout displays in the **Custom Layout Description** field. The custom layout will be used the next time that you run the report. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2c5eb389..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create and Modify Custom Layouts for Reports and Documents -description: Learn how to create your own customized layouts to personalize the appearance of a report when it is viewed, printed, or saved. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customized report, document layout, logo, personalize -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report or Document Layout -By default, a report will have a built-in report layout, which can be either an RDLC report layout or Word report layout, or both. You cannot modify built-in layouts. However, you can create your own custom layouts that enable you to change the appearance of report when it is viewed, printed or saved. You can create multiple custom report layouts for the same report, and then switch the layout that is used by a report as needed. - -> [!NOTE] -> In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the term "report" also covers externally-facing documents, such as sales invoices and order confirmations that you send to customers as PDF files. - -To create a custom layout, you can either make a copy of an existing custom layout or add a new custom layout, which in most cases is based on a built-in layout. When you add a new custom layout, you can choose to add an RDLC report layout type, Word report layout type, or both. The new custom layout will automatically be based on the built-in layout for the report if one is available. If there is no built-in layout for the type, then a new blank layout is a created, which you will have to modify and design from scratch. For more information about RDLC and Word report layouts, built-in and custom layouts, and more, see [Manage Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md). - -## To create a custom layout -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Layout Selection**, and then choose the related link. - - The **Report Layout Selection** window lists all the reports that are available in the company that is specified in the **Company** field at the top of the window. -2. Set the **Company** field to the company in which you want to create the report layout. -3. Select the row for the report that you want to create the layout for, and then choose the **Custom Layouts** action. - The **Custom Report Layouts** window appears and lists all the custom layouts that are available for the selected report. -4. If you want to create a copy of an existing custom layout, select the existing custom layout in the list, and then choose the **Copy** action. - The copy of the custom layout appears in the **Custom Report Layouts** window and has the words *Copy of* in the **Description** field. -5. If you want to add a new custom layout that is based on a built-in layout, do the following: - 1. Choose the **New** action. The **Insert Built-in Layout for a Report** window appears. The **ID** and **Name** fields are automatically filled in. - 2. To add a custom Word report layout type, then select the **Insert Word Layout** check box. - 3. To add a custom RDLC report layout type, then select the **Insert RDLC Layout** check box. - 4. Choose the **OK** button. - The new custom layouts appear in the **Custom Report Layouts** window. If a new layout is based on a built-in layout, then it has the words **Copy of a Built-in Layout** in the **Description** field. If there was no built-in layout for the report, then the new layout has the words **New Layout** in the **Description** field, which indicates that custom layout is blank. -6. By default, the **Company Name** field is blank, which means that the custom layout will be available for the report in all companies. To make the custom layout available in a specific company only, choose **Edit**, and then set the **Company Name** field to the company that you want. - -The custom layout has been created. You can now modify the custom layout as needed. - -## Modifying a custom layout -To modify a report layout, you must first export the report layout as a file to a location on your computer or network, and then open the exported document and make the changes. When you are finished making the changes, you import the report layout. - -### To modify a custom layout -1. You export a custom layout from the **Custom Report Layouts** window. If this window is not already open, search for and open the **Report Layout Selection** window, select the report that has the layout that you want to modify, and then choose the **Custom Layouts** action. -2. In the **Custom Report Layouts** window, select the layout that you want to modify, choose the **Export Layout** action, and then choose **Save** or **Save As** to save the report layout document to a location on your computer or network. - -3. Open the report layout document that you just saved, and then make changes. - - If you are changing a Word layout, open the layout document in Word. For editing details, see the next section [Making Changes to the Report Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md#MakeChangesToLayout). - - RDLC report layouts are more advanced than Word report layouts. For more information about modifying an RDLC report layout, see [Designing RDLC Report Layouts](/dynamics-nav/Designing-RDLC-Report-Layouts). - - Remember to save you changes when done. - -4. Return to the **Custom Report Layouts** window, select the report layout that you exported and modified, and then choose the **Import Layout** action. - -5. In the **Import** dialog box, select **Choose** to find and select the report layout document, and then choose **Open**. - -## Making changes to a Word report layout -To can make general formatting and layout changes, such as changing text font, adding and modifying a table, or removing a data field, just use the basic editing features of Word, like you do with any Word document. - -If you are designing a Word report layout from scratch or adding new data fields, then start by adding a table that includes rows and columns that will eventually hold the data fields. - -> [!TIP] -> Show the table gridlines so that you see the boundaries of table cells. Remember to hide the gridlines when you are done editing. To show or hide table gridlines, select the table, and then under **Layout** on the **Table** tab, choose **View Gridlines**. - -### Removing Label and Data Fields in Word Layouts - Label and data fields of a report are contained in content controls in Word. The following figure illustrates a content control when it is selected in the Word document. - - ![Content control for field in Word report layout](media/nav_wordreportlayouts_contentcontrol.png "NAV_WordReportLayouts_ContentControl") - - The name of the label or data field name displays in the content control. In the example, the field name is CompanyAddr1. - -### To remove a label or data field - -1. Right-choose the field that you want to delete, and then choose **Remove Content Control**. - - The content control is removed, but the field name remains as text. - -2. Delete the remaining text as needed. - -### Adding data fields -Adding data fields from a report dataset is a more advanced and requires some knowledge of the report dataset. For information about adding fields for data, labels, data, and images, see [How to: Add Fields to a Word Report Layout](ui-how-add-fields-word-report-layout.md). - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) -[How to: Change Which Layout is Currently Used on a Report](ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md) -[How to: Import and Export a Custom Report or Document Layout](ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout.md) -[Working with Reports](ui-work-report.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-define-ext-text.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-define-ext-text.md deleted file mode 100644 index a11ef3d9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-define-ext-text.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Add Extra Lines to Define Extended Text for an Item Description -description: You can add extra lines to extend the standard text that describes an item. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 01/16/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# How to: Set Up Extended Item Text -You can extend a standard text for items by adding extra lines, and you can set up conditions for use of the extra lines. You do this from item cards. - -## To define extended text for an item description -1. Open the card for an item that you want to add extended text to, and then choose the **Extended Text** action. -2. In the **Code** field, enter the code, and in the **Description** field, enter the desired text. -3. Choose **Extended Texts**. -4. Fill in the lines in the **Extended Text** window with the additional text. -5. Fill in the **Language Code** field or the **All Language Codes** field if you use language codes. -6. Fill in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields if you want to limit the dates on which the extended text is used. -7. Select relevant check boxes for the document types where you want the extended text printed. -8. Close the window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Setting Up Inventory](inventory-setup-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout.md deleted file mode 100644 index c572bf12..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Importing and Exporting a Report and Document Layout - description: You can import and export an existing custom report layout as a file to and from a location on your computer and network. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: jswymer - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Import and Export a Report or Document Layout -You can import and export an existing custom report layout as a file to and from a location on your computer and network. For example, you can export a report layout, and then send the file to another person to modify. That person can then make the modifications to layout and return the file to you so that you can import it back. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> You cannot import or export built-in report layouts. - -### To export a report layout to a file - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Layout Selection**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the row for the report that contains the custom report layout that you want to export, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Custom Layouts**. - -3. In the **Report Layouts** window, select the report layout that you want to export to a file, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Export Layout**. - -4. In the **Export File** dialog box, choose **Save**, and then save the file to a location on your computer or network. - -### To import a report layout file - -1. Make sure that the relevant file that defines the report layout is available on your computer or network. - - A Word report layout file must have the .docx file type extension. An RDLC report layout file must have the .rdlc or .rdl file type extension. - -2. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Layout Selection**, and then choose the related link. - -3. Select the row for the report to which you want to import the report layout, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Custom Layouts**. - -4. In the **Report Layouts** window, select the report layout to which you want to import the file, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Import Layout**. - -5. In the **Import** dialog box, select the document that defines the report layout, and then choose **Open**. - - The original custom report layout is replaced with the imported report layout. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md) - [Managing Report and Document Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) - [Working with Reports](ui-work-report.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-preview-post-results.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-preview-post-results.md deleted file mode 100644 index ed9eb50b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-preview-post-results.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Preview Entries Before You Post a Document or Journal -description: You can make sure that entries for documents and journals are accurate before you post them to the general ledger. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 05/12/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# How to: Preview Posting Results -On every document and journal that can be posted, you can choose the **Preview Posting** button to review the different types of entries that will be created when you post the document or journal. - -## To preview G/L entries that will result from posting a purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a purchase invoice. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). -3. Choose **Preview Posting**. -4. In the **Posting Preview** window, select **G/L Entry**, and then choose **Show Related Entries**. - The **G/L Entries Preview** window shows which entries will be created when you post the purchase invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Post Documents and Journals](ui-post-documents-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-register-dynamics-nav-azure.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-register-dynamics-nav-azure.md deleted file mode 100644 index d33c97bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-register-dynamics-nav-azure.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "How to: Register Dynamics NAV in the Azure Management Portal" -author: edupont04 -manager: edupont -ms.author: edupont -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 11/15/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# How to: Register Dynamics NAV in the Azure Management Portal -If you want to use services that are based on Microsoft Azure, you must register your Dynamics NAV in the Azure Management Portal. For example, the [Sales and Inventory Forecast](ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md) extension requires that you specify an API key and API URI, and other services require similar information. So where do you find that information? - -You can use the **Set Up Azure Management Portal** guide to register Dynamics NAV in the Azure Management Portal and extract the information you need to use services such as the Sales and Inventory Forecast extension, Power BI, Microsoft 365, and so on. You must register in the Azure Management Portal only once, and you must be an administrator or superuser in Dynamics NAV. - -The point of the registration is that Dynamics NAV and the service that you want to connect to must know the Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) details about each other. - -## To register Dynamics NAV in the Azure Management Portal -1. Log in to the Azure Management Portal at [https://portal.azure.com](https://portal.azure.com). - If you are not familiar with the Azure Management Portal, you can find guidance in the [Azure documentation library](/azure/). -2. In the left navigation pane, choose **More services**, and then choose **App registrations**. -3. In the top menu, choose **Add**, and then, in the **Create pane**, fill in the fields with the following information: - - **Name**: Specify a name for your Dynamics NAV solution, such as *Dynamics NAV*. - - **Application Type**: Choose Web app* / API. - - **Sign-on URL**: Enter the URL for your Dynamics NAV browser client, such as *https://MyServer:8080/DynamicsNAV/WebClient/OAuthLanding.htm*. - The OAuthLanding.htm file is a file that helps manage the exchange of data between Dynamics NAV and other services through Azure AD. -4. Choose the **Create** button. - This adds your Dynamics NAV to the **App registrations pane**, so you can now add settings to it. -5. In the **App registrations list**, choose your new app. If this does not open the **Settings** pane, you should see an action to open **Settings**. -6. In the **Settings** pane, in the **API Access** section, choose **Keys**. -7. In the **Keys** pane, specify a description and when you want to let the key expire, and then choose **Save**. -8. Copy the generated key to a temporary location - you will need it in the next procedure. -9. In the **API Access** section, choose **Required Permissions**. - - Add delegated permissions to view all reports to the Power BI Service - - Add delegated permissions to Sign In and read user profile to Windows Azure Active Directory - - Repeat for other services that you want to grant access to your Dynamics NAV -10. Close the **Settings** pane, and then, in the **Essentials** pane, copy the value of the **Application ID** to a temporary location. - -You have now registered your Dynamics NAV in the Azure Management Portal, you have given access to the relevant services, and you have extracted the information that you need in Dynamics NAV. - -## To add the information to Dynamics NAV -1. In the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, enter **Azure AD Application Setup Wizard**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the wizard, choose **Next**. -3. In the **Client ID** field, specify the content that you copied from the **Application ID** field earlier. -4. In the **Secret Key** field, specify the content that you copied from the **Keys** pane earlier. -5. Choose **Next**. Unless you see an error message, you are now done. - -Your Dynamics NAV is registered and ready to connect to services such as Cortana Intelligence and Power BI. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales and Inventory Forecast](ui-extensions-sales-forecast.md) -[Set Up Your Dynamics NAV](setup.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-run-batch-jobs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-run-batch-jobs.md deleted file mode 100644 index c7f107d3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-run-batch-jobs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Create and Run a Batch Job -description: You run batch jobs to process data and update information, for example, to do periodic accounting activities, or to do calculations. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: task, process -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# How to: Run Batch Jobs -A batch job is a routine that processes data in batches, for example the **Adjust Exchange Rates** batch job. There are batch jobs that perform periodic accounting activities, such as closing the income statement at the end of a fiscal year. Many batch jobs do calculation work, such as calculation of finance charges, exchange rate adjustment, and calculation of unit prices. - -A batch job is like a report, except the batch job uses the result of its work to update information directly, instead of printing the results. - -## To run a batch job -1. To open the request window for the relevant batch job, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter the name of the batch job, and then choose the related link. -2. If there is an **Options** FastTab for the batch job, fill in the fields to determine what the batch job will do. -3. The window may contain one or more FastTab with filters, which you can use to limit the data included in the batch job. You can enter criteria in the suggested filters or add more filters. -4. Choose the **OK** button to start the batch job. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Entering Criteria in Filters](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-send-documents-email.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-send-documents-email.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2eada45f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-send-documents-email.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Set Up Document-Specific Content and Attachments for Email Messages -description: You can define content to insert into the body of an email message, for example, a PayPal link. You can also attach documents to email messages. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: SMTP, mail, Microsoft 365, cover, body, PayPal, layout -ms.date: 03/30/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Send Documents by Email -To communicate the contents of business documents quickly to your business partners, such as the payment information on sales documents to customers, you can use the Report Layout feature to define document-specific content that gets inserted in email bodies automatically. For more information, see [Managing Report and Document Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md). - -To enable emails from within [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], start the **Set Up Email** assisted setup on the Home page. - -You can email practically all document types as attachments to email messages directly from the window that shows the document. In addition to the attachment, you can set up document-specific email bodies with core information from the document preceded by standard text that greets the mail recipient and introduces the document in question. To offer your customers to pay for sales electronically using a payment service, such as PayPal, you can also have the PayPal information and hyperlink inserted in the email body. - -From all supported documents, you initiate emailing by choosing the **Send** action, on posted documents, or the **Post and Send** action, on non-posted documents. - -If the **Email** field in the **Send Document to** window is set to **Yes (Prompt for Settings)**, then the **Send Email** window opens prefilled with the contact person in the **To:** field and the document attached as a PDF file. In the **Body** field, you can either enter text manually or you can have the field filled with a document-specific email body that you have set up. - -The following procedure describes how to set the **Sales - Invoice** report up to be used for document-specific email bodies when you email posted sales invoices. - -## To set up a document-specific email body for sales invoices -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Selections Sales**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Report Selection - Sales** window, in the **Usage** field, select **Invoice**. -3. On a new line, in the **Report ID** field, select, for example, standard report 1306. -4. Select the **Use for Email Body** check box. -5. Choose the **Email Body Layout Code** field, and then select a layout from the drop-down list. - - Report layouts define both the style and the content of the email body, including the standard text that precedes the core document information in the email body. You can see all available report layouts if you choose the **Select from full list** button in the drop-down list. -6. To view or edit the layout that the email body is based on, select the layout in the **Custom Report Layouts** window, and then choose the **Edit Layout** action. -7. If you want to offer customers to pay for sales electronically, you can set up the related payment service, such as PayPal, and then have the PayPal information and hyperlink inserted in the email body as well. For more information, see [How to: Enable Customer Payments Through PayPal](sales-how-enable-payment-service-extensions.md). -8. Choose the **OK** button. - -Now, when you choose, for example, the **Send** action in the **Posted Sales Invoice** window, the email body will contain the document information of report 1306 preceded by styled standard text according to the report layout that you selected in step 5. - -The following procedure describes how to send a posted sales invoice as an email message with the document attached as a PDF file and with a document-specific email body. - -## To send documents by email -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the relevant posted sales invoice, and then choose the **Send** action. The **Send Document to** window opens. -3. In the **Email** field, select **Yes (Prompt for Settings)**. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). -4. Choose the **OK** button. The **Send Email** window opens. -5. In the **To:** field, enter a valid email address. The default value is the customer email address. -6. In the **Subject** field, enter a descriptive subject text. The default value is the customer name and invoice number. -7. In the **Attachment** field, the generated invoice is attached by default as a PDF file. Choose the lookup button to open the file or attach another one. -8. In the **Body** field, enter a short message to the recipient. - - If a document-specific email body is set up in the **Report Selection - Sales** window, then the **Body** field is filled in automatically. For more information, see the "To set up a document-specific email body for sales invoices" section in this topic. -9. Choose the **OK** button to send the email message. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you do not want to specify email settings each time you email a document, you can select the **Yes (Use Default Settings)** option in the **Email** field in the **Send Document to** window. In that case, the **Send Email** window will not open. See Step 4. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Document Sending Profiles](sales-how-setup-document-send-profiles.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Report and Document Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) -[How to: Set up Email](madeira-how-setup-email.md) -[How to: Invoice Sales](sales-how-invoice-sales.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues.md deleted file mode 100644 index ea93b16f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Specify Colored Indicators to Customize Visual Signals About a Cue's Activity -description: Set up a colored indicator on a Cue tile to provide a personalized visual signal of the Cue’s activity. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: personalize, customize -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# How to: Set Up a Colored Indicator on Cues -You can set up Cues that appear on the **Home** page to include an indicator that changes color based on the data values in the Cues. - -The indicator appears as a colored bar along the top border of the Cue tile. It provides a visual signal of the status of the Cue's activity, which can indicate favorable or unfavorable conditions to prompt the user to take action. For example, if a Cue displays ongoing sales invoices, you can set up the indicator to appear green (favorable) when total number of ongoing sales invoices is below 10, and appears red (unfavorable) when the total is greater than 20. - -From the **Cue Setup** window, you set up indicators for all the Cues that are available in the company database. - -To set up the indicator, you specify up to two threshold values that define three ranges of data values (low, middle, and high) to which you can apply a different color (or style). - -## To set up colored indicators on Cues -1. Under **Activities** on your **Home** page, choose **Set Up Cues**. - The **Cue Setup** window appears. The window lists the indicators that are currently setup up on Cues. -2. To modify an indicator, edit the fields and modify, for example, the values for the different thresholds. - -The following table lists the colors that correspond to the options of the **Low Range Style**, **Middle Range Style**, and **High Range Style** fields. - -| Option | Color | -| --- | --- | -| **None** |No color (same color as the Cue )| -| **Favorable** |Green | -| **Unfavorable** |Red | -| **Ambiguous** |Yellow | -| **Subordinate** |Gray | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-use-allocation-keys-general-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-use-allocation-keys-general-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index f6083b52..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-use-allocation-keys-general-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: 'How to: Use Allocation Keys in General Journals ' -description: Learn how you can use allocation keys in journals. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: cost accounting -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Use Allocation Keys in General Journals -You can allocate an entry in a general journal to several different accounts when you post the journal. The allocation can be made by quantity, percentage, or amount. - -## To set up allocation keys -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Recurring General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Batch Name** field to open the **General Journal Batches** window. -3. You can either modify allocations on an existing batch in the list or create a new batch with allocations. - * To create a new batch, choose the **New** action, and go to the next step. - * To change the allocations of an existing journal, select the journal and go to step 7. -4. In the **Name** field, enter a name for the batch, such as CLEANING. In the **Description** field, enter a description, such as Cleaning Expenses Journal. -5. When you are done, close the window. A new, empty recurring journal opens. -6. Fill in the fields on the line. -7. Choose the **Allocations** action. -8. Add a line for each allocation. You must fill in either the **Allocation %**, **Allocation Quantity**, or **Amount** field. You must also fill in the **Account No.** field and, if you are allocating the transaction among global dimensions, the global dimension fields. -9. If you enter a percentage on a line, the amount in the **Amount** field is calculated automatically. These amounts have the opposite sign from the total amount in the **Amount** field in the recurring journal. -10. After entering the allocations lines, choose **OK** to return to the **Recurring General Journal** window. The **Allocated Amt. (USD)** field is filled in and matches the **Amount** field. -11. Post the journal. - -## To change an allocation key that has already been set up -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Recurring General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Recurring General Journal** window, select the journal with the allocation. -3. Choose the line with the allocation, and then choose **Allocations** action. -4. Change the relevant fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Posting Documents and Journals](ui-post-documents-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-users-permissions.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-users-permissions.md deleted file mode 100644 index 214345f5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-users-permissions.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Assign User Permissions and Create or Modify Permission Sets -description: Describes how add Microsoft 365 users to Dynamics NAV, and then assign permissions, access rights, and security settings. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: access, right, security -ms.date: 07/12/2018 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Manage Users and Permissions -If you get a new employee, your company's system administrator or IT pro has to add them to your [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Then, you can assign them access to the relevant parts of the product based on their work area by assigning user groups and permissions. - -Permission sets define which database objects, and thereby which UI elements, users have access to, and in which companies. - -A permission set is a collection of permissions for specific objects in the database. All users must be assigned one or more permission sets before they can access [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. A number of predefined permission sets are provided by default. You can use these permission sets as already defined, modify the default permission sets, or create additional permission sets. - -You can add users to user groups. This makes it easier to assign the same permission sets to multiple users. - -Administrators can use the **User Setup** window to define periods of time during which specified users are able to post, and also specify if the system logs the amount of time users are logged on. - -## To assign permissions to a user -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Users**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the user that you want to assign permission to. -Any permission sets that are already assigned to the user are displayed in the **Permission Sets** FactBox. -3. Choose the **Edit** action to open the **User Card** window. -4. On the **User Permission Sets** FastTab, on a new line, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To group users in user groups -You can set up users groups to help you manage permission sets for groups of users in your company. You can use a function to copy all permission sets from an existing user group to your new user group. User group members are not copied. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Alternatively, in the **Users** window, choose the **User Groups** action. -3. In the **User Groups** window, select an existing user group that you want to copy, and then choose the **Copy User Group** action. -4. In the **New User Group Code** field, specify the name of the new user group, and then choose the **OK** button. - - As an alternative to copying, you can choose the New action to create a new line for an empty user group, which you then fill in manually. -5. To add new or additional users, in the **User Group** window, choose the **User Group Members** action. -6. In the **User Group Members** window, on a new line, fill in the fields as necessary by selecting from existing users. -7. To add new or additional permission sets, in the **User Group** window, choose the **User Group Permission Sets** action. -8. In the **User Group Permission Sets** window, on a new line, fill in the fields as necessary by selecting from existing permission sets. - -## To create or modify permission sets -If the default permission sets that are provided with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] are not sufficient or not appropriate for your organization, you can create new permission sets. And if the individual object permissions that define a permission set are not adequate, you can modify a permission set. You can create a permission set manually, or you can use a recording function that records your actions as you navigate through a scenario and then generates the required permission set. - -### To create or modify permission sets manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Users**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Users** window, choose the **Permission Sets** action. -3. In the **Permission Sets** window, choose the **New** Action. -4. On a new line, fill in the fields as necessary. -5. Choose the **Permissions** action. -6. In the **Permissions** window, fill in the fields on the header as necessary. -7. On a new line, fill in the five fields for the different permission types as described in the following table. - - |Option|Description| - |------|-----------| - |Blank|Specifies that the permission type is not granted for the object.| - |**Yes**|Specifies that the permission type is granted with direct access to the object.| - |**Indirect**|Specifies that the permission type is granted with indirect access to the object.| - - Indirect permission to a table means that you cannot open the table and read from it, but you can view the data in the table through another object, such as a page, that you have direct permission to access. For more information, see the “Example - Indirect Permission” section in this topic. - -8. In the **Security Filter** field, enter a filter that you want to apply to the permission by selecting the field on which you want to limit a user's access. - - For example, if you want to create a security filter so that a user can view only sales with a specific salesperson code, you choose the field number for the **Salesperson Code** field. Then, in the **Field Filter** field, you enter the value of the that you want to use to limit access. For example, to limit a user's access to only Annette Hill's sales, enter AH. -9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to add permissions for additional objects to the permission set. - -### To create or modify permission sets by recording your actions -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Users**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Users** window, choose the **Permission Sets** action. -3. In the **Permission Sets** window, choose the **New** Action. -4. On a new line, fill in the fields as necessary. -5. Choose the **Permissions** action. -6. In the **Permissions** window, choose the **Start** action. - - A recording process starts to capture all your actions in the user interface. -7. Go to the various windows and activities in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] that you want users with this permission set to access. You must carry out the tasks that you want to record permissions for. -8. When you want to finish the recording, return to the **Permissions** window, and then choose the **Stop** action. -9. Choose the **Yes** button to add the recorded permissions to the new permission set. -10. For each object in the recorded list, specify if users are able to insert, modify, or delete records in the recorded tables. See step 7 in the "To create or modify permission sets manually" section. - -### Example - Indirect Permission -You can assign an indirect permission to use an object only through another object. -For example, a user can have permission to run codeunit 80, **Sales-Post**. The **Sales-Post** codeunit performs many tasks, including modifying table 37, **Sales Line**. When the user posts a sales document, the **Sales-Post** codeunit, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] checks if the user has permission to modify the **Sales Line** table. If not, the codeunit cannot complete its tasks, and the user receives an error message. If so, the codeunit runs successfully. - -However, the user does not need to have full access to the **Sales Line** table to run the codeunit. If the user has indirect permission to the **Sales Line** table, then the **Sales-Post** codeunit runs successfully. When a user has indirect permission, that user can only modify the **Sales Line** table by running the **Sales-Post** codeunit or another object that has permission to modify the **Sales Line** table. The user can only modify the **Sales Line** table when doing so from supported application areas. The user cannot run the feature inadvertently or maliciously by other methods. - -## To set up user time constraints -Administrators can define periods of time during which specified users are able to post, and also specify if the system logs the amount of time users are logged on. Administrators can also assign responsibility centers to users. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **User Setup** window opens, choose the **New** action. -3. In the **User ID** field, enter the ID of a user, or choose the field to see all current Windows users in the system. -4. Fill in the fields as necessary. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Getting Ready for Doing Business](ui-get-ready-business.md) -[Setup and Administration in Dynamics NAV](admin-setup-and-administration.md) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Creating Microsoft Dynamics NAV Users](/dynamics-nav/How-to--Create-Microsoft-Dynamics-NAV-Users) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-view-test-reports-posting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-view-test-reports-posting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6bfec4c3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-how-view-test-reports-posting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Review a Test Report Before Posting a Sales or Purchase Document -description: Before you post a document, for example, an order or a credit memo, you can test and review it to check for errors that might block posting. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 05/12/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# How to: View Test Reports Before Posting -When you are ready to post a document, such as an order, invoice, or a credit memo, you can test the document to ensure that no issues exist that will block the posting. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure is about testing before posting a purchase document. The functionality works in the same way for sales documents. - -## To print a test report before posting a purchase invoice -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the purchase invoice that you want to test. -3. Choose the **Test Report** action. - -All parts of the purchase invoice are tested, and the result is presented in a report. If the report indicates any errors or missing information, then you must correct the problem before posting the purchase invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Post Documents and Journals](ui-post-documents-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-let-system-suggest-values.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-let-system-suggest-values.md deleted file mode 100644 index 89cb3472..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-let-system-suggest-values.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Suggested Field Values -description: To avoid manual calculations and complete tasks quickly and accurately, you can set up automatic data entry so that Dynamics NAV fills in selected fields. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 08/15/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Letting [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Suggest Values -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can help you complete tasks quicker and more correctly by prefilling fields or complete lines with data that you would otherwise have to calculate and enter yourself. Although such automatic data entry is always correct, you can change it afterwards if you want to. - -Functionality that enters field values for you is typically offered for tasks where you enter large volumes of transactional data and want to avoid errors and save time. This topic contains a selection of such functionality. More sections will be added in future updates of [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## The **Suggest Balancing Amount** check box in the **General Journal Batches** window -When, for example, you are entering general journal lines for multiple expenses that must all be posted to the same bank account, then each time you enter a new journal line for an expense, you can have the **Amount** field on the bank account line automatically updated to the amount that balances the expenses. For more information about working with general journals, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -### To have the **Amount** field on balancing general journal lines filled automatically -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the line for your preferred general journal batch, choose the **Suggest Balancing Amount** check box. -3. Open the general journal and proceed to register and post transactions using the described functionality for automatic entry of a field value. - -For information about how to set up a personal general journal batch, for example, for expense handling, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -## The **Automatically Fill Date Received** field in the **Payment Registration** window -The **Payment Registration** window shows outstanding incoming payments as lines that represent sales documents where an amount is due for payment. For more information about applying customer payments, see [How to: Reconcile Customer Payments Manually From a List of Unpaid Sales Documents](receivables-how-reconcile-customer-payments-list-unpaid-sales-documents.md). - -You main actions in the window are to fill in the **Payment Made** check box and the **Date Received** field. You can set [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] up to automatically enter work date in the **Date Received** field when you select the **Payment Made** check box. - -### To have the **Date Received** field in the **Payment Registration** window filled automatically -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Payment Registration Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Automatically Fill Date Received** check box. -3. Open the **Payment Registration** window and proceed to process incoming customer payments using the described functionality for automatic entry of a field value. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Finance](finance.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-manage-report-layouts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-manage-report-layouts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 228bf319..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-manage-report-layouts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Working with Custom and Built-In Layouts for Reports and Documents -description: Use report layouts to customize documents, for example, to personalize the font, logo, or page settings of PDF files you send to customers. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customized report, document layout, logo, personalize -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Managing Report and Document Layouts -A report layout controls content and format of the report, including which data fields of a report dataset appear on the report and how they are arranged, text style, images, and more. From [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can change which layout is used on a report, create new layout, or modify the existing layouts. - -> [!NOTE] -> In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the term "report" also covers externally-facing documents, such as sales invoices and order confirmations that you send to customers as PDF files. - -In particular, a report layout sets up the following: - -* The label and data fields to include from the dataset of the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] report. -* The text format, such as font type, size, and color. -* The company logo and its position. -* General page settings, such as margins and background images. - -A [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can be set up with multiple report layouts, which you can switch among as required. You can use one of the built-in report layouts or you can create custom report layouts and assign them to your reports as needed. For more information, see [How to: Create a Custom Report or Document Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md). - -There are two types of report layouts that you can use on reports; Word and RDLC. - -## Word report layout overview -A Word report layout is a based on Word document (.docx file type). Word report layouts enable you to design report layouts by using Microsoft Word 2013 or later. A Word report layout determines the report's content - controlling how that content elements are arranged and how they look. A Word report layout document will typically use tables to arrange content, where the cells can contain data fields, text, or pictures. - - ![Example of a word report layout document for NAV](media/nav_wordreportlayout_edit_in_word_example.png "NAV_WordReportLayout_Edit_In_Word_Example") - -## RDLC layout overview -RDLC layouts are based on client report definition layouts (.rdlc or .rdl file types). These layouts are created and modified by using SQL Server Report Builder. The design concept for RDLC layouts is similar to Word layouts, where the layout defines the general format of the report and determines the fields from the dataset to include. Designing RDLC layouts is more advanced than Word layouts. For more information, see [Designing RDLC Report Layouts](/dynamics-nav/Designing-RDLC-Report-Layouts). - -## Built-in and custom report layouts -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes several built-in layouts. Built-in layouts are predefined layouts that are designed for specific reports. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] reports will have a built-in layout as either an RDLC report layout, Word report layout, or in some cases both. You cannot modify a built-in report layout from [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] but you use them as a starting point for building your own custom report layouts. - -Custom layouts are report layouts that you design to change the appearance of a report. You typically create a custom layout based on a built-in layout, but you can create them from scratch or from a copy of an existing custom layout. Custom layouts enable you to have multiple layouts for the same report, which you switch among as needed. For example, you can have different layouts for each [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company, or you can have different layouts for the same company for specific occasions or events, like a special campaign or holiday season. - -## Deciding whether to use a Word or RDLC report layout -A report layout can be based on either a Word document or RDLC file. Deciding on whether to use a Word report layout or RDLC report layout type will depend on how you want the generated report to look and your knowledge of Word and SQL Server Report Builder. - -The general design concepts for Word and RDLC layouts are very similar. However each type has certain design features that affect how the generated report is appears in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. This means that the same report might look different when using the Word report layout compared to the RDLC report layout. - -The process for setting up Word report layouts and RDLC report layouts on reports is the same. The main difference is in the way you modify the layouts. Word report layouts are typically easier to create and modify than RDLC report layouts because you can use Word. RDLC report layouts are modified by using SQL Server Report builder which targets more advanced users. - -For information on how to change which layout to use, see [How to: Change Which Layout is Currently Used on a Report](ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Updating Report or Document Layouts](ui-update-report-layouts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report or Document Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md) -[How to: Import and Export a Custom Report or Document Layout](ui-how-import-and-export-report-layout.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with Reports](ui-work-report.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-mandatory-fields.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-mandatory-fields.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0c678fb..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-mandatory-fields.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Fields Required to Complete Processes -description: Learn about fields marked with a red asterisk, which indicates that they are required and must be filled in to complete a processes. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 05/12/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Mandatory Fields -When you enter data on pages in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], certain fields are marked with a red asterisk. The red asterisk means that the field must be filled to complete a certain process that uses the field, such as posting a transaction that uses the value in the field. - -Even though the field contains a red asterisk, you are not forced to fill in the field before you continue to other fields or close the page. The red asterisk only serves as a reminder that you will be blocked from completing a certain process. - -## Examples -In the **Customer Card** window, the red asterisk appears in the **Name** field, in the **Tax Area Code** field, and in the posting group fields to indicate that you cannot post a sales transaction for the customer unless the fields are filled. - -In the **Item Card** window, the red asterisk appears in the **Description** field to indicate that you cannot enter the item on a document line, such as a sales order, unless this field is filled. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-locked.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-locked.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0a746249..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-locked.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Why is the page is locked from personalizing?" -description: Explains why you cannot personlaize a page and what you can do to unlock it so you can personalize it. -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: personalization locked, cannot personalize page -ms.date: 09/07/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Why is the Page is Locked from Personalizing? -If there is a lock icon in the **Personalizing** banner when you open a page (as shown), this means that you are currently prevented from making any more personalization changes to the page in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web](includes/nav_web_md.md)]. - -![Personalize Lock](media/personalization-locked.png "Personalize lock") - -There can be two reasons for this: -1. Until now, you have only used the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] to personalize the page. - -2. You have used the [!INCLUDE[nav_web](includes/nav_web_md.md)] to personalize the page before, but it was done using a [!INCLUDE[nav2017](includes/nav2017.md)] or earlier version. - -If you want to continue personalizing the page by using the [!INCLUDE[nav_web](includes/nav_web_md.md)], choose the lock icon, and then **Unlock**. - -## What Happens When you Unlock the Page -If you choose to unlock the page, the current personalization of the page in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web](includes/nav_web_md.md)] will be cleared, meaning the page will go back to its original layout and you will have to start from scratch. - -In the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)], the page will remain as it was before and will not be effected by the new changes in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web](includes/nav_web_md.md)]. The personalization in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web](includes/nav_web_md.md)] and [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] becomes separated, so you will now have a personalized version in each client. - -In the future, you will personalize the page in the two clients separately. Therefore, the page can potentially look different between the two. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Personalization Overview](ui-personalization-overview.md) -[Working with personalization between the Dynamics NAV Windows and Web client](ui-personalization-overview.md#PersonalizationWinWeb) -[Personalizing Your Workspace by Using the Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) -[Personalizing Your Workspace by Using the Windows Client](ui-personalization-windows-client.md) -[Managing Personalization](ui-personalization-manage.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-manage.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-manage.md deleted file mode 100644 index d6110b0b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-manage.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Managing Personalization as an Administrator -description: Learn how to customize the user interface to suit your way of working. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 07/26/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Managing Personalization as an Administrator -Users can personalize their workspace to suit their own preferences. As an administrator, you can control and manage personalization by: - -- Enabling or disabling the personalization feature for the entire the application ([!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)] only). You cannot disable personalization on a global basis for the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]. -- Enabling or disabling the personalization feature for users of a specific profile. -- Clearing any page personalizations that users have made. - -## Enabling or Disabling Personalization in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)] -By default, personalization is not enabled in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]. To enable personalization, you modify the configuration file (navsettings.json) of the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_server_instance_md](includes/nav_web_server_instance_md.md)] instance for the Web client to include this line: - -``` -"PersonalizationEnabled": true -``` - -If you want to disable personalization in the Web client, remove this line. - -For more information about how to modify the navsettings.json file, see [Modify the navsettings.json file directly](/dynamics-nav/configuring-microsoft-dynamics-nav-web-client-by-modifying-the-web.config-file#WebClientSettingsFile). - -## Disabling Personalization for a Profile -You can prevent all users that belong to a specific profile from being able to personalize their pages. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Profiles**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the profile in the list that you want to modify. -3. Select the **Disable personalization** check box, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## Clearing User Personalizations -Clearing page personalization changes the page back to its original layout before any personalization was made. There are two ways to clear the personalizations that users have made to pages: using the **Delete User Personalization** page and using the **User Personalization Card** page. - -### To clear user personalizations by using the Delete User Personalization page -The **Delete User Personalization** page enables you to clear personalization on a per-page, per-user basis. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Delete User Personalization**, and then choose the related link. - - The page lists all the pages that have been personalized and the user it belongs to. - - >[!NOTE] - > A check mark in the **Legacy Personalization** column indicates that the personalization has been done strictly by using [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] and/or it has been done in [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)] prior to [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]. Users who try to personalize these pages by using the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)] are locked from doing so unless they choose to unlock the page. For more information, see [Why a page is locked from personalizing](ui-personalization-locked.md).For more information about personalization between the [!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)] and [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)], see [Working with personalization between the Dynamics NAV Windows and Web client](ui-personalization-overview.md#PersonalizationWinWeb). - -2. Select the entry that you want to delete, and then choose the **Delete** action. - - The user will see the changes the next time they sign-in. - -### To clear user personalizations by using the User Personalization Card page - -The **User Personalization Card** page enables you to clear the personalization on all pages for specific user. This requires write permission to Table 2000000072 **Profile**. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **User Personalization**, and then choose the related link. - - The **User Personalization** page lists all users who potentially have personalized pages. If you cannot find a user in the list, this means that they do not have any personalized pages. - -2. Select the user from the list, and then choose the **Edit** action. - -3. On the **Actions** tab, choose **Clear Personalized Pages**. - - The user will see the changes the next time they sign-in. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Personalization Overview](ui-personalization-overview.md) -[Personalizing Your Workspace](ui-personalization-user.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-overview.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-overview.md deleted file mode 100644 index f5c591b5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-overview.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Personalizing Your Workspace - Overview" -description: Learn how to customize your workspace using different Dynamics NAV features for the Windows client and Web client. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.date: 07/26/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Personalizing Your Workspace - Overview -You can customize, or *personalize*, your workspace to suit your work and preferences by changing the layout of pages so that they display only the information you need, where you need it. The personalization changes that you make will only affect what you see, not what other users see. - -You can personalize your workspace by using the [[!INCLUDE[nav_windows_md](includes/nav_windows_md.md)]](ui-personalization-windows-client.md) and [[!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]](ui-personalization-user.md). The personlization changes that you make will also be seen in the [!INCLUDE[nav_phone_md](includes/nav_phone_md.md)] and [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_phone_md.md)]. - -> [!NOTE] -> The administrator in your company may have already customized your user interface to a role-specific layout for all users who have the same profile as you and use the same Role Center. Personalizations that you make to your workspace are saved under your user account, so they will be preserved even if an administrator rolls out a new set of role-specific layouts in your company. For more information, see [Configuring the User Interface](admin-configure-user-interface.md). - -## Comparing Personalization in the Dynamics NAV Windows and Web Clients -Depending on the page, you can personalize many parts of the user interface, such as what fields or columns are shown and where they are placed, what actions are included on the ribbon, and more. Many of these things you can do in both the Windows client and Web client. The following table provides an overview of the personalization capabilities in each client. - -### Fields in FastTabs - -| Personalize | Windows client | Web client | -|---------------|------------------|--------------| -|Add, move, remove |x|x| -|Show in collapsed header|x|| -|Hide under **Show more fields** action|x|| - -### Lists or document lines - -| Personalize | Windows client | Web client | -|---------------|------------------|--------------| -|Add, move, remove columns |x|x| -|Add, move, remove freeze pane |x|x| - -### FactBoxes - -| Personalize | Windows client | Web client | -|---------------|------------------|--------------| -|Move, remove|x|x| -|Add|x|| -|Add, move, remove fields|x|x| - -### Cues - -| Personalize | Windows client | Web client | -|---------------|------------------|--------------| -|Move, remove|x|x| -|Add |x|| - -### Charts - -| Personalize | Windows client | Web client | -|---------------|------------------|--------------| -|Move, remove|x|x| -|Add|x| | -|Ribbon and actions||x| -|Navigation Pane||x| - -Another difference is that when personalizing by using the Windows client, you can have various personalized versions of the same page, based on different access points to the page. For example, the **Sales Orders** page personalized to look different when it is opened from the **Customer Card** page than when it is opened from the **Sales Order Processor Role Center** page. When you personalize a page by using the Web client, there is only one personalized version per page, so the changes will be seen in the page no matter where you open it from. - -## Working with Personalization Between the Dynamics NAV Windows and Web Client -Before you start personalizing pages, it is important to understand how the personalization between the Window client and Web client works. If you will only ever use either the Windows client or the Web client, this information is not so relevant. However, it becomes important if you begin to personalize pages using both clients or when transitioning from using the Windows client to using the Web client permanently. - -- If you use the Windows client to personalize a specific page from the start, you will also see the personalization changes to the page in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)] as well. - -- As long as you continue to use the Windows client to personalize the page, any personalization changes you make, will also take effect on the page in the Web client. - -- However, as soon as you start to personalize the page by using the Web client, the personalization for that page becomes separate between the two clients, and you will have a personalized version for each client. In the Web client, the previous personalizations on the page are cleared, which means that the page will return to its original layout, and you will essentially start personalizing the page from scratch. The previous personalizations in the Windows client are unchanged. - -- From this point on, you will personalize the page in the Windows and Web client independent of each other, which means the page can potentially look different in each client. The Phone and Tablet clients will show the same page personalizations as the Web client. - -> [!Tip] ->If you open the **Delete User Personalization** page, you can see all the pages that have been personalized by each user. The **Legacy Personalization** column gives you an indication as to whether the personalization was done in the Windows client or Web client. If there is a check mark in the column, the personalization was done in the Windows client (or in the Web client prior to [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Personalizing Your Workspace in the Dynamics NAV Windows Client](ui-personalization-windows-client.md) -[Personalizing Your Workspace in the Dynamics NAV Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) -[Managing Personalization](ui-personalization-manage.md) -[Customizing Dynamics NAV](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-user.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-user.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0dc2df28..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-user.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Personalizing Your Workspace Using the Dynamics NAV Web Client -description: Learn about the different options to customize the user interface to suit your way of working. -documentationcenter: '' -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: customize, personalize, personalize page, personalization, hide columns, remove fields, move fields -ms.date: 07/26/2017 -author: jswymer -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Personalizing Your Workspace Using the Dynamics NAV Web Client - -You can customize, or *personalize*, your workspace to suit your work and preferences by changing pages so that they display only the information you need, where you need it. The personalization changes that you make will only affect what you see, not what other users see. - -Depending on the type of page and what it includes, you can: - -- Add, move, and remove fields. -- Add, move, and remove columns in a list. -- Change the freeze pane of columns in a list. The freeze pane locks one or more columns to the left side of a list so that are always present, even when you scroll horizontally. -- Move and remove Cues (tiles). -- Move and remove parts. Parts are subdivisions or areas on a page that contain things like multiple fields, another page, a chart, or tiles. - -## To personalize a page - -1. In the upper-right corner, select your avatar, and then **Personalize**. - - The **Personalizing** banner appears at the top, which indicates that you can start making changes. - - ![Personalize mode](media/ui_personalize_mode_small.png "Personalize mode") - - > [!Note] - > If you do not see the **Personalize** action, then personalization has not been enabled. Contact to your administrator or see [Enabling or Disabling Personalization in the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]](ui-personalization-manage.md#EnablePersonalization) for information about how to enable it. - -2. Go to a page that you want to personalize. - - If there is a ![Personalization locked](media/personalization-lock-icon.png "Personalization locked") icon in the banner, see [Why the Page is Locked](ui-personalization-locked.md) for more details. - - If there is a ![Personalization blocked](media/ui_personalization_blocked.png "Personalization blocked") icon, you cannot personalize the page because it has been configured by an administrator. - -3. Point to an area that you want to personalize, such as a field or column header in a list. Anything that you can personalize is immediately highlighted with an arrow or border. - - -4. Use this table to help make changes: - - - - - - -
What do you want to doHow to do it
Move something, like a field, column in list, tile, or part Point anywhere on what you want to move, and drag it to its new location. The location is indicated by either a thick horizontal or vertical line.
Remove somethingSelect the arrowhead, and choose Remove.
Add a field or columnIn the Personalizing banner, choose More, and then choose Field.

The Add Field to Page pane opens on the right. It lists the fields that you can add to the page. Fields marked as Placed are already on the page. Fields marked as Ready are not currently on the page.

To add a field, drag it from the pane to the location that you want it. The location is indicated by either a thick horizontal or vertical line.
Change the freeze pane in a list to another columnSelect the arrowhead of the column that you want as the last column of the freeze pane, and then choose Set Freeze Pane.

If you want to set the freeze pane back to its original designed location, select the arrowhead for the current freeze pane column, and choose Clear Freeze Pane. Note: You cannot remove original freeze pane. There will always be a freeze pane that includes at least one column.
- - > [!IMPORTANT] - > You cannot make changes to a list if the list is shown as tiles. You must first switch the page to the list view by selecting the ![Show as list](media/ui_show_as_list_icon.png "Show as list arrow left") icon. - -5. You can continue to make changes on the same page or move to another page. Your changes are automatically saved as you make them. When you are done, in the **Personalizing** banner, choose **Done**. - -## Clearing Personalization to Change a Page Back to its Original Layout -At some point, you might want to undo all the personalization changes that you have made to a page over time so that page looks like it did originally. To do this, in the **Personalizing** banner, choose **More**, and then **Clear personalization**. - -## Personalization in Detail -To help you better understand personalization, here are some pointers. -- When you make changes to a card page that you open from a list, the changes will take effect on all records that you open from that list. For example, let us say you open a specific customer from the **Customers list** window, and then personalize the page by adding a field. When you open other customers from the list, the field that you added will also be shown. -- Changes that you make will take effect on all your Role Centers. For example, if you make a change to the Customer list when the Role Center is set to Business Manager, you will also see the change in the Customer list when Role Center is set to Sales Order Processor. -- Changes to a page in a pane will take effect on the page where ever it is shown. -- You can only add fields and columns from a predefined list, which is based on the page. You cannot create new ones. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Personalization Overview](ui-personalization-overview.md) -[Managing Personalization](ui-personalization-manage.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md) -[Configuring the User Interface (UI) for Users](admin-configure-user-interface.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-windows-client.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-windows-client.md deleted file mode 100644 index 047f5f22..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-personalization-windows-client.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,368 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Personalizing Pages in the Dynamics Windows Client -description: Learn how to customize the user interface to suit your way of working for the Dynamics Windows Client. -author: jswymer -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 07/26/2017 -ms.author: jswymer -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Personalizing Your Workspace in the Dynamics Windows Client -You can personalize, or customize, your workspace to suit your work and preferences by changing pages so that they display only the information you need, where you need it. The personalization changes that you make will only affect what you see, not what other users see. You can personalize many parts of the user interface (UI), including which actions to include on the ribbon, how fields are positioned on FastTabs or in FactBoxes, and which menu items to include in the navigation pane. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also personalize pages by using the [!INCLUDE[nav_web_md](includes/nav_web_md.md)]. To learn how personalization works between the two clients, see [Personalization Overview](ui-personalization-overview.md). - -## How to personalize your workspace -You perform most of the personalization work by using the **Customize** feature, which you can access from practically all types of pages by doing the following: - -1. Open the page that you want to personalize. -2. In the top left, choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, choose **Customize**, and then select one of the customization options. - -There are also some basic UI changes, such as adjusting the size of any window or expanding the width of columns, which you do directly on the page, outside of the **Customize** option. - -## General Information -While customizing the UI, it is a good idea to keep these points in mind: - -- You can record multiple customizations of the same page based on different access points to the page. For example, the Sales Orders window can be customized to look different when it is opened from the Customer Card window than when it is opened from the Sales Order Processor Role Center. The point from which you access the page to be customized is recorded in that specific page customization. Accordingly, there may be multiple page-customization records in the database, as you can see in the **Delete User Personalization** window. - -- The application can be configured to show and hide user interface (UI) elements (such as fields, FatTabs, and FactBoxes)lbased on your license or permissions. You will only be able to view and customize elements fields that you have permission to. - -## Customizing Ribbons -The ribbon provides you access to several actions. By customizing the ribbon, you can optimize it for your work processes and preferences. For example, if you frequently use the **Dimensions** window, you can add the **Dimensions** action to the **Process** actions group. You can also remove actions that you never use for better overview. - -You can perform the following tasks to customize ribbons on pages: - -- Add, rename, or remove tabs, groups, actions, and menus. -- Change the order of actions. -- Restore the ribbon to its default setting. - -### To customize a ribbon -1. Open the page that you want to change. -2. In the top left, choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, choose **Customize** , and then **Customize Ribbon**. - -The **Organize actions in the ribbon** dialog box is divvided into two panes. The **Available actions** pane lists all the actions that you can choose to add to the page. The **Show actions in this order** pane shows the structure of all the actions currently shown on the page. - -- Root-level items define tabs. - - - Second-level items define a group in a tab. - - - Third-level item define a menu of actions in a group - -### To add a group -Select the tab under which you want the group, and then select **Create Group**. You cannot add a group under a menu. - -### To add a menu -Select the group under which you want the menu, and then select **Create Menu**. You can only add a menu to a group or another menu. - -#### To add an action -Select it in the **Available actions** pane, choose **Add** to add it to the **Show actions in this order** pane, then use the **Move Up** and **Move Down** buttons to place it where you want it. - -You cannot add an action to a tab; only to a group or menu. - -### Limitations and Recommendations -Be aware of the following limitations when you customize the ribbon: - -- System tabs or groups such as **Home** or **New** cannot be moved or renamed. The position of some groups, such as **New Document** is fixed. -- Actions or groups that have dynamic visibility cannot be added or removed. -- You can only create menus inside groups, not inside tabs. -- You can nest a menu within another menu, but this is not recommended. -- If you see unexpected behavior with groups and actions after having customized the ribbon, do the following: - - 1. Empty, but do not delete, the group where the problem occurs. - 2. Close the dialog using the **OK** button. - 3. Open the dialog again and re-add the actions to the group. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> Any customization that alters the ribbon could affect the guidance provided in the [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] Help, because navigation steps in Help may refer to a different ribbon layout. - -## Customizing FastTabs -FastTabs help organize information about pages into simple, manageable groups. You can customize FastTabs on pages so that they support your workflow. For example, you may want to show fewer FastTabs or hide specific fields on FastTabs. You can also promote the most important fields to be included in the FastTab headers when the FastTabs are collapsed. - -### To customize a FastTab - -1. Open the page that you want to change. -2. Choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, select **Customize**, and then choose **Customize This Page**. -3. In the **Customize \** dialog box, choose **FastTabs**. - -### To add, move, or remove FastTabs -The **Show FastTabs in this order** box contains the FastTabs that are currently on the page, and the order in which they are displayed. Use the **Add**, **Remove**, and **Move Up** and **Move Down** buttons to make changes. - -### To show and hide fields on FastTabs -In **Show FastTabs in this order box**, select the FastTab that you want to change, and then choose **Customize FastTab**. Use the buttons to customize the fields you want to display and their order on the page. - -Set the **Importance** as follows: -- If you want to display the field in the FastTab header when the FastTab is collapsed, set this to **Promoted**. -- If you want the field to be hidden unless the user chooses the **Show More Fields** action on the FastTab, set this to **Additional**. -- **Standard** is the default or normal setting. - -### To set up a field for Quick Entry -Select the **Quick Entry** check box to add the field to the quick entry field list. When you work on the page, and press the Enter key in a field, the pointer jumps to the next field that is set to be a Quick Entry field. - -## Customizing FactBoxes -You use FactBoxes to see information that relates to the record that you have selected in the list or opened in a task page. You can select which FactBoxes to display in your FactBox pane. You can also customize FactBoxes to display only the fields that you need. - -### To show or hide the FactBox pane -FactBoxes are contained in a FactBox pane, which you can choose to show or hide on a page basis. This enables you to easliy hide multiple FactBoxes without having to remove them individually. - -1. Open the page that you want to change. -2. Choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, select **Customize**, and then choose **FactBoxes**. A check mark indicates that the FactBox pane is displayed. - -### To customize the FactBox pane -1. Open the page that you want to change. -2. Choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, select **Customize**, and then choose **Choose FactBoxes**. - -### To add a FactBox - -Select the FactBox that you want to add to the FactBox pane in the **Available FactBoxes** box, and then choose the **Add** button. - -### To remove a FactBox - -In the **Show FactBoxes in this order** box, select the FactBoxes , and then **Remove** button. - -### To change the order of the FactBoxes - -In the **Show FactBoxes in this order** box, select the FactBox that you want to move, and then choose the **Move Up** or **Move Down** buttons until it is positioned where you want it. - -### To change the fields in a FactBox - -1. In the **Show FactBoxes in this order** box, select the FactBox, and then choose **Customize Part**. - -2. The **Available fields** box list all the fields that you can choose from. The **Fields shown** box shows all the fields that are currently displayed in the FactBox. Use the buttons to add, remove, and move the fields. - - -## Customizing Columns in a List or on Document Lines -To get a better overview of the information that you need, you can customize list pages and card pages by adding or removing columns in the grids, rearranging columns, and adding a freeze pane. - -### To add, remove, and arrange columns - -1. You can add, remove, or rearrange columns two ways: - - - Choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, choose **Customize**, and then **Choose Columns**. - - Right-choose a column header and then choose **Choose Columns**. - -2. In the **Choose which columns to show in list** dialog boxThe **Available columns** pane contains columns that are hidden. The **Show columns in this order** pane contains columns that are shown. Use the **Add** and **Remove** buttons to move columns from one field to the other. Use the **Move Up** and **Move Down** buttons to position the columns. - ->[!TIP] ->Select the **Quick Entry** check box to add the field to the quick entry field list. When you work on the page, and press the Enter key in a field, the pointer jumps to the next field that is set to be a Quick Entry field. - -### To set the freeze pane -A list can have many columns, which can force you to scroll horizontally to see all the columns. There might be some columns that you always want to display even as you scroll. To achieve this, you can add a vertical freeze pane to restrict some columns from scrolling. This enables you to ensure that only less important columns move when you scroll. - -To set the freeze pane, select the column after which you want the freeze pane to start, and then choose **Add Freeze Pane**. - -## Customizing the Navigation Pane -The navigation pane displays a menu of links to different list pages. Links are grouped under root-level buttons. - -### To customize the navigation pane - -Choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, choose **Customize**, and then choose **Customize Navigation Pane**. - -### Renaming or Rearranging Buttons in the Navigation Pane -In the **Customize Navigation Pane** dialog box, in the left pane, select the button that you want to move, rename, or remove and then choose the relevant button in the middle of the window. - -You cannot move, rename, or remove the **Home** button. The **Departments** button can be removed from the navigation pane, but not renamed or moved. - -### To add a new menu button -You can create a new root-level button, and then add a menu of links under the button to open different pages. - -1. In the **Customize Navigation Pane** dialog box, choose **New**, and then type a name in the **Name** field. -2. Choose the **OK** button. - -You can add links to the button. - -### To add a link to a button -If you have permission to view a list, such as the sales order list, you can add a link to the list from a button in your navigation pane. - -1. In the **Customize Navigation Pane** dialog box, in the **Navigation pane buttons** field, select the menu that you want to add the link to. - -2. Choose the **Add** button. - -3. Browse to the link that you want to add, and then choose the **OK** button. - > [!TIP] - > If you find a link in the **Departments** pages, you can also add it to the navigation pane. For more information, see the section Adding a Link from Departments to Your Role Center. - -### To move or copy a link from one button to another - -1. In the **Customize Navigation Pane** dialog box, in the **Navigation pane buttons** field, select the menu where the link currently appears. - -2. In the **Lists** pane, select the link that you want to move, and then choose **Move To** or **Copy To** - -3. Select the navigation button that you want to add the link to, and then choose the **OK** button. - -### To rearrange the order of a links under a button - -1. In the **Lists** pane, select the link that you want to move. - -2. Use the **Move Up** and **Move Down** buttons to position the link. - -## Adding Department Links to the Role Center -Sometimes you may find a link on a **Departments** page that you want to add to your Role Center for easy access. Where you can place the link on the Role Center depends the category of the link on the **Departments** page. - -The following table describes the types of links in each category on the **Departments** pages, and where on your Role Center you can add them. - -|**Category**|**Contains**|**Add link to**| -|------------------|------------------|---------------------| -|Lists|List pages|**Home** button in navigation pane| -|Tasks|Task pages, batch jobs, worksheets, journals|**Actions** tab in the ribbon| -|Reports and Analysis|Reports, batch jobs, matrix windows|**Reports** tab in the ribbon| -|Documents|Documents such as invoices and reminders|**Reports** in the ribbon| -|Archive/History|Posted/finished documents, registers|**Home** button in navigation pane| -|Administration|Setup windows|**Actions** tab in the ribbon| - -### To copy department links to your Role Center - -1. Open the **Departments** page. - -2. Right-choose the link, and then choose of the following (only one of these options will be available). - - - | **Select** | **To add the link to** | - |------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------| - | **Add to Navigation Pane** | The **Home** button in navigation pane on your Role Center. | - | **Add to Actions on Role Center Ribbon** | The **Actions** menu on the ribbon on your Role Center | - | **Add to Reports on Role Center Ribbon** | The **Reports** menu on the ribbon on your Role Center | - - -3. Confirm the message that appears. - - The new link now appears in the menu to which you added it. However, you may want to move the link to another position in the menu. For example, if you added a link to the navigation pane, it will appear on the **Home** menu, but you can move it to another menu in the navigation pane. For more information, see the section Customizing the Navigation Pane. - -## Adding Charts to Role Centers and List Pages -When you have complex information, you may want to view a visual representation of the data to help see trends and make decisions. For example, you may want to monitor the balances per bank account for your company in a chart. You use the chart pane to visually show data from a list on the following types of pages: - -- On your Role Center, where you can select from predefined generic charts. - -- On a list page, where you can select to view a list as a chart. - -### To add a generic chart to your Role Center - -1. On your Role Center, choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, select **Customize**, and then **Customize this Page**. - -2. In the **Customize the Role Center** window, in the **Available parts** field, select **Chart Part**, and then choose **Add**. - -3. Use the **Move Up**, **Move Down**, **Move Left**, and **Move Right** buttons to position the Chart Part on your Role Center. - -4. Select the chart part, choose **Customize Part**. - -5. In the **Customize Chart** window, select the predefined chart that you want to display, and then choose the **OK** button. - -### To view a list as a chart - -1. On the list page, select the **Show as Chart** action. - -2. Select a measure and a dimension to create a custom chart. To see additional information, select a secondary dimension. For example, to create a simple bar chart, select a dimension on the x-axis, and then select the **Dimension Count** dimension on the y-axis. - -> [!NOTE] -> By default, the chart pane is hidden because it can slow down performance. You should only show the chart when you must have the information. - -## Handling External Files and Automation Objects -When [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] receives an external file, you are presented with a dialog box. In addition to selecting what to do with the file, you can decide how to treat that file type next time it is received. - -When [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] is required to run an automation object, you are presented with a dialog box. You can decide whether that type of object should always or never be able to run. - -### To specify how to handle external files - -1. When you are presented with the dialog box, clear the **Always ask before opening this type of file** check box if you want [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] to remember the option that you select in step 2. Next time that type file must be handled, the dialog box will not appear, and the file will be treated as specified in step 2. - - Alternatively, select the **Always ask before opening this type of file** check box to always be presented with the dialog box when this file type is received. - -2. Select **Open**, **Save**, or **Cancel**. The file is treated according to your selection. - -### To specify how to handle automation objects - -When you are presented with the dialog, select the **Always allow** check box if you want [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] to always run that type of automation object. Next time that type of automation object is required to run, the dialog box will not appear, and the automation object will run directly. - -Alternatively, select the **Never allow** check box to. Next time that type of automation object is required to run, the dialog box will not appear, and the automation object will not run. - -## Cancelling Personalization -Cancelling personalization can be divided into two categories: - -- Cancelling changes that you made by using the **Customize** feature. -- Cancelling basic UI changes. - -### Canceling Customization -If you want to cancel all UI customization that you have ever made for a page under your current user logon or since you last canceled UI customizations, you can use the **Delete User Personalization** window. The layout of the page for which you delete your personalization is then reset to the default configuration for your profile. - -If you only want to cancel UI customization that you have made to a specific UI area on a page, such as the ribbon, you can use the **Restore Defaults** button in the **Customize** window. The layout of the specific UI area on that page is then reset to the default configuration for your profile. - -#### To cancel all UI customization that you have made to a page - -1. In the **Search** box,, enter **Delete User Personalization**, and then choose the related link. - -2. Select the page for which you want to cancel your UI customization, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **View** group, choose **Delete**. - -> [!NOTE] -> All UI customization of the page that you have ever made under your current user logon or since you last used the **Delete User Personalization** window are canceled. The layout of the page is reset to the default configuration for your profile, as configured by the administrator or as installed with [!INCLUDE[navnow](includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -#### To cancel UI customization that you have made to a UI area on a page - -1. From the page where you have customized a UI area, such as the ribbon, choose the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon") icon, choose **Customize**, and then choose **Customize \**. - -2. At the bottom of the **Customize** window, choose the **Restore Defaults** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> All customization of the UI area that you have ever made for the page under your current user logon or since you last used the **Restore Defaults** button are canceled. The layout of the UI area on the page is reset to the default configuration for your profile, as configured by the administrator or as installed with [!INCLUDE[navnow](includes/navnow_md.md)]. - -### Canceling Basic UI Changes -You cancel basic UI changes by opening the **Reset User-Specified Settings** window from your Role Center. - -Basic UI changes include things like: - - Changing the size and position of any window. - - Changing the width of columns - - Changing the height of column headers. - - Sorting on columns in a list. - - Displaying lists as chart. - - Specifying how external files and automation objects are handled. - -#### To cancel basic UI changes - -1. Go to your Role Center. - - On the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon"), choose **Customize**, and then choose **Reset User-Specified Settings**. - -2. Choose the **Reset UI settings** button. Alternatively, choose the **Reset all** button to also cancel your decisions for handling files and automation objects. - - All basic UI changes that you have ever made under your current user logon to [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)], or since you last chose the **Reset UI settings** button, are canceled. The user interface is reset to the default configuration for your profile. - -#### To cancel your decision for running or saving external files - -1. Go to your Role Center. - - On the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon"), choose **Customize**, and then choose **Reset User-Specified Settings**. - -2. Choose the **Reset file handling decision** button. Alternatively, choose the **Reset all** button to also cancel your view changes and decision for handling automation objects. - - All decisions for default handling of file types that you have ever made under your current user logon, or since you last chose the **Client file access** button, are canceled and reset to the default configuration for your profile. The next time [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] receives an external file of any type, you are presented with a dialog with the options, **Save**, **Run**, and **Cancel** - -### To cancel your decision for handling automation objects - -1. Go to your Role Center. - - On the **Application** menu ![Application Menu button in menu bar](media/applicationmenuicon.png "ApplicationMenuIcon"), choose **Customize**, and then choose **Reset User-Specified Settings**. - -2. Choose the **Reset automation decisions** button. Alternatively, choose the **Reset all** button to also cancel your view changes and decision for running or saving external files. - - All decisions about how to run automation objects that you have ever made under your current user logon, or since you last chose the **Reset automation decisions** button, are canceled. The file handling behavior is reset to the default configuration for your profile.The next time [!INCLUDE[navnow_md](includes/navnow_md.md)] must run an automation object of any type, you are presented with a dialog with the options, **Always allow** and **Never allow**. - - - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Personalizing Your Workspace in the Dynamics Web Client](ui-personalization-user.md) -[Personalization Overview](ui-personalization-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-documents-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-documents-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index 35048563..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-documents-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Posting Documents and Journals -description: Outlines posting actions and the ways you can post documents and journals. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 05/12/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Post Documents and Journals -Posting represents the accounting action of recording business transactions in the various company ledgers. - -Practically every document and journal in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] offers a **Posting** group from which you can choose between different posting actions, such as **Post**, **Preview Posting**, **Post and Send**, **Post and Email**. - -The following table describes related tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Learn about posting purchase documents. |[Posting Purchases](ui-post-purchases.md) | -| Learn about posting sales documents. |[Posting Sales](ui-post-sales.md) | -| Learn about posting general journals. |[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) | -| Preview, in a window, the entries that will be created when you post. |[How to: Preview Posting Results](ui-how-preview-post-results.md) | -| Preview, in a report, the entries that will be created when you post. |[How to: View Test Reports Before Posting](ui-how-view-test-reports-posting.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-purchases.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-purchases.md deleted file mode 100644 index 91701418..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-purchases.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Understanding How To Post Purchase Documents -description: Learn about the different posting functions to post purchase documents. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 05/12/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Posting Purchases -In the **Posting group** on a purchase document, you can choose between the following posting functions: - -* **Post** -* **Preview Posting** -* **Post and Print** -* **Test Report** -* **Post Batch** - -When you have completed all the lines and entered all the information on the purchase order, you can post it, that is, create a receipt and an invoice. - -When a purchase order is posted, the vendor's account, the general ledger, and the item ledger entries are updated. - -For each purchase order, a purchase entry is created in the **G/L Entry** table. An entry is also created in the vendor's account in the **Vendor Ledger Entry** table and a G/L entry is created in the relevant payables account. In addition, posting the order may result in a VAT entry and a G/L entry for the discount amount. Whether an entry for the discount is posted depends on the contents of the **Discount Posting** field in the **Purchases & Payables Setup** window. - -For each purchase order line, an item ledger entry will be created in the **Item Ledger Entry** table (if the purchase lines contain item numbers) or a G/L entry will be created in the **G/L Entry** table (if the purchase lines contain a G/L account). In addition, purchase orders are always recorded in the **Purch. Recpt. Header** and **Purch. Inv. Header** tables. - -Before you start to post, you can print a test report that contains all the information in the purchase order and indicates any errors there. To print the report, choose **Posting**, and then choose **Test Report**. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> When you post an order, you can create both a receipt and an invoice. These can be done simultaneously or independently. You can also create a partial receipt and a partial invoice by completing the **Qty. to Receive** and **Qty. to Invoice** fields on the individual purchase order lines before you post. Note that you cannot create an invoice for something that has not been received. That is, before you can invoice, you must have recorded a receipt, or you must choose to receive and invoice at the same time. - -You can either post, or post and print. If you choose to post and print, a report is printed when the order is posted. You can also choose the **Post Batch** function, which lets you post several orders at the same time. - -When the posting is completed, the posted purchase lines are removed from the order. A message tells you when the posting is completed. After this, you will be able to see the posted entries in the various windows that contain posted entries, such as the **Vendor Ledger Entries**, **G/L Entries**, **Item Ledger Entries**, **Purchase Receipts**, and **Posted Purchase Invoices** windows. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Purchasing](purchasing-manage-purchasing.md) -[Post Documents and Journals](ui-post-documents-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-sales.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-sales.md deleted file mode 100644 index a963797c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-post-sales.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Understanding How To Post Sales Documents -description: Learn about the different posting functions to post sales documents. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Posting Sales -In the **Posting group** on a sales document, you can choose between the following posting functions: - -* **Post** -* **Test Report** -* **Post and Send** -* **Post and Print** -* **Post and Email** -* **Post Batch** -* **Preview Posting** - -When you have completed all the lines and entered all the information on the sales order, you can post it. This creates a shipment and an invoice. - -When a sales order is posted, the customer's account, the general ledger, and the item ledger entries are updated. - -For each sales order, a sales entry is created in the **G/L Entry** table. An entry is also created in the customer's account in the **Cust. Ledger Entry** table and a general ledger entry is created in the relevant receivables account. In addition, posting the order may result in a VAT entry and a general ledger entry for the discount amount. Whether an entry for the discount is posted depends on the contents of the **Discount Posting** field in the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window. - -For each sales order line, an item ledger entry will be created in the **Item Ledger Entry** table (if the sales lines contain item numbers) or a general ledger entry will be created in the **G/L Entry** table (if the sales lines contain a general ledger account). In addition to this, sales orders are always recorded in the **Sales Shipment Header** and **Sales Invoice Header** tables. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> When you post an order, you can create both a shipment and an invoice. These can be done at the same time or independently. You can also create a partial shipment and a partial invoice by completing the **Qty. to Ship** and **Qty. to Invoice** fields on the individual sales order lines before you post. Note that you cannot create an invoice for something that is not shipped. That is, before you can invoice, you must have recorded a shipment, or you must choose to ship and invoice at the same time. - -When the posting is completed, the posted sales lines are removed from the order. A message tells you when the posting is completed. After this, you will be able to see the posted entries in the various windows that contain posted entries, such as the **Cust. Ledger Entries**, **G/L Entries**, **Item Ledger Entries**, **Posted Sales Shipments**, and **Posted Sales Invoices** windows. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Sales](sales-manage-sales.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-schedule-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-schedule-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4c4d8368..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-schedule-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Schedule a Report to Run" -description: Learn how to run a report on a set schedule. -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen -ms.author: solsen -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# Schedule a Report to Run -You can schedule a report to run at a specific date and time. Scheduled reports are entered in the job queue and processed at the scheduled time, similar to other jobs. You can choose to save the processed report to a file, such as an Excel, Word, or PDF, print it to a selected printer, or process the report only. If you choose to save the report to a file, then the processed report is sent to the **Report Inbox** on your Home page, where you can view it. - -You can schedule a report when you open a report. You choose **Schedule** and then you enter information such as printer, and time and date. The report is then added to the job queue and will be run at the specified time. When the report is processed, the item will be removed from the job queue. If you saved the processed report to a file, it will be available in the **Report Inbox**. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Specify Printer Selection for Reports](ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md) - - - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-search.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-search.md deleted file mode 100644 index c9ebab78..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-search.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Using Search for Page or Report" -description: Learn how to search for pages or reports using the address batr in your browser. -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen -ms.author: solsen -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/22/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- - -# Using Search for Page or Report -You can find pages and reports by choosing the **Search for Page or Report** field in the top right corner of the address bar. - -If you use [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] in a browser, look for the **Search for Page or Report** icon instead. - -When you start typing characters, a drop-down list shows page names containing the character(s) you type. The drop-down list changes as you type more characters, and you can select the correct page from the list when it is displayed. The second column in the drop-down list shows the navigation paths to the found pages. There is also a link that enables you to search the help for the characters that you typed. - -> [!NOTE] -> The **Search for Page or Report** function does not search through data, such as customer names, addresses, or transactions. Instead, you can search for data in list pages by choosing the magnifier symbol in the right corner of the list header. The search applies only to the list you are viewing. For more information, see [Entering Criteria in Filters](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Work with Dynamics NAV](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-smart-notifications.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-smart-notifications.md deleted file mode 100644 index 308b0dcc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-smart-notifications.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Work With Smart Notifications and Specify When You See Them -description: You can receive notifications that inform you about status changes or events, for example, an overdue balance or low inventory. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: bholtorf - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 08/17/2017 -ms.author: bholtorf - ---- -# Smart Notifications -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can help you work smarter by notifying you about certain events or changes in status, such as when you are about to invoice a customer who has an overdue balance, or the available inventory is lower than the quantity you are about to sell, for example. These notifications are shown as discreet tips in the context of the task you are doing, and you can choose to ignore the notification or to see details about the issue. - -If you choose to see details for a notification, you can take action to resolve the issue, such as contacting the customer, buying more inventory, and so on. It's your choice what to do, and [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] gives you advice and recommendations. - -Notifications can help untrained users complete unfamiliar tasks, and do not reduce productivity for the more trained user. - -## To turn notifications on or off, and control when they are sent -When you first start with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] all notifications are turned on, but you can turn them on or off, for example, if you aren't interested in a certain event or status. - -Additionally, some notifications let you specify the conditions under which they are sent. For example, if you want to be notified when inventory is running low, but only for items you buy from a certain vendor. - -Turning notifications on or off, and specifying conditions, applies only to you. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **My Notifications**, and then choose the related link. -2. To turn on or turn off a notification, select or clear the **Enabled** check box. -3. To specify conditions that trigger a notification, choose the **View filter details** link, and then fill in the fields. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-sorting.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-sorting.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0e4c0526..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-sorting.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Arranging Data Using the Sorting Function -description: You can use the sorting function to get an overview of your data. For example, you can sort customers by Currency Code to get a select sample of customers. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 02/07/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Sorting -The sorting function makes it easy for you to get a quick overview of your data. If you have many customers, for example, you can choose to sort them by **Customer No.**, **Customer Posting Group**, **Currency Code**, **Country Region Code**, or **Sales Tax Registration No.** to get the overview you need. - -Choose a column heading and use the small arrow to sort ascending or descending. - -> [!NOTE] -> Sorting is not supported images, BLOB fields, FlowFilters, and fields that do not belong to a table. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Entering Criteria in Filters](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 77316ec8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Setting Up Reports to Print on Specific Printers -description: Learn about specifying a printer for a report and using the Printer Selections window. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: online printing -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Specify Printer Selection for Reports -This page is empty because you cannot yet set up specific printers for specific reports. We are working on solving this. - -In the meantime, when you want to print a report, you have to download the report as a PDF document first by choosing the **Send to** button. Then you select the type of file to download the report as, and here you should pick **PDF Document**. Now, you can either open the PDF document right-away and print it, or save it and print it later. - - - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[How to: Run Batch Jobs](ui-how-run-batch-jobs.md) -[How to: Send Documents by Email](ui-how-send-documents-email.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-troubleshoot-self-signup.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-troubleshoot-self-signup.md deleted file mode 100644 index d8da455c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-troubleshoot-self-signup.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Ways to Troubleshoot or Work Around Issues with Self-Service Sign-Up -description: Learn about the most common reasons why you may not be able to complete the signup to Dynamics NAV, and ways to work around them. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Troubleshooting Self-Service Sign-Up -Signing up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is easy and can be done very quickly. You can create a free account even if you are an existing organization. This article addresses issues that you may have during signup. - -## What email address can I use with Dynamics NAV? -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] requires that you use a work, or school, email address to sign up. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not support email addresses provided by consumer email services or telecommunication providers. This includes outlook.com, hotmail.com, gmail.com, and others. - -If you try to sign up with a personal email address, you will get a message indicating to use a work or school email address. - -## Troubleshooting -In many cases, registering for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can be achieved by following the sign-up process. However, there are several reasons why you may not be able to complete self-service signup. The table below summarizes some of the most common reasons you may not be able to complete signup and ways you can workaround these issues. - - -| Symptom/Error Message | Cause and Workaround | -|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| For Microsoft 365 email addresses that are not registered in the United States, you receive a message like the following during signup:

**That didn't work, we don't support your country or region yet.** | [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] currently only supports Microsoft 365 US registered email accounts. | -| Personal email addresses such as nancy@gmail.com are not supported. You receive a message like the following during signup:

**You entered a personal email address: Please enter your work email address so we can securely store your company's data.**
or
**That looks like a personal email address. Enter your work address so we can connect you with others in your company. And don’t worry. We won’t share your address with anyone.** | [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not support email addresses provided by consumer email services or telecommunications providers. To complete signup, try again using an email address assigned by your work or school. If you still cannot sign up and are willing to complete a more advanced setup process, you can register for a new Microsoft 365 trial subscription and use that email address to sign up. | -| .gov or .mil email addresses You receive a message like the following during signup:

**[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] unavailable: [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] is not available for users with .gov or .mil email addresses at this time. Use another work email address or check back later.**
or
**We can't finish signing you up. It looks like [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] isn't currently available for your work or school.** | [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not support .gov or .mil addresses at this time. | -| Self-service signup is not enabled. You receive a message like the following during signup:

**We can't finish signing you up. Your IT department has turned off signup for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. Contact them to complete signup.**
or
**That looks like a personal email address. Enter your work address so we can connect you with others in your company. And don’t worry. We won’t share your address with anyone.** | Your organization’s IT administrator has disabled self-service signup for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. To complete signup, contact your IT administrator and ask them to follow the instructions on the page below to allow existing users to sign up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] and to allow new users to join your existing tenant. You may also experience this problem if you signed up for Microsoft 365 through a partner. | -| Email address is not a Microsoft 365 ID. You receive a message like the following during signup:

**We can't find you at contoso.com. Do you use a different ID at work or school? Try signing in with that, and if it doesn't work, contact your IT department.** | Your organization uses IDs to sign in to Microsoft 365 and other Microsoft services that are different than your email address. For example, your email address might be Nancy.Smith@contoso.com but your ID is nancys@contoso.com. To complete signup, use the ID that your organization has assigned to for signing in to Microsoft 365 or other Microsoft services. If you do not know what this is, contact your IT administrator. If you still cannot sign up and are able to complete a more advanced setup process, you can register for a new Microsoft 365 trial subscription and use that email address to sign up. | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Welcome to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)]](index.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) - diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-update-report-layouts.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-update-report-layouts.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7e8afa3c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-update-report-layouts.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Keeping a Report Layout Up-to-date - description: You may need to update a custom report layout that is used on a report. This is required when there has been a design change to the report's data set, for example, a field that is used in the layout has been removed from the report data set. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: jswymer - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Updating Report or Document Layouts -Occasionally, you may need to update a custom report layout that is used on a report. This is required when there has been a design change to the report's data set, for example, a field that is used in the layout has been removed from the report data set. If a report layout requires updating, you will get an error message when you try to preview, print or save the report. - -You can automatically update a report layout from the error message that appears when you run the report by choosing the **Yes** button on the error message. Or, in advance of running reports, you can update specific report layouts or all custom report layouts that might be affected by dataset changes. - -You also have the option to test updates without applying the required changes to the custom report layouts. This enables you to see what changes will be applied to the report layout and identify possible issues in the process. From the test results, you can open the custom report layouts directly for editing to fix any issues. We recommend that you test the report layout update before you apply the updates. - -Not all report dataset changes can be automatically updated in the report layouts. Some changes will require that you manually edit the report layout. For more information, see [Limitations of the Custom Report Layout Update](ui-update-report-layouts.md#UpdateLimitations). - -## To update one or more custom report layouts - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Layouts**, and then choose the related link. - -2. In the **Report Layouts** window, if you want to update a specific report, select the layout from the list, and then choose the **Update Layout** action. Or, if you want to update all custom report layouts for the company, choose the **Update All Layouts** action. - -If no errors occur, then the updates is applied to the report layouts. If errors occur, then a message that contains the errors appears. You will then have to manually edit the custom report layout to fix the error. For more information, see [Fixing Errors](ui-update-report-layouts.md#FixErrors). - -## To test custom report layout updates - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Report Layout Selection**, and then choose the related link. - -2. In the **Report Layout Selection** window, choose the **Test Layout Updates** action. - - Chnages to the report layouts are tested but not applied to the actual report layouts. A **Report Layout Update Log** window appears that provides the status a potential updates for each report layout. If there are errors for a report layout, you can access the report layout directly for editing from the message to fix any issues. For more information, see [Fixing Errors](ui-update-report-layouts.md#FixErrors). - -## Limitations of the Custom Report Layout Update - There are several types of changes that the automatic update can apply to custom report layouts, for example, a field that is used in the layout has been removed from the report data set. However, the automatic update cannot handle the following changes to a report dataset. - -1. Deleted fields, labels, or data items. - -2. Duplicate field names in the report layout after a field has been renamed in the dataset. This should be treated as a design error. - -3. Upgrade scenarios where there are multiple iterations of a report layout that causes multiple rename actions on the same fields, labels or data items. - - If the update process detects any one of these issues, the update cannot be applied. You will have to fix the issues manually, for example by editing the report layout in Word, or programmatically by using upgrade codeunits. - -## Fixing Errors - If you get an error message when you update or test report layout updates, you most likely will have to modify the report layout to fix the problem. Read the error message to help determine the cause of the problem. - - The most typical problem occurs when a field that is used on the layout has been removed from the report dataset. In this case, you will see a line in the error message that states that an item has been removed. To fix this issue, you will have to modify the layout and remove the field in question. - - For more information, see [How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md#ModifyCustomLayout). - - After you modify the layout, try to update the layout again. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Managing Report Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) - [Working with Reports](ui-work-report.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-general-journals.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-general-journals.md deleted file mode 100644 index e8ec46a2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-general-journals.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Using General Journals to Post Directly to G/L -description: Learn about using general journals to post financial transactions to general ledger accounts and other accounts, such as bank and vendor accounts. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 07/02/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Working with General Journals -Most financial transactions are posted to the general ledger through dedicated business documents, such as purchase invoices and sales orders. For business activities that are not represented by a document in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as smaller expenses or cash receipts, you can create the related transactions by posting journal lines in the **General Journal** window. For more information, see [How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md). - -For example, you can post employees' expenditure of own money on business-related expenses, for later reimbursement. For more information, see [How to: Record and Reimburse Employees' Expenses](finance-how-record-reimburse-employee-expenses.md). - -You use general journals to post financial transactions directly to general ledger accounts and other accounts, such as bank, customer, vendor, and employee accounts. Posting with a general journal always creates entries on general ledger accounts. This is true even when, for example, you post a journal line to a customer account, because an entry is posted to a general ledger receivables account through a posting group. - -The information that you enter in a journal is temporary and can be changed while it is in the journal. When you post the journal, the information is transferred to entries on individual accounts, where it cannot be changed. You can, however, unapply posted entries, and you can post reversing or correcting entries. For more information, see [How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md). - -## Using Journal Templates and Batches -There are several general journal templates. Each journal template is represented by a dedicated window with particular functions and the fields that are required to support those functions, such as the **Payment Reconciliation Journal** window to process bank payments and the **Payment Journal** window to pay your vendors or reimburse your employees. For more information, see [Make Payments](payables-make-payments.md) and [How to: Reconcile Customer Payments Manually](receivables-how-apply-sales-transactions-manually.md). - -For each journal template, you can set up your own personal journal as a journal batch. For example, you can define your own journal batch for the payment journal that has your personal layout and settings. The following tip is an example of how to personalize a journal. - -> [!TIP] -> If you select the **Suggest Balancing Amount** check box on the line for your batch in the **General Journal Batches** window, then the **Amount** field on, for example, general journal lines for the same document number is automatically prefilled with the value that is required to balance the document. For more information, see [Letting [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Suggest Values](ui-let-system-suggest-values.md). - -## Understanding Main Accounts and Balancing Accounts -If you have set up default balancing accounts for the journal batches on the **General Journals** page, the balancing account will be filled in automatically when you fill in the **Account No.** field. Otherwise, fill in both the **Account No.** field and the **Bal. Account No.** field manually. A positive amount in the **Amount** field is debited to the main account and credited to the balancing account. A negative amount is credited to the main account and debited to the balancing account. - -> [!NOTE] -> VAT is calculated separately for the main account and the balancing account, so they can use different VAT percentage rates. - -## Working with Recurring journals -A recurring journal is a general journal with specific fields for managing transactions that you post frequently with few or no changes. Using these fields for recurring transactions, you can post both fixed and variable amounts. You can also specify automatic reversal entries for the day after the posting date and use allocation keys with the recurring entries. - -## Working with Standard Journals -When you have created journal lines which you know you are likely to create again later, you can save them as a standard journal before you post the journal. This functionality applies to item journals and general journals. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following procedure refers to the item journal, but the information also applies to the general journal. - -### To save a standard journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter one or more journal lines. -3. Select the journal lines that you want to reuse. -4. Choose the **Save as Standard Journal** action. -5. In the **Save as Standard Item Journal** request window, define a new or existing standard item journal that the lines should be saved in. - - If you have already created one or more standard item journals and you want to replace one of these with the new set of item journal lines, in the Code field, select the code you want. -6. Choose the **OK** button to verify that you want to overwrite the existing standard item journal and replace all its content. -7. Select the **Save Unit Amount** field if you want to save the values in the **Unit Amount** field of the standard item journal. -8. Select the **Save Quantity** field if you want the program to save the values in the **Quantity** field. -9. Choose the **OK** button to save the standard item journal. - -When you have finished saving the standard item journal, the Item Journal window is displayed so you can proceed to post it, knowing that it can easily be recreated next time you need to post the same or similar lines. - -### To reuse a standard journal -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Standard Journals** action. - - The Standard Item Journals window opens showing codes and descriptions for all existing standard item journals. -3. To review a standard item journal before you select it for reuse, choose the **Show Journal** action. - - Any changes you make in a standard item journal are implemented right away. They will be there next time you open or reuse the standard item journal in question. You should therefore be sure that the change is important enough to apply generally. Otherwise, make the specific change in the item journal after the standard item journal lines have been inserted. See step 4 below. -4. In the **Standard Item Journals** window, select the standard item journal you want to reuse, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Now the item journal is filled with the lines you saved as the standard item journal. If journal lines already existed in the item journal, the inserted lines will be placed under the existing journal lines. - - If you did not check the **Save Unit Amount** field when you used the **Save as Standard Item Journal** function job, then the **Unit Amount** field on lines that are inserted from the standard journal is automatically filled with the item’s current value, copied from the **Unit Cost** field on the item card. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you selected the **Save Unit Amount** or **Save Quantity** fields, you should now make sure the inserted values are correct for this particular inventory adjustment before you post the item journal. - - If the inserted item journal lines contain saved unit amounts that you do not want to post, you can quickly adjust it to the current value of the item as follows. - -5. Select the item journal lines you want to adjust, and then choose the **Recalculate Unit Amount** action. This will update the Unit Amount field with the current unit cost of the item. -6. Choose the **post** action. - -## To renumber document numbers in journals -To make sure that you do not receive posting errors because of the document number order, you can use the **Renumber Document Numbers** function before you post a journal. - -In all journals that are based on the general journal, the **Document No.** field is editable so that you can specify different document numbers for different journal lines or the same document number for related journal lines. - -If the **No. Series** field on the journal batch is filled, then the posting function in general journals requires that the document number on individual or grouped journal lines be in sequential order. To make sure that you do not receive posting errors because of the document number order, you can use the **Renumber Document Numbers** function before you post the journal. If related journal lines were grouped by document number before you used the function, they will remain grouped but may be assigned a different document number. - -This function also works on filtered views. - -Any renumbering of document numbers will respect related applications, such as a payment application that has been made from the document on the journal line to a vendor account. Accordingly, the **Applies-to ID** and **Applies-to Doc. No.** fields on the affected ledger entries may be updated. - -The following procedure is based on the **General Journal** window, but applies to all other journals that are based on the general journal, such as the **Payment Journal** window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. When you are ready to post the journal, choose the **Renumber Document Numbers** action. - -Values in the **Document No.** field are changed, where required, so that the document number on individual or grouped journal lines are in sequential order. After documents are renumbered, you can proceed to post the journal. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Post Transactions Directly to the General Ledger](finance-how-post-transactions-directly.md) -[How to: Reverse Postings](finance-how-reverse-journal-posting.md) -[How to: Allocate Costs and Income](year-allocate-costs-income.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-product.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-product.md deleted file mode 100644 index 19845180..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-product.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Working with the General Functionality in Dynamics NAV -description: Learn about the general functionality you use to interact with data in Dynamics NAV, such as entering values, sorting data, and changing views. -services: '' -documentationcenter: '' -author: SusanneWindfeldPedersen - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 05/29/2017 -ms.author: solsen - ---- -# Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_long_md.md)] -When performing business tasks, you interact with data in different ways, such as creating records and entering data, sorting and filtering data, writing notes, and outputting data to other applications. - -For example, you can adjust the size and position of any window, expand the width of columns and increase the height of column headers, and change the sorting of data in columns. And if you want to use the horizontal scroll bar to view all columns on a list page or on document lines, you will see that there is a vertical freeze pane to restrict some columns from scrolling. - -The following table lists some of the general functionality with links to topics that describe them. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Read about including symbols and special characters when searching for data. |[Entering Criteria in Filters](ui-enter-criteria-filters.md) | -| See which fields must be filled in. |[Mandatory Fields](ui-mandatory-fields.md) | -| Use Search to look for a specific page or report. |[Using Search for Page or Report](ui-search.md) | -| Learn about how to sort data. |[Sorting](ui-sorting.md) | -| Change how you view lists of, for example, customers, vendors, or items. |[Displaying Lists in Different Ways](across-display-lists-different-views.md) | -| Modify the colored indicator on cues. |[How to: Set Up a Colored Indicator on Cues](ui-how-setup-colored-indicator-cues.md) | -| Change basic settings such as company or work date. |[Changing Basic Settings](ui-change-basic-settings.md) | -| Change the Role Center, and the related Home page, to fit your role. |[How to: Change the Role Center](change-role.md) | -| Change which fields and actions are shown in the user interface to fit your company's business processes. |[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) | -| Get reports to show data from specific date ranges. |[Entering Date Ranges in Dynamics NAV](ui-enter-date-ranges.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[General Business Functionality](ui-across-business-areas.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-customizing-overview.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-report.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-report.md deleted file mode 100644 index 44fab19d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-report.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Scheduling a Report to Run at a Specific Date and Time -description: Learn about entering a report into a job queue and scheduling it to be processed at a specific date and time. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: task, process, report -ms.date: 07/06/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Working with Reports -A report gathers information based on a specified set of criteria, and organizes and presents the information in an easy-to-read, printable format. There are many reports that you can access throughout the application. The reports typically provide information relative to the context of the page you are on. For example, the **Customer** page includes reports for the top 10 customers and the sales statistics, and more. - -You can find reports in the **Reports** tab on selected pages, or you can use search to find reports by name. When you open a report, you are presented with a page that let's you specify information (options and filters) that determines want to include in the report. For example, depending on the report, you can specify a date range, a specific record such as a customer, or sorting order. - -## Previewing a report -Choose **Preview** to see the report in the Internet browser. Point to an area of the report to show the menu bar. - -![Report preview toolbar](media/report_viewer.png "Report preview toolbar"). - -Use the menu bar to: - -- Move through pages -- Zoom in and out -- Resize to fit the window -- Select text - - You can copy text from a report, and then paste it somewhere else, like a page in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] or Microsoft Word. Using a mouse, for example, you press and hold where you want to start, and then move the mouse to select one or more words, sentences, or paragraphs. You can then press the right mouse button, and select **Copy**. You can the paste the selected text where ever you want it. -- Pan the document - - You can move the visible area of the report in any direction so you can view other areas or the report. This is helpful when you have zoomed in to see details. Using your mouse, for example, press and hold the mouse button anywhere in the report preview, and then move your mouse. - -- Download to a PDF file on your computer or network. - - -## Saving a Report -You can save a report to a PDF document, Microsoft Word document, or Microsoft Excel document by choosing **Send to**, and then making your selection. - -## Scheduling a Report to Run -You can schedule a report to run at a specific date and time. Scheduled reports are entered in the job queue and processed at the scheduled time, similar to other jobs. You can choose to save the processed report to a file, such as an Excel, Word, or PDF, print it to a selected printer, or process the report only. If you choose to save the report to a file, then the processed report is sent to the **Report Inbox** area on your Home page, where you can view it. - -You can schedule a report when you open a report. You choose the **Schedule** action and then you enter information such as printer, and time and date. The report is then added to the job queue and will be run at the specified time. When the report is processed, the item will be removed from the job queue. If you saved the processed report to a file, it will be available in the **Report Inbox** area. - -## Printing a Report -When you want to print a report you have to download the report as a PDF, Word, or Excel document first by choosing **Send to**. Now, you can either open the report document right-away and print it, or save it and print it later. - -## Using Saved Settings -A report can include one or more entries in the **Saved Settings** box. *Saved settings* are basically a predefined group of options and filters that you can apply to the report before previewing or sending the report to a file. Using saved settings is a fast and reliable way to consistently generate reports that contain the correct data. - -The saved settings entry called **Last used options and filters** is always available. This entry sets the report to use options and filters that were used the last time you looked at the report. - ->[!NOTE] ->As an administrator, you can create and manage the saved settings for reports for all users. For more information, see [Managing Saved Settings on Reports](reports-saving-reusing-settings.md). - -## Changing the layout and look of a report -A report layout controls what is shown on a report, how it is arranged, and how it is styled. If you want to switch to a different layout, see [How to: Change Which Layout is Currently Used on a Report](ui-how-change-layout-currently-used-report.md). Or, if you want to customize your own report layout, see [How to: Create and Modify a Custom Report Layout](ui-how-create-custom-report-layout.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Specify Printer Selection for Reports](ui-specify-printer-selection-reports.md) -[Managing Report and Document Layouts](ui-manage-report-layouts.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-with-notes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-with-notes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 71edce0a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/ui-work-with-notes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Adding Information to Records to Yourself - description: Attach a note to any record in the application. For example, if you have extra information about a sales order that does not fit in any of the fields on the sales order, you can write a note. - author: jswymer - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Adding and Viewing Notes on Records - You can add notes to records in the application. Many pages, particularly those pages that display a list of records (such as the **Sales Orders** page) or details about a specific record (such as the **Sales Order** page) include the **Notes** action or **Notes** FactBox. **Notes** is where you can write notes about a record to yourself - - - -## To work with notes on a record - -1. Open the record list page or record page (for example, the **Sales Orders** or **Sale Order** page). - - - -2. Choose the **Notes** action to open the **Notes** window. This window displays any current notes on the record. From here, you can do the following: - - - To view or edit the note, choose **...** and then **Edit**. You can also do this from the **Notes** FactBox if it available on the page. - - To add or note, choose **+new**, and the ype your message in the **Note** box. You can enter a maximum of 30 lines of text in the note. - - - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/upload-data.md b/dynamics-nav-app/upload-data.md deleted file mode 100644 index 619d52d2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/upload-data.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Import Your Legacy Business Data into Dynamics NAV -description: You can migrate data for customers, vendors, and inventory, for example, from Excel, QuickBooks, or Dynamics GP, into Dynamics NAV. -author: edupont04 - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: migrate, initialize, implement -ms.date: 09/25/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Importing Business Data from Other Finance Systems -When you sign up for [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you can choose to create an empty company so that you can upload your own data and to test your new [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company. Depending on the finance solution that your business uses today, you can transfer information about customers, vendors, inventory, and bank accounts. - -From Home, you can start an assisted setup guide that helps you transfer the business data from an Excel file or from other formats. The type of files you can upload depends on the extensions that are available. For example, you can migrate data from QuickBooks because [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes an extension that handles the conversion from QuickBooks. If you want to migrate data from other finance solutions, you must either check if an extension is available for that solution or import from Excel. - -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes templates for accounts, customers, vendors, and inventory items that you can choose to apply when you import your data. - -## Importing Data from QuickBooks or Dynamics GP -If your business uses QuickBooks or Dynamics GP today, you can export the relevant information to a file. You can then open the assisted setup guide to transfer the data. -For example, if your file includes customers and vendors, you can choose to transfer only the customer data. You can then transfer the rest of the information later. - -The assisted setup includes an option to change the default configuration of the transfer, but we recommend that you only enter this advanced setup if you are familiar with database tables. In the vast majority of businesses, the default mapping from QuickBooks or Dynamics GP to [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will transfer the information that you want. - -For more information, see [QuickBooks Desktop Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md), [QuickBooks Online Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration.md), or [Dynamics GP Data Migration](ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md). - -## Importing Data from Configuration Packages -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a configuration package that you can export to Excel and set up your data there. Then, you can import the data from Excel again. The package consists of 27 tables, including master data such as customers, vendors, items, and accounts, other basic setup tables such as shipping methods, and transactions tables such as sales header and lines. - -> [!NOTE] -> Working with configuration packages is advanced functionality, and we recommend that you contact your administrator. For more information, see [Importing Data from Legacy Accounting Software using a Configuration Package](across-import-data-configuration-packages.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Importing Data from Legacy Accounting Software using a Configuration Package](across-import-data-configuration-packages.md) -[QuickBooks Desktop Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-data-migration.md) -[QuickBooks Online Data Migration](ui-extensions-quickbooks-online-data-migration.md) -[Dynamics GP Data Migration](ui-extensions-dynamicsgp-data-migration.md) -[Customizing [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Using Extensions](ui-extensions.md) -[Setting Up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](setup.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6767ff6a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Business Process Walkthroughs - description: This selection of walkthroughs provides step-by-step, end-to-end business processes that you can perform using the CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration company. The walkthroughs consist of multiple procedures, some of which would normally be performed by one user, while others incorporate several different user roles. In order to simulate the working environment, some of the walkthroughs contain setup steps necessary to complete the exercises as described. These steps can provide insight into the kind of information users need to share with their company's IT professionals. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Business Process Walkthroughs -This selection of walkthroughs provides step-by-step, end-to-end business processes that you can perform using the CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration company. The walkthroughs consist of multiple procedures, some of which would normally be performed by one user, while others incorporate several different user roles. In order to simulate the working environment, some of the walkthroughs contain setup steps necessary to complete the exercises as described. These steps can provide insight into the kind of information users need to share with their company's IT professionals. - - The walkthroughs are complete scenarios, and should be performed from beginning to end for the greatest benefit. Many are based on [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] demonstrations, and enable you to try those procedures yourself, at your own pace. - - To avoid having to log in as many different profiles, navigation steps in the walkthroughs are based on department menus and not on the Role Centers. - -|To|See| -|--------|---------| -|Set up a marketing campaign|[Walkthrough: Conducting a Sales Campaign](walkthrough-conducting-a-sales-campaign.md)| -|Use prepayments to part of sales orders|[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments](walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md)| -|Set up approval users, when and how the users receive notification about approval workflows, and then modify and enable the relevant approval workflow.|[Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow](walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md)| -|Put received items away in basic warehouse configurations|[Walkthrough: Receiving and Putting Away in Basic Warehouse Configurations](walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing.md)| -|Put received items away in advanced warehouse configurations|[Walkthrough: Receiving and Putting Away in advanced warehouse configurations](walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-advanced-warehousing.md)| -|Plan supply orders to fulfill demand manually|[Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Manually](walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually.md)| -|Plan supply orders to fulfill demand automatically|[Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Automatically](walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md)| -|Assemble and ship items that are customized on the sales order|[Walkthrough: Selling, Assembling, and Shipping Kits](walkthrough-selling-assembling-and-shipping-kits.md)| -|Plan a project, from start to finish|[Walkthrough: Managing Projects with Jobs](walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs.md)| -|Understand the costs of a job|[Walkthrough: Calculating Work in Process for a Job](walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md)| -|Pick items for shipment in basic warehouse configurations|[Walkthrough: Picking and Shipping in Basic Warehouse Configurations](walkthrough-picking-and-shipping-in-basic-warehousing.md)| -|Implement defects management|[Walkthrough: Tracing Serial-Lot Numbers](walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md deleted file mode 100644 index c37846e4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-calculating-work-in-process-for-a-job.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Calculating Work in Process for a Job - description: With jobs, you can schedule the usage of your company's resources and keep track of the various costs associated with the usage of resources on a specific project. Jobs involve the consumption of employee hours, machine hours, inventory items, and other types of usage that have to be tracked as a job progresses. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Calculating Work in Process for a Job -With jobs, you can schedule the usage of your company's resources and keep track of the various costs associated with the usage of resources on a specific project. Jobs involve the consumption of employee hours, machine hours, inventory items, and other types of usage that have to be tracked as a job progresses. If a job runs over a long period, you may want to transfer these costs to a Work in Process (WIP) account on the balance sheet while the job is being completed. You can then recognize the costs and sales in your income statement accounts when it is appropriate. - -## About This Walkthrough - This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Calculating WIP. -- Selecting a WIP calculation method. -- Excluding part of a job from the WIP. -- Posting the WIP to the general ledger. -- Reversing a WIP posting. - - Each step of the process calculates the value and moves the job transactions to the general ledger. The calculation and posting steps are separated to help you review your data and to make modifications before posting to the general ledger. Therefore, you should make sure that all information is correct after you run the calculation batch jobs and before you run the posting batch jobs. - -## Roles - This walkthrough uses the project team member (Tricia) as the persona. - -## Prerequisites - Before you can perform the tasks in the walkthrough, the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] must be installed on your computer. - -## Story - This walkthrough focuses on CRONUS International Ltd., a design and consultancy firm that designs and fits new infrastructures, such as conference halls and offices, with furniture, accessories, and storage units. Most of the work at CRONUS is project-oriented and Tricia, a project team member, uses jobs to have an overview of each ongoing job that CRONUS has started and also the jobs that are completed. Some of the jobs can be very lengthy and can run over months. Tricia can use a WIP account to record the work in process and to track the costs throughout the job. - -## Calculating WIP - CRONUS has taken on a lengthy project that has now extended across reporting periods. Tricia, a project team member, calculates the work in process (WIP) to make sure that the financial statement of the company will be accurate. - - During this procedure, Tricia will select a specific group of tasks that will be included in the WIP calculation. In the **Job Task Lines** window, she can specify these lines in the **WIP-Total** column. - - The following table describes the three options. - - -| Field | Description | -|--------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -| **\** | Leave blank if the job task is a part of a group of tasks. | -| **Total** | Defines the range or group of tasks that are included in the WIP and recognition calculation. Within the group, any job task with **Job Task Type** set to **Posting** will be included in the WIP Total, unless its **WIP-Total** field is set to **Excluded**. | -| **Excluded** | Applies only to a task with **Job Task Type** of **Posting**. The task is not included when WIP and recognition are calculated. | - - In the following walkthrough, Tricia applies the Cost Value method, her company standard, to calculate WIP. She specifies what part of the job will be included in the WIP calculation by assigning WIP-Total values to various job task lines. - -### To calculate WIP - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Jobs** list, select the **Deerfield** job, and then choose the **Edit** action. This will open the job card in edit mode. - - WIP can be calculated based on Cost Value, Sales Value, Cost of Sales, Percentage of Completion, or Completed Contract. In this example, CRONUS uses the Cost Value method. - -3. On the **Posting** FastTab, choose the **WIP Method** field, and then select **Cost Value**. -4. Choose the **Job Task Lines** action and set the following values in the **WIP-Total** field. - - The following table describes the values. - - - | Job Task No. | WIP-Total Field | - |--------------|-----------------| - | 1130 | Excluded | - | 1190 | Total | - | 1210 | Excluded | - | 1310 | Excluded | - - -5. Choose the **WIP** action, and then choose the **Calculate WIP** action. -6. In the **Job Calculate WIP** window, you can select a job that you want to calculate WIP. On the **Job** FastTab, select **Deerfield** in the **No.** field. -7. In the **Posting Date** field, enter a date that is later than the work date. -8. In the **Document No.** field, enter **1**. This creates a document that you can refer to later for traceability. -9. Choose the **OK** button to run the batch job. A message is displayed. Choose the **OK** button to continue. Close the **Job Task Lines** window. - - > [!NOTE] - > The message states that there are warnings associated with the WIP calculation. You will review the warnings in the next procedure. - -10. On the **Job** card, expand the **WIP and Recognition** FastTab to see the calculated values. You can also see the **WIP Posting Date** and the values that have been posted to the general ledger, if any. - - Notice that the value for **Recog. Costs Amount** is 215.60 in the **To Post** column. This reflects the total costs of two of the items in the group of job tasks 1110 – 1130. The third item was set to **Excluded**, and therefore is not included in the WIP calculation. - -### To review WIP warnings - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job WIP Cockpit**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Deerfield** job, and then choose the **Show Warnings** action. -3. In the **Job WIP Warnings** window, review the warning associated with the job. - - After the accounting period ends, Tricia has to recalculate the WIP to include completed work to this point. - -### To recalculate WIP - -1. On the **Job** card, choose the **WIP Entries** action to view the WIP calculation. - - The **Job WIP Entries** window shows the WIP entries that were last calculated on a job, even if WIP has not yet been posted to the general ledger. - -2. You can follow the steps in the procedure that explains how to calculate WIP to recalculate WIP. Every time WIP is calculated, an entry is created in the **Job WIP Entries** window. -3. Close the window. - -> [!NOTE] -> Work in Process and Recognition is only calculated. It is not posted to the general ledger. To do so, you must run **Post WIP to G/L** batch job after you have calculated the WIP and Recognition. - -## Posting WIP to General Ledger - Now that Tricia has calculated WIP for this job, she can post it to the general ledger. - -### To post WIP to general ledger - -1. From the **Jobs** list, select the **Deerfield** job. -2. Choose the **WIP** action, and then choose the **Post WIP to G/L** action. -3. In the **Job Post WIP to G/L** window, on the **Job** FastTab, select **Deerfield** in the **No.** field. -4. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Reversal Document No.** field, enter **1**. -5. Choose the **OK** button to post WIP to the general ledger. -6. Choose the **OK** button to close the confirmation window. - - After you have completed the posting, you can view the posting information in the **WIP G/L Entries** window. - -7. In the **Jobs** list, select the **Deerfield** job, and then choose the **WIP G/L Entries** action. - - In the **Job WIP G/L Entries** window, verify that the WIP has been posted to the general ledger. - -8. Close the window. -9. Open the **Job** card for the **Deerfield** job. -10. On the **WIP and Recognition** FastTab, notice that in the **Posted** column, the **Recog. Costs G/L Amount** field is now filled in, which indicates that WIP was posted to the general ledger successfully. -11. Choose the **OK** button to close the card. - -## Reversing a WIP Posting - Tricia determines that the job tasks that were excluded from the calculation of WIP should have been calculated in WIP. She can reverse the incorrect postings without having to post new WIP postings. - -### To reverse a WIP posting - -1. From the **Jobs** list, select the **Deerfield** job. -2. Choose the **WIP** action, and then choose the **Post WIP to G/L** action. -3. In the **Job Post to WIP to G/L** window, on the **Job** FastTab, select **Deerfield** in the **No.** field. -4. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Reversal Document No.** field, enter **1**. -5. In the **Reversal Posting Date** field, enter the original posting date. It should be the same date that you used to calculate WIP the first time. -6. Select the **Reverse Only** check box. This will reverse previously posted WIP, but does post new WIP to the general ledger. -7. Choose the **OK** button to run the batch job, and choose the **OK** button to close the confirmation window. -8. Open the **Job** card for **Deerfield**. -9. On the **WIP and Recognition** FastTab, verify that there are no posted WIP entries. -10. Close this window. -11. In the **Jobs** list, select the **Deerfield** job, choose the **WIP** action, and then choose the **WIP G/L Entries** action. The WIP entries have the **Reversed** check box selected. -12. Close this window. -13. Open **Job Task Lines** for the job, include the parts of the job that should be in the WIP calculation, and then recalculate and post the new value to the general ledger. - - > [!NOTE] - > Suppose Tricia calculated and posted WIP for a job with incorrect dates. Following the method that was discussed earlier, she can reverse the incorrect postings, correct the dates, and repost to the general ledger. - -## Next Steps - This walkthrough has taken you through the steps of calculating WIP in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. In larger jobs, it may be useful to transfer the costs to a WIP account periodically while the job is being completed. This walkthrough has shown you how to exclude task lines from a calculation. It also shows you when you would have to recalculate. And finally, this walkthrough demonstrates how to post the WIP to the general ledger. An example of how to reverse a WIP posting to the general ledger is also included. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Walkthrough: Managing Projects with Jobs](walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs.md) - [Understanding WIP Methods](projects-understanding-wip.md) - [Monitor Progress and Performance](projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-conducting-a-sales-campaign.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-conducting-a-sales-campaign.md deleted file mode 100644 index bcbfbf20..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-conducting-a-sales-campaign.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,200 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Conducting a Sales Campaign - description: A campaign is any kind of activity that involves several contacts. An important part of setting up a campaign involves selecting the target audience for your campaign. For this purpose, in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you create a segment, or a group of contacts using filters. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Conducting a Sales Campaign -A campaign is any kind of activity that involves several contacts. An important part of setting up a campaign involves selecting the target audience for your campaign. For this purpose, in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], you create a segment, or a group of contacts using filters. - - You use these features in Sales & Marketing to carefully plan your marketing activities and to manage your interactions with contacts and customers. You can create campaigns and set up segments of your contacts for mailings and other types of interactions with your contacts and prospective customers. - - The Campaign and Segment features with their automated processes enable you to plan, organize, and keep track of your marketing activities. This will increase the chances of winning new customers and retaining existing customers. - -## About This Walkthrough - This walkthrough demonstrates the process for following up on a trade show and targeting potential customers (contacts) in a follow-up campaign. - - The walkthrough introduces the campaign and segment management feature in the Sales & Marketing department. This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Setting up a campaign. -- Selecting the target audience. -- Mining data. -- Sending letters to contacts. -- Registering campaign responses. - -## Roles - This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user roles: - -- Marketing Manager or Sales Manager -- Marketing Staffer - -## Prerequisites - Before you can perform the tasks in the walkthrough, you must install the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -## Story - The marketing manager in the Sales department of CRONUS is responsible for planning campaigns and for executing them. He also makes decisions about which trade shows to participate in and he evaluates campaign progress. - - The marketing staffer in the Marketing department handles producing, distributing, and placing marketing material. - - The company has just launched a new product called the Millennium Server. The product was recently promoted at a trade show, Computer Futurus. Many customers expressed great interest in the product, and as part of a promotional effort, customers who bought Millennium Server during a campaign period were offered a special campaign price. - - One of the marketing staffer’s tasks after the trade show is to enter all the potential customers as contacts. - - The marketing manager sets up a campaign, creates a segment that contains all the new contacts and then mines the contact data to select the target audience for the campaign. - - The staffer helps send out thank you letters to all the contacts who left their cards with the staff at the stand, and finally, the manager records all the responses they receive from the prospective customers. - -## Setting Up a Campaign - As soon as the staffer has entered the business cards received at the trade show, the marketing manager sets up a campaign card to manage the activities involved in the campaign. - -### To set up a campaign - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Campaigns**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new campaign. On the campaign card, press Enter to have a campaign number automatically inserted. -3. In the **Description** field, enter a description for the campaign, for example, **FUTURUS trade show**. -4. Choose the **Status Code** field, and select a status code from the list that opens in the **Campaign Status** window. -5. Fill in the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields of the campaign as appropriate. - -## Selecting the Target Audience - The marketing manager creates a segment to select the contacts that he wants to interact with. - -### To create a segment with the relevant contacts - -1. Choose the **Segments** action. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new segment. On the segment card, press Enter to have a segment number automatically inserted. -3. On the **General** FastTab, in the **Description** field, enter, for example, **Visitors at the FUTURUS trade show**. - - After entering general information about the segment, select the contacts to be included in the segment. - - You can use a variety of criteria to select contacts, for example, you can select contact persons who work at a customer site or a prospective customer site who are responsible for purchases at their company. - - You use filters to add contacts according to the criteria that best fit your purposes. For example, you can choose to filter by the job responsibility of the contact person or the business relation or industry of the contact company. For this walkthrough, choose the **Job Responsibility** filter to select contacts. - -4. In the **Segment** window, choose the **Add Contacts** action to open the **Add Contacts** filter. -5. On the **Job Responsibility** FastTab, select the **Purchase** filter as the **Job Responsibility Code** and choose the **OK** button. - - The **Segment** window now contains a list of contacts based on the filter you entered. On the **General** FastTab, in the **No. of Lines** field, you can see at a glance the number of contacts that meet these criteria. - - > [!NOTE] - > You can save your segmentation criteria to be reused at a later stage. - - 1. In the **Segment** window, choose the **Segment** action, and then choose the **Save Criteria** action. - 2. In the **Save Segment Criteria** window, enter a code for the segment. In the **Description** field, enter a description of the segment criteria. - 3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Mining the Data - The marketing manager takes a closer look at the segmented list of contacts and realizes that the list is much too big. He decides to reduce the list based on actual, prospective customers to make sure he focuses on the correct target group. This process of refining and reducing the data is also referred to as data mining. - -### To remove contacts from the segment - -1. In the **Segment** window, choose the **Contacts** action, and then choose the **Reduce Contacts** action to open the **Remove Contacts – Reduce** window. -2. On the **Business Relation** FastTab, select the **PROS** filter as the **Business Relation Code**, and choose the **OK** button. - - The **Segment** window now contains a reduced list of contacts, and in the **No. of Lines** field, you can see the number of contacts that now meet these new criteria. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you have to reverse this removal of a group of contacts, you can do this using the **Go Back** function. In other words, you can undo your last segmentation. - > - > In the **Segment** window, choose the **Segment** action, and then choose the **Go Back** action. - > - > The contacts that you just removed are added back to the list of contacts. - -## Linking a Segment to a Campaign - The marketing manager decides that the reduced list is the final list of contacts that he wants to be part of the campaign. He therefore links this segment to the campaign FUTURUS trade show. - -### To link a segment to the campaign - -1. In the **Segment** window, on the **Campaign** FastTab, choose the **Campaign No.** field to select the campaign that you want the segment to be attached to, for example, **CP0001**. -2. Since this segment is the target of the campaign, select the **Campaign Target** check box. - -## Sending Letters and Email Messages to Contacts - The marketing staffer helps the marketing manager send out correspondence to the prospective customers, in which he thanks them for visiting the trade show. - -### To use a segment to send a letter to a contact - -1. Open the **Segment** card for the **Visitors at the FUTURUS trade show**. -2. On the **Interaction** FastTab, in the **Interaction Template Code** field, select the Business Letter template, code **BUS**. -3. In the **Subject (Default)** field, enter the following example text: **Thank you for visiting the trade show**. - - > [!NOTE] - > This template consists of more than one attachment document, each of them written in a different language. Example languages include English and Danish. - -4. Choose the **Language Code (Default)** field to open the **Segment Interaction Languages** window. Select a language code and then choose the **OK** button. -5. You can display the document in the selected language. Choose the **Attachment** action, and then choose the **Open** action. - - To respond to the message that requests permission to start Word, choose the **Allow for this client session** option. - - This opens the attached Word document so that you can inspect it. You can also take this opportunity to edit and modify the letter. Close Word when you are finished. - -6. Enter the subject of the letter in the **Subject** field, in the language selected for the template. -7. Choose the **Log** action. -8. Choose the **Send Attachments** check box to have the attachments printed. - - 1. Select the **Create Follow-up Segment** check box. - 2. Choose the **OK** button to start the **Log Segment** batch job. - -9. The attachments are sent. When the process is done, choose the **OK** button for the message that states that the segment has been logged. - - The letters are automatically printed and the segment is logged. Because the segment has been logged, it is no longer in the list of segments but is moved to the list of logged segments. To see that list, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Logged Segments**, and then choose the related link. - -10. After the segment is logged, each letter that is sent is recorded as an interaction, which you can view in the log. - - Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Interaction Log Entries**, and then choose the related link. There is an entry for each sent letter. - -### To send an email message to a contact - -1. On the **Interaction** FastTab, in the **Interaction Template Code** field, select the Business Letter template, code **BUS**. -2. In the **Subject (Default)** field, enter the following example text: **Thank you for visiting the trade show**. -3. In the **Correspondence Type** field, choose **E-Mail**. -4. Specify language settings, as in the previous procedure. -5. Choose the **Log** action. The **Log Segment** window opens. -6. Select the **Send Attachments** check box to have the attachments sent by email. -7. Select the **Create Follow-up Segment** check box. -8. Choose the **OK** button. - - The letters are automatically sent by email, and the segment is logged. Because the segment has been logged, it is no longer in the list of segments but is saved in the list of logged segments. To see that list, Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Logged Segments**, and then choose the related link. - -## Registering Campaign Responses - During the next couple of weeks, the prospective customers respond to the letter. The marketing manager wants to keep track of the responses and record these interactions. - - For this purpose, set up a segment for the contacts who have responded to the letter. - -### To register campaign responses - -1. In the **Segment** window, expand the **Interaction** FastTab. -2. Choose the **Interaction Template Code** field. - - There is no interaction template for recording responses to campaigns. Therefore, create a new template. - -3. In the **Interaction Templates** window, choose the **New** action. -4. In the **Code** field, enter **RESP**, and in the **Description** field, enter **Campaign Responses**. -5. Choose the **OK** button. -6. Select this interaction template in the **Interaction Template Code** field and confirm the message that asks if you want to update the segment lines with the same Interaction Template Code. - - Now specify that these contacts have responded to the campaign: -7. On the **Campaign** FastTab, in the **Campaign No.** field, select your campaign. -8. Leave the **Campaign No.** field and confirm the message that asks if you want to update the segment lines with the same Interaction Template Code. -9. Select the **Campaign Response** field and confirm the subsequent message. - - Log the segment to make sure that the interactions are recorded. -10. In the **Segment** window, choose the **Log** action. -11. In the **Log Segment** window, clear the **Send Attachments** check box, and then choose the **OK** button and confirm the message that appears. - - After the segment is logged, an entry for the campaign is automatically created to record this action in the **Campaign Entries** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Relationship Management](marketing-relationship-management.md) - [Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-making-cash-flow-forecasts-by-using-account-schedules.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-making-cash-flow-forecasts-by-using-account-schedules.md deleted file mode 100644 index ff750206..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-making-cash-flow-forecasts-by-using-account-schedules.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Making Cash Flow Forecasts by Using Account Schedules - description: This walkthrough describes how you can use account schedules to make cash flow forecasts. Account schedules perform calculations that cannot be done directly in the chart of cash flow accounts. In the account schedules, you can set up subtotals for cash flow receipts and disbursements. These subtotals can be included in new totals that can then be used in making cash flow forecasts. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Making Cash Flow Forecasts by Using Account Schedules -This walkthrough describes how you can use account schedules to make cash flow forecasts. Account schedules perform calculations that cannot be done directly in the chart of cash flow accounts. In the account schedules, you can set up subtotals for cash flow receipts and disbursements. These subtotals can be included in new totals that can then be used in making cash flow forecasts. - -## About This Walkthrough -This walkthrough describes the following tasks: - -- Setting up a new cash flow account schedule name. -- Setting up account schedule lines. -- Setting up a new column layout. -- Assigning a column layout to an account schedule. -- Viewing and printing the cash flow forecast. - -### Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] installed. -- The cash flow worksheet lines are registered. - -## Roles -This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user role: - -- Controller - -## Story -Ken is a controller at CRONUS who makes monthly cash flow forecasts. He includes finance, sales, purchase, and fixed assets in the forecast, and then he presents it to CFO Sara for business insight. - -## Setting Up a New Account Schedule Name -An account schedule consists of a cash flow account schedule name with a series of lines and a column layout. - -### To set up a new account schedule name - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Account Schedules**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, choose the **New** to create a new cash flow account schedule name. -3. In the **Name** field, enter **Forecast**. -4. In the **Description** field, enter **Cash Flow Forecast**. -5. Leave the **Default Column Layout** and **Analysis View Name** fields blank. - -## Setting Up Account Schedule Lines -After an account schedule name is set up, Ken defines each line that appears in the cash flow account schedule. Ken defines lines that can be shown in reports in addition to lines that are only for calculation purposes. - -### To set up account schedule lines - -1. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, select the new **Forecast** account schedule name that you have created. On the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Edit Account Schedule**. -2. In the **Account Schedule** window, enter each line exactly as shown in the following table. - - > [!NOTE] - > Using the **Insert CF Accounts** function, you can quickly mark the cash flow accounts from the chart of cash flow accounts and copy them to account schedule lines. - - | Row No. | Description | Totaling Type | Totaling | Row Type | Amount Type | Show | - |---------|--------------------|--------------------|----------|------------|-------------|------| - | C10 | Amount | Net Change | Entries | Net Amount | Always | | - | C20 | Amount until Date | Balance at Date | Entries | Net Amount | Always | | - | C30 | Entire Fiscal Year | Entire Fiscal Year | Entries | Net Amount | Always | | - - -3. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Assigning the Column Layout to the Account Schedule Name -Ken is now ready to assign the column layout to the account schedule name. - -### To assign the column layout to the account schedule name - -1. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, select **Forecast** in the **Name** field. -2. In the **Default Column Layout** field, choose the column layout **Cash Flow** to assign as the default column layout. - -### To view and print the cash flow forecast -1. In the **Account Schedule Names** window, choose the **Overview** action to view the cash flow forecast. -2. In the **Acc. Schedule Overview** window, you can select an amount and then view the cash flow forecast entries that make up the amount. In addition, you can view the formula that is used to calculate the amount. You can also filter the amounts by date and dimension. -3. Choose the **Print** action to print the cash flow forecast. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Account Schedules](bi-how-work-account-schedule.md) - [Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs.md deleted file mode 100644 index 430d2d72..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-managing-projects-with-jobs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,488 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Managing Projects with Jobs - description: This walkthrough introduces you to the project management features in jobs. Jobs are a way for you to schedule the usage of your company's resources and to keep track of the various costs associated with the resources on a specific project. Jobs involves the consumption of employee hours, machine hours, inventory items, and other types of usage that you may want to track as a job progresses. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Managing Projects with Jobs -This walkthrough introduces you to the project management features in jobs. Jobs are a way for you to schedule the usage of your company's resources and to keep track of the various costs associated with the resources on a specific project. Jobs involves the consumption of employee hours, machine hours, inventory items, and other types of usage that you may want to track as a job progresses. - - This walkthrough covers the setup of a new job in addition to some common tasks such as handling fixed pricing, making payment by installments, posting invoices from jobs, and copying jobs. - -## About This Walkthrough - This walkthrough demonstrates the following tasks: - -### Setting Up a Job - With the budget structure set up for jobs, creating a job is straightforward. This walkthrough covers the following procedures: - -- Setting up job task lines and planning lines. -- Creating job-specific prices for items, resources, and general ledger accounts. -- Invoicing from a job. - -### Handling Fixed Prices - In jobs, you can handle fixed prices and the prices for services or goods that are agreed upon in advance with customers. In this walkthrough, you can do the following: - -- See how contract and invoice values are determined. -- Allow for extra work in the schedule that has not been invoiced. - -### Copying a Job - This part of the walkthrough focuses on how to copy part or all of a job in order to reduce manual data entry and improve accuracy. It includes the following: - -- Copying part of a job to a new job. -- Copying job-specific prices. -- Copying planning lines. - -### Making Payment by Installment - When a large, expensive project lasts for a long period, the customer often makes an agreement with the company to pay by installments. This scenario shows how you set up payment by installments and covers: - -- Creating payment by installments for a job. -- Invoicing payments to customers. -- Accounting for usage in a job set up for payment by installments. - -## Roles - This walkthrough includes tasks for the following roles: - -- Project Manager -- Project Team Member - -## Prerequisites - Before you can perform the tasks in the walkthrough, you must do the following: - -- Install the CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration database. -- Create sample data by using the steps in the following section. - -## Story -This walkthrough focuses on CRONUS International Ltd., a design and consultancy firm that designs and fits new infrastructures, such as conference halls and offices, with furniture, accessories, and storage units. Most of its work is project oriented. Prakash is a project manager at CRONUS. He uses jobs to give him an overview of each ongoing job that CRONUS has started, as well as the jobs that are completed. He is usually the one who sets up deals with customers and enters the core of the job, which is task and planning lines in addition to prices, into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. He finds that creating, maintaining, and reviewing information is straightforward. Prakash also likes the way [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] enables copying jobs and payment by installments. - - Tricia, a project team member who reports to Prakash, is responsible for monitoring the job day-to-day. She enters her own work in addition to the work performed by technicians on every task. She records the items that they have used and the costs that they have incurred. - -## Preparing Sample Data - To prepare for this walkthrough, you must add Tricia as a new resource. - -### To prepare the sample data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Resources**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new resource card. -3. On the **General** FastTab, enter the following information: - - - **No.**: **Tricia** - - **Name**: **Tricia** - - **Type**: **Person** - -4. Choose the **Base Unit of Measure** field, and choose the **New** action to open the **Resource Unit of Measure** window. In the **Code** field, select **Hour**. Choose the **OK** button. -5. On the **Invoicing** FastTab, enter the following information: - - - **Direct Unit Cost**: **5** - - **Indirect Cost %**: **4** - - **Unit Cost**: **10** - - **Gen. Prod. Posting Group**: **Services** - - **VAT Prod. Posting Group**: **VAT 25** - -6. Choose the **OK** button to save the changes. - - In the next procedure, you create a job journal batch for Tricia in order to post her usage. - -### To create a Job Journal batch - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Job Journal** window, choose the **Batch Name** field. The **Job Journal Batches** window opens. -3. Choose the **New** action to create a new line with the following information: - - - **Name**: **Tricia** - - **Description**: **Tricia** - - **No. Series**: **JJNL-GEN** - -4. Choose the **OK** button to close all open windows. - -## Setting Up a Job - In this scenario, CRONUS has won a contract with a customer, Progressive Home Furnishings, to design a conference and dining hall. The customer is based in the United States and the project will require special software. The project manager reaches an agreement with the customer and creates a job that covers the agreement. - -### To set up a job - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new card. -3. On the **General** FastTab, enter the following information: - - - **Description**: **Advising on conference hall setup** - - **Bill-to-Customer No.**: **01445544** - -4. On the **Posting** FastTab, enter the following information: - - - **Status**: **Order** - - **Job Posting Group**: **Setting Up** - - **WIP Method**: **Cost Value** - -5. On the **Duration** FastTab, type today's date into the **Starting Date** and **Ending Date** fields. These dates will help apply currency conversions when the job is invoiced. -6. On the **Foreign Trade** FastTab, set the currency code to **USD**. If you select USD in the **Invoice Currency Code** field, then the job will be invoiced in U.S. dollars and planned in the local currency of CRONUS only. - - You can customize the pricing for customers on a per job basis, depending on the agreements you have set up. In the next procedure, the project manager specifies a cost for Tricia’s time, sets the price for the required software, and adds in the travel costs that the customer has agreed to pay. - -### To customize pricing - -1. From the job card, choose the **Resource** action. -2. In the **Job Resource Prices** window, enter the following information: - - - **Code**: **Tricia** - - **Unit Price**: **20** - -3. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. -4. Choose the **Item** action. -5. In the **Job Item Prices** window, enter the following information and customized price: - - 1. **Item No.**: **80201 (Graphic Program)** - 2. **Unit Price**: **200** - -6. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. -7. Choose the **G/L Account** action. -8. In the **Job G/L Account Prices** window, enter the following information and the cost of travel, for which the customer has agreed to pay cost plus 25 percent: - - 1. **G/L Account**: **8430 (Travel)** - 2. **Unit Cost Factor**: **1.25** - -9. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. - - The final steps in setting up a job are adding the job tasks and the planning lines that are part of each task. The planning lines determine what is invoiced to the customer. - -### To add job tasks - -1. On the **Job** card for the new job, choose the **Job Task Lines** action. -2. The following table describes the information that you should enter in the fields. - - - | Job Task No. | Description | Job Task Type | - |--------------|------------------------------------|---------------| - | 1000 | Consulting on hall setup | Begin-Total | - | 1010 | Consultation meeting with customer | Posting | - | 1020 | Development | Posting | - | 1090 | Consulting Total | End-Total | - - -3. To show that some tasks are subcategories of other tasks, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Indent Job Tasks**. - - A planning line can be one of the following types: - -- **Schedule**: Added to the schedule, but not invoiced. -- **Contract**: Invoiced, but not added to the schedule. -- **Both Schedule and Contract**: Invoiced and added to the schedule. - - In this walkthrough, the project manager uses **Both Schedule and Contract**. He creates three planning lines for task 1010, and two planning lines for task 1020. - -### To create planning lines - -1. Select line 1010, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. Enter the following information: - - **Line 1** - - - **Line Type**: **Both Schedule and Contract** - - **Planning Date**: **(today’s date)** - - **Type**: **Resource** - - **No.**: **Tricia** - - **Quantity**: **40** - - **Line 2** - - - **Line Type**: **Both Schedule and Con**tract - - **Planning Date**: **(today’s date)** - - **Type**: **Resource** - - **No.**: **Timothy** - - **Quantity**: **40** - - **Line 3** - - - **Line Type**: **Both Schedule and Contract** - - **Planning Date**: **(today’s date)** - - **Type**: **G/L Account** - - **No.**: **8430 (Travel)** - - **Quantity**: **2** - - **Unit Cost**: **400** - -2. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. The totals are updated in the **Job Task Lines** window. -3. Select line 1020, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. Enter the following information: - - **Line 1** - - - **Line Type**: **Both Schedule and Contract** - - **Planning Date**: **(today’s date)** - - **Type**: **Resource** - - **No.**: **Tricia** - - **Quantity**: **80** - - **Line 2** - - - **Line Type**: **Both Schedule and Contract** - - **Planning Date**: **(today’s date)** - - **Type**: **Item** - - **No.**: **80201 (Graphic program)** - - **Quantity**: **1** - -4. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. Totals are updated in the **Job Task Lines** window. - -## Calculating Remaining Usage - Tricia, the team project member, has been working on the job for a while and wants to register her hours and usage on the job. She has not worked more hours than was agreed upon with the customer in advance. She uses the **Calculate Remaining Usage** batch job to calculate remaining usage for the job in a job journal. For each task, the batch job calculates the difference between scheduled usage of items, resources, and general ledger expenses and the actual usage posted in job ledger entries. The remaining usage is then displayed in the job journal from where she can post it. - -### To calculate remaining usage - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Job Journal** window, in the **Batch Name** field, open the **Job Journals Batches** list. Select the **Tricia** job journal batch. -3. Choose the **Calc. Remaining Usage** action. -4. In the **Job Calc. Remaining Usage** window, on the **Job Task** FastTab, choose the **Job No.** field, and select the relevant job number, typically job J00010. -5. On the **Options** FastTab, type **J00001** in the **Document No.** field. This makes future tracking of the posting easier. -6. Enter today’s date as the posting date. -7. Choose the **OK** button. This will generate job journal lines derived from the planning lines that Prakash created for the job. -8. Choose the **OK** button in the confirmation window. The generated lines are added to the job journal. -9. Make sure that all the document numbers are J00001, and then choose the **Post** action. Choose **Yes** to confirm the posting. -10. The lines are now posted. Choose the **OK** button to close the windows. - -## Creating and Posting a Job Sales Invoice - Next, Tricia can create a new invoice for the whole job or for part of a job. She can also attach the invoice to another invoice for the same customer for the same job. In this case, she invoices for the whole job, because the project is now completed. - -### To create a job sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the job that you created earlier, and then choose the **Create Job Sales Invoice** action. -3. On the **Job Task** FastTab, clear any filter on **Job Task No.** in order to invoice the job. In the **Job No.** field, select the relevant job. -4. On the **Options** FastTab, fill in the posting date and define whether you want to create one invoice per task or just a single invoice for all tasks. -5. Choose the **OK** button to create the invoice and choose the **OK** button in the confirmation window. - - After Tricia creates the invoice, she can access it from **Sales & Marketing** under **Order Processing** and do additional processing. - -### To post a new sales invoice - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the invoice for Customer No. 01445544. You can see the information that was entered from the planning lines. -3. Choose the **Post** action. Choose **Yes** to confirm the posting. - -### To view the posted invoice - -1. Open the job, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -2. Select any of the planning lines that have been invoiced, and then choose the **Sales Invoice/Credit Memo** action. -3. In the **Job Invoices** window, choose the **Open Sales Invoice/Credit Memo** action. - - Tricia has a question about the prices, costs, and profits that are relevant to this particular job, so she accesses that information in the **Statistics** window. - -### To open the Statistics window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Statistics** action. You can review detailed information about the job prices, costs, and profits in both local and foreign currencies. -3. Choose the **Close** button to close the **Job Statistics** window. - -## Handling Fixed Prices - CRONUS has been contracted to set up conference rooms. As the project manager, Prakash wants a good overview of the tasks required for the job with the associated budgeted and incurred costs for each task. In addition, he wants to know the total contracted price for the job and the amount that has been invoiced to this point. He has reached an agreement with the customer regarding fixed pricing for the job. - -### To manage fixed pricing in jobs - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Guildford** job number, and then choose the **Jobs Task Lines** action. -3. Select line 1120, and in the **Schedule (Total Cost)** field, right-click the amount and choose **DrillDown**. - - By reviewing the Job Planning lines, Prakash determines that he will also need Tricia for 30 hours for this stage of the project. He agrees on a fixed price with the customer. - -4. In the **Job Task Lines** window, select line 1120, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -5. Choose the **New** to create a new line with the following information: - - - **Line Type**: **Both Schedule and Contract** - - **Type**: **Resource** - - **No.**: **Tricia** - - **Quantity**: **30** - -6. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. -7. In the **Schedule (Total Cost)** field, right-click the field, and choose **Drilldown** again in the **Job Task Lines** window. View the changes to the schedule. You see that 30 hours have been added to the schedule. -8. Choose the **OK** button to close the windows. - - After Tricia has been added to the schedule for this task line, she works 25 hours on the job. She enters these hours into the job journal. - -### To enter hours in the Job Journal - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. On a new line, enter the following information: - - - **Line Type**: **(blank)** - - **Posting Date**: **(today's date)** - - **Document No.**: **J00002** - - **Job No.**: **Guildford** - - **Job Task No.**: **1120** - - **Type**: **Resource** - - **No.**: **Tricia** - - **Quantity**: **25** - -3. Choose the **Post** action. - - A few days later, Tricia works for another 10 hours on the job. She has now worked 35 hours in all. Because the agreement is for 30 hours with the customer, only five of these hours will be charged to the customer. Tricia will manually add the additional five hours she worked to the schedule. - -4. In the **Job Journal** window, choose the **Calc. Remaining Usage** action. -5. In the **Job Calc. Remaining Usage** window, on the **Options** FastTab, enter the following information: - - - **Document No.**: **J00003** - - **Posting Date**: **(today's date)** - -6. On the **Job Task** FastTab, enter the following information: - - - **Job No.**: **Guildford** - - **Job Task No.**: **1120** - - Choose the **OK** button to run the calculation. There are five hours of work remaining for Tricia. The **Line Type** field is blank, which indicates that only the usage remains to be posted because the work has already been scheduled. - -7. In the **Job Journal**, create a new line with the following information. Make sure that both job numbers are sequential with those that you have already used: - - - **Line Type**: **Schedule** - - **Job No.**: **Guildford** - - **Job Task No.**: **1120** - - **Type**: **Resource** - - **No.**: **Tricia** - - **Quantity**: **5** - - By using the **Schedule** line type, there are updates to the scheduled costs and prices, but no updates to the contract costs and prices that are invoiced to the customer. - -8. Choose the **Post** action. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. -9. Open the **Jobs** list. -10. Select the GUILDFORD job, and then choose the **Job Task Lines** action. -11. Select line 1120 and in the **Schedule (Total Cost)** field, right-click the amount. Choose **DrillDown** to view the information. - - Changes are automatically entered on the line for Job Task No. 1120. In the total cost of scheduled work, five additional hours of work by Tricia has been added to the schedule. - -12. Choose the **Close** button to close the window. -13. Right-choose the amount in the **Contract (Total Cost)** field and choose **DrillDown** to view the information. - - In the total price for the contract, only the original contracted 30 hours are included, because this is what was agreed upon with the customer. - -## Copying Jobs - Prakash has reached an agreement with a customer, Selagorian Ltd, to set up 10 conference rooms. The agreement resembles an earlier job. Therefore, it will save time to copy that earlier job. - - In the **Copy Job** window, you can select the job and task lines that you want to copy. You can also select to copy the source job ledger entries, which creates planning lines based on actual usage, or you can copy the source job planning lines, which copies the original planning lines to the new job. You can then choose what planning line or ledger entry line type that you want to include, selecting only what is relevant to this new job. Finally, you can select the job that you want to copy to and define whether prices and quantities should be copied as well. - -### To copy a job - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Jobs**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action to create a new job. Enter the following information: - - - **Description**: **Setting up 10 Conference Rooms** - - **Bill-To Customer No.**: **20000** - -3. Choose the **Copy Job Tasks from** action. -4. In the **Copy Job Tasks** window, enter the following: - - - **Job No.**: **Guildford** - - **Job Task No. From**: **1000** - - **Source**: **Job Planning Lines** - - **Incl. Planning Line Type**: **Schedule + Contract** - - **To Job No.**: **GuildfordSetting up 10 Conference Rooms** - - Select the **Copy Dimensions** and **Copy Quantity** fields. - -5. Choose the **OK** button to copy the job and then choose the **OK** button to close the confirmation window. - - By comparing prices, job task lines, and job planning lines for the two jobs, you can see that the information was successfully copied. - -## Making Payments by Installments - CRONUS has just landed a large project that will take a year to be completed. Because it requires the dedication of many resources, the project manager sets up the contract so that the customer pays part of the price up front, part when the project is halfway completed, and the final payment upon completion. - -### To set up a new account - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Chart of Accounts**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, choose the **New** action to create a new card. -3. On the **New G/L Account** card, enter the following information: - - - **No.**: **6630** - - **Name**: **Job Payment** - -4. On the **Posting** FastTab, in the **Gen. Prod. Posting Group** field, select **MISC**. Choose the **OK** button to close the window. -5. In the **Chart of Accounts** window, select **No. 6630 Job Payment**, and then choose the **Indent Chart of Accounts** action. Choose **Yes** to confirm. - - The following procedures show how to create a new job, set pricing, and then set up payment by installment. In the job task lines, you can create specific lines dedicated to the payment by installments. All work completed on the job that is added to the schedule will be entered on the usage lines. For each payment task line on the planning lines, the line type is Contract, which means that the customer will be invoiced. Enter a new line for the down payment. On the usage task line, you can enter the information for the items and resources that have been used in this project, which will increase the schedule, such as employee hours and items used on the job. - -### To make a payment by installment - -1. Create a new job. -2. On the new **Job** card, fill in the following information: - - - **Description**: **Redecoration of Reception Area** - - **Bill-to-Customer No.**: **30000** - - **Job Posting Group**: **Setting up** - - **WIP Method**: **Cost Value** - -3. On the job card, choose the **Resource** action. Enter the following information: - - - **Code**: **Tricia** - - **Unit Price**: **10** - - Choose the **OK** button to close the window. - -4. On the **Job** card, choose the **Job Task Lines** action. - - The following table describes the lines that you will create. - - - | Line | Job Task No. | Description | Job Task Type | - |------|--------------|----------------------|---------------| - | 1 | 1000 | Payment-Down Payment | Posting | - | 2 | 2000 | Usage | Posting | - | 3 | 3000 | Payment - Midway | Posting | - | 4 | 4000 | Payment - Completion | Posting | - - -5. In the **Job Task Lines** window, select task 1000, and then choose the **Job Planning Lines** action. -6. Create a planning line with the following information: - - - **Line Type**: **Contract** - - **Planning Date**: **(today's date)** - - **Type**: **G/L Account** - - **No.**: **6630** - - **Quantity**: **1** - - **Unit Price**: **5000** - - Choose the **OK** button to close the window. - -7. In the **Job Task Lines** window, select **task 2000**, and open its **Job Planning Lines**. - - The following table describes the planning lines that you will create. - - |Line|Line Type|Planning Date|Type|No.|Quantity| - |----------|---------------|-------------------|----------|---------|--------------| - |1|Schedule|(today’s date)|Resource|Tricia|120| - |2|Schedule|(today’s date)|Item|70104|10| - - Choose the **OK** button to close the window. In the **Job Task Lines** window, you can see the schedule amounts have been updated. - -8. In the **Job Task Lines** window, select **task 3000**. -9. Create a planning line with the following information: - - - **Line Type**: **Contract** - - **Planning Date**: **a future date** - - **Type**: **G/L Account** - - **No.**: **6630** - - **Quantity**: **1** - - **Unit Price**: **5000** - - Choose the **OK** button to close the window. - -10. Create a similar planning line entry for job task 4000. - - Now that the task and planning lines have been entered, Prakash creates an invoice for the first payment. He does this from the job task lines to make sure that the invoice only contains the lines for the first payment. You can open the sales order from the planning lines or the task lines. - -### To create an invoice - -1. In the **Job Task Lines** window, select line 1000, and then choose the **Create Sales Invoice** action. -2. In the **Create Sales Invoice** window, set today’s date as the posting date, specify **Per Task**, and choose the **OK** button to create an invoice with the default information. Choose the **OK** button to close the confirmation window. -3. Choose the **Sales Invoice/Credit Memo** action. On the sales invoice, you can see that only the down payment is included in the invoice. You can now send this to the customer as agreed. - -## Next Steps - This walkthrough has taken you through some of the basic steps of working with jobs in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. You have learned about how to create a new job, how to copy a job, and how to handle payments. Also, you have seen a demonstration of how to track hours and create invoices. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Setting Up Project Management](projects-setup-projects.md) - [How to: Use Resources](projects-how-use-resources.md) - [How to: Monitor Progress and Performance](projects-how-monitor-progress-performance.md) - [How to: Invoice Jobs](projects-how-invoice-jobs.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-picking-and-shipping-in-basic-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-picking-and-shipping-in-basic-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 20282751..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-picking-and-shipping-in-basic-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Picking and Shipping in Basic Warehouse Configurations - description: In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the outbound processes for picking and shipping can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Picking and Shipping in Basic Warehouse Configurations -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the outbound processes for picking and shipping can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - -|Method|Inbound process|Bins|Picks|Shipments|Complexity level (See [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md))| -|------------|---------------------|----------|-----------|---------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -|A|Post pick and shipment from the order line|X|||2| -|B|Post pick and shipment from an inventory pick document||X||3| -|C|Post pick and shipment from a warehouse shipment document|||X|4/5/6| -|D|Post pick from a warehouse pick document and post shipment from a warehouse shipment document||X|X|4/5/6| - -For more information, see [Design Details: Outbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md). - -The following walkthrough demonstrates method B in the previous table. - -## About This Walkthrough -In basic warehouse configurations where your location is set up to require pick processing but not ship processing, you use the **Inventory Pick** window to record and post pick and ship information for your outbound source documents. The outbound source document can be a sales order, purchase return order, outbound transfer order, or a production order with component need. - -This walkthrough demonstrates the following tasks: - -- Setting up SILVER location for inventory picks. -- Creating a sales order for customer 10000 for 30 loudspeakers. -- Releasing the sales order for warehouse handling. -- Creating an inventory pick based on a released source document. -- Registering the warehouse movement from the warehouse and at the same time posting the sales shipment for the source sales order. - -## Roles -This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user roles: - -- Warehouse Manager -- Order Processor -- Warehouse Worker - -## Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- CRONUS International Ltd. installed. -- To make yourself a warehouse employee at SILVER location by following these steps: - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Employees**, and then choose the related link. - 2. Choose the **User ID** field, and select your own user account in the **Users** window. - 3. In the **Location Code** field, enter SILVER. - 4. Select the **Default** field. - -- Make item LS-81 available at SILVER location by following these steps: - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journals**, and then choose the related link. - 2. Open the default journal, and then create two item journal lines with the following information about the work date (January 23). - - |Entry Type|Item Number|Location Code|Bin Code|Quantity| - |----------------|-----------------|-------------------|--------------|--------------| - |Positive Adjmt.|LS-81|SILVER|S-01-0001 **Note:** The item’s default bin in CRONUS|20| - |Positive Adjmt.|LS-81|SILVER|S-01-0002|20| - - 3. Choose the **Post** action, and then select the **Yes** button. - -## Story -Ellen, the warehouse manager at CRONUS, sets up SILVER warehouse for basic pick handling where warehouse workers process outbound orders individually. Susan, the order processor, creates a sales order for 30 units of item LS-81 to be shipped to customer 10000 from the SILVER Warehouse. John, the warehouse worker must make sure that the shipment is prepared and delivered to the customer. John manages all involved tasks in the **Inventory Pick** window, which automatically points to the bins where LS-81 is stored. - -## Setting Up the Location -The setup of the **Location Card** window defines the company’s warehouse flows. - -### To set up the location -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the SILVER location card. -3. Select the **Require Pick** check box. - -## Creating the Sales Order -Sales orders are the most common type of outbound source document. - -### To create the sales order -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Create a sales order for customer 10000 on the work date (January 23) with the following sales order line. - - |Item|Location Code|Quantity| - |----------|-------------------|--------------| - |LS_81|SILVER|30| - - Proceed to notify the warehouse that the sales order is ready for warehouse handling. - -4. Choose the **Release** action. - - John proceeds to pick and ship the sold items. - -## Picking and Shipping Items -In the **Inventory Pick** window, you can manage all outbound warehouse activities for a specific source document, such as a sales order. - -### To pick and ship items -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Picks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Select the **Source Document** field, and then select **Sales Order**. -4. Select the **Source No.** field, select the line for the sale to customer 10000, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Alternatively, choose the **Get Source Document** action, and then select the sales order. -5. Choose the **Autofill Qty. to Handle** action. - - Alternatively, in the **Qty. to Handle** field, enter 10 and 30 respectively on the two inventory pick lines. -6. Choose the **Post** action, select **Ship**, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The 30 loudspeakers are now registered as picked from bins S-01-0001 and S-01-0002, and a negative item ledger entry is created reflecting the posted sales shipment. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md) - [How to: Pick Items for Warehouse Shipment](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md) - [How to: Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operations Areas](warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md) - [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md) - [How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md) - [How to: Move Items Ad Hoc in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md) - [Design Details: Outbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md) - [Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9c9bccd4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,273 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Planning Supplies Automatically - description: Phrases like “run planning” and “run MRP” refer to the calculation of the master production schedule (MPS) and the material requirements plan (MRP) based on actual and forecasted demand. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Automatically -Phrases like “run planning” and “run MRP” refer to the calculation of the master production schedule (MPS) and the material requirements plan (MRP) based on actual and forecasted demand. - -- MPS is the calculation of a master production schedule based on actual demand and the production forecast. The MPS calculation is used for end items that have a forecast or a sales order line. These items are called "MPS items" and are identified dynamically when the calculation starts. -- MRP is the calculation of material requirements based on actual demand for components and the production forecast on the component level. MRP is calculated only for items that are not MPS items. The overall purpose of MRP is to provide time-phased formal plans, by item, to supply the right item at the right time, in the right place, in the right quantity. - - The planning algorithms used for both MPS and MRP are identical. The planning algorithms use netting, reuse of existing supply orders, and action messages. The planning system process examines what is needed or will be needed (demand) and what is available or expected (supply). When these quantities are netted against each other, action messages are displayed in the planning worksheet. Action messages are suggestions to create a new supply order, change a supply order (quantity or date), or cancel an existing supply order. Supply orders can be production orders, purchase orders, and transfer orders. For more information, see [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md). - - The planning result is calculated partly from the demand-supply sets in the database and partly by the setup of stockkeeping unit cards or item cards, production BOMs, and routings. - -## About This Walkthrough - This walkthrough demonstrates how to use the supply planning system to automatically plan all the purchase and production orders required to produce 15 touring bicycles demanded on different sales orders. To provide a clear and realistic walkthrough, the number of planning lines is delimited by filtering out all other demand-supply sets in the CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration company except the sales demand at location BLUE. - - This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Creating the sales order and calculating a complete supply plan. -- Viewing planning parameters and order tracking entries behind the planning lines. -- Automatically creating the suggested supply orders. -- Creating new sales demand and replanning accordingly. - -## Roles - -- Production Planner -- Purchasing Agent - -## Prerequisites - To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- The CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration company. -- To change various item setup values by following the steps in the “Preparing Sample Data” section, later in this walkthrough. - -## Story - The customer, Cannon Group PLC, orders five touring bikes for shipment on 02-05-2014 (February 5). - - Eduardo, the production planner, performs the routine supply planning for the first week of February 2014. He filters on his own location, BLUE, and enters a planning interval of the work date (01-23-2014) to 02-07-2014 before he calculates an initial supply plan. - - The only demand that week is for the Cannon Group sales order. Eduardo sees that none of the planning lines have warnings, and he proceeds to create supply orders without changes for the suggested planning lines. - - The next day, before any of the initial supply orders are started or posted, Eduardo is notified that another customer has ordered ten touring bikes for shipment on 02-12-2014. He recalculates to adjust the supply plan according to the change of demand. The recalculation gives you a net change plan that suggests changes to both time and quantity of some of the supply orders created in the first run. - - During the various planning steps, Eduardo looks up the involved orders, and uses the Order Tracking feature to see which demand is covered by which supply. - -## Preparing Sample Data - Create stockkeeping units (SKUs) for the touring bike and a selection of its components, item numbers 1001 to 1300. (Some components are excluded to simplify the procedures.) Adjust the planning parameters of the selected components to provide a more transparent planning result. - -### To create stockkeeping units - -1. Open the item card for item 1001, Touring Bicycle. -2. Choose the **Create Stockkeeping Unit** action. -3. In the **Create Stockkeeping Unit** window, leave all options and filters unchanged, and then choose the **OK** button. -4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all items in the number range between 1100 and 1300. - -### To change selected planning parameters - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Stockkeeping Units**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the BLUE stockkeeping unit card for item 1100, Front Wheel. -3. On the **Planning** FastTab, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Reordering Policy | Safety Stock Quantity | Lot Accumulation Period | Rescheduling Period | - |-------------------|-----------------------|-------------------------|---------------------| - | Lot-for-Lot | Blank | 2W | 2W | - - -4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all SKUs in the number range between 1100 and 1300. - - This completes the preparation of sample data for the walkthrough. - -## Creating a Regenerative Supply Plan - In reaction to a new sales order for five touring bikes, Ricardo begins the planning process by setting options, filters, and planning interval to exclude all other demand except that of the first week of February at location BLUE. He begins by calculating a master production schedule (MPS), and then proceeds to calculate a complete supply plan for all lower-level demand (MRP). - -### To create the sales order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Sales Order** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Sell-to Customer Name|Shipment Date|Item No.|Location|Quantity| - |----------------------------|-------------------|--------------|--------------|--------------| - |Cannon Group|02-05-2014|1001|BLUE|5| - -4. Accept the availability warning and choose the **Yes** button to record the new demand quantity. - -### To create a regenerative plan to fulfill demand at location BLUE - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planning Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Regenerative Plan** action. -3. In the **Calculate Plan - Plan. Wksh.** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Calculate Plan|Starting Date|Ending Date|Show results:|Limit totals to| - |--------------------|-------------------|-----------------|-------------------|---------------------| - |**MPS** = Yes

**MRP** = No|01-23-2014

(work date)|02-07-2014|1001..1300|Location Filter = BLUE| - -4. Choose the **OK** button to start the planning run. - - One planning line is created suggesting that a planned production order be issued to produce the ten touring bikes, item 1001, by 02-05-2014, the shipment date of the sales order. - - Next, verify that this planning line relates to the Cannon Group sales order by using the **Order Tracking** function, which dynamically links demand with its planned supply. - -5. Select the new planning line, and then choose the **Order Tracking** action. -6. In the **Order Tracking** window, choose the **Show** action. - - The sales order for five touring bikes shipping to customer number 10000 on 02-05-2014, is shown. - -7. Close the **Sales Order** and **Order Tracking** windows. - -### To calculate MRP to include underlying component needs - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planning Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Regenerative Plan** action. -3. In the **Calculate Plan - Plan. Wksh.** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - |Calculate|Starting Date|Ending Date|Show results:|Limit totals to:| - |---------------|-------------------|-----------------|-------------------|----------------------| - |**MPS** = Yes

**MRP** = Yes|01-23-2014|02-07-2014|1001..1300|Location Filter = BLUE| - -4. Choose the **OK** button to start the planning run. - - A total of 14 planning lines are created suggesting supply orders for all the demand that the touring bike sales order at BLUE location represents. - -## Analyzing the Planning Result - To analyze the suggested quantities, Eduardo drills down on selected planning lines to view order tracking entries and planning parameters. - - In the **Planning Worksheet** window, note in the **Due Date** column that the suggested supply orders are scheduled backward from the due date of the sales order, 02-05-2014. The timeline begins on the top planning line with the production order to produce the finished touring bikes. The timeline ends on the bottom planning line with the purchase order for one of the lowest-level items, 1255, Socket Back, due on 01-30-2014. Like the planning line for item 1251, Axle Back Wheel, this line represents a purchase order for components that are due on the starting date of its produced parent, subassembly item 1250, which in turn is due on 02-03-2014. Throughout the worksheet, you can see that all underlying items are due on the starting date of their parents. - - The planning line for item 1300, Chain Assy, suggests ten pieces. This deviates from the five pieces that we expect to need to fulfill the sales order. Proceed to view the order tracking entries. - -### To view order tracking entries for item 1300 - -1. Select the planning line for item 1300, and then choose the **Order Tracking** action. - - The two lines in the **Order Tracking** window show that five pieces are tracked from the planning line (first order tracking line) to sales order 1001 (second order tracking line). The last five pieces suggested on the planning line are not related to any document lines, but to a planning parameter, forecast entry, or blanket order entry. Such untracked quantities are summed in the **Untracked Quantity** field in the header of the **Order Tracking** window. - -2. Choose the **Untracked Quantity** field. - - The **Untracked Planning Elements** window shows that item 1300 uses a planning parameter, Minimum Order Quantity, of 10.00. Therefore, the planning line is for ten pieces in total, of which only five can be tracked to a demand. The last five pieces are an untracked quantity to satisfy the planning parameter. Proceed to review the planning parameter. - -### To check the planning parameter - -1. In the **Untracked Planning Elements** window, select the order tracking line for item 1300. -2. Choose the **Item No.** field, and then choose the **Advanced** action. -3. In the **Item List** window, choose the **Stockkeeping Units** action. -4. In the **Stockkeeping Unit List** window, open the BLUE stockkeeping unit card. -5. On the **Planning** FastTab, note that the **Minimum Order Quantity** field contains 10. -6. Close all windows except the **Planning Worksheet** window. - -### To view more order tracking entries - -1. Select the planning line for item 1110, Rim, and then choose the **Order Tracking** action. - - The **Order Tracking** window shows that five rims are needed for each production order for front and back wheels respectively. - - The same order tracking applies to the planning lines for items 1120, 1160, and 1170. For item 1120, the **Quantity per** field on the production BOM of each wheel item is 50 PCS, which result in a total need of 100. - - The planning line for item 1150 for six pieces looks irregular. Proceed to analyze. - -2. Select the planning line for item 1150, and then, on then choose the **Order Tracking** action. - - The **Order Tracking** window shows that five units are tracked to the front wheel, and one unit is untracked. Proceed to view the untracked quantity. - -3. Choose the **Untracked Quantity** field. - - The **Untracked Planning Elements** window shows that item 1150 uses a planning parameter, Order Multiple, of 2.00, which specifies that when the item is ordered, it must be in a quantity that is divisible by 2. The closest number to 5 that is divisible by 2 is 6. - - The same order tracking applies to the planning lines for the Front Hub components, items 1151 and 1155, except that each need is multiplied by the scrap percentage that is defined for item 1150 in the **Scrap Percentage** field on the item card. - - This completes the analysis of the initial supply plan. Notice that the **Accept Action Message** check box is selected in all planning lines indicating that they are ready to be converted to supply orders. - -## Carrying Out Action Messages - Next, Eduardo converts the suggested planning lines to supply orders by using the **Carry Out Action Msg.** function. - -### To automatically create the suggested supply orders - -1. Select the **Accept Action Message** check box on all planning lines with a warning of type Exception. -2. Choose the **Carry Out Action Message** action. -3. In the **Carry Out Action Msg.-Plan.** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Production Order | Purchase Order | Transfer Order | - |------------------|--------------------|--------------------| - | Firm Planned | Make Purch. Orders | Make Trans. Orders | - - -4. Choose the **OK** button to automatically create all the suggested supply orders. -5. Close the empty **Planning Worksheet** window. - - This completes the initial calculation, analysis, and creation of a supply plan for demand at location BLUE in the first week of February. In the following section, another customer orders ten touring bikes, and Eduardo must replan. - -## Creating a Net Change Plan - The next day, before any supply orders are started or posted, a new sales order arrives from Libros S.A. for ten touring bikes to be shipped on 02-12-2014. Eduardo is notified of the new demand, and he proceeds to replan in order to adjust the current supply plan. Eduardo uses the Net Change Plan function to calculate only the changes that are made to demand or supply since the last planning run. In addition, he expands the planning period to 02-14-2014 to include the new sales demand on 02-12-2014. - - The planning system calculates the best way to cover the demand for these two identical products, such as to consolidate some purchase and production orders, reschedule other orders, and create new orders where it is required. - -### To create the new sales demand and replan accordingly - -1. Choose the **New** action. -2. In the **Sales Order** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Sell-to Customer Name | Shipment Date | Item No. | Location | Quantity | - |-----------------------|---------------|----------|----------|----------| - | Libros S.A. | 02-12-2014 | 1001 | BLUE | 10 | - - -3. Accept the availability warning and choose the **Yes** button to record the demand quantity. -4. Proceed to replan to adjust the current supply plan. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planning Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -6. Choose the **Calculate Net Change Plan** action. -7. In the **Calculate Plan - Plan. Wksh.** window, fill in the fields as described in the following table. - - - | Calculate Plan | Starting Date | Ending Date | Show results: | Limit totals to | - |-----------------------------------------|---------------|-------------|---------------|------------------------| - | **MPS** = Yes

**MRP** = Yes | 01-23-2014 | 02-14-2014 | 1001..1300 | Location Filter = BLUE | - - -8. Choose the **OK** button to start the planning run. - - A total of 14 planning lines are created. Notice in the first planning line that the **Action Message** field contains **New**, the **Quantity** field 10, and the **Due Date** field 02-12-14. This new line for the top parent item, 1001, Touring Bike, is created because the item uses a reordering policy of **Order**, which means that it must be supplied in a one-to-one relationship to its demand, the sales order of ten pieces. - - The next two planning lines are the production orders for touring bike wheels. Each existing order of five, in the **Original Quantity** field, is increased to 15, in the **Quantity** field. Both production orders have unchanged due dates, as indicated in the **Action Message** field that contains **Change Qty.** This is also the case for the planning line for item 1300, except its order multiple of 10.00 rounds the tracked demand for 15 pieces up to the 20. - - All other planning lines have an action message of **Resched. & Chg. Qty.**. This means that apart from being increased in quantity, the due dates are moved in relation to the supply plan to include the extra quantity in the available production time (capacity). Purchased components are rescheduled and increased to supply the production orders. Proceed to analyze the new plan. - -## Analyzing the Changed Planning Result - Because all lot-for-lot-planned items within the filter, 1100 to 1300, have a rescheduling period of two weeks, their existing supply orders are all modified to meet the new demand, which occurs within the specified two weeks. - - Several planning lines are simply multiplied by three to provide 15 touring bikes instead of 5, and the due dates are moved back in time to provide the increased quantities by the shipment date of the sales order to the Cannon Group. For these planning lines, all quantities can be tracked. The remaining planning lines are increased by ten pieces in addition to moving their due dates. For these planning lines, a part of the quantities are untracked due to different planning parameters. Proceed to view some of these order tracking entries. - -### To view order tracking entries for item 1250 - -1. Select the planning line for item 1250, and then choose the **Order Tracking** action. - - The seven lines in the **Order Tracking** window show that five and ten pieces are tracked through the back wheel to the touring bikes on the two sales orders respectively. - - The last five pieces are untracked. Proceed to analyze. - -2. Choose the **Untracked Quantity** field. - - The **Untracked Planning Elements** window shows that item 1250 uses a planning parameter, Order Multiple, of 10.00. Therefore, the planning line is for 20 pieces in total to round the actual need up to the nearest number divisible by 10. The last five pieces are an untracked quantity to satisfy the planning parameter. - -3. Close all windows except the **Planning Worksheet** window. - -### To view an existing order - -1. In the planning line for item 1250, choose the **Ref. Order No.** field. -2. In the **Firm Planned Prod. Order** window for the Back Hub. The existing order for ten pieces, which you created in the first planning run, opens. -3. Close the firm planned production order. - - This completes the walkthrough of how the planning system is used to automatically detect demand, calculate the appropriate supply orders according to demand and planning parameters, and then automatically create different types of supply orders with the appropriate dates and quantities. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Manually](walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually.md) - [Design Details: Supply Planning](design-details-supply-planning.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually.md deleted file mode 100644 index 82a52069..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-planning-supplies-manually.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,229 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Planning Supplies Manually - description: This walkthrough demonstrates the process of planning supply orders to fulfill new demand. You can initiate supply planning at fixed intervals, for example, every morning or every Monday, or when you are notified by sales or production, depending on the type of demand. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Manually -This walkthrough demonstrates the process of planning supply orders to fulfill new demand. You can initiate supply planning at fixed intervals, for example, every morning or every Monday, or when you are notified by sales or production, depending on the type of demand. In this walkthrough you will use the **Order Planning** window, a simple supply planning tool that is based on manual decision-making instead of parameter-based automatic planning. - -## About This Walkthrough - This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Planning a purchase order for manufacturing components. -- Planning a transfer order to fulfill sales demand. -- Planning a production order for a multilevel item. - -## Roles - This walkthrough demonstrates tasks performed by the following user roles: - -- Production Planner -- Purchasing Agent -- Sales Order Processor - -## Prerequisites - Before you begin this walkthrough, you must install the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. The following modifications must be made to the database: - -- Delete all existing sales orders for bicycles. -- Create one sales order for 10 bicycles at BLUE location. -- Delete all planned and firm planned production orders. Do not delete started orders with entries that are already posted. - - As a rule, use the suggested data in this walkthrough because this data has the necessary records. - -## Story - Eduardo, the Production Planner of a small manufacturing company, is about to plan production and purchase orders to fulfill new sales demand. - - Because the products have few BOM levels and the flow of orders is relatively low, Eduardo uses the **Order Planning** window to manually create supply orders, one product level at a time. - - In a more complex manufacturing environment, the planning worksheet is used to plan supply based on item parameters such as rescheduling period, safety lead time, reorder point, and batch calculations of consolidated demand from all product levels. - -## Setting Up the Sample Data - The standard CRONUS demonstration company currently has lots of unplanned demand. During the different planning tasks in this walkthrough, you will have to deviate from the realistic business flow by ignoring demand with close due dates and instead use demand with later due dates. - -## Using the Order Planning Window - The **Order Planning** window can be accessed from several different locations on the **Departments** menu in the navigation pane: - -- Manufacturing, Planning -- Sales & Marketing, Order Processing -- Purchase, Planning -- In addition, you can open this window for a specific production order by choosing **Planning** on the **Navigate** tab in the **Order** group. - -### To use the Order Planning window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Order Planning**, and then choose the related link. - - When the **Order Planning** window first opens, a plan must be calculated to show the new demand since it was last calculated. - -2. Choose the **Calculate Plan** action. - - The planning system analyzes any new demand that has been introduced, such as new sales, changed sales, or production orders. - - Based on total availability, the quantity needed for each demand line is calculated. This calculation is performed order-by-order. This means that the order which includes the demand line with the earliest due date or shipment date will be calculated first. After that, additional demand lines will be calculated in the same order, regardless of the due date or shipment date. - -3. Be sure that the **Order Planning** window is maximized and that column fields are resized to show all the default field names. - - When the calculation is completed, the window displays all unfulfilled demand as collapsed order header lines sorted by earliest demand date. - - Notice that CRONUS has several orders with unfulfilled demand. Each bold planning line represents an order, sales order, or production order, including at least one order line with insufficient availability. - -4. In the **Show Demand As** field, select the **All Demand** filter. - - With the **Demand Type** field, you can choose which order types that you want to display. - - Orders that do not have availability problems are not shown. If no orders exist when a plan is calculated, a message will display and no planning lines will appear. - -## Planning a Purchase Order to Fulfill Component Demand - In this procedure, you create a purchase order for needed manufacturing components. - -### To plan a purchase order to fulfill component need in production - -1. Expand the first line (choose the + symbol). -2. Choose the first demand line, with item **LSU-15**, and then choose the **Show Document** action. -3. Close the opened production order to return to the **Order Planning** window. -4. In the **Replenishment System** field, select **Purchase**. - - The default value is from the item card, or SKU card, but you can change it to one of the following options: - - - **Purchase** – To create a purchase order. - - **Transfer** – To create a transfer order. - - **Prod. Order** – To create a production order. - -5. In the **Supply From** field, select one of the following options according to the selected replenishment system: - - - **Vendor** – For purchases - - **Location** – For transfers - - If the field is not filled in, an error message will display when you try to create the supply orders. - - > [!NOTE] - > If the components have a default vendor number set up on the item cards, the lines will be preset. - -6. Choose the **Supply From** field. -7. In the **Item Vendor Catalogue** window, choose the **New** action, and then select vendor **30000**. -8. Choose the **OK** button to return to the **Order Planning** window. -9. Copy vendor **30000** to the other lines for loudspeaker components on this production order. - - You are now ready to create a purchase order. - -10. Choose the **Make Orders** action. The **Make Supply Orders** window opens. -11. On the **Order Planning** FastTab, in the **Make Orders for** field, choose the **Active Order** option. -12. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Create Purchase Order** field, choose the **Make Purch. Order** option. -13. Choose the **OK** button to create purchase orders for all the components of the order. - - The purchase orders are now created and saved as the last orders in the list of purchase orders. - -## Planning a Transfer Order to Fulfill Sales Demand - In this procedure, you will plan for demand from a sales order. Demand lines represent sales lines and not component lines, as in production demand. - -### To plan a transfer order to fulfill sales demand - -1. Move the pointer to the planning line for order **2008**. -2. Expand the line and move the pointer to the demand line. - - Sales order **2008** is for ten loudspeakers, item **LS-120**, ordered by John Haddock Insurance Co. - - The item’s defined replenishment system and default vendor will display. - - > [!NOTE] - > At the bottom of the window, there are four information fields. In the **Earliest Date Available** field, the ten pieces that are needed will be available, on an inbound supply order, nine days later than the current due date. If this is too late for the customer, the **Available for Transfer** field shows 13 pieces of the item at another location. You will want to plan for this stock. - -3. Choose the **Available for Transfer** field to open the **Get Alternative Supply** window. -4. Choose the **OK** button to book the ten items that are available. - - > [!NOTE] - > In the demand line, the suggested purchase has been exchanged with a transfer from GREEN location. The **Make Orders** function creates a transfer order from GREEN to the demanded location. The **Substitutes Exists** field works in the same way. - -5. Choose the **Make Orders** action. The **Make Supply Orders** window opens. -6. On the **Order Planning** FastTab, in the **Make Orders for** field, choose the **The Active Order** option. -7. On the **Options** FastTab, in the **Create Transfer Order** field, select the **Make Trans. Orders** option. -8. Choose the **OK** button to create the transfer order to supply the sales order. - - The transfer order is now created and saved in the list as the last order in the list of open transfer orders. - -## Planning a Multilevel Production Order to Fulfill Sales Demand - In this procedure, you will plan to fulfill sales demand for a produced item with multiple product levels, each creating dependent production demand. - -### To plan multilevel production to fulfill sales demand - -1. Select the planning line with sales demand for order **1001**, created earlier as prerequisite data. - - This demand is a sales line, but the item has a defined replenishment system of **Prod. Order**. Proceed to add an extra bell to the component need of each bicycle. - -2. Choose the **Components** action to open the **Planning Components** window. -3. On the line with the Bell item, change the **Quantity per** field from **1** to **2**. -4. In the **Order Planning** window, consider your planning alternatives. In this case, you have no alternative means of supply, no transfer, substitute, or later delivery. You must create the suggested supply order, a production order. -5. Choose the **Make Orders** action to create the production order. - - In the **Order Planning** window, notice that the planning line for sales order **1001** no longer exists and that the initial sales demand has been covered. - -6. Close the **Order Planning** window. - - Now, you could choose to stay in this view and complete all the planning tasks. Instead, you will now take on the Production Planner role by going to the production order that you just created and access the **Order Planning** window. - - As a production planner you now must plan a specific production order. - -### To plan a specific production order - -1. Open the production order **101001**, for ten bicycles, that you just created by using the **Make Orders** function. -2. Open the **Prod. Order Components** window to check that the extra bell is reflected on the production order. -3. Choose the **Planning** action. - - The **Order Planning** window opens in a view that is always filtered on the specific production demand. Sales demand is not displayed. You must calculate a plan before you can see any additional demand. - -4. Choose the **Calculate Plan** action. - - Notice that four new production orders appear as unplanned production demand derived from order **101001**. The new lines represent new production demand from the subassemblies that must be created to produce the order. - -5. Choose the **Expand All** action to get an overview of all the production demand for the production orders. - - To provide additional information about the demand lines, you may want to add the **Demand Quantity** and **Demand Qty. Available** fields to your view. - - Now you must supply ten of each component. - - Note that four of the demand lines have replenishment system Prod. Order. These four subassemblies represent the second product level of the bicycle. - - The default replenishment settings are already filled in and you can proceed to make orders. - -6. Choose the **Make Orders** action. - - Before you choose the **OK** button, notice the text on the **Order Planning** FastTab. This text is important because you know that the bicycle has several produced components, subassemblies, in its product structure that might be in demand when you create this production order. - -7. In the **Make Supply Order** window, in the **Make Orders for** field, choose the **All Lines** option, and then choose the **OK** button to create production orders for the second product level of the order. - - Note that the top-level production demand for production order 101001 no longer exists. This means that the initial production demand for subassemblies has been planned for. - - In the **Order Planning** window, you calculate a plan again in order to plan the bicycle structure. - -8. Choose the **Calculate Plan** action to recalculate the plan as instructed by the embedded Help text. - - The two new lines represent additional production demand derived from the subassemblies planned in the previous steps. It is suggested that you make two production orders to supply the wheel hubs, one for 10 front hubs and one for 10 back hubs. - -9. Choose the **Expand All** action to get an overview of all the demand for the two production orders. - - The suggested supply plan indicates that a total of four purchase orders will be created for the components. You decide to make the proposed orders. - -10. Choose the **Make Orders** action. -11. In the **Make Orders for** field, select the **All Lines** option, and then choose the **OK** button. Check if additional demand exists for the production of the parent item, the bicycle, which is being sold on sales order 1001. -12. Choose the **Calculate Plan** action. - - The message indicates that all required items are now supplied. Verify the firm planned production orders that are created. - -13. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Firm Planned Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. - - In the **Firm Planned Prod. Orders** window review how start times and end times of individual orders are scheduled according to the product structure. The lowest-level components are produced first. Therefore, you must plan multilevel orders as demonstrated in this planning workflow. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Automatically](walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-advanced-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-advanced-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index aea44fe7..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-advanced-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,157 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Receiving and Putting Away in Advanced Warehouse Configurations - description: In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the inbound processes for receiving and putting away can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Receiving and Putting Away in Advanced Warehouse Configurations -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the inbound processes for receiving and putting away can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - -|Method|Inbound process|Bins|Receipts|Put-aways|Complexity level (See [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md))| -|------------|---------------------|----------|--------------|----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -|A|Post receipt and put-away from the order line|X|||2| -|B|Post receipt and put-away from an inventory put-away document|||X|3| -|C|Post receipt and put-away from a warehouse receipt document||X||4/5/6| -|D|Post receipt from a warehouse receipt document and post put-away from a warehouse put-away document||X|X|4/5/6| - -For more information, see [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md). - -The following walkthrough demonstrates method D in the previous table. - -## About This Walkthrough -In advanced warehouse configurations where your location is set up to require receiving processing in addition to put-away processing, you use the **Warehouse Receipt** window to record and post the receipt of items on multiple inbound orders. When the warehouse receipt is posted, one or more warehouse put-away documents are created to instruct warehouse workers to take the received item and place them in designated places according to bin setup or in other bins. The specific placement of the items is recorded when the warehouse put-away is registered. The inbound source document can be a purchase order, sales return order, inbound transfer order, or assembly or production order with output that is ready to be put away. If the receipt is created from an inbound order, more than one inbound source document can be retrieved for the receipt. By using this method you can register many items arriving from different inbound orders with one receipt. - -This walkthrough demonstrates the following tasks. - -- Setting up WHITE location for receiving and putting away. -- Creating and releasing two purchase orders for full warehouse handling. -- Creating and posting a warehouse receipt document for multiple purchase order lines from specific vendors. -- Registering a warehouse put-away for the received items. - -## Roles -This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user roles: - -- Warehouse Manager -- Purchasing Agent -- Receiving Staff -- Warehouse Worker - -## Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- CRONUS International Ltd. installed. -- To make yourself a warehouse employee at WHITE location by following these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **User ID** field, and select your own user account in the **Users** window. -3. In the **Location Code** field, enter WHITE. -4. Select the **Default** field. - -## Story -Ellen, the warehouse manager at CRONUS International Ltd., creates two purchase orders for accessory items from vendors 10000 and 20000 to be delivered to WHITE warehouse. When the deliveries arrive at the warehouse, Sammy, who is responsible for receiving items from vendors 10000 and 20000, uses a filter to create receipt lines for purchase orders arriving from the two vendors. Sammy posts the items as received into inventory in one warehouse receipt and makes the items available for sale or other demand. John, the warehouse worker, takes the items from the receiving bin and puts them away. He puts all units away in their default bins, except 40 out of 100 received hinges that he puts away in the assembly department by splitting the put-away line. When John registers the put-away, the bin contents are updated and the items are made available for picking from the warehouse. - -## Reviewing the WHITE Location Setup -The setup of the **Location Card** window defines the company’s warehouse flows. - -### To review the location setup - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the WHITE location card. -3. Note on the **Warehouse** FastTab that the **Directed Put-away and Pick** check box is selected. - - This means that the location is set up for the highest complexity level, reflected by the fact that all warehouse handling check boxes on the FastTab are selected. - -4. Note on the **Bins** FastTab that bins are specified in the **Receipt Bin Code** and the **Shipment Bin Code** fields. - -This means that when you create a warehouse receipt, this bin code is copied to the header of the warehouse receipt document by default and to the lines of the resulting warehouse put-aways. - -## Creating the Purchase Orders -Purchase orders are the most common type of inbound source document. - -### To create the purchase orders - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Create a purchase order for vendor 10000 on the work date (January 23) with the following purchase order lines. - - |Item|Location code|Quantity| - |----------|-------------------|--------------| - |70200|WHITE|100 PCS| - |70201|WHITE|50 PCS| - - Proceed to notify the warehouse that the purchase order is ready for warehouse handling when the delivery arrives. - -4. Choose the **Release** action. - - Proceed to create the second purchase order. - -5. Choose the **New** action. -6. Create a purchase order for vendor 20000 on the work date with the following purchase order lines. - - |Item|Location code|Quantity| - |----------|-------------------|--------------| - |70100|WHITE|10 CAN| - |70101|WHITE|12 CAN| - - Choose the **Release** action. - - The deliveries of items from vendors 10000 and 20000 have arrived at WHITE warehouse, and Sammy starts to process the purchase receipts. - -## Receiving the Items -In the **Warehouse Receipt** window, you can manage multiple inbound orders for source documents, such as a purchase order. - -### To receive the items -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Location Code** field, enter WHITE. -4. Choose the **Use Filters to Get Src. Docs.** action. -5. In the **Code** field, enter **ACCESSORY**. -6. In the **Description** field, enter **Vendors 10000 and 20000**. -7. Choose the **Modify** action. -8. On the **Purchase** FastTab, in the **Buy-from Vendor No. Filter** field, enter **10000|20000**. -9. Choose the **Run** action. The warehouse receipt is filled with four lines representing purchase order lines for the specified vendors. The **Qty. to Receive** field is filled because you did not select the **Do not Fill Qty. to Handle** check box in the **Filters to Get Source Docs.** window. -10. Optionally, if you want to use a filter as described earlier in this section, choose the **Get Source Document** action, and then select purchase orders from the vendors in question. -11. Choose the **Post Receipt** action, and then choose the **Yes** button. - - Positive item ledger entries are created reflecting the posted purchase receipts of accessories from vendors 10000 and 20000, and the items are ready to be put away in the warehouse from the receiving bin. - -## Putting the Items Away -In the **Warehouse Put-away** window, you can manage put-aways for a specific warehouse receipt document covering multiple source documents. Like all warehouse activity documents, each item on the warehouse put-away is represented by a Take line and a Place line. In the following procedure, the bin code on the Take lines is the default receiving bin at WHITE location, W-08-0001. - -### To put the items away -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Put-Aways**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the only warehouse put-away document in the list, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit**. - - The warehouse put-away document opens with a total of eight Take or Place lines for the four purchase order lines. - - The warehouse worker is told that 40 hinges are needed in the assembly department, and he proceeds to split the single Place line to specify a second Place line for bin W-02-0001 in the assembly department where he places that part of the received hinges. - -3. Select the second line in the **Warehouse Put-away** window, the Place line for item 70200. -4. In the **Qty. to Handle** field, change the value from 100 to 60. -5. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Functions**, and then choose **Split Line**. A new line is inserted for item 70200 with 40 in **Qty. to Handle** field. -6. In the **Bin Code** field, enter W-02-0001. The **Zone Code** field is automatically filled. - - Proceed to register the put-away. - -7. Choose the **Register Put-Away** action, and then choose the **Yes** button. - - The received accessories are now put-away in the items’ default bins, and 40 hinges are placed in the assembly department. The received items are now available for picking to internal demand, such as assembly orders, or to external demand, such as sales shipments. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Put Items Away with Warehouse Put-aways](warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways.md) - [How to: Move Items in advanced warehouse configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md) - [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md) - [Walkthrough: Receiving and Putting Away in Basic Warehouse Configurations](walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing.md) - [Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index d7e92646..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-receiving-and-putting-away-in-basic-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Receiving and Putting Away in Basic Warehouse Configurations - description: In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the inbound processes for receiving and putting away can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Receiving and Putting Away in Basic Warehouse Configurations -In [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], the inbound processes for receiving and putting away can be performed in four ways using different functionalities depending on the warehouse complexity level. - -|Method|Inbound process|Bins|Receipts|Put-aways|Complexity level (See [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md))| -|------------|---------------------|----------|--------------|----------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| -|A|Post receipt and put-away from the order line|X|||2| -|B|Post receipt and put-away from an inventory put-away document|||X|3| -|C|Post receipt and put-away from a warehouse receipt document||X||4/5/6| -|D|Post receipt from a warehouse receipt document and post put-away from a warehouse put-away document||X|X|4/5/6| - -For more information, see [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md). - -The following walkthrough demonstrates method B in the previous table. - -## About This Walkthrough -In basic warehouse configurations where your location is set up to require put-away processing but not receive processing, you use the **Inventory Put-away** window to record and post put-away and receipt information for your inbound source documents. The inbound source document can be a purchase order, sales return order, inbound transfer order, or production order with output that is ready to be put away. - -> [!NOTE] -> Even though the settings are called **Require Pick** and **Require Put-away**, you can still post receipts and shipments directly from the source business documents at locations where you select these check boxes. - -This walkthrough demonstrates the following tasks. - -- Setting up SILVER location for inventory put aways. -- Setting up SILVER location for bin handling. -- Defining a default bin for item LS-81. (LS-75 is already set up in CRONUS.) -- Creating a purchase order for vendor 10000 for 40 loudspeakers. -- Verifying that the put-away bins are preset by setup. -- Releasing the purchase order for warehouse handling. -- Creating an inventory put-away based on a released source document. -- Verifying that the put-away bins are inherited from the purchase order. -- Registering the warehouse movement into the warehouse and at the same time posting the purchase receipt for the source purchase order. - -## Roles -This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user roles: - -- Warehouse Manager -- Purchasing Agent -- Warehouse Worker - -## Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- CRONUS International Ltd. installed. -- To make yourself a warehouse employee at SILVER location by following these steps: - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Employees**, and then choose the related link. - 2. Choose the **User ID** field, and select your own user account in the **Users** window. - 3. In the **Location Code** field, enter SILVER. - 4. Select the **Default** field. - -## Story -Ellen, the warehouse manager at CRONUS International Ltd., creates a purchase order for 10 units of item LS-75 and 30 units of item LS-81 from vendor 10000 to be delivered to SILVER Warehouse. When the delivery arrives at the warehouse, John, the warehouse worker, puts the items away in default bins defined for the items. When John posts the put-away, the items are posted as received into inventory and available for sale or other demand. - -## Setting up the Location - The setup of the **Location Card** window defines the company’s warehouse flows. - -### To set up the location - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the SILVER location card. -3. Select the **Require Put-away** check box. - - Proceed to set up a default bin for the two item numbers to control where they are put away. - -4. Choose the **Bins** action. -5. Select the first row, for bin S-01-0001, and then choose the **Contents** action. - - Notice in the **Bin Content** window that item LS-75 is already set up as content in bin S-01-0001. - -6. Choose the **New** action. -7. Select the **Fixed** and the **Default** fields. -8. In the **Item No.** field, enter LS-81. - -## Creating the Purchase Order -Purchase orders are the most common type of inbound source document. - -### To create the purchase order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Create a purchase order for vendor 10000 on the work date (January 23) with the following purchase order lines. - - |Item|Location code|Bin code|Quantity| - |----------|-------------------|--------------|--------------| - |LS_75|SILVER|S-01-0001|10| - |LS-81|SILVER|S-01-0001|30| - - > [!NOTE] - > The bin code is entered automatically according to the setup that you performed in the “Setting up the Location” section. - - Proceed to notify the warehouse that the purchase order is ready for warehouse handling when the delivery arrives. - -4. Choose the **Release** action. - - The delivery of loudspeakers from vendor 10000 has arrived at SILVER warehouse, and John proceeds to put them away. - -## Receiving and Putting the Items Away -In the **Inventory Put-away** window, you can manage all inbound warehouse activities for a specific source document, such as a purchase order. - -### To receive and put the items away - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Put-aways**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Select the **Source Document** field, and then select **Purchase Order**. -4. Select the **Source No.** field, select the line for the purchase from vendor 10000, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Alternatively, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Get Source Document**, and then select the purchase order. - -5. Choose the **Autofill Qty. to Handle** action. - - Alternatively, in the **Qty. to Handle** field, enter 10 and 30 respectively on the two inventory put-away lines. - -6. Choose the **Post** action, select the **Receive** action, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The 40 loudspeakers are now registered as put away in bin S-01-0001, and a positive item ledger entry is created reflecting the posted purchase receipt. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Put Items Away with Inventory Put-aways](warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md) - [How to: Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operations Areas](warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md) - [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md) - [How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md) - [How to: Move Items Ad Hoc in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md) - [Design Details: Inbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-inbound-warehouse-flow.md) - [Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-selling-assembling-and-shipping-kits.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-selling-assembling-and-shipping-kits.md deleted file mode 100644 index 72d301cf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-selling-assembling-and-shipping-kits.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,441 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Selling, Assembling, and Shipping Kits - description: To support just-in-time inventory and the ability to customize products to customer requests, assembly orders can be automatically created and linked as soon as the sales order line is created. The link between the sales demand and the assembly supply enables sales order processors to customize the assembly item and promise delivery dates according to component availability. In addition, assembly consumption and output are posted automatically with the shipment of the linked sales order. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Selling, Assembling, and Shipping Kits -To support just-in-time inventory and the ability to customize products to customer requests, assembly orders can be automatically created and linked as soon as the sales order line is created. The link between the sales demand and the assembly supply enables sales order processors to customize the assembly item and promise delivery dates according to component availability. In addition, assembly consumption and output are posted automatically with the shipment of the linked sales order. - -Special functionality exists to govern the shipping of assemble-to-order quantities, both in basic and in advanced warehouse configurations. When workers in charge of assembly finish assembling parts or all of the assemble-to-order quantity, they record it in the **Qty. to Ship** field on the warehouse shipment line, in advanced configurations, and then choose **Post Shipment**. The result is that the corresponding assembly output is posted, including the related component consumption, and a sales shipment for the quantity is posted for the linked sales order. This walkthrough illustrates the advanced warehouse process. - -In basic warehouse configurations, when an assemble-to-order quantity is ready to be shipped, the warehouse worker in charge posts an inventory pick for the sales order lines. This creates an inventory movement for the components, posts the assembly output, and the sales order shipment. For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section in Inventory Pick. - -## About This Walkthrough -This walkthrough demonstrates the following tasks: - -### Setting up Assembly Items -Assembly items are characterized by their replenishment system and the assembly BOM. The item’s assembly policy can be either assemble-to-order (ATO) or assemble-to-stock (ATS). This section covers the following tasks: - -- Setting the appropriate replenishment system and assembly policy on a new assembly item card. -- Creating an assembly BOM that lists the assembly components and the resource that go into the assembly item. - -### Selling Customized Assembly Items -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] provides the flexibility to enter both an inventory quantity and an assemble-to-order quantity on one sales order line. This section covers the following tasks: - -- Creating a pure ATO sales order line where the full quantity is unavailable and must be assembled before shipment. -- Customizing ATO items. -- Recalculating the unit price of a customized assembly item. -- Creating a mixed sales order line where parts of the sales quantity is provided from inventory and the remaining part must be assembled before shipment. -- Understanding ATO availability warnings. - -### Planning for Assembly Items -Assembly demand and supply are handled by the planning system, just like for purchase, transfer, and production. This section covers the following tasks: - -- Running a regenerative plan for items with sales demand for assembled supply. -- Generating an assembly order to fulfill a sales line quantity by the demanded shipment date. - -### Assembling Items -Assembly orders function in a similar way as production orders, expect the consumption and output is recorded and posted directly from the order. When the items are assembled to inventory, the assembly worker has full access to all header and line fields. When the items are assembled to an order where the quantity and date are promised to the customer, then certain fields on the assembly order are not editable. In that case, the assembly posting is performed from the warehouse shipment for the linked sales order. This section covers the following tasks. - -- Recording and posting assembly consumption and output to inventory. -- Accessing a warehouse shipment line from an ATO assembly order to record assembly work. -- Accessing an ATO assembly order from a warehouse shipment line to review the automatically entered data. - -### Shipping Assembly Items, from Stock and Assembled to Order -Special functionality exists to govern the shipping of assemble-to-order quantities. This section covers the following tasks: - -- Creating a warehouse pick for inventory assembly items and for assembly components to be assembled before shipment. -- Registering warehouse picks for assembly components and then for assembly items. -- Accessing an assembly order from a warehouse shipment to review picked or consumed components. -- Shipping assemble-to-order quantities. -- Shipping inventory assembly items. - -## Roles -This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user roles: - -- Sales Order Processor -- Planner -- Assembly Worker -- Picker -- Shipping Responsible - -## Prerequisites -Before you can perform the tasks in the walkthrough, you must do the following: - -- Install [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. -- Make yourself a warehouse employee at WHITE location by following these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **User ID** field, and select your own user account in the **Users** window. -3. In the **Location Code** field, enter WHITE. -4. Select the **Default** field. - -Prepare WHITE location for assembly processing by following these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the location card for WHITE location. -3. On the **Bins** FastTab, enter **W-10-0001** in the **To-Assembly Bin Code** field. - - By entering this non-pick bin code, all assembly order lines are ready to receive their components in the bin. - -4. In the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field, enter **W-01-0001**. - - By entering this pick bin code, finished assembly items will be output to the bin. - -Remove the default lead time for internal processes by following these steps: - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Manufacturing Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Manufacturing Setup** window, on the **Planning** FastTab, remove the value in the **Default Safety Lead Time** field. - -Create inventory for assembly components by following the "Prepare Sample Data" section in this walkthrough. - -## Story -On January 23, Susan, the sales order processor takes an order from The Device Shop for three units of Kit B, which is an ATO item. All three units are customized and must contain the strong graphics card and an extra RAM block. The disc drives are upgraded to DWD because the CD drives are unavailable. Susan knows that the units can be assembled immediately, so she leaves the suggested shipment date of January 23. - -At the same time, the customer orders fifteen units of Kit A with a special request that five units be customized to contain the strong graphics card. Although Kit A is typically an assemble-to-stock item, the order processor combines the sales line quantities to sell ten units from stock and assemble five customized units to the order. The ten units of Kit A are unavailable and must first be supplied to inventory by an assembly order according to the item’s assembly policy. Susan learns from the assembly department that Kit A units cannot be completed in the current week. She sets the shipment date of the second sales order line, for the mixed ATO and inventory quantity, to January 27 and informs the customer that the 15 units of Kit A will be shipped four days later than the three units of Kit B. To signal to the shipping department that this sales order requires assembly processing, Susan creates the warehouse shipment document from the sales order. - -Eduardo, the planner, runs the planning worksheet and generates an assembly order for ten standard units of Kit A with an internal due date of January 27. - -Sammy, who is responsible for shipping, gets three warehouse shipment lines for the sales order: One line for the three pure ATO units, one line for the five ATO units on the mixed sales order line, and one line for the ten ATS units on the mixed sale order line. He creates a warehouse pick document for all the assembly components that are needed to assemble the total of eight ATO units on the warehouse shipment document. - -John, the picker, retrieves components for all the ATO quantities on the warehouse shipment document and brings them to the assembly area. He enters the quantity to handle and registers the warehouse pick. - -Linda assembles the three ATO units of Kit B. The components are already picked, and she does not record output and consumption quantities or post the order, because both of these actions are performed automatically through the related warehouse shipment lines. - -Sammy records the assembled quantity on the warehouse shipment line and posts the shipment of the three units of Kit B. The first line on the sales order is updated as shipped. The linked assembly order remains open until the sales order is fully invoiced. The two warehouse shipment lines, one ATO and one ATS, for Kit A with due dates on January 27 remain open. - -On January 27, Linda processes two assembly orders for Kit A. The first order is the ATO order for five units, which she processes differently than the ATO order for Kit B that she processed on January 23. On this order, she is authorized to access the warehouse shipment line herself to record the completed assembly work. The needed components are ready in the assembly department, as they were picked together with components for Kit B. - -The second assembly order is the ATS order for ten units that were created by the planning system. On this ATS order, Linda performs all involved actions from the assembly order. She creates a warehouse pick document for the assembly components that are needed to assemble the ten units. When the PCs are assembled, Linda posts the assembly order and thereby signals that the items are available in inventory and can be picked for shipment. - -Sammy creates a warehouse pick document for any quantities that remain before the warehouse shipment can be posted. A pick document is created for the ten units of Kit A that have just finished. The components needed to assemble the five units of Kit A to order where picked on January 23. - -John brings the ten units of Kit A from the warehouse to the specified shipping area, records the quantity to handle, and then registers the pick. - -Sammy packs the ten ATS units with the five ATO units that Linda assembled earlier in the day. He fills in the quantity to ship on both lines and then posts the last shipment for The Device Shop. The related assembly order for five units of Kit A is automatically posted. The second line on the sales order is updated as shipped. Two linked assembly order remains open until the sales order is invoiced and closed. - -When the sales order is later posted as fully invoiced, the sales order and the linked assembly orders are removed. - -## Setting Up the Sample Data - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Item Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Batch Name** field, and then select the default journal. -3. Create positive inventory adjustments at WHITE location on the work date, January 23, by entering the following information. - - |**Item No.**|**Zone Code**|**Bin Code**|**Quantity**| - |-----------------------------------|---------------------------------------|--------------------------------------|------------------------------------| - |80001|PICK|W-01-0001|20| - |80005|PICK|W-01-0001|20| - |80011|PICK|W-01-0001|20| - |80014|PICK|W-01-0001|20| - |80203|PICK|W-01-0001|20| - |80209|PICK|W-01-0001|20| - -4. On the **Home** tab, in the **Registering** group, choose **Register**, and then choose the **Yes** button. - - Next, synchronize the new warehouse entries with inventory. - -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Journals**, and then choose the related link. The **Item Journal** window opens. -6. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Calculate Whse. Adjustment**. -7. In the **Calculate Whse. Adjustment** window, choose the **OK** button. -8. In the **Item Journal** window, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Post**, and then choose the **Yes** button. - -### Creating the Assembly Items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **New**. -3. Create the first assembly item based on the following information. - - |Field|Value| - |---------------------------------|-----------| - |**Description**|Kit A – Basic PC| - |**Base Unit of Measure**|PCS| - |**Item Category Code**|Misc.| - |**Replenishment System**|Assembly| - |**Assembly Policy**|Assemble-to-Stock| - |**Reordering Policy**|Lot-for-Lot| - - > [!NOTE] - > Kit A is typically supplied by assembly to stock and therefore has a reordering policy to make it part of general supply planning. - -4. On the **Navigate** tab, in the **Assembly/Production** group, choose **Assembly**, and then choose **Assembly BOM**. -5. Define an assembly BOM for Kit A with the following information. - - |**Type**|**No.**|**Quantity per**| - |-------------------------------|------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |Item|80001|1| - |Item|80011|1| - |Item|80209|1| - |Resource|Linda|1| - -6. Create the second assembly item based on the following information. - - |Field|Value| - |---------------------------------|-----------| - |**Description**|Kit B – Pro PC| - |**Base Unit of Measure**|PCS| - |**Item Category Code**|Misc.| - |**Replenishment System**|Assembly| - |**Assembly Policy**|Assemble-to-Order| - - > [!NOTE] - > Kit B is usually supplied by assembly to order and therefore does not have a reordering policy, because it should not be part of general supply planning. - -7. On the **Navigate** tab, in the **Assembly/Production** group, choose **Assembly**, and then choose **Assembly BOM**. -8. Define an assembly BOM for Kit B with the following information. - - |**Type**|**No.**|**Quantity per**| - |-------------------------------|------------------------------|---------------------------------------| - |Item|80005|1| - |Item|80014|1| - |Item|80210|1| - |Resource|Linda|1| - -### Selling the Assembly Items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **New**. -3. Create two sales order lines for customer 62000, The Device Shop, on the work date with the following information. - - |**Type**|**Description**|**Quantity**|Qty. to Assemble to Order|Shipment Date| - |--------------|---------------------|------------------|-------------------------------|-------------------| - |Item|Kit B – Pro PC|3|3|January 23| - |Item|Kit A – Basic PC|15|5|January 27| - - > [!NOTE] - > The following availability issue exists for the sales order line for Kit B: - > - > - Assembly component 80210 is not available. This means that the three specified units of Kit B cannot be assembled, indicated by **0** in the **Able to Assemble** field in the **Assembly Availability** window. - > - > The following availability issue exists for the sales order line for Kit A: - > - > - The ten units of Kit A are not available. This indicates to the planning system that the quantity must be assembled to inventory. - - Next, customize the sales order. - -4. Select the sales order line for three units of Kit B. -5. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Line**, choose **Assemble to Order**, and then choose **Assemble-to-Order Lines**. -6. In the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window, on the assembly order line for item 80014, enter **2** in the **Quantity per** field. -7. On the assembly order line for item 80210, choose the **No.** field, and then select item 80209 instead. -8. Create a new assembly order line with the following information. - - - | Type | No. | Quantity per | - |------|-------|--------------| - | Item | 80203 | 1 | - - -9. Close the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window. - - Next, update the unit price of Kit B according to the customization that you just performed. Notice the current value in the **Unit Price Excl. VAT** field. - -10. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Line**, choose **Assemble to Order**, and then choose **Roll Up Price**. -11. Choose the **Yes** button. Notice the increased value in the **Unit Price Excl. VAT** field. -12. Select the sales order line for 15 units of Kit A. -13. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Line**, choose **Assemble to Order**, and then choose **Assemble-to-Order Lines**. -14. In the **Assemble-to-Order Lines** window, create a new assembly order line with the following information. - - |Type|No.|Quantity per| - |----------|---------|------------------| - |Item|80203|1| - - Next, change the shipment date of the second sales order line according to the assembly schedule. - -15. On the sales order line for 15 units of Kit A, enter **01-27-2014** in the **Shipment Date** field. -16. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Release** group, choose **Release**. -17. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Warehouse** group, choose **Create Whse. Shipment**. -18. Close the sales order. - -### Planning for the Unavailable ATS Items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Planning Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Action** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Calculate Regenerative Plan**. -3. In the **Calculate Plan** window, set the following filters. - - |Starting Date|Ending Date|No.| - |-------------------|-----------------|---------| - |01-23-2014|01-27-2014|Kit A – Basic PC| - -4. Choose the **OK** button. - - A new planning line is created for the needed assembly order of ten units, due on January 27. It needs no changes, so now you can create the order. - -5. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Carry Out Action Message**. -6. In the **Carry Out Action Msg.** window, choose the **Assembly Order** field, and then select **Make Assembly Orders**. -7. Choose the **OK** button. - -### Assembling and Shipping the First ATO Quantity - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Shipment**, and then choose the related link. - - > [!NOTE] - > In this section, the person who is responsible for shipping is in charge of recording the completed ATO assembly work on the warehouse shipment line. This workflow may occur in environments where the assembly work is performed by the person who is responsible for shipping or by assembly workers in the shipping area. - > - > In this section, actions on the assembly order are performed indirectly from the warehouse shipment line. For more information about how to process an assembly order directly, see the “Assemble Items to Inventory” section in this walkthrough. - -2. Open the most recent warehouse shipment that is created at WHITE location. - - Notice the three warehouse shipment lines: One line for the ATO quantity of Kit B, due on January 23. One line for the ATO quantity of Kit A, due on January 27. One line for the inventory quantity of Kit A, due on January 27. - - The **Assemble to Order** field specifies the assembly method. - - Next, create a pick document for all the ATO assembly components that are needed on the warehouse shipment. - -3. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Create Pick**, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Next, perform the picker’s task. - -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Picks**, and then choose the related link. -5. Open the warehouse pick document that you created in step 3 in this section. - - Notice the value in the **Source Document** field and that all the pick lines are for assembly components. - - Next.register the pick without changing the default information. - -6. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Autofill Qty. to Handle**. -7. On the **Home** tab, in the **Registering** group, choose **Register Pick**. - - Return to performing the shipping tasks. - -8. Reopen the **Warehouse Shipment** window. - - Notice that the **Qty. Picked** field is still empty on all lines. This is because you still have not picked the items to be shipped, but only the components needed to assemble the ATO quantities. - - Proceed to review the related assembly order. - -9. Select the shipment line for three units of Kit B. -10. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose **Line**, and then choose **Assemble to Order**. The **Assembly Order** window opens. - - Notice that several fields on the assembly order are unavailable because the order is linked to a sales order. - - Notice on the assembly order lines that the **Qty. Picked** field is filled. This is due to the pick that you registered in step 7 in this section. - -11. In the **Quantity to Assemble** field, try to enter any value lower than **3**. - - Read the error message explaining why this field can only be filled through the **Qty. to Ship** field on the related shipment. - - The **Quantity to Assemble** field is editable is to support situations where you want to partially ship an inventory quantity instead of assembling more units to the order. For more information, see the “Combination Scenarios” section in [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -12. Close the **Assembly Order** window to return to the **Warehouse Shipment** window. -13. On the shipment line for three units of Kit B, in the **Qty. to Ship** field, enter **3**. -14. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Posting** group, choose **Post Shipment**, and then select **Ship**. - - Along with this warehouse shipment posting, the full consumption and output quantities of the related assembly order are posted, and the **Remaining Quantity** field is empty. The sales order line for Kit B is updated to show that the three units are shipped. - - Warehouse activities to fulfill the first sales order line by January 23 are completed. Next, fulfill the sales order lines that are shipping on January 27 - -### Assembling and Recording the Second ATO Quantity - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assembly Orders**, and then choose the related link. - - Notice that the ATO order for shipped units of Kit B is still in the list, although the **Remaining Quantity** is empty. This is because the linked sales order is still not fully invoiced. - - > [!NOTE] - > In this section, the assembly worker is responsible for recording the completed ATO assembly work on the warehouse shipment line. This workflow may occur in environments where the assembly work is performed in a separate assembly department and assembly workers are authorized to change the warehouse shipment line. - -2. Open the ATO assembly order for five units of Kit A. - - Notice that the **Quantity to Assemble** and the **Quantity to Consume** fields are empty because no work is recorded yet. - - Notice on the assembly order lines that the **Qty. Picked** field is filled. This is due to the pick that was registered on January 23. - - Next, record that the assembly order is completed. - -3. On the **Navigate** tab, in the **Warehouse** group, choose **Asm.-to-Order Whse. Shpt. Line**. -4. In the **Asm.-to-Order Whse. Shpt. Line** window, in the **Qty. to Ship** field, enter **5**, and then close the window. - - Notice in the **Assembly Order** window that the **Quantity to Assemble** and the **Quantity to Consume** fields are now filled with the output and consumption quantities that will be posted with the shipment. - -5. Close the **Assembly Order** window. - -### Assembling the ATS Quantity - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assembly Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the assembly order for ten units of Kit A. - - Notice that the **Quantity to Assemble** field is filled with the expected quantity. - - Next, create a pick document to retrieve the needed components. - -3. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Release** group, choose **Release**. -4. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Warehouse** group, choose **Create Whse. Pick**, and choose the **OK** button. - - Next, perform the picker’s task. - -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Picks**, and then choose the related link. -6. Open the warehouse pick document that you created in step 4 in this section. - - Proceed to register the pick without changing the default information. - -7. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Autofill Qty. to Handle**. -8. On the **Home** tab, in the **Registering** group, choose **Register Pick**. - - Return to the assembly order to perform the last assembly task. - -9. In the **Assembly Order**, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Posting** group, choose **Post**, and then choose the **Yes** button. - - Notice that the assembly order is removed from the list of open orders. - -### Shipping the Remaining Items, Partly from Stock and Partly Assembled to the Order - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Shipment**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the most recent warehouse shipment that is created at WHITE location. - - Notice on the line for ten units of Kit A that the **Qty. to Ship** and **Qty. Picked** field are empty. - - Next, pick any remaining items. - -3. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Create Pick**, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Next, perform the picker’s last task for this warehouse shipment. - -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Picks**, and then choose the related link. -5. Open the warehouse pick document that you created in step 3 in this section. - - Notice that this pick document is for assembly item, not for assembly components. - - Next, register the pick without changing the default information. - -6. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Functions** group, choose **Autofill Qty. to Handle**. -7. On the **Home** tab, in the **Registering** group, choose **Register Pick**, and then choose the **Yes** button. - - Return to the warehouse shipment to perform the last task. - -8. Reopen the **Warehouse Shipment** window. - - In the **Warehouse Shipment** window, on the line for ten units of Kit A, notice that the **Qty. to Ship** and **Qty. Picked** fields now contain **10**. - -9. On the **Actions** tab, in the **Posting** group, choose **Post Shipment**, and the choose **Ship**. - - The warehouse shipment document is removed, which indicates that the involved warehouse activities are completed. Next, verify that the sales order has been processed. - -10. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link -11. Open the sales order for The Device Shop. - - Notice that the **Quantity Shipped** field contains the full quantity on both lines. - - When the The Device Shop pays for their receipt of the 18 PCs from CRONUS, the sales order and its linked assembly orders are removed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md) - [How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md) - [How to: Pick Items for Warehouse Shipment](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md) - [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md) - [How to: Assemble Items](assembly-how-to-assemble-items.md) - [Design Details: Assembly Order Posting](design-details-assembly-order-posting.md) - [Design Details: Internal Warehouse Flows](design-details-internal-warehouse-flows.md) - [Design Details: Outbound Warehouse Flow](design-details-outbound-warehouse-flow.md) - [Walkthrough: Planning Supplies Automatically](walkthrough-planning-supplies-automatically.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3516d8a3..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-invoicing-sales-prepayments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments - description: Prepayments are payments that are invoiced and posted to a sales or purchase prepayment order before final invoicing. You may require a deposit before you manufacture items to order, or you may require payment before you ship items to a customer. You use the prepayments functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to invoice and collect deposits that are required from customers or remit deposits to vendors. Thus, you can make sure that all payments are posted against an invoice. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Setting Up and Invoicing Sales Prepayments -Prepayments are payments that are invoiced and posted to a sales or purchase prepayment order before final invoicing. You may require a deposit before you manufacture items to order, or you may require payment before you ship items to a customer. You use the prepayments functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to invoice and collect deposits that are required from customers or remit deposits to vendors. Thus, you can make sure that all payments are posted against an invoice. - - Prepayment requirements can be defined for a customer or vendor for all items or selected items. After you complete the required setup, you can generate prepayment invoices from sales and purchase orders for the calculated prepayment amount. You can change the default amounts on the invoice as needed. For example, you can send additional prepayment invoices if additional items are added to the order. - -## About This Walkthrough - This walkthrough will take you through the following scenarios: - -- Setting up prepayments -- Creating an order that requires a prepayment -- Creating a prepayment invoice -- Correcting the prepayment requirements on an order -- Applying prepayments to an order -- Invoicing the final amount on an order with prepayment - -### Roles - This walkthrough includes tasks for the following roles: - -- Accounting Manager (Phyllis) -- Order Processor (Susan) -- Accounts Receivable Administrator (Arnie) - -## Story - Phyllis is an accounting manager. She makes decisions about which customers are required to pay a deposit before items are manufactured or shipped. Phyllis sets up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to calculate prepayments automatically. - - Susan is a sales order processor. When a customer calls to place an order, she enters the order into the system while the customer is on the telephone. This way, she can verify prices and payment terms with the customer immediately, and she can make adjustments to the order while she negotiates with the customer. - - Arnie works in the Accounts Receivable department, where he posts invoices and payments. - - In this scenario, Phyllis sets up prepayment requirements for the customer Selangorian, based on their credit history, and gives Susan instructions for how to handle their orders. - - When the customer calls, Susan negotiates with the customer until they reach an agreement. She can then choose to calculate the prepayment in several different ways. - - After Susan sends the prepayment invoice, the customer orders an extra item. Susan updates the order and creates a second prepayment invoice. - - Arnie registers the customer's payment and applies it to the invoices, and then sends the final invoice. - -## Setting Up Prepayments - Phyllis sets up the system to handle prepayments for customers. - -- Phyllis decides to have the same number series for prepayments as the one used for sales invoicing. -- Phyllis sets the program to check if prepayments are required before final invoicing on an order. -- Phyllis sets up default values for a required prepayment percentage for particular items and customers. - -The following procedures describe how to complete Phyllis' tasks: - -#### To set up number series for prepayments -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales & Receivables Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, expand the **Numbering** FastTab. -3. Verify that the number series for posted prepayment invoices in the **Posted Prepmt. Inv. Nos.** field is the same as for posted sales invoices (**Posted Invoice Nos.**) and the number series for posted prepayment credit memos (**Posted Prepmt. Cr. Memo Nos.**) is the same as for posted credit memos (**Posted Credit Memo Nos.**). - -#### To block shipments for unpaid prepayment -1. In the **Sales & Receivables Setup** window, on the **General** FastTab, select the **Check Prepayment when Posting** check box. - - Now you cannot ship or invoice an order that has an unpaid prepayment amount. - -By default, Phyllis requires customer 20000 to be invoiced for a 30% down payment on all orders. Therefore, she will enter a default prepayment percentage on the customer card. - -Phyllis requires all customers to be invoiced a 20% deposit for item 1100. Customer 20000 has a poor payment history. Therefore, she requires a 40% prepayment from customer 20000 for item 1100. The following procedure illustrates how to set up default prepayment percentages. - -#### To assign default prepayment percentages to customers and items -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Customers**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for customer 20000 (Selangorian). -3. In the **Prepayment %** field, type **30**. -4. Choose the **OK** button to close the customer card. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -6. Open the card for customer 1100. -7. Choose the **Prepayment Percentages** action. -8. Fill in two lines in the **Sales Prepayment Percentages** window as follows. - - |**Sales Type**|**Sales Code**|**Item No.**|**Prepayment %**| - |--------------------|--------------------|------------------|----------------------| - |**Customer**|**20000**|**1100**|**40**| - |**All Customers**||**1100**|**20**| - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > Depending on your country/region, you must also specify a tax group code on the **Invoicing** FastTab for items 1000 and 1100. - -9. Close all windows. - -#### To specify an account for sales prepayments in general posting setup -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Posting Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line where the **Gen. Bus. Posting Group** field is set to **EXPORT**, and the **Gen. Prod. Posting Group** field is set to **RETAIL**, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **General Posting Setup Card** window, in the **Sales Prepayments Account** field, specify the relevant account. -4. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Creating an Order that Requires a Prepayment - In the following scenario, Susan, the order processor, creates an order when talking to a customer. The items that the customer orders require a prepayment, and the customer has made some late payments in the past. Therefore, Susan has been instructed to require a fixed amount of 2,000 as a prepayment on the order. - -The customer requests to be able to pay 35%, to which Susan can agree. Therefore, she changes the order. - -Susan creates the prepayment invoice and sends it to the customer. - -#### To create a sales order with a prepayment -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Sell-to Customer No.** field, select **20000**. -5. Accept the overdue balance warning that is displayed. -6. Fill in two sales lines with the following information. - - |**Type**|**No.**|**Quantity**| - |--------------|-------------|------------------| - |**Item**|**1000**|**1**| - |**Item**|**1100**|**1**| - - By default, the prepayment fields on the sales line are hidden, so you must display them. - -7. Verify that the **Prepayment %** field on the line with item **1000** contains **30**. The default value was taken from the sales header, which was populated from the customer card. - - The **Prepayment %** field on the line with item **1100** contains **40**. This is the percentage you entered in the **Sales Prepayment Percentages** window for item **1100** and customer **20000**. - - For more information, see [How to: Set Up Prepayments](finance-set-up-prepayments.md). -8. Choose the **Statistics** action. -9. On the **Prepayment** FastTab, the **Prepmt. Line Amount Excl. VAT** field contains **1,560**. If you create a prepayment invoice for the order now, then this is the amount that is displayed on the invoice. - - In this scenario, Susan has been instructed to suggest a total prepayment of 2000 for the order. - - > [!IMPORTANT] - > Depending on your country/region, the following step might not apply. -10. Change the amount in the **Prepmt. Line Amount Excl. VAT** field to **2000** and then close the window. -11. Verify the **Prepayment %** field on the sales lines, and you will see that it has been recalculated to **40.81625**. - - The recalculation includes all lines that have a prepayment percentage that is greater than 0. - - Now the customer asks if the prepayment percent can be set to 35%. Susan's supervisor approves the change. - -12. In the **Sales Order** window, in the **Prepayment %** field, enter **35**. -13. In the warning that appears, choose the **Yes** button. A rate of 35% will be applied as the payment percentage for the whole order. -14. Verify that the lines have been updated accordingly. - -## Creating a Prepayment Invoice -After entering the correct prepayment values on the order, Susan creates the prepayment invoice and sends it to the customer. - -#### To create a prepayment invoice - -1. In the **Sales Order** window, choose the **Post Prepayment Invoice** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> Susan would select **Post and Print Prepmt. Invoice** and mail the invoice to the customer. - -## Creating an Additional Prepayment Invoice -The following day, the customer calls Susan and makes changes to the order. The customer wants two of item 1100. Susan reopens and updates the order, and then she creates a second prepayment invoice on the order and sends it to the customer. - -#### To create an additional prepayment invoice - -1. In the **Sales Order** window, choose the **Reopen** action. -2. On the line for item **1100**, in the **Quantity** field, enter **2**. - - Scroll to see the prepayment fields. The **Prepayment Line Amount Excl. VAT** field now contains **630**, and the **Prepmt. Amt. Inv. Excl. VAT** field contains **315**. This shows that there is an additional prepayment amount that has not been invoiced yet. -3. To post an invoice for the additional prepayment amount, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Posting** group, choose **Prepayment**, and then choose **Post Prepayment Invoice**. - -## Applying the Prepayments -The customer pays the prepayments amount and Arnie, who works in the accounts department, registers the payment and applies it to the prepayment invoices. - -#### To apply a payment to the prepayment invoices - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Cash Receipt Journals**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in a journal line with the following information. - - |Field name|Enter| - |----------------|-----------| - |**Document Type**|**Payment**| - |**Account Type**|**Customer**| - |**Account No.**|**20000**| -3. Choose the **Apply Entries** action. -4. In the **Apply Customer Entries** window, select the first prepayment invoice, and then choose the **Set Applies-to ID** action. -5. Repeat the previous step for the second prepayment. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - - The amount field has now been filled in with the sum of the two prepayment invoices. - -7. Post the journal. - -## Invoicing the Remaining Amount -Now Arnie has been informed that the items on the order have been shipped and that the order is ready for invoicing. Arnie creates the invoice for the order. - -#### To invoice the remaining amount -1. Open the sales order. -2. Choose the **Ship and Invoice** action, and then choose the **OK** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> Normally, the shipping department would have already posted the shipment. - -Arnie can view the history to verify that the sales invoice was created as intended. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Sales Invoices**, and then choose the related link. - -## Next Steps -This walkthrough has taken you through steps to set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to handle prepayments. You have set up default prepayment percentages on customers and items, and you have also used different methods to calculate the prepayments on an order. You have tried to assign one total prepayment amount to the order, and you have had the prepayment amount calculated as a percentage of the whole order. - -You have also posted a prepayment invoice, created a second prepayment invoice when the order has changed, and posted the final invoice for the remaining amount. - -The prepayments functionality in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] makes it easy to set up and enforce prepayment rules for customers and items, and it enables you to post every payment against an invoice. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Invoicing Prepayments](finance-invoice-prepayments.md) -[Finance](finance.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md deleted file mode 100644 index ab7180b5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-setting-up-and-using-a-purchase-approval-workflow.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow - description: You can automate the process of approving new or changed records, such as documents, journal lines, and customer cards, by creating workflows with steps for the approvals in question. Before you create approval workflows, you must set up an approver and substitute approver for each approval user. You can also set approvers’ amount limits to define which sales and purchase records they are qualified to approve. Approval requests and other notifications can be sent as email or internal note. For each approval user setup, you can also set up when they receive notifications. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Setting Up and Using a Purchase Approval Workflow -You can automate the process of approving new or changed records, such as documents, journal lines, and customer cards, by creating workflows with steps for the approvals in question. Before you create approval workflows, you must set up an approver and substitute approver for each approval user. You can also set approvers’ amount limits to define which sales and purchase records they are qualified to approve. Approval requests and other notifications can be sent as email or internal note. For each approval user setup, you can also set up when they receive notifications. - - You can set up and use workflows that connect business-process tasks performed by different users. System tasks, such as automatic posting, can be included as steps in workflows, preceded or followed by user tasks. Requesting and granting approval to create new records are typical workflow steps. For more information, see [Workflow](across-workflow.md). - -## About This Walkthrough -This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Setting up approval users (incl. setting up a user in Windows and in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]). -- Setting up notifications for approval users. -- Modifying and enabling an approval workflow. -- Starting the job queue that dispatches notifications. -- Requesting approval of a purchase order, as Alicia. -- Receiving a notification and then approving the request, as Sean. - -## Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need the CRONUS International Ltd. demonstration company. - -## Story -Sean is a super user at CRONUS on his own computer. - -He creates two approval users. One is Alicia who represents a purchasing agent. The other is himself representing Alicia’s approver. Sean then gives himself unlimited purchase approval rights and specifies that he will receive notifications by internal note as soon as a relevant event occurs. Last, Sean creates the required approval workflow as a copy of the existing Purchase Order Approval Workflow workflow template, leaves all existing event conditions and response options unchanged, and then enables the workflow. - -To test the approval workflow, Sean first logs into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as Alicia, and then requests approval of a purchase order. Sean then logs in as himself, sees the note on his Role Center, follows the link to the approval request for the purchase order, and approves the request. - -## Setting Up the Sample Data -You must create a new user on the local computer and in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] representing Alicia who you will later select as an approval user. Your own user account will represent Sean. - -### To add Alicia as a user on the local computer - -1. Choose **Start**, in the **Search programs and files** box, enter **Edit local users and groups**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the **Users** folder. -3. On the **Actions** tab, choose **New User**. -4. In the **User Name** field, enter Alicia. -5. In the **Password** and **Confirm Password** fields, enter a valid password. -6. Deselect the **User must change password at next logon** check box. -7. Close the **Local Users and Groups** window. - -### To add Alicia as a user in [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Users**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Windows Users** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. -3. In the **User Card** window, in the **User Name** field, enter Alicia. -4. In the **Windows User Name** field, choose the AssistEdit button. -5. In the **Select User or Group**, window, in the **Enter the object name to select** field, enter Alicia, and then choose the **Check Names** button. -6. When [COMPUTER NAME]ALICIA appears in the field, choose the **OK** button. -7. On the **User Permission Sets** FastTab, in the **Permission Set** field, select **SUPER**. -8. In the **Company** field, select **CRONUS International Ltd.** -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Setting Up Approval Users -Using the Windows user that you have just created, set Alicia up as an approval user whose approver is yourself. Set up your approval rights and specify how and when you are notified of approval requests. - -### To set up yourself and Alicia as approval users -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Approval User Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Approval User Setup** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **New** group, choose **New**. - - > [!NOTE] - > You must set up an approver before you can set up users who require that approver's approval. Therefore, you must set up yourself before you set up Alicia. - -3. Set up the two approval users by filling the fields as described in the following table. - - |User ID|Approver ID|Unlimited Purchase Approval| - |-------------|-----------------|---------------------------------| - |[COMPUTER NAME][YOU]||Selected| - |[COMPUTER NAME]ALICIA|[COMPUTER NAME][YOU]|| - -## Setting Up Notifications -Specify how and when you are notified of approval requests. - -### To set up how and when you are notified -1. In the **Approval User Setup** window, select the line for yourself, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Notification Setup**. -2. In the **Notification Setup** window, in the **Notification Type** field, enter **Approval**. -3. Choose the **Notification Template Code** field, and then choose the **Advanced** button. -4. In the **Notification Templates** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit List**. -5. On the line for the APPROVAL template, in the **Notification Method** field, enter **Note**. -6. Choose the **OK** button. -7. In the **Notification Setup** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Notification Schedule**. -8. In the **Notification Schedule** window, in the **Occurence** field, choose **Instantly**. -9. Choose the **OK** button. - -## Creating the Approval Workflow - Create the purchase order approval workflow by copying the steps from the Purchase Order Approval Workflow workflow template. Leave the existing workflow steps unchanged, and then enable the workflow. - -### To create and enable a purchase order approval workflow -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Workflows**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Workflows** window, on the **Actions** tab, in the **General** group, choose **Create Workflow from Template**. -3. On the **Actions** tab, in the **General** group, choose **Create Workflow from Template**. The **Workflow Templates** window opens. -4. Select the workflow template named Purchase Order Approval Workflow, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The **Workflow** window opens for a new workflow containing all the information of the selected template. The value in the **Code** field is extended with “-01” to indicate that this is the first workflow that is created from the Purchase Order Approval Workflow workflow template. -5. On the header of the **Workflow** window, select the **Enabled** check box. - -## Starting a Notification Job Queue -Make sure that a job queue in your installation is set up to handle workflow notifications. - -### To start the NOTIFY job queue -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Job Queues**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Job Queues** window, select the line for the NOTIFY job queue, and then, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Start Job Queue**. - -## Using the Approval Workflow -Use the new Purchase Order Approval Workflow workflow by first logging into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as Alicia to request approval of a purchase order. Then log in as yourself, view the note on the Role Center, follow the link to the approval request, and then approve the request. - -To log into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as different users, you will use the **Run as different user** function. - -### To log into [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as Alicia - -1. For the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] web client, on the browser launch button for the web page, press Shift + Right-Click, and then choose **Run as different user**. - - For the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] Windows client, on the launch button for the program, press Shift + Right-Click, and then choose **Run as different user**. - -2. In the **Windows Security** window, enter [COMPUTER NAME]ALICIA and the required password. - -### To request approval of a purchase order, as Alicia - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the line for open purchase order 104001, and then on the **Home** tab, in the **Manage** group, choose **Edit**. -3. In the **Purchase Order** window, on the **Actions** tab, in the **Approval** group, choose **Send Approval Request**. - - Notice that the value in the **Status** field has changed to **Pending Approval**. - -4. Close [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]. - -### To approve the purchase order, as Sean - -1. Open [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] as you generally do. The program will open with you as the user. -2. On the Role Center, in the **My Notifications** window, look for a new note from Alicia. - - > [!NOTE] - > Although the notification recurrence is set to **Instantly**, the note will arrive approximately one minute after Alicia sent the approval request. This is due to the default recurrence frequency of the Job Queue feature. - -3. When the note appears in the **My Notifications** window, choose the **Approval Entry: XX, XX** value in the **Page** field. The **Requests to Approve** window opens with Alicia’s request for the purchase order highlighted. -4. In the **Requests to Approve** window, on the **Home** tab, in the **Process** group, choose **Approve**. - - The value in the **Status** field on Alicia’s purchase order changes to **Released**. - -You have now set up and tested a simple approval workflow based on the first two steps of the Purchase Order Approval Workflow workflow. You can easily extend this workflow to automatically post Alicia’s purchase order when Sean approves it. To do this, you must enable the Purchase Invoice Workflow workflow, in which the response to a released purchase invoice is to post it. First you must change the event condition on the first workflow step from (purchase) **Invoice** to **Order**. - -The generic version [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] includes a number of workflow templates for scenarios that are supported by the application code. Most of these are for approval workflows. For more information, see Workflow Templates. - -You define variations of workflows by filling fields on workflow lines from fixed lists of event and response values representing scenarios that are supported by the application code. For more information, see [How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md). - -If a business scenario requires a workflow event or response that is not supported, a Microsoft partner must implement them by customizing the application code. For more information, see [Walkthrough: Implementing New Workflow Events and Responses](/dynamics-nav/Walkthrough--Implementing-New-Workflow-Events-and-Responses) in the developer and IT-pro help. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Set Up Approval Users](across-how-to-set-up-approval-users.md) -[Setting Up Workflow Notifications](across-setting-up-workflow-notifications.md) -[How to: Create Workflows](across-how-to-create-workflows.md) -[How to: Use Approval Workflows](across-how-use-approval-workflows.md) -[Workflow](across-workflow.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md b/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md deleted file mode 100644 index 53e87b9f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/walkthrough-tracing-serial-lot-numbers.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,294 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Walkthrough - Tracing Serial-Lot Numbers - description: When product defects occur, the errors must be identified and affected items must be prevented from leaving the company. If defective items have already been shipped, you must trace who received them and, if you need to, recall the items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Walkthrough: Tracing Serial-Lot Numbers -When product defects occur, the errors must be identified and affected items must be prevented from leaving the company. If defective items have already been shipped, you must trace who received them and, if you need to, recall the items. - -The first task of defects management is to investigate where the defective items came from and where they were used. This investigation is based on historic data and is made easier by searching through item tracking entries using the **Item Tracing** window. - -The second task of defects management is to determine whether the traced items are planned for in open documents, such as non-posted sales orders or consumption journals. This work is performed in the **Navigate** window. You can use the Navigate feature to search all kinds of database records. - -## About This Walkthrough -This walkthrough demonstrates how to identify which items are defective, which vendor supplied them, and where they are used so that those orders can be stopped or recalled. - -This walkthrough illustrates the following tasks: - -- Tracing usage to origin. -- Tracing origin to usage. -- Searching for all current records which hold the traced serial/lot number. - -## Roles -This walkthrough demonstrates tasks that are performed by the following user roles: - -- Quality Controller -- Warehouse Manager -- Order Processor -- Purchasing Agent - -## Prerequisites -To complete this walkthrough, you will need: - -- The [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] company. -- To create new items and several business transactions by following the "Prepare Sample Data" section, later in this walkthrough. - -## Story -Ricardo, the quality controller, is acting on a sales return of item 1002, Racing Bike. The customer, Selangorian Ltd., complained that the frame has cracked welding seams. Quality control engineers have confirmed that the racing frame of the returned bike is defective. The quality controller must now determine: - -- Which lot of racing frames was faulty. -- On which purchase order the faulty lot was received. - -From the sales department, the quality controller knows that the returned racing bike, item 1002, had the serial number SN1. By using this basic information, he must determine where the finished racing bike was last used, and then he must trace backward to the earliest origin to establish which lot number the faulty component, the racing frame, came from. - -The results of this first item tracking task identify which racing frames were defective and which vendor supplied them. Afterward, but in the same overall tracking process, the quality controller must find all the sold racing bikes that contain racing frames from the faulty lot so that those orders can be stopped or recalled. Lastly, the quality controller must find any open documents where the faulty lot is used so that no additional transactions are made. - -The first two defects-management tasks are performed in the **Item Tracing** window. The last task is performed in the **Navigate** window in integration with the **Item Tracing** window. - -## Prepare Sample Data -You must create the following new items: - -- 2000, Racing Frame: lot-specific tracking, component of 1002 -- 1002, Racing Bike: serial number-specific tracking - -Then you must create various purchase, production, and sales transactions with the two items. - -### To create the items - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **No.** field, enter **2000**, and then proceed to fill in the following fields. - - |Description|Base Unit of Measure|Gen. Prod. Posting Group|VAT Prod. Posting Group|Inventory Posting Group|Item Tracking Code| - |-----------------|--------------------------|------------------------------|-----------------------------|-----------------------------|------------------------| - |Racing Frame|PCS|RAW MAT|VAT25|RAW MAT|LOTALL| - - > [!NOTE] - > To enter the base unit of measure, choose the **New** button, and then select **PSC** in the **Item Units of Measure** window. - -4. All other fields have acceptable default data or do not have to be filled in. -5. Choose the **OK** button to create the first new item card, 2000. -6. Choose **New**. -7. In the **No.** field, enter **1002**, and then proceed to fill in the following fields. - - |Description|Base Unit of Measure|Gen. Prod. Posting Group|VAT Prod. Posting Group|Inventory Posting Group|Replenishment System|Item Tracking Code| - |-----------------|--------------------------|------------------------------|-----------------------------|-----------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------| - |Racing Bike|PCS|RETAIL|VAT25|FINISHED|Prod. Order|SNALL| - - > [!NOTE] - > To enter the base unit of measure, choose the **New** button, and then select **PSC** in the **Item Units of Measure** window. - - Next, define the item's manufacturing setup. - -9. On the **Replenishment** FastTab, in the **Routing No.** field, enter **1000**. -10. Choose the **Production BOM No.** field, and then choose **Advanced**. -11. In the **Production BOM List** window, choose the first line, **1000**, and then choose the **Edit** action. -12. In the **Production BOM** window, change the value in the **Status** field to **Under Development**. -13. Go to an empty line, enter **2000** in the **No.** field, and then enter **1** in the **Quantity Per** field. -14. Change the value in the **Status** field back to **Certified**. -15. Choose the **OK** button to insert the production BOM on the item card and close the **Production BOM** window. - - Next, purchase racing frames from Custom Metals Incorporated. - -### To purchase components -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Create a purchase order for vendor, Custom Metals Incorporated, by filling in the following line fields. - - |Item|Quantity|Lot No.| - |----------|--------------|-------------| - |2000|10|LOT1| - -4. To enter the lot number, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -5. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, fill in the **Lot No.** and **Quantity (Base)** fields, and then close the window. -6. In the **Vendor Invoice No.** field, enter any value. -7. Choose the **Post** action, select the **Receive and Invoice** option, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Next, purchase racing frames from Coolwood Technologies. -8. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -9. Choose the **New** action. -10. Create a purchase order for vendor, Coolwood Technologies, by filling in the following line fields. - - |Item|Quantity|Lot No.| - |----------|--------------|-------------| - |2000|11|LOT2| - -11. To enter the lot number, on the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Line** group, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -12. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, fill in the **Lot No.** and **Quantity (Base)** fields, and then close the window. -13. In the **Vendor Invoice No.** field, enter any value. -14. Choose the **Post** action, select the **Receive and Invoice** option, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Next, produce two racing bikes, SN1 and SN2. - -### To produce end items -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Released Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** group. -3. Create a new released production order by filling in the following fields. - - |Source No.|Quantity|Serial No.| - |-|-|-| - |1002|2|SN1| - |1002|2|SN2| - -4. Choose the **Refresh Production Order** action, and then choose the **OK** button to fill the line. -5. To enter the serial numbers, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -6. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, fill in the **Serial No.** and **Quantity (Base)** fields, and then close the window. - - Next, post consumption of racing frames from LOT1. -7. In the **Released Production Order** window, choose the **Production Journal** action. -8. In the **Production Journal** window, select the consumption line for item 2000, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -9. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, choose the **Lot No.** field, choose **LOT1**, and then choose the **OK** button. -10. Leave all other defaults in the **Production Journal** window, and then choose the **Post** action. - - Next, produce two more racing bikes, SN3 and SN4. - -11. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Released Prod. Orders**, and then choose the related link. -12. Choose the **New** action. -13. Create a new released production order by filling in the following fields on the header. - - |Source No.|Quantity|Serial No.| - |----------------|--------------|----------------| - |1002|2|SN3| - |1002|2|SN4| - -14. Choose the **Refresh Production Order** action to fill the line. -15. To enter the serial numbers, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action, and then the numbers on two lines in the **Serial No.** field in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. - - Next, post more consumption of racing frames from LOT1. -16. In the **Released Production Order** window, choose the **Production Journal** action. -17. In the **Production Journal** window, select the consumption line for item 2000, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action. -18. In the **Item Tracking Lines** window, choose the **Lot No.** field, choose **LOT1**, and then choose the **OK** button. -19. Leave all other defaults in the **Production Journal** window, and then choose the **Post** action. - - You have produced four racing bikes, SN1 to SN4, and consumed four of the ten racing frames from LOT1, two frames in each production order. - -20. Close the production journal and the production orders. - - Next, sell racing bikes. First sell the racing bike with SN1 to Selangorian Ltd.. - -### To sell the end items -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action, and then, create a sales order by filling in the following fields. - - |Customer|Item|Qty.|Serial No.| - |--------------|----------|----------|----------------| - |Selangorian Ltd.|1002|1|SN1| - -3. To enter the serial number, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action, and then the number in the **Serial No.** field in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. -4. Choose the **Post** action, select the **Ship and Invoice** option, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Next, sell the racing bike with SN2 to The Cannon Group PLC. - -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -6. Choose the **New** action, and then, create a sales order by filling in the following fields. - - |Customer|Item|Qty.|Serial No.| - |--------------|----------|----------|----------------| - |Cannon Group PLC.|1002|1|SN2| - -7. To enter the serial number, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action, and then the number in the **Serial No.** field in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. -8. Choose the **Post** action, select the **Ship and Invoice** option, and then choose the **OK** button. - - Finally, sell some racing frames separately. The Cannon Group PLC. also orders four separate racing frames for their own assembly line. - -9. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -10. Choose the **New** action, and then, create a sales order by filling in the following fields. - - |Customer|Item|Qty.|Serial No.| - |--------------|----------|----------|----------------| - |Cannon Group PLC.|2000|5|LOT1| - -11. To enter the serial number, on the **Lines** FastTab, in the **Line** group, choose the **Item Tracking Lines** action, and then the number in the **Serial No.** field in the **Item Tracking Lines** window. - - > [!NOTE] - > Do not post the last sales order for five racing frames. - - This completes the preparation of data to demonstrate the Item Tracing and Navigate features. - -## Tracing from Usage to Origin - From the sales department, the quality controller knows that the returned racing bike, item 1002, has the serial number SN1. By using this basic information, he can determine where the finished racing bike was last used, in this case, on the sales shipment to Selangorian Ltd.. Then, the quality controller must trace backward to the earliest origin to establish which lot number the faulty racing frame came from and which vendor supplied it. - -### To determine which lot included the faulty frame and who supplied it -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Tracing**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Item Tracing** window, enter **SN1** in the **Serial No. Filter** field, and then enter **1002** in the **Item Filter** field. -3. Keep the default setting of **Item-Tracked Only** in the **Show Components** field, and keep the default trace method of **Usage – Origin** in the **Trace Method**. -4. Choose the **Trace** action. - - Note that one sales shipment header matches the search criteria. Before you continue the trace, verify that the shipment is the one that shipped the faulty racing bike to Selangorian Ltd. - -5. Select the trace line, and then choose the **Show Document** action. - - Now continue to trace the origin of the sales shipment of the racing bike with number SN1. -6. Choose the + icon on the trace lines to gradually expand and trace backward in the chain of transactions that the sales shipment originates from. - - You can trace the following transaction history: - - - The first posted document backward in the chain of transactions is the output posting of SN1 from the first released production order. - - The next posted document backward after that is the consumption posting from the first released production order. Here the quality controller sees that a racing frame from LOT1 was used. - - The lowest posted document in this chain is the posted purchase receipt on which racing frames with LOT1 entered inventory. - - The quality controller has now established which lot of racing frames was faulty and he can search for the last trace line to see which vendor supplied them, namely Custom Metals Incorporated. - - > [!NOTE] - > Do not make any additional modifications to the trace result, as you will use it in the next section. - - This completes the first defects-management task using the **Item Tracing** window. The quality controller must now determine whether other posted documents have processed racing frames from LOT1. - -## Tracing from Origin to Usage - The quality controller has established that the faulty racing frames came from LOT1. He must now find any other racing bikes that contain racing frames from the faulty lot so that those bikes can be stopped or recalled. - - One way to prepare this trace task in the **Item Tracing** window is to manually enter LOT1 in the **Lot No. Filter** field and 2000 in the **Item Filter** field. However, this walkthrough will use the **Trace Opposite - from Line** function. - -### To find all usage of the faulty lot - -1. In the **Item Tracing** window, select the line of the purchase receipt, the last trace line, and then choose **Trace Opposite – from Line**. - - The trace result is now based on the filters of the trace line for the purchase receipt, LOT1 and item 2000, and the result is based on trace method **Origin - Usage**. - - To obtain an overview of all usage of item 2000 with LOT1, continue to expand all trace lines. - -2. Choose the **Expand All** action. - - The first four trace lines refer to the sales shipment to Selangorian Ltd., which is already resolved. The last line indicates that one more racing bike, SN2, was produced in the same released production order and then sold and shipped on another sales shipment. - - The quality controller immediately informs the sales department so that they can initiate a recall of the defective racing bike from the customer, Cannon Group PLC. - - At the same time, he can see from the last three trace lines that another two items, SN3 and SN4, have been produced based on racing frames from LOT1. He takes action to block these end items in inventory. - - This completes the second defects management task using the **Item Tracing** window for defects management. Since the **Item Tracing** window is based on posted entries only, the quality controller must continue to the **Navigate** window to make sure that LOT1 is not used in non-posted documents. - -## Finding All Records of a Serial/Lot Number - With the **Item Tracing** window, the quality controller learned that LOT1 contained the faulty racing frames, which vendor supplied them, and in which posted transaction they have been used. He must now determine whether LOT1 is in any open documents by integrating from the trace result to the **Navigate** window where he can perform a search through all database records. - -### To find all occurrences of LOT1 in non-posted records, such as open orders - -1. In the **Item Tracing** window, select the first trace line, the purchase receipt of LOT1. -2. Choose the **Navigate** action. - - The **Navigate** window is preset with search filters based on the trace result for LOT1. The quality controller recognizes most of the records as pertaining to documents already identified in the **Item Tracing** window. For example, the last Navigate line of type Production Order refers to the two released production orders that consumed racing frames from LOT1. - - However, the second Navigate line of type **Sales Line** is a non-posted document line, so the quality controller proceeds to investigate. - -3. To open the sales line record, select the second Navigate line, choose the **Show** action. Alternatively, choose the value in the **No. of Records** field. - - Here the quality controller sees one open sales line for the faulty racing frames. He immediately suggests to the sales department that this order be canceled and a new production order, based on good racing frames, be initiated. - - This completes the walkthrough of how to use the **Navigate** window for defects management in integration with the **Item Tracing** window. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Work with Serial and Lot Numbers](inventory-how-work-item-tracking.md) -[How to: Trace Item-Tracked Items](inventory-how-to-trace-item-tracked-items.md) -[Business Process Walkthroughs](walkthrough-business-process-walkthroughs.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick.md deleted file mode 100644 index ae25c78a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Automatic Breaking Bulk with Directed Put-away and Pick - description: For locations that use directed put-away and pick, you can break a larger unit of measure into smaller units of measure, when it creates warehouse instructions that fulfill the needs of source documents, production orders, or internal picks and put-aways. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enable Automatic Breaking Bulk with Directed Put-away and Pick -For locations that use directed put-away and pick, [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] can, in various situations, automatically breakbulk, that is, break a larger unit of measure into smaller units of measure, when it creates warehouse instructions that fulfill the needs of source documents, production orders, or internal picks and put-aways. To breakbulk sometimes also means gathering smaller units of measure, if necessary, to meet outbound requests by breaking the larger unit of measure on the source document or production order into the smaller units of measure that are available in the warehouse. - -## Breakbulking in Picks -If you want to store items in several different units of measure and allow them to be automatically combined as needed in the picking process, select the **Allow Breakbulk** field on the location card. - -To fulfill a task, the program automatically looks for an item in the same unit of measure. But if it cannot find this form of the item, and this field is selected, the program will suggest that you break a larger unit of measure into the unit of measure that is needed. - -If the system can only find smaller units of measure, it will suggest that you gather items to fulfill the quantity on the shipment or production order. In effect, it breaks the larger unit of measure on the source document into smaller units for picking. - -## Breakbulking in Put-aways -In the warehouse put-away, the program automatically suggests Place action lines in the put-away unit of measure, for example, pieces, even though the items arrive in a different unit of measure. - -## Breakbulking in Movements -The program also breakbulks automatically in replenishment movements, if the **Allow Breakbulk** field is selected on the **Option** FastTab in the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** window. - -You can view the results of the conversion process from one unit of measure to another as intermediate breakbulk lines in the put-away, pick, or movement instructions. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you select the **Set Breakbulk Filter** field on the warehouse instruction header, the program will hide the breakbulk lines whenever the larger unit of measure is going to be completely used. For example, if a pallet is 12 pieces and you are going to use all 12 pieces, the pick will then direct you to take 1 pallet and place 12 pieces. However, if you have to pick only 9 pieces, then the breakbulk lines will not be hidden, even if you have selected the **Breakbulk Filter** field, because you have to place the remaining three pieces somewhere in the warehouse. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you want your units of measure to perform optimally in the warehouse, also in connection with the breakbulk functionality, you should wherever possible try to: -> -> - Set up the base unit of measure for an item as the smallest unit of measure that you expect to handle in your warehouse processes. -> - Set up your alternative units of measure for the item as multiples of the base unit of measure. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-receive-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-receive-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index ee6b9a48..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-receive-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Receive Items - description: When items arrive at a warehouse that is set up for warehouse receipt processing, you must retrieve the lines of the released source document that triggered their receipt. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/31/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Receive Items -When items arrive at a warehouse that is not set up for warehouse receipt processing, you simply record the receipt on the related business document, such as a purchase order, a sales return order, or an inbound transfer order. - -When items arrive at a warehouse that is set up for warehouse receipt processing, you must retrieve the lines of the released source document that triggered their receipt. If you have bins, you can either accept the default bin that is filled in, or if the item has never been used before in the warehouse, fill in the bin where the item should be put away. You must then fill in the quantities of the items you have received, and post the receipt. - -## To receive items with a purchase order -The following describes how to receive items with a purchase order. The steps are similar for sales return orders and transfer orders. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open an existing purchase order, or create a new one. For more information, see [How to: Record Purchases](purchasing-how-record-purchases.md). -3. In the **Qty. to Receive** field, enter the received quantity. - - The value in the **Qty. Received** field is updated. If this is a partial receipt, then the value is lower than the value in the **Quantity** field. -4. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To receive items with a warehouse receipt -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. - - Fill in the fields on **General** FastTab. When you retrieve source document lines, some of the information is copied to each line. - - For warehouse configuration with directed put-away and pick, if the location has a default zone and bin for receipts, the **Zone Code** and **Bin Code** fields are filled in automatically, but you can change them as appropriate. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you wish to receive items with warehouse class codes other than the class code of the bin in the **Bin Code** field on the document header, you must delete the contents of the **Bin Code** field on the header before you retrieve source document lines for the items. -3. Choose the **Get Source Documents** action. The **Source Documents** window opens. - - From a new or an open warehouse receipt, you can use the **Filters to Get Source Docs.** window to retrieve the released source document lines that define which items to receive or ship. - - 1. Choose the **Use Filters to Get Src. Docs.** action. - 2. To set up a new filter, enter a descriptive code in the **Code** field, and then choose the **Modify** action. - 3. Define the type of source document lines that you want to retrieve by filling in the relevant filter fields. - 4. Choose the **Run** action. - - All released source document lines that fulfill the filter criteria are now inserted in **Warehouse Receipt** window from which you activated the filter function. - - The filter combinations that you define are saved in the **Filters to Get Source Docs.** window until the next time you need it. You can make an unlimited number of filter combinations. You can change the criteria at any time by choosing the **Modify** action. - -4. Select the source documents for which you want to receive items, and then choose the **OK** button. - - The lines of the source documents appear in the **Warehouse Receipt** window. The **Qty. to Receive** field is filled with the quantity outstanding for each line, but you can change the quantity as necessary. If you deleted the contents of the **Bin Code** field on the **General** FastTab before getting the lines, you must fill in an appropriate bin code on each receipt line. - - > [!NOTE] - > To fill in the **Qty. to Receive** field on all the lines with zero, choose the **Delete Qty. to Receive** action. To fill it in once again with the quantity outstanding, choose the **Autofill Qty. to Receive** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot receive more items than the number in the **Qty. Outstanding** field on the source document line. To receive more items, retrieve another source document that contains a line for the item by using the filter function to get source documents with the item. - -5. Post the warehouse receipt. The quantity fields are updated on the source documents, and the items are recorded as part of company inventory. - -If you are using warehouse put-away, the receipt lines are sent to the warehouse put-away function. The items, although received, cannot be picked until they have been put away. The received items are identified as available inventory only when the put-away has been registered. - -If you are not using warehouse put-away but you are using bins, the put-away of the items in the bin specified on the source document line is recorded. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you use the **Post and Print** function, you both post the receipt and print a put-away instruction that shows you where to place the items in storage. -> -> If your location uses directed put-away and pick, then the put-away templates are used to calculate the best place to put the items away. This is then printed on the put-away instruction. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-ship-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-ship-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 08c74ca2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-ship-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Ship Items - description: Depending on your warehouse configuration, you can either record shipment on the related outbound business document, such as a sales order, directly, or you can use warehouse shipment documents that respect a workflow and integrate to various warehouse activities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Ship Items -When you ship items from a warehouse that is not set up for warehouse shipment processing, you simply record the shipment on the related business document, such as a sales order, service order, purchase return order, or outbound transfer order. - -When you ship items from a warehouse that is set up warehouse shipment processing, you can ship items only on the basis of source documents that other company units have released to the warehouse for action. - -> [!NOTE] -> If your warehouse uses cross-docking and bins, for each line, you can view the quantity of items that have been placed in the cross-dock bins. The program calculates these quantities automatically whenever the fields on the shipment are updated. If they are the items that apply to the shipment you are preparing, you can create a pick for all the lines and then complete the shipment. For more information, see [How to: Cross-Dock Items](warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md). - -## To ship items with a sales order -The following describes how to receive items with a purchase order. The steps are similar for purchase return orders, service orders, and outbound transfer orders. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open an existing sales order, or create a new one. For more information, see [How to: Sell Products](sales-how-sell-products.md). -3. In the **Qty. to Ship** field, enter the received quantity. - - The value in the **Qty. Shipped** field is updated. If this is a partial shipment, then the value is lower than the value in the **Quantity** field. -4. Choose the **Post** action. - -## To ship items with a warehouse shipment -First you create a shipment document from a business source document. Then you pick the specified items for the shipment. - -### To create a warehouse shipment -Typically, employee responsible for shipping creates a warehouse shipment. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. - - Fill in the fields on **General** FastTab. When you retrieve source document lines, some of the information is copied to each line. - - For warehouse configuration with directed put-away and pick, if the location has a default zone and bin for shipments, the **Zone Code** and **Bin Code** fields are filled in automatically, but you can change them as appropriate. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you wish to ship items with warehouse class codes other than the class code of the bin in the **Bin Code** field on the document header, you must delete the contents of the **Bin Code** field on the header before you retrieve source document lines for the items. -3. Choose the **Get Source Documents** action. The **Source Documents** window opens. - - From a new or an open warehouse shipment, you can use the **Filters to Get Source Docs.** window to retrieve the released source document lines that define which items to ship. - - 1. Choose the **Use Filters to Get Src. Docs.** action. - 2. To set up a new filter, enter a descriptive code in the **Code** field, and then choose the **Modify** action. - 3. Define the type of source document lines that you want to retrieve by filling in the relevant filter fields. - 4. Choose the **Run** action. - - All released source document lines that fulfill the filter criteria are now inserted in **Warehouse Shipment** window from which you activated the filter function. - - The filter combinations that you define are saved in the **Filters to Get Source Docs.** window until the next time you need it. You can make an unlimited number of filter combinations. You can change the criteria at any time by choosing the **Modify** action. - -4. Select the source documents for which you want to ship items, and then choose the **OK** button. - -The lines of the source documents appear in the **Warehouse Shipment** window. The **Qty. to Ship** field is filled with the quantity outstanding for each line, but you can change the quantity as necessary. If you deleted the contents of the **Bin Code** field on the **General** FastTab before getting the lines, you must fill in an appropriate bin code on each shipment line. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot ship more items than the number in the **Qty. Outstanding** field on the source document line. To ship more items, retrieve another source document that contains a line for the item by using the filter function to get source documents with the item. - -When you have the lines you want to ship, you can start the process that sends the lines to warehouse employees to pick. - -### To pick and ship -Typically, a warehouse worker responsible for picking creates a pick document, or opens an already created pick document. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Shipments**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the warehouse shipment that you want to pick for, and then choose the **Create Pick** action. -3. Fill in the fields in the request window, and then choose the **OK** button. The specified warehouse pick document is created. - - Alternatively, open an existing warehouse pick. -4. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Picks**, and then choose the related link. Select the warehouse pick that you want to work on. - - If the warehouse is set up to use bins, then the pick lines have been converted to Take and Place action lines. - - You can sort the lines, assign an employee to the pick, set a break-bulk filter, if you are using directed put-away and pick, and print the pick instructions. - -5. Perform the actual picking of items and place them in the specified shipping bin, or in the shipping area, if you do not have bins. -6. Choose the **Register Pick** action. - - The **Qty. to Ship** field and the **Document Status** field on the header of the shipment document are updated. The items you have picked are no longer available for picking for other shipments or for internal operations. -7. Print your shipping documents, prepare the shipment packages, and then post the shipment. - -For more information about picking for warehouse shipments, see [How to: Pick Items for Warehouse Shipment](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md). - -You can also use the pick worksheet to make several pick instructions into one instruction (for several shipments) and thereby improve the efficiency of picking in the warehouse. For more information, see [How to: Plan Pick in Worksheets](warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are waiting for particular items to arrive at the warehouse, and you use cross-dock functionality, then [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates on each shipment or pick worksheet line the quantity of the item that is in the cross-dock bin. It updates this field each time you leave and open the shipment document or worksheet. For more information, see [How to: Cross-Dock Items](warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-assign-default-bins-to-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-assign-default-bins-to-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index e38cd2a8..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-assign-default-bins-to-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Assign Default Bins to Items - description: If you are using bins at a location, assigning default bins to your items can make the process of shipping, receiving, and moving your items much easier. When a default bin is assigned to an item, this bin is suggested every time you initiate a transaction for this item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Assign Default Bins to Items -If you are using bins at a location, assigning default bins to your items can make the process of shipping, receiving, and moving your items much easier. When a default bin is assigned to an item, this bin is suggested every time you initiate a transaction for this item. Default bins are defined in the **Bin Content** window. - -## To assign a default bin to an item -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bin Content Creation Worksheet**, and choose the related link. -2. Fill in the bin code and item information for each bin that you would like to set up as a default for an item. Make sure to select the **Default** field. -3. Choose the **Create Bin Content** action. Default bins are now assigned for your item. - -> [!NOTE] -> When an item is put away, if the item does not have a default bin assigned, the bin where the item is put away is assigned as the default. - -## To change the default bin for an item -You may need to change the default bin assignment for an item or assign a default bin to a new item. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bin Contents**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Location Filter** field, select the appropriate location code. -3. Find the current default bin content entry for the item and clear the **Default Bin** check box. -4. Find the bin content line for the bin that you would like as the new default bin. Select the **Default Bin** check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> When an item is put away for the first time, and the item does not have a default bin assigned, the system will assign the bin where the item is put away as the default bin for the item. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7acbf8ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Calculate Bin Replenishment - description: When the location is set up to use directed put-away and pick, priorities of the put-away template for the location are taken into account when putting receipts away. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Calculate Bin Replenishment -When the location is set up to use directed put-away and pick, priorities of the put-away template for the location are taken into account when putting receipts away. Priorities include the minimum and maximum quantities of bin content that have been fixed for a particular bin, and the bin rankings. Therefore, if items are arriving at a steady pace, the most-used pick bins will be filled up as they are emptied. - -But inventory does not always arrive in a steady trickle. Sometimes, items are purchased in large quantities so that the company can obtain a rebate, or your production unit might produce a lot of one item to achieve a low unit cost. Then items will not be received in the warehouse again for some time, and the warehouse needs to periodically move items to pick bins from bulk storage areas. - -It could also be that the warehouse is expecting new stock to arrive soon and wants to empty the bulk storage area of items before the new merchandise arrives. - -Finally, if you have defined your bulk storage bins with a bin type action **Put Away** only, that is, the bin type does not have the **Pick** action selected, you must always keep your pick bins replenished, since Put Away-type bins are not suggested for a pick of inventory. - -## To replenish pick bins -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Movement Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** action to open the report request page. -3. Fill in the batch job request window to limit the scope of the replenishment suggestions that will be calculated. For example, you might be concerned with particular items, zones, or bins. -4. Choose the **OK** button. Lines are created for the replenishment movements that need to be performed according to the rules that have been set up for the bins and bin contents, that is, items in bins. -5. If you want to perform all the suggested replenishments, choose the **Create Movement** action. Employees can now find instructions in the **Movements** menu item, carry them out and register them. -6. If you only want some of the suggestions to be performed, delete the lines that are less important and then create a movement. - -The next time you calculate bin replenishment, the suggestions that you have deleted will be recreated, if they are still valid at that time. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the following conditions are met for an item: -> -> - The item has an expiration date, and -> - The **Pick According to FEFO** field on the location card is selected, and -> - You use the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** functionality -> -> then the **From Zone** and **From Bin** fields will be blank because the algorithm to calculate from where to move the items is triggered only when you activate the **Create Movement** function. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Picking by FEFO](warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-convert-existing-locations-to-warehouse-locations.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-convert-existing-locations-to-warehouse-locations.md deleted file mode 100644 index 97d49408..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-convert-existing-locations-to-warehouse-locations.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Convert Existing Locations to Warehouse Locations - description: You can enable an existing inventory location to use zones and bins and to operate as a warehouse location. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Convert Existing Locations to Warehouse Locations -You can enable an existing inventory location to use zones and bins and to operate as a warehouse location. - -The batch job to enable a location for warehouse operation creates initial warehouse entries for the warehouse adjustment bin for all items that have inventory in the location. These initial entries will be balanced when warehouse physical inventory entries are entered after the batch job is run. - -You can create zones and bins either before or after the conversion. The only bin that you must create before the conversion is the one that is to be used as the future adjustment bin. - -> [!IMPORTANT] -> To clear all negative inventory and any open warehouse documents before you convert the location for warehouse handling, run a report to identify the items with negative inventory and open warehouse documents for the location. For more information, see Check on Negative Inventory. - -## To enable an existing location to operate as a warehouse location -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Warehouse Location**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Location Code** field, specify the location that you want to enable for warehouse processing. -3. In the **Adjustment Bin Code** field, specify the bin at the location where unsynchronized warehouse entries are stored. For more information, see the "To synchronize the adjusted warehouse entries with the related item ledger entries" section in [How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory](inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md). - - Using the open item ledger entries for the specified location, warehouse journal lines are created that sum up every combination of Item No., Variant Code, Unit of Measure Code, and, if necessary, Lot No. and Serial No. in the item ledger entries. The warehouse journal lines are then posted. This posting creates warehouse entries that place the inventory in the warehouse adjustment bin. The **Adjustment Bin Code** on the location card is also set. - -4. To see which items were added to the adjustment bin during the batch job, run the **Warehouse Adjustment Bin** report. -5. When the **Create Warehouse Location** batch job has completed, perform and post a warehouse physical inventory. For more information, see [How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory](inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md). - -> [!NOTE] -> It is recommended that you run the **Create Warehouse Location** batch job at a time when it will not impact the daily work in the system. This job processes each entry in the **Item Ledger Entry** table, and if there are a large number of item ledger entries, the job can last several hours. - - For those locations that did not use warehouse management documents before the conversion, you must re-open and release any source documents that were partially received or partially shipped before the conversion. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md deleted file mode 100644 index b961432b..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Bins - description: The most effective way to create the bins of your warehouse is to generate groups of similar bins in the bin creation worksheet, but you can also create your bins individually. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/07/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Bins -The most effective way to create the bins of your warehouse is to generate groups of similar bins in the bin creation worksheet, but you can also create your bins individually from the location card. You can also use a function in the **Bin Creation Worksheet** window to create bins automatically. - -## To create a bin from the location card -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and choose the related link. -2. Select the location that you want to create a bin from, and then choose the **Bins** action. -3. Choose the **New** action. -4. Fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -## To create bins individually in the bin creation worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bin Creation Worksheet**, and choose the related link. -2. Fill in on each line the fields that are necessary to name and characterize the bins you are creating. -3. Choose the **Create Bins** action. - -## To make bins automatically in the bin creation worksheet -Before you start creating bins automatically, you should determine the kind of bins that are essential for your operations, as well as the most practical flow of items through the physical structure of your warehouse. - -> [!NOTE] -> As soon as you use a bin, you cannot delete it unless it is empty. But if you want to use another bin-naming system, you can use the reclassification journal to in effect move your items to a new bin system. This process is manual and takes time, however, so it is best to set up your bins correctly from the start. - -To work with the **Bin Creation Worksheet** window, you must be set up as a warehouse employee at the location where the bins exist. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Warehouse Employees](warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bin Creation Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Bins** action. -3. In the **Calculate Bins** window, in the **Bin Template Code** field, select the bin template that you want to use as the model for the bins you are creating. -4. Fill in a description for the bins you are in the process of creating. -5. To create the bin codes, fill in the **From No.** and **To No.** fields in the three categories shown in the window: **Rack**, **Section,**, and **Level.** The bin code can contain up to 20 characters. - - > [!NOTE] - > The number of characters that you have entered in the three categories for either field, for example, the characters you have entered in the three **From No.** fields, plus the field separators, if any, must be 20 or less. - - You can use letters in the code as an identifying combination, but the letter you use must be the same in the **From No.** and **To No.** fields. For example, you might define the Rack part of the code as **From No. A01** and **To No. A10**. The program is not set up to generate codes with letter sequences, for example, from A01 to F05. - -6. If you want a character, such as a hyphen, to separate the category fields you have defined as part of the bin code, fill in the **Field Separator** field with this character. -7. If you want the program not to create a line for a bin if it exists already, select the **Check on Existing Bin** field. -8. When you have finished filling in the fields, choose the **OK** Button. - - The program creates a line for each bin in the worksheet. You can now delete some of the bins, for example, if you have a rack with a passageway through the first two levels of a couple of sections. - -9. When you have deleted all unnecessary bins, choose the **Create Bins** action, and the program will create bins for each line in the worksheet. - -Repeat the process for another set of bins until you have created all the bins in your warehouse. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5011fb3c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Put-aways from Internal Put-aways - description: After items have been put away and before they are picked to fulfill the needs of a production order or shipment, they are stored in the warehouse as part of available inventory. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Pick and Put Away Without a Source Document -After items have been put away and before they are picked to fulfill the needs of a production order or shipment, they are stored in the warehouse as part of available inventory. - -Situations can arise where items must be taken out of the warehouse pick bins temporarily, perhaps to serve as demonstration models in a sales presentation. These items are still owned by the company and are part of inventory, but they are not available for picking. They are registered in a special purpose bin that you create for this purpose; technically, the items are in the warehouse, but physically, they could be in a conference or demonstration room. - -In other situations, the production unit might unexpectedly need a few parts for a process. You can pick items for the production bins using the internal pick. When the process is over and output is created, you post the consumption of the items and empty the production bin, which in turn decreases the quantity of the item at your location. - -Likewise, items can be returned to the warehouse to be put away. The items may have been taken out of available inventory for a production order, and then not used at all. To make them part of available inventory again, they must be put away in the bin. - -The **Internal Put-aways** enables you to perform put-aways without having to refer to a particular source document. You can easily set up all the information you need to create a put-away warehouse instruction. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you are not using internal picks and internal put-aways, these adjustments can be performed using the methods to move items from bin to bin or to post quantity adjustments in a bin. -> -> When the location uses directed put-away and pick, and therefore uses bin types, you cannot manually move items in or out of a bin of bin type RECEIVE, because items that are in a RECEIVE-type bin must be registered as being put away before they are part of available inventory. - -## To create an internal pick -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Internal Pick**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the **No.** field and the **To Bin Code** field on the **General** FastTab. The **To Bin Code** field specifies the bin from which you want to get the items. For production purposes, this bin would be the inbound production bin or the open shop bin. For other purposes, choose a To Bin Code of a bin type that is not used for picking, most likely a staging, shipping or special purpose bin. -3. Select an item in the **Item No.** field, and fill in the quantities you want to pick. -4. Choose the **Create Pick** action. A warehouse pick instruction is now ready for a warehouse employee to perform. - -## To create an internal put-away -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Internal Put-away**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the **No.** and **From Bin Code** fields on the **General** FastTab. The **From Bin Code** field specifies the bin where the items being returned to the warehouse, perhaps from production, are located. -3. Fill in the item numbers and quantities on the lines. -4. Choose the **Create Put-away** action. A warehouse put-away instruction is now ready for a warehouse employee to perform. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index aa1ed3bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Cross-Dock Items - description: Cross-docking functionality is available to you if you have set up your location to require warehouse receive and put-away processing. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Cross-Dock Items -Cross-docking functionality is available to you if you have set up your location to require warehouse receive and put-away processing. - -When you cross-dock items, you process items in receiving and shipping without ever placing them in storage, thereby expediting the item through the put-away and pick processes and limiting the physical handling of items. You can cross-dock items for both shipments and for production orders. When you prepare a shipment or pick items for production and you are using bins, the item is automatically picked from a cross-dock bin before any other bin. You must look in the cross-dock area to see if the items you need are available there before you get the items in their usual storage area. - -If you have calculated cross-dock quantities, put-away lines to the cross-dock bin for cross-dock calculations are created when you post the receipt. Other put-away lines are created as usual. - -If you want to post the cross-dock items right away to make them available for picking, you must also register a put-away for the other items originating from the receipt line, namely those that need to be stored. If only some items on a receipt line are being cross-docked, you must therefore make an effort to put away the remaining items as quickly as possible. Alternatively, your warehouse policy could be to encourage cross-docking of entire receipt lines whenever possible. - -In the put-away instruction, you can to your advantage delete both Take and Place instruction lines for each receipt line that concern receipts that are to be fully put away in storage. These lines can later be created as put-away lines from the put-away worksheet or the posted receipt. When they are deleted, you can then put away and register the lines that concern cross-dock items. - -If you have selected the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field on the location card and have posted your receipt with calculated cross-docks, all the receipt lines become available in the worksheet. The cross-dock information is lost and cannot be recreated. Therefore, if you wish to use cross-dock functionality, you should relay lines to the put-away worksheet by deleting put-away instructions rather than using the automatic relay function provided in the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field. - -If you post the warehouse receipt and you do not have the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field selected, the items to be cross-docked appear as separate lines on the put-away instruction. The **Cross-Dock Information** field on each put-away line shows whether the line contains cross-dock items, items from the same receipt that all need to be stored, or items that need to be stored originating from a receipt line where some of the items are to be cross-docked. With this field, employees can easily see why the full receipt quantity is not being placed in storage. - -The program does not keep separate records about items that have been cross-docked, but registers them as ordinary put-away instructions. - -## To set up the warehouse for cross-docking -1. Set up at least one cross-dock bin, if you are using bins. Set up a cross-dock zone, if you are using directed put-away and pick. - - A cross-dock bin has the **Cross-Dock Bin** field selected and must have both **Receive** and **Pick** bin types selected. For more information, see [How to: Create Bins](warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md) and [How to: Set Up Bin Types](warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md). - - If you are using zones, create a zone for your cross-dock bins, and select the **Cross-Dock Bin Zone** field. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Locations to Use Bins](warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md). - -2. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Location**, and then choose the related link. -3. In the **Location** window, select the location that you want to set up the warehouse for cross-docking, and then choose the **Edit** action. -4. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, select the **Use Cross-Docking** check box and fill in the **Cross-Dock Due Date Calc.** field with the time to search for cross-dock opportunities. - - The **Use Cross-Docking** option is only available if the **Require Receive**, **Require Shipment**, **Require Pick**, and **Require Put-away** fields are selected. - -5. If you are using bins, on the **Bins** FastTab, fill in the **Cross-Dock Bin Code** field with the code of the bin you would like to use as the default cross-dock bin. -6. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Stockkeeping Unit**, and select the related link. -7. For each item or stockkeeping unit that you want to be able to cross-dock, select the item, and then choose the **Edit** action. -8. In the **Stockkeeping Unit Card** window, select the **Use Cross-Docking** check box. - -> [!NOTE] -> Cross-docking is only possible if your location is set up to require warehouse receive and put-away processing. - -## To cross-dock items without viewing the opportunities -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a warehouse receipts for an item that has arrived and can perhaps be cross-docked. For more information, see [How to: Receive Items](warehouse-how-receive-items.md). -3. Fill in the **Qty. to Receive** field, and then choose the **Calculate Cross-Dock** action. - - Outbound source documents requesting the items that are scheduled to leave the warehouse within the date formula time period are identified. [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] calculates quantities so that you can cross-dock as much as possible and avoid having to put items away, without piling up too many items in the cross-dock area. The value in the **Qty. to Cross-Dock** field is thus the sum of all the outbound lines requesting the item within the look-ahead period minus the quantity of the items that have already been placed in the cross-dock area, or it is the value in the **Qty. to Receive** field on the receipt line, whichever is smaller. You cannot cross-dock more than you have received. - -4. If you want to cross-dock the quantity as suggested, post the receipt. You can also decide to change the quantity to cross-dock to a higher or lower value and then post the receipt. - - The amounts to be cross-docked now appear as lines in the put-away instruction, assuming the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field is cleared. The quantities not cross-docked also become lines in the put-away instruction. - - If you have bins, the cross-docked items have been assigned to the default cross-dock bin defined on the location card. - -5. Delete the **Take** and **Place** lines for items that are not going to be cross-docked at all. -6. Print the put-away instruction for the remaining lines, and place the quantities of the receipt that need to be stored in the appropriate bins or in the appropriate area of the warehouse. Place the cross-dock items in the area or bin designated for them by warehouse policy. Sometimes, warehouse policy might require that you to just leave them in the receiving area. -7. To register the cross-docked items as being put-away and available for picking, choose the **Register** action. - -## To cross-dock items after viewing the opportunities -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a warehouse receipts for an item that has arrived and can perhaps be cross-docked. For more information, see [How to: Receive Items](warehouse-how-receive-items.md). - - You want to view the source document lines that are requesting the item before you post the receipt. -3. Choose the **Calculate Cross-Dock** action. - - In the **Cross-Dock Opportunities** window you can see the most important details about the lines requesting the item, such as type of document, quantity requested, and due date. This information might help you to decide how much to cross-dock, where to place the items in the cross-dock area, or how to group them. - -4. Choose **Autofill Qty. to Cross-Dock** action to see how the quantities on the receipt lines are calculated. When you change the number of items in the **Qty. to Cross-Dock** field on each line, the calculation is updated as you make changes. This does not mean that the particular shipment or production order will actually receive the items being suggested for cross-docking, because these manipulations are for testing purposes only. The process can be informative, however, if more than one unit of measure is involved. -5. If you want to reserve a quantity of the item for a particular order line, place your cursor on that line, and then choose the **Reserve** action. In the **Reservation** window, you can now reserve any available quantity of the item for this specific order. This reservation is like any other reservation and does not have higher priority because it was created in connection with cross-docking. For more information, see [How to: Reserve Items](inventory-how-to-reserve-items.md). -6. When you are finished recalculating or reserving, choose the **OK** button to bring the calculation as you have revised it into the **Qty. to Cross-Dock** field on the receipt line, or choose the **Cancel** button if you want to return to the warehouse receipt, where you can calculate the cross-dock again if you wish. -7. Now post the receipt, and you can continue in the put-away instruction as described in steps 3 through 7 in the “To cross-dock items without viewing the opportunities” section. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the warehouse put-away, you can continue to change the quantities that are being put away in storage or cross-docked, as necessary. For example, you might decide to cross-dock an extra quantity to expedite the cross-dock registration. - -## To view cross-docked items in a shipment or pick worksheet -If you are using bins, you can see, each time you open a shipment or the pick worksheet, an updated calculation of the quantity of each item in the cross-dock bins. This is valuable information if you are waiting for an item to come in. When you see that the item is available in the cross-dock bin, you can then quickly create a pick for all the items on the shipment. In the pick worksheet, you can modify the lines as appropriate and then create a pick. - -You have to look for items in the cross-dock area first when you pick items for shipment. If you have noted during the receipt process the source documents that were the basis for cross-docking, you have a better idea of whether the item can be found in the cross-dock area or not. - -When a production order has been released, the lines are available in the pick worksheet, and you can see in the **Qty. on Cross-Dock Bin** field whether the items you are waiting for have arrived and been placed in the cross-dock bins. When you create a pick instruction, the program suggests that you first pick the cross-docked items and will only later search for the item in storage bins. - -If you are not using bins, you must remember to check the cross-dock area from time to time, or rely on notifications from receipts that items for production have arrived. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments.md deleted file mode 100644 index 6d8915e0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Find Your Warehouse Assignments - description: To find your warehouse assignments, open the card window for a selected item. If warehouse instructions have been created, Take and Place lines are visible, and you can begin working on an assignment. In some warehouses, the manager may have assigned specific instructions to each employee. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Find Your Warehouse Assignments -To find your warehouse assignments, open the card window for a selected item. If warehouse instructions have been created, Take and Place lines are visible, and you can begin working on an assignment. In some warehouses, the manager may have assigned specific instructions to each employee. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Warehouse Employees](warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md). - -## To find an instruction assigned to you -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Put-aways**, **Warehouse Picks**, or **Warehouse Movement**, and then choose the related link. - - All three windows show assignments for all warehouse locations. - -2. Sort the items by location. You can now see the instructions that have been assigned to you. -3. Select one of the lines with your initials in the **Assigned User ID** field and then choose the **OK** button. The put-away assignment then appears in the window, with your initials in the **Assigned User ID** field on the **General** FastTab. - -You can use the **Assigned User ID** field on the header to claim work assignments, if the warehouse manager does not assign particular instructions to individuals. Simply enter your user ID in the header of the warehouse before you begin work on an instruction. Your co-workers can then choose to work on other instructions, and the warehouse will avoid a duplication of effort. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2265eea0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations - description: If item processing operations occur at your warehouse location, then you may have to move items between internal bins to respond to internal source documents, such as production, assembly, or service orders at the location. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations -If item processing operations occur at your warehouse location, then you may have to move items between internal bins to respond to internal source documents, such as production, assembly, or service orders at the location. - -> [!NOTE] -> For information about moving items between bins without source documents, see Internal Movement. - -In advanced warehouse configurations, which are locations that use the **Directed Put-away and Pick** setup field, you can use the **Movement Worksheet** window to move items between bins. For more information, see [How to: Move Items in Advanced warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md). - -In basic warehouse configurations, which are locations that use the **Bin Mandatory** setup field and the **Require Pick** setup field, you can register movement of items to internal operation areas based on internal source documents in the following ways: - -- With the **Inventory Movement** window. -- With the **Inventory Pick** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> Inventory picks also post negative item ledger entries as consumption and are only supported for production components. For more information, see the Inventory Pick window. - -For detailed information about inventory movements, see the Inventory Movement window. - -Two different roles can create the initial inventory movement. An assembly worker, for example, can create it from a released assembly order so that it shows up in the warehouse worker’s list of work to do. To create an inventory movement for assembly order lines that are ready to have components moved to their specified bins, the assembly worker uses the **Create Inventory Movement** function. - -Alternatively, a warehouse worker can create it by pointing to the released assembly order in question. This is described in the following procedure. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the movement is for an assembly order where the item is assembled to a sales order, then you can define that the inventory movement document is automatically created when you create the inventory pick document that takes the finished assembly item and posts the shipment. To set this up, select the **Create Movements Automatically** field in the **Assembly Setup** window -> -> For more information about assembly orders and basic warehouse configurations, see the "Handling Assemble-to-Order Items with Inventory Picks" section in [How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md). - -This procedure shows how to create an inventory movement from the **Inventory Movement** window by referencing a released assembly order as a source document. The procedure is the same when you move components for production orders and service orders. - -## To move components to an operation area in basic warehouse configurations -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Movement**, and choose the relevant link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the **No.** field. You can press the Enter key to select from the number series. -3. In the **Location Code** field, enter the location where the movement occurs. -4. Choose the **Get Source Documents** action. Alternatively, fill in the **Source Document** field, and then choose the **AssistEdit** button in the **Source No.** field. -5. In the **Source Documents** window, select the assembly order that you want to move components for, and then choose the **OK** button. - - For each needed component that can be moved, one Take line and one Place line are generated in the **Inventory Movements** window. All fields except the **Qty. to Handle** field are prefilled according to the source document lines. The **Qty. to Handle** field is set to zero until you enter the quantity that you have actually moved. - - You can change the bin code on a Take line but only according to availability. If you choose the **AssistEdit** button in the **Bin Code** field on a Take line, then the **Bin Contents** window opens and only shows bins where the component is available. - - You cannot change the bin code on a Place line. Only the bin code that is defined on the component line of the source document is accepted. This supports the principle that the role who requests a component, which is an assembly worker in this procedure, knows where the component must be placed. If you want to place the components in a different bin, then you must first change the bin code on the component line and then re-create the inventory movement lines. -6. In the **Qty. to Handle** field, enter the full or partial quantity that you have actually moved. The value on the Take and the Place lines must be the same. Otherwise, you cannot register the movement. - - > [!NOTE] - > As in other warehouse activities, you can split the Place line by selecting the **Actions** action and then choosing the **Split Line** action. In that case, the sum of the two split Place lines must equal the quantity on the Take line. - -7. When you are ready to register the movements that you have performed, choose the **Register Invt. Movement** action. - - Warehouse entries are created reflecting that the components now exist in the bins specified on the assembly order lines. - - > [!NOTE] - > Unlike when you move components with an inventory pick, consumption is not posted when you register an inventory movement. That step must be performed separately by posting the assembly order output and consumption. For more information, see Assembly Order. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7917c562..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Move Items Ad Hoc in Basic Warehouse Configurations - description: You may occasionally need to move items between internal bins, not receiving or shipping bins, without a specific demand from a source document. You may perform these ad hoc movements, for example, to reorganize the warehouse, to bring items to an inspection area, or to move additional items to and from a production area without a system relation to the production order source document. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Move Items Ad Hoc in Basic Warehouse Configurations -You may occasionally need to move items between internal bins, not receiving or shipping bins, without a specific demand from a source document. You may perform these ad hoc movements, for example, to reorganize the warehouse, to bring items to an inspection area, or to move additional items to and from a production area without a system relation to the production order source document. - -In basic warehouse configurations, that is locations that use the **Bin Mandatory** setup field and possibly the **Require Pick** and the **Require Put-away** setup fields, you can register ad hoc movements without source documents in the following ways: - -```code - - With the **Internal Movement** window. - - With the **Item Reclassification Journal** window. -``` - -> [!NOTE] -> In advanced warehouse configurations, that is locations that use the **Directed Put-away and Pick** setup field, you use the **Movement Worksheet** window or the **Internal Whse. Pick** or the **Internal Whse. Put-away** windows to move items ad hoc between bins. - -## To move items as an internal movement -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Internal Movement**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **General** FastTab, fill in the **No.** field, either by leaving the field or by choosing the **AssistEdit** button to select from the number series. -3. In the **Location Code** field, enter the location where the movement takes place. - - If the location is set up as your default location as a warehouse employee, the location code is inserted automatically. -4. In the **To Bin Code** field, enter a code for the bin that you want to move the item to. For production purposes, this could be the open shop floor bin code, for example, as defined on the location card or work center. -5. In the **Due Date** field, enter the date by which the movement must be completed. -6. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Item No.** field to open the **Bin Contents List** window, and then select the item to move based on its availability in bins. Alternatively, choose the **Get Bin Contents** action to fill the internal movement lines based on your filters. For more information, see the tooltip for the **Get Bin Content** action. - - When you have selected the item, the **From Bin Code** field is automatically filled according to the selected bin content, but you can change it to any other bin where the item is available. - - > [!NOTE] - > Because the **Item No.** field and the **From Bin Code** field are connected, their values may change interdependently when you edit either field. - - The **To Bin Code** field is filled with the value you entered on the header, but you can change it on the line to any other bin code that isn’t blocked or dedicated to special purposes. For more information about making bins dedicated, see Dedicated. -7. When you have defined which bins you want to move the item from and to, enter the quantity to move in the **Quantity** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > Quantity must be available in the From Bin code. - -8. When you are ready to process the internal movement, choose the **Create Inventory Movement** action. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you have created the inventory movement, the internal movement lines are deleted. - - You perform the remainder of the ad hoc movement in the **Inventory Movement** window in the same way as you would for a movement based on source documents. For more information, see for example [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md) - -## To move items with the item reclassification journal -In stead of using warehouse movement documents, you can record the moving of items by reclassifying their bin codes. For more information, see [How to: Count, Adjust, and Reclassify Inventory](inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md). -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclass. Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. On each journal line, define the bins from which and to which you want to move items by filling in the **Bin Code** and the **New Bin Code** fields. - - 1. To move a bin's entire contents to another bin, choose the **Get Bin Contents** action. - 2. Fill in the filters to find the bin whose contents you would like to move and then choose the **OK** button. The journal lines are filled with the contents of the bin. -3. Fill in the remaining fields on each journal line. -4. Post the reclassification journal. - - > [!NOTE] - > Unlike with movement documents, a movement posted with the reclassification journal does not create a warehouse request to perform the physical task. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index 98b03948..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: How to Move Items in advanced warehouse configurations -description: In advanced warehouse configurations, that is, locations with directed put-away and pick, warehouse movements between bins are performed by a senior employee preparing warehouse movements in the movement worksheet and then creating the warehouse movements for warehouse employees to perform. -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: -ms.date: 08/23/2017 -ms.author: edupont ---- -# How to: Move Items in Advanced Warehouse Configurations -In advanced warehouse configurations, that is, locations with directed put-away and pick, warehouse movements between bins are performed by a senior employee preparing warehouse movements in the movement worksheet and then creating the warehouse movements for warehouse employees to perform. - -## To move items with the warehouse movement worksheet -The **Movement Worksheet** window has two functions that can assist in automatically filling in the lines. The first is the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** function. This function uses the bin rankings to suggest replenishment for high-ranking bins from low-ranking bins. The second is the **Get Bin Content** function, which fills in the worksheet lines with the entire bin contents of the bin or bins you specify. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Movement Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Enter the warehouse movement information on the worksheet lines as appropriate. -3. Choose the **Create Movement** action to create a warehouse movement document which can then be registered when the warehouse movement is completed. - -### To register the warehouse movement -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Movements**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the warehouse movement that you want to process. -3. On lines of action type **Place**, specify where, which, and when to move the item in question by editing the **Zone Code**, **Bin Code**, **Qty. to Handle**, or **Due Date** fields. - - If your warehouse has been set up so the bin codes follow the physical structure of the warehouse, you can take quantities of several items from successive bulk bins and then place them in forward picking bins, which also might be close to one another. -4. On lines of action type **Take**, specify in the **Qty. to Handle** field a part quantity of the bin content that you want to move. All other fields on lines of action type **Take** are read-only. -5. To move all suggested quantities as specified in the **Quantity** field, choose the **Autofill Qty. to Handle** action. -6. Choose the **Register** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the location uses directed put-away and pick, then you cannot manually move items in or out of bins of bin type RECEIVE, because items in such bins must be registered as being put away before they are part of available inventory. - -## To register the movement of an item that has already occurred -If your location uses directed put-away and pick, and you need to move items to other bins without a pre-existing warehouse put-away, pick, or movement, you can register the correct placement of the items in the warehouse using the **Whse. Reclassification Journal**. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Reclassification Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the **Item No.**, **From Zone Code**, **From Bin Code**, **To Zone Code**, and **To Bin Code** fields. -3. Choose the **Register** action. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-internal-operations-in-advanced-warehousing.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-internal-operations-in-advanced-warehousing.md deleted file mode 100644 index decf769f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-internal-operations-in-advanced-warehousing.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Pick for Internal Operations in Advanced Warehouse Configurations - description: In advanced warehouse configurations where the location is set up to use picking as well as shipping, you can pick components for production and assembly activities with the **Warehouse Pick** window. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/06/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Pick for Assembly or Production in Advanced Warehouse Configurations -In advanced warehouse configurations where the location is set up to use picking as well as shipping, you can pick components for production and assembly activities with the **Warehouse Pick** window. - -Alternatively, you can use the **Movement Worksheet** window to move items between bins ad hoc, meaning without reference to a source document. For more information, see [How to: Move Items in advanced warehouse configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md). - -For information about picking items for internal operations in basic warehouse locations that are set up for picking only, see [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md). - -You cannot create a warehouse pick document from scratch because a pick activity is always part of a workflow, either in a pull or a push scenario. - -You can create the warehouse pick document in a push fashion by selecting **Create Whse. Pick** on the source document, such as a released assembly order or warehouse shipment. For more information, see [How to: Pick Items with Warehouse Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md). - -Alternatively, you can create the warehouse pick document in a pull fashion by using the **Pick Worksheet** window to detect pick requests, both for shipment and internal operations, and then create the required warehouse pick documents. - -The following procedure explains a pull scenario where you pick components for a released production order through the **Pick Worksheet** window. The procedure also applies for an assembly order. - -To create pick requests, both for pull and for push scenarios, the source documents in question must be released. Release source documents for internal operations in the following ways. - -|Source Document|Release Method| -|---------------------|--------------------| -|Production Order|Change order type to released production order.| -|Assembly Order|Change status to Released.| - -## To pick components using the pick worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Pick Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Warehouse Documents** action, and then select the component lines from the released production order. -3. Inspect the lines, sort them to ensure an efficient picking round, and combine them with other worksheet lines if necessary to make best use of employee time. -4. Choose the **Create Pick** action. -5. Define how to create the warehouse pick documents and how to sort pick lines by filling fields in the **Create Pick** window. -6. Choose the **OK** button. Warehouse pick documents are created with pick lines for each component that is required in the internal operation. - -If the internal operation area, such as a production shop floor, is set up with a default bin for placement of components to be used in the operation, then that bin code is inserted in the Place lines on the warehouse pick document to instruct warehouse workers where to place the items. For more information, see the **To-Production Bin Code** or the **To-Assembly Bin Code** field. - -## Filling the Consumption Bin -This flow chart shows how the **Bin Code** field on production order component lines is filled according to your location setup. - -![Bin flow chart](media/binflow.png "BinFlow") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md deleted file mode 100644 index b0776bd2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Pick for Production in Basic Warehouse Configurations - description: When your warehouse location requires pick processing but does not require shipment processing, use the **Inventory Pick** window to organize and record the picking of components. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Pick for Production or Assembly -How you put away your pick components for production or assembly orders depends on how your warehouse is set up as a location. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -In basic warehouse configurations where the location requires pick processing but not shipment processing, you use the **Inventory Pick** window to organize and record the picking of components. - -In basic warehouse configurations, you must pick for assembly orders with the **Inventory Movement** window. For more information, see the "Handling Assemble-to-Order Item with Inventory Picks" section in [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -In advanced warehouse configurations where locations require both picks and shipments, you use the **Warehouse Pick** window to bring components to production or assembly orders. - -> [!NOTE] -> The following important differences exist between inventory picks and inventory movements: -> -> - When you register an inventory pick for an internal operation, such as production, the consumption of the picked components is posted at the same time. When you register an inventory movement for an internal operation, you only record the physical movement of the required components to a bin in the operation area without posting the consumption. -> - When you use inventory picks, the **Bin Code** field on a production order component line defines the *take* bin from where components are decreased when posting consumption. When you use inventory movements, the **Bin Code** field on production order component lines defines the *place* bin in the operation area where the warehouse worker must place the components. - -A system precondition for picking, or moving, components for source documents is that an outbound warehouse request exists to notify the warehouse area of the component need. The outbound warehouse request is created whenever the production order status is changed to Released or when a released production order is created. - -## To pick components in basic warehouse configurations -In basic warehouse configurations where the location is set up to use picking only, you can pick components for production activities with the **Inventory Pick** window. For more information, see [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Picks**, and then choose the related link. -2. To access the production order components, choose the **Get Source Documents** action, and then select the released production order. -3. Perform the pick, and then record the actual picking information in the **Qty. Picked** field. -4. When the lines are ready for posting, choose the **Post** action. The posting creates the necessary warehouse entries and posts the consumption of the items. - -You can also create an **Inventory Pick** directly from the released production order. Choose the **Create Inventory Put-away/Pick** action, select the **Create Invt. Pick** check box, and then choose the **OK** button. - -Alternatively, you can use the **Inventory Movement** window to move items between bins ad hoc, meaning without reference to a source document. -For more information, see [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md). - -### Handling Assemble-to-Order Items with Inventory Picks -The **Inventory Pick** window is also used to pick and ship for sales where items must be assembled before they can be shipped. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - -Items to be shipped are not physically present in a bin until they are assembled and posted as output to a bin in the assembly area. This means that picking assemble-to-order items for shipment follows a special flow. From a bin, warehouse workers take the assembly items to the shipping dock and then post the inventory pick. The posted inventory pick then posts the assembly output, the component consumption, and the sales shipment. - -You can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to automatically create an inventory movement when the inventory pick for the assembly item is created. To enable this, you must select the **Create Movements Automatically** field in the **Assembly Setup** window. For more information, see [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehousing](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md). - -Inventory pick lines for sales items are created in different ways depending on whether none, some, or all of the sales line quantities are assembled to order. - -In regular sales where you use inventory picks to post shipment of inventory quantities, one inventory pick line, or several if the item is placed in different bins, is created for each sales order line. This pick line is based on the quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field. - -In assemble-to-order sales where the full quantity on the sales order line is assembled to order, one inventory pick line is created for that quantity. This means that the value in the Quantity to Assemble field is the same as the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field. The **Assemble to Order** field is selected on the line. - -If an assembly output flow is set up for the location, then the value in the **Asm.-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** field or the value in the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field, in that order, is inserted in the **Bin Code** field on the inventory pick line. - -If no bin code is specified on the sales order line, and no assembly output flow is set up for the location, then the **Bin Code** field on the inventory pick line is empty. The warehouse worker must open the **Bin Contents** window and select the bin where the assembly items are assembled. - -In combination scenarios, where a part of the quantity must first be assembled and another must be picked from inventory, a minimum of two inventory pick lines are created. One pick line is for the assemble-to-order quantity. The other pick line depends on which bins can fulfill the remaining quantity from inventory. Bin codes on the two lines are filled in different ways as described for the two different sales types respectively. For more information, see the “Combination Scenarios” section in [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -## To pick components in advanced warehouse configurations -In advanced warehouse configurations where the location is set up to use picking as well as shipping, you can pick components for production and assembly activities with the **Warehouse Pick** window. For more information, see [How to: Pick Items with Warehouse Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md). - -Alternatively, you can use the **Movement Worksheet** window to move items between bins ad hoc, meaning without reference to a source document. For more information, see [How to: Move Items in Advanced Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md). - -You cannot create a warehouse pick document from scratch because a pick activity is always part of a workflow, either in a pull or a push scenario. - -You can create the warehouse pick document in a push fashion by selecting the **Create Whse. Pick** action on the source document, such as a released assembly order or warehouse shipment. For more information, see [How to: Pick Items with Warehouse Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md). - -Alternatively, you can create the warehouse pick document in a pull fashion by using the **Pick Worksheet** window to detect pick requests, both for shipment and internal operations, and then create the required warehouse pick documents. - -The following procedure explains a pull scenario where you pick components for a released production order through the **Pick Worksheet** window. The procedure also applies to assembly orders. - -To create pick requests, both for pull and for push scenarios, the source documents in question must be released. Release source documents for internal operations in the following ways. - - |Source Document|Release Method| - |---------------------|--------------------| - |Production Order|Change order type to released production order.| - |Assembly Order|Change status to Released.| - -## To pick components using the pick worksheet - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Pick Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Warehouse Documents** action, and then select the component lines from the released production order. -3. Inspect the lines, sort them to ensure an efficient picking round, and combine them with other worksheet lines if necessary to make best use of employee time. -4. Choose the **Create Pick** action. -5. Define how to create the warehouse pick documents and how to sort pick lines by filling fields in the **Create Pick** window. -6. Choose the **OK** button. - -Warehouse pick documents are now created with pick lines for each component that is required in the internal operation. - -If the internal operation area, such as a production shop floor, is set up with a default bin for placement of components to be used in the operation, then that bin code is inserted in the Place lines on the warehouse pick document to instruct warehouse workers where to place the items. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operation Areas](warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md). - -## Filling the Consumption Bin -This flow chart shows how the **Bin Code** field on production order component lines is filled according to your location setup. - -![Bin flow chart](media/binflow.png "BinFlow") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md deleted file mode 100644 index 4ea27612..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Pick Items for Warehouse Shipment - description: When the location is set up to require warehouse pick processing as well as warehouse shipment processing, you use the warehouse pick documents to create and process pick information prior to posting the warehouse shipment. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Pick Items for Warehouse Shipment -When the location is set up to require warehouse pick processing as well as warehouse shipment processing, you use the warehouse pick documents to create and process pick information prior to posting the warehouse shipment. - -You cannot create a warehouse pick document from scratch because a pick activity is always part of a workflow, either in a pull or a push scenario. - -You can create warehouse pick documents in a pull fashion by opening an empty warehouse shipment document, detect source documents that are released to shipment, and then create warehouse pick lines for those shipments. You can use the **Get Source Documents** or **Use Filter to Get Source Documents** functions to detect source documents that are ready for shipment. - -Alternatively, you can use the **Pick Worksheet** window to pull and create pick lines in batch mode. For more information, see [How to: Plan Picks in Worksheets](warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md). - -You can also create warehouse pick documents in a push fashion from the **Warehouse Shipment** window by selecting **Create Pick**. - -> [!NOTE] -> Picking for warehouse shipment of items that are assembled to the sales order being shipped follows the same steps as for regular warehouse picks for shipment, as described in this topic. However, the number of pick lines per quantity to ship may be many to one because you pick the components, not the assembly item. -> -> The warehouse pick lines are created for the value in the **Remaining Quantity** field on the lines of the assembly order that is linked to the sales order line that is being shipped. This ensures that all components are picked in one action. -> -> For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Warehouse Shipments” section. -> -> For information about picking components for assembly orders generally, including situations where the assembly item is not due on a sales shipment, see [How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md). - -## To pick items for warehouse shipment -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Picks**, and then choose the related link. - - If you need to work on a particular pick, select the pick from the list or filter the list to find the picks that have been assigned to you specifically. Open the pick card. -2. If the **Assigned User ID** field is empty, enter your ID to identify yourself if necessary. -3. Perform the actual picking of items. - - If the warehouse is set up to use bins, then the items’ default bins are used to suggest where to take the items from. The instructions appear as two separate lines, at least one for each action type, Take and Place. - - If the warehouse is set up to use directed put-away and pick, then the bin ranking is used to calculate the best bins to pick from, and those bins are then suggested on the pick lines. The instructions appear as two separate lines, at least one for each action type, Take and Place. - -4. When you have performed the pick and placed the items in the shipping area or shipping bin, choose the **Register Pick** action. - -The person responsible for shipment can now bring the items to the shipment dock and post the shipment, including the related source document, in the **Warehouse Shipment** window. For more information, see [How to: Ship Items](warehouse-how-ship-items.md). - -In addition to picking for source documents, as described in this topic, you can take and place items between bins without referring to source documents. For more information, see [How to: Pick and Put Away Without a Source Document](warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md). - -## Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Warehouse Shipments -In assemble-to-order scenarios, the **Qty. to Ship** field on warehouse shipment lines is used to record how many units are assembled. The specified quantity is then posted as assembly output when the warehouse shipment is posted. - -For other warehouse shipment lines, the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field is zero from the start. - -When workers in charge of assembly finish assembling parts or all of the assemble-to-order quantity, they record it in the **Qty. to Ship** field on the warehouse shipment line and then choose the **Post Shipment** action. The result is that the corresponding assembly output is posted, including the component consumption. A sales shipment for the quantity is posted for the sales order. - -From the assembly order, you can choose **Asm.-to-Order Whse. Shpt. Line** to access the warehouse shipment line. This is convenient for workers who do not typically use the **Warehouse Shipment** window. - -After the warehouse shipment is posted, various fields on the sales order line are updated to show progress in the warehouse. The following fields are also updated to show how many assemble-to-order quantities remain to be assembled and shipped: - -- **ATO Whse. Outstanding Qty.** -- **ATO Whse. Outstd. Qty. (Base)** - -> [!NOTE] -> In combination scenarios, in which a part of the quantity must first be assembled and another must be shipped from inventory, two warehouse shipment lines are created. One is for the assemble-to-order quantity, and one is for the inventory quantity. -> -> In that case, the assemble-to-order quantity is handled as described in this topic, and the inventory quantity is handled as any other regular warehouse shipment line. For more information about combination scenarios, see [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md deleted file mode 100644 index 94b93c8a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Pick Items with Inventory Picks - description: If a location is set up to require pick processing but not shipment processing, you use the inventory pick documents to record and post picking and shipping information for your source documents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/29/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks -When your location is set up to require pick processing but not shipment processing, you use the **Inventory Pick** window to record and post picking and shipping information for your source documents. The outbound source document can be a sales order, a purchase return order, an outbound transfer order, or a production order whose components are ready to be picked. - -> [!NOTE] -> Components for assembly orders cannot be picked or posted with inventory picks. Instead, use the **Inventory Movement** window. For more information, see [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehousing](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md). -> -> When picking and shipping sales line quantities that are assembled to the order, you must follow certain rules when creating the inventory pick lines. For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section. - -You can create an inventory pick in three ways: - -- Create the pick in two steps by first requesting an inventory pick by releasing the source document. This signals to the warehouse that the source document is ready for picking. The inventory pick can then be created in the **Inventory Pick** window based on the source document. -- Create the inventory pick directly from the source document itself. -- You can create inventory picks for several source documents at the same time by using the batch job. - -## To request an inventory pick by releasing the source document -For sales orders, purchase return orders, and outbound transfer orders, you create the warehouse request by releasing the order. The following describes how to do this from a sales order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Sales Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the sales order that you want to release, and then choose the **Release** action. - -For production orders, you automatically create the warehouse request for the picking of components, called *flushing*, when the production order status is changed to **Released** or when the released production order is created. For more information, see [How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md). - -After the warehouse request has been created, a warehouse employee assigned to picking items can see that the source document is ready to be picked and can create a new pick document based on the warehouse request. - -## To create an inventory pick based on the source document -Now that the request is created, the warehouse employee can create a new inventory pick based on the released source document. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Picks**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Source Document** field, select the type of source document you are picking for. -4. In the **Source No.** field, select the source document. -5. Alternatively, choose the **Get Source Document** action to select the document from a list of outbound source documents that are ready for picking at the location. -6. Choose the **OK** button to fill the pick lines according to the selected source document. - -## To create an inventory pick from the source document -1. In the source document, which can be a sales order, purchase return order, outbound transfer order, or production order, choose the **Create Inventory Put-away/Pick** action. -2. Select the **Create Invt. Pick** check box. -3. Choose the **OK** button. A new inventory pick will be created. - -## To create multiple inventory picks with a batch job -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Invt. Put-away / Pick**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Warehouse Request** FastTab, use the **Source Document** and **Source No.** fields to filter on certain types of documents or ranges of document numbers. For example, you can create picks only for sales orders. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **Create Invt. Pick** check box. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The specified inventory picks are created. - -> [!NOTE] -> If picking and shipping sales line quantities that are assembled to the order you should follow certain rules when creating the inventory pick lines. For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section. -> -> In basic warehouse configurations, items that are assembled to sales orders are picked from the related sales order, as explained in this topic. For more information, see “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” in Inventory Pick. - -## To record the inventory picks -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Pick**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Bin Code** field on the pick lines, the bin that the items must be picked from is suggesting per the item's default bin. You can change the bin in this window if necessary. -3. Perform the pick and enter the information for the actual quantity put away in the **Qty. to Handle** field. - - If it is necessary to pick the items for one line from more than one bin, for example because they are not available in the designated bin, then use the **Split Line** function on the **Lines** FastTab. For more information about splitting lines, see [How to: Split Warehouse Activity Lines](warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md). -4. When you have performed the pick, choose the **Post** action. - -The posting process will post the shipment of the source document lines that have been picked, or in the case of production orders, the posting process will post the consumption. If the location uses bins, the posting will also create warehouse entries to post the bin quantity changes. - -## To delete inventory pick lines -If items on the inventory pick are not available, then you can delete those inventory pick lines after posting and then delete the inventory pick document. The source document, such as a sales order or a production order, will have remaining items to be picked, which can be obtained through a new inventory pick later when the items become available. - -> [!WARNING] -> This process is not possible if serial/lot numbers are specified on the source document. For example, if a sales order line contains a serial/lot number, then that item tracking specification will be deleted if an inventory pick line for the serial/lot number is deleted. -> -> If inventory pick lines have serial/lot numbers that are not available, you must not delete the lines in question. Instead, you must change the **Qty. to Handle** field to zero, post the actual picks, and then delete the inventory pick document. This ensures that the inventory pick lines for those serial/lot numbers can be recreated from the sales order later. - -## Handling Assemble-to-Order Items with Inventory Picks -The **Inventory Pick** window is also used to pick and ship for sales where items must be assembled before they can be shipped. For more information, see [How to: Sell Items Assembled to Order](assembly-how-to-sell-items-assembled-to-order.md). - -Items to be shipped are not physically present in a bin until they are assembled and posted as output to a bin in the assembly area. This means that picking assemble-to-order items for shipment follows a special flow. From a bin, warehouse workers take the assembly items to the shipping dock and then post the inventory pick. The posted inventory pick then posts the assembly output, the component consumption, and the sales shipment. - -You can set up [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] to automatically create an inventory movement when the inventory pick for the assembly item is created. To enable this, you must select the **Create Movements Automatically** field in the **Assembly Setup** window. For more information, see [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehousing](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md). - -Inventory pick lines for sales items are created in different ways depending on whether none, some, or all of the sales line quantities are assembled to order. - -In regular sales where you use inventory picks to post shipment of inventory quantities, one inventory pick line, or several if the item is placed in different bins, is created for each sales order line. This pick line is based on the quantity in the **Qty. to Ship** field. - -In assemble-to-order sales where the full quantity on the sales order line is assembled to order, one inventory pick line is created for that quantity. This means that the value in the Quantity to Assemble field is the same as the value in the **Qty. to Ship** field. The **Assemble to Order** field is selected on the line. - -If an assembly output flow is set up for the location, then the value in the **Asm.-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** field or the value in the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field, in that order, is inserted in the **Bin Code** field on the inventory pick line. - -If no bin code is specified on the sales order line, and no assembly output flow is set up for the location, then the **Bin Code** field on the inventory pick line is empty. The warehouse worker must open the **Bin Contents** window and select the bin where the assembly items are assembled. - -In combination scenarios, where a part of the quantity must first be assembled and another must be picked from inventory, a minimum of two inventory pick lines are created. One pick line is for the assemble-to-order quantity. The other pick line depends on which bins can fulfill the remaining quantity from inventory. Bin codes on the two lines are filled in different ways as described for the two different sales types respectively. For more information, see the “Combination Scenarios” section in [Understanding Assemble to Order and Assemble to Stock](assembly-assemble-to-order-or-assemble-to-stock.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8ef5c5a4..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Plan Picks in Worksheets - description: If your warehouse is set up to require both pick and shipment processing, the warehouse can choose to operate so that the lines on shipment documents are not automatically transformed into pick instructions, but are made available instead to the pick worksheet. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/21/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Plan Picks in Worksheets -If your warehouse is set up to require both pick and shipment processing, the warehouse can choose to operate so that the lines on shipment documents are not automatically transformed into pick instructions, but are made available instead to the pick worksheet. - -> [!NOTE] -> If warehouse pick instructions have already been created, and you would like to combine them into one efficient pick instruction, then you must delete the individual warehouse picks. The lines to be picked can now be listed in the worksheet. - -In the pick worksheet, you can set up pick lists for employees that minimize the time the employee has to move about the warehouse picking items. There are fields that contain information about the quantities of items available in the cross-dock bins. This is useful in cross docking situations to plan your work assignments, because the program will always propose a pick from a cross-dock bin before any other bin, regardless of the unit of measure. The lines in the worksheet can come from a number of source documents and be sorted by item, shelf number, source document, due date, or ship-to address. - -If you sort by due date, you can choose to delete from the worksheet all lines except those that need immediate attention. The less urgent lines are not deleted as such, but just sent back to the **Pick Selection** worksheet. When you create the pick, the lines have already been sorted by due date, and you can choose to assign the pick to a particular employee. - -> [!NOTE] -> Picking for warehouse shipment of items that are assembled to the sales order being shipped follows the same steps as for regular warehouse picks for shipment, as described in this topic. However, the number of pick lines per quantity to ship may be many to one because you pick the components, not the assembly item. -> -> The warehouse pick lines are created for the value in the **Remaining Quantity** field on the lines of the assembly order that is linked to the sales order line that is being shipped. This ensures that all components are picked in one action. -> -> For more information, see “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Warehouse Shipments” in Warehouse Shipment. -> -> For information about picking components for assembly orders generally, including situations where the assembly item is not due on a sales shipment, see [How to: Pick for Assembly or Production in Advanced Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-internal-operations-in-advanced-warehousing.md). - -## To plan picks in the worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Pick Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Whse. Documents** action. -3. Select the shipments for which you want to prepare a pick. You can now sort the lines to some degree, but the sorting you do here will not be carried through to the pick instruction. You can also delete some of the lines to make a more effective pick. For instance, if there are a number of lines with items in cross-dock bins, you might want to create a pick for all the lines associated with these lines. The cross-docked items will be shipped, along with the other items on the shipments, and the cross-dock bins will have space for more incoming items. -4. Choose the **Create Pick** action, and fill in the **Create Pick** request window. The sorting you request here will order the pick lines you create. For example, you can create one pick for each zone and sort the lines by bin ranking within each pick. -5. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Picks**, and then choose the related link. The **Picks** window opens. -6. You can now find the pick assignment you just created by selecting the pick with the highest number. -7. In the pick, you can still alter, if necessary, the assigned user ID and the way the lines are sorted. -8. Choose the **Print** action to print the pick instructions. -9. After you have performed the pick, choose the **Register** action. - -If the bins have been numbered in a way that mirrors the physical layout of the warehouse, the lines sorted by bin code allow the picker to pick for a number of shipments in one round of the warehouse. The worker takes the required number of items for each shipment line out of each bin and places them along with the other items for the particular shipment. A picker can save a great deal of time by picking for several shipments in one visit to a bin. - -Another effective sorting option is bin ranking, if the physical layout of the warehouse is more according to bin ranking than bin code. - -In the pick worksheet, you can also sort by ship-to address, enabling you to assemble and ship the orders to far-away customers first. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets.md deleted file mode 100644 index 84b95a68..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Plan Put-aways in Worksheets - description: If your location requires both put-away and receive processing, and you want to plan put-away instructions for a number of receipts, rather than have employees follow the instructions that the program creates for separate posted receipts, you can use the put-away worksheet. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/10/2018 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Plan Put-aways in Worksheets -If your location requires both put-away and receive processing, and you want to plan put-away instructions for a number of receipts, rather than have employees follow the instructions that the program creates for separate posted receipts, you can use the put-away worksheet. - -To set up your warehouse so that receipt lines are available to you in the put-away worksheet as soon as they are posted, select the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field on the **Warehouse** FastTab of the location card. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -If you do not select this field, the program will automatically create put-away instructions for receipts as they are posted. - -> [!NOTE] -> Regardless of the status of the **Use Put-away Worksheet** field on the location card, you can always get put-away instruction lines, that is, posted receipt lines, into the put-away worksheet by doing the following: -> -> 1. In the **Warehouse Put-away** window, press Ctrl+D to delete the entire put-away instruction, or select the lines that you want to process in the worksheet and delete them. -> 2. Continue the process in as many put-aways as you wish, until you have deleted the lines you want to work on in the worksheet. Now choose **Put-away Worksheets** and proceed with planning. - -## To plan instructions in the put-away worksheet -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Put-away Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Warehouse Documents** action. The **Put-away Selection** window opens. - - You see all the posted receipts and registered internal put-aways that have been forwarded to the put-away function, including those for which put-away instructions have already been created. Documents with put-away lines that have been completely put away and registered are not shown on this list. - -3. Select the documents that you want to work on in the worksheet. You can work on lines from several documents at the same time. - - > [!NOTE] - > If you try to select a receipt or internal put-away document for which you have already created instructions for all its lines, the program informs you that there is nothing to handle. - -4. Fill in the **Sorting Method** field to sort the lines the way you prefer. - - > [!NOTE] - > The way the lines are sorted in the worksheet does not carry through automatically to the put-away instruction, but the same sorting possibilities exist, along with bin ranking. The line order you plan in the worksheet is thus easily recreated when you create the put-away instructions or by sorting in the put-away instructions. - -5. Fill in the **Qty. to Handle** field. Choose the **Autofill Qty.to Handle** action, or fill in the fields manually. -6. If necessary, edit the lines manually. You can delete lines, for example, if some items need to be put away in a bin far away from the bins for the other items. - - > [!NOTE] - > Lines deleted are only deleted from this worksheet, not from the put-away selection list. - -7. Choose the **Create Put-away** action. The **Create Document** window opens, where you can add more information to the put-away you are creating, as follows: - - - You can assign the put-away to a specific employee. - - You can sort the put-away instruction lines as you did in the worksheet or by bin ranking. When you sort according to bin ranking, the Take lines appear first, since most receipt bins have a 0 bin ranking, and the Place lines appear last, starting with the bins with the lowest bin ranking. If you have structured your warehouse so bins of similar bin ranking are side by side, sorting lines in this way will ultimately save steps for your warehouse employees. - - You can choose not to see the intermediate lines created when the program breaks a larger unit of measure to smaller units of measure by selecting the **Set Breakbulk Filter** field. For more information, see [How to: Enable Automatic Breaking Bulk with Directed Put-away and Pick](warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick.md). - - You can choose not to have the **Qty. to Handle** field automatically filled in on the put-away instructions. - - You can choose to print the document immediately. - -8. Choose the **OK** button, and the program creates the put-away according to your requests. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-warehouse-movements-in-worksheets.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-warehouse-movements-in-worksheets.md deleted file mode 100644 index ac11853e..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-plan-warehouse-movements-in-worksheets.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Plan Warehouse Movements in Worksheets - description: Plan movements in the worksheet using a bin replenishment function or manually planning the lines that you want to create as movement instructions. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Plan Warehouse Movements in Worksheets -Plan movements in the worksheet using a bin replenishment function or manually planning the lines that you want to create as movement instructions. - -## To calculate a replenishment movement -As the warehouse ships items out to customers, the bins with the highest bin rankings contain fewer and fewer items. To fill up these high-ranking pick bins with items from other bins, run the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** function in the **Movement Worksheet** window - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Movement Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** action. - - [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] creates lines that indicate precisely how you should move items from the low-ranking bins to the higher-ranking bins. - - > [!NOTE] - > A movement is suggested according to FEFO when you activate the **Create Movement** function if the following conditions are met for an item: - > - > - The item has an expiration date. - > - The **Pick According to FEFO** check box on the location card is selected. - > - The **Bin Mandatory** check box on the location card is selected. - > - The **From Zone** and **From Bin** fields are blank. - - For more information, see [Picking by FEFO](warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md). - -3. Look through the lines and change them if necessary, or delete some of them if there is not enough time to perform them all. -4. Choose the **Create Movement** action to make a warehouse instruction for action by warehouse employees. - -## To move the entire contents of one or more bins by using the Get Bin Content function -You can also use the movement worksheet to plan other movement of inventory within the warehouse. For example, when you want to place items in a bin for quality control, you can use the movement worksheet to plan this action and then create a movement to make instructions for an employee. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Movement Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Get Bin Content** action. Use the request window to filter which bins and items you want to appear on the movement worksheet lines. -3. Fill in the relevant fields in the batch job request window. For example, if you want to see the bin content of all the bins in a certain zone at the location, fill in the **Zone Code** field. If you want to retrieve lines for each bin that contains a particular item, fill in the **Item No.** field. - - > [!NOTE] - > You cannot manually move items in or out of a bin of bin type RECEIVE, because items that are in a RECEIVE-type bin must be registered as being put away before they are part of available inventory. - -4. If you are retrieving many lines, choose **Sort** to select a sorting method to determine the order the lines will appear in the worksheet, and then choose the **OK** button. - - > [!NOTE] - > Movement lines are retrieved according to FEFO when you activate the **Get Bin Content** function if the following conditions are met for an item: - > - > - The item has an expiration date. - > - The **Pick According to FEFO** check box on the location card is selected. - > - The **Bin Mandatory** check box on the location card is selected. - > - The **From Zone** and **From Bin** fields are blank. - -5. Complete some of the retrieved lines to reflect the changes you want to make. For each item that you want to move, you must fill in the **Item No.**, **From Bin Code**, **To Bin Code**, and **Quantity** fields. -6. Delete the incomplete lines that you used for information. -7. Once the movement worksheet lines accurately reflect how the movement action should be carried out by the warehouse employee, choose the **Create Movement** action to create the instructions for the employee. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7f90c4ba..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Put Away Production Output - description: How you put away your output from production depends on how your warehouse is set up as a location. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Put Away Production or Assembly Output -How you put away your output from production depends on how your warehouse is set up as a location. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -In basic warehouse configurations where the location requires put-away processing, but not receive processing, you use the **Inventory Put-away** document to organize and record the put-away of output. - -In advanced warehouse configurations where the location requires both put-away and receive processing, you create either an internal put-away document or a movement document to put away the output. - -The first step in creating putting output away is to create the inbound warehouse request. This request informs the warehouse that the production or assembly order output is ready to be put away. - -## To create the inbound warehouse request -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Released Production Order**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the production order that is ready for put-away, choose the **Create Inbound Whse. Request** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also create the inbound warehouse request by selecting the **Create Inbound Request** check box when you refresh the production order. For more information, see [How to: Refresh or Replan Production Orders](production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md). - -## To put output away with an inventory put-away -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Put-away**, and then choose the related link. -2. Create a new inventory put-away. For more information, see [How to: Put Items Away with Inventory Put-aways](warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md). -3. To access the production order output, choose the **Get Source Documents** action, and then select the released production order. -4. Fill in the put-away lines as appropriate. -5. When the lines are ready for posting, choose the **Post** action. The posting will create the necessary warehouse entries and post the output of the items. - -You can also create an **Inventory Put-away** directly from the released production order. For more information, see [How to: Put Items Away with Inventory Put-aways](warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md). - -When you post an inventory put-away, it is assumed that all the operations are posted according to the standard routing, that is, output quantity is posted according to the last operation. You can use the output journal to post variances in output quantity and the setup and run times. If it is required to post partially after you have created the inventory put-away, you can do so on setup times and quantities for all operations except the last one. In that case, the last operation is controlled by the inventory put-away. - -If you only need to post setup or run time on the last operation, then set the output quantity on the last operation to 0. Alternatively, you can choose not to post the last line at all by simply deleting it - -## To put output away with a warehouse internal put-away -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Whse. Internal Put-away**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Fill in the header of a new internal put-away with at least the **Location Code**. -4. Fill in a line for each item you wish to move to the warehouse. You only have to fill in the **Item No.** and the **Quantity** fields. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you select the **Item No.** field, the **Bin Contents List** opens instead of the **Item List**. This is because you want to put away an item that is in a particular bin - a Bin Content - not just an item, and you already know the bin the item should be taken from. - -4. To fill the worksheet lines with the entire bin content or the filtered bin content of bins in the location, choose the **Get Bin Content** action. -5. Choose the **Create Put-away** action, and the items you want to move out of production are now on put-away instructions waiting to be stored in the warehouse. - -> [!NOTE] -> When your warehouse location is set up to use directed put-away and pick, the warehouse is linked to your manufacturing facility through the default production bins: the inbound and outbound production bins and the open shop bin, all of which you define on the **Bins** FastTab of the location card. When you post the output of a production order, the output is placed in the **Outbound Production Bin**. You follow the same procedure as described above to put-away the production output, except that instead of using the item's default bin, you will move or put-away the items from the **Outbound Production Bin** to the item's default bin. - -## To manually specify a bin to store items from production output -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Movement Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. Fill in the header, and create a line for each item you wish to move to the warehouse. -3. Fill in both the **From Bin Code** and the **To Bin Code** fields, and enter the quantity in the **Quantity** field. -4. To fill the worksheet lines with the entire bin content or the filtered bin content of bins in the location, choose the **Get Bin Content** action. -5. Choose the **Create Movement** action. The warehouse movement instructions are created with Take and Place lines for warehouse employees to perform. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot enter the source document number, such as the Production Order No., in the internal put-away, put-away, or movement documents for either of these procedures. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md deleted file mode 100644 index ea5d9bb0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Put Items Away with Inventory Put-aways - description: When your location is setup to require put-away processing but not receive processing, you use the **Inventory Put-away** document to record and post put-away and receipt information for your source documents. The inbound source document can be a purchase order, a sales return order, an inbound transfer order, or a production order whose output is ready for put-away. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/31/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Put Items Away with Inventory Put-aways -When your location is set up to require put-away processing but not receive processing, you use the **Inventory Put-away** document to record and post put-away and receipt information for your source documents. The inbound source document can be a purchase order, a sales return order, an inbound transfer order, or an assembly or production order whose output is ready to be put away. - -You can create an inventory put-away in three ways: - -- Create the put-away in two steps by first creating a warehouse request from the source document, which acts as a signal to the warehouse that the source document is ready for put-away. The inventory put-away can then be created from the **Inventory Put-away** window based on the source document. -- Create the inventory put-away directly from the source document itself. -- Create inventory put-aways for several source documents at once by using a batch job. - -## To request an inventory put-away by releasing the source document -For purchase orders, sales return orders, inbound transfer orders, and assembly orders, you create the warehouse request by releasing the order. The following describes how to do this from a purchase order. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Purchase Orders**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the purchase order that you want to release, and then choose the **Release** action. - - For production orders, you create the warehouse request by creating an inbound request from the released production order. -3. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Released Production Orders**, and then choose the related link. -4. Choose the **Create Inbound Whse. Request** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can also create the inbound warehouse request by selecting the **Create Inbound Request** check box when you refresh the production order. For more information, see [How to: Refresh or Replan Production Orders](production-how-to-replan-refresh-production-orders.md). - -When the warehouse request is created, a warehouse employee assigned to putting items away can see that the source document is ready and can create an inventory put-away document. - -## To create an inventory put-away based on the source document -Now that the request is created, the warehouse employee can create a new inventory put-away based on the released source document. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Inventory Put-away**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Source Document** field, select the type of source document you are putting away for. -4. In the **Source No.** field, select the source document. -5. Alternatively, choose the **Get Source Document** action to select the document from a list of inbound source documents that are ready for put-away at the location. -6. Choose the **OK** button to fill the put-away lines according to the selected source document. - -## To create an inventory put-away from the source document -1. In the source document, which can be a purchase order, sales return order, inbound transfer order, or production order, choose the **Create Inventory Put-away/Pick** action. -2. Select the **Create Invt. Put-away** check box. -3. Choose the **OK** button. A new inventory put-away is created. - -## To create multiple inventory put-aways with a batch job -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Create Invt. Put-away / Pick**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Warehouse Request** FastTab of the request window, use the **Source Document** and **Source No.** fields to filter on certain types of documents or ranges of document numbers. -3. On the **Options** FastTab, select the **Create Invt. Put-away** check box. -4. Choose the **OK** button. The specified inventory put-aways are created. - -## To record the inventory put-away -1. Open a previously created put-away document by selecting one from the **Inventory Put-aways** window. -2. In the **Bin Code** field on the put-away lines, the bin where the items must be put away is suggesting per the item's default bin. You can change the bin in this window if necessary. -3. Perform the put-away and enter the information for the actual quantity put away in the **Qty. to Handle** field. - - If it is necessary to place the items for one line in more than one bin, for example because the designated bin is full, then use the **Split Line** function on the **Lines** FastTab. For more information about splitting lines, see [How to: Split Warehouse Activity Lines](warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md). -4. When you have performed the put-away, choose the **Post** action. - -The posting process will post the receipt, or for production orders, the output, of the source document lines that have been put away, and if the location uses bins, the posting will also create warehouse entries to post the bin quantity changes. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways.md deleted file mode 100644 index 58e5dbb0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Put Items Away with Warehouse Put-aways - description: When your location is set up to require warehouse put-away processing and warehouse receive processing, you use the warehouse put-away documents function to control the putting away of items. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/31/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Put Items Away with Warehouse Put-aways -When your location is set up to require warehouse put-away processing and warehouse receive processing, you use the warehouse put-away documents function to control the putting away of items. - -When you post a warehouse receipt, the source documents, such as purchase, inbound transfer, or sales return orders, are updated, the quantity received is posted to the item ledger, and the lines about the items received are sent to the put-away function in the warehouse. If you have internal put-away and pick, the internal put-away can also create lines for put-away. - -Depending on the warehouse setup, the lines are either made available to the put-away worksheet or used to generate put-away instructions immediately. For more information, see [How to: Plan Put-aways in Worksheets](warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets.md). - -In addition to the standard ways to create warehouse put-aways that are described in this topic, you can create the put-away from the related posted warehouse receipt. This is useful if you have deleted put-away lines, or if you use directed put-away and pick and have decided not to use the put-away worksheet, because you can create or recreate put-away instructions from the posted receipt lines. - -## To put items away without directed put-away and pick -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Put-aways**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the warehouse put-away that is ready to handle. - - You can sort the put-away lines by various criteria, for example, by item, shelf number, or due date, and thereby optimize the put-away process. -3. On each line, in the **Qty. to Handle** field, enter the quantity you want to put away. -4. After you have completed putting the items away, choose the **Register Put-away** action to record the completion of the activity and make the items available for picking. - -## To put items away with directed put-away and pick -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Put-aways**, and then choose the related link. - If put-away instructions have been created, a warehouse put-away is visible. -2. Open the warehouse put-away that you want to work on. -3. If your warehouse requires, enter your user ID on the **General** FastTab when you begin work on a particular put-away. -4. Perform the take and place actions indicated in the **Action Type** field on the lines. - - Note that each receipt line has become at least two lines in the warehouse put-away: - - - The first line, with **Take** in the **Action Type** field, indicates where the items are located in the receiving area. You cannot change the zone and bin field on this line. - - The next line, with **Place** in the **Action Type** field, shows where you must place the items in warehouse storage. If the warehouse has received a large number of items on one receipt line, they may have to be put away in several bins, so there is a Place line for each bin. - - If the Take and Place lines for each receipt line do not immediately follow one another, and you want them to do so, you can sort the lines by selecting **Item** in the **Sorting Method** field on the **General** FastTab. - - If the physical layout of the warehouse reflects the bin rankings, you can use the **Bin Ranking** sorting method to prepare a put-away round that will minimize your steps through the warehouse. - -5. When you have placed all the items in bins as instructed, choose the **Register Put-away** action. - -At locations that are set up to use directed put-away and pick, the following settings are prerequisites for the procedure above: - -- A put-away template is set up. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Put-away Templates](warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md). -- The weight, cubage, and special storage requirements of the item or stockkeeping unit are defined. For more information, see Gross Weight. -- The capacity, bin type, and bin ranking of the bins. For more information, see Bin Ranking. - -The bin ranking is taken into consideration when more than one bin matches put-away template criteria. If both the put-away template criteria and the bin ranking are the same for more than one bin, the bin with the highest number is selected. - -## To create a put-away from a posted receipt - If your location uses both put-away processing and receive processing and you have deleted put-away lines, or if you use directed put-away and pick and have decided not to use the put-away worksheet, you can create or recreate put-away instructions for the posted receipt lines. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Posted Whse. Receipts**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a posted receipt that might need to be put away. -3. Choose the **Card** action. - - If the **Document Status** field is blank, the receipt has not been put away at all. Otherwise, the field indicates the receipt is partially put-away or completely put-away. - -4. If the receipt is partially put away or not put away at all, choose the **Create Put-away** action. -5. Fill in the batch job request window to create the put-away, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses.md deleted file mode 100644 index 9f899ca1..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Restructure Warehouses - description: You may want to restructure your warehouse with new bin codes and new bin characteristics. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Restructure Warehouses -You may want to restructure your warehouse with new bin codes and new bin characteristics. You will not undertake this kind of activity very often, but situations can occur where a reclassification is necessary to achieve or maintain a more efficient operation. For example: - -- You might want to switch to bin codes that support the use of automatic data capture, for example, with hand-held devices. -- The warehouse may have purchased a new rack system that gives new possibilities in item storage. -- The company may have altered its item assortment and moved the warehouse to a new physical location to accommodate this change. - -If your warehouse is set up to use bins but not directed put-away and pick, restructure your warehouse by creating the new bins that you want to use in the future. - -## To restructure a basic warehouse that uses bins only -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, set the **Default Bin Selection** field to **Last-Used Bin**. -3. Move all the contents of your current bins to the new bins that you have just created. - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Item Reclassification Journal**, and then choose the related link. - 2. Select a journal line, and then choose the **Get Bin Content** action. - 3. On the **Bin Content** FastTab, set filters in the **Location Code**, **Bin Code**, and **Item No.** fields to specify the content that you want to move. - 4. Choose the **OK** button to fill a journal line. - 5. In the **New Bin Code** field, select the bin to which the items should be moved. - 6. Repeat steps b through e for all bin content that you want to move. - 7. Choose the **Post** action. - -You have now emptied the bins where the items used to be. The default bins for your items have now been changed to the new bins. - -## To restructure an advanced warehouse that uses directed put-away and pick - -1. Create the new bins that you want to use in the future. For more information, see [How to: Create Bins](warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md). -2. Move all the contents of your current bins to the new bins that you just created. - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Reclassification Journal**, and then choose the related link. - 2. For the bins where no real movement of items is involved, create a line for each of your current bins in the **Warehouse Reclassification Journal** with the old bin code, **From Bin Code**, and the new bin code, **To Bin Code**. - 3. If some of the movements involve actual physical movements that you want employees to perform, use **Movement Worksheets** to prepare movement instructions instead of using the warehouse reclassification journal. For more information, see [How to: Move Items in Advanced Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md). - -3. When the old bins are emptied, reclassify them as **QC** type bins to ensure that they are not included in item flows. - - 1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. - 2. Select the line with the location, and then choose the **Bins** action. - 3. In the **Bins** window, in the **Bin Type Code** field, enter **QC** for each of the old bins that you emptied in step 3 in the previous procedure. - -You have now removed the bins from the warehouse flow, and reclassified them as QC bins. QC bins have none of the activity fields in the **Bin Types** window selected and are therefore not considered by the item flow. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bin Types](warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md). - -## To delete a bin - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the location where you want to delete bins. Choose the **Bins** action. -3. Select the lines for the bins that you want to delete. -4. Choose the **Delete** action. - -If you choose the **Yes** button, the bin is deleted for use in the future, but the bin code in all warehouse entries remains the same. - -If you want to rename a bin so that all records associated with the bin are also renamed, including bin contents, warehouse activity lines, registered warehouse activity lines, warehouse worksheet lines, warehouse receipt lines, posted warehouse receipt lines, warehouse shipment lines, posted warehouse shipment lines, and warehouse entries, you can do so in the **Bins** window. - -## To rename a bin and change the bin code in all records - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the location where you want to rename a bin or change the bin code, and then choose the **Bins** action. -3. Select the bin that you want to change and enter a new bin code in the **Code** field. -4. Choose the **Yes** button. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you choose **Yes** and there are many entries concerning this bin, for example, because you have not deleted warehouse documents for some time, it may take some time to rename all the records. Therefore, if you use this method, consider running the batch job **Delete Registered Whse. Documents** before you start the renaming process. Also note that the only documents that are deleted in this batch job are put-aways, picks, and movements. -> -> If you are renaming a receiving bin or a shipping bin, all the posted receipts or shipments that refer to the bin in question are renamed. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md deleted file mode 100644 index 843fbcfa..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operations Areas - description: If internal operation areas such as production or assembly exist in basic warehouse configurations where locations use the **Bin Mandatory** setup field and possibly the **Require Pick** and **Require Put-away** setup fields, then you use three basic warehouse documents to record your warehouse activities for internal operation areas. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operations Areas -If internal operation areas such as production or assembly exist in basic warehouse configurations where locations use the **Bin Mandatory** setup field and possibly the **Require Pick** and **Require Put-away** setup fields, then you can use the following basic warehouse documents to record your warehouse activities for internal operation areas: - -- **Inventory Movement** window. -- **Inventory Pick** window. -- **Inventory Put-away** window. - -> [!NOTE] -> Even though the settings are called **Require Pick** and **Require Put-away**, you can still post receipts and shipments directly from the source business documents at locations where you select these check boxes. - -To use these windows with internal operations, such as to pick and move components to production, you must make some or all the following setup steps depending on how much control you need: - -- Enable the inventory pick, move, and put-away documents. -- Define default bin structures for components and end items flowing to and from operation resources. -- Make to- and from- bins that are dedicated to specific operation resources to prevent the items from being picked for outbound documents. - -Bin codes that are set up on location cards define a default warehouse flow for certain activities, such as components in an assembly department. Additional functionality exists to make sure that when items are placed in a certain bin, they cannot be moved or picked to other activities. For more information, see the "To create dedicated component bins" section. - -The following procedures are based on setting up basic warehouse activities around a production area. The steps are similar for other operation areas, such as assembly, service management, and jobs. - -> [!NOTE] -> In the following procedure, the **Bin Mandatory** setup field on location cards is selected as a precondition because that is considered the foundation for any level of warehouse management. - -## To enable inventory documents for internal operation activities -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the location card you want to set up. -3. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, select the **Require Put-away** check box to indicate that, when an inbound or internal source document with a bin code is released, an inventory put-away or an inventory movement document can be created. -4. Select the **Require Pick** check box to indicate that when an outbound or internal source document with a bin code is created, an inventory pick or an inventory movement document must be created. - -## To define a default bin structure in the production area -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the Location you want to set up. -3. On the **Bins** FastTab, in the **Open Shop Floor Bin Code** field, enter the code of the bin in the production area with plenty of components that the machine operator can consume from without requesting a warehouse activity to bring them to the bin. Items that are placed in this bin are typically set up for automatic posting, or flushing. This means that the **Flushing Method** field contains **Forward** or **Backward**. -4. In the **To-Production Bin Code** field, enter the code of the bin in the production area where components that are picked for production at this location are placed by default before they can be consumed. Items that are placed in this bin are typically set up for manual consumption posting. This means that the **Flushing Method** field contains **Manual** or **Pick + Forward** or **Pick + Backward** for warehouse picks and inventory movements. - - > [!NOTE] - > When you use inventory picks, the **Bin Code** field on a production order component line defines the *take* bin from where components are decreased when posting consumption. When you use inventory movements, the **Bin Code** field on production order component lines defines the *place* bin in the operation area where the warehouse worker must place the components. - -5. On the **Bins** FastTab, in the **From-Production Bin Code** field, enter the code of the bin in the production area where finished end items are taken from by default when the process involves a warehouse activity. In basic warehouse configurations, the activity is recorded as an inventory put-away or an inventory movement. - -Now, production order component lines with the default bin code require that forward-flushed components are placed there. However, until the components are consumed from that bin, other component demands may pick or consume from that bin because they are still considered available bin contents. To make sure that bin content is only available to component demand that uses that to-production bin, you must select the **Dedicated** field on the line for that bin code in the **Bins** window that you open from the location card. - -This flow chart shows how the **Bin Code** field on production order component lines is filled according to your setup. - -![Bin flow chart](media/binflow.png "BinFlow") - -## To define a default bin structure in the assembly area -Components for assembly orders cannot be picked or posted with inventory picks. Instead, use the **Inventory Movement** window. For more information, see [How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehousing](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md). - -When picking and shipping sales line quantities that are assembled to the order, you must follow certain rules when creating the inventory pick lines. For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section in [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -For more information, see [Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md). - -### To set up that an inventory movement is automatically created when the inventory pick for the assembly item is created -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Assembly Setup**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the **Create Movements Automatically** check box. - -### To set up the bin in the assembly area where components are placed by default before they can be consumed in assembly -The value in this field is automatically inserted in the **Bin Code** field on assembly order lines when this location is entered in the **Location Code** field on the assembly order line. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the Location you want to set up. -3. Fill in the **To-Assembly Bin Code** field. - -### To set up the bin in the assembly area where finished assembly items are posted to when they are assembled to stock -The value in this field is automatically inserted in the **Bin Code** field on assembly order headers when this location code is filled into the **Location Code** field on the assembly order header. - -Bin codes that are set up on location cards define a default warehouse flow for specific warehouse activities, such as consumption of components in an assembly area. Additional functionality exists to make sure that when items are placed in a default bin, they cannot be moved or picked to other activities. - -> [!NOTE] -> This setup is only possible for locations where the Bin Mandatory field is selected. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the Location you want to set up. -3. Fill in the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field. - -### To set up the bin where finished assembly items are posted to when they are assembled to a linked sales order -From this bin, the assembly items are shipped immediately, via an inventory pick, to fulfill the sales order. - -> [!NOTE] -> This field cannot be used if the location is set up to use directed pick and put-away. - -The bin code is copied from the sales order line to the assembly order header to communicate to assembly workers where to place the output to ready it for shipping. It is also copied to the inventory pick line to communicate to warehouse workers where to take it from to ship it. - -> [!NOTE] -> The Assemble-to-Order Shipment bin is always empty. When you post an assemble-to-order sales line, then the bin content is first positively adjusted with the assembly output. Immediately after, it is negatively adjusted with the shipped quantity. - -The value in this field is automatically inserted in the Bin Code field on sales order lines that contain a quantity in the **Qty. to Assemble to Order** field or if the item to be sold has **Assemble-to-Order** in the **Replenishment System** field. - -If the **Asm.-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** is blank, then the **From-Assembly Bin Code** field is used instead. If both setup fields are blank, then the last used bin with content is used in the **Bin Code** field on sales order lines. - -The same bin code is in turn copied to the **Bin Code** field on the inventory pick line that manages the shipment of the assemble-to-order quantity. For more information, see the “Handling Assemble-to-Order Items in Inventory Picks” section in [How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the Location you want to set up. -3. Fill in the **Asm.-to-Order Shpt. Bin Code** field. - -## To create dedicated component bins -You can specify that quantities in a bin are protected from being picked for other demands than demand from their current purpose. - -Quantities in dedicated bins can still be reserved. Accordingly, the quantities in dedicated bins are included in the **Total Available Quantity** field in the **Reservation** window. - -For example, is a work center is set up with a bin code in the **To-Production Bin Code** field. Production order component lines with that bin code require that forward-flushed components are placed there. However, until the components are consumed from that bin, other component demands may pick or consume from that bin because they are still considered available bin contents. To make sure that bin content is only available to component demand that uses that to-production bin, you must select the **Dedicated** field on the line for that bin code in the **Bins** window that you open from the location card. - -Making a bin dedicated provides similar functionality to using bin types, which is only available in advanced warehousing. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bin Types](warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md). - -> [!Caution] -> Items in dedicated bins are not protected when they are picked and consumed as production components with the Inventory Pick window. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. Select the location that you want to update. -2. Choose the **Bins** action. -3. Select the **Dedicated** field for each bin that you want to use exclusively for certain internal operations and where you want quantities to be reserved for that internal operation once placed there. - -> [!NOTE] -> The bin must be empty before you can select or clear the **Dedicated** field. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-contents.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-contents.md deleted file mode 100644 index 31462bdc..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-contents.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Create Bin Contents - description: After you have set up your bins, you can set up the bin contents. In other words, you can set up the items you want to store in any given bin and set the rules that govern filling the bin with a particular item. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Create Bin Contents -After you have set up your bins, you can set up the bin contents. In other words, you can set up the items you want to store in any given bin and set the rules that govern filling the bin with a particular item. You can do this manually in the **Bin Contents** window or automatically with the **Create Bin Content Worksheet** window. - -## To create bin content manually -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the location where you want to set up bin contents, and then choose the **Bins** action. -3. Select the bin where you want to set up contents, and then choose the **Contents** action. -4. For each item that you want to store in the bin, fill in a line in the **Bin Contents** window with the appropriate information. Some of the fields are filled in already with information about the bin. -5. First fill in the **Item No.** field, and then, if you are using directed put-away and pick, fill in the other fields such as the **Unit of Measure Code**, **Max. Qty.**, and **Min. Qty.** fields. - -Select the **Fixed** field if necessary. If the bin is to be used as the default bin for the item, select the **Default Bin** field. - -If you are using directed put-away and pick, and if you have entered the correct dimensional information on the item card about each item’s units of measure, the maximum quantity that you enter in the **Bin Contents** window is verified against the physical capabilities of the bin. The minimum and maximum quantities are used when calculating bin replenishment and suggested put-aways. - -If you select the **Fixed** field, you are fixing the item to the bin, meaning that [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] will try to put this item in the bin if there is space for it, and it will preserve the record fixing the item to the bin even when the quantity in the bin is 0. Other items can be put into the bin, even though a particular item has been fixed to the bin. - -> [!NOTE] -> You can set up several bin contents at the same time in the **Bin Content Creation Worksheet** window. - -## To create bin content with a worksheet -When you have created your bins, you can create the bin content that you want for each bin in the bin content creation worksheet. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bin Content Creation Worksheet**, and then choose the related link. -2. On the worksheet header, in the **Name** field, select the worksheet of the location where you want to create bin contents. -3. In the **Bin Code** field, select the code of the bin for which you want to define bin content. - - If you are using directed put-away and pick in this location, the fields relating to that particular bin, such as **Bin Type**, **Warehouse Class Code**, and **Bin Ranking**, will be filled in automatically. This is information that you need to consider as you define the bin content. -4. Select the item that you want to assign to the bin, and fill in the fields related to the bin content. If you are using directed put-away and pick, and you want to use the **Calculate Bin Replenishment** function, fill in the **Max. Qty.** and **Min. Qty.** fields. - - To set this bin as the preferred bin for the item even if the bin quantity is **0** and all other put-away criteria equal, select the **Fixed** field. -5. Repeat steps 3 through 4 for each item you want to assign to a bin. -6. Choose the **Print** action to preview and print the bin content you have entered in the worksheet. Continue to revise the bin content until you are satisfied. -7. When you are ready, choose the **Create Bin Content** action. - -In this worksheet, you can work with a number of bin content lines for a number of bins and thereby obtain a good overview of what you are putting into various bins in a given zone, aisle, or rack. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Calculate Bin Replenishment](warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment.md) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md deleted file mode 100644 index eab47f5c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Bin Types - description: You can direct the flow of items through bins that you have defined for particular warehouse activities. You give each bin its basic flow activities, and thereby define the way the way a bin is used, by assigning it a bin type. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Bin Types -You can direct the flow of items through bins that you have defined for particular warehouse activities. You give each bin its basic flow activities, and thereby define the way the way a bin is used, by assigning it a bin type. - -There are eight bin types. You can operate your warehouse with all of the eight possible bin types, or you can choose to operate with just the RECEIVE, PUTPICK, SHIP and QC bin types. These four bin types enable suggestions to be made that support the flow of items and allow you to record inventory discrepancies. - -## To set up the bin types you want to use -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Bin Types**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Bin Types** window, create a 10-character code for a bin type. -3. Select the activities that can be performed with each bin type. - -> [!NOTE] -> Bin types are only applicable if you are using directed put-away and pick for your location. - -The bin type determines only how a bin is used when processing the flow of items through the warehouse. You can always override the suggestions for any warehouse document, and you can move items in or out of any bin by performing a warehouse movement. - -The bin types that you can create are listed below. - -|Bin Type|Description| -|------------------|---------------------------------------| -|RECEIVE|Items registered as posted receipts but not yet put away.| -|SHIP|Items picked for warehouse shipment lines but not yet posted as shipped.| -|PUT AWAY|Typically, items to be stored in large units of measure but that you do not want to access for picking purposes. Because these bins are not used for picking, either for production orders or shipments, your use of a Put Away type bin might be limited, but this bin type could be useful if you have purchased a large quantity of items. Bins of this type should always have a low bin-ranking, so that when received items are put away, other higher-ranking PUTPICK bins fixed to the item are put away first. If you are using this type of bin, you must regularly perform bin replenishment so that the items stored in these bins are also available in PUTPICK or PICK type bins.| -|PICK|Items to be used only for picking, for example, for items with an approaching expiration date that you have moved into this type of bin. You would place a high bin ranking on these bins so they are suggested for picking first.| -|PUTPICK|Items in bins that are suggested for both the put-away and pick functions. Bins of this type probably have different bin rankings. You can set up your bulk storage bins as this type of bin with low bin rankings compared to your ordinary pick bins or forward picking area bins.| -|QC|This bin is used for inventory adjustments if you specify this bin on the location card in the **Adjustment Bin Code** field. You can also set up bins of this type for defective items and items being inspected. You can move items to this type of bin if you want to make them inaccessible to the usual item flow.

**NOTE:** Unlike all other bin types, the **QC** bin type has none of the item handling check boxes selected by default. This indicates that any content you place in a QC bin is excluded from item flows.| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-items-for-directed-put-away-and-pick.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-items-for-directed-put-away-and-pick.md deleted file mode 100644 index c6ee0d4a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-items-for-directed-put-away-and-pick.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Items and Locations for Directed Put-away and Pick - description: When you set up a warehouse location for directed put-away and pick, you have new functionality available to you to help run the warehouse in the most efficient way possible. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Items and Locations for Directed Put-away and Pick -When you set up a warehouse location for directed put-away and pick, you have new functionality available to you to help run the warehouse in the most efficient way possible. In order to make full use of this functionality, you provide additional information about the items, which in turn helps to make the calculations necessary to suggest the most efficient and effective ways to conduct warehouse activities. For more information, see [Design Details: Warehouse Setup](design-details-warehouse-setup.md). - -## To set up an item for directed put-away and pick -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Open the card for the item that you want to set up for directed put-away and pick. -3. On the **Warehouse** FastTab of the item card, fill in the fields to define how the item should be handled in the warehouse. -4. Choose the **Units of Measure** action. -5. In the **Item Units of Measure** window, fill in the fields to define the different units of measure in which the item may be transacted, including the height, width, length, cubage, and weight for the unit of measure. -6. Choose the **Bin Contents** action. -7. In the **Bin Contents** window, define the location and bin to which the item should be associated. The **Default** field is not used when the location is set up for directed put-away and pick. - -## To activate directed put away and pick functionality -Directed put-away and pick gives you access to advanced warehouse configuration features that can greatly enhance your efficiency and data reliability. In order to use this functionality, you must first set up a number of parameters in your warehouse location. - -To use the directed put-away and pick functionality, you must activate the functionality on the location card. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the location where you want to use directed put-away and pick, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, select the **Directed Put-away and Pick** check box. - -You do not need to fill in any other fields on the location card until later in the setup process. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot set up the warehouse to use bins when the location has open item ledger entries. - -The next step is to define the type of bins you want to operate. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Bin Types](warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md). The bin type defines how to use a given bin when processing the flow of items through the warehouse. You can assign a bin type to both a zone and to a bin. - -You can also define warehouse class codes, if the warehouse carries items that need various storage conditions. Warehouse class codes are used when suggesting item placement in bins. You assign the warehouse class codes to product groups, which are then assigned to items and SKUs, or to zones and bins that can accommodate the storage conditions required by the warehouse class codes. - -You are now ready to set up zones, if you want to operate zones in your warehouse. Using zones reduces the number of fields you need to fill in when you set up your bins, because bins created within zones inherit several properties from the zone. Zones can also make it easier for new or temporary employees to orient themselves in your warehouse. Note that flow is controlled by bins, therefore it is possible to operate with bins and only one zone. - -## To set up a zone in your warehouse -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the location where you want to set up zone and open the location card, and then choose the **Zones** action. -3. In the **Zones** window, fill in the fields as necessary. [!INCLUDE[tooltip-inline-tip](includes/tooltip-inline-tip_md.md)] - -When you change a zone parameter, all bins created thereafter in that zone will have the new characteristics, but the original bins will not be changed. - -> [!NOTE] -> If you want to operate without zones, you must still create one zone code that is undefined except for the code. - -The next step in setting up the warehouse is to define bins. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Locations to Use Bins](warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md). - -In addition, you must create put-away templates and counting periods. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Put-away Templates](warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md). - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md deleted file mode 100644 index 40755418..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Locations to Use Bins - description: Bins represent the basic warehouse structure and are used to make suggestions about the placement of items. When you have created your bins, you can define very specifically the contents that you want to place in each bin, or the bin can function as a floating bin without specified contents. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Locations to Use Bins -Bins represent the basic warehouse structure and are used to make suggestions about the placement of items. When you have created your bins, you can define very specifically the contents that you want to place in each bin, or the bin can function as a floating bin without specified contents. - -To use the bin functionality at a location, you first activate the functionality on the **Location** card. Then you design the item flow at the location by specifying bin codes in setup fields that represent the different flows. - -> [!NOTE] -> Before you can specify bin codes on the location card, the bin codes must be created. For more information, see [How to: Create Bins](warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md). - -## To set up a location to use bins -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select the location where you want to use bins. -3. Choose the **Edit** action. -4. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, select the **Bin Mandatory** check box. -5. If you are not using directed put-away and pick for the location, fill in the **Default Bin Selection** field with the method the system should use when assigning a default bin to an item. -6. Open the card for the location that you want to set up bins for. -7. On the **Bins** FastTab, select the bins that you want to use as the default for receipts, shipments, inbound, outbound, and open shop floor bins. -8. The bin codes you fill in here will appear automatically on the headers and on the lines of various warehouse documents. The default bins define all starting or ending placements of items in the warehouse. -9. If you are using directed put-away and pick, select a bin for your warehouse adjustments. The bin code in the **Adjustment Bin Code** field defines the virtual bin in which to record discrepancies in inventory when you register either observed differences registered in the warehouse item journal, or differences calculated when you register a warehouse physical inventory. -10. Fill in the fields on the **Bin Policies** FastTab if they are relevant to your warehouse. The most important fields are **Bin Capacity Policy**, **Allow Breakbulk**, and **Put-away Template Code** fields. -11. On the **Warehouse** FastTab, fill in the **Outbound Whse. Handling Time**, **Inbound Whse. Handling Time**, and the **Base Calendar Code** fields. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Base Calendars](across-how-to-assign-base-calendars.md). - -## Filling the Consumption Bin -This flow chart shows how the **Bin Code** field on production order component lines is filled according to your location setup. - -![Bin flow chart](media/binflow.png "BinFlow") - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md deleted file mode 100644 index 063efee0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Put-away Templates - description: With directed put-away and pick functionality, the most appropriate bin for your items at any given time is suggested, according to the put-away template that you have set up for the warehouse, the bin rankings you have given to the bins, and the minimum and maximum quantities that you have set up for fixed bins. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Put-away Templates -With directed put-away and pick functionality, the most appropriate bin for your items at any given time is suggested, according to the put-away template that you have set up for the warehouse, the bin rankings you have given to the bins, and the minimum and maximum quantities that you have set up for fixed bins. - -You can set up a number of put-away templates and select one of them to govern put-aways in general in your warehouse. You can also select a put-away template for any item or stockkeeping unit that might have special put-away requirements. - -## To set up put-away templates -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Put-away Templates**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Enter a code that is the unique identifier of the template you are about to create. -4. Enter a short description, if you wish. -5. Fill in the first line with the bin requirements that you want fulfilled first and foremost when suggesting a put-away. -6. Fill in the second line with the bin requirements that would be your second choice to fulfill in finding a bin for put-away. The second line is used only if a bin that meets the requirements of the first line cannot be found. -7. Continue to fill in the lines until you have described all the acceptable bin placements that you want to use in the put-away process. -8. On the last line in the put-away template, select the **Find Floating Bin** check box. - -You can create various put-away templates and then apply them as you see fit. The put-away template that you selected for the item or stockkeeping unit, if any is used first. If these fields are not filled in, then the put-away template that you selected for the warehouse on the **Bin Policies** FastTab on the location card is used. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md deleted file mode 100644 index 74d21b6c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Set Up Warehouse Employees - description: Each user who performs warehouse activities must be set up as a warehouse employee assigned to one default location and potentially more non-default locations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/23/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Set Up Warehouse Employees -Each user who performs warehouse activities must be set up as a warehouse employee assigned to one default location and potentially more non-default locations. This user setup filters all warehouse activities across the database to the employee's location so that the employee can only perform the warehouse activities at the default location. A user can be assigned to additional non-default locations for which the employee can view activity lines but not perform the activities. - -## To set up warehouse employees -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. Select the **User ID** field, and then select the user to be added as a warehouse employee. Choose the **OK** button. -6. In the **Location Code** field, enter the code of the location where the user will be working. -7. Select the **Default** check box to define the location as the only location where the employee can perform warehouse activities. -8. Repeat these steps to assign other employees to locations or assign non-default locations to existing warehouse employees. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2cc9ab6f..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Split Warehouse Activity Lines - description: In warehouse put-aways, movements, or picks, and in inventory put-aways and inventory picks, bins are suggested for the picking or putting away of items. The actual quantity in the bin suggested may not be sufficient, or there is not enough room in the suggested bin to put away the required quantity. In these cases, you need to split the line, so that the items for one line are either taken from or placed into more than one bin. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/16/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Split Warehouse Activity Lines -In warehouse put-aways, movements, or picks, and in inventory put-aways and inventory picks, bins are suggested for the picking or putting away of items. The actual quantity in the bin suggested may not be sufficient, or there is not enough room in the suggested bin to put away the required quantity. In these cases, you need to split the line, so that the items for one line are either taken from or placed into more than one bin. - -The following procedure applies to warehouse documents, such as warehouse put-away, movement, and pick lines, or inventory put-away, movement, and pick lines. - -## To split warehouse activity lines -1. Open a warehouse activity line where you are trying to handle an insufficient quantity. -2. In the **Qty. to Handle** field, enter the reduced quantity that you are able to handle. -3. On the **Lines** FastTab, choose the **Actions** action, choose the **Functions** action, and then choose the **Split Line** action. A new line appears, which is a copy of the original line, except that the **Qty. to Handle** field contains the quantity that you removed from the original line. -4. Assign an appropriate bin and, if you are using directed put-away and pick, a zone, to this new line, or continue splitting the line as necessary until you find appropriate bins for all of the quantity. - -> [!NOTE] -> If the location uses directed put-away and pick and you split the lines, you must be familiar with the warehouse and be able to choose a bin that matches the storage requirements of the item and that fulfills the general requirements of the warehouse document. For example, you would not split a line on a pick document and place some items in the bulk storage. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-manage-warehouse.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-manage-warehouse.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2f61e2ec..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-manage-warehouse.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Warehouse Activities - description: After goods are received and before goods are shipped, a series of internal warehouse activities take place to ensure an effective flow through the warehouse and to organize and maintain company inventories. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/15/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Warehouse Management -After goods are received and before goods are shipped, a series of internal warehouse activities take place to ensure an effective flow through the warehouse and to organize and maintain company inventories. - -Typical warehouse activities include putting items away, moving items inside or between warehouses, and picking items for assembly, production, or shipment. Assembling items for sale or inventory may also be considered warehouse activities, but these are covered elsewhere. For more information, see [Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md). - -In large warehouses, these different handling tasks can be separated by departments and the integration managed by a directed workflow. In simpler installations, the flow is less formalized and the warehouse activities are performed with so-called inventory put-aways and inventory picks. For more information about basic versus advanced warehouse configurations, see [Design Details: Warehouse Overview](design-details-warehouse-overview.md). - -Before you can perform warehouse activities, you must set the system up for the relevant complexity of warehouse processing. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Record the receipt of items at warehouse locations, either with a purchase order only, in simple location setups, or with a warehouse receipt, in case of semi or fully automated warehouse processing at the location.|[How to: Receive Items](warehouse-how-receive-items.md)| -|Bypass the put-away and pick processes to expedite an item straight from receiving or production to shipping.|[How to: Cross-Dock Items](warehouse-how-to-cross-dock-items.md)| -|Put away items received from purchases, sales returns, transfers, or production output according to the configured warehouse process.|[Putting Items Away](warehouse-put-away-items.md)| -|Move items between bins in the warehouse.|[Moving Items](warehouse-move-items.md)| -|Pick items to be shipped, transferred, or consumed in assembly or production, according to the configured warehouse process.|[Picking Items](warehouse-pick-items.md)| -|Record the shipment of items from warehouse locations, either with a sales order only, in simple location setups, or with a warehouse shipment, in case of semi or fully automated warehouse processes at the location.|[How to: Ship Items](warehouse-how-ship-items.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) - [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) - [Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) - [Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-move-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-move-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index bccdb262..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-move-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Move Items - description: While in inventory, items may need to be moved between bins to support the daily warehouse activities involved in keeping items flowing through the warehouse. Some movements happen in direct relation to internal operations, such as a production order that needs components delivered or end items put away. Other movements happen as mere warehouse space optimization or as ad-hoc movements to and from operations. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/22/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Moving Items -The warehouse activity of moving items within the warehouse is performed in different ways depending on how warehouse management features are configured. The complexity can rank from no warehouse features, through basic warehouse configurations for order-by order handling in one or more activities only, to advanced configurations where all warehouse activities must be performed in a directed workflow. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -While in one warehouse location, items may need to be moved between bins to support the daily warehouse activities involved in keeping items flowing through the warehouse. Some movements happen in direct relation to internal operations, such as a production order that needs components delivered or end items put away. Other movements happen as mere warehouse space optimization or as ad-hoc movements to and from operations. - -Moving items to other locations affects the item ledger entries and must therefore be done by transfer order. For more information, see [How to: Transfer Inventory Between Locations](inventory-how-transfer-between-locations.md). - -Additional movement tasks are to periodically replenish picking bins or shop floor bins and to modify bin content information. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Move items between bins in basic warehouse configurations at any time and without source documents.|[How to: Move Items in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-ad-hoc-in-basic-warehousing.md)| -|Use the warehouse movement worksheet to move items in advanced warehouse configurations, both for source documents and ad hoc.|[How to: Move Items in Advanced Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-items-in-advanced-warehousing.md)| -|Bring component items to internal operations in basic warehouse configurations as requested by source documents for those operations.|[How to: Move Components to an Operation Area in Basic Warehouse Configurations](warehouse-how-to-move-components-to-an-operation-area-in-basic-warehousing.md)| -|Plan which bins to fill or empty to maintain an efficient flow, such as emptying a bulk storage area before a large receipt.|[How to: Plan Warehouse Movements in Worksheets](warehouse-how-to-plan-warehouse-movements-in-worksheets.md)| -|Update the frequency at which bins, such as picking bins, must be replenished as a result of demand fluctuations.|[How to: Calculate Bin Replenishment](warehouse-how-to-calculate-bin-replenishment.md)| -|Restructure your warehouse with new bin codes and new bin characteristics and potentially move them around.|[How to: Restructure Warehouses](warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-pick-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-pick-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index e5a588c5..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-pick-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Pick Items - description: The warehouse activity of picking items before they are shipped or consumed is performed in different ways, depending on how warehouse management features are configured. The [setup](../configure-warehouse-processes.md) complexity can rank from no warehouse features, through basic warehouse configurations for order-by-order handling in one or more activities only, to advanced configurations where all warehouse activities must be performed in a directed workflow. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/29/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Pick Items -The warehouse activity of picking items before they are shipped or consumed is performed in different ways, depending on how warehouse management features are configured. The complexity can rank from no warehouse features, through basic warehouse configurations for order-by-order handling in one or more activities only, to advanced configurations where all warehouse activities must be performed in a directed workflow. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -If you decide to organize and record your picking activity with warehouse documents, you place a check mark in the **Require Pick** field on the location card. This indicates that when you have items that need to be picked for an outbound source document you want the picking of those items to be controlled by the system. An outbound source document can be a sales order, a purchase return order, an outbound transfer order, a service order, or a production order whose components should be picked. - -> [!NOTE] -> Even though the setting is called **Require Pick**, you can still post shipments directly from the source business document at location where you select this check box. - -If your location is set up to require pick processing but not shipment processing, you use the **Inventory Pick** window to organize the picking information, print the picking information, enter the result of the pick, and post the picking information, which in turn posts the shipment of the items. In the case of picking components for a production order, the posting of the pick also posts the consumption. - -If your location is set up to require both pick and shipment processing, so that you have placed check marks in both the **Require Pick** and **Require Shipment** field on the location card, you use the **Warehouse Pick** window to handle the pick. The warehouse pick functions similarly to the inventory pick, except that instead of posting the picking information, you register the pick. This registering process does not post the shipment, but merely makes the items available for shipment. As a warehouse manager, you can use a pick worksheets to organize pick information before creating the individual warehouse pick instructions. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Post the shipment of items directly in the outbound order document because no warehouse features exist. (Works the same for sales orders, outbound transfer orders, and return shipments.)|[How to: Ship Items](warehouse-how-ship-items.md)| -|Pick items order by order and post the shipment in the same activity, in a basic warehouse configuration.|[How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md)| -|Pick items for multiple orders in an advanced warehouse configuration.|[How to: Pick Items with Warehouse Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md)| -|Pick components for production or assembly in a basic or an advanced warehouse configuration.|[How to: Pick for Production or Assembly](warehouse-how-to-pick-for-production.md)| -|Plan optimized pick instructions for a number of shipments rather than have warehouse workers act directly on posted shipments.|[How to: Plan Picks in Worksheets](warehouse-how-to-plan-picks-in-worksheets.md)| -|Pick items technically for a special purpose, such as a production unit in need of extra components, in such a way that the items do not technically leave the warehouse.|[How to: Pick and Put Away Without a Source Document](warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md)| -|Understand how to automatically pick items according to their expiration date, for example perishable goods.|[Picking By FEFO](warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md)| -|Split a pick line into multiple lines, for example because there are not enough items to take from in the designated bin.|[How to: Split Warehouse Activity Lines](warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md)| -|Get immediate access to picks that are assigned to you as a warehouse worker.|[How to: Find Your Warehouse Assignments](warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md deleted file mode 100644 index 824a130d..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: How to Enable Picking by FEFO - description: First-Expired-First-Out (FEFO) is a sorting method that ensures that the oldest items, those with the earliest expiration dates, are picked first. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 07/01/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enable Picking Items by FEFO -First-Expired-First-Out (FEFO) is a sorting method that ensures that the oldest items, those with the earliest expiration dates, are picked first. - - This functionality only works when the following criteria are met: - -- The item must have a serial/lot number. -- On the item’s item tracking code setup, the **SN-Specific Warehouse Tracking** field or the **Lot-Specific Warehouse Tracking** field must be selected. -- The item must be posted to inventory with an expiration date. -- On the location card, the **Require Pick** check box must be selected. -- On the location card, the **Pick According to FEFO** check box must be selected. -- On the location card, the **Bin Mandatory** check box must be selected. - - When all the criteria are met, then serial/lot-numbered items to be picked are sorted with the oldest first in all picks and movements, except for items that use SN-specific or lot-specific tracking. - -> [!NOTE] -> If some serial/lot-numbered items use specific tracking, then those are respected first and under them, the remaining, non-specific, serial/lot numbers are listed according to FEFO. - - If two serial/lot-numbered items have the same expiration date, then the program selects the item with the lowest serial or lot number. If the serial or lot numbers are the same, then the program selects the item that was registered first. - -> [!NOTE] -> - When picking serial/lot-numbered items in locations set up for directed put-away and pick, only quantities on bins of type *Pick* are picked according to FEFO. -> - To enable movements according to FEFO, either in the **Inventory Movement** window or the **Movement Worksheet** window, you must leave the **From Bin** field empty. -> - If the **Strict Expiration Posting** field is selected, then only items that are not expired will be included in the pick. This applies even if you are not using Pick according to FEFO. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Picking Items](warehouse-pick-items.md) -[How to: Pick Items for Warehouse Shipment](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-for-warehouse-shipment.md) -[How to: Pick Items with Inventory Picks](warehouse-how-to-pick-items-with-inventory-picks.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-put-away-items.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-put-away-items.md deleted file mode 100644 index 8a1de7c0..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-put-away-items.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Put Items Away - description: The warehouse activity of putting items away after they are received or output is performed in different ways depending on how warehouse management features are configured. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 08/31/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Putting Items Away -The warehouse activity of putting items away after they are received or output is performed in different ways depending on how warehouse management features are configured. The complexity can rank from no warehouse features, through basic warehouse configurations for order-by order handling in one or more activities only, to advanced configurations where all warehouse activities must be performed in a directed workflow. For more information, see [Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md). - -If you decide that you want to organize and record put-away information with warehouse documents, you place a check mark in the **Require Put-away** field on the location card. This indicates that when you have items coming into the warehouse location through an inbound source document, you want the put-away of those items to be controlled by the system. An inbound source document can be a purchase order, a sales return order, an inbound transfer order, or a production order whose output is ready for put-away. - -If your location is set up to use put-away processing but not receive processing, you use the **Inventory Put-away** window to organize the put-away information, print it, enter the result of the actual put-away and post the put-away information, which in turn posts the receipt information for the source document. In the case of a production order, the posting process posts the output of the order and finishes the production order. - -If your location is set up to require both receive and put-away processing, so that you have placed check marks in both the **Require Receive** and the **Require Put-away** field on the location card, there is a different process for putting items away. In this case, you will use the **Warehouse Put-away** window to handle the put-away. The warehouse put-away functions similarly to the inventory put-away, except that instead of posting the information, you register the put-away. Note that the registering of the warehouse put-away does not post the receipt of the items. It merely updates the bin content. As a warehouse manager, you can use a put-away worksheets to organize put-away information before creating the individual warehouse put-away instructions. - -The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Post the receipt of items directly from the inbound order document and thereby record the put away, because no warehouse configuration exists.|[How to: Receive Items](warehouse-how-receive-items.md)| -|Put items away order by order and post the receipt in the same activity, in a basic warehouse configuration.|[How to: Put Items Away with Inventory Put-aways](warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-inventory-put-aways.md)| -|Put items away for multiple orders in an advanced warehouse configuration.|[How to: Put Items Away with Warehouse Put-aways](warehouse-how-to-put-items-away-with-warehouse-put-aways.md)| -|Put produced or assembled items away in a basic or an advanced warehouse configuration.|[How to: Put Away Production or Assembly Output](warehouse-how-to-put-away-production-output.md)| -|Plan optimized put-away instructions for a number of posted warehouse receipts rather than have warehouse workers act directly on receipts.|[How to: Plan Put-aways in Worksheets](warehouse-how-to-plan-put-aways-in-worksheets.md)| -|Put back items that were picked technically with an internal pick, for example for a production order that did not consume the expected quantity.|[How to: Pick and Put Away Without a Source Document](warehouse-how-to-create-put-aways-from-internal-put-aways.md)| -|Split a put-away line to place part of the put-away quantity in available bins because the designated bin is filled up.|[How to: Split Warehouse Activity Lines](warehouse-how-to-split-warehouse-activity-lines.md)| -|Get immediate access to put-aways that are assigned to you as a warehouse worker.|[How to: Find Your Warehouse Assignments](warehouse-how-to-find-your-warehouse-assignments.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-setup-warehouse.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-setup-warehouse.md deleted file mode 100644 index abb5c982..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-setup-warehouse.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Configure Warehouse Processes - description: A company's distribution strategy is reflected in the configuration of its warehouse processes. This includes defining how different items are handled in different warehouse locations, such as the degree of bin control and the extend of workflow required between warehouse activities. - - documentationcenter: '' - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/08/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# Setting Up Warehouse Management -A company's distribution strategy is reflected in the configuration of its warehouse processes. This includes defining how different items are handled in different warehouse locations, such as the degree of bin control and the extend of workflow required between warehouse activities. - - The following table describes a sequence of tasks, with links to the topics that describe them. - -|**To**|**See**| -|------------|-------------| -|Get an overview of the capabilities of basic versus advanced warehouse functionality.|[Design Details: Warehouse Overview](design-details-warehouse-overview.md)| -|Set up eight different bin types, such as Picking Bin, to define the flow activities that relate to each bin type.|[How to: Set Up Bin Types](warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-types.md)| -|Create bins, either manually or automatically, with information, such as name, number series, and category, according to a bin template.|[How to: Create Bins](warehouse-how-to-create-individual-bins.md)| -|Define which items you want to store in any given bin and set the rules that decide when to fill the bin with a particular item.|[How to: Create Bin Contents](warehouse-how-to-set-up-bin-contents.md)| -|Set an item up to always be placed in a specific bin.|[How to: Assign Default Bins to Items](warehouse-how-to-assign-default-bins-to-items.md)| -|Create templates to govern where and how items are put away during directed put-away.|[How to: Set Up Put-away Templates](warehouse-how-to-set-up-put-away-templates.md)| -|Set users up as warehouse employees at specific locations.|[How to: Set Up Warehouse Employees](warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md)| -|Define different types of bins across the warehouse to control where items are placed according to their type, rank, or handling level.|[How to: Set Up Locations to Use Bins](warehouse-how-to-set-up-locations-to-use-bins.md)| -|Make additional settings to an existing location to enable it for warehouse activities.|[How to: Convert Existing Locations to Warehouse Locations](warehouse-how-to-convert-existing-locations-to-warehouse-locations.md)| -|Enable picking, moving, and putting away for assembly or production orders in basic warehouse configurations.|[How to: Set Up Basic Warehouses with Operations Areas](warehouse-how-to-set-up-basic-warehouses-with-operations-areas.md)| -|Set items and locations up for the most advanced scope of warehouse management where all activities must follow a strict workflow.|[How to: Set Up Items and Locations for Directed Put-away and Pick](warehouse-how-to-set-up-items-for-directed-put-away-and-pick.md)| -|Define when and how items in warehouse locations are counted for maintenance or financial reporting purposes.|[How to: Count, Adjust, or Reclassify Inventory](inventory-how-count-adjust-reclassify.md)| -|Enable warehouse workers to break a larger unit of measure into smaller units of measure to fulfill the needs of source documents.|[How to: Enable Automatic Breaking Bulk with Directed Put-away and Pick](warehouse-enable-automatic-breaking-bulk-with-directed-put-away-and-pick.md)| -|Set up the warehouse to automatically suggest items to be picked that expire first.|[How to: Enable Picking by FEFO](warehouse-picking-by-fefo.md)| -|Integrate bar code readers to your warehouse management solution.|[Use Automated Data Capture Systems (ADCS)](warehouse-use-automated-data-capture-systems-adcs.md)| -|Get tips on how to reorganize locations, bins, or zones to obtain more efficient warehouse activities.|[How to: Restructure Warehouses](warehouse-how-to-restructure-warehouses.md)| - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-use-automated-data-capture-systems-adcs.md b/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-use-automated-data-capture-systems-adcs.md deleted file mode 100644 index ec0c4b7a..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/warehouse-use-automated-data-capture-systems-adcs.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ ---- - title: Use Automated Data Capture Systems (ADCS) - description: You can use your automatic data capture system (ADCS) to register the movement of items in the warehouse and to register some journal activities, such as quantity adjustments in the warehouse item journal and physical inventories. - author: SorenGP - - ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" - ms.topic: article - ms.devlang: na - ms.tgt_pltfrm: na - ms.workload: na - ms.search.keywords: - ms.date: 09/18/2017 - ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Enable Automated Data Capture Systems (ADCS) -You can use your automatic data capture system (ADCS) to register the movement of items in the warehouse and to register some journal activities, such as quantity adjustments in the warehouse item journal and physical inventories. - -To use ADCS, you must give each item stored in the warehouse an item identifier. You must also set up miniforms, handheld functions, data exchanges, and specify settings for fields that control ADCS. You specify whether to use ADCS on the location card of a warehouse. - -Based on the needs of your warehouse, you define the amount of information displayed in the miniform setup for the particular handheld device. The following are examples of information that you can display: - -- Data from tables within [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)], such as a list of pick documents from which the user can select. -- Text information. -- Messages to show confirmations or errors about activities performed and registered by the handheld device user. - -For more information, see [Configuring an Automated Data Capture System](/dynamics-nav/Configuring-Automated-Data-Capture-System) in the developer and IT-pro help. - -## To set up a warehouse to use ADCS -To use ADCS, you must specify which warehouse locations use the technology. - -> [!NOTE] -> We recommend that you do not set up a warehouse to use ADCS if the warehouse also has a bin capacity policy. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Locations**, and choose the related link. -2. Select a warehouse from the list for which you want to enable ADCS, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Location Card** window, select the **Use ADCS** check box. - -## To specify an item to use ADCS -Each warehouse item that you want to use with ADCS must be assigned an identifier code to link it with its item number. For example, you can use the item's bar code as the identifier code. An item can also have multiple identifier codes. You may find this useful in the case where an item is available in various units of measures, such as pieces and pallets. In this case, assign an identifier code to each. - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Items**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select an item from the list that is part of your ADCS solution, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. In the **Item Card** window, choose the **Identifiers** action. -4. In the **Item Identifiers** window, choose the **New** action. -5. In the **Code** field, specify the identifier for the item. For example, the identifier could be the item's bar code number. - - You can also enter a **Variant Code** and a **Unit of Measure** code. - -6. If needed, enter multiple codes for each item. -7. Choose the **OK** button. -8. To review the information, choose the **Identifier Code** field to open the **Item Identifiers** window. - -## To add an ADCS user -You can add any user as a user of an Automated Data Capture System (ADCS). When you do this, the user must also provide a password. Optionally, you can also provide a connection that identifies the ADCS user as a warehouse employee. The ADCS user password can be different from the Windows logon password of the user. For more information, see [How to: Manage Users and Permissions](ui-how-users-permissions.md). - -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **ADCS Users**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Name** field, enter a name for the user. The name cannot contain more than 20 characters, including spaces. -4. In the **Password** field, enter a password. The password is masked. - -### To specify that a warehouse employee is an ADCS user -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Warehouse Employees**, and then choose the related link. -2. If needed, add a new warehouse employee. For more information, see [How to: Set Up Warehouse Employees](warehouse-how-to-set-up-warehouse-employees.md). -3. Choose the **Edit List** action. -4. Select a warehouse employee from the list. In the **ADCS User** field, choose the drop-down arrow, and then select the name of an ADCS user from the list. - -> [!NOTE] -> The default warehouse for the employee must be one that uses ADCS. - -## To create and customize miniforms -You use miniforms to describe the information that you want to present on a handheld device. For example, you can create miniforms to support the warehouse activity of picking items. After you create a miniform, you can add functions to it for the common actions that a user takes with handheld devices, such as moving up or down a line. - -To implement or change the functionality of a miniform function, you must create a new codeunit or modify an existing one to perform the required action or response. You can learn more about ADCS functionality by examining codeunits such as 7705, which is the handling codeunit for logon functionality. Codeunit 7705 shows how a Card-type miniform works. - -### To create a miniform for ADCS -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Miniforms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **New** action. -3. In the **Code** field, enter a code for the miniform. Optionally, enter values in all other fields. - - Select the **Start Miniform** check box to indicate that the miniform is the first form that the user sees at logon. - -4. On the **Lines** FastTab, define the fields that appear on the miniform. The order in which you enter lines is the order in which the lines appear on the handheld device. - -When you have created a miniform, the next steps are to create functions and to associate functionality for various keyboard inputs. - -### To add support for a function key -1. Add code similar to the following example to the.xsl file for the plug-in. This creates a function for the **F6** key. The key sequence information can be obtained from the device manufacturer. - ``` - - - - - ``` -2. In the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] development environment, open table 7702 and add a code representing the new key. In this example, create a key that is named **F6**. -3. Add C/AL code to the relevant function of the miniform-specific codeunit to handle the function key. - -### To customize miniform functions -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Miniforms**, and then choose the related link. -2. Select a miniform from the list, and then choose the **Edit** action. -3. Choose the **Functions** action. -4. In the **Function Code** drop-down list, select a code to represent the function that you want to associate with the miniform. For example, you can select ESC, which associates functionality with the press of the ESC key. - -In the [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] development environment, edit the code for the **Handling Codeunit** field to create or modify code to perform the required action or response. - -For more information, see [Configuring an Automated Data Capture System](/dynamics-nav/Configuring-Automated-Data-Capture-System) in the developer and IT-pro help. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Warehouse Management](warehouse-manage-warehouse.md) -[Inventory](inventory-manage-inventory.md) -[Setting Up Warehouse Management](warehouse-setup-warehouse.md) -[Assembly Management](assembly-assemble-items.md) -[Design Details: Warehouse Management](design-details-warehouse-management.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-allocate-costs-income.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-allocate-costs-income.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0def92c2..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-allocate-costs-income.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Allocate Costs and Income -description: Outlines the tasks to allocate an entry in a general journal to several different accounts when you post the journal. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: SorenGP - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/07/2017 -ms.author: edupont - ---- -# How to: Allocate Costs and Income -You can allocate an entry in a general journal to several different accounts when you post the journal. The allocation can be made by three different methods: - -* Quantity -* Percentage (%) -* Amount - -The allocation features can be used with recurring general journals and in fixed assets journals. - - -The following procedures describe how to prepare to allocate costs in a recurring general journal by defining allocation keys. When allocation keys are defined, you complete and post the journal like any other recurring general journal. For more information, see [Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md). - -## To set up allocation keys -You can allocate an entry in a recurring general journal to several different accounts when you post the journal. The allocation can be made by quantity, percentage, or amount. -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Recurring General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. Choose the **Batch Name** field to open the **General Journal Batches** window. -3. You can either modify allocations on an existing batch in the list or create a new batch with allocations. - * To create a new batch, choose the **New** action, and go to the next step. - * To change the allocations of an existing journal, select the journal and go to step 7. -4. In the **Name** field, enter a name for the batch, such as CLEANING. In the **Description** field, enter a description, such as Cleaning Expenses Journal. -5. When you are done, close the window. A new, empty recurring journal opens. -6. Fill in the fields on the line. -7. Choose the **Allocations** action. -8. Add a line for each allocation. You must fill in either the **Allocation %**, **Allocation Quantity**, or **Amount** field. You must also fill in the **Account No.** field and, if you are allocating the transaction among global dimensions, the global dimension fields. -9. If you enter a percentage on a line, the amount in the **Amount** field is calculated automatically. These amounts have the opposite sign from the total amount in the **Amount** field in the recurring journal. -10. After entering the allocations lines, choose **OK** to return to the **Recurring General Journal** window. The **Allocated Amt. (USD)** field is filled in and matches the **Amount** field. -11. Post the journal. - -## To change an allocation key that has already been set up -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Recurring General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Recurring General Journal** window, select the journal with the allocation. -3. Choose the line with the allocation, and then choose **Allocations** action. -4. Change the relevant fields, and then choose the **OK** button. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Working with General Journals](ui-work-general-journals.md) -[Posting Documents and Journals](ui-post-documents-journals.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-account-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-account-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 2872eda6..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-account-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Close Accounting Periods for a Fiscal Year -description: Describes how to close the accounting periods that make up the fiscal year. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, bank account detailed trial balance -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Close Accounting Periods -When a fiscal year is over, you must close the periods that comprise it. - -## To close accounting periods -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Accounting Periods**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **Accounting Periods** window, choose the **Close Year** action. - - If more than one fiscal year is open, the earliest one is automatically selected to be closed. A message displays identifying the year that will close and the consequences of closing the year. -3. To close the year, choose the **Yes** button. - -The fiscal year is closed, and the **Closed** and **Date Locked** fields for all the periods in the year are selected. The fiscal year cannot be opened again and you cannot remove the check mark from the **Closed** or **Date Locked** fields. - -> [!NOTE] -> You cannot close a fiscal year before you create a new one. Notice that when a fiscal year has been closed, you cannot change the starting date of the following fiscal year. - -Even though a fiscal year has been closed, you can still post general ledger entries to it. When you do this, the entries will be marked as posted to a closed fiscal year and the **Prior-Year Entry** field will be selected. - -After a fiscal year is closed, you must close the income statement accounts and transfer the year's results to an account in the balance sheet. You can repeat this every time that you post to the closed fiscal year. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Books](year-close-books.md) -[How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md) -[How to: Open a New Fiscal Year](finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-books.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-books.md deleted file mode 100644 index 875249bf..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-books.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of the Tasks for Closing the Books -description: Learn about the process of closing the books for a fiscal year or period, and what happens after you close at the end of a year. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, bank account detailed trial balance -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Closing the Books -After you ensure that all your accounts are up-to-date, and you allocate costs and income, then you can close the books for a fiscal year or period. - -You are not required to close a year, but doing so will make working in the system easier for you because you will be able to take advantage of the convenient filtering options provided. You also do not have to worry about losing details of transactions when you close because all details are retained, even after you close the year. - -## Closing Book Process -The process for closing the book includes these main tasks: - -1. Closing the accounting period. - - A fiscal year is defined as one or more open periods as defined in the **Accounting Periods** window. A typical fiscal year contains 12 periods of one month each, but you can also choose another method of defining a year. - - For more information, see [How to: Close Accounting Periods](year-close-account-periods.md). -2. Registering prior-year entries. - - When you close a fiscal year, you must enter a number of administrative transactions (such as prepaid and accrued items). These transactions are called adjusting entries. There are no special rules for posting these entries, and they (like other entries) contain a check mark in the **Prior-Year Entry** field if they are posted on a date in a closed fiscal year. Even though a fiscal year has been closed, you can still post general ledger entries to it. -3. Transferring balances from the income statement accounts to the balance sheet. - - After a fiscal year has been closed and all prior-year entries have been posted, the income statement accounts must be closed and the net income for the year must be transferred to an account under owners' equity on the balance sheet. Use the Close Income Statement batch job for this purpose. The batch job processes all general ledger accounts of the type Income Statement and creates entries that reverse their balances. These entries are placed in a journal from which they can be posted. The batch job does not post them automatically, except when an additional reporting currency is used. When an additional reporting currency is used, the batch job posts directly to the general ledger. - - For more information, see [Close Income Statement](year-close-income-statement.md). -4. Posting the year-end closing entry along with the offsetting equity account entries. - - When the Close Income Statement batch job is finished, you post the entries generated by the job. If you did not specify a retained earnings account in the batch job, then enter one line with a balancing entry that posts the net income to the correct general ledger account under owners' equity on the balance sheet. Finally, post the journal. - - For more information, see [How to: Post Year-End Closing Entry](year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md). - -## What Happens When You Close -When you close at the end of the year, the system moves your earnings from calculated earnings to the Retained Earnings account. The system also marks the fiscal year as "closed," and marks all subsequent entries for the closed year as "prior year entries." - -The system then generates a closing entry, but it does not post the entry automatically. You are given the opportunity to make the offsetting equity account entry or entries, which allows you to decide how to allocate your closing entry. For example, if your company has several divisions, you can let the system generate a single closing entry for all the divisions, and you can then make an offsetting entry for each division's equity account. - -You can post in a previous fiscal year, even after the income statement accounts have been closed, if you run the Close Income Statement batch job again afterward. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Open a New Fiscal Year](finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-income-statement.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-income-statement.md deleted file mode 100644 index 3d59bf4c..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-income-statement.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Close Income Statement Accounts -description: At year closing, you must run the Close Income Statement batch job to close the accounting periods that make up the fiscal year. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, bank account detailed trial balance -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Close Income Statement Accounts -When a fiscal year is over, you must close the periods that comprise it. To do this, you run the **Close Income Statement** batch job. This job transfers the year's result to an account in the balance sheet and closes the income statement accounts. You do this by creating lines in a journal, which you then can post. - -## To run the Close Income Statement batch job -1. Close the fiscal year. The fiscal year must closed before the batch job can be run. For more information, see [How to: Close Accounting Periods](year-close-account-periods.md). -2. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **Close Income Statement**, and then choose the related link. -3. Choose the **OK** button to run the batch job. - -## About the Close Income Statement Batch Job -The batch job processes all general accounts of the income statement type and creates entries that cancel out their respective balances. That is, each entry is the sum of all the general ledger entries on the account in the fiscal year. These new entries are placed in a journal in which you must specify a balancing account and retained earnings account in the balance sheet before you post. When you post the journal, an entry is posted to each income statement account so that its balance becomes zero and at the same time the year's result is transferred to the balance sheet. - -You must post the journal yourself. The batch job does not post the entries automatically, except when an additional reporting currency is being used. When an additional reporting currency is being used, the batch job posts entries directly to the general ledger. - -The date on the lines that the batch job inserts in the journal is always a closing date for the fiscal year. The closing date is a fictitious date between the last day of the old fiscal year and the first day of the new year. The advantage of posting on a closing date is that you maintain the correct balances for the ordinary dates of the fiscal year. - -The **Close Income Statement** batch job can be used several times. You can post in a previous fiscal year, even after the income statement accounts have been closed, if you run the batch job again. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Books](year-close-books.md) -[How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry](year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md) -[How to: Open a New Fiscal Year](finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-years-periods.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-years-periods.md deleted file mode 100644 index 0f2a7c81..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-close-years-periods.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Tasks to Close a Fiscal Year and Accounting Periods -description: Outlines the tasks to close a fiscal year or accounting period, for example, making sure documents and journals are posted and verifying bank balances. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, bank account detailed trial balance -ms.date: 06/07/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Closing Years and Periods -At the end of a fiscal year, there are a number of administrative tasks that you have to perform, like making sure all documents and journals are posted, making sure currency data are up-to-date, closing the books, and more. The actual tasks will depend your company. - -The following table provides an overview of tasks that you typically perform to close a year and period. - -| To | See | -| --- | --- | -| Specify system-wide and user-specific posting date ranges. Depending on your business needs, you may want to restrict user posting date ranges at the start of the period-end process or after it. |[How to: Specify Posting Periods](finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md) | -| Get an overview of activities that are commonly performed at the end of a period, such as posting all documents and journals, or running account schedules. |[Closing Periods](year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md) | -| Update currency exchange rates and adjust the exchange rates of posted customer, vendor, and bank account entries. |[How to: Update Currency Exchange Rates](finance-how-update-currencies.md) | -| Allocate costs and income among accounts and dimensions. |[Allocating Costs and Income](year-allocate-costs-income.md) | -| Prepare to report value-added tax amounts that you have collected for sales to the tax authorities' web service. |[How To: Report VAT to Tax Authorities](finance-how-report-vat.md)| -| Print reports to verify general ledger, customer, vendor and bank account balances before closing a period. |[Preparing Pre-Closing Reports](year-prepare-preclose-reports.md) | -| Close accounting periods and fiscal year, transfer income statement balances to balance sheet accounts and post the year end closing entry. |[Closing Books](year-close-books.md) | -| Print reports that can assist you in creating financial statements. |[Preparing Closing Statements](year-prepare-close-statement.md) | - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Open a New Fiscal Year](finance-how-open-new-fiscal-year.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md deleted file mode 100644 index 7a978675..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-how-complete-period-end-processes.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Optional Activities for Closing Periods -description: This topic outlines the optional processes and activities for closing accounting periods in Dynamics NAV. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, aging, creditor payments, vendor payments -ms.date: 08/10/2018 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Overview of Tasks to Close Accounting Periods -[!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)] does not force you to close periods, however, there are many period-end (month-end) activities that you can do. This topic provides an overview of optional processes and activities for closing periods. - -## General Ledger -* Specify system-wide and user-specific posting periods. - - This specifies the dates between which you allow posting. Depending on your business, you may want to allow posting at the start of the period, or toward the end. For more information, see [How to: Specify Posting Periods](finance-how-specify-posting-periods.md). -* Make all necessary G/L adjustments. -* Update and post Recurring Journals. - -* Run account schedules as follows: - * Open the **Account Schedule** window, and then choose the **Print** action. - -## Sales and Receivables -* Post all sales orders, invoices, credit memos, and return orders. -* Post all cash receipt journals. -* Update and post recurring journals that are related to sales and receivables. -* Reconcile accounts receivable to the general ledger. -* Run the **Delete Invoiced Sales Orders** batch job. - -## Purchases and Payables -* Post all purchase orders, invoices, credit memos, and return orders. -* Post all payment journals. -* Update and post recurring journals that are related to purchases & payables. -* Run the **Aged Accounts Payable** report and reconcile accounts payable to the general ledger. -* Run the **Delete Invoiced Purchase Orders** batch job. - -## Fixed Assets -* Post all maintenance costs have been posted through the fixed asset journals or invoices. -* Post adjustments. -* Post appreciation. -* Post depreciation. -* Update and post the recurring fixed asset journal. - -## Intercompany -* Process Intercompany Transactions - -## Calculate and Process Sales Tax -* Complete Tax Statements. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Closing Books](year-close-books.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md deleted file mode 100644 index c82058f9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-how-post-year-end-close-entry.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Review and Post the Year-End Closing Entry -description: Describes how to open the journal you specified in the Close Income Statement batch job, and then review and post the year-end closing entry. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, bank account detailed trial balance -ms.date: 03/29/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# How to: Post the Year-End Closing Entry -After you use the **Close Income Statement** batch job to generate the year-end closing entry or entries, you must open the journal you specified in the batch job, and then review and post the entries. - -## To post the year end closing entry -1. Choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, enter **General Journal**, and then choose the related link. -2. In the **General Journal** window, in the **Batch Name** field, select the batch that contains the closing entries. -3. Review the entries. -4. To post the journal, choose the **Post** action. - -> [!NOTE] -> If an error is detected, an error message is displayed. If the posting is successful, the posted entries are removed from the journal. After posting is complete, an entry is posted to each income statement account so that its balance becomes zero and the year's result is transferred to the balance sheet. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[How to: Close Accounting Periods](year-close-account-periods.md) -[Closing Books](year-close-books.md) -[Close Income Statement](year-close-income-statement.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statement.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statement.md deleted file mode 100644 index 89dd9285..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statement.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Reports to Help Prepare Closing Statements -description: Provides an overview of the reports you can use to gather information to prepare your company's closing statements when closing the fiscal year. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.search.keywords: year closing, close accounting period, close fiscal year, aging, creditor payments, vendor payments, assets, liabilities, equity, analysis, reporting, financial report, business intelligence, BI, Power Bi, KPI -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Preparing Closing Statements -There are a number of standard reports that you can use to gather the information that you need to prepare your company's closing statements. - -The following table describes a number of reports that may be useful in this process, with links to the topics that describe them. - -| To | See this report | -| --- | --- | -| Print a trial balance report with balances and net changes for general ledger accounts. |Trial Balance | -| Get an overview of accounts receivable, with the age of amounts receivable calculated from the due date, posting date, or document date. |Aged Accounts Receivable | -| Get an overview of accounts payable, with the age of amounts payable calculated from the due date, posting date or document date. |Aged Accounts Payable | -| Compare the trial balance with a budget. |Trial Balance/Budget | -| Print a trial balance report with balances and net changes for general ledger accounts calculated for a series of periods. |Trial Balance by Period | -| Print an account schedule to analyze figures in general ledger accounts or compare actual general ledger entries with general ledger budget entries. |Account Schedule | -| Check whether customer and vendor ledger entries balance with corresponding general ledger entries. |Reconcile Cust. and Vend. Accs | - -To see a report, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, type the name as it appears in the table, and then choose the related link. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -[Business Intelligence](bi.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statements.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statements.md deleted file mode 100644 index 29f85db9..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-close-statements.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: "Prepare Closing Statements" -description: Learn about some of the different closing statements and their corresponding reports. -author: jswymer -ms.author: jswymer -ms.custom: na -ms.date: 09/16/2016 -ms.reviewer: na -ms.suite: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.topic: article -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" ---- -# Prepare Closing Statements -There are a number of standard reports that you can use to gather the information that you need to prepare your company's closing statements. - -The following table describes a number of reports that may be useful in this process along with the report name. - - -| To | See this report | -|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------| -| Print a trial balance report with balances and net changes for general ledger accounts. | Trial Balance | -| Get an overview of accounts receivable, with the age of amounts receivable calculated from the due date, posting date, or document date. | Aged Accounts Receivable | -| Get an overview of accounts payable, with the age of amounts payable calculated from the due date, posting date or document date. | Aged Accounts Payable | -| Compare the trial balance with a budget. | Trial Balance/Budget | -| Print a trial balance report with balances and net changes for general ledger accounts calculated for a series of periods. | Trial Balance by Period | -| Print an account schedule to analyze figures in general ledger accounts or compare actual general ledger entries with general ledger budget entries. | Account Schedule | -| Check whether customer and vendor ledger entries balance with corresponding general ledger entries. | Reconcile Cust. and Vend. Accs | - -To see a report, in the top right corner, choose the **Search for Page or Report** icon, type the name as it appears in the table, and then choose the related link. -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Close Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) diff --git a/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-preclose-reports.md b/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-preclose-reports.md deleted file mode 100644 index 5df2f413..00000000 --- a/dynamics-nav-app/year-prepare-preclose-reports.md +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ ---- -title: Overview of Pre-Closing Reports to Verify Account Accuracy -description: Provides an overview of the reports you can use to verify the accuracy of accounts before closing the books at the end of a year or period. - -documentationcenter: '' -author: jswymer - -ms.prod: "dynamics-nav-2018" -ms.topic: article -ms.devlang: na -ms.tgt_pltfrm: na -ms.workload: na -ms.date: 06/02/2017 -ms.author: jswymer - ---- -# Using Pre-Closing Reports -There are many standard reports that you can use to verify the accuracy of the accounts before closing the books at the end of a year or period. For example, you can use the **Customer - Trial Balance** report to verify that the balance for a customer posting group is equal to the balance on the corresponding general ledger account on a certain date. - -The following table describes a number of reports that may be useful in this process. - -| To | See this report | -| --- | --- | -| Print a detailed trial balance report for one or more bank accounts with additional information about individual entries. |Bank Acc. - Detail Trial Bal. | -| Print a detail trial balance for selected customers. |Customer - Trial Balance | -| Print a detail trial balance with detailed information about individual entries, for selected customers during a selected period. |Customer - Detail Trial Bal. | -| Print a detail trial balance for selected vendors. |Vendor - Trial Balance | -| Print a detail trial balance with detailed information about individual entries, for selected vendors during a selected period. |Vendor - Detail Trial Balance | -| Print a trial balance with the current year's and the previous year's figures. |Closing Trial Balance | -| Print a detailed trial balance report for general ledger account balances. |Detail Trial Balance | -| Print a trial balance report with balances and net changes for general ledger accounts. |Trial Balance | -| Print a trial balance for a consolidated company. |Consolidated Trial Balance | - -To see a report, choose the ![Search for Page or Report](media/ui-search/search_small.png "Search for Page or Report icon") icon, type the name as it appears in the table, and then choose the related link. - -## See Also -[Dynamics 365 Business Central](/dynamics365/business-central/) -[Closing Years and Periods](year-close-years-periods.md) -[Working with [!INCLUDE[d365fin](includes/d365fin_md.md)]](ui-work-product.md) -